FEBRUARY 2007 VOLUME 22, NUMBER 1
GENERAL WORKS
AC8 2006-002762 1-932559-72-8
Nearer; essays.
Saltzman, Arthur.
Parlor Press, ©2006 355 p. $20.00 (pa)
In this collection of 25 essays, Saltzman (English, Missouri Southern State
U.) offers reflections on wide-ranging topics. The title essay offers a per-
spective on parental love inspired by the hero of the 1957 science fiction
film The Incredible Shrinking Man. Three of the essays, “Getting Known,”
“My Animal Instincts,” and “In So Many Words” have been named
Notable Essays in the Best American Essays series. In addition to six
critical studies of literature and writers, Saltzman has published another
collection of essays Objects and Empathy (2001), which won the First
Series Creative Nonfiction Award.
AE5 2006-013005 978-0-7166-0107-4
The World Book encyclopedia; 22v.
Title main entry.
World Book, ©2007 14300 p. $899.00
★★★★ Previous editions are recommended in Best Reference Books, Guide
to Reference Books, and General Reference Books for Adults. Providing a
readable yet detailed reference for students in middle and high school, as
well as the general reader, this encyclopedia is updated annually and
remains a fascinating read. More than 3800 specialists are involved in
writing, reviewing, and fact checking, ensuring the reputation of this
reliable and up- to-date reference. The illustrations and photos are
detailed and plentiful, with many descriptive maps, tables, and drawings.
Particularly thorough are entries on large topics, such as architecture,
painting, or weather. These entries delve into all aspects of the topics, pro-
viding the reader with insights into how buildings are made, for example,
and the education required to build them. Such entries include detailed
outlines cross-referencing related topics. The large quantity of biogra-
phical entries is impressive and entices readers to keep reading. Some of
the science entries include an illustrative science project. Volume 22 con-
tains a comprehensive index and a section on how to write papers, give
a talk, and carry out research.
AM7 2006-000102 0-7546-4560-6
The responsive museum; working with audiences in the
twenty-first century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Caroline Lang et al.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 276 p. $99.95
Sending patrons through static displays when they have just come in
from the world of video games may already be a lost cause. In this col-
lection of articles designed to help administrators and curators think of
museums as learning spaces responsive to their audiences, contributors
work from experience to describe understanding and developing audi-
ences at the theoretical, policy and practical levels. Topics include influ-
ences on museum practice, government policy, the public access debate,
prioritizing audience groups, building capacity for sustainable audience
development through networks and partnerships, developing web
resources, evaluation, funding, applied research, audience advocacy, cre-
ating environments for learning, museum professions, and a hint of
where museums will go from here. Topics include responses on such
issues as developing the inclusive model, digital technologies, and taking
collective responsibility for making museums accessible.
–1–
ISSN 0887-3763
AM11 978-0-7734-5622-8
The making of public historical culture in the American
West; 1880-1910, the role of historical societies.
Laugesen, Amanda.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 245 p. $109.95
Looking at the cases of Oregon, Kansas, and Wisconsin, Laugesen (history
and American studies, Flinders U., Australia) seeks to demonstrate the
crucial role played by state historical societies in the formation of the
public historical consciousness, paying particular attention in their
position of mediators between the local and the national. She is also con-
cerned with the processes of professionalization underwent by the state
historical societies as they moved from organizations founded by pio-
neers and antiquarians to organizations more intimately connected with
academic historical production and the effect of this transformation on
the stories they told about the history of the American west.
AS222 2006-012666 978-0-87413-937-2
Between the real and the ideal; the Accademia degli
Arcadi and its garden in eighteenth-century Rome.
Dixon, Susan M.
Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 156 p. $55.00
Although the members of the Accademia degli Arcadi largely supported
restraint, elegance and Enlightenment ideals, they were also well aware
of their proximity to the court and the papal curia and the tensions those
views, particularly the participation of women, would create. Therefore
the Arcadians expressed themselves in a less-direct way, in their meeting
gardens, as well as more directly in theater. Dixon (art history, U. of
Tulsa) describes how Arcadian developments of space and the physical
world expressed their views, how their friends and enemies perceived
those views as expressed in their garden and landscape, and how the
Arcadians came to be regarded as social reformers. As the gardens are
currently under renovation this is particularly timely. Distributed by
Associated University Presses.
AZ105 1-55238-172-2
Mind technologies; humanities computing and the
Canadian academic community.
Title main entry. Ed. by Raymond Siemens and David Moorman.
(Media studies)
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 317 p. $44.95 (pa)
The “mind technologies” Siemens (humanities computing, U. of Victoria,
Canada) and Moorman (a senior policy advisor with the Social Sciences
and Humanities Research Council, Canada) reference in the title to this
collection of 18 papers is a term that refers to the “computer-assisted tools,
methodologies, and structures that capture the ways in which those in
the arts and humanities carry out the practices associated with their dis-
ciplines.” Presented in the belief that the Canadian academic community
has made an internationally significant contribution to this realm, the
collection contains case studies of innovative projects and activities that
have resulted, including contributions to areas of archival representation
and communication of results; technologies associated with critical
inquiry and analysis; and activities of knowledge transfer, training, edu-
cation, and support. Distributed in the US by Michigan State U. Press.
Watch for four stars: ★★★★ The stars you see at the beginning of some
annotations can help with collection development. They indicate that a
previous edition has been cited in Books for College Libraries, 3rd ed., in
Guide to Reference Books, or in other standard references.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
AZ182 2006-022458 978-0-8204-8857-7 B105 2005-038057 978-1-59102-402-6
The figure of the road; deconstructive studies in Opportunity; optimizing life’s chances.
humanities disciplines. Morris, Donald.
Morris, Christopher D. Prometheus Books, ©2006 461 p. $28.00
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 276 p. $74.95 In this accessible and wide-ranging text, Morris examines the nature of
Morris (English, Norwich U., Vermont) packs literature, religion, phi- opportunity from a variety of disciplinary perspectives. The focus is on
losophy, visual art and popular culture on this road trip to where artists the identification of high-end opportunities—those crucial decisions
and writers anticipate the aporia or “pathless place.” Given the aporia is which have the power to alter the course of a life. The volume concludes
a world understood as wholly figural, he analyzes the path of American with a selection of aphorisms and quotations on the topic of opportunity.
literature to that not-so-distant place, the linear tropes leading to it by de A former instructor of philosophy, Morris is currently a professor of
Man and Derrida, the implications for theology both within the Christian accounting at Eastern New Mexico U.
Acts of the Apostles and the Four Roads of Taoism, the reflexivity of the
road film and its influence on the intellect and soul, the myriad paths B126 2006-001102 978-0-87220-709-7
of popular culture that are in fact only one, whether they be painted as Readings in Han Chinese thought.
televised baseball, the graphic novel or the video game, the figural road Title main entry. Ed. and trans. by Mark Csikszentmihalyi.
as university in Christo and Jeanne-Claude’s The Gates, and in a nimble Hackett Publishing Co., ©2006 220 p. $39.95
conclusion, the ultimate fate of curriculum and ethics.
In this reader, Csikzentmihayli (Chinese and religious studies, U. of
Wisconsin, Madison) introduces students without knowledge of Chinese
PHILOSOPHY studies to the kinds of religious and philosophical conversations that he
or she might have encountered in the classrooms or hallways of Han
B29 2006-411840 1-55111-823-8 dynasty China. The material is divided into sections on ethics and state-
First philosophy; fundamental problems and readings in craft, knowledge, and the natural world. Every chapter is devoted to a
philosophy, concise ed. different topic and contains a general introduction followed by three or
four translations of Han texts, arranged chronologically, with short
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew Bailey.
prefaces for each.
Broadview Press, ©2006 593 p. $49.95 (pa)
Containing 30 readings on six major topics in philosophy, the concise B298 978-90-04-15160-4
edition of this introductory textbook is offered as a streamlined alter- Democritus; science, the arts, and the care of the soul;
native to a lengthier textbook of the same name. Each reading is prefaced
proceedings.
by a set of notes providing relevant background information. The
International Colloquium on Democritus (2003: Paris, France) Ed. by
readings are also heavily annotated by editor Bailey (philosophy, U. of
Aldo Brancacci & Pierre-Marie Morel. (Philosophia antiqua; v.102)
Guelph), and each is accompanied by some critical thinking questions
BRILL, ©2007 348 p. $147.00
plus suggestions for further reading.
The colloquium was titled Deémocrite: La philosophie, les savoirs, les tech-
B105 2006-024137 0-8204-8884-4 niques, and the participants, like the editors, are scholars of ancient phi-
Common sense; its history, method, and applicability. losophy. They analyze the thinking of Greek philosopher Democritus
(460-370 BC) on death and dying, social and psychological harm, zoology,
Ledwig, Marion.
and other matters. Five of the 11 essays are in French.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 157 p. $62.95
Ledwig (philosophy, Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm) not only B319 2006-004912 978-0-8139-2553-0
defends common sense, as many philosophers have done before her, but Socrates and the irrational.
also explores such matters as how far it generalizes, whether it can be
Hans, James S.
found in proverbs and game theory, and how it helps people survive
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 225 p. $29.50
childhood until real thinking develops.
Socrates has long been enthroned as the epitome of Greek rationalism,
B105 2006-026637 978-0-8047-5423-1 but Hans (English, Wake Forest U.) finds that his ideas were a bit more
The honor of thinking; critique, theory, philosophy. complex than the Platonic and later equation that rational is good and
irrational is bad. He looks closely at the Ion, the Apology, the Phaedrus,
Gasché, Rodolphe. (Cultural memory in the present)
and the Republic dialogues.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 410 p. $24.95 (pa)
In 14 essays written, and mostly published, over a period of 10 years, B395 2005-034699 978-1-4051-1521-6
Gasché (comparative literature, State U. of New York-Buffalo) considers A companion to Plato.
the act of thinking in light of views by Martin Heidegger and his French
Title main entry. Ed. by Hugh H. Benson. (Blackwell companions to
intellectual descendants. His topics include the sober absolute, the com-
philosophy)
paratively theoretical, and thinking within thought. Only names are
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 473 p. $149.95
indexed.
Perhaps if we thought of Plato as more flesh and blood than marble on
B105 2006-483270 978-3-937202-98-3 a pedestal, we would reach a better understanding of what he had to say.
This collection does exactly that in its 29 articles by leading scholars, and
Mind and its place in the world; non-reductionist
it also shows how that same flesh and blood has influenced that of mil-
approaches to the ontology of consciousness. lions of others. Contributors work through descriptions of the Platonic
Title main entry. Ed. by Alexander Batthyany and Avshalom Elitzur. method and the dialog form and Platonic epistemology, metaphysics, psy-
(Phenomenology & mind; v.7) chology, ethics, politics and aesthetics, concluding with his legacy in
Ontos Verlag, ©2006 323 p. $115.95 articles about learning about Plato from Aristotle, the impact on Plato in
Scholars of philosophy or the natural sciences grapple with the problem Hellenistic philosophy, and his influence on Jewish, Christian and
of consciousness following the non-reductionist path broken by Karl Islamic thought. Topics include form and the dialogs, definition and
Popper, John C. Eccles, and others—a tradition they feel needs to be pol- forms, methods of dialectic, ignorance, recollection, perception,
ished up again and set on prominent display. Their topics include the knowledge, cosmology, language, mathematics, religion, paradox, the
impulse to reductionism, consciousness and the intentional awareness of soul, eros, pleasure, the unity of the virtues, justice, goodness, the law
instantiable, a radical externalist approach, and the near-death expe- and the arts.
rience and the failure of materialism. Distributed in North and South
America by Transaction Publishers. B398 2006-003548 978-0-8018-8469-6
Plato and the virtue of courage.
Rabieh, Linda R.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 209 p. $45.00
For guidance to the deeply troubling questions raised by the call to
courage, Rabieh (classics, Tufts U.) turns to Plato, and in the process
seeks to shed light on his thinking as well. Her topics include the ben-
efits of spear fighting, steadfastness of soul, the role of spiritedness in
the Republic, and an education for courage.

Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –2–

B693 0-7156-3563-8
Culture and philosophy in the age of Plotinus.
Edwards, Mark. (Classical literature and society)
Duckworth, ©2006 198 p. $31.00 (pa)
Edwards (patristics, Oxford U.) examines four third-century Romans who
would have called themselves philosophers—Plotinus, Longinus,
Porphyry, and Iamblichus—and the cultural and intellectual milieu in
which they wrote. He is not so concerned with the elements of their phi-
losophy itself, but does summarize parts where necessary to his
description of the Platonic tradition, literature and dogma, magic and
occult sciences, and other features of the time. Distributed in the US by
International Publishers Marketing.
B745 2006-007029 978-1-58044-105-6
The dicts and sayings of the philosophers.
Title main entry. Ed. by John William Sutton. (Middle English texts
series)
Medieval Institute Pub., ©2006 163 p. $15.00 (pa)
The long prose text purporting to be a compendium of lore collected from
biblical, classical, and legendary philosophers and sayings, traveled
through many lands and languages. It became popular in England
during the 14th century, and this Middle English version was printed by
Caxton in 1477. In this edition, words possibly difficult for learners are
glossed at the bottom of the page, and compiled in the end matter.
Explanatory notes, a bibliography of other editions and secondary works,
and a thematic index are included.
B745 2006-052166 978-90-04-15386-8
Knowledge triumphant; the concept of knowledge in
medieval Islam, 2d ed.
Rosenthal, Franz. (Brill classics in Islam; v.2)
BRILL, ©2007 355 p. $90.00
Arabic and Semitic scholar Rosenthal (1914-2003) retired from Yale
University in 1985. He argues here that knowledge is the quickening
concept in Islamic civilization, and explores its myriad manifestations
and functions. His topics include human knowledge and divine
knowledge, the plural of knowledge, Shi’ah notions of knowledge,
knowledge as light in Sufism, and monographs in praise of knowledge
and the educational literature. The first edition was published by Brill
sometime before 1970; this second is slightly revised.
B765 2006-047330 978-90-04-15431-5
From a topical point of view; dialectic in Anselm of
Canterbury’s De Grammatico .
Boschung, Peter. (Studien und Texte zur Geistesgeschichte des
Mittelalters; v.90)
BRILL, ©2006 346 p. $134.00
Historiographers of the 19th and early 20th century considered Anselm
(1033-1109) to be the founder of the characteristic theological method of
the 13th century, but failed to pay much attention to his De Grammatico,
which is an introduction to dialectic. At least part of the reason, says
Boschung, is that the scholars lacked sufficient training in logic to under-
stand the work’s logical theory. He considers such aspects as its
influence, its structure, its fallacies, Anselm’s sources, and his semantic
distinctions. The study served as Boschung’s 2006 Ph.D. dissertation in
philosophy at the University of Zurich.
B808 2006-008838 0-7546-5670-5
Personal autonomy in society.
Oshana, Marina.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 190 p. $99.95
Oshana (philosophy, U. of Florida) does not attempt a precise taxonomy
of autonomy in its many guises, but offers an admittedly worldly, natu-
ralistic interpretation that is significantly different from both the new-
Humean and the Kantian models. She emphasizes the nature and
function of autonomy, and the conditions of its existence within peoples’
daily lives.
B824 2006-017968 978-0-8047-5338-8
Interpretation and difference; the strangeness of care.
Bass, Alan.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 194 p. $24.95 (pa)
In his 2000 Difference and Disavowal: The Trauma of Eros, Bass, a psy-
choanalyst practicing in New York City, presented a clinical perspective
on resistance to the interpretation of psychoanalysis as therapy. Here he
uses that work as a foundation to explore the philosophical issues
involved in such resistance. Nietzsche, Heidegger, and Derrida are the
pivots of his account. He does not provide an index.
–3–
B842 2004-012071 978-0-8018-8543-3
Body and story; the ethics and practice of theoretical
conflict. (reprint, 2005)
Terdiman, Richard.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 265 p. $25.00 (pa)
In order to explore the clash of theories in the human sciences, Terdiman
(literature and the history of consciousness, U. of California-Santa Cruz)
orchestrates a collide between two conflicting theories: Enlightenment
materialism and Post-structuralist textualism. His goal is not to find a res-
olution between them, but to investigate the nature of a world in which
multiple and even contradictory theories have explanatory or interpretive
traction. The 2005 edition was cloth bound.
B945 2006-921347 978-1-932236-90-3
Michael Polanyi; the art of knowing.
Mitchell, Mark T. (Library of modern thinkers)
ISI Books, ©2006 195 p. $25.00
Hungarian-born Polyanyi (1891-1976) was a physical chemist, but as wars
wracked Europe and the world, his attention turned from science to phi-
losophy. Treating him as a political philosopher, Mitchell (government,
Patrick Henry College, Virginia) looks at his thought, particularly his
insistence that a new conception of knowledge must be introduced that
acknowledges the reality of moral and spiritual ideals.
B1499 2005-032017 0-415-24339-4
Hume on causation.
Beebee, Helen.
Routledge, ©2006 236 p. $88.00
Beebee (philosophy, U. of Birmingham) challenges the conventional views
of Scottish philosopher David Hume’s (1711-76) thoughts on the meta-
physics of causation. After an introductory chapter, she looks at his dis-
cussion of relations and a priori reasoning, causal reasoning, and the
idea of necessary connection—the order in which he presented the ideas.
Then she explores the interpretive disputes surrounding his ideas,
develops a projectivist interpretation, and discusses the skeptical realist
interpretation.
B1608 978-0-8264-8639-4
Rethinking Mill’s ethics; character and aesthetic
education.
Heydt, Colin.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 165 p. $120.00
Given the rise of neoliberalism and all its variants and anti-variants, and
ever-present concern about utility as it applies to governance, it is no
wonder that Heydt (philosophy, U. of South Florida) feels compelled to
set readers straight on the riches behind the works that Victorians would
have caught in an instant but modern readers probably have missed
completely. Heydt illuminates and provides contexts for Mill’s work on
aesthetics and life as art, the contrast with Bentham and the related
issues of internal culture, the ethics of Mill that includes narrative and
imagination as well as the “proper religion” of humanity, family and
gender relations within the social and political dimensions of aesthetic
education, and that form of education’s social and political dimensions
in the industrial economy and the workplace. Now you have no excuse
for misappropriating the thoughts of Mill again.
B1616 2005-037800 978-0-8264-7540-4
Idealist political philosophy; pluralism and conflict in the
absolute idealist tradition.
Tyler, Colin. (Continuum studies in British philosophy:)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 220 p. $120.00
Tyler (political theory, U. of Hull) combats idealism’s reputation as oth-
erworldly, unrealistic, and dangerously conservative as he analyzes the
work of Hegel, Green, Caird and Bosanquet. Using newly-discovered
British idealist manuscripts, he concentrates on such issues as Hegel’s
take on the formation of states and the nature of war, Green on franchise
reform and its application to his “working theory of life,” Caird’s work
on history and Sittlichkeit, Bosanquet on individuality and the sate, and
the applications of idealism to such current preoccupations as cultural
diversity. In the process he notes the inevitability of idealism creeping in
without notice on such issues as the design of civil institutions, political
and social pluralism, and the tragedy of human progress.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
B1646 2005-034559 0-7546-4088-4
T.E. Hulme and the question of modernism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edward P. Comentale and Andrzej Gasiorek.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 248 p. $99.95
Scholars of English from Britain and the US look at the life and work of
British intellectual Hulme (1883-1917), who appeared suddenly in 1902
and took a commanding position in the modernist milieu there. Their
topics include imagism and modernist theories of language, his art crit-
icism, the new psychologism, antinomies of original sin, and his feelings.
B1647 2006-001712 978-1-4051-0623-8
McDowell and his critics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cynthia Macdonald and Graham Macdonald.
(Philosophers and their critics; v.13)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 247 p. $89.95
Ten scholars of philosophy from around the anglophone world were
commissioned to analyze and critique the work of colleague John
McDowell. He in turn was permitted to comment on each analysis.
Among the topics they toss about are austerity and openness, self-
knowledge and inner space, acting in the light of appearances, and
Aristotle’s use of prudential concepts.
B2430 2006-049063 978-90-04-15337-0
Althusser; the detour of theory.
Elliott, Gregory. (Historical materialism book series; v.13)
BRILL, ©2006 410 p. $116.00
Originally released by Verso in 1987 as the revised edition of the doctoral
thesis of Elliott (PhD, Balliol College, Oxford, UK), this study provided an
account of the intellectual career of structural Marxist theorist Louis
Althusser (1918-1990). The study focuses primarily on Althusser’s later,
more directly political phase, placing it, as Althusser would wish, in their
particular historical context. Although Elliott now recognizes a number
of deficiencies in the study, including a misreading of Althusser’s
attitude toward Eurocommunism and levity in discussing Maoism, he
has resisted the urge to revise the text beyond expanding the bibliography
of Althusser’s published writings, adding a long postscript in which he
takes stock of Althusser’s posthumously published work, some incidental
stylistic revisions, and updated references.
B2430 978-0-8264-8680-6
Deleuze and Guattari’s philosophy of history.
Lampert, Jay.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 178 p. $120.00
Lampert (philosophy, U. of Guelph) works through Deleuze’s philosophy
of time, including the “pure past” to build a coherent philosophy of
history that includes both Deleuze’s and Guanttari’s major thoughts on
the subject. He examines the three syntheses of time—the contracted
present, the virtual co-existence of the past, and the dark precursors of
the future, moving to the problems inherent in historical chronology, the
delicate margins of causes such as “quasi-causes” and “becoming
casual,” and the theory of beginnings, and closes with the co-existing
levels of temporality. Major works examined here include Anti-Oedipus, A
Thousand Plateaux, Difference and Repetition and The Logic of Sense.
B2430 2006-021222 978-0-252-03142-7
Diary of a philosophy student; v.1: 1926-27.
De Beauvoir, Simone. Ed. by Barbara Klaw et al. Trans. by Barbara
Klaw. (The Beauvoir series)
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 40 p. $40.00
Written when she was a student of 18-19 years at the Sorbonne and trans-
lated into English for the first time in this edition, Beauvoir’s diary con-
tains the youthful thoughts, desires, and confusion one would expect
from a teenager, but it is also full of quotations and thoughts about the
many books she was reading and the art she enjoyed seeing, providing
an insight into the literary and cultural trends of Paris in this era.
Verlaine, Gide, Merleau-Ponty, and many others are cited and discussed;
Klaw (French, Northern Kentucky U.) translates their quoted passages
into English. Heavily annotated and concluding with a bibliography and
detailed index, this volume offers scholars and students of the
philosopher a rich resource for Beauvoir’s early life and influences.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –4–
B2430 2005-022293 978-1-59051-234-0
Foucault 2.0; beyond power and knowledge.
Paras, Eric.
Other Press LLC, ©2006 240 p. $29.00 (pa)
Upon the publication of the 3000 pages of Foucault’s Dits et écrits, one
Foucalt scholar commented that it still would not be possible to come to
a full evaluation of Foucault’s place in 20th century intellectual life
without access to the 13 semester-length lecture courses offered by
Foucault at the Collège de France. Having studied these lectures, Paras
(Minda de Gunzburg Center for European Studies, Harvard U.) agrees
wholeheartedly, observing that the lectures show the development of
Foucault’s thought at a time when he was producing little material in
print, yet was formulating some of the foundations upon which he would
rest Discipline and Punish and The Use of Pleasure and also shed light on
the transformation that would place Foucault’s later thought in oppo-
sition to his structuralist ideas of the “death of the subject” and his
Archaeology of Knowledge.
B2430 2006-017387 978-0-8166-4516-9
Lacan’s medievalism.
Labbie, Erin Felicia.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 264 p. $25.00 (pa)
Labbie (English, Bowling Green State U.) argues that French psychoan-
alyst Jacques Lacan (1901-81) can be considered a medievalist because he
cites courtly love poetics as a means of developing and articulating his
theory of desire, and because his methodologies follow those established
by the medieval scholastic scholars who sought to determine the potential
for the human subject to know and to represent real universal categories.
B2430 2006-017974 978-0-8047-5111-7
Minima memoria; essays in the wake of Jean-François
Lyotard.
Title main entry. Ed. by Claire Nouvet et al.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 249 p. $21.95 (pa)
Scholars of French and comparative literature and of philosophy—among
them Jacques Derrida—explore the impact of 20th-century French
philosopher Lyotard. Their topics include his aesthetics of Holocaust
memory, the writings of the differend, his infancy, and childish things.
There is no index.
B2430 2004-109129 0-89870-971-7
Socrates meets Sartre; the father of philosophy meets the
founder of existentialism; a socratic cross-examination of
Existentialism and human emotions.
Kreeft, Peter.
Ignatius Press, ©2005 222 p. $11.95 (pa)
Christian philosopher Kreeft (philosophy, Boston College) uses an imag-
inary dialogue between Socrates and Sartre to challenge the fundamental
concepts of existentialist philosophy. The conversational style and non-
technical language he employs serves to make the concepts discussed
accessible to both students and general readers. Kreeft is also the author
of Socrates Meets Marx and Socrates Meets Machiavelli.
B2599 2005-023350 978-0-8264-9028-5
Leibniz reinterpreted.
Strickland, Lloyd.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 172 p. $110.00
British historian of philosophy Strickland joins many modern scholars in
asking how someone obviously as intelligent as Gottfried Wilhelm
Leibniz (1646-1716) could be so unreservedly optimistic about the world
and history that Voltaire made a fortune ridiculing him for it. He looks
closely at what exactly the German philosopher meant when he said that
this was the best of all possible worlds, saying that previous scholars
who have tried did not focus their attention closely enough or for long
enough.
B2691 2006-034888 978-0-8204-9529-3
Phädon, or, on the immortality of the soul.
Mendelssohn, Moses. Trans. by Patricia Noble.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 185 p. $29.95 (pa)
Noble’s (Schiller Institute) main interest is ancient Greece, and over the
years she has found the German writings on it far superior to anything
in English. Having translated several other works, she here offers the
first modern and concise English translation of Mendelssohn’s (1729-86)
translation of Plato’s discussions of Socrates in his jail cell in the final
hours before his execution in 399 BC. There is no index.
B2758 978-0-826-48778-0
The aesthetic in Kant, a critique. (reprint, 2004)
Kirwan, James. (Continuum studies in philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 200 p. $39.95 (pa)
Kant’s Critique of the Power of Judgment is both seminal in the study of
aesthetics and problematic in its assertions about taste and desire.
Kirwan (Anglo-American studies, Kobe U.) re-examines Kant’s text to find
new solutions, working from recent research on the Critique and its con-
texts. He finds new relationships between the subjective and the uni-
versal in taste, the nature and the dependency of the sublime to the
observer, and the issue of the “true” and “false” sublime, and the rela-
tionship of free or dependent beauty to what Kant called “fantastic
desire.” This is a paperbound reprint of a 2004 book.
B2798 2006-006916 978-1-4051-1197-3
A companion to Kant.
Title main entry. Ed. by Graham Bird. (Blackwell companions to phi-
losophy; 36)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 530 p. $149.95
Bird (emeritus, philosophy, U. of Manchester, UK) presents 33 essays that
provide a survey of the philosophy of Immanuel Kant (1724-1804). The
focus, naturally enough, is on Kant’s most celebrated and influential
works, the Critiques, but issues from earlier in his career are discussed
as well, including Kant’s cosmology and his debts to Liebniz and to the
British Empiricists. Papers exploring the Critique of Pure Reason discuss
transcendental idealism, the transcendental aesthetic, Kant’s refutation of
problematic idealism, his critique of rational psychology, his philosophy
of mathematics, and the metaphysical foundations of natural science.
The philosopher’s moral philosophy is the subject of the next set of
papers, which explore his account of freedom; formulations of the moral
law; metaphysics of morals; and conceptual accounts of liberty, equality,
and independence, among other topics. The Critique of Judgment is dis-
cussed in the next four papers, which explore such issues as rational
judgment and the structure of nature, aesthetic theory, and the philo-
sophical significance of Kant’s biological teleology. Finally, the influence
of Kant is explored in the writings of Hegel, Husserl, Heidegger, and the
philosophers of the 20th century analytical tradition, among others.
B3068 2005-028101 0-8047-5136-6
The radical enlightenment of Solomon Maimon; Judaism,
heresy, and philosophy.
Socher, Abraham P. (Stanford studies in Jewish history and culture)
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 248 p. $55.00
Scholars of his own time and later have generally accepted Maimon’s
(1754-1800) account of his rejection of Talmudism and turn to Kabbala
and Maimonidean philosophy as a movement from the provincial Polish-
Lithuanian Judaism of his youth to German modernity. Socher (Jewish
studies, Oberlin College) is not so sure. He finds Maimon’s self-represen-
tation to be a site of uneasy heretical hybridity, and describes his trans-
formation not as geographical or intellectual but as a cultural translation.
B3245 2005-031884 0-7546-5471-0
A critical introduction to the philosophy of Gottlob Frege.
Rosado Haddock, Guillermo E.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 157 p. $99.95
Rosado Haddock (philosophy, U. of Puerto Rico) responds to the recent
flow of work that pins Frege as a epistemologist in the Kantian tradition
or a philosopher of mathematics by taking a balanced approach to the
various and often opposing schools of thought and assessing Frege in
terms of his whole philosophy rather than specific issues. He begins with
the Begriffsschrift in terms of its identity statements and functions, then
moves to the first and second parts of Die Grundlagen der Arithmetik,
working from the need for clarification of the nature of mathematics all
the way to numbers of properties of objects, the nature of geometry, and
the attempts at a definition of “number.” He examines the basic distinc-
tions in sense and referent, and function and object, then closes with the
fundamental philosophical issues in Grundgesetze and commentary on
the Zermelo-Russell paradox, the controversy on the foundations of
geometry, and Frege’s abandonment of logicism.
–5–
B3279 978-0-7734-5594-8
The collapse of philosophy and its rebirth; an intellectual
history with special attention to Husserl, Rickert and
Bakhtin.
Nikiforov, Vladimir.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 435 p. $129.95
A Russian scholar of logic and mathematics who fled the Soviet Union
in 1988, Nikiforov describes a circle of thinkers who inhabited a shared
Russian-German cultural space beginning in the 1890s, and their concern
with individualism. His topics include phenomenology as the descriptive
study of mental phenomena, the supra-individualist against the indi-
vidual, and responsibility as the attitude of participation in a being-event.
Quotations are in English translation.
B3279 2006-029023 978-0-8207-0389-3
Heidegger’s philosophy of religion; from God to the gods.
Vedder, Ben.
Duquesne University Press, ©2007 336 p. $21.50 (pa)
Vedder (philosophy, Radboud U., the Netherlands) argues that in the phi-
losophy of unrepentant Nazi Martin Heidegger (1889-1976) there is a
concept of religion in which truth is a given that moderates religion’s
principal truth claims. Others have discussed at length Heidegger’s claim
that Christian philosophy is impossible, he says, so he focuses instead on
unfold his implicit thinking on religion from out of his own philosophy.
B3279 978-0-7734-5617-4
The keywords of Martin Heidegger; a philosophical-lexical
analysis of Sein und Zeit .
Griffiths, David B.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 364 p. $119.95
Part of Heidegger’s project, it seems, was to defy traditional logic but not
replace it with a new system. Often the result is incredibly obscure,
almost an attempt to cease communication rather than engender it. Here,
rather than offering a mere concordance, Griffiths, who formerly taught
history and humanities at York U. in Toronto, places the terms under
consideration in a significant context, allowing each to comment upon
each other in a remarkably logical fashion. He has chosen close to 200
of Heidegger’s terms significant to Sein und Zeit, calling in experts and
alternate or inconsistent nomenclature when needed, and clearly
explaining for the layman why, for example, certain commentators con-
sidered some terms negative while others thought them to be positive.
The result is a very helpful guide to this nearly opaque work, and
Griffiths remains true to the text and objective throughout.
B3279 2006-023110 978-0-7425-5282-1
Martin Heidegger; paths taken, paths opened.
Smith, Gregory Bruce. (20th century political thinkers)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 333 p. $29.95 (pa)
Unrepentant Nazi Heidegger (1889-1976) opposed every element of liberal
and cosmopolitan society and technological civilization, admits Smith
(political science, Trinity College), so why should anyone pay attention to
anything he said? First, he answers, because Heidegger was brilliant and
his attitudes toward liberalism are so well founded that they must be
answered; and second, because his work is having an impact in the
world, and ignoring it will not make it go away.
B3313 2006-009324 978-0-7425-4263-1
Nietzsche’s On the Genealogy of Morals ; critical essays.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christa Davis Acampora. (Critical essays on
the classics)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 337 p. $29.95 (pa)
One of the projects of this opaque but increasingly popular text is to ask
ourselves how we can know ourselves better. In these 20 papers interna-
tional contributors do just that, examining genealogy in general, specific
passages, later applications, and the work’s impact on politics, ethics and
aesthetics. Topics include re-evaluation and the turn to genealogy, inter-
pretation in Nietzsche’s second Untimely Meditations and the title work,
the metaphors of genealogy, the will to power combined with the
problem of a past, slave morality, agent and deed, why it matters how
we read the work, finding the übermensch, Nietzsche’s aphorism and the
art of the polemic, remaining strangers to ourselves, nihilism as will to
nothingness, the structure of an ambivalence between Nietzsche and
Jews, virtue ethics, and the “beasts of prey.” Critiques cover myth and
enlightenment, Nietzsche and Deleuze, and approaches by way of
Foucault and Derrida.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
B3317 2005-299924 978-0-7391-1808-5
Decadence of the French Nietzsche. (reprint, 2005)
Brusseau, James.
Lexington Books, ©2006 229 p. $26.95 (pa)
This is a paperbound reprint of a 2005 book. In philosophy, decadence
studies truths dedicated to the intensification of thought. The best truth
is that which incites the most thinking, so right and wrong lose relevance
and thought no longer exists to pursue truth; truths exist to accelerate
thinking. So asserts Brusseau (philosophy and letters, Mexican National
U.) as he examines two themes: the conditions of French Nietzscheanism
from Nietzsche through Deleuze, and what philosophy looks like when
the traditional relation between thinking and truth are reversed. He also
examines whether in decadence truth is in actually sacrificed for
thinking. By way of application of decadent theory, he also examines
how decadence has emerged from both French Nietzscheanism and
many of the objections to it.
B3376 2006-022764 978-0-7425-4191-7
Wittgenstein’s philosophical investigations; critical essays.
Title main entry. Ed. by Meredith Williams. (Critical essays on the
classics)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 238 p. $29.95 (pa)
Eight essays by US and British scholars of philosophy comment on the
later work of Ludwig Wittgenstein (1889-1951). Reflecting roughly the
development in his posthumously published Philosophical Investigations,
they consider reference and meaning, rules and their application, the
interiority of mind and the alleged uses of private languages, and
necessity and grammar. For the benefit of readers new to the work, ref-
erences are included to classical philosophy texts that help clarify the text.
B3918 2006-048722 978-90-04-15467-4
Arnold Geulincx’ Ethics with Samuel Beckett’s notes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Han van Ruler et al. Trans. by Martin Wilson.
(Brill’s studies in intellectual history; v.146: Brill’s texts and sources in
intellectual history; v.1)
BRILL, ©2006 368 p. $129.00
Both drawing and diverging from the humanistic intellectual climate of
his time, French philosopher Geulincx (1624-69) sought to reinvest the
classical approach to ethics with an input of Christianity. Wilson, who
also translated his Metaphysics recently, presents the first English edition
of the Latin De Virtute et Primus Eius Proprietatibus. The work was appre-
ciated for its lyric qualities as well as its doctrines by 20th-century Irish
poet Beckett.
B3999 2006-013872 978-0-7391-1601-2
Between philosophy and religion; Spinoza, the Bible, and
modernity; v.1: Hermeneutics and ontology.
Polka, Brayton.
Lexington Books, ©2007 277 p. $80.00
Polka (emeritus humanities and social and political thought, York U.)
begins a two-volume set engaging Benedictus Spinoza ((1632-77) as a
thinker who is at once biblical and modern. Understanding how he
makes the God of the Bible the subject of knowledge that is at once suf-
ficient and necessary for humans being, he argues, demonstrates how
the Bible and modernity are not fundamentally opposed, but profoundly
related to each other. The second volume considers politics and ethics.
B3999 2006-008837 0-7546-5618-7
The logic of expression; quality, quantity, and intensity in
Spinoza, Hegel, and Deleuze.
Duffy, Simon. (Ashgate new critical thinking in philosophy)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 284 p. $89.95
Duffy (philosophy, U. of Sydney) explores how French philosopher Gilles
Deleuze (1925-95) strategically redeployed the thought of Jewish-Dutch
philosopher Benedictus de Spinoza (1632-77), especially in relation to how
German philosopher Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel (1770-1831) inter-
preted him. Both of the later philosophers, he argues, adapted the first
into their own systems, and Deleuze also incorporated Hegel’s adoption
of Spinoza.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
B4376 2006-004850 978-0-88146-021-6
P r e f a c e s and W r i t i n g s a m p l e r and T h r e e d i s c o u r s e s o n
imagined occasions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert L. Perkins. (International Kierkegaard
commentary; 9-10)
Mercer University Press, ©2006 454 p. $50.00
From wherever Søren Kierkegaard (1813-55) is read, scholars of phi-
losophy comment on the three works he published pseudonymously.
Their topics include paratextualism in Prefaces and contemporary literary
culture, author creation in Writing Sampler, his confessional discourse in
Three Discourses on Imagined Occasions, and the experience of time by
the side of the grave.
B4715 2006-006166 978-0-8126-9463-5
The philosophy of Jaakko Hintikka.
Title main entry. Ed. by Randall E. Auxier and Lewis Edwin Hahn.
(The library of living philosophers; v.30)
Open Court Publishing, ©2006 971 p. $42.95 (pa)
Hintikka (philosophy, Boston U.), a major figure in logic and several
other branches of philosophy, begins the volume with his intellectual
biography. Next come 27 descriptive and critical essays, with his reply to
each, on his work in the history of philosophy, logic and language, truth
and consequences, and epistemology and the philosophy of science.
Finally, a bibliography lists his books and papers published between
1953 and 2005, and some forthcoming.
B4825 2006-011716 978-0-8386-4100-2
The metaphysics of religion; Lucian Blaga and
contemporary philosophy.
Jones, Michael S.
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2006 287 p. $57.50
The work of Romanian philosopher Blaga (1895-1961) was suppressed at
the height of his career by the rise of the Communist Party and the cre-
ation of the Popular Republic, says Jones (philosophy, Liberty U.), and so
is not well known outside of his own country. He argues that Blaga’s phi-
losophy is a systematic attempt to account of all human experience, and
has contemporary relevance to Anglo-American philosophy. Distributed
in the US by Associated University Presses.
B5802 2006-010210 978-0-7391-1697-5
Jewish philosophy and psychoanalysis; narrating the
interhuman.
Oppenheim, Michael.
Lexington Books, ©2006 261 p. $70.00
Oppenheim (religion, Concordia U.) compares ideas about the domain of
the interhuman of Jewish philosophy with the field of the interpersonal
identity of Freudian psychoanalysts, finding a rich but partially hidden
vein of insight on the life of persons with other persons. After an
extended and energetic apology to nearly all who specialize in each of the
two fields he explains the Jewish philosophical narratives of the inter-
human as they are found primarily in Rosenzweig, Buber and Levinas,
then moves to psychoanalytic narratives of development from some of its
chief practitioners, moving on to the mutual contexts of gifts and gift-
giving in terms of engendering social relationships in a multitude of sym-
bolic forms within class and ethnicity, familial relations, the public and
the private, and gender. He then works through the twin perceptions of
transference and transcendence, closing with an analysis of the work of
Irigaray.
BC171 978-90-420-2130-3
Essays in logic and ontology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jacek Malinowski and Andrzej Pietruszczak.
(Poznan studies in the philosophy of the sciences and the humanities;
91)
Editions Rodopi, ©2006 394 p. $104.00
Continuing the work of those prominent in the Lvov-Warsaw school
between the world wars Jerzy Perzanowski, head of the Department of
Logic at Nicolaus Copernicus U. strongly encouraged those investigating
philosophical problems by means of logical methods. This collection is
one of the outstanding results. The eight papers here include a compre-
hensive analysis of making logic the basis of ontology, a presentation of
a logical theory of ontological modality, and an essay on the ontology of
what is not there. Others address the problem of adopting inconsistency
by investigating the relations between contradiction and negation in
paraconsistent logic, Moore’s paradox within the logic of acquisition,
formal tools for systematic investigation of Strawson’s notion of presup-
position, social relations in classical analytical interpretive sociology and
a proof that methods from standard first courses in logic can be used to
test connectives from natural language.
–6–
BD21 978-0-8264-9020-9
A brief history of philosophy; from Socrates to Derrida.
Johnston, Derek.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 211 p. $14.95 (pa)
In this accessible text complete with portraits, summary boxes and
precise definitions of key terms, Johnston describes the mental workings
of 18 of the greats. Working chronologically and also through themes,
Johnston describes the trends from Socrates and Plato to Aristotle,
Epicurus and Zeno, Aquinus, Descartes, Locke and Montesquieu,
Spinoza, Hume, Kant, Marx, Nietzsche, Wittgenstein, Heidegger, Sartre
and Derrida, opening each chapter with the most basic ideas and
building to crisp explanations of some of the most complex ideas to ever
hit paper. Although this can be read cover to cover to give high school
students and the general public a running start, Johnston’s appraisals
and summaries also serve as references and refreshers.
BD21 2006-279201 1-55111-649-9
Philosophical conversations.
Martin, Robert M.
Broadview Press, ©2006 351 p. $24.95 (pa)
This textbook uses a dialog format to introduce undergraduates to the tra-
ditional questions of philosophy. So that students may understand and
appreciate all sides of these issues, characters in each dialog advocate for
different answers, with no clear winners identified. Seven chapters focus
on questions in such areas as religion, ethics, determinism, and
knowledge. Martin teaches philosophy at Dalhousie U.
BD111 978-90-420-2092-4
Vasily Sesemann; experience, formalism, and the question
of being.
Botz-Bornstein, Thorsten. (On the boundary of two worlds; identity,
freedom, and moral imagination in the Baltics; 7)
Editions Rodopi, ©2006 133 p. $38.00 (pa)
Sesemann, arguably Lithuania’s greatest philosopher, worked on the idea
that experience is constantly self-reflective and dynamic, what he called
an “ungraspable” phenomenon which cannot be objectified. Botz-
Bornstein describes the role of the concept of experience in philosophy in
the early twentieth century and Sesemann’s life and work within that
context, including his time in a Siberian labor camp for six years,
Sesemann’s relation to neo-Kantism, formalism and the question of
being, and the ways in which his work relates to Bakhtin, Lacan, Bergson
and Zeno. Included are new translations of “Socrates and the Problem of
Self-knowledge,” “On the Nature of the Poetic Image,” “The Foundations
of Politics” and a bibliography of Sesemann’s works.
BD161 2006-026574 978-0-87462-668-1
Through a glass darkly; Bernard Lonergan & Richard
Rorty on knowing without a God’s-eye view.
Snell, R.J. (Marquette studies in philosophy; No.45)
Marquette University Press, ©2006 238 p. $27.00 (pa)
It appears the modern project of attaining purely rational knowledge is
declining, perhaps under its own weight. Philosophers have found that
one of the key elements of the project, acquiring a “god’s-eye view,” may
be a semantic and philosophical impossibility. Snell (philosophy, North
Park U.) examines the causes of this disillusion and defends the human
capacity to know by analyzing alternatives offered by the work of
Richard Rorty and Bernard Lonergan, who differ in some ways but agree
that philosophy has relied too much on intuitionism. Rorty’s response,
says Snell, is to welcome disillusion as a therapy and then radicalize it;
Lonergan responds with transcendental theory or intentionality analysis.
Snell works through the “end of philosophy” argument, the epistemology
and hermeneutics of the questions, the issues of self-knowledge and the
corresponding desire to know, the effects of contingency, and the rela-
tionship between critical realism and conversation.
BD171 2005-051783 978-0-826-47608-1
Why truth matters.
Benson, Ophelia and Jeremy Stangroom.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 202 p. $24.95
In this accessible text, the editors of the ButterfliesandWheels.com
website critically examine the current trend of skepticism regarding the
reality, meaning, possibility, and importance of the truth. Calling for a
return to the intellectual tradition of the Enlightenment, they expose the
faulty thinking of everyone from religious fundamentalists and
Holocaust deniers to relativist intellectuals and postmodernist academics.
Benson and Stangroom are also the authors of The Dictionary of
Fashionable Nonsense (Souvenir).
–7–
BD221 2006-000668 978-0-8264-8636-3
Relativism in contemporary American philosophy.
Mosteller, Timothy. (Continuum studies in American philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 192 p. $120.00
Mosteller (philosophy, U. of San Diego) reviews the major definitions of
relativism in the American experience and the classical arguments
against it, showing that relativism and its opposition have remained
remarkably consistent in both content and approach. After giving readers
a comprehensive introduction to the definitions and concepts, Mosteller
addresses MacIntyre, Putnam and Rorty in an overall account of
knowledge as he describes epistemological relativism (ER), recent
attempts to generate an ER without built-in problems, relativistic tensions
in MacIntyre’s, Putnam’s and Rorty’s epistemology (generating a three-
way debate), and finally articulating the move toward an “ER-free” epis-
temology.
BD232 2005-034563 0-7546-5412-5
Values and the reflective point of view; on expressivism,
self-knowledge, and agency.
Dunn, Robert.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 151 p. $99.95
Dunn (philosophy, U. of Sydney) analyzes a range of contemporary views
in moral psychology and in theories of agency to demonstrate the way
such views obscure or distort the role of values. He argues that a “natural
fit” exists between an expressivist account of values and the best account
of the role of values in the lives of reflective agents. Critiquing recent con-
tributions to the theory of self- knowledge by Richard Moran and J. David
Velleman, Dunn asserts that, by reasoning about truth and values, we
possess a unique, non- observational way of coming to know our own
minds and hearts, together with what we are going to make happen in
the world.
BD418 2006-014906 978-1-4051-3323-4
The philosophy of mind and cognition; an introduction,
2d ed.
Braddon-Mitchell, David and Frank Jackson.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 325 p. $84.95
Philosophy scholars Braddon-Mitchell (U. of Sydney) and Jackson
(Australian National U.) set out the issues in the philosophy of mind for
readers who are approaching it for the first time, and challenge some of
the conventional thinking in the field. They believe that a certain kind
of functionalism—common-sense, or analytical functionalism—is the best
candidate for a philosophy of mind. The first edition was published in
1996.
BD418 2006-007947 0-7425-5063-X
Theories of mind; an introductory reader.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maureen Eckert.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 270 p. $35.00 (pa)
What a mind is, how it is structured, how it is related to the brain and
other body parts, and whether other things besides people have minds
are among the basic questions pondered by the philosophy of mind.
Eckert (philosophy, U. of Massachusetts-Dartmouth) gathers 21 readings
providing a background to the field in the 20th and 21st centuries in the
company of psychology, neurosciences, and cognitive science. The
anthology is tailored for an undergraduate course introducing the phi-
losophy of mind.
BD450 2006-014459 978-0-8014-4454-8
Brutal reasoning; animals, rationality, and humanity in
early modern England.
Fudge, Erica.
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 224 p. $45.00
Fudge (literary and cultural studies, Middlesex U., England) intended to
study beliefs about the reasoning capacity of animals before Descartes’
1637 beast-machine hypothesis. She found that people then were not very
interested in that, and in fact only brought it up as an opening to talk
about humans. So she here explores what people through being human
meant, how humans could lose their humanity. These questions lead nat-
urally to what they thought made an animal an animal, why they looked
at animals at all, and how they understood and misunderstood what
they saw when they did.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BD450 2006-276146 1-55111-653-7
Theories of human nature, 3d ed.
Loptson, Peter. (Broadview guides to philosophy)
Broadview Press, ©2006 287 p. $24.95 (pa)
Loptson (philosophy, U. of Guelph) offers a survey of theories about
human nature, including the work of Aristotle, Rousseau, Marx, Freud,
Darwin and E.O. Wilson. The text has been updated and revised
throughout for the third edition, including discussion of new develop-
ments in genetic and paleontological record, and expanded treatment of
the Christian theory of human nature through incorporation of the ideas
of the Marx scholar and social theorist G.A. Cohen. Suitable for use as a
textbook in a one-semester course on human nature, courses in western
civilization, philosophy, and a variety of other humanities courses.
BD555 2006-030583 978-0-7391-1605-0
Deep empiricism; Kant, Whitehead, and the necessity of
philosophical theism.
Malone-France, Derek.
Lexington Books, ©2007 201 p. $70.00
Malone-France (George Washington U.) is surprised that no one has com-
pared the two philosophers before, noting that both evolved from pure
mathematics to mathematical physics and then to natural philosophy to
help interpret and assimilate a fundamental shift in physical models—
Newton for Kant and Einstein for Whitehead—and ended up producing a
monumental work of philosophical system-building. Having identified
the similarities, he explores the profound and fundamental divergences
in their understandings of reality and human experience.
BD581 2005-037058 978-0-8264-7902-0
Philosophies of nature after Schelling.
Grant, Iain Hamilton. (Transversals; new diredtions in philosophy)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 232 p. $130.00
Grant (philosophy, U. of the West, UK) points out that approaches to
“naturephilosophy” range from the 1830s to the present and that rather
than dying out this inquiry seems to actually be growing. Part of this
phenomenon may be the increasing attention to the relationship of
science and philosophy and therefore the increasing attention to Schiller’s
work, especially his famous contention that metaphysics cannot be sepa-
rated from physics. Grant takes the rather opaque thought of Schiller into
new depths, starting with the relations between Platonism and anti-
physics, Schilling’s reconstruction of dynamic physics after Kant and
Fichte as well as Oken and Carus, the workings of transcendentalism in
naturephilosophy, and the meanings of “nature” and “intelligence.” Grant
closes with lively comparisons of the naturephilosophy of Schilling and
Deleuze.
BD632 2006-022859 0-8204-8871-2
The future of post-human space-time; conceiving a better
way to understand space and time.
Baofu, Peter.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 202 p. $68.95
Championing neither Newton’s absolutist perspective of space-time nor
Einstein’s relativist counterpart, Baofu, a prolific futurist writer, offers his
own perspectival theory of time-space. He argues that space and time can
be understood from multiple perspectives in relation to culture, society,
nature, and the mind; that each perspective exists in each of these realms
for good reasons; and that space and time will eventually be superseded
by post-humans both in this universe and in multiverses.
BD638 2006-049032 978-90-04-15427-8
Time and memory.
International Society for the Study of Time, Conference (12th: 2004:
Clare College, Cambridge) Ed. by Jo Alyson Parker et al. (The study of
time; v.12)
BRILL, ©2006 321 p. $120.00
In this collection of papers from their 2004 conference contributors from
the International Society for the Study of Time explore inscribing and for-
getting, inventing and commemorating. Specific topics include the body
as a medium of memory, body memories and gender, temporal order for-
mation in semantic memory, narrative and dementia, Perec’s com-
mentary on Lieux, historic time and geography, mnemonic practice,
remembrance in cinema, music in prose, losing track of time in pursuing
Oppenheimer, an ontological dilemma, redress, African-American
identity, the return of memories to the visual field, family memory and
gratitude and meetings as sites of organizational memory.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BD995 2006-931314 978-0-7618-3605-6
Startling strangeness; reading Lonergan’s Insight.
Liddy, Richard M.
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 250 p. $33.00 (pa)
Liddy (Catholic thought and culture, Seton Hall U.) reflects on the
framework for thinking about life and the universe presented by con-
temporary thinker Bernard Lonergan in his Insight: A Study of Human
Understanding. He begins by recounting his own introduction and
changing ideas about both the work and its author, under whom he
studied in Rome, then surveys his current understanding of various
aspects of it.
PSYCHOLOGY
BF31 2006-010293 1-59147-380-2
APA dictionary of psychology.
VandenBos, Gary R.
American Psychological Assn., ©2007 1024 p. $49.95
This comprehensive reference contains 25,000 entries and includes terms
and concepts drawn from a diverse range of subject areas, including
anthropology, computer programming, molecular and population
biology, pharmacology, physics, and statistics. Though primarily
intended for graduate and undergraduate students and practitioners and
researchers in psychology and related fields, the text is clear and concise
and should be accessible to general readers. Appendices list the biogra-
phical, institutional/organizational, test and assessment, and psycho-
logical and psychotherapeutic approach entries separately. Irregular
plurals, variants forms, synonyms, and etymologies are listed when
appropriate.
BF38 2006-000715 978-0-8204-8179-1
An inquiry into the philosophical foundations of the
human sciences.
Claassen, Alfred. (San Francisco State University series in philosophy;
v.14)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 260 p. $39.95 (pa)
Claasen (sociology emeritus, California State U., Fresno) takes the gener-
alist’s point of view in describing the approaches, frameworks, philoso-
phies and methods linked to the social sciences, psychology and cultural
studies. In a unique approach sure to open debate, he begins with sec-
toralism and the basic dimensions of the human, covering such topics as
the ideal and the real, the id/ego system, individualism and collectivism,
and describes how sectoralism came to its current impasse. He then
moves to universalism and the complex dimensions of the human,
including the rational universal, religion, ethics. Individualism and col-
lectivism in the universal, the balancing mechanism, and the incidence
of harmony and conflict, then describes the epistemics of the human sci-
ences, including dialectical historicism, phenomenology and methods,
aesthetics, overcoming skepticism and radical relativism and reunifying
the human sciences under philosophy.
BF38 2006-040848 978-0-415-36862-9
Philosophy of psychology; contemporary readings.
Title main entry. Ed. by José Luis Bermúdez. (Routledge contemporary
readings in philosophy)
Routledge, ©2006 673 p. $35.95 (pa)
Reprinted from journals, other anthologies, and monographs published
over the past quarter century or so, 30 articles address the basic concepts
of the field: pictures of the mind, commonsense psychology, and repre-
sentation and cognitive architecture. Readers are expected to be students
of the philosophy of psychology or philosophy of mind.
BF39 2006-017399 0-8058-6168-8
Longitudinal models in the behavioral and related
sciences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kees van Montfort et al. (European Association
of Methodology series)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 447 p. $45.00 (pa)
Aimed at advanced students and researchers, this volume reviews longi-
tudinal models and analysis procedures for use in the behavioral and
social sciences in 17 contributions from experts in the field. They
describe current approaches and theories and identify the technical
problems involved in their formulations. Particular attention is paid to
problems arising due to the categorical nature of the data available.
Editor van Montfort teaches qualitative research methods at the Free U.
in Amsterdam.
–8–
BF77 1-84169-393-6
A student’s guide to studying psychology, 3d ed.
Heffernan, Thomas M.
Psychology Press, ©2005 230 p. $55.00 (pa)
Noting that undergraduate psychology students have often complained to
him about not knowing what is expected of them in writing essays, how
to study during lectures, or how to prepare for examinations, Heffernan
(psychology, Northumbria U., UK) presents a practical guide to such
topics. Chapters discuss the nature of psychology as an academic subject,
the different modes of presentation in psychology course, essay writing
and reference skills, research methods and statistics, ethics in research,
and empirical research report writing.
BF109 2006-013766 0-8058-5232-8
Do justice and let the sky fall; Elizabeth F. Loftus and her
contributions to science, law, and academic freedom.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maryanne Garry and Harlene Hayne.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 229 p. $89.95
This volume collects 11 essays relating to the research of psychological
scientist Elizabeth Lotus (b. 1944), particularly in the areas of human
memory, applications to legal problems, and the costs of doing
controversial research. Contributors, who work in psychology and law in
the US and New Zealand, also discuss the misinformation effect,
children’s memory, suggestibility, distortions, errors, and repressed
memories—all areas that she made contributions to. A sketch of her
career in her own words is included, and excerpts from interviews are
integrated throughout the book. Garry and Hayne (Victoria U. of
Wellington and U. of Otago, New Zealand) aim the book at scientists,
graduate students, lawyers, and health professionals. Subject and author
indexes are provided.
BF109 2006-048659 978-0-06-059895-2
Freud; inventor of the modern mind.
Kramer, Peter D. (Eminent lives)
HarperCollins, ©2006 213 p. $21.95
Taking a position in the no-man’s land between the irreconcilable pro-
and anti-Freud camps, Kramer approaches Freud both critically and sym-
pathetically. Kramer, a practicing psychiatrist, asserts that, although
much of Freud’s thought is now archaic, the discipline he invented has
become an inescapable part of our culture. Kramer sees Freud as a myth-
maker, a storyteller and a writer whose books will survive among the
classics of literature.
BF109 2006-042896 1-56980-315-3
I have America surrounded; the life of Timothy Leary.
Higgs, John.
Barricade Books, ©2006 306 p. $24.95
Journalist Higgs, who came upon a forgotten stash of papers, letters and
a diary while researching Leary’s fugitive years, gives reassuringly solid
reasons for Leary’s successes and failures, always keeping Leary the
human rather than Leary the icon in mind.
BF121 2006-001716 978-1-4051-2698-4
Psychology & you; an informal introduction, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Julia C. Berryman et al.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 251 p. $39.95 (pa)
For undergraduates, Berryman (psychology, U. of Leicester, UK) et al.
offer an introductory psychology textbook consisting of self- contained
chapters linked to the reader’s everyday experiences. Chapters cover
topics such as body language, personality, sex and gender, emotions, rela-
tionships, health, psychological problems, and perception and thinking.
This edition contains new chapters on the brain and health psychology,
more on careers, and separate boxes explaining methodology. It has been
reorganized and has more examples, exercises, and illustrations.
References have been updated.
BF161 978-0-7618-3524-0
The selfcreating mind.
Snooks, Graeme Donald.
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 317 p. $38.00 (pa)
Snooks (Australia National U.) continues his two-decade endeavor to
develop and apply what he calls dynamic-strategy theory to explain all
living systems. Having previously considered history, economics and pol-
itics, and historical biology, he turns here to psychiatry. He explores the
mind’s role in life, how it emerged from inchoate matter, how it has
become conscious of itself, and why it continues to malfunction in a sig-
nificant minority of people.
–9–
BF175 2006-023954 978-0-7391-1148-2
Liberating Oedipus?; psychoanalysis as critical theory.
Kovacevic, Filip.
Lexington Books, ©2007 245 p. $65.00
Kovacevic explores how psychoanalytical theory can join political theory
in creating alternative political norms and values. He begins with a
chronological examination of Freud’s works and the Liberation Thesis of
Reich, Marcuse, and Brown. The main part of the volume is devoted to
an investigation of the sociopolitical importance of the psychoanalytic
thought of Jacques Lacan. Kovacevic teaches political psychology and
leadership studies at the U. of Montenegro.
BF175 2005-053098 0-88163-420-4
Unconscious fantasies and the relational world.
Knafo, Danielle and Kenneth Feiner. (Relational perspectives book
series; v.31)
Analytic Press, Inc., ©2006 222 p. $45.00
Clinical psychologist Knafo and psychoanalyst Feiner address some ques-
tions about fantasy life and its relation to reality that could be of impor-
tance in psychoanalytic theory, clinical practice, and the arts. They cover
primal scene, family romance, and castration fantasies.
BF204 2005-021707 978-0-19-517218-8
The Oxford handbook of methods in positive psychology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony D. Ong and Manfred H.M. van
Dulmen.
Oxford U. Press, ©2007 644 p. $79.95
Featuring contributions from both senior academics and those just
beginning their careers, this volume provides a broad overview of
methods employed in the contemporary practice of positive psychology.
The emphasis is on advances in the field since the publication of the
Handbook of Positive Psychology by Oxford in 2002. Some of the major
themes addressed in the 42 chapters include lifespan development, stress,
health, personality, and social relations. Editor Ong teaches human devel-
opment at Cornell U., and van Dulmen is a psychology professor at Kent
State University.
BF318 1-84619-022-3
Making it real; a practical guide to experiential learning
of communication skills.
Thistlethwaite, Jill and George Ridgway.
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2006 140 p. $39.95 (pa)
This resource for healthcare educators in university and workplace set-
tings contains a set of scenarios designed for use in communication skills
training sessions that involve simulated patients (actors). Each scenario
features instructions for facilitators, participants, and the simulated
patient. Suggestions are given for group discussion and debriefing.
Thistlethwaite is a medical educator at the U. of Sydney, and Ridgway
has been involved in communication skills teaching as both a simulated
patient and as a facilitator at Leeds U. Distributed in the U.S. by
Bookmasters.
BF371 2006-020697 1-4129-1629-1
Human memory; structures and images.
Howes, Mary B.
Sage Publications, ©2007 453 p. $64.95 (pa)
The bulk of this work by Howes (State U. of New York at Oneonta) is
designed to serve as the core text material for a course covering the tra-
ditional field of research into memory. It includes chapters on historical
and current perspectives, the associative model of memory, sensory
memory, verbal short-term memory, encoding and retrieval in long-term
memory, the constructivist model of memory, alterations in the compo-
nents of a memory, and autobiographical memory. These core chapters
are supplemented with additional chapters on higher-order structures in
long-term memory, memory for images, implicit memory, traumatic and
false memory, disorders of memory, and neuroscience and memory.
BF441 2006-002506 978-0-8058-5260-8
Mind and its evolution; a dual coding theoretical
approach.
Paivio, Allan.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 517 p. $55.00 (pa)
Paivio (U. of Western Ontario) updates the dual coding theory of mind
in light of recent psychological research on memory, thought, language
and other core areas. He also extends the theory to the interpretation of
mind evolution, following the generally accepted premise that mind evo-
lution proceeded from a primeval non-verbal phase to a recent period
that incorporates language.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BF442 2005-040691 0-8058-4183-0
The mental models theory of reasoning; refinements and
extensions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Walter Schaeken et al.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 234 p. $69.95
Mostly European but some North American psychologists present 11
papers from a workshop on mental models and deductive reasoning held
in Brussels at an undisclosed date. They survey some of the recent
research related to the role of mental models—representations in the
mind of real or imaginary situations—in reasoning. Among their topics
are memory retrieval and context effects in conditional reasoning, falsi-
fication, relational reasoning, and informal argument.
BF447 2006-010277 978-0-19-531174-7
Beyond rationality; the search for wisdom in a troubled
time.
Hammond, Kenneth R.
Oxford U. Press, ©2007 338 p. $35.00
Hammond (emeritus, psychology, U. of Colorado) sums up the scientific
theory of human judgment and rationality and, in an effort to show its
political relevance to the general public and to policy makers, applies it
to political case studies from the Cuban Missile Crisis to Colin Powell’s
erroneous presentation at the United Nations about Iraq’s alleged
weapons of mass destruction. His theory is grounded on the recognition
of the tension between the two standards for evaluating judgment—cor-
respondence competence (wherein judgment corresponds to empirical
facts) and coherence competence (wherein judgments don’t logically con-
flict with other judgments)—and on the declining importance of ration-
ality in assessing judgment.
BF469 2006-040227 0-8058-5299-9
Applied spatial cognition; from research to cognitive
technology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gary L. Allen.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 395 p. $110.00 (pa)
Memory for location, spatial problem solving, and distance cognition are
among the practical aspects explored by psychologists, systems and com-
puter engineers, geographers, and other researchers. In particular, they
discuss influencing spatial activity in such real-world and electronic con-
texts as pedestrian and building design; assisting way-finding, orien-
tation, and mobility in specific populations such as young children and
visually impaired drivers; and training or facilitating skilled performance
in such areas as medicine and military tactics.
BF531 2005-025705 978-0-19-509889-1
Feelings; perception of self.
Laird, James D.
Oxford U. Press, ©2007 258 p. $55.00
Laird (psychology, Clark U.) builds on William James’s concept of self-
perception theory, which holds that feelings do not cause behavior but in
fact follow from behavior, and are the means of our knowing about our
bodily state and behaviors. He defines the debates about how feelings
and behaviors relate, then works through hundreds of studies on emo-
tional expressions, postures and gaze as they relate to action, autonomic
arousal and emotional feeling, nonemotional feelings such as confidence
and pride as well as self-esteem, motivation and hunger, cognitive
feelings of knowing and familiarity, attitudes and cognitive dissonance.
He provides a theoretical summary on emotion and on self-perception,
and concludes with the relationships between self-perception, levels of
organization and the mind-body relation.
BF531 978-90-04-15544-2
Love, hatred, and other passions; questions and themes
on emotions in Chinese civilization.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paolo Santangelo.
BRILL, ©2006 424 p. $147.00 (pa)
As the title suggests, these essays take a provocative approach to Chinese
history, focusing on an anthropological aspect of human experience: the
affective world. The contributors, who are specialists in Asian studies
and Chinese history, analyze literary, historical and judicial material to
illuminate their basic philosophical concepts, as well as their termi-
nology. The topics covered include melancholy in Imperial China, emo-
tions in Chinese medical texts, and the emotional condition of revenge as
represented in pre-modern Chinese fictional narratives. Santangelo
(history of China, Universitã L’Orientale of Naples) provides an intro-
duction to the articles and a conclusion in which he considers the
analysis of non-literary documents.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BF575 2006-021042 0-275-98984-4
Coping with infuriating, mean, critical people; the
destructive narcissist pattern.
Brown, Nina W.
Praeger, ©2006 191 p. $39.95
No doubt you have worked for one of them, been taught by one of them,
or married one of them. They brag, take credit for the work of others,
expect favors but give none, never listen, and know what is right and
best, regardless of the topic. Take heart. Brown (education, Old Dominion
U.) has a name for these people and she assures us they and not we are
the problem. Far from urging those who must endure those with
destructive narcissistic behaviors and attitudes to get over it, get behind
it, or just take it, she carefully describes the specific behaviors you can
diffuse by recognizing them and moderating the impact on yourself,
including blocking identification, understanding your own cognitive dis-
tortion, using emotional insulation and refusing to empathize.
BF575 2006-025844 1-58562-240-0
Dreams of love and fateful encounters; the power of
romantic passion.
Person, Ethel Spector.
American Psychiatric Pub., ©2007 379 p. $29.95 (pa)
Person (clinical psychology, Columbia U.) complains that in much of the
psychoanalytic literature, the topic of romantic love, when not seen as a
manifestation of neurosis, has still been relegated to the periphery in
spite of the obvious fact that psychoanalysts confront issues of romantic
love in their clinical practice on a not infrequent basis. In this work,
aimed equally at general readers and her fellow psychoanalysts, she
explores the positive aspects of romantic love as a crucible for growth
both for individuals and for the culture at large, as well as its inherent
paradoxes and conflicts and its propensity to disintegrate and cause
harm.
BF575 2005-053577 0-89503-315-1
Noah’s rainbow; a father’s emotional journey from the
death of his son to the birth of his daughter.
Fleming, David.
Baywood Publishing Co., ©2006 201 p. $39.95
On August 10, 2000, David and Kim Fleming suddenly lost their son,
Noah, during childbirth. In this memoir, David (a sports journalist for
ESPN) recounts his emotional journey during the year that followed, as
he and his wife grieved for the death of their son and prepared for the
birth of their second child. The harrowing, but ultimately encouraging
narrative is aimed at parents—particularly fathers—who are dealing with
the death of a child.
BF623 2005-043548 978-0-8493-8213-0
Human error; causes and control.
Peters, George A. and Barbara J. Peters.
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2006 214 p. $79.95
As experts on industrial problem-solving, G.A. Peters and B.J. Peters (his
daughter) conceptualize approaches to minimizing harmful human
error. One such human factors approach is FODISE entailing: frequency,
opportunities, detection, inquiries, severity, and effect. With case sce-
narios, they discuss human error inquiries from evidence-based data col-
lection and risk assessment to analyses of errors at the managerial,
organizational, and institutional levels. The text concludes with a review
of professional ethics and discussion questions. A downloadable Web
supplement is available. Both authors have JD degrees; the father is also
a psychologist, safety engineer, quality engineer, and lawyer in California.
BF637 2006-009720 978-1-55620-235-3
Assessment of client core issues.
Halstead, Richard W.
American Counseling Assn., ©2007 110 p. $29.95 (pa)
Halstead (counselor education, Saint Joseph College, Connecticut) created
this monograph in response to a perceived lack of a framework with
which counselors can gain a deep understanding of the core problems
and patterns that, more than isolated incidents, must be understood to
offer effective intervention to a client. In six chapters he describes his
model, developed in practice, for assessing the client’s “living story” and
designing a treatment plan that focuses on relational issues and strength-
based process. Chapters include vignettes, accompanied by analysis, that
illustrate how strategies may be applied by clinicians. This book is
intended for both practitioners and students of counseling.
–10–
BF637 2006-015372 978-1-57886-507-9
Bully-proofing children; a practical, hands-on guide to
stopping bullying.
Scaglione, Joanne and Arrica Rose Scaglione.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 219 p. $34.95 (pa)
The authors of this book, intended for primary and secondary educators
as well as parents, are a K-12 principal, counselor, and teacher, and her
daughter, who works in children’s music. Here they present the program
they’ve developed to deal with problems involving bullies and their
victims. Twenty-one chapters explain common acts and motivations of
bullies, the phenomenon of cyberbullying, the consequences of
unchecked bullying, how to identify bullies, how to empower victims to
cope and solve problems, and proactive approaches to prevention,
including how to teach conflict resolution. One section contains short sce-
narios designed for kids to read and respond to; “golden rule”-type
morals are identified by the authors for each vignette. The book is not
indexed.
BF637 2005-029366 978-0-471-72086-7
Evidence based coaching handbook; putting best practices
to work for your clients.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dianne R. Stober and Anthony M. Grant.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 398 p. $44.95
Pointing out that evidence-based workplace and executive coaching must
be balanced with business restrictions on access to information, Stober
(organizational management/development, Fielding Graduate School,
Santa Barbara) and Grant (coaching psychology, U. of Sydney, Australia)
introduce multiple perspectives on this maturing profession and
emerging area of scholarship. US, UK, and Australian contributors to a
dozen chapters discuss both single-theory and integrative approaches.
The former includes humanistic, behavior-based, and psychoanalytically-
informed coaching. The latter includes adult learning, positive psy-
chology, and adventure-based frameworks. The handbook lists scholarly
business references.
BF637 978-1-4129-3394-0
Life coaching skills; how to develop skilled clients.
Nelson, Jones, Richard.
Sage Publications, ©2007 228 p. $32.95 (pa)
A rapidly growing field, life coaching is based on the understanding that
good psychological skills can help anyone to lead a more fulfilling life.
This introductory textbook teaches the fundamental skills that coaches
use when working with individuals in such areas as relationships, occu-
pations, and health. Coverage includes goal- setting, presentation, demon-
stration, and consolidation skills. Ethical issues are also addressed.
Nelson is Director of the Cognitive Humanistic Institute in Chiang Mai,
Thailand.
BF637 90-04-14858-2
Methods of negotiation research.
Title main entry. Ed. by P. Carnevale and C.K.W. de Dreu.
(International negotiation series; v.2)
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2006 362 p. $209.00
Carnevale (psychology, New York U.) and De Dreu (organizational psy-
chology, U. of Amsterdam, The Netherlands) compile 24 chapters on
methods of negotiation research, both traditional and innovative and
common and atypical. Chapters cover a variety of methods, issues and
controversies, and aim to increase the accessibility of works, improve
communication between fields, and promote the application of methods
across fields. The editors also aim to gather information on conflict phe-
nomena from diverse methods and different settings as well as consider
their common features. Each chapter covers a specific methodology (such
as Markov chain models, cross-cultural research, comparative case
studies, and field experiments), its strengths and weaknesses, examples,
potential, and the author’s experience using it. The contributors, an
international group of scholars, work in the fields of management,
political science, psychology, conflict resolution, law, and communi-
cation. The volume is a reprint of the journal International Negotiation,
vol. 9 (3) and 10 (1), 2004-2005.
BF713 2006-278853 0-07-327130-6
Human development, 8th ed.
Vander Zanden et al.
McGraw-Hill, ©2007 676+ p. $108.13 (pa)
Emphasizing the role of family, this psychology textbook describes devel-
opment during the seven stages of life in two-chapter sets. The first
chapter examines physical, cognitive, and moral development while the
second chapter deals with emotional and social changes. The eighth
edition adds 1,200 references and updates U.S. statistics.
–11–
BF722 2006-922116 978-1-4129-2075-9
Early childhood; a guide for students.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tina Bruce.
Sage Publications, ©2006 334 p. $105.00
The first section of this introductory early childhood text discusses the
education not of young children but of the readers themselves, including
advice for using information and communications technology to aid
study and work. The remaining chapters are stand-alone discussions of
key issues in child development, and best theories and practices for
working with children in each age group on different skills. Two sections
address stages specific to England’s school system, though the contrib-
utors forgo discussion of policy for that of research-based strategy. The
later chapters discuss professional development and the leading and
managing of others in early childhood professions.
BF723 2006-012305 1-59385-352-1
Child and adolescent development for educators.
Pressley, Michael and Christine B. McCormick.
Guilford Pr., ©2007 498 p. $60.00
Pressley and McCormick’s text is the first graduate-level child devel-
opment textbook written specifically for future educators. It offers a solid
understanding of major theories of development as they inform research
and practice in educational settings. Major topics covered include the
impact of biology and early experiences on the developing mind; the
development of academic competence and motivation; how learning is
influenced by individual differences, sociocultural factors, peers, and
family; gender role development; and what educators need to know about
child mental health. Pressley taught teacher education at Michigan State
U. prior to his death in 2006; McCormick is with the School of Education
at the U. of Massachusetts.
BF723 0-8058-4750-2
Gaze-following; its development and significance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ross Flom et al.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 327 p. $125.00
Joining with others to see Spot run turns out to be very important for
children’s language development, according to these essays on the devel-
opment of joint attention in infants. The authors answer questions about
the significance of a child’s ability to look where another is looking,
about the neurological systems facilitated by the development of gaze-fol-
lowing, and about the ways older children and adults use another’s
direction of gaze to learn about various social interactions and the inten-
tions of others. Despite their different emphases, the authors all agree on
the importance of studying individuals in relationship to others and on
the fact that joint visual attention and gaze-following are part of the
dynamic development system in infants.
BF724 2006-009402 978-0-8047-5316-6
Learning difference; race and schooling in the multiracial
metropolis.
Staiger, Annegret Daniela.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 223 p. $19.95 (pa)
Staiger (anthropology, Clarkson U., Potsdam, New York) reports findings
from an ethnographic study exploring how race is formed and how it
functions within an intensely multiethnic and multiracial urban high
school. The study was conducted at a high school in metropolitan
California, in a city where Whites have become the minority and where
there is no longer a clear racial majority. While the school is publicly cel-
ebrated for its academic success and racial integration in an inner-city
area, the study reveals that organizational reforms meant to desegregate
schools actually become the means by which racial exclusion is perpet-
uated and that adolescents adopt, generate, and sometimes manipulate
racial meanings to accomplish certain goals and navigate through the
social minefield of the school.
BF1556 2006-020701 978-0-8126-9601-1
The undead and philosophy; chicken soup for the
soulless.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Greene and K. Silem Mohammad.
(Popular culture and philosophy; v.22)
Open Court Publishing, ©2006 261 p. $17.95 (pa)
Mostly American scholars mostly of philosophy explore philosophical
implications of popular works regarding vampires, zombies, and other
creatures that are animate though physically or mentally dead. Among
the topics are Blade Runner, Heidegger, Romero and Aristotle, Spinoza,
vampires and vegetarians, ethical and existential elements of vampirism,
Rousseau, and Halloween.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BF1566 2006-002136 978-0-7425-4697-4
The path of the devil; a study of early modern witch
hunts.
Jensen, Gary.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 283 p. $26.95 (pa)
While historians have been paying ever more attention to the witch hunts,
sociologists have tended to wander away during the past couple of
decades, and Jensen (sociology and religious studies, Vanderbilt U.)
thinks that is a shame. He argues that the craze illustrates how applying
different sociological conceptions can highlight different features of a his-
torical phenomenon, and how various issues arise when scientists began
to operationalize variables and compile quantitative data and statistical
analysis. All this, he says, is relevant in an introductory sociology course.
BF1582 2006-007783 978-0-86698-352-5
On the inconstancy of witches; Pierre de Lancre’s Tableau
de L’inconstance des Mauvais Anges et Demons (1612).
Lancre, Pierre de. Ed. by Gerhild Scholz Williams. Trans. by Harriet
Stone and Gerhild Scholz Williams. (Arizona Center for Medieval and
Renaissance Studies; v.16: Medieval and Renaissance texts and studies;
v.307)
ACMRS, ©2006 586 p. $62.00
The French king appointed two men to investigate alleged witch activities
among the Basques near the borders of Spain and Navarre. One, an
occult enthusiast, soon returned to his studies, leaving the field open to
Lancre, a painstaking (no pun) jurist thrilled with demonology and
ambitious to become a vigorous and merciless witch hunter. This, his
report, reflects his conviction that women were inclined towards evil and
that witchcraft was real. He supplies all the details that his contempo-
raries could want. Williams (German, Washington U., St. Louis) provides
footnotes explaining references. The book is published by the Arizona
Center for Medieval and Renaissance Studies in collaboration with
Brepols.
BF1588 2005-027036 0-8160-6048-7
The encyclopedia of magic and alchemy.
Guiley, Rosemary Ellen.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2006 370 p. $82.50
The bad news is that it is not a how-to book; the good news is that it is
comprehensive compendium of magical lore and traditions with over 400
entries that describe philosophies, rituals, materials, procedures and
famous practitioners of magic. The historical range reaches from ancient
Egypt to 20th-century politics, religion and science and the topics cover
everything from astral travel to zombies. The encyclopedia contains
black-and-white photographs and cross-references. It appropriate for stu-
dents in grade 9 and up.
BF1621 2006-028454 978-0-7591-1040-3
A cognitive theory of magic.
Sørensen, Jesper. (Cognitive science of religion series)
AltaMira Press, ©2007 218 p. $28.95 (pa)
Sørensen (comparative religion, U. of Southern Denmark) sees magic as
a synthetic concept that covers a broad range of cognitive, cultural, and
social phenomena, and therefore requires several types of theoretical
models addressing different descriptive levels. Here he establishes a com-
prehensive model as a framework to link these different explanatory
levels.
BF1623 2004-056852 0-89254-138-5
The meaning and philosophy of numbers. (reprint, 1932)
Bosman, Leonard. (The Ibis western mystery tradition series)
Ibis Press, ©2005 156 p. $12.95 (pa)
As part of a series that reprints little-known texts relating to the Western
spiritual tradition, this volume presents a treatise that views numbers as
“symbols of the beginning and development of the universe.” That this
sounds reminiscent of Kabbala, Jewish mysticism, is hardly surprising
since Bosman (1879-?), a Jew, Theosophist and Freemason, studied eso-
teric traditions in London, according to the new foreword to a book orig-
inally published in 1932 by Rider & Co., London. Ibis Press is an imprint
of Nicholas-Hays, Inc.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BF1779 2006-024929 978-0-7391-1348-6
Culture of fengshui in Korea; an exploration of East Asian
geomancy.
Yoon, Hong-key.
Lexington Books, ©2006 331 p. $75.00
The art of fengshui has had a deep and extensive impact on Korean,
Chinese, and other East Asian cultures. Korean native Yoon (geography
and environmental science, U. of Auckland, New Zealand) explores the
nature of geomantic principles and their applications in Korean culture.
Coverage includes the origins, evolution, and spread of geomancy; the
development of geomancy in Korea; Chinese geomantic principles and
their applications for the building of graves and houses; the relationships
between geomancy and Korea’s main religions, Buddhism and
Confucianism; the use of geomantic ideas in Chinese, Japanese, and
Korean cities, with particular focus on Seoul and Kaesong; and the role
of geomancy in the iconographical warfare between Japanese colonialism
and Korean nationalism. For students and scholars of Asian studies and
geography.
AESTHETICS
BH39 2006-006598 978-0-8047-4424-9
The end of art; readings in a rumor after Hegel.
Geulen, Eva. Trans. by James McFarland.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 206 p. $19.95 (pa)
Geulen (German, U. of Bonn) examines the notions of Hegel, Nietzsche,
Benjamin, Adorno, Heidegger, Holderlin and others on the fate of the arts
in modernity and postmodernity, constantly asking why there is a com-
pulsion to say art is at an end. She plays the thoughts of each against
each other, seeking out their motivations and collective obligations to
declare that all the great work of art may have been done, analyzing the
turning points and revelations they found in their own work and that of
their predecessors and contemporaries. Particularly interesting is the
chapter on Heidegger and myth and the epilogue that comments on what
Geulen calls “the mysterious yearning for the chasm.”
BH301 2006-025575 978-0-7391-1088-1
The art of power; Machiavelli, Nietzsche, and the making
of aesthetic political theory.
Von Vacano, Diego A.
Lexington Books, ©2007 215 p. $60.00
By looking at the work of the two influential thinkers, Von Vacano
(political science, Texas A&M U.) pursues such questions as how political
theory can explain the persistent political power of images and other
forms of sensory perception on people’s imagination, and what the rela-
tionship is between aesthetic or sensory cognition and the fields of
morality and politics.
BH301 2006-019343 978-0-8014-4511-8
The enlargement of life; moral imagination at work.
Kekes, John.
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 236 p. $29.95
Kekes (philosophy and public policy, State University of New York,
Albany) looks at literary works that show something important about the
place of imagination in a good life. In particular, he examines the three
processes of making pictures, coming to resemble them, and reflecting
in a certain way. He has discussed some of the works before, particularly
in The Art of Life, but here offers further thoughts.
ETHICS
BJ21 2006-025658 978-1-4051-6036-0
Shared intentions and collective responsibility.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter A. French and Howard K. Wettstein.
(Midwest studies in philosophy; v.30)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 337 p. $34.95 (pa)
This year’s annual anthology contains 20 essays clustering around the
chosen philosophical theme. Contributors from North America and
Europe consider such topics as collective responsibility and an agent
meaning theory, historical injustices, the rationality of collective guilt,
corporate responsibility and moral taint, and the evil intentions of health
care in the US. There is no introduction or index.
–12–
BJ1012 2006-007481 978-1-4051-2951-0
Foundations of ethics; an anthology, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Russ Shafer-Landau and Terence Cuneo.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 504 p. $99.95
Shafer-Landau (philosophy, U. of Wisconsin) and Cuneo (philosophy,
Calvin College) prepare a collection of 38 readings in metaethics, divided
by issues of ontology of morality and problems. Essays do not consider
normative questions of moral life, but instead involve the legitimacy of
normative theories and theorizing. Meant for students of ethical theory,
the volume also contains commentary to the essays, which ponder moral
error theories, expressivism, constructivism, sensibility theories, semantic
puzzles, and moral realism, motivation, reasons, explanations, dis-
agreement, knowledge, and supervenience. There is no index.
BJ1188 2006-017737 978-0-7425-5011-7
Religious perspectives on business ethics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas O’Brien and Scott Paeth. (Religion and
business ethics)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 359 p. $34.95 (pa)
For managers and college students, O’Brien and Paeth (both: religious
studies, DePaul U.) compile 18 recently published articles on business
ethics that come from the perspective of religion in a much- needed
anthology on the two subjects. The essays, which the editors have used
in their own courses, address normative theories, religious approaches to
economic life, and everyday and personal life issues. Topics include
responsibility, Utilitarianism, teleology, character, justice, corporate social
responsibility, management practices, self- interest, sustainability, Roman
Catholicism, and globalization. The collection is meant to simplify sup-
plementing introductory business ethics textbooks. Articles are predomi-
nantly Christian, and some prior knowledge of moral theory is assumed.
Contributors work in religious studies or management and business
ethics fields in the US.
BJ1251 978-1-904675-15-0
Justus Lipsius On constancy ; De constantia translated by
Sir John Stradling (1595).
Lipsius, Justus. Trans. by John Stradling. Ed. by John Sellers.
Bristol Phoenix Press, ©2006 152 p. $37.95 (pa)
Sellers (Oxford U.) modernizes and otherwise slightly revises Stradling’s
translation as published in Rudolf Kirk’s 1939 edition, and includes some
editorial material by Kirk. He also provides an introduction setting
Lipsius’ 1584 attempt to reconcile Stoicism with Christianity in historical
and philosophical context. Distributed in the US by the David Brown
Book Company.
BJ1401 2006-017583 978-0-7425-5239-5
Eden’s garden; rethinking sin and evil in an era of
scientific promise.
Coleman, Richard J.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 301 p. $26.95 (pa)
Coleman, a retired minister in the United Church of Christ, examines the
notion of sin in a contemporary world that values scientific and nonre-
ligious approaches to the study of human behavior. In arguing for the
importance of the notions of sin and evil to the nonreligious mind,
Coleman reconceptualizes those notions as “indelible pieces of our evo-
lutionary history.”
BJ1421 2006-025918 978-0-8126-9611-0
Bullshit and philosophy; guaranteed to get perfect results
every time.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gary L. Hardcastle and George A. Reisch.
(Popular culture and philosophy)
Open Court Publishing, ©2006 272 p. $17.95 (pa)
Whereas liars deliberately distort the truth, bullshitters have no interest
in whether what they say is true or not, and so are the more dangerous
to truth. This is one of the core findings by Harry G. Frankfurt (moral
philosophy, Princeton U.) in his 2005 volume On Bullshit. Here scholars
of philosophy take up his challenge to consider the nature, incidence, and
significance of the phenomenon. They consider rethinking and
responding to it; defining it; and its appearance in politics, science, edu-
cation, and the law.
–13–
BJ1500 2006-008772 978-0-7425-5090-2
Universalism vs. relativism; making moral judgments in a
changing, pluralistic, and threatening world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Don Browning.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 189 p. $22.95 (pa)
In the shadow of 9/11, US philosophers and social scientists ask whether
there are universal, or at least highly stable, moral truths; or whether all
morality in relative to time, place, tradition, and context with little
common ground across cultural communities. Their perspectives include
the origin of moral norms, ethical traditions at the interface with inter-
national law, and concrete levels of being and their political implications.
BJ1581 2005-007351 978-0-7546-4881-9
Ethics, law, and society; v.2.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer Gunning and Søren Holm.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 326 p. $124.00
Law, philosophy, religion, the social sciences, and medicine are among
the fields represented by scholars and activists as they explore the tradi-
tional areas of ethical concern that remain unresolved and newly dis-
covered areas of ethical interest that may or may not have to do with new
technologies. Their topics include the surprising controversy over
umbilical cord cell banking, children and media coverage of traumatic
events, myths and realities of the international financial war against ter-
rorism, Ukraine and the spirit of constitutionalism, Saddam Hussein’s
trial, and the continuing disaster of Bhopal.
BJ1611 2006-005811 978-0-471-79362-5
The power of you!; how you can create happiness,
balance, and wealth.
Martineau, Scott.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 208 p. $24.95
Martineau is with Conscious One, the largest Internet resource for inspi-
rational tools, products, and online interactive courses for personal
growth and enlightened spirituality. He offers interested general readers
a self-help text for balancing the pressures of work and the needs of one’s
personal life. The text combines practical tools, techniques, and skills
with inspirational and practical advice from renowned contributors such
as Dr. Nathaniel Branden, Arthur Joseph, Joe Vitale, and Jack Canfield.
RELIGION
BL31 2005-440756 978-1-84371-138-4
The encyclopedia of religion and nature; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bron R. Taylor et al.
Thoemmes Press, ©2005 1877 p. $450.00
Relationships among human beings, their diverse religions, and the
Earth’s living systems are explored by scholars of natural and social sci-
ences and religion. Their studies have grown from the growing concern
about the historical and possible future role of religion in the degra-
dation and protection of the environment. The entries range from para-
graph-long profiles of minor figures and organizations to entries of
dozens of pages on major world religions and environmental movements;
each provides a list of further reading. A brief survey of topics includes
engaged Buddhism, the Catholic bishops’ Columbia River Watershed
Pastoral Letter, pre-Islamic Egypt, the Ghost Dance, hunting and the
origins of religion, Carl Jung (1875-1961), martial arts, the Redwood
Rabbis, Dorothee Soelle (1929-2003), volcanoes, and Zimbabwe’s Matopo
Hills. There is little or no cross-referencing in the text, but much in the
index. The two volumes of this set are paged and indexed together. The
2005 edition has been reprinted with corrections in 2006.
BL31 2005-055320 978-90-04-13980-0
Religion past & present; encyclopedia of theology and
religion; v.1: A-Bhu.
Religion in Geschichte und Gegenwart. Ed. by Hans Dieter Betz et al.
BRILL, ©2007 719 p. $279.00
Religion in Geschichte und Gegenwart was first published in 1909-13 by
Mohr Siebeck, and this is a translation and adaptation of the 1998-2005
fourth German edition. The comprehensive reference to theology and
religion is rooted in the tradition of modern Protestantism but not bound
to any particular theological school or program. Among the fields
examined are biblical studies, ethics, practical theology, history, phi-
losophy, sociology, psychology, science, law, and economics. People,
movements, places, works, and ideas are among topics of particular
entries. Volumes two and three are scheduled for 2007; the entire 10
volumes—and presumable an index—are expected to be available by 2010.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BL41 2006-048992 978-90-04-15267-0
Comparing religions; possibilities and perils?
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Athanasius Idinopulos et al. (Numen
book series; studies in the history of religions; v.113)
BRILL, ©2006 320 p. $120.00
University classroom instructors of religion address such questions as
what methods should be used to compare religions; what the purposes
and benefits of such comparison are; and what risks, perils, and liabil-
ities lie in wait. The sections cover theory; methodology; and post-
colonial, post-modern, and modern perspectives. Specific topics include
the role of the authoritative in the comparative process, comparing
founder-figures Socrates and Jesus in the classroom, and comparing
Hinduism and Islam as orientalist constructions.
BL51 2006-932739 0-495-00914-8
On the philosophy of religion.
Gale, Richard M.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2007 146 p. $15.95 (pa)
The central question is whether it is rational in some sense to believe that
the God of traditional Western theism exists. Gale (emeritus, U. of
Pittsburgh) intends to provoke undergraduate students into give-and-take
discussion and even heated debate in a philosophy of religion course. In
addition to presenting ideas about the central question, his approach
demonstrates how to counter an argument with argument to help stu-
dents develop polemic skills. To prevent debaters from taking short cuts,
there is no index.
BL53 2006-021770 0-275-98788-4
Where God and science meet; how brain and evolutionary
studies alter our understanding of religion; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick McNamara. (Psychology, religion, and
spirituality)
Praeger, ©2006 862 p. $275.00
The meeting is definitely taking place in the house of science, and the
emphasis is on biological processes associated with religiousness, though
religious processes associated with biologicalness are occasionally
addressed—for example the health benefits and risks of religiosity. Mostly
psychologists, but also other scientists and a few scholars of religion, look
at evolution, genes, and the religious brain in volume one. The second
volume discusses the neurology of religious experience; and the third the
psychology of religious experience. The volumes are paged and indexed
separately.
BL60 2006-922461 978-0-7618-3468-7
The merging of theology and spirituality; an examination
of the life and work of Alister E. McGrath.
McDonald, Larry S.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 166 p. $28.00 (pa)
McDonald (Christian studies, Truett-McConnel College, Georgia) explains
how Belfast-born (1953) theologian McGrath has challenged evangelicals
to develop a spirituality that addressed the deepest needs of Christians,
but was biblically and theologically based and historically rooted in the
Reformers, Puritans, and Pietists.
BL60 90-04-15473-6
Research in the social scientific study in religion; v.17.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ralph L. Piedmont. (Series: title)
BRILL, ©2007 278 p. $79.00 (pa)
The 11 articles continue the series’ effort to provide a wide assortment of
studies that extends the value of religious and spiritual constructs to
understanding the human experience. New and experienced scholars in
sociology, several branches of psychology, mental health, ministry, pas-
toral counseling, and other fields explore such topics as intolerance
toward others and belief in an active Satan, variant uses of religious
beliefs to justify social attitudes, and afterlife beliefs of Catholic and
Protestant undergraduates.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BL65 2006-021027 978-0-275-99313-9
The future of peace and justice in the global village; the
role of the world religions in the 21st century.
McFaul, Thomas R.
Praeger, ©2006 224 p. $49.95
In describing this work, McFaul (emeritus, ethics and religious studies,
North Central College in Naperville, Illinois) writes that it addresses one
specific question: “Will the global village be a place where the inhabi-
tants experience an increase in peace and justice or hatred and hostility?”
He explores the role that the world religions will play in shaping the
answer to that question. After introducing the basic concepts underlying
the discussion, he compares and contrasts the worldviews of major reli-
gions and explores the common ground between them. He then does the
same with the ethics of the world religion. Finally, he applies the fore-
going discussion to issues of violence; sex, sexuality, and gender, and the
separation of the sacred from the secular and develops possible scenarios
for the impact of the world religions on the course of the global village.
BL65 2006-026203 0-313-33088-3
Homosexuality and religion; an encyclopedia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey S. Siker.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 258 p. $85.00
Scholars mostly of religion but also of gender and other concerns in the
social sciences begin with synthetic essays on how the relationship
between homosexuality and religion plays out in law, the social sciences,
the biological sciences, and spirituality. The core articles survey attitudes
and practices in a range of religions and Christian denominations; and
consider such topics as AIDS and HIV, clergy and ordination, marriage,
and queer theology.
BL65 2006-050925 978-90-04-15447-6
Mapping gender in ancient religious discourses.
Title main entry. Ed. by Todd Penner and Caroline Vander Stichele.
(Biblical interpretation series; v.84)
BRILL, ©2007 280 p. $269.00
Scholars of religion, theology, and the classics explore and interrogate
ancient conceptions of gender, emphasizing how they can be understood
to intersect with religious discourses in antiquity and the rhetorical rep-
resentations and modes of argument in those discourses. They consider
Jewish, early Christian, and Greco-Roman literature, in isolation and in
interaction, from the broad Roman imperial world as late as the fourth
century CE.
BL65 2006-009476 978-0-8139-2562-2
Religion and violence in a secular world; toward a new
political theology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Clayton Crockett. (Studies in religion and
culture)
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 233 p. $22.50
North American scholars of religion offer theoretical perspectives on the
coincidence of religion and violence in the world today and the implica-
tions of both in issues of politics and terrorism. They draw primarily on
Continental philosophy as a methodology. In general, the focus is on
Western monotheistic religions. Only names are indexed.
BL65 2006-933309 978-0-7618-3558-5
Religion, culture, curriculum, and diversity in the 21st
century American.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Alice Trent et al.
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 203 p. $27.95 (pa)
Faculty members at Oral Roberts University and other institutions of
Christian higher education in the US discuss racial and religious diversity
in such schools. Their topics include Africa-American and Euro-American
perspectives on teaching Langston Hughes and the Harlem Renaissance,
Muslim and Hindu paradigms of the God-world relation, and being
Muslim in the central Texas Bible Belt. There is no index.
BL82 2006-006886 1-58901-125-2
Key words in religious studies.
Geaves, Ron.
Georgetown U. Press, ©2006 111 p. $12.95 (pa)
In this pocket-size (5x7″) guide, Geaves (religious studies, University of
Chester) defines and succinctly explains terms used in religious studies
and theology. Many terms are drawn from the disciplines of sociology,
anthropology, psychology, and philosophy, reflecting the intersection of
these disciplines with religious studies.
–14–
BL240 2005-026762 0-7656-8064-5
Science, religion, and society; an encyclopedia of history,
culture, and controversy; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Arri Eisen and Gary Laderman.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 888 p. $279.00
The intersection of science and religion through the ages, in various cul-
tures, and in the present are the topics of the essays of this 2-volume ref-
erence. Written by academics and other specialists worldwide, the 86
essays are grouped into the broad topics of general overview; historical
perspectives; creation, the cosmos, and the origins of the universe; the
natural world; consciousness, mind, and the brain; healers and healing;
death and dying; and genetics and religion. Each of these sections begins
with a general introduction to the topic. A sampling of essay titles
includes Taoist contributions to science in China, science in the classical
Hindu world, African cosmologies, neurotheology, Navajo spirituality,
and near death experiences. Eiser (he teaches biology and in the Center
for Ethics) and Laderman (American religious history and culture) both
teach at Emory U., where they have organized a faculty reading group,
undergraduate courses, and symposia on the topic of science and
religion.
BL458 2004-058389 0-321-19481-0
Women in religion.
Fisher, Mary Pat.
Longman, ©2007 328 p. $35.33 (pa)
Is the history of religion always the history of the beliefs and practice of
men? Not if one looks carefully, notes Fisher (comparative religion,
Gobind Sadan Institute), who includes biographies of women and direct
quotations to show how powerful the female has been and continues to
be in a wide range of faiths, whether by universal belief or by that held
privately by women practitioners themselves. Fisher relates the experi-
ences of women as bodies and souls in indigenous religions where they
can be divine, interlinked with past and future, or mutilated, in
Hinduism where they range from goddesses to social activists, in
Buddhism where they are nuns and teachers, in Confucianism and
Daoism, where they can be immortals and adepts, Christianity, in which
they are saints. Scholars, activists servants, Islam, in which they are
equals in word, and other religions, in which they serve as everything
from founders to slaves.
BL600 2006-048593 90-04-15342-X
Theorizing rituals; issues, topics, approches, concepts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jens Kreinath et al. (Numen book series)
BRILL, ©2006 777 p. $219.00
Having recently published an annotated bibliography of work on theories
of human ritual (publish in 1998 as volume 82 of the same Numen book
series on “Studies in the History of Religions”), Kreinath (Institute for
Religious Studies, U. of Heidelberg, Germany), Snoek (sciences of religion,
U. of Heidelberg), and Stausberg (history of religions, U. of Bergen,
Norway) planned this volume as a complement that would review the
key subjects of the emerging field. They present 35 chapters in all, the
first four dealing with such methodological and metatheoretical issues,
including definitions, the relationship between rituals and other forms of
social action, conceptual alternatives to “ritual,” and a lexicographic
survey of terms related to ritual from an emic perspective. The next six
revisit such classical topics as ritual and the psyche, the societal role of
ritual, and ritual and meaning. Theoretical approaches are reviewed in
chapters on action, aesthetics, cognition, communication, ethology,
gender, performance, praxis, relationality, and semiotics. The remaining
chapters explore paradigmatic concepts: agency, complexity, deference,
dynamics, efficacy, embodiment, emotion, framing, language, media,
participation, reflexivity, rhetorics, transmission, and virtuality.
BL624 2006-022389 0-8204-8879-8
Spirituality, ethnography, and teaching; stories from
within.
Title main entry. Ed. by Will Ashton and Diana Denton.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 283 p. $69.95
Ashton and Denton (drama and speech communication, U. of Waterloo)
contend that ethnography is a way for teachers to find “a way into the
heart of spiritual dwelling and communication.” To this end, they use
autoethnography, which they define as a subgenre of autobiography that
“expands the horizons of our consciousness.” The examples demonstrate
rather than define these hazy concepts by relaying personal experiences
of spirituality and teaching in such circumstances as Ground Zero,
Mormon missionary work, and the aftermath of a relative’s suicide.
–15–
BL795 2006-049930 978-90-04-15242-7
Phrygian rock-cut shrines; structure, function, and cult
practice.
Berndt-Ersöz, Susanne. (Culture and history of the ancient Near East;
v.25)
BRILL, ©2006 410 p. $236.00
Berndt-Ersöz explores Phrygian cult and cult practices through a detailed
analysis of rock-cut monuments in their preserved context in central
Anatolia, and in combination with other Phrygian religious material
groups. She draws on already published and recorded material, partly at
least to indicate where and how further surveys and excavations should
be undertaken to clarify issues she raises. An underlying question is the
role of the Phrygians in the formative stage of the Iron Age and subse-
quent centuries. The study is updated from her 2003 Ph.D. dissertation
in classical archaeology and ancient history at the University of
Stockholm.
BL1055 2006-014342 978-1-57731-180-5
Eastern wisdom modern life; collected talks, 1960-1969.
Watts, Alan.
New World Library, ©2006 245 p. $15.95 (pa)
In this compilation of lectures by Watts, the man who introduced mil-
lions of Western readers to Zen and other Eastern philosophies, we once
again hear the call to reevaluate Western culture’s constructs and to open
our minds to other possibilities. In interpreting Eastern philosophies for
Western audiences, Watts questions the value of a divine patriarch and
of monarchial religions. He also discusses the nature of reality and the
impact of an individual’s relationship with society on reality.
BL1164 2006-011680 978-0-472-06956-9
Cage of freedom; Tamil identity and the ethnic fetish in
Malaysia.
Willford, Andrew C.
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 346 p. $26.95 (pa)
Alongside the widely recognized Islamic resurgence in contemporary
Malaysia, there have also been religious revivalist movements among
non-Malay and non-Muslim minorities, including the Tamil Hindu com-
munity. In his ethnography of Tamil Hindu revivalism, Willford (anthro-
pology and Asian studies, Cornell U.) argues that Tamil religious
expression, especially for the working classes, symbolically reject state
and elite ideologies of Malay Islamic modernism but paradoxically serve
to legitimate modern Malay narratives of ethnic affiliation. He also
explores the different strategies employed middle and elite class Tamils
to challenge Malay categories of ethnicity and the impact of internal class
divisions among Tamils.
BL1202 2006-024490 0-275-99006-0
Essential Hinduism.
Rosen, Steven J.
Praeger, ©2006 266 p. $44.95
Rosen, a frequent writer about Hinduism, sets out the fundamentals of
the religion, focusing on the tradition of Vaishnavism, with which about
two-thirds of Hindus worldwide identify themselves. He considers such
aspects as the one and the many, dharma, the Vedas, underlying meta-
physics, festivals and holidays, and sonic theology.
BL1640 2006-004855 978-90-04-14674-7
The rituals and myths of the feast of the goodly gods of
KTU/CAT 1.23; royal constructions of opposition,
intersection, integration, and domination.
Smith, Mark S. (Society of Biblical Literature resources for biblical
study; no.51)
BRILL, ©2006 201 p. $110.00
When the Ugarit text often called The Birth of the Beautiful Gods was first
published in 1933, it attracted much scholarly attention because it dis-
plays a combination of ritual and mythic material unique in the Ugaritic
corpus. But no one could quite figure out what it said, and by 1980,
scholars had wandered off to greener pastures. Smith (New York U.)
takes up the challenge again, armed with recent developments in the
study of myth and ritual in anthropology and ritual studies. He begins
by refuting several assumptions that had blocked progress in under-
standing the text. Brill publishes the hardbound edition of this book;
Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BL1802 2006-001695 978-1-85109-626-8
Chinese religions in contemporary societies.
Title main entry. Ed. by James Miller.
ABC-CLIO, ©2006 317 p. $85.00
For students and general readers, Miller (East Asian traditions, Queen’s
U., Kingston, Ontario, Canada) provides 12 chapters that detail Chinese
religious practices and their interpretation around the world. The book
focuses on the religious lives of the majority Han Chinese people around
the world and the adoption of Chinese religions by non-Chinese people
in contemporary societies in North America. Chapters were written by
religious and Asian studies scholars from North America and Asia and
cover the history and content of these religions and specific aspects in
different societies, such as Buddhist monasteries, Daoism, shamanism
and mediumship, Protestant Christianity in China, and women and
religion.
BL2015 2006-554474 81-7304-673-5
Assertive religious identities; India and Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Satish Saberwal and Mushirul Hasan.
Manohar, ©2006 480 p. $64.95
Social scientists, most from India but two from Germany, investigate
institutions that, ostensibly religious or social, have the effect of social
separation, and have developed low-cost forms of organization and
activity so that they are growing, often in competition with each other.
Among their case studies are Jews in Europe under Muslim and
Christian rule, Hindutva ideas of the past, the evolution of political Islam
in Jammu and Kashmir, and asserting religious ideas in Germany.
Distributed in the US by South Asia Books.
BL2428 978-0-86159-156-5
A Naos of Nekhthorheb from Bubastis; religious
iconography and temple building in the 30th dynasty.
Spencer, Neal. (BMP Research Paper 156)
The British Museum Press, ©2006 126 p. $48.00 (pa)
Fragments of the monumental naos, or shrine, were discovered by
Edouard Naville during excavations in 1888, but its architectural form
and the exquisite quality of its sunken relief carvings have remained
unknown to most Egyptologists because the fragments were scattered.
The British Museum has recently stored the fragments together in a place
where researchers could, using them and fragments in the Cairo
Museum, reconstruct the original structure and decoration. Spencer has
undertaken the task. He also discusses the role of the naos and its context
in the city and temples. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book
Company.
BL2450 2006-051764 978-90-04-15420-9
Nile into Tiber; Egypt in the Roman world; proceedings.
Colloque international sur les etudes isiaques (3d: 2005: Leiden,
Netherlands) Ed. by Laurent Bricault et al. (Religion in the Graeco-
Roman world; v.159)
BRILL, ©2007 562 p. $194.00
The conferences began in 1999 with the express purpose of exploring the
diffusion of the cults of Isis in the Mediterranean, but have loosened the
belt a bit to consider broader aspects of cultural interaction between
Egypt and Rome. Among the 20 topics are the Hellenistic face of Isis as
cosmic and savior goddess, the temple of Isis at Pompeii, Egyptian cults
and local elites in Boeotia, and images of Isis and her cultic shrines. Nine
of the essays are in French.
BL2525 2006-022880 0-275-98605-5
Faith in America; changes, challenges, new directions; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles H. Lippy.
Praeger, ©2006 832 p. $300.00
Scholars of religion explore the major trends in religion in the US over
the past half century at a level accessible to general readers and
nonspecialist scholars and students. The first volume looks primarily at
transformations in organized religious life in mainstream and other
varieties of Christianity, in religions that are minorities in the US, and
among various population groups. The second explores debate and
controversy that have risen, such as the political impact of the religious
right, abortion, and civil religion. The third considers the retreat into
personal spirituality from such perspectives as fiction, film the Internet,
and religion in a world of terror. The volumes are paged and indexed
separately.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BL2525 2006-022954 0-275-98712-4
Introduction to new and alternative religions in America;
5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eugene V. Gallagher and W. Michael Ashcraft.
Praeger, ©2006 1504 p. $399.99
Ashcraft (religion, Truman State U.) and Gallagher (religious studies,
Connecticut College) have assembled a fascinating and thorough resource
on the many new and alternative religions to be found in the U.S. Each
of the five volumes is devoted to a separate theme (and contains its own
index), and contains lengthy articles on between 8 and 12 topics. The
initial volume delves into history and controversies, with many religions
discussed under such topics as globalization, the law, evangelical
Christian countercult movements, and new religious movements and vio-
lence. The subsequent volumes contain articles on religious movements,
with volumes on Asian traditions; African diaspora traditions and other
American innovations; metaphysical, New Age, and neopagan move-
ments; and Jewish and Christian traditions. The articles discuss each
movement in depth, describing its history, philosophy, leaders, religious
practice, controversies and issues, publications, and related themes. Each
article is signed, annotated, and concludes with a bibliography. There is
no comprehensive index.
BL2525 2006-002837 978-0-8108-5508-3
Religion and spirituality in America; the ultimate teen
guide.
Gay, Kathlyn. (It happened to me; no.15)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 135 p. $40.00
About 40 percent of today’s teenagers are curious enough about religion
and spirituality to visit faith-based websites each month, and this series
of narratives and points of fact punctuated with explanatory text helps
by describing a range of beliefs and their applications, focusing on
learning and tolerance. It describes the religious diversity now in the US,
the concept of the separation of church and state, the relationship
between religion and politics, religious restrictions and protections,
religion in everyday life, religious rites of passage most closely associated
with the teen years, lesser-known belief systems such as Wicca, what
agnostics and atheists believe, and the process of getting to know others’
beliefs.
BL2540 2006-010823 978-1-57075-679-5
Religion in Latin America; a documentary history.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lee M. Penyak and Walter J. Petry.
Orbis Books, ©2006 423 p. $40.00 (pa)
Penyak (history, Latin American studies, and women’s studies; U. of
Scranton, Pennsylvania) and Petry (emeritus history, Latin American and
Caribbean studies, and Black studies; Fairfield U.) present 162 texts for
graduate and undergraduate students or others interested in religion in
Latin America. The sections are generally chronological, beginning in
indigenous religions and ending with Protestantism and Roman
Catholicism entering the 21st century. Sections also consider such topics
as ecclesiastical realities, education, slavery, the Inquisition, and liber-
ation theology.
BL2565 2006022454 978-0-8204-8191-3
Crucial issues in Caribbean religions.
Mitchell, Mozella G. (MLK, Jr. memorial studies in religion, culture and
social development; v.10)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 265 p. $79.95
Mitchell (religious studies, U. of South Florida, Tampa) discusses the rela-
tionship of major world religions to indigenous and African- derived reli-
gions in the Caribbean, as she sees religious diversity closely tied to
Caribbean life. These include Catholic and Protestant Christianity,
Judaism, Islam, and Hinduism; Caribs and Arawaks; and Lucumi, Regla
de Palo, Vodun, Obeah, Rastafari, and Orisa or Shango in Trinidad.
Issues she considers involve the social and economic problems of exile,
slavery and racism, economic oppression, sexism, ethnocentrism and cul-
tural dominance, and religious diversity. Syncretism, popular religiosity,
religious and spiritual imperialism, continuity and change, survival tech-
niques, interreligious dialogue and engagement, and universal spiritu-
ality are also discussed. The sources for the study are books, films, the
author’s travels and observations, and interviews. An index of foreign
words and phrases is included.
–16–
BL2565 2006022454 0-8204-8863-1
Crucial issues in Caribbean religions.
Mitchell, Mozella G. (MLK, Jr. memorial studies in religion, culture and
social development; v.10)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 267 p. $32.95 (pa)
Mitchell (religious studies, U. of South Florida-Tampa) explores the inter-
sections of the Caribbean of major world religions with indigenous reli-
gions and religions derived from Africa. She argues that the religious
diversity and mixture of the Caribbean are strongly based on the issues
that are the basis of life in the region, and that is why so many of the
religions remain very much alive after long attempts to eradicate them.
BL2600 2005-041990 978-0-7546-0667-3
Religions and missionaries in the Pacific, 1500-1900.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tanya Storch. (The Pacific world; no.17)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 415 p. $154.95
Although now considered more in terms of economics, the Pacific has
been an important focus of religious and cultural interaction since the
sixteenth century. In this collection contributors consider the riches of
transmissions in various periods, including Islamic, when that faith was
a part of the history of the Netherlands West Indies, Malaysia and The
Philippines; the Iberian Catholic period when clerics were involved with
the courts of Japan and with missions to China, The Philippines,
Southern California and New Spain; the influence of the Jewish diaspora;
Russian Orthodoxy in Alaska; Protestants in Singapore, Malaysia, China,
Australia, New Guinea and the marginalized Hmong and Maori; and the
Asian migration period, which found the Sikh religion, Kriya Yoga med-
itation, Buddhism, and a wide array of faiths side by side in American
life and death.
BL2760 2006-008265 978-1-59102-413-2
Atheists; a groundbreaking study of America’s
nonbelievers.
Hunsberger, Bruce E. and Bob Altemeyer.
Prometheus Books, ©2006 159 p. $20.00 (pa)
The late (1946-2003) Hunsberger (Wilfred Laurier U.) and fellow psychol-
ogist Altemeyer (U. of Manitoba) have surveyed mostly active atheists in
North America—ones who have joined clubs or spoken publicly about
atheism—and present their findings. They discuss such matters as
whether people become atheists because they are bitten by another
atheist, religious ethnocentrism, ordinary American atheists, and
agnostics and inactive believers in the Manitoba parent group.
BL2775 2006-016169 1-59102-476-5
The reason-driven life; what am I here on earth for?
Price, Robert M.
Prometheus Books, ©2006 363 p. $24.00
Price, now a humanist and host of Heretics Anonymous discussion
groups for disenchanted Christian fundamentalists, spent a dozen years
as a member of the American evangelical subculture. In this rejoinder to
Rick Warren’s bestselling The Purpose Driven Life, Price exposes Warren’s
book as stale fundamentalism and demonstrates that the popular ide-
ology of a “personal relationship with Christ” actually has no biblical
basis whatsoever. He argues that fundamentalist Christianity as espoused
by Warren stunts an individual’s growth personally, morally, and intel-
lectually, and, using a light-hearted point-counterpoint approach, he out-
lines an alternative for people who are seeking maturity and meaning in
life. Price is affiliated with Johnnie Colemon Theological Seminary.
BL2790 2006-012115 978-1-59102-430-9
D.M. Bennett the truth seeker.
Bradford, Roderick.
Prometheus Books, ©2006 412 p. $32.00
He was banned in Boston before Boston banned. Bennett founded his
periodical The Truth Seeker in 1873, and despite its popularity with no
less than Twain and Darrow, his devotion to “science, morals, free
thought and human happiness” roused the ire of Comstock, who
inspired Bennett’s media-baiting trial and eventual imprisonment.
Journalist Bradford is not shy about his admiration of the mercurial
Bennett’s writings, and also traces his work with the National Liberal
League, suffragists and a forerunner of the American Civil Liberties
Union. Bennett’s religious skepticism, his devotion to free speech and his
increasingly radical ideas seem at odds with his gentle Shaker
upbringing, but as Bradford frequently points out, a strong influence can
become a forked road. Bennett tested the limits of taste and patience of
his day, but he was convinced he had taken the right path.
–17–
BM50 2006-006887 1-58901-128-7
Key words in Judaism.
Geaves, Ron.
Georgetown U. Press, ©2006 98 p. $12.95 (pa)
This small book (it measures 4x5″) will be useful for students and others
who want quick access to concisely presented information. After a brief
preface Geaves (religious studies, U. of Chester) presents a convenient
glossary of about 450 terms. Each is defined and cross-referenced, but
there is no indication of pronunciation.
BM165 2006-028863 978-0-313-33206-7
The emergence of Judaism.
Hayes, Christine Elizabeth. (Greenwood guides to historic events of the
ancient world)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 197 p. $45.00
Putting aside the history and civilization of the Jewish people, Hayes (reli-
gious studies in classical Judaica, Yale U.) is here more concerned with
the emergence and development of the religious traditions, texts, prac-
tices, and ideas of Judaism through late antiquity. She surveys the bib-
lical sources and related extra-biblical evidence, examines the
transformation of the Israelite heritage prior to the first century CE, and
describes the rise of classical rabbinic Judaism and its establishment as
the normative tradition of Judaism. A final chapter surveys Judaism’s
developments up to the modern period.
BM175 2004-057064 978-90-04-14108-7
The new Damascus Document; the Midrash on the
Eschatological Torah of the Dead Sea Scrolls;
reconstruction, translation and commentary.
Wacholder, Ben Zion. (Studies on the texts of the desert of Judah; v.56)
BRILL, ©2007 425 p. $175.00
In a radical re-reading of the known material, both the CD texts available
since 1910 and the fragmentary additions of the ten manuscripts found
in the caves of Qumran, Wacholder (emeritus Talmud and rabbinics,
Hebrew Union College-Jewish Institute of Religion) offers a composite
edition of the 12 ancient and medieval manuscripts with notes, a new
translation of the Hebrew text, and a commentary on the composite text
that questions elements of conventional scholarship and how it applies
to historical and systemic questions.
BM175 2006043094 90-04-15030-7
The social role of liturgy in the religion of the Qumran
Community.
Arnold, Russell C.D. (Studies on the texts of the desert of Judah; v. 60)
BRILL, ©2006 267 p. $124.00
Arnold (religious studies, DePauw U., Indiana) discusses the many litur-
gical texts among the Dead Sea Scrolls and the ritual contexts that contain
them, and examines the significance of the liturgical and ritual practice
as an expression of the social structure and overall worldview of the
Qumran community. The texts are unique, he says, in providing a
window into the self-understanding of the community in relation with
God and with God’s people, and the public expression of that self-under-
standing.
BM176 978-90-04-15700-2
The books of the Maccabees; history, theology, ideology;
proceedings.
International Conference on the Deuterocanonical Books (2d: 2005:
Pápa, Hungary) Ed. by Géza G. Xeravits and József Zsengellér.
(Supplements to the journal for the study of Judaism; v.118)
BRILL, ©2007 245 p. $122.00
Questions of history, theology, and ideology play a role in discussions of
the Books, which reveal the thinking of a particular strand of early
Judaism. They seek to find the place of the Maccabaean literature within
the circles that wrote them, and contextualize it in the contemporary lit-
erature. The 15 papers address such issues as whether the category of
Deuterocanoncal Books has a Jewish origin, the role of scripture in the
last words of Mattathias, and the use of flood imagery in 4 Maccabees
in its ancient Jewish context.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BM176 2006-049637 978-90-04-15309-7
Judaism in the Roman world; collected essays.
Goodman, Martin. (Ancient Judaism and early Christianity; v.66)
BRILL, ©2007 275 p. $129.00
In 19 essays that work well as interrelating chapters Goodman (Jewish
studies, U. of Oxford) dispels the notion that as Christianity grew
Judaism proper was somehow reduced, covering such issues as the pil-
grimage economy of Jerusalem, the physical attributes of sacred
scripture, the power of both scribes and texts, Josephus, Qumran sec-
tarians and the Essenes, the new rabbinicism, the Jewish image of God,
and sacred spaces as interpreted by disapora Judaism. He closes with a
fascinating essay on the limitations of evidence about the diaspora in the
late Roman period.
BM198 2006-049914 90-04-15356-X
The messianic secret of Hasidism.
Altshuler, Mor. (Brill’s series in Jewish studies; v.39)
BRILL, ©2006 440 p. $162.00
A scholar of Jewish mysticism, Altshuler integrates the theoretical obser-
vations and the historical events to recount the beginning of Hasidism as
a story of a messianic movement. She examines the years 5500 to 5541
(1740-81 AD) to reveal such issues as who the first Hasidic zaddik was,
when the first Hasidic court was established, who its members were, and
what aspects of their beliefs and activities generated opposition forceful
enough to crystallize their opponents as an enduring stream within
Jewish society since the end of the 18th century. No publication infor-
mation is provided for the original Sod ha-meshihi shel ha-Hasidut, which
is translated here by Joel Linsider.
BM205 978-0-85303-663-0
Commentary magazine, 1945-59; a journal of significant
thought and opinion.
Abrams, Nathan.
Vallentine Mitchell, ©2007 201 p. $75.00
Abrams (U. of Wales, UK) presents the first full-fledged monograph on
Commentary magazine in the era before the death of its founding editor-
in-chief, Eliot E. Cohen, and its handover to the editorial control of
Norman Podhoretz, who would go on to transform it into one of the
leading organs of neoconservatism. While Abrams pays attention to the
literary output of the magazine, which included writings by Saul Bellow,
Philip Roth, and James Baldwin, and its visual style, his main attention
is on the magazine’s influence, extending far beyond its relatively small
readership, on American politics and public policy including such issues
as American Judaism and policy towards Israel, American foreign policy
and anti-communism, and the civil rights movement and race relations.
In examining these matters he pays particular attention to the shaping
forces of the magazine, the biographical background of Cohen and his
political evolution, and the views of the institutional sponsor, the
American Jewish Committee. Unfortunately, Abrams declines to address
whether he sees connections between the liberal anti-communist politics
of the early era and the politics of the later neoconservative period under
Podhoretz and onwards. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
BM292 978-0-85303-610-4
British Chief Rabbis, 1664-2006.
Taylor, Derek.
Vallentine Mitchell, ©2007 457 p. $79.50
This is a history profiling all of the Hahamim, the spiritual leaders of
the Anglo-Jewish Sephardim, and the Chief Rabbis of the Anglo- Jewish
Ashkenazim from 1664 to the present. The author’s emphasis is divided
between examining the spiritual guidance offered by the 22 profiled men
to their respective Jewish communities and the activities they undertook
in order to negotiate the place of Judaism within the wider English
society. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
BM487 2006-937089 978-90-04-15760-6
The Dead Sea Scrolls; a short history.
Fields, Weston W.
BRILL, ©2006 128 p. $19.95 (pa)
Once they were lost, but now are found, but Fields, executive director of
the Dead Sea Scrolls Foundation in Jerusalem, offers a fuller history than
that. Except in the chronology, he is not concerned with how the docu-
ments were generations and ended in hidden at Qumran. Rather he
focuses on what has become of them since the initial discovery in 1947,
how they have and have not been made accessible scholars and the
public, and the impact they have made and are continuing to make in
history and religion. Lavishly and colorfully illustrated. There is no
index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BM487 90-04-14062-5
The Dead Sea scrolls electronic library, rev. ed. (CD-ROM)
Title main entry. Ed. by Emanuel Tov.
BRILL, ©2006 —— p. $279.50
Recent U.S. exhibits of the Dead Sea Scrolls attest to continuing fasci-
nation with these mid-20th century finds that have revolutionized bib-
lical and Judaic studies. As part of Brill’s Dead Sea Scrolls Electronic
Library, this release replaces the The Dead Sea Scrolls Reader (edited by
Parry and Tov, 2004-2005), offering coverage of all published DDS texts
including scrolls identified in 2004 and 2005. The accompanying brief
manual outlines the database’s elements: Hebrew/Aramaic texts of all the
known scrolls found at Qumran; translations into English; improved
images of most texts and fragments included in the database; lemmati-
zation and morphological analyses; and searchable Wordcruncher 7.0
software. Windows 2000 or XP operating system is required. Brigham
Young University is the co-publisher. This is a standalone CD-ROM,, but
the work is also available in a network version for multiple users.
BM487 2006-051759 978-90-04-14749-2
Discerning wisdom; the sapiential literature of the Dead
Sea scrolls.
Goff, Matthew J. (Supplements to Vetus Testamentum; v.116)
BRILL, ©2007 372 p. $170.00
The Dead Sea Scrolls contain portions of at least eight previously
unknown writings that are widely considered to be wisdom texts from
the second and first centuries BCE, a period from which no other
wisdom text in Hebrew survives. The only other book-length treatment of
this corpus, in 1996, consists mostly of translations, so Goff (religion.
Florida State U.) does not include translation or critical editions of entire
texts. He focuses instead on interpretation, exploring themes and con-
cerns, genre classification, provenance, and other issues of ten composi-
tions or fragments. A concluding chapter considers the significance of
the corpus as a whole.
BM487 2006-049204 978-90-04-15335-6
Rabbinic perspectives; rabbinic literature and the Dead
Sea scrolls; proceedings.
Symposium of Orion Center for the Study of the Dead Sea Scrolls and
Associated Literature International (8th: 2003: Jerusalem) (Studies on
the texts of the desert of Judah; v.62)
BRILL, ©2007 211 p. $168.00
These papers were originally presented at the Eighth International
Symposium of the Orion Center for the Dead Sea Scrolls and Associated
Literature at the Hebrew University of Jerusalem in January 2003. The
symposium addressed the question of what lines of continuity and dis-
continuity connect and differentiate the Dead Sea Scrolls from early rab-
binical literature. The contributors use various approaches to answer that
question, some focusing on specific comparative case studies and others
addressing the wider issues of historical and comparative methodology.
They all pay special attention to the nature of sectarian and rabbinic law
and the ways one may elucidate the other. Editors Fraade (history of
Judaism, Yale), Shemesh (Bar-Ilan U. and Shalom Hartman Institute) and
Clements (Orion Center, Hebrew U. of Jerusalem) suggest that these
studies are models for future research.
BM496 2006-923908 978-0-7618-3487-8
Jeremiah in Talmud and Midrash; a source book.
Neusner, Jacob. (Studies in Judaism)
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 406 p. $54.00 (pa)
Interested in the mechanism by which a sacred text can maintain its
authority after it has been translated into a different language and
adapted to a very different context in which it was composed, Neusner
(theology, Bard College) details how Israelite Scripture was received and
recast in the language communities that produced the Bible in two
Testaments of Christianity and the dual Torah of Judaism. He begins
with the book of Jeremiah, but intends to deal with all the prophets in
turn. Most of the volume is comprised of excerpts, with brief com-
mentary.
BM536 2005-030619 0-7546-0955-3
Wisdom in early Confucian and Israelite traditions; a
comparative study.
Yao, Xinzhong. (Ashgate world philosophies series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 239 p. $99.95
Having previously written a book comparing the core of Confucianism
with the key ideas of the New Testament, Yao (religion and ethics, U. of
Wales-Lampeter) here compares wisdom as presented in the books of pre-
Qin Confucianism and in the Wisdom Literature preserved in the Old
Testament. He hopes to find in these older texts a common framework
that is not apparent in modern thought and practice.
–18–
BM538 2006-014784 0-313-33053-0
Judaism and science; a historical introduction.
Efron, Noah J. (Greenwood guides to science and religion)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 348 p. $65.00
In order to understand the historical relationship between Judaism and
science, says Efron (science, technology, and society; Bar Ilan U.) it is nec-
essary to realize that there is no such thing as Judaism and no such thing
as science: both have changed so radically over the centuries that nothing
definitive can be said about either except in the context of a particular
time and place. This said, he looks at particulars such as the nature of
the Talmud and early Rabbinic literature, Medieval Jews and natural phi-
losophy, and Jews and science in the 20th century.
BM610 2006042947 978-90-04-15398-1
Revelation of the name Yhwh to Moses; perspectives from
Judaism, the pagan Graeco-Roman world and early
Christianity.
Title main entry. Ed by George H. van Kooten. (Themes in biblical nar-
rative; Jewish and Christian traditions)
BRILL, ©2006 264 p. $139.00
The revelation is described in chapters three and six of the Book of
Exodus, and the nature of the name Yahweh, connected with the phrase
“I am that I am,” is of central important to Jewish monotheism, attracted
the attention of pagan writers, and was bequeathed to Christians.
European scholars of religion, philosophy, and literature discuss what
people made of it from those three perspectives in 13 papers from a July
2004 conference in Groningen.
BM648 2006-051766 978-90-04-11791-4
Against Apion.
Josephus, Flavius. Ed. and trans. by John M. G. Barclay. (Flavius
Josephus, translation and commentary; v.10)
BRILL, ©2007 430 p. $199.00
Apion may have mocked their names, but Josephus warns against
making light of those who saved Alexandria. Barclay (divinity, Durham
U.) works from the new critical text established by the Munster Josephus
project in this new and elegant translation of Josephus’s apologetic
treatise, and in his commentary provides significant detail in his descrip-
tions of its historical, literary and rhetorical contexts. Along with the
translation and commentary Barclay provides a very able introduction
and a series of appendices on Apion’s other perceptions of antiquity,
including those on Manetho, pseudo-Hecataeus, exodus narratives in the
cultural context, the Judeans and the Ass, the sources of apologetic
encomium, and the issue of whether this work was an expression of
Judaism in Roman dress. The bibliography is well-chosen, and Barclay
wisely includes indices for ancient texts, places and names, Greek and
Latin words, and modern scholars.
BM651 2006-046151 978-0-8122-3950-8
A kingdom of priests; ancestry and merit in ancient
Judaism.
Himmelfarb, Martha. (Jewish culture and contexts)
U. of Pennsylvania Pr., ©2006 270 p. $59.95
Himmelfarb (religion, Princeton U.) explores how the concept of a
kingdom of priests—promised to the children of Israel by God according
to Exodus—and the tensions it hints at were of central importance to Jews
during the Second Temple period. Among her topics are ancestry and
professional skill in several texts, purity laws, sectarianism, Philo and
Alexandrian Judaism, and the end of priesthood.
BM670 2006-040969 1-904113-00-1
Undercurrents of Jewish prayer.
Schonfield, Jeremy. (The Littman library of Jewish civilization)
Littman Libr./Jewish Civiliz., ©2006 394 p. $55.00
Schonfield (Hebrew and Jewish studies, Leo Baeck College, London)
explores deeper meanings to the Jewish liturgy than are obvious in the
words in the text. The edition he uses was the standard in western
Europe from the early 19th century until after World War II, as trans-
lated from Hebrew into English by his father, a rabbi. His topics include
modern and traditional views of the liturgical narrative, the silence of
language, and the liturgical argument encapsulated. The work served as
his Ph.D. dissertation for the University of Cambridge at an undisclosed
date. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–19–
BM723 0-415-34003-9
Controversy and dialogue in the Jewish tradition; a
reader.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hanina Ben-Menahem et al.
Routledge, ©2005 456 p. $115.00
An anthology of passages from the entire range of rabbinical literature
highlights the rabbinical awareness of the centrality of controversy in
halakhic discourse. The passages, taken from the first part of the editors’
Controversy and Dialogue in the Halakhic Sources, cover controversy as the
way of the Torah, etiquette and rules of debate, controversy and truth,
uniformity of practice, social harmony, and the origins of halakhic con-
troversy. Following the English, the sources are provided in Hebrew.
BM750 978-0-85303-713-2
Orthodox Judaism in Britain since 1913; an ideology
forsaken.
Freud-Kandel, Miri J.
Vallentine Mitchell, ©2006 240 p. $75.00
Freud-Kandel (Hebrew and Jewish studies, U. of Oxford) traces the role
of the Chief Rabbinate in Britain since Joseph H. Hertz’s election in 1913.
After an analysis of Orthodox active engagement with the dominant
culture that flourished under Rabbi Hertz based on his theological views,
she examines forces that eroded this model in the subsequent terms of
Chief Rabbis Israel Brodie and Immanuel Jakobovits. These forces
included immigration and the ‘Jacobs affair’ over the promotion of a
rabbi whose orthodoxy was questioned. Lastly, she observes that the
present Chief Rabbi presides over an even more divided Jewish com-
munity. The book is eistributed in the US by ISBS.
BM755 2006-046511 978-1-904113-29-4
Maimonides’ confrontation with mysticism.
Kellner, Menachem. (The Littman library of Jewish civilization)
Littman Libr./Jewish Civiliz., ©2006 343 p. $49.50
Egyptian Jewish thinker Moses Maimonides (1135-1204) contradicted
himself on the issue of universalism and particularism, and rabbinic
scholars have taken his particularist views as central and his universalist
ones as window dressing. Kellner (Jewish thought, U. of Haifa) reverses
the equation, thus bringing into question the notion that Jews are dis-
tinguished from non-Jews by some essential characteristic that makes
them ontologically distinct and superior. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
BM755 2006-049685 90-04-15265-2
Redefining Judaism in an age of emancipation;
comparative perspectives on Samuel Holdheim (1806-
1860).
Title main entry. Ed. by Christian Wiese. (Studies in European Judaism;
v.13)
BRILL, ©2006 423 p. $134.00
Holdheim appeared to remain fundamentally loyal to Judaism as he
evolved into a liberal, and then radical reformer throughout the con-
tentious 1840s to 1870s, despite his opponent’s charges that his move
away from rabbinic tradition and his rejection of the significance of
Jewish ceremonial law made him another Paul of Tarsus. These 14
papers ably analyze Holdheim as a radical reformer, scholar, and
political thinker, and place him within the contexts of the Reform con-
troversy and radical reform itself. They analyze his career and his path
to the extreme, explore the politics of religion in his thought, describe his
years in Schwerin as an ecclesiastical councilor, and examine his attitude
toward Karaism. They describe his place in the debates about circum-
cision, the prayer book, the liturgy, and the legal character of Jewish mar-
riage, and compare his work to that of Frankel, Zunz, Stern, Hirsch, and
Einhorn.
BP43 2006-012601 978-1-58826-450-3
Teaching Islam; textbooks and religion in the Middle East.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eleanor Abdella Doumato and Gregory
Starrett.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 267 p. $55.00
Responding to accusations that the content and character of official edu-
cation programs in the Middle East are a danger both to local children
and to international peace and security, educators, social scientists, his-
torians, and other scholars examine the actual content of government-pro-
duced religious studies textbooks, and of history and civics textbooks that
incorporate religious themes in a number of majority Islamic countries.
They find no evidence of mindless fanaticism or trans-regional jihadi ide-
ology, only programs in each country to tailor a normative Islam for
domestic consumption.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BP64 2006-051780 0-7734-5535-3
The spread of Islam in West Africa; colonization,
globalization, and the emergence of fundamentalism.
Badru, Pade.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 220 p. $109.95
Without claiming to provide a comprehensive account, Badru (pan
African studies and sociology, U. of Louisville) traces the history of glob-
alization and Islam in West Africa to its ancient roots, and demonstrates
the effect of globalization on the embrace of Islam in the region. He also
describes the specificity of Islamic practice in black Africa and the socio-
cultural basis of the local variation in the adoption of Islam.
BP67 2006-014298 978-0-313-32825-1
Muslims in the United States.
Ba-Yunus, Ilyas and Kassim Kone.
Greenwood Press, ©2006 172 p. $55.00
Ba-Yunus (emeritus sociology) and Kone (both anthropology, State U. of
New York-Cortland) explore the Muslim American perspective on their
religion and their major concerns in the US in light of the current hos-
tility against them. They also consider the dimensions of their popu-
lation, the status of women, their organizations, and communities.
BP133 90-04-14764-0
Encyclopaedia of the Qur’an; index volume.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jane Dammen McAuliffe.
BRILL, ©2006 860 p. $220.00
The sixth and final volume of the series—a towering achievement of
Koran scholarship— anchors and provides entry to the series with five
separate indexes. They cover contributing scholars and their academic
institutions; all the articles by title; proper names of people, places, lan-
guages, religious and social groupings, rulers and dynasties, and other
entities entitled to proper names; transliterated Arabic words and phrases
by trilateral root, as in modern Arabic-English dictionaries; and qur’anic
verses and suras that are cited in the Encyclopedia.
BP133 2006-045840 978-90-04-15226-7
The making of a forefather; Abraham in Islamic and
Jewish exegetical narratives.
Lowin, Shari L. (Islamic history and civilization; 65)
BRILL, ©2006 308 p. $130.00
The stories a people tells about its ancestors can illuminate how that
people understands itself, says Lowin (religious studies, Stonehill College),
but that approach has not been used to study the similarities and dif-
ferences between the two Abrahamic religions. She seeks to fill that gap
by examining the Islamic and Jewish version of the early biography of
Abraham from his birth through his miraculous escape from the flames
of the Chaldean furnace, that is, the years leading up to his election as
God’s chosen. She is not concerned, as so many scholars are, with deter-
mining precedence in the stories—who stole what from whom when—but
with the function of the stories within the tradition that created them.
The study began as her 2002 Ph.D. dissertation in Near Eastern
Languages and Civilizations at the University of Chicago.
BP161 2005-026433 978-1-4051-2174-3
The Blackwell companion to contemporary Islamic
thought.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ibrahim M. Abu-Rabi. (Blackwell companions
to religion)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 675 p. $169.95
Scholars of religion and scholars of many fields in the Islamic world
briefly outline some of the major trends in Islamic thinking roughly
since the end of World War II, the rise of the nation state, and the
beginning of the decolonization process. Four major intellectual move-
ments are seen to dominate contemporary Muslim intellectual life:
nationalism, Islamism, Westernization, and state ideology. Among more
specific themes are secularism, jihad and terrorism, pluralism, justice,
and women.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BP161 2006-019253 0-275-99078-8
Islam vs. Islamism; the dilemma of the Muslim world.
Demant, Peter R.
Praeger, ©2006 279 p. $49.95
Demant (history, U. de Sao Paulo), a specialist in Middle Eastern and
Islamic affairs, carefully distinguishes between the religion of Islam and
the political ideology of Islamism, placing each within its own context.
He describes the origins and historical trajectory of Islam from the clas-
sical to the era of western influence, and then examines how Islam’s
expansion relates to issues of diaspora. He relates the past to the three
waves of Islamism from the Sunni jihad of the late 1960s to the early
1980s, the Shiite interlude of the 1980s, and the later “Seven Marks,” ana-
lyzes Islamism as an ideology, a movement, and an element of tribalism,
and evaluates the tangled relationship of Islam and the west that will
define coming years. He closes with observations about homogeneity,
modernity, democracy, the challenge from western Islam and the possi-
bility of an Islamist superpower or an Islamist revolution in a western
state.
BP166 90-04-15177-X
Rational theology in interfaith communication; Abu l-
Husayn al-Basri’s Mu’tazili theology among the Karaites
in the Fatimid age.
Madelung, Wilferd and Sabine Schmidtke. (Jerusalem studies in religion
and culture; v.5)
BRILL, ©2006 144 p. $156.00
Madelung (Arabic, U. of Oxford) and Schmidtke (Islamic studies, Free U.
of Berlin) argue that physician l-Husayn’s (d. 1044) criticism of the
Mu’tazila school of the rational speculative theology was immediately
registered and controversially debated in the Karaite community under
the Fatimid caliphate. It has generally been held that his work was
ignored by Mu’tazili scholars of his time, and passed down among stu-
dents of medicine for a century until it was revived and espoused by a
Mu’tazili leader in Central Asia a century later. They present excerpts, the
Arabic following an English translation, of responses to his work. There
is no index.
BP173 2006-049043 978-90-04-15134-5
Islamic economics; a short history.
El-Ashker, Ahmed A.F. (Themes in Islamic studies; v.3)
BRILL, ©2006 450 p. $155.00
Wilson (economics, Institute of Middle Eastern and Islamic Studies,
Durham U., UK) and El-Ashkar (finance, Songkia U., Thailand) analyze
the development of Islamic economics from the economic concerns found
in the Qur’an and the Sunnah to the 20th century. They cover economic
though during what they call the Rightly-Guided Caliphate, much quoted
by modern Muslim economists; during the later eras of administrative
and economic reform under the dynastic caliphates of the Umayyads and
Abbasids; the appearance of the first specialized works on Islamic eco-
nomics; intellectual developments during the political decline of the
caliphate; and the emergence of Islamic banking during the 20th century.
BP173 2003-069726 978-90-04-15622-7
Public Islam and the common good. (reprint, 2004)
Title main entry. Ed. by Armando Salvatore and Dale F. Eickelman.
(Social, economic, and political studies of the Middle East and Asia;
v.95)
BRILL, ©2006 254 p. $93.00 (pa)
Advancing levels of education, greater east of travel, and the rise of new
communications media throughout the Muslim-majority world have con-
tributed to the emergence of a public sphere in which large numbers of
people—not just an educated, political, and economic elite—want a say in
political and religious issues, say the contributing anthropologists, histo-
rians, and religious scholars, almost all from the US and Europe. They
look beyond immediate events to trace long-term trends from coffee-
houses of the Ottoman Empire to the near future. This is a paperbound
reprint of a 2004 book.
BP173 2006-022466 0-8204-8843-7
Understanding radical Islam; medieval ideology in the
twenty-first century.
Farmer, Brian R.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 243 p. $31.95 (pa)
Farmer (social sciences, Amarillo College, Texas) has synthesized ideas of
many other scholars of ideology, Islam, and politics in the Islamic realm,
into what he hopes is a fair and accurate account of Islamism as it exists
in 2006. He looks at traditional and extreme conservatism, jihad, sharia,
terrorism, Zionism, Afghanistan and Osama, Iraq, and Islamism in The
West.
–20–
BP194 2006-049188 90-04-15345-4
Living Shi’ism; instances of ritualization among Islamist
men in contemporary Iran.
Thurfjell, David. (Iran studies; 1)
BRILL, ©2006 268 p. $115.00
Revising his 2003 Ph.D. dissertation in the history of religion at Uppsala
University, Sweden, Thurfjell explores the sorrow rituals of conservative
Shi’ism as practiced and experienced by five informants in Esfahan. He
quickly abandoned his ambition to find the true meaning of the rituals,
and explores instead some of the many possible meanings they may hold
for different people at different times.
BP194 2006-012361 978-0-393-06211-3
The Shia revival; how conflicts within Islam will shape
the future.
Nasr, Vali.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 287 p. $25.95
The resurgence of Shia Moslem power that began with the 1979 Iranian
revolution and has become even more visible in the wake of the
American invasion of Iraq is likely to spread across the Muslim world,
according to Nasr (Middle East and South Asia politics, Naval
Postgraduate School). Avoiding the twin traps of either essentializing the
conflict between the Sunnis and the Shia, noting that conflict between
the two is often more about political power and economic resources than
religious differences, or painting either group as monolithic, without
numerous internal conflicts and differences, Nasr describes the factors
that have led to the Shia revival and explores its likely political conse-
quences within the Moslem world from the Middle East to South Asia
and in relations between the Moslem world and the West.
BP370 2006-042601 978-90-04-14373-9
Citizens of the world; a history and sociology of the
Baha’is in a globalisation perspective.
Warburg, Margit. (Numen book series; studies in the history of reli-
gions; v.106)
BRILL, ©2006 592 p. $249.00
Warburg (sociology of religion, U. of Copenhagen) spent 10 years doing
research for her interpretation of the religion, visiting Baha’i commu-
nities in many countries and doing two periods of fieldwork at the
Baha’i World Center in Haifa. Her main focus is how the Baha’i ethic of
being citizens of the world has interfaced with the growing globalization
during the century and a half since the religion rose from religious
current within Shi’ite Islam. This is probably the most thorough study to
date of Baha’i by someone who is not a believer.
BP573 2006-024949 978-0-7391-1339-4
Secular spirituality; reincarnation and spiritism in
nineteenth-century France.
Sharp, Lynn L.
Lexington Books, ©2006 245 p. $28.95 (pa)
People seem to have believed in spirits and magic since before the ear-
liest record, says Sharp (history, Whitman College), and even today, while
anthropologists ponder the meaning of such beliefs in distant and exotic
tribes, they remain a facet of modern life, often derided and ridiculed,
but continuing to influence popular culture, and so worthy of investi-
gation. As a case study, he examines the French spiritualist movement
founded by Allan Kardec (1804-69), with an emphasis on the belief in
reincarnation.
BP605 2006-010885 978-0-7591-0818-9
Introduction to pagan studies.
Davy, Barbara Jane. (The pagan studies series)
AltaMira Press, ©2007 245 p. $69.00
The US military recently allowed a soldier to be buried with a Wiccan
symbol on his tombstone. As part of a series that treats spiritual expres-
sions that are less formal than traditional religions, this volume presents
a study of contemporary paganism. Noting that self-identified pagans
(aka: Wiccans or witches) come from diverse backgrounds though many
support countercultural mores, Davy (PhD, religion, Concordia U.,
Montreal) treats their increasing numbers; beliefs; organizations; prac-
tices (counter to media portrayals); historical, literary, and social influ-
ences; ethics; politics; and current debates over public image and
direction. She points out that scholar practitioners have had to adopt
innovative research methods. The book includes b&w photos of influ-
ential personalities and a glossary.
–21–
BQ568 2006-008330 978-0-8248-3024-3
Spreading the Dhamma; writing, orality, and textual
transmission in Buddhist Northern Thailand.
Veidlinger, Daniel M. (Southeast Asia—politics, meaning, memory)
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 261 p. $52.00
Veidlinger (religious studies, California State U.-Chico) analyzes the devel-
opment of writing and its complex relationship to the oral tradition
during the 15th century in the kingdom of Lan Na in northern Thailand
as one part of the story of the transmission of the Tipitaka and related
Pali texts of Buddhist literature, a story that now includes compact disks.
The study is based on his doctoral dissertation in South Asian Languages
and Civilizations at the University of Chicago, and draws on his research
in Thailand in 1999.
BQ4012 978-1-903765-18-0
Understanding Buddhism.
Schimdt-Leukel, Perry. (Understanding faith)
Dunedin Academic Press, ©2006 180 p. $23.95 (pa)
Recognizing that no small volume could possible encompass the wide
historical, geographical, and personal varieties of Buddhism, Schmidt-
Leukel (systematic theology and religious studies, U. of Glasgow) focuses
on basic Buddhist insights into life and its existential challenges, hopes,
and promises. He also sketches the historical settings and development
of Buddhist views. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
BQ7496 2006-013715 978-0-8248-3106-6
Contexts and dialogue; Yogacara Buddhism and modern
psychology on the subliminal mind.
Jiang, Tao. (Monograph no.21; Society for Asian and Comparative
Philosophy)
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 198 p. $20.00 (pa)
Jiang (religion, Rutgers U.) reflects on both Buddhism and modern psy-
chology in a way that uses each as a mirror to examine the other’s
assumptions, and so make the ongoing dialogue between them more con-
scious and fruitful. His goal is not to boil them down together into some
kind of buddhachology, but to reveal certain paradigmatic assumptions
embedded in the two systems.
BQ7662 978-90-04-15548-0
Tibetan Buddhist literature and praxis; studies in its
formative period, 900-1400; proceedings.
International Seminar on [Title] (10th: 2003: Oxford) Ed. by Ronald M.
Davidson and Christian K. Wedemeyer.
BRILL, ©2006 262 p. $93.00
European and US scholars of religion address a range of issues in
Tibetan religion and its literature from the far eastern oasis of Dunhuang
in the 10th century, to the high classical developments in Central Tibet
in the early 15th century. Other topics of the 10 essays include textual
criticism of the Rnying ma’i rgyud ‘bum tradition, alternative translations
of Sanskrit sources in the writings of Rjy Tsong kha pa, and the
influence of Maitripa and his circle on the formation of Sutra
Mahamudra in the Kagyu schools. There is no index.
BQ8789 2006-012705 978-0-8204-8624-6
The revival of Buddhist monasticism in medieval China.
Chen, Huaiyu. (American university studies; VII: Theology and religion;
253)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 244 p. $71.95
Chen (religious studies, U. of the West, California) explores the phe-
nomenon by taking as a case study one of the most important Chinese
Buddhist monks, Daoxuan (596-667). Analyzing his writings, Chen
focuses especially with his understanding of the crisis confronting the
Buddhist community, which he attributed partly to shortcomings in
ascetic and ritual practices of monks and nuns. He also describes the
institution of the celibate monkhood. Quotations are in Chinese with
English translation.
BR62 2006-022843 978-0-8028-2895-8
The earliest Christian artifacts; manuscripts and Christian
origins.
Hurtado, Larry W.
W.B. Eerdmans, ©2006 248 p. $20.00 (pa)
Hurtado (New Testament language, literature and theology, U. of
Edinburgh) explains what papyrologists, archeologists and paleographers
have found in the early texts and artifacts and shows how the dimen-
sions and configuration of these physical objects expressed first belief.
He finds that according to such studies early Christianity was complex
rather than simple, with regional variations and schools of theology
emerging almost from the first days. Hurtado includes a comprehensive
of early Christian texts and a nice set of monochrome photographs with
his very accessible text.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BR65 2006-049279 978-90-04-15290-8
Gregory of Nyssa; the letters.
Gregory. Ed. by Anna M. Silvas. (Supplements to Vigiliae Christianae;
v.83)
BRILL, ©2007 283 p. $159.00
Continuing her study of Cappadocian Fathers and the emergence of
monasticism in general in Asia Minor during the fourth century AD,
Australian scholar Silvas translates and comments on not only the 30
letters generally recognized as having been written by Gregory (335-394),
but also another seven that have been proposed as his. She also presents
selected letters, many excerpted, by Basil and Gregory Nazianzen that
cast light on Gregory’s life, work, and writings.
BR65 2005-16881 90-04-13051-9
Theodoret of Cyrus; commentary on Daniel.
Theodoret of Cyrus, Bishop of Cyrrhus. Ed. and trans. by Robert C.
Hill. (Writings from the Greco-Roman world; no.7)
BRILL, ©2006 340 p. $155.00
In 423 Theodoret was named bishop of Cyrus, a city northeast of
Antioch, and though he was responsible for some 800 parishes, found
ample time to write commentaries on books of the Old and New
Testament. One of his first was this treatise arguing for the importance
of Daniel as a prophet and countering the Jewish position on the char-
acter of the work. Hill, not otherwise identified, offers a substantial intro-
duction to the bishop and his work, then presents the text on facing
pages of Greek and English.
BR65 2006-026008 978-0-8204-8608-6
Theodoret of Cyrus on Romans 11:26; recovering an early
Christian Elijah Redivivus tradition.
Weaver, Joel A. (American university studies; VII: Theology and
religion; v.249)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 184 p. $65.95
Theodoret of Cyrus, a fifth-century Antiochene bishop, predicted that the
Jews would be convinced that Jesus is the Messiah upon the return of
the prophet Elija, a prophecy Weaver (biblical languages, George W.
Truett Seminary) explores in detail through the ninth through eleventh
chapters of St. Paul’s letter to the Romans. Truett examines the rela-
tionship of the passage to the rest of St. Paul’s argument in the letter, its
theological content and its role on modern research. He explains the life
and times of Theodoret as well as his exegetical, apologetic, dogmatic,
historical and sermon writing and gives a full translation of the text, and
explains the Jewish and Christian Elija redivivus tradition wherein the
prophet serves as a forerunner of the Day of the Lord and perhaps of the
Messiah. The appendices include scriptural references.
BR115 2006-015695 0-313-32362-3
Encyclopedia of modern Christian politics; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Roy P. Domenico and Mark Y. Hanley.
Greenwood Press, ©2006 666 p. $199.95
The purpose is to illustrate the breadth and significance of Christian
activism in, and influence on, modern politics, rather than to cite every
example of it. Scholars of history and religion, and to a lesser degree of
literature and other fields, discuss people, organizations, and movements
that drew specifically from Christian ideas to influence other people’s
political views. For example, Franco is included but Hitler is not. Modern
begins in 1789, and the geographic range is all of Christendom, though
Europe and North America get the most attention. The two volumes are
paged and indexed together.
BR115 2006-042661 1-84545-170-8
The limits of meaning; case studies in the anthropology
of Christianity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Matthew Engelke & Matt Tomlinson.
Berghahn Books, ©2006 239 p. $75.00
A missionary in the Bolivian highlands wonders about whether people
understand their own customs. Underpaid workers in a Christian non-
governmental organization based in Africa lose interest in their primary
work. Masowe Christians believe the Bible stands between them and
God. These nine papers, which were originally presented at the 2002
meeting of the American Anthropological Association, examine the
“meaning” found in the anthropology of religion as explained in these
and other settings, societies and cultures from around the world. Topics
include anthropology’s contributions to Christianity, charismatic speech,
ambiguity in rural life, reality and ritual in humanitarian work, institu-
tional power and interpretive practice in the pursuit of Christian truth,
the limits of meaning in sermons and its wealth in moral economies,
and the semiotics of sacral action.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BR115 2005-034258 1-885118-16-3
March to Moscow; the role of the Reverend Sun Myung
Moon in the collapse of communism.
Ward, Thomas J.
Paragon House, ©2006 191 p. $14.95 (pa)
Ward (international programs, U. of Bridgeport), a longtime adherent,
maintains the Reverend Sun Myung Moon and his Unification Church
should be credited for the fall of communism in the Soviet Union and
the ending of the Cold War. He claims Moon succeeded by explaining his
theories of unification succinctly and becoming highly influential
through his personal contacts with forces on both sides, citing meetings
with officials and speeches. He also describes supportive statements in
certain media outlets, including one in which USSR president Mikhail
Gorbachev conceded defeat because Moon had impressed him as a most
brilliant anti-communist and enemy of the state. Building on the rev-
erend’s success in ending the Cold War, Ward also explains Moon’s
strategies to end terrorism and counter-terrorism. The bibliography is
particularly interesting.
BR118 2006-000644 0-8204-6383-3
Nathan Scott’s literary criticism and fundamental
theology.
Buhrman, William D. (American university studies, series VII, Theology
and religion; v.246)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 134 p. $57.95
Mightily revising his doctoral dissertation in religious studies for
Marquette University at an undetermined date, Buhrman helps contem-
porary American scholar of literature and religion Scott overcome the
bias that his literary criticism is so reliant on theological doctrines, par-
ticularly those of Paul Tillich, that it cannot bear the weight of academic
attention. He argues that Scott’s theological literary criticism may alter-
nately be incorporated into the framework of David Tracy’s fundamental
theology.
BR127 2005-020666 978-0-567-08171-1
Abraham’s children; Jews, Christians, and Muslims in
conversation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Norman Solomon et al.
T&T Clark, ©2005 338 p. $120.00
Since 1992, the Oxford Abrahamic Group has gathered a dozen or so the-
ologians of the three faiths two or three times a year to present and
discuss papers on differences and continuities. A selection of 36 papers
were revised for publication and are presented here along with com-
mentaries on the general themes that were approved by the whole group.
The themes are the founders of the faiths, the image of God in humanity,
pluralism, gender, the environment, and life after death. T&T Clark is an
imprint of Continuum.
BR162 2005-044740 0-06-085842-7
Cities of God; the real story of how Christianity became
an urban movement and conquered Rome.
Stark, Rodney.
HarperCollins, ©2006 280 p. $24.95
Drawing on historical and archeological evidence, Stark (social sciences,
Baylor U.) counters the claims of popular culture, the media, and even
his fellow academics that Christianity was a backwater religion forced
down the world’s throats. He asserts that some of the primary reasons
for the success of the faith was its doctrine and spirit of inclusion, that
some contemporary faith systems that centered on positive virtues pre-
pared the way for the rapid spread of Christianity, and that paganism
simply died out when people found Christianity more attractive. The
result is not only a powerful and persuasive narrative but also an
excellent source of statistical information about how Christianity took
root and advanced across the known world.
BR170 2006-027920 978-0-313-33564-8
Daily life of Christians in ancient Rome.
Ermatinger, James W. (The Greenwood Press “Daily life through
history” series)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 201 p. $49.95
Relegating the history and theology of Christianity to minor mention,
Ermatinger (history, Southeast Missouri State U.) explores the differences
between Christians and others in their daily lives, and how Christianity
developed and identified itself in a hostile environment before it was
legalized.
–22–
BR252 978-90-04-15463-6
Medieval monks and their world; ideas and realities;
studies in honor of Richard E. Sullivan.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Blanks et al. (Brill’s series in church
history; v.25)
BRILL, ©2006 211 p. $99.00
US historians honor their colleague, now retired from Michigan State
University with 11 essays reflecting his interests in the Middle Ages.
Among their topics are Egyptian monasticism, monks and their family
in the Chartrain from 1000 to 1200, Carolingian eucharistic thought and
the sermons of Ademar of Chabannes, and the early 14th-century context
for the doctrine of divine foreknowledge in Wyclif’s Latin sermons.
BR516 2006-046810 0-7432-8712-6
Tempting faith; an inside account of political seduction.
Kuo, David.
Free Press, ©2006 283 p. $25.00
Having spent three years as second in command at President George W.
Bush’s Office of Faith-Based and Community Initiatives, David Kuo came
away from the experience deeply disillusioned with the marriage of pol-
itics and Christianity, feeling that he and other Christians seduced by pol-
itics have been lured away from pursuing true Christian goals and been
manipulated by irreligious politicians into supporting issues that have
nothing to do with religion (although he maintains his faith in Bush’s
sincerity). Here, he recounts his experiences in the Bush administration,
reflecting on the personal and public issues that caused him to turn
away from the politics of religion, and pleads for a Christian “fast” from
involvement in politics.
BR520 2006-013487 978-0-8262-1674-8
Republicanism, religion, and the soul of America.
Sandoz, Ellis. (Eric Voegelin Institute series in political philosophy)
U. of Missouri Press, ©2006 230 p. $39.95
Sandoz (political science, Louisiana State U.) traces the rise of republican
government from key sources in Western Christian Protestant civilization.
He argues that the core distinction of American republicanism are the
notions of human dignity and of the human capacity for self-government
under Providential guidance.
BR759 2005-052868 978-0-567-03076-4
After anti-Catholicism?; John Henry Newman and
Protestant Britain, 1845-c.1890.
Sidenvall, Erik.
T&T Clark, ©2005 207 p. $59.95
Sidenvall (theology and religious studies, Lund U., Sweden) explores the
emergence of popular—as opposed to official—tolerant religious attitudes
during the 19th century by examining closely the popular Protestant
British view of Newman between his secession to the Roman Catholic
Church and his death. This platform, he says, allows him to approach
several conceptual and theoretical problems inherent in the received
view. T&T Clark is an imprint of Continuum.
BR759 2005-057986 978-0-582-47289-1
Religion and society in twentieth-century Britain.
Brown, Callum G. (Religion, politics, and society in Britain)
Longman, ©2006 344 p. $32.00 (pa)
Far from declining into a mere refuge for the few and the odd, some
elements of religion in the UK have taken on a militancy unimaginable
when faith appeared to be on the wane in the 1960s and 1970s. What
caused this change? Brown (religious and cultural history, U. of Dundee)
provides the first comprehensive study of religion in the UK in the twen-
tieth century, deftly explaining the various Christian dissenting groups in
an age mistakenly assumed to belong to the Church of England, the con-
tinuing influence of Victorianism and revival, the experience of war, the
eventual turmoil in identity which followed, the inclusion of overseas-
founded groups, and the growth of secularism in the cultural revolutions
of the 1960s and 1970s, and the social and political agendas of a variety
of faiths, including New Age movements, at the end of the century.
–23–
BR1710 2-503-51760-9
Conversing with the saints; communication in pre-
Carolingian hagiography from Auxerre.
Egmond, Wolfert S. van. (Utrecht studies in medieval literacy; v.15)
Brepols Publishers, ©2006 230 p. $81.00
Essentially translating his 2001 Ph.D. dissertation at the University of
Utrecht, Egmond subjects three ninth-century Merovingian texts to a kind
of analysis they have not previously received. First he re-examines corpus
questions such as authorship, time and place of origin, and distribution.
Then gets down to his main purpose: analyzing the content, in particular
the forms of communication used in the texts. He does not provide an
index. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
BR1720 978-1-85182-980-4
Muirchú Moccu Macthéni’s ‘Vita Sancti Patricii’; life of St.
Patrick.
Howlett, David.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 199 p. $60.00
Howlett (classics, U. of Oxford) here begins a set of three books illus-
trating the intertwining of literary threads in the three traditions of Celtic
Latin that emerged from Romano-British culture of the first four cen-
turies of the Christian era: Cambro-Latin (Wales), Hiberno-Latin
(Ireland/Scotland), and Armorico-Latin (Brittany). For each he will edit,
translate, and analyze a life of one of the tradition’s great Celtic saints.
Ireland is first as he reconstructs a life of Saint Patrick that he suggests
was written in the final decade of the seventh century. Samson and
David will follow. The Latin and English are on facing pages. Distributed
in the US by ISBS.
BS315 2006-051757 978-90-04-15558-9
The Bible in Arab Christianity; proceedings.
Mingana Symposium on Arabic Christianity and Islam (5th: 2005:
Birmingham, UK) Ed. by David Thomas. (The history of Christian-
Muslim relations; v.6)
BRILL, ©2007 421 p. $188.00
The 19 papers portray the centrality of the Bible, both as an object of
study and as an instrument of argument, in the Arabic Churches and in
their relations with early Islam. It was a major source of Christian
polemical and apologetic arguments, and was attacked and defended for
its integrity and authenticity as a God-given word. Among the topics are
the Paradise story and its exegesis in the Arabic Apocalypse of Peter,
`Ammar al-Basri on the alleged corruption of the gospels, and a
Nestorian Arabic Pentateuch used in western Islamic lands.
BS440 2005-034355 0-313-33082-4
All things in the Bible; an encyclopedia of the biblical
world; 2v.
Tischler, Nancy M.
Greenwood Press, ©2006 747 p. $149.95
Having produced 2003 a reference to men and women in the Bible,
Tischler (emerita, English and humanities, Pennsylvania State U.) here
describes groups of people such as professions or nationalities, com-
monly referenced cultures and places such as Egypt and Galilee, theo-
logical constructs such as the Fall of Man and the Resurrection, events
and activities, pagan gods, and other matters of possible interest to lay
readers of the Hebrew or Christian Bible. Entries range from a page or
less to several pages, cite biblical passages and cross-references in the text,
and suggest further print and online sources for deeper study. The two
volumes are paged and indexed together.
BS500 2005-021015 0-7546-3893-6
Scripture and scholarship in early modern England.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ariel Hessayon and Nicholas Keene.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 255 p. $99.95
British and Canadian scholars of early modern history, theology, and lit-
erature explore the scholarly criticism of the Bible in England between
the late 16th and early 18th centuries. Among their topics are the Genesis
narrative in the circle of Robert Hooke and Francis Lodwick, biblical crit-
icism and the New Testament canon, and Jeremy Taylor’s 1647 Liberty of
Prophesying and its readers.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BS511 2006-008742 978-90-04-13088-3
The recycled Bible; autobiography, culture, and the space
between.
Title main entry. Ed. by Fiona C. Black. (Semeia studies; no.51)
BRILL, ©2006 215 p. $111.00
Recycled refers to how the Bible has been used in a wide range of
Western cultural texts, and the resulting influence that culture and the
Bible exert on one another. The space between refers to the blend of cul-
tural criticism and autobiography that the contributors—religious
scholars from the US, Canada, and England—use to explore the con-
nection between Western culture and the Bible. Among their topics are
Hebrew and homebrew, the pastoral epistles as hypertexts, John Six in
conversation with vampire studies, and the metrical psalms and The
Gammage Cup. No index is provided. Brill publishes the hardbound
edition of this book; Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paper-
bound edition.
BS538 2005-034703 978-1-4051-0136-3
The Blackwell companion to the Bible and culture.
Title main entry. Ed. by John F. A. Sawyer. (Blackwell companions to
religion)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 555 p. $149.95
Offering readers a one-volume reference source about 21st- century
approaches to the Bible, this volume explores the ways the Bible has
affected all the major social contexts where it has been influential:
ancient, medieval and modern. The 30 articles are written by distin-
guished specialists and are organized into sections on revealing the past,
the nomadic text, the Bible and the senses, and reading in practice. The
articles emphasize the multi- faceted nature of the Bible and its impact
on the world and help to bridge the gap between specialist biblical
studies and other disciplines, such as literature, art, music, history, the-
ology, politics and psychology.
BS651 2006-022710 978-0-8204-8827-1
Christian theology in a pluralist context; a methodological
and constructive inquiry in the doctrine of creation.
Wiebe, Steven L. (American University studies; series VII: Theology and
religion; v.255)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 239 p. $71.95
Partly for its own value, and partly as an example for other theological
issues, Wiebe, a theologian now working outside both church and
academe, explores how to develop a doctrine of creation that responds to
today’s worldwide multi-religious context. Among the questions he
pursues is why to mess up a perfectly good creation story with foreign
material, and what methods are suitable to develop pluralistic theology.
BS680 2006-051652 978-90-04-15085-0
Human sacrifice in Jewish and Christian tradition.
Title main entry. Ed. by Karin Finsterbusch et al.
BRILL, ©2007 365 p. $174.00
European and American scholars investigate the degree to which ancient
practices and traditions of human sacrifice are reflected in medieval and
modern traditions. In antiquity, they focus especially on rituals of human
sacrifice and ancient polemics against it or transformations of it in the
Israelite-Jewish and Christian cultures, but they also consider the Ancient
Near East and ancient Greece. In modern times they look not only at
Jewish and Christian traditions, but also at debates about euthanasia and
the death penalty in the western world.
BS744 2006-029246 978-90-04-15122-2
Septuagint and cognate studies; proceedings.
International Organization for Septuagint and Cognate Studies Congress
(12th: 2004: Leiden, The Netherlands) Ed. by Melvin K.H. Peters.
(Septuagint and cognate studies; v.54)
BRILL, ©2006 232 p. $111.00
Both established and new scholars are represented by the 17 papers on
the Old Greek version of the Hebrew Bible and related topics. Among
their considerations are approaches in translation studies and their use
for studying the Septuagint, the Septuagint and the vocalization of the
Hebrew text of the Torah, John Chrysostom and Job and Psalms, the
place of the enclitic personal pronouns in the Old Greek psalter, and ‘en
with dative indicating instrument in the Septuagint of Ezekiel. There is
no index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BS1160 2006-013827 978-90-04-13765-3
Rediscovering the traditions of Israel, 3d ed.
Knight, Douglas A. (Society of biblical literature studies in biblical liter-
ature; 16)
BRILL, ©2006 360 p. $129.00
Knight (Vanderbilt U.) examines the nature and impact of biblical tra-
ditio-historical research, with traditio defined as the process of trans-
mission from one generation to the next, a process which is at times rigid
and faithful and at others inclusive of intentional or unintentional alter-
ations. He contrasts traditio with traditum, the content of the trans-
mission itself, and analyzes past and present perceptions about this
aspect of study of “tradition history.” He describes the first studies of tra-
dition in the Hebrew Bible, the era of source criticism, the work of
Gunkel, Gressmann, Alt, von Rad and Noth, subsequent practitioners
such as Gese, Richter and Steck, and critical reactions. He turns then to
the Scandinavian debate beginning with Mowinckel and progressing to
Engnell and the Uppsala Circle, ending with commentary on whether tra-
dition history has a future. If this fine work is any indication, it most
certainly does.
BS1171 2006-049031 978-90-04-14512-2
Reflection and refraction; studies in biblical
historiography in honour of A. Graeme Auld.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Rezetko et al. (Supplements to Vetus
Testamentum; v.113)
BRILL, ©2007 572 p. $194.00
Colleagues, former students, and friends of Scottish Hebrew Bible scholar
Auld present 30 essays on such topics as historiography and theodicy in
the Old Testament, The Chronicle of the Kings of Judah as a source of the
Deuteronomistic history, the use of dôr in Psalms 14 and 24, the trouble
with King Jehoshaphat, the notion of Jerusalem as a holy city, and the
biblical exegesis of Hebrew roots in the Septuagint. Only names are
indexed.
BS1181 2006-008538 978-90-04-13766-0
A farewell to the Yahwist?; the composition of the
Pentateuch in recent European interpretation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas B. Dozeman and Konrad Schmid.
(Society of Biblical Literature symposium series; no.34)
BRILL, ©2006 197 p. $110.00
Six papers and three responses present various perspectives on the thesis
that the Priestly author of Genesis and Exodus was the first the combine
the tradition of the ancestors with the story of Moses and the exodus,
thus creating the master narrative of salvation history as a progression
beginning with the divine promise of land, posterity, and blessings made
to the ancestors; and ending with the exodus from Egypt and the journey
to the promised land. The contributing German, Swiss, and North
American theologians were inspired by the work of the Pentateuch
Seminar of the Society of Biblical Literature since the early 1980s. The
hardbound edition of this work is published by Brill (978-90-04-13766-0);
the paperbound is published by the Society of Biblical Literature (978-1-
58983-163-6).
BS1199 2006-051765 978-90-04-15299-1
The jubilee from Leviticus to Qumran; a history of
interpretation.
Bergsma, John Sietze. (Supplements to Vetus Testamentum; v.115)
BRILL, ©2007 348 p. $155.00
Just as the concept of jubilee has been interpreted differently in various
modern contexts, says Bergsma (theology, Franciscan U. of Steubenville,
Ohio), so it was during biblical times. He surveys the history of its rein-
terpretation as a legal, ethical, chronological, and messianic concept from
the roots of the jubilee year in ancient Near Eastern law and practice
through its original formulation in pre-exilic Israel and its various re-uses
in the Hebrew Bible, Second Temple literature, and Qumran writings. He
does not consider New Testament texts.
–24–
BS1199 2006-030223 978-90-04-15124-6
Seeking the favor of God; v.1: The origins of penitential
prayer in second temple Judaism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark J. Boda et al. (Early Judaism and its lit-
erature; no.21)
BRILL, ©2006 249 p. $122.00
The late 1990s saw a flurry of significant publications on the Second
Temple era, and in response the Society of Biblical Literature set up a
series of annual meetings designed to encourage mutual consultation.
The idea worked admirably, and these 11 papers chosen from those
meetings cross the typical disciplinarian lines of the Hebrew Bible,
Qumran, Second Temple literature, the New Testament, post-70 CE
Judaism, and early Christianity, resulting not only in accomplished work
but also in avenues for future research. Contributors address penitential
prayer with the context of the Second Temple era, the state of scholarship,
confession as a theological expression, the socio-ideological setting or set-
tings for penitential prayers, priestly performance as speech act, lament
in Trito-Isaiah’s penitential prayer and within Jeremiah and Joel, the
concept of guilt in Isaiah, the literary lament of Ezra 9:6-15, and the con-
tributions of form criticism.
BS1255 2006-009625 0-8018-8500-0
Illuminating Leviticus; a study of its laws and institutions
in the light of biblical narratives.
Carmichael, Calum.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 212 p. $55.00
Yes, the laws may seem excessively dry and strange, admits Carmichael
(comparative literature and law, Cornell U.), but actually they concern
some of the most dramatic incidents and famous people in biblical
sources, among them Noah, the Philistines of the plague narrative, lots
about Joseph and his brothers, Rachel and Onan, and the renowned
descendants David and Jonathon. He argues that there is a fundamental
connection between the rules and the stories about first happenings in
this epic, not because the rules were made up at various times to deal
with specific problems, but because people who make up laws generally
link them to legendary history and locate the origins of the laws so far
back in time that no one can dispute them.
BS1305 2006-049078 978-90-04-15086-7
Compositional strategy of the book of Judges; an
inductive, rhetorical study.
Wong, Gregory T.K. (Supplements to Vetus Testamentum; v.111)
BRILL, ©2006 287 p. $134.00
Like other synchronic scholars, Wong, a Scottish scholar of Hebrew and
Old Testament studies, examines Judges through a close reading of lit-
erary and rhetorical features such as narrative structure, recurring
themes and motifs, allusions, wordplays, points of view, plot, and char-
acterization. Unlike previous writers however, he does not begin with an
assumption that the book is an integrated text. Rather he investigates
whether that view is justifiable, by exploring whether significant
rhetorical links exist between narratives from different sections, based on
language and plot parallels.
BS1515 2005-037069 978-90-04-13041-8
“As those who are taught”; the interpretation of Isaiah
from the LXX to the SBL.
Title main entry. Ed. by Claire Mathews McGinnis and Patricia K. Tull.
(Society of Biblical Literature symposium series; no.27)
BRILL, ©2006 342 p. $150.00
Rising from the milieu of the Society for Biblical Literature’s Isaiah
Group, 15 essays by scholars from the Americas and Europe consider
interpretations of the Old Testament book over the millennia, and how
those interpretations continue to influence modern conceptions of its
unity or coherence. Their topics include nationalistic exegesis in the
Greek Isaiah, Qumran, Johannine christology, the perspective of a 12th-
century rabbi in northern France, Robert Lowth’s 18th-century com-
mentary, and Isaiah’s polyphonic message. Brill publishes the hardbound
edition of this book; Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paper-
bound edition.
–25–
BS1520 2006-026032 978-0-8204-8618-5
Anti-cultic theology in Christian biblical interpretation; a
study of Isaiah 66:1-4 and its reception.
Stein, Valerie A. (Studies in biblical literature; v.97)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 161 p. $62.95
The passage has often been used to proclaim God’s rejection of the
Jerusalem temple and cult, and has poisoned relations between
Christians and Jews even to our own time, but Stein (religion, U. of
Evansville, Indiana) argues that such an interpretation is fundamentally
incongruous with its broader literary context. Critically analyzing its
reception from the Patristic Era, the writings of Martin Luther, and the
Modern Era, she shows that its anti-cultic interpretation derives from
factors external to the text and that its meaning has been shaped to
reflect the interpreter’s theological concerns. The study is revised from
her 2004 Ph.D. dissertation in the Hebrew Bible/Old Testament for
Harvard University.
BS1520 2006-051754 978-90-04-15434-6
A people tall and smooth-skinned; the rhetoric of Isaiah
18.
Lavik, Marta Høyland. (Supplements to Vetus Testamentum; v.112)
BRILL, ©2007 274 p. $146.00
How do you persuade a large number of very critical readers and lis-
teners that a biblical text is about someone else and not themselves?
Lavik (Old Testament, School of Mission and Theology, Stavanger) takes
a fascinating passage of the Book of Isaiah which has often confused lay
audiences and scholars alike and analyzes how its textual design, motifs
and rhetoric are created to persuade and how the strophes within each
stanza relate to each other. As she works through a very close reading
she finds phonetic and syntactic elements as well as semantic choices
that build to a consistent but still pragmatic poetic technique, and she
finds significant rhetorical features nestled amongst the motifs of mes-
sengers, rivers, vines, vineyards, harvests and knives. The result is a
model of rhetorical analysis of a traditionally difficult text, set solidly
within the context of time, place and language.
BS1665 2006-028511 978-90-04-15112-3
Up the steep and stony road; the Book of Zechariah in
social-location trajectory analysis.
Curtis, Byron G. (Society of Biblical Literature Academica Biblica; no.25)
BRILL, ©2006 328 p. $116.00
Looking for the social matrix that gave birth to the strange 14-chapter
form of the book of Zechariah, Curtis asks again whether it may have
but one principal author, the eponymous prophet. He proposes mini-
mally that a single trident group in a single generation of time wrote the
whole book. Going further, he also tries to establish grounds that make
unitary authorship once again a tenable hypothesis. Published under
license from the Society of Biblical Literature.
BS2361 2006-049065 978-90-04-15304-2
The New Testament interpreted; essays in honor of
Bernard C. Lategan.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cilliers Breytenbach et al. (Supplements to
Novum Testamentum; v.124)
BRILL, ©2007 404 p. $173.00
Scholars from South Africa present 19 selected and revised papers pre-
sented to an August 2004 colloquium at Stellenbosch held to honor their
fellow biblical scholar Lategan. The topics include hermeneutical consid-
erations concerning the so-called third quest of the historical Jesus, inter-
textual readings in the Septuagint, Lategan on the threshold of diverse
theological discourses, and the chronotope and its discursive function in
the Gospel of Luke.
BS2585 2006-047060 978-0-7734-5553-5
The Gospel of Mark; an indexed bibliography, 1980-2005.
Humphrey, Hugh Minear.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 334 p. $119.95
Humphrey (religious studies, Fairfield U., Connecticut) cites without
annotation books, chapters, and articles on the Gospel that were pub-
lished during the 25 years and are generally accessible in major theo-
logical libraries. Among them are studies of the whole Gospel, its
relations to other works, theoretical approaches, specific passages, and
theological motifs. As in his earlier bibliography of the previous 25 years,
he references journal articles to their abstracts in New Testament
Abstracts, and selectively notes reviews of books. The arrangement being
topical, he indexes only authors.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BS2589 2006-043092 978-90-04-15474-2
Convinced that God had called us; dreams, visions, and
the perception of God’s will in Luke-Acts.
Miller, John B.F. (Biblical interpretation series; v.85)
BRILL, ©2007 282 p. $153.00
Slightly revising his doctoral dissertation for Princeton University, Miller
(religion, McMurry U.) examines the many dream-visions in Luke-Acts.
He explains that the dream-vision scenes include both divine irruption
into human experience and human perception of divine activity, and so
mark an intersection between Luke’s theology and anthropology. The
response of characters to the experience is his main concern, and he
finds that some just do what they are told, but others interpret them to
make sense of them and discern the will of God.
BS2615 2006-025611 978-90-04-14672-3
New currents through John; a global perspective.
Title main entry. Ed. by Francisco Lozada and Tom Thatcher.
(Resources for biblical study; no.49)
BRILL, ©2006 248 p. $116.00
In 1957 Johannine scholars were startled by John A.T. Robinson’s asser-
tions that a “new look” at the fourth gospel would soon replace the old
orthodoxy, including the then-established dictum that John used the syn-
optic gospels as his source. Five decades later this absorbing collection
shows how the tide has turned again. After an introduction to the old
“new look” and the new critical orthodoxy, contributors examine such
topics as anthropology as a feature of Johannine eschatology, the role of
John 21 in defining discipleship and John 13 in defining community,
Judaism as presented in John, subordination in Johannine Christology
and the Roman family, new readings of John 2:12-25, and aspects of two
worlds present in the gospel, at least one of which was Jewish. Final
reflections consider the future of Johannine scholarship, especially in
terms of social location.
BS2625 0-567-08097-8
Foreign but familiar gods; Greco-Romans read religion in
Acts.
Kauppi, Lynn Allan. (Library of New Testament studies; 277)
T&T Clark, ©2006 165 p. $115.00
Revising his 1999 doctoral dissertation at the Lutheran School of
Theology in Chicago, Kauppi explores how non-Christian readers
received Luke’s references to various gods and other aspects of the con-
temporary Greco-Roman religion. His goal is to distinguish Luke’s appro-
priation of the gods for his own theological purposes from possible
interpolation of references to them by his readers, and thereby get a
better understanding of Luke’s theology and purpose. T&T Clark is an
imprint of Continuum.
BS2655 2005-030617 0-7546-5499-0
Paul’s necessary sin; the experience of liberation.
Ashworth, Timothy.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 245 p. $99.95
In what he warns is a radical and original interpretation of the theology
of Paul, Ashworth (biblical studies, Woodbrooke Quaker Study Center,
Birmingham, Britain) argues that the transformation among early
Christians led them to reinterpret their old life as a kind of slavery, and
shows how Paul used the universal image of the movement from
childhood to adulthood to illuminate his transformed sense of how God
acts: not as an external authority or guide, but as an inner maturity and
liberation.
BS2825 2005-037070 978-90-04-15107-9
The reality of Apocalypse; rhetoric and politics in the
Book of Revelation.
Title main entry. Ed. by David L. Barr. (Society of Biblical Literature
symposium series; no.39)
BRILL, ©2006 306 p. $129.00
To recapture the meaning of the Apocalypse for the original readers of
the Book of Revelation, these essays focus on two interrelated themes in
that document: politics and rhetoric. The contributors, who are scholars
of religion and the Bible, consider the rhetorical strategies and tactics in
Revelation and demonstrate their connection to the situation in Roman
Asia Minor. They also examine community and cultural conflicts,
showing how myth, symbol and liturgy function as means of resistance
in an imperial setting. The 12 papers were selected from a number of
symposia over the years.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BT77 2006-001999 978-1-4051-5358-4
The Christian theology reader, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alister E. McGrath.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 744 p. $49.95 (pa)
Luther comments on the Christography of Nestorius. Brunner and Barth
part ways on the nature of God. Ussher elegantly finds that anyone who
shows the results of justification can be regarded as being justified.
McGrath (historical theology, Oxford U.) introduces key ideas, personal-
ities and schools of thought in 361 readings with summaries, com-
mentary and questions for study. His selections include primary
readings, proofs of the existence of God and the grounds of faith,
scripture and interpretation as sources of theology, the role of tradition
and dogma, the doctrine of God as trinity, the person of Christ as divine
and human, salvation in Christ, the effects of human nature in sin and
grace, the role of the church, the sacraments, the relation of Christianity
with other religions, and the end times as everlasting death and ever-
lasting life. New materials include increased coverage of Catholicism and
Orthodoxy and works by women.
BT77 2006-016856 978-1-56478-424-7
Experience and religion; a lay essay in theology. (reprint,
1967)
Mosley, Nicholas.
Dalkey Archive Press, ©2006 156 p. $12.50 (pa)
Mosley came to a mutual crisis point in both his life and his faith, and
rather than abandoning religion as unfashionable or even irrelevant. He
managed to sort out that faith and experience might just be able to work
together. In this agile and deeply personal text Mosley finds compelling
ways to describe religion in terms of how the world works, rather than
of what might be revealed. He is a master of the conundrum, working
out how human freedom allies with both prophecy and commitment,
and how language figures in our perceptions of both experience and
religion and how they relate to each other, eventually coming to the main
point of religion, particularly Christianity, as it applies to the present and
future experience of the world. This is a reprint of the United Church
Press edition of 1967.
BT82 978-0-7734-5598-6
A history of the idea of “God’s Law” (Theonomy); its
origins, development and place in political and legal
thought.
Clauson, Marc A.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 464 p. $139.95
Clauson (history and law, Cedarville U., Ohio) traces the origin and devel-
opment of the late-20th-century movement to apply Old Testament or
Mosaic Law to the civil realm; and its related legal theory that the scope
and power of government should be limited to what the Scriptures of the
Old Testament, supplemented by the New, clearly command or to what
can be deduced from them. After his investigation, he suggests that the
movement adopt a somewhat less ambitious pedigree than John Calvin
and John Knox.
BT83 2005-034644 978-1-84553-104-1
Resurrecting erotic transgression; subjecting ambiguity in
theology.
Monro, Anita. (Gender, theology, and spirituality)
Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2006 194 p. $24.95 (pa)
Munro (liturgy and theology, Charles Sturt U.) works through theories of
Julia Kristeva and others to develop a poststructuralist and postmodernist
approach that allows for the reality of a multiplicity of languages and
identities within the faith. She shows how charges of erotic transgression
are inherent is such a study, and that ambiguity, which allows for duality
and alternative thinking, is built into hermeneutics and allows for
boundary-crossing and category-breaching, and introduces how methods
of understanding poetry within an ambiguous context can apply to scrip-
tural reading and interpretation. Distributed by the David Brown Book
Company.
BT88 2005-034562 0-7546-5437-0
Law, liberty, and church; authority and justice in the
major churches in England.
Arthur, Gordon. (Ashgate new critical thinking in religion, theology,
and biblical studies)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 214 p. $99.95
Having studied physics, philosophy, and theology, Arthur here examines
assumptions underlying ideas about how the Church should regulate the
conduct of its members and make decision. He studies representative
churches of five major denominations in England. The scholarly work
draws on legal theory, history, and Canon Law, but he has not assumed
readers to be familiar with any of these fields.
–26–

BT90 2006-929292 978-0-7618-3547-9
Through a glass darkly; the ambiguity of the Christian
tradition.
Berry, Donald L.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 90 p. $23.00 (pa)
Distressed by the power of religious and political forces seeking to
impose on the general population ethical views they claim to derive from
the Bible, Episcopal priest Berry (emeritus philosophy and religion,
Colgate U.) explores how ambiguity emerges as an important ingredient
in the Christian paradigm, and how an appropriation of this feature can
make the Christian voice less demanding and more inviting, less strident
and more healing. He looks at the story, the book, the man, and the
friend. There is no index.
BT93 2005-017427 978-0-295-98547-3
Fire in the ashes; God, evil, and the Holocaust.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Patterson and John K. Roth. (The
Pastora Goldner series in post-Holocaust studies)
U. of Washington Pr., ©2005 350 p. $45.00
Jewish and Christian philosophers and theologians engaged in interfaith
dialogue through the biennial Pastora Goldner Holocaust Symposium
step outside conventional theological frameworks to search the ashes of
the Holocaust for theology, particularly theodicy. Their unifying premise
is that the relation between God and evil has been complicated by the
Holocaust, and that a dialogue among Christians and Jews of various
religious persuasions is necessary to deal with the issue. Several of the
scholars took part in two earlier volumes.
BT130 2006-022459 978-0-8204-8696-3
Revisiting the doctrine of the divine attributes; in dialogue
with Karl Barth, Eberhard Jüngel and Wolf Krötke.
Holmes, Christopher R.J. (Issues in systematic theology; v.15)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 249 p. $70.95
Holmes (systematic theology and ethics, Providence Theological
Seminary, Manitoba) describes and evaluates what the three seminal
20th-century Protestant theologians take to be the function of a doctrine
of the divine attributes. He finds common ground among them, and
where necessary explains why their doctrines take different conceptual
and descriptive directions.
BT378 2006-049211 978-90-04-15301-1
The afterlife imagery in Luke’s story of the rich man and
Lazarus.
Lehtipuu, Outi. (Supplements to Novum Testamentum; v.123)
BRILL, ©2007 361 p. $147.00
What most people remember most about the Lazarus and the Rich Man
story that Luke has Jesus tell is the image of bliss and torment in the
afterlife, but modern scholars and theologians argue that the promise
and threat are not the point of the parable at all. Lehtipuu (U. of
Helsinki) puts the narrative in the context of stories and folktales that
Luke’s readers, and Jesus’ listeners, would have known; and of Luke’s
overall purpose and Jesus overall teachings. The study is mildly revised
from her 2004 Ph.D. dissertation in theology at the University of Helsinki.
BT660 2006-005160 978-0-8047-5252-7
The Guadalupan controversies in Mexico.
Poole, Stafford.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 318 p. $65.00
In the symbol of Our Lady of Guadalupe, Mexicans fuse religious
devotion and national identity. Like many emblems of universality,
however, this one has concealed a number of cultural fissures. Poole
explains the various controversies that have arisen from Juan Diego’s
sighting of the Virgin Mary in 1531, including questions about Diego’s
existence that have persisted to the 21st century. Poole objects to Diego’s
canonization but ensures through his comprehensive research that his
opinion is well grounded rather than mere iconoclasm.
–27–
BT702 2006-008827 0-7546-5767-1
Nietzsche and theology; Nietzschean thought in
Christological anthropology.
Deane, David. (Ashgate new critical thinking in religion, theology, and
biblical studies)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 195 p. $99.95
Deane (theology and religious studies, Colorado State U.) responds
Christologically to the Nietzschean tradition, admitting that the very
Christology he offers shares much of the genetic code of the Nietzschean
discourses he rejects. Such semiotic cross-pollination is a good thing, he
says, because it allows the Christian story to parasiticize grammars of
power and violence while also being open itself to invigoration from a
host of viral discourses.
BT707 2006-022364 0-8204-8667-1
Pious pro-family rhetoric; postures and paradoxes in
philosophical perspective.
Newman, Jay.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 202 p. $67.95
Having produced a 2001 work on the broad relationship between religion
and family values in Western societies, Newman (philosophy, U. of
Guelph, Canada) here looks at some of the specific media debates. He
shows what they reveal about the state of religion in contemporary
Western societies, varieties of religious commitment, strategies of inter-
denominational and intra-denominational competition, ideals of tradition
and progress, and other matters.
BT738 2005-026467 0-7546-5201-7
Christ and human rights; the transformative engagement.
Newlands, George. (Theology and religion interdisciplinary perspective
series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 218 p. $99.95
Newlands (U. of Glasgow) argues that the central Christian doctrine of
Christology—the transcendent mystery of Christ—has much to contribute
to a culture in which global human rights may be positively addressed.
He considers why Christology has not been able to play a more decisive
role, and how a hermeneutical retrieval of the tradition in the service of
the future may be achieved.
BT1390 2006-280881 0-06-078339-7
Forbidden faith; the gnostic legacy from the Gospels to
the Da Vinci Code .
Smoley, Richard.
HarperSanFrancisco, ©2006 244 p. $24.95
Gnosis, the experience of direct “inner knowing,” has been marginalized
in Western religions as a traditional counter-culture. The editor of Gnosis,
a journal of Western spiritual traditions, argues that the Gnostic legacy
may yet bridge the chasm between faith and science. Smoley presents
and explains a family tree of Gnosticism from ancient civilizations to its
many branches that include Kabbalah, alchemy, Freemasonry, and
Hinduism/ Buddhism. The Da Vinci Code, the bestselling book, intro-
duced many to the secret nature of such teachings and the central (and
suppressed by the Church) role of the sacred feminine.
BV823 2006-050608 978-90-04-15464-3
Cornelius Henrici Hoen (Honius) and his epistle on the
Eucharist (1525); medieval heresy, Erasmian humanism,
and reform in the early sixteenth-century low countries.
Spruyt, Bart Jan. (Studies in medieval and reformation traditions;
history, culture, religion, ideas)
BRILL, ©2006 296 p. $155.00
Journalist Spruyt, whose historical specialization includes the history of
Christian humanism in The Netherlands and the political philosophy of
conservatism, focuses on Hoen’s famous work opposing transubstanti-
ation, the evidence within it about Hoen’s character and thought, its rela-
tionship to works by Bucer, Erasmus, Luther and Zwengli, and its
continuing influence. Spruyt analyzes the debate on Hoen from
Hardenberg’s Vita Wesseli Groningensis on through the work of de Hoop
Scheffer and Moll to the Leiden Historical School, gives details on Hoen’s
life and thought and the circumstances of his trial, the work’s contents,
sources and historical background, including the influence on Luther
and later dissent from Wyclif, Hus and Berengar, and the impact of the
work in terms of its printing history and dissemination. He includes an
edition of the original Latin text and a contemporary German translation.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BV2813 1-55238-166-8
The letter of Margaret Butcher; missionary-imperialism on
the North Pacific coast.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary-Ellen Kelm (Legacies shared series;
no.15)
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 273 p. $29.95 (pa)
As a missionary nurse and teacher in a residential school in the wilds of
British Columbia, she was in a perfect position to observe the Haisla
people, but she was a white woman, a missionary, and convinced that
assimilation was the only way. Editor Kelm (history, Simon Frasier U.)
lets Butcher speak for herself but is careful to bring her within her own
contexts rather than ours. The result is an unfettered voice from another
age. Distributed by the Michigan State U. Press.
BV3160 2006-049212 978-90-04-15471-1
New faith in ancient lands; Western missions in the
Middle East in the nineteenth and early twentieth
centuries.
Title main entry. Ed. by Heleen Murre-van den Berg. (Studies in
Christian mission; v.32)
BRILL, ©2006 339 p. $134.00
In 13 papers from a January 2005 conference in Leiden, the Netherlands,
historians of the Middle East and of Christianity describe examples of the
intense interest the Middle East shown by Christianity and the West in
general during the 19th century. That interest, they say was generated by
curiosity about holy places, mounting eschatological and millennial
expectations, renewed motivations for missionary activity, and growing
colonial and imperial investment in the region. One of the papers is in
French, and another in German.
BV3773 2006-006370 0-313-32828-5
Encyclopedia of religious revivals in America; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael McClymond.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 1178 p. $225.00
Religious scholars, historians, and social scientists offer a reference to
religious revivals in the US and Canada from the 18th century into the
21st. The first volume contains 227 articles on people, revival events, reli-
gious denominations or groups associated with revivals, revival practices
or phenomena such as speaking in tongues and radio and television, and
themes such as confession and eschatology. The cross-referencing is
thorough, and further reading is suggested at the end of each article. The
second volume presents 106 primary documents from as far back as
1527 and as late as 2005. The two volumes are paged separately, and each
provides a cumulative index, which seems to be the only cross-reference
between the volumes.
BV4011 2005-026469 0-7546-5565-2
Renewing pastoral practice; Trinitarian perspectives on
pastoral care and counselling.
Pembroke, Neil. (Explorations in practical, pastoral, and empirical the-
ology)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 117 p. $89.95
Pembroke (pastoral studies, U. of Queensland) looks to a central doctrine
of the Christian faith for guidance in shaping pastoral theory and
practice. In addition to pointing out how the Trinity has relevance for
pastoral care and counseling, he shows how thinking about it can renew
a pastor’s vision of the ministry of care. He ends with theodicy and suf-
fering.
BV4164 2006-021156 978-0-7546-5754-5
Theological reflection and education for ministry; the
search for integration in theology.
Paver, John E. (Explorations in practical, pastoral, and empirical the-
ology)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2007 180 p. $89.95
Paver (emeritus, Uniting Church Theological College, Melbourne) argues
that theological reflection under pastoral supervision may be a key to
reforming the curriculum of theological schools and integrating theory
and practice, which students, churches, and even some members of the
academy have found diverging during the past years.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BV4319 2006-018432 978-0-7425-5195-4
Communication, media, and identity; a Christian theory
of communication.
Fortner, Robert S. (The communication, culture, and religion series)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 280 p. $31.95 (pa)
Fortner (communication, Calvin College) provides theoretical and biblical
analyses of the nature of communication itself, its implications for inter-
personal relationships, the use of media and the development of digital
culture, while carefully considering the theological differences within the
faith. He examines what communication is and how it relates to theory,
how it is a relational activity, and how its technology has changed, how
it is a form of art and expression of culture, and advocates for devel-
opment of Christian identity in the swirl of knowledge and information
so the spiritual needs of people will matter. He closes with commentary
about what can happen when Christians embrace communication tech-
nology and what happens when they do not.
BV4335 2006-047517 978-90-04-15189-5
Spiritual care in a hospital setting; an empirical-
theological exploration.
Smeets, Wim. Trans. by M. Manley. (Empirical studies in theology; v.13)
BRILL, ©2006 290 p. $116.00
Given the increasing secularization and technology- and policy- driven
nature of health care, spiritual caregivers face the challenge of rein-
venting their profession in Dutch hospitals as elsewhere. In a study of
practices in the overlapping domains of healthcare and worldview,
Smeets (theology, Radboud U.; Radboud U. Nijmegen Medical Centre, the
Netherlands) queried 545 such caregivers on their views on quality
assurance in healthcare and their role in it. Based on a factor analysis,
he recommends policies reinforcing the legitimacy of their role and fol-
lowup international research to further clarify the relationship between
modern medicine and spiritual care. The study questionnaire and other
methodological notes are appended. This is a translation of Kwaliteit van
de geestelijke verzorging in zorginstellingen.
BV4500 2006-045880 0-7546-0992-8
Anne Phoenix.
Phoenix, Anne. Ed. by David Como. (The early modern Englishwoman.
Printed writings, series 1, Part 4; v.5)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 — p. $99.95
Anne Phoenix published The saint’s legacies; or, a collection of certaine
promises out of the word of God, a devotional pamphlet, in 1631. A clear
facsimile of the pamphlet is found in this little volume, part of an
ongoing series of facsimiles of hard-to-find works written by early
modern English women writers. The editor (his affiliation is not noted)
has provided a discussion of the work and its context and a biography
of the writer, a devout and outspoken Puritan.
BX830 2006-017198 978-0-7425-5193-0
Catholicism and religious freedom; contemporary
reflections on Vatican II’s declaration on religious liberty.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kenneth L. Grasso and Robert P. Hunt.
Sheed & Ward, ©2006 224 p. $26.95 (pa)
Dignitatis Humanae, or The Declaration on Religious Freedom: On the
Right of the Person and of Communities to Social and Civil Freedom in
Matters Religious, was declared by John Paul II to be one of the major
texts emerging from the 1962-65 Second Vatican Council. Of the
American scholars offering perspectives on it four decades later, most are
surprisingly political scientists, with others coming from law as well as
philosophy and theology. No index is provided.
BX920 978-1-84682-032-8
The Irish College at Santiago de Compostela, 1605-1769.
O Connell, Patricia.
Four Courts Press, ©2007 158 p. $55.00
This history highlights the Irish College at Santiago de Compostela from
1605 to 1769 and its association with early Irish exiles in Spain who were
forced to leave Ireland because of Penal Laws, thereafter training as
priests at the college. Using material from the Salamanca Archive man-
uscript source in the Russell Library, NUI, Maynooth, O Connell (a
former librarian of NUI, Galway) describes college life and the rectors,
includes a list of students and biographical notes on them, and outlines
important events. This is the third volume of her series of books on the
six Irish Colleges founded in the Iberian peninsula. The others are The
Irish College at Alcalá de Henares, 1649-1785 and The Irish College at
Lisbon, 1590-1834. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–28–
BX1198 2005-033953 978-0-7546-5526-8
The chronicle of Hugh of Flavigny; reform and the
investiture contest in the late-eleventh century.
Healy, Patrick. (Church, faith, and culture in the Medieval West)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 264 p. $99.95
Revising his doctoral dissertation in history at Trinity College, Dublin,
where he teaches today, Healy discusses Hugh’s account of the conflict
between Pope Gregory VII (r. 1073-85) and Henry IV of Germany (1056-
1106). He considers the Abbey of St-Vanne in Verdun, where Hugh was a
monk; his life and career; the Chronicon and its sources; and its account
of kingship and tyranny and other matters.
BX1263 2006-049271 90-04-15502-3
The popes and the Baltic Crusades, 1147-1254.
Fonnesberg-Schmidt, Iben. (The northern world; v.26)
BRILL, ©2007 387 p. $134.00
Not every crusader went south. Sometimes they went north. Here
Fonnesberg-Schmidt (medieval history, Aalborg U., Denmark) describes
the crusades against the Slavs initiated by Eugenius III in 1147 which
continued to the end of Innocent IV’s pontificate in 1254. She begins by
analyzing papal policy on the Baltic crusades up to 1198, the beginning
of the pontificate of Innocent III and his subsequent interpretation of
missions among non-Christians in the Baltic region and elsewhere, and
the nature of care for the newly converted, an effort which Honorius III
coordinated the Dominicans from 1216 to 1227. The pontificates of
Gregory IX and Innocent IV that followed included crusades on Prussia,
Livonia, Estonia, Finland and Russia, and Gregory IX further involved
the mendicant orders in follow-up. The result was a curious and variable
combination of crusade and mission rivaling the complexity of the
crusade for Jerusalem.
BX1428 2006-009138 978-0-8165-2563-8
Dangerous speech; a social history of blasphemy in
colonial Mexico.
Villa-Flores, Javier.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 242 p. $24.95 (pa)
Villas-Flores (history and Latin American and Latino studies, U. of
Illinois-Chicago) explores the connection between blasphemy and reli-
gious belief by analyzing the social uses of blasphemous speech among
different groups in colonial Mexico between 1520 and 1700. He contends
that blasphemy can be not only a manifestation of deep belief and
rebellion, but also a powerful verbal device for multiple social purposes.
BX1468 2004061089 0-7734-5653-8
A social history of the Catholic Church in Chile; v.3: The
second period of the Pinochet government, 1980-1990.
Aguilar, Mario I.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 270 p. $109.95
In this volume of the series, Aguilar (divinity, U. of St. Andrews,
Scotland) examines the civil alliances in Chilean society that helped to
reconstruct what had been destroyed under the Pinochet regime. He
finds the work of the Catholic church was indispensable in gathering up
those who supported democracy, in gaining support for human rights,
and in giving those who could not otherwise speak a chance to do so
with some measure of personal safety. He places the Church in the
context of Chile, then covers the events of 1980 under the new consti-
tution, the years of Pinochet’s rule, including his attacks on the people
and their Church, the wide-ranging protests that resulted in tragedies, the
Pope’s visit in 1987, and the move toward democracy that could only
come with the downfall of Pinochet.
BX1505 1-85182-995-4
Religion and reformation in the Tudor diocese of Meath.
Scott, Brendan.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 174 p. $65.00
Irish historian Scott, assistant editor of Breifne, charts the social and reli-
gious state of the diocese in the years surrounding the introduction of
reform. The diocese is close to the English seat of power in Dublin and
encompasses large swathes of the Pale and the Gaelic midlands, he says,
and so can cast light on why the reformation failed to become established
in Ireland as a whole. The study began as his 2004 doctoral dissertation
at the National University of Ireland-Galway. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
–29–
BX1543 2-503-51807-9
Giulia Gonzaga and the religious controversies of
sixteenth-century Italy.
Russell, Camilla. (Late medieval and early modern studies; v.8)
Brepols Publishers, ©2006 237 p. $81.00
Gonzaga (1513-66) was renowned by contemporaries for her beauty and
chaste widowhood, but after her death, a cache of letters showed that she
had maintained a long and intimate relationship with a man who was
decapitated and burned the next year for the heresy revealed in the
letters. Revising her 2003 Ph.D. dissertation at the University of London,
Russell traces the life of the Italian noblewomen through the lens of the
religious beliefs she held and the subversive agenda she pursued in the
atmosphere of religious uncertainty and controversy that pervaded the
Italian peninsula at the time. Distributed in the US by the David Brown
Book Company.
BX1546 2006-047567 978-90-04-15357-8
Reforming priests and pastors; Tuscan dioceses in the
first century of seminary education.
Comerford, Kathleen M. (Education and society in the Middle Ages and
Renaissance; v.27)
BRILL, ©2006 162 p. $98.00
The matter under study here is not priests and pastors pursuing reform,
but the reform of priests and pastors under the 1563 decree by the
Council of Trent that all dioceses in Catholic territories build seminaries
to train parish priests. Comerford (history, Georgia Southern U.) explores
how that played out in a number of diocesan seminaries in the part of
Italy now called Tuscany, between the close of the Council and the late
17th century. The dioceses she examines span a wide range of economic,
political, demographic, and religious issues.
BX1795 2005-032623 978-0-8018-8389-7
Negotiating Darwin; the Vatican confronts evolution, 1877-
1902.
Artigas, Mariano et al. (Medicine, science, and religion in historical
context)
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 326 p. $50.00
Artigas (philosophy, U. de Navarra, Spain), Thomas F. Glick (history,
Boston U.) and Rafael A. Martínez (philosophy, Pontifical U. of the Holy
Cross, Rome) have worked in the archives of the Holy Office in Rome
since 1999, a year after they were opened. They present six cases during
their period of study in which Catholics tried to harmonize evolution and
Christianity. The cases are often mentioned during debates, they say, but
information about them has been fragmentary, giving rise to confusion.
They detail who acted and for what reasons, how the events unfolded,
what decisions were made, and how they were put into practice.
BX1908 2006-049029 978-90-04-15393-6
Angelus pacis; the legation of Cardinal Giovanni Gaetano
Orsini, 1326-1334.
Beattie, Blake R. (The medieval Mediterranean; v.67)
BRILL, ©2007 245 p. $128.00
Orsini was a rare example during the period of an Italian who played a
central role in the Avignon papacy’s Italian policy, says Beattie (history,
U. of Louisville). He was dispatched to Italy as legate by Pope John XXII
in the spring of 1326 with the charge to bring about the pacification and
general reformation of Italy, immediately with the aim of protecting
papal interests, but ultimately to bring about conditions under which the
exiled papacy could return to Rome.
BX2651 90-04-15408-6
Paul and his theology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stanley E. Porter. (Pauline studies; v.3)
BRILL, ©2006 454 p. $168.00
The first two volumes, of a projected five, looked at the Pauline canon
and Paul and his opponents. Here scholars of religion consider his the-
ology from such perspectives as Paul’s understanding of faith as partici-
pation, reconciliation, the spirit and the temple in his letters to the
Corinthians, whether Romans 8 shows that he was a trinitarian, Paul the
exorcist and healer, and Melanchthon’s interpretation of the letter to the
Romans in his 1521 Loci Communes. There is no subject index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BX3606 978-90-04-15640-1
Francis of Marchia; theologian and philosopher; a
Franciscan at the University of Paris in the early
fourteenth century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Russell L. Friedman and Chris Schabel.
BRILL, ©2006 204 p. $81.00 (pa)
Historians of medieval philosophy comment on the work of Francis, an
Italian Franciscan who first studied and then taught at the University of
Paris. Five volumes of his writings have been published since 1990, and
the essays here reflect the expansion of modern interest from his natural
philosophy to his political philosophy, epistemology and philosophy of
mind, metaphysics, and philosophical theology. There is no index.
BX3706 2006-007237 978-0-87220-839-1
Jesuit writings of the early modern period, 1540-1640.
Title main entry. Ed. and trans. by John Patrick Donnelly.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2006 263 p. $37.95
Himself a Jesuit, Donnelly (history, Marquette U.) assembles represen-
tative early writings by members of the Society of Jesus, the most influ-
ential of the many new monastic orders founded during the 16th century
in the context of the Protestant Reformation and reforms in the Roman
Catholic Church. The first section contains writings of founder Ignatius
of Loyola. Others consider education, missions and Asia and the
Americas, opposition to Protestantism, spirituality, pastoral ministries,
politics, and attacks on the order.
BX3708 2006-921363 978-0-7618-3404-5
Closer walk; confessions of a Jesuit yat.
Gelpi, Donald L.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 418 p. $49.95 (pa)
For those not blessed by time in the Ninth Ward, a “yat” is what people
from New Orleans call themselves, as in “Where y’at, dawlin’?” Gelpi,
active in the Catholic Charismatic Renewal since the 1960s and at the
Jesuit School of Theology at Berkeley since 1973, enlightens readers on
much more than just his native dialect by explaining his systematic the-
ology by way of his life experiences, an approach that he makes both
accessible and rigorous. His was an early vocation, while he was still
firmly in his teens, and as he walked with Jesus he found new and unfa-
miliar theological paths, including a theology inculturated into the US, a
five-fold conversion that challenges personal and institutional neurosis
and psychosis, and a constant dialog with the Great Church. The result
is a sincere act of gratitude for the opportunity he was given for this long
and productive walk.
BX4655 978-90-04-15530-5
The encroaching desert; Egyptian hagiography and the
medieval west.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jitse Dijkstra and Mathilde van Dijk.
BRILL, ©2006 286 p. $189.00
Historians, classicists, and religious scholars in Europe and the US
present case studies illuminating the context in which the theme of
Egyptian hagiography was used during Late Antiquity, and how its
themes and motives were transferred to and reused in the different con-
texts of the medieval West. The desert itself was not moving; the image
refers to how the myth of the desert teeming with monks spread through
the history of Christianity. Nine of the 10 essays are from a March 2005
workshop in Groningen, the Netherlands. Only names are indexed.
BX4700 2006-049192 978-90-04-15503-9
Parables; Bernard of Clairvaux’s mapping of spiritual
topography.
Brunn, Mette B. (Brill’s studies in intellectual history; v.148)
BRILL, ©2007 344 p. $129.00
Though he traveled much, Cistercian monk Bernard (1090-1153) never
visited the Holy Land, so he was free to envision Jerusalem as he thought
fit. Bruun (Centre for the Study of the Cultural Heritage of Medieval
Rituals, U. of Copenhagen) explains how his topography of the city was
composed of a range of theologico-literary topoi and included such fea-
tures as the Garden of Eden, Babylon, and the wilderness.
Assume that all books contain appropriate scholarly paraphernalia. We note if
the book should contain, but lacks, a subject index and/or a bibliography.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
BX4827 2005-044222 978-0-8204-7874-6
Doing theology when God is forgotten; the theological
achievement of Wolf Krötke.
Ziegler, Philip Gordon. (Issues in systematic theology; v.14)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 253 p. $70.95
Ziegler (systematic theology, U. of Aberdeen, Scotland) explores the
thought of contemporary German theologian Krötke. The study began as
his doctoral dissertation at the Toronto School of Theology, which was
completed before Krötke set out his full scale treatment of the doctrine
of God’s attributes in Gottes Klarheiten, but readers of that will find here
the process by which he developed that doctrine through his earlier
work.
BX4881 978-90-04-15454-4
Preachers by night; the Waldensian Barbes (15th-16th
centuries).
Audisio, Gabriel. Trans. by Claire Davison. (Studies in Medieval and
Reformation traditions; history, culture, religion, ideas; v.118)
BRILL, ©2007 258 p. $129.00
They called themselves the Poor of Lyon or the Poor of Christ, and their
detractors called them Valdesianus, followers of Vaudès, which came into
English as the Waldensians. Audisio (emeritus early modern history, U.
of Provence) says their movement was the only medieval religious dissent
to have endured pursuit and persecution from the 12th century to the
threshold of modern times. Here he describes the lives and trials of the
itinerant preachers as they struggled to maintain a clandestine faith. No
information is provided about an original edition.
BX4891 2006-021691 978-1-59477-135-4
Crusade against the Grail; the struggle between the
Cathars, the Templars, and the Church of Rome.
Rahn, Otto.
Inner Traditions International, ©2006 229 p. $16.95 (pa)
Completely convinced that Eschenbach’s Parzival was an historical
account and the heretical Cathars left clues in Pyrenean caves as to
where they had hidden the Holy Grail, Rahn traveled extensively in
southern France to conduct research. He also believed that the Cathars’
claims to higher spiritual integrity prompted violent suppression by
forces raised by the Vatican in the form of an indiscriminate crusade.
Throw in the Knights Templar, and Rahn found himself a member of the
SS working for Himmler. Rahn’s short and sad life, his obsessions and
his willingness to allow them to be used by nazi myth makers, and his
emulation of his beloved Cathars even unto the manner of his death over-
shadow his account of his search for the Grail. The result, here for the
first time translated into English, is bound to be controversial, popular,
or both.
BX4905 90-04-15007-2
A companion to John Wyclif, a late medieval theologian.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ian Christian Levy.
BRILL, ©2006 489 p. $124.00
Wyclif (1330-84) is best known as the first translator of the Bible into
English and as the inspiration for the popular heresy movement called
Lollardy. But scholars of religion and literature here focus on his the-
ology, which created the reputation that made his public positions and
actions important in his own time. Looking mostly at his Latin works,
they explore his logic and metaphysics, trinitarian and christological the-
ology, ecclesiology and political thought, and the Christian life. They also
review his life, the English Bible, and his opponents.
BX4931 2006-043093 978-90-04-15402-5
A companion to Anabaptism and spiritualism, 1521-1700.
Title main entry. Ed. by John D. Roth and James M. Stayer. (Brill’s
companions to the Christian tradition; v.6)
BRILL, ©2007 574 p. $163.00
For generations Reformation historians focused on who was right, and
radicals were generally studied by those of their own persuasion. In this
new approach to the study of historical Anabaptist belief and practice the
contributors include the coming generations by proposing new areas of
study. Their thirteen comprehensive essays cover the contributions of
Karlstadt and Muntzer to the Reformation of the Commoners, the begin-
nings of Swiss Anabaptism, Swiss and South German Anabaptism from
1526 to 1540, Schwenckfeld and Frank on early modern spiritualism,
Anabaptism in Moravia and Silesia, the Melchiorites and Munster, the
spiritualist Anabaptists, Mennonites and Doopsgezinden in the
Netherlands from 1535 to 1700, Marpeck and the later Swiss Brethren,
Anabaptism literature and hymnody, women and gender roles in
Anabaptist and spiritualist groups, Anabaptism martyrdom and its con-
siderations, and the role of Anabaptism in the early modern state.
–30–
BX5700 2006-046808 0-7432-6937-3
Rabble-rouser for peace; the authorized biography of
Desmond Tutu.
Allen, John.
Free Press, ©2006 481 p. $28.00
Awarded the Nobel Peace Prize in 1984, Archbishop Desmond Tutu,
spent years working against South Africa’s Apartheid system and is
credited by many for having played a major role in South Africa’s truth
and reconciliation process. In this biography of Tutu, Allen (the former
director of communications for South Africa’s Truth and Reconciliation
Commission) combines first-hand knowledge from his 30-year associ-
ation with Tutu, information from his interviews with the Tutu family
and access to the Tutu family papers, and archival research to present a
portrait of the man from his childhood through Tutu’s political activities
following the fall of Apartheid.
BX6462 2005-011123 1-57233-448-7
Exiled; voices of the Southern Baptist Convention holy
war.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carl L. Kell.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 194 p. $25.95
Nearly 30 former and current members of the Southern Baptist
Convention describe their experiences in the ongoing struggle between
fundamentalists and moderates or liberals in the denomination. Their
narratives detail questionable tactics to gain power by the fundamen-
talists and extreme actions once it is attained, crises of faith and practice,
and fears that the denomination is becoming radicalized over matters of
secular rather than sacred concern. The result is a study of what happens
when politics, rather than faith, becomes the heart of practice.
BX6495 2006-020550 978-0-87480-873-5
France Davis; an American story told.
Davis, France A. and Nayra Atiya.
University of Utah Press, ©2007 276 p. $24.95
Now pastor of the Calvary Baptist Church in Salt Lake City, Davis
recounts his life, from his 1946 birth in rural Georgia, through his
coming of age in the segregated South, to his life and work in the min-
istry. Oral historian Atiya has recorded and written his story. There is no
index or bibliography.
BX7635 978-0-7734-5568-9
The evolution of a Quaker community; Middletown
meeting, Bucks County, PA, 1750-1850.
Grundy, Martha Paxson.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 356 p. $119.95
Middletown Meeting started in 1750, built their third meeting house by
1793, made various improvements and repairs, was finally connected to
the city sewer system in 1969, and is still in regular use. Grundy makes
good use of the detailed records kept by the Meeting, including full nar-
ratives about committees, business, and the births, marriages and deaths
of those involved in the Meeting. Although works based on town records
abound, relatively few scholars consider the riches to be found in the
records of a community that has sustained itself for over 250 years in
America. Grundy wisely sticks to the first century of the Middletown
Meeting, concentrating on the evolution of faith development, early
reform, responses to slavery and war, changing economic views, evan-
gelism, internal politics that led to some separating from the Meeting and
politics in the wider world, and family patterns.
BX8495 2006-047057 978-0-7734-5541-2
John Wesley’s book stock and the Arminian Magazine
catalogue of 1789.
Rogal, Samuel J.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 177 p. $99.95
Rogal (emeritus humanities and fine arts, Illinois Valley Community
College, Oglesby) explores some of the personal and organizational chal-
lenges that Wesley, his brother Charles, and their Methodist organization
faced as they published, distributed, and sold books in the British Isles
and North American during the 18th century. Their enterprise was
intended to spread the evangelical message through books, he says, but
also to provide income to conduct that mission.
–31–
BX8611 2006-011340 0-87062-348-6
Reflections of a Mormon historian; Leonard L. Arrington
on the new Mormon history.
Arrington, Leonard J. Ed. by Reid L. Neilson and Ronald W. Walker.
The Arthur H. Clark Co., ©2006 360 p. $36.95
Arrington was one of the founders of the New Mormon History
movement in the late 20th century, and he was named Church Historian
of the Latter-Day Saints Church in 1972, the first professional historian to
hold that post. Reprinted here are 14 of his published essays reflecting
on his own efforts to reconcile his religious beliefs and his professional
standards. They are introduced by editors Neilson and Walker—fellow
historians from Brigham Young University, the bastion of academic
Mormonism.
BX9225 2006-014451 978-0-8108-5793-3
In the midst of early Methodism; Lady Huntingdon and
her correspondence.
Tyson, John R. with Boyd S. Schlenther. (Revitalization: explorations in
world Christian movements) (Pietist and Wesleyan series; no.19)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 331 p. $40.95 (pa)
She corresponded with the Wesleys, George Washington, John Jay and
African American poet Phillis Wheatley. She appointed chaplains and ran
the business of nearly 70 chapels, operated an orphanage and established
a seminary. The efforts of Selina Hastings, Countess of Huntington, were
integral to all the eighteenth century revival movement and to Methodism
in particular. In this collection, which begins as she is married and ends
as she is dying, we read of her concerns for John Wesley’s peace of mind,
her substantial finances, and her ability to know which candlesticks
were at which chapel awaiting the new preacher. We read her assess-
ments of the Calvinism with which she is so closely associated, and the
means by which she intends to illuminate all with it. Mostly, she informs
us that women of the period could be capable and powerful as well as
prayerful.
BX9422 2006-049210 978-90-04-15498-8
Reformed orthodoxy and philosophy, 1625-1750; Gisbertus
Voetius, Petrus van Mastricht, and Anthonius Driessen.
Goudriaan, Aza. (Brill’s series in church history; v.26)
BRILL, ©2006 391 p. $155.00
Voetius, Mastricht and Driessen were from successive generations, repre-
senting almost 200 years of thought about theological and philosophical
issues that were tearing their world apart. Goudriaan (philosophy,
Erasmus U.) reconstructs the views of these three leading lights of the
Reformed tradition, setting their arguments in context and comparing
their ideas on such issues as holy scripture, human reason, natural the-
ology, creation, Mosaic physics, Copernicus, divine accommodation, the
providence of God, secondary causality, the human being, the soul and
the body, special status, conscience, and theological and political aspects
of divine and natural law. Goudriaan’s conclusions are particular inter-
esting as they reflect the ongoing differences in political alignments and
in theology, the concepts of development and identity, and the priority of
Christian doctrine.
BX9422 2006-047805 978-90-04-15509-1
Religion without ulterior motive.
Title main entry. Ed. by E.A.J.G. Van der Borght. (Studies in reformed
theology; v.13)
BRILL, ©2006 248 p. $119.00
The complex relationship of religion and other forces such as politics and
culture can depress saints and delight despots. In this collection of 14
articles contributors consider Abraham van de Beek’s concept of “religion
without ulterior motives,” in which religion preserves its autonomy and
respects the autonomy of other elements of life. They address the issues
of whether this concept places religion only within the private domain,
whether it affords a gratuitous spirituality for Calvinists, and whether
Christian faith can be separated from Christian life. They also examine
the family, the reasons for belief in God, the questions of unity and
justification, the thoughts of Calvin on the kingdom of the Christ, and
approaches to the idea from Korean, Caribbean and African contexts,
closing with commentary on contextual theology and the Reformed
tradition.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
AUXILIARY SCIENCES OF HISTORY
CB245 2006-925551 1-932236-80-5
The triumph of the therapeutic; uses of faith after Freud.
Rieff, Philip.
ISI Books, ©2006 290 p. $18.00 (pa)
Rieff’s groundbreaking work, first published by Harper and Row in
1966, caught the scent of the cultural changes that came ripe in the next
40 years. In a series of essays that fully represent his conservative point
of view, Rieff finds irony, in that this therapeutic age, which identifies
itself as fiercely committed to the growth of human potential and per-
sonal fulfillment, is actually anti-therapeutic and even, in some respects,
anti-human. He regards Freud as the key transitional figure from the
Judeo-Christian to the purely therapeutic, and takes the broad view on
Freud’s legacy, changes in Western culture, community, the analytic
attitude, the replacement of the theologian by the therapist, including the
roles of martyr and myth-maker, and the passage to a nearly completely
therapeutic culture, complete with all the nearly unheralded irony.
CB245 2006-012437 978-0-7391-1612-8
The West at war.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bradley C.S. Watson.
Lexington Books, ©2006 222 p. $27.95 (pa)
Based on papers presented at an April 2005 conference of the same
name, this book contains 11 chapters examining cultural, political, reli-
gious, ethical, and policy dimensions of the “war on terror.” Watson
(American and Western political thought, Saint Vincent College) has
organized the material into sections that consider the nature of the clash
between “certain versions of Islam and/or Arab culture and the West,”
ethical and religious reformulations of “just war” and ethical limits of
liberal democracy “in the face of an enemy committed to its overthrow,”
and the political “hearts and minds” aspects of the Western war against
its declared enemies.
CB251 2006-016477 978-1-59797-062-4
The last crusade; Americanism and the Islamic
reformation.
Palmer, Michael A.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2007 273 p. $26.95
Surveying the history of the Islamic world from its origins to the present
time, Palmer (history, East Carolina U.) has constructed this narrative pri-
marily for the purpose of arguing that Islam is essentially a civilization
that has failed in the project of modernization. That, and not imperial or
other transgressions by the West, is the reason that Islamism of Osama
Bin Laden resonates within the Islamic world and sets it in conflict with
the forms of modernization known as Americanism. He predicts years
of conflict that will only end when the world has converted to Islam or
the West has been able to impose modernism on the Islamic world.
Distributed in the US by Books International.
CB351 2002-007485 1-58044-025-8
Studies on the personal name in later medieval England
and Wales.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dave Postles and Joel T. Rosenthal. (Studies in
medieval culture; 44)
Medieval Institute Pub., ©2006 391 p. $60.00
Focusing mostly on forenames—Christian or baptismal—but also some
family names, Historians from England, the US, and Tasmania explore
not particular names but naming patterns within particular social
groups and regions as well as in England generally. Chapters also look
at the Domesday jurors, and names and ethnicity in Anglo-Norman
England.
CB359 2006-042600 978-0-7614-7650-4
Renaissance and Reformation; 6v.
Title main entry. Ed. by James A. Patrick.
Marshall Cavendish, ©2007 1584 p. $671.36
The six volumes of this reference, written for the middle school student,
provide alphabetical entries on the people, issues, and events of the
European Renaissance and Reformation, as well as individual entries on
each country. Among the numerous biographical entries are many
artists, writers, philosophers, and political figures. The entries are well
illustrated in color and b&w plates and many include inset boxes that
detail related issues, events, or the careers of significant people. The
lengthy entry on theatre, for example, contains boxes on the Fool, the
commedia dell’arte, Lope de Rueda, Anthony Munday, and Thomas
Middleton, among others. Volume Six contains thematic indexes,
resources for further study, and a glossary, among other resources.
Patrick is the chancellor of the College of Saint Thomas More, Fort Worth,
Texas. The contributors teach mainly in the US and the UK.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
CB361 2005-037430 0-7546-4102-3
Curiosity and wonder from the Renaissance to the
Enlightenment.
Title main entry. Ed. by R.J.W. Evans and Alexander Marr.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 265 p. $99.95
European and American scholars of history and literature explore how
the two emotions were expressed during the early modern period. Their
topics include the metaphorical collecting of curiosities in France and
Germany, the jocund cabinet and the melancholy museum in 17th-
century English literature, and wonder-working and the culture of
automata.
CB411 2006-005879 978-0-8387-5619-5
Enlightenment and emancipation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Manning and Peter France. (The
Bucknell studies in eighteenth-century literature and culture)
Bucknell University Pr., ©2006 233 p. $51.50
Two of the most important elements of modernity, enlightenment and
enlightenment are studied separately, to the detriment of our under-
standing of what modernity actually is. Here contributors ask whether
enlightenment actually was a force for emancipation and come up with
a range of answers including Condorcet’s measure of the abolition of
slavery in the French colonies, Voltaire’s role in toleration and emanci-
pation, the relative enlightenment of Rousseau and Burke and the
resulting impact on paradox and rhetoric, the manipulated roar of the
crowd on the issue of liberty, civility in Scotland, science and sedition in
Bourbon South America, the anachronism of the queen consort, emanci-
pation by women’s pens, emancipation by women’s radical politics,
Diderot’s delicate approach to the critical, musical enlightenment, the
recovery or at least the creation of a necessary past, and the very real
and ever-present second face of the enlightenment. Distributed by
Associated University Presses.
CB430 2006-001715 978-1-4051-3190-2
Beautiful things in popular culture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alan McKee.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 231 p. $59.95
Scholars and other pop culture analysts explore such consumer icons as
superheroes in comics, shoes, crime fiction, “post-gay” websites, and a
villain in the Xena: Warrior Princess TV show that they highly rate. The
most unusual of the 13 essays treats why a 1943 propaganda film about
a massacred village can be considered beautiful. McKee (creative indus-
tries, Queensland U. of Technology) situates these attractions in the
context of critical debates over high vs. mass culture aesthetics. The few
b&w photos include self-styled pop princess Kylie Minogue, and the
beautifully styled Ducati 916 motorbike.
CB465 2006-048126 978-0-07-301903-1
Oceans in world history.
Buschmann, Rainer F. (Explorations in world history)
McGraw-Hill, ©2007 138 p. $21.88 (pa)
Buschmann (California State U., Channel Islands) intends this short work
as a complementary text for introductory world history and maritime
history courses. In four chapters, he explores the role played by maritime
exploration, trade, and travel in the interconnection of formerly isolated
societies. The first three chapters discuss topics reaching to antiquity
including the early oceanic migrations of Austronesian peoples, the
making of an Indian Ocean commercial and cultural world, and the cre-
ation of interacting Atlantic and Pacific webs in the context of European
maritime expansion. The final chapter describes the role of oceans in
globalization since 1800. The introduction and four chapters all include
a timeline of key events in both human and geological history.
ARCHAEOLOGY
CC72 978-1-84217-211-7
Social archaeology of funerary remains.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rebecca Gowland and Christopher Knüsel.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 312 p. $120.00
In this collection of 19 papers, contributors analyze the placement,
position and condition of human remains in a variety of sites and
explain the reasons they were buried, alone or in groups, in that par-
ticular manner in that particular place. Topics include surveys of the pat-
terns of preservation of human skeletons, Neolithic practice in England
and Ireland, cremation, animals as companions in death, dietary varia-
tions from analysis, combinations of cultures, age identity, gender,
lessons learned from monasteries, late Renaissance and early modern
disease culture, the investiture contest as a model, the incidence of vio-
lence and domestic violence, meanings behind fragmentation and body
modifications, and the art of the living in funerary performance.
Distributed by the David Brown Book Company.
–32–
CC76 2005-031879 978-1-4051-1885-9
The archaeologist’s fieldwork companion.
Kipfer, Barbara Ann.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 467 p. $74.95
Kipfer, a lexicographer and author, provides a guide to information and
materials needed when doing archeological fieldwork, compiled in one
volume that can be carried while in the field. Aimed at students, ama-
teurs, and professionals, the book covers classification and typology;
sample forms and records; lists and checklists; mapping, drawing, and
photographing settings and artifacts; measurements and conversion,
including charts and using equipment; and planning and designing
projects. Resources are listed in the final chapter, including organizations
and journals, ethical guidelines, legislation, and government information.
Chapters cover topics in alphabetical order; no index is supplied.
CC76 978-1-84217-233-9
Who owns objects?; the ethics and politics of collecting
cultural artefacts; proceedings.
St Cross—All Souls Seminar Series and Workshop (1st: 2004: Oxford,
UK) Ed. by Eleanor Robson et al.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 134 p. $48.00 (pa)
As an informed stroll through any western museum will attest, arche-
ology has become inextricably bound with ethics and considerations of
cultural sovereignty. Drawn from a seminar series held from October to
December 2004, and motivated in part by the looting of cultural objects
in recent military conflicts, these nine essays reflect the long and strong
debate amongst archeologists, museums, and the legal antiquities trade.
Their contributors describe the case for an open public debate on cultural
artifacts, changes in collecting over the past 50 years, accessibility to the
public and to scholars, new legal and voluntary codes, views from the
antiquities and coin trades, the debate on cultural property, recent UK
regulations against illicit trade in cultural objects, and lessons on repa-
triation learned from the Glasgow experience. Distributed in the US by
The David Brown Book Co.
CC77 2006925172 9780387342184
Between dirt and discussion; methods, methodology, and
interpretation in historical archaeology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steven N. Archer and Kevin M. Bartoy.
Springer, ©2006 235 p. $99.00
Probably a shower, of course, but anthropologists and related scientists
look at what else is necessary between digging up artifacts from his-
torical periods and presenting findings to a conference. They do not
champion some interpretive methodologies over others, but evaluate and
critique methods they use themselves or have seen others use, with a goal
of improving their internal consistency or their connection with larger
theoretical and methodological contexts. The 12 essays are from a 2004
conference in St. Louis, Missouri.
CC77 0-7156-3438-0
Rethinking wetland archaeology.
Van de Noort, Robert and Aidan O’Sullivan.
Duckworth, ©2006 167 p. $22.00 (pa)
The relevance and practicality of wetland archaeology has come under
criticism from many voices in mainstream archaeology, say the authors,
both UK-based wetland archaeologists. In this book, they suggest an
agenda for redirecting the discipline in order to integrate it into broader
geographical, cultural, and theoretical frameworks. They describe
important discoveries and figures, illustrate wetlands’ contributions in
the study of landscapes, and assess deficient theories including those
favoring “dryland” populations while overlooking the possibility of com-
munities that lived and worked in bogs and marshes. Finally, a dis-
cussion of politics and practice in wetlands archaeology portray the
challenges to establishing the discipline’s credibility and how its practi-
tioners may do so. Distributed by International Publishers Marketing.
CC79 978-1-84217-125-7
Beyond affluent foragers; rethinking hunter-gatherer
complexity; proceedings.
Conference of the International Council of Archaeozoology (9th: 2002:
Durham, UK) Ed. by Colin Grier et al.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 200 p. $80.00
The term affluent forager was coined some 20 years ago as a shorthand
for the specific socio-economic conditions of prehistoric coastal fisher-
hunters in productive environments, where they no one had to work very
hard to stay fat and happy. In one of several topical volumes that form
the proceedings of that assembly, archaeologists present case studies and
comparative and theoretical studies on such people. The 13 papers are
not indexed. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
–33–
CC79 978-1-84217-122-6
Recent advances in ageing and sexing animal bones;
proceedings.
Conference of the international Council of Archaeozoology (9th: 2002:
Durham) Ed. by Deborah Ruscillo.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 261 p. $130.00
This collection of 18 papers comes from the conference held in August
2002 and includes a range of new research and applications. Topics on
new approaches to aging and sexing include using osteohistology, exam-
ining mandibular dentition, a simple table test for sexing Candi Humeri,
and sexing fragmentary ungulate acetabulae. Papers on testing existing
methods of aging include reconciling rates of long bone fusion and tooth
eruption and wear, determining the accuracy of measuring tooth crown
heights, understanding problems and biases in age determination, and
using a Bayesian approach in tooth wear. Papers on tooth eruption and
wear are also in a separate section, and other general topics include
applications of osteometrics and epiphyseal fusion and sexual dimor-
phism. Distributed by The David Brown Book Co.
CC165 978-0-9741873-3-4
In the field; the archaeological expeditions of the Kelsey
Museum.
Talalay, Lauren E. and Susan E. Alcock.
Kelsey Museum of Archaeology, ©2006 103 p. $19.50 (pa)
The Kelsey Museum of Archaeology was founded by its namesake,
Frances W. Kelsey, at the University of Michigan in the 1920s. In this
book, all 20 of the museum’s expeditions to date are featured chronolog-
ically. B&w and color photographs are accompanied by text explaining
the sites and the significance and context of the team’s finds. Most of the
sites lie along the Mediterranean— Carthage, Cyrene and Apollonia in
Lybia, Paesteum in Italy, Pylos in Greece, and Kedesh and Sepphora in
Israel are among them. Inland sites include Seleucia-on-the-Tigris in Iraq,
Antioch of Pisidia in Turkey, the Monastery of St. Catherine at Mount
Sinai, and the museum’s current dig at Vorotan, Armenia. This book is
distributed by David Brown Book Co. It measures 10x10″.
CD974 2001-045862 978-0-8108-5742-1
Effective approaches for managing electronic records and
archives. (reprint, 2002)
Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce W. Dearstyne.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 167 p. $30.00 (pa)
Arguing that multiple approaches are needed towards the proper man-
agement of electronic records, Dearstyne (information studies, U. of
Maryland) presents eight articles from a variety of perspectives. After a
historical retrospective of the impact of digital technologies over the past
four decades, discussion address what exactly is meant by the term “elec-
tronic record,” the implication of attempting to translate theory into
practice in developing strategic approaches, and case studies of the
Minnesota state government and the National Archives of Canada. Also
included is a discussion of legal implications and issues. This is a paper-
bound reprint of a 2002 book.
CJ814 978-0-7141-1813-0
Roman provincial coinage; v.7.1: De Gordien I er á
Gordien III (238-244 aprés J.-C.). Part 1: Province d’Asie.
Butcher, Marguerite Spoerri.
The British Museum Press, ©2006 395 p. $240.00
Several thousand bronze coins are documented from the Roman province
of Asia in AD 238-244. Most were minted in the name of the emperor
Gordian II (238-244) and his wife Tranquillina, but some for Gordian I
and II, Pupienus, and Balbinus. They were minted by over 70 cities in
the province, and are analyzed by die. The arrangement is by Roman
conventus. The coins are from the same principal collections used
throughout the series. Co-published by Bibliothéque nationale de France;
the text is in French. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book
Company.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
CR4743 2006-016844 978-1-59477-117-0
An illustrated history of the Knights Templar.
Wasserman, James.
Destiny Books, ©2006 191 p. $19.95 (pa)
After their founding in 1119 they served crusade after crusade, won sig-
nificant battles, gathered power in the name of their faith and on their
own, and eventually became amongst the most admired and feared of
men. That is exciting enough, but in 1307 their order collapsed and their
leaders were burned under charges of heresy and perversion. Why would
this ill-fated private army become the object of so much rumor,
resentment, repression and research? Enthusiast Wasserman traces the
reasons why the Knights Templar continue to inspire tales both tall and
small and serve as the model for myriad secret organizations by
inquiring into the nature of their contacts with saints, kings, heretics and
the original Assassins. Along with more than 170 color and monochrome
illustrations he describes the history of the order, its significance in
modern thinking, and its treasures. Distributed by Inner Traditions.
CT25 2006-001570 978-0-472-09928-3
Early modern autobiography; theories, genres, practices.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ronald Bedford et al.
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 309 p. $70.00
This collection brings together researchers from literary studies, women’s
studies, history and politics in order to examine the practice of autobio-
graphical writing and self-representation in the 15th, 16th and 17th cen-
turies. Rejecting the critical tradition that insists on the 16th century as
a key moment in self-understanding, the contributors develop new
readings of significant autobiographical works while also suggesting the
importance of many texts and contexts that have rarely been analyzed in
detail. As a whole, the volume asserts that early modern writing displays
a constant interplay between the grand ideals of self and the recording
of quotidian events and observations.
CT119 2006-020187 978-1-58765-292-9
Great lives from history; the 19th century, 1801-1900; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Powell.
Salem Press, ©2006 2944 p. $360.00
The essays of this four-volume set comprise 617 taken from the Dictionary
of world biography (Salem Press, 1998-9) and 120 new essays. The entries
give biographies of people mainly from the U.S., France, Germany, and
England, though lives of people from many other countries are also
included. Of the entries, 123 are devoted to women. Many professions are
represented, of which the most common are: government and politics,
art, music, science, business, and literature. The bibliographies that
accompany each entry are annotated and have been updated. The con-
tributors are academics and independent scholars mainly in the US.
Appropriate for high school libraries.
CT214 2006-025152 978-0-07-353455-8
American portraits; biographies in United States history,
3d ed.; v.1.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen G. Weisner and William F. Hartford.
McGraw-Hill, ©2008 321 p. $47.19 (pa)
For use as a supplement in American history survey courses, this volume
(the first in a two-volume set) brings together biographical essays on
figures such as John Smith, Daniel Boone, Tecumseh, Andrew Jackson,
Nat Turner, Harriet Beecher Stowe, and William T. Sherman. Weisner
(history, Springfield Technical Community College) and Hartford, a
writer and project editor, present in 19 chapters, profiles of individuals
that show how they influenced and were influenced by historical events.
Articles were selected based on their readability and interest, and are pre-
ceded by contextual introductions to sections, which are organized
chronologically. Primary documents and introductory notes are included.
Changes to this edition include replacing the articles on Benjamin
Franklin and Phyllis Wheatley with more current pieces on them. A new
essay on Sarah Bagley is included, and the bibliographies have been
updated. The book lacks an index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
CT214 2006-025152 978-0-07-321027-8
American portraits; biographies in United States history,
3d ed.; v.2.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen G. Weisner and William F. Hartford.
McGraw-Hill, ©2008 324 p. $47.19 (pa)
This second volume in a two-volume set collects biographical essays on
figures in American history, and is meant for college survey courses. The
three sections and 18 chapters are organized chronologically and feature
people such as John Rockefeller, Theodore Roosevelt, W.E.B. Du Bois,
Margaret Sanger, Eleanor Roosevelt, Martin Luther King Jr., Betty Friedan,
and Cesar Chavez. Weisner (history, Springfield Technical Community
College) and Hartford, a writer and project editor, aim to profile these
individuals and also show their influence on history as well as history’s
influence on them. In this edition, the article on Huey Long has been
replaced with a more recent one on him, and essays on Ronald Reagan
and Bill Gates have been added. Articles were selected based on their
readability and interest, and are preceded by a contextual introduction in
each section, along with introductory notes to each chapter and supple-
mental primary documents. The bibliographies have been updated.
There is no index.
CT225 2006-019847 978-0-7627-4101-4
Laid to rest in California; a guide to the cemeteries and
grave sites of the rich and famous.
Brooks, Patricia and Jonathan Brooks.
Insiders’ Guide, ©2006 340 p. $15.95 (pa)
This guide to about 1,000 gravesites of movie stars and other celebrities
focuses on those in California. Organized by region, the sites are then
arranged alphabetically by town and cemetery. Each grave is listed with
birth and death dates and exact location in the cemetery. Two hundred
and fifty of the listings include obituaries, as well as nearby homes and
close places to take a food break. Some of the listings: Truman Capote,
Frank Zappa, Dean Martin, Marilyn Monroe, Liberace, John Ritter, Walt
Disney, Nat King Cole, and Richard Nixon. B&w photos of cemeteries and
many gravestones are incorporated, and location addresses and phone
numbers are listed. There is no bibliography. Patricia Brooks has written
other guidebooks, and Jonathan Brooks is a freelance journalist.
CT274 2006-013892 978-1-889963-88-4
Good company; a mining family in Fairbanks, Alaska.
Isto, Sarah Crawford.
U. of Alaska Press, ©2007 254 p. $24.95 (pa)
This is a historical memoir of the author’s family in Fairbanks, Alaska.
Her parents, gold miner Jim Crawford and his wife Alta, were both born
in the first decade of the 20th century during an era of optimism for the
social benefits of technology; they died in 1994 and 2005, respectively.
Using family interviews and manuscripts, historical texts, university and
city documents, and newspaper articles, Isto details the family’s private
history, politics, and legend against the backdrop of 20th century global
events. Isto is a Juneau-based retired physician and is a skillful, evocative
writer. Unlike many memoirs, the book is referenced and indexed.
CT275 2005-021510 0-299-21754-X
Chasing Montana; a love story.
Soderlind, Lori.
U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 272 p. $22.95 (pa)
Soderlind (journalism, Norwalk Community College, Connecticut)
describes this autobiographical narrative as a work of creative non-
fiction—names changed, time frames adjusted. A child of the 1970s, she
writes about seeking self understanding as she flees New Jersey for
Montana.
CT862 978-0-7165-2842-5
Kathleen Lynn; Irishwoman, patriot, doctor.
Ó HÓgartaigh, Margaret.
Irish Academic Press, ©2006 180 p. $75.00
Ó Hógartaigh (medicine, Victoria U. of Wellington, New Zealand)
presents a biography of Kathleen Lynn (1874-1955), a prominent, contro-
versial female physician who worked with Dublin’s poor, established a
hospital for infants, and was a political activist involved with Sein Féin.
Dr. Lynn’s life offers a lens on changes in the medical profession, views
on public health, suffragism, and Irish politics during this period. Based
on primary and secondary sources, the book includes photos of Dr. Lynn
with staff and patients at St. Ultan’s. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–34–
CT3202 2006-008290 0-7876-7585-7
Dictionary of women worldwide; 25,000 women through
the ages; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Commire and Deborah Klezmer.
Thomson Gale, ©2007 2572 p. $325.00
Consulting standard biographical dictionaries while editing their ency-
clopedia Women in World History, the editors found that entries on
women typically accounted for five percent or less of the texts and that
even the women that were included were typically accorded shallower
treatment than men. Some 25,000 alphabetical entries provide details on
the lives of significant women in world history from the 32nd century
B.C.E. to the present, including birth and death dates, important relatives,
and accomplishments. Also included are 85 genealogical charts of his-
torical ruling families, largely European, but also including Japan,
Ancient Egypt, and Byzantium. The entries are presented in the first two
volumes and the final third volume contains listings of entries indexed
by historical era, geography, and occupation.
HISTORY (GENERAL)
D16 90-04-15646-1
The idea of universal history in Greece; from Herodotus
to the age of Augustus.
Alonso-Núñez, José Miguel.
J.C. Gieben, ©2006 152 p. $54.00
Alonso-Núñez has expanded a lecture he delivered in the history and
classics departments at Harvard University in May 1998. He explores the
evolution among Greek and Roman writers of the idea that there is a
single history of the world. He points out that a universal historiography
requires a universal conception of time and space in which humans are
the actor. Throughout the evolution, he finds, some writers focused on
politics and others on ethnic and cultural aspects. Dist. in the US by Brill.
D16 2004-116090 0-7619-4773-6
Teaching and learning history.
Timmins, Geoffrey et al. (Teaching & learning the humanities in
higher education)
Sage Publications, ©2005 250 p. $40.95 (pa)
Written by a team of history professors at the U. of Central Lancashire,
UK, this text examines current trends and practices in the learning and
teaching of history. The focus is on undergraduate programs in Britain,
Ireland, North America, and Australasia. A sampling of topics includes
progression and differentiation; dissertations and content; and seminars
and group work. Assessment issues are covered in the last chapter.
D20 2006-046708 978-0-07-353453-4
Traditions and encounters; a brief global history.
Bentley, Jerry H. et al.
McGraw-Hill, ©2008 675 p. $71.25 (pa)
Bentley, Zeiger, and Streets (history, U. of Hawai’i and Washington State
U.) present this text for high school and undergraduate courses in world
history, de-emphasizing Western-centered perspective in favor of more
global ones. Twenty-nine chronologically arranged chapters are
organized under the larger epochs of the seven eras of global history,
beginning with the early complex societies of 3500 to 500 B.C. The title
of the book describes the themes that unify the book’s content: the tra-
ditions of individual societies and the encounters, ideological and
physical, among them. Each chapter is approximately 20 pages, and
opens with a vignette to set the stage for the era in question. Additionally,
each contains a written primary source, as well as dozens of maps and
images. Chapters conclude with a chronology, a summary, and sugges-
tions for further reading. Specific topics include: early African societies
and the Bantu migrations, the empires of Persia, the realm of Islam, the
foundations of Christian society, nomadic empires and Eurasian inte-
gration, the making of industrial society, and World Wars I and II.
D25 2006-048603 978-0-19-280653-6
Battlefield; decisive conflicts in history.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Holmes and Martin Marix Evans.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 376 p. $30.00
Holmes (military and security studies, Cranfield U. and the Defence
Academy of the UK) has taken the battle entries from The Oxford
Companion to Military History, of which he was general editor and
presents them here, revised according to recent scholarship. He has also
added new articles in order to provide somewhat greater balance than
the earlier work, which emphasized events in Europe and North America
in the past three centuries. The entries typically describe the events and
results of strategically important battles in major wars in rather broad-
brush strokes. The material covers battles in Ancient Egypt to the 2003
Anglo-American invasion of Iraq.
–35–
D25 2006-015366 978-0-313-33536-5
Dictionary of battles and sieges; a guide to 8,500 battles
from antiquity through the twenty-first century; 3v.
Jaques, Tony.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 1354 p. $299.95
This three-volume work alphabetically lists 8,500 individual battles from
across the world’s recorded history, from the Battle of Megiddo in 1468
BC to the US invasion of Iraq. Making no attempt to distinguish or cate-
gorize the different battles, the author includes the following information
in the entries: the name and date of the battle, the name of the war and
the basic military context in which the battle was fought, the opposing
commanders (if known), and the outcome of the fighting. A chrono-
logical reference guide to all the battles included precedes the alpha-
betical entries. An appendix lists significant wars that did not have major
recorded battles. A bibliography and an index are also included.
D25 2005-058936 978-0-8160-6577-6
Dictionary of wars, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by George Childs Kohn.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 692 p. $85.00
Kohn has written and edited numerous reference texts, including three
other Facts on File works. The third edition of this Dictionary provides
summaries of all notable global conflicts, civil wars, mutinies, punitive
expeditions, undeclared wars, rebellions, and revolutions from ancient
times to the present, spanning some 4,000 years. Completely updated and
expanded to reflect changes since the 1999 second edition, it now con-
tains some 1,850 cross-referenced entries. Contains both a geographical
and general index, but lacks bibliographical information either at the
end of each entry or as a general listing at the end of the text. Illustrated
in b&w.
D25 978-1-59237-116-7
Encyclopedia of warrior peoples and fighting groups, 2d
ed.
Davis, Paul K. and Allen Lee Hamilton.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2006 654 p. $135.00
Aimed at high school students, this encyclopedia takes readers on a tour
of duty that includes the Arab Legion, the Buffalo Soldiers, the Goths, the
Green Berets and the Knights Templar. In addition to the detailed por-
traits of important military forces and militarized groups throughout
history, the text contains supplemental readings, including letters home
from Roman soldiers, the Samurai Creed, and Robert E. Lee’s “Farewell
to the Army of Northern Virginia,” as well as maps of important regions,
such as the kingdoms of the Fertile Crescent, Napoleon’s Empire, the
Roman Empire and the British invasion of Zululand. This second edition
includes an index of entries and a historical timeline that puts the entries
in chronological order.
D25 2006-029128 978-0-275-99315-3
Fields of conflict; battlefield archaeology from the Roman
Empire to the Korean War; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Douglas Scott et al.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 450 p. $175.00
This two-volume set grew out the 2004 eponymous conference on battle-
field archaeology, the third to address the field and the first to be held
in association with the American Battlefield Protection conference. The
24 papers presented open with discussions of techniques, theories, and
methodologies for the infant discipline, but the bulk of the papers report
the results of research at battlefield sites dating from the Roman Battle
of Varus in 9 AD to the Battle for Hill 209 during the Korean War. A con-
cluding chapter takes stock of the state of the discipline and future direc-
tions.
D51 978-0-7156-3448-6
Celebrity in antiquity; from media tarts to tabloid queens.
Garland, Robert. (Classical inter/faces)
Duckworth, ©2006 177 p. $23.50 (pa)
Proving that celebrities can exist without paparazzi, Garland (classics,
Colgate U.) highlights the careers of such renowned individuals as
Alcibiades, Socrates, Alexander the Great, Julius Caesar, Cleopatra,
Augustus, Jesus, Nero and Theodosia in terms of their successful self-pro-
motion. Garland concludes with a comparison of celebrity in antiquity
and the present day. Distributed by International Publishers Marketing.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
D62 978-0-905205-43-4
Anastasius I; politics and empire in the late Roman
world.
Haarer, F.K. (ARCA; classical and medieval texts, papers and mono-
graphs; no.46)
Francis Cairns Ltd., ©2006 351 p. $130.00
Striding boldly where her post-modern colleagues fear to tread, Haarer
(classics, King’s College, London) presents an imperial biography. She
uses the reign of the Roman emperor Anastasius, 491-518, as a
framework within which to narrate and evaluate the political, economic,
military, and religious policies pursued at the turn of the sixth century.
The Isaurian revolt, foreign policy in the east and west, the search for
religious compromise, administration and domestic policy, and building
are the areas she considers. The study is revised from her 1998 Ph.D. dis-
sertation for Oxford University. Distributed in the US by the David Brown
Book Company.
D128 2006-389491 1-84415-360-6
The medieval soldier. (reprint, 1971)
Norman, Vesey.
Pen and Sword, ©2006 278 p. $16.99 (pa)
Norman describes how the function of the military changed from the
beginnings of feudalism with the early Lombards and Franks, moving to
the Vikings and Saxons, getting down to such details as how chain mail
was actually made and used. He describes the rise of chivalry and the
process of becoming a knight, the growth of the military orders and their
influence in the Crusades, the campaigns of the Crusades and their
dependence on technologies of arms and armor, and the ships that
brought them to those campaigns. This is a reprint of the 1971 edition
published by Arthur Barker Limited. Distributed by Casemate.
D155 2006-019410 1-57607-862-0
The Crusades; an encyclopedia; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alan V. Murray.
ABC-CLIO, ©2006 1390 p. $385.00
Murray (medieval studies, U. of Leeds, UK), together with an editorial
board containing many impressive credentials in Crusade scholarship,
have assembled an authoritative resource on the Crusades that encom-
passes the people, places, events, and ideology in entries that are acces-
sible to the advanced high school and undergraduate student and will be
of interest to the general reader. There are 1000 signed entries on the
Crusades from the 11th-14th centuries, written by 120 specialists based
in 25 countries. Each entry concludes with a list of scholarly bibliography
(often in languages other than English). Main subjects for the entries
include countries, cities, military orders, kings, battles, queens, patriar-
chates, and individual crusades, among other topics. Many maps and
b&w illustrations, a selection of primary sources, and a bibliography by
region are included.
D157 2006-926785 978-0-7546-4077-6
The chronicle of Ibn al-Athir for the crusading period
from al-Kamil fi’l-ta’rikh ; p t . 1 : T h e y e a r s 4 9 1 - 5 4 1 / 1 0 9 7 -
1146; the coming of the Franks and the Muslim response.
Ibn al-Athir, Izz al-Din. Trans. by D.S. Richards. (Crusade texts in trans-
lation; 13)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 401 p. $99.95
The Complete Work of History begins with creation and ends abruptly in
629/1231-2 when Ibn al-Athir’s died. This volume takes up the story as
he introduces his narrative reference to the background and initial
progress of the First Crusade, and ends with the death of Zanki, which
may be understood to mark the end of a stage in the response of Islam
to the phenomenon of the Crusades. It is not concerned with the
Crusades alone, however, but ranges far as to Baghdad, to Turkish
nomads invading Transoxania, and to the rise and fall of dynasties in
the Maghreb and Spain. Richards provides footnote explaining references
and sometimes literary features.
D214 2005-054498 1-57488-971-0
War in European history, 1494-1660; the essential
bibliography.
Black, Jeremy. (Essential bibliographies)
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 116 p. $14.95 (pa)
Black (history, U. of Exeter, UK) believes that there are two, equally
important, areas of military history: accounts of the military, its organi-
zation, weaponry, and conflicts and consideration of the relationship
between war and wider themes of international competition, state-
building, and social developments, among others. Both of these themes
are present in his brief historiographical essay surveying the main topics
of European warfare from 1494 to 1660. The essay is followed by a bib-
liography which point readers towards what Black believes are the most
important scholarly works on the topic.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
D299 2006-007335 0-684-31359-6
Europe 1789 to 1914; encyclopedia of the age of industry
and empire; 5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Merriman and Jay Winter. (Scribner
library of modern Europe)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 2,500 p. $595.00
Written by academic specialists at universities in Europe, Australia, and
North America, the entries of this reference are authoritative but also
accessible to the undergraduate student and general reader. There are
entries for countries, cities, and people, as well as different styles of art
and architecture, events, inventions, and political parties. An approach
that emphasizes society and daily life is present, and entries are included
describing classes and class systems. As is common in encyclopedias, the
majority of the entries are biographical, with many entries devoted to
composers, artists, and writers, as well as the more expected political
figures and leaders. The volumes are well-illustrated with b&w images
and groups of color plates devoted to different themes. Each entry con-
cludes with a bibliography. Maps are provided at the beginning of all
five volumes. Volume five contains a comprehensive bibliography.
Forming a comprehensive reference when combined with its companion
set, Europe since 1914; encyclopedia of the age of war and reconstruction,
the substance and quality of the entries is consistently high throughout
all 10 volumes.
D424 2006-014427 0-684-31365-0
Europe since 1914; encyclopedia of the age of war and
reconstruction; 5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Merriman and Jay Winter. (Scribner
library of modern Europe)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 3135 p. $595.00
Encompassing the era from 1914 to the present, the entries of this 5-
volume reference provide an often sobering insight into the many cata-
clysmic events of Europe’s recent past. Because their experience bears
close ties to more western Europe, both Russia and Turkey are included.
The two world wars, their participants, victims, and long-term and far-
ranching impacts are a predominent theme. Many entries are biogra-
phies—of writers, artists, filmmakers, political figures, and thinkers.
Entries are included for individual countries and for some major cities,
particularly where their history during this era was of widespread
importance. Other categories include economic history, concepts and
ideas, daily life, law, and philosophy. A thematic list of contents and a
very substantial comprehensive index are included in volume five. Both
editors are at Yale U.; the contributors are academics and independent
scholars in North America and Europe. The volumes are well illustrated
with b&w images and a group of full-page maps is found at the
beginning of each volume. “This is a companion set to the 5-volume
Europe 1789 to 1914; Encyclopedia of the Age of Industry and Empire.”
D511 2006-047268 978-0-582-42379-4
The origins of the First World War, 3d ed.
Joll, James and Gordon Martel. (Origins of modern wars)
Longman, ©2007 346 p. $36.00 (pa)
Martel (history, U. of Northern British Columbia) updates Joll’s (d. 1994)
account first published in 1984 and augmented but not thoroughly
revised in 1992. They look beyond the immediate well known crisis of
1914 to find the origins of The Great War in such trends and conditions
as the alliance system and the old diplomacy, the primacy of domestic
politics, the international economy, and the mood in 1914. They include
maps happily at the end for easy reference.
D521 2005-027236 978-0-8160-6061-0
World War I.
Carlisle, Rodney P. (Eyewitness history)
Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 454 p. $75.00
Carlisle (history, Rutgers U.) has written numerous articles and some 15
books on history. Designed for general readers, his latest text provides a
basic overview of WWI—how it started, the high cost of lives, why the
U.S. became involved, and its connections to later conflicts. The material
is presented in a chronological series of 12 chapters, covering the years
1903 through 1927; each chapter features an introductory essay, a
chronicle of events, and a selection of direct eyewitness testimony from
statesmen and cabinet members, journalists, frontline tourists, soldiers in
the field, sailors and survivors of torpedoed ships, and ordinary citizens.
Also included are 28 official documents, biographies of 58 key indi-
viduals, a glossary of technical and informal expressions of the era, and
16 maps. Illustrated in b&w.
–36–
D531 2006-931225 1-60105-035-6
Ludendorff’s own story; August 1914 - November 1918;
the Great War from the Siege of Liege to the signing of
the Armistice as viewed from the grand headquarters of
the German army. (reprint, 1918)
Ludendorff, Erich von.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2006 473 p. $49.95 (pa)
A reprint edition first published in 1918, this volume is an account by
Ludendorff, who was a Quartermaster-General of the German Army
during World War I. He recounts in detail the war from this point of
view—as well as his role as Chief of the General Staff in the Eastern
Front—from August 1914 to November 1918, and details such as cam-
paigns in Poland, Masuria, Russia, and Rumania, in addition to the
conduct of war.
D545 2006-931228 1-60105-038-0
Our greatest battle (the Meuse-Argonne). (reprint, 1919)
Palmer, Frederick.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2006 629 p. $39.90 (pa)
A soldier and press relations officer in the American Expeditionary Force
during World War I, Palmer disdained the jerry-built histories and per-
sonal narratives that flooded the market as soon as war-time censorship
ended. As a result of special facilities for information and observation,
he says, he offers a comprehensive and intelligent account of the greatest
battle in which Americans ever fought. The history continues and sup-
plements his America in France.
D546 978-0-85303-691-3
The king’s own loyal enemy aliens; German and Austrian
refugees in Britain’s armed forces, 1939-45.
Leighton-Langer, Peter.
Vallentine Mitchell, ©2006 401 p. $85.00
Leighton-Langer was one of them. He left his native Vienna for Britain in
1938 at aged 15 and took time out of his business career to serve as a
soldier during World War II. Most of the information for his account of
the Germans and Austrians fighting with the British—besides his own
experience—comes from published sources, but he also consulted the
National Archives in London, especially the diaries to be found there.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
D570 2006-009170 978-0-521-86434-3
The AEF way of war; the American army and conflict in
World War I.
Grotelueschen, Mark Ethan.
Cambridge U. Pr., ©2007 387 p. $75.00
Taking his cue from military historians who have begun to investigate
the role of ideas in the conduct of war, Grotelueschen (US Air Force
Academy) examines the relationship among command, doctrine, and
operational adaptation in the World War I campaigns of the American
Expeditionary Forces. His narrative centers on the ideological war waged
within the AEF between commanders who adhered to the traditional
ideas of the prewar army based on infantry manpower, the rifle and
bayonet, maximization of maneuver, and hopes for decisive operational
or strategic results and those who increasingly appreciated the modern,
industrial ideas more prevalent in the European armies based on the
integration of modern weaponry, maximization of firepower, and
methodical attacks on specific units in pursuit of modest operational
results. In analyzing the AEF’s doctrinal war, he focuses on the
organization, training, and combat operations of four of the most active
divisions.
D570 2006-026200 0-313-33181-2
World War I.
Keene, Jennifer D. (The Greenwood Press daily life through history
series)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 217 p. $65.00
Keene (history, Chapman U.) provides, for students and general readers,
an account of the daily lives of American enlisted men during World War
I, recounting their experiences from training camps to France and back
home. She gives an overview of the causes of the war and the overall
strategy, but focuses mostly on their experiences in service. Topics dis-
cussed include the effect of the war on men and women at home;
morale, personal habits, and religion; diversity, particularly the experi-
ences of African American and foreign born soldiers and female nurses
and war workers; fighting and service roles; casualties, death, and the
1918 influenza pandemic; the reaction of soldiers to the Armistice; and
their postwar lives.
–37–
D603 2006-001168 978-0-8108-5662-2
French strategic and tactical bombardment forces of
World War I.
Martel, René. Trans. by Allen Suddaby. Ed. by Steven Suddaby.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 461 p. $60.00 (pa)
Martel, who fought the Great War from the sky as an observer and bom-
bardier, first published this most important and detailed description of
the French art of bombardment in 1939. It is only now that his work has
been translated into English and edited, revealing how strategy and
tactics in French aviation warfare developed as the war progressed to
include simple bomb-dropping, creating and effectively using bomb-
sights, targeting based on intelligence, flying in formation and as escorts,
and using aerial photography to assess damage. The able and accessible
translation gives the general reader better insight into the non-technical
aspects of the world of the bombardier, as Martel also writes of the prop-
aganda war about bombing on both sides and closely describes the work
of pioneers in war aviation to make a new technology fit a war fought
on very traditional principles.
D744 2006-015707 0-275-98879-1
Thanks for the memories; love, sex, and World War II.
Leder, Jane Mersky.
Praeger, ©2006 185 p. $39.00
Freelance writer and journalist Mersky examines the impact of WWII on
relationships between men and women. Focusing on the areas of love,
sex, and marriage, she describes how the war’s disruption of ordinary
home life and the subsequent entry of women into the workforce allowed
for a relaxing of the social restrictions that had formerly kept women in
check. The personal stories of ordinary people—single, married, military,
and civilian—are interwoven throughout the narrative.
D756 2006-046517 978-0-7432-8710-4
11 days in December; Christmas at the Bulge, 1944.
Weintraub, Stanley.
Free Press, ©2006 201 p. $25.00
The Allied troops huddled and died in mist and mud, trapped in pockets
by driving rain and snow. No one had expected Hitler to amass forces
secretly and break through the lines of the Ardennes forest, or the fierce
fighting that was to be called the Battle of the Bulge, and the Allied
troops desperately lacked food, supplies, arms and ammunition. The only
way to get supplies was by air. The only way to win was to conduct air
strikes. If only the weather would clear. Then George S. Patton strode into
a Luxembourg chapel and began a private prayer with “Sir, whose side
are you on?” The weather cleared. Weintraub (arts and humanities
emeritus, Pennsylvania State U.) takes readers through some of the most
harrowing days in history, giving insights from commanders, soldiers,
and even prisoners of war like Kurt Vonnegut, Jr.
D756 2006-025916 978-0-275-99094-7
Destination Normandy; three American regiments on D-
Day.
Bennett, G.H. (Studies in military history and international affairs)
Praeger Security International, ©2007 222 p. $49.95
Bennett (humanities, U. of Plymouth, UK) examines the American
involvement in the Normandy campaign at the regimental level, focusing
on the 22nd Infantry Regiment, which landed on Utah Beach in June
1942 and became involved in a war of siege against German fortifica-
tions; the 116th Infantry Regiment, which took heavy casualties in forcing
its way off Omaha Beach and breaking through the Nazi’s Atlantic Wall;
and the 507th Parachute Infantry Regiment, which suffered the worst
misdrop of any American parachute regiment and wound up fighting in
isolated groups for control of bridges, roads, and dry land in the midst
of a vast swampland.
D757 2006-019333 978-1-56663-713-8
Firestorm; the bombing of Dresden, 1945.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Addison and Jeremy A. Crang.
Ivan R. Dee, Inc., ©2006 260 p. $16.95 (pa)
Among the most controversial episodes in the history of WWII, the
bombings of the German city of Dresden by English and American forces
resulted in the deaths of thousands of civilians. In this volume, nine con-
tributions from leading international scholars discuss the attacks and
their long-term consequences from a wide range of viewpoints. The
editors are affiliated with the U. of Edinburgh.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
D757 2006-026012 0-275-99185-7
Rommel’s lieutenants; the men who served the Desert Fox,
France, 1940.
Mitcham, Samuel W.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 202 p. $49.95
In 1940 in France, German Field Marshal Erwin Rommell (a.k.a. “The
Desert Fox”) led his first field command of WWII. This text for scholars
and general readers tells the stories of the men who worked under
Rommell in the 7th Panzer Division during this campaign, including his
staff officers and company, battalion, and regimental commanders. The
volume is illustrated with b&w archival photographs. Mitcham is the
author of 20 books on WWII.
D760 2006-014787 978-0-15-101404-0
Blitz; the story of December 29, 1940.
Gaskin, Margaret.
Harcourt, ©2006 430 p. $27.00
As she conducted research for a completely different story in her own
town, London journalist Gaskin kept running into the date, and finally
realized that before she could continue, she had to reconstruct that one
night of German bombing in one square mile of London. She draws on
news reports, letters, memoirs, and other sources to discuss the personal
as well as military aspects.
D764 2006-010951 1-59797-010-7
Eastern Front day by day, 1941-45; a photographic
chronology.
Crawford, Steve.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 192 p. $19.95 (pa)
Photographs and maps abound in this chronology describing key events
in the four year battle for the Eastern Front during World War II, which
killed five million Germans and 35 million Soviets. Key occasions of
fighting, strategy, and diplomacy on both sides are described by the day
on which they took place. Days that marked major campaigns such as
Stalingrad and Kursk receive longer treatment, and are accompanied by
full color maps. Sidebars provide biographies on major personalities
from the Eastern Front; explain technologies and strategies that were
employed; and describe the different factions of the armed forces on both
sides (i.e. the Panzer Division), their characteristics, and their specific
purpose.
D764 2006-019691 1-84545-186-4
Exploitation, resettlement, mass murder; political and
economic planning for German occupation policy in the
Soviet Union, 1940-1941.
Kay, Alex J. (Studies on war and genocide; v.10)
Berghahn Books, ©2006 242 p. $75.00
Although they were never fully implemented by the Nazis because
Hitler’s expected easy victory over Soviet forces never materialized, plans
for the political and economic administration of an occupied Soviet
Union nevertheless existed and influenced the chaotic policy that actually
did come to fruition. Kay (PhD, history, Humboldt U., Germany)
describes the development of this planning and analyzes the extent to
which economic and political plans interacted and conflicted with one
another. Beyond this question, the two most important aspects of the
planning that are discussed in the work are the Nazi’s vision of a
Neuordnung for the Soviet territories in which political borders would be
arranged along ethnic lines and Soviet populations would be forced to
make way for the resettlement of Germanic peoples and the Hungerpolitik
or “starvation policy” that aimed toward the forceful seizure of agricul-
tural produce and the consequent starvation of the Soviet population.
D764 2005-016578 978-0-7425-4481-9
War of annihilation; combat and genocide on the Eastern
Front, 1941.
Megargee, Geoffrey P. (Total war (unnumbered))
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 177 p. $24.95
Megargee (Center for Advanced Holocaust Studies) locates all the flaws in
the myth that the military geniuses of the Wehrmacht were morally
correct and the SS was completely responsible. A skilled military his-
torian, he finds that the military operations and war crimes were inex-
tricably linked, that genocide and war crimes were a part of the military
plan reinforced by early victories, and that by the time the Wehrmacht
made its idiot move to Moscow the killing of civilians had become
routine. He closes with fascinating chapters on how nazi military failures
led to exposure of the policy of genocide and how post-war politics fac-
tored in the fabrication of history.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
D767 1-86105-941-8
The Banzai hunters; the small boat operations that
defeated the Japanese, 1944-5.
Haining, Peter.
Robson Books, ©2006 192 p. $29.95
This account traces the efforts of Army and Navy soldiers from the
British Commonwealth to take over the Arakan coast while the troops of
the British 14th Army in India retook Burma during World War II. Using
official documents, reports, and recollections, Haining recounts their
story. He is a former journalist, magazine editor, and publishing exec-
utive. Distributed in the US by Trafalgar Square.
D767 2006-015542 1-59114-096-X
Fortnight of infamy; the collapse of Allied airpower west
of Pearl Harbor, December 1941.
Burton, John.
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 351 p. $32.95
While America was preoccupied with the aftermath of Pearl Harbor,
Japan opened the largest front in the history of warfare: an aircraft-
driven invasion of colonial possessions throughout the Far East that
crumbled the entire Western imperial legacy of the 19th century. This
work overviews the collapse of Allied air forces during the period
between December 8 and 24, 1941. Written for a wide audience, it gives
readers a cockpit view of the events and an understanding of why such
heavy losses occurred. B&w historical photos are included. Burton is a
former naval systems engineer.
D767 2006-017325 1-59114-466-3
Lonely vigil; coastwatchers of the Solomons. (reprint,
1977)
Lord, Walter. (Bluejacket books)
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 322 p. $17.95 (pa)
In 1942-43, the Solomon Islands were at the center of the conflict between
U.S./Allied forces and the Japanese as they fought for mastery of the
Pacific. This text tells the story of the Coastwatchers—daring individuals
who operated behind Japanese lines for the purpose of gathering critical
intelligence and helping downed pilots. Lord based his narrative on infor-
mation gathered through interviews with participants as well as on
archival and field research. This is a reprint of a volume originally pub-
lished in 1977 in New York by Viking Press.
D768 2006-010909 978-0-7425-3741-5
Latin America during World War II.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas M. Leonard and John F. Bratzel.
(Jaguar books on Latin America series)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 226 p. $29.95 (pa)
Twelve international academics contribute 11 essays to the first full-
length study exploring World War II from the perspectives of various
Latin American countries, regions, and territories including Argentina,
Brazil, Central America, Chile, Columbia, the Dominican Republic,
Ecuador, Mexico, Panama, Puerto Rico, and Venezuela. Each of the essays
examines how the specific country, region, or territory responded to the
outbreak of war in Europe in 1939 and the events leading to the global
conflict that erupted in December 1941; its policies toward the Axis, how
it dealt with the internal Axis threat; if and how it cooperated with the
Allies; and its responses to the economic and social dislocations caused
by the war.
D769 2005-905610 1-57510-120-3
Forgotten warriors of the Aleutian campaign.
Rearden, Jim.
Pictorial Histories Publishing, ©2005 188 p. $18.95 (pa)
In June of 1942, Japanese military forces attacked the US military base
at Dutch Harbor Alaska and invaded the Aleutian Islands of Attu and
Kiska, after which the US initiated the 15-month campaign to force the
Japanese out of the Aleutians. This narrative of the Aleutian campaign
emphasizes the personal experiences of the Americans who fought in the
campaign, battling both the Japanese and the harsh weather conditions
of the Arctic.
–38–
D769 2006-003052 978-0-252-07372-4
Lost and found; reclaiming the Japanese American
incarceration.
Ishizuka, Karen L. (The Asian American experience)
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 217 p. $24.95 (pa)
Ishizuka is a third-generation Japanese American; formerly with the
Japanese American National Museum in Los Angeles for 15 years, she is
now an independent writer and documentary producer. She presents a
text based on “America’s Concentration Camps: Remembering the
Japanese American Experience,” a touring exhibit produced by the
Japanese American National Museum which traveled from Los Angeles
to New York, Atlanta, San Francisco, and Little Rock between 1994 and
2004. The text tells the life history of the exhibition from its conception
and the development of its exhibition strategy and design, to its mani-
festation as a venue for bringing history alive and fostering the processes
of revelation that unfolded as former internees and visitors confronted
the experience of the camps. Illustrated in b&w.
D769 2006-015432 1-59797-016-6
Worshipping the myths of World War II; reflections on
America’s dedication to war.
Wood, Edward W.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 244 p. $24.95
Having been seriously wounded in World War II, Wood, now a retired
city planner in Denver, has written extensively about his experiences and
his insights from them in articles, essays, and poems. Over the decades,
he has watched the war become softened and sweetened into four myths:
The Good War; The Greatest Generation; we won it mostly by ourselves;
and when evil lies in others, war is the means to justice. He disagrees
with passion and eloquence. Distributed in the US by Books
International.
D781 1-59114-892-8
The U-boat century; German submarine warfare, 1906-
2006.
Showell, Jak Mallmann.
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 224 p. $39.95
This book traces the development and design of the U-boat from 1906 to
2006. Showell, a naval historian and author of several other books on U-
boat operations, takes a chronological look at the submarine and its
history from World War I and II to the modern German Navy, including
weapon systems, anti-submarine weapons, and builders. He uses
material from the U-Boot-Archiv (Deutsches U-Boot Museum) in Germany,
as well as other sources, and also discusses bases, the organization of
flotillas, and sailors. Many b&w photos are included.
D790 2006-050461 978-0-7432-3544-0
Masters of the air; America’s bomber boys who fought
the air war against Nazi Germany.
Miller, Donald L.
Simon & Schuster, ©2006 671 p. $35.00
Miller (history, Lafayette College) celebrates the triumph of US bombers
over Berlin, Hanover, and Dresden, and the terrible cost of bombing for
the German people.
D802 2005-032891 1-59797-021-2
Hitler’s bandit hunters; the SS and the Nazi occupation of
Europe.
Blood, Philip W.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 401 p. $29.95
Blood (formerly of the U. of Aachen, Germany) analyzes the shift in Nazi
military operational doctrine from Partisanenbekämpfung (the combating
of partisans) to Bandenbekämpfung (the combating of bandits), in
occupied territories of Eastern Europe and Russia for the period 1942-45.
He shows how the shift from labeling resistance “partisans” to “bandits,”
a shift rooted in earlier German military and political thinking, was far
more than simply a semantic change. By placing resistance in the cat-
egory of “bandits” and formulating military doctrine in accordance,
Heinrich Himmler unleashed extraordinary brutality and discarded
many of the prevailing laws of warfare. Blood traces Bandenbekämpfung
from its origins through its formulation and implementation.
–39–
D804 2006-929003 978-0-7618-3542-4
Holocaust; a Q&A guide to help young adults really
understand the Holocaust.
Crispin, M. Guyle.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 202 p. $32.95 (pa)
The few living eyewitnesses to the horror are now old, and although
advocates and the media have attempted to bridge the gap between the
knowledge of that generation and the understanding of those to come,
young people often do not grasp how the Holocaust can relate directly to
them. Here Crispin, a public educator, attempts to answer 94 questions
posed by middle school and high school students about the events and
situations leading to World War I, the nazis’ rise to power, the conditions
of the Jewish ghettos and the concentration camps, the end of World War
II and the impact of the Holocaust. He includes period photographs,
keeps his explanations as simple as possible and includes a glossary and
a reading list. He concludes with a personal narrative telling students
what he learned about history and remembrance while researching and
writing this book for them.
D804 0-85303-724-8
Holocaust memoir digest; a digest of published survivor
memoirs with study guide and maps; v.3.
Title main entry. Ed. by Esther Goldberg.
Vallentine Mitchell, ©2006 120 p. $19.50 (pa)
For teachers and students, this third volume of the digest contains infor-
mation on five memoirs published from the 1960s to 2002: Primo Levi’s
Survival in Auschwitz, The Nazi Assault on Humanity, Leon Weliczker
Wells’ The Janowska Road, Mel Mermelstein’s By Bread Alone: The Story of
A-4685, Hana Greenfield’s Fragments of Memory, From Kolin to Jerusalem,
and Eva Gossman’s Good Beyond Evil: Ordinary People in Extraordinary
Times. Aiming to make them more accessible to schools, libraries, and
other institutions, the editor describes memoirs with a range of regions
and experiences. Each section has a chronology, publishing details, focus
and features of the memoir, and topics covered, with coordinating page
numbers and quotes. A lesson plan and 30 maps are included, showing
places mentioned in the memoirs, locations of death camps and ghettos,
European borders, deportations, and layouts of concentration camps, for
example. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
D805 978-0-85303-716-3
Belsen 1945; new historical perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Suzanne Bardgett and David Cesarani.
Vallentine Mitchell, ©2006 250 p. $69.50
This volume compiles 13 essays based on the 60th anniversary seminar
held at the Imperial War Museum London in April 2005. The essays are
from an international group of scholars and curators who discuss recent
research on the liberation of the Bergen-Belsen concentration camp by the
British army in 1945. Essays provide a brief history of the camp, and
describe medical and emergency relief efforts, survivor’s experiences, the
filming of the liberation and its impact, children’s testimonies, memori-
alization, and how the event was represented by official war artists. It
also contains accounts from liberators and relief workers, and scripts
from two BBC radio broadcasts. Bardgett led the team that created the
Imperial War Museum’s Holocaust Exhibition in London. Cesarani is a
professor of history at Royal Holloway, U. of London. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
D810 2006-013077 978-1-55778-860-3
Inman’s war; a soldier’s story of life in a colored
battalion in WWII.
Copeland, Jeffrey S.
Paragon House, ©2006 366 p. $17.95 (pa)
At a flea market in the fall of 2002, English professor Jeffrey S. Copeland
(U. of Northern Iowa) acquired a suitcase full of old letters. These were
later revealed to be the correspondence between Sgt. Inman Perkins—who
was serving in a “Colored Battalion” in the U.S. Army Air Corps during
WWII—and his young bride back home in St. Louis. This fictionalized
narrative of Perkins’ experiences is based upon material from those
letters as well as archival research and interviews with relatives of
Perkins and current and former military personnel.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
D810 2006-002155 0-415-39110-5
The politics and strategy of clandestine war; Special
Operation Executive, 1940-1946.
Title main entry. Ed. by Neville Wylie. (Studies in intelligence series)
Routledge, ©2007 214 p. $120.00
Established in the summer of 1940, Britain’s Special Operations Executive
(SOE) was intended to encourage popular resistance in territories
occupied by the Axis powers and by the end of the war had come to
embrace the range of activities now called covert operations. The ten
papers presented by Wylie (international relations, U. of Nottingham, UK)
focus on the non-military, more political, of these activities, viewing them
as foundational for today’s world of covert operations and are of par-
ticular interest because they are based on greater access to the files of
the than were previously available. Following a discussion of the possi-
bility of distortions creeping into the archival record, of particular
concern with regards to covert organizations, and a review of the pre-
vious historical writing on the SOE, the papers discuss such topics as
relations with the US’s Office of Strategic Services in North Africa; the
SOE’s political support of Yugoslavia’s Josip Broz Tito; the activities of
committed communists within the SOE; and the scope of the SOE’s
involvement in irregular political warfare, psychological warfare, eco-
nomic warfare, and financial warfare.
D811 2006042246 0-7656-1643-2
Senso; the Japanese remember the Pacific War, expanded
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Frank B. Gibney. Trans. by Beth Cary.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 357 p. $29.95 (pa)
This collection contains translations of about 300 letters written by
Japanese citizens who experienced World War II, half of them former ser-
vicemen. The letters, written in 1986 at the request of the Asahi Shimbun
newspaper, describe their support of the war effort, reasons for it, arrests
and interrogations, their questioning of government policies, army
training and brutality, their opinions about the war afterward, and
civilian life. Introductions to each chapter provide historical context, and
letters are grouped according to topic. This edition includes comments
from political and intellectual leaders, who reflect on the causes and
spirit of the war. The late Gibney was a foreign correspondent, editor,
and author who served in World War II. Cary is a translator and inter-
preter.
D840 2006-018721 978-0-7425-5451-1
The Cold War after Stalin’s death; a missed opportunity
for peace?
Title main entry. Ed. by Klaus Larres and Kenneth Osgood. (The
Harvard Cold War studies book series)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 318 p. $69.95
Following the death of Joseph Stalin, a period of rapid fluidity marked
the Soviet approach to foreign policy that, however brief, ushered in deep
and lasting changes in its interactions with the West and within its own
sphere of influence and has left Cold War historians debating the
question of whether Washington missed an opportunity for bringing the
Cold War to an end much earlier than the world actually experienced.
Offering different perspectives on these issues and providing varying
answers to the question of missed opportunities, the 14 papers presented
by Larres (history and international affairs, U. of Ulster, Northern
Ireland) and Osgood (history, Florida Atlantic U., US) examine the post-
Stalin era of Soviet foreign policy, touching upon such issues US views
of the new Soviet leadership, the US positions on German reunification
and nuclear disarmament as purposely designed to forestall the easing
of tensions, the rhetorical framing of “peace” in Soviet and American
political speeches, the influence of Great Britain and France on Western
policy towards the Soviet Union, the perceptions of the Cold War among
Soviet allies, Soviet shifts in policy approaches toward East Germany, the
signing of the Austrian State Treaty as an example of the “new course”
of Stalin’s successors, and the evolution of the US-Japanese-Soviet
relationship.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
D840 2005-036713 1-58367-139-0
The Cold War and the new imperialism; a global history,
1945-2005.
Heller, Henry.
Monthly Review Press, ©2006 366 p. $22.95 (pa)
For both the United States and the Soviet Union, asserts Heller (history,
U. of Manitoba, Canada), the Cold War served as a means of blocking
internal social and political revolutions around the world be redefining
them in terms of international ideological and state rivalry between East
and West. He explores the evolution of the Cold War as an international
system from its original construction in the wake of World War II to the
fall of the Soviet Union, looking first at the imposition of Stalinism in
Europe and the expansion of the communist sphere through revolutions
in China, Korea, and Vietnam in combination with the US construction
of a global system of military bases and political alliances intended both
as a counter to communism and as a means to project its own power
abroad. He also examines how the decolonization and national liberation
movements of Asia and Africa, as well as the populist rebellions and rev-
olutions in Latin America, were influenced by the international Cold War
system and explores the 1970s transition from third world revolution to
neoliberalism.
D1056 90-04-15317-9
Religious freedom, multiculturalism, Islam; cross-reading
Finland and Ireland.
Sakaranaho, Tuula. (Muslim minorities; v.6)
BRILL, ©2006 468 p. $162.00
Taking the two countries as case studies, Sakaranaho (comparative
religion, U. of Helsinki) challenges the allegation that Islam and therefore
Muslims inherently constitute a problem for religious freedom as it is
understood and implemented in a multicultural Europe. She concedes
that Ireland—90% Roman Catholic—and Finland—85% Evangelical
Lutheran—are hardly models of multiculturalism, but it is the erosion of
these monoliths, and the very recent immigration of Muslims to the two
countries, that can highlight the issue.
D2025 2006-028570 0-275-99301-9
America and Europe after 9/11 and Iraq; the great divide.
Kashmeri, Sarwar A.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 128 p. $44.95
Much ink has been spilt regarding the differences between Europe and
the United States over the Iraq war and Kashmeri (a fellow of the Foreign
Policy Association), like many others, sees the split as having roots in the
changing transatlantic relationship. Basing part of his analysis on inter-
views with such figures as George H. W. Bush, Gen. Wesley Clark, former
UK Prime Minister John Major, former US Secretary of Defense Caspar
Weinberger, and former Spanish Foreign Minister Ana de Palacio, he
argues that the Atlantic alliance has grown rotten and that the US needs
a fresh approach that moves away from the tilt towards Britain and
instead forges a “special relationship” with Europe as a whole and pro-
motes multilateralism.
D2025 2006-024848 978-0-7391-1661-6
The transatlantic drift debates; proceedings.
American Foreign Policy Council conference on U.S.-European Relations
(2004)
Lexington Books, ©2006 87 p. $18.00 (pa)
Beginning in 2003, the “TransAtlantic Drift Debates” were initiated for
the purpose of bringing together American and European politicians,
diplomats, journalists, and other to debate international politics and the
US-Europe relationships. This volume contains the proceedings of the
fourth of these debates, in which the participants, primarily drawn from
the right side of the political spectrum, addressed such questions as
whether political and military tensions could lead to a disruption of eco-
nomic relations between the US and Europe, what conditions are nec-
essary for a transatlantic consensus on the US of force, what role the
media has played in transatlantic relations, and whether objective dif-
ferences in national interests are dictating a fundamental shift in the US-
Europe relationship.
–40–
GREAT BRITAIN, IRELAND
DA3 2004-24726 978-0-7391-1798-9
Sir Arthur Bryant and national history in twentieth-
century Britain. (reprint, 2005)
Stapleton, Julia.
Lexington Books, ©2006 307 p. $29.95 (pa)
Stapleton (politics, U. of Durham) investigates the extent to which Bryant
(1899-1985) tried to revive the role of national historian and revive the
Whig tradition of English/British history, and other questions about the
influences on him, his intentions and practices, and the significance of
his work from the perspective of the early 21st century.
DA28 978-1-904950-53-0
20 Prime Ministers of the 20th century; 20v.
Title main entry.
Books International, Inc., ©2006 3520 p. $299.00 (pa)
From Lord Salisbury to Tony Blair, the volumes of this 20-volume set bio-
graphically profile the 19 men and one woman who have served as
British Prime Minister during the 20th century. Each individually
authored volume contains a chronological narrative that briefly examines
the life of the person in question prior to coming to 10 Downing Street,
describes their activities while holding the premiership, and assesses
their political legacy. Each volume also contains a chronology detailing
international and domestic British political and cultural events during
the Prime Minister’s tenure and a guide to further reading. The
chronologies from all 20 volumes are also gathered together in a sepa-
rately bound volume accompanying the set.
DA65 2006-022876 0-275-99039-7
A military history of Britain; from 1775 to the present.
Black, Jeremy.
Praeger Security International, ©2006 191 p. $49.95
Military structures and cultures, relevant sociological contexts, and the
conflicts themselves are part of the story that Black (history, Exeter U.)
tells. The early 21st century, he says, provides a different perspective than
did the Cold War, and so he chooses some surprising topics to follow
down the three centuries. The series being American, he devotes much
attention to cross-Atlantic military relations, mostly after the unfortunate
dust-up in the 1770s, oh yes, and that 1812 misunderstanding.
DA87 1-904048-54-4
Nelson.
Carolan, Victoria.
Pocket Essentials, ©2005 160 p. $15.00
Carolan, a maritime historian, provides a concise biography of English
Rear Admiral Horatio Nelson, particularly his role in the Battle of
Trafalgar during the Napoleonic Wars. In this introductory book to his
life, she also details other battles he participated in, such as the Battle of
the Nile, his marriage, the period when he was captain of the HMS
Victory, and his legacy. Distributed in the US by Trafalgar Square
Publishing.
DA125 2006-049042 978-90-04-15346-2
Diaspora youth and ancestral homeland; British
Pakistani/Kashmiri youth visiting kin in Pakistan and
Kashmir.
Cressey, Gill. (Muslim minorities; v.5)
BRILL, ©2006 221 p. $108.00
The data set that forms the basis for this study by Cressey (U. of
Birmingham, UK) consists of interviews exploring the life stories of thirty
British-born Pakistani and Kashmiri young people about their visits to go
see relatives back in Pakistan and Kashmir. It is not an ethnographic
study, rather it is a narrative study of lives that utilizes a cultural studies
approach in order to investigate questions of identity. The interviews (and
some works of literature) are used to explore such themes as journeys,
homeland, race, national, diaspora, ummah (the Islamic community of
believers), gender, kin, generation and change, language, and cultural
shift, each of which is examined in a separate chapter.
–41–
DA125 2006-279082 0-7453-1847-9
Dreams, questions, struggles; South Asian women in
Britain.
Wilson, Amrit.
Pluto Press, ©2006 190 p. $26.95 (pa)
An activist on gender and race issues in Britain and South Asian politics,
Wilson examines how gender relations of the population have been
reshaped over the past 30 years within the context of local and global dis-
courses. She also considers the role of the British state and the pressures
of the market and the politics of South Asia in reconfiguring patriarchal
power. Distributed in the US by University of Michigan Press.
DA125 2006-018449 978-0-7546-4047-9
The new British; the impact of culture and community on
young Pakistanis.
Din, Ikhlaq.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 164 p. $89.95
Din (U. of Bradford, Britain) examines the experiences of British- born
people of Pakistani origin who were between 14 and 19 years old and
lived in Bradford at the time of the study. Focusing on the relationship
between young boys and girls, their parents, and the Pakistani com-
munity, he explores such issues as the experience of school, aspirations,
identity, popular culture, experiencing the community, and tensions
between Islam and culture.
DA145 1-901992-55-1
Roman pottery production in the Walbrook Valley;
excavations at 20-28, Moorgate, City of London, 1998-2000.
Seeley, Fiona and James Drummond-Murray. (MoLAS monograph; 25)
Mus/London Archaeology Service, ©2005 221 p. $58.00 (pa)
Some were stout, just the thing for grain. Others were slender, insub-
stantial, held in one hand to tip out a small measure of wine. These are
amongst the many discoveries in 1999 at Northgate House, in 2000 in
Copthall Close, and at an intermittent watching brief at Kent House in
1999 and 2000, exertions that not only uncovered new evidence about the
Roman pottery industry in the area but also the location of natural
resources and the names of potters. Finds include kilns, the potters’
workshop, a timber well, and unused samian ware indicating there may
have been a shop. The most significant discovery is that the kilns were
producing Verulamium region white ware, indicating cooperation and
trade. The volume is beautifully illustrated with maps, color photographs
of the artifacts and field site and line art. Distributed in the US by The
David Brown Book Co.
DA153 978-0-7734-5545-0
Byrhtferth’s East Anglian chronicle; a comparative edition
and translation of the Latin annals.
Byrhtferth. Trans. and ed. by Cyril Hart. (The early chronicles of
England; v.3)
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 194 p. $119.95
Finally retired from medical practice, Hart, a Fellow of the Royal
Historical Society, is free to pursue his life-long interest in early medieval
history, demonstrated here in a six-volume series on Anglo-Saxon chron-
icles. In 1981, he himself established that a previously anonymous and
undated Latin chronicle concerning early East Anglia had been compiled
in the late 10th century by Byrhtferth, schoolmaster at the newly founded
abbey of Ramsey, deep in the eastern fenlands. In the same format he
uses throughout the series, he discusses the sources and attribution of
that chronicle, then presents a Latin edition with facing pages of English
translation. People, places, and subjects are indexed separately.
DA155 978-0-9549627-1-5
The Anglo-Saxon cemetery at Finglesham, Kent.
Hawkes, Sonia Chadwick and Guy Grainger. Ed. by Birte Brugman.
(Oxford University School of Archaeology; Monograph no.64)
Oxford U.School of Archaeology, ©2006 436 p. $52.00
This report describes the excavations of the Fingelsham Anglo-Saxon
cemetery in east Kent directed by Sonia Chadwick Hawkes between 1959
and 1967. It includes 216 inhumation graves in use from the sixth to
eighth centuries. Unpublished at the time of Hawkes death in 1999, the
information aims to stimulate new research. It provides a grave inventory
and illustrations of graves, items found, and the site, analysis of the
skeletal remains by Guy Grainger, and descriptions of textiles, non-
ferrous metal objects, alloy bowls, glass beads, and pottery by other
authors. Some b&w photos are included. Distributed by The David
Brown Book Company.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DA155 978-0-947816-22-3
Anglo-Saxon studies in archaeology and history; v.13.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sarah Semple. (series; title)
Oxford U.School of Archaeology, ©2006 330 p. $90.00 (pa)
The annual publication presents papers concerning the archaeology and
history of England and its neighbors during the Anglo-Saxon period that
are comprehensible to non-specialists. Archaeologists mostly from Britain
but also Japan and Italy discuss such topics as topographical place-names
and the distribution of tun and ham, the five senses and Anglo-Saxon
coinage, language mixing in Anglo-Saxon inscriptions, and strategies and
tactics of King Alfred and the Vikings 876-886. The 12 papers are not
indexed. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
DA155 1-874350-41-8
Market Lavington, Wiltshire, an Anglo-Saxon cemetery
and settlement.
Williams, Phillip and Richard Newman. (Wessex archaeology report;
no.19)
Wessex Archaeology, ©2006 198 p. $54.00
Excavations were undertaken at Grove Farm, in Wessex, from 1986 to
1990, and unearthed 42 inhumation burials probably spanning from the
late fifth and sixth centuries. The report was completed in 1992, with
revisions in 1995 and 1997; already typeset, it then lay dormant until late
2004. An updated and enlarged concluding discussion is included that
takes account of—without detailing—subsequent investigations.
Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
DA175 2005-036416 978-1-4051-0649-8
England and its rulers, 1066-1307, 3d ed.
Clanchy, M.T. (Blackwell classic histories of England)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 344 p. $84.95
Far more than a listing of names and dates, this text introduces students
to the rulers of England and their aspirations in the period between the
Norman Conquest and the death of Edward I by showing the multicul-
tural influences that shaped the medieval English polity and placing that
history in a European context. In this third edition, three new chapters
examine the social and economic history of the period, particularly
focusing on the creation of wealth, the rise of the aristocracy, and the
chronicling of a British, as opposed to an exclusively English, history. The
bibliography and suggested further reading sections have been fully
updated, and additions and amendments have been made throughout
the text. Clanchy is professor emeritus of medieval history at the Institute
of Historical Research, U. of London, and is a Fellow of the British
Academy.
DA345 2006-011511 978-0-415-30215-9
The mid Tudors; Edward VI and Mary, 1547-1558.
Lee, Stephen J. (Questions and analysis in history)
Routledge, ©2007 155 p. $23.95 (pa)
This text explores the reigns of Edward VI and Mary and examines key
issues concerning that period that have been debated by historians.
Questions addressed include (for example) the degree to which the
monarchy was weakened during Edward’s reign and the level of success
Mary Tudor achieved in implementing her religious objectives. The
volume is aimed at students studying for history exams in sixth-form and
university courses in the UK as well as teachers desiring to enrich their
history instruction. Lee was formerly head of history at Bromsgrove
School.
DA396 2005-021329 0-7546-4087-6
The Spanish match; Prince Charles’s journey to Madrid,
1623.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alexander Samson.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 243 p. $99.95
When Charles returned to London without the Spanish Infanta as a
bride, Protestants heralded the event as a religious victory, and historians
have tended to follow them since. Here historians delve into some of the
underlying of the journey and the failure of the match. Among their
topics are Charles’ art purchases in Madrid, the politics of translation,
the Spanish literary response to the visit, and a French view. The 11
papers are from a spring 2003 conference at Stratford-upon-Avon.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DA447 978-0-7734-5486-6
A record of Samuel Pepys’ financial accounts, 1660-1669.
Rogal, Samuel J.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 261 p. $109.95
Rogal (emeritus humanities and fine arts, Illinois Valley Community
College, Oglesby) mines Pepys’ famous diary for yet more data about the
daily life of upper middle class Londoners during the late 17th century.
He has extracted entries relating to money spent and received over the
nine years, and provided footnotes explaining, for example what the Rota
Club was that he paid dues to, and what sort of thermometer it would
have been that he bought. Entries are included even if they do not specify
an amount.
DA506 978-0-7165-3365-8
Edmund Burke’s Irish identities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Seán Patrick Donlan.
Irish Academic Press, ©2006 274 p. $75.00
An Irish-born British statesman, a protestant of the established church
with extensive links and sympathy with Catholicism, a New Man who
defended the modernity of the British ancien régime, and a reforming
Whig who vehemently opposed the revolution in France and was
therefore adopted by latter-day political conservatives, are probably only
some of Burke’s (1729-97) identities. Scholars in a wide range of disci-
plines on both sides of the Atlantic and the Irish Sea look into it.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
DA506 2006-046985 978-0-7734-5583-2
A life of John Julius Angerstein, 1735-1823; widening
circles in finance, philanthropy, and the arts in eighteenth
century London.
Twist, Anthony.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 606 p. $149.95
British merchant and government loan contractor John Julius Angerstein
(1735-1823) used his wealth to found a number of charities and to collect
fine art. Although in his day, Angerstein was a person of some note, he
has becomes somewhat historically obscure, according to his biographer
Twist (retired, economics, Cambridge U., UK). Twist’s narrative of
Angerstein’s life underscores the merchant’s business acumen, his chari-
table generosity, and his “ever widening” social and economic ties to
other important figures from London and beyond.
DA533 2006-012782 0-300-11213-0
Household gods; the British and their possessions.
Cohen, Deborah.
Yale University Press, ©2006 296 p. $40.00
Using research done on collections and archives in England, Scotland,
and Wales, Cohen (history, Brown U.) explores the history of British
fondness for home interiors and domesticity, singling out the 1830s to the
1930s. Focusing on the middle class, she examines what shaped con-
sumer demand, including religion, morals, neighbors, and friends. She
describes ideas of bad taste, gender roles, personality aspects, antiques,
and households during the time of modernism. Color and b&w photos
of objects, interiors, and places, punctuate her discussion.
DA533 978-1-905043-07-1
Regency recollections; Captain Gronow’s guide to life in
London and Paris.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher Summerville.
Ravenhall Books, ©2006 207 p. $33.95
“I feel like killing someone!” roared the fashionable young man, and so
he did after picking several quarrels on a fashionable street in Paris.
Gronow, who was equally as fashionable but never as compulsive a
duelist, managed to record the life of a Regency dandy largely from his
own experience. Honed by Waterloo, surrounded by the likes of the
Prince Regent, and eventually up to his impeccable collar in debt,
Gronow describes the gentleman’s son’s life in the army, including the
surprisingly rigid etiquette of camp life, the Hyde Park set, the glories
and ignominies of real war, the life in Paris of debtors and idlers (the
article on how to get invited to a ball is particularly enlightening), and
the best way to rub elbows with royalty, high society, and ladies with
lovers. This is all style over content, but what glorious style it is.
Distributed by The David Brown Book Co.
–42–
DA566 2006-002796 978-0-8387-5632-4
Winston Churchill’s imagination.
Alkon, Paul K.
Bucknell University Pr., ©2006 267 p. $55.00
Alkon (English and American Literature, U. of Southern California, Los
Angeles) reaches beyond Churchill’s 38 volumes of writings to find
moments that Alkon deems hallmarks of Churchill’s imagination. These
surprising enterprises include Churchill’s involvement with cinema in an
essay about Charlie Chaplin and as a scriptwriter and consultant for
Alexander Korda’s film studio; Churchill’s evocation of paintings as tem-
plates for narrative in his first history and in his only novel; and “The
Dream,” a story Churchill reserved for posthumous publication, in which
he discusses the 20th century with the Victorian ghost of his father, Lord
Randolph Churchill. Distributed by Associated University Presses.
DA600 2006-404116 978-1-902771-53-3
Beaches, fields, streets, and hills; the anti-invasion
landscapes of England, 1940.
Foot, William. (CBA research report; 144)
Council /British Archaeology, ©2006 658 p. $55.00 (pa)
Fearing the threat of invasion in 1940, began establishing a defense land-
scape combining natural barriers such as rivers with anti-tank ditches,
concrete obstacles, and hardened weapon emplacements. This work com-
bines archaeological evidence of the surviving pieces of this defense
system in 67 areas of the English landscape with documentary investi-
gation in order to reconstruct the system as a whole and analyze the
strategy behind it. Maps and archival photographs document the loca-
tions of the defenses and the surviving condition of individual structures
is assessed. The authors conclude that the defenses would successfully
have served to hold up and divert a German attack, allowing the mobile
British reserve forces to counter-attack at the place of their choosing.
Distributed by The David Brown Book Company.
DA670 978-1-84217-217-9
The Mote of Mark; a dark age hillfort in south-west
Scotland.
Laing, Lloyd and David Longley.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 197 p. $90.00
The 1973 and 1979 excavations at the rampart were undertaken to
establish the potential for identifying a stratigraphic sequence and cor-
relating it with observations from excavations in 1913. Laing and Longley
set out the stratigraphic, metalworking, artefacts, animal bones, and
objects cast in clay molds that were found. Then they discuss implica-
tions for understanding the region in the sixth and seventh centuries and
the Angles there; and the status, social context, and economy of the Mote
of Mark. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
DA670 0-904761-72-X
Water resources and their management.
Treen, C. and M. Atkin. (WHARRAM; a study of settlement on the
Yorkshire Wolds; 10. York U. Archaeological Publications; 12)
English Heritage, ©2005 278 p. $39.00
This volume presents the results of excavations carried out between 1971
and 1983 on the site of a medieval dam and pond at the southern end
of the deserted English village of Wharram Percy, North Yorkshire. The
excavations provided valuable insights into everyday life in the medieval
village and also revealed environmental evidence relating to the land-use
history of the valley and plateau. The text is accompanied throughout by
maps, diagrams, and b&w photos and drawings of artifacts.
DA677 978-1-901992-63-2
The Doulton stoneware pothouse in Lambeth; excavations
at 9 Albert Embankment, London.
Tyler, Kieron. (MoLAS archaeology studies series; 15)
Mus/London Archaeology Service, ©2005 63 p. $16.00 (pa)
Illustrated throughout with b&w photos, this report presents the findings
of archaeological excavations at 9 Albert Embankment in London. The
fieldwork conducted there uncovered the remains of a pothouse operated
by the Doulton company, which probably began operation in the 1870s
and continued until 1926. In addition to describing various artifacts, the
authors (affiliations not cited) examine the larger context of London’s
pottery industry and make connections between their findings and rel-
evant documentary sources. Distributed in the U.S. by The David Brown
Book Company.
–43–
DA677 1-901992-50-0
The royal palace, abbey and town of Westminster on
Thorney Island; archaeological excavations (1991-1998) for
the London Underground Limited Jubilee Line extension
project.
Thomas, Christopher et al. (MoLAS monograph; 22)
Mus/London Archaeology Service, ©2006 224 p. $60.00 (pa)
Thomas, Robert Cowie, and Jane Sidell describe and discuss the excava-
tions during the 1990s in advance of the subway extension, and integrate
the findings with those of both archaeological and antiquarian efforts
during the 18th, 19th, and 20th century to present a unified account of
what science now thinks has been going on there since Mesolithic and
Neolithic times. The juicy bits about the royal family are in a different
volume, which is not cheap! Distributed in the US by the David Brown
Book Company.
DA687 0-904220-36-2
The Tower of London new armouries project.
Keevill, Graham and Steve Kelly. (Oxford archaeology occasional paper;
no.12)
Oxford Archaeology, ©2006 80 p. $15.00 (pa)
During the period 1997-2000, Oxford Archaeology carried out a series of
archaeological investigations at the Tower of London. This report sum-
marizes what was found there, including traces of Roman deposits, the
remains of medieval buildings, and features constructed within the royal
garden. The excellently preserved remains of Dugal Campbell’s 18th-
century Irish Barracks are also described. The volume is thoroughly illus-
trated with photographs and diagrams (many in color). Distributed in
North America by the David Brown Book Company.
DA690 2006-445309 978-1-84217-065-6
The archaeology of the upper city and adjacent suburbs.
Steane, Kate. (Lincoln archaeological studies; no.3)
Oxbow Books, ©2006 311 p. $65.00
Steane and others from the city of Lincoln Archaeology Unit staff
describe excavations of the Upper City at Lincoln in England and
adjacent suburbs from the period of 1972 to 1987. Data on artefactual
and environmental finds is integrated into the presentation of the strati-
graphic sequence, which is organized by Land Use Blocks and Context
Groups. The first chapter gives background on the project and proce-
dures used, followed by descriptions of each site, which include those in
and around Lincoln Cathedral, St. Paul in the Bail, Mint Wall, and West
Bight. Distributed by The David Brown Book Co.
DA690 978-1-86077-393-8
Beyond the bridges; the suburbs of Shrewsbury 1760-1960.
Trinder, Barrie.
Phillimore, ©2006 210 p. $40.00
A stalwart historian of industry and towns, Trinder here looks at the
suburbs of the town where he has lived for some four decades. He sets
out to explain how Shrewsbury appears to have grown over the past 200
years, drawing on maps, census returns, newspapers, and reminiscences
but very little on property deeds and the official records of the corpo-
ration. After considering suburbs, contexts, networks, and building; he
focuses on various specific places, among them the parish of Meole Brace
and Coton Hill, and Greenfields. The monochrome photographs are of
particularly high quality. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book
Company.
DA690 0-7524-3749-6
In defence of landscape; an archaeology of Porton Down.
Ride, David.
Tempus Publishing, ©2006 160 p. $37.50 (pa)
The 2.750 hectare site at Porton Down in southern England was turned
into a chemical and biological research facility during World War I, and
the Ministry of Defense has protected it from modern agriculture. Ride,
who worked at the facility for 17 years and led the archaeology section
of the Porton Down Conservation Group for 17, explores the archaeology
of the landscape from the Neolithic to the present, including the gas
trenches, and argues that the rare habitat should continue to be pro-
tected. Distributed in the US by Trafalgar Square Publishing.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DA690 978-0-85989-785-3
Making a Christian landscape; the countryside in early
medieval Cornwall, Devon and Wessex.
Turner, Sam.
University of Exeter, ©2006 218 p. $38.00 (pa)
Turner (archaeology, Newcastle U.) investigates the impact of Christianity
on the landscape of southwestern Britain from the conversion period
about 450 AD to the Norman Conquest, which reached the hinterlands
about 1070. He infers changes in the structure of the landscape from
sites, monuments, place names, and patterns of fields and farms. Then
he maps these changes and interprets them as reflecting the social,
political, and ideological changes that resulted from adaptations to the
new religion. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
DA690 978-1-84217-180-6
Raunds area survey; an archaeological study of the
landscape of Raunds, Northamptonshire, 1985-94.
Parry, Stephen.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 292 p. $60.00
The detailed landscape survey was part of a major program of archaeo-
logical research into the evolution of the landscape in part of midland
England from the Mesolithic onward. Six years of field-walking, crop-
mark analysis, magnetometer surveys, and excavation produced reports
that were completed in 1994; few changes were found necessary for pub-
lication a decade later. Along with the volume, 12 fold-out, table-sized
maps are included inside a nesting double box. Distributed in the US by
the David Brown Book Company.
DA908 978-1-85182-959-0
Community in early modern Ireland.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Armstrong and Tadhg Ó hAnnracháin.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 240 p. $70.00
With the exception of religious communities, the notion of community
has had little place in Irish history, so the historians here are con-
structing an idea of Irish community as well as describing examples of
it. Their topics include imagining political representation in the 17th
century, the communities of Clonmal 1608-49, Irish communities in 17th-
century western France, and the communion of saints and Catholic ref-
ormation. The 12 essays are from a September 2003 conference in
Dublin. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
DA911 978-1-84682-028-1
The Kirwans of Castlehacket, Co. Galway; history, folklore
and mythology in an Irish horseracing family.
Lynch, Ronan.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 200 p. $65.00
In Castlehacket in the west of Ireland, says Lynch, the head of research
at the Centre for Conflict Resolution Journalism in Derry, the resident
landlords were an Irish family, the Kirwans, and there was a great deal
of cultural exchange between the Gaelic and Ascendancy—Anglo-Irish,
English speaking—worlds, as illustrated by the acclaim of the Kirwan
family in local folklore and song. He analyzes the cultural boundaries
between the Gaelic and Ascendancy worlds on a local scale in the 18th
and 19th centuries. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
DA930 978-1-85182-978-1
Cenél Conaill and the Donegal kingdoms; AD 500-800.
Lacey, Brian.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 351 p. $65.00
The enormous influence of the Donegal kingdoms on Ireland as a whole
during the early medieval period has generally been underestimated and
misunderstood, says Irish archaeologist, historian, and museum director
Lacey. He focuses on the Cenél Conaill kingdom, which was most dom-
inant across the island for much of the period he covers. His main
sources are the various texts knows as the annals. Distributed in the US
by ISBS.
DA930 1-904890-12-1
Medieval pottery from Wood Quay, Dublin; the 1974-6
waterfront excavations.
McCutcheon, Clare.
Royal Irish Academy, ©2006 213 p. $40.00
Over 200,000 shards of pottery were recovered from the excavation, some
10,000 of them from late medieval and post-medieval times.
Archaeologist McCutcheon illustrates—mostly in drawings with some pho-
tographs—and describes a representative selection of these. She also dis-
cusses the purpose and methodology of the study, and the historical
background to the pottery. Patrick F. Wallace, who directed the project,
contributes an introduction. There is no index. Dist. in the US by ISBS.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DA959 978-1-85182-996-5
Politics and power in victorian Ireland.
Title main entry. Ed. by Roger Swift and Christine Kinealy.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 208 p. $65.00
When Queen Victorian died in 1901, it was not obvious nor inevitable
that Ireland would become partitioned 20 years later, but because it in
fact was, the politics of 19th-century Ireland have since been portrayed
as a simple divide between Catholic nationalists and Protestant unionists.
Here, English and Irish historians look at events and attitudes on both
sides of the Celtic Sea from the perspective of those who took part in
them without the benefit of modern hindsight. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
DA962 0-7190-7346-4
Rendering to God and Caesar; the Irish churches and the
two states in Ireland, 1949-73.
Ó Corráin, Daithí.
Manchester U. Press, ©2006 276 p. $50.00
Ó Corráin (contemporary Irish history, Trinity College Dublin) looks at
the Catholic Church and the Church of Ireland as examples of organiza-
tions that have operated on both sides of the border after the partition
of Ireland in 1920 and tried to adjust to, moderate, or simply live with
the divided nation. She considers how each dealt with the border itself,
how the Church of Ireland related to the Irish state and the Catholic
Church to the Northern Ireland state, and inter-church relations and reli-
gious borders in Ireland.
DA962 978-0-7165-2832-6
Spies, informers and the Anti-Sinn Féin Society; the
intelligence war in Cork City 1920-1921.
Borgonovo, John.
Irish Academic Press, ©2007 198 p. $75.00
During a single year at least 26 Cork civilians died at the hands of the
IRA. IRA sources claim that some of the civilians were members of the
Anti-Sinn Féin Society, a pro-British intelligence network operating in the
city. Borgonovo analyzes the existence of the network, the alleged IRA
persecution of ex-soldiers and the strength of the IRA intelligence efforts
in Cork city and places these trends in the context of the British reprisal
campaign in Cork city and the IRA’s guerrilla struggle. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
DA966 2006-001345 978-0-8139-2544-8
Re-imagining Ireland. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew Higgins Wyndham.
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 273 p. $34.95
Social scientists, artists, writers, historians, and cultural scholars, explore
social and cultural issues raised by the transformation of Ireland’s image
from a bastion of tradition to a cutting edge of modernization. Among
their topics are the Celtic Tiger, relations with Britain and America, race
and ethnicity, language, myths, cinema, Paisleyism, and migrations.
EUROPE, BALKANS, RUSSIA, FORMER SOVIET
REPUBLICS
DB851 2006-012174 1-932559-89-2
Vienna voices; a traveler listens to the city of dreams.
Weinberger, Jill Knight. (Writing travel)
Parlor Press, ©2006 247 p. $18.00 (pa)
Weinberger (English, Central Connecticut State U.) has traveled to Vienna
often over the past 20 years, sometimes alone and sometimes with her
husband, whose parents were born there and forced to leave when Hitler
came to power in 1938. Here she reflects on the physical city, the liter-
ature, the activities, and the voices of the people.
DB957 2005-058170 0-06-077261-1
Journey to a revolution; a personal memoir and history of
the Hungarian Revolution of 1956.
Korda, Michael.
HarperCollins, ©2006 221 p. $24.95
At the outbreak of the failed Hungarian Revolution of 1956, the author,
then a young Oxford undergraduate, set off for Budapest to bring
medical supplies and to witness the rebellion against Soviet authority
first hand. He recounts those events here, seeking a balance between
history and memoir.
–44–
DB957 2006-043654 0-375-42458-X
Twelve days; the story of the 1956 Hungarian Revolution.
Sebestyen, Victor.
Pantheon Books, ©2006 340 p. $26.00
A native of Hungary, Sebestyen lives in England where he has worked
for numerous British newspapers, including the London Evening
Standard; his family fled from Hungary when he was a small child. On
the 50th anniversary of the Hungarian Revolution, he presents a new
account of the event, based on newly released official Hungarian and
Soviet documents, his family’s diaries, and eyewitness testimony. The text
demonstrates that Hungary was “. . . just one battleground in the great
East-West struggle in the second half of the twentieth century. . . a pawn,
trapped between bigger powers” of Moscow and Washington, D.C.
Illustrated with b&w photographs.
DB2763 2004-011379 0-86516-426-6
Illustrated Slovak history; a struggle for sovereignty in
Central Europe.
Spiesz, Anton and Dusan Caplovic.
Bolchazy-Carducci Pub., ©2006 420 p. $37.00 (pa)
Slovak publisher Ladislau Bolchazy presents an English edition of the
work created by the late Slovak economic historian Anton Spiesz, origi-
nally published as Ilustrovane dejiny Slovenska: Na ceste k sebauvedomeniu
in 1992. The English translation includes a foreword by President Ivan
Gasparovic, an afterword by Slovak archaeologist Dusan Caplovic, some
60 pages of endnotes by Michael J. Kopanic (St. Francis U., Loretto,
Pennsylvania), and an extensive bibliography. Illustrated throughout with
b&w and color photographs, maps and diagrams, the text is suitable for
both the specialist and the general reader.
DC33 2006-011406 978-1-57591-108-3
Charting change in France around 1540.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marian Rothstein.
Susquehanna Univ. Press, ©2006 224 p. $50.00
According to editor Rothstein (French, Carthage College) and contrib-
utors, before the fundamental changes of about 1540, France considered
itself inferior to Italy, ancient Rome and classical Greece, only to take a
rather abrupt about-face and begin to consider itself a civilization
superior in language, culture and even food. The six essays here describe
aspects of that fundamental change, and how France became a nation
well aware of its own merits, by describing the French Amadis in the
1540s, changing the image of French music, colonizing Canada following
the Cartier voyages, engaging in religion in new ways, printing and
translation as part of the paradigm shift, and realizing the dialogism in
Rabelais’s Prologues as part of the recognition of changes in Renaissance
epistemology. Distributed by Associated University Presses.
DC33 2006-017935 0-313-32892-7
Culture and customs of France.
Haine, W. Scott. (Culture and customs of Europe)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 315 p. $49.95
For general readers, Haine (European history, Holy Names U.) describes
aspects of the culture and customs of France within a historical context,
including the land, people, and history; religion and thought; gender,
marriage, family, and education; and leisure activities. Other topics
covered encompass food and fashion, literature, media, cinema, per-
forming arts, and art, architecture, and housing. A few b&w photos are
included.
DC36 2006-047175 0-06-059898-0
Alexis de Tocqueville; democracy’s guide.
Epstein, Joseph. (Eminent lives)
HarperCollins, ©2006 208 p. $21.95
American essay and story writer Epstein presents a biography of French
aristocrat and social critique Tocqueville (1805-59), best known for his
favorable view of the US in the first volume of Democracy in America
(1835). The work lacks index, bibliography, and even table of contents.
DC183 2005-047217 978-0-374-27341-5
The Terror; the merciless war for freedom in
revolutionary France.
Andress, David.
Farrar, Straus & Giroux, ©2005 441 p. $17.00 (pa)
A specialist in the French Revolution, Andress (modern European history,
U. of Portsmouth) offers a new interpretation of the mass killings that
have become the most vivid image of the revolution. The Terror was not
an inevitable outcome of revolution, he argues, but was the result of dog-
matic and fundamentalist thinking and dreadful decisions by a group of
people whose survival was threatened by famine, external war, and
counter-revolutionaries.
–45–
DC195 2006-003245 978-0-87462-311-6
Small-town martyrs and murderers; religious revolution
and counterrevolution in western France, 1774-1914.
Woell, Edward J. (Marquette studies in history ; no. 1)
Marquette University Press, ©2006 292 p. $32.00 (pa)
In this study, Woell (history, Western Illinois U.) recounts the story of the
massacres that took place in March 1793 in the French town of
Machecoul. In addition to tracing the events leading up to the bloodshed
in this small community, he explains just how far- reaching were its local
and national repercussions for the French Revolution and beyond.
Particular attention is paid to the roles of religion, violence, and memory
in the events at Machecoul.
DC203 978-0-7734-5613-6
Napoleon and the first empire’s ministries of war and
military administration; the construction of a military
bureaucracy.
Dague, Everett Thomas.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 232 p. $119.95
A specialist in Napoleon, Dague (modern history, Benedictine College,
Kansas) examines the development of the army’s field and bureaucratic
administrative operations during the First French Empire. He also traces
the antecedents and precedents through the 17th century and during the
French Revolution. He considers the process as evolving, but also intro-
duces socio-metrical analysis by tracking the Napoleonic careers of the
major military administrative figures, particularly Minister of War Henri
Clarke.
DC220 2006-019409 978-1-85109-646-6
The encyclopedia of the French revolutionary and
Napoleonic Wars; a political, social, and military history;
3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gregory Fremont-Barnes.
ABC-CLIO, ©2006 1284 p. $285.00
For those interested in the battles, armies, political and military leaders,
and related themes of the wars that occupied Europe from 1792-1815, this
3-volume reference contains a wealth of information in its authoritative
entries and full bibliography of places to look next. Ten introductory
essays provide the background and context to the wars, with topics
including a biography of Napoleon, political thought and ideology, liter-
ature, and economic background. There are over 800 signed A-Z entries
written by an international team of contributors. The entries on battles
are accompanied by maps of the campaigns. Vol.3 contains a selection of
primary documents, including treaties. Many of the entries are biogra-
phies of key figures. Fremont-Barnes is an independent scholar in
Oxford, UK.
DC235 2006-050052 1-4128-0599-6
The Russian campaign of 1812. (reprint, 1996)
Clausewitz, Carl von.
Transaction Publishers, ©2007 148 p. $24.95 (pa)
This is a reprint of a 1996 book titled The Campaign of 1812 in Russia
(Blue Crane Books, Watertown, Massachusetts), presenting Clausewitz’
19th-century account with an introduction by Gerard Chaliand (Ecole
Nationale d’Administration, Paris). In 1812, after disastrous defeats by
Napoleon, Prussian general von Clausewitz was one of a group called
“the Scharnhorst party” that chose to fight for Russia rather than honor
the new Franco-Prussian alliance. His account, experienced from the
Russian side, relates Napoleon’s Russian campaign in which the French
army made it to Moscow but retreated after Tsar Alexander set fire to
that city. The introduction sets the context and describes von Clausewitz’s
account as a “global analysis of conflict,” lauding the author’s eye for
appreciating a situation in all its diplomatic, political, and military
ramifications.
DC611 978-2-503-52025-4
The city, the duke and their banker; the Rapondi family
and the formation of the Burgundian State (1384-1430).
Lambert, Bart. (Studies in European urban history (1100-1800); v.7)
Brepols Publishers, ©2006 215 p. $72.00 (pa)
The boom-and-bust cycle turning more slowly in those days, the years
between 1300 and 1460 were an economic crisis; many merchants who
had loaned their otherwise idle capital to princes found that the promises
and fortunes of such luminaries were not as reliable as merchants might
wish. One notable exception was the Rapondi family, active in Bruges but
originally from the Italian city of Lucca. Lambert, not otherwise iden-
tified, investigates how this family managed not only to survive, but
thrive for over half a century. He focuses on the family’s simultaneous
relations with the city of Bruges and the duke of Burgundy, when it was
most successful. Only proper names are indexed. Distributed in the US
by the David Brown Book Company.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DC611 2-503-52278-5
Epitomes of evil; representation of executioners in
Northern France and the Low Countries in the late Middle
Ages.
Klemettilä, Hannele. (Studies in European urban history (1100-1800); 8)
Brepols Publishers, ©2006 388 p. $83.00 (pa)
Klemettilä (not further identified) focuses on the period from the 14th
century to the early 16th, a period during which the office of the
hangman became established in the European penal system; there was
an increasing demand for professional executioners as capital and cor-
poral penalties became the responsibility of the state and other public
authorities; and the hangman’s representation was actively exploited,
shaped, and modified for various reasons by various social and cultural
groups in various religious and secular contexts. She does not provide an
index. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
DC707 2006-010841 978-0-8109-5489-2
Bell towers of Paris; a stroll through the City of Light.
Setboun, Michel. Ed. by Pierre Guicheney.
Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 202 p. $24.95 (pa)
Approximately 35 Paris bell towers are shown here in color photos, many
of them shot with a backdrop of the Paris nightlights. In addition, views
from these towers are photographed, showing sights such as the Eiffel
Tower, the Louvre, churches, and other places. Nine itineraries are pro-
vided as an introduction, taking readers on Setboun’s journey to places
such as Notre-Dame, the Museé d’Orsay, the Sorbonne, and the Hôtel de
Ville. The book measures 10x11.25″.
DD17 2005-023373 0-8160-4521-6
Germany; a reference guide from the Renaissance to the
present.
Biesinger, Joseph A. (European nations)
Facts On File, Inc., ©2006 856 p. $85.00
Dürer’s horsemen surge over lost and living souls. Joseph Haydn perfects
the symphony. Adolf Eichman stands in a glass cage. Here there are tran-
scendent artists, scurvy politicians, kings, composers, saints, and the
most obscene of murderers. The scattering of states becomes a nation, the
Romantic movement rises and falls, and one of the most sophisticated
cultures in the world grows and then is strangled by brutes. This crisply
written reference includes essays on period from the tribal origins of
German through the present post-unification era along with hundreds of
entries describing people, places and events, a concise chronology, and
illustrations including line art, period photographs and maps. The result
is accessible down to the high school level and should also suit the
general reader or traveler.
DD204 2006-051810 0-7734-5523-X
Nationalism versus cosmopolitanism in German thought
and culture, 1789-1914; essays on the emergence of
Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Anne Perkins and Martin Liebscher.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 308 p. $119.95
The anthology was inspired by a symposium held in conjunction with
the March 2001 exhibit Spirit of an Age at the National Gallery in
London. Looking at such cultural productions as poetry, music, and
architecture, scholars examine the contrast between and surprising
overlap between calls for a German nation state and a vibrant Europe
during the long 19th century. Quotations are in German with English
translation.
DD239 2006-019413 1-85109-733-3
Pop culture Germany!; media, arts, and lifestyle.
Fraser, Catherine C. and Dierk O. Hoffmann. (Popular culture in the
contemporary world)
ABC-CLIO, ©2006 405 p. $85.00
For students, travelers, and general readers, this volume introduces
modern German culture, including lifestyle, art, entertainment, tele-
vision, music, and film. Not only focusing on pop culture, Fraser
(German, Indiana U., Bloomington) and Hoffmann (German studies,
Colgate U.) discuss the ambivalent attitude Germans have toward their
country and past; idiosyncrasies in language, gestures, stereotypes,
symbols, and sexuality; political, legal, and social structures; and social
aspects such as lifestyle, fashion, youth culture, gender equality, multi-
culturalism, and food. Leisure activities are described, followed by media,
performing arts, visual arts and architecture, and production and con-
sumption information. Coverage spans the postwar years, time of
rebellion, and the present post- unification era, but is supplemented by
information on history. The authors include impressions and attitudes
from magazines, papers, and individuals, as well as facts, which are
related through alphabetical listings of terms in the “From A to Z” sec-
tions at the end of each chapter.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DD240 2006-044684 978-0-7425-5363-7
A concise history of Nazi Germany, 3d ed.
Bendersky, Joseph W.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 228 p. $24.95 (pa)
Using a writing style which combines narrative storytelling with analysis,
Bendersky (history, Virginia Commonwealth University) provides stu-
dents and general readers with an overview of Nazi Germany, surveying
the major political, economic, and social factors that powered the rise
and fall of the Third Reich. Although not designed for experts in the field
of German history, the book covers aspects of Nazism often neglected,
such as the lives of average citizens during the period. This third edition
continues to reflect trends in social history, while reemphasizing the
crucial role played by racial ideology in determining the policies and
practices of the Third Reich. B&w historical photos and a chronology are
included.
DD256 2006-024670 978-3-11-018982-7
Victims and perpetrators, 1933-1945; (re)presenting the
past in post-unification culture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Laurel Cohen-Pfister and Dagmar Wienroeder-
Skinner. (Interdisciplinary German cultural studies; v.2)
Walter de Gruyter, ©2006 371 p. $98.00
In the decades since Germany was infested with nazism and millions
died as the result of its ideology, German identity narratives have
emerged which explain that Germans were also the victims of deadly
oppression by their government and victims of Allied warfare. The result
is a complex web of public and private relations that define who were
or are the perpetuators and who were or are the victims. This series of
16 articles with an introduction explore aspects of this evolving series of
relations in terms of trans-generational memory, the air war and German
literature, transnational reconciliation, and historical consequences in the
German present. Specific topics include the limits of understanding in
generational identities in recent German memory literature, the question
of whether to write or remain silent about the German air war, role
reversals in the victim-perpetrator complex, Polish-German relations, how
grandchildren understand nazi crimes and their grandfathers’ pasts.
DD901 90-04-15269-5
Civic culture and everyday life in early modern Germany.
Roeck, Bernd. (Studies in medieval and reformation traditions; history,
culture, religion, ideas; v.115)
BRILL, ©2006 286 p. $129.00
Roeck (U. of Zurich) offers an overview of bourgeois culture and aspects
of everyday life in Germany from the Renaissance through the 18th
century, while introducing readers to fundamental research problems.
The topics range from life styles, clothing and eating habits to con-
sciousness of time and rites of passage. Roeck pays special attention to
the role of female and male citizens in music, literature and fine arts.
The text, which is aimed primarily at history and art history students,
includes excerpts from many important primary sources, including
Albrecht D(:u)er’s letters, Michel de Montaigne’s’ Diary of a Journey to
Spas, John Caspar Riesbeck’s Letters of a Travelling Frenchman, Kant’s
What is Enlightenment?, and Goethe’s Poetry and Truth.
DE1 978-90-04-14950-2
Ancient West & East; v.5 no.1-2.
Title main entry. (Monograph supplement: Colloquia Pontica)
BRILL, ©2006 398 p. $188.00
This final volume of the series published by Brill is a double issue, with
eight articles, four notes, and 120 pages of reviews. Article topics include
untying the Cretan hieroglyphic knot, the foothills of the northwestern
Caucasus in the eighth to fourth centuries BC, the chora of Hermonassa,
and St. Euphemia’s church by the Hippodrome of Constantinople within
the broader context of early seventh-century history and architecture. The
contents of the next issue are listed, but the publisher is yet to be
revealed. There is no index.
–46–
DE5 978-90-04-15320-2
Brill’s New Pauly: Chronologies of the ancient world;
names, dates and dynasties.
Title main entry. Ed. by Walter Eder and Johannes Renger. Trans. and
ed. by Wouter F.M. Henkelman. (Brill’s New Pauly supplements; v.1)
BRILL, ©2007 363 p. $194.00
Though it supplements the New Pauly reference, this volume is a stand-
alone reference, containing tables detailing the dates and names of
dynasties and other ruling bodies in Eurasia in ancient times. The
volume’s parameters are from the end of the 3d millenium B.C.E. to the
end of the 7th century, C.E. Significantly, China is included, in acknowl-
edgement of the contact China had with the West through trade. With
variations, the tables provide the ruler’s name, throne name, personal
name, title, genealogy, dates of rule, and brief notes. The first section con-
tains tables for the many dynasties of the ancient Near East, including
Egypt. The second section contains western Europe. In addition to
emperors, Roman consuls, dictators, and censors are listed. Tables are
included for the late antique Germanic kingoms in Britannia and in
western Europe and Italy, for the Huns, and for bishops and patriarchs.
DE5 978-90-04-12272-7
Brill’s New Pauly; encyclopaedia of the ancient world:
Antiquity; v.9: Mini-Obe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hubert Cancik and Helmuth Schneider.
BRILL, ©2006 942 p. $249.00
The translation continues of Der Neue Pauly; Enzyklopädie der Antike pub-
lished beginning in 1996 by J. B. etzlersche Verlagsbuchhandlung und
Carl Erns Poeschel Verlag GmbH in Stuttgart and Weimar. The 20-volume
English version includes updated annotations, and covers a period from
the second millennium BC to the early Middle Ages. The signed articles,
rarely over a page long, are thoroughly referenced and cross-referenced.
The volumes are not individually indexed.
DE61 1-84217-185-2
Journal of Roman pottery studies; v.12: An archaeological
miscellany, papers in honour of K F Hartley.
Title main entry. Ed. by Geoffrey B. Dannell and Pamela V. Irving.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 138 p. $50.00 (pa)
Kay Hartley is widely recognized in Britain and elsewhere as an
authority on Romano-British mortaria and the stamps of their potters.
This extended volume of the Journal of Roman Pottery Studies was com-
piled to honor her vital contributions to the field. More than two- dozen
contributions discuss such topics as the dating of Crambeck parchment
ware; the Great Essex Earthquake of ca. 60 AD; and evidence for the
presence of the domestic cat in Roman Britain. The volume is not
indexed. Distributed in the U.S. by the David Brown Book Company.
DE61 2006-012905 978-0-8262-1667-0
The shotgun method; the demography of the ancient
Greek city-state culture.
Hansen, Mogens Herman. (The Fordyce W. Mitchel Memorial Lecture
Series)
U. of Missouri Press, ©2006 140 p. $39.95
To complement the many studies of specific details of ancient Greece,
Hansen (Greek, Copenhagen U.) takes broad aim and estimates the pop-
ulation in all the poleis in the Greek homeland and founded as colonies
from Spain to Caucasus and from the Crimea to Libya in 334 BC, when
Alexander the Great set off to conquer the Persian empire. He also con-
siders the proportion of the population settled in the hinterland, and the
carrying capacity of the ancient Greek polis world.
DF82 1-905125-11-9
Sparta & war; proceedings.
International Sparta Seminar (5th: 2004: Rennes, France) Ed. by
Stephen Hodkinson and Anton Powell.
Classical Press of Wales, ©2006 309 p. $79.50
The 10 papers discuss war and society, military and civic geography, and
military practice and policy in the classical Greek city. Among specific
topics are commemorating the Spartan war dead, Xenophon’s view of
why the Spartans fight so well even in disorder, the politics of Spartan
mercenary service, and why Sparta did not destroy Athens in 404 or 403
BC. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
–47–
DF82 1-905125-07-0
Spartan education; youth and society in the classical
period.
Ducat, Jean. Trans. by Emma Stafford et al.
Classical Press of Wales, ©2006 361 p. $100.00
Jean Ducat (retired, Greek history, U. of Nice) is a recognized French
authority on classical Sparta. In this study, he collects, translates and
evaluates sources ranging from the well-known to the obscure that deal
with Spartan education. The focus is on the public system of education
(paideia), as little was recorded about private instructional practices.
Translated from the French by Emma Stafford, Pamela-Jane Shaw, and
Anton Powell (affiliations not cited). Distributed in the U.S. by The David
Brown Book Co.
DF85 2006-051506 978-90-04-12204-8
Greek colonisation; an account of Greek colonies and
other settlements overseas.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gocha R. Tsetskhladze. (Mnemosyne supple-
ments; v.1)
BRILL, ©2006 564 p. $187.00
The 12 essays here and a second volume update again the history of
Greek expansion from an archaeological perspective, which is done very
few years as new evidence and information comes to light. Among the
areas discussed are Aegean Anatolia in the Early Dark Age, southern
Italy, Sardinia, Sicily, the Iberian Peninsula, and Egypt. One essays looks
at the Phoenicians in the Mediterranean as a non-Greek model of
overseas settlement and presence.
DF214 2006-016525 978-1-58765-281-3
Ancient Greece; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas J. Sienkewicz. (Magill’s choice)
Salem Press, ©2007 1028 p. $207.00
Sienkewicz (Monmouth College) presents 315 topical articles, ranging in
length from one to eight pages, exploring Greek history and culture from
the earliest archaeological evidence to the Battle of Actium in 31 B.C.E.,
which marked the merging of the Greek and Roman civilizations.
Presented over the course of three volumes, the entries discuss art and
architecture, daily life and customs, death and burial, education and
training, government and law, language and literature, medicine and
health, navigation and transportation, the performing arts, religion and
ritual, science, settlements and social structure, sports and entertainment,
technology, trade and commerce, war and weapons, and women’s lives.
Also included are numerous biographical entries on political and mil-
itary leaders, as well as important thinkers and literary figures. A small
collection of maps and a key to pronunciation is included at the start of
each volume. Included at the end of the third volume are category, per-
sonages, and subject indexes.
DF220 2006-027437 1-931534-16-0
Aegean bronze age rhyta.
Koehl, Robert B. (Prehistory monographs; 19)
Inst. /Aegean Prehistory Press, ©2006 484 p. $120.00
Rhyta (singular rhyton) are horn-shaped vessels with two holes in them,
usually at opposite ends, widely known from Classical times. Koehl
examines examples from much earlier in region of the Aegean Sea. In
addition to presenting a catalogue of known examples, he discusses their
typology, history, and development; mechanical functions; and uses.
Published by the Institute for Aegean Prehistory Academic Press, and
distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
DF221 2006-045296 1-931909-14-8
Pottery and society; the impact of recent studies in
Minoan pottery; gold medal colloquium in honor of Philip
P. Betancourt; proceedings.
Archaeological Institute of America. General Meeting (104th: 2003: New
Orleans, LA) Ed. by Malcolm H. Wiener et al.
Archaeological Inst.of America, ©2006 157 p. $45.00
Five papers explore what pottery can reveal about society on the island
of Crete during the Minoan period. Archaeologists discuss such topics as
pottery making and social reproduction in the Bronze Age Mesara, tra-
ditions and trends in the production and consumption of storage con-
tainers in proto-palatial and neo-palatial Crete, and whether southeastern
Anatolian pottery from Late Minoan Crete is evidence for direct contact
between Arzawa and Keftiu. There is no index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DF224 978-0-7156-3456-1
Solon the thinker; political thought in archaic Athens.
Lewis, John.
Duckworth, ©2006 178 p. $70.00
Lewis (history, Ashland U., Ohio) examines the poetic fragments of Solon,
the chief official of Athens around 594 BC, as early Greek political
thought. He finds there Solon’s way of understanding Athens and the
men in it, of grasping the certainty of justice and the arbitrariness of fate,
and of judging both good and bad rulers. He concludes that the poetry,
fragmentary as it is, reveals the birth of thinking about the polis as a
lawful, just community. Quotations are in Greek with English translation.
Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing.
DF229 2006-049068 978-90-04-13683-0
Brill’s companion to Thucydides.
Title main entry. Ed. by Antonios Rengakos and Antonis Tsakmakis.
BRILL, ©2006 947 p. $336.00
The first wide-ranging collective work on Thucydides in 38 years, this
volume reflects the change in focus during those years from Thucydides’
method of investigation and his values to his modes of representation
and his thinking. It also registers a new interest in interpretations based
on sociological and political categories, from the author’s philosophy of
history to his self-awareness as a writer. The 32 contributors, who are
international scholars in classics and history, provide a survey of current
trends in Thucydidean studies, covering Thucydides’ life, intellectual
milieu, predecessors, rhetoric, historical method, narrative techniques,
reliability as a historian, and his legacy. The papers include discussions
of warfare, religion, democracy, oligarchy and the invention of political
science. Rengakos is professor of Greek literature at the Aristotle
University of Thessaloniki. Tsakmakis teaches Greek literature at the
University of Cyprus.
DF543 2006-006939 0-7546-5902-X
The Byzantine aristocracy and its military function.
Cheynet, Jean-Claude. (Variorum collected studies series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 378 p. $114.95
The aristocracy formed the social framework of the Byzantine Empire
from the seventh to the fifteenth centuries, says Cheynet, but it would
probably be a mistake to try to delineate it too closely, as its ranks could
be entered through either heredity or capability, and its bottom side
trailed off into other classes. Six essays consider the general character-
istics of the aristocracy, and another eight their military role. Eight of 14
are in French. They were originally published between 1980 and 2003.
DF901 978-1-84217-206-3
Making a landscape sacred; outlying churches and icon
stands in Sphakia, southwestern Crete.
Nixon, Lucia.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 180 p. $48.00 (pa)
The Sphakia Survey is an archaeological investigation of how humans
have interacted with the landscape of a particular area in southwestern
Crete from their earliest arrival ca. 3000 B.C.E. until the end of the
Turkish period in ca. 1900 C.E. In this text, the Survey’s co-director
presents the results of a detailed study she made of two types of religious
structures in the area: outlying churches and icon stands. Employing a
phenomenological approach, she analyzes the rationale for the posi-
tioning of these structures and considers their symbolic function.
Distributed in the U.S. by The David Brown Book Company.
DG70 2006-050451 978-0-312-35585-2
Pompeii; the living city.
Butterworth, Alex and Ray Laurence.
St. Martin’s Press, ©2006 354 p. $27.95
Drawing on recent archaeological and historical research, Butterworth, a
writer and dramatist, and Laurence, a research fellow at the U. of
Birmingham Institute of Archaeology and Antiquity, offer a vivid portrait
of Pompeii during the 25 years leading up to the eruption that destroyed
it. They focus on key individuals from each stratum of Pompeian society
to create a compelling narrative that reanimates the sights and sounds of
the living city.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DG223 978-1-84217-208-7
Deliciae fictiles III; architectural terracottas in ancient
Italy; new discoveries and interpretations; proceedings.
Conference Deliciae filictiles (3rd: 2002: Rome, Italy) Ed. by Ingrid
Edlund-Berry et al.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 508 p. $70.00
Specialists in architectural terracottas from Italy and elsewhere consider
roofing systems and decorations on them made from the material
throughout ancient Italy. After reviewing recent research generally, the 44
papers, 10 in English and most of rest in Italian, cover Etruria; Umbria
and Abruzzo; The Faliscans, Rome, and Latium; Campania and Magna
Graecia; and Sicily. They are not indexed Distributed in the US by the
David Brown Book Company.
DG235 2005-021926 978-1-4051-0217-9
A companion to the Roman Republic.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nathan Rosenstein and Robert Morstein-Marx.
(Blackwell companions to the ancient world. Ancient history)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 737 p. $149.95
Put together by Rosenstein (history, Ohio State U.) and Morstein-Marx
(classics, U. of California at Santa Barbara), the goal of this work is to
present some of the most important themes of and debates about the rise
and fall of the Roman Republic in a manner that takes into account the
most recent research in the literature. Following chapters that discuss the
raw material of the historiography of Rome (the historical scholarship
from the early 20th century to the present, literary and epigraphic evi-
dence, the archaeology of the Roman city, and the physical geography
and environment of Italy), the chronological framework is presented in
chapters that narrate military and political developments from the
origins of Rome to the death of Julius Caesar. Beginning with the tenth
chapter and continuing to the 25th, the material turns broadly thematic,
with sections addressing civic structures of church, law, constitution, and
military; social issues of demography, social structure, and gender; issues
of political culture, including aristocratic values, popular power,
patronage, rhetoric and public life; and questions of Roman identity,
including history and collective memory, art and architecture, literature,
and the relationships between the Roman and the Other. The final four
chapters introduce areas of continuing historical controversy such as
imperial expansion under the Republic, agrarian change and the
economy, the relationship between Rome and Italy, and the transfor-
mation from Republic to Empire.
DG272 978-1-84217-248-3
Romanitas; essays on Roman archaeology in honour of
Sheppard Frere on the occasion of his ninetieth birthday.
Title main entry. Ed. by R.J.A. Wilson.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 242 p. $60.00
Frere (archeology of the Roman empire emeritus, Oxford U.) has justly
earned the appreciation of generations of colleagues and pupils, nine of
whom offer very accessible and well-illustrated accounts here, including
charming introductions that explain how they came to know and admire
Frere as a mentor and friend. They cover the relationship between urban
defenses and civic status in early Roman Britain, the evidence deter-
mining whether London was ever a colonia, the civic and military sig-
nificance of contributions toward Hadrian’s Wall, weapons and the
garrison at Newstead, elements of military fortifications of Roman
Britain, samian cups and their uses, the account of an anonymous
traveler on the Antonine Wall in 1697, two centuries of conservation and
archeology of Hadrian’s Wall and later Roman African red slip ware
from the frontier region in a province of Upper Egypt. Distributed by The
David Brown Book Co.
DG272 978-1-84217-219-3
Theoretical Roman archaeology conference (TRAC 2005);
proceedings.
International Theoretical Roman Archaeology Conference (15th: 2005:
University of Birmingham, UK) Ed. by Ben Croxford et al.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 137 p. $48.00 (pa)
Three of the 11 papers were commissioned to mark the 15th year of the
Conference by taking stock of it to date and projecting its course in the
future; the 10th anniversary was similarly commemorated. Other topics
include modeling Roman demography and urban dependency in central
Italy, the Romanization of the countryside in western Gaul, and wild and
domestic animals in the Roman sacrificial ritual. There is no index.
Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
–48–
DG311 2005-037149 978-1-4051-0857-7
A history of the later Roman Empire, AD 284-641; the
transformation of the ancient world.
Mitchell, Stephen. (Blackwell history of the ancient world)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 469 p. $84.95
Christianity was nearly an outlaw faith for too long. Justinian may have
been too optimistic about restoring the Roman empire too soon. Mitchell
(ancient history, U. of Exeter) wisely takes a top-down approach in his
treatment of the latter days of an empire that did not appear to know it
was at its end. In 12 concise chapters, the majority of which are thematic,
he first describes the archeological record and the nature of the evidence,
then examines the period from Diocletian to Alaric, the Roman state, the
barbarian kingdoms, and the passage from pagan to Christian. He then
traces the issues of conversion to Christianity and the politics of religious
identity, the political economy, the society and economy of the
Mediterranean and Middle East, the challenges of the late sixth century,
and the final reckoning of the Eastern empire. The timelines, maps and
summaries are particularly well done.
DG312 2005-026459 0-7546-5498-2
Violence in late antiquity; perceptions and practices.
Title main entry. Ed. by H.A. Drake.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 395 p. $99.95
Scholars of history and literature in the US and Europe present 27 papers
from the March 2003 Shifting Frontiers Conference, held in Santa
Barbara, California. Violence is so heavily associated in late antiquity that
few have thought to study it, but here specialists in western Europe,
Byzantium, and Islam and in different centuries cross previously invio-
lable disciplinary boundaries to consider the larger picture as they
discuss the prevalence of violence, legitimate violence, violence and
rhetoric, and religious violence.
DG540 2006-051689 978-90-04-15429-2
Spain in Italy; politics, society, and religion 1500-1700.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas James Dandelet and John A. Marino.
(The medieval and early modern Iberian world; v.32)
BRILL, ©2007 594 p. $188.00
Dandelet (history, U. of California, Berkeley) and Marino (history, U. of
California, San Diego) were two of the organizers of a 2003 conference
held at the American Academy in Rome, from which the 19 articles of
this volume derive. The Spanish, who ruled the kingdom of Naples,
Sardinia, and Sicily for centuries, were a key political and religious
power in Italy in the 16th-18th centuries. Articles describing the Spanish
states and Spanish influence throughout Italy are supplemented with
articles describing economic, social, administrative, and religious partic-
ulars during their rule. Most of the contributors are based in Italy or
Spain; their essays were translated into English for this publication. Full-
page b&w plates accompany the article on Spanish Counter-Reformation
art, by Sebastian Schütze (Queen’s U., Kingston, Ontario, Canada).
DG677 2002-013623 978-0-8018-8539-6
Enrico Dandolo and the rise of Venice. (reprint, 2003)
Madden, Thomas F.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2007 298 p. $25.00 (pa)
This is a paperbound reprint of a 2003 book. Between the 11th and 13th
centuries, Venice grew from a struggling merchant commune into a pow-
erful maritime empire. In this study, Madden (history, Saint Louis U.)
traces the city-state’s rise through an examination of the life of Enrico
Dandolo, who ruled Venice as doge from 1192 until his death in 1205.
Coverage includes Dandolo’s efforts to reform the Venetian Church; his
role in the Fourth Crusade; and the social, political, and religious envi-
ronment in which he worked.
DG737 2005-037147 978-1-4051-1954-2
A history of Florence 1200-1575.
Najemy, John M.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 515 p. $84.95
Known as the “birthplace” of the Renaissance, the Italian city- republic
of Florence was the epicenter of a number of major social, economic,
political and cultural transformations. In this text for scholars and
general readers, Najemy traces the causes and effects of these important
changes as he describes all of the major phases of Florentine history from
1200-1575. Najemy (history, Cornell U.) is also the editor of Italy in the Age
of the Renaissance, 1300-1550 (2004).
–49–
DJK3 2006-000224 963-7326-52-9
Discourses of collective identity in Central and Southeast
Europe (1770-1945); texts and commentaries; v.1: Late
enlightenment, emergence of the modern ‘national idea.’
Title main entry. Ed. by Balazs Trencsenyi and Michal Kopecek.
Central European U. Press, ©2006 351 p. $39.95
Identifying a need to create a common regional framework of intercul-
tural dialogue within Central and Southeast Europe, scholars from the
Balkan Summer University in Plovdiv, Bulgaria, conceived of a reader
containing a “representative collection of fundamental texts that had con-
tributed to and/or reflected upon the formation of narratives of national
identity” in the region, the first volume of which is presented here by
Trencsenyi (history, Central European U., Hungary) and Kopecek
(Institute of Contemporary History, Czech Republic) in the hopes of con-
tributing to the emergence of a non-nationalist vision that goes beyond
national grand narratives. The volume’s 44 readings are presented with
the intent of shedding light on the transformation of cultural patterns
(e.g. the Enlightenment) and the emergence of national ideologies and
movements. The era covered by this first volume of four begins in 1770
and ends with the emergence of Romanticism. Distributed in the US by
Books International.
DK32 2006-001693 1-933146-03-6
Catherine the Great and French philosophers of the
Enlightenment; Montesquieu, Voltaire, Rousseau, Diderot
and Grim.
Gorbatov, Inna.
Academica Press, LLC, ©2006 259 p. $74.95
When Catherine II became empress in 1762, says Gorbatov, she sought to
end nearly five centuries of Russian isolation from the West by nurturing
a relationship with French philosophers who were developing an oppo-
sition to the state and looking to northern and Protestant countries for
models of freedom. She examines the impact of their ideas during the 34
years of Catherine’s reign. Professor Gorbatov’s monograph is based on
original research in Russian, French and American archives and is a
unique study of Catherine’s velvet glove/iron fist manipulation of French
intellectuals, (always with the exception of J-J Rousseau).
DK34 2006-016939 978-0-7425-4981-4
The Jews of Khazaria, 2d ed.
Brook, Kevin Alan.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 317 p. $39.95
The Khazars were a Turkic people who established a large empire in
southern Russia during the early Middle Ages, which formed a barrier
between the Islamic Caliphate and the Byzantine Empire. They would be
of little interest outside of specialist history circles except that they—or at
least their leaders—adopted Judaism, which has led some to speculate
that Ashkenazi Jews descended from them, rather than from Jews of the
Middle East, thus undermining Jewish historical claims to territory there.
American historian Brook, a specialist in Khazars, explores their entire
history rather than just the Judaic aspect of it. The second edition incor-
porates new findings since 1999, when the first was published.
DK67 2006-005839 978-0-7546-4630-3
Russian-Belarusian integration; playing games behind the
Kremlin walls.
Danilovich, Alex. (Post-Soviet politics)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 234 p. $99.95
Although Belaruse appears to be the perfect partner in developing
strategic communications with Europe, Russia has so far been reluctant
to take back its former fellow USSR republic in any form of strategic
alliance. Danilovich (Kazakhstan Institute of Management, Economics
and Strategic Research) finds the reasons include strangely convoluted
domestic politics, poorly planned and executed treaties, and leaders who
are variable at best. The result is a near-total lack of congruence, failure
to integrate, and intrigue beyond fiction. He explains the linkage between
domestic and foreign policy, the efforts to integrate under Yeltsin in a
dizzying array of treaties, and the role of Putin in the quarrels and
moments reconciliation that have not led to integration.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DK69 2006-023949 978-0-7391-1632-6
Soviet-Cuban relations 1985 to 1991; changing perceptions
in Moscow and Havana.
Bain, Mervyn J.
Lexington Books, ©2007 149 p. $55.00
Bain (politics and international relations, U. of Aberdeen) reassess rela-
tions between the Soviet Union and Cuba during the final years of the
former, partly drawing on recent theories of international relations. His
topics include the foreign policy theories of the two countries, idealism
and institutionalism during early encounters, and the Gorbachev factor
and glasnost.
DK254 0-7524-3409-8
To kill Rasputin; the life and death of Grigori Rasputin.
Cook, Andrew.
Tempus Publishing, ©2005 287 p. $35.00
The conventional tale is that Russian aristocrats sensationally murdered
the priest and magician in 1916 for fear of his influence on the czar’s
family. Cook has found evidence that the British Secret Intelligence
Service had a hand in it. He includes here information that has come to
light since the BBC film he worked on. Distributed in the US by Trafalgar
Square Publishing.
DK288 2006-015001 978-0-295-98637-1
Boris Yeltsin and Russia’s democratic transformation.
Ellison, Herbert J. (Jackson School Publications in International Studies)
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 313 p. $30.00
Russian politician Anatoly Chubais has compared Boris Yeltsin to Peter
the Great and Tsar Alexander II in terms of his importance in trans-
forming Russia. Ellison (emeritus, history and international studies, U. of
Washington) basically agrees with that assessment, crediting Yeltsin with
being the “leader in the destruction of the communist dictatorship, the
liberator of the republics of the Soviet Union, the architect of a demo-
cratic constitutional structure, the founder of a new economic system,
and the initiator of a comprehensive transformation of Russia’s role in
international affairs.” He makes the case for Yeltsin’s importance through
reviewing and appraising his role in Russian affairs from his removal
from the Gorbachev Politburo in 1987 to his resignation from the presi-
dency in 1999.
DK505 2006-020005 978-963-7326-58-5
Making a great ruler; Grand Duke Vytautas of Lithuania.
Mickunaite, Giedre.
Central European U. Press, ©2006 337 p. $47.95
Giedre (art history and theory, Vilnius Academy of Fine Arts, Lithuania)
is not primarily interested in the deeds of Vytautas the Great (1348-1430)
or with exposing the misperceptions that underly his image, though she
does a little of both as introduction. Rather she investigates how and why
it happened that he came to be considered a great hero of Lithuania. She
traces the making of his myth from his own efforts to the post-Soviet era.
The study is based on her 2002 Ph.D. dissertation in medieval studies at
the Central European University in Budapest. Distributed in the US by
Books International.
DK679 2006-007157 978-0-8014-7330-2
Defending the border; identity, religion, and modernity in
the Republic of Georgia.
Pelkmans, Mathijs. (Culture and society after socialism)
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 240 p. $22.95 (pa)
In this volume, Pelkmans (Max Planck Institute for Social Anthropology)
offers the results of research carried out during extended stays in the
Georgian province of Ajaria between 1999-2001. The result is a fasci-
nating study of the changes that are continuing to occur following the
collapse of the former Soviet Union, particularly those that concern
culture. As Ajaria, with its ancient Christian traditions, shares a border
with Turkey, religion—including Christian, Muslim, and Soviet-era atheist
religious traditions, values, and interactions—provides a common theme
in Pelkmans’ account of Ajarian lives.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DK4409 2006-045334 978-0-8214-1695-2
The clash of moral nations; cultural politics in Pilsudski’s
Poland, 1926-1935.
Plach, Eva. (Ohio University Press Polish and Polish-American studies
series)
Ohio University Press, ©2006 262 p. $42.95
The May 1926 coup in Poland, led by Józef Klemens Pilsudski, while cer-
tainly a result of the great cleavage between left and right in Polish pol-
itics, also served to exacerbate divisions and, according to Plach (history,
Wilfrid Laurier U., Canada), transform them into irreconcilable moral
categories that went beyond left and right to encompass struggle over
“everything from models of femininity and definitions of the nation to
ideas about citizen activism and service to the state.” The goal of her
work is to describe how these “moral nations” took shape following the
coup. In order to do this, she examines the goals of the left-liberal intel-
ligentsia as revealed in letters to Pilsudski, the explosion of women’s
activism that followed the coup, the responses of right-nationalist and
socialist political forces to the coup, and the writings of Polish literary
figure Tadeusz Boy-Zelenski.
DL643 2006930452 0-7618-3570-9
Immigration, gender, and family transitions to adulthood
in Sweden.
Bernhardt, Eva et al.
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 258 p. $36.99 (pa)
Featuring the work of a team of demographers, sociologists and anthro-
pologists, this volume studies the transition to adulthood among the
adult children of immigrants to Sweden. The research focuses on the host
country, rather than the country of origin, and examines the educational
attainment of Swedish young adults of different origins, their transitions
to marriage and cohabitation, inter-ethnic partnering, and their efforts to
balance work and family.
DL1032 2006-021333 978-0-313-32837-4
The history of Finland.
Lavery, Jason. (Greenwood histories of the modern nations)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 195 p. $45.00
Lavery (history, Oklahoma State U.) offers a survey of the history of the
nation of Finland, from Ice Age prehistory through the present. Nine
chapters introduce the culture, geography and climate of the country, and
discuss Finland as part of the Swedish realm; 19th century autonomy;
Russian rule (dubbed the Age of Oppression), independence, and civil
war; the country’s roles in WWII and the Cold War; and its current
culture, politics, and economy. The final chapter profiles notable people
in Finnish history.
DP96 978-90-04-14594-8
The Visigoths in Gaul and Iberia; a supplemental
bibliography, 1984-2003.
Ferreiro, Alberto. (The medieval and early modern Iberian world; v.28)
BRILL, ©2006 889 p. $305.00
Ferreiro (European history, Seattle Pacific U.) presents a sequel to his
1988 bibliography, and was rather astounded to discover that there were
as many relevant publications in the 20 years between 1984 and 2003 as
there had been from about the beginning of time through 1983. The
same problem remains, he says: the wide dispersal of information about
Visigoths in Gaul and Iberia throughout congresses, symposia,
Festschriften, journals with very limited distribution, and chapters in
books that are about something entirely different. He tracked down
nearly 8,000, which he cites without annotation. The sections are mostly
thematic, but some focus on particular genre.
DR435 2006-019190 978-0-87480-870-4
The Armenian rebellion at Van.
Title main entry. Ed. by Justin McCarthy et al. (Utah series in Turkish
and Islamic studies)
University of Utah Press, ©2006 296 p. $25.00 (pa)
Prior to the events recorded in this book, some 500,00 Armenians, Turks,
and Kurds populated the Ottoman province of Van. Beginning in the late
19th century, the Armenian minority revolted against Ottoman rule,
seeking to establish an independent country. With the help of the
Russians, they drove out much of the province’s Muslim population, only
to driven out in turn after their betrayal by the Russians, in the judgment
of the authors, who describe the political and military events in the
region from the 1870s to 1919.
–50–
DR603 2006-023065 978-0-8047-5501-6
Between Islam and the state; the politics of engagement.
Turam, Berna.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 223 p. $21.95 (pa)
Turam (sociology and Middle East studies, Hampshire College) began her
account in her native Istanbul, then expanded it to include Ankara,
Almati, Kazakhstan, and North America to present a multi-cited ethnog-
raphy that served as her doctoral dissertation at McGill University,
probably in 2001. By following everyday encounters between the state
and Islamic actors, she challenges the view that there is a conflict in
Turkey between Islamism and secular democracy, between cultural and
political processes, and between civil society and the state.
DR1313 2006-044316 978-0-8108-5767-4
Balkan propaganda wars.
Hentea, Calin. Ed. by Martin Gordon. Trans. by Christina Bordianu.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 157 p. $45.00 (pa)
Hentea, a colonel in the Romanian Armed Forces working in the psy-
chological operation section of the Romanian General Staff and a psy-
chological operations and information operation staff officer in NATO’s
headquarters in Kosovo in 2003-4, describes and assesses what he judges
to be the failure of the West’s information war (propaganda) activities
during the Balkan Wars of the 1990s, while also looking at the propa-
ganda efforts of other forces. In the end, he judges NATO informational
failure to be the result of a “deaf- mute” dialogue wherein the West failed
to understand the psychology of the Serbs or other Balkan peoples.
DR1313 978-1-77007-031-8
Sarajevo roses; war memoir of a peacekeeper.
du Preez Bezdrob, Anné Marié.
Oshun Books, ©2004 390 p. $21.95 (pa)
For two years during the Bosnian conflict, Anné Mariè du Preez Bezdrob
was a United Nations peacekeeper in the besieged city of Sarajevo. In this
memoir, she recounts her experiences and describes how the people she
met there persevered despite the daily horrors of war. A former political
journalist, du Preez Bezdrob is also the author of Winnie Mandela: A Life.
Distributed in the U.S. by International Publishers Marketing.
DR1535 0-907871-89-5
Croatia; through writers’ eyes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Frankopan et al.
Eland Publishing, ©2007 250 p. $28.95 (pa)
Famous writers such as Evelyn Waugh, Rebecca West, Osbert Sitwell,
Fitzroy Maclean, Vladimir Dedijer, and others are featured in this com-
pilation of stories about Croatia that consists of excerpts from their
writings. Excerpts range in date from 1778 to 2001 and are classified by
theme: travel in the area, people, cities, and war, including the fall of
Yugoslavia. A brief history of the country is provided by Frankopan, and
each section is introduced. There is no index. Distributed in the US by
Dufour.
DR2087 2006-049106 978-0-8014-4539-2
Peace at any price; how the world failed Kosovo.
King, Iain and Whit Mason. (Crises in world politics)
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 303 p. $27.95
Following a chronological account of the UN’s involvement in Kosovo, the
authors (both of whom served in the UN Mission in Kosovo—UNMIK)
assess the international community’s performance, judging it to be a
severe disappointment and forecasting ethnic division, endemic crime,
non-inclusive politics, and a dysfunctional economy. Examining the
causes of this failure, they argue that UNMIK neglecting soft power by
putting local politicians in charge of education, failed to properly regulate
the media, used hard power ineffectively due to risk-aversion, and failed
to understand the nature of Kosovo’s ethnic divisions.
THE MIDDLE EAST, ASIA
DS13 2005-058213 978-0-7614-7677-1
Peoples of Western Asia; 11v.
Title main entry.
Marshall Cavendish, ©2006 648 p. $359.95
Written for the middle school student, this resource introduces them to a
part of the world little known until recently. Heavily illustrated with color
photos and including inset boxes detailing customs and history, the
volumes provide a fascinating overview of each country. Each country’s
entry includes a map and statistics, then details its ancient and modern
history, peoples, languages, religions, industries, foods, arts and crafts,
sports, and holidays. Each volume contains a glossary and bibliography,
with a more detailed bibliography, a pronunciation guide, and indexes
contained in vol.11.
–51–
DS44 2005-055323 978-0-7614-7571-2
World and its peoples; Middle East, western Asia and
northern Africa; 11v.
Title main entry.
Marshall Cavendish, ©2007 1584 p. $499.95
Written for middle school students, the 11 volumes of this reference
provide a thorough introduction to the geography, politics, peoples, and
cultures of the countries of the Middle East, western Asia, and northern
Africa. Each volume contains a different geographic area, or a single
country. The first part of each volume describes the area’s geography,
resources, and history. The entries on each country include a map and
list of statistics, population profile, and chronology, followed by dis-
cussion of the country’s government, modern history, literature, culture,
festivals, food and drink, religion, daily life, health and welfare, and
economy. The volumes are well illustrated with color photos. Volume 11
is devoted to appendices, including many comparative tables of topics
such as population, or family life; 6 thematic indexes; a glossary; bibli-
ography; and comprehensive index.
DS51 2006-050606 978-90-04-15456-8
Society and politics in an Ottoman town; ‘Ayntab in the
17th century.
Canbakal, Hülya. (The Ottoman Empire and its heritage; 36)
BRILL, ©2007 213 p. $120.00
Canbakal (history, Sabanci U.) has revised her 1999 doctoral dissertation
in history and Middle Eastern studies at Harvard University. In it she
looks at the Turkish town now called Gaziantep during the late 17th
century, when the Ottoman Empire was suffering both from domestic
political and military strife and from military defeats on the European
front. From the perspective of social and political hierarchy—the power
of the urban elite and their relationship with the common folk—she con-
siders privilege certified, wealth, honor and influence, and representa-
tives and decision-making.
DS63 2006-028576 978-0-275-99328-3
Russia in the Middle East; friend or foe?
Kreutz, Andrej.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 222 p. $49.95
Kreutz (political science and international relations, U. of Calgary,
Canada) analyzes post-Soviet Russian foreign policy towards Syria,
Lebanon, Jordan, Israel/Palestine, Iraq, Egypt, and the Arabian Peninsula
in terms of its broad historical and geopolitical framework. The major
questions he wishes to address in his treatment concern the origins of
Russia’s objectives in the Arab East (Al- Mashreq), the impact of sociopo-
litical change in Russian statehood on Russian foreign policy, the basic
goals and characteristics of Russian diplomacy, President Putin’s par-
ticular contributions to those goals and characteristics, and the compati-
bility (or lack thereof) of Russian foreign policy in the region with
American, Israeli, or broader Western objectives.
DS70 2005-037991 1-84553-193-0
Uruk; the first city.
Liverani, Mario. Trans. by Zainab Bahrani and Marc Van De Mieroop.
(BibleWorld)
Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2006 97 p. $20.00 (pa)
Liverani (history, U. of Rome) makes use of the work of V. Gordon Childe
and Marxist theory to show how Uruk in southern Mesopotamia created
a revolution in the fourth millennium BCE that has served as the basis
of economy-based society ever since. Liverani takes an interdisciplinary
approach to explain how the evolution of a simple farmland into a
complex marketplace was far from accidental, and how commerce grew
to the counting house and thence to politics and governance. The result
is accessible but rigorous, and serves as a model for further studies.
Distributed in the US by David Brown Book Co.
The two Book News periodicals alert you to more than 19,000 new, high-level
books each year. Our mission is to get reliable news to you quickly.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS70 2006-012511 978-1-59051-238-8
Web of deceit; the history of Western complicity in Iraq,
from Churchill to Kennedy to George W. Bush.
Lando, Barry M.
Other Press LLC, ©2007 350 p. $24.95
The December 30, 2006 hanging of Saddam Hussein apparently dashed
any hopes that a fair and transparent judicial process for the Iraqi dic-
tator would also bring to light the complicity of Western leaders for his
many crimes. Fortunately for the historical record, Lando (a investigative
producer with 60 Minutes for 25 years) has gone back to the period of
the British Mandate of Iraq and exposed the hypocrisy of George W.
Bush, Tony Blair, and other Western leaders as they wring their hands
and cry crocodile tears over Saddam’s many victims. He describes
Winston Churchill’s bombing of Iraqis (in order to instill in them a
“lively terror”) as a precedent for Saddam’s terror, CIA sponsorship of the
young Saddam as he rose through the ranks of the Ba`ath Party (which
the CIA also used to massacre putative Iraqi Communists on CIA-sup-
plied lists), Richard Nixon and Henry Kissinger’s cynical encouragement
of Kurdish rebellion against the central government and see-no-evil
attitude towards Saddam Hussein as he brutally crushed the uprising in
1975 after it no longer served US goals, and George H.W. Bush’s similar
actions in the wake of the first Gulf War. He also describes how the US
and other Western powers looked the other way as Saddam “gassed his
own people” at Halabja because they were encouraging his war against
Iran during the 1980s, and even how the chemical weapons used to carry
out those attacks were supplied by French, Belgian, and German firms.
He takes the narrative “full circle” from the British Mandate to the US
occupation.
DS79 2006-013912 978-1-931859-39-4
Friendly fire; the remarkable story of a journalist
kidnapped in Iraq, rescued by an Italian secret service
agent, and shot by U.S. forces.
Sgrena, Giuliana. Trans. by Lesley Freeman Riva.
Haymarket Books, ©2006 215 p. $20.00
Unlike journalists “embedded” with the U.S. military in Iraq, Sgrena
covered the war for an Italian newspaper. Amy Goodman (Democracy
Now!) introduces Sgrena’s account of being a victim both of Iraqi insur-
gents and the US military in 2005, as an anti-war journalist interviewing
refugees from the US bombing of Falluja. She reveals her lingering anx-
ieties and fear that independent journalists can no longer report the truth
about Iraq. The book includes a map and reprinted online accounts and
interviews. The Italian edition was published in 2005 as Fuoco amico by
Feltrinelli, Ltd., Italy.
DS79 978-1-56025-892-6
Inside the resistance; the Iraqi insurgency and the future
of the Middle East.
Chehab, Zaki.
Nation Books, ©2005 277 p. $15.95 (pa)
In the “Sunni Triangle” city of Ramadi, Middle Eastern journalist Chehab
made contacts with the Sunni resistance to the American occupation of
Iraq shortly after the capture of Saddam Hussein. In this work of
reportage, he incorporates his knowledge of the resistance into a general
account of the course of the war. His account provides a view of the
insurgency that is unavailable to western journalists and, in the end,
makes the case that the Americans and the Iraqi government must reach
a political accommodation with their opponents.
DS79 2006-020992 978-0-275-99243-9
Inside the red zone; a veteran for peace reports from
Iraq.
Ferner, Mike.
Praeger, ©2006 164 p. $39.95
A member of Veterans for Peace, Mike Ferner traveled to Iraq twice, just
before the invasion in March 2003 and again a year later. In this book
he reports on those travels, describing the experience of serving as a
human shield in an attempt to prevent the war during the first visit and
presenting reportage from the “Red Zone,” in other words the entirety of
Iraq except for Baghdad’s Green Zone. His reporting profiles other peace
activists alongside ordinary Iraqis just trying to survive the chaos and
violence of occupation and war.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS79 2006-012195 1-56656-648-7
Iraq; a war.
Title main entry. Photographs by the Associated Press.
Olive Branch Press, ©2007 158 p. $20.00 (pa)
This volume collects work by Associated Press staff photographers
documenting the invasion and occupation of Iraq. In spite of the fact that
they were available from the Associated Press, many of the photographs
never made it into the mainstream American newspapers, perhaps
because editors perceived their subject matter as too “sensitive,” depicting
as they do such subjects as an Iraqi detainee hooded and comforting his
four-year-old son behind barbed wire, innocent victims of US military
operations, scenes of carnage from Sunni insurgent bombs, morgues full
of victims of Shia death squads connected to the US-installed government,
and other disturbing scenes in addition to more comforting images, such
as purple-fingered voters, that did make it to American audiences. The
work of 39 photographers is represented. Journalist Chris Hedges
provides the introduction, a meditation on the failure that is war in
general and the Iraq War in particular.
DS79 2006-017238 978-1-59114-527-1
Iraq and back; inside the war to win the peace.
Olson, Kim.
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 211 p. $26.95
Col. Olson (US Air Force, Ret.) worked under Lieutenant General Jay
Garner in the initial days of the occupation of Iraq, prior to his
replacement by L. Paul Bremer. In this memoir she describes her expe-
rience of the occupation, offering an insider’s account of the initial
political and economic reconstruction strategies, most of which were
scrapped with the arrival of Bremer.
DS79 2006-019926 978-92-808-1128-5
The Iraq crisis and world order; structural, institutional
and normative challenges.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ramesh Thakur and Waheguru Pal Singh
Sidhu.
United Nations University Pr., ©2006 549 p. $49.00 (pa)
Thakur (senior vice-rector, United Nations U., Japan and Assistant
Secretary-General of the United Nations) and Sidhu (Geneva Centre for
Security Policy) declare that the “Iraq war of March 2003 was a multiple
assault on the foundations and rules of the existing UN-centred world
order as well as the critical transatlantic relationship.” Whether it was an
“assault” or not and who may be responsible for that assault are no
doubt questions over which there is disagreement, but there is little
doubt among most observers that the Iraq war represents a crisis in the
international order, especially in terms of the relationship of the United
States to the United Nations system it helped set up following World War
II, a crisis that the contributors of these 31 chapters examine from dis-
parate viewpoints. Opening chapters discuss structural and normative
challenges, addressing the tension between American unipolarity and the
multilateral international system, contestation of norms of international
peace and security versus state sovereignty, and the challenge of the
world-spanning movement against the war. A range of national institu-
tional perspectives on the war are then presented, approximately a third
from the Middle East, a third from the major powers, and a third from
smaller countries and institutional actors such as the EU and NATO.
Remaining chapters explore legal and doctrinal issues, including the legit-
imacy of the war, humanitarian intervention as a (flawed) justification
for the war, and relations between the UN and occupying powers of Iraq.
DS79 2004-023973 0-415-36293-8
The Iraq War; European perspectives on politics, strategy,
and operations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jan Hallenberg and Hakan Karlsson.
(Contemporary security studies)
Routledge, ©2005 253 p. $115.00
The editors (of the Swedish National Defense College, along with most of
their contributors) present a collection that was originally intended to
draw out political and military lessons of the American/British invasion
and occupation of Iraq for Swedish military officers, but now has been
made available for the English-language market. Following an intro-
ductory essay discussing the primary puzzles of the war (when did it
happen, why did it happen, and how was it fought?), five essays discuss
the pre-war political and strategic goals and considerations of the gov-
ernments of the US, Britain, Russia, and Ba’athist Iraq. The political dis-
cussion is concluded with an essay that sets the war in context of
international law and discusses how the creation of Iraq in the crucible
of World War I created the conditions for the current conflict. Discussion
then turns to military matters in essays exploring the use of force and
coercion against Iraq as elements of US strategy, combined arms theory
and the conduct of US ground operations, air operations and their
impact, and the role of information management.
–52–
DS79 2005-053383 1-59558-062-X
Mr. Galloway goes to Washington; the Brit who set
Congress straight about Iraq.
Galloway, George.
The New Press, ©2005 132 p. $13.95 (pa)
British MP George Galloway, who was booted from the Labour Party over
his vociferous opposition to the invasion of Iraq and went on to form the
new Respect Party, traveled to Washington in May of 2005 to testify before
the US Senate’s Committee on Homeland Security and Governmental
Affairs in answer to accusations that he was involved in Iraqi Oil-for-
Food program corruption and other scandals. His performance before
the committee, in which he disputed the accusations against him and
issued a stinging rebuke of the pre-invasion sanctions against Iraq and
the illegal war of George W. Bush and his own Prime Minister, galvanized
many antiwar sympathizers in the United States who were unused to that
level of defiance by a Senate witness. The transcript of that testimony
occupies about a third of this slim volume, which also contains a pair of
essays in which Galloway describes his involvement with Iraq over the
years and the circumstances of his trip to Washington.
DS79 2005-058183 978-1-57965-309-5
A soldiers’ portfolio; this is our war; servicemen’s
photographs of life in Iraq.
Friedman, Devin.
Artisan, ©2006 224 p. $29.95
GQ journalist Friedman, along with his editors, selected the 256 photo-
graphs presented here from tens of thousands they collected from
American servicemen and women who served in Iraq between 2003 and
2005. All dated and credited when possible, the photographs are catego-
rized by the experience they depict: initial deployment and separation
from family, fun and camaraderie among the troops, realities on the bat-
tlefield, opportunities for tourism and sightseeing, everyday life in the
barracks and communication with loved ones, and the soldier’s
unavoidable proximity to devastation and death. The stories of five sol-
diers are featured in detail, through essays and/or photographic narra-
tives; among those profiled are the only man to receive the Medal of
Honor for combat and Iraq and witness to the crimes at Abu Grahib.
General Wesley Clark authored the foreword.
DS110 2005-045576 90-04-12626-0
Excavations at Sepphoris; v.1.
Strange, James F. et al. (The Brill reference library of Judaism; v.22)
BRILL, ©2006 170 p. $188.00
Strange (religious studies, U. of South Florida), Lonhstaff (emeritus, reli-
gious studies, Colby College), and Groh (humanities and archaeology,
Illinois Wesleyan U.) present the first volume of a multi-volume work
reporting on archaeological investigations into the ancient Galilean city
of Sepphoris. It first reviews the ancient literary sources about Sepphoris
and the progress of the investigations in the 1980s. It then describes the
findings regarding the tower (or citadel) and the villa (thought to be a
church or basilica in the 1930s). It also incorporates details of coins,
pottery, and other small finds.
DS110 2006-022613 0-89757-072-3
Tel Tanninim; excavations at Krokodeilon Polis, 1996-
1999.
Stieglitz, R. Robert. (American schools of oriental research archeological
reports; v.10)
Am.Schools / Oriental Research, ©2006 255 p. $84.95
Tel Tanninim, Crocodiles Mound, is the modern Hebrew name for the
Arabic site Tell el-Melat, Mortar Mound, on the east coast of the
Mediterranean about 4.25 kilometers north of Caesarea. Stieglitz and col-
leagues describe the geography and hydrography of the site; the four-year
excavation project they conducted; and finds dating to the Iron Age,
Byzantine, and later periods. Distributed by The David Brown Book Co.
DS112 2005-037764 978-1-56563-704-7
Manners and customs in the Bible; an illustrated guide to
daily life in Bible times, 3d ed.
Matthews, Victor H.
Hendrickson Publishers, ©2006 256 p. $24.95
Matthews (religious studies, Missouri State University) provides back-
ground information, accessible to general readers and students, on the
peoples and cultures of the Bible and how they lived. Each chapter fur-
nishes an introduction to the historical, political, and physical setting of
five basic periods in Israel’s history, and explains cultural practices, reli-
gious tensions, and apparent contradictions in the Bible. This third
edition is updated to reflect current scholarship, and the book’s
appealing color art program includes about 150 new photos, illustrations,
and maps. A glossary is also new. Personal name, place name, and
ancient text indexes are included.
–53–
DS115 2005-058245 90-04-15008-0
Making history; Josephus and historical method.
Title main entry. Ed. by Zuleika Rodgers. (Supplements to the Journal
for the study of Judaism; v.110)
BRILL, ©2007 471 p. $188.00
Most scholars today focus on the accuracy of certain events in the work
of Flavius Josephus (37-100) or on his rather sketchy credentials as a his-
torian, but the International Josepus Colloquium, in Dublin in September
2004, critically analyzed his historical methods, particularly the method-
ological encounters between interpretation and history. The 18 papers
that emerged look at ancient and modern conceptual frameworks, his
use of sources, his reliability as a source, and the interface between his
accounts and archaeological evidence. The few contributors whose fields
are identified are theologians or archaeologists; presumably some at least
have a background in historiography.
DS115 2006-049127 978-90-04-15389-9
Studies in Josephus and the varieties of ancient Judaism;
Louis H. Feldman jubilee volume.
Title main entry. Ed. by Shaye J.D. Cohen and Joshua J. Schwartz.
(Ancient Judaism and early Christianity; v.67)
BRILL, ©2007 312 p. $139.00
One contributor mentions in passing that his field is Jewish studies, but
in general the contributors are identified only by name. They consider
what the work of Jewish historian Flavius Josephus (37-100 AD) reveals
about the diversity of thought and practice among Jews during and
before his time. Among their topics are the impact of Zionism on Joseph
Klausner’s History of the Second Temple, the abuse and misuse of
Josephus in Eusebius’ Ecclesiastical History, Josephus and the Books of
Samuel, and conversion to Judaism during the Second Temple period.
DS119 2006-929009 978-0-7618-3554-7
Barriers to reconciliation; case studies on Iraq and the
Palestine-Israel conflict.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jacqueline S. Ismael and William W. Haddad.
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 332 p. $42.00 (pa)
Ismael (social work, U. of Calgary, Canada) and Haddad (history,
California State U. at Fullerton, US) present 12 chapters analyzing struc-
tural obstacles to peace and reconciliation in US-occupied Iraq and
Israel/Palestine. The Iraq chapters analyze the US occupation as a neo-
colonial revival of Manifest Destiny, discuss US funded Iraqi women’s
non-governmental organizations as instruments of colonial policy,
analyze the degradation of Iraq’s health care system under occupation,
describe Iraqi civil society resistance to the occupation, and set the occu-
pation within the wider context of US policy in the Middle East and inter-
national law. The Israel/Palestine chapters discuss evangelical Christian
Zionism, debate the two-state and one-state solutions to the conflict, and
reflect on the international legal and political implications of the
“Security Fence”/”Apartheid Wall.”
DS119 2006-002388 978-1-58826-365-0
Bridging the divide; peacebuilding in the Israeli-
Palestinian conflict.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edy Kaufman et al. (Project of the European
Centre for Conflict Prevention)
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2006 323 p. $57.50
Activists and scholars took part in a research project conducted by the
Centre and other organizations that looked into the role of non-gov-
ernment organizations in the Israeli-Palestinian peace process. Eight
essays revised from presentations at several seminars consider such
aspects as a historical perspective, civil society, and nonviolent action. A
directory of Israeli, Palestinian, and joint organizations is also included.
DS119 2006-009650 0-415-38560-1
Israeli politics and the First Palestinian intifada; political
opportunities, framing processes, and contentious politics.
Alimi, Eitan Y. (Routledge studies in Middle Eastern politics; 4)
Routledge, ©2007 226 p. $120.00
Analyzing Palestinian print sources and data gathered through inter-
views with Palestinian activists and Israeli journalists, Alimi (political
science, the Hebrew U. and the U. of Haifa, Israel) concludes that the
timing of the first intifada (1987-92), which was an unprecedented shift
in prolonged commitment to resistance to Israeli occupation compared to
earlier years, was intimately connected to Palestinian perceptions of
system-wide Israeli political divisions. This analysis suggests that a pre-
existing willingness and readiness to resist, structural in terms of Israeli
oppression and agency-oriented in terms of the Palestinian development
of organizations and ideologies, combined with an opportunity
dimension connected to Palestinian perceptions of Israeli politics in order
to trigger the inception of the intifada.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS119 2006-025245 0-275-99041-9
Terror in the Holy Land; inside the anguish of the Israeli-
Palestinian conflict.
Title main entry. Ed. by Judy Kuriansky. (Contemporary psychology)
Praeger, ©2006 280 p. $49.95
Bringing together 31 contributions from professionals in mental health
and related disciplines, this collection explores some of the myriad
psychosocial issues relevant to the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. Kuriansky
(psychiatry, Columbia Medical School) presents the papers in four
sections that provide context and describe the overall psychological effects
of the conflict; explore key psychosocial issues including revenge,
humiliation, imbalance of power, and search for identity in groups;
explore the experiences of women and children caught in the conflict;
and discuss therapeutic and educational efforts for understanding,
coping, and reconciliation.
DS121 2006-049124 90-04-14699-7
Proximity to power and Jewish sectarian groups of the
ancient period; a review of lifestyle, values, and Halakhah
in the Pharisees, Sadducees, Essenes, and Qumran.
Newman, Hillel. Ed. by Ruth Ludlam. (Brill reference library of
Judaism; v.25)
BRILL, ©2006 332 p. $143.00
First looking at the four Jewish groups during the Second Temple period,
Newman, a scholar of Jewish history, then argues that the axis of political
involvement is central for determining the future development of a
minority group and for predicting its behavior, lifestyle, and rules. He
also finds that minority groups behave in a consistent, systematic, and
rational manner. The study began as his 1998 Ph.D. dissertation, Norm,
Dissent and Secession in the Judaism of the Maccabean Era, in Jewish
history at Bar Ilan University; the CiP data retains that title.
DS134 2006-049033 978-90-04-15332-5
Building a diaspora; Russian Jews in Israel, Germany,
and the USA.
Ben Rafael, Eliezer, et al. (International comparative social studies; v.13)
BRILL, ©2006 374 p. $120.00
The immigration of Jews from the former Soviet Union has been called
a modern exodus. In a comparative study of how they fare in new homes
in Israel, Germany, and the US, Ben-Rafael (emeritus, sociology, U. of Tel-
Aviv) and German and US colleagues examined the theoretical and prac-
tical issues involved in self-images of being Russian vs. being Jewish vs.
being a new nationality. Their survey, which also analyzed their coverage
in Jewish and mainstream print media, confirms that Russian-speaking
Jews in these major diaspora countries share convergent and divergent
features. While all need to construct new identities, only in Israel is not
meeting traditional criteria for being Jewish a major issue. Policy impli-
cations are also addressed. Methodological notes are appended.
DS135 2006-024353 978-0-7391-1647-0
Almost Englishmen; Baghdadi Jews in British Burma.
Cernea, Ruth Fredman.
Lexington Books, ©2007 175 p. $24.95 (pa)
Exiled to Babylon in biblical times, Jews lived in what is now Iraq until
persecution in modern times. Drawing on oral histories and other
sources, the author of several studies of immigrant Sephardic commu-
nities in the US examines the multi-layered Bagdadhi diaspora com-
munity which flourished in colonial Burma until World War II and
Burma’s independence. As the title implies, they emulated the British in
lifestyle and attitudes but were not regarded as their peers. Period photos
show Bagdadhis in traditional Arabic and Western dress. Appendices
provide demographic data.
DS135 2006-020968 978-1-58648-399-9
Among the righteous; lost stories from the Holocaust’s
long reach into Arab lands.
Satloff, Robert.
PublicAffairs, ©2006 251 p. $26.00
Some helped Jews to pass as Muslims under the noses of nazis. Some
resisted anti-Semitic laws that stripped Jews of their property and jobs.
Some hid Jews on their farms or in their homes. When the nazis
occupied France they also occupied its colonial territories, where they
enforced draconian laws and built death camps. Satloff, executive
director of The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, spent years
finding the unheralded Muslim righteous, those who saved Jewish lives
in the Holocaust as it befell Europe and Africa. He describes the means
by which nazis extended racial murder deep into French North Africa,
and the efforts by ordinary Muslims to protect their Jewish townsmen
and even strangers. Most telling is his analysis of why so few, whether
Muslim or Jewish, have revealed these acts of valor until now.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS135 2006-5956 978-1-59051-239-5
Blood libel; the Damascus affair of 1840. (reprint, 2004)
Florence, Ronald.
Other Press LLC, ©2006 257 p. $15.95 (pa)
Damascus had it all: open markets, active trade, multiple ethnicities and
religions, a cosmopolitan air, and a fairly stable government. Or so it
seemed. Within a matter of weeks it also had a missing monk, madness,
mayhem and murder. Historical author Florence traces what happened
when a Capuchin monk and his servant went missing, and the author-
ities (local as well as French) managed to accuse or convict almost every
prominent member of the town’s Jewish community. This being
Damascus and the nineteenth century every power with a bite into the
Middle East became involved, and the media in France and England
cried out for revenge for the spilling of Christian blood for what they
assumed as unholy uses. Florence describes the backroom diplomacy
and desperate measures by Britain, Austria and the international Jewish
community, who united for the first time in centuries to try to spare the
accused.
DS135 2006049125 90-04-15349-7
Historical writings of Joseph of Rosheim; leader of Jewry
in early modern Germany.
Title main entry. Ed. by Chavra Fraenkel-Goldschmidt. (Studies in
European Judaism, v.12)
BRILL, ©2006 445 p. $195.00
At some point during his life, Joseph (1478-1554) began to be known as
Commander of the Jews in the Holy Roman Empire of the German
Nation. He served as a judge at the rabbinical court, helped resolve dis-
putes within the Jewish community, and negotiated on behalf of Jews
with the larger society. He also wrote, and here are translations of his
chronicle of events in the region from 1479 to 1544, and Letter of
Consolation to the Jews of Hesse. Fraenkel-Goldschmidt died in March
1995 about a month after completing the manuscript. The translation
from his Hebrew is by Naomi Schendowich; Adam Shear (Jewish history,
U. of Pittsburgh) has edited the English edition.
DS135 2006-045657 0-7432-5843-6
Last days in Babylon; the history of a family, the story of
a nation.
Benjamin, Marina.
Free Press, ©2006 290 p. $25.00
When the modern nation of Iraq was founded in 1932, Jews formed the
single largest and most prosperous ethnic group in Baghdad. Within 20
years, a hostile government had destroyed this community, and most of
its members quickly fled the country. In this narrative, London journalist
Benjamin traces the transformation of Iraqi Jews from Baghdad’s elite to
displaced exiles through the personal story of her grandmother, Regina.
Illustrations include b&w archival images and family photographs.
DS140 978-0-85303-628-9
Confronting the perpetrators; a history of the claims
conference.
Henry, Marilyn.
Vallentine Mitchell, ©2007 256 p. $79.50
This is a laudatory history of the Conference on Jewish Material Claims
Against Germany, which beginning in the early 1950s brought together
delegations from Israel and Jewish voluntary organizations to negotiate
with West Germany over compensation for Jewish victims of Nazi crimes.
Reviewing the activities of the organization through the early 2000s, the
author describes how, “with little more than moral arguments and
dogged determination,” it helped build a legal regime that set major
precedents in humanitarian law and institute allocation programs that
altered the cultural and physical landscape of Jews in Europe and scope
and nature of social welfare and medical services to the elderly in Israel
and the former of Soviet Union. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
DS145 2006-014650 978-0-7425-5227-2
The resurgence of anti-Semitism; Jews, Israel, and liberal
opinion.
Harrison, Bernard. (Philosophy and the global context)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 219 p. $22.95 (pa)
Harrison (emeritus philosophy, U. of Utah) attempts to define a clear
boundary between anti-Semitism and legitimate criticism of the state of
Israel, whether and how that boundary is being crossed in current public
debate, and how the political left—Jewish and non-Jewish—found itself in
a corner where opposing extermination policies is somehow a defense of
the Holocaust.
–54–
DS149 2006-028362 978-90-04-15529-9
From binational society to Jewish state; federal concepts
in Zionist political thought, 1920-1990, and the Jewish
people.
Gorny, Yosef. (Jewish identities in a changing world; v.7)
BRILL, ©2006 189 p. $122.00
Gormy (emeritus, Jewish history, Tel Aviv U., Israel) presents a revised
version of a book that, it its original Hebrew edition, was titled Policy and
Imagination: Federal Ideas in Zionist Political Thought. In the book, he
traces the development of federal ideas in the writings of prominent
Zionist leaders from the Balfour declaration through to the First
Intifadah. By using the term federal ideas, he means the idea that Israel’s
Jewish and Arab populations can exist with independent national sover-
eignties in local, cultural, and other matters underneath a central
authority that would guarantee a Jewish majority and the status of Israel
as “owned” by all the world’s Jews, as well as the idea that the Jews of
Israel, the United States, and Europe would exist in a kind of federal rela-
tionship to each other. He identifies models of Zionist federal plans,
although he argues that there is continuity between them. He concludes
with the suggestion that the failure to achieve Jewish-Arab federalism
within Israel has perhaps made the possibility of federalism among
world Jewry more likely.
DS150 2006-024805 0-8204-8862-3
The restoration of Israel; Christian Zionism in religion,
literature, and politics.
Falk, Gerhard. (American university studies; series VII, Theology and
religion; v.257)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 224 p. $70.95
Falk (sociology, State U. of New York-Buffalo) traces the triumph of
Christians in establishing Jews in Palestine, from the Puritans in the 17th
century through the US and British governments founding the State of
Israel in the middle of the 20th to the continuing support for that state
by Fundamentalist Christians.
DS153 978-1-84217-209-4
Crossing the rift; resources, routes, settlement patterns
and interaction in the Wadi Arabah.
Title main entry. Ed. by Piotr Bienkowski and Katharina Galor. (Levant
supplementary series; v.3)
Oxbow Books, ©2006 258 p. $90.00
Southern Jordan and the Negev were clearly part of a single socio-eco-
nomic system from the Iron Age through Roman and Byzantine times,
but they are divided by the Wadi, which is generally considered a barrier
and border. In November 2003, archaeologists gathered in Atlanta,
Georgia to share thoughts and findings on how the Wadi was formed
and developed geographically and environmentally, routes across it,
resources for settlement, settlement patterns from the Palaeolithic to
Ottoman periods, and its historical role as a bridge between the two
regions. The 21 papers are not indexed. Distributed in the US by the
David Brown Book Company.
DS154 2005-037863 1-84519-147-1
King Hussein and the evolution of Jordan’s perception of
a political settlement with Israel, 1967-1988.
Nevo, Joseph.
Sussex Academic Press, ©2006 209 p. $67.50
Analyzing the subject primarily through the public statements of King
Hussein, Nevo (Middle East history, U. of Haifa, Israel) examines the evo-
lution of Jordan’s attitudes towards political settlement with Israel from
the loss of the West Bank to Israel during the 1967 war to the removal
of the West Bank as a bone of contention in Jordanian- Israeli relations
in 1988. The particular aspects of Jordanian attitudes that are discussed
by Nevo include Jordan’s demands of Israel, what Jordan was prepared
to offer Israel in return, the means proffered for achieving settlement (i.e.
UN mediation, direct negotiations, multilateral agreements, etc.), the
purpose of peace, and the relative viability of any military option. The
focus of the analysis is on how King Hussein negotiated the conflict
between Jordan’s commitment to Arabism and the inter-Arab system, on
the one hand, and the pragmatic national and dynastic interests that
necessitated a settlement. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–55–
DS244 978-0-415-27419-7
Saudi Arabia; power, legitimacy and survival.
Niblock, Tim. (The contemporary Middle East)
Routledge, ©2006 206 p. $135.00
Niblock (Arab Gulf studies, U. of Exeter) examines Saudi Arabia as a sta-
bilizing force in terms of terrorism, outright war and oil prices, showing
how elements of its complex history, religious tradition, societal influ-
ences and politics interact. He works through conditions and events
chronologically, examining the formation of the Saudi state and its
political processes prior to oil and thereafter, the new policies and cen-
tralized state of Faisal and its redirection during the conflicts of the
1970s, the economic reforms just before the turn of the century, and the
pivotal role of Saudi Arabia in international relations in the cascading
terrorism that led to the post-9/11 era.
DS247 2006-050958 978-90-04-15266-3
Historical Muscat; an illustrated guide and gazetteer.
Peterson, J.E. (Handbook of Oriental studies; section one: The Near and
Middle East, v.88)
BRILL, ©2007 151 p. $155.00
An American scholar of the Arabian Peninsula and the Gulf, Peterson
defines and explains the historical environment that determined the sig-
nificance and design of the capital of Oman, Muscat, its sister city
Matrah, and environs prior to 1970. He also explore how the development
of the conurbation since then has transcended the historical boundaries
and considerations of the existing settlement, how the process of devel-
opment has proceeded largely without any consideration of the impact
on the city’s tangible or remembered history, and how much of the tan-
gible historical legacy of Muscat has been gratuitously destroyed and
much of the rest trivialized and bowdlerized. Then he offers a gazetteer,
a chronology, a list of modern rulers, and over 200 color and mono-
chrome illustrations.
DS248 978-90-04-15449-0
Mekka in the latter part of the 19th century; daily life,
customs and learning; the Moslims of the East-Indian
Archipelago, 2d ed.
Hurgronje, C. Snouck. (Brill classics in Islam; v.1)
BRILL, ©2007 326 p. $90.00
Dutch Orientalist Hurgonje spent 1888-1889 living in the Arabian cities of
Mecca and Jeddah, later producing a two-volume work describing, in the
first volume, the history of the city’s and their rulers and, in the second,
examining the daily public and private life of Meccan society during the
period of Ottoman rule. This book translates only that second volume (in
the hopes that a favorable reception will allow for a translation of the
first) and contains Hurgonje’s descriptions of the educational system in
the Great Mosque, marriage and funeral customs, and pilgrimage rites in
the holies city of Islam. Also of interest is his examination of the Meccan
immigrant community of the Jâwah, an Islamic community from the
Dutch East Indies, an area about which he had already produced much
scholarly work.
DS266 2006-022941 0-313-32053-5
Culture and customs of Iran.
Daniel, Elton L. and Ali Akbar Mahdi. (Culture and customs of the
Middle East)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 231 p. $49.95
This survey of Iran (aimed at students and general readers) covers the
contemporary life of the country within a historical context. Daniel
(history, U. of Hawaii) and Mahdi (sociology and anthropology, Ohio
Wesleyan U.) discuss the land and people; religions; literature and lan-
guage; drama and cinema; architecture; carpets and the history of
weaving; food and dining; family, women, marriage, and gender rela-
tions; holidays, festivals, and events; and Persian music and dance. Only
limited coverage of sports, dress, painting, ceramics, and metalwork is
provided. B&w photos are included.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS270 2006-028034 978-0-8108-5330-0
Historical dictionary of Iran, 2d ed.
Lorentz, John H. (Historical dictionaries of Asia, Oceania, and the
Middle East; no.62)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 479 p. $99.00
Lorentz (history, Shawnee State U., Ohio) first visited Iran as a Peace
Corps volunteer in the early 1960s and has returned a number of times
since then, including a visit as a Senior Fulbright-Hays Fellow. He offers
an overview of specific events, movements, people, political and social
groups, places, and trends in the history of Iran. Revised and updated
throughout, the second edition reflects significant events since publi-
cation of the first edition a decade ago, particularly in the areas of
culture and politics. The text features 146 new entries, including new
material on Iranian cinema, on some 20 key political and intellectual
figures such as President Muhammad Khatami and President Mahmud
Amadinejad, new entries on economic topics, more expansive coverage of
individual cities, material on Iranian tribes, and more coverage of
women.
DS289 2006-049041 978-90-04-15083-6
Beyond the legacy of Genghis Khan.
Title main entry. Ed. by Linda Komaroff. (Islamic history and civi-
lization. Studies and texts; v.64)
BRILL, ©2006 652 p. $129.00
Taken from a symposium in June 2003, these 23 papers analyze the
impact of the cultural, social, religious and political changes wrought by
Genghis Khan’s invasion of western and eastern Asia in the early thir-
teenth century. Topics on culture and commerce in the Mongol world
empire include cultural transmissions, diplomatic gifts, luxury goods,
maritime trade, and political culture; those on the lifestyles at the courts
of the ruling elite include interpretations of excavations, traditions, and
survival; those on the art of the book describe the workings of a scrip-
torium, the intellectual implications of frontispieces, and legacies; those
ion th arts and artistic interchange include paper, pottery, poetry and
motifs; and those on religion examine patronage of astrologers, Islamic
conversion, religious diversity and the Mongol legacy of dynastic legit-
imacy. The color and monochrome plates are well-chosen.
DS318 2005-282071 978-1-56025-716-5
The Iranian labyrinth; journeys through theocratic Iran
and its furies.
Hiro, Dilip.
Nation Books, ©2005 418 p. $16.95 (pa)
Blending travelogue, history, and sociopolitical analysis, journalist Hiro
offers the general reader an introduction to Iran’s politics and past. After
using the Grand Bazaar of Tehran as an opening thematic window into
the country, he describes the country’s political history from the estab-
lishment of the Majlis (literally, “assembly”) in the early 20th century, the
election of populist prime minister Mohammad Mossadiq and his over-
throw by the US, the installation of the brutal Shah and his eventual over-
throw in the Iranian revolution of 1979, which brought Ayatollah
Khomeini and other clerics to power. Remaining chapters take a more
thematic approach to Iran, focusing in turn on the religious center of
Qom, the role of oil in Iranian society, Iran’s relations with Iraq and the
United States, and Iran’s women and youth.
DS382 2006-011296 978-0-8108-5601-1
Historical dictionary of Pakistan, 3d ed.
Burki, Shahid Javed. (Historical dictionaries of Asia, Oceania, and the
Middle East; no.61)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 583 p. $99.00
A former longtime official of the World Bank, Burki served in the interim
government of Pakistan in the mid-1990s. His reference text features a
cross-referenced dictionary containing some 500 entries for key indi-
viduals, places, events, and aspects of Pakistan’s economy, society,
culture, and religious practices; a chronology; a list of acronyms and
abbreviations; an introductory essay; and an extensive bibliography
grouping materials by topic—history, government and politics, economics,
society, newspapers and magazines, and websites. The text has been
expanded and updated throughout, including the incorporation of entries
on the “Muslimization” and “Islamization” of Pakistani society to reflect
changing Western concepts of Pakistan over recent years.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS386 2006-310088 81-7304-641-7
The India-Pakistan air war of 1965.
Jagan Mohan, P.V.S. and Samir Chopra.
Manohar, ©2005 378 p. $52.95
The authors (co-webmasters of www.bharat-rakshak.com/IAF, “the most
visited resource on the Indian Air Force on the Internet,” according to the
bookjacket) detail the operations of the Indian Air Force during the 1965
conflict with Pakistan, relying primarily on the remembrances of Indian
military personnel in order to reconstruct the dogfights and air raids on
the western front above and surrounding Jammu-Kashmir and on the
border between India and East Pakistan (now Bangladesh). Distributed
in the US by South Asia Books.
DS395 2006-414568 984-05-1771-6
Bangladesh in the mirror; an outsider perspective on a
struggling democracy.
Rahman, A.T. Rafiqur.
University Press Limited, ©2006 383 p. $8.14
In this study, expatriate Bangladeshi Rahman (public administration,
City U. of New York) compares the democratic aspirations of Bangladesh
when it gained independence in 1971 with its present day reality. He
identifies the underlying conditions that have shaped the nation’s insti-
tutions, processes, and leadership in several key areas. He then offers
some suggestions for enhancing institutional capacities to enable
Bangladesh to reach its full potential. Currently, there is no US dis-
tributor.
DS408 2006310842 978-1-84560-017-4
India then and now.
Mukerjee, Rudrangshu and Vir Sanghvi.
Mercury Books, ©2006 274 p. $60.00
The “now” side of this oversized photo essay (12.25x12.25″) contains color
photos of contemporary sites and scenes through many regions of India,
including famous cities, events, and regional costumes. Flipped over, the
“then” side of the book contains 19th- century photographs of India,
including some fold-out panoramas of cities, sites, or festivals. The
content of the captions is designed to promote the wonder of India rather
than provide critical or historic information. Distributed in the US by
International Publishers Marketing.
DS432 2006-024690 978-0-8248-3146-2
The encyclopedia of the Indian diaspora.
Title main entry. Ed. by Brij V. Lal.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 416 p. $60.00
By the estimates of the Indian government, the Indian diaspora numbers
some 20 million people living in virtually every region in the world. This
volume presents an encyclopedic look at the “lived experience” of the
diaspora. General editor Lal (Pacific and Asian history, Australian
National U.) arranges the 76 signed articles thematically, with opening
sections devoted to the historical context of India, migration patterns and
experiences from the Age of Merchants to the Age of Globalization,
Indian government relations with the diaspora, cultural life in the
diaspora, and literary productions from the diaspora. The remaining
articles, occupying some five eighths of the text, focus in more detail on
particular national communities, with every region of the world
represented.
DS442 2006-028574 978-0-275-98570-7
A military history of India and South Asia; from the East
India Company to the nuclear era.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel P. Marston and Chandar S. Sundaram.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 238 p. $49.95
Complaining that Indian military history has been grossly neglected by
the South Asian studies community and by military historians, Marston
(war studies, Royal Military Academy, UK) and Sundaram (military
history, United International College, China) present a varied collection of
13 papers that both distill work by established scholars and present new
and original research on military history in the South Asian subcon-
tinent. As the title implies, the opening paper examines the armed
expansion of the English East India Company from the mid-18th to the
mid-19th century and the final paper analyzes India’s current nuclear
policy. Between these bookends are examinations of army training at the
Northwest frontier (1901-1947), the performance of the Indian Army in
the First World War, the “Indianization” of the officer corps (1817-1940),
the Indian wars with China and Pakistan, and the conflict between the
Tamil Tigers and the government forces of Sri Lanka.
–56–
DS450 2006-413550 81-7708-114-4
India-Russia partnership; Kashmir, Chechnya, and issues
of convergence.
Mahapatra, Debidatta Aurobinda.
New Century Pub. (Delhi), ©2006 212 p. $45.00
Mahapatra (international studies, Jawaharlal Nehru U., India) traces the
development of relations between Russia and India from India’s inde-
pendence to the present. Particular emphasis is placed on the evolving
Russian stance towards the Kashmir separatism question in India, par-
ticularly as it relates to Russia’s own separatist province of Chechnya and
the question of separatist violence (“terrorism” to the governments of
India and Russia). Other areas of convergence are also discussed,
including advocacy for a multipolar global order, technological and eco-
nomic imperatives for joint ventures and cooperation, and strengthening
democracy.
DS463 2005-057754 978-0-582-31738-3
India under colonial rule; 1700-1885.
Peers, Douglas M. (Seminar studies)
Longman, ©2006 163 p. $19.20 (pa)
This volume offers students a clear, concise overview of the history of
India under British colonial rule during the period 1700-1885. Peers takes
into account both British and Indian perspectives on colonialism as he
introduces the major historical developments and debates. Supplemental
materials include maps, a chronology, a glossary, excerpts from primary
documents, and suggestions for further reading. Peers teaches Indian
and Imperial History at the U. of Calgary.
DS480 2006-554926 81-7304-672-7
Negotiating for India; resolving problems through
diplomacy; seven case studies, 1958-1978.
Mehta, Jagat S.
Manohar, ©2006 296 p. $54.95
Mehta served as Foreign Secretary of India from 1976 to 1979 following
many years in the diplomatic corps. Here he offers a window into Indian
diplomacy by describing seven bi-national negotiations he was involved
in from 1958 to 1978, having served as the lead negotiator in all but one.
The negotiations include Prime Minister Nehru’s trip to Bhutan in 1958,
India-China boundary talks in 1960, 1975 compensation negotiations for
Indians expelled by Idi Amin’s Uganda, water resource negotiations with
Pakistan and Bangladesh in 1976 and 1977 respectively, and trade and
transit talks with Nepal in 1978. Distributed in the US by South Asia
Books.
DS485 2006-017046 0-7922-6192-5
Himalaya; personal stories of grandeur, challenge, and
hope.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard C. Blum et al.
Natl. Geographic Society, ©2006 255 p. $35.00
The exiled Dalai Lama of Tibet introduces this volume on the gorgeous
landscape, Buddhist culture, and challenges of his homeland. Former
president Jimmy Carter offers his perspective on Nepal and the work of
the American Himalayan Foundation, with which the editors are affil-
iated. Commentary on the region’s ecological, political, and social
problems by 40 writers, scholars, mountaineers, and humanitarians are
interspersed with color photos of stunning scenery and a color map.
Reference sources beyond the National Geographic are not listed. Not
indexed.
DS485 2006-051899 978-90-04-15596-1
Peace and conflict in Ladakh; the construction of a fragile
web of order.
Pirie, Fernanda. (Brill’s Tibetan studies library; v.13)
BRILL, ©2007 235 p. $129.00
Pirie (anthropology, Oxford U.) investigates how the Ladakhi people in
the Himalayan region of the Indian state of Jammu and Kashmir
maintain their social order in the midst of economic development, tech-
nological change, and political conflict all around them. Drawing from
interviews with people throughout the region, but particularly in one of
the remoter villages and in the urban center of Leh, she describes how
they are far from isolated, but manage conflict and pursue peace by con-
structing fragile webs of order within their communities.
–57–
DS485 2006-554339 81-7304-622-0
Punjab politics, 1 January 1944-3 March 1947; last years
of the ministries; governors’ fortnightly reports and other
key documents.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lionel Carter.
Manohar, ©2006 392 p. $72.50
Carter (formerly, Secretary and Librarian of the Centre of South Asian
Studies, U. of Cambridge, UK) presents the third volume of series repro-
ducing the Fortnightly Reports of the Governor of the Punjab to the
Viceroy in order to provide source material for the study of the British
colonial administration in the region. In addition to the Fortnightly
Reports, certain key documents sent by the Governor or his Secretary to
the Viceroy are also included. Covering January 1944 to March 1947, the
documents shed light on British food and supply shortage concerns
during the Second World War, constitutional activity prior to Indian inde-
pendence, British concerns about the possibility of major communal vio-
lence, and other matters of the final years of the colonial ministries.
Distributed in the US by South Asia Books.
DS485 2006-554340 81-7304-674-3
Reporting the partition of Punjab, 1947; press, public, and
other opinions.
Tanwar, Raghuvendra.
Manohar, ©2006 622 p. $78.95
The human impacts of the partition of India were especially acute in the
Punjab, creating refugee flows of Sikhs and Hindus into India and
Muslims into Pakistan and resulting in much inter-communal violence.
In this work, Tanwar (modern history, Kurukshetra U., India) attempts
to reconstruct the day-to-day human dimensions of the partition of the
Punjab during 1947, relying mostly on newspapers, especially editorial
page letters, but including other sources as well. While attention is paid
to the experiences and motivations of political and religious readers,
Tanwar’s main goal is to give voice to the marginalized. Distributed in
the US by South Asia Books.
DS517 978-90-04-15416-2
The Russo-Japanese war in global perspective: World War
Zero; v.2
Title main entry. Ed. by David Wolff et al. (History of warfare; v.40)
BRILL, ©2007 583 p. $223.00
The two volumes collect papers presented to a conference in Tokyo at an
undisclosed date. Japanese and Western historians look at the 1905 war
from the perspectives of military visions and revisions, the Japanese and
Russian home fronts, the cultural prism, and regional relations during
and after the war. Specific topics include differences regarding Togo’s
surprise attack on Port Arthur, how the Japanese railways met the chal-
lenge of war, Notsume Soseki’s nuanced views of the conflict, the war
and Chinese nationalism, and Komura Jutaro and US-Japan relations.
DS525 2006-020880 978-1-58826-482-4
The changing dynamics of Southeast Asian politics.
Dosch, Jörn.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 271 p. $55.00
Most studies of Southeast Asian politics focus either on domestic or inter-
national dimensions, but Dosch (Asia-Pacific studies, U. of Leeds) com-
bines the two perspectives in hopes of finding a more comprehensive
and holistic understanding of the region’s political dynamics. Among his
topics are the impact of democratization on making foreign policy, coop-
eration between Cold War rivals in the Mekong Valley, and ASEAN and
beyond.
DS529 9971-69-304-6
Seventeenth-century Burma and the Dutch East India
company, 1634-1680. (CD-ROM included)
Dijk, Wil O.
Singapore University Press, ©2006 348 p. $32.00 (pa)
Revising her Ph.D. dissertation at Leiden University, Dijk draws on the
records of the Dutch East India Company in The Netherlands to shed
light on Burma and the interaction between Burma and the Company
during the 17th century. She begins with the historical background of
Burma and a survey of features in the country on the eve of the
Company’s arrival. The disk contains appendices.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS530 981-230-362-6
Myanmar’s long road to national reconciliation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Trevor Wilson.
Asia Pacific Press, ©2006 310 p. $39.90 (pa)
The 14 papers presented here by Wilson (the former Australian ambas-
sador to Myanmar (Burma) from mid-2000 to mid-2003) come from the
2004 Myanmar/Burma Update Conference, which, rather than rely on the
perspectives of expatriate Burmese and mostly Western academics,
sought to include insights from individuals who have had extensive
recent experience inside the militarily-ruled country. Collectively, the
papers aim to provide a portrait of the current social, economic, and
political landscape of the country and assess the possibilities of
movement towards democracy and ethnic reconciliation. Individually,
papers look at the politics of the military junta of the State Peace and
Development Council, explore ethnic participation in politics, review the
status of the agricultural sector and the wider economy, discuss the
health or lack thereof of Burmese civil society, and consider the roles of
international non-governmental organizations and corporations in aiding
Burmese political and economic development. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
DS556 2006-000835 978-0-8248-2984-1
The Táy Son uprising; society and rebellion in eighteenth-
century Vietnam.
Dutton, George Edson. (Southeast Asia—politics, meaning, memory)
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 293 p. $52.00
Revising his 2001 Ph.D. dissertation at the University of Washington,
Dutton (Asian languages and cultures, U. of California-Los Angeles) tells
of an uprising of upland tribesmen and lowland peasants that began in
1773. By the time the rebel armies were defeated in 1802, he says, they
had overthrown two ruling families, briefly unified two traditional
kingdoms, and ended a 300-year-old dynasty. He focuses on the rela-
tionship between the Táy Son leaders and the many social, ethnic, and
economic groups that constituted Vietnamese society.
DS556 2005-032883 978-0-299-21770-9
Viet Nam; borderless histories.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nhung Tuyet Tran and Anthony Reid. (New
perspectives in Southeast Asian studies)
U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 386 p. $24.95 (pa)
The successful struggle of Vietnam to establish its national identity
against the attempted domination of the Chinese, the French, and then
the Americans now allows, suggest editors Tran (history, U. of Toronto,
Canada) and Reid (director, Asia Research Institute, National U. of
Singapore), a more nuanced historical look at Vietnam as a confluence
of cultures and peoples. Such is the task taken up by the ten papers they
present, which explore the influences of different ethno-religious groups
within Indochina and outside forces on the construction of Vietnamese
identity. Examples of topics addressed include the impact of Chinese
gunpowder technology in the region, French law and daughters’
inheritance rights in Vietnam, ethnic pluralities in the Mekong Delta, and
the experiences of Vietnamese soldiers and workers in France during
World War I.
DS558 2006-011367 978-0-7425-4436-9
Debating Vietnam; Fulbright, Stennis, and their Senate
hearings.
Fry, Joseph A. (Vietnam; America in the war years)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 198 p. $22.95 (pa)
In February 1966, at the height of the Vietnam War, J. William Fullbright,
chair of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee held hearings on the
war, hoping that they could be used to pressure President Johnson to halt
escalation and seek a negotiated settlement. About a year and half later,
Fullbright’s colleague, John C. Stennis, chair of the Preparedness
Investigating Subcommittee of the Senate Armed Services Committee, ini-
tiated his own hearings on the war, seeking a more aggressive conduct
of the war. Suggesting that these hearings “forced a far more public and
more extensive debate of U.S. war policies than President Johnson pre-
ferred,” Fry (history, U. of Nevada at Las Vegas) offers the first full-length
comparative treatment of the hearings.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS558 2006-028550 978-0-275-99327-6
Phantom reflections; the education of an American fighter
pilot in Vietnam.
McCarthy, Mike.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 176 p. $44.95
The author flew the F-4 Phantom II fighter plane on numerous missions
during the Vietnam War and he here retrospectively narrates the “most
significant events” he experienced during the war (almost all combat
missions), the stereotypical jet pilots bravado perhaps tempered a bit by
time. Occasional thoughts about the wider context of the war intrude
from time to time and he differs from many of his military colleagues
in now believing that the US failed to recognize the limits of its power
in Vietnam and that the war could not have been won even if the mil-
itary had been able to fight the war with no limitations.
DS558 2005-937561 978-1-59460-206-1
To oppose any foe; the legacy of U.S. intervention in
Vietnam.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ross A. Fisher et al.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2006 618 p. $50.00
The editors present ten essays revisiting “Legal and Policy Issues of the
Indochina War,” which was also the title of the U. of Virginia Law School
seminar from which eight of the ten originated. The papers were
selected, say the editors, for their contributions to the literature and for
their use of primary sources. In turn, the first six papers explore the
reasons for the Kennedy administration’s complicity in the overthrow of
Ngo Dinh Diem; argue that US involvement in Vietnam preserved global
democratic security; seek to debunk the “myth” that Nixon and Diem’s
successor, Nguyen Van Thieu, sabotaged the 1973 Paris Peace Accords;
analyze Cambodia’s Khmer Rouge (and its ideology in a separate paper);
and examine the Vietnamese invasion of Cambodia. The next three
papers discuss legal issues, including the legal advice given to US deci-
sions makers at the start of the war, the contemporary lessons for naval
interception operations that can be taken from the war, and how the law
of command responsibility was reshaped in the wake of the My Lai mas-
sacre. The final pair of essays looks at the silencing of the Joint Chiefs
of Staff as a prime cause for the policy failure of the war and the US
intervention in Somalia as a reprise of the mistakes of the Vietnam War.
DS558 2005-053086 0-7546-2559-1
The Vietnam war.
Title main entry. Ed. by James H. Willbanks. (The International Library
of Essays on Military History)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 456 p. $195.00
Willbanks (U.S. Army Command and General Staff College) presents a
selection of 24 essays on the Vietnam War published in key scholarly
journals between 1985 and 2004. The collection provides a number of
representations on the current state of scholarship on the war and its
aftermath, and demonstrates that the Vietnam War remains a contro-
versial issue even today, 30-plus years after the fall of Saigon. The essays
are grouped into five sections addressing U.S. presidents and the
Vietnam War, the conduct of the war in the field, the Tet Offensive and
the Khe Sanh, a retrospective on the war and its meaning, and the
legacies and lessons of the Vietnam War. Indexed by name only; no
subject index.
DS558 2006-025641 0-275-98308-0
The Vietnam War era; a personal journey.
Solheim, Bruce O.
Praeger, ©2006 216 p. $49.95
Solheim (history, Citrus College) presents a narrative history of the US
war in Vietnam that generally focuses on the political and military deci-
sions of top leaders from Eisenhower and Kennedy’s early involvement
through the Johnson and Nixon years. Interspersed throughout are short
profiles of important individuals from the era, including General
Creighton Abrams, Jane Fonda, Vietnamese General Vo Nguyen Giap,
Abbie Hoffman, Black Panther Eldridge Cleaver, Secretary of Defense
Robert McNamara, reporter Seymour Hersh, and Bob Dylan. At the end
of the book, he offers his own autobiographical account of growing up
in the Vietnam War era.
–58–
DS559 0-9776049-0-X
Failure to atone; the true story of a jungle surgeon in
Vietnam.
Hassan, Allen.
Failure to Atone Press, ©2006 272 p. $29.95
As one of 774 civilian doctors with the American Medical Association’s
Volunteer Physicians for Vietnam program, Hassan served for one tour
of duty in Quang Tri Provincial Hospital during the Vietnam War. He
describes the humanitarian service by this group, and tries to come to
terms with the atrocities, the wasted lives and money, and the continuing
sorrow. He now practices law and medicine in Sacramento, California,
and told his story to Los Angeles writer David Drum.
DS625 2006-022942 978-0-313-33339-2
Culture and customs of Indonesia.
Forshee, Jill. (Culture and customs of Asia)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 237 p. $49.95
For students and general readers, Forshee (cultural anthropology, U. of
California, Berkeley) describes the culture and customs of Indonesia,
with specific emphasis on common people. Background is given on the
land, people, and the country’s history; religion; past and modern liter-
ature and art; architecture and housing; cuisine and dress; gender,
courtship, and marriage traditions; festivals and leisure activities; music,
dance, and theater; and social customs and lifestyle. Attention is given to
all the islands, not just Bali and Java.
DS632 2006-008332 978-0-8248-3072-4
Art as politics; re-crafting identities, tourism, and power
in Tana Toraja, Indonesia.
Adams, Kathleen M. (Southeast Asia; politics, meaning, and memory)
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 286 p. $25.00 (pa)
Adams (anthropology, Loyola U., Chicago) was intrigued by the death
cults of the Sa’dan Toraja people, a Christian enclave in the mountains
of South Sulawesi, Indonesia, a predominantly Muslin nation. She soon
discovered that a lot of other people were too, and the place was already
crawling with Western anthropologists and tourists. So she decided to
study the impact of Christian conversion, modernization, and tourism on
their art, religion, politics, and other cultural traits.
DS643 2006-328961 9971-69-330-5
Colonial spectacles; the Netherlands and the Dutch East
Indies at the world exhibitions, 1880-1931.
Bloembergen, Marieke. Trans. by Beverley Jackson.
Singapore University Press, ©2006 478 p. $36.00
Bloembergen (Research Institute for History and Culture, Utrecht U., the
Netherlands) examines the colonial sections of the Netherlands’ entries to
world exhibitions in the period 1880-1931 in pursuit of what they reveal
about the relationship between Dutch imperialism, the forming of images
of the Netherlands’ colonies, and the development of Dutch national con-
sciousness. He focuses on the organizational structure and ideas under-
lying the colonial entries, on their arrangement and appearance, and on
the way they were reported in the domestic daily press as well as in
weekly magazines and illustrated periodicals. Part of his aim in this
work is to test the theories of Edward Said’s Orientalism, which he finds
to be problematic in its ahistoricism.
DS646 2006-008589 0-295-98633-6
Verandah of violence; the background to the Aceh
problem.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony Reid.
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 397 p. $30.00 (pa)
Historians, political scientists, a journalist, and a theologian explore the
history of the rocky relations between Aceh and the central government
of Indonesia. They begin with the mixing of Indian and Indonesian
people during the first millennium; consider factors before, during, after,
colonization; and look at the current situation. The 15 essays were origi-
nally presented to a May 2004 conference in Singapore, but many have
been revised in light of the tsunami of December 2004 and peace initia-
tives during 2005. Published in association with National University of
Singapore.
–59–
DS666 2006-022266 978-0-8248-3103-5
Uncultural behavior; an anthropological investigation of
suicide in the southern Philippines.
Macdonald, Charles J-H. (Monographs of the Center for Southeast Asian
Studies, Kyoto University; English-language series; no.21)
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 307 p. $29.00 (pa)
This volume examines the high rate of suicide by the Palawan people of
Kulbi-Kenipaqan in the Southern Philippines. Beginning with a
description of Palawan culture and society, MacDonald follows with the
story of one woman’s death and how the society viewed it. He recounts
other suicides documented through kinsfolk and acquaintances of
victims and gives statistical information that shows patterns from which
he draws five profiles. He also discusses approaches to suicide in anthro-
pological literature, and describes his own hypothesis of looking at it
from a perspective of biology and psychology, sociology, and history. The
volume is aimed at Philippinists, Asianists, social anthropologists, ethno-
psychologists, and those studying suicidal behavior. Fieldwork used in
the book began in 1970 and spanned up to 2002. MacDonald (U. de la
Méditeranée, France) is a social anthropologist associated with the French
National Center for Scientific Research.
DS735 0-7546-4847-8
China’s “peaceful rise” in the 21st century; domestic and
international conditions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sujian Guo.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 272 p. $99.95
Eleven international academics contribute ten chapters exploring the pos-
sibility of China having “peaceful development” given domestic and inter-
national challenges, including American efforts to constrain or contain it.
Coverage includes the domestic dimension and what factors could affect
the peaceful development—including reform, legitimacy, corruption,
repression, and regime type; the international challenges—general inter-
national conditions, China- U.S. military relations, China’s military mod-
ernization, Sino-Japan relations, and Central Asian geopolitics; and how
China can meet these challenges. The authors suggest that the peaceful
rise could be achieved if China can strategically overcome the challenges
and leverage opportunities at both domestic and international fronts. For
students and scholars in foreign policy, Asian politics and development.
DS740 2006-015450 978-0-8047-5502-3
Behind the bamboo curtain; China, Vietnam, and the
world beyond Asia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Priscilla Roberts. (Cold War International
History Project series)
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 559 p. $65.00
The 15 papers presented in this book by Roberts (history, U. of Hong
Kong) originate from a scholarly conference sponsored by the Cold War
International History Project that focused attention on the role of China
in the Indochina Wars of the 1960s and 70s. Topics include the evolution
of Mao’s policy towards Indochina, Sino-Soviet relations, the French
recognition of China and its implications for the Vietnam War, the impact
of the Vietnam War on the economics and politics of China, the
Kremlin’s perspective of the Soviet-Chinese-Vietnamese triangle, and (the
subject of some third of the papers) Sino-American relations.
DS740 978-0-7748-1301-3
Tibet and nationalist China’s frontier; intrigues and
ethnopolitics, 1928-49.
Lin, Hsiao-ting.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 285 p. $85.00
Lin (a visiting fellow at the Hoover Institution, Stanford U.) analyzes the
approach of China’s Nationalist Government to Tibet and other ethnic
borderlands from 1928 until their defeat by the Communists in 1949.
After an introduction to the political and territorial landscape at the
outset of the Nationalist era, he looks at Nationalist approaches to Tibet
issues in the prewar decade, arguing that Nationalist political efforts to
incorporate Tibet into China were much more equivocal than previous
analysis has suggested and discussing political motives for the Nationalist
frontier policy beyond pure frontier and minority objectives. Shifting to
the Sino-Japanese War (1937-1945), he situates the Sino-Tibetan rela-
tionship in the context of international wartime rivalries, finding that
Chiang Kai-shek and his confreres took a pragmatic stand towards Tibet.
Finally, he examines the crucial final four years of Nationalist rule, this
time concentrating on confrontations between the Han Chinese and
various minority groups and the government’s state-building efforts in
the southwest peripheries. Distributed in the US by the U. of Washington
Press.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS748 2006-051682 978-90-04-15605-0
A biographical dictionary of Later Han to the Three
Kingdoms (23-220 AD).
De Crespigny, Rafe. (Handbook of Oriental studies=Handbuch der
Orientalistik. Section 4: China; v.19)
BRILL, ©2007 1306 p. $299.00
As a companion to Michael Loewe’s 2000 dictionary of the Former Han
dynasty, De Crespigny (Asian studies, Australian National U.) aspires to
cite every person recorded as having lived under Later Han or, in the case
of non-Chinese people, in relationship to its government. Identifies over
8,000 people in the period from the proclamation of Lui Xuan as the
Gengshi Emperor to the abdication of Liu Xie as Emperor Xian. Even the
shortest entry includes a reference to the source of the information.
Supporting material includes genealogical tables, an outline of the
administrative renderings, bibliographies of early and modern works,
and maps.
DS754 2005-036379 0-7007-1611-4
The diary of a Manchu soldier in seventeenth-century
China; my service in the army.
Dzengseo. Trans. by Nicola Di Cosmo. (Routledge studies in the early
history of Asia; 4)
Routledge, ©2006 140 p. $110.00
Di Cosmo (East Asian studies, Institute for Advanced Study) provides a
translation of the diary of Dzengseo, a young Manchu soldier who fought
in the conquest of China during the seventeenth century. He relates the
events of the War of the Three Feudatories from 1673-1682, and his per-
spectives on military life, survival, and killing. In addition, Di Cosmo
supplements the text with an introduction—a brief analysis of the con-
quest, Wu Sangui as a historical character, the rebellion of the Three
Feudatories, and text authorship, style, and narrative—in addition to
notes, which explain technical terms and geographical issues, and give
information about people. The original diary consists of four parts, but
only the last was found. A transliterated Manchu text is supplied in the
appendix.
DS777 2006-015599 978-1-59114-946-0
The dragon’s war; allied operations and the fate of China,
1937-1947.
Yu, Maochun.
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 242 p. $32.95
Following the Japanese occupation of Manchuria in 1931, frequent mil-
itary clashes between the Japanese and the Chinese erupted in full-scale
war in 1937. Facing a technologically superior enemy, the Chinese turned
to foreign powers to provide it with the military aid and defense assis-
tance vital to its attempt to defeat the Japanese just as various Western
powers significant military and intelligence operations inside China. Yu
(East Asia and military history, US Naval Academy) describes these
foreign aid and intelligence activities, arguing that they collectively
undermined the authority and legitimacy of the Nationalist government
led by Chiang Kai-Shek and directly contributed to his defeat by the
Communist Party four years after the war was over.
DS777 2005-036819 1-58367-141-2
Through a glass darkly; U.S. views of the Chinese
revolution.
Hinton, William.
Monthly Review Press, ©2006 287 p. $19.95 (pa)
This is the last book written by the American Marxist scholar of China,
William Hinton (1919-2004), perhaps best known for Fanshen: A
Documentary of Revolution in a Chinese Village (1967). As its pages make
evident, he admired the first decades of the Chinese Revolution to the
end. The work is, at base, a rejoinder to the “spin” of Friedman,
Pickowicz, and Selden’s Chinese Village, Socialist State that Hinton sees as
exemplifying the “vitriolic polemic” against the Chinese Revolution found
amongst American scholars of China in general. Having apparently
picked Chinese Village, Socialist State because of his own personal experi-
ences in the region and during the time period it discusses, Hinton
focuses on countering negative claims regarding four aspects of the trans-
formation of Chinese peasant life: the land system, the household
economy of the peasants, popular customs and culture, and traditional
morality. He also offers chapters disputing the earlier book’s account of
the “alleged `Great Famine’” and offering a perspective on the class
struggles within the Chinese Communist Party that would lead to the
abandonment of socialism in 1978.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS779 2006-015454 0-7656-1773-0
Chinese politics in the Hu Jintao era; new leaders, new
challenges.
Lam, Willy Wo-Lap.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2006 359 p. $29.95 (pa)
Lan (China studies and global studies, Akita International U.) argues that
the current generation of Chinese leaders have not demonstrated the kind
of foresight and courage needed to push forward far-reaching challenges
to their archaic political and economic system. On the other hand, he
says, there is every reason to believe that the current system can muddle
along for another couple decades.
DS793 2005-024390 978-0-295-98543-5
The art of ethnography; a Chinese “Miao album”.
Title main entry. Trans. by David Deal and Laura Hostetler. (Studies on
ethnic groups in China)
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 178 p. $40.00
During the 18th century, Qing China (1636-1911) was expanding south
into areas where non-Chinese people lived, and books with pictures and
descriptions of these exotic people, Miao albums, were compiled probably
by minor officials in the administration the territories. Historians Deal
(1939-2001) (Whitman College) and Hostetler (U. of Illinois-Chicago)
reproduce and translate one such album, anonymous and untitled as
most are, from sometime after 1797. It identifies 82 different ethnic
groups residing in Guizhou, with a hand-painted illustration, textual
description, and poem devoted to each.
DS796 2006-003663 0-8108-5061-3
Historical dictionary of the Hong Kong SAR and the
Macao SAR.
Chan, Ming K. and Shiu-hing Lo. (Historical dictionaries of Asia,
Oceania, and the Middle East; 60)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 387 p. $85.00
The Hong Kong and Macao special administrative regions (SARs) of the
People’s Republic of China have recently been released from European
rule, yet, as SARs, they retain a high degree of autonomy. This historical
dictionary contains chronologies and entries on key political and eco-
nomic figures, institutions, and programs in both regions. Appendices
offer statistics and lists of officials for each region. Chan is executive
coordinator of the Hong Kong Documentary Archives at Stanford
University. Lo teaches political science at the University of Waterloo,
Canada.
DS797 2006-002605 978-0-8047-5496-5
Crimson rain; seven centuries of violence in a Chinese
county.
Rowe, William T.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 437 p. $60.00
Using the highland county Macheng, Hubei Province, as a case study,
Rowe (Chinese history, Johns Hopkins) demonstrates the ways events and
trends of national significance in China’s history have been experienced
at the local level. Between the expulsion of the Mongols in the mid-14th
century and the invasion of the Japanese in 1938, Macheng experienced
repeated waves of mass extermination in segments of its population.
Rowe argues that, beyond its strategic military centrality and ingrained
social tensions, cultural factors, such as popular religion, folklore, and
local historical production, played key roles in the population’s proclivity
for carnage.
DS797 2006-010666 978-0-7425-2878-9
Revolution in the highlands; China’s Jinggangshan base
area.
Averill, Stephen C. (State and society in East Asia)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 451 p. $69.00
The Jinggangshan region of China served as an early revolutionary base
area for Mao Zedong in the late 1920s and, as such, is prominent in the
historiography of the Chinese revolution. However, most of the literature
on revolutionary Jinggangshan focuses narrowly on Mao and the nascent
Red Army forces or treats the region as the ideal of peasant revolution
precisely because that is where the Chinese Revolution first began. In
contrast, the late Averill (formerly a professor of history at Michigan State
U.) examines the revolutionary politics of the region before, during, and
after Mao’s sojourn there, revealing the complex dynamics of local pol-
itics and how they interacted with larger forces of revolution and
reaction.
–60–
DS798 2006-012624 978-0-8047-5426-8
Reins of liberation; an entangled history of Mongolian
independence, Chinese territoriality, and great power
hegemony, 1911-1950.
Liu, Xiaoyuan.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 474 p. $65.00
Liu (history, Iowa State U.) traces the “Mongolian question” as it evolved
in Chinese politics about national identity during the first half of the
twentieth century, including how the question was handled at the local
level. Building from his previous work in this three-part series, Liu
explains how revolutions and wars, including two world wars, caused
pressures that further complicated an already complex situation, in
which the prevailing Han of China perceived efforts at Mongolian
identity as not only alien but counter-revolutionary and an explicit form
of bigotry. He traces the changes and conflicts in geopolitical identity
from the era of China and Mongolia becoming national states after being
an empire, the shifts in the perceptions of peripheral as opposed to
central focus, the affects of the civil was of 1945-1959, and the emergency
of ethnicity and hegemony as powerful motivation in China’s relations
with Mongolia.
DS839 2006-015540 1-55750-042-8
From Mahan to Pearl Harbor; the imperial Japanese navy
and the United States.
Asada, Sadao.
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 385 p. $36.95
Captain Alfred Thayer Mahan became formidable upon the 1980 publi-
cation of his The Influence of Sea Power Upon History, 1660-1783. Instantly
he was hailed by Theodore Roosevelt, Kaiser Wilhelm II, the British
Admiralty, and the Japanese Naval Ministry, which took Mahan’s instruc-
tions especially to heart. Asada (history emeritus, Doshisha U.) describes
how Mahan’s book led the Japanese Naval Ministry to understand itself
as the natural enemy of the US, then draws from archival records never
before used to describe how naval conferences held in Washington in
1921-22, Geneva in 1927 and London in 1930 indicated the Japanese were
an unenviable position. They were losing ground technologically, failing
to justify increased armaments, and yet persisting in believing Mahon.
Eventually the Japanese proved they were not able to filter the facts about
relative battle strength and intention of themselves and the US through
the pages of Mahon’s 50-year-old book.
DS881 2006-044349 978-0-06-088432-1
Breaking open Japan; Commodore Perry, Lord Abe and
the American Imperialism of 1853.
Feifer, George.
HarperCollins, ©2006 389 p. $25.95
This book revisits the history of the end of Japan’s isolationist foreign
policy of sakoku in the 1850s, casting a somewhat more critical eye on
American imperialist ambitions than many previous American works on
the subject, but not finding the Japanese totally innocent in many of the
negative consequences for the legacy of the “Opening of Japan.” The nar-
rative’s focus is structured around the actions of two men: Commodore
Matthew C. Perry, whose “Black Ships” were to become a symbol of
Western colonialism for the Japanese, and Masahiro Abe, the real power
behind Japan’s final shogunate.
DS881 2006-052884 978-90-04-15598-5
A history of nationalism in modern Japan; placing the
people.
Doak, Kevin M. (Handbook of Oriental studies=Handbuch der
Orientalistik. Section five: Japan; v.13)
BRILL, ©2007 292 p. $93.00
Drawing on some 20 years of studying the literature on Japanese nation-
alism, Doak (Japanese studies, Georgetown U.) examines the debates over
Japanese national identity and nationalism. Coverage includes an
overview of major developments in nationalism theory; a survey of the
social hierarchy and decentralized political structure of the early 19th
century as preconditions for nationalism; the role of the monarchy in
raising and suppressing nationalist aspirations; nationalism as seen from
the perspective of influential Japanese theorists, including an analysis of
the concept of society—shakai—in modern Japan; analysis of kokumin
and minzoku, two concepts at the core of the alternative ways in which
Japanese articulate nationalism; and a summary of how the key elements
are shaping the present and future of nationalism in Japan.
–61–
DS881 2005-926980 978-0-8048-3627-2
Shinsengumi; the shogun’s last Samurai corps.
Hillsborough, Romulus.
Tuttle Publishing, ©2005 230 p. $29.95
Now back in his native California after 15 years of living and writing in
Japan, Hillsborough presents his third book on samurai of the 19th-
century Meiji Restoration. He concentrates on the spirit of the
Shinsengumi and its leaders Kondo Isami and Hijikata and their place
in history, rather than on details, especially where the many sources con-
tradict each other.
DS884 2006-019423 978-0-8248-2998-8
Suicidal honor; General Nogi and the writings of Mori
Ogai and Natsume Soseki.
Bargen, Doris G.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 289 p. $42.00
General Nogi Maresuki paid a decades-old debt of honor by disembow-
eling himself on the day of his emperor’s funeral. Nogi Shizuko, his wife,
joined him in self-inflicted death. News of their suicide split opinion
throughout the Japan of 1912 and brought into full view long-simmering
questions about traditional morality within the samurai code, the
intrusion or improvements of modernity, and the many and complex
reasons why the ritual of seppuku was forbidden but still practiced.
Bargen (Japanese literature and culture, U. of Massachusetts Amherst)
explores these acts in themselves within their historical and political con-
texts. She also examines how these acts influenced two of Japan’s greatest
writers in a time of significant and painful historical transition and rede-
finition of national identity, when Japan was still defining what it was
as a nation and what was meant by national and personal honor.
DS884 2006-931236 1-60105-046-1
Togo and the rise of Japanese sea power. (reprint, 1932)
Falk, Edwin A.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2006 508 p. $34.90 (pa)
Originally published in 1932, Edwin A. Falk’s study of the role of sea
power in modern Japanese history focuses on Admiral of the Fleet Count
Togo. Particular attention is paid to the close identification of Togo’s
spirit and character with that of Japan. Coverage includes Togo’s key role
in strategy and technology and Japan’s emergence as an international
naval power at the dawn of the 20th century. B&w photographs and
maps illustrate the volume.
DS889 2006-000016 978-0-7656-1650-0
Japan’s foreign policy since 1945.
Cooney, Kevin.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 297 p. $26.95 (pa)
Cooney (political science and international relations, Union U.) carefully
uses a wide range of literature on Japanese foreign relations and
extensive interviews with Japanese policy-makers to craft this accessible
account of how Japan relates to the outside world. He describes policies
spawned by occupation and the Yoshida Doctrine, the Gulf War, Japan’s
later perceptions of security and the resulting restructuring, the myth of
gaiatsu and how others filter their understanding of Japan through it, the
new Japan/China/US political triangle, and the future of Japanese foreign
policy.
DS894 2005-033076 0-415-36500-7
Myth, protest and stuggle in Okinawa.
Tanji, Miyume. (Grassroots pacifism in post-war Japan)
Routledge, ©2006 234 p. $120.00
Tanji (Asian research, Murdock U., Australia) begins by describing how
Okinawans, part of the separate Ryukyo kingdom until the 19th century,
have been occupied, economically deprived, and systematically abused,
first by the Japanese and since World War II by the American military.
Her main story, though, is their political responses to the abuse and mar-
ginalization, and one of her intentions is to show that this response is
more complex than is often appreciated and is stable and constant is
focus.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DS918 2006-015360 978-0-313-33248-7
The Korean War.
Edwards, Paul M. (Daily life through history series. American soldiers’
lives)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 210 p. $65.00
Today, 50-plus years after the conflict, the experience of being a soldier
during the Korean War is generally unknown. Edwards (Center for the
Study of the Korean War, Graceland U., Independence, Missouri) presents
a concise text for students and general readers offering an overview of
the daily routines of soldiers during “The Forgotten War.” Coverage
includes background information on the outbreak of the war and
physical and cultural aspects of Korea; phases and campaigns; the
process of raising a military force for the war; learning to be a soldier
and to fight with WWII weapons; life on the front; care of the wounded
and dead; life behind the line; soldiers’ attitudes about enemies and
allies; media, morale, and myths; religion, relaxation, and entertainment;
returning home; and how the war is remembered by veterans. The text
also includes a timeline and an extensive bibliography.
AFRICA, OCEANIA
DT21 2006-026178 0-313-33540-0
Daily lives of civilians in wartime Africa; from slavery
days to Rwandan genocide.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Laband. (The Greenwood Press Daily life
through history series; daily lives of civilians during wartime)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 301 p. $65.00
Nine contributions from Laband and other scholars discuss the impact
of war on the daily life of civilians in various regions of Africa. Coverage
spans time periods ranging from the late 18th century to the present day.
A sampling of topics includes civilian casualties in the trans-Atlantic
slave trade, the impact of WWI on African people, and the consequences
of Sudan’s series of civil wars on the civilian population. Laband teaches
history at Wilfrid Laurier U. in Canada.
DT28 2006-008596 0-299-21950-X
Intermediaries, interpreters, and clerks; African
employees in the making of colonial Africa.
Title main entry. Ed. by Benjamin N. Lawrance, Emily Lynn Osborn,
and Richard L. Roberts. (Africa and the diaspora)
U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 332 p. $45.00
Historians of Africa, most working in North America or Europe, look
specifically at how African intermediaries contributed to making colonial
legal institutions during the formative and mature periods of colonial
rule. Their topics include the Boubou Penda-Ernest Noirot affair of 1905
in French Guinea, and African court elders in the Kenyan province of
Nyanza moving from traditional to modern between 1930 and 1960.
DT56 2006-011522 1-56656-654-1
A traveller’s history of Egypt.
Adés, Harry. (Traveller’s histories)
Interlink Publishing Group, ©2007 452 p. $14.95 (pa)
Aimed at students and tourists visiting Egypt, this volume offers a
concise summary of the sweep of Egyptian history from the first evi-
dence of human habitation to contemporary times. The chronological rise
and fall of kingdoms and governments constitutes most of the discussion,
but some explorations of arts, literature, and the lives of ordinary
Egyptians are interspersed throughout. Also included are appendixes
listing pharaohs and heads of governments, as well as a chronology.
DT57 83-918250-3-5
Deir El-Behari in the Hellenistic and Roman periods; a
study of an Egyptian temple based on Greek sources.
Lajtar, Adam. (The journal of juristic papyrology; supplement 4)
Warsaw U., ©2006 462 p. $119.00
From 1988 to 1990, and again in 1995 and 2002, Lajtar (archaeology,
Warsaw U.-Cairo) documented reliefs and hieroglyphic inscriptions on
the walls of the temple of Queen Hatshepsut at Deir el-Bahari, but he also
discovered nearly 100 Greek inscriptions that had not been reported
earlier, and made observations and corrections to many more that had
been reported. Here he presents his findings on cult activities there
during Ptolemaic and Roman times, and catalogs the sources of the
Greek inscriptions. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book
Company.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DT58 0-85698-175-3
The survey of Saïs (Sa el-Hagar), 1997-2002.
Wilson, Penelope. (Excavation memoir; 77)
Egypt Exploration Society, ©2006 336 p. $120.00
Saïs was the capital of Egypt in Dynasty 26 and well known to western
classical scholars from the writings of Herodotus in particular. The site
was identified near the village of Sa el-Hagar on the Rosetta or western
branch of the Nile at the end of the 18th century. Wilson took part it the
Society’s project to survey the site and record whatever material
remained from old Survey of Egypt maps. She discusses the city’s early
history, topography, visitors’ accounts through the 18th century, later
records, previous excavations, the geomagnetic and drill auger surveys,
and the archaeology of the site. Drawings, maps, and monochrome pho-
tographs illustrate the text. There is no index. Distributed in the US by
the David Brown Book Company.
DT60 978-0-85698-169-2
More usefully employed; Amelia B. Edwards, writer,
traveller and campaigner for ancient Egypt.
Moon, Brenda. (Occasional publication; 15)
Egypt Exploration Society, ©2006 319 p. $70.00
Moon seeks to presents a fuller biography of novelist and founder of the
Egypt Exploration Society Edwards (1831-92) than previous writers by
drawing on a wider range of sources. She was virtually forgotten outside
the field of Egyptology until the surge in women’s studies towards the
end of the 20th century, she says, but the wealth of information about
her in archive collections and in her unpublished writing has still not
been adequately mined. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book
Company.
DT61 1-84217-220-4
Current research in Egyptology; proceedings.
Annual Current Research in Egyptology (5th: 2004: Durham, UK) Ed.
by Rachael J. Dann.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 157 p. $48.00 (pa)
Postgraduate students from around the world report on recent research
in the field of Egyptology. Many of the 13 papers explore various aspects
of the Egyptian language and ancient Egyptian literature. Others address
such topics as the ritual meaning of the materials used to construct
Tut’Ankhamun’s body armor, and the potential of using stable isotope
analysis to investigate dietary patterns in pre- dynastic Egypt. The volume
is not indexed. Editor Dann teaches archaeology at the U. of Durham.
Distributed in the U.S. by The David Brown Book Company.
DT61 978-0-85698-173-9
The Oxyrhynchus Papyri; v.70.
Title main entry. Ed. and trans. by N. Gonis et al. (Graeco-Roman
memoirs; no.90)
Egypt Exploration Society, ©2006 164 p. $130.00
Not all of them are reduced to shreds and fibers. In fact, some of the
early Christian texts here are remarkable in their preservation, judging
from the excellent photographs of this volume, and the content is fasci-
nating. The four sections include a codex-leaf with part of the Passion of
St. Pamoun (a text otherwise only known in Coptic), scraps of Greek
fiction of Antonius Diogenes, a group of Demosthenes papyri that shows
how careless some scribes can be and how deep the roots of medieval
tradition go, material on a rich woman whose lands may have been con-
fiscated, and a dossier of the House of Apion that adds more information
about their family and lands that has been previously published. These
theological, known and new literary and documentary texts include
translations and a comprehensive index. Distributed by the David Brown
Book Company.
DT62 2006-019346 978-0-8014-4472-2
Mummies and death in Egypt.
Dunand, Françoise and Roger Lichtenberg.
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 234 p. $39.95
This book on ancient Egyptian mummification is really two works in
one. In the first, Dunand (history of religion, Marc Bloch U., France)
describes the history of mummification in ancient Egypt from the ear-
liest evidence to the Roman period, introduces the physical and ritual
practices of mummification, and connects these to the religion of the
ancient Egyptians. She also includes a chapter on the mummification of
animals. Then physician/archaeologist Lichtenberg describes his work
investigating Egyptian mummies with his portable X-ray machine at
archaeological digs, revealing medical information about the mummies’
lives and deaths.
–62–
DT83 2006-049915 978-90-04-11385-5
Ancient Egyptian chronology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Erik Hornung et al. (Handbook of Oriental
studies; section 1, The Near and Middle East; v.83)
BRILL, ©2006 517 p. $215.00
There are exceptions, of course, for certain theories of history and certain
individual historians, but in general, knowing when something hap-
pened is an important starting point for investigating what actually hap-
pened, why it happened, its consequences, and other matters of concern
to historians. It turns out that the chronology of ancient Egypt is not as
consensual as some might like, and scholars here—named but not oth-
erwise identified—grapple with some problems and solution involved
with creating such a consensus. They look at Egyptian chronological tra-
dition and method of dating, relative chronology such as dynasties, and
absolute chronology such as dendrology and the heliacal rising of Sirius.
A conclusion is followed by chronological table for the dynastic period,
2900-323 BC.
DT83 2003-010639 978-0-8018-8544-0
From slave to pharaoh; the black experience of ancient
Egypt. (reprint, 2004)
Redford, Donald B.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 218 p. $22.95 (pa)
Redford (classics and ancient Mediterranean studies, Pennsylvania State
U.) offers a general overview of the Nubian and Kushite experience of the
expansionist power of Egypt and its culture up to 671 B.C. Coverage
includes an historical examination of how the dark-skinned Nubians and
Sudanese blacks were perceived and treated by the Egyptians; the sepa-
ration of the Nile Valley communities based on spatial and spiritual
boundaries; reasons why imperial Egypt exerted influence well beyond
its boundary; how the Nubians and Sudanese reacted to the resulting loss
of self-determination; the subsequent imposition of more regularized,
imperial structures; and the long, checkered history of the relationship
between the communities. This is a paperbound reprint of a 2004 book.
DT87 2006-032115 1-931707-90-1
Akhenaten and Tutankhamun; revolution and restoration.
Silverman, David P. et al.
U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2006 196 p. $24.95
This beautifully illustrated volume presents an accessible account and
new interpretation of the radical religious ideas and policies of the
Egyptian ruler Akhenaten, their rituals, artistic motifs, and festivals, and
the return to tradition instituted by his son and successor, Tutankhamun.
Archaeological research and evidence found in sculpture and other art
are cited throughout. The text is accompanied by color plates, many of
art works at the U. of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology and
Anthropology (with which all three authors, Silverman, Josef W. Wegner,
and Jennifer Houser Wegner, are affiliated: they are also part of the
department of Near Eastern languages and civilization at the U. of
Pennsylvania). Many photos of the site of Amarna, maps, plans, and
reconstruction drawings are included.
DT87 2006-022781 978-0-87586-479-2
Empire of Thebes, or, Ages in chaos revisited.
Sweeney, Emmet. (Ages in alignment; v.3)
Algora Publishing, ©2006 194 p. $23.95 (pa)
A specialist in early modern history, Sweeney (West U., Romania) here
continues his reconstruction of ancient history drawing on the schol-
arship of Immanual Velikovsky during the 1950s, but correcting the
errors introduced by his mistaking the Bible for a historical record. This
third volume focuses on the 18th, or Theban Dynasty in Egypt. He project
four volumes, five counting the volume on Arthur.
DT154 96-21424 978-0-8018-8541-9
Alexandria in late antiquity; topography and social
conflict. (reprint, 1997)
Haas, Christopher. (Ancient society and history)
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 494 p. $30.00 (pa)
Contemporaries attributed the high degree of popular violence in the
Egyptian city during late antiquity to the fact that Alexandrians were
frenzied madmen who possessed an inborn propensity to senseless vio-
lence. Haas (history, Villanova U.) is not at all sure that such an expla-
nation is adequate, and examines the historical and social context. He
especially notes the fierce competition for hegemony between the strong
pagan, Christian, and Jewish religious communities.
–63–
DT294 2006-014518 0-8156-3074-3
Algeria & France, 1800-2000; identity, memory, nostalgia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia M.E. Lorcin. (Modern intellectual and
political history of the Middle East)
Syracuse U. Pr., ©2006 335 p. $45.00
Historians and students of French culture, most from the US and none
from France, consider how Franco-Algerian identity was formulated in a
number of ways for a variety of ends, how the past is remembered and
how it has been obscured, and the memories of the displaced and how
they have been used to come to terms with the past in reflective and
restorative nostalgia.
DT295 2006-003506 978-159017-218-6
A savage war of peace; Algeria, 1954-1962.
Horne, Alistair. (New York Review Books classics)
New York Review Books, ©2006 608 p. $19.95 (pa)
British historian Horne spent much of his career studying French mil-
itary history. In this 1977 work, he turned his eye on France’s failed
colonial war in Algeria. His narrative is constructed through a synthesis
of France’s secondary literature on the bloody conflict and interviews
with many of the key actors. He combines discussion of the conflict
proper with analysis of the politics of Algeria’s National Liberation Front,
the European-Algerian community, and France itself, where the war led
to the collapse of the Fourth Republic. In a new preface, the author dis-
cusses some of the parallels of the Algerian war with the US occupation
of Iraq, including the futility of using torture and other brutal tactics
against an insurgency, no matter how bloody that insurgency might be
itself.
DT329 0-907871-99-2
Marrakesh; through writers’ eyes. (reprint, 2003)
Title main entry. Ed. by Barnaby Rogerson and Stephen Lavington.
Eland Publishing, ©2007 296 p. $28.95 (pa)
Originally published in 2003 by Sickle Moon Books, part of Eland
Publishing, this anthology collects 40 Western perspectives on a Muslim
city long regarded as a “crucible of all that is exotic.” The more well-
known of these voices on Marrakesh include George Orwell and Edith
Wharton. Each essay is followed by a blurb on the author. The travelogue
includes a timeline of when the respective writers were there, from the
14th to the 21st centuries. Rogerson is a travel writer specializing in
former Ottoman Empire countries. The book is distributed by Dufour.
DT346 978-0-7734-5625-9
The United Nations mission for the referendum in
Western Sahara.
Solà-Martin, Andreu.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 198 p. $109.95
Established by the Security Council in 1991, the United Nations Mission
for the Referendum in the Western Sahara (MINURSO) was supposed to
help the Saharan people achieve self-determination following decolo-
nization from Morocco. In this study, Solà- Martín considers the reasons
why MINURSO has failed to fully carry out its mandate. He also assesses
the progress made in implementing the post-settlement peacebuilding
measures outlined in the UN settlement proposals and considers the
larger implications for peacekeeping reforms. Solà-Martín is an Associate
Research Fellow at the Africa Center for Peace and Conflict Studies at the
U. of Bradford, UK.
DT353 90-04-15486-8
Africa yearbook v.2. Politics, economy and society south
of the Sahara in 2005.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andreas Mehler et al.
BRILL, ©2006 511 p. $54.00 (pa)
Mehler (director, Institute of African Affairs, Germany), Melber (research
director, Nordic Africa Institute, Sweden), and van Walraven (a researcher
at the African Studies Center, the Netherlands) present country-specific
articles reviewing political developments, foreign policies, and socioeco-
nomic trends in Sub- Saharan Africa during the year 2005. In addition
to the country- specific studies, regional overviews are presented for West,
Central, Eastern, and Southern Africa and an article on African-European
relations is included.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DT433 2006-043641 0-7734-5722-4
Contemporary witch-hunting in Gusii, southwestern
Kenya.
Ogembo, Justus M.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 196 p. $109.95
Ogembo’s study of the witch-killings in 1992 in Kisii District, Kenya ben-
efits from the insider status of its author, who grew up in a Kenya com-
munity where stories of witches abounded. The study includes witness
interviews taken soon after the event occurred, as well as explanations of
the macro-social history of Kenya in the late 20th century and of the con-
ditions of Gusii rural life in the late 1990s. Ogembo (anthropology and
education, U. of New Hampshire) investigates the causes of these mon-
strous actions, which violated Gusii tradition and Christian morality, and
focuses on the factors of deprivation and impunity.
DT433 2006-051768 0-7734-5801-8
Ethnography of the Gusii of Western Kenya; a vanishing
cultural heritage.
Title main entry. Ed. by John S. Akama and Robert Maxon.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 379 p. $119.95
Most of the contributors were born and bred in the rural Gusii social and
cultural milieu, and are now senior social scientists at Kenyan public uni-
versities. Therefore, they combine formal study with their own observa-
tions and experiences of the erosion and transformation of Gusii
indigenous culture over the decades. Most of the cultural attributes and
ethnographic traits they describe, analyze, and explain are quickly dis-
appearing and may already be gone, so their account serves as a depos-
itory.
DT450 2006-013959 978-0-8108-5302-7
Historical dictionary of Burundi, 3d ed.
Eggers, Ellen K. (Historical dictionaries of Africa; no.103)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 207 p. $75.00
Eggers (linguistics and English, California State U.), who lived in Burundi
in the 1980s, presents an historical dictionary of the sub- Saharan African
country. Entries are listed alphabetically and cover national figures,
political parties, the army, economy, society, and culture, with specific
topics such as slavery, language, women, education, HIV/AIDS, and rela-
tions between the Hutu and Tutsi, and individuals such as Melchior
Ndadaye and Jean-Baptiste Bagaza. Entries range in length from a para-
graph to a few pages; more have been added to this edition. Appendices
list kings, and postcolonial prime ministers and presidents.
DT450 2006-019352 978-0-8014-4448-7
The order of genocide; race, power, and war in Rwanda.
Straus, Scott.
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 273 p. $27.95
While agreeing with the consensus view that the mass killings of Tutsis
in Rwanda in the 1990s were genocide of a very modern form, rather
than simply the eruption of “age-old tribal hatreds,” Straus (political
science, U. of Wisconsin at Madison) still finds significant analytical and
empirical gaps in the consensus literature on the genocide. The most
notable of these gaps concerns both the reasons why the Rwandan
political elites decided on genocide and why they were able to mobilize
middle and lower Hutu strata to comply with their genocidal issues. In
order to answer these questions, he focuses on the local dynamics of the
genocide, including how violence spread through rural regions, the iden-
tities of mobilizers and perpetrators, regional differences in violence, and
other such issues. He also evaluates earlier explanations of the Rwandan
genocide and attempts to develop a theory of genocide that explains
events at both the national and local levels.
DT516 978-90-04-15234-2
Digest of jurisprudence of the special court for Sierra
Leone; 2003-2005.
Laucci, Cyril.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 873 p. $241.00
The Special Court for Sierra Leone was created in 2002 for the purpose
of prosecuting those responsible for serious violations of international
humanitarian law and Sierra Leonean law in Sierra Leone since
November 30, 1996. This resource for practitioners and academics
presents abstracts of selected decisions, orders, and judgments rendered
by Chambers through December 31, 2005. Abstracts were chosen on the
basis of their relevance to interpretation and application of the Statute
and Rules of Procedure and Evidence or their importance in the devel-
opment of international criminal law. Laucci is Legal Adviser of the
Appeals Chamber, Special Court for Sierra Leone. Martinus Nijhoff is an
imprint of Brill.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DT546 2006-017936 978-0-313-33203-6
Culture and customs of the Central African Republic.
Woodfork, Jacqueline. (Culture and customs of Africa)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 191 p. $49.95
Woodfork (history, Whitman College) provides an introductory overview
of the Central African Republic, one of the least know countries in
African, both to other Africans and people of different continents.
Coverage includes an historical overview and information on geography,
economics and politics, followed by individual chapters exploring various
aspects of Centrafrican culture and customs: religion and worldview; lit-
erature and the media; art, architecture, and living patterns; cuisine and
traditional dress; gender roles, marriage, and family; social customs and
lifestyle; and music and dance. The text also includes a chronology,
glossary, and selected bibliography. Academic but accessible to the
general reader.
DT546 2006-011557 978-0-8108-4918-1
Historical dictionary of Gabon, 3d ed.
Gardinier, David E. & Douglas A. Yates. (Historical dictionaries of
Africa; no.101)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 455 p. $120.00
This resource for students and researchers contains hundreds of cross-
referenced entries on Gabon’s most important people, places, events, and
institutions. A sampling of topics includes President Omar Bongo, King
Denis, the International Monetary Fund, the Pygmies, and World War I.
Gardinier (emeritus, history, Marquette U.) and Yates (political science,
American U. of Paris) provide a general overview of the country’s history
and geography in the introduction. Supplementary materials include a
chronology, lists of elected officials, statistical tables, and maps. An
extensive bibliography, organized by subject, completes the volume.
DT1302 2006-028864 0-313-33147-2
Culture and customs of Angola.
Oyebade, Adebayo O. (Culture and customs of Africa)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 180 p. $49.95
Aimed at students and general readers, this volume provides a basic
understanding of the culture and customs of Angola. In the introduction,
Oyebade (history, Tennessee State U.) briefly recounts Angola’s history
and supplies information on the country’s geography, economy, and pol-
itics. Subsequent chapters focus on areas such as religion, literature,
architecture, leisure activities, gender roles, and music. Supplemental
materials include a chronology, glossary, and suggestions for further
reading.
DT1974 2006-040796 0-7407-5572-2
Mandela; the authorised portrait.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mac Maharaj and Ahmed Kathrada.
Andrews McMeel, ©2006 355 p. $50.00
In this coffee-table biography, the narrative of Mandela’s journey to
freedom is accompanied images of Mandela throughout his life, of South
Africa before and after apartheid, and of documents relevant to
Mandela’s struggle for civil rights. It also contains more than 60 specially
commissioned interviews, as well as tributes and anecdotes from world
leaders, friends and associates, including Bill Clinton, Tony Blair, Bono,
Thabo Mbeki and Muhammad Ali.
DT2913 978-0-7734-5577-1
A socio-political agenda for the twenty-first century
Zimbabwean Church; empowering the excluded.
Dube, Jimmy G.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 210 p. $109.95
A Zimbabwean contextual theologian currently living in the US, Dube
proposes a theological framework for constructing a socio-political the-
ology of the excluded in Zimbabwe in particular, but applicable to mar-
ginalized communities in general. His main concern is to describe the
experiences, conditions, and consequences of exclusion in the context of
colonization, missionization, globalization. Such exclusion, he argues,
bears much responsibility for the predicament and suffering of millions
of Zimbabweans today.
–64–
DT2976 978-1-77007-112-4
Against the grain; memoirs of a Zimbabwean newsman.
Nyarota, Geoffrey.
Zebra Press, ©2006 352 p. $29.95 (pa)
His telephone was bugged. He was threatened, arrested, and jailed. His
printing press was bombed, and eventually he found a contract had been
taken out on his life. Distinguished journalist and academic Nyarota was
the founding editor of the Daily News, often a lone voice against the
corrupt and repressive Mugabe regime in Zimbabwe. As an idealistic
schoolteacher he was witness to a guerrilla war and as a new journalist
he saw his first newspaper absorbed by an increasingly repressive gov-
ernment. As he wrote about how the people were being betrayed, he and
his colleagues were systematically and literally beaten down. He went
into exile only when he became convinced he could do more for his
country alive than dead. This is riveting and graphic evidence of what
happens when a government becomes a sociopath.
DU80 978-0-7734-5740-9
Social action and institution building in the three houses
of the Australian parliament; the work of parliamentary
committees.
Jones, Grant.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 350 p. $119.95
Jones (Graduate School of Management, Macquarie University) analyzes
committee life in the Australian House of Representatives, the Senate, and
the Australian Capital Territory’s Legislative Assembly. According to the
author, the study “is partly inspired by the work of behaviorists working
in the area of legislative study, such as John Wahlke and Heinz Elau. It
is further guided by more recent attempts by Donald Searing to apply the
principles underpinning sociology to the analysis of parliamentary life.
However, the approach goes beyond these perspectives and would be best
located within the so-called ‘new institutionalism’ as defined by March
and Olsen.”
DU120 0-85575-501-6
A man of all tribes; the life of Alick Jackomos.
Broome, Richard and Corinne Manning.
Aboriginal Studies Press, ©2006 298 p. $35.95 (pa)
From an adventurous boyhood as a Greek growing up in Melbourne,
Alick Jackomos became a traveling tent wrestler and, after mixing with
the Aboriginal population in that venue, evolved into a tireless proponent
of Aboriginal advancement. The text includes some photographs from
Jackomos’ extensive archive of images of Aboriginal Victorians.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
DU120 2006-389603 0-17-012780-X
Race and racism in Australia, 3d ed.
Hollinsworth, David.
Thomson Learning / Australia, ©2006 332 p. $38.43 (pa)
Hollinsworth (U. of Queensland, Australia) offers a broad treatment of
the role of race and racism in Australian history and contemporary
society. He reviews the history of indigenous-settler relations from 1788
onward, explores attempts to control migration and settlement patterns;
describes contemporary debates about indigenous policy, refugees, mul-
ticulturalism, and social justice; and examines social science theories of
race and racism in the Australian context. Not distributed in the US at
this time.
DU122 2006-404193 1-920694-75-7
The Dutch down under; 1606-2006.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nonja Peters.
U. of Western Australia Pr., ©2006 422 p. $58.50
Peters (migration, ethnicity, refugees, and citizenship, Curtin U. of
Technology, Western Australia) was one of 170,000 Dutch nationals who
emigrated to Australia after World War II. This book, coinciding with cel-
ebrations of 400 years of Dutch- Australian contact, chronologically
reviews the relationship between those countries, beginning with the East
India Company’s vessel Duyfken’s arrival on the present day Cape York
Peninsula in 1606. Photographs and maps illustrate the rich history,
moving readers through the motives for original exploration and set-
tlement; the relationship of the Dutch to locals and other immigrants; the
great migration of Dutch- Indonesians during World War II (and
resulting racial conflicts); the integration and assimilation of language,
art, business, and society; and contemporary manifestations of the two-
nation identity. This book is distributed in the US by ISBS.
–65–
DU122 2006-050910 978-90-04-15479-7
The sojourner community; Japanese migration and
residency in Australia.
Mizukami, Tetsuo. (Social sciences in Asia; v.10)
BRILL, ©2007 202 p. $80.00 (pa)
In Australia, explains Mizukami (sociology, Rikkyo U. Tokyo), there is a
long-term discernible pattern of temporary movement related to resi-
dency, which serves an important role in the country’s economy and
culture. He examines in detail foreign residency, in both temporary and
permanent forms, of Japanese in Australia. Within the cultural context of
Australia, he presents and analyzes data relating to Japanese sojourning,
and explains the mechanisms and processes by which it takes place. He
thus presents a case study both of foreigners in Australia and of Japanese
in foreign countries.
DU125 2006-021200 978-0-8166-4922-8
Shimmering screens; making media in an aboriginal
community.
Deger, Jennifer. (Visible evidence; v.19)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 267 p. $22.50 (pa)
In this ethnography, Deger (anthropology, Macquarie U., Australia) inves-
tigates how the aboriginal Yolngu people of the tropical north of
Australia engage with modern media technology, particularly focusing on
how the Yolngu have deployed video production to their own purposes.
Although building on anthropological theorizations of mimesis found in
the writings of Walter Benjamin and Michael Taussig, she differs from
those earlier authors in seeing Yolngu video mimesis as a modality for
“revelation,” as opposed to “representation.” Yolngu mimeses “is about a
bringing forth, a connecting and making visible the immanent under-
lying Ancestral relations” of the Yolngu.
DU419 2006-404500 978-1-877372-16-2
Disputed histories; imagining New Zealand’s pasts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tony Ballantyne and Brian Moloughney.
Otago University Press, ©2006 283 p. $49.95 (pa)
New Zealand historians not only take stock of the country’s historiog-
raphy as it stands, but also test innovate ways of writing about the past
and the communities that have made the islands their home. They search
for new analytical stances, novel ways of framing temporal and spatial
boundaries of histories, and new or little-used sources. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
DU624 2006-006222 978-0-8248-2981-0
From the land of hibiscus; Koreans in Hawaii, 1903-1950.
Title main entry. Ed. by Yong-ho Ch’oe.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 287 p. $45.00
As Ch’oe (Korean history, U. of Hawai`i) notes in the introduction,
hibiscus is both the national flower of Korea and the state flower of
Hawai`i, hence the highlighting of hibiscus in the title of this collection
of ten essays examining Korean experiences in Hawai`i from the arrival
of the first group Koreans in 1903 to the present. Topics include the activ-
ities of later South Korean dictator Syngman Rhee in Hawai`i, Korean
immigration and the Korea Protestant Church, diasporic politics and the
1931 court cases of the Korean National Association of Hawai`i, crime
and media portrayals of Koreans in Hawai`i, and 100 years of Korean
dance in Hawai`i.
DU629 2003007993 978-0-8248-3086-1
Loyal to the land; the legendary Parker Ranch, 1950—
1970; v.2; The senior stewards.
Bergin, Billy.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 313 p. $40.00
Dr. Kauka Billy Bergen (State of Hawai’i Department of Agriculture), who
was born on the Big Island, served as chief veterinarian at the Parker
Ranch—one of the largest in the US —from 1970 to 1995. After chronicling
the Parker family from 750 to 1950 in the first volume, here he profiles
subsequent leaders and innovations in the ranch’s management rooted in
traditional Hawaiian reverence for the land, e.g., its Animal Health
Program. The book includes archival photos, a ranch map, and glossary
of colloquial Hawaiian used by the paniolo (cowboy).
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
DU629 2005-037459 978-0-8248-2979-7
Waikiki; a history of forgetting and remembering.
Feeser, Andrea. Art & design by Gaye Chan.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 188 p. $29.00
As part of the Historic Waikiki art project, Feeser (art history, Clemson
U.) presents a well-illustrated social history of the city in the frameworks
of its indigenous history, colonialism, and tourism. A major focus is in
on how Native Hawaiian practices have been valued and devalued by out-
siders. The book (in 9.5 x11″ landscape format) includes a chronology,
maps, and glossary of terms and historical figures. Designer Chan
teaches at the U. of Hawaii, where Feeser previously taught.
DX210 92-950-4253-0
At risk; Roma and the displaced in Southeast Europe.
Title main entry.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 132 p. $35.00 (pa)
The United Nations Development Programme addresses the situation of
Roma—The Gypsies—in the Balkans using quantitative data from cross-
country surveys, and focuses particularly on refugees and internally dis-
placed people, a significant vulnerable group in the post-conflict region.
There is no index.
DX210 2006-042833 1-84545-164-3
The Romani movement; minority politics and ethnic
mobilization in contemporary Central Europe.
Vermeersch, Peter. (Studies in ethnopolitics)
Berghahn Books, ©2006 261 p. $80.00
Vermeersch (East European politics) explores recent attempts of the Roma
in Central Europe and their supporters to form a political movement and
to influence domestic and international politics. The study is based on
firsthand observation and interviews with activists and politicians in the
Czech Republic, Hungary and Slovakia. Coverage includes an intro-
ductory overview of Roma identity and interests, and ethnic mobi-
lization; the development of minority policies in Central Europe, pre-1989
and post-1989; the actions of Central European Romani activists, their
opinions and their interpretations of events; the interaction between
activists and policy makers, and how Romani movement leaders have
understood and framed their cause; the impact of international organi-
zations on the development of domestic Romani movement action; and
the Romani movement as seen from various theoretical perspectives.
DX217 978-1-904558-61-3
Becoming conspicuous; Irish travellers, society and the
state 1922-70.
Bhreatnach, Aoife.
Dufour Editions, ©2006 222 p. $37.95 (pa)
In order to understand the historical status of Travellers, Irish social sci-
entist Bhreatnach examines developments in Irish society that affected
attitudes to the nomadic population. Among her concerns are whether
the relationship between Travellers and settled people were antagonistic
or tolerant at different times, what forces shaped that relationship during
the period, and whether the presence of the wandering beggar or boc-
cough was important for attitudes towards mobility and alms-giving.
NORTH AMERICAN INDIANS, U.S. HISTORY
E18 2006-005162 978-0-8047-4280-1
Puritan conquistadors; iberianizing the Atlantic, 1550-
1700.
Cañizares-Esguerra, Jorge.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 327 p. $15.00 (pa)
Cañizares-Esguerra (history, U. of Texas, Austin) offers a comparative
analysis of the Puritan colonization of New England and Iberian models
of colonization. The author argues that British Protestants and Spanish
Catholics utilized similar religious discourses to explain and justify con-
quest and colonization—a biblically sanctioned interpretation of
expansion which was part of a long-standing Christian tradition of holy
violence aimed at demonic enemies within and without.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E29 2006-022704 0-8204-8111-4
Arabs in the Americas; interdisciplinary essays on the
Arab diaspora.
Title main entry. Ed. by Darcy A. Zabel.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 236 p. $31.95 (pa)
Fourteen Arab and non-Arab writers from the U.S., Canada, Latin
America and the Middle East contribute 12 essays exploring what it
means to be part of the Arab diaspora and to live in the Americas.
Coverage includes early immigration to Latin America in the 1890s, the
construction of an Arab American identity in the U.S. in the 1920s, expa-
triatism in the 1970s-1990s, having multiple identities, the impact of pop
culture and stereotypes on one’s experience of the Americas, a “then and
now” look at Arab experiences in Latin America, the cultural significance
of Arab American literature, Arab American reclamation rhetoric, repre-
sentations of Arabs in juvenile fiction pre- and post-9/11, the post-9/11
responses of the larger community, and the situation today. No subject
index.
E78 2006-013866 978-0-295-98636-4
Art of the Northwest coast.
Jonaitis, Aldona.
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 322 p. $26.95 (pa)
This comprehensive, generously illustrated survey of the Native arts of
the Pacific Northwest Coast spans the region from Puget Sound to Alaska
and proceeds from prehistoric times to the present. Jonaitis incorporates
into the region’s social history the observations of anthropologists, art
historians and Native peoples to reveal how a complex web of factors
informed varied responses to the changes and challenges brought about
by contact with Europeans. Jonaitis is director of the University of Alaska
Museum of the North and professor of anthropology at the University of
Alaska Fairbanks.
E78 2006-046559 978-0-295-98623-4
As days go by; our history, our land, and our people; the
Cayuse, Umatilla, and Walla Walla.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer Karson.
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 263 p. $23.95 (pa)
Karson (Tamástslikt Cultural Institute, Pendleton, Oregon) presents a col-
lection of nine essays about the history, culture, way of life, and future
of the Cayuse, Umatilla, and Walla Walla tribal people and their gov-
ernment—the Confederated Tribes of the Umatilla Indian Reservation
(CTUIR). The contributing authors include nine members of the Cayuse,
Umatilla, and Walla Walla tribes, and two tribal attorneys and one
history scholar with long connections to the CTUIR. The text is intended
for current members and future generations of the CTUIR, and as a
resource offering non- Indians insights into the CTUIR to promote greater
understanding of the CTUIR and of tribes in general.
E78 978-1-55238-200-4
Canadian Indian cowboys in Australia; representation,
rodeo, and the RCMP at the Royal Easter show, 1939.
Mannik, Lynda.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 196 p. $24.95 (pa)
They were businessmen, politicians, and well known entertainers, but all
of them also accomplished professional athletes. The Canadian gov-
ernment allowed them to go to Australia for the annual show on con-
dition that a member of the Royal Canadian Mounted Police supervise
them, and that they be seen in a traditional tipi-village selling handi-
crafts: they would, after all, be representing Canadian First Nations.
Mannick, apparently a historian in Canada, draws on letters, popular
and official records, interviews, and other sources to examine the affair.
Distributed in the US by Michigan State University Press.
E78 2006-007672 978-0-87480-853-7
Environmental change and human adaptation in the
ancient American Southwest.
Title main entry. Ed. by David E. Doyel and Jeffrey S. Dean.
University of Utah Press, ©2006 344 p. $45.00
Archaeologists at mostly public institutions in the US present a sample
of institutional contexts and approaches for studying the interaction
between culture and the environment in the ancient southwest of the
country. The underlying conceptual model has been developed over 20
years by an interdisciplinary team looking at such interaction among the
Kayenta Anasazi in northern Arizona.
–66–
E78 2005-029390 978-0-89013-482-5
Fine Indian jewelry of the Southwest; the Millicent Rogers
Museum collection.
Tisdale, Shelby J. Photography by Addison Doty.
Museum of New Mexico Pr., ©2006 215 p. $50.00
In her later years, oil heiress, fashion icon and art patron Millicent
Rogers promoted and collected Indian and Hispano arts and crafts. Her
collection of Navajo and Zuni silver and turquoise, Hopi silver work, and
Pueblo stone and shell jewelry provided the foundation for the Millicent
Rogers Museum in Taos, which has reproduced in this volume some of
its finest pieces. Tisdale, former director of the Rogers Museum and
current director of the Museum of Indian Arts and Culture/Laboratory
of Anthropology, includes a biography of Rogers and the historical and
social background of the pieces in the collection.
E78 978-0-7748-0663-3
The first nations of British Columbia; an anthropological
survey. (reprint, 1998)
Muckle, Robert J.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 146 p. $16.95 (pa)
Muckle (anthropology, Capilano College, Canada) presents a synthetic
overview of the First Nations (Native American) people of the Canadian
province of British Columbia. He primarily approaches the topic through
an anthropological lens, discussing First Nations prehistory, traditional
lifeways, and cultural change over the past 200 years. However, he also
covers government relations, significant court cases, political negotiations
in the 1990s, and current issues. Distributed in the US by the U. of
Washington Press.
E78 2006-004630 978-0-8139-2548-6
First people; the early Indians of Virginia, 2d ed.
Egloff, Keith and Deborah Woodward.
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 96 p. $12.95 (pa)
For students and general readers, Egloff (Virginia Department of Historic
Resources) and Woodward, an editor and writing consultant, discuss the
history of the Virginia Indians. They cover the tribes’ everyday life, tools
and other objects used (including illustrations), culture, contact with
Europeans, and tribes today. This edition integrates recent events in the
Indian community and new research.
E83 2006-044559 0-8061-3759-2
Washita memories; eyewitness views of Custer’s attack on
Black Kettle’s village.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard G. Hardorff.
U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2006 474 p. $34.95
The November 1868 attack by Lt. Col. George Custer and his US Cavalry
forces on a Southern Cheyenne Village located along the Washita River in
what is now Oklahoma was perhaps the most tragic event in the decades
long subjugation of the Cheyenne in the estimation of independent
scholar Hardorff, who here presents a documentary history of the event
which gathers recollections from participants, victims, and other wit-
nesses from primary sources such as official reports, journals, letters,
interviews, and newspaper accounts. The different sources are typically
preceded by introductory contextual material.
E89 2005-012817 0-8204-7944-6
Native American autobiography redefined; a handbook.
Sellers, Stephanie A.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 128 p. $29.95 (pa)
Sellers (English, Gettysburg College) offers perspectives on how scholars
can use Native American autobiographies of the past as teaching tools to
help dispel some of the myths about Native Americans. She also helps
show readers generally how to distinguish Native from European ele-
ments in popular autobiographies like Black Elk Speaks. No index.
E93 2006-021772 0-275-99011-7
Native America, discovered and conquered; Thomas
Jefferson, Lewis & Clark, and Manifest Destiny.
Miller, Robert J. (Native America, yesterday and today)
Praeger, ©2006 214 p. $49.00
Former Oregon Congresswoman Elizabeth Furse (director, Institute for
Tribal Government, Portland State U.) introduces the shocking neglect of
Indian issues and laws by members of Congress and the education
system. As a member of the Eastern Shawnee Tribe and Chief Justice,
Court of Appeals, Confederated Tribes of the Grande Ronde Community
of Oregon, Miller (Lewis & Clark Law School, Portland), notes the book’s
conception out of ambivalence over the bicentennial anniversary of the
Lewis and Clark expedition. He traces how the Doctrine of Discovery still
continues to limit Native rights and calls for its end.
–67–
E96 978-0-7748-1230-6
Supporting indigenous children’s development;
community-university partnerships.
Ball, Jessica and Alan Pence.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 136 p. $85.00
Ball and Pence (both: child and youth care, U. of Victoria) describe the
evolution and practice of a community-based partnership they created in
conjunction with First Nations in Canada to strengthen community
capacity to design, deliver, and evaluate culturally appropriate programs
to support young people’s development. The approach diverges from con-
ventional approaches that promote knowledge transmission and best
practices based on assumptions of their universal validity and desir-
ability. Distributed in the US by University of Washington Press.
E97 2006-002980 1-57416-086-9
Children left behind; dark legacy of Indian mission
boarding schools.
Giago, Tim.
Clear Light Publishers, ©2006 166 p. $14.95 (pa)
Beginning in the middle of the 1800s and continuing until the 1960s, the
Bureau of Indian Affairs established Indian boarding schools conceived
to “Americanize” their students. In these schools, Giago (former president
of the Native American Journalists Foundation, Inc. and former editor
and publisher of the magazine Native American Review) charges, students
suffered routine physical, psychological and sexual abuse. He himself
attended the Holy Rosary Mission on the Pine Ridge Reservation for ten
years, and has been writing about the boarding school system ever since
in poems and newspaper columns. This volume collects some of theses
materials in order to expose the dark legacy of the Indian boarding
school system.
E98 2006-020802 978-0-7391-1393-6
Beyond white ethnicity; developing a sociological
understanding of Native American identity reclamation.
Fitzgerald, Kathleen J.
Lexington Books, ©2007 251 p. $75.00
Sociologists have shown considerable interest in the lingering presence of
ethnicity and the ethnic identity of European ethnics, says Fitzgerald
(sociology, Columbia College), but have paid little attention to ethnic
identity among racial minorities. To help bridge that gap, she investigates
the ethnic identity construction or reconstruction of Native American
reclaimers. She focuses mostly on the individual reclamation process, but
believes the study can contribute to understanding larger cultural trans-
formation.
E98 2006-297066 978-1-58008-767-4
The desert Southwest; four thousand years of life and art.
Hayes, Allan and Carol Hayes. Photographs by John Blom.
Ten Speed Press, ©2006 200 p. $24.95 (pa)
Writing from a layperson’s point of view, the authors present a history
of Southwest art, artifacts, and events, with photos of objects from the
Museums of the Arizona Historical Society, as well as areas. They draw
from their experiences as collectors, which stimulated their research on
the subject. Beginning with prehistory, they explore the area of southwest
California, Arizona, and New Mexico, and describe artifacts of the
Spanish, Anglos, and American Indians. Allan Hayes is a writer and art
director, and Carol Hayes is an antiques and Indian art dealer. They are
joined by Blom, who is a photographer.
E98 2006-033520 978-0-275-99097-8
Native North American religious traditions; dancing for
life.
Paper, Jordan D.
Praeger, ©2007 189 p. $49.95
Paper (emeritus comparative religion, York U.) has taken part in Native
American religious rituals for some 25 years in Canada, the US, and
Mexico. Respecting the oral nature of the events, he never recorded his
experience, so his accounts of them are general rather than detailed. His
focus is on the ceremonies, which are observable, rather than on ide-
ology, theology, or myths.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E98 2006-021717 978-0-87220-861-2
Quest for harmony; Native American spiritual traditions.
(reprint, 2002)
Young, William A.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2006 420 p. $45.00
Young (religious studies, Westminster College, Missouri) outlines the basic
spiritual teaching of four Native American traditions that are in the midst
of a rival: the Lenape (Delaware), Ani’-Yun’-wiya (Cherokee), Lakota
(Sioux) and Diné (Navajo). For each he looks at the people and their social
organization, creation legends, history, spirituality, and the tradition
today. He also discusses the Ghost Dance, the Native American Church,
and the eco-crisis. The 2002 edition was published by Seven Bridges.
E99 2005-034286 978-0-89013-483-2
Classic Hopi and Zuni kachina figures.
Portago, Andrea. Ed.by Barton Wright.
Museum of New Mexico Pr., ©2006 173 p. $55.00
Kachina carvings, called Katsintithu by the Hopi people, were originally
given to the young to aid in religious instruction. Presented in this
volume are 85 rare, classic-era (1880s-1940s) Hopi and Zuni carved dolls
from private and public collections and 30 landscape photographs that
give context to the kachinas. Wright, the author of many articles and
books about Puebloan culture and Hopi kachinas, supplements Portago’s
photographs with an essay about the systems and perceptions by which
the Pueblo people negotiated their world.
E99 2006-040261 978-0-8061-3785-8
Crazy Horse; a Lakota life.
Bray, Kingsley M. (Civilization of the American Indian series; v.254)
U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2006 510 p. $34.95
A bookseller in Manchester, Bray has spent two decades researching the
history and ethnology of Plains Indians, particularly the Lakota. Here he
offers a biography of Crazy Horse (1842-77), the greatest war leader of
the Lakota, renowned for his bravery, his martial prowess, his intro-
version, and his life-long rejection of negotiations with the US.
E99 2006-003161 978-0-7591-0984-1
Cultural representation in Native America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew Jolivétte. (Contemporary Native
American communities)
AltaMira Press, ©2006 205 p. $72.00
In Native Barbie dolls and racist mascots, misconceptions of mixed- race
identities, and the commodification of all things “Indian,” the contrib-
utors to this collection of essays reveal the ways in which the existence
of Native people continues to be challenged and the ways those challenges
create harmful repercussions in social and legal policy. The authors re-
articulate Native history, religion, identity, and oral and literary tradi-
tions, allowing the true identity of Native people to be recognized and
respected.
E99 2006-018523 978-0-7591-0571-3
Drinking and sobriety among the Lakota Sioux.
Medicine, Beatrice. (Contemporary Native American communities;
stepping stones to the seventh generation)
AltaMira Press, ©2007 155 p. $24.95 (pa)
Teacher and anthropologist Medicine (d. 2005) was descended from the
Sihasapa and Minneconjou bands of the Lakota Nation. Here she extends
a 1969 work on changes in family structure associated with a perceived
increase in the use of alcohol. Taking a indigenous perspective, she
draws on native articulations regarding why people choose to drink, how
they were socialized to drinking, and the rational for drunken behavior.
During the course of her study, she developed new ethno-linguistic cate-
gories of drinking and sober states.
E99 978-1-55238-198-4
“I will fear no evil”; Ojibwa-missionary encounters along
the Berens River, 1875-1940.
Gray, Susan Elaine.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 214 p. $29.95 (pa)
Gray (anthropology, U. of Winnipeg) describes the many ways that the
native Ojibwa people in Manitoba and northwestern Ontario interpreted
conversion to Christianity during the period, and integrated Christian
rituals and practices into their world view in ways that they controlled
and found meaningful. Distributed in the US by Michigan State
University Press.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E99 2006-013499 978-0-8165-2481-5
Mimbres society.
Title main entry. Ed. by Valli S. Powell-Martí and Patricia A. Gilman.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 213 p. $50.00
Drawing on architecture and pottery, US and Canadian archaeologists
explore the organizational complexity of the Mimbres people before,
during, and after the Classic period, AD 1000-1130, in the southwestern
US. They use architectural data to provide insight into family, household,
communal, and community structure and also to complement analysis
of the composition and design of the painted pottery that the Mimbres
are best known for.
E99 2006-411944 1-55111-790-8
The Nisga’a treaty; polling dynamics and political
communication in comparative context.
Ponting, J. Rick.
Broadview Press, ©2006 194 p. $26.95 (pa)
Applying symbolic interactionist theory, particularly its social construc-
tionist offshoot, to his analysis, Ponting (emeritus, sociology, U. of
Calgary, Canada) presents a comparative political ethnography of the
negotiation of the 2000 treaty between the First Nation Nisga’a people
and the governments of Canada and British Columbia and the work of
Australia’s Council for Aboriginal Reconciliation. In addition to analyzing
the motivations and actions of the key political players, he is also con-
cerned with the dynamics of public opinion polling in the development
of political negotiations.
E99 2004-012034 1-57416-064-8
Po’pay; leader of the first American revolution.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joe S. Sando and Herman Agoyo.
Clear Light Publishers, ©2005 254 p. $14.95 (pa)
Po’pay led the Pueblo revolt of 1680, which ousted the Spanish from New
Mexico until 1692. In conjunction with the 2005 placing of a statue of the
leader in the US Capitol’s National Statuary Hall, a historian and tribal
leader from New Mexico Pueblos present the first book on this leader
and his legacy from a Pueblo perspective. It includes a foreword by New
Mexico governor Bill Richardson, a chronology, images of the statue, and
commemorative statements.
E99 2005-051187 978-1-88963-78-5
Social life in northwest Alaska; the structure of Iñupiaq
Eskimo nations.
Burch, Ernest S.
U. of Alaska Press, ©2006 478 p. $65.00
Burch (Arctic Studies Center, Smithsonian Institution) presents a text
based on some 40 years of research in 14 Alaska Native villages and
numerous libraries and archives. The book is the third and last of a
series of volumes by Burch on the early-contact nations of Northwest
Alaska. The first volume was a social geography of the Inupiaq Eskimos
and the second concentrated on the types of relations between and
among the several nations formerly existing in the region. The third
focuses on how the nations were organized internally and how they func-
tioned. Coverage includes an overview of the region and the Inupiaq
people, role differentiation, social solidarity, the economic process, the
political process, and the social integration process.
E99 2006-028658 978-0-313-33658-4
The Trail of Tears and Indian removal.
Sturgis, Amy H. (Greenwood guides to historic events, 1500-1900)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 164 p. $45.00
Designed as a reference for high school students and lower-level under-
graduates, this volume examines the forced removal of the Cherokee
Nation from its traditional homeland (a.k.a. the “Trail of Tears”) in 1838-
1839. The perspectives of both the Cherokee Nation and the U.S. gov-
ernment are discussed. Supplemental materials include brief biographies
of key individuals as well as a chronology and excerpts from primary
documents.
Prices are U.S. "list." They may vary outside the U.S. Bookstores, jobbers,
or the presses will fill orders. Do not order books from Book News Inc.
–68–
E156 2005-283780 1-4144-1058-1
Worldmark encyclopedia of the States, 7th ed.; 2v.
Title main entry.
Thomson Gale, ©2007 1050 p. $235.00
★★★★A previous edition of this work was cited in Guide to Reference
Books and in Senior High School Library Catalog. This two-volume ency-
clopedia presents each US state in a separate chapter, along with the
District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the Caribbean and Pacific
Dependencies. Each chapter describes the geography, population, ethnic
groups, languages, religions, history and government, services, armed
forces, migration, economy, and agriculture of the state. Other subjects
include mining, energy, industry and commerce, banking and finance,
health, social welfare, housing, education, the arts, libraries and
museums, communications and press, organizations, tourism, recreation,
and famous people. Facts on each state precede the articles, including
information on the state name, capital, date of statehood, song, motto,
flag, symbols, and time zone. Maps are also incorporated, and the final
chapter gives an overview of the entire country. Information for articles
was drawn from state and federal agencies—especially internet sites for
this revised and updated edition. Private documents were also used.
There is no index.
E169 2004-013424 1-57488-715-7
The 1950’s most wanted; the top 10 book of rock & roll
rebels, Cold War crises, and all-American oddities.
Rodriguez, Robert.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 348 p. $12.95 (pa)
Rodriguez compiles lists of trivia relating to the 1950s, such as fashions
and fads, food, language, books, cars, unlikely music artists, movie
quotes, forgotten TV shows, and unique lists such as discredited urban
legends, celebrity deaths, and everyday things that began in the 1950s.
He attempts to put together lists that aren’t typical, with a focus on pop
culture. Each item in the lists is also described. Distributed by Books
International.
E169 2006-022779 978-0-87586-467-9
American narcissism; the myth of national superiority.
Caldwell, Wilber W.
Algora Publishing, ©2006 181 p. $22.95 (pa)
Georgia-based writer Caldwell continues his commentary on American
society by defining and diagnosing the national US disease; exploring its
historical, psychological, political, and cultural causes and effects; and
prescribing a cure.
E169 2004-004029 978-0-7425-3436-0
The battle for the American mind; a brief history of a
nation’s thought. (reprint, 2004)
Richard, Carl J.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 356 p. $19.95 (pa)
Writing for general readers, Richard (history, U. of Louisiana-Lafayette)
argues that the US has passed through periods of theism, humanism,
and skepticism, but that since World War II all three philosophies are
present at the same time and are at constant war with each other.
E169 2005-021866 978-0-7425-5081-0
Divided we stand; the rejection of American culture since
the 1960s.
McElroy, John Harmon.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 259 p. $26.95
The “counter-culture movement’s antagonism toward American culture”
is “the most serious internal threat to America since the divisive conflicts
of the 1840s and 1850s that preceded the Civil War,” argues McElroy
(emeritus, U. of Arizona). He raises the alarm about the pernicious
effects of the left’s war on American culture in virtually every sphere of
American society, generally repeating charges that will be familiar to
anyone who has followed the so-called “culture wars” and presenting
anecdotal evidence that is frequently generalized to demonstrate this per-
ceived pervasive attack on American culture. Perhaps McElroy’s most
original contribution is his tracing many of these problems to a putative
attachment to materialism on the part of those who would destroy
American culture.
–69–
E169 2006-012206 978-0-7425-5038-4
The gilded age; essays on the origins of modern America,
2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles W. Calhoun.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 391 p. $24.95 (pa)
The 1996 first edition has been substantially changed to meet the request
of college instructors for a more updated account of American life in the
late 19th century. The second edition bristles with modern scholarship
and interpretive argument as the contributing historians discuss the
major trends, events, and personalities associated with different aspects
of life.
E169 2004-013120 978-0-7656-8067-9
Postwar America; an encyclopedia of social, political,
cultural, and economic history; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by James Ciment.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 1683 p. $399.00
This four-volume encyclopedia offers some 550 alphabetical entries
detailing historical developments in the United States following World
War II. Broadly speaking, the topics covered include arts and popular
culture; civil liberties and civil rights; defense and foreign affairs;
economy and labor; education; family, community, society; government
and politics; health and medicine; legal issues, courts, and crime; race
and ethnicity; religion and spiritual issues; science, technology, and the
environment. The entries range from broad topics such as the automobile
industry, day care, banking and credit, tort law, organized crime, death
and dying, and anticommunism to the extremely specific, including the
Kent State shootings, the My Lai Massacre, the Head Start program,
Richard Nixon’s “Checkers speech,” Abscam, the Freedom of Information
Act, and the Attica prison riot. Included in the fourth volume is a guide
to print and broadcast cultural landmarks of the era, containing brief
descriptions of works ranging from Allen Ginsberg’s Howl to The X-Files.
This is followed by a glossary, a topical bibliography, and a general
index.
E175 2006-008886 978-1-59558-044-3
History in the making; an absorbing look at how
American history has changed in the telling over the last
200 years.
Ward, Kyle.
The New Press, ©2006 374 p. $26.95
Ward (history and political science, Vincennes U.) traces the evolution of
what was considered the true history of the US through representative
textbooks published between 1794 and 1999. Among his goals is to help
students of history think in a historiographical way, that is to realize that
everyone writes in the present with what information and interests they
have.
E179 2006-003571 978-0-8018-8459-7
Born in the country; a history of rural America, 2d ed.
Danbom, David B. (Revisiting rural America)
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 301 p. $20.00 (pa)
Danbom (history, North Dakota State U., Fargo) presents a history of
rural America, with the following objectives: to synthesize rural social
history, provide a textbook, and stimulate other studies. Integrating social
history with political and economic history, he begins with pre-
Columbian America and includes the experiences of white and black
people, men and women, and Native Americans and immigrants. This
edition expands the information on the late twentieth and early twenty-
first centuries and has a new chapter on the post-World War II pro-
duction revolution, which combines two previous chapters. Also added is
a new afterword, and bibliographies have been updated.
E181 2006-026340 978-1-56802-956-6
Political history of America’s wars.
Axelrod, Alan.
CQ Press, ©2007 556 p. $155.00
This work surveys the most significant American wars from a political
perspective, from the American Revolution to the invasion of Iraq.
Included in the 48 conflicts discussed are all of the commonly known
conflicts, as well as Shay’s Rebellion and the Whiskey Rebellion, the
Texas War of Independence, Indian wars in the Pacific Northwest and
California, the Boxer Rebellion, US interventions in Nicaragua and
Panama, US interventions in Lebanon, and US intervention in the Somali
Civil War, to cite just a few. After discussing military action, each chapter
addresses the political background and antecedents of the conflict,
relevant political issues and events during the conflict, and the conflict’s
political consequences. Interspersed throughout the interpretive narrative
are excerpts of original documents and brief biographies of notable
individuals.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E182 2006-020769 978-0-393-05847-5
Six frigates; the epic history of the founding of the U.S.
Navy.
Toll, Ian W.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 560 p. $27.95
This book traces the history of six frigates built in six major seaports in
the US, which essentially launched the US Navy. Authorized in 1794 by
President Washington, their construction was in response to the need for
a strong military. Described here is the story of the politics involved,
views of the founding fathers and subsequent presidents, the campaign
against Tripoli, and the frigates’ role in the War of 1812. A chronology
of events after 1815 is appended. Toll has been a financial analyst,
political aide, and speechwriter.
E183 2006-030909 978-1-931968-40-9
Behind the veil; an American woman’s memoir of the
1979 Iran hostage crisis.
Johanyak, Debra. (Series on international, political, and economic
history)
University of Akron Press, ©2007 251 p. $24.95 (pa)
As part of her graduate studies, Johanyak spent a year in Shiraz, Iran,
where she witnessed the revolution of 1979, and the subsequent hostage
crisis played out at the American embassy. Her memoir of that period of
Iranian social and political upheaval and international tension reflects
the perspective of an American who grew up in the United States and
married into an Iranian family.
E183 2006-014005 978-1-57488-803-4
The color of empire; race and American foreign relations.
Krenn, Michael L. (Issues in the history of American foreign relations)
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 146 p. $19.95 (pa)
Krenn (history, Appalachian State U.) contends that race has played and
continues to play as important a role in the formation and implemen-
tation of US foreign policy as economics, politics, and strategic interests.
In support of this argument, he describes the development of the concept
of race the shape it took in early American history; the racism of the
Mexican-American war, the occupation of the Philippines, and other early
forays into empire; the way that both Chinese immigration and Japanese
imperialism were framed as part of the “Yellow Peril;” and connections
between US relations with Africa, the civil rights movement, and African-
American reactions to the Vietnam war. Distributed in the US by Books
International.
E183 2006-280225 978-1-4051-4986-0
A companion to American foreign relations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert D. Schulzinger. (Blackwell companions
to American history)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 562 p. $39.95 (pa)
The 24 essays presented by Schulzinger (history and international affairs,
U. of Colorado at Boulder) are best described as historiographical assess-
ments of the various literatures analyzing American foreign relations
from independence to the early years of the 21st century in that they are
more concerned with how American foreign relations has been described
and judged by historians and how those descriptions have changed over
different eras. The chapters proceed in a broadly chronological fashion,
discussing such topics as the history of US culture and foreign relations,
international environmental issues, the US and imperialism, US relations
with particular regions and countries during various important periods,
World Wars I and II, the Cold War, the Korean and Vietnam Wars, pres-
idential elections and the Cold War, and Détente over 30 years.
E183 2006-045264 0-375-41105-4
Dangerous nation.
Kagan, Robert.
Alfred A. Knopf, ©2006 527 p. $30.00
Kagan, the neoconservative co-founder of the Project for a New American
Century and vocal advocate for “regime change” in Iraq, argues that the
United States, from its beginnings, has been an expansionist and
aggressive power, contrary to the national self-image of Americans as
inward-looking and isolationist. Of course for Kagan this is not a bad
thing because the expansionism was accompanied by an ideology of
freedom and a championing of liberal, commercial economics, even if it
has caused defenders of monarchy and absolutism to view the US as a
“dangerous nation.” The only real problem is the lack of historical under-
standing by Americans of their own expansionist tendencies, which
causes them to miscalculate the reactions of themselves and others to his-
torical events. He reviews this history of American expansionism and
misunderstandings from colonial times to the Spanish-American war,
hinting at a second volume to come in the final pages.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E183 2006-026198 978-0-313-33267-8
Declarations of independence; encyclopedia of American
autonomous and secessionist movements.
Erwin, James L.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 240 p. $75.00
This encyclopedia contains entries on nationalist, secessionist, and auton-
omist movements in the US that occurred since the beginning of the
American Revolution. Entries are organized alphabetically and consist of
geographic regions and movements, with background history as part of
the discussion. These include Mormonism, the Republic of New Afrika,
the Dakota, the Cherokee Nation, the South, and some US states and
regions within them. Movements that did not aim to secure political inde-
pendence as a nation or state are excluded, in addition to Amish and
communal movements or those at the local level. Most Native American
movements are also omitted. Erwin is an independent scholar.
E183 2005-058862 0-87113-925-1
Guests of the Ayatollah; the first battle in America’s war
with militant Islam.
Bowden, Mark.
Grove Atlantic, ©2006 680 p. $26.00
Bowden (an American journalist perhaps best known for authoring Black
Hawk Down) reconstructs the story of the Iranian hostage crisis, in which
66 Americans were held by Iranian students demanding that the US turn
over the toppled Shah following the eruption of the Iranian Revolution of
1979. The crisis severely weakened the administration of President
Jimmy Carter and led to a disastrous special operations rescue that came
to its doom in the Iranian desert. Bowden’s focus is on the experiences
of the hostages and the activities of the unsuccessful rescuers, but he also
offers some discussion of the thoughts and decisions of the policy
makers and the motivations of the hostage-takers.
E183 2006-017576 978-0-393-05809-3
Khrushchev’s cold war; the inside story of an American
adversary.
Fursenko, Aleksandr and Timothy Naftali.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 670 p. $35.00
By the year 2003, a collection of the protocols and minutes of the
Presidium of the Central Committee of the Communist Party of the Soviet
Union from the Khrushchev era were finally fully declassified, allowing
access to the debates, decisions, and desires of the Soviet leadership
during this crucial era of the Cold War. Fursenko (a Russian historian
and member of the Russian Academy of Sciences) and Naftali (director,
Kremlin Decision-making Project, Miller Center of Public Affairs, U. of
Virginia) have used this material in their attempt to recreate Premier
Khrushchev’s views and strategies towards the conflict with the capitalist
West during a period that included the 1956 Hungarian Revolution, the
Suez Crisis, the blockade of Berlin, and the Cuban Missile Crisis.
E183 2006-027432 978-0-7391-1599-2
Safeguarding German-American relations in the new
century; understanding and accepting mutual differences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hermann Kurthen et al.
Lexington Books, ©2006 277 p. $68.00
With the avowed intention of healing the German-American rift evident
in disagreements over the Iraq invasion by encouraging “an open dia-
logue about possible solutions and alternatives that could rejuvenate the
transatlantic partnership and bridge differences between both nations, its
leaders, and peoples,” Kurthen (sociology, Grand Valley State U., US),
Menéndez-Alarcón (sociology, Butler U., US), Immerfal (sociology,
Schwaebisch Gmuend U., Germany) present 12 essays examining dif-
ferent facets of the international relationship. The first half of the con-
tributions set about defining the contours of the current relationship
through discussions of cultural dimensions of the relationship, the
influence of the Christian Right over Bush’s foreign policy, German atti-
tudes towards “out-of-area” military missions, different attitudes towards
the idea of a Pax Americana, and bilateral economic relations. The
remaining papers are more comparative in nature looking at each
country’s national perceptions towards educational reform, academic dis-
course related to migration issues, perceptions of the Second Gulf War,
memories of World War II, views of liberal filmmaker Michael Moore,
and core attitudes in the political culture towards such concepts as indi-
vidualism and universalism.
–70–
E183 2006-003909 0-7546-4813-3
The United States and the Korean peninsula in the 21st
century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tae-Hwan Kwak and Seung-Ho Joo.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 207 p. $99.95
The nine separately authored chapters presented by Kwak (Eastern
Kentucky U. in the US and Kyungnam U. in South Korea) and Joo (U. of
Minnesota-Morris, US) explore and analyze recent relations between the
United States and the two Koreas. The issue of North Korea’s nuclear
program, and the diplomatic negotiations surrounding them, is of course
a major topic, taken up by at least four of the chapters in one form or
another. Other topics include the US response to the rise of Asian region-
alism, the realignment of US armed forces in South Korea, and the role
of China and Japan in US-Korean Peninsula relations.
E183 978-1-84682-010-6
United States foreign policy and Ireland; from empire to
independence, 1913-29.
Whelan, Bernadette.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 607 p. $65.00
Whelan (history, U. of Limerick) examines the formulation and imple-
mentation of US foreign policy towards Ireland, focusing on the role of
three presidents who served during her period of study: Woodrow
Wilson, Warren Harding, and Calvin Coolidge. She considers their per-
sonal and pre-presidential, as well as presidential, links and ties to the
Irish-American community and to Ireland, and looks at the factors that
influenced their attitudes to and formulation of policy on Ireland.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
E183 2006-049897 0-7432-7528-4
The writing on the wall; why we must embrace China as
a partner or face it as an enemy.
Hutton, Will.
Free Press, ©2006 421 p. $28.00
While the 21st century may turn out to be the Chinese Century in the
same way the 20th was the American Century, Hutton (former editor of
the London Observer and economics editor of The Guardian) argues that
doesn’t portend the authoritarian future that many westerners fear. This
is because the Enlightenment values and the public institutions they
spawned form the core of the competitive advantage that allowed the rise
of the United States and Britain before it. In other words, the Chinese
Century can only happen if China adopts theses values and institutions.
Therefore, the West, rather than fear China, should engage it in order to
foster those value and institutions that will be good both for China and
for the world in general. Further, the United States should put greater
effort into embodying Enlightenment values in those areas in which it
falls short.
E184 2006-019665 978-0-8166-4274-8
American tropics; articulating Filipino America.
Isaac, Allan Punzalan. (Critical American studies series)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 205 p. $20.00 (pa)
Isaac (English, Wesleyan U.) closely examines not only the images of the
exotic in film and literature but also the near-invisibility inherent in those
images of American imperialism. As he works through the legal debates
over what constituted American colonies, Progressive-era popular liter-
ature about the exotic and the Latin, and Hollywood’s depiction of alter-
nately balmy and war-torn isles, he shows how the invisibility of empire
was so pervasive it affected even Filipino-American literature. The result
is superior commentary about the more subtle effects of how America
can be oblivious to itself.
E184 2006-298190 978-0-7453-2516-3
Anti-Arab racism in the USA; where it comes from and
what it means for politics today.
Salaita, Steven.
Pluto Press, ©2006 252 p. $19.95 (pa)
Although it has come into somewhat sharper relief in the wake of the
September 11th attacks and the US invasion and occupation of Iraq, anti-
Arab racism is hardly new to the United States, as Salaita (English, U. of
Wisconsin at Whitewater), a second-generation Arab American describes
in this book. In addition to exploring the place of anti-Arab racism in
American society and its doleful impacts on Arab-American commu-
nities, Salaita discusses its pernicious effects in the realms of US foreign
and domestic policy, addressing the illegal invasion of Iraq and the sub-
sequent Abu Ghraib torture scandal, the failure to address the root
causes of the Israel- Palestine conflict, and the civil liberty destroying
USA PATRIOT Act. Distributed in the US by the U. of Michigan Press.
–71–
E184 2006-023631 0-8204-7493-2
Between two cultures; the case of Cambodian women in
America.
Das, Mitra.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 139 p. $25.95 (pa)
Das (sociology, U. of Massachusetts-Lowell) examines Cambodian women
there in Lowell, where the community is large enough to advocate suc-
cessfully for empowerment programs, but also large enough to tax the
system. Drawing largely from her interviews with women, she discusses
their journey, origins, challenges and opportunities, family changes, and
community institution building. She does not provide an index.
E184 2006-020403 978-0-7425-3772-9
Contemporary ethnic geographies in America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ines M. Miyares and Christopher A. Airriess.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 410 p. $59.00
Nineteen American academics contribute 18 chapters examining the expe-
riences of a range of ethnic groups in the U.S. in both historical and con-
temporary contexts, including Native Americans, African Americans,
Mexican Americans, Latin Americans, and Asian Americans. Coverage
includes an overview of key concepts and processes relevant to ethnic
geography, the role of immigration in defining and controlling who
could enter and who could become “American,” case studies of old and
new groups categorized as “minority populations” which are progressing
into majority status, and implications of this ethnic diversity and con-
temporary immigration in terms of urban landscapes, ethnic economies,
and ethnic festivals.
E184 2006-015038 978-0-8166-4796-5
Cultural erotics in Cuban America.
Ortíz, Ricardo L.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 337 p. $24.00 (pa)
Ortiz (English, Georgetown U.) explores the erotic dynamic behind the
on-going formation and deformation of the experience of The Cuban
outside of Cuba. His quest invokes the conventionality of the oedipal
struggle and the gendered categories it authorizes, and problematizes
convention and category by keeping open the possibility that erotics is
less a function of conventional gender positions and more often of
variable orientations toward desire and pleasure.
E184 2006-025246 978-1-4129-4067-2
Diversity and society; race, ethnicity, and gender, 2d ed.
Healey, Joseph F.
Pine Forge Press, ©2007 362 p. $48.95 (pa)
Derived from the fourth edition of Healey’s (Christopher Newport U.,
Newport News, Virginia) text Race, Ethnicity, Gender, and Class (2006), this
textbook offers an accessible sociological analysis of U.S. minority groups.
The text has been updated throughout for the second edition, and
includes new coverage of current issues— illegal immigration, “new
Americans” such as Arab Americans and Haitian Americans—and
expanded material on “whiteness” and gender. For undergraduate
courses in minority groups, race and gender, and immigration taught in
departments of sociology, social work, and political science.
E184 2006-026195 0-313-33300-9
Encyclopedia of American race riots; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Walter Rucker and James Nathaniel Upton.
(Greenwood milestones in African American history)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 930 p. $199.95
In addition to detailing examples of collective violence between white and
black Americans since the Civil War, including riots, lynchings, vigi-
lantism, assassinations, racist police violence, etc., the 265 entries pre-
sented by the editors (both of Ohio State U.) in this two- volume
encyclopedia cover a broad range of related subjects and themes. Among
these, broadly speaking, are anti-lynching and civil rights organizations
and activists, government organizations and officials, ideologies and
policies, legislation and court cases, newspapers and reporting, racist
organizations and leaders, literature and art, social issues, and war and
the military. The entries, which range in length from 500 to 1000 words
each, are cross-referenced and include bibliographical guides to further
reading. Also included in the encyclopedia are a chronology; a selection
of 23 primary documents; a short essay on the recent historiography of
race riots; a subject index; and a bibliography of book, articles, and web
sites.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E184 2006-042660 1-55885-479-7
Enriqueta Vasquez and the Chicano movement; writings
from El grito del norte .
Longeaux y Vasquez, Enriqueta. Ed. by Lorena Oropeza and Dionne
Espinoza. (Hispanic civil rights series)
Arte Público Press, ©2006 231 p. $16.95 (pa)
Between 1968 and 1972, the New Mexico newspaper El Grito del Norte
published columns by Chicana activist Enriqueta Vasquez, under the
heading ¡Despierten Hermanos! (Awaken Brothers and Sisters!), in which
she wrote about racism, sexism, imperialism, discrimination, poverty,
and other issues of concern to the Chicano movement of the era. This
anthology collects all 44 of those columns, together with a reflection on
the Grito columns by Vasquez herself, an introductory essay describing
Vasquez’s life and times, and a concluding essay that considers the
impact of her work in El Grito del Norte
E184 2006-9731 978-0-7425-5229-6
From sanctuary to boardroom; a Jewish approach to
leadership.
Lewis, Hal M.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 160 p. $16.95 (pa)
Experienced organizational executive Lewis describes an approach to
leadership in contemporary American Jewish communities that is rooted
in ancient Jewish religious traditions. The text is aimed at all sorts of
community leaders, including professionals, rabbis, volunteers, and
laypeople. Some of the themes addressed include the sources of authority,
the importance of ethics, and the role of wealth in Jewish communal
leadership. Lewis teaches at the Spertus Institute of Jewish Studies in
Chicago.
E184 2006-003033 978-0-472-11442-9
Mark one or more; civil rights in multiracial America.
Williams, Kim M. (The politics of race and ethnicity)
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 196 p. $27.95
Williams (public policy, Harvard U.) discusses the birth, growth, activ-
ities, victories, and potential of the social movement advocating latitude
in racial self-identification in the US. Countering arguments that the
movement would undermine civil rights enforcement, she says it has
potential to drive a wedge through traditional racism and encourage
people to think differently and more humanely across racial boundaries.
E184 2006-024379 0-932863-51-5
The power of Israel in the United States.
Petras, James F.
Clarity Press, Inc., ©2006 191 p. $16.95 (pa)
Following in the wake of the controversial paper by Mearsheimer and
Walt, The Israel Lobby and U.S. Foreign Policy, this work by Petras
(emeritus, sociology, State U. of New York at Binghamton) takes up the
same topic with less restraint and a greater willingness to criticize Israeli
crimes, US enabling of them, and the lobby that he views as substantially
responsible for that enabling. Among the topics he explores the role of
pro-Israel officials and journalists in the United States in taking the
country into the disastrous war with Iraq, the role of the US in backing
Israeli ethnocide in the Palestinian Occupied Territories and in attacking
Lebanon, the arena of psychological warfare in which Israeli and Israel
lobby “terror experts” who “project the violence of the executioners onto
the victims,” and an alternative explanation of the phenomenon of
suicide bombers. Of particular interest to leftist critics of US policy
towards Israel/Palestine will be the chapter in which Petras seeks to
refute Noam Chomsky’s dismissal of the power of the lobby.
E184 2006925773 0-7618-3514-8
Societal suicide.
Camacho, Julián Segura.
Hamilton Books, ©2006 91 p. $21.00 (pa)
Camacho (Chicano studies, California State U.) presents a collection of
personal stories of Mexican life in Los Angeles. The accounts explore the
issues that can make Mexicans living in the U.S. suicidal, both from a
societal and a familial perspective, as they feel excluded from quality
neighborhoods, education, jobs and other factors normally associated
with a good life. No subject index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E184 2006-023023 0-8204-8693-0
Ten dollars in my pocket; the American education of a
Holocaust survivor; a memoir in documents.
Trahan, Elizabeth Welt.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 286 p. $34.95 (pa)
Born in Berlin in 1924, Trahan lived most of her life in Czechoslovakia
and Vienna until she went to the US at age 23, where she pursued a long
and illustrious academic career. Her 1998 memoir chronicled her life in
Vienna. Here, in a mixture of diary entries, letters, publications, and
documents interspersed with her memories and reflections, she tells of
her life in America from 1947 to 1956.
E184 2005-036574 0-87417-632-8
A travel guide to Basque America; families, feasts, and
festivals, 2d ed.
Zubiri, Nancy. (The Basque series)
U. of Nevada Press, ©2006 578 p. $24.95 (pa)
This travel guide uniquely features Basque-American communities, busi-
nesses, and places in the US. Following a discussion of Basque-American
history, immigration, culture, and traditions, the guidebook describes
communities and businesses in California, Nevada, Idaho, Oregon, and
Washington, other Western states, and select areas of the East and South.
Only businesses and institutions that impart Basque culture are listed.
Directions to locations are given, in addition to contact information, some
photos, and recipes. Listings include restaurants, clubs, boardinghouses,
churches, and festivals, which this edition updates, as well as those for
websites. Zuburi is a journalist, freelance writer, and teacher whose her-
itage is part Basque.
E184 2006-926036 978-0-7618-3528-8
Unwanted and not included; the saga of Mexican people
in the United States.
Camacho, Julián Segura.
Hamilton Books, ©2006 105 p. $23.95 (pa)
Writing from firsthand experience as a Mexican American, Camacho
(Chicano studies, California State U., Long Beach) presents a collection of
argumentative essays on the condition of Mexican Americans in the U.S.,
examining who Mexican Americans are; how they differ in relation to
Whites, Blacks, Asians, and other immigrants from Latin America; and
the struggles of the younger generation to overcome traditional percep-
tions of Chicano cultural life. The text includes one essay in Spanish
addressing Mexicans south of the border who do not comprehend the
social position and the climate for Mexicans in the U.S. No subject index.
Hamilton Books is an imprint of Rowman & Littlefield.
E185 2006-927253 978-0-7618-3540-0
African American politics in rural America; theory,
practice, and case studies from Florence County, South
Carolina.
Udogu, E. Ike.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 193 p. $59.95
What can African American grassroots politics in South Carolina tell us
about the democratic process? Working from eight years of unique
research and observation, Udogu (political science, Appalachian State U.)
finds significant contradictions between theoretical idealism and prac-
tical realism amongst political actors when those actors are working
from the margins of society, whether that society is the rural South or
anywhere else in the world. He begins with a theoretical analysis of
African American politics, considering the history of involvement and
results, then works through political behavior, attitudes and leadership,
and the creation and issue of Black politics in the region of his case
study. In a series of three fascinating and in-depth narratives he analyzes
the experiences, including the triumphs and frustrations, of two coun-
cilmen and a mayor from the region, and closes with commentary on
the future of African-American involvement at the local level in rural
ethnic politics.
E185 2006-930460 978-0-7618-3581-3
B.D. Amis, African American radical; a short anthology of
writings and speeches.
Amis, B.D. Ed. by Walter T. Howard.
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 133 p. $24.00 (pa)
Calling African-American Communist Party (USA) activist B.D. Amis “a
major figure in the black freed struggle during the two decades between
the world wars,” Howard (history, Bloomsburg U.) presents a selection of
his key writings and speeches. The selection includes his analysis of
lynchings and southern racism published as a pamphlet by the CPUSA;
articles from the Daily Worker discussing black unions, Marcus Garvey,
white racism inside the communist movement, and similar matters; his
speech before the 1936 national CPUSA convention in Chicago; and
writings related to his work in the Congress of Industrial Organizations.
–72–
E185 2006-018122 978-0-275-98504-2
The black digital elite; African American leaders of the
information revolution.
Barber, John T.
Praeger, ©2006 196 p. $39.95
Barber (ballistic Missile Defense U., and communications, George Mason
U.) provides profiles of 26 African Americans who are leaders in the
information industry, including computer scientists, policymakers, edu-
cators, entrepreneurs, mathematicians, analysts, developers, activists, and
businesspeople. He describes the contributions and lives of innovators
such as Roy L. Clay, Sr., Clarence (Skip) Ellis, Ronald H. Brown,
Congressman Bobby L. Rush, Reverend Jesse Jackson, Dhyana Ziegler,
Robert L. Johnson, and Kenn Turner.
E185 2006-015765 978-1-58826-455-8
The Black middle class; social mobility—and vulnerability.
Bowser, Benjamin P.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 191 p. $49.95
Bowser (sociology, California State U., East Bay) argues convincingly that
the seemingly comparable black and white middle classes, though inex-
tricably linked, exist on different economic planes. Probing the inner
workings of class dynamics, Bowser demonstrates that belief in compa-
rability is based in hopes, sentiment and ideology, rather than in reality.
His focus on structural barriers that underlie differences in white and
black achievement underscore the fact that race and class are inseparable
in the US.
E185 2006-003040 978-0-252-07394-6
Black power in the belly of the beast.
Title main entry. Ed. by Judson L. Jeffries.
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 320 p. $25.00 (pa)
Instructors of upper-level undergraduate courses on African American
politics can find an abundance of scholarly material on the Civil Rights
movement, but little on the Black Power movement. Here American social
scientists fill that gap with essays mostly on particular organizations, but
also on the movement as a whole. Among their topics are the Republic
of New Africa in Mississippi, the League of Revolutionary Black Workers,
and the Black Liberation Army and the radical legacy of the Black
Panther Party.
E185 2005-028940 978-0-8203-2814-0
The Civil Rights movement in American memory.
Title main entry. Ed. by Renee C. Romano and Leigh Raiford.
Univ. of Georgia Press, ©2006 382 p. $22.95 (pa)
Romano (history and African American studies, Wesleyan U.) and
Raiford (African American studies, U. of California at Berkeley) present
an anthology exploring the nature and significance of the historical
memory of the American civil rights movement of the 1950s and 60s.
Highlighting how contestations over the construction and representation
of historical memory can reveal contrasting social and political agendas
for the present and future and different attitudes towards America’s past,
the 12 papers address the explore such topics a the reputational politics
of commemorating Martin Luther King Jr. in Georgia street names,
media culture public memory of the civil rights movement, photographic
memory of black power in Vibe magazine, remembering race and gender
in the Mississippi movement, deaf activism at Gaullaudet University and
historical memory of the civil rights movement, and the adoption of civil
rights movement rhetoric by the Christian right.
E185 2006-015180 978-0-7425-4409-3
The human tradition in the civil rights movement.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan M. Glisson. (The human tradition in
America)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 350 p. $24.95 (pa)
In this collection of 16 essays, contributors steer away from the “great
man” theories and treatments to focus on grassroots actions by those
closest to the issues—ordinary and yet extraordinary men and women
who worked locally but had national impact. Working through 1954 to
1965, biographies include those of Abraham Galloway, Homer Plessy,
and James Vardaman as hope of civil rights is born, Ida Wells in pursuit
of higher law, A. Philip Randolph seeking reconciliation of labor and the
new politics, Lucy Randolph Mason and the frontline women, Amzie
Moore in Mississippi, James Lawson in Nashville and Charles Sherrod in
Albany, along with other unsung heroes in the African-American com-
munity and those who extended the fight into other ethnic and gender
groups.
–73–
E185 2006-021193 0-7876-6493-6
Notable Black American men; book 2.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jessie Carney Smith.
Thomson Gale, ©2007 827 p. $179.00
This collection of about 300 biographies joins the 500 of the first volume
in the series, continuing the project to gain recognition for the accom-
plishments of men like Archie Alphonso Alexander, whose large-scale
engineering projects included airfields, Todd Duncan, whose opera
career included leading roles and the mentoring and teaching of dozens
of singers, and Lewis Sheridan Leary, who never lived to see his dream
of abolition. Entries also include period photographs and illustrations,
chronologies and references including print and online resources and,
when available, collections of primary documents. The geographic, occu-
pation and subject indices are particularly well done.
E185 2006-026040 978-1-55728-827-1
Up against the wall; violence in the making and
unmaking of the Black Panther Party.
Austin, Curtis J.
U. of Arkansas Pr., ©2006 456 p. $34.95
At first glance, one might expect a book that proposes to examine the
history of the Black Panther Party “through the lens of violence” to be
merely a resuscitation of the stereotypical demonizations that were
common from the organization’s enemies in the media and the gov-
ernment during their existence. Instead, Austin (history, U. of Southern
Mississippi) shows how the BPP’s stand on self-defense, a major factor in
their explosive growth and influence, was a product of violence against
black communities by white supremacists and by the state. He also dis-
cusses how state forces responded to the Party’s challenge to the white
monopoly on violence with a deadly viciousness not meted out to white
radicals and internal tensions between those Panthers who advocated
militant confrontation and those that preferred the type of community
organizing exemplified by the Panthers’ free breakfast program. While
clearly sympathetic to the BPP’s sincere goal of black liberation, Austin
doesn’t shy away from criticizing the Party when warranted, arguing
that Party leadership, including Huey P. Newton, sometimes used vio-
lence illegitimately and that the Party’s early emphasis on self-defense
“left it open to mischaracterization, infiltration, and devastation by local,
state, and federal police forces.”
E185 2006-016675 978-0-19-530962-1
The works of William Sanders Scarborough; Black
classicist and race leader.
Scarborough, W.S.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 508 p. $70.00
Born into slavery in 1852, William Sanders Scarborough went on to
become the first professional classicist of African American descent and
the president of Wilberforce U. in Ohio. This first collection of his pub-
lished works spans a half century from the end of Reconstruction
through WWI and the rise of Jim Crow and includes speeches, book
reviews, travel narratives, opinion pieces, philological papers, and more.
Editor Michele Valerie Ronnick (classics, Greek, and Latin, Wayne State
U.) provides background information on Scarborough’s life and schol-
arship in the introduction.
E187 2006-280226 978-1-4051-4985-3
A companion to colonial America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Vickers. (Blackwell companions to
American history)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 562 p. $41.95 (pa)
The emphases of Vickers (history, U. of California at San Diego) in
putting together this thematic and synthetic collection intended to reflect
the current historiography on Colonial America appears, judging by his
introductory discussion, to have been on the issue of cultural difference
and the importance of not constructing a monolithic narrative of colonial
history. In addition to chapters focusing on the colonial era experiences
of particular groups such as women, African Americans, and Native
Americans, other chapters focus on issues that have reflect relatively
recent historical concerns, including ecology, migration and settlement,
children and parents, consumption, culture, regionalism, and border-
lands. Still others focus on more traditional historical issues, including
causes of the American Revolution, empire, economy, class, colonial pol-
itics, religion, and religion. Also included are comparative chapters dis-
cussing New Spain, New France, the Caribbean, and Atlantic Canada.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E188 2006-280411 0-06-075090-1
The birth of America; from before Columbus to the
Revolution.
Polk, William R.
HarperCollins, ©2006 392 p. $25.95
Having previously written mainly about modern Asia and Africa, Polk
here draws on information from and about as many social and ethnic
groups as is available to present a creation story of the US different than
any using a single perspective. He begins with Native Americans and the
coming of Europe and Africa, then looks at the establishment of British
America, the breakdown of the imperial system, and the slide toward
independence.
E188 2006-020294 1-85109-827-5
Colonial America from settlement to the Revolution.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rodney P. Carlisle and J. Geoffrey Golson.
(Turning points in history)
ABC-CLIO, ©2007 266 p. $85.00
Welcome to America, where we speak French, except in our state-run
churches where we speak German, swear allegiance to the King of Spain,
and have as our Prime Minister a woman who is a member of the
Cherokee nation. In these 13 state-by-state lessons, the actual history of
what happened in the period from European settlement to 43 years
before the revolution is contrasted with what could have happened
according to recent studies by leading historians if a certain battle was
lost rather than won, a certain historical figure died before making any
ripples, or certain people were somehow able to get along. Here, as an
alternative, Jamestown survives, the Pilgrims do not, the Dutch never
leave New York, Maryland becomes a permanent religious haven for
Catholics and the rice crops fail in South Carolina, making slavery eco-
nomically unfeasible. The result is well-researched, well-presented,
poignant and thought-provoking.
E199 2005-058450 978-0-06-076184-4
The French and Indian War; deciding the fate of North
America.
Borneman, Walter R.
HarperCollins, ©2006 360 p. $27.95
They fought in wilderness thousands of miles from the source of their
conflict or in their own sacred places. They were not unaware of their
place in history, and they also sensed this was in actuality the first real
world war. Borneman makes it clear how France and England regarded
themselves, each other, and the battlefields of Ohio, Quebec and the
Caribbean upon which they sought to build empire at the expense of
everyone else, describes the fascinating people such as the young George
Washington who were English but born on US soil, and re-reads the roles
of William Pitt, James Wolfe, Robert Rogers and Edward Braddock, a host
of French and Spanish, and the Native Americans whose valor was
answered by decimation. The result is both accessible and detailed and
serves well to explain the background of the building of empire and the
revolutions in America and France.
E208 2006-031100 978-1-85109-839-2
American Revolutionary War; a student encyclopedia; 5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gregory Fremont-Barnes and Richard Alan
Ryerson.
ABC-CLIO, ©2007 2566 p. $485.00
This substantial reference contains over 900 entries on the battles, states,
countries, armies, mercenaries, and individuals involved in the war. A
large percentage of the entries are biographies. All entries are signed and
conclude with a list of references, including websites. The editors con-
tribute two introductory essays to the work, on the origins of the war and
its military operations. Volume 5 is devoted to primary documents, each
of them preceded by an introduction. Vol.5 also contains appendices that
include helpful guides on how to read primary sources, maps, and charts
and graphs, as well as a glossary, chronology, and bibliography. The
volumes are well illustrated with b&w images, and each volume (except
v.5) commences with a group of maps.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E208 2006-029711 978-1-85109-408-0
The encyclopedia of the American Revolutionary War; a
political, social, and military history; 5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gregory Fremont-Barnes and Richard Alan
Ryerson.
ABC-CLIO, ©2006 1777 p. $485.00
This impressive 5-volume reference, appropriate for high school and
undergraduate students and the public library, contains over 900 entries
on the people, battles, issues, and events of the war. Many of the entries
are biographical, describing the subject’s life and the details of their
involvement in the conflict. Two general essays are included at the outset,
on the origins of the American Revolution and the military operations
during the war. Maps are included at the beginning of vols.1-4 (maps of
specific actions are also incorporated into the text), and a glossary,
chronology, and bibliography are included in vol.4. All of vol.5 is devoted
to primary documents, including acts, resolutions, official reports, first-
hand and sometimes contrasting accounts of significant events, letters,
treaties, and political proclamations. The volumes are well illustrated
with b&w images. Fremont-Barnes is an independent historian; Ryerson
is academic director of the David Library of the American Revolution,
Washington Crossing, Penn. The contributors are academics and inde-
pendent scholars in the U.S., Canada, and the U.K.
E209 2006-026440 0-275-99306-X
In pursuit of liberty; coming of age in the American
Revolution.
Werner, Emmy E.
Praeger, ©2006 190 p. $49.95
As in Reluctant Witnesses: Children’s Voices from the Civil War and
Through the Eyes of Innocents: Children Witness World War II, Werner
offers an unusual perspective on wartime: that of youth. She chronicles
how an 11-year-old was among the American Revolution’s first causal-
ities, young boys served on ships, and girls watched women take on
more independent roles. Illustrations include a Congressional Record dis-
position regarding the rape of teenage girls by British soldiers, a black
drummer boy, and future president John Quincy Adams at age 15.
E241 2006-020459 1-59629-144-3
The Battle of Camden; a documentary history.
Piecuch, Jim.
History Press, ©2006 159 p. $24.99 (pa)
When the thousands of troops faced each other eight miles north of
Camden, South Carolina in August 1780, more than half of those on the
side of the British were technically Americans. The battle had been
brewing for almost five years, and had included moments of diplomacy,
periodic taking and retaking of ground, strategy that sometimes worked,
and officers who ranged from seasoned professionals to rank amateurs.
Would the rebel troops fighting under the flags of various states under
the leadership of Major General Horatio Gates prevail, or would the field
fall to Lieutenant General Charles, Earl Cornwallis? In this collection of
accounts from the American and British commanders and soldiers, along
with the contemporary observations and reports by noncombatants,
Piecuch follows the events leading to battle, the battle itself, and the
aftermath, including the letter by the people of Charleston congratulating
the victor, Cornwallis.
E241 2005-936676 0-945726-80-5
General Israel Putnam, “Old Put.”; a biography. (reprint,
1865)
Hill, George Canning.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2005 270 p. $29.95 (pa)
Israel Putnam (1718-1790) was an American Revolutionary War general
who fought at the Battle of Bunker Hill. Written in 1865, this work was
one a series of biographies designed “more particularly for the young.”
The series aimed to “furnish from the pages of the world’s history a few
examples of true manhood, lofty purpose, and persevering effort, such as
may be safely held up either for the admiration or emulation of the
youth of the present day.” The biography, which covers Putnam’s life
from his early days to his death, is presented in facsimile form with no
ancillary materials.
–74–
E302 2006-029668 978-0-87586-488-4
Letters from France; the private diplomatic
correspondence of Benjamin Franklin, 1776-1785.
Franklin, Benjamin. Ed. by Brett F. Woods.
Algora Publishing, ©2006 223 p. $23.95 (pa)
After decades of success in science and one of the more technologically
sophisticated businesses of the day, printing, Franklin, then in his 70s,
donned a fur hat and a simple costume and went to France to conquer
a nation infatuated with Rousseau. He became a media star, noted (and
perhaps influenced) the relentless merchandizing of his image and
writings, and used his reputation as a man of the soil to create a quiet
and effective web of revolutionaries’ diplomacy as he circulated amongst
the salons. Woods (literature, Harvard U.) has carefully mined Franklin’s
enormous correspondence from his eight years in France, and brings to
the forefront the care with which his subject manipulated finances,
opinion, spies, and his own reputation, eventually crafting the Treaty of
Paris of 1783. The result is that we see just as much of Franklin as he
allowed his friends and his enemies.
E302 2006-043478 978-0-87220-696-0
Selected writings of James Madison.
Madison, James. Ed. by Ralph Ketcham. (The American heritage series)
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2006 396 p. $55.00
The fourth President of the U.S., James Madison “was perhaps the finest
political intelligence among the mentally gifted group of Founders.” He
also left behind an extensive body of writing. Arranged chronologically,
this volume presents more than 80 excerpts from Madison’s essays, cor-
respondence, speeches, and other works. Each selection is preceded by
an explanatory note by the editor. Ketcham (Syracuse U.) also supplies
background information on Madison’s career and the times in which he
lived in the introduction. The text of the U.S. Constitution is provided in
the appendix.
E312 2005936683 0-945726-78-3
The diaries of George Washington, 1748-1799; 4v. (reprint,
1925)
Title main entry. Ed. by John C. Fitzpatrick.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2006 1821 p. $79.50 (pa)
This reprint from 1925 consists of four volumes of the diaries of George
Washington originally published by the Mount Vernon Ladies’
Association of the Union, who saw the need to compile all of them
(except those that are missing) in a complete edition. The diaries are
from 1748 to 1799 and include explanatory footnotes, background, and
descriptions of the physical state of the journal. They retain Washington’s
spelling and capitalization and make some punctuation corrections, but
exclude his weather records. Also provided is a complete list of his
diaries by date and their location. A comprehensive, 130-page index is
included in the last volume only.
E312 87-403730 978-0-8139-2579-0
The papers of George Washington; revolutionary war
series; v.16, July-September, 1778.
Washington, George. Ed. by David R. Hoth et al. (Series: title)
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 683 p. $85.00
He urges Major General John Sullivan to make full use of the 16 French
ships waiting off Sandy Hook. He receives reports on troop placements
and ammunition, and pleads for more clothes for his troops. However,
this collection from the earlier days of the Revolution shows Washington
was not only an able administrator and tactician but also a man who
found quarters for the sick in camp away from the privations of the war,
begged vendors to ship warm clothing to his troops, invited his officers
to dine with him when they were not otherwise engaged, and inquired
gently about a gift sent by the French queen to his wife, which he was
told was stolen by the enemy and raffled off. The result is a better under-
standing of the heart of a human being who was the chief traitor in a
war of sedition.
E332 2006-012445 978-0-8139-2619-3
Thomas Jefferson; reputation and legacy.
Cogliano, Francis D. (Jeffersonian America)
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 276 p. $45.00
Cogliano (history, U. of Edinburgh) describes four stages of the legacy
and reputation of US founding father Jefferson (1743-1826), and he traces
it not chronologically but through changing ideas about such aspects as
the US revolution, his papers, Monticello, Sally Hemings, slavery, and
America and the world. The book is co-published by Edinburgh
University Press, and is available for sale in the U.S. and Canada by the
University of Virginia Press.
–75–
E338 2006-280272 978-1-4051-4982-2
A companion to 19th-century America.
Title main entry. Ed. by William L. Barney. (Blackwell companions to
American history; 2)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 414 p. $39.95 (pa)
Designed to be accessible to a general audience by its editor, Barney
(American history, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill), and contributors,
this book provides a broad overview of the recent scholarship and
scholarly debates concerning 19th century American history. The 24 the-
matic chapters, each of which synthesizes and summarizes the recent lit-
erature on its particular topic, are presented in sections covering politics
and public life; foreign relations; the economy and class formations; race,
gender, and ethnicity; regional perspectives, and cultures and ideas.
E353 2006-016124 1-59114-792-1
Oliver Hazard Perry; honor, courage, and patriotism in
the early U.S. Navy.
Skaggs, David Curtis. (Library of naval biography)
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 302 p. $34.95
Perry is best known for his post-Battle of Lake Erie proclamation: “We
have met the enemy and they are ours.” Drawing on Perry’s correspon-
dence with the Department of the Navy in the Oliver Hazard Perry
archives at Bowling Green State University, Ohio, Skaggs (emeritus,
history, Bowling Green) offers the first scholarly biography in many
years of this War of 1812 naval hero. He also reassesses longstanding
debates over battle reports by his second in command, which threatened
Perry’s reputation. The book includes a list of American and British
squadron armaments for that battle, maps, and period illustrations.
E354 2006-040340 978-0-7432-2618-9
Union 1812; the Americans who fought the Second War of
Independence.
Langguth, A.J.
Simon & Schuster, ©2006 482 p. $30.00
Langguth (journalism, U. of Southern California), author of Patriots: The
Men Who Started the American Revolution, provides a narrative of the War
of 1812, tracing what led up to it, beginning with the resignation of
George Washington from the Continental Army in 1783, to the peace
treaty in 1815 and aftereffects up to 1861. He discusses roles played by
John Adams, Thomas Jefferson, James Madison, Andrew Jackson,
Tecumseh, and others, and relates the details of what happened during
the war.
E356 2005-931237 0-945726-70-8
Jackson and New Orleans; an authentic narrative of the
memorable achievements of the American Army under
Andrew Jackson before New Orleans in the winter of
1814, ‘15.
Walker, Alexander.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2005 411 p. $29.95 (pa)
It was in essence a humiliating victory, as the Battle of New Orleans was
fought after the War of 1812 ended, but Jackson’s strategy, perseverance
and therefore his appeal to the common voter became famous. Originally
published in 1856, Walker’s nearly minute-by-minute account bristles
with skirmishes, wayward and obedient cannon, frantic planning ses-
sions and desperate searches for materiel, brave soldiers (mainly
American), foolish soldiers (mainly British), adventurers with unlikely
skills such as Packenham and Lafitte, inconvenient flora, really incon-
venient seawater, and, it appears, nearly everybody in the country who
could get there with a gun. The result is no doubt biased, but Walker is
very thorough in his descriptions of offensive and defensive actions,
tactics, and the decision-making process, as technologically simple as it
was.
E364 2006-006463 978-0-252-03179-3
Don’t give up the ship; myths of the War of 1812.
Hickey, Donald R.
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 460 p. $34.95
Hickey (history, Wayne State College, Wayne, Nebraska), who has pub-
lished other works on the War of 1812, takes on the task of separating
fact from fiction by exposing the many myths and biased assumptions
about the war. Following a prologue summarizing the history of the war
and the events that led to it, Hickey proceeds in thematic chapters to
address the myths point-by-point, citing original and secondary sources
to support his conclusions. The causes of the war, its battles and cam-
paigns, the maritime war, the different types of people involved, military
concerns, and the war’s conclusion are the main themes. The book will
be of particular interest to the specialist and general reader of military
history.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E381 2006-000647 978-0-8108-5453-6
Historical dictionary of the Jacksonian era and Manifest
Destiny.
Corps, Terry. (Historical dictionaries of U.S. historical eras; no.6)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 435 p. $85.00
A British historian of the US and specialist in the Jacksonian era, Corps
(U. of Sheffield, U. of Leicester) describes the period, 1829-49, as a
moment of transition from an independent and geographically limited
country into a nascent superpower. The dictionary contains entries on
people, places, parties and other organizations, events, movements, laws,
works of literature, and other topics with political, social, economic, or
artistic significance. There is no index, but the cross-references are
extensive.
E382 2006-007742 978-1-57233-548-6
Andrew Jackson and the politics of martial law;
nationalism, civil liberties, and partisanship.
Warshauer, Matthew.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 314 p. $39.95
During the War of 1812, General Andrew Jackson declared martial law
in New Orleans and suspended the writ of habeas corpus, even going so
far as to arrest a federal judge for issuing such a writ. The judge would
later fine Jackson $1000 dollars for contempt of court in response and
Jackson, years later in the 1840s, would begin a campaign for a refund
of the fine, a campaign that was taken up by other Democratic politi-
cians who sponsored bills to compel a refund. Warshauer (history,
Central Connecticut State U.) describes these events, examining them in
the context of ongoing debates over civil rights and the evolution of par-
tisan politics in the United States.
E443 2006-013080 978-1-57003-646-0
Crafting the overseer’s image.
Wiethoff, William E. (Studies in rhetoric/communication)
U. of South Carolina Pr., ©2006 234 p. $39.95
An attorney in Indiana, Wiethoff has also written The Insolent Slave for
the series. Here he examines in the detail the personal, professional, and
public image of the plantation’s slave overseer as constructed by friends
and enemies, neighbors and strangers. He draws heavily from primary
sources.
E444 2006-019885 978-0-89587-323-1
Far more terrible for women; personal accounts of
women in slavery.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick Minges. (Real voices, real history series)
John F. Blair Publisher, ©2006 219 p. $11.95 (pa)
In the 1930s, the Federal Writers’ Project conducted interviews with
approximately 1500 former woman slaves in some 20 states, providing a
window of oral history into the lives of individuals whose voices were,
and are, rarely heard. This volume collects 27 of these narratives, organ-
izing them according to five themes: “Jezebel and Mammy,” “Friends
and Families,” “Witches/Doctors,” “Mother/Child,” and “Herstory.”
E446 2006-018581 978-0-8108-5765-0
To be silent...would be criminal; the antislavery influence
and writings of Anthony Benezet.
Brendlinger, Irv A. (Pietist and Wesleyan studies; no.20)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 229 p. $35.00 (pa)
In tracing the life of Anthony Benezet, an 18th-century opponent to
slavery and the African slave trade, Brendlinger (church history and the-
ology, George Fox U.) follows the evolution of antislavery activity in
America. In addition to Benezet’s antislavery tracts, Brendlinger includes
Benezet’s correspondence with his contemporaries, which provides
insights into his relationships and his desire to build a viable network to
oppose slavery.
E449 2006-020681 978-0-19-530961-4
The works of James McCune Smith; Black intellectual and
abolitionist.
Smith, James McCune. Ed. by John Stauffer. (The collected black
writings series)
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 340 p. $80.00
Stauffer (English and African and African American studies, Harvard U.)
has assembled and annotated a selection of short works by Smith (1813-
65) from 1824 to 1864. They come from his early essays, speeches, and
journal; two periods of his work as a New York correspondent; his Heads
of the Colored People column in Frederick Douglass’ newspaper; articles
in Anglo-African Magazine; and letters to Gerrit Smith.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E457 2006-045259 978-1-4000-4039-1
Lincoln’s sword; the presidency and the power of words.
Wilson, Douglas L.
Alfred A. Knopf, ©2006 343 p. $26.95
Examining Abraham Lincoln’s presidential writing, Wilson (codirector,
Lincoln Studies Center, Knox College) comes to the conclusion that it was
his most powerful political weapon. He takes the reader on a selective
tour of key written texts from Lincoln’s tenure, paying attention to such
matters as style, rhetorical strategy, and the like, but only in so much as
it serves his larger goal of exploring the circumstances behind the cre-
ation of the document and the role it played in Lincoln’s presidency.
Among the documents de discusses are the July 4th address of 1861, the
Emancipation Proclamation, and the Gettysburg Address.
E457 2006-046271 978-0-06-112978-0
Mr. Lincoln’s t-mails; the untold story of how Abraham
Lincoln used the telegraph to win the Civil War.
Wheeler, Tom.
HarperCollins, ©2006 227 p. $24.95
General McClellan sent a message to the president saying the fatigue of
his men’s horses kept them from pursuing the rebels after the battle of
Antietam. President Lincoln fired a message back, asking what the
horses had been doing that so fatigued them. Union messages were sent
in a cipher so successful not even publishing them in Southern news-
papers for all to tackle worked. Enthusiast Wheeler explains how Lincoln,
the only president to hold a patent, made the new technology of the tele-
graph his own, as he became the first grand commander to have real-
time access to the thoughts and actions of his generals and support
personnel. Wheeler describes the systems Lincoln used, his methods of
communication that straddled the wide gap between the technology and
traditional wartime communication, and the resulting creation of a new
mode of leadership. We resist the temptation to make jokes about
antennas in that stovepipe hat.
E464 2006-019672 0-7922-6206-9
Eyewitness to the Civil War; the complete history from
secession to Reconstruction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Neil Kagan.
Natl. Geographic Society, ©2006 416 p. $40.00
Editor Kagan is former publisher and managing editor of Time-Life
Books. Here, he compiles primary sources from the Civil War, beginning
with a portrait of slavery and the time of secession, and concluding with
Lincoln’s assassination and reunion and reconstruction. Sources com-
prise 440 images—photographs, portraits, battlefield sketches, and his-
toric relics; 30 written accounts; and quotes from people great and
ordinary who lived through the war. Accompanying text authored by his-
torians provides detail and context to the sources. Authors of sources
include a member of John Brown’s militia, Robert E. Lee and a number
of other military figures, female civilian eyewitnesses, a son of a freed
slave, and many more. Timelines of certain events are included in
sidebars. In addition to the historical maps, 14 National Geographic maps
illustrate the movement of troops and the terrain of key battle sites. The
appendix contains casualty statistics by battle, a timeline of selected mile-
stones, and a glossary. The index includes a list of maps. Oversize:
9.5X11″.
E468 2006-020068 0-8160-3867-8
Civil War America, 1850 to 1875.
Selcer, Richard F. (Almanacs of American life)
Facts On File, Inc., ©2006 540 p. $105.00
For those grades nine and up, this volume assembles information on
American life during the Civil War era, from 1850 to 1875. Selcer (Dallas
Community College and Tarrant County Junior College) describes and
compiles tables of data on developments in climate, natural history, and
geography; disasters; Native American life; the economy; transportation;
population; religion; the war itself; and states, territories, and cities.
Other topics are education; arts; architecture and design; science and
technology; medicine and psychiatry; popular culture; and crime. A
section on “representative Americans” consists of biographies of people
such as Sojourner Truth, Frederick Douglass, Henry Ward Beecher, Red
Cloud, and Samuel F.B. Morse. Some facsimiles and excerpts from
primary source documents are included; examples are The Homestead
Act, Walt Whitman’s Leaves of Grass, and amendments to the
Constitution.
–76–
E474 2006-017726 978-1-58980-366-4
Antietam; the lost order.
Jermann, Donald R.
Pelican Publishing Co., ©2006 320 p. $24.95
On September 13, 1862, the Confederacy lost and Union forces recovered
what turned out to be a copy of the Confederate battle plan Special Order
191. This accessible narrative describes the impact of the discovery of this
lost order on the pivotal Battle of Antietam. Retired U.S. naval officer
Jermann provides detailed coverage of troop movements from September
9-17 and explains the vital roles played by such lesser-known persons as
Col. Dixon Miles and Brig. Gen. Julius White. He also offers an analysis
of what went wrong for both sides of the famous battle.
E475 2006-033337 978-0-7864-2824-3
Torn families; death and kinship at the Battle of
Gettysburg.
Dreese, Michael A.
McFarland & Co., ©2007 224 p. $45.00
Dreese has carefully chosen from the diaries, letters and reports of those
who fought at Gettysburg and includes the stories of fathers and sons,
mothers and sons, spouses and sweethearts, Union and Confederate
brothers, sibling reunions, homecomings and even the tales of twins
here. Some are exhilarating, some are heartbreaking, but all remind us
that 7,000 died outright and many more dragged their permanently
broken bodies home to their families.
E476 2006-011466 978-1-57233-544-8
Through the howling wilderness; the 1864 Red River
Campaign and Union failure in the West.
Joiner, Gary D.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 305 p. $39.95
Joiner (history, Louisiana State U.-Shreveport) describes a campaign that
send large Union army and navy forces into the interior of Louisiana to
seize the Confederate capital of the state, defeat the army guarding the
region, and open access to Texas and the west. He explores such ques-
tions as what on earth the president was thinking, how the commanders
in the field dealt with the situation, and the political and military impli-
cations of the campaign and its disastrous failure. His account bears little
resemblance to Gore Vidal’s.
E540 2005-020762 978-0-8203-2757-0
Invisible Southerners; ethnicity in the Civil War.
Bailey, Anne J. (Jack N. and Addie D. Averitt lecture series; no.14)
Univ. of Georgia Press, ©2006 95 p. $24.95
Bailey (history, Georgia College and State U.) finds evidence to support
the idea that how one chose a side in the Civil War was far more complex
than mere geography. She shows how ethnic and racial issues were
accompanied by sometimes conflicting personal and social loyalties, local
and regional relationships in family and business, and long-standing and
often desperate rivalries. She focuses on the lessons of the past that
haunted German immigrants, the divided loyalties of Native American
nations, and the plight of many southern African Americans in the
Northern Army. The result is a better understanding about how in civil
war, nothing is simple.
E565 2005-020451 1-57233-461-4
No pardons to ask, nor apologies to make; the journal of
William Henry King, Gray’s 28th Louisiana Infantry
Regiment.
King, William Henry. Ed. by Gary D. Joiner et al. (Voices of the Civil
War)
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 322 p. $44.00
Two-thirds of all Confederate soldiers were absent without leave, but
Jefferson Davis said the army was in better condition now than at any
previous time, King notes in late December 1863. He found the statements
conflicted somewhat, but found just as interesting a fight between a
group of men and women of ill-fame and a contingent of guards and
prisoners. This is the account of an enlisted man, an ordinary soldier,
but he had a sharp eye and an even sharper wit and a sincere devotion
to disregard for authority, a combination which served him well as a
coping mechanism as he moved across the Mississippi theater of war. He
noted not only the expected battles but his and others’ personal percep-
tions of the causes and the repercussions on ordinary people like him,
regardless of the circumstances of their eyes or wits.
–77–
E580 2005-016216 1-57233-458-4
Our trust is in the god of battles; the Civil War letters of
Robert Franklin Bunting, chaplain, Terry’s Texas Rangers,
C.S.A.
Bunting, R.F. Ed. by Thomas W. Cutrer. (The voices of the Civil War
series)
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 436 p. $45.00
Cutrer (American studies, Arizona State U. West) presents the letters
penned by Confederate military chaplain Bunting to newspapers during
the Civil War. Unlike many collections of Civil War correspondence, the
material in this volume was written with a specific polemical purpose,
primarily to use religion to influence civilian publics in support of the
goals of the South, although he also included quite a bit of description
of military developments at Shiloh, Murfreesboro, Chickamauga, and
other areas where the Eighth Texas Cavalry fought. It thus provides a
greater glimpse into the construction of the “official” religious ideology
of the Confederacy than can be found in other collections of Civil War
letters.
E591 2006-016646 978-1-59114-882-1
Blue and gray navies; the Civil War afloat.
Tucker, Spencer C.
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 426 p. $34.95
Tucker, a former professor of military history at the Virginia Military
Institute, draws on recent scholarship, official records, and the memoirs
of participants to look at the roles played by the Union and Confederate
navies during the Civil War. He examines the senior leadership, officers,
and personnel of the two navies as well as their organization,
recruitment and training, and manufacturing resources. He then takes a
close look at major battles and technological innovations during the war
itself. B&w historical photos and a glossary are included.
E605 2005-020764 978-0-8203-2693-1
The Civil War letters of Joseph Hopkins Twichell; a
chaplain’s story.
Twichell, Joseph Hopkins. Ed. by Peter Messent and Steve Courtney.
Univ. of Georgia Press, ©2006 333 p. $34.95
Joseph Twichell cut short his seminary studies to become a Union Army
chaplain in New York’s Excelsior Brigade. His letters chronicle his obser-
vations at the Peninsula and Wilderness Campaigns, as well as at the
battles of Second Bull Run, Fredericksburg, Chancellorsville, Gettysburg
and Spotsylvania. Writing about politics and slavery and the theological
and cultural divide between him and his men, who were primarily poor
Irish American Catholics, Twichell offers a valuable perspective of the
Civil War from an underrepresented class of soldier, the army chaplain.
E612 2006-017047 978-0-88146-012-4
Ghosts and shadows of Andersonville; essays on the
secret social histories of America’s deadliest prison.
Davis, Robert Scott.
Mercer University Press, ©2006 310 p. $35.00
Davis (family and regional history, Wallace State Community College,
Alabama) explores some of the most controversial questions that have
emerged from earlier studies of Camp Sumter, the infamous Confederate
Civil War prison that has become known as Andersonville. The military
plays a minor role as he discusses such topics as barbed wire disease,
the hangman, the Trojan women, the devil’s advocate, and the last man
to get away.
E661 2006-000927 978-0-19-515670-6
The Gilded Age and Progressive Era; a student
companion.
Perry, Elisabeth Israels and Karen Manners Smith. (Oxford student
companions to American history)
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 430 p. $60.00
Perry (history, Saint Louis U.) and Smith (ethnic and gender studies,
Emporia State U., Kansas) mark the beginning of the Gilded Age at 1877,
the end of Reconstruction, and the end of the Progressive Era at 1921,
the end of Wilson’s term as president. Generally these are later in the
range scholars choose. They also see the two periods as very connected,
with the progressive ideas developing out of the earlier economic,
political, and social conditions. Articles of a page or two discuss people,
events, trends, institutions, disciplines and professions, technology, and
other facets. Each is cross-referenced and includes a list for further
reading.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E666 2006-011374 978-0-15-101212-1
The avenger takes his place; Andrew Johnson and the 45
days that changed the nation.
Means, Howard.
Harcourt, ©2006 286 p. $25.00
Virgina-based biographer and novelist Means describes how Johnson
dealt with the aftermath of the Civil War when the US presidency fell to
him with Lincoln’s assassination in April 1865.
E715 2006-931253 1-60105-063-1
The war with Spain. (reprint, 1902)
Lodge, Henry Cabot.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2006 287 p. $34.90 (pa)
Although the Spanish-American War (1898) was very brief, “[i]ts results
were many, startling, and of world-wide meaning.” So wrote Republican
senator/historian Lodge in 1899. In a reprint of this illustrated account
first published in 1902, he drew on US military sources in discussing the
factors leading to war and peace. Appendices include Congressional res-
olutions demanding the withdrawal of Spain from Cuba, President
McKinley’s war proclamation, and the peace treaty. A new introduction
providing historical context would have been welcome.
E742 2006-280222 978-1-4051-4984-6
A companion to post-1945 America. (reprint, 2001)
Title main entry. Ed. by Jean-Christophe Agnew and Roy Rosenzweig.
(Blackwell companions to American history; 6)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 584 p. $39.95 (pa)
This is a paperbound reprint of a 2001 book. Agnew (American studies
and history, Yale U.) and Rosenzweig (history, George Mason U.) compile
34 essays on the history and historiography of the post-1945 period in
America. Coverage encompasses society and culture, social change and
movements, and politics and foreign policy, with specific essays on
family, religion, leisure and tourism, popular music, visual arts, the
media, immigrants and ethnicity, civil rights, women’s history, sexuality,
labor and unions, the Cold War, and McCarthyism. The final section
includes eight essays that are reflections by scholars on key publications,
such as Edward Said’s Orientalism, Stephanie Coontz’s The Way We Never
Were, and Samuel Lubell’s The Future of American Politics. Scholars work
in history, American studies, and related fields and are based in the US,
Australia, and UK. The book is aimed at students, historians, and general
readers.
E743 2006-929183 978-1-933859-12-5
The conservative intellectual movement in America since
1945.
Nash, George H.
Intercollegiate Studies Inst., ©2006 656 p. $25.00 (pa)
First published in 1976, this work traces the activist conservative intel-
lectual movement as it emerged in the United States in the years fol-
lowing World War II. It is primarily an account of influential
conservative books and other writings and their influence on the
American political scene. Among the authors he discusses are Milton
Friedman, Leo Strauss, Lionel Trilling, William F. Buckley, Brent Bozell,
Russell Kirk, and Irving Kristol. The Epilogue of the second (1996) edition
has been retained as chapter 12 in this edition and a new conclusion on
the current state of conservatism has been added.
E747 2005-016260 0-8160-5368-5
The FDR years.
Pederson, William D. (Presidential profiles)
Facts On File, Inc., ©2006 480 p. $85.00
Part of Facts on File’s Presidential Profile reference series, this work by
Pederson (Louisiana State U.) is a biographical dictionary that profiles
some 300 individuals important to the era in which the White House was
occupied by Franklin Delano Roosevelt (1932-1945). Emphasis is given to
executive branch officials, justices of the Supreme Court, members of
Congress, governors, and cultural icons of the period, as well as a few
foreign political leaders. The entries are intended to define the relation-
ships of each person’s career in relation to the President, the Great
Depression, and World War II. Also included are an introductory
overview essay; a chronology; lists of cabinet members, Supreme Court
justices, and congressional leaders; selected speeches by Roosevelt; and a
bibliography of recent works on Roosevelt and his era.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E813 2006-024107 0-8156-3128-6
America in the fifties.
Dunar, Andrew J.
Syracuse U. Pr., ©2006 351 p. $24.95 (pa)
Dunar (history, U. of Alabama at Huntsville) presents a general historical
treatment of the United States during the 1950s. The major focus is on
domestic and foreign political developments as seen from the perspective
of the policy-makers, including a chapter just discussing the Korean War,
but overarching societal change, major cultural developments, and the
origins of the civil rights and other movements also receive attention.
E839 2006-007609 978-0-8179-4752-1
Ever wonder why? and other controversial essays.
Sowell, Thomas. (Hoover Institution Press publication no.548)
Hoover Institution Press, ©2006 460 p. $15.00 (pa)
Sowell (a senior fellow at the Hoover Institution, Stanford U.) collects
some 150 examples of his nationally syndicated column in which he
offers his culturally conservative and economically l’aissez faire views on
a range of national issues of recent years, including the “War on Terror,”
media bias, testing in education, judicial “activism,” the left’s alleged
desire to impose “collective conformity at all costs,” the hypocrisy of elite
leftists in speaking in the name of the downtrodden, the desirability of
school vouchers, liberal mollycoddling of criminals, environmental
alarmism, and the like. Either the economics-trained Sowell has ignored
his own warning that academic degrees too often “embolden people to
pontificate on a wide range of subject where they don’t know what they
are talking about” or he believes he is not implicated in such a problem
because of the (unsupported) “fact that academics are overwhelmingly of
the political left.”
E840 2005-034657 978-0-8160-5369-8
The Carter years.
Kaufman, Burton F. (Presidential profiles)
Facts On File, Inc., ©2006 648 p. $85.00
Aimed at high school students, this review of the Carter presidency has
over 250 entries covering all the key personalities of the era, from Bella
Abzug to Anwar Sadat. The reference also contains a chronology of con-
temporary events; an appendix with documents such as inaugural
addresses and presidential speeches; and tables listing the members of
the Carter White House staff, cabinet members and members of
Congress. Kaufman (emeritus, Miami U., Ohio) has previously published
books on Carter and on Eisenhower.
E840 2005-033993 0-8160-5280-8
The Nixon-Ford years.
Greene, John Robert. (Presidential profiles)
Facts On File, Inc., ©2006 916 p. $85.00
This reference work aims to provide insight into the American historical
experience during the presidencies of Richard Nixon and Gerald Ford by
presenting some 250 biographical entries on key personalities of the era.
Editor Greene (Cazenovia College) includes the significant government
officials and elected politicians important during the Nixon-Ford years,
including Dick Cheney and Donald Rumsfeld, to name just two of the
figures who have remained important in American public life, as well as
many figures not directly connected to government who still played a
major role in American political life, such as Black Panther leader
Eldridge Cleaver, political columnist Jack Anderson, and My Lai mas-
sacre protagonist Lt. William Calley. Included in the volume are an intro-
ductory essay, maps, a chronology, a listing of principal US government
officials, and approximately 170 pages of selected primary documents.
E840 2006-273300 1-59558-025-5
The rise and rise of Richard B. Cheney; unlocking the
mysteries of the most powerful vice president in
American history.
Nichols, John.
The New Press, ©2005 268 p. $14.95 (pa)
Who is the President of the United States? According to Nichols
(Washington correspondent for The Nation), the answer to that question
is not the figurehead princeling, George W. Bush, but Dick Cheney, the
“evil genius in the corner.” In his polemical political biography, he peels
back the curtain on the career of Dick Cheney, exposing his fake public
persona, his draft-dodging during the Vietnam War, his political
machinations during the Ford administration (besting even Henry
Kissinger in bureaucratic infighting), his congressional support of
Apartheid South Africa, his services to the military- industrial complex
endangered by post-Cold War talk of a “peace dividend,” and his corrupt
activities as the head of the oil corporation Halliburton. Also discussed
is Cheney’s role in engineering George W. Bush’s 2000 presidential
“victory,” his crucial role in shaping the incoming administration, and
his equally crucial role in pushing the invasion of Iraq.
–78–
E840 2006-006352 978-0-8165-2569-0
Senator Dennis DeConcini; from the center of the aisle.
DeConcini, Dennis and Jack L. August Jr.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 286 p. $29.95
DeConcini served as the Democratic Senator from Arizona from 1977
until his retirement in 1995. This is his political memoir of his tenure as
a senator, co-authored with August (executive director, Arizona Historical
Foundation, Arizona State U.). As is clear from the title, DeConcini prides
himself on having been a political centrist, a position which helped him
engineer consensus on the Panama Canal Treaty of 1977. In addition to
reflecting on his achievements while in the Senate, he also spends con-
siderable time discussing the banking and political contribution scandal
involving himself and the other “Keating Five.”
E859 978-0-446-69822-1
Fear and loathing; on the campaign trail ‘72. (reprint,
1983)
Thompson, Hunter S.
Warner Books, Inc., ©2006 481 p. $15.99 (pa)
The late Thompson’s inimitable style of “gonzo” journalism was on full
display in this series of articles originally written for and serialized in
Rolling Stone magazine, covering the 1972 Democratic presidential pri-
maries through the subsequent blowout defeat of Senator McGovern by
President Nixon (which greatly demoralized Thompson, a supporter of
McGovern from early in the primaries). While reporting on campaign
events, Thompson never bothered to hide his disdain for much of the
American political process or for the mainstream media’s treatment of
American politics. As with others of Thompson’s books, illustrations by
Ralph Steadman accompany the text; unfortunately their reproduction
(and that of the photographs) in this edition is poorer that fans of
Steadman might have hoped. This is a reprint of the 1983 book.
E882 2006-020984 978-0-446-57990-2
My father, my president; a personal account of the life of
George H.W. Bush.
Koch, Doro Bush.
Warner Books, Inc., ©2006 586 p. $29.99
Doro Bush Koch, the youngest child of former president George H. W.
Bush, presents an insider’s account of her father’s life, noting that “...a
daughter may not have either the expertise or the objectivity of a his-
torian, but a historian doesn’t know a father the way his daughter does.”
Drawing on public and private records and the reminiscences of hun-
dreds of friends and colleagues, the text spans Bush’s complete life, from
his boyhood years to the present day, demonstrating the importance of
family, love, and loyalty in the life of President Bush.
E895 2006-016959 0-415-95204-2
American empire; a debate.
Layne, Christopher and Bradley A. Thayer.
Routledge, ©2007 153 p. $19.95 (pa)
Thayer (defense and strategic studies, Missouri State U.) argues that the
US should maintain its current primacy in international politics and use
its military, cultural, and institutional power to advance and protect its
interests. Layne (international affairs, Texas A&M U.) counters that a
grand strategy of primacy and empire is not in the country’s best
interest, is based on dubious assumptions, and would lead to a geopo-
litical backlash against the US and unnecessary military interventions.
E902 2006-016644 978-0-7425-5374-3
The arrogance of American power; what U.S. leaders are
doing wrong and why it’s our duty to dissent.
Snow, Nancy.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 249 p. $22.95 (pa)
Snow (Californian State U.) explores America’s current imperial moment
through the lens of her academic specialty of communications. Among
the topics she tackles are the rhetoric of American exceptionalism, the
marketing of war, the role of the press in furthering American propa-
ganda, and the self- defeating arrogance of American public diplomacy.
–79–
E902 2006-017412 978-0-7425-3653-1
Bush’s war; media bias and justifications for war in a
terrorist age.
Kuypers, Jim A. (Communication, media, and politics)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 199 p. $27.95 (pa)
Noting that the modern American presidency is a “rhetorical presidency,”
Kuypers (political communication, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and
State U.) analyzes how President George W. Bush rhetorically justified his
military actions in the wake of the September 11th attacks and how the
US news media themselves presented those justifications to the US public.
He is particularly concerned with how the Bush administration con-
structed rhetorical themes and frames justifying war and how they were
filtered through the press. He finds that audiences that listened to Bush’s
speeches directly “had a much clearer understanding of the country’s
actions” and that press bias contributed to a fractured and confused per-
ception of the “War on Terror.”
E902 2006-011211 978-0-7425-3038-6
The crisis of American foreign policy; the effects of a
divided America.
Wiarda, Howard J.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 329 p. $34.95 (pa)
American foreign policy is beset by problems that go beyond the activ-
ities of one warns Wiarda (international relations, U. of Georgia). These
problem are rooted in partisan divisions, divisions among the various
foreign policy institutions, the increased importance of interest groups in
the foreign policy process, and a general American myopia when it
comes to the wider world. After describing the institutional workings of
American foreign policy, he looks at the problematic workings of US
foreign policy as it relates to democratization, human rights, relation-
ships with “friendly tyrants,” and globalization. Finally, he elaborates on
how the problems he has identified with American foreign policy have
played out in the regional cases of Asia, sub-Saharan Africa, Latin
America, and the Middle East.
E902 2006-004259 978-0-87286-454-2
Dear President Bush.
Sheehan, Cindy. (An open media book)
City Lights Books, ©2006 133 p. $9.95 (pa)
This small book carries a strong anti-war essay from the woman who
has attracted a considerable amount of attention protesting the Iraq war
and the Bush administration. Having lost her son five days after he
arrived in Iraq, she writes passionately and speaks for many. The book
has footnotes and references for further information. Historian Howard
Zinn provides an introductory essay as does Hart Viges, an Iraq war
veteran, peace advocate, and public speaker.
E902 2006-020195 1-59102-466-8
The infiltrator; my undercover exploits in right-wing
America.
Leon, Harmon.
Prometheus Books, ©2006 263 p. $17.00 (pa)
Political satirist Leon delights in infiltrating right wing organizations “in
order to fight their repulsive ridiculousness with my repulsive ridicu-
lousness.” This is the third of his books reporting on his exploits, this
time describing his adventures with the anti-immigrant Minutemen
Project, at a teen-abstinence educators’ conference, seeking faith healing
from a television evangelist, and at a gathering of right-wing skinheads,
to summarize a few.
E902 2004-066018 978-1-4000-9536-0
Moyers on America; a journalist and his times.
Moyers, Bill. Ed. by Julie Leininger Pycior.
Anchor Books, ©2005 233 p. $13.95 (pa)
This collection of articles and essays includes three pieces too new to be
contained in the hardcover edition, and presents Moyers’ thoughts on the
media, the war in Iraq, the meaning of democracy, his career and the
profession of journalism, and other topics related to his life and America.
He often focuses on what the comfortable do to the uncomfortable,
whether out of cruelty or ignorance, and he makes a compelling case for
getting back to reality, remarking that America is now the hardest and
most unforgiving of all the industrial nations on the earth.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
E902 2006-028019 978-1-58322-756-5
United States v. George W. Bush et al.
De la Vega, Elizabeth.
Seven Stories Press, ©2006 256 p. $14.95 (pa)
Former US federal prosecutor de la Vega presents the transcript of hypo-
thetical grand jury proceedings pursuing an indictment against George
Bush, Dick Cheney, Condoleeza Rice, Donald Rumsfeld, and Colin Powell
for “conspiracy to defraud the United States” in the matter of the pre-Iraq
war intelligence regarding “weapons of mass destruction,” Ba`athist con-
nections to Al Qaeda, as defined by 18 U.S.C. Section 371. Although her
prosecutors, jurors, and witnesses (mostly hypothetical federal agents) are
fictional, the facts of the case are not, based as they are on publicly
available information from news sources and government documents.
She leaves the verdict of the grand jury to the reader.
E903 2005-930260 0-7897-3470-2
The big book of Bush cartoons!
Title main entry. Ed. by Daryl Cagle and Brian Fairrington.
Pearson Technology Group, ©2005 210 p. $14.95 (pa)
In this history of the Bush presidency in cartoons, international editorial
cartoonists have a field day with the 2000 campaign and the adminis-
tration’s stands on topics including Hurricane Katrina, Enron, gay mar-
riage, religion, and Iraq and the war on terrorism. The book begins with
an overview of trends in such drawings, in which Bush seems to be
shrinking. His lame duck term offers plenty of material for a sequel.
E903 2006-017826 978-1-58322-743-5
Impeach the president; the case against Bush and Cheney.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis Loo and Peter Phillips.
Seven Stories Press, ©2006 326 p. $17.95 (pa)
Rather than draw up an example bill of impeachment and defending it,
as other authors calling for the impeachment of President George W.
Bush have done, Loo (sociology, California State Polytechnic U.) and
Phillips (sociology, Sonoma State U.) have identified 12 reasons for
impeachment and recruited knowledgeable authors to address each one.
The reasons they cite include the common charges of lying the country
into the war in Iraq, directing the torture of captives, acting negligently
with regards to Hurricane Katrina, and illegally spying on Americans, as
well as accusations that have been left off of most discussions of
impeachment, including overthrowing the democratically elected
President of Haiti, use of signing statements to undermine congressional
legislative intent, excessive secrecy, negligently ignoring the implications
of Peak Oil, stealing the 2000 and 2004 elections, and violating the con-
stitutional separation of church and state by bringing theocratic ide-
ologies into the machinery of government.
E903 2006-926772 978-0-7618-3490-8
Washington and the world; 2001-2005.
King, Llewellyn.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 295 p. $35.00 (pa)
Syndicated columnist King collects his columns and commentaries from
January 2001 through September 2005. As the title suggests, the focus is
on the politics of Washington and (secondarily) the world.
Unsurprisingly, much of the focus is on the invasions of Afghanistan and
Iraq, the problems of terrorism and “homeland security,” and corporate
scandals, but these issues do not exhaust the list of issues discussed.
U.S. LOCAL HISTORY, LATIN AMERICA, CANADA
F7 2006-042166 978-0-8122-3965-2
Abraham in arms; war and gender in colonial New
England.
Little, Ann M. (Early American studies)
U. of Pennsylvania Pr., ©2007 262 p. $45.00
The close attention to attitudes concerning manliness and gender among
both the English, whose histories have dominated perceptions of this era,
and the Native Americans and French who they fought, provides the
reader with a thought-provoking twist to received ideas about colonial
New England. Little (history, Colorado State U.) examines sermons,
letters, satirical prints, and other first-hand accounts of the wars, skir-
mishes, and daily encounters of English and non-English. Detailed
treatment is devoted to imprisonment on both sides and the impact
dressing in English or Indian clothing had on the wearer’s self-image.
The result is a fascinating and nuanced view of a profoundly anxiety-
ridden period in American history.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
F67 2006-026275 0-321-47806-1
The Puritan dilemma; the story of John Winthrop, 3d ed.
Morgan, Edmund S. (The library of American biography)
Pearson / Longman, ©2007 210 p. $20.00 (pa)
In a biography of Winthrop (1588-1649), Morgan argues that, like people
in all ages, he was concerned with the question of what responsibility a
righteous an owes to society. When society follows a course someone con-
siders morally wrong, he says, most people contrast the options of with-
drawing and keep their principles intact, or staying, but the governor of
a Puritan colony had another answer.
F72 2006-923754 978-0-7618-3495-3
Nantucket’s people of color; essays on history, politics
and community.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Johnson.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 254 p. $35.00 (pa)
Ten American academics, researchers, and independent scholars—all par-
ticipants in the James Bradford Ames Fellowship Program at the U. of
Massachusetts over the past ten years—contribute ten chapters exploring
the relationship between African Americans and European-Americans on
Nantucket, from the 18th century to the 20th century. The essays analyze
and contrast questions of ethnicity, politics and community on the island,
thus revealing the strengths and problems faced by those on Nantucket
regarding issues of inclusion, freedom, justice and morality. At the same
time they document the lives of courageous people of color who created
productive communities and institutions despite the challenges of
extremely difficult circumstances.
F89 2005-936498 978-0-7385-4462-5
Providence.
McGowan, Louis and Daniel Brown. (Postcard history series)
Arcadia Publishing, ©2006 128 p. $19.99 (pa)
Both local amateur historians, the authors use postcards (reproduced two
to a page) mainly from McGowan’s own postcard collection to compile a
detailed history of Providence, its streets, buildings, businesses, enter-
tainments, and waterways in the early 20th century. In addition to the
brief introductory history to the city, each postcard is accompanied by a
detailed caption. Not indexed.
F106 2005-017102 1-57233-456-8
Encyclopedia of Appalachia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rudy Abramson and Jean Haskell.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 1832 p. $79.95
Adopting the definition of Appalachia used by the US federal gov-
ernment, comprising 410 counties from New York to Mississippi, editors
Abramson (former Washington correspondent for the Los Angeles Times)
and Haskell (retired director of the Center for Appalachian Studies and
Services, East Tennessee State U.) include some 2000 cross-referenced
entries in their encyclopedia of the region in some 30 thematic sections
themselves grouped under the headings of landscape, people, work and
the economy, cultural traditions, and institutions. These sections include
coverage of geology; ecology; environment; family and community;
images and icons; race, ethnicity, and identity; settlement and migration;
urban Appalachian experience; agriculture; business, industry, and tech-
nology; labor; tourism; transportation; architecture; crafts; folklore and
folklife; food and cooking; humor; language; literature; music; per-
forming arts; religion; sport and recreation; visual arts; cultural institu-
tions; education; government; health; and media. Within these categories,
subjects of individual entries range from the broad and almost stereo-
typical to the extremely specific and relatively obscure.
F128 2006-042150 978-0-8122-3961-4
Before Harlem; the Black experience in New York City
before World War I.
Sacks, Marcy S. (Politics and culture in modern America)
U. of Pennsylvania Pr., ©2006 231 p. $49.95
The early years of black migration to New York City, according to Sacks
(history, Albion College), were the crucible within which the patterns of
black life and race relations in the city were forged, as white elites and
poor immigrants reacted to the perceived threat of black migration and
as blacks formed their own geographic and ethnic divisions, created their
own organizational infrastructure and support networks, and evolved
cultural patterns within a hostile environment. She explores this history
in the years 1880-1915 in terms of the cultural, economic, social, and
political patterns that defined black life before Harlem.
–80–
F128 2006-016408 978-0-8109-4942-3
N e w Y o r k ; 3 6 5 d a y s f r o m t h e p h o t o a r c h i v e s o f t h e New
York Times.
Title main entry.
Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 734 p. $29.95
This book offers a terrific browse for inhabitants of NYC as well as those
on the outside. The photos of the city were selected from the many mil-
lions in the New York Times photo archives and are presented in an
appealing, horizontal format (9.5x6.5″). No attempt was made to cover
every subject or every part of the city; images were chosen simply
because they stand out in some way—as newsworthy or as particularly
memorable or evocative. Each is accompanied by a caption or a para-
graph or two setting the context. The rationale for the arrangement is a
bit mysterious (not thematic, not chronological), but there is an index for
those seeking something specific.
F128 2006-021404 0-8204-6915-7
Roots and routes; Bosnian adolescent refugees in New
York City.
Mosselson, Jacqueline. (Intersections in communications and culture;
v.10)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 220 p. $32.95 (pa)
Mosselson (international education, U. of Massachusetts-Amherst)
explores such elements as education, diasporic ruptures, identify, and the
ethnic enclave, drawing on interviews with Muslim women aged 16- 24
who left Bosnia after 1995 and are attending public high school or college
in New York City. Readers elsewhere should know that in Massachusetts,
root and route are pronounced the same.
F132 978-1-59237-175-4
Profiles of New Jersey, 2006.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2006 414+ p. $149.00 (pa)
Utilizing Grey House Publishing’s four-volume Profiles of America as a
base for this volume’s data, then updating the material and adding fresh
material on demographic information and community rankings, this
work presents statistical profiles of all 799 Census-recognized commu-
nities and counties in the state of New Jersey. The profiles provide infor-
mation on geography, ancestral and racial makeup, economy, housing,
transportation, industry, education, population, health, religion, and
climate. The 100 largest communities are compared by some dozens of
data points. Hispanic origins are defined in terms of 23 background cat-
egories while Asian ones are defined in terms of 21. Comparative data is
presented for each of these sub-category populations. Sixteen full-color
statistical maps are presented at the back of the volume.
F135 2006-010753 978-0-8135-3969-0
History walks in New Jersey; exploring the heritage of the
Garden State.
Rosenfeld, Lucy D. and Marina Harrison.
Rivergate Books, ©2006 221 p. $18.95 (pa)
Aimed at history buffs and walking enthusiasts, this volume describes
48 historical walks in the state of New Jersey. Sites profiled include Ellis
Island, a Revolutionary War battlefield, the glassworks at Wheaton
Village, and a number of ghost towns. Each walk features directions,
information on tours, a brief history, and suggestions for additional
places to visit in the area. Rosenfeld and Harrison have written eight
guidebooks together. Rivergate Books is an imprint of Rutgers U. Press.
F158 2006-045853 978-0-87169-964-0
A portrait of Elizabeth Willing Powel (1743-1830).
Maxey, David W. (Transactions of the American Philosophical Society;
v.96, pt.4)
Am. Philosophical Society, ©2006 91 p. $24.00 (pa)
In life, as on canvas, she was strong-minded and sincere, an influential
member of early Philadelphia salon society, an advisor to the nation’s
first president and a dedicated correspondent. As rendered in artists’
paint she is a serious woman with rather strong features, apart from a
slightly receding chin, and a decidedly cerebral presence. However,
Maxey has found a rendering of the indomitable Elizabeth Willing Powel
to be particularly illuminating about the experiences behind that
impassive face, as a mother whose sons died early in childhood, a
woman who spent much of her life a widow, and a talented and influ-
ential person who slipped quietly into obscurity upon her death. Maxey
uses Powel’s own correspondence and other primary documents to
discern how that particular rendering, a funerary allegory, made its way
back to the Powel manse and expressed her grief as no other way could.
–81–
F159 2006-011487 978-1-57233-495-3
From the miners’ doublehouse; archaeology and
landscape in a Pennsylvania coal company town.
Metheny, Karen Bescherer.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2007 305 p. $45.00
Current scholarship about company towns generally depict workers and
their families as helpless victims cast hither and yon by economic and
historical forces, says Metheny (archaeology, Boston U.). Suspecting that
there was more to their experience than that, she examines issues of
worker agency and working-class behavior in the mining town of
Helvetia, Pennsylvania from 1891 to 1947. Oral and documentary sources
and architectural, material, and archaeological evidence are among her
sources.
F208 2006-025282 0-8204-8651-5
This corner of Canaan; curriculum studies of place & the
reconstruction of the South.
Whitlock, Reta Ugena. (Complicated conversation; a book series of cur-
riculum studies; v.19)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 190 p. $29.95 (pa)
Whitlock (adolescent education, Kennesaw State U.) contemplates
Southernness and Southern place from her perspective as a Southern,
white, female, lesbian, working-class, liberal, fundamentalist Christian,
teacher educator. As part of a project to construct alternative Southern
curricula, her aims are four-fold: “1) unsettling prohibitive nostalgia so
as to disrupt rather than solidify identity/place norms; 2) homeplace as
a site for the interrogation of the construction of identity rather than the
consoling, pacifying mirror of identity; 3) queer Southernness, exem-
plified in the conjunction rather than the opposition of fundamentalism
and queer desire; 4) grace that shatters rather than absolves traditional
raced, classed, and gendered notions of Southern identity.”
F220 2006-022009 978-1-58465-589-3
Jewish roots in Southern soil; a new history.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marcie Cohen Ferris and Mark I. Greenberg.
U. Press of New England, ©2006 368 p. $29.95
Jews have lived in the U.S. South for over 350 years, and the Jewish com-
munity in the South has as distinct an identity as the region. Editors
Ferris (Jewish/American studies, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill) and
Greenberg (Florida studies, U. of South Florida) bring together 13 contri-
butions addressing themes including debates over uniqueness, personal
histories from colonial and Confederate eras to the Civil Rights movement
to today, intra-group tensions, Jewish-Black relations, writings by and
about Southern Jews, and fusion cuisine. Eli Evans, a founder of Jewish
studies, supplies the foreword. Period images are included.
F220 2006-009705 0-7546-4454-5
Latinos in the new South; transformations of place.
Title main entry. Ed. by Heather A. Smith and Owen J. Furuseth.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 292 p. $89.95
Over the past decade, Latinos have emerged as one of the fastest- growing
ethnic populations in the southern states of the U.S. Twenty American
academics contribute 13 chapters to a contemporary and multi-disci-
plinary examination of the reasons for, impacts of and responses to
Latino migration into the U.S. South. Drawing on both theory and
empirical field-based research, the chapters offer insight into the Latino
experiences in a range of states, in both rural and urban environments,
demonstrating that there is no one single story of Latino based transfor-
mation in the South but rather multiple stories and diverse outcomes.
F229 2006-30570 978-0-8204-8694-9
Inventing Virginia; Sir Walter Raleigh and the rhetoric of
colonization, 1584-1590.
Moran, Michael G. (Early American literature and culture through the
American renaissance; v.7)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 261 p. $73.95
Moran (English, U. of Georgia) discusses not the physical aspects of the
English colony, but the manner in which Raleigh advocated for it, par-
ticularly in his reports to the throne. A main goal is to reveal the impor-
tance of technical, scientific, and commercial communication during the
Renaissance. Virginia as a garden, explaining a failure, the Roanoke
Indians, and surveying techniques are among his topics.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
F234 2006-021267 978-0-8139-2616-2
Scandal at Bizarre; rumor and reputation in Jefferson’s
America. (reprint, 2004)
Kierner, Cynthia A.
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 246 p. $18.95 (pa)
Kierner (history, U. of North Carolina-Charlotte) tells of a 1793 case in
which Richard Randolph of Bizarre, Virginia, was accused of helping his
wife’s sister terminate a pregnancy that he had also initiated. She shows
how the scandal emerged and was interpreted within the social and cul-
tural context of early republican Virginia. Jefferson was related to the
family and played a supporting role in the story. Originally published in
2004 by Palgrave Macmillan.
F250 2006-000320 978-0-252-07335-9
Coalfield Jews; an Appalachian history.
Weiner, Deborah R.
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 234 p. $25.00 (pa)
What on earth were Jewish immigrants from Eastern Europe and their
children doing in the coalfields in the Appalachian Mountains, asks
Weiner (history and family history, Jewish Museum of Maryland,
Baltimore). The story she tells should unsettle commonly held views of
both Appalachia and the American Jewish experience.
F347 2006-010249 978-1-58980-346-6
Vanished Mississippi Gulf Coast.
Fraiser, Jim. Photography by Rick Guy and Jim Fraiser.
Pelican Publishing Co., ©2006 104 p. $22.95
Before Hurricane Katrina hit, Fraiser and Guy wanted to preserve the
history and architecture of the Mississippi coast in photographs. They
finished just before the hurricane hit, but added information and photos
of the ensuing damage. Presented here are 142 photos of the Mississippi
Gulf Coast before and after Hurricane Katrina, along with text on the
history, architecture, and culture of the area. Areas included are Ocean
Springs, Pascagoula, Biloxi, Gulfport, Pass Christian, and Bay St. Louis.
There is no index or bibliography. Fraiser, a federal administrative law
judge, is the author of other books on Mississippi. Guy is a photojour-
nalist who has previously collaborated with Fraiser.
F549 2004-117624 0-7385-3385-8
Galena.
Marsh, Diann. (Images of America)
Arcadia Publishing, ©2005 128 p. $19.99 (pa)
US Grant rented a house in Galena, Illinois when he moved there to join
his brothers in their leather shop. More than one family lived in a grand
Italianate mansion, while others packed six children and two adults in a
log cabin about the size of a modern kitchen. Galena was once a major
stop for giant steamboats but became quite ordinary when farmers and
miners clogged its river with silt and soil. Now it is a successful heritage
tourism site, with fine antebellum buildings along its winding streets.
This indispensable guide to Galena includes an engaging history of how
the town built itself up, fell into disrepair, and then built itself up again,
a host of period photographs of times when all the children were
charming, all the men wore spats and all the women wore significant
hats, and a set of well-arranged walking tours with maps.
F586 2006-005187 978-0-87462-017-7
Distinguished service; the life of Wisconsin governor
Walter J. Kohler.
Reeves, Thomas C.
Marquette University Press, ©2006 456 p. $45.00
This biography traces the life of Wisconsin Governor Walter J. Kohler, Jr.
(1904-1976), who was elected to office three times and influenced the
election of President Eisenhower. Reeves, a former history professor and
fellow at the Wisconsin Policy Research Institute, describes how Kohler
lost the US Senate race to fill Joe McCarthy’s seat, his role in the family
company and its labor dispute, and how he served in the Navy during
World War II, among other events. The biography draws from family
documents, photos, interviews, and other sources.
F589 2006-017100 978-0-87020-375-6
Cream City chronicles; stories of Milwaukee’s past.
Gurda, John.
State Hist. Soc. of Wisconsin, ©2007 303 p. $26.95
Long-time historian of his home-town Milwaukee, Gurda here collects
monthly columns he has written for the Milwaukee Journal and
Milwaukee Sentinel since 1994. Each tells a story about the city’s past,
within such sections as the early years, water, making a living, and
winter. He includes an index but no bibliography.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
F592 2004-011981 978-0-8139-2595-0
Across the continent; Jefferson, Lewis and Clark, and the
making of America. (reprint, 2005)
Title main entry. Ed. by Douglas Seefeldt et al.
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 222 p. $19.50 (pa)
Without trying to deflate the myth, historians and anthropologists
explore how the 1803-06 expedition to the west coast of what is now the
US connects with society two centuries later. Their focus is on Thomas
Jefferson, the US president who initiated the effort, and their topics
include his fluid plans for the western perimeter, and his conflicted
Legacy in American archaeology. The six essays were published cloth-
bound to celebrate the bicentenary of the event.
F594 2005-022233 0-471-26291-9
Doc Holliday; the life and legend.
Roberts, Gary L.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 528 p. $30.00
By the time of his death at age 36 in 1887, John Henry “Doc” Holliday
was already a Wild West legend: dentist, gunslinger, outcast of a Southern
family, “mad, merry scamp with heart of gold and nerves of steel...,” per
Tombstone friend/sheriff Wyatt Earp. Drawing on newly discovered
primary sources, Roberts (emeritus, history, Abraham Baldwin College,
Tifton, Georgia) offers insights into the man, the legend, and the frontier
period. The biography includes photos of Holliday, his family, friends,
and his first cousin Mattie, a rumored early love who became a nun.
F596 2006-015019 978-0-292-71471-7
Aryan cowboys; White supremacist ideology and the
search for a new frontier, 1970-2000.
Schlatter, Evelyn A.
U. of Texas Press, ©2006 250 p. $19.95 (pa)
Schlatter (PhD, history, U. of New Mexico) examines the development of
white supremacist right-wing groups in the American west since 1967,
including the Idaho-based Aryan Nations, the Posse Comitatus,
Montana’s Freemen, the Republic of Texas, and others. Her analysis
focuses on the interaction of these groups with other ideological strands
of American western identity, especially the way white masculinity has
been defined in terms of the “West” as a symbol of freedom, an oppor-
tunity for conquest, and an escape from modern industrial society.
F615 2006020371 978-1-890434-73-1
Latino Minnesota.
Roethke, Liegh.
Afton Historical Society Press, ©2007 128 p. $24.00
Roethke, an art historian, has compiled a vivid portrait of the lives,
struggles, culture, and history of Minnesota’s large Latino population.
Complemented by many historic photographs, the text chronicles the
arrival of immigrants and migrant workers in the 19th century, their
work, neighborhoods, and social lives, continuing the narrative into the
present. The book is designed for young readers (6th and 7th grade), and
includes a selection of activities coded to each chapter. Printed in a hor-
izontal format: 10.25x9.25″.
F767 2006-040258 0-8061-3792-4
Devil’s Gate; owning the land, owning the story.
Rea, Tom.
U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2006 307 p. $26.95
It has an unlikely name, the Sweetwater River valley, and it occupies one
of the most rugged of spaces in the rugged state of Wyoming. In it or
near it masses of Native Americans hunted, a woman was hanged,
migrants froze to death, and thousands of pioneers paused at the valley’s
Independence Rock on their way to Oregon. Who owned the land then
and owns it now has control of a vast repertoire of American history. Rea
follows the stories of the land and how they changed according to who
owned it, ranging from early settlers to one of the most prominent early
ranchers who was instrumental in the only lynching of a woman in
Wyoming all the way to the present, in which the Church of Jesus Christ
of Latter-Day Saints operates a museum in honor of forebears said to
have died of exposure in the valley in 1856.
–82–
F786 2005-033433 978-0-8165-2557-7 F868 2005-054785 0-88150-649-4
Troublesome border, rev. ed. The photographer’s guide to the California coast; where to
Martínez, Oscar J. find perfect shots and how to take them.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 182 p. $17.95 (pa) Steakley, Douglas.
A longtme resident of the border area between the U.S. and Mexico, Countryman Press, ©2006 96 p. $16.95 (pa)
Martínez (history, U. of Arizona) offers students and scholars an exami- From California’s North Coast beaches to the Mexican border, a photog-
nation of selected topics that illuminate past and contemporary relation- rapher who lives in the state has selected 118 favorite coastal locations.
ships in the U.S.-Mexico borderlands. In the process, the text identifies After describing his approach to taking pictures and general guidelines
the roots and traces the evolution of the strife that has characterized the for improving one’s photos, Steakley offers specific tips for the selected
region. The revised edition reflects dramatic changes since publication of spots featured in his stunning color photos. The guide includes maps and
the original work in 1988, with new coverage of current-day border a list of locales by category (e.g., favorite state parks, lighthouses).
issues of concern to the federal governments on both sides of the border
including rapid population growth, environmental problems, undocu- F868 2006-922942 978-0-7385-3142-7
mented migration, drug trafficking, and violence. Yosemite National Park and vicinity.
Radanovich, LeRoy. (Images of America)
F790 2006-005716 978-0-8165-2505-8 Arcadia Publishing, ©2006 127 p. $19.99 (pa)
Mestizo in America; generations of Mexican ethnicity in Hundreds of b&w archival images take readers on a visual journey
the suburban Southwest. through the history of the Yosemite region in the Sierra Nevada moun-
Macias, Thomas. tains. The photos are arranged by location depicted into five sections. In
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 175 p. $19.95 (pa) addition to detailed photo captions, Radanovich has provided a one-page
Based on statistical data from the U.S. Census and firsthand interviews, introduction for each chapter. Bibliographical references and an index are
Macias (sociology, U. of Vermont) examines the social integration of third- lacking. Historian Radanovich has written extensively on Yosemite
plus-generation Mexican Americans. The author finds that the process of National Park.
social integration for third-plus- generation Mexican Americans shares
many elements with that of third- plus-generation European Americans. F869 2006-016634 1-59714-040-6
However, social forces related to ethnic concentration, social inequality, Ira Nowinski’s San Francisco; poets, politics, and divas.
and identity politics have combined to make ethnicity for Mexican Nowinski, Ira.
Americans more fixed across generations than it has been for other Heyday Books, ©2006 127 p. $27.95 (pa)
groups with multiple- generation histories in the U.S.
Three themes from Nowinski’s oeuvre are presented in this oversized
volume (10.5x12″): beat poets, impoverished men in rooming houses (that
F826 2006-019189 0-9788748-0-3
were shortly afterwards destroyed as they watched), and the performers
Scottish shepherd; the life and times of John Murray of San Francisco Opera. Photographed in b&w in the 1970s, the photos
Murdoch, Utah pioneer. present a personal view of San Francisco’s North Beach neighborhood,
Merrell, Kenneth W. on the one hand, and its internationally renowned cultural icons, on the
University of Utah Press, ©2006 230 p. $27.95 other. Not indexed.
Born and raised in Scotland, John Murray Murdoch embraced
Mormonism and set out for the Utah with his wife, Ann, in 1852, where F869 2003-059730 978-1-59223-126-3
another young Scottish woman, Isabella Crawford, would later join them San Diego then and now.
in polygamous marriage. This narrative, told by a descendent of John Hendrickson, Nancy (Then and now series)
Murdoch, describes the story of the three Mormon pioneers. The nar- Thunder Bay Press, ©2003 144 p. $17.98
rative’s subjects were not high-profile leaders, thus telling their story,
Fifty-year San Diego resident Hendrickson provides the brief text to this
avers the author, allows a window into the experiences of ordinary
book, which compares photographs from the first half of the 20th
people involved in the early years of Utah Mormonism.
century to the city’s scenes of today. Large b&w and color prints illus-
trate the changing faces of locales and historical fixtures including the
F841 2005-025896 0-87417-663-8
Hotel Del Coronado, the Star of India, Spreckels Organ Pavillion, La Jolla,
Devils will reign; how Nevada began. the Mission Valley, El Cajon Boulevard, and the Mission San Diego De
Zanjani, Sally. (Wilbur S. Shepperson series in Nevada history) Alcala. Oversize: 9.75x11.25″.
U. of Nevada Press, ©2006 222 p. $29.95
In the middle of the nineteenth century the people who came to or came F882 2006-022884 978-0-295-98622-7
through Nevada did not necessarily do so with guns blazing. Some came River of renewal; myth and history in the Klamath Basin.
as farmers, including a group of African Americans who made them- Most, Stephen.
selves successful in the Carson Valley. Some came as farmers but became U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 292 p. $22.50 (pa)
miners, as did the Grosh brothers who found rich veins of silver
Playwright and documentary storyteller Most drew from oral history,
alongside the gold in the Virginia Range. Some became farmers in neigh-
written narratives, and historical documentation to create this composite
boring Utah and to some extent in Nevada itself, including Mormons
of perspectives on the Klamath basin, which covers large parts of
driven across the desert in order to practice polygamy in peace. Zanjani
southern Oregon and northern California. The myths of Bigfoot and the
(political science, U. of Nevada, Reno) covers ten years of who moved in,
trickster Coyote are set in the area, and Rosicrucian scripture describes
who moved out, who moved in again, the decimation of the Native
a seven foot tall race of humans that lived on Mount Shasta. Ancient nar-
Americans, the legal and illegal ways of making big money, and the
ratives from the numerous indigenous tribes in the region are woven
advent of territory status in 1861.
with the political history of the many contentions over water distribution
and salmon protection. Farmers from the U.S. and abroad, trappers,
F862 2006-022076 978-0-89997-398-2
explorers, natives, and back-to-the-land urban transplants are among the
Best of California’s missions, mansions, and museums. characters who populate and inform Most’s stories. Some b&w photo-
McKowen, Ken and Dahlynn McKowen. graphs and maps of the region are included.
Wilderness Press, ©2006 344 p. $21.95 (pa)
In focusing on three mainstays of tourism—missions, mansions and F889 98-33603 978-1-57145-156-9
museums—this guide describes 135 of California’s historic and cultural San Francisco then and now.
treasures from Alcatraz Island to the Museum of Man. The text includes Yenne, Bill. (Then and now series)
24 self-guided tours tailored for specific groups, such as families, couples, Thunder Bay Press, ©1998 144 p. $17.98
and movie buffs, as well as trivia quizzes meant to forestall the question
This coffee table book illustrates how the famous downtown, streets, and
of travelers everywhere: “Are we there yet?”
neighborhoods of San Francisco have changed physically over the last 150
years. The black and white photographs on the left-hand pages were
taken between 1850 and 1960 while the color pictures of the same area
on the right-hand pages were taken in 1998.

–83– Reference & Research Book News February 2007

F897 2006-16148 978-0-295-98643-2
National Park, city playground; Mount Rainier in the
twentieth century.
Catton, Theodore.
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 236 p. $18.95 (pa)
Mount Rainier dominates the views from the Pacific Northwest cities of
Tacoma and Seattle and in turn the inhabitants of those cities of played
a definitive role in the evolution of the mountain and its environs as a
National Park. Catton, an independent scholar, narrates this historical
relationship over the course of the 20th century, examining how different
actors influenced the region as a place for recreation, a focus of envi-
ronmental conservation, and cultural symbol.
F914 2006-010050 978-1-889963-89-1
Empire’s edge; American society in Nome, Alaska, 1898-
1934.
Jones, Preston.
U. of Alaska Press, ©2007 158 p. $19.95 (pa)
They were closer to Siberia than to New York, but those who came to
Nome in its relatively late gold rush never forgot from whence they came.
Jones (history, John Brown U.) shows how and why the white folk who
left their homes for adventure in the north managed to bring their roots
along with them and build an all-American small-town atmosphere in
tundra, trackless frontiers and harbors frozen most of the year. The
result was American popular music, flu pandemics, the Depression, high
school football and women’s garden clubs nestling alongside grizzled
prospectors’ cabin lifestyles and desperate efforts by Native Americans to
retain their culture. The result is a cautionary tale about the imposition
of empire by way of culture as well as an interesting story of mutual sur-
vival that took a long, long time to resolve itself in the cold.
F1219 2006-024758 978-0-915703-62-3
The last Pescadores of Chimalhuacán, Mexico; an
archaeological ethnography.
Parsons, Jeffrey R. (Anthropological papers; Museum of Anthropology,
University of Michigan; no.96)
U of Mich/Mus.of Anthropology, ©2006 377 p. $28.00 (pa)
In the course of doing fieldwork there since the 1960s, Parsons has wit-
nessed considerable environmental decline in the wetlands of the Valley
of Mexico. In comparative context, he examines how aquatic resources
(fauna and flora) are traditionally utilized locally. Images and tables
feature such foci as boats and nets used by the pescadores (fishermen),
remnants of marshlands, and a summary of ethnographic information
from the 16th-20th centuries. The monograph includes maps but lacks a
subject index.
F1221 2006930458 0-7618-3582-2
The sacred mushrooms of Mexico; assorted texts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Brian P. Akers.
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 175 p. $28.00 (pa)
These papers present new research in enthnomycology, the study of the
role of fungi in societies, a discipline that most often focuses on hallu-
cinogenic mushrooms. Five of the six articles are translations from
Spanish that were previously unavailable in English. The sixth is a tran-
script of “The Sacred Mushroom,” an episode of the television series One
Step Beyond. The transcript may record the only program in broadcast
history in which the host ingested hallucinogenic mushrooms and
demonstrated their effects for the viewing pleasure of the home audience.
F1224 2005-046748 0-8061-3701-0
National narratives in Mexico; a history.
Florescano, Enrique. Trans. by Nancy T. Hancock.
U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2006 430 p. $65.00
In examining how national historical narratives have been constructed in
Mexico, the author goes beyond the work of professional historians to
examine conceptions of the past held by the state and in the imagina-
tions of the common people. He traces the development of these varying
narratives of the nation from the ancient peoples of Mesoamerica
through the post-Revolutionary era. His work focuses how cultural influ-
ences of national and ethnic identity influenced evolving concepts of
history and national memory amongst different contending groups of
actors.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
F1236 2006-008377 978-0-87286-477-1
The other campaign; La otra campaña.
Marcos, subcomandante. (Open media series)
City Lights Books, ©2006 175 p. $8.95 (pa)
Since emerging as armed insurgency group from Mexico’s Lacandon
Jungle in 1994, the Zapatistas have constantly shifted their strategic focus
in response to changing political conditions in Mexico. Their latest ini-
tiative is the Other Campaign, so named to indicate their opposition to
and disdain for the Presidential electoral politics happening at the same
time. As part of the Other Campaign, Zapatista spokesman
Subcomandante Marcos and his compañeros have been traveling the
country, seeking to forge connections with other indigenous and
resistance groups. This volume contains the Sixth Declaration of the
Lacandon Jungle, explaining the rationale of the Other Campaign, and a
short interview with Marcos himself, further elaborating. The texts are
presented in both Spanish and English on facing pages.
F1408 2006-012990 978-0-292-71481-6
Heroes and hero cults in Latin America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Samuel Brunk and Ben Fallaw.
U. of Texas Press, ©2006 318 p. $22.95 (pa)
Historians, an art historian, and an anthropologist, all specializing in
Latin America, look at examples of heroes in Latin American history and
at the same time consider the social and cultural as well as political con-
ditions that raised them to such a position. Among the heroes are Simón
Bolívar, Santa Anna, Emiliano Zapata, Augusto Sandino, Frida Kahlo,
and Evita Perón.
F1414 2006-034479 1-58367-151-X
Faces of Latin America, 3d ed.
Green, Duncan.
Monthly Review Press, ©2006 238 p. $19.00 (pa)
For general readers and students, this volume describes the culture and
people of Latin America. Green traces the history and current state of
economics, politics, land and environment, race, gender, and social
movements, and culture and religion in the area. This edition has been
updated to include material on events that have occurred up to 2006.
Green has written other books on Latin America, as well as trade, devel-
opment, and globalization.
F1418 2006-004448 978-0-7425-4098-9
Addicted to failure; U.S. security policy in Latin America
and the Andean region.
Title main entry. Ed. by Brian Loveman. (Latin American silhouettes)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 367 p. $27.95 (pa)
Why, asks Loveman (political science, San Diego State U.), does the United
States continue to pursue policies that exacerbate Latin America’s woes
rather than ameliorate them and that fail to promote Washington’s
declared goals of promoting democracy, human rights, the war on drugs,
and favoring free trade and increased foreign investment? The country
case studies he presents attempt to answer that question by reviewing
American policy towards Colombia, Venezuela, Ecuador, Bolivia, Peru,
Brazil in the post-Cold War years and describing reactions to those
policies by Latin American political and economic actors, including the
growing social movements of the region. In addition to the country
studies, a number of papers discuss the overall security and defense
policy of the United States and the European Union toward the Andean
region.
F1434 2006-008686 978-0-8165-2314-6
Precolumbian water management; ideology, ritual, and
power.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lisa J. Lucero and Barbara W. Fash.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 304 p. $55.00
Anthropologists, geologists, and other scholars explore how water was
conceived, used, and represented in ancient Mesoamerica and what is
now the US Southwest, and the mechanisms that were used to build
upon the sacredness of water to enhance political authority. Among their
case studies are formative period Central Mexico, classic Maya society,
Mexico-Texcoco Lakes during the post-classic period, and the pre-
columbian Southwest.
–84–
F1435 2006-003689 978-0-292-71440-3
Dissident women; gender and cultural politics in Chiapas.
Title main entry. Ed. by Shannon Speed et al.
U. of Texas Press, ©2006 280 p. $22.95 (pa)
Mexican and US anthropologists describe organizing efforts by
indigenous women of Mexico in the region controlled by the EZLN, or
Zapatistas. After presenting key documents, they consider such topics as
the Zapatistas’ demands and the National Indigenous Women’s
Movement, the politics of scale in Mexico, and contesting gender and
ethnic identities through healing.
F1435 2005-482050 1-85759-386-3
Lords of creation; the origins of sacred Maya kingship.
Fields, Virginia M. and Dorie Reents-Budet.
Scala Books, ©2006 287 p. $60.00
Published in conjunction with an exhibition that opened at the Los
Angeles County Museum of Art in September 2005, the catalogue uses art
works to trace the development of the dominant cosmology of
Mesoamerica from the Olmecs through the Maya Early Classic period.
Most of the 152 figures are color photographs. Distributed outside the
Museum by Antique Collectors’ Club.
F1466 2006-010315 978-0-8047-5467-5
Secret history; the CIA’s classified account of its
operations in Guatemala, 1952-1954, 2d ed.
Cullather, Nick.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 176 p. $17.95 (pa)
When the first edition was published in 1999, says Cullather (history,
Indiana U.), his study concerned a secretive episode in the cold war in
Central America, but now it reveals an early precedent for regime change
and the global path of action pursued in the war on terror. He has not
altered the text but appends some of the more significant documents that
were released by the US State Department in 2003.
F1887 2006-009312 978-0-7391-1775-0
Planning the past; heritage tourism and post-colonial
politics at Port Royal.
Waters, Anita M.
Lexington Books, ©2006 125 p. $18.95 (pa)
Waters (sociology and anthropology, Denison U.) presents a study of Port
Royal, Jamaica, to explore how one post-colonial society has reconstructed
its national history and grappled with its colonial past. Coverage includes
Port Royal’s attractions as a site for development planning, the range of
meanings discovered in its history, how it is perceived by different social
and economic constituencies, how the telling of its history has changed
over the years since Jamaica became an independent nation, why so
much planning has remained unrealized, how the social memories of
area residents compare with official versions of history, and what can be
learned by an ethnographic approach to heritage tourism development.
For students of historiography, piracy, Caribbean history and politics,
and heritage tourism.
F2122 2006-000864 978-1-55876-387-6
Inward hunger; the education of a prime minister.
Williams, Eric.
Markus Wiener Pub., ©2006 352 p. $28.95 (pa)
Born in the West Indies in 1911 (when it was still a British Crown
Colony), Eric Williams went on to win a scholarship to study at Oxford
and then taught political science at Howard U. In 1956, he helped found
Trinidad and Tobago’s independence movement and became the state’s
prime minister in 1962. In this autobiography, he reflects on his form-
ative experiences, education, and political career. This reprint of a volume
originally published in 1968 features a new introduction by Colin Palmer
(Princeton U.).
F2161 2006-001496 978-1-55876-401-9
Space and history in the Caribbean.
Lara, Oruno D. Trans. by Christine Ayorinde.
Markus Wiener Pub., ©2006 166 p. $24.95 (pa)
From the perspective of the New Archeology that challenges ethnocentric
and colonial views, Lara (founder, Center of Carribean-American
Research, U. of Paris), treats the Caribbean’s geographical and historical
factors as they relate to the slave trade and current socioeconomic crises
in a region that has long been exploited but not really discovered or con-
quered by Europeans. The book includes a map, historical and demo-
graphic data, and recommended readings. Originally published in
French in 1986 as Les Caraïbes by Presses Universitaires de France.
–85–
F2172 2005-037904 978-1-55876-358-6
Beyond fragmentation; perspectives on Caribbean history.
Title main entry. Ed. by Juanita De Barros et al.
Markus Wiener Pub., ©2006 299 p. $28.95 (pa)
Historians from North America, Europe, and even two from the
Caribbean itself, review and critique past scholarship on areas within the
region colonized by the French, Spanish, Dutch, and English. Among the
topics are books no one has read on slavery in the Dutch Caribbean, the
historiography and methodology of the aftermath of slavery in the
Spanish-speaking Caribbean, and the historiography of decolonization in
the Anglophone Caribbean. There is no index.
F2191 2006-926153 978-0-7618-3447-2
Cultural identity and creolization in national unity; the
multiethnic Caribbean.
Title main entry. Ed. by Prem Misir.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 216 p. $32.00 (pa)
Social scientists from the Caribbean, Britain, and North America, as well
as novelist V. S. Naipaul and former Guyana president Cheddi Jagan,
contribute to an anthology arguing that Creolization retards national
unity and is a manifestation of ethnic dominance, and that each culture
within a society should be respected and allowed to contribute to national
development.
F2230 2006-017975 978-0-8047-5519-1
Now we are citizens; indigenous politics in post-
multicultural Bolivia.
Postero, Nancy Grey.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 294 p. $24.95 (pa)
Indigenous political organizing in Bolivia symbolically culminated
recently with the December, 2005 election of Evo Morales, an indigenous
Aymara, to the presidency and, perhaps more importantly, indigenous
movements are now widely recognized as playing a vanguard role in
Bolivia’s resistance to the dictates of neoliberalism. Postero (anthropology,
U. of California at San Diego) offers a window into the new Bolivian pol-
itics of indigeneity by analyzing the activities of Guaraní leaders involved
in debates over national identity, multiculturalism, neoliberalism, and
democracy at the local, municipal, and regional levels.
F2936 1-902638-68-9
Where the earth ends; a journey beyond Patagonia.
(reprint, 2000)
Harrison, John.
Parthian Books, ©2006 401 p. $15.95 (pa)
In this reprinted travelogue, a UK writer shares his experiences and per-
sonal and area history in trekking to Tierra del Fuego and Antarctica.
Harrison (Royal Geographical Society) met the Yamana and Selk’nam, the
last indigenous peoples of the area, who led a hunter-gatherer lifestyle
until the 1920s. The book includes maps and photos (e.g., of a coming of
age ceremony, Robinson Crusoe Island, penguins). Distributed by Dufour.
F3031 2006-445266 0-297-84633-7
Razor’s edge; the unofficial history of the Falklands War.
Bicheno, Hugh.
Weidenfeld & Nicolson, ©2006 838 p. $37.50
This is an unabashedly pro-British and pro-Thatcher narrative of the war
between Argentina and Britain over the Falklands Islands, that focuses
primarily on the military aspects of the war. While the author blames
Argentine aggressiveness and perceptions of British weakness (justified
in the case of many British politicians, the author argues) for the war, he
is not beyond praising occasional Argentine officers for bravery and mil-
itary competence on criticizing British officials and officers for incom-
petence, lack of planning, and other sins. His coverage of the air, sea, and
land engagements of the war is detailed and comprehensive and attempts
to understand the thinking of decision-makers on both sides of the war
and at the different levels of command.
F3442 2006-010681 978-0-87220-829-2
History of how the Spaniards arrived in Peru; dual-
language edition.
Yupangui, Diego de Castro. Trans. by Catherine Julien.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2006 180 p. $45.00
Written by the son of the last Inca Emperor of Peru, the Relasçion de
como los Españoles Entraron en el Peru (1570), an account of Incan
dealings with the Spaniard following the arrival of Francisco Pizzarro—
centering on the alliance between the authors’ father, Manco Inca
Yupanqui (the half-brother of Atahualpa), and Pizzaro and how it
unraveled—is presented here in English translation side by side with the
original Spanish on facing pages. Translator and editor Julien (history,
Western Michigan U.) also includes an introductory essay and
explanatory footnotes.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
F3442 2006-016436 978-0-87220-843-8
Royal commentaries of the Incas and general history of
Peru; abridged.
Vega, Garcilaso de la. Ed. by Karen Spalding. Trans. by Harold V.
Livermore.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2006 232 p. $45.00
Spalding (history, U. of Connecticut) presents an abridgment of both
volumes of Livermore’s (Spanish and Portuguese, U. of British Columbia)
English translation (U. of Texas Press, 1966) of 16th-century author
Garcilaso de la Vega’s historical narrative of the history and culture of
his native Andes. A new introduction and notes by Spalding place
Garcilaso in his intellectual, historical, and cultural contexts. Academic
but accessible to the general reader interested in the Incas and the history
of Peru.
FC26 978-0-8020-9385-1
Canada’s governors general, 1847-1878; biography and
constitutional evolution.
Messamore, Barbara J.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 308 p. $29.95 (pa)
Marrying constitutional history and political biography, this work ana-
lyzes the changing role of the governor general of Canada between 1847
and 1878. This was the period, according to the author, when the prin-
ciples and practices of responsible government were being worked out,
that constitutional conventions for the governor general being worked
out. Each of the British appointees to the office during this period—Lord
Elgin (1847-54); Sir Edmund Head (1854-61); Lord Monck (1861-8); Sir
John Young, later Lord Lisgar (1868-72); and Lord Dufferin (1872- 8)—are
examined in terms of how their individual characters influenced the
process.
FC106 978-0-7748-1345-7
Race and the city; Chinese Canadian and Chinese
American political mobilization.
Fernando, Shanti.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 173 p. $85.00
Comparatively examining Chinese-American and Chinese-Canadian com-
munities in Los Angeles and Toronto, respectively, through the lens of
critical race theory, Fernando (political science, York U., UK) concentrates
on three major areas of concern: “the racialized nature of Canada and
the United States and the institutions and processes within these coun-
tries that undermine racialized minority groups’ full access to political
participation and substantive citizenship; the histories of Chinese
Canadians, Chinese Americans, and Chineses immigrants to these coun-
tries, the difficulties they faced, and the racialization that has taken
place; and the importance/role of ethnoculturally specific community
groups in the life of racialized minorities.” Although his analysis focuses
on ethnic Chinese populations, he asserts that many of his findings
remain applicable to other racialized minorities in the United States and
Canada. Distributed in the US by the U. of Washington Press.
FC155 978-0-8020-3891-3
To the past; history education, public memory, and
citizenship in Canada.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ruth W. Sandwell.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 131 p. $50.00
These essays examine two areas of Canadian history: history and social
studies as school subjects and history as an intellectual space. Despite
their different approaches to and interest in history education, all of the
authors raise the possibility that the way history is taught as a fixed body
of facts may be linked to deeper questions about the way knowledge,
identity and power are created and sustained in the social system. In her
introduction, Sandwell (history and teacher education, U. of Toronto)
establishes the context for the subsequent essays. Ken Osborne (history,
U. of Manitoba, emeritus) concludes the volume with a synthesis of
important topics in Canadian history education from the past and antic-
ipated in the future.
FC219 978-0-88864-466-4
This wild spirit; women in the Rocky Mountains of
Canada.
Title main entry. Ed. by Colleen Skidmore.
The U. of Alberta Press, ©2006 475 p. $34.95 (pa)
This fascinating volume contains examples of women’s excursions into
the Canadian Rocky Mountains from the late-19th through the mid-20th
century. Skidmore (arts, U. of Alberta) represents these women through
their creative responses to their adventures in paintings, embroidery,
beading, novels, travel writing, letters, diaries, plays, posters and some
remarkable photographs. Distributed by Michigan State U. Press.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
FC246 978-0-7748-1305-1
Canada and the British world; culture, migration, and
identity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Phillip Buckner and R. Douglas Francis.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 356 p. $85.00
The idea of Canada as a “British” nation is a theme that has long run
through English Canadian historiography, until the “Quiet Revolutions”
of the 1960s prompted Canadian historians to begin to emphasize the
North American origins of Canadian identity and history. For editors
Buckner (emeritus, U. of New Brunswick, Canada) and Francis (U. of
Calgary, Canada) and their contributors it seems, historians need not take
an either/or approach to these issues and a renewed interest in the place
of Canada in the “British World” is justified. The 19 papers presented
exemplify this latter approach, perhaps more nuanced than its prede-
cessors, discussing such topics as law and British culture in the creation
of British North America; the “Anglo-Saxon” and the construction of
identity in the late 19th century; responses to the Robert Baden-Powell’s
Boy Scout movement in the pre-World War I era; competing visions of the
First World War in Canada and Britain; teachers from the British Isles in
Saskatchewan rural schools in the 1920s; Canadian culture and identity
at the British Empire Exhibition of 1924-5; the Canadian Radio
Broadcasting Commission of the 1930s and the negotiation of
“Britishness;” and Canadian Labour politics versus the British model
from 1920 to 1950.
FC581 0-88755-690-6
A great restlessness; the life and politics of Dorise
Nielsen.
Johnston, Faith.
Univ. of Manitoba Pr., ©2006 361 p. $24.95 (pa)
Winnipeg-based writer Johnston recounts the life of Nielsen (1902- 80),
who in 1940 became the first communist elected to the Parliament of
Canada, and was a major activist for women’s rights and economic
justice. In 1957 she left Canada for China, where she remained bitter
about Canada and Canadian communists until she died. Distributed in
the U.S. by Michigan State U. Press.
FC633 0-7748-1297-4
Here is hell; Canada’s engagement in Somalia.
Dawson, Grant.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2007 230 p. $85.00
Substantially revising his 2003 doctoral dissertation for Carleton
University, Dawson (political science, Carleton U. and history, U. of
Ottawa) critically examines the Canadian government’s decision-making
process that resulting in sending military forces to Somalia in 1992-93, a
mission that ended in recrimination and scandal. Most assessment have
been harshly critical of the commanders and troops in the field and
senior military leaders in Canada, but he challenges that interpretation
of pre-deployment decisions and the operations in Somalia. Distributed
in the US by University of Washington Press.
FC3250 1-55238-197-8
Zhorna; material culture of the Ukrainian pioneers.
Fodchuk, Roman Paul.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 156 p. $39.95 (pa)
Using the symbol of the zhorma, a stone mill used to grind grain into
flour, Fodchuk (a planning and landscape design professional in Canada)
details the character of Ukrainian settlers in western Canada, their
immigration journey, and their material culture. His own childhood is
part of the story, which is supplemented with color and b&w photos and
drawings of the people and objects he describes. Material was also drawn
from memoirs and collections at the Shadro Museum and the Ukrainian
Cultural Heritage Village in Canada. Introductions by scholars Robert
Klymasz and John Lehr provide information on the culture and historical
background. Distributed by Michigan State U. Press.
For information about BookNews Online, visit www.paratext.com, or link to it
from our newly revamped website: www.booknews.com. You’ll have access
to the entire Book News database (over 200,000 reviews), with a powerful
search engine. Trial subscriptions are available.
–86–
FC3661 978-1-55238-196-0
Alberta formed—Alberta transformed; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Payne et al.
The U. of Alberta Press, ©2006 808 p. $100.00
A product of the work of the Alberta 2005 Centennial History Society, this
two-volume work brings together a range of historians, political scientists,
economists, and archaeologists, each of whom was charged with writing
a study of a particular year in the history of the Canadian province of
Alberta, selected because they represent key political, economic, social,
legal, environmental, or cultural turning points in the history of the
region. This has resulted in a diverse set of 31 essays intended to give
readers a sense of the broad sweep of Albertan history and varied ways
it can be interpreted. The first volume explores topics prior to the official
proclamation of Alberta, such as the record of a massive volcanic
eruption over 7,000 years ago, the lifeways of aboriginal people on the
Alberta plains a thousand years ago, the smallpox epidemic of 1781-1782,
reorganization of the fur trade in the 1820s, military rebellion in 1870,
and the signing of treaties with Alberta First Nations. Topics in the
second volume include economic depression in 1913, experiences of
World War I, the social credit revolution of 1935, oil politics and eco-
nomics in 1951, community identity and the Golden Jubilee of 1955,
national and provincial government conflict over oil in 1980, and rural
and urban demographic trajectories in 1996. The set is illustrated
throughout with two-tone photographs, drawings, maps, and other
images. Co-published with the U. of Calgary Press and distributed in the
US by Michigan State U. Press.
FC3661 1-55238-144-7
Creating citizens; history and identity in Alberta’s schools,
1905-1980.
Heyking, Amy Von.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 216 p. $34.95 (pa)
By examining history and social studies curricula and textbooks used in
Alberta schools from 1905 to 1980, von Heyking (elementary education,
U. of Alberta) demonstrates the ways Albertans were inculcated into the
culture and shaped into Albertans. V on Heyking explores the process of
curriculum and provides insights into current debates about the purpose
and content of public education. Distributed by Michigan State U. Press.
GEOGRAPHY, ENVIRONMENT, TOURISM
G63 2005-027695 0-8160-6307-9
Encyclopedia of the world’s nations and cultures; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by George Thomas Kurian.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2006 2718 p. $380.00
Kurian (president, International Encyclopedia Society) presents an
“extensive overhaul” of his 2002 Encyclopedia of the World’s Nations,
expanding the focus on culture for the 190 entries from the previous
work and the new entries on the Marshall Islands, Micronesia, and East
Timor, hence the change of title. As with the older edition, each entry
focuses on a particular country and includes statistical and descriptive
information on such topics as the climate and weather, the population,
ethnic composition, religions, history, the constitution, national and local
governments, the legal system, foreign policy and the military, human
rights, the economy, health, food and nutrition, status of women, work,
education, science and technology, and the media, as well as a
chronology. For this edition, new sections have been include on flora and
fauna, lists of modern rulers, living conditions, work, folklore and
mythology, entertainment and recreation, etiquette, family life, personal
appearance, and sports. The fourth and final volume of the set includes
a reference resources section cataloging relevant titles for further
research, comparative statistics for all countries, and a subject index.
–87–
G63 1-4144-1089-1
Worldmark encyclopedia of the nations, 12th ed.; 5v.
Title main entry.
Thomson Gale, ©2007 3539 p. $535.00
★★★★ This five-volume encyclopedia opens with a volume dedicated to
the United Nations and its various agencies. It describes the structure,
history, and activities of the various UN organizations and programs, as
well as other international governance bodies from the International
Atomic Energy Agency to the World Bank. This volume also contains
glossaries of religious holidays and special terms, a guide to abbrevia-
tions and acronyms, and conversion tables. The next four volumes, cov-
ering Africa, the Americas, Asia and Oceania, and Europe in turn,
contain 194 entries providing information on individual countries of the
world. Each entry is broad in coverage, including discussion of the
country’s currency, weights and measures, holidays, religion, demog-
raphy, transportation, political history and institutions, economy, indus-
trial sectors, science and technology, domestic and foreign trade, balance
of payments, public finance, taxes and customs, social development,
health, housing, education, cultural institutions, media, tourism and
recreation, and famous persons. Each entry also contains a bibliographic
guide to further reading. Earlier editions have been cited in Books for
College Libraries (third edition) and in Public Library Catalog.
G73 2006-023743 1-59158-361-6
Teaching global literacy using mnemonics.
Ebbesmeyer, Joan.
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 162 p. $25.00 (pa)
Ebbesmeyer, a retired teacher now at Missouri Baptist U., explains how
to teach world geography using mnemonics. Her additional aims are to
help teachers educate students about cultural differences, global facts,
using critical and creative thinking, and to strengthen reading. Chapters
are organized by continent and connected to the US National Geography
Standards. They include annotated lists of picture and chapter books,
maps, sample activities and reproducible worksheets, and stories linking
mnemonics.
G80 2006-015162 0-313-32043-8
Maritime exploration in the age of discovery, 1415-1800.
Love, Ronald S. (Greenwood guides to historic events, 1500-1900)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 195 p. $45.00
Aimed at student researchers at the high school and beginning under-
graduate levels, this text covers the maritime exploration that drove
European trade and imperial expansion during the period 1415- 1800.
Following a chronology and historical overview, Love (history, U. of West
Georgia) describes early Portuguese expeditions along the African coast.
Other topics include the Spanish discovery of the Americas, the search
for a northern passage to China, and the exploration of the Pacific.
Supplementary materials include biographical profiles, excerpts from
primary documents, a glossary, and an annotated bibliography.
G80 2006-047184 978-0-393-06259-5
Pathfinders; a global history of exploration.
Fernández-Armesto, Felipe.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 428 p. $27.95
Fernández-Armesto (Spanish culture and civilization, Tufts U.) presents
an historical survey of exploration, from the first trail finders from gath-
ering cultures and great empires to the great explorers of the 19th and
20th centuries, including Columbus, Cabor, Da Gama, Cook, Burton,
Livingstone, Stanley, Shackleton, Peary, and Scott. The text is illustrated
throughout with b&w and color maps, diagrams, and photographs.
Academic but accessible to the general reader.
G140 2006-389753 978-1-905119-06-6
Between the wind and the water; World Heritage Orkney.
Wickham-Jones, Caroline.
Windgather Press, ©2006 178 p. $35.00 (pa)
An archaeologist specializing in the early settlement of Scotland,
Wickham-Jones now lives on Orkney, which she has studied for three
decades. She describes and discusses four great monuments on the
island, and places them in the context of the people who built them and
lived among them. She includes Mesolithic and early Neolithic times,
Skara Brae, Maeshowe burials, the Ring of Brodgar, the Bronze and Iron
Ages, the coming and going of peoples into the 20th century, and the
arrival of antiquarians and archaeologists.Distributed in the US by the
David Brown Book Company.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
G155 2006-042016 978-1-84376-104-4
International handbook on the economics of tourism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Larry Dwyer and Peter Forsyth.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 495 p. $255.00
Leading scholars summarize current thinking on the major topics in
tourism economics. Each of 21 chapters follows a common format that
addresses a particular topic’s importance, outlines its main contribu-
tions/themes, reviews the existing literature, and suggests directions for
future research. Some of the subjects covered include tourism demand
forecasting; pricing principles for natural and cultural attractions;
alliances in the airline industry; and public sector investment in tourism
infrastructure. Editor Dwyer teaches at the U. of New South Wales,
Australia, and Forsyth is a professor at Monash U.
G155 2006-012522 978-0-7546-4775-1
Tourism and borders; contemporary issues, policies, and
international research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Helmut Wachowiak. (New directions in
tourism analysis)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 275 p. $99.95
Bringing together case studies from Europe, the US and Southern Africa,
these articles discuss current issues and policies, destination man-
agement and communication, and planning in cross- border areas. The
authors, who are specialists in the geography of tourism and recreation,
and in tourism management, consider borders as tourist attractions and
destinations, as barriers to travel and the growth of tourism, and bound-
aries as links of transit and contributors to the growth of supranation-
alism. They find that many borders that have traditionally hosted
large-scale tourism are becoming more difficult to cross due to concerns
about safety and illegal immigration, and that places once forbidden to
foreigners are now opening up and new destinations are becoming more
commonplace.
G155 2005-031478 978-0-7890-3208-9
Tourism crises; management responses and theoretical
insight.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eric Laws and Bruce Prideaux.
Haworth Pr., ©2005 160 p. $29.95 (pa)
Laws and Prideaux, both affiliated with James Cook University,
Australia, present the latest research on crisis management in the
tourism industry. They examine tourism flows and the economic well-
being of communities at the regional, national, and international levels,
discussing issues such as crisis communication, employee safety, and
methods for maintaining yield during crisis situations. Case studies look
at the industry’s responses to the September 11th attacks, the SARS epi-
demic, and the 1999 Austrian avalanche disaster. The book has been co-
published simultaneously as Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing, vol.
19, nos. 2/3, 2005.
G155 978-1-84541-050-6
Tourism in the Middle East; continuity, change and
transformation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rami Farouk Daher.
Channel View Publications, ©2007 325 p. $64.95 (pa)
Scholars of tourism, anthropology, architecture, literature, and other
fields—some in the West and some in the Middle East—offer perspectives
besides typical Orientalist conceptions or the fear of military and political
instability. Their topics include a historiography of tourism in Cairo, the
portrayal of the Arab world in tourism advertising, and tourism and
power relations in Jordan. There is no index. Distributed in the US by
UTP Distribution.
G155 2005-935565 978-1-4129-2294-4
Travel and tourism.
Sharpley, Richard. (Sage course companions; knowledge and skills for
success.)
Sage Publications, ©2006 232 p. $99.00
Designed as a companion text for undergraduate courses in travel and
tourism, this gives background on why tourism may be the world’s
largest industry, why it a major social phenomenon and a significant
factor in the economic, environmental and socio-cultural conditions of
destinations, and why it deserves serious academic study. Compact and
accessible, this focusing on the idea that the study is necessarily inter-
disciplinary, and covers such topics as changes and increases in demand,
the role of air transport, accommodations, attractions, tour operations,
retailing and marketing, strategy, tourism’s typical role in development,
planning, visitor management, urban and rural tourism, and contem-
porary issues such as exploitation and appropriation. A section explains
skills students will need, including tips for lectures and seminars, essay-
writing and revisions, and exams.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
G156 2006-023764 978-0-7890-3117-4
Cultural tourism; global and local perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Greg Richards.
Haworth Hospitality Press, ©2007 347 p. $34.95 (pa)
Initiated in 1991, the Cultural Tourism Research Project of the
Association for Tourism and Leisure Education (ATLAS) has drawn upon
the expertise of 85 collaborators on five continents. This volume contains
papers originally presented by ATLAS members at an October 2003
meeting held in Barcelona. The 16 case studies and essays address such
issues as the impact of globalism on the distinctiveness of place, and her-
itage as a tool for formal and informal learning. Editor Richards has
directed a number of ATLAS projects for the European Commission.
G156 2006-017791 978-1-84541-043-8
Cultural tourism in a changing world; politics,
participation and (re)presentation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Melanie K. Smith & Mike Robinson. (Tourism
and cultural change; 7)
Channel View Publications, ©2006 303 p. $54.95 (pa)
Thirty international academics, consultants, and researchers contribute
19 chapters examining theoretical aspects of cultural tourism and its rela-
tionship to heritage and the arts as evidenced by case studies from cap-
italist, communist and postcolonial settings. Coverage includes cultural
policy and politics, notions of community participation and empow-
erment, issues of authenticity and commodification, and interpretation
in cultural tourism. Collectively the chapters reveal the contested
processes of transforming and mobilizing culture for touristic purposes
in relation to changing contexts, and enable the reader to see that cul-
tural tourism is a political process, or at least a set of economic transac-
tions that have political impacts. No subject index.
G463 2006-925351 1-60105-005-4
The cruise of the Brooklyn; a journal of the principal
events of a three years’ cruise in the U. S. flag-ship
Brooklyn, in the South Atlantic station, extending south of
the equator from... (reprint, 1885)
Beehler, W. H.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2006 341 p. $29.95 (pa)
The USS Brooklyn, a wooden screw sloop launched in 1858 and decom-
missioned in 1889, made four cruises in South American water between
the end of the Civil War and her decommissioning. This work, first pub-
lished in 1885, describes the events of the third of these cruises, which
lasted from 1881 to 1884, as well as the subsequent voyage to Africa and
Madagascar. The material, for the most part, was taken from the pages
of the ship’s on-board newspaper, the Brooklyn Eagle, and was authored
by one of the ship’s officers. The text is presented in facsimile form with
no ancillary materials.
G590 978-1-905172-09-2
Captain Francis Crozier; last man standing?
Smith, Michael.
The Collins Press, ©2006 242 p. $36.95
Adding to his list of biographies, Smith recounts the life of Crozier (1796-
1849), whose nearly four decades of sea exploration included three great
expeditions to navigate the North West Passage, reach the North Pole, and
map the Antarctic. He was a modest man, says Smith, who received
scant reward, never wrote a book, and faded from history soon after his
death. Distributed in the US by Dufour Editions.
G860 2006-275178 0-7414-2912-8
Courage, sacrifice, devotion; the men and women of the
“Puckered Penguins” the ice pirates; the history of the
United States Navy Antarctic Air Squadron VXE-Six; a
proud pioneering Antarctic air unit.
Gillespie, Noel.
Infinity Publishing Co., ©2005 513 p. $35.95 (pa)
This account relates the experiences of Antarctic aviators who served in
the US Navy VX-6 and VXE-6 Squadron from its establishment in 1955 to
its decommission in 1999. Gillespie begins with a description of
Operation Deep Freeze and gives details about achievements, historic
flights, crashes, the squadron’s helicopter crews, commercial flights to
the area, and the recent all-female crew. About 150 pages of b&w photos
are provided. Squadron commanders, those who died, personnel and
locations named after them, and planes they flew are listed in the appen-
dices. Gillespie is an architectural design consultant and freelance avi-
ation writer and lives in New Zealand.
–88–
G1021 978-0-19-531321-5
Oxford atlas of the world, 13th ed. (fold-out map
included)
Title main entry.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 448 p. $80.00
Justifiably renowned for the superb quality of their maps, Oxford U.
Press presents this 13th edition of its fairly affordable, handsome, large
scale (11.25x14.75″) world atlas, with maps that show careful attention to
quality and clarity, as well as providing accurate and fully up-to-date
data. New to this edition are new maps of Ethiopia and the Horn of
Africa; the Mediterranean basin and eastern Mediterranean; large-scale
maps for numerous islands in the Pacific, the Caribbean, and off the
coast of Africa; southwest Asia; Korea and Taiwan; and Kazakhastan and
Central Asia. Maps are included reflecting current events, including new
maps of Iraq, Israel, southern Lebanon, and Afghanistan.
G1105 978-1-55407-207-1
Firefly atlas of North America; United States, Canada &
Mexico.
Title main entry.
Firefly Books Ltd., ©2006 272 p. $55.00
An atlas’s most important feature must be its maps, and readers will not
be disappointed with these. Published in an oversized format (11x14.5″)
to make poring over the pages more satisfying, the maps are grouped
according to location in the country rather than alphabetically, so
Washington and Oregon are found on adjacent pages, for example, in
parallel with their locations. The maps are detailed, clearly indicating
physical features. Maps for 41 cities and a gazetteer is provided.
G1210 0-8416-2811-4
Road atlas; United States, Canada, Mexico; 2007.
Title main entry.
American Map Corporation, ©2007 144 p. $12.95 (pa)
For those who retain primitive preference for paper maps and those who
know enough to have a reliable low-tech reference available for when
electronics fail, this spiral bound atlas, which measures, 11x15″, presents
state and major city maps: a page for the small states, and more pages
for the bigger states. Supplementary material includes info on tourist
attractions, national parks, and notable drives.
G1541 2006-051197 978-0-7656-1598-5
An atlas and survey of Latin American history.
Larosa, Michael J. and Germán R. Mejía.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 169 p. $26.69 (pa)
Historians Larosa (Rhodes College, Tennessee) and Mejía (Pontificia U.
Javeriana, Bogatá, Colombia) present a synthetic portrait of the inter-
action between physical geography and human history since the first
arrival of people in that part of the Americas later colonized by countries
with a mostly Latin-derived language—primarily Spanish, Portuguese,
and French. The maps, designed to inform rather than dazzle, are line-
drawn with gray-scale shading.
GA66 978-1-84682-036-6
The Irish ordnance survey; history, culture and memory.
(reprint, 2005)
Doherty, Gillian M.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 237 p. $29.95 (pa)
Though he does not aspire to a comprehensive study of the 1824 Ordance
Survey memoir scheme, Doherty (history, U. College Cork) offer a critical
assessment of the cultural and historical work of what he considers one
of the most important intellectual endeavors of the 19th century, and one
that had profound implications for nationality. Among his perspectives
are the idea of improvement, staff and activities, the rural poor and
popular culture, and the cult of genealogy. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
GA102 0-7165-3372-3
Civilizing Ireland; ordnance survey 1824-1842;
ethnography, cartography, translation.
Cadhla, Stiofán Ó.
Irish Academic Press, ©2007 280 p. $75.00
Cadhla (folklore and ethnology, National U. of Ireland-Cork) discusses the
many dimensions of Ireland that the survey measured and recorded, as
well as the assumptions the surveyors incorporated into their work and
the those its interpreters drew from it. She considers topographic and
antiquarian vision; the emergence of folklore and ethnology; race, place,
and language; fieldwork, mimicry, and method; and translation,
Anglicization, and culture. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–89–
GA201 978-2-503-51726-1
Fra Mauro’s world map; with a commentary and
translations of the inscriptions. (CD-ROM and fold-out
map included)
Falchetta, Piero. (Terrarvm Orbis: History of the representation of space
in text and image; v.5)
Brepols Publishers, ©2006 829 p. $156.00
Composed around 1450, Fra Mauro’s map of the world has long been rec-
ognized as a masterpiece of western cartography and has been repro-
duced and cited in hundreds of books. This in-depth examination of the
document is the result of a collaborative effort between historians and
scholars at the Biblioteca Nazionale Marciana and the CIRCE at Venice’s
IUAV University. It has been translated from Italian by Jeremy Scott (affil-
iation not cited). The CD-ROM contains a high-resolution image of the
map, along with software allowing for “navigation” between the map
and its inscriptions. A color fold-out map is also included with the
volume. Distributed in the U.S. by The David Brown Book Company.
GA201 2006-001247 0-275-99135-0
The power of projections; how maps reflect global politics
and history.
Klinghoffer, Arthur Jay.
Praeger, ©2006 192 p. $49.95
In cartography, projection is the technique of representing the curved
surface of the earth on a two-dimensional map; in political science, the
projection of power is a polite way of saying military bullying.
Klinghoffer (political science, Rutgers U.) finds that the two are not that
different, and shows how the manner of making maps through the ages
have reflected the political philosophies and aspirations of those who
commissioned and used them.
GA201 978-1-58297-464-4
To the ends of the earth; 100 maps that changed the
world.
Harwood, Jeremy.
F&W Publications, ©2006 192 p. $35.00
These 100 maps demonstrate that the history of maps is also the history
of humankind’s changing relationship with the world. The maps are
organized into sections on the ancient, classical, and medieval worlds,
the age of discovery, the age of empire, and the modern world. The
volume contains every sort of map from drawings found in Idaho, c.
10,000 B.C.E. to NASA’s Blue Marble Maps of the world. The text includes
a chronology and a list of resources for further study.
GB5014 2006-028268 978-92-808-1135-3
Measuring vulnerability to natural hazards; towards
disaster resilient societies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jörn Birkmann.
United Nations University Pr., ©2006 524 p. $39.00 (pa)
The contributors of these 24 articles advocate discerning the worst
hazards, creating direct and proactive programs, and investing in
measures that are part of a sustainable economic and social system.
Articles give basic principles and theories, frameworks designed to
measure vulnerability and promote disaster-resilient societies, the role of
social levels, indicators of user needs, the environmental components of
vulnerability, turning to global, national, subnational and local
approaches to indexing hazards, including the Disaster Risk Index and a
human security index. They show how these approaches apply with
surveys including those of the Americas and Europe and case studies of
programs.
GC222 978-92-1-120473-5
Moving forward post-tsunami; voices of the vulnerable.
Title main entry. Ed. by ESCAP.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 119 p. $54.00 (pa)
In response to the tsunami that hit eight Asian countries in December
2004, the UN Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific
(ESCAP) initiated a project to increase understanding of how this natural
disaster affected people who were particularly vulnerable due to social
marginalization, disability status, age and gender. Studies were commis-
sioned in Indonesia, Sri Lanka, and Thailand and national workshops
were organized in those countries. An introductory chapter detailing the
project and offering a summary of key findings and recommendations
is followed by chapters describing the individual studies of the three
countries. Summary reports of the national workshops and a regional
workshop held in 2005 are also included. No subject index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
GE40 2006-006338 978-0-8165-2461-7
The origins of modern environmental thought.
De Steiguer, J. Edward.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 246 p. $24.95 (pa)
De Steiguer (natural resources economics and policy, U. of Arizona) starts
where most people do, with the 1962 publication of Rachel Carson’s Silent
Spring. From there he looks at environmental and natural resource
scholars who followed her during the 1960s and 1970s. Among them are
Barry Commoner, Garett Hardin, Paul Ehrlich, Roderick Nash, Lynn
White, and E. F. Schumacher. Earlier versions of some of the material
appeared in his 1997 The Age of Environmentalism.
GE180 90-420-2123-3
Building sustainable communities; environmental justice
& global citizenship.
Title main entry. Ed. by J.D. Wulfhorst and Anne K. Haugestad.
Editions Rodopi, ©2006 236 p. $65.00 (pa)
Scholars and practitioners in natural and social sciences, business, and
other realms argue for the importance of building sustainable commu-
nities, and offer reports and illustrations of the process from Europe,
North America, and Australia. The 14 papers are from a February 2004
Ecological Justice and Global Citizenship conference in Copenhagen. They
are not indexed.
GE180 2006-024722 978-1-58826-460-2
Governing the environment; the transformation of
environmental regulation.
Eisner, Marc Allen.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 322 p. $59.95
Although he finds the achievements of the Environmental Protection
Agency over the course of the past few decades to be impressive, Eisner
(public policy and government, Wesleyan U.) argues that there is a need
to integrate recent private sector innovations—advances in corporate envi-
ronmental management, the development of environmental codes by
trade associations, and the global dissemination of international envi-
ronmental standards—into the public regulatory framework into a system
of environmental governance wherein regulators, standard-setting organ-
izations, associations, and corporations cooperate towards achieving
environmental goals. He first describes the historical development of the
core public and private elements of his proposed framework in the US
and at the international level, concluding with a discussion of how to
incorporate them into his conceived system of environmental governance.
GE195 2006-040862 978-0-582-77297-7
Environmentalism.
Peterson del Mar, David.
Pearson / Longman, ©2006 214 p. $15.95 (pa)
The publisher’s Big Ideas series offers brief, accessible, jargon-free sum-
maries of ideas that shaped the 20th century and continue to shape the
present. This conveniently sized (5.25x8″) overview explores the recurring
tension between conservation and preservation, emphasizing the com-
plexities, factions, and paradoxes of environmentalism. It considers a
range of conservation and preservation movements as well as less
organized forms of nature loving, such as ecotourism, and argues that
many of these activities distract from the hard work of creating a sus-
tainable relationship with the natural environment. A timeline, a list of
major figures, margin notes, and boxes on key concepts, groups, and
individuals are included. Peterson del Mar has taught environmental
history at colleges in Canada and the US and has published four books
on social history.
GE195 2006-016905 0-7619-8750-9
Volatile places; a sociology of communities and
environmental controversies.
Gunter, Valerie and Steve Kroll-Smith.
Pine Forge Press, ©2007 241 p. $34.95 (pa)
In a series of case studies, Gunter (sociology, U. of New Orleans) and
Kroll-Smith (sociology, U, of North Carolina, Greensboro) examine what
happens when environments and communities collide and all the
baggage of the past comes open. With special emphasis on the aftermath
of Hurricane Katrina, they examine the building of trust in government
and its destruction by what locals perceive as betrayal, the problems
superimposed by incomplete or erroneous information, perceptions of
fair treatment in crisis, social capital as a factor in response, and the
complex response to the equally complex relationship between social per-
ceptions and physical realities.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
GE197 0-9777971-0-4
A democracy built to last; Green/Populist steps toward a
livable future.
Beattie, Robert.
Applecart Books, ©2006 327 p. $17.95 (pa)
Much of American political thinking is based on the implicit assumption
of the value of ongoing economic growth. This work argues that failure
to recognize the impossibility of continuing economic growth in a finite
world is what has given rise to a host of problems, including economic
disparities, environmental despoliation, industrialized agriculture, and
failed health and education systems. It counterposes the idea of sustain-
ability and sketches out how American politics might look if we were to
prioritize sustainability.
GE197 2006-024499 0-275-98535-0
Eco-terrorism; radical environmental and animal
liberation movements.
Liddick, Donald R.
Praeger, ©2006 189 p. $39.95
Adopting the terminology of the hard right in the US, Liddick (adminis-
tration of justice, U. of Pittsburgh-Greensburg) explains not only how
environmental and animal rights movements break laws, but also
explains what they think and how they feel while they do it.
GF21 2006-004723 978-0-8139-2576-9
Pilgrimage to Vallombrosa; from Vermont to Italy in the
footsteps of George Perkins Marsh.
Elder, John. (Under the sign of nature)
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 282 p. $29.95
Elder (English and environmental studies, Middlebury College) recounts
his trip to Italy following pioneering conservationist Marsh, who was
born in Woodstock, Vermont in 1801, and died at Vallombrosa, in the
mountains of eastern Tuscany, in 1882. The three sections focus in turn
on Tuscany, the literature of a prophetic tradition in conservation as
exemplified by Marsh’s 1864 Man and Nature, and evidence of his
influence in the Vermont landscape today.
GF676 2006-014199 978-0-7591-0739-7
Cows, kin, and globalization; an ethnography of
sustainability.
Crate, Susan A. (Globalization and the environment)
AltaMira Press, ©2006 355 p. $75.00
This is an ethnography of the indigenous Sakha people of subarctic
Russia and is also written as, in the words of Crate (human ecology,
George Mason U.), “an ethnography of sustainability by exploring how
communities balance adaptation and resilience in the crossfire of glob-
alizing and modernizing forces.” His multi-sited analysis seeks to connect
local experience with wider forces by looking at how the Sakha
developed a “cows-and-kin” food production system in response to the
collapse of the Soviet Union, examining Sakha responses to Soviet and
post-Soviet industrial environmental degradation; and comparing the
Sakha experience to Canadian indigenous experiences with diamond
mining.
ANTHROPOLOGY
GN2 2006-000280 978-0-915703-61-6
West African early towns; archaeology of households in
urban landscapes.
Holl, Augustin F.C. (Anthropological papers; no.95)
U of Mich/Mus.of Anthropology, ©2006 168 p. $26.00 (pa)
From an anthropological archaeological perspective, Holl analyzes the
spatial organization of the inhabited space in medieval towns of West
Africa, giving special attention to material excavated from the acropolis
of Awdaghost, also known as Tegdaoust, dating to about 900-1500. He
places the findings there with in the larger context of towns in the region,
and compares them to early Arabic historical descriptions of the town.
He does not provide an index.
–90–
GN17 978-0-7748-1272-6 GN50 2006-92846 0-495-09399-8
Historicizing Canadian anthropology. Lab manual and workbook for physical anthropology, 6th
Title main entry. Ed. by Julia Harrison and Regna Darnell. ed.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 338 p. $85.00 France, Diane L.
Is there a distinctly Canadian tradition of anthropology? This is the over- Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2007 349 p. $60.95 (pa)
arching question guiding this collection these 21 papers seeking to set the This supplemental textbook explores specific topics in-depth and provides
development of Canadian anthropology and the activities and theories of exercises for applying the concepts of genetics, biological classification,
Canadian anthropologist in historical perspective. Harrison (anthro- human osteology, and hominid evolution. Color photographs of skeletal
pology, Trent U., Canada) and Darnell (anthropology, U. of Western remains are provided. Spiral binding and perforated pages. The sixth
Ontario, Canada) place the papers into sections that grapple with the edition adds chapters on human growth and development, and inten-
basic problems and issues of historicizing Canadian anthropology, his- tional modification and anomalies.
torically situate anthropological “subjects,” document institutional rela-
tions in the field, and consider comparisons with and connections to GN281 978-0-7734-5682-2
other national traditions. From language as speech to language as thought; the
great leap in evolution (40,000 B.C.).
GN20 2006-013216 1-59874-083-0
Westendorp, Grard.
Women in anthropology; autobiographical narratives and Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 295 p. $119.95
social history. Published posthumously by his partner, Angeline Westendorp-van
Title main entry. Ed. by Maria G. Cattell and Marjorie M. Schweitzer. Roosmalen, Westendorp’s (1948-2001) text explores the evolution in
Left Coast Press, ©2006 259 p. $29.95 (pa) humans from a species capable of verbal communication to one capable
They had no intellectual maps, many had no mentors, and quite a few of verbal thought. Coverage includes an examination of what our pre-
had no help on that “second shift” of keeping a family together and rel- verbal ancestors looked like and what their capacities were, particularly
atively well-fed and clean. Some of them went back to school, some of in a cognitive sense, before they split off from the common evolutionary
them never left, but all of them were looked upon as odd creatures who tree; the transition from a hominid using a few words to improve com-
did not really fit in. In these 17 narratives by pioneering academics and munication to a species that can consciously control what goes on it its
other researchers, the mere process of getting accepted to a doctoral mind whenever and wherever it so chooses; and analyses of three aspects
program, getting to the university in question, and being taking seriously of modern human life—from medicine, psychology, and sociology—to
was monumental; getting their field work and dissertation proposals explore how the evolution of verbal communication and thought affect
approved nearly took superhuman powers. The work they produced chal- what we are, how we think and why we act as we do.
lenged every sexist and ageist aspect of academia. Aside from its value
as social history, this also tells new academic women how it was, and GN296 2006-019726 1-59874-034-2
how it should never again be. Witches, westerners, and HIV; AIDS and cultures of
blame in Africa.
GN21 2004-044182 978-0-7391-1777-4
Rödlach, Alexander.
Robert Redfield and the development of American Left Coast Press, ©2006 247 p. $29.95 (pa)
anthropology. (reprint 2004) A Catholic priest now at the Anthropos Institute in Florida, Rödlach con-
Wilcox, Clifford. ducted field work as an anthropologist in Zimbabwe during the 1990s.
Lexington Books, ©2006 235 p. $27.95 (pa) Here he discusses how people there choose between and combine various
This is a paperbound reprint of a 2004 book. In his studies of “transi- causes both of the disease and of the illness and suffering it produces.
tional” Mexican peasant communities, University of Chicago anthropol- Like westerners, he says, they attribute causes that have meaning in their
ogist Redfield (1897-1957) was one of the first to challenge the historical culture.
anthropological approach, pioneered by Franz Boas, which eschewed
generalization and evolutionary thinking. He was also important in the GN316 2006-046621 978-0-07-353095-6
debates over the nature and purpose of social science in general. This Cultural anthropology, 12th ed. (CD-ROM included)
work examines his career, assessing his contributions to anthropological Kottak, Conrad Phillip.
theory and social science methodology. McGraw-Hill, ©2008 390+ p. $113.25 (pa)
GN25 2006-046622 978-0-07-353094-9 With an emphasis on the diversity of cultures around the world, this
textbook introduces undergraduates to the study of cultural anthro-
Anthropology; the exploration of human diversity, 12th pology. Pedagogical tools include chapter summaries, highlighted key
ed. terms, and critical thinking questions. The 12th edition features a new
Kottak, Conrad Phillip. chapter on the evolutionary origins of human culture. A “Living
McGraw-Hill, ©2008 594+ p. $115.05 (pa) Anthropology” CD-ROM contains 25 video clips, each corresponding to a
With an emphasis on human diversity, this textbook introduces under- chapter in the text.
graduates to the study of anthropology. All four sub-disciplines of the
field—cultural, archaeological, biological/physical, and linguistic—are GN316 0-8020-9111-3
covered, and connections are made to prominent current issues and The neo-primitivist turn; critical reflections on alterity,
approaches. About two dozen “Living Anthropology” video clips are culture, and modernity.
found on the accompanying CD-ROM. Li, Victor.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 292 p. $50.00
GN25 2006-922137 978-0-7618-3454-0
Primitive, a category invented by the modern West to denigrate other
Reflections on theory and history in anthropology. people, and has been abandoned as not politically correct. Li (English, U.
Salamone, Frank A. of Toronto) looks at neo-primitivism, a rejection of primitivism that
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 246 p. $35.00 (pa) allows it to reappear in new and more acceptable forms. He show how
Salamone (sociology, Iona College) examines his work in cultural anthro- it functions in the writings of postmodernist theory, literary and cultural
pology over the past 30 years, relating his field and archival work to his studies, cultural anthropology, and philosophical modernity.
ideas on anthropology’s history and the development of its theory, with
a close focus on issues of race and ethics. He comments on the work of GN345 2006-045613 978-0-202-30861-6
Frank Boas and the construction of race in relation to the development Description and comparison in cultural anthropology.
of African American studies, ethnographic writing, indirect rule, the (reprint, 1970)
image of the body, the affects of diaspora, meaning in music and
Goodenough, Ward H.
religion, maturity, rituals and shamans, views on death, the ongoing role
AldineTransaction, ©2006 173 p. $24.95 (pa)
of the missionary, ethnic boundary markers, colonialism and the cre-
ation of ethnic identity, contradictions under colonialism and pater- Goodenough (emeritus anthropology, U. of Pennsylvania) illustrates some
nalism, fashion in the 1950s, and, more than once, the pervading note of of the difficulties anthropologists have had in overcoming ethnocentrism
Jazz. The result is a memoir of a purposeful, insight-seeking, working life when describing and comparing features of other cultures. The four
in anthropology. essays cover marriage and family, kindred and clan, sibling and cousin,
and general and particular. They were delivered as the 1968 Lewis Henry
Morgan Lectures at the University of Rochester.

–91– Reference & Research Book News February 2007

GN345 2006-008020 978-0-472-09945-0
Documents; artifacts of modern knowledge.
Title main entry. Ed. by Annelise Riles.
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 243 p. $65.00
Pivoting on the document as one particular ethnographic artifact, mostly
US anthropologists explore how ethnographers conceive, grasp, appre-
ciate, and see patterns rather than engage in the experimentation and
analysis that are standard methodology in the social sciences. Documents
were chosen as the lens because of their very centrality to social sciences,
and so as an extreme example of how ethnographic knowledge differs
from other types of knowledge.
GN345 2006-006854 1-4129-1442-6
An introduction to intercultural communication; identities
in a global community, 5th ed.
Jandt, Fred E.
Sage Publications, ©2007 444 p. $59.95 (pa)
Jandt’s (communication, California State U.) textbook is designed for
introductory courses in culture and communication at the sophomore or
junior level in departments of communication, business, and anthro-
pology, and assumes no previous course work in communication or
culture studies. The fifth edition includes new “Focus on Theory” sec-
tions to highlight theory, and updated domestic and global examples,
including new material on the effects of increased Muslim immigration
to Western Europe, throughout the text.
GN345 2006-025962 1-84545-282-8
The Manchester School; practice and ethnographic praxis
in anthropology.
Title main entry. Ed. by T.M.S. Evens and Don Handelman.
Berghahn Books, ©2006 334 p. $25.00 (pa)
Evens (anthropology, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill) and
Handelman (anthropology, The Hebrew U. of Jerusalem) compile 14
essays on the extended-case method and situational analysis of the
Manchester School of Anthropology, which was pioneered by Max
Gluckman. The contributed essays, which originated in a workshop
organized for the Biennial Conference of the European Association of
Social Anthropologists in 2002, are by the editors and other former stu-
dents and colleagues of Gluckman. They discuss theorizing and histori-
cizing the extended-case method, followed by case studies of locations in
Sweden and Africa. A reprinted essay by Gluckman is included.
GN346 2006-006923 978-1-4051-2593-2
Ethnographic fieldwork; an anthropological reader.
Title main entry. Ed. by Antonius C. G. M. Robben and Jeffrey A.
Sluka. (Blackwell anthologies in social & cultural anthropology; 9)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 616 p. $89.95
As any student of cultural and social anthropology knows, fieldwork
based on participant observation lies at the very heart of the discipline.
Rather than simply present a compendium of fieldwork methods,
Robben (anthropology, Utrecht U., the Netherlands) and Sluka (anthro-
pology, Massey U., New Zealand) have produced an anthology that is
intended to provide students with an overall context for fieldwork by
gathering classic and contemporary writings presenting qualitative, sub-
jective, and reflexive perspectives on fieldwork that will simultaneously
illustrate the broad range of approaches, methods, problems, problems,
experiences, and ethical issues involved. Thirty-eight readings are pre-
sented in sections covering fieldwork beginnings; fieldwork identity;
fieldwork relations and rapport; perspectives of the “Other;” fieldwork
conflicts, hazards, and dangers; fieldwork ethics; multi-sited fieldwork;
sensorial fieldwork; reflexive ethnography; and fictive fieldwork and
fieldwork novels.
GN366 0-521-61406-6
The Cambridge handbook of acculturation psychology.
Title main entry. Ed. by David L. Sam and John W. Berry.
Cambridge U. Pr., ©2006 551 p. $50.00 (pa)
Thirty-six international academics and researchers contribute 31 chapters
to an edited text compiling and systemizing the current state of the art
by exploring the broad international scope of acculturation. Coverage
includes an overview of the main theories and concepts within the field;
issues pertaining to research design, methodology and measurement;
research findings, both general and specific, on the various kinds of
acculturating groups that are found in plural societies; research findings
from a variety of societies of settlement, where much of the investigative
work on acculturation has been taking place; and applications, drawing
upon both theory and empirical findings to address issues of work,
school, society and health that may arise in plural societies as a result
of acculturation. For scholars and graduate-level students in cross-
cultural psychology, and practitioners and policymakers working with
minority ethnic groups and immigrants.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
GN497 87-7934-110-1
Warfare and society; archaeological and social
anthropological perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ton Otto et al.
Aarhus University Press, ©2006 557 p. $83.95
Over the past few decades, military historians have begun to look at the
social aspects of war, but the archaeologists and anthropologists here
find that even these historians treat war as something set aside from
other practices. Seeking to show how war is instead an outgrowth or
extension of fundamental features of a society, they cover conceptions of
warfare in Western thought and research, pre-state societies, the state, dis-
course and identity, and weaponry and material culture. Their time
frame stretches from Neolithic Britain and Ireland to Bosnia in the 1990s.
GN549 963-05-8284-8
Khanty mythology.
Kulemzin, Vladislav et al. Ed, by Vladimir Napolskikh et al.
(Encyclopedia of Uralic mythologies; 2)
Akadémiai Kiadó, ©2006 241 p. $55.00
Having among studied among the Khanty and written widely about
them, Kulemzin (history, Tomsk State U.) led the team of scholars that
produced this first treatise to appear in English about the Uralic
speaking people Western Siberian people. They wrote it in Russian,
actually, and Marja-Leea Hattuneimi translated it into English. The alpha-
betical entries discuss objects, ceremonies, activities and other matters
pertaining to Khanty mythology. Introductory essays outline the sources
of information and the traditional Khanty world view. Three poems are
also included. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
GN560 2005-036671 978-0-8203-2832-4
Caribbean and Southern; transnational perspectives on the
U.S. South.
Title main entry. Ed. by Helen A. Regis. (Southern Anthropological
Society proceedings; no.38)
Univ. of Georgia Press, ©2006 154 p. $19.95 (pa)
Six papers from the Society’s 2003 meeting in Baton Rouge, Louisiana
explore the conceptualization of the US South, and its cultural and geo-
graphical affinities with the global South as represented by the
Caribbean. Their topics include Southern African, and British influence
in Bahamian foodways; hidden transcripts in diasporic ritual per-
formance; and eastern Caribbean dimension of a Southern Problem.
They are not indexed.
GN575 2006-019278 1-84545-190-2
Neo-nationalism in Europe and beyond; perspectives from
social anthropology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andre Gingrich and Marcus Banks.
Berghahn Books, ©2006 303 p. $25.00 (pa)
Prompted in part by the near-simultaneous rise of far-right parlia-
mentary neo-nationalist parties in Europe, editors Gingrich (social
anthropology, U. of Vienna, Austria), Banks (visual anthropology, U. of
Oxford, UK), and their contributors undertook to analyze these move-
ments through an anthropological lens that focuses on questions of his-
torical consciousness, ideologies of identity, globalization, and the
symbolism of nationalism. After a pair of chapters address theoretical
and methodological concerns, case studies of neo-nationalist movements
in Norway, Denmark, the Netherlands, Belgium, Austria, Italy, and
France are presented. These are followed by more general discussions of
European neo-nationalism and a pair of comparative chapters discussing
India’s Hindu-identity Bharatiya Janata Party and new rightists in
Australia.
GN641 2006-002146 0-415-77081-5
Muslim diaspora; gender, culture, and identity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Haideh Moghissi.
Routledge, ©2006 238 p. $120.00
Episodic or consistent unity between Islamic communities in the West
has more to do with their current situation than with a shared religion
or culture, argue social scientists. They challenge the notion of a single
homogeneous Islamic culture in 14 papers, all but two from a May 2004
conference in Toronto. Among the recurring notions that rise are that
identity is always constructed in relation to others, and diaspora itself as
an agent of social and cultural change especially for women.
–92–
GN649 2006-005359 978-0-7591-1023-6
Cosmopolitan desire; transcultural dialogues and
antiterrorism in Morroco.
Foster, Stephen William. (Alterations book series)
AltaMira Press, ©2006 245 p. $75.00
Through a series of narratives and interpretations rather than formal
ethnography, American independent anthropologist Foster looks to
Morocco for answers to how encounters between Others shape people’s
self-understanding and their life histories. Having visited Morocco often
since 1970, he chronicles the country’s move toward Europe and the US
and his own move toward the North African country from his native San
Francisco.
GN657 2006-023773 0-313-33246-0
Culture and customs of Zambia.
Taylor, Scott D. (Culture and customs of Africa)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 148 p. $49.95
Emphasizing that culture is a thing of both continuity and change, this
book presents a portrait of the African nation of Zambia’s culture and
custom in manner accessible to the general reader. After an introduction
to Zambia’s land, people, and history, chapters are presented on religion
and worldview; literature and the media; art, architecture, and housing;
cuisine and traditional dress; gender roles, marriage, and family; social
customs and lifestyle; and music and dance. Also included are a
chronology, a glossary, a selected bibliography, and an index.
GN659 2006-025373 978-0-313-33163-3
Culture and customs of Mozambique.
Ndege, George O. (Culture and customs of Africa)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 133 p. $49.95
For general readers, Ndege (history, St. Louis U.) provides an overview of
the culture and traditions of Mozambique, with attention to its geog-
raphy, economy, and politics; religions and worldview; literature; media;
art; architecture and housing; cuisine; dress; gender roles, marriage, and
family; social customs; and music and dance. Its ethnic diversity—yet
common cultural elements—as well as conflict between the traditional
and modern aspects of life, are emphasized. Some b&w photos are
included.
GN772 90-76368-12-0
Beyond the site; the Saalian archaeological record at
Maastricht-Belvèdère (The Netherlands). (CD-ROM
included)
De Loecker, Dimitri. (Analecta praehistorica leidensia; 35/36)
Faculty of Archaeology, Leiden, ©2005 300 p. $110.00 (pa)
Beginning in 1985, De Loecker participated in the annual excavation
program and used the experience as the basis of this, his doctoral dis-
sertation, which he began in 1992. He also took part in a program
between 1994 and 1999 investigating the cultural adaptations of
Pleistocene hunter-gatherers in Northern Europe during the past 500,000
when climate fluctuations resulted in the ebb and flood of hominid
presence. Here he summarizes the geology, palaeoenvironment, and
dating; Middle Palaeolithic technology; sites and finds; and patterns of
behavior and spatial aspects of technology. The disk contains site-specific
data. There is no index. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book
Company.
GN776 978-1-84217-214-8
Animals in the Neolithic of Britain and Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dale Serjeantson and David Field. (Neolithic
studies group seminar papers; 7)
Oxbow Books, ©2006 178 p. $56.00 (pa)
The 12 papers represent most of the presentations at the November 2003
symposium, held at the British Museum. There being no previous general
book or collection of papers on Neolithic animals in Europe, the con-
tributing archaeologists and curators have sought to suggest the breadth
of the field and the research waiting to be pursued. Their topics include
dogs and wolves in Britain, spent grain as cattle feed, ploughing with
cows at Knossos, food or feast at Runnymede, and early Bronze Age
auroch in west London. There is no index. Distributed in the US by the
David Brown Book Company.
–93–
GN776 978-1-902937-32-8
Marshland communities and cultural landscapes.
Evans, Christopher and Ian Hodder. (The Haddenham project; v.2)
McDonald Inst./Archaeol. Res., ©2006 509 p. $75.00
This is the second volume reporting on the archaeological investigations
of the Haddenham project, which conducted landscape surveys at four
sites north of Cambridge (UK) from 1981-1987, documenting shifting
human settlement and land use patterns as Neolithic woodland trans-
formed into Romano-British marshland. In this volume, Evans (director,
archaeological unit, Cambridge U., UK) and Hodder (cultural and social
anthropology, Stanford U., US) focus on the later periods investigated by
the project, describing the material finds from Bronze Age, Iron Age, and
Roman, and post- Medieval landscapes and commenting on their
meaning for our understanding of landscape use, ritual, and other cul-
tural practices. Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co.
GN776 1-902937-31-7
A woodland archaeology; neolithic sites at Haddenham.
Evans, Christopher and Ian Hodder.
McDonald Inst./Archaeol. Res., ©2006 389 p. $75.00
This publication (the first in a two-volume set) provides the details of
sites excavated at Haddenham, north of Cambridge. Evans (Cambridge U.
Archaeological Unit) and Hodder (cultural and social anthropology,
Stanford U.), along with other contributing specialists, describe the
results of the U. of Cambridge’s research excavations in the marshland
environs of Haddenham, Cambridgeshire, along the lower fenland
reaches of the River Great Ouse. They focus on long-term construction of
the cultural landscape, regional environmental adaptation, and the
changing interrelationship and constitution of ritual settlement over time.
Methodology and process are explained, in addition to themes of com-
munity resolution, marginalization, and representation. Analogical com-
mentaries from local and international sources are incorporated.
Fieldwork was undertaken from 1981-1987, during the later phases of the
Fenland Survey Project. Diagrams and photos are included. The book is
intended for practitioners of British and European prehistory and
wetland and landscape archaeologists. Distributed in the US by The
David Brown Book Co.
GN799 0-9539923-9-X
A.F.L. Beeston at the Arabian Seminar and the other
papers including a personal reminiscence by W.W.
Müller.
Title main entry. Ed. by M.C.A. Macdonald and C.S. Phillips.
Archaeopress, ©2005 179 p. $40.00 (pa)
A personal reminiscence of Arabist Beeston (1911-95) and a revised bib-
liography of his work introduce a selection of his work. The first section
contains five previous unpublished papers; the second section is a new
edition of papers previously published in The Proceedings of the Seminar
for Arabian Studies between 1971 and 1991. No index is provided.
Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
GN799 1-905739-01-X
Seminar for Arabian Studies; v.36, 2006; proceedings.
Seminar for Arabian Studies Meeting (39th: 2005: London, UK)
(Seminar for Arabian Studies)
Archaeopress, ©2006 299 p. $100.00 (pa)
Before the 14 reports on recent archaeological work in Arabia, 10 papers
honor the memory of A. F. L. Beeston (1911-95), a pillar of the profession,
with personal accounts of him and studies on topics of particular interest
to him. The reports include the Tylos burials in Bahrain, Arabic rock
inscriptions of south Sinai, and Yemeni oceanic policy at the end of the
13th century. There is no index. Distributed in the US by the David
Brown Book Company.
GN805 0-7524-3764-X
Scotland’s hidden history, 2d ed.
Armit, Ian.
Tempus Publishing, ©2006 190 p. $27.50 (pa)
Armit offers a narrative of Scotland’s past anchored on monuments that
the public can visit. His first chapter summarizes the entire period up to
1000 AD, and subsequent chapters focus on particular eras and struc-
tures within it. Among them are tombs of the first farmers, forts and
farms of the Iron Age, the Roman interlude, and the Vikings. He includes
map coordinates and directions to the sites, and in many cases photo-
graphs so visitors will know when they have arrived. Distributed in the
US by Trafalgar Square Publishing.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
GR105 2006-022952 0-313-33772-1
The Greenwood library of American folktales; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas A. Green.
Greenwood Press, ©2006 1524 p. $299.95
Following the practice, if not the explicit policy, of the America Folklore
Society, Green (anthropology, Texas A&M U.) organizes his anthology of
folktales by geographical regions. The jokes, folktales, legends, myths,
and personal experiences are designed to provide access to the range of
narrative genres for educators, students, and researchers who require
examples to illustrate these genres. For each narrative, he identifies the
tradition bearer, literary source, date, original location, and national
origin—to the extent that they are known. The four volumes tramp from
the northeast to the northwest, and there they hop aboard that old cyber-
space to finish the trip. They are paged and referenced separately, but
the cumulative index in each volume facilitates the comparison of
variants in different regions.
GR111 2006-000652 978-0-313-33325-5
Chicano folklore; a handbook.
Herrera-Sobek, Maria. (Greenwoop folklore handbooks)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 334 p. $55.00
Herrera-Sobek has been researching and writing about Chicano folklore
since the 1970s. Here she introduces the history, context, genres, and def-
initions related to the study. Abundant examples of folk songs (including
the ten-strophe poem and the drug-smuggling ballad), proverbs and
jokes, children’s songs and games, and folk theater are presented in both
English and Spanish. Additionally, the author discusses folk belief, cos-
tumes, dance, medicine, ailments, art, and food in the politically con-
scious Chicano culture. One chapter discusses the work and methods of
four generations of Chicano folklorists.
GR166 2006-027919 0-313-33464-1
The pied piper; a handbook.
Mieder, Wolfgang. (Greenwood folklore handbooks)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 189 p. $55.00
Mieder (German and folklore, U. of Vermont) explores the folktale
through its seven centuries of oral and written transmission and more
recent appearances in such media as film, cartoons, and advertisements.
Following the series format, he covers definition and classification,
examples and texts, scholarship approaches, and modern contexts. Most
of the scholarship on The Pied Piper is in German.
GR320 2006-929927 978-0-495-09280-3
Challenging gender norms; five genders among the Bugis
in Indonesia.
Davies, Sharyn Graham. (Case studies in cultural anthropology)
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2007 152 p. $27.95 (pa)
Davies (anthropology, Auckland U. of Technology) describes gender
diversity among the Bugis, the largest ethnic group in South Sulawesi,
Indonesia. After exploring the concept of gender in general and whether
it is considered important in their society, she explains that there are five
genders in their culture, including masculine man, feminine woman,
masculine female, feminine male, and androgynous shamans. Certain
characteristics define them, such as lifestyle, behavior, clothing, social
and ritual roles, sexual practices, and erotic desires. Her ethnographic
research consists of interviews, conversations, and observations. In
addition, she considers gender and biological sex, bodies, identity, sexu-
ality, and marriage.
GR337 2006-006229 978-0-8248-3079-3
The three boys and other Buddhist folk tales from Tibet.
Title main entry. Ed. by Yeshi Dorjee. Trans.and John S. Major.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 223 p. $17.95 (pa)
Bhutan-born and Indian-educated, Dorjee now teaches as a Buddhist
center in California. Here he retells 15 traditional stories that he either
learned as a child or heard from expatriate Tibetan monks at university
in India. He also illustrates then with line drawings. The stories are not
religious instruction or stories about Buddhism, but folk tales within a
Buddhist culture. Major is a retired historian of East Asia in the US.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
GR830 2006-026799 0-275-99292-6
Legends of blood; the vampire in history and myth.
Bartlett, Wayne and Flavia Idriceanu.
Praeger, ©2006 205 p. $44.95
Bartlett, a historian specializing in eastern Europe, and Idriceanu, a
philologist in Romania, explore historical, literary, and religious origins
of some of the features now associated with the vampire legend, and
trace the development of those features down the centuries through the
evolution of themes and the changes in media. Among their topics are
the vampire epidemics, landscapes of magic, the witch, the magus, the
power of the mind, and the undead.
GT2846 2006-010111 978-4-7700-3020-7
Getting wet; adventures in the Japanese bath.
Talmadge, Eric.
Kodansha International, ©2006 255 p. $22.00
Associated Press journalist Eric Talmadge has lived in Japan for 25
years, and his articles about bathing in Japan have appeared in news-
papers around the world. In 11 engaging essays, he offers his reflec-
tions on the history and cultural significance of bathing, as well as on
a wide range of bathing experiences—including bathing "theme parks"
and a tub that dispenses electric shocks. He concludes with tub tips
that address etiquette for those thinking of traveling to Japan.
GT2853 2006-025398 978-0-7864-2670-6
Food fight!; the battle over the American lunch in schools
and the workplace.
Lautenschlager, Julie L.
McFarland & Co., ©2006 246 p. $35.00 (pa)
The story of lunch in American schools and workplaces is, according to
this work, intimately connected with the industrialization and commer-
cialization of American society. The author explores the development of
the role of lunch in modern American food ideology, examining how the
way Americans consume the meal has been manipulated by powerful
interests ranging from progressive reformers drawing links between
nutrition and industrial productivity to governmental officials treating
lunch as a matter of national security to advertisers seeking markets for
new products.
GT3330 1-904965-07-5
Death redesigned; British crematoria history, architecture
and landscape.
Grainger, Hilary J.
Spire Books, ©2005 519 p. $70.00 (pa)
Not until the 1990s did scholars show much interest in the history of
cremation in Britain, and none so far have focused on the changing archi-
tecture of crematoria. Being a specialist in that very thing, Grainger
(fashion, U. of the Arts, London) traces the changes in the places of cre-
mation from the late 19th century, when the practice began in Britain, to
their privatization after 1970. Distributed in the US by the David Brown
Book Company.
GT3331 2006-389302 978-1-904965-04-6
Committed to the cleansing flame; the development of
cremation in nineteenth-century England.
Parsons, Brian.
Spire Books, ©2005 328 p. $70.00 (pa)
For over two decades, Parsons has researched the London funeral
industry, and is a specialist on the development of cremation. Focusing
on Woking Crematorium, he traces the development of cremation from
1874, when the Cremation Society of England was founded, to 1902,
which saw the opening of Golden Green Crematorium and the passing
of the Cremation Act. His study is just a beginning, he says, and there
are plenty of questions left for other historians. Distributed in the US by
the David Brown Book Company.
GT3930 2006-011057 978-1-84541-047-6
Festivals, tourism and change; remaking worlds.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Picard and Mike Robinson. (Tourism
and cultural change; 8)
Channel View Publications, ©2006 293 p. $49.95 (pa)
Traditional local festivals that foster a sense of community have increas-
ingly become a destination of organized tourism. Picard (anthropology,
Sheffield Hallam U., UK) and Robinson (tourism and culture, Leeds
Metropolitan U., Leeds) introduce 16 chapters by international contrib-
utors treating the issues involved in rediscovered, reinvented, or newly
created events from Australia’s Camp Oven Festival to gay and lesbian
pride festivals. For example, does global marketing compromise their
authenticity and promote a postmodern sense of placelessness?
Distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.
–94–
GT4803 2006-035793 978-0-7808-0779-2
African-American holidays, festivals,and celebrations; the
history, customs, and symbols associated with both
traditional and contemporary religious and secular events
observed by Americans of African descent.
Gay, Kathlyn.
Omnigraphics, Inc., ©2007 566 p. $65.00 (pa)
Gay presents a reference guide to the wide array of annual events hon-
oring the heritage of African Americans and people of the African
diaspora who have immigrated to the U.S. The 109 entries in the book
are arranged alphabetically by the name of the event. Each entry
includes the date and location of observance; what or who the event com-
memorates and the type of observation; historical background; the
process by which the event was created; a description of the event’s
observance, customs, and symbols; listings of website and contact infor-
mation; and suggestions for further reading. Also included are a
chronology of the events and associated individuals/historical events; a
monthly calendar of events; a geographical listing of the events; a bibli-
ography; and alphabetical listing of organizations, their websites and
contact information. The author’s credentials are not stated.
GT4820 2005-028395 978-0-8165-2511-9
Unmasking class, gender, and sexuality in Nicaraguan
festival.
Borland, Katherine.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 223 p. $45.00
Borland (humanities, Ohio State U.-Newark) explores the social and
political elements in festivals in the provincial capital Masaya south of
Managua. In particular show looks at how the festivals accommodated
political power during the Somoza (19936-79), Sandinista (1979-90), and
neoliberal (1990-2006) periods but also satirized and insulted parties,
people, and positions that were unpopular.
RECREATION, LEISURE, SPORT, DANCE
GV35 0-7524-3442-X
The world of the gladiator.
Shadrake, Susanna.
Tempus Publishing, ©2005 256 p. $35.00 (pa)
Shadrake covers all aspects of the Roman gladiators and their games in
this detailed study. She describes the life of a gladiator from training and
diet to social status and mortality rates and traces the history of the
amphitheater along with the evolution of the gladiator. Shadrake and her
husband run Britannia, a society specializing in the reconstruction and
re-enactment of the gladiatorial spectacle. Pictures of those re-enactments
are included in the text. Distributed in the US by Trafalgar Square
Publishing.
GV188 978-1-55783-691-5
The entertainment sourcebook, 2007.
Title main entry. Ed. by The Association of Theatrical Artists and
Craftspeople.
Applause Books, ©2007 668 p. $49.95 (pa)
This alphabetical reference from the Association of Theatrical Artists and
Craftspeople lists items and services needed for theater, film, television,
or advertising productions or events and includes company names and
contact information, descriptions of the items they carry, and types of
payment accepted. Items range from antiques, clothing, costumes, and
ethnic goods to fabrics, furniture, medical supplies, and paint and dyes,
in addition to listing those who provide services such as moving and
transport, prop and scene crafting, or theater spaces. About 5000 com-
panies are listed. The book includes product and company indexes.
GV191 2006-013391 1-59714-039-2
Past tents; the way we camped.
Snyder, Susan.
Heyday Books, ©2006 145 p. $17.95 (pa)
Published in conjunction with The Bancroft Library, U. of California,
Berkeley, where Synder works, this pictorial essay presents a delightful
history of early camping in the western US. As the author explains, after
the Gold Rush camping changed from a necessity to a pleasurable,
healthful—except for various critters and weather conditions—escape from
civilization. The book includes rare period photos, diary entries, and
recipes.
–95–
GV193 2006-019019 978-0-8166-4876-4
A manufactured wilderness; summer camps and the
shaping of American youth, 1890-1960.
Van Slyck, Abigail A. (Architecture, landscape, and American culture
series)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 296 p. $34.95
Van Slyck (art history, Connecticut College) offers an architectural history
of children’s summer camps in North America from 1890-1960, while
viewing the environment as something socially constructed for campers
and their parents. She examines the camps’ roles in the social con-
struction of childhood, as they were part of a trend in the beginning of
the twentieth century of places that catered solely to children. She dis-
cusses social and cultural trends that influenced the camp phenomenon,
those who owned, operated, and built them, and issues relating to race,
gender, and class that affected their development. Her approach, which
views architecture as a process, is a cultural one that considers the
natural environment, outdoor areas, structures, program activities, and
the use of Native American motifs. Many period photos are examined, as
well as brochures, construction documents, and other literature. Family,
well-baby, special-needs, and skill-based camps are excluded.
GV193 978-0-7689-2445-9
Peterson’s Make summer count; programs & camps for
teens & kids.
Thomas, Charlotte.
Peterson’s, ©2006 466 p. $19.00 (pa)
This guide for parents describes a wide variety of summer programs and
camps that can help teenagers and children discover new interests,
broaden their horizons, and even enhance their college applications.
Organized alphabetically by name, the main part of the volume consists
of detailed entries supplied by program staff members. These include
descriptions of activities, facilities, application procedures, deadlines,
costs, and contact information. Several introductory essays offer sugges-
tions on how to pick the right program.
GV199 978-1-933056-02-9
Accidents in North American mountaineering; v.9, no.1,
issue 59; 2006.
Title main entry.
The Mountaineers Books, ©2006 107 p. $10.00 (pa)
This collection of reports submitted by those involved describe a variety
of accidents on rock, snow and ice includes analyses by the safety com-
mittees of The American Alpine Club and the Alpine Club of Canada that
determine the reasons for the accident, whether human, equipment-
related, or as a result of unexpected weather conditions. In the tradition
established since 1946, the clubs also note themes and trends in acci-
dents, such as a lingering avalanche season in Canada and a tendency to
rappel off the end of the rope in the US. The result is a good learning
tool for enthusiasts and a valuable series of warnings for novices.
GV199 978-1-933056-01-2
American alpine journal 2006; the world’s most
significant climbs.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Harlin.
The Mountaineers Books, ©2006 519 p. $35.00 (pa)
The Journal has been presenting first hand reports by mountain climbers
annually since 1929. In this issue, 17 long reports describe the trials and
travails of first ascent and other important climbs around the world, fol-
lowed a few hundred short reports of new routes in the world’s
mountain ranges, organized geographically. Also included are reviews of
20 new mountain climbing books.
GV199 2006-016637 978-0-7627-4008-6
Vertical world; conversations with the masters of rock.
Brown, Katie.
Falcon Hill Press, ©2007 161 p. $19.95 (pa)
Prominent rock climber Brown interviews nine of her fellow sport
climbers—six men and three women—that are “some of the world’s best,”
in her estimation. In the interviews, the climbers discuss technical and
cultural aspects of the sport, some of their most memorable climbs and
experiences, and related topics. The volume includes copious color pho-
tographs of the interviewees on the rock face and a few of them relaxing
on the ground.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
GV199 2006-282372 0-8027-1494-3
Walking zero; discovering cosmic space and time along
the prime meridian.
Raymo, Chet.
Walker & Company, ©2006 194 p. $22.95
In 2003, Raymo (a former science and nature columnist for the Boston
Globe) set out to walk across southeastern England along the prime
meridian. As becomes clear in the opening pages of his book, his intent
was less to recount his travels than to use the prime meridian—the zero
line for geographical longitude and international time, as well as a line
that runs close to the area of the first dinosaur fossil discoveries, Charles
Darwin’s home, Isaac Newton’s faculty offices, and other important sci-
entific landmarks—as a conceit to explore the scientific history of inves-
tigations into space and time.
GV436 2005-055333 0-8053-0069-4
Measurement and evaluation in physical education and
exercise science, 5th ed.
Lacy, Alan C. and Douglas N. Hastad.
Benjamin Cummings, ©2007 460 p. $94.40
This textbook for students of physical education and exercise science
presents a practical approach to measurement and evaluation. The focus
is on techniques and tools used in physical education settings in K-12
schools as well as in adult activity settings in non-school environments
such as the workplace. The authors also discuss the role of measurement
and evaluation in program development and assessment. The fifth
edition contains a new appendix with some Microsoft Excel assignments
that provide students with an opportunity to use statistics software.
GV545 2006-025383 0-313-33810-8
Arnold Schwarzenegger; a biography.
Krasniewicz, Louise and Michael Blitz. (Greenwood biographies)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 156 p. $29.95
Krasniewicz (University of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology) and
Blitz (City University of New York) present the story of Governor
Schwarzenegger’s life as the classic tale of the American Dream. They
chronicle Arnold’s childhood in Austria, rise to bodybuilding fame,
movie career in Hollywood, interest in politics, and election to California
governor. A few black and white photographs are provided.
GV573 2005-037144 978-0-631-22970-4
Sport and spectacle in the ancient world.
Kyle, Donald G. (Ancient cultures)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 403 p. $81.95
In an overview rather than a comprehensive account, Kyle (history, U. of
Texas-Arlington) looks at changes and continuities in sport and spectacle
from the Minoans, Hittites, and Mycenaeans through the archaic and
ancient Greek to the late Roman Empire. To facilitate the study’s use as
a textbook, the bibliography emphasizes easily available works in
English.
GV583 2006-021461 0-275-99134-2
Big sports, big business; a century of league expansions,
mergers, and reorganizations.
Jozsa, Frank P.
Praeger, ©2006 181 p. $44.95
Jozsa (economics and business administration, Pfeiffer U.) details the
history of professional sports transformations from the 1876 to the
present, viewing it through an economic and business perspective, while
looking at demographics and team performances. Focusing on reloca-
tions, expansions, and mergers, he brings together this information in
one book for the first time. It describes changes, and the reasons for
them, in Major League Baseball, the NBA, the NFL, National Hockey
League, and Major League Soccer, as well as alternative organizations
and how they competed for fans, market share, and profit. Alternative
organizations included are the American Association and Federal
League, American Football League, World Football League, WNBA,
Atlantic Coast League and North American Soccer League. The book was
written for a general sports audience, and is a modification and
extension of Jozsa’s dissertation from 1977 and his book Relocating
Teams and Expanding Leagues: How the Major Leagues Respond to Market
Conditions from 1999.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
GV583 2006-023918 978-1-4051-0647-4
Sports in American life; a history.
Davies, Richard O.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 485 p. $74.95
Davies (history, U of Nevada, Reno) traces the evolution of American
sports, from disorganized and quaint origins to the present time when
sports have become fully integrated into the political, social, cultural, and
economic fabric of the country. The narrative is organized around the
argument that sports, for good or bad, have been a significant social
force throughout much of the history of the U.S. and a reflection of the
underlying values and tensions of American society, including inspiring
examples of courage, grace, drama, accomplishment, and depressing
examples of brutality, racism, sexism, intolerance, homophobia, xeno-
phobia, nationalism, greed, and hypocrisy. While accessible to the
general reader, this academic text is intended for the serious student
interested in examining the American past from the perspective of sports.
Illustrated with b&w photographs.
GV697 2005-035749 978-1-59486-190-1
Bowerman; and the men of Oregon; the story of Oregon’s
legendary coach and Nike’s cofounder.
Moore, Kenny.
Rodale, ©2006 432 p. $28.95
Running coach and Nike co-founder William J. Bowerman (1911 - 1999)
had a profound impact on the world of track and field. Written in coop-
eration with Bowerman’s family by a runner whom he coached, this
biography describes Bowerman’s life and career in great detail. Just a
few of the topics covered: Bowerman’s WWII service, his invention of the
waffle sole for running shoes, his innovative training methods, and the
siege at the 1972 Munich Olympic Games where Bowerman was head
U.S. track coach.
GV706 2006-014426 1-898595-48-8
Amity in the Middle East; how the World Sports Peace
Project and the passion for football brought together Arab
and Jewish youngsters.
Whitfield, Geoffrey.
Alpha Press, ©2006 170 p. $25.00 (pa)
Based on his applied theology model, Whitfield (a retired UK Baptist
minister, University chaplain, and psychotherapist) headed a football/con-
flict prevention project in which people of several communities and
faiths miraculously cooperated in sponsoring mixed Israeli and
Palestinian youth sports teams in the Galilee from 2001-2003. In this
hopeful book, he includes a project diary, points for project consideration
and evaluation, b&w photos, and list of the coaching teams. Distributed
in the US by ISBS.
GV706 978-87-7289-827-8
Gymnastics and politics; Neils Bukh and male aesthetics.
(DVD included)
Bonde, Hans.
Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2006 376 p. $72.00
Bonde (exercise and sport sciences, U. of Copenhagen) describes the life
of the internationally renowned Danish gymnastic educationalist Bukh
(1880-1950) and his pioneering masculine aesthetic. He emphasizes the
interplay between Bukh’s gymnastic endeavors and his right-wing totali-
tarian ideologies as he worked in the international arena in Europe and
Latin America. The accompanying disc contains photos and film clips of
Bukh and some of his many tours and displays. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
GV706 2004-011675 978-0-8204-7251-5
Revolt of the white athlete; race, media and the
emergence of extreme athletes in America.
Kusz, Kyle. (Intersections in communications and culture; v.14)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 214 p. $29.95 (pa)
Kusz (kinesiology, U. of Rhode Island) sees media representations of
white male athletes like Andre Agassi and Lance Armstrong and
emerging white dominated sports such as NASCAR as evidence of a cul-
tural “revolt” seeking to reestablish white hegemony by establishing a
narrative of “other” whiteness that helps defuse the challenges to white
normativity and supremacy in American culture. This cultural revolt is
not some conscious plan on the part of white athletes, rather it consti-
tuted by and constitutive of a more pervasive white cultural revolt that
has been taking place since at least the 1990s.
–96–
GV706 2006-279732 978-0-07-328366-1
Sports in society; issues & controversies, 9th ed.
Coakley, Jay.
McGraw-Hill, ©2007 676 p. $88.13 (pa)
In this textbook, Coakley (U. of Colorado, Colorado Springs) outlines the
role of sport in society, using sociology as a lens. Chapters, which present
sociological research and theory, are organized around issues and their
relationships to everyday life, including the economy, religion, the media,
politics, class, race, and gender. Aimed at college students who have not
taken courses in sociology or sport-science, this edition has been
rewritten and updated in terms of statistics, and shortened by placing
additional materials on the related website. Additions include boxes that
address sports and people with disabilities, discussions of health and
obesity and deviance, more on performance-enhancing substances,
player-fan violence and sexual misconduct, gender ideology, genetic
issues, media rights, and other topics. Coakley’s objective is to make
sports more democratic and accessible.
GV709 2006-021460 0-313-32453-0
Sports and the physically challenged; an encyclopedia of
people, events, and organizations.
Mastandrea, Linda and Donna Czubernat.
Greenwood Press, ©2006 173 p. $75.00
Wheelchair athlete Mastandrea and her sister, Czubernat, authored the
169 entries in this encyclopedia describing significant people, terms,
events, and organizations in the history of disability sports. The volume
opens with a timeline of firsts beginning with the 1870s participation of
schools for the deaf in sporting events. The entries that follow are alpha-
betically arranged and contain from a paragraph to about two pages of
information. Topics include the Americans with Disabilities Act, Blind
Sailing International, the Paralympics and its precursors, U.S. Disabled
Ski Team, and 10 types of wheelchair sports. This reference will be useful
for students researching sports and the physically challenged and is
appropriate for a general readership.
GV711 2006-024882 978-0-470-01098-3
Coaching science; theory into practice.
McMorris, Terry and Tudor Hale.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 332 p. $45.00 (pa)
Using their experiences as coaches, McMorris and Hale (motor behavior
and sport science, U. of Chichester, UK) provide a textbook on coaching
theory and its practical application for first and second level students in
coaching science/studies and physical education in the UK, in addition to
coaches and those studying for national governing body awards. First
addressed are socio-psychological factors and the psychology of skill
acquisition from a coaching point of view, rather than lab research.
Subsequent sections discuss exercise physiology, developmental factors,
and the integration of physical, technical, tactical, and psychological
training and practice.
GV712 2006-019738 978-1-4051-5290-7
Sports mega-events; social scientific analyses of a global
phenomenon.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Horne and Wolfram Manzenreiter.
(Sociological review monographs)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 199 p. $34.95 (pa)
At the same time that competition among cities to host sports mega-
events, such as the Olympics and World Cup, become more fierce, the
evidence of economic and other benefits of hosting becomes less con-
vincing. This collection of specially commission ed essays investigates
that conundrum, asking why governments and cities bid to host these
events and if the events ever deliver the benefits that their proponents
proclaim. Horne (Scottish Centre for P.E., Sport and Leisure Studies, U. of
Edinburgh) and Manzenreiter (East Asian Studies, U. of Vienna)
introduce the essays with an overview of the sociology of sports.
–97–
GV716 2006-046557 978-1-84376-941-5
The economics of association football; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bill Gerrard. (An Elgar reference collection)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 928 p. $425.00
Gerrard (sport management and finance, Leeds U. Business School, UK)
brings together 53 seminal and contemporary academic articles on the
economics of association football (soccer), from the first 1969 study of the
retain-and-transfer system by Peter J. Sloane to a number of works first
appearing in the literature in 2003. In the first volume of the two-volume
collection, papers explore determinants of attendance demand at dif-
ferent levels of analysis; examine the “sporting production function” (the
relationship between team performance and playing and coaching
inputs), focusing on the technical efficiency of the sporting production
function and the impact of managerial change on team performance; and
analyze the players’ labor market and transfer system, paying particular
attention to the role of anchor-and- adjustment valuations and the impact
of 1995’s Bosman free agency ruling by the European Court of Justice on
the econometric analysis of transfer fees. The second volume contains
papers that explore how the promotion-and-relegation (based on sporting
performance) league structure of European football, which contrasts with
the fixed- hierarchy structure of most North American sports leagues,
influences economic competitive balance between leagues; examine
industrial performance as a function of the relationship between wage
costs and team performance and the relationship between team per-
formance and team revenue; and discuss betting and the informational
efficiency of markets. Since the bulk of the preceding concerns British
football, the second volume also includes a small selection of interna-
tional contributions to the economics of football.
GV840 978-0-9539840-3-9
The stormrider guide Europe—the Continent.
Title main entry.
Low Pressure Ltd., ©2006 214 p. $29.95 (pa)
This surf guide to Europe has been split into two volumes in this edition,
this one covering Portugal, France, Spain, the North Sea nations, and
Morocco, with a new chapter on the Mediterranean. The text is presented
in both English and French. Provided are general discussions of the surf,
ocean environment, and surf culture, as well as for each specific country,
along with detailed break reports. Also included are travel information,
many color photos, and detailed relief maps. More thorough descriptions
and new regions have been added.
GV863 2006-012901 978-0-7425-5169-5
Ambassadors in pinstripes; the Spalding world baseball
tour and the birth of the American empire.
Zeiler, Thomas W.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 217 p. $24.95 (pa)
Zeiler (history, U. of Colorado, Boulder) relates how, in 1888 and 1889,
two baseball teams, toured the world under the sponsorship of Albert
Spalding, and places their story in the context of American imperialism.
He describes their “expression” of free enterprise, modern communi-
cation and transport, culture, and nationalistic values. He discusses the
teams in the context of market capitalism and business ethics while in
Chicago, ideas about the new American West and transportation and
communications as he follows them to Hawaii, questions of identity
while in Europe, and nationalism upon their return to the US.
GV1029 978-1-55407-231-6
Inside Ferrari; unique behind-the-scenes photography of
the world’s greatest Formula One team.
Maurice, Hamilton. Photographs by Jon Nicholson.
Firefly Books Ltd., ©2006 287 p. $39.95
Photographer Jon Nicholson, with the help of Formula One sportscaster
Hamilton, pays tribute to the Scuderia Ferrari F1 team in the 300 color
images collected here. The photos, taken between 2003 and 2005,
showcase the Maranello, Italy factory, catch engineers and other crew at
work, and capture the ruby red racecars in action in test races and the
real thing. The final section takes a close look at the orange-clad Ferrari
“family” in both professional and celebratory moments. Historical back-
ground and captions support the images. Oversize: 10.5x11.5″.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
GV1449 2006-020994 978-0-275-99065-7
Chess and the art of negotiation; ancient rules for modern
combat.
Karpov, Anatoly and Jean-François Phelizon.
Praeger, ©2006 116 p. $34.95
Karpov, a world chess champion, and Phelizon, head of a French multi-
national corporation, offer tips in an interview format on lessons this
ancient game of strategy has for business success today. Knowing an
opponent’s style (confrontational/ concessionary) and approach
(direct/oblique) is a tactical advantage. Tips include: why it’s best to
negotiate in your own time zone, and why humility can win out over ego.
Not indexed. This is a translation of the original French edition, pub-
lished in 2004 by Ed. Economica as Psychologie de la Bataille.
GV1469 2006-278761 0-7456-3401-X
Computer games; text, narrative and play.
Title main entry. Ed. by Diane Carr et al.
Polity Press, ©2006 210 p. $24.95 (pa)
Despite the lasting popularity of computer games (called such in the UK
whether played on a PC or dedicated console), there remains the “disci-
plinary promiscuity” of where to situate game studies. Developed from a
research project called the “Textuality of Video Games” at the U. of
London’s Centre for the Study of Children, Youth and Media, this col-
lection of 13 essays analyzes what defines this genre and its role playing,
story telling, gender, and other aspects. Some screen shots are featured.
GV1469 2006-023510 978-0-7864-2822-9
The meaning and culture of Grand theft auto ; critical
essays.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nate Garrelts.
McFarland & Co., ©2006 256 p. $35.00 (pa)
Seventeen international academics, researchers, and independent
scholars contribute 14 essays designed to help academic game studies
bridge the boundaries of academia to speak directly to the gaming public
and other interested parties, including politicians, journalists, review
boards, and parents. Focusing on the immensely popular and
controversial Grand Theft Auto series of digital games, the initial essays
examine how adult-oriented digital games have entered society and the
controversies surrounding them. The text then approaches the games as
they might be studied absent the controversy, examining how players
meaningfully and purposefully play Grand Theft Auto games, including
the ways that elements of daily life are represented and that players
mediate the symbols in a game with their minds, computers, and
controllers.
GV1469 2006-025163 978-1-58450-459-7
Sex in video games.
Brathwaite, Brenda.
Charles River Media, ©2006 319 p. $39.95
Presenting a broad, yet in-depth view of a controversial subject,
Brathwaite (game design, Savannah College of Art & Design) chronicles
the “sexual revolution” in video games, from arcade games to the
present, exploring ethical issues, parental and retailer responsibility,
industry attempts at self-regulation, and past and present litigation.
Chapters address sex across cultures, cybersex, educational and thera-
peutic games with sexual content, and fetish games, as well as the
various legal definitions of obscenity. Case studies and interviews with
23 industry leaders, academics, and game aficionados provide a broad
perspective. The creator of the Hot Coffee mod for Grand Theft Auto: San
Andreas discusses his role in the controversy surrounding a sex mini-
game embedded in the best-selling game, and various users around the
world weigh in on sexual attitudes and gaming in China, India, and
Japan.
GV1623 2006-026183 0-313-33756-X
Social dancing in America; a history and reference; 2v.
Giordano, Ralph G.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 761 p. $149.95
Most take him for a minuet man, but George Washington very well could
have waltzed on his first Inaugural Day. Clog dancing was “made easy”
in publications by 1873, and at any time of the day or night someone on
this planet is donning a long-beloved white polyester suit and shooting a
right forefinger into the air. Giordano (adjunct history and American
studies, City U. of New York) takes a good long look at how we danced,
why and with whom across the years from the “fair terpsichore” and “set
dances” so complicated they required flash cards to country dances, the
Virginia Reel, the polka, the cake walk, the two-step, and the much more
seriously intentioned Buffalo Dance and Ghost Dance, followed by
ragtime, the Charleston, jitterbug, swing, the Latin dances, rock and roll,
disco, breakdancing, and recent revivals of classic dances.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
GV1801 2006-020841 978-0-8108-5734-6
The contemporary circus; art of the spectacular.
Albrecht, Ernest.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 262 p. $60.00
A couple of monkeys and a clown car no longer does a circus make. Now
audiences, designers, owners and performers expect the circuses they
watch and perform to bend the quality and quantity of space and time,
seek out the truths behind fantasy and reality, and hit an emotional and
even spiritual spot unreachable by any other art form. Albrecht, a spe-
cialist whose credits include a quarterly journal devoted to the circus
arts, augments his case studies of productions of leading circuses,
including detailed descriptions of the collaborative and individual cre-
ative work involved, with commentary pitched to the fascinations of the
audience. Commentators include directors, clowns, acrobats, musicians,
animal trainers, and dancers as well as instructors in schools for all the
above.
GV1853 2006-927403 978-0-7546-4333-3
Total landscape, theme parks, public space.
Mitrasinovic, Miodrag.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 296 p. $79.95
Mitrasinovic uses the example of theme parks to explain the properties
of privately-owned publicly accessible space, a hybrid form of public
space that is emerging in urban environments worldwide. He argues that
the process of systematic totalization that brings these two types of
spaces together are values, conditions and techniques that extend
throughout the social realm. The relationship between theme parks and
privately-owned publicly accessible spaces offers insights into the ethos
of total landscape, a condition that emerges from convergences of the
globally emerging socio-economic systems and that is based on the idea
of systematic totality.
SOCIAL SCIENCES (GENERAL), STATISTICS
H61 2006-017537 978-1-4129-4027-6
Concept mapping for planning and evaluation.
Kane, Mary and William M. K. Trochim. (Applied social research
methods series; v.50)
Sage Publications, ©2007 200 p. $64.95
Concept mapping, as used by Kane (president and CEO, Concept Systems
Incorporated, “a consulting and support company for social and behav-
ioral researchers and managers”) and Trochim (policy analysis and
management, Cornell U.) refers to a process of representing ideas in pic-
tures or maps that involves the steps of brainstorming, statement analysis
and synthesis, unstructured sorting of statements, multidimensional
scaling and cluster analysis, and the generation of numerous inter-
pretable maps and data displays. Here they present the methodology of
concept mapping as a means of generating a conceptual framework for
planning and evaluation in social research. In order to show how the
methodology can be applied in practice, they provide real-world
examples from their experiences consulting for the Centers for Disease
Control, the National Institutes of Health, and state governments.
H62 2006-924245 978-1-4129-2125-1
Developing effective research proposals, 2d ed.
Punch, Keith F. (Essential resources for social research)
Sage Publications, ©2006 164 p. $110.00
Punch (education, U. of Western Australia) outlines, for graduate stu-
dents, how to develop research proposals that are empirical and in the
field of social science. He describes what a proposal is, who reads it, and
why; guidelines for development, theory and literature, qualitative and
quantitative methods, and writing; and examples of five finished pro-
posals. This edition includes sections on reviewing literature and aca-
demic writing, and more on ethical issues and getting started in
proposals development. A glossary has also been added, and there are
more examples.
–98–
H62 2006-007756 978-1-4129-3650-7
A guide to qualitative field research, 2d ed.
Bailey, Carol A.
Pine Forge Press, ©2007 214 p. $34.95
Bailey (sociology, Virginia Technical University) gives advanced under-
graduates and graduate students more advice on techniques for ana-
lyzing data, understanding ethics and using paradigms in this edition
while continuing her focus on the entire research process. She covers the
history of field research and status characteristics along with defining
such concepts as the naturalistic setting, purpose, and values of the work,
and the, using classic ethnographies, examples and exercises describes
ethics, selecting a topic, practicality, accessibility, infrastructure such as
theory and traditions of inquiry, and basic methodology. She gives prac-
tical steps in making observations, interviewing, taking field notes and
leaving the field, coding, creating memos and descriptions, and using
typologies, taxonomies, visual representations, storytelling, critical events,
analysis induction, choosing evaluation criteria and preparing the final
manuscript. The index does double duty as a glossary.
H62 2006-531187 978-0-335-21240-8
Interviewing and representation in qualitative research.
Schostak, John. (Conducting educational research)
Open University Press, ©2006 189 p. $41.95 (pa)
Schostak (education, Manchester Metropolitan U., UK) describes the
process of interviewing, addressing the term itself and calling it an “inter-
view.” He considers its complexities, the role of language and meaning
in the process, and how it can be a means of representing the world. He
discusses how transcripts are interpreted and subject positions are con-
structed to create identities, and the political implications of doing so.
Finally, ethics and truth are addressed, as is the role of the anecdote and
transforming the interview into writing. The book is aimed at students
and researchers in education.
H62 2006-034017 978-1-933371-09-2
Pedagogies of praxis; course-based action research in the
social sciences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nila Ginger Hofman and Howard Rosing.
Anker Publishing Co., Inc, ©2007 178 p. $38.00
The editors (a pair of anthropologists at DePaul U.) present a series of
nine case studies illustrating the use of course-based action research—
encompassing community-based research, community-focused experi-
ential learning, and participatory action research—within the social
sciences as a means of building public interest partnerships between
institutions of higher education and local community-based organiza-
tions. The aims of such projects are to educate students through their par-
ticipation in research activity that meets the needs of community-based
organizations, to empower community members, and to connect the uni-
versity to the community.
H62 2006-024105 978-1-4129-2743-7
Readme first for a user’s guide to qualitative research, 2d
ed.
Richards, Lyn and Janice M. Morse.
Sage Publications, ©2007 288 p. $44.95 (pa)
Intended for advanced undergraduate and graduate students who are
beginners in qualitative research methods, this volume explains quali-
tative inquiry and describes the many methods that can be used. The
authors provide an overview of techniques and how they work with dif-
ferent research goals. They outline selecting a method, research design,
data analysis and coding, abstracting, and beginning a project. This
edition contains software overviews and advice, incorporates changes in
software, has new sections on writing and more detail on the integrity
of qualitative methods, and emphasizes methodological choice.
H62 2005-030919 1-4129-1416-7
Theoretical frameworks in qualitative research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Vincent A. Anfara and Norma T. Mertz.
Sage Publications, ©2006 207 p. $36.95 (pa)
Finding that their graduate students seemed unsure about the role of
theory in qualitative research, especially about the use of a theoretical
framework, teachers and researchers in education present a guidebook.
Some of the topics are liminality and the study of a changing academic
landscape, a framework for understanding social workers at midlife, and
a look through the Kubler-Ross theoretical lens.
–99–
H97 2006-000170 978-0-7656-1775-0
The practice of American public policymaking.
Biggs, Selden and Lelia B. Helms.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 563 p. $89.95
Political scientists Biggs (Department of Homeland Security) and Helms
(educational policy and leadership, U. of Iowa) combine their experience
teaching public policy making to graduate students, and their experience
in government contracting and consulting to produce a textbook on
public policymaking in the US. They focus on the actual work policy
makers do within historical and institutional contexts, and do not con-
sider analyzing policy itself.
HA29 2006-011888 1-4129-1611-9
Encyclopedia of measurement and statistics; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Neil J. Salkind.
Sage Publications, ©2007 1193 p. $395.00
Salkind (U. of Kansas) presents three volumes containing around 500
alphabetical entries that provide an overview of issues and concepts
related to measurement and statistics in the social sciences. The entries
range in length from 500 words for simple definitions or biographies
(e.g. the arithmetic mean or Charles Babbage) to 4000 words for more
detailed treatments of important topics (such as aptitude tests). The
headings in the reader’s guide give a sense of the scope of the encyclo-
pedia: biographies; charts, graphs, and visual displays; computer topics
and tools; concepts and issues in measurement; concepts and issues in
statistics; data and data reduction techniques; descriptive statistics; eval-
uation; experimental methods; inferential statistics; organizations and
publications; prediction and estimation; probability; qualitative methods;
samples, sampling, and distributions; statistical techniques; statistical
tests; and tests by name. Following the entries, three appendixes provide
a step-by-step presentation of basic concepts of statistics and meas-
urement, a collection of Internet resources; and a glossary of frequently
encountered terms and concepts.
HA29 2004-111060 0-324-22320-X
Essentials of statistics for business and economics;
abbreviated 4th ed.
Anderson, David R. et al.
South-Western College Pub., ©2007 406 p. $134.95 (pa)
Anderson et al. (quantitative analysis and management science, U. of
Cincinnati and Rochester Institute of Technology) provide an introductory
textbook on statistics for business administration and economics stu-
dents. It integrates applications of data analysis and statistical method-
ology into the text. In this edition, interval estimation and hypothesis
testing methods have been changed, a new procedure for two sample
inferences is used, and new sections on the shape of distributions and
probability distributions are added. Examples are drawn from real data,
and there are new case problems. Each chapter begins with an article on
statistics in practice. All exercises and case problems are online.
HA29 2006-020300 978-0-87289-301-6
Essential statistics for public managers and policy
analysts, 2d ed.
Berman, Evan M.
CQ Press, ©2007 309 p. $59.95 (pa)
Berman (public administration, Louisiana State U.) provides a textbook
on statistics for public management and policy analysis students. It
covers assumptions, purposes, and applications, using examples, tables,
charts, and graphs. Data analysis skills are illustrated through computer-
based analysis instead of hand-based calculations. The new edition
divides the chapters into 16 to include more explanation of topics. It also
has more examples and three new chapters on research design, concep-
tualization and measurement, and data collection.
HA30 2006-010016 1-4129-0656-3
Multiple time series models.
Brandt, Patrick T. and John T. Williams. (Quantitative applications in
the social sciences; v.148)
Sage Publications, ©2007 99 p. $16.95 (pa)
Brandt (political science, University of Texas-Dallas) and Williams
(political science, University of California-Riverside) introduce researchers
and students to different approaches for modeling multivariate time
series data, including simultaneous equations, ARIMA, error correction
models, and vector autoregression (VAR). Focus is on VAR models as a
generalization of these other approaches. The book can be used in
advanced undergraduate and graduate courses on time series analysis,
quantitative research methods, or advanced statistics, especially in
departments of sociology, psychology, political science, and economics.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HA97 2006-005777 978-0-7656-1367-7
Public program evaluation; a statistical guide.
Langbein, Laura.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2006 259 p. $49.95 (pa)
Rather than simply presenting a definition of program evaluation,
Langbein (public administration and policy, American U.) and Felbinger
(editor, Public Works Policy & Management) deconstruct its meaning as
the assessment of the effectiveness of public policies, programs, and pro-
grams and their implementation and management with social science
methods. Coverage includes a description of each major type of evalu-
ation; design issues; the ethics of randomized field experiments; tips for
dealing with problem/missing variables; and meta-analysis of others’
research. Chapters include a summary of basic concepts, references, and
“do it yourself” exercises.
ECONOMICS
HB71 2006-048146 978-0-202-30908-8
Economic philosophy.
Robinson, Joan.
AldineTransaction, ©2006 150 p. $24.95 (pa)
Robinson, a leading figure of Cambridge University’s economics faculty
for 30 years, takes readers “behind the scenes” of economic philosophy
and exposes the dogmatic content of economic orthodoxy. In its place,
she offers the possibility that, with obsolete concepts cleared out of the
way, economics can make substantial advancement toward science. The
book was first published in 1962.
HB75 2006-901299 0-324-53666-6
The evolution of economic thought, 7th ed.
Brue, Stanley L. and Randy R. Grant.
South-Western College Pub., ©2007 543 p. $121.95 (pa)
Brue (Pacific Lutheran U.) and Grant (Linfield College) collaborate on
this textbook on the history of economics. The approach of the text
involves addressing the questions of historical background, major tenets,
benefits, use, and contributions of economic schools. On the new com-
panion website, new chapters on economic thought before 1500, new
biographies of economists, and links to websites are given. This edition
also contains a section on Amartya Sen, connects earlier ideas to newly
discussed ones, and has added chapter questions.
HB95 978-1-84542-082-6
The road to economic freedom; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Philip Booth and John Meadowcroft.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 913 p. $375.00
Garnering praise from former Prime Minister Thatcher in the foreword
for their “brave” championship of free-market economics, the editors and
their colleagues at the UK’s Institute of Economic Affairs were instru-
mental in the intellectual “counter-revolution” (quoting Thatcher again)
the elevated free-market economics over Keynesian and social democratic
economics. In this two-volume collection, they present some of the
seminal works of this counter-revolution. The first volume opens with 11
papers on monetary policy and price stability, followed by seven dealing
with theories of unemployment. The 20 papers contained in the second
volume explore the economics of government, government regulation and
the size of government, and issues of economic language and ideas.
Together, papers by Chicago School leader Milton Friedman and Austrian
School leader Friedrich Hayek (whose 1944 critique of economic
planning, the Road to Serfdom, is echoed in the title of this collection)
account for the majority of the papers, although works by others such as
Chicago School figure George Stigler, Virginia School political economist
James M. Buchanan, international capital theorist James E. Meade, and
Nobel Prize winner Sir John Hicks are also presented.
HB99 2006-011741 978-1-84542-497-8
Economics in the shadows of Darwin and Marx; essays
on institutional and evolutionary themes.
Hodgson, Geoffrey M.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 265 p. $100.00
“All social scientists in the twenty-first century somehow have to settle
their accounts with both Darwin and Marx,” declares Hodgson (business
studies, U. of Hertfordshire, UK). As an economist, it might seem easier
for him to do with Marx, whose theories are valuable for their attention
to the macro-dynamics of the capitalist system and for their “critical
realism,” but Hodgson suggests that the explanatory rubric and basic
philosophical outlook of Darwinism is even more valuable for the expla-
nation of socio-economic phenomenon. Putting the valuable parts of
Marxian and Darwinian theory together brings one very close to the
institutionalism of Thorstein Veblen. These and other ideas are explored
in a series of 11 loosely connected essays.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HB131 2006-002681 978-1-84376-352-9
Recent developments in economic methodology; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by John B. Davis. (The international library of
critical writings in economics; 193)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 1695 p. $670.00
Billed as a successor to Bruce Caldwell’s three-volume The Philosophy and
Methodology of Economics, which appeared in 1993, this edited set
presents more recent work in the field. Editor Davis (history and method-
ology of economics, U. of Amsterdam, the Netherlands) has organized the
71 articles such that early papers engage similar concerns raised in the
earlier collection, including the Popper-Lakatos methodology of scientific
research program, the rhetoric and discourse approach to methodology,
realism, the sociology of scientific knowledge, and constructivism. The
second volume is transitional in nature, presenting articles connecting
past core concerns about economic methodology to new fields of inves-
tigation in feminist economics, Marxist and postmodern approaches, and
methodological pluralism and open systems investigations and
addressing overarching core issues of old and new methodologies
including the nature of rationality, the agent and philosophy of the mind,
and evolution. The final volume turns to newer issues related to models
and assumptions, econometrics, microeconomics and macroeconomics,
normative themes, and formalism in economics and concludes with a
trio of papers exploring the current of economic methodology.
HB135 2006-026293 978-1-4051-3380-7
Mathematical tools for economics.
Turkington, Darrell A.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 365 p. $64.95
Turkington (economics, U. of Western Australia) provides a semester’s
worth of intermediate-level material, focusing on the math behind opti-
mization, both static and dynamic, covering the necessary essentials of
matrix algebra and differential equations. He keeps his explanations
uncluttered as he describes matrix algebra and linear economic models,
including the basic concepts, simultaneous linear equations, linear eco-
nomic models, quadratic forms and positive definite matrices. He then
covers functions of many variables and optimization as well as compar-
ative static analysis in optimization problems, and then describes
dynamic analysis, including integration, continuous time in differential
equations and discrete time in difference equations, closing with material
on dynamic optimization. Turkington provides both exercises and
answers and a concise list of further reading.
HB145 2006-048186 978-1-84376-929-3
Dynamic networks and evolutionary variational
inequalities.
Daniele, Patrizia. (New dimensions in networks)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 253 p. $100.00
Daniele (mathematics and computer science, U. of Catania) analyzes
dynamic networks and evolutionary variational inequalities. Networks
become dynamic when the constitutive elements of the phenomena asso-
ciated with the fixed geometry of networks are considered to be evolving
over time. Working through a variety of examples, Daniele covers the
traffic equilibrium problem, evolutionary spatial price equilibrium, the
evolutionary financial model, and projected dynamical systems.
Although not for the faint of heart, this material is supported by
extended appendices on definitions and properties, weak convergence,
generalized inequalities, quasi-variational inequalities, and infinite
dimensional duality. The bibliography is also reader-oriented and com-
prehensive.
HB171 2005-936181 0-324-31502-3
Economics, concise ed.
Arnold, Roger A.
South-Western College Pub., ©2007 593 p. $154.95 (pa)
Arnold (California State U. at San Marcos) presents his undergraduate-
level introductory textbook on economics. The text covers the standard
topics in macroeconomics, microeconomics, and the international
economy. Each chapter contains a variety of pedagogical features,
including margin definitions, applications features, self-tests, a chapter
summary, questions and problems, working with numbers and graphs,
and key terms and concepts. The publisher also offers a range of
ancillary products designed to accompany the textbook, including a study
guide and a Web site with instructor materials.
–100–
HB171 2006-020252 978-0-7425-5430-6
Economic literacy; basic economics with an attitude, 2d
ed.
Weaver, Frederick S.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 269 p. $24.95 (pa)
Weaver (emeritus, economics and history, Hampshire College) introduces
mainstream, consensus economic analysis to the non-economist,
employing a slightly irreverent tone and highlighting debates within the
field. He covers neoclassical microeconomics and Keynesian macroeco-
nomics, as well as theories of international economy. Rather than avoid
jargon, he seeks to explain it, seeing this as a necessary step for readers
move beyond being passive consumers of others’ economic conclusions.
HB171 2005-923685 0-324-22113-4
Economics; principles and policy, 10th ed.
Baumol, William J. and Alan S. Blinder.
South-Western College Pub., ©2006 796 p. $154.95
Baumol (economics, New York U. and Princeton U.) and Blinder (eco-
nomics, Princeton U.) present this economics textbook, which begins with
an introduction to the topic and ends with a discussion of the US in the
world economy. In this edition, they simplify the chapters on stock and
bond markets, regulation and antitrust, environmental economics, and
poverty and inequality. They have also brought back the myth and reality
chapter that was omitted from the ninth edition. Other new material has
been added, some chapters have been reorganized, and updates to the
section on microeconomics and the virtues and limitations of markets
have been made.
HB171 2005-030807 978-0-7656-1329-5
Empirical post Keynesian economics; looking at the real
world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard P.F. Holt and Steven Pressman.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 340 p. $32.95 (pa)
Believing that a half century has been plenty long enough for post-
Keynesian economics to focus on methodology and theory, practitioners
explain both the importance of and the techniques for testing the well-
wrought ideas against evidence concerning distribution, inequality, and
consumption; business investment; and international economic relations.
HB172 2006-040926 978-1-84542-510-4
An introduction to the economic theory of market
behavior; microeconomics from a Walrasian perspective.
Katzner, Donald W.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 701 p. $155.00
Katzner (economics, U. of Massachusetts at Amherst) presents a “consid-
erably revised” version of Walrasian Microeconomics: An Introduction to
the Economic Theory of Market Behavior (1988) for the purpose of
defending the relevance and importance of the Walrasian theory of
market theory, more commonly known as general equilibrium theory.
Katzner has corrected errors, clarified arguments, and added a new
chapter on price determination, but retained the purpose of presenting a
unified model of the perfectly competitive Walrasian economy. The pres-
entation develops through chapters on utility maximization and the
theory of demand, production and cost, models of the firm, markets in
isolation, interacting markets, the fixed-factor-supply economy, dynamics
and equilibrium, methodological individualism and the theory of price
determination, imperfect competition, economic welfare, capital, and gov-
ernment and the economy. A final chapter considers some alternative
assumptions and methods of analysis.
HB501 2006-043567 978-0-582-50609-1
Capitalism.
Bowles, Paul. (Big ideas series)
Pearson Education, ©2007 202 p. $15.95 (pa)
The publisher’s series provides concise histories of the growth and
influence of ideas that shaped the 20th century and continue to shape
the present. This mini-text (5.25x8″) examines capitalism both as an ide-
ology and as an economic system, drawing on the writings of leading
thinkers such as Adam Smith and Karl Marx, and exploring current
issues as well, such as global capitalism. The book concludes by arguing
that the advocates of global capitalism have erred, and that, without
change, we are heading for an impoverished future. A timeline, a who’s
who, and boxed readings are included. Bowles teaches at a university in
Canada.
–101–
HB501 2006-050914 978-90-04-14937-3
Exploring Marx’s Capital ; philosophical, economic, and
political dimensions.
Bidet, Jacques. Trans. by David Fernbach. (Historical materialism book
series; v.14)
BRILL, ©2007 327 p. $168.00
This is an English translation of Que faire du ‘Capital’? (1985), in which
Bidet (political philosophy, U. of Paris-X, France) approaches Marx’s
major work as would a historian of science following its development
through successive divisions in order to reveal the Hegelian roots of
Marx’s dichotomous treatment of market and capital, as well as the cat-
egories of labor-value, labor power as commodity, and productive labor.
This reconstruction, he suggests, reveals Marx’s inability to resolve
problems evident in his theory’s Hegelian genesis but not necessarily
visible in later editions and works. Once these problems are revealed,
and considered in light of the result towards Marx was tending, it opens
up the possibility of giving the theory an adequate formulation that
resolves the problems arising from Capital’s Hegelian origins.
HB501 2006-404269 1-55266-182-2
Turning the world right-side up; science, community and
democracy.
Kerans, Patrick and John Kearney.
Fernwood Publishing, ©2006 226 p. $22.95 (pa)
Social policy academic Kerans and social anthropologist Kearney, seeing
“corporations and the economists who act as their apologists [as] the cul-
tural driving force in contemporary society,” lay much of the blame for
widening inequality and the hollowing out of democracy at the feet of
neoliberal economists whose claims to scientific legitimacy exhibit a
reductionism that elevates economic values above all others, including
traditional loyalties, social obligations, and respect for the environment.
They suggest that recent holistic developments in physics, chemistry, and
biology point the way toward the reform of economics and also rec-
ommend that we need to build democratic institutions from the ground
up, relying on locally produced knowledge instead of that of economic
“experts.”
HB615 2006-044014 978-1-84542-308-7
Entrepreneurship and technology policy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Albert N. Link. (The international library of
entrepreneurship; 4)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 361 p. $190.00
Link (economics, U. of North Carolina at Greensboro) presents a col-
lection of key scholarly articles examining entrepreneurship—narrowly
defined here as the innovative and risk-taking activities that are specific
to small firms—and how various innovative-related behaviors are affected
by technology policy. The majority of the articles are relatively new,
having been published since the mid- to late-1990s. The 23 articles are
organized into four sections covering government’s direct support of
R&D, government’s leveraging of R&D, government’s infrastructure
policies, and knowledge flows from universities and laboratories.
Indexed by author only; no subject index.
HB615 2006-040019 978-1-84542-451-X
Entrepreneurship, investment, and spatial dynamics;
lessons and implications for the enlarged EU.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Nijkamp et al. (New horizons in regional
science series)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 238 p. $100.00
Nijkamp (economic and economic geography, Free U., the Netherlands),
Moomaw (business administration, Oklahoma State U.), and Traistaru-
Siedschlag (head of the Centre for International Macroeconomic Analysis,
Economic and Social Research Institute, Ireland) present individual and
cross-country analyses of empirical evidence related to the spatial dimen-
sions of investment, entrepreneurship, and knowledge spillovers. The
analyses are used to draw out lessons for economic growth policy in the
European Union. Specific topics include European integration and
Japanese direct investment in the Central and East European countries,
foreign direct investment profitability of EU firms in Romania, financial
integration and investment performance in the European Union, deter-
minants of regional differences in new firm formation in Western
Germany, rural entrepreneurship success determinants, the county-level
role of socioeconomic factors in entrepreneurship development, small
and medium enterprises and territorial networks in Romania, knowledge
spillovers and regional growth, and foreign direct investment and
learning regions in Central and Eastern Europe.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HB615 2006-018355 0-275-98904-6
The entrepreneur’s strategy guide; ten keys for achieving
marketplace leadership and operational excellence.
Cannon, Tom.
Praeger, ©2006 301 p. $44.00
Cannon’s book describes successful strategies for small business CEOs
and managers and start-up entrepreneurs. He covers externally focused
strategies that position the business in the marketplace and managerial
and operational strategies for implementation of this goal. He follows ten
“keys” to create success, involving end-user benefits; pricing; infotech-
strengthened channels and supply chains; sales and marketing; customer
service; business planning; teaming; leveraged development, production,
and outsourcing; problem solving; and linking growth strategies with
profit plans. Many case examples are incorporated. Cannon is a mar-
keting and strategic planning consultant specializing in startups and
small businesses. The bibliography is annotated.
HB615 2006-028313 0-275-98986-0
Entrepreneurship; the engine of growth; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maria Minniti et al. (Praeger perspectives)
Praeger, ©2007 768 p. $300.00
This three-volume set (edited by a group of scholars from Babson College)
brings together 32 essays exploring the topic of entrepreneurship. The
first volume explores entrepreneurship as a form of human action, exam-
ining the influence of various factors on entrepreneurial behavior,
including cognition, risk, social capital, institutions, immigration and
ethnicity, and gender. The second volume switches focus to issues of the
entrepreneurial process and includes chapters on idea generation,
venture teams, investment processes and outcomes, venture capital
financing, small-firm growth strategies, entering global markets, and the
entrepreneurial exit. The final volume considers contexts that can be con-
nected to the concept of place, addressing such topics as franchising, eth-
nicity and entrepreneurship, entrepreneurship in transition economies,
regional influences, and national legal and policy regimes.
HB615 2006-046991 0-7734-5606-6
Studies in entrepreneurship, business, and government in
Hong Kong; the economic development of a small open
economy.
Yu, Tony Fu-Lai.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 268 p. $109.95
Yu (economics, Feng Chia U., Taiwan) analyzes the transformation of
Hong Kong into a small, open economy. Utilizing new institutional and
Austrian theories, he considers in turn the Chinese entrepreneurial spirit,
the business system, and government policies that have led to economic
success. Earlier versions of the 11 chapters were presented at interna-
tional conferences and/or published in various journals. Yu is also the
author of Entrepreneurship and Economic Development in Hong Kong
(1997).
HB701 2006-019429 978-0-252-07352-6
Henryk Grossman and the recovery of Marxism.
Kuhn, Rick.
U. of Illinois Press, ©2007 332 p. $25.00 (pa)
Kuhn (political science, Australian National U.) presents an intellectual
biography of Henryk Grossman (1881-1950), a longtime member of the
Polish Communist Party whose studies of Marx’s Capital highlighted and
expanded upon the crisis theory of capitalism, which insists on the ten-
dency of the rate of profit to fall as central to capitalism’s inability to
maintain growth without periods of sharp economic contraction.
HB846 2006-011575 978-0-7425-4703-2
Critics, ratings, and society; the sociology of reviews.
Blank, Grant.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 245 p. $24.95 (pa)
Blank (sociology, American U. in Washington, DC) presents the first full
sociological treatment of reviews (such as for restaurants, movies, books,
etc.) and rating systems. He explores the characteristics of review texts,
the production of reviews, audience responses and the effects of reviews
on the wider social world. He also explores the significance of the study
of reviews for wider theoretical concerns in sociology, suggesting that the
phenomenon of cultural evaluation is more important and widespread
than is generally recognized.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HB848 92-1-151409-6
World population prospects; the 2004 revision; v.3:
Analytical report.
Title main entry. Department of Economic and Social Affairs.
Population Division.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 195 p. $45.00 (pa)
This third in a series of three companion volumes provides a detailed
analysis of the results of the United Nations’ World Population Prospects
2004. It also documents data sources used and methods applied in the
preparation of the 2006 Revision. An executive summary of the results
has been translated into the six official UN languages. The remainder of
the volume is in English.
HB849 2006-935146 978-0-7391-1176-5
The Cairo consensus; democracy surveys, women’s
empowerment, and regime change in population policy.
Halfon, Saul.
Lexington Books, ©2007 261 p. $60.00
Held in Cairo in 1994, the International Conference on Population and
Development signaled a shift in the focus of population policy from envi-
ronmentally influenced demographic targets to feminist and humanist
goals relating to reproductive health and rights, women’s empowerment,
and broad-based development. In this study, Halfon investigates just
what made this transition possible and stable, with particular attention
paid to the role of technical practices. Halfon teaches Science and
Technology in Society at Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State U.
HB1061 2006-007573 978-0-8047-5486-6
The political economy of Japan’s low fertility.
Title main entry. Ed. by Frances McCall Rosenbluth.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 222 p. $45.00
Social scientists from the US, Europe, and Japan look at possible a cor-
relations between fertility and female welfare in Japan. They contend that
fertility tends to be depressed where vested interests impede female
access to the workforce, and higher where easy labor market accessibility
and childcare support make it easier women to balance family and
career. The thesis challenges some strongly held popular beliefs.
HB3581 2006-001115 978-1-84407-352-8
The new generation of Europeans; demography and
families in the enlarged EU.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wolfgang Lutz et al. (Population and sus-
tainable development series)
Earthscan Publications Ltd., ©2006 389 p. $105.00
From 1999 to 2004, the European Observatory on the Social Situation,
Demography, and Family investigated such questions as who Europe’s
future citizens will be, how many there will be, how healthy they will
be, how many children they will have, what kinds of families they will
have, and what challenges to their social cohesion will arise. In
September 2004, the researchers met in Brussels to present summary
reports on each of the themes they had pursued, among them migration.
Those 16 reports are published here. Distributed in the US by Stylus.
HC10 978-1-84673-012-2
The handbook of country risk, 2006; a guide to
international business and trade, 8th ed.
Title main entry.
GMB Publishing, ©2006 441 p. $129.00 (pa)
This handbook will be used as a resource by companies developing inter-
national trade and by entrepreneurs and their advisors concerned with
international investment. It provides analyses of the risks involved in
trading with or investing in 152 countries. Country entries are organized
by region, with regional overviews preceding the entries. Country entries
overview main economic indicators and conditions for market access,
and provide risk assessments, import/export data, standard of living and
purchasing power statistics, and information on foreign exchange regu-
lations and attitudes to foreign investors. Introductory articles overview
regional and global economic trends.
–102–
HC59 2006-045197 978-0-8213-6201-3
Aid that works; successful development in fragile states.
Title main entry. Ed. by James Manor. (Directions in development)
The World Bank, ©2007 301 p. $30.00 (pa)
Fragile states, those suffering from weak institutions and capacity and
vulnerable to conflict, pose obvious challenges to development efforts and
programs. In this text, Manor (director, Civil Society and Governance
Program, Institute of Development Studies, U. of Sussex) presents case
studies of a range of development projects in East Timor, Cambodia,
Mozambique, Afghanistan, and Uganda in order to draw out their
lessons for successful development in fragile states.
HC59 0-230-50058-7
Human development report 2006; beyond scarcity: Power,
poverty and the global water crisis.
United Nations Development Programme.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 422 p. $26.00 (pa)
The United Nation’s Human Development Report for 2006 rejects the view
that the widely recognized global water crisis is about absolute shortages
of physical supply, instead tracing the roots of the crisis to poverty,
inequality, and unequal power relationships, as well as flawed water
management policies that exacerbate scarcity. The report further argues
that few countries treat water and sanitation as a political priority, that
the world’s poorest are paying the highest prices for water, and the inter-
national community has failed to prioritize water and sanitation in its
development programs. In addition to detailing these problems and sug-
gesting solutions, the report also discusses water competition in agri-
culture and the management of transboundary water resources. Also
included in the volume are 31 statistical tables relevant to more general
indicators of human development.
HC59 2006-007608 0-8179-4742-6
The second twentieth century; how the information
revolution shapes business, states, and nations.
Rosa, JeanJacques. (Hoover Institution Press publication; 547)
Hoover Institution Press, ©2006 390 p. $15.00 (pa)
For Rosa (economics and finance, Institut d’Etudes Politiques, France) the
20th century was part of a universal cycle of social organization charac-
terized, until the late 1960s, by expansion of large corporate and state
organizations and, later, by the fragmentation of these organizations. In
seeking to determine the causal factors that drove this cycle, Rosa puts
forward an economic theory of technology that suggests the growth in
large organizations were the unintended consequences of aggregate indi-
viduals reacting to the technological possibilities of their time. As tech-
nology changed, particularly information and communication
technology, these forms of organization no longer made any sense and
thus fragmented. He considers the consequence of this fragmentation for
the (doomed) European Union, terrorism, secession and regionalist move-
ments, and other issues.
HC79 978-981-210-307-9
Challenging sustainability; urban development and
change in Southeast Asia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tai-chee Wong et al.
Marshall Cavendish Academic, ©2006 389 p. $39.00 (pa)
Dealing with the issue of sustainability in a rapidly urbanizing Southeast
Asia requires, in the view of the editors (two from Singapore’s Nanyang
Technological U. and the other from the U. of Western Australia), recog-
nition the intertwining relationship of physical environment, economic-
cultural developments, and social- political developments. They have thus
structured the 14 papers on urban development and change in the region
around these three broad issues. The first set of papers address envi-
ronmental and infrastructure developments, specifically looking at
public use of urban forest and related conservation issues in Singapore,
urban water management, urban transport, and other topics. Cultural
and economic developments discussed include the university and the
global knowledge economy, urban heritage conservation and tourism
development, and a case study of Nike as a global production network.
Among the social and political topics addressed are population devel-
opment, ethnicity and the city, moral geographies of squatting in Kuala
Lumpur, and urbanization in Burma (Mandalay and Rangoon).
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–103–
HC79 2005-058950 978-1-84542-616-3
The economic analysis of innovation; extending the
concept of national innovation systems.
Balzat, Markus. (New horizons in institutional and evolutionary eco-
nomics)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 187 p. $90.00
Balzat presents a revised version of his PhD thesis, completed at the U.
of Augsburg, Germany, in July 2004. Following an overview of the basic
elements and development of the national innovation systems (NIS)
concept, the author discusses the specifics and usefulness of NIS bench-
marking and then introduces an NIS-derived model that allows for a
comparison and evaluation of the performance level of national inno-
vation systems in highly developed countries. The model is applied in a
comparison study to a sample of 18 OECD member countries—16
European nations, the U.S., and Japan—to gain insights into the ability of
countries to develop and absorb new technologies, and to analyze the
structure of innovative efforts, the institutional framework conditions
and the measurable innovative performance in different countries. For
economists, scholars, and policymakers.
HC79 2006-009672 978-1-84407-371-9
Escaping poverty’s grasp; the environmental foundations
of poverty reduction.
Reed, David.
Earthscan Publications Ltd., ©2006 206 p. $85.00
The poverty reduction and resource conservation approach favored by
Reed (director, Macroeconomics Program Office, World Wildlife Fund-
International) and his colleagues is based on the following premises:
poverty-environment interventions require rigorous economic, ecological,
and institutional analysis at the micro, meso, and macro levels of society;
the starting point for such interventions involves removing obstacles at
the local level that prevent the poor from competing economically,
improving management of their natural resources, and participating in
political processes; policies and institutional arrangements need to be
aligned at the subnational (meso) and national (macro) levels; these
policy and institutional changes can only be effected by building alliances
between rural communities and a wide range of advocates, experts, and
supporting institutions. After describing this approach in some more
detail, he reports on experiences in trying to implement such interven-
tions in China, Indonesia, El Salvador, South Africa, and Zambia.
Distributed in the US by Stylus.
HC79 2006-025241 978-1-57444-564-0
Handbook of technology management in public
administration.
Title main entry. Ed. by David S. Greisler and Ronald J. Stupak. (Public
administration and public policy; 122)
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2007 859 p. $139.95
As editors Greisler (business, York College of Pennsylvania) and Stupak
(formerly, organizational behavior, U. of Southern California) put it in
their preface, the nine chapters of this handbook on the management,
implementation, and integration of technology in public administration
settings are “configured to challenge the reader to consider technology
form several perspectives: markets and the public sector (a macro-per-
spective) and organizations, groups, and individual consumers (a micro-
perspective).” The chapters discuss the culture of technology; innovations,
concerns, and barriers of technology transfer; ethical issues and con-
cerns; managing change and measuring performance; technology’s con-
tribution to quality; national security issues; negotiating technology
issues; and technology and the professions.
HC79 2005-044217 1-84376-578-0
Innovation dynamism and economic growth; a nonlinear
perspective.
Hirooka, Masaaki.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 426 p. $155.00
Beginning this work with an examination of the diffusion of techno-
logical innovations, Hirooka (Institute of Technoeconomics, Japan) finds
that they are of a logistic nature, suggesting that the innovation paradigm
exists within a definite time span with nonlinear causality. Within this
time span exist technology, development, and diffusion trajectories. The
nonlinear nature of these trajectories make it possible to make timing
judgments related to participation in innovation. The behavior of firms
in the course of innovation, international competitiveness of industries,
technology fusion by existing industries, and evolution of innovation par-
adigms are also explored in terms of innovation trajectories. Later, he dis-
cusses models of innovation as development process of science and
proposes a discrete knowledge dynamics that expands innovation
dynamics to cover wider knowledge transfer behavior in society.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HC79 0-8493-9358-2
The office process redesign language.
Chappelet, Jean-Loup and Michael Sherwood-Smith. (Management of
technology series)
CRC Press, ©2006 150 p. $69.95
With this detailed explanation of OPRL, Chappelet (public management
and information system, Swiss Graduate School of Public Administration,
U. of Lausanne) and Sherwood-Smith (former head of the computer
science department, University College Dublin) turn the seemingly oxy-
moronic concept of an e-office with people into a viable option. OPRL,
which is both an approach and a language for office process redesign,
allows hands-on managers and staff to communicate and approve
requirements of an office and to design internet-based office systems so
that the office processes can be generated, tested, simulated, operated
and adapted effectively. The Swiss publisher is EPFL Press; US distri-
bution is by CRC.
HC79 2006-926065 978-0-7546-4605-1
Sustainable development; national aspirations, local
implementation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer Hill et al.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 323 p. $124.95
Geographers and other earth scientists from Britain, the US, and the West
Indies identify discontinuities between national aspirations and local
implementation of sustainable development strategies. Among the issues
they explore is whether local knowledge, aspirations, and actions are
undermining national aspirations or whether they are simply being
ignored at the national level with detrimental consequences to sus-
tainable development. Many of the case studies come from Africa.
HC79 2006-927251 978-0-7618-3545-5
What’s left?; Marxism, Utopianism, and the revolt against
history.
Luzkow, Jack Lawrence.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 166 p. $28.95 (pa)
Luzkow (Fontbonne U.) believes that utopianism has played a generally
positive role throughout human history and wonders what the future of
socialist utopianism can be after the collapse of Marxist-Leninism. He
describes how Marxist utopianism was distorted for distinctly non-
utopian ends in Stalin’s Soviet Union and Mao’s China, but also offers
more positive assessment’s of the influence of Marxist utopianism in the
works of Walter Benjamin, Ernst Bloch, Herbert Marcuse, and Andre
Gorz.
HC85 2006-018481 978-1-4051-5995-1
Natural resources, taxation and regulation; unusual
perspectives on a classic problem.
Title main entry. Ed. by Laurence S. Moss. (Studies in economic reform
and social justice)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 396 p. $65.00
Economists and political scientists, most of them in the US, apply
modern analysis to problems of natural resources economics. Their
topics include a comparative political economy approach to farming
interest groups in Australia and the US, resources and the new economy,
non-renewable exhaustible resources and property taxation, and from
Austrian capital theory to ecological economics.
HC102 2006-031209 0-313-33862-0
Icons of business; an encyclopedia of mavericks, movers,
and shakers; 2v.
Drexler, Kateri. (Greenwood icons)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 515 p. $175.00
In this encyclopedia, 23 prominent figures in the contemporary business
world are profiled, with discussions of their personalities, career path,
leadership style, organizations, skills, and traits, as well as information
on biography and their personal lives. How these leaders wield power in
the political arena is also discussed, and sections on criticism of them
and their future impact are included. Individuals were chosen if their
companies were successful market leaders, and they represent a variety
of industries. Examples are Oprah Winfrey, Richard Branson, Warren
Buffett, Bill Gates, Alan Greenspan, Lee Iacocca, Phil Knight, Martha
Stewart, Donald Trump, Sam Walton, and Ted Turner. Quotes, company
information, and timelines are incorporated, and information for the
entries was drawn from research texts, management books, biographies,
autobiographies, interviews, and company websites. An index is included
in the second volume only.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HC103 2005-004599 1-85109-749-X
Industrial revolution in America; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kevin Hillstrom and Laurie Collier Hillstrom.
ABC-CLIO, ©2005 884 p. $185.00
These three volumes form the middle third of a nine-volume set exam-
ining the role of the Industrial Revolution in shaping American history.
While the first three volumes separately discussed iron and steel, rail-
roads, and steam shipping, these three place their focus on three of the
most important industrial sectors: textiles, mining and petroleum, and
automobiles. The remaining three volumes, scheduled for 2007, will
discuss agriculture and meatpacking, communications, and the
Industrial Revolution as a whole. Each volume is divided into ten nar-
rative topical chapters synthesizing the historical literature on origins
and developments, innovations and inventions, major entrepreneurs and
companies, lives of the workforce, labor organizations and reform move-
ments, environmental impact, immigration’s impact, societal impact,
Gilded Age art and literature, and the Modern Era.
HC103 2006-020728 978-0-7425-4205-1
Servants of wealth; the right’s assault on economic justice.
Ehrenberg, John. (Polemics)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 204 p. $60.00 (pa)
Whatever the differences among the American right, according to
Ehrenberg (political science, Long Island U.), the movement is united by
their support of aggressive state power to advance the interests of the
rich. Their remarkable success in achieving this plutocratic goal over the
past few decades came about through the fashioning of a broad ideo-
logical assault on liberalism that rested on militarism, strengthening
authority, racial fear, attacks on the welfare state, and moral defense of
inequality. The development of each of these pillars of the new right’s
ideological campaign is described in individual chapters.
HC106 2005-057116 978-1-57675-387-3
All together now; common sense for a fair economy.
Bernstein, Jared.
Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2006 154 p. $12.00 (pa)
The extreme “you’re on your own” individualism that currently guides
economic policy-making in Washington and much of our national dis-
course is, according to Bernstein (a senior economist and director of the
Living Standards Program at the Economic Policy Institute in
Washington, DC), “hurting our nation, endangering our future and that
of our children, and, paradoxically, making it harder for individuals to
get a fair shot at the American dream.” He describes the emergence of
this extremist paradigm amongst policy-makers and economists and pro-
poses his own “we’re in this together” alternative, which aims not for
“redistributionist Robin Hood schemes,” but for reconnecting a “flexible
economy to the living standards of all.”
HC106 2005-022028 0-19-518292-8
Depression, war, and cold war; studies in political
economy.
Higgs, Robert.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 221 p. $35.00
Higgs (political economy, The Independent Institute) builds upon his
earlier analysis of the political economy of the “military- industrial-con-
gressional-complex” and its effects on the wider economy, polity, and
society presented in Crisis and Leviathan: Critical Episodes in the Growth
of Government (1987) by collecting ten of his essays subsequently pub-
lished in peer-reviewed journals that extend and refine the ideas of the
1987 book. Topics include institutional antecedents of the modern mil-
itary procurement system in the US rearmament program of 1940-41, US
capital formation of the 1940s as wartime socialization of investment, the
political economy of the Cold War, Congress’s role in military pro-
curement, public opinion as a predictor of US defense spending, and
profit rates of US defense contractors.
HC106 978-0-7618-3100-6
President Reagan’s conservative fiscal policy;
unemployment among African Americans.
Okoye, Chiazam Ugo.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 152 p. $35.00 (pa)
Okoye (political science, Bethune Cookman College) analyzes the budget
and tax policies of Ronald Reagan’s administration and its impact on
African American unemployment. He looks at how the tax relief acts
passed by Congress and signed by Reagan and the budget cuts to such
programs as the Comprehensive Employment and Training Act helped
reverse the upward mobility and employment gains made by African
Americans in the 1960s and 1970s.
–104–
HC110 2006-021343 978-0-313-33688-1
Income and wealth.
Reynolds, Alan. (Greenwood guides to business and economics)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 231 p. $55.00
As part of a series aiming to improve economic literacy and decision-
making, this volume is meant for general readers, high school and
college students, or as a review for graduate students and those in
business. Reynolds (Cato Institute) provides a guide to the growth and
distribution of income and wealth in the US. He addresses statistics pur-
ported by the press and economists, arguing that these perspectives are
often influenced by a misunderstanding of basic concepts and measures.
He then explains those concepts and measures, as well as work and
income, the idea that the middle class is declining, and claims that
average wages have not increased, and includes a discussion of the
income of the top one percent. He discusses CEOs and stock options, the
distribution of wealth, using consumption as a measure of living stan-
dards, and recommendations to fix wage or income inequality.
HC130 2006-047623 978-0-8213-6676-9
Infrastructure in Latin America and the Caribbean; recent
developments and key challenges.
Fay, Marianne and Mary Morrison. (Directions in development.
Infrastructure)
The World Bank, ©2007 130 p. $25.00 (pa)
Jointly produced by the World Bank and the Inter-American Development
Bank, this report examines infrastructure issues in Latin America and
the Caribbean. The report finds that regional infrastructure has fallen
behind what should be expected based on the region’s income and lays
much of the blame on governments that have relied solely on the private
sector for financing and management. The report recommends greater
spending on infrastructure, greater attention to infrastructure mainte-
nance, greater government responsibility for regulating and overseeing
infrastructure provision, and improving the framework for private par-
ticipation in infrastructure. Co-published by the World Bank and
Stanford U. Press.
HC153 2005-028037 978-0-8135-3854-9
Reproducing inequities; poverty and the politics of
population in Haiti.
Maternowska, M. Catherine. (Rutgers studies in medical anthropology)
Rutgers U. Press, ©2006 221 p. $26.95 (pa)
Investigating why poor women and men decline to use family-planning
services, medical anthropologist Maternowska (U. of California at San
Francisco) conducted fieldwork in the Haitian slum of Cité Soleil during
the three years following the first coup overthrowing President Jean-
Bertrand Aristide, a remarkable feat in itself as Cité Soleil represented a
major part of the base for Aristide’s Lavalas movement and was under
siege by the Coup supporters. Employing a political economy of fertility
framework, she examines how structures of power determine (and
deform) demographic policies as they filter down to the program level
and finds a dynamic of reproduction and resistance in which local
popular movements challenge traditional public health initiatives as
unresponsive to the needs of the poor.
HC155 2006-924968 978-0-7546-4391-3
Environmental planning in the Caribbean.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jonathan Pugh and Janet Henshall Momsen.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 207 p. $99.95
In keeping with the aim of the Urban Planning and Environment series,
this volume presents empirically based studies that assess a variety of ini-
tiatives to improve environmental quality. The contributors use case
studies of both large and small nations to provide an interdisciplinary
critical overview of environmental planning in the Caribbean. They argue
that context is central to environmental planning in this region and focus
on the interaction between local and global relations of power. The topics
covered include participatory planning, urban planning, physical devel-
opment planning, pest management, sustainable development, water pol-
lution, and ecotourism.
–105–
HC182 2006-033480 978-0-8213-6662-2
Bolivia; public policy options for the well-being of all.
Title main entry. Ed. by Vicente Fretes-Cibils et al.
The World Bank, ©2006 538 p. $50.00 (pa)
The editors (all of the World Bank) present a report that is intended to
contribute to the debate over Bolivia’s economic and social development
policy. The volume starts by reviewing issues and providing recommen-
dations connected to economic policy, including discussion of macroeco-
nomic management, tax collection, transaction costs and aid
effectiveness, management and sustainability of the public debt, the
financial system, the energy resource sector, productivity and competi-
tiveness, rural development, and trade and integration policies. It then
turns to issues of social inclusion and exclusion and social service pro-
vision in chapters that address poverty and inequality, Bolivia’s
indigenous population, gender issues, education and health, social pro-
tection, pension reform, water and sanitation, transportation systems,
environmental degradation, and land policy. Finally, governance is
examined in chapters discussing the efficiency and transparency in
public administration, political decentralization, and justice and public
security.
HC188 2006-005165 978-0-8047-5179-7
Frontier Goias, 1822-1889.
McCreery, David.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 297 p. $55.00
Although it lies at the physical center of Brazil, during the 19th century
the province of Goiás occupied a frontier position in terms of the state-
building project of the Brazilian elites, according to McCreery (history,
Georgia State U.). He offers a descriptive treatment of state-building in
Goiás in an effort to fill a hole in the understanding of the national
history of Brazil, which has tended to focus on areas connected to the
export sectors. Topics covered include the manifestations of central gov-
ernment power in the province, populations that threatened state power,
obstacles to trade and industry, agriculture, stock raising, land and law,
and labor mobilization and control.
HC240 2006-010251 978-0-691-12710-1
The European economy since 1945; coordinated capitalism
and beyond.
Eichengreen, Barry. (The Princeton economic history of the Western
world)
Princeton U. Press, ©2007 495 p. $35.00
Discussing the rapid “catch-up” growth of both Western and Eastern
European economies in the first decades following the end of World War
II in his chronological narrative of the European economy, Eichengreen
(economics and political science, U. of California at Berkeley) argues that
Europe had inherited a set of institutions particularly well suited for the
task—a coordinated capitalism of solidaristic trade unions, cohesive
employers associations, and growth-minded governments working
together to mobilize savings, finance investment, and stabilize wages at
levels consistent with full employment in Western Europe and wholesale
nationalization and central planning in the East. While these institutions
worked well when brute-force capital formation and technology acqui-
sition were important to growth, a shift came in which increases in effi-
ciency and internally generated innovation became more important for
economic growth. This transition, Eichengreen argues, meant that those
same institutions that had once worked well for European growth
became greater constrains on the economy beginning in the 1970s.
HC240 2006-050648 0-88135-394-9
Networking Europe; transnational infrastructures and the
shaping of Europe, 1850-2000.
Title main entry. Ed. by Erik van der Vleuten and Arne Kaijser.
Science History Pubns., ©2006 335 p. $47.50
The authors of these ten articles contend that infrastructures integrated
across Europe are fraught with the intentions and fears of history, and
prone to conflicts based not on the needs of the European Union but on
past economic and political events. They describe the Greek pursuit of an
“Iron Egnatia” in Balkan Europe, the influence of the Swiss Gotthard
Railways, early technological visions of a united Europe, the building of
European power grids through such means as IG Auschwitz, past
telecommunications networks, Dutch power relations, electricity systems
in the Baltic region, and the results of two decades of large technical
system studies. Science History Publications USA is a division of Watson
Publishing International.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HC241 2005-035222 0-7546-4805-2
The economics of European integration; theory, practice,
policy, 5th ed.
Molle, Willem.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 446 p. $154.95
Molle (international economics, Erasmus U. Rotterdam, The Netherlands)
presents the latest edition of his text designed for students in courses fol-
lowing European integration and for those with a professional interest in
the subject. The text has been revised throughout to reflect changes in
course requirements, new statistical information, and recent policy devel-
opments, and features new material on the ongoing integration of the
new member states and the new forms of association with the recent
accession countries of Central and Eastern Europe; the establishment of
the European Monetary Unit and subsequent performance of the Euro;
and the EU’s past and future development as a guide to the successful
economic integration of other regions of the world and for the
improvement of global economic governance.
HC244 978-90-76998-96-1
Heterodox views on economics and the economy of the
global society.
Title main entry. Ed. by G. Meijer et al. (Mansholt publications series;
v.1)
Wageningen Academic Publishers, ©2006 399 p. $60.00 (pa)
This volume contains revised papers from the eighth conference of the
International Society for Intercommunication of New Ideas, which was
founded by a Romanian economist for the purpose of discovering and
testing new ideas in economics and the social sciences more generally.
Most of the papers are “heterodox” in their views of economics and the
global economy in that they either reject mainstream neo-classical
analysis or supplement it with insights from other social sciences.
Examples of topics discussed in the 19 contributions include money,
freedom, and order in the European Union; modeling relationships
between inequality and market maladjustment; perceived inflation and
actual price changes in the Netherlands; empowering “ultimate owners”
as a means to improve corporate governance; the effect of changes in cor-
porate ownership structure on performance; cost projection of emissions
reduction; modeling environmental cooperation on reciprocal emission
reduction via virtual market systems, the effects of free trade arrange-
ments on social welfare and urban employment; and financial sector
reforms and impact of monetary policy shocks in Nigeria. Distributed in
the US by Enfield.
HC260 2006-017471 978-0-8214-1702-7
The cut of his coat; men, dress, and consumer culture in
Britain, 1860-1914.
Shannon, Brent.
Ohio University Press, ©2006 252 p. $49.95
Shannon (English, Transylvania U., Kentucky) examines the costume,
grooming habits, and consumer practices of Britain’s middle-class urban
males during the period. He re-evaluates the long-overlooked changes in
male sartorial and consumer habits in order to discern why the
Victorians seem heavily invested in denying men’s relationship to
consumerism.
HC260 0-7190-7504-1
The experience of urban poverty, 1723-82; parish, charity
and credit.
Tomkins, Alannah.
Manchester U. Press, ©2006 289 p. $85.00
Records of particular parish paupers tend to be rare, but Tomkins
(history, Keele U.) finds that taken together they can offer deeper insights
into what it was like being poor in 18th-century England than more
general studies of the phenomenon. In the process, she addresses the
issue of the character of the old poor law and the balance of alternative
welfare or survival resources. Distributed in the US by Palgrave
Macmillan.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HC260 978-1-905785-02-5
Social policy in Ireland; principles, practice and problems,
rev.ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sean Healy et al.
Liffey Press, ©2006 468 p. $38.95 (pa)
Two directors of the Justice Office of the Conference of Religious of
Ireland (CORI Justice) and an economist at Trinity College Dublin present
a work that continues in the tradition of CORI Justice previous publica-
tions on Irish social policy by alternately exploring issues of principle
and paradigm, analyzing general practices, or focusing on specific
problems. Twenty-two contributions discuss such topics as equality, plu-
ralism, evidence-based policy-making, population and demographic
change, measurements and trends of poverty, the implications of the
European Union’s social inclusion indicators, taxation reform,
employment and unemployment, housing, health policy, neoliberalism
and education, rural development, migration, family policy, social capital
and well-being, the economic challenge of sustainability, and the political
economy of altruism. Distributed in the US by Dufour.
HC340 978-0-7734-5580-1
The reinvention of capitalism; Russia’s alternative to
corporate concentration and to the command economy.
Piveronus, Peter J.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 168 p. $99.95
In contrast to Marx, Ricardo, and others, economist Louis Kelso proposed
a binary theory of economics which identified both labor and capital as
the sources of added value, extending this idea to the claim that if labor
owned enterprises, the result would be greater efficiency and produc-
tivity and worker-owners would have incentives to expand both profits
and wages, thus increasing social justice and welfare. Piveronus (history,
Lansing Community College) argues that Kelso’s theory, as expressed in
his The Capitalist Manifesto (1958), became a major element in the
Russian transition of the 1990s. He describes how the theory was imple-
mented through the issuance of negotiable, alienable, and heritable
vouchers representing ownership in construction, retail, food, and light
industries and presents a generally approving assessment of the effects
of Russia’s “People’s Capitalism.”
HC390 0-8213-6575-4
The state of state reform in Latin America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eduardo Lora.
The World Bank, ©2007 446 p. $35.00 (pa)
Declaring the past couple decades as an era of silent revolution for state
institutions in Latin America, Lora (principal adviser, Research
Department, Inter-American Development Bank) presents 12 papers
reviewing and assessing key aspects of institutional reform. Each paper
focuses on a particular area of institutional reform, summarizing the
objectives of the reform, describing and measuring their scope, and iden-
tifying obstacles to their implementation and effectiveness, and com-
paring and contrasting reforms and their results for the different Latin
American countries. Individual chapters focus on political reform,
judicial reform, public administration and public employment reform,
budgetary institutions, tax reform, fiscal and political decentralization,
privatization and regulation, financial reforms, productive development
policies and supporting institutions, pension and social assistance
systems, and educational reform. Co-published by Stanford U. Press.
HC412 2005-031680 1-84542-713-0
Asia’s innovation systems in transition.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bengt-Ake Lundvall et al. (New horizons in the
economics of innovation series)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 322 p. $130.00
Lundvall (economics, Aalborg U., Denmark, and economics and man-
agement, Tringhua U., China) et al. bring together 12 essays by scholars
in business, science and technology, and economics from Europe and
Asia, who examine innovation systems and competence- building systems
in Asia, which they view as being in transition. They discuss how
national systems have upgraded their production structure through
empirical examples, followed by case studies of four innovation systems
in Thailand, Hong Kong, Indonesia, and Korea. Science-based innovation
in Japan, India, and Singapore, and policy learning in China comprise
the final section. Essays were originally given as papers at the First
Asialics Conference on Asian Innovation Systems and Clusters held in
Bangkok in Spring 2004. The book, developed in connection with the net-
works GLOBELICS and ASIALICS, is meant for academics and post-
graduate students and national and international policy organizations.
–106–
HC424 2006-009835 978-0-7391-1155-0
Culture, politics, and development in postcolonial Sri
Lanka.
Hennayake, Nalani.
Lexington Books, ©2006 211 p. $75.00
In this study, Hennayake investigates the intricate and complex rela-
tionship between politics, culture, and development in postcolonial Sri
Lanka. Particular attention is paid to the significance of culture in con-
ceptualizing development indigenously. The author also describes the
explicit political program that attempted to mediate between development
and local culture and examines how certain development projects have
been contested by local populations. Hennayake teaches geography at the
U. of Peradeniya, Sri Lanka. The text is an expanded and updated version
of her doctoral dissertation.
HC424 2006-027542 978-0-7619-3536-0
Development under stress; Sri Lankan economy in
transition.
Kelegama, Saman.
Sage Publications, ©2006 305 p. $79.95
During the late 1950s, says Kelegama (Institute of Policy Studies of Sri
Lanka, Colombo) Sri Lanka had per-capita income levels similar to those
in South Korea and Malaysia, and for 30 years after independence
implemented consistent measures to improve the physical quality of life.
He argues that the stressful political, military, and economic environment
that the government has constantly operated under can explain why the
one island has not prospered while the other two have.
HC427 2005-035223 0-7546-4482-0
The Chinese economy after WTO accession.
Title main entry. Ed. by Shuming Bao et al. (The Chinese economy
series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 357 p. $124.95
In 18 papers revised from presentations at an August 2003 conference in
Ann Arbor, Michigan, Chinese and US economists evaluate the impact of
China’s 2001 entry into the World Trade Organization on the Chinese
and world economy. They analyze the challenges and opportunities faced
by China and other countries, discuss China’s current economic
problems, and offer recommendations to policy makers.
HC427 2006-008484 978-0-7425-5354-5
A Chinese economic revolution; rural entrepreneurship in
the twentieth century.
Grove, Linda. (State and society in East Asia)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 305 p. $60.00
While most analysts trace the growth in Chinese industry to the eco-
nomic reform policies of 1978, Grove (liberal arts, Sophia U., Tokyo)
places it in the context of a century-long development trajectory, and
explores links between managerial practices in contemporary rural firms
and traditional Chinese business practices. Her case study is the Gaoyang
weaving district from its rise in the first decade of the 20th century to
the present.
HC427 2006-002906 0-415-39584-4
Critical issues in contemporary China.
Title main entry. Ed. by Czeslaw Tubilewicz.
Routledge, ©2006 269 p. $125.00
Tubilewicz (China and international studies, Open U. of Hong Kong,
China) presents nine chapters that are intended to collectively address the
critical political and socioeconomic issues facing China in the reform era.
Underpinned by the interrelated themes of stability, sustainable devel-
opment, and territorial integrity, which are also addressed broadly by the
introductory chapter, the individual papers explore critical developments
in Chinese politics; privatization and its consequences; uneven economic
development; China’s environmental problems; population change and
food security; ethnic minorities; critical social issues of gender, education,
health, and economic inequality; and Taiwan Strait relations and the
prospects for reunifications.
All books cited here are new, and all are in print and available.
We prepare entries from bound books only, never galleys.
–107–
HC427 2005-034794 0-415-38067-7
Economic and social transformation in China; challenges
and opportunities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Angang Hu. (Routledge studies on the Chinese
economy)
Routledge, ©2007 276 p. $135.00
Hu compiles material from the China Studies Reports of Tsinghua U.’s
Center for China Studies, an influential Chinese policy think-tank
directed by him that has often had policy recommendations adopted by
the Chinese political leadership. The volume’s 13 chapters collectively
provide a grand overview of the perceived current status and future chal-
lenges of Chinese economic and social development. Individual chapters
discuss the causal factors behind Chinese economic growth; the compar-
ative comprehensive national power of China versus other world and
regional powers; coordination in regional development; poverty reduction
efforts; health insecurity; aging population concerns; urban unem-
ployment and social security; national savings and natural capital; cor-
ruption; institution building as a “second transformation” of the
Communist Party; and need to make policy decision-making more sci-
entific, democratic, systematic, and specialized
HC427 2006-041791 978-1-84542-768-9
Economic growth, transition, and globalization in China.
International Conference on “Transition, Growth, and Globalization in
China” (2005: Perth, W.A.) Ed. by Yanrui Wu. (Advances in Chinese eco-
nomic studies series)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 241 p. $100.00
Between 1978 and 2004 the Chinese industrial sector grew to nearly half
the GDP while the agricultural segment declined from about 28 percent
to about 13 percent. Increases in exports have grown at an average of 18
per cent from 1979 to 2004, and soon even more astonishing changes will
come in an explosion of domestic consumption. Drawn from those pre-
sented at the July 2005 conference, these 11 papers describe the dramatic
changes in Chinese economy and society since 1978, particularly its
emerging role in the world economy as both producer and consumer.
They describe the sources of growth, inter-regional fluctuations in output,
business cycles, prospects from 2005 to 2020, the performance of city
economies, rural migration and public security, efficiency in job-
matching, banking reform and management on a macroeconomic scale,
the exchange rate debate, and the economic development brought on by
globalization.
HC427 0-7315-3763-7
The turning point in China’s economic development.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ross Garnaut and Ligang Song.
Asia Pacific Press, ©2006 390 p. $40.00 (pa)
The “turning point” of the Chinese economy to which the editors (pro-
fessors of economics at The Australian National U.) refer in the title of
this book is the point at which surplus labor from rural agricultural
sectors ceases to be available, forcing real wage increases and real
exchange rate appreciation, thus generating structural shifts towards
more capital-intensive and technologically sophisticated industrial
structure and the expense of labor intensive manufacturing and agri-
culture. They present 17 papers analyzing the domestic and international
economic ramifications of this structural change. Specific topics include
constraints and policy options for economic growth, China’s role in the
international currency system, the financing of Chinese bank restruc-
turing, labor scarcity and trade expansion, the impact of the gust-worker
system on poverty in urban China, demographic change and the labor
supply constraint, changing patterns in China’s agricultural trade after
accession to the World Trade Organization, changing demand for
resources, the coal industry and the environment, and energy use and
greenhouse gas emissions. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HC435 2006-541031 81-7188-530-6
Propelling India from socialist stagnation to global power;
v.1: Growth process.
Virmani, Arvind.
Academic Foundation, ©2006 419 p. $69.95
Over the course of two volumes, Virmani (principal adviser, Planning
Commission, Governor of India) reviews the economic history of India,
analyzes major aspects of India’s economic reform, and projects India’s
economic future. In this first volume he analyzes the overarching tra-
jectory of Indian macroeconomic growth from Independence to the
1980s, considers lessons drawn from China’s experience with economic
reform, explores India’s place in the global economic and political order
(proposing the likelihood of a Sino-American-Indian “Tripolar Century”),
and examines the political economy of Indian social welfare and voting.
The second volume focuses more narrowly on specific areas of reform.
Distributed in N. America by Independent Publishers Group, Chicago.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HC435 2006-541031 81-7188-531-4
Propelling India from socialist stagnation to global power;
v.2: Policy reforms.
Virmani, Arvind.
Academic Foundation, ©2006 485 p. $69.95
Over the course of two volumes, Virmani (principal adviser, Planning
Commission, Governor of India) reviews the economic history of India,
analyzes major aspects of India’s economic reform, and projects India’s
economic future. In the first volume, he looked at overarching macro-
economic and political economic issues, whereas in this volume he offers
more detailed analysis of particular areas of reform, especially those of
the 1990s. Individual chapters discuss food and agriculture policy,
foreign direct investment reform, value-added tax and customs duty
reforms, customs tariff reform, the impact of tariff reform on Indian
industry, and domestic and global financial integration. Distributed in N.
America by Independent Publishers Group, Chicago.
HC440 2006-345188 984-05-1735-X
Elite perceptions of poverty in Bangladesh.
Hossain, Naomi.
University Press Limited, ©2005 173 p. $5.02 (pa)
In Dhaka, the capital city of Bangladesh, the sheer extent of poverty
means that even the elite have multiple encounters with the poor,
whether through extended family connections to their home villages,
their domestic live-in servants, or just the numerous poor crowding the
streets. Measuring and analyzing elite perceptions of the poor, Hossain
(Institute of Development Studies, U. of Sussex, UK) asks whether the
Bangladeshi elite believe poverty to be a priority. It’s perhaps not sur-
prising that poverty is found to not be a priority for the elites, but the
identified reasons are perhaps interesting. These include the perception
that the poor don’t pose a threat to the elites, the belief that poverty is a
consequence of national underdevelopment, and a lack of confidence in
the efficacy of state anti-poverty programs.
HC440 2006-414387 984-05-1755-4
Growth and poverty; the development experience of
Bangladesh.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sadiq Ahmed and Wahiduddin Mahmud.
University Press Limited, ©2006 315 p. $50.00
Ahmed (director, Poverty Reduction and Economic Management unit,
South Asia Region, World Bank) and Mahmud (economics, U. of Dhaka,
Bangladesh) present 12 papers from a joint World Bank/U. of Dhaka
Bureau of Economic Research seminar on “Accelerating Growth and
Poverty Reduction in Bangladesh.” Topics include the sources of rising
inequality in Bangladesh; cross-country analysis of employment/poverty
linkages; connections between political regimes and poverty reduction;
the political economy of Bangladeshi development; entrepreneurship,
productivity, and investment climate; public enterprise performance and
strategy; a human rights perspective on basic health service delivery; fer-
tility decline under poverty; micro-finance experiences; citizens’ views of
basic service delivery; and participation of non-governmental organiza-
tions in the delivery of social services.
HC444 2005-024435 0-415-34311-9
Vietnam’s development strategies.
Masina, Pietro P. (Routledge contemporary Southeast Asia series; 10)
Routledge, ©2006 182 p. $105.00
Masina (international political economy, U. of Naples, Italy) presents a
critical analysis of the major areas of debate amongst the Vietnamese
leadership concerning national development strategy and an assessment
of Vietnam’s doi moi renovation process. He discusses the ideas that have
formed the Washington Consensus of the international financial institu-
tions and the ideas of the repackaged post-Washington Consensus fol-
lowing in the wake of the East Asian financial crisis (the dominant
perspectives in the debates), while also exploring the South Korean and
Japanese models of state strategic development guidance, and the idea
that Vietnam can somehow further the socialist transformation promised
by leaders such as Ho Chi Minh while still embracing market-friendly
reforms. He argues that it is incumbent upon Vietnamese leaders not to
unreservedly accept the diktats of the International Monetary Fund and
the World Bank and to pay greater attention to the possibilities suggested
by the other two conceptual frames of development.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HC460 2005-029313 978-0-7890-2744-3
Globalization and East Asia; opportunities and challenges.
International Trade and Finance Association Conference (12th: 2002:
Bangkok, Thailand)
Haworth Pr., ©2006 289 p. $34.95 (pa)
First presented at the 12th International Conference of the International
Trade and Finance Association (May/June, 2002), the 16 revised studies
contained in this text explore aspects of the economic performance of
East Asian countries over the past few decades. Fatemi (president,
Eastern Oregon U.) has organized the papers into four sections that
provide a contextual overview; present comparative studies on such
issues as comparative advantage recycling, relative industry efficiencies,
economic structural differences, trade flows, and financial resource
flows; discuss trends in international finance; and contain industry-spe-
cific studies of the textile and apparel industries of Vietnam and of US
apparel imports. A final chapter discusses future research directions.
HC800 2005-036769 978-1-84407-319-1
Water governance for sustainable development.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sylvain Perret et al.
Earthscan Publications Ltd., ©2006 295 p. $89.95
Emphasizing African case studies, this collection presents 16 papers that
explore global water politics in terms of recent changes in governance,
institutions, economics, and policies. The editors (professors of agricul-
tural and environmental economics at the U. of Pretoria, South Africa)
first present two keynote papers that review two major issues of water
governance: institutions and economic viability. The next six papers
explore governance, institutions, and policies in Southern Africa at the
local level of communities and irrigation schemes and at the
regional/basin level. The final papers explore practical tools and
approaches to institutional, economic, and policy-related issues of water
governance in found in Tanzania, Morocco, Mexico, Brazil, France, and
South Africa. Distributed in the US by Stylus.
HC810 2006-025730 978-0-8213-6796-4
Fostering higher growth and employment in the Kingdom
of Morocco. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. (A World Bank country study)
The World Bank, ©2006 107 p. $25.00 (pa)
The study investigates the low economic growth rate in the North African
country, which is seen as the central challenge in its development agenda.
Applying the innovative procedure Growth Diagnostic, it identifies
Morocco’s binding constraints to growth, and recommends activist
policies for productive diversification and enhanced competitiveness of
the economy. The disk contains the background studies on which the
final report is based. There is no index.
HC830 90-04-15277-6
Changing consumer cultures of modern Egypt; Cairo’s
urban reshaping.
Abaza, Mona. (Social, economics and political studies of the Middle
East and Asia (S.E.P.S.M.E.A.); V.101)
BRILL, ©2006 309 p. $134.00
Having studied consumerism in Singapore and Kuala Lampur, Abaza
(sociology, American U., Cairo) returned to Cairo to find similar devel-
opments there. She began making observations in malls and interviewing
managers, workers, and public but soon realized that consumer culture
thrived away from the glitter as well, in coffee houses, cuisines, and
other mundane matters. Among her findings is that consumerism does
not necessarily equate with homogenization because Egyptians do it dif-
ferently than, for example, Indonesians and Chinese.
HC905 978-0-8213-6537-3
Africa development indicators; 2006. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry.
The World Bank, ©2006 152 p. $125.00 (pa)
In this year’s data collection, The World Bank finds Africa doing great:
conflicts have declined, economic performance has improved, some high
performers are beginning to emerge, and 14 countries have achieved
average growth rates over five percent since the 1990s. The tables are
arranged under sections on basic indicators and national accounts,
Millennium Development Goals, development outcomes, and household
welfare by country. There is no index.
–108–
HC905 2006-473162 0-7969-2123-7
The development decade? Economic and social change in
South Africa, 1994-2004.
Title main entry. Ed. by Vishnu Padayachee.
Human Sciences Res. Council, ©2006 471 p. $39.95
The 19 papers presented by Padayachee (development studies, U. of
KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa) review the results of the so-called “devel-
opment decade” in South Africa, the ten years following the fall of
Apartheid during which the country was governed by the alliance of the
African National Congress, the Congress of South African Trade Unions,
and the South African Communist Party, who had largely embraced
neoliberal economics and reform. Utilizing different analytical frame-
works and methodologies, the chapters summarize and analyze eco-
nomic and social developments in the realms of macroeconomic and
microeconomic reforms, poverty and inequality, gender and social
security, industrial innovation and clustering, local municipal economic
development, labor supply and demand, the informal economy, popu-
lation health, rural development, and social movements. Distributed in
the US by Independent Publishers Group.
HC995 0-7734-5638-4
Global development and remote African villages;
environmental conservation and cultural survival in
Cameroon.
Wolfgram, Steven A.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 364 p. $129.95
In this study, Wolfgram aims to identify the reasons why so many con-
servation projects fail in Africa despite the involvement of local people.
Drawing upon a review of the literature as well as field research in
remote Cameroonian villages, he illuminates the complex relationships
between local culture, local ecosystem type, and development and con-
servation priorities. He concludes with a discussion of the need for locally
designed and implemented projects for biodiversity and sustainability.
Wolfgram (Cardinal Stricht U.) has been involved in research, environ-
mental conservation, and human development projects in Cameroon
since 1992. The text is based upon his 2005 dissertation.
PRODUCTION, INDUSTRY, COMMERCE
HD30 2004-351841 1-59140-259-X
Annals of cases on information technology.
Khosrow-Pour, Mehdi.
Idea Group Publishing, ©2004 628 p. $149.00 (pa)
Volume six in this series collects experiences with implementing and
managing information technology in the business and government
sectors, and offers cautionary tales about the dangers of overlooking
crucial issues. The 36 case studies address electronic commerce, business
process automation, accounting information systems, IT in developing
countries, the human side of IT, and end-user computing issues. Specific
topics include building automation into existing business processes,
implementing an ambulance dispatch system, eliciting the requirements
for intelligent systems in law enforcement, library networking at a
Venezuelan university, and outsourcing systems management.
HD30 978-0-7734-5615-0
The art of organisational problem-solving; how to think
about what we are doing in management.
Kawalek, John Paul.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 316 p. $119.95
Kawatek (systems theory, change management, and management con-
sultancy at U. of Sheffield in the UK) presents methodological principles
for managing process improvement in organizations. His discussion,
which brings together concerns about philosophical issues, epistemology,
analysis of interaction and behavior, critical thinking, and learning
processes, is set within the context of his overall goal of integrating
inquiry as an integral component of management action in practice.
–109–
HD30 2006-003567 1-59904-412-9
Cases on information technology and organizational
politics & culture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mehdi Khosrow-Pour.
Idea Group Publishing, ©2006 413 p. $69.95 (pa)
The spread of information technology into wider and wider areas of
organizational functioning, notes Khosrow-Pour (editor-in-chief, Journal of
Cases on Information Technology), suggests the need for more attention to
the impact of information technology on organizational politics and
culture. He presents 25 real-life cases that illustrate various aspects of the
relationship between information technology and organizational politics
and culture through examining an integrated online library resources
automation project; the alignment of business strategy with business
structure, culture, communication, and change within the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration; information technology and orga-
nizational performance in corporations; small business-to-business e-com-
merce; information technology governance within the airlines industry;
the cross-cultural implementation of an information system; and the
introduction of networked personal computers in a local government
offices, to name a few.
HD30 2006-003568 1-59904-409-9
Cases on information technology planning, design and
implementation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mehdi Khosrow-Pour.
Idea Group Publishing, ©2006 370 p. $69.95 (pa)
This volume presents 21 cases illustrating how companies and organiza-
tions have planned, designed, and implemented various applications
using information technology. Both successes and failures are included,
and a wide range of issues related to systems development, design, and
analysis of modern information systems are addressed. Each case is fol-
lowed by some questions for discussion. A former professor of infor-
mation systems at the Pennsylvania State U., Khosrow-Pour is
editor-in-chief of Journal of Cases on Information Technology. Most of the
cases were previously published in that journal or in others edited by
him.
HD30 2006-029150 978-0-7619-3525-4
IT application service offshoring; an insider’s guide.
Lewis, Mario.
Sage Publications, ©2006 233 p. $32.95 (pa)
Mario Lewis is a senior consultant within the offshore software delivery
industry in Bangalore. In this guide for business leaders and project
managers, he discusses the practical considerations involved when
moving IT operations to another country. He describes what types of
work can be offshored, outlines several offshore delivery engagement
models, and explains how best to staff and organize offshore teams. The
volume lacks bibliographical references. Response Books is an imprint of
Sage India.
HD30 2005-049717 1-84542-236-8
Knowledge intensive business services; organizational
forms and national institutions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marcela Miozzo and Damian Grimshaw.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 279 p. $110.00
Bringing together scholars from a mix of disciplines, this volume explores
the nature and evolution of a range of Knowledge Intensive Business
Services (KIBS). The contributors examine various KIBS sectors, such as
computer services, management consultancy and R&D services, but all
agree that the evolution of KIBS is strongly associated with new inter-
organizational forms and that different country institutions shape the
characteristics of these forms. Editors Miozzo (innovation studies) and
Grimshaw (employment studies) both teach at the Manchester Business
School at the U. of Manchester.
HD30 2006-005776 978-0-7656-1728-6
Knowledge management in the public sector; a blueprint
for innovation in government.
McNabb, David E.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 325 p. $34.95 (pa)
McNabb (business administration, Pacific Lutheran U.) explains how
knowledge management techniques developed by and for corporations
can be used by national, state, and local governments. He covers the foun-
dations of knowledge management, transforming government with it,
and knowledge management systems in the public sector. Three case
studies look at NASA, the Army’s Communications-Electronics
Command, and the Virginia Department of Transportation.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD30 2006-012371 1-59904-308-4
Knowledge management systems in law enforcement;
technologies and techniques.
Gottschalk, Petter.
Idea Group Publishing, ©2007 335 p. $79.95 (pa)
Gottschalk (Norwegian School of Management) takes the knowledge man-
agement concepts already used by businesses and applies them to the
analysis of criminal information and knowledge through a stages of
growth model which begins with police officers as knowledge workers
and culminates in artificial intelligence to support police work. The
unique textbook doesn’t provide any exercises, but does summarize
research studies on professional skills, anti-terror investigations, and
value shops.
HD30 2006-003847 978-0-7656-1779-8
Management economics; an accelerated approach.
Forgang, William G. and Karl W. Einolf.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 218 p. $42.95 (pa)
This management economics textbook was designed specifically for accel-
erated and on-line courses at the upper undergraduate and MBA levels.
Its non-mathematical approach emphasizes the links between economic
analysis and other business topics such as marketing, communications,
accounting, and strategy. Each of seven chapters concludes with a
business case and discussion questions.
HD30 2005-034273 978-0-471-76894-4
Service-oriented architecture; a planning and
implementation guide for business and technology.
Marks, Eric A. and Michael Bell.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 378 p. $59.95
This resource for business and IT professionals provides an accessible
overview of the business and technology issues involved in service-ori-
ented architecture (SOA). The authors’ modeling approach is general and
may be applied to all industries, technology platforms, and operating
environments. Sample topics include asset reuse, governance, archi-
tecture, and return on investment. Marks is a veteran software and tech-
nology services expert, and Bell is founder of an SOA modeling firm.
HD30 2006-017155 0-8493-5360-2
Service oriented enterprises.
Khoshafian, Setrag.
Auerbach Publications, ©2007 438 p. $79.95
Developed as a technological tool for engineers, service oriented archi-
tecture (SOA) is based on principles that may also be used to guide the
management of business operations. This text for business and IT pro-
fessionals describes how a three-tier architecture of performance man-
agement, business process automation, and a strong IT service
infrastructure can support the top priorities of any enterprise.
Khoshafian is vice president of BPM Technology at Pegasystems, Inc.
Distributed in the U.S. by Taylor & Francis.
HD30 2006-022334 978-1-4129-2687-4
Strategic ambiguities; essays on communication,
organization, and identity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eric M. Eisenberg.
Sage Publications, ©2007 312 p. $69.95
These essays written over the last two decades reflect Eisenberg’s devel-
opment of a new aesthetics of communications that explores language
and communication in the construction of social structures and personal
identities. The essays are arranged chronologically and follow the evo-
lution and application of Eisenberg’s new definitions of communication,
organization and identity. Eisenberg has added framing chapters and
head notes for this text to provide students an intellectual and historical
context for the essays.
HD30 2005-032596 978-1-4051-2613-7
The strategy pathfinder; core concepts and micro-cases.
Angwin, Duncan et al.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 354 p. $39.95 (pa)
Angwin (strategic management, U. of Warwick, UK) et al. describe, for
business students, strategic planning based on learning principles that
keep discussions brief, incorporate real micro-cases from around the
world, and use graphics for explanations. They aim to make the readers
the “producers” of the strategy by tracing what happens in a strategy
path, from causes in the external environment to the industry setting,
corporate strategy and character, positioning, and internal change,
including innovative strategies.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD30 2006-930451 978-0-7618-3562-2
Strategic planning; cases, concepts and lessons, 2d ed.
Ziegenfuss, James T.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 184 p. $28.00 (pa)
Ziegenfuss (management and health care systems, Pennsylvania State U.)
offers lessons learned, and 32 case studies in this edition, about strategy
formation and strategic planning in private and public organizations,
from NASA to Southwest Airlines to the Olive Garden. The author expe-
rienced or observed the cases and presents them as composites. Lessons
learned focus on purpose, philosophy, and concept; design and methods;
and progress, outcomes, and benefits. Roles of those in an organization
are discussed, as well as competitor analysis, vision development, and
progress reviews. This edition also has additional lessons. The book is
meant for executives, managers, and students.
HD30 978-0-521-68986-1
Teaching management; a field guide for professors,
corporate trainers, and consultants.
Clawson, James G.S. and Mark E. Haskins.
Cambridge U. Pr., ©2006 494 p. $39.99 (pa)
Do you pause in the middle of your lecture on management, leadership,
accounting, finance, marketing or sales because you hear gentle snoring
from the front benches? Glawson and Haskins (both business adminis-
tration, U. of Virginia) intend to motivate professors, trainers, and con-
sultants to use effective teaching methods to create dynamic business
courses and classes. Drawing on their half-century or so of combined
experience with what works and what does not in the classroom, they
cover the fundamental elements of teaching and adult learning, course
and class planning, lecturing, managing discussions, using alternatives
such as case studies, role playing, action learning and experience, using
technologies, working with executives, mentoring and counseling stu-
dents, evaluating and being evaluated, research, managing a degree
program or non-degree client program, working with the press, and
managing your teaching career. The result is a full course on teaching
adults in a single volume.
HD31 2006-927104 1-4129-2247-X
Creative management and development, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jane Henry.
Sage Publications, ©2006 259 p. $130.00
Henry (human resources and change management, Open University
Business School, UK) collects book chapters and journal articles, mainly
from the mid- to late-1990s, on ways to develop and sustain creativity and
innovation in organizations. Material in sections on creativity and cog-
nition offers a systemic view of creativity, while material on style and
culture looks at the way in which cognitive style and personality type
affect problem-solving, decision-making, and change. Sections on devel-
opment and perception discuss the relationship between development
and creativity and address the question of how assumptions affect devel-
opment. This third edition offers expanded material on development,
complexity, and team innovation.
HD31 2006-017490 978-0-7494-4766-3
A handbook of management techniques; a comprehensive
guide to achieving managerial excellence and improved
decision making, 3d rev.ed.
Armstrong, Michael.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 640 p. $55.00 (pa)
This resource for business students and managers in all industries
describes over 100 systematic and analytical methods they can use to
improve decision-making and managerial performance. The methods are
organized into seven sections dealing with various areas of management
(operational, financial, and so on). The third edition features new
material on human capital measurement, role analysis, and grade and
pay structures. Armstrong is an independent management consultant
and bestselling author.
HD31 2006-028566 0-275-99332-9
Managing by accountability; what every leader needs to
know about responsibility, integrity—and results.
Dealy, M. David.
Praeger, ©2007 90 p. $24.95
Dealy shares how the role of personal accountability has shaped his
career at Burlington Northern Railroad, and identifies the most common
mistakes committed by well-intentioned leaders. He recommends setting
personal expectations high, living the integrity imperative, treating
accountability as a verb, accepting change and conflict, and helping
others develop personal accountability.
–110–
HD38 2006-003355 978-0-470-04447-6
Business intelligence competency centers; a team
approach to maximizing competitive advantage.
Miller, Gloria J. et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 198 p. $29.95
Three consultants with SAS International provide a roadmap for
planning a business intelligence competency center with defined tasks
and processes for supporting and promoting the effective use of business
intelligence across an organization. The guide explores benefits and
potential pitfalls, identifies what to consider when setting up a BICC, and
describes four example company experiences.
HD38 2006-041768 978-0-471-77634-5
Essentials of supply chain management, 2d ed.
Hugos, Michael. (Essentials series)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 290 p. $34.95 (pa)
In this second edition, Hugos (Northwestern U.’s Kellogg School of
Management) offers insights from his twenty years in logistics and
supply chain management to business executives and managers building
and operating supply chains. The nine chapters move readers through
key concepts and definitions; operations for planning, sourcing, making,
and delivering; and tools for measuring and coordinating supply chain
performance and operations; concluding with advice on maintaining and
advancing an existing supply chain. Updates include new chapters on
Information Technology and creating supply chains for competitive
advantage, as well as expanded coverage of technologies such as radio
frequency identification, business process management, and simulation
modeling.
HD38 2006-010630 1-4221-0279-3
Harvard business review on supply-chain management.
Title main entry. (The Harvard business review paperback series)
Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2006 211 p. $19.95 (pa)
This resource for managers contains eight articles on supply-chain man-
agement that were originally published in the Harvard Business Review.
The volume opens with a description of a partnership model that was
used successfully by Wendy’s International and Tyson Foods when they
were crafting a supply chain partnership. Other topics include (for
example) building relationships with suppliers, aligning incentives in
supply chains, and increasing responsiveness to fluctuating customer
demands.
HD38 2006-015562 978-0-8144-7347-4
Lean Six Sigma that works; a powerful action plan for
dramatically improving quality, increasing speed, and
reducing waste.
Carreira, Bill and Bill Trudell.
AMACOM, ©2006 263 p. $21.95 (pa)
Carreira and Trudell combine ideas of lean manufacturing with Six
Sigma in a guide aimed at managers of Six Sigma projects. They describe
lean Six Sigma methodologies and the basic tools of each strategy as well
as how to utilize these tools in areas such as engineering analysis, setup
reduction, indirect expenses, assembly lines, and rework. They also
discuss customer satisfaction, waste, value, cost, and profit. No bibliog-
raphy is provided. The authors are consultants with experience in man-
ufacturing and reducing cost and waste.
HD45 2006-030362 1-4221-0427-3
Open business models; how to thrive in the new
innovation landscape.
Chesbrough, Henry.
Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2006 256 p. $35.00
First described by the author in a 2003 book of the same name, “Open
Innovation” is a business paradigm in which firms import external ideas
for use in their own businesses and also allow their un- utilized ideas to
be used by others. In this text, Chesbrough provides a diagnostic
instrument for assessing a company’s current business model and sug-
gests ways of overcoming barriers to creating a more open model.
Particular attention is paid to issues relating to the management and pro-
tection of intellectual property. Chesbrough is Executive Director of the
Center for Open Innovation at the U. of California at Berkeley.
–111–
HD49 2006-013219 0-7494-4780-X
Project management disasters & how to survive them.
Nickson, David.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 226 p. $29.95 (pa)
Aimed at project and risk managers, this text offers practical advice on
how to prevent problems and also explains how to lead and support
project teams when things go wrong. Drawing upon interviews and a
review of the literature, Nickson presents real-life examples of recovery
from project disasters in a variety of industries. He also provides a
checklist of actions to avoid when under pressure. Nickson is a bid
manager, consultant, and the author of several books.
HD50 2006-009840 978-0-89106-196-0
Destination profit; creating people-profit opportunities in
your organization.
Cawood, Scott and Rita V. Bailey.
Davies-Black Publishing, ©2006 240 p. $26.95
This book describes a process for maximizing business growth that
focuses on an organization’s employees and providing them with an
engaging work experience. Advice from CEOs, executives, and managers
is incorporated with a discussion on companies and how they create
profitability. Their process is then outlined through concepts of
awareness, accountability, alignment, and adaptation. The book con-
cludes with a discussion of communication and celebration. The book
lacks a bibliography. Cawood and Bailey are both associated with con-
sulting firms.
HD50 2006-271025 0-7575-1687-4
Employee development at the workplace; achieving
empowerment in a continuous learning environment, 2d
ed.
Woods, Edward.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2005 177 p. $37.95
For students, Woods (communication studies, Marshall U.) offers an
exploration of the relationship between communication competence and
career success and discusses the characteristics of an advanced commu-
nicator that are key to success in the workplace. He traces stages of
career development and describes the cultural context of organizations,
developing functional maturity, achieving interactive maturity, making
effective presentations, consultative maturity, political dimensions, and
what to do in an initial management position. The book lacks an index.
HD53 2006-002734 978-1-4051-0755-6
Knowledge at work; creative collaboration in the global
economy.
DeFillippi, Robert J. et al.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 276 p. $84.95
Here the authors look at knowledge workers themselves, as individuals,
communities, organizations and industries, and trace the increasingly
complex ways in which workers interrelate at all levels. Using a number
of case studies from around the world, they define what “knowledge
work” actually is and how participants do their jobs, then look at each
of the four levels of involvement and how they relate, the characteristics
of project-based knowledge work, virtual and global knowledge work
and learning, intellectual property, and the processes and conditions of
participating in the knowledge economy. They provide summaries and,
for students, questions for reflection and discussion with each chapter.
HD53 2006-009810 0-7494-4797-4
The leader’s guide to lateral thinking skills; unlocking the
creativity and innovation in you and your team, 2d ed.
Sloane, Paul.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 183 p. $16.95 (pa)
Consultant Sloane takes Edward de Bono’s concept of lateral thinking—a
set of approaches and techniques designed to find radically new solu-
tions to problems—and shows how business leaders can use it to
transform their organizations. A number of ready-to-use practical
methods and exercises are provided to help executives to both develop
their own capacity for innovation and encourage and reward it in team
members. Sloane is the author of 15 books on lateral thinking puzzles
and problem-solving.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD53 2005-052981 1-84542-112-4 HD57 2006-020996 978-0-7879-7913-3
The management of intellectual property. Leadership agility; five levels of mastery for anticipating
Title main entry. Ed. by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster. (New and initiating change.
horizons in intellectual property series) Joiner, Bill and Stephen Josephs.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 333 p. $130.00 Jossey-Bass, ©2007 322 p. $29.95
Featuring 15 contributions from economists, management scientists, Joiner and Josephs (founders of ChangeWise) describe a skill set they call
accountants, and lawyers, this volume looks at the measurement and “leadership agility” that helps business executives to effectively steer their
management of intellectual property (IP) and intellectual property rights organizations amid conditions of rapid change and mounting complexity.
(IPRs) from a variety of perspectives. The focus is on private sector issues They also explain how anyone can develop this vital competency. Real-life
such as the private costs and benefits of alternative strategies, rather than examples are drawn from interviews with business leaders as well as the
on the policies of government or international bodies. Trade and service authors’ decades of consulting experience. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of
marks are covered in addition to patent-related concerns. Editor Wiley.
Bosworth is affiliated with the Oxford Intellectual Property Research
Centre, and Webster is a researcher at the U. of Melbourne. HD57 2006-016469 0-7494-4798-2
Leadership and motivation; the fifty-fifty rule and the
HD56 2006-022818 978-0-7879-8270-6 eight key principles of motivating others.
Wake me up when the data is over; how organizations Adair, John.
use stories to drive results. Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 135 p. $25.00
Silverman, Lori L. Consultant Adair interprets the work of Herzberg and Maslow to mean
Jossey-Bass, ©2006 288 p. $29.95 that to motivate, one must be motivated and select people who are also
Consultant Silverman describes how her methods produce results from self-motivated. He also believes in treating everyone as an individual,
once-tired managers, formerly bored and detached employees, and organ- setting challenging yet realistic targets, remembering that progress itself
izations that were snoozing standing up. She and her contributors motivates, creating a motivating environment, providing fair rewards
advocate using the fine and time-honored art of storytelling to rev up and giving recognition. He has also developed a system he calls “Action-
their day-to-day operations, build teams and networks, model and deliver Centered Leadership,” based on the concept that 50 percent of motivation
leadership, handle project management, and create a culture in which comes from within and 50 percent from the environment. Along with his
the story is the new currency and seamless organizational change is just instructions on applying this wisdom Adair supplies a list of recom-
a narrative away. They show how organizations use stories strategically mended reading.
in difficult times, when markets and people need definition, and when
companies need enduring brand identification. They close with a series HD57 2006-042803 978-1-57675-344-6
of articles on being a story pioneer, getting answers and ideas in Leadership and the new science; discovering order in a
research, and finding all five sides to every story. chaotic world, 3d ed.
Wheatley, Margaret J.
HD57 2006-020991 978-0-7879-8470-0
Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2006 218 p. $19.95 (pa)
Becoming a conflict competent leader; how you and your
Wheatley describes some recent discoveries in scientific fields such as
organization can manage conflict effectively.
biology, chaos theory, and quantum physics and explains how under-
Runde, Craig E. and Tim A. Flanagan. standings gleaned from this “new science” may be applied to the world
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 217 p. $29.95 of organizations and management. The emphasis throughout is on cre-
Runde and Flanagan explain the importance of developing “conflict com- ating organizations that are adaptive, creative, and resilient in times of
petence” as a key leadership skill. They describe how leaders of all types chaos. The third edition features a new chapter in which the author
of organizations can lessen their destructive responses and actually come reflects on lessons learned from recent news stories. Wheatley has been
to embrace conflict as an opportunity for growth. They conclude by a management professor and consultant since 1973.
looking at ways that leaders can help build conflict competence at the
organizational level. The authors are affiliated with the Leadership HD57 2006-018176 978-0-13-234772-3
Development Institute at Eckerd College. Jossey- Bass is an imprint of Leading at a higher level; Blanchard on leadership and
Wiley. creating high performing organization.
Blanchard, Ken.
HD57 2006-026719 978-0-7879-8151-8
Prentice Hall, ©2007 359 p. $24.99
Building character; strengthening the heart of good
Blanchard, a management consultant and co-author of the bestseller, The
leadership.
One Minute Manager, gathers contributions from founding associates and
Klann, Gene. consulting partners of The Ken Blanchard Companies to offer a new
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 212 p. $34.00 vision of ethical leadership. Contributors offer insight on the character-
Writing for leaders and managers in corporations, government, and the istics of a high performing organization, treating the customer right,
military, Klann (training, Center for Creative Leadership, Greensboro) treating employees’ right, and leadership intention. An organizational
explains how to develop character in subordinate leaders at all levels of assessment instrument is included.
an organization. He describes the process and provides tools and a prac-
tical model for developing character through leading by example, and ele- HD57 2006-025136 978-0-7879-8773-2
ments related to new experiences; education, knowledge, and training; Leadership lessons from West Point.
the work environment; and evaluation. This is a joint publication of the Title main entry. Ed. by Doug Crandall.
Jossey-Bass Business & Management Series and the Center for Creative
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 397 p. $27.95
Leadership.
Teachers at the U.S. military academy, both past and present, describe
HD57 978-1-58798-287-3 their views on quiet leadership, mission, values, taking care of people,
organizational learning, and leading change. The 19 contributions share
Crafting solutions for troubled businesses; a disciplined
experiences in connection with learning from failure, taking responsi-
approach to diagnosing and confronting management bility for actions, influencing moral philosophy, managing high-potential
challenges. talent, inspiring a team, developing charisma with caution, and social-
Hopkins, Stephen J. and S. Douglas Hopkins. izing new leaders. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
BeardBooks, ©2006 302 p. $74.95
A father and son team of consultants draws from 25 years of turnaround
management—helping financially troubled businesses achieve maximum
value—to offer strategies to potential lenders, purchasers, consultants, and
coaches of troubled businesses. Eighteen chapters set forth the author’s
conceptual approach, discuss the challenges and pitfalls that arise near
the zone of insolvency, lay out the diagnostic process necessary to obtain
an understanding of a financially troubled business, and offer steps to
take in determining strategy and evaluating risks for turnaround. The
final chapter summarizes the lessons learned by the authors from 100
completed assignments into advice on managing three types of troubled
businesses. Case studies and suggestions for further reading support the
text.

Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –112–

HD57 2006-928397 978-0-7546-2612-1
Leadership perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alan Hooper.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 563 p. $250.00
The 33 essays in this book were all previously published in peer-reviewed
books and journals such as Harvard Business Review, J. of Management,
and Sloan Management Review; they are compiled here to present in one
source the best public writing on the subject of leadership. Business stu-
dents, academic researchers, leadership consultants, and practical leaders
are the intended audience. Discussions involve both abstract theory and
explicit practical techniques, and coverage includes relationships, power,
identity and difference, imagination, and spirituality. Specific topics
include: the psychodynamics of organizational totalitarianism, the effect
of leader and follower emotional intelligence on performance and
attitude, the executive as coach, power failure in management circuits,
managing oneself, planning on the left side of the brain and managing
on the right, and the theory of charismatic leadership. There is an author
index, but no subject index.
HD57 2006-001051 0-470-01499-7
Meeting the innovation challenge; leadership for
transformation and growth.
Isaksen, Scott G. and Joe Tidd.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 392 p. $60.00 (pa)
With an emphasis on the role of senior management, this text presents
an integrated model of creative leadership in private and public organi-
zations. Isaksen (Creative Problem Solving Group, Inc.) and Tidd (tech-
nology and innovation management, U. of Sussex, UK) outline the need
for taking a systemic approach to change and transformation and then
offer a variety of practical suggestions and resources. Aimed at man-
agers, the text is also suitable for postgraduate study and post experience
training in change or innovation management, leadership, and creativity.
HD57 2006-015403 978-0-8144-0894-0
The nature of leadership; reptiles, mammals, and the
challenge of becoming a great leader.
White, B. Joseph.
AMACOM, ©2007 200 p. $21.95
White, president of the U. of Illinois, offers his thoughts on leadership,
drawing on his own experience as a leader in various capacities. The two
sides of a successful leader require a cold and disciplined nature akin to
a reptile and a warm and nurturing mammalian nature, he says. He
describes, using examples of past and present leaders, the necessary
characteristics of each side, including having an innovative perspective,
risk-taking ability, an appetite for talent, a broad perspective, and
presence.
HD57 2006-031371 978-0-7879-8305-5
The practice of leadership; developing the next generation
of leaders.
Conger, Jay A. and Ronald E. Riggio.
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 402 p. $50.00
Conger (leadership studies, Claremont McKenna College) and Riggio
(leadership and organizational psychology, Claremont McKenna College)
assemble 15 chapters on leadership and management practices, based on
papers given at a conference held at the Kravis Leadership Institute at
Claremont McKenna College in February of 2005. The volume serves as
a resource of current research for managers and executives, educators,
and researchers. Chapters address implementation of its described ideas
and consider leadership development and selection, key tasks and capa-
bilities, organizations (including teams and ethics), and requirements for
dealing with crises and diversity. Contributors work in the fields of orga-
nizational behavior, psychology, leadership studies, and others in the US
and Singapore. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
HD57 2005-033968 978-0-7879-7638-5
Silos, politics & turf wars; a leadership fable about
destroying the barriers that turn colleagues into
competitors.
Lencioni, Patrick.
Jossey-Bass, ©2006 211 p. $22.95
Lencioni, a management consultant, addresses the issue of silos, the bar-
riers that create organizational politics, in this fictional narrative about
a young management consultant struggling to launch his practice. After
the narrative, there is a 35-page section presenting a model for combating
silos, case studies, and advice on managing and organizing around a
single, qualitative focus shared by the entire leadership team. There is no
subject index. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
–113–
HD57 2005-037737 0-13-187338-5
The truth about being a leader...; and nothing but the
truth.
Otazo, Karen L.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2007 233 p. $18.99
Dr. Otazo, an executive coach, provides 52 tips for assuming a new lead-
ership position, speaking to an audience, motivating a team, setting clear
boundaries with employees, delegating responsibility, and tracking rela-
tionships. The bite-size chunks and practical style suit the busy lifestyle
of managers who have five minutes while standing in line or need
guidance on a specific problem. No index is provided.
HD58 2006-007901 978-1-59139-799-1
3-D negotiation; powerful tools to change the game in
your most important deals.
Lax, David A. and James K. Sebenius.
Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2006 286 p. $29.95
Lax, an investment banker, and Sebenius (business administration,
Harvard Business School) discuss their approach to negotiation, which
adds the idea of setup to the tactics and deal design steps in the process.
They describe how to identify barriers to agreement, overcome them,
design value-creating deals, and understand problem solving-tactics. They
also show their approach in practical examples and real cases.
HD58 2006-019604 978-1-4129-2746-8
Appreciative inquiry; research for change.
Reed, Jan.
Sage Publications, ©2007 219 p. $69.95
For advanced undergraduate and graduate courses, researchers, and pro-
fessionals, this volume describes appreciative inquiry (AI) as a research
framework rather than an organizational development tool. Reed (health
care for older people, U. of Northumbria at Newcastle, UK) explores
general principles and debates in AI and how it is a tool for change and
development in organizations as well as a research methodology.
Chapters then trace the stages of research and implications for using the
AI approach, including managing and organizing data gathering,
analysis, and communicating research to an audience. Contributors are
scholars and researchers based in the UK, Australia, and Canada.
HD58 2006-003563 1-59904-397-1
Cases on information technology and business process
reengineering.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mehdi Khosrow-Pour.
Idea Group Publishing, ©2006 357 p. $69.95 (pa)
The growing importance of information technology has spurred business
and other organizations to attempt to fit their organizational structures
and processes to best take advantage of information technology solutions.
Khosrow-Pour (editor-in-chief, Journal of Cases on Information Technology)
presents 21 case studies of such organizational efforts intended to illus-
trate the pitfalls and opportunities of business process reengineering
project implementation and management. Topics include a health
board’s enterprise system implementation, workflow-supported invoice
management, business process reengineering in government agencies,
Internet-based workflow systems, information systems redesign within a
state social services agency, reengineering efforts within a showroom
wholesaler, distance learning and Web-based training, reorganization of
a department of motor vehicles, and reengineering distribution for a beer
distributor, among others.
HD58 2006-030628 0-275-98685-3
The creative enterprise; managing innovative
organizations and people; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tony Davila et al.
Praeger, ©2007 680 p. $300.00
In three volumes, this set brings together 31 chapters by academics and
practitioners in management, technology, business, and organizational
psychology from the US and Europe who discuss how to be innovative
and design organizations and management infrastructures to enhance
creativity. The volumes, which combine the viewpoints of large com-
panies and small start-ups, each take a different perspective: strategy in
the first, followed by creativity at individual and team levels, and exe-
cution. Topics include environment, social innovation, historical back-
ground, how to use the creative potential of people, organizational
culture, the process of innovation, cross-national interaction, organi-
zation, discipline, and intellectual property. Specific examples relate to
the Silicon Valley, Honda, start-up companies, and others. Davila is a
faculty member at IESE Business School, U. of Navarra, Spain, and
Stanford U. Epstein is a professor of management at Rice U., and Shelton
is affiliated with a management consulting company.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD58 2006-018818 0-7494-4821-0
Develop your assertiveness, 2d ed.
Bishop, Sue.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 128 p. $17.95 (pa)
UK-based Bishop, a trainer and consultant, offers basic advice to people
seeking to be more assertive at work and in relationships. Thirteen
chapters briefly describe the benefits and techniques of positive thinking,
listening, being aware of body language, communicating with honesty
and spontaneity, delivering confidently to convey power and status, and
assertively making and refusing requests. Also addressed are “problem
people” and tricky situations such as giving criticism, asking for a pro-
motion or raise, and being interviewed. Self-quizzes and exercises are
included in each chapter. There is no index or bibliography.
HD58 2006-045878 0-566-08728-6
Great negotiators; how the most successful business
negotiators think and behave.
Beasor, Tom.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 281 p. $19.95 (pa)
This pocket (4.5x6″) guide compiles tips on business negotiation from the
author’s weekly newsletter, Negotiation Update. One-page tips are pre-
sented in sections on practical hints, planning and preparation, negoti-
ation philosophy, practical examples, the international perspective, and
lessons from the game of poker. There is no subject index.
HD58 2006-027162 978-0-7879-8169-3
Informal learning; rediscovering the natural pathways
that inspire innovation and performance.
Cross, Jay.
Pfeiffer, ©2007 292 p. $50.00 (pa)
Cross discusses informal learning, which he argues is the way that
workers learn most of the time. He describes the definition of the
concept, how it benefits organizations, and why learning ecosystems are
better than training programs. Skills and attitudes of informal learners
are detailed, in addition to stories about use in companies. The final
section covers how to implement informal learning in an organization.
The book is aimed at decision makers, executives, chief learning officers,
and training managers. Cross is a strategist, speaker, and designer of cor-
porate performance systems; he designed the first business degree
program offered by the U. of Phoenix. Pfeiffer is an imprint of Wiley.
HD58 2005-058111 978-0-273-69598-1
Organizational change, 3d ed.
Senior, Barbara and Jocelyne Fleming.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2006 436 p. $69.99 (pa)
Senior (education, Open U., UK), a chartered occupational psychologist,
and Fleming (human resources management, U. of Gloucestershire, UK)
present a textbook on organizational change, taking a theoretical and
practical approach. They discuss the causes and nature of change, struc-
turing, the cultural and political contexts, leadership, and design,
planning, and implementation. The book is aimed at MBA students,
business studies undergraduates, and those studying for more specialist
degrees, as well as senior and middle managers.
HD58 2006-003154 0-7546-4842-7
Organizational learning in the global context.
Title main entry. Ed. by M. Leann Brown et al.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 289 p. $99.95
Through examinations of a wide range of divergent organizations from
the European Union to Colombian drug cartels, the 13 case studies pre-
sented by Brown (U. of Florida), Kenney (Pennsylvania State U.), and
Zarkin (Westminster College) engage in some of the major theoretical
debates within the political science field of organizational learning. To
mention some examples, discussion of the European Union’s food policy
is used to address questions about orders of learning, the way the
Catholic Church has responded to liberation theology is related to the-
ories of dogmatic organizations, stability operations by the US military
is explored in terms of compartmentalization and learning, and terrorist
groups are discussed for the purpose of shedding light on technology in
organizations.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD58 2005-030093 978-0-89106-203-5
Positive performance improvement; a new paradigm for
optimizing your workforce.
Gerson, Richard F. and Robbie G. Gerson.
Davies-Black Publishing, ©2006 184 p. $34.95
In this resource for human performance technology (HPT) professionals,
consultants Richard and Robbie Gerson describe their Positive CORE
model for performance improvement. Incorporating research from pos-
itive psychology, appreciative inquiry, and sports psychology, their
approach to improving organizational effectiveness focuses on identifying
and building upon the strengths of individuals. Each chapter concludes
with a special “challenge” section that encourages readers to apply what
they have learned and make positive changes in their organizations.
HD58 2006-050106 978-0-273-68359-9
Rethinking organisational behavior; a poststructuralist
framework, 2d ed.
Jackson, Norman and Pippa Carter.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2007 390 p. $60.99 (pa)
Jackson and Carter (management, U. of Leicester, UK) provide a textbook
on organizational behavior that is contrary to traditional approaches and
instead uses the framework of contemporary social theory. It addresses
the assumptions that management of organizational behavior hinge on
and gives different starting points that are tied to poststructuralism.
Topics treated are semiotics, structure, knowledge, power, rationality, ide-
ology, self, boundary, efficiency, and decision-making. Traditional topics
like motivation, leadership, and culture are not emphasized. In this
edition, the glossary and references have been expanded, and there are
case studies and an appendix charting the development of the ideas dis-
cussed the book. The book’s audience is students in intermediate or
advanced courses at the undergraduate or postgraduate level.
HD58 2006-046472 978-1-57524-268-2
Workplace learning; principles and practice.
Rowden, Robert W. (The professional practices in adult education and
lifelong learning series)
Krieger Publishing Co., ©2007 146 p. $26.50
Aimed at adult education and human resources development practi-
tioners, this text integrates theory and practice about workplace learning.
Following a brief overview of adult learning theory, Rowden (Florida
Atlantic U.) explores some of the internal and external factors that
influence workplace learning. He goes on to address such topics as cog-
nitive processes, social processes, and learning at the organizational level.
The final chapter examines some methods organizations can use to
promote workplace learning.
HD59 2006-008147 0-7494-4407-X
Effective personal communication skills for public
relations.
Green, Andy. (PR in practice series)
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 219 p. $32.50 (pa)
As a complement to books that detail the functions involved in public
relations practice, this book focuses on the psychological side of PR. A
communications expert writes in terms of communicating one’s “inner
brand” and managing the communication environment. Green draws on
biologist Richard Dawkins’ concept of memes to explain how ideas can
be self- perpetuating, and cites the “Love Bug” e-mail virus and Christ’s
gospel as examples of effective use of communication tools. The guide
includes a synopsis of the chapters, glossary, annotated bibliography, and
list of the author’s networking contacts.
HD59 2005-032451 978-1-84407-334-4
Free market missionaries; the corporate manipulation of
community values.
Beder, Sharon.
Earthscan Publications Ltd., ©2006 260 p. $29.95
Suggesting that we are currently witnessing a revolutionary shift from
democracy to corporate rule representing a wholesale change in cultural
values and aspirations, Beder (formerly of the U. of Wollongong School
of Social Sciences, Media and Communication in Australia) argues that
this shift is the product of a deliberate strategy by corporate executives,
who have mobilized their enormous financial and political resources in
order to promote a free market ideology that trumps values of individu-
ality, truth, justice, and democracy. She charts the development and insti-
tutions of this ideological campaign from the 1970s onwards, describing
the public relations campaigns, corporate influence over economic edu-
cation, pro-business think tanks, international economic advisers, and
ideological academic constructs that are complicit in the campaign.
Distributed in the US by Stylus.
–114–
HD59 1-880873-51-6
National directory of corporate public affairs, 2007, 25th
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Valerie S. Sheridan et al.
Columbia Books Inc., ©2007 1037 p. $249.00 (pa)
This directory consists of a listing of about 13,000 corporate individuals
and about 1,500 companies who are involved in public and government
affairs, corporate communications and public relations, lobbying,
political action, corporate philanthropy, human resources, investor rela-
tions, and regulatory and environmental affairs. Companies with major
operations in the US are presented alphabetically and with contact infor-
mation, a roster of public affairs executives, and the current chairman of
the board or CEO. Their foundation or corporate giving programs and
political action committees, contributions, and revenues are also listed.
Listings of individuals include their job title and contact information, and
note if they are federal registered lobbyists. This edition includes new
individuals and updated annual revenue and Public Affairs Council con-
tribution figures. Information in the volume was taken from a yearlong
review of government, press, and other public sources as well as answers
to questionnaires sent to companies. Indexes are organized by industry
and location. Major company name changes are also noted.
HD60 2006-012799 978-1-84542-782-5
Developing corporate social responsibility; a European
perspective.
Perrini, Francesco et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 250 p. $100.00
Although originally rooted in the United States because of the limited role
of the American state in the economy, the authors (all of Bocconi U.,
Italy) of this book note that the “global center of gravity” for corporate
social responsibility (CSR) thought and practice has shifted to Europe.
They provide a portrait of the current state of CSR in a series of ten
essays that describe the European perspective on the role and responsi-
bilities of business in society, national public policies and ongoing ini-
tiatives in the field of CSR, the evolution of the concept of CSR, the
relationship of CSR to firm competitiveness, the Italian experience with
CSR and typical CSR manifestations in Italy, the implementation of the
European CSR strategy in Italy (the Corporate Social Responsibility-Social
Commitment Project, and future directions.
HD60 2006-031101 978-1-57675-371-2
Growing local value; how to build business partnerships
that strengthen your community.
Hammel, Laury and Gun Denhart. (The social venture network series)
Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2007 176 p. $12.00 (pa)
Writing for other small business entrepreneurs, Hammel (co-founder,
Business Alliance for Local Living Economies) and Denhart (co-founder,
Hanna Andersson children’s clothing company) argue that businesses do
best when they “grow local value” by partnering with all the various
stakeholders in the business in order to promote the “triple bottom line”
(people, planet, profits). They give advice on and examples of best prac-
tices in chapters addressing each stakeholder group: customers,
employees, vendors, fellow businesses, owners/investors, nonprofits, the
environment, and the public sector.
HD60 2006-023011 0-7494-4643-9
The sustainable enterprise; profiting from best practice,
2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jonathan Reuvid.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 231 p. $79.95
This accessible and attractive treatment of what is becoming an increas-
ingly important item on the business agenda includes 14 legal overviews
written by a team of corporate attorneys and two dozen other articles
from a range of experts in business, government and research. Topics
include trading greenhouse gases and reporting, core issues in business
management such as risk management, supplier diversity, process effi-
ciency and funding and investment, community concerns such as brand
integrity, green labeling, corporate responsibility and innovation,
company/employee partnerships, neutral waste, and construction.
Articles on transport, health, safety and employment issues cover travel
plans in London, fleet management, occupational health and safety and
the changing world of work, and those on energy and land use cover effi-
ciency, water supplies and climate change, emissions and contaminants,
and recycling. Includes advertising pages from corporate sponsors.
–115–
HD61 2005-302083 0-470-82165-5
Risk management, 3d ed. (CD-ROM included)
Das, Satyajit. (The swaps & financial derivatives library)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 1327 p. $125.00
In this successor to Swap Financing (1989) and Swaps and Financial
Derivatives (1994), an expert in the area of risk management, financial
derivatives (instruments used to trade or manage assets), and capital
markets touts the development of derivative instruments as “perhaps the
most significant aspect of capital markets in the last 20 years.” After
explaining how derivatives have impacted financial activities and bene-
fitted investors and other market participants, Das (MBA, Australian
Graduate School of Management) presents an accessible, in-depth review
of risk management principles, models, and methodologies for quanti-
fying and managing the various types of risk. Then he shifts to organi-
zational, documentation, legal and regulatory aspects. The accompanying
CD-ROM contains technical documents and trial valuation software.
HD62 2006-026987 978-1-4022-0763-1
The complete book of business plans; simple steps to
writing powerful business plans, 2d ed.
Covello, Joseph A. and Brian J. Hazelgren.
Sourcebooks, Inc., ©2006 506 p. $21.95 (pa)
An early chapter in this workbook poses 100 questions for defining
business goals, internet and marketing strategies, management questions,
and financial projections. Subsequent chapters help flesh out each
section of the business plan. The second half of the book contains 11
sample business plans for manufacturers, consultants, a wholesaler, a
landscaper, and a pharmacy.
HD62 2006-022623 978-0-7876-9112-7
Encyclopedia of small business, 3d ed.; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Arsen J. Darnay and Monique D. Magee.
Thomson Gale, ©2007 1216 p. $499.00
From “absenteeism” to “zoning ordinances,” this two-volume encyclo-
pedia presents 605 alphabetical entries intended as an information
resource for the small business owner in the United States or the general
student of business. The editors have sought to cover most aspects of
business activity and concerns, including human resources, organiza-
tional structures, accounting practices, stock trading, sales and mar-
keting, valuation and other measurement issues, legal and regulatory
requirements, the overall business environment, and even emerging and
declining “management fads.” In order to give a better sense of scope,
examples of specific topics follow: advertising budget, application service
providers, baby bonds, bar coding, biometrics, brand equity, business
education, communication systems, cost-benefit analysis, debt financing,
due diligence, entrepreneurial networks, the Federal Trade Commission,
joint ventures, nepotism, office automation, operations management,
pregnancy in the workplace, product costing, record retention, the
Sarbanes-Oxley Act, value-added tax, and workplace anger.
HD62 2006-013810 978-0-910627-53-5
How to buy and/or sell a small business for maximum
profit; a step-by-step guide. (CD-ROM included)
Richards, René V.
Atlantic Publishing, ©2006 283 p. $24.95 (pa)
For novice entrepreneurs wanting to buy or sell a small business, this
guide details the steps in the process. It covers the evaluation of a
business and its profitability; valuation; capital and financing options;
business organization, including legal documents and tax issues; negoti-
ation; and transitioning to a new owner. A CD-ROM, containing forms in
the book and a sample business plan, is included. Richards has also
written articles on business and finance.
HD62 2006-023713 978-0-7879-7906-5
Level best; how small and grassroots nonprofits can
tackle evaluation and talk results.
Festen, Marcia and Marianne Philbin.
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 136 p. $24.95 (pa)
Consultants Festen and Philbin address the unique evaluation challenges
faced by grassroots and smaller nonprofit organizations. Drawing upon
their extensive experience working with such organizations, they describe
“rolling evaluation”—an approach that allows organizations to ask and
answer a limited number of questions each year and gradually build on
what they learn. Supplemental materials include sample forms, check-
lists, and meeting agendas.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD62 2006-025103 0-87766-732-2
Nonprofits and government; collaboration & conflict, 2d
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth T. Boris and C. Eugene Steuerle.
Urban Institute Press, ©2006 453 p. $29.50 (pa)
Eighteen American academics, researchers and nonprofit professionals
contribute 12 essays exploring the collaborative and conflicting rela-
tionship between nonprofits and government. The second edition reflects
the many developments since publication of the 1999 edition and offers
a more in-depth understanding of how government regulates, facilitates,
finances, and oversees nonprofit activities, and how nonprofits try to
shape the way government services the public and promotes the civic,
religious, and cultural life of the country. New material includes dis-
cussion of trends affecting nonprofit-government interactions and new
chapters on the roles of U.S. international nonprofits and on how state
government finances and regulates nonprofits.
HD62 2006-020658 1-932531-73-4
Non profits made easy.
Bangs, David H.
Entrepreneur Press, ©2006 193 p. $19.95 (pa)
Bangs, who specializes in helping improve the management of small
businesses and nonprofits, discusses the management of nonprofit
organizations and how people involved can make them stronger by using
better management techniques. He describes the process from before
start-up to raising money, with emphasis on managing people, financial
management, and strategic and business planning. Organizations, web-
sites, and other resources are listed.
HD69 2006-023022 0-7494-4832-6
Branding a store; how to build successful retail brands in
a changing marketplace.
Floor, Ko.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 360 p. $45.00
Floor explains how retailers can remain competitive in the global mar-
ketplace through the development of a strong, independent brand
identity. Using the stories of such successful international retailers as
Wal-Mart and Tesco as examples, he shows how an understanding of con-
sumer emotion can give retailers an advantage in the battle for business.
He concludes with some forecasts about the future of retail brands.
Consultant Floor has taught brand management classes at the U. of
Amsterdam.
HD69 2005-019143 978-1-4051-2450-8
Commercial management of projects; defining the
discipline.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Lowe.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 469 p. $159.95
Lowe (commercial project management, U. of Manchester) and Leiringer
(construction management and engineering, U. of Reading) bring
together 19 chapters by contributors from around the world, who work
in construction management, engineering, architecture, and other fields.
They discuss aspects of commercial management, a topic usually spread
across a variety of fields, and the current state of knowledge about
projects and issues relating to practice in project- based industries.
Chapters focus on external, corporate, and general and individual project
environments, and topics such as competition, culture, corporate gover-
nance, trust, outsourcing, conflict management, performance meas-
urement, value and contract management, and bidding. Most of the
chapters are oriented towards construction as an example. The book’s
objective is to contribute to the broadening research to include man-
agement of project-based organizations, industries, and careers.
HD69 2006-019308 0-8144-0879-6
Fundamentals of project management, 3d ed.
Lewis, James P.
AMACOM, ©2007 164 p. $14.95 (pa)
This practical resource for managers explains how to keep projects and
initiatives on track and get them completed on time and under budget.
Consultant and trainer Lewis (The Lewis Institute) covers each step of the
process, from developing goals and objectives through producing a
workable schedule, managing the project team, and conducting periodic
reviews. The third edition features new information on risk management
and a discussion of the hazards of estimating time, costs, and resources.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD69 2005-030939 978-0-471-79346-5
Kerzner’s project management logic puzzles.
Kerzner, Harold.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 218 p. $19.95 (pa)
Consultant Kerzner (systems management, Baldwin-Wallace College)
steps through 100 logic problems designed to hone thinking skills of
project managers. Ranging from simply discerning who did what from
where and with how much to using project complex time management
skills, the problems cover a variety of topics including scheduling and
earned value measurement systems. Although most are intended for
entertainment and to help wind down after a busy day of managing
project, quite a few can be useful in the classroom or in professional sem-
inars. Kerzner’s particular expertise is in getting readers to think logi-
cally in spite of themselves, and he provides answers to serve those who
have to be assured of their quality and recommends publications for
those who want to take the next step in the critical path.
HD69 2006-021756 0-13-239078-7
Lean Sigma; a practitioner’s guide.
Wedgwood, Ian D.
Prentice Hall, ©2007 461 p. $59.99
Wedgwood, a PhD-level consultant/master black belt in Six Sigma and
Lean Sigma, explains the evolution of Lean Sigma from Six Sigma, and
why this business methodology has outlived Total Quality Management
and other quality improvement approaches. Intended to be a practical
guide rather than a primarily technical reference (though equations, e.g.
for measuring performance, are given), the author applies project road
maps and other tools to solve a wide range of real-world problems. The
text includes examples of data collection sheets, footnoted references, and
a free trial subscription to the online edition.
HD69 2006-279944 1-930699-57-3
Middle managers in program and project portfolio
management; practices, roles and responsibilities.
Blomquist, Tomas and Ralf Müller.
Project Management Institute, ©2006 103 p. $34.95 (pa)
Program and portfolio management studies typically identify
selection/planning techniques or how return-on-investment decisions are
made. Blomquist and Müller (professors of business administration,
Umea U., Sweden) report on their qualitative, theory-grounded study
examining the middle managers’ roles in project-based organizations.
They discuss such factors as the relationship between environmental
complexity and governance style. The book features their survey and
interview instruments, methodological notes, and author contact infor-
mation, but not an index.
HD69 2006-280090 1-930699-83-2
Patterns of effective management of virtual projects; an
exploratory study.
Khazanchi, Deepak and Ilze Zigurs.
Project Management Institute, ©2006 98 p. $34.95 (pa)
Khazanchi and Zigurs, not further identified, explain some of the chal-
lenges of managing a software development team that only communi-
cates across the Internet. They reviewed the literature for best practices
and theory, constructed a frame of patterns to propose an integrated
approach, and tested their ideas with focus groups from five companies.
There is no index.
HD69 2006-019147 978-0-7879-8534-9
The performance consultant’s fieldbook; tools and
techniques for improving organizations and people, 2d
ed. (CD-ROM included)
Hale, Judith.
Pfeiffer, ©2007 268 p. $50.00 (pa)
Hale, a management consultant and faculty member of ISPI’s HPT
Institute and Boise State’s School of Engineering, presents a revised and
updated edition of her volume on performance consulting. Intended for
trainers, organizational development consultants, and human resource
development professionals, the book explains techniques for performance
interventions and expanding their role in an organization. Based on her
experience in the private and public sectors, Hale describes becoming a
performance consultant and cost- effective programs for improving per-
formance. This edition contains a section on understanding costs and
cost drivers; new material on sustaining change and social systems and
norms in the workplace; more examples; a focus on measuring results
and people performance; and a CD with corresponding tools and figures.
Pfeiffer is an imprint of Wiley.
–116–
HD69 95-30772 0-566-07785-X
Project leadership, 2d ed. (reprint, 1996)
Briner, Wendy et al.
Gower Publishing, ©2004 163 p. $39.95 (pa)
This resource for senior managers focuses on the leadership aspects of
project management, rather than on technical considerations. Drawing
upon lessons learned in their research and consultancy work, the authors
delineate the skills needed by the modern project leader and discuss the
importance of careful planning. They then describe each stage of the
project management process, from start-up to completion. Distributed in
the U.S. by Ashgate.
HD75 2006-042196 978-0-8213-6515-1
Delivering on the promise of pro-poor growth; insights
and lessons from country experiences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Timothy Besley and Louise Cord.
The World Bank, ©2007 253 p. $30.00 (pa)
Citing Bangladesh, Brazil, Ghana, India, Indonesia, Tunisia, Uganda, and
Vietnam as countries that have been “relatively successful in delivering
pro-poor growth,” this World Bank publication presents case studies of
each country that analyze the distributional patterns of growth. The
studies also seek to analyze the influence of national policies and other
conditions on growth and its distribution.
HD75 978-0-7748-1205-4
Development’s displacements; ecologies, economies, and
cultures at risk.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Vandergeest et al.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2007 281 p. $85.00
The editors (all of York U., UK) present nine case studies of population
displacement induced by development projects and programs around the
world. Broadly speaking, the papers link the issue of development-
induced displacement to the activities of multinational corporations,
neoliberal economics, and environmental conservation. Specific topics
discussed include the World Banks involuntary resettlement policy in a
large mining project run by a Canadian transnational company in Peru,
the gendered aspects of development and displacement in the Sudanese
oil and energy sectors, displacement attributable to neoliberal land tenure
reform in Laos and Thailand, India’s Narmada damn project as illus-
trative of displacement’s local (project-specific) and global (policy-ori-
ented) effects, and Costa Ricans of African descent displaced by the
establishment of national parks. Distributed in the US by the U. of
Washington Press.
HD75 2005-024132 0-7656-1473-1
Environmental and natural resources economics; theory,
policy, and the sustainable society, 3d ed.
Hackett, Steven C.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2006 524 p. $44.95 (pa)
Hackett (economics, Humboldt State U.) presents the new edition of a
textbook introducing environmental and resource economics to an under-
graduate audience, as well is issues of sustainability and sustainable
development. He begins with theory and fundamentals, covered in
chapters discussing value systems and economic systems; the economics
of market allocation; externalities, market failures, and policy interven-
tions; and theory and concepts in the economics of natural resource
systems. The next five chapters are presented under the heading “policy”
and discuss the economics of marine capture fisheries; measurement
and analysis of benefits and costs; the political economy of environ-
mental regulation and resource management; monitoring, enforcement,
and sanctions for regulatory compliance; creating economic incentives for
environmental protection and resource management; and the science,
policy, and economics of global climate change. Topics on the economics
of sustainability are addressed last, in chapters covering an introduction
to the concept of sustainability, recognizing interdependencies and
thinking long term, sustainable economic development, issues in sus-
tainable production and consumption, and issues in the economics of
sustainable local communities.
–117–
HD79 1-84564-046-2
Environmental economics and investment assessment.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Aravossis et al. (WIT transactions on
ecology and the environment; v.98)
WIT Press, ©2006 348 p. $215.00
Economists, business scholars, and others made their way to Mykonos,
Greece in 2006 for the first international conference on the links among
the three domains. The 33 papers published discuss such topics as eco-
nomic aspects of modern environmental policy, the effect of greenhouse
gas emissions trading on investment decisions for biomass-to-energy pro-
duction, minimizing fuel consumption through optimum material
selection by a car frame production company, insights from South Africa
into decision support for long-term water resource management in semi-
arid areas, and methods for comparing the sustainability performance of
corporations. Only authors are indexed. The US office of WIT Press is
Computational Mechanics.
HD82 2006-048227 978-0-8047-5709-6
Natural resources, neither curse nor destiny.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Lederman and William F. Maloney.
(Latin America development forum)
The World Bank, ©2007 369 p. $30.00 (pa)
Economists from academia and various banks, both within and outside
Latin America, ponder whether being rich in natural resources helps or
hinders development. Among their perspectives are trade structure and
growth, innovation and resource-based growth in Latin America, and
comparative advantage and trade intensity.
HD82 2006-005594 1-57851-777-X
The origin of wealth; evolution, complexity, and the
radical remaking of economics.
Beinhocker, Eric D.
Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2006 527 p. $29.95
Beinhocker (a senior advisor to McKinsey & Company, a management
consulting firm) has written this work in order to introduce a broad
audience to what he believes is a revolutionary new paradigm in eco-
nomics and its implications for our understanding of the creation of
wealth. He describes how the growing field of complexity theory allows
for evolutionary understanding of wealth creation, in which business
designs co-evolve with the evolution of technologies and organizational
innovations. In addition to giving his audience a tour of this field of com-
plexity economics, he discusses its implications for real-world issues of
business.
HD191 2006-008014 978-0-472-11556-3
Americans and their land; the house built on abundance.
Mackin, Anne.
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 251 p. $29.95
An environmental planner who turned from government work to
writing, Makin traces the history of the relationship between European
immigrants and their descendants in the US and the land they came to,
which was once so abundant as to be thought limitless. She looks at
carving up heaven in colonial America, moving from family farm to city
early in the republic, the race for resources in the late frontier, and now.
HD259 2005-058121 978-0-471-74346-0
Developing affordable housing; a practical guide for
nonprofit organizations, 3d ed.
Hecht, Bennett L.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 818 p. $120.00
Affordable housing is as crucial to providing opportunities for Americans
as education, healthcare, and workforce development, according to the
McArthur Foundation’s president. In this updated edition (dates are not
given for previous ones), the founder of One Economy Corporation
presents a practical guide for nonprofit organizations to develop housing
options for the underserved. Following a profile of the current status of
real estate availability, regulations, and funding challenges, and through
new case studies of diverse situations, he covers the entire development
process: from determining project feasibility, sources of public housing
funds, and tax-exempt status, to rehabilitation/construction. Required
forms and checklists are included. Hecht formerly taught at Georgetown
U. Law Center, where he created a housing and community development
clinical program.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD1289 2006-013322 978-1-57675-361-3
Capitalism 3.0; a guide to reclaiming the commons.
Barnes, Peter.
Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2006 195 p. $22.95 (pa)
Likening the economic system to a computer operating system, Barnes
(cofounder and former president of Working Assets Long Distance) sug-
gests that Capitalism 2.0 has become obsolete because it damages the
environment and widens inequality. He calls for an upgrade to
Capitalism 3.0, the most salient feature of which is the institutional-
ization of a “commons sector” that preserves and enhances common
wealth. Among the proposals proffered are a series of ecosystems trusts,
a share per citizen mutual fund that pays dividends to all Americans, a
trust fund providing start-up capital to every child, a risk-sharing pool
for health care that covers everyone, a national fund based on copyright
fees that supports local arts, and a limit on the amount of advertising.
HD1333 1-55238-192-7
A common hunger; land rights in Canada and South
Africa.
Fairweather, Joan G.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 260 p. $39.95 (pa)
A South African historian and archivist living in Ottawa, Fairweather
offers a comparative history of the two former British colonies focusing
on how indigenous peoples are reclaiming rights to the land and an equi-
table share in the wealth-producing resources they contain as a means
of confronting the legacies of poverty left by their dispossession by
European colonists. Distributed in the US by Michigan State University
Press.
HD1333 2006-000554 0-8179-4722-1
Liberal reform in an illiberal regime; the creation of
private property in Russia, 1906-1915.
Williams, Stephen F. (Hoover Institution Press publication; no.545)
Hoover Institution Press, ©2006 320 p. $15.00 (pa)
The agricultural reform unleashed by Russian Prime Minister Petr
Stolypin in 1906, which was aimed at the widespread privatization of
peasant communal lands, was “reform in the direction of liberal
democracy” in the estimation of Judge Williams (US Court of Appeals for
the DC Circuit) even if chosen and implemented by a Tsarist government
that couldn’t possibly be considered liberal or democratic. Applying the
theoretical framework of the law-and- economics movement, particularly
its focus on transaction costs, Williams analyzes the Stolypin reforms and
its social and economic effects, suggesting that the lessons may be appli-
cable to future efforts of illiberal regimes to institute liberal reforms.
HD1375 2006-001144 978-1-4051-1099-0
Markets & institutions in real estate & construction.
Ball, Michael.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 271 p. $89.95 (pa)
Ball (urban and property economics, University of Reading) examines
housing markets in different parts of the world, the role of real estate
agents, and international differences in the home building industry. His
analysis highlights divergent trends among commercial and residential
brokers, the pervasiveness of large construction firms, objections to
urban regeneration partnerships, and why market processes are the best
way to deal with housing problems. The book will be of most interest to
academics and graduate students and is recommended for libraries
serving business schools.
HD1382 0-9786292-0-5
The spill zone; forecast what a property will be worth 3
years from now in minutes.
Ross, Ed.
Monarch Group, LLC, ©2006 200 p. $24.95
Ross, a real estate investor, provides a model for forecasting a home’s
value. He offers guidance for light investing in real estate and gives
advice on retiring with high income from real estate. The book will be
useful to real estate holders, buyers, sellers, or renters.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD1387 2006-040661 0-922154-87-2
Historic properties; preservation and the valuation
process, 3d ed.
Reynolds, Judith.
Appraisal Institute, ©2006 182 p. $40.00 (pa)
For appraisers and general readers, this book describes the preservation
and appraisal process of historic properties, including legislation, court
decisions, tax laws, and restrictions. It discusses how the application of
the highest and best use principle is modified for historic properties and
also provides an overview of the preservation movement, along with line
drawings of building styles and a discussion of the costs and benefits of
these properties. A chapter each is devoted to the sales comparison,
income, and cost approaches. Information on government agencies con-
cerned with regulation and restoration is given, and a directory of
national and state resources and websites is included. This edition has
an expanded valuation section and case studies of how the sales com-
parison and income capitalization approaches are applied. Reynolds is
an appraiser specializing in historic properties.
HD1415 2006-025722 978-1-4051-0596-5
The world food economy.
Southgate, Douglas et al.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 402 p. $94.95
This volume emerged out of a course taught by the authors (of the
department of agricultural, environmental, and development economics
at the Ohio State U.) on the economics of population growth and food
demand, agricultural development, and related environmental issues.
Because the course and ones like it tend to attract international relations
and other non-economics students, the material is presented in a non-
specialized manner. The authors open with chapters exploring trends in
food demand and population growth, impacts of food consumption on
living standards, agricultural development (emphasizing improvements
in technology for commodity production, and markets of consumption
and production influenced by public policy. Then, various environmental
issues connected to crop and livestock production, the role of agriculture
and globalization, and the role of agriculture in economic development
are in turn examined, followed by a chapter on food insecurity. A series
of regional chapters explore overall trends in food economics around the
world, and the text concludes with a discussion of emerging issues.
HD1537 2006-011775 0-8047-5271-0
State, peasant, and merchant in Qing Manchuria, 1644-
1862.
Isett, Christopher Mills.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 418 p. $65.00
Isett (history, U. of Minnesota) explores the relationship of the sociopo-
litical structures that shaped peasant lives in northeast China during the
dynasty. She explains how the region’s social landscape early during the
period was largely shaped by policies of the Qing ruling house to defend
its homeland against occupation by non- Manchus; how this agrarian
configuration unraveled under challenge from settler peasant commu-
nities; and how the new social formation shaped peasant economic
behavior and established the limits of economic change and trade
growth.
HD1691 2005-057075 978-0-7546-2371-7
The economics of water quality.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. William Easter and Naomi Zeitouni. (The
international library of environmental economics and policy)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 592 p. $275.00
Easter and Zeitouni (U. of Minnesota) compile 34 journal essays in this
collection focusing on the economics of water quality. The essays, from
1982 to 2005, consist of economic studies of key water quality issues of
importance in recent years and economic and social aspects, such as pol-
luters’ actions and incentives, the design and comparison of tools for pro-
tection, the cost and benefits of improvement projects, and the
management of transboundary water quality. Topics focus on industrial
and agricultural sectors; policy tools, including regulation, standards,
taxes, subsidies, liability, and pollution permits and nutrient trading;
water contamination that crosses national boundaries; and new policy
directions. The essays also make recommendations for improving incen-
tives, programs, and policies. Article authors are agricultural economists
and scientists based at universities and government organizations
around the world. Only a name index is provided.
–118–
HD1698 2006-413288 81-7708-106-3
Water resources management; realities and challenges.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Nageswara Rao.
New Century Pub. (Delhi), ©2006 304 p. $55.00
Indian economists specializing in drought, environmental studies, public
utilities, agriculture, and watershed management grapple with challenges
in effectively allocating water resources, especially in the context of eco-
nomic development. The findings, based on micro-level studies, might be
useful to other researchers, policy makers, environmentalists, and aca-
demics. There is no index.
HD1795 2006-043948 978-0-7425-5356-9
Hacienda and market in eighteenth-century Mexico; the
rural economy of the Guadalajara region, 1675-1820, 2d
ed.
Young, Eric Van. (Latin American silhouettes)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 400 p. $34.95 (pa)
Van Young (Latin American history, U. of California, San Diego) presents
a history of eighteenth century Mexico that concentrates on the societal
and economic aspects of the hacienda. He considers how the Guadalajara
region became internally integrated, the growth of the urban market as
a catalyst, and the expansion of commercialized agriculture to supply the
market. He also examines the connection between population growth and
agrarian structure. The book is based on many sources, including
archives, reports, censuses, tax records, account books, and court cases.
HD1795 2006-019925 978-0-8165-2500-3
Weathering risk in rural Mexico; climatic, institutional,
and economic change.
Eakin, Hallie.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 242 p. $50.00
Eakin (geography, U. of California, Santa Barbara) uses ethnographic
data she collected from three agricultural communities in rural Mexico
to demonstrate that economic and climatic change are connected.
Focusing on the human dimensions of climate variability and change
and the social implications of institutional change, she looks at farmers’
experiences in the Puebla-Tlaxcala Valley, their decision-making, and
implications of their actions. She discusses the impacts of El Niño-
Southern Oscillation events from 1997-1999 and the institutionalization of
neoliberalism and free-trade principles under the Salinas de Gotari and
Zedillo administrations, as well as the farmers’ adaptive strategies.
HD2341 2006-005603 978-1-84542-520-3
The hidden enterprise culture; entrepreneurship in the
underground economy.
Williams, Colin C.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 263 p. $110.00
The economic scale of underground entrepreneurs, those that conduct all
or part of their business off-the-books, eclipses that of General Motors or
any other Fortune 500 firms. In this work, Williams (work organization,
U. of Leicester Management Center, UK) seeks to measure just how large
a phenomenon such underground activity (akin to formal employment
and profit-seeking ventures) is in western societies and consider what the
policy response to it should be. He argues that governments need to rec-
ognize such activity as a “hidden enterprise culture” that is an asset to
be harnessed by providing a means for underground entrepreneurs to
legitimize their businesses.
HD2745 2006-019149 978-0-7879-8610-0
The imperfect board member; discovering the seven
disciplines of governance excellence.
Brown, Jim.
Jossey-Bass, ©2006 203 p. $22.95
Using a story about a fictional board member, this book describes seven
disciplines of governance to aid board directors of non-profit and for-
profit organizations. Brown details concepts such as reflecting on orga-
nizational results, respecting owner expectations, selecting prominent
leadership, and directing and protecting organizational performance,
and also details his model at the end of the book, with tips on the prin-
ciples, including board-management interaction and healthy board rela-
tions. No index is provided. Brown is associated with a leadership
development firm that specializes in governance. Jossey-Bass is an
imprint of Wiley.
–119–
HD2766 2005-057106 978-1-58321-416-9
Balancing collections performance and service ratings;
assessing the impact of policies at municipal and
cooperative utilities.
Seger, Steven E.
American Water Works Assn., ©2006 111 p. $65.00 (pa)
Segar, principal of a management consulting and training company,
offers 25 lessons on the impact of credit and collections policies on rev-
enues and customer satisfaction ratings at not-for-profit water, waste-
water, electric, and natural gas utilities. The brief lessons provide local
officials, directors, and managers with information they can use when
formulating policies and operational procedures. Early chapters analyze
the results of a pilot study on how various policies are linked to results,
while lessons cover new account requirements, current account tasks,
and delinquent account actions. A final chapter covers other collection
resources, such as bankruptcy processing and sweep accounts. Lessons
contain tables, sample forms, and worked calculations, and appendices
provide 45 credit and collection policies and collections agency requests
for proposals.
HD3611 2005-055187 0-415-36011-0
Clusters in urban and regional development.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andy Cumbers and Danny MacKinnon. (Urban
studies monographs)
Routledge, ©2006 232 p. $110.00
Previously published as a special issue of the journal Urban Studies, this
collection of 11 papers critically reviews the theory and evidence con-
cerning the economics of spatial agglomeration (or clusters). Editors
Cumbers (human geography, U. of Glasgow, UK) and MacKinnon
(human geography, U. of Aberdeen, UK) open the volume with papers
that address broad conceptual and theoretical concerns, including the
geographic definition of clusters, market conditions as incentives for clus-
tering, and the ways that different theorizations of clustering can inform
each other. The next section explores the relationship between clustering
and knowledge and innovation, connecting this topic to issues of labor
mobility, entrepreneurial dynamics, and the place of clusters within
wider geographic networks. The final set of papers consist of empirical
studies looking at the development of biotechnology clusters in Scotland;
the software cluster in Oslo, Norway; and the renewal of automotive and
metal clusters in the old industrial region of Styria in Austria.
HD4140 2006-010114 978-0-7425-5308-8
The politics of greed; how privatization structured politics
in Central and Eastern Europe.
Schwartz, Andrew Harrison. (World social change)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 357 p. $34.95 (pa)
The national privatization strategies urged by the neoliberal Washington
Consensus on the transition countries of Eastern and Central Europe,
argues the late Schwartz (formerly of the Berkeley Roundtable on the
International Economy), were often decisive for the political and eco-
nomic development of the countries involved. Assessing the political,
legal, and institutional environments that were forged with privatization,
he argues that privatization is not necessarily connected to the quality of
capitalism and democracy, rapid privatization may generate owners
resistant to state regulation of markets and may provoke popular
backlash, privatization schemes that encourage foreign direct investment
are more likely to accelerate capitalism and democracy, and that com-
petent and independent market regulators are central to the growth of
capitalism and democracy.
HD4885 978-0-8160-5573-9
Ferguson career resource guide to apprenticeship
programs, 3d ed.; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth H. Oakes.
Ferguson Publishing, ©2006 1032 p. $125.00
Aimed at high school and college students who are planning their future
careers, this reference describes apprenticeship opportunities in 55 fields.
The information is based upon interviews with people currently working
in those jobs. Volume one opens with several informative essays on such
topics as volunteer work, interviewing skills, and workplace etiquette.
The main part of the material is organized alphabetically by career field.
These entries are followed by a section on apprenticeships by eligibility
(such as those for disabled workers) and listings of schools, job centers,
and state apprenticeship councils. Oakes is a professional writer who has
published more than 20 books.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD4904 2006-006526 978-0-8014-8998-3
Breaking the mold; redesigning work for productive and
satisfying lives, 2d ed.
Bailyn, Lotte.
ILR Press, ©2006 184 p. $17.95 (pa)
Bailyn (management, MIT) offers this update to her 1993 monograph in
a new climate in which the challenges to professionals balancing work
and life are greater, while an explosion of research into the “work-life”
problem has brought wider attention to the issue. Through real-life anec-
dotes, the author analyzes the strained relationship between the
employer’s goals for competition and the employee’s needs for healthy
and productive personal and family lives, focusing particularly on tech-
nical, professional, and managerial employees. Along with her findings,
the book includes her suggestions for policy making and starting an
employer/employee dialogue around the demands of work and home
life.
HD4904 2006-029720 0-8058-4604-2
Working couples caring for children and aging parents;
effects on work and well-being.
Neal, Margaret B. and Leslie B. Hammer.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 367 p. $32.50 (pa)
Focusing on dual-earner couples, this volume examines the issues with
caring for children and aging parents at the same time. Neal (Institute
on Aging, Portland State U.) and Hammer (psychology, Portland State U.)
single out the workplace as the place for change and draw from a three-
year study of about 300 couples called Working Couples Caring for
Children and Aging Parents—one of the first comprehensive national
studies on the group. They present data from both members of couples
and analyze work and family roles by giving a profile of these couples,
discussing their prevalence, and describing the effects of being “sand-
wiched” on their well-being, coping strategies, and workplace supports.
Similarities and differences between husbands and wives are detailed.
The book is aimed at students, policymakers, health care professionals,
psychologists, sociologists, human resource managers, and occupational
health psychologists. Both subject and author indexes are provided.
HD4904 2006-010550 0-8058-5621-8
Work, family, and community; exploring interconnections.
Voydanoff, Patricia. (Series in applied psychology)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 196 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this study, Voydanoff explores the complex interconnections between
the domains of the workplace, family life, and the larger community.
Using a conceptual model based on ecological systems theory, she inte-
grates recent research in family studies, sociology, and industrial organi-
zational and occupational health psychology. Her analysis focuses on the
allocation of resources and fulfillment of demands both within and
across the boundaries of this trio of seemingly disparate worlds.
Voydanoff (U. of Dayton) is also the author of Work and Family Life
(1987).
HD4965 2006-926066 978-0-566-08733-2
Senior executive reward; key models and practices.
Pepper, Sandy.
Gower Publishing, ©2006 86 p. $89.95
This volume covers the theories and practices relating to the compen-
sation of senior executives. Aiming to combine practical and academic
viewpoints, Pepper uses real case studies and examples to consider eco-
nomic models; psychology, sociology, and organizational behavior; tax
and accounting; and corporate governance in the US and Europe. Pepper
is a chartered accountant who specializes in senior executive reward,
employee share schemes, and the taxation of international executives.
Distributed by Ashgate.
HD5701 2006-007960 978-1-84542-881-5
Labour supply and microsimulation; the evaluation of tax
policy reform.
Creedy, John and Guyonne Kalb.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 327 p. $130.00
Creedy and Kalb, both of the Melbourne Institute of Applied Economic
and Social Research at the U. of Melbourne, describe behavioral tax
microsimulation methods and review the use of those models for evalu-
ating text policy reforms. The authors address topics related to inter-
preting results from microsimulation, such as welfare measurements,
income distribution, confidence intervals around the simulated results
and feedback effects on the wage distribution via labor demand. The
approaches and proposed methods are not model- specific. The text
includes detailed descriptions of how labor supply models can be used
in building behavioral microsimulation models and discusses the devel-
opment of new methods for evaluating policy reforms.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD5715 2005-055521 978-0-8160-6557-8
But what if I don’t want to go to college?; a guide to
success through alternative education, 3d ed.
Unger, Harlow G.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2006 246 p. $34.95
Unger has worked for the New York Herald Tribune and The Times of
London. Here he offers advice and resources to people, grade 9 and
above, considering alternatives to four years of higher education. He dis-
cusses on-the-job education and explains different forms of co-operative
education, including vocational/technical high schools, community col-
leges, and distance learning programs. Using U.S. Department of Labor
statistics, he highlights jobs not requiring a Bachelor’s degree in the
fastest growing industries and compares expected yearly earnings for
each level of education attained, up to and including a four-year degree.
Other materials include advice on selecting a career, applying, and inter-
viewing. The appendices contain contacts for accreditation and co-oper-
ative education programs, as well as a chart displaying the required
education, employment outlook, and yearly salaries for about 700 jobs.
HD5715 2006-036204 978-0-7879-9598-0
Tough choices or tough times; the report of the New
Commission on the Skills of the American Workforce.
National Center on Education and the Economy (U.S.). New
Commission on the Skills of the American Workforce.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 169 p. $19.95 (pa)
Composed of former cabinet secretaries, federal elected officials, school
superintendents, corporate CEOs, union leaders, and governors, the
“new” Commission on the Skills of the American Workforce presents a
new report analyzing the state of American education and presenting
recommendations for restructuring to meet the challenges of an eco-
nomically globalizing world. As with the previous America’s Choice: High
Skills or Low Wages!, they provide recommendations on standards and
assessments for “high performance” schools, but also discuss such pro-
posals as education savings account and literacy programs for the adult
workforce.
HD5724 2006-017187 0-8242-1062-X
Jobs in America.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Ramm. (The reference shelf; v.78, no.4)
H.W. Wilson Company, ©2006 181 p. $50.00 (pa)
This volume contains reprints of 26 articles from respected publications
that examine employment in the U.S. from a variety of perspectives. Each
of four thematic sections is introduced by editor Ramm (affiliation not
cited). A sampling of topics addressed includes health care costs, local
“living wage” laws, and the economic role of high-skilled foreign
workers. A section of the U.S. Department of Labor’s 2006-2007
Occupational Outlook Handbook is reproduced in the appendix.
HD5724 2006-024006 978-0-87766-731-5
Making America work.
Forman, Jonathan Barry.
Urban Institute Press, ©2006 429 p. $29.50 (pa)
In a complex society like the US, the economic rewards from work are
determined by a combination of market forces and government policies,
says Forman (law, U. of Oklahoma), and government policies should be
changed both to encourage greater work effort and to reduce economic
inequality. In particular, he argues for policies that would increase the
rewards for low-skilled Americans and reduce the work disincentives
that so many other workers face.
HD5724 2006-040295 0-312-35522-X
Take this job and ship it; how corporate greed and brain-
dead politics are selling out America.
Dorgan, Byron L.
St. Martin’s Press, ©2006 277 p. $24.95
Senator Dorgan (D-North Dakota) issues a broadside against the North
American Free Trade Agreement and other free trade policies of the
United States long embraced by politicians from both major parties. He
argues, often anecdotally, that current free trade policy has had dam-
aging effects on the economic health of the nation, distorts American
foreign policy, and hurts the world’s environment. He includes with a list
of recommendations for addressing these problems, including the devel-
opment of an American Fair Trade Plan, the establishment of a Federal
Trade Department, addressing the trade deficit with “import certifi-
cates,” repealing tax breaks that encourage job exportation, encouraging
stronger labor unions, and setting a ceiling on trade deficits.
–120–
HD5819 2006-027543 978-0-7619-3545-2
Employment and unemployment in India; emerging
tendencies during the post-reform period.
Mathew, E.T.
Sage Publications, ©2006 166 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this study, Mathew (Center for Development Studies,
Thiruvananthapuram) analyzes trends in employment and unem-
ployment in the post-reform Indian economy. Drawing upon the most
recent set of NSS data, he reveals the impact of various structural eco-
nomic reforms on such areas as employment generation, the proportion
of casual labor, and the “feminization” of the labor force. He concludes
with a discussion of the future prospects of business processing out-
sourcing in India.
HD5854 2006-026650 978-0-88099-288-6
The shadow workforce; perspectives on contingent work
in the United States, Japan, and Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sandra E. Gleason.
W.E. Upjohn Institute, ©2006 349 p. $22.00 (pa)
Nonstandard, or contingent, employment—encompassing part-time
employees; temp agency placements; self-employed consultants; subcon-
tracted employees; multiple-job holders; and day laborers—has been
growing rapidly from as early as the mid-1970s, promising benefits to
employers but increased risk and lower wages for employees. In this
work, Gleason (Pennsylvania State U.) presents a synthetic overview of
the literature on nonstandard employment in the United States, Japan,
and the European Union, discussing employer decisions to hire con-
tingent workers, labor union responses, the legal framework influencing
contingent work, the impact of public programs such as unemployment
insurance, and other issues.
HD5856 2004-028439 978-0-415-33356-6
Palestinian labour migration to Israel; labour, land and
occupation.
Farsakh, Leila. (The Routledge political economy of the Middle East and
North Africa series)
Routledge, ©2005 264 p. $95.00
Farsakh (U. of Massachusetts) describes the political and economic deter-
minants and dynamics of Palestinian labor migration to Israel between
1967 and 2000. Noting that traditional economic migration theories fail
to adequately explain Palestinian labor migration because they don’t take
into account political factors that help shape economic decision making
by Palestinian workers, he points to the specificity of the Israeli occu-
pation and its implications for Palestinian economic development and
labor force absorption as the main factor determining Palestinian labor
migration. He argues that Israeli determination to consolidate its
holdings over Palestinian land prevented the Palestinian economy from
absorbing its own work force, especially in the agricultural sector, thus
“releasing” Palestinian labor to be absorbed by the Israeli economy, par-
ticularly in construction. Since the introduction of the Oslo accords in
1993, he further argues, a process of “bantustanisation” has taken place,
creating a Palestinian reserve labor force, although this may not have
been the specific intention of Israeli leaders.
HD6053 2005-055933 1-84542-664-9
Globalization, uncertainty and women’s careers; an
international comparison.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hans-Peter Blossfeld and Heather Hofmeister.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 475 p. $160.00
Twenty-three European and American academics and researchers con-
tribute 17 chapters to one of four books stemming from the 1999-2005
international and multidisciplinary research program, GLOBALIFE—Life
Courses in the Globalization Process, funded by the Volkswagen
Foundation, Hanover. The text examines how women in 13 industrialized
societies navigate work and family careers in an era of globalization and
rising economic uncertainty. Coverage includes an overview of women’s
employment in times of globalization; country-specific studies examining
women’s employment entries, exits, and job mobility in conservative,
social-democratic, post-socialist, liberal, and family-oriented welfare
regimes; the impact of gender role attitudes on women’s life courses; and
a summary discussion of women’s careers in an era of uncertainty. For
academics, students, researchers, practitioners, and policymakers.
–121–
HD6054 978-0-7748-1319-8
Bar codes; women in the legal profession.
Leiper, Jean McKenzie. (Law and society series)
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 242 p. $85.00
Leiper (sociology, King’s U. College, U. of Western Ontario, emeritus)
examines women lawyers’ attempts to reconcile their professional obli-
gations with other aspects of their lives. It charts the life courses of
women who constitute the first wave in a profession designed for and by
men and in which formal codes of conduct and subtle cultural norms
promote masculine values. She analyzes women’s encounters with this
culture and raises questions about the stresses common to many
Canadian women. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press.
HD6054 2005-031734 1-84542-437-9
Successful professional women of the Americas; from
polar winds to tropical breezes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Betty Jane Punnett et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 284 p. $120.00
Drawing from more than 1100 surveys and hundreds of interviews from
the Successful Women Project, the contributors of these 13 articles
examine how women find success in locales as different as Barbados and
Canada. The contributors describe the personal, social, economic, cul-
tural, and organizational constructs of their success in terms of theory
and empirical findings of the project, the culture and personal charac-
teristics that seem most likely to produce success, leadership and lead-
ership styles, barriers, social support, mentors and the big picture, as
well as country studies for Canada, the US, Mexico, Brazil, Argentina and
Chile. Particularly interesting are the results from nations thought to be
particularly paternalistic, where women nevertheless find niches that
will afford them professional and personal success, and other thought to
be imbued with equality, where women’s expectations are not being met
as much as they had hoped.
HD6060 978-3-938094-90-7
Convergence, persistence and diversity in male and
female careers; does context matter in an era
globalization?
Grunow, Daniela.
Barbara Budrich Publishers, ©2006 250 p. $28.90 (pa)
The complete subtitle is: Does context matter in an era globalization? A
comparison of gendered employment mobility patterns in West Germany
and Denmark. Though the two countries share active state engagement
in gender relations, Grunow (sociology, Yale U.) finds that they represent
greatly different normative and institutional settings for male and female
employment: Denmark has actively fostered a dual-earner model, while
West Germany promoted a single-provider model with the other partner
focusing on the domestic sphere. She analyzes whether that difference
affected the career course of men and women during the economic,
political, and social changes of the late 20th century. There is no index.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HD6060 2006-005789 1-59140-815-6
Encyclopedia of gender and information technology; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eileen M. Trauth.
Idea Group Publishing, ©2006 1371 p. $525.00
Derived from studies carried out by the contributors, many of them
including interviews and literature reviews, the 213 entries of this two-
volume reference describe the experiences and potential for women in the
field of IT. Most numerous are the entries on women and IT in indi-
vidual countries or of women minorities within their countries. These
entries frequently describe specific government or NGO efforts to bring
women into the IT sector. Other entry topics include theories for
improving women’s opportunities to have careers in IT, education in
general and in specific places or levels, ethics, methods of studying
women and IT, discussion as to why men dominate the field, and fem-
inism. Each entry concludes with a list of references and a list of key
terms with their definitions. The 295 contributors teach at universities
mainly in North America, Europe, and Australia. Trauth is at the
Pennsylvania State U.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD6279 2006-027906 978-0-7879-8117-4
Training older workers and learners; maximizing the
workplace performance of an aging workforce.
Moseley, James L. and Joan Conway Dessinger.
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 390 p. $50.00 (pa)
This resource for practitioners provides tools and guidance for training
and re-training older worker-learners (OWLS). Moseley (instructional
technology, Wayne State U.) and Dessinger (a workplace learning con-
sultant) begin with an overview of some common characteristics of
OWLS as workers, retirees (or not) and learners. They then describe the
transitions OWLS go through and conclude with some specific training
strategies aimed at transforming older workers into high-level learners
and performers. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
HD6490 2006-000327 978-0-252-07364-9
Waves of opposition; labor and the struggle for
democratic radio.
Fones-Wolf, Elizabeth. (The history of communication)
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 307 p. $25.00 (pa)
In stark contrast to the present, organized labor once had a strong voice
on American broadcast radio, reaching its peak in the late 1950s. Fones-
Wolf (history, West Virginia U.) relates the history of labor’s engagement
with radio and its competition with business groups to influence the
American people through the medium from the 1920s through labor
radio’s decline in the 1960s. Along the way, she describes the political,
economic, and legal forces that shaped the rise and fall of labor radio.
HD6508 2006-006962 978-0-252-07319-9
Radical unionism in the Midwest, 1900-1950.
Feurer, Rosemary. (The working class in American history)
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 320 p. $25.00 (pa)
Feurer (history, Northern Illinois U.) examines the radical union organ-
izing of District 8 of the United Electrical, Radio, and Machine workers
and places it in the context of national and international developments.
She discusses how a militant minority, including Communist president
of District 8, William Sentner, developed a form of community organizing
rooted in the unemployed and union organizing struggles of the 1930
and aimed at wholesale transformation of the union movement at the
national and international levels. She also explores how an eventual anti-
communist backlash allowed employers and more right-wing forces in
the Congress of Industrial Organizations to challenge and eventually roll
back the gains of the United Electrical, Radio, and Machine workers. The
work is also notable in that it explores unionization at the “independent”
companies on the periphery of the electrical and metal trades industries,
rather than at the already well-studied large corporations.
HD6642 2006-026018 978-0-275-97741-2
A history of organized labor in Peru and Ecuador.
Alexander, Robert J.
Praeger, ©2007 238 p. $140.00
Originally intending a general history of organized labor in Latin
America and the Caribbean, the author worried that it would never see
light as a single work and so began breaking it down into separate
volumes. The present work provides descriptive narratives of the organi-
zational evolution and political and economic activities of the organized
labor movements in the neighbor countries of Peru and Ecuador.
Although prior eras do receive treatment, the greatest level of detail con-
cerns the years 1948-1990.
HD6955 2006-280064 978-1-4051-3903-8
A new sociology of work?
Title main entry. Ed. by Lynne Pettinger et al. (Sociological review
monograph series)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2005 247 p. $34.95 (pa)
Pettinger (sociology, U. of Essex, UK) et al. collect 13 essays that look at
the nature of work and ways of theorizing and researching it, aiming to
generate debate and research that will refine definitions. The essays are
a result of a workshop held at the Policy Studies Institute in London in
autumn of 2003, funded by the Economic and Social Research Council.
Contributors—sociologists from Canada, the UK, and New Zealand—
discuss conceptualizing and re-examining the topic (including the femi-
nization of labor markets), privatized work such as childcare and
schooling, challenging the public and private spheres through volun-
teering and community work, and international comparisons. They
emphasize five themes: the nature and definition of work; socioeco-
nomic, spatial, and temporal dimensions; its embeddedness in other
social relations; the interconnection between work in different spheres;
and commodification and remuneration.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD6971 2005-036833 0-275-98703-5
What managers say, what employees hear; connecting
with your front line (so they’ll connect with customers).
Title main entry. Ed. by Regina Fazio Maruca.
Praeger, ©2006 175 p. $39.95
Leading consultants, academics, and business people explore issues
involved in the management of front line employees from a variety of
perspectives. The 13 contributions address such topics as tailoring
employee training and standards to meet customers’ expectations; pro-
moting authentic engagement with customers; and creating environ-
ments that unlock potential. Editor Maruca is a freelance business writer
and a Principal at the Center for Executive Development.
HD7091 2006-013335 0-7546-2355-6
Grounding security; family, insurance and the state.
Weisbrod, Carol. (Law, justice and power)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 145 p. $99.95
Weisbrod (U. of Connecticut School of Law) argues that individual
security is supported by three interrelated foundational pillars: the
family, private insurance, and government (through state provision of
social security and the like). Her goal in this work is to describe these
pillars and their interrelationships in the US setting, noting that if public
policy assumptions about one or more of the pillars are based on
incorrect premises, then policy approaches related to other pillars will
not have the desired effects. She concludes her analytic tour with an
argument for public responsibility for security on liberal assumptions.
HD7091 2006-048232 978-0-8213-6764-3
Pensions panorama; retirement-income systems in 53
countries.
Whitehouse, Edward.
The World Bank, ©2007 234 p. $25.00 (pa)
Whitehouse (Social Policy Division, Organization for Economic Co- oper-
ation and Development) provides a compendium of facts and analysis of
retirement-income systems of 53 countries around the globe. The text
opens with a comparison of retirement-income systems across countries,
describing the parameters and rules of pension schemes and calculating
the value of pension entitlements for workers on different levels of
earnings, followed by reports for individual countries grouped by
region—high-income OECD countries, Eastern Europe and Central Asia,
Latin America and the Caribbean, Middle East and North Africa. Each
country report includes information about qualifying conditions, benefit
calculation, treatment of pensioners under the personal income tax and
social security contributions, and a summary results table giving relative
pension levels, replacement rates, and pension wealth at different indi-
vidual levels of earnings.
HD7105 2005-058495 1-4133-0410-9
Nolo’s guide to social security disability; getting &
keeping your benefits, 3d ed. (CD-ROM included)
Morton, David A.
Nolo, ©2006 — p. $29.99 (pa)
Morton, who makes good use of his extensive experience, guides appli-
cants and recipients through one of the world’s largest bureaucracies. In
plain English he explains the programs associated with disability, the
means of applying for disability benefits for adults and children, getting
benefits during the application process, proving you are disabled, and
understanding who decides your claim and how they decide, the fine
points of impairment and ability, how age and education matter as much
as work experience, the reasons you may be denied benefits, appeals,
what to do once you are approved, and your right to legal and other rep-
resentation. The CD-ROM includes information on how the Social Security
Administration categorizes and defines medical disabilities.
HD7125 2006-024631 978-0-88099-290-9
Social security and the stock market; how the pursuit of
market magic shapes the system.
Munnell, Alicia H. and Steven A. Sass.
W.E. Upjohn Institute, ©2006 171 p. $40.00 (pa)
Many policymakers have proposed the use of investments in equities as
a component of proposals on reforming Social Security. Suggesting that
this is a “promising” approach “due to the high expected returns on
stocks and the diversification of the program’s funding sources beyond
the payroll tax,” but warning that it would also introduce a host of chal-
lenges, the author of this book seeks to identify the proper way to
structure such a reform by examining the experiences of the United
Kingdom, Australia, and Canada with their recent introduction of equity
into their programs.
–122–
HD7287 978-1-933588-05-6
Household spending; who spends how much on what,
11th ed. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. Ed. by New Strategist Publications editors.
New Strategist Pub., Inc., ©2006 598 p. $94.95
If logic works, from 2000 to 2004 you should have received 11 percent
more services paid for by property taxes, driven 13 percent more, enjoyed
a 24 percent improvement in health care and gotten 31 percent better
educated. Not the case? According to this comprehensive report, most of
these increases for your household were involuntary, regardless of your
age, ethnicity, income, education level, or region. Along with such large-
scope revelations as this comes hundreds of details on apparel, enter-
tainment, financial products and services, alcoholic beverages, gifts,
health care, housing, utilities, personal care, reading, education, tobacco
use and transportation, so you can find out what the trends are on vir-
tually everything an average American household buys or consumes,
down to hosiery and pet food. Along with being a boon to researchers,
this is also a fascinating look at who thinks what is worth buying in
America today.
HD7287 978-1-933588-11-7
Who’s buying alcoholic and nonalcoholic beverages, 3d
ed.
Title main entry. (The who’s buying series)
New Strategist Pub., Inc., ©2006 123 p. $59.95 (pa)
Figures are presented showing average spending for beverages, the best
customers, total spending, market share, and product-specific spending.
Alcoholic beverages are divided between those consumed at home and at
bars and restaurants. Non-alcoholic drinks include carbonated drinks,
coffee and tea, and fruit and vegetable juice. The date is from the 2004
Bureau of Labor Statistics’ Consumer Expenditure Survey. No index is
provided.
HD7287 978-1-933588-08-7
Who’s buying apparel, 2d ed.
Title main entry. (The who’s buying series)
New Strategist Pub., Inc., ©2006 107 p. $59.95 (pa)
Produced by the Bureau of Labor Statistics, the Consumer Expenditure
Survey is an ongoing, nationwide survey of household spending. This
volume summarizes data from the most recent (2004) release of the
survey dealing with consumer spending on apparel. Following an
overview of general trends is a set of tables describing spending within
various demographic groups. The remaining tables are organized by
product category (i.e., children’s shoes, jewelry, women’s apparel, dry
cleaning, and so on).
HD7287 978-1-933588-22-3
Who’s buying; executive summary of household spending,
2d ed.
Title main entry. (The who’s buying series)
New Strategist Pub., Inc., ©2005 178 p. $59.95 (pa)
This volume reports on data collected by the Bureau of Labor Statistics’
Consumer Expenditure Survey, the ongoing nationwide survey of
household spending. Two types of statistical tables are presented: those
that show the average annual spending of households on each major
product and service category in 2004 and indexed spending tables that
compare the spending of particular household (age) segments with that
of the average household.
HD7287 978-1-933588-17-9
Who’s buying for pets, 4th ed.
Title main entry. (The who’s buying series)
New Strategist Pub., Inc., ©2006 61 p. $39.95 (pa)
The Bureau of Labor Statistics’ Consumer Expenditure Survey (CEX) is an
ongoing study of the day-to-day spending of American households. Based
on the Survey’s most recent (2004) release, this volume presents tables of
data pertaining to household spending on pets in such product categories
as food, supplies, and veterinary care. The data are also broken down by
demographic characteristics (age, income level, and so on). The tables are
preceded by brief analyses of spending trends.
–123–
HD7287 978-1-933588-21-6
Who’s buying for travel, 3d ed.
Title main entry. (The who’s buying series)
New Strategist Pub., Inc., ©2006 81 p. $49.95 (pa)
This volume provides an overview of American household spending on
travel. Tables of data are organized by demographic characteristics (i.e.,
age, income, race) as well as by product category (gasoline, airline fares,
lodging, recreational expenses, and so on). The data are taken from the
most recent (2004) release of the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ Consumer
Expenditure Survey (CEX). The editors summarize current trends in
travel spending in the introduction and at the beginning of each section.
HD7287 978-1-933588-20-9
Who’s buying transportation, 3d ed.
Title main entry. (The who’s buying series)
New Strategist Pub., Inc., ©2006 125 p. $59.95 (pa)
Drawing data from the 2004 Bureau of Labor Statistics’ Consumer
Expenditure Survey, the report presents tables showing consumer
spending on transportation products first by household or consumer
characteristic. Among these are age, income, race, region, household type,
and education level. Then they present the same data by product, among
which are new and used cars and trucks, parking fees, towing charges,
vehicle finance charges and insurance, bus and train fares, taxis, airline
fares. Bicycles, skateboards, hiking boots, and the like are not included.
There is no index.
HD7289 hd1379 978-0-9696922-5-6
The cottage ownership guide; how to buy, sell, rent,
share; hand down & retire to your waterfront getaway.
Hunter, Douglas.
Cottage Life Books, ©2006 256 p. $35.00
Hunter, who writes about a variety of topics, provides a guide to buying
and owning a cottage. He focuses on waterfront properties for personal
use and does not discuss condos, ski chalets, or using the cottage as an
investment property. The area covered includes Canada and the US and
particular issues concerning purchasing, owning, selling, sharing,
renting, retiring to, and bequeathing a cottage. He uses advice from
owners and industry professionals to describe how to choose an area,
search for a property, test the location, survey and inspect it, build on
land, finance, and relocate. Distributed by Firefly Books.
HD7289 2006-013814 978-0-910627-74-0
The second homeowners handbook; a complete guide for
vacation, income, retirement, and investment.
Haden, Jeff.
Atlantic Publishing, ©2006 347 p. $21.95 (pa)
Haden is with an advertising agency and book publishing services
provider. He has invested extensively in residential and commercial prop-
erties in five states, and has also written on real estate investing, mort-
gages, and personal finance. He presents a practical guide for individuals
considering investment in a second home, either to live in, to resell for a
profit, to use as a vacation property, or to convert into a rental property
for monthly income.
HD8039 2006-009628 0-8018-8471-3
Networked machinists; high-technology industries in
Antebellum America.
Meyer, David R. (Johns Hopkins studies in the history of technology)
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 311 p. $49.95
From 1790 to 1860, a set of metal manufacturers called the pivotal pro-
ducer durables formed networks of machinists, firms, and clusters of
individuals or firms, says Meyer (sociology and urban studies, Brown U.),
and it was in these networks as a whole, rather than in any constituent
of them, that the technological knowledge and skills of the industry were
embedded. He traces the emergence and elaboration of the networks
through the period, with examples such as firearms, locomotives, and
machine tools.
HD8039 2006-006959 0-252-07386-X
Wartime shipyard; a study in social disunity.
Archibald, Katherine.
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 244 p. $25.00 (pa)
When Archibald left graduate school at Berkeley to work in the nearby
Oakland shipyard as part of the war effort in 1942, she encountered a
society very different from anything she had experienced before. Her
sociological account originally published that year focuses on the various
racial, gender, and other hierarchies within the workplace. Alex
Lichtenstein (history, Rice U.) and Eric Arnesen (history and Africa-
American studies, U. of Illinois-Chicago) contribute a substantial intro-
duction putting the work in context.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD8045 978-91-89116-71-9
Political change and the rise of labour in comparative
perspective; Britain and Sweden 1890-1920.
Hilson, Mary.
Nordic Academic Press, ©2006 352 p. $76.00
Hilson (Scandinavian studies, U. College London, UK) presents a com-
parative historical study of the emergence of working-class political
movements in the naval dockyard towns of Plymouth in Britain and
Karlskrona in Sweden. One of her main concerns is related to the local
politics of naval dockyard towns and the particular difficulties they
posed to an organized labor movement nominally committed to interna-
tionalism and disarmament, but significant secondary goals of her study
include efforts to challenge narratives of national exceptionalism in labor
history and to offer a new approach to labor history that goes beyond
debates about the formation of the industrial working class towards
understanding of the implications of labor ideology, party organization,
and political behavior.
HD8066 00-708458 978-1-59237-101-3
Working Americans 1880-2006; v.7: Social movements.
Derks, Scott.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2006 640 p. $145.00
Though there is abundant information within its covers, the author’s
decision to use lengthy bulleted lists instead of paragraphs throughout
this hefty volume to convey each sentence of personal narratives, or the
author’s own rendition of a historical narrative, makes for frustrating
and confusing reading. Among the accounts subjected to this presen-
tation are the Scottsboro Trial, Prohibition, and fishing rights of the
Native Americans. The volume is organized chronologically, by decade,
and contains b&w reproductions of period photographs and prints.
HD8081 2006-028175 0-8139-2550-9
The segregated scholars; black social scientists and the
creation of black labor studies, 1890-1950.
Wilson, Francille Rusan. (Carter G. Woodson institute series)
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 356 p. $37.50
Wilson (African American studies, U. of Maryland) presents a collective
intellectual biography of three generations of black social scientists and
activists, from W.E.B. Du Bois in the 1890s to young economist Robert C.
Weaver during the New Deal. In the course of the study, she profiles 15
representative black sociologists, historians and economists from their
graduate training through their public careers.
HD8081 2006-021761 1-59332-136-8
Skilled immigrant and native workers in the United
States; the economic competition debate and beyond.
Batalova, Jeanne. (The new Americans)
LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2006 180 p. $58.00
A policy analyst at the Migration Policy Institute, Batalova addresses con-
cerns that skilled immigration measures passed by Congress since 1990
have had a negative impact on earnings of US-born skilled workers and
professionals. The problem will continue to worsen, she says, because
importing cheap foreign labor has been accompanied by defunding US
schools that might otherwise train native specialists. She looks at the
history, demographics, earnings competition, gender, and the future.
HD8085 2006-026093 978-0-8166-4637-1
By the ore docks; a working people’s history of Duluth.
Hudelson, Richard and Carl Ross.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 336 p. $18.95 (pa)
They wanted to become Americans, to find their fortunes, to seek rea-
sonable working conditions, or just to get fed for a while. Hudelson (phi-
losophy, U. of Wisconsin, Superior) and Ross (late Minnesota Historical
Society) trace the lives of the immigrants who came to the Duluth docks
for any or all of these reasons, and stayed to create a diverse and some-
times troubled city. They show how big steel ruled much of the workers’
lives, if from afar, why ethnic groups competed for what was sometime
small pickings, how class became an issue and soon so did immigrant
status, and why radical political and labor movements thrived. They
closely detail the rise and eventual fall of the Popular Front among the
workers, the roles of activists and the rank and file in politics, and the
continuing struggle to survive at the edge of what sometimes seemed to
be bloody water.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD9000 2006-010813 978-0-7591-0914-8
Fast food/slow food; the cultural economy of the global
food system.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Wilk. (Society for Economic
Anthropology monographs; v.24)
AltaMira Press, ©2006 268 p. $72.00
These anthropologists, sociologists and historians draw upon their inter-
national field experience to examine the change in food systems around
the globe. The contributors offer a cultural perspective on markets, indus-
trial production and food economies. Finding Lao survival food presented
as exotic offerings in trendy American restaurants and traditional
Japanese fast-foods in 7-Elevens, they reveal the global and corporate con-
nections in the slow food movement, and local and regional variations of
the fast food industry.
HD9000 2006-008270 0-7494-4645-5
Retailing logistics and fresh food packaging; managing
change in the supply chain.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kerstin Gustafsson et al.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 228 p. $80.00
Practitioners and researchers in European logistics, retail, and transport
identify changes occurring in fresh food retail supply chains through the
lens of packaging logistics. Their goal is to help organizations understand
the changes and the opportunities they offer. They explain packaging
logistics, discuss various aspects of it, and present two in-depth and 10
shorter case studies.
HD9005 2006-016827 978-1-890871-68-0
The agricultural marketing system, 6th ed.
Rhodes, V. James et al.
Holcomb Hathaway, Pub., ©2007 372 p. $55.00 (pa)
This textbook provides future managers, decision makers, and opinion
leaders with an overview of the economic factors and market forces at
work at each stage of the agricultural supply chain. Although global con-
cerns are considered when most relevant, the focus is on the U.S. agri-
cultural marketing system. Sample topics include price determination,
processor procurement systems, and collective marketing by farmer
groups.
HD9005 2006-029851 978-0-8014-7329-6
Appetite for change; how the counterculture took on the
food industry, 2d ed.
Belasco, Warren J.
Cornell U. Press, ©2007 327 p. $21.95 (pa)
Along with the counterculture of the 1960s arose a counter-cuisine that,
as Belasco (American studies, U. of Maryland) describes it, had three
major elements: a consumerist component rejecting processed foods; a
“therapeutic” component advocating improvisation, craftsmanship, and
ethnic and regional variety in cooking; and an organic foods component
addressing issues of food production and distribution. He describes the
development of the counter-cuisine, examines how the demands and
challenges raised by the counter-cuisine were addressed by mainstream
cuisine (“a loose network of respected scientists, government officials,
journalists, and marketers”), and assess the impact on US food ways.
HD9198 978-90-04-15599-2
The Dutch East India Company’s tea trade with China
1757-1781.
Liu, Yong. (TANAP monographs on the history of the Asian-European
interaction; v.6)
BRILL, ©2007 277 p. $99.00
Drawing on archival research in the Netherlands and Britain, Liu finds
that of all the Chinese goods traded by the Company, tea was by far the
most important, and eventually became the cornerstone of its China
trade. He focuses on the quarter century of the most robust trade to
explore such aspects as the Company’s China Committee and its man-
agement of the direct China trade, the purchase of teas in Canton, the
Dutch-Chinese-European triangle in China, the sale of the teas in Europe,
and the golden age of the tea trade and its conclusion. The study may be
his 2006 doctoral dissertation in history at Leiden University.
–124–
HD9199 2006005954 0-89680-247-7
Organic coffee; sustainable development by Mayan
farmers.
Martinez-Torres, Maria Elena.
Ohio University Press, ©2006 176 p. $22.00 (pa)
Martinez-Torres (environment and society, Center for Research and
Advanced Studies in Social Anthropology, Chiapas, Mexico) describes
how mostly Mayan indigenous peasants in the mountains of southern
Mexico have been organizing themselves to provide a solution to wide-
spread poverty and environmental degradation in the region during the
past two decades. The study is largely based on her 2003 doctoral dis-
sertation for the University of California-Berkeley.
HD9502 2006-040903 0-88173-530-2
Performance contracting; expanding horizons, 2d ed.
Hansen, Shirley J.
Fairmont Press, ©2006 332 p. $98.00
International performance contracting consultant Hansen presents a new
edition of Performance Contracting for Energy and Environmental Systems
(1992). While still intending to provide an overview of performance con-
tracting activities, for the new edition she has placed a greater emphasis
on the more pragmatic aspects of performance contracting relevant to
energy service companies. Writing both for service providers and end
users, she offers coverage of partner selection, measurement and verifi-
cation, financing energy efficiency, quality contracts, project man-
agement, and communication strategies. Customer and service provider
risk management is then discussed, followed by exploration of the future
landscape of performance contracting. Distributed in the US by CRC
Press/Taylor & Francis.
HD9506 2005-030396 978-0-295-98607-4
The battle for Butte; mining and politics on the northern
frontier, 1864-1906. (reprint, 1981)
Malone, Michael P. (The Emil and Kathleen Sick lecture-book series in
Western history and biography; v.4)
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 281 p. $25.00 (pa)
Malone was president of Montana State University in Bozeman and
author of regional histories. His 1981 study traces the rise of Butte,
Montana as an industrial center, focusing on the manic drive of capi-
talists to consolidate the copper mining district’s most valuable prop-
erties. William L. Lang (history, Portland State U., Oregon) contributes a
new foreword to the reprint.
HD9576 2006-018541 978-0-8047-5446-0
America’s kingdom; mythmaking on the Saudi oil
frontier.
Vitalis, Robert.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 353 p. $29.95
In telling the story of the Arabian American Oil Company (ARAMCO) in
Saudi Arabia, Vitalis (political science, U. of Pennsylvania) takes aim at
a number of myths of exceptionalism he finds common to earlier nar-
ratives such as the PBS documentary The Prize and Thomas Lippman’s
Inside the Mirage. These include the idea that ARAMCO was less
exploitive than, say, mining companies in Africa and the idea that Saudi
Arabia developed in relative international isolation and represents a rel-
atively unique case in the history of extractive economies. His discussion
looks how ARAMCO officials set up a system of social hierarchy similar
to Jim Crow or Apartheid in the oil town of Dhahran, explores the Saudi
workers’ challenges to this system of hierarchy and to their economic
exploitation, and parallel challenges to the international oil hierarchy rep-
resented by ARAMCO from progressive state-building forces in the Saudi
government.
HD9576 2006-022873 0-275-99188-1
The changing dynamics of energy in the Middle East; 2v.
Cordesman, Anthony H. and Khalid R. Al-Rodhan.
Praeger Security International, ©2006 168 p. $150.00
The authors (both of the Center for Strategic and International Studies)
provide analysis of the current capacities of the countries of the Middle
East and North Africa to supply energy exports to world markets and
assesses possible causes of capacity decline or even major supply inter-
ruptions. In the first volume of the report, key areas of internal risks and
general security trends are discussed and connections are made between
regional stability and economic and political dimensions in the region.
Beginning in the second volume, country-by-country analysis is provided
for Bahrain, Iran, Iraq, Qatar, Oman, Saudi Arabia, Yemen, Jordan,
Lebanon, Palestine, Israel, Egypt, Syria, Algeria, and Libya. The authors
than turn to assessment of methods of energy analyses before concluding
with summaries of the broad economic and technological trends of
energy supply and demand and presentation of broad scenarios for the
future of the region and energy markets.
–125–
HD9685 978-1-55046-462-7
The Canadian Niagara power company story.
Ball, Norman R.
Boston Mills Press, ©2005 318 p. $49.95
Ball (engineering, U. of Waterloo) recounts the trials and triumphs of the
Canadian Niagara Power Company, which has been generating electric
power continuously since 1905. Throughout the text, he demonstrates that
the company’s history is also the story of the political and economic con-
sequences of electricity on the Niagara region. The text is generously illus-
trated with historical photographs, maps and drawings. Distributed by
Firefly Books.
HD9685 2006-045424 978-0-8213-6633-2
People and power; electricity sector reform and the poor
in Europe and Central Asia.
Lampietti, Julian A. et al. (Directions in development)
The World Bank, ©2007 227 p. $25.00 (pa)
This volume presents the results of World Bank studies applying poverty
and social impact analysis to assess the distributional impact of power
sector reforms in Armenia, Georgia, Moldova, and Azerbaijan. The report
describes the methodology of the studies, presents the case studies, and
considers the implications for reform design.
HD9696 2006-029296 978-1-59059-721-7
In search of stupidity; over 20 years of high-tech
marketing disasters, 2d ed.
Chapman, Merrill R.
Apress, ©2006 373 p. $24.99 (pa)
Chapman has worked in the high-tech and software industries since 1978
in a number of capacities and currently writes, lectures, and consults
about various aspects of high-tech marketing. In this text, he explores the
world of high-tech companies and what many of these companies have
done that has caused them to fail. For the second edition, the author has
added helpful analyses and, where appropriate, checklists of specific
actions that companies can take to both avoid acting stupidly and to
improve their marketing strategies and sales.
HD9703 2005-013239 0-7546-0523-X
Alfred Herbert Ltd. and the British machine tool industry,
1887-1983.
Lloyd-Jones, Roger and M.J. Lewis. (Modern economic and social
history)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 352 p. $99.95
In 1900 Britain was amongst the world leaders in quality machine tools,
but by 1980 the entire industry had nearly disappeared. Lloyd-Jones and
Lewis (economic history and business history, respectively, Sheffield
Hallam U.) examine why such firms as Alfred Herbert Ltd. Of Coventry
lost their way. They examine the early years of the twentieth century,
when British machine tools were challenged by American upstarts,
through the rigors of wars and the ensuing growth of foreign compe-
tition in terms of technologies and intact infrastructures. They show how
the industry, and much of British manufacturing in general fared in
modernization, how new business structures and strategies failed, and
the collapse of Albert Herbert Ltd. Taking a fair piece of British industry
with it. This is a cautionary tale that should be read carefully in this
globalizing age.
HD9764 978-0-7748-1307-5
Capital and labour in the British Columbia forest
industry, 1934-74.
Hak, Gordon.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2007 258 p. $85.00
Adding to the existing histories of the vital industry in British Columbia,
Hak (history, Malaspina U.-College, British Columbia) primarily examines
companies, which were organized to further capitalist accumulation, and
unions, which represented the interest of workers. The history of the
forest industry from when it recovered from The Great Depression to its
structural decline in the 1970s, he says, was worked out in the context of
the ongoing interaction between capital and labor, which created and
sustained a web of economic, social, and ideological relations.
Distributed in the US by University of Washington Press.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HD9879 2006-010716 978-0-8203-2628-3 HE635 20069033579 1-894759-20-6
A common thread; labor, politics, and capital mobility in Sternwheelers and canyon cats; whitewater freighting on
the textile industry. the Upper Fraser.
English, Beth. (Politics and society in the modern South) Boudreau, Jack.
Univ. of Georgia Press, ©2006 236 p. $39.95 Caitlin Press, ©2006 256 p. $18.95 (pa)
Taking the Dwight Manufacturing Company of Chicopee, Massachusetts This book tells the story of men called “Canyon Cats” who worked on
as a case study, English (public and international affairs, Princeton U.) whitewater freighters in British Columbia, focusing on the Grand Canyon
analyzes capital mobility in the cotton textile industry. The company was of the Upper Fraser River during the period of 1862-1921. Boudreau
one of the first to open a subsidiary plant in the US South, in 1896. It draws from newspapers, books, magazines, and historical quarterlies to
gradually moved all of its operations from New England to the South, describe the navigation of waterways, specific steamers, those who were
and in 1959 was one of the first Southern cotton mills to close under lost, and the impact of the railroad. Boudreau is the author of Mountains,
pressure from post-war foreign competition. Campfires & Memories, Crazy Man’s Creek, and Grizzly Bear Mountain.
Distributed in the US by Graphic Arts Center Publishing.
HD9940 2006-928846 978-0-87846-708-2
Fashion show; Paris style. HE730 978-92-1-112699-0
Parmal, Pamela and Didier Grumbach. Review of maritime transport, 2006.
MFA Publications, ©2006 221 p. $65.00 (pa) Title main entry. Ed. by UNCTAD Secretariat. (United Nations con-
The director of the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston, notes that the ference on trade and development)
museum’s definition of art includes fashion. In conjunction with a MFA United Nations Publications, ©2006 147 p. $90.00
exhibition (11/12/06-3/18/07 per the MFA website), this lavishly illus- The annual report identifies the main developments in world maritime
trated book profiles ten designers showing in Paris today from such transport, and provides relevant statistical data. It focuses on maritime
houses as Chanel Haute Couture, Rochas, Valentino Haute Couture, and activities in developing countries, and highlight the correlation between
Yohji Yamamoto. Besides featuring creations ranging from classic to the development of global trade and maritime transport activities in
experimental, museum curator Parmal traces Paris’s history as a center general. The special chapter this year is on sub-Saharan Africa. No index
of style and the fashion industry since the 17th century with vintage illus- is provided.
trations. Grumbach is president of the Fédération Françcaise de la
Couture, Paris. HE2751 2006-271318 1-55046-403-5
Outbound trains; in the era before the mergers.
HD9980 2005-034528 978-0-470-09116-6 Boyd, Jim.
Services marketing management; a strategic perspective, Boston Mills Press, ©2005 192 p. $49.95
2d ed. Racing toward his 20th volume of railroad photographs, Boyd here
Kasper, Hans et al. focuses on the first generation of diesel from the early 1960s through the
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 554 p. $70.00 (pa) 1970s. He tours the US, with chapters on Chicago, the east, Dixie, and the
Kasper (services and retail management, Maastricht U., The Netherlands) west.
et al. provide an overview of services marketing for advanced under-
graduate and graduate students in the UK, Europe, and Australasia that HE3298 2006-029625 0-275-98564-4
focuses on guiding principles of market orientation, assets and capabil- Engines of change; the railroads that made India.
ities (not often in a textbook on services marketing), characteristics of Kerr, Ian J. (Moving throught history; transportation and society)
services, internationalization, and value. The broad perspective of the Praeger, ©2007 210 p. $49.95
book emphasizes the importance of relationships in addition to the rele- The Indian railroad system is among the most fascinating in the world,
vance of the marketing mix. Coverage in this revised edition extends to says Kerr, a retired history professor (U. of Manitoba), and he recounts
electronic services and more examples from the UK, Europe, and its birth and growth since the 1850s, with an emphasis on the impact it
Australasia. had on the political and economic development of the country. For the
first century, until 1947, it was a colonial railroad system designed to
HE148 2006-018478 978-0-7546-4882-6 serve the imperial occupation, and has continued to be shaped by the
Mobilities, networks, geographies. colonial legacy after independence and partition, he explains.
Larsen, Jonas et al. (Transport and society)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 165 p. $99.95 HE5611 2006-018125 978-1-4051-5270-9
This book by Larsen (Roskilde U., Denmark), Urry (Lancaster U., UK), Against automobility.
and Axhausen (Eidgenoessische Technische Hochschule, Switzerland) is a Title main entry. Ed. by Steffen Böhm et al. (Sociological review mono-
substantially revised version of the report “Social Networks and Future graphs)
Mobilities” commissioned by the UK Department for Transport and sub- Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 259 p. $34.95 (pa)
mitted in early 2006. The text aims to show “how contemporary tech- Far more than enough evidence has been presented over the decades to
nologies and practices of transport and communication are indict automobiles for many if not most of the environmental, health,
reconfiguring how people connect with places and each other, how they and social problems of modern society. So the social scientists and liter-
socialize with and relate to friends, workmates and family members, and ature scholars here turn instead to the concept that underlies it. They
how the make new contacts often at a distance.” In other words, it seeks explore automobility as a set of political institutions and practices, an ide-
to insert the “social” into transport research and “travel” into the social ological or discursive formation, and a phenomenology that together seek
sciences to the mutual benefit of both. The report identifies five interde- to legitimize the dominance of automobiles in society. The 13 papers are
pendent mobilities—physical travel of people, physical movement of from a September 2002 conference at Keele University.
objects, mediated imaginative travel, virtual travel on the Internet, and
communicative person-to-person travel—and relate them to the concept of HE5903 2006-009520 978-1-57675-413-9
“network capital” of vehicles, communication devices, and so on in order
Changing how the world does business; FedEx’s
to analyze how social networks are spatially distributed.
incredible journey to success; the inside story.
HE336 2006-015247 978-0-7425-5112-1 Frock, Roger.
Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2006 239 p. $27.95
The road more traveled; why the congestion crisis matters
more than you think, and what we can do about it. The rise of FedEx from a fledgling start-up with an innovative idea to a
Balaker, Ted and Sam Staley. company with annual revenues of $30 billion is a model of entrepre-
neurial success against the odds. In this memoir, Frock (a member of the
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 186 p. $24.95 (pa)
company’s first management team) describes how the leaders and
Fellows with the Reason Foundation, a nonprofit thinktank based in Los employees of FedEx pulled together in the early years to overcome a
Angeles, are not among those who think that traffic congestion on U.S. series of legal, financial, and operational crises. He also recounts the
roads is inevitable. Not do they favor the alternatives of public transit and company’s development into a mature organization and analyzes its cor-
carpool lanes. Drawing on national and international experiences, they porate culture.
advocate for such “congestion busters” as building more highways, high-
occupancy toll lanes, and telecommuting. Staley also teaches urban eco-
nomics at the U. of Dayton.

Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –126–

HE7631 0-8230-5936-7
World radio TV handbook; the directory of global
broadcasting 2006, 60th anniversary ed.
Title main entry.
Billboard Books, ©2006 704 p. $29.95 (pa)
Organized by country, this directory lists the name, address, telephone
number, website, and frequency of national radio stations throughout the
world and the schedule of international stations transmitting in different
languages throughout the day. The opening articles in the 60th edition
review new receivers and update digital radio and HF broadcast
reception conditions.
HE8085 2005-052822 1-84376-806-2
Telecommunications policy-making in the European
Union.
Goodman, Joseph W.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 299 p. $120.00
Goodman (German and European studies, Georgetown U.) traces the
development of a European Union telecommunications policy from 1957
to 2003. Coverage includes theoretical and historical background, early
involvement by the European Commission, analysis of the Commission’s
two-pronged strategy of liberalization and harmonization as set forth in
its 1987 Green Paper on Telecommunications, the development the new
2003 electronic communications framework, and wider implications of
the study. The text is based on six years of research conducted while the
author was a doctoral student at Oxford U., including extensive archival
research and 150-plus interviews with policy makers, user interest
groups, national regulators and government officials, telecommunica-
tions operators, and independent consulting firms. For those actively
involved or interested in the regulatory environment of the European
telecommunications sector, and students of European integration.
HE8697 2006-008875 0-299-21870-8
9XM talking; WHA Radio and the Wisconsin idea.
Davidson, Randall.
U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 405 p. $34.95
Davidson, a Wisconsin Public Radio news producer and anchor, provides
a history of the University of Wisconsin radio station WHA, the affiliated
state-owned station WLBL, and Wisconsin Public Radio. He traces its pro-
gramming and broadcasts from the 1900s to 1978, with a brief chapter
up to today. He uses archival material such as newspapers and the U. of
Wisconsin Press Bulletin as a basis for his study. In addition to the
general index, a station index is included.
HE8700 2005-037889 0-8160-6312-5
Career opportunities in television and cable.
Taylor, Allan et al.
Ferguson Publishing, ©2007 383 p. $49.50
Aimed at students preparing to enter the job market as well as profes-
sionals considering a career change, this volume presents current infor-
mation on 100 job opportunities in the network and cable television
industries. It is organized into 13 sections, corresponding to general areas
of employment (i.e., advertising, directing, engineering, news, per-
forming, and writing). Each entry contains detailed information on the
duties, salary ranges, and prerequisites associated with a particular job.
An overview of trends within the industry is provided in the intro-
duction.
HE8700 2006-920423 978-0-7618-3440-3
Instant nationalism; McArabism, al-Jazeera and
transnational media in the Arab world.
Rinnawi, Khalil.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 196 p. $29.95 (pa)
The advent of a new media landscape in the Arab world, a landscape
that includes the Internet, the transnational satellite news station Al
Jazeera, and other challenges to the old state-run monopolistic medias, is
described by Rinnawi (behavioral science, College of Management in Tel-
Aviv, Israel) as a “major seismic movement” prompting a resurgence in
pan-Arabism. In this book, he analyzes these developments and assesses
their likely social and political implications.
–127–
HF395 978-90-04-15633-3
Money, markets and trade in late medieval Europe; essays
in honour of John H.A. Munro.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lawrin Armstrong et al. (Later medieval
Europe; v.1)
BRILL, ©2007 648 p. $201.00
To mark Munro’s retirement from teaching economics and Medieval
studies at the University of Toronto, colleagues and former students con-
vened an international workshop there in March of 2004 to talk about
his favorite topics. The 19 essays—not precisely the ones presented—
discuss money and ethics, taxation and revenue, expenditure and war,
land and labor, market integration, long- distance trade and markets,
and regional and local markets. Among topics perhaps particularly
germane to today are calculating profits and losses during the Hundred
Years War, Egyptian specie markets and the international gold crisis of
the early 15th century, and cultivating and consuming medieval Lübeck’s
gardens.
HF486 2006-283946 978-0-7453-2523-1
The corporation that changed the world; how the East
India Company shaped the modern multinational.
Robins, Nick.
Pluto Press, ©2006 218 p. $24.95 (pa)
The English East India Company, which came to economically rule over
much of India during its 275-year existence, paralleled today’s corpora-
tions in many important ways, according to the author, “with the
Company outstripping Wal-Mart in terms of market power, Enron for cor-
ruption and Union Carbide for human devastation.” His focus in this
history of the Company is on its sorry social record and on the critics
who sought to hold it accountable, including figures such as Adam
Smith, Edmund Burke, and British government officials.
HF1008 2006-026199 978-0-313-33793-2
Anatomy of a business; what it is, what it does, and how
it works.
Galbraith, Sasha.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 307 p. $75.00
This book focuses on the basics of business for high school and under-
graduate students and serves as an introduction to the principles behind
strategy, leadership, finance and accounting, marketing, sales, man-
agement of information systems, human resources, the supply chain,
research and development, and other staff functions, such as the legal
department and investor relations. Throughout the book, sections on the
everyday experiences of executives are provided. The bibliography is
annotated. Galbraith works at a consulting firm managing marketing,
information technology, contract negotiations, human resources, and
accounting functions.
HF1008 978-92-1-112698-3
Trade and development report 2006; proceedings.
United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (2006: Geneva,
Switzerland).
United Nations Publications, ©2006 237 p. $50.00 (pa)
With an emphasis on the implications for developing countries, this
report from the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development
(UNCTAD) assesses the performance of the world economy in the areas
of trade and development. Topics include (for example) the systemic char-
acter of global imbalances, the emergence of the “Washington
Consensus,” and the role of foreign direct investment. Particular attention
is paid to policies that support local ownership, the creative forces of
markets, and the entrepreneurial dimension of investment. The volume
is not indexed.
HF1102 2005-052825 1-84542-179-5
International entrepreneurship education; issues and
newness.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alain Fayolle and Heinz Klandt.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 306 p. $120.00
Fayolle (EM Lyon and CERAG Laboratory, France; Solvay Business School,
Belgium) and Klandt (European Business School, Germany) present a col-
lection of essays chosen from the proceedings of the Internationalizing
Entrepreneurship Education and Training conference held in Grenoble in
2003. Thematically they offer a challenge to the knowledge conventions,
the context, the location and pedagogy of entrepreneurship education.
Following an introductory chapter proposing and discussing paradig-
matic changes in the field, the remaining 14 selections focus on key
issues in relation to definitional, evaluative and institutional questions;
methodological aspects approached through different contexts; and dif-
fusing and promoting entrepreneurial culture and developing entrepre-
neurial potential.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF1106 2005-055167 0-8204-7764-8
Intercultural learning as identity negotiation.
Weber, Susanne. (Berufliche Bildung in Wandel; bd.8)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2005 302 p. $57.95 (pa)
Weber’s (philosophy, Humboldt U., Berlin) study tackles intercultural
learning and development from the viewpoint of economics and business
education. She offers a new, more holistical framework for intercultural
learning and development, based primarily on Engeström’s Socio-cultural
and Historical Activity Theory and Ting-Toomey’s mindful identity negoti-
ation approach. The framework is tested for intervention purposes and
empirically evaluated by means of a design experiment. For professors,
students, and professional practitioners in educational research or prac-
tical course design and implementation in various fields, or in studies on
diversity and modern language teaching. No subject index.
HF1352 2005-051895 1-84542-579-0
Globalisation and the Asia-Pacific; contested perspective
and diverse experiences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Iyanatul Islam and Moazzem Hossain.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 233 p. $100.00
Islam (international business, Griffith University, Australia) and Hossain
(economics, Griffith University) collect essays on the globalization expe-
riences of Australia, China, India, and Sri Lanka. Writing in a non-tech-
nical but rigorous fashion, academics and practitioners from national
governments and international organizations look at disagreements
among economists on the benefits and costs of globalization, and offer
a critique of macroeconomic conservatism. They anchor their critique in
regional- and country- specific circumstances. Issues discussed range
from political economy to industry case studies, with an emphasis on
socio-economic disparities in the age of globalization.
HF1359 2006-026474 978-0-7494-4871-4
Global remix; the fight for competitive advantage.
Scase, Richard.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2007 180 p. $29.95
In this accessible overview of business trends noted forecaster and
strategist Scase analyzes macroeconomic trends, most notably global-
ization, to find how they will affect the life of the corporation and indi-
viduals’ private and corporate lives over the next 20 years. He sticks to
the positive in describing the 2 billion potential customers of western
goods and services in the east, the ongoing war for talent and search for
globally integrated enterprise, the rising golden age of the entrepreneur,
opportunities for women, the transition from management to leadership,
the new demographics and the new market segments that go with them,
the politics of terror and counter-terror in business, and the ways corpo-
rations can apply creativity, innovation and reinvention to become part
of the boom.
HF1359 2005-037243 0-7619-3490-1
Tectonic shift; the geoeconomic realignment of globalizing
markets.
Sheth, Jagdish N. and Rajendra S. Sisodia.
Response Books, ©2006 350 p. $31.95
Sheth (marketing, Emory U.) and Sisodia (marketing, Bentley College)
argue that forces already in place will cause regionalization to supplant
globalization, with the European Union expanding both east and south,
a Chinese-led Asian bloc expanding to include a united Korea as well as
Australia and New Zealand, a North and South America uniting under
the revived Free Trade area of the Americas (FTAA) treaty and joined by
the UK, and South Asia creating free trade area that will eventually join
the FTAA. To build their case they describe the realities of globalization,
including resistance to American dominance, trade as the engine of
growth in an otherwise stabilized economy, competition between blocs,
realignment of industrial policy and the renewal of infrastructure, trade
and investment, the rationalization for a domestic industry, and potential
obstacles to this realignment of markets. Response Books is an imprint
of Sage India.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF1379 2006-027128 978-1-904838-09-8
Global diversity; winning customers and engaging
employees within world markets.
Gundling, Ernest and Anita Zanchettin.
Nicholas Brealey Publishing, ©2007 328 p. $35.00
Gundling (Haas School of Business, U. of California, Berkeley) and
Zanchettin, who both work in intercultural management consulting,
describe differences between and within cultures in countries around the
globe so that managers, expatriates, organizational leaders, and diversity
professionals can better work with these countries. While exploring the
topic of diversity, the authors also offer a model of inclusion for organi-
zations. Chapters individually discuss diversity and culture in China,
Egypt, India, Japan, Mexico, Russia, the UK, and the US, and variables
such as socioeconomic status, language, educational and family back-
ground, gender, religion, race and ethnicity, age, and regional origin.
Authors of chapters are either natives of the country or have lived there
for many years, and work for the same consulting firm as Gundling and
Zanchettin.
HF1379 2005-037167 0-7656-1780-3
International business; theory and practice, 2d ed.
Ajami, Riad A. et al.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2006 548 p. $115.95
This textbook provides an overview of international business teaching as
a balance between international business environments and the func-
tional area knowledge of international finance, international accounting,
and international management. The first section addresses the scope of
international business and multinational corporations. Presenting the
institutional framework of economic theories and global strategies, the
second section includes discussions of classical and modern theories of
economic development. Section three evaluates the environmental con-
straints in international business and section four explains the functional
operations aspect of multinational corporate activities. The final section
covers social and ethical issues and concludes with a discussion of future
trends. The text includes a section of case studies with a European focus.
HF1379 2005-057449 1-84376-503-9
International economics and confusing politics.
Robertson, David.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 230 p. $100.00
Robertson (U. of Melbourne, Australia) reviews the current politics of
neoliberal globalization, defending it against critics he equates to Nazis
and communists hiding “behind the cover of civil society” and entangled
with anarchists and other anti-capitalists purportedly committed to vio-
lence and destruction. He discusses the politics of the World Trade
Organization and the International Monetary Fund, recognizing some
national government criticisms as legitimate; reviews the growth of
regional economic agreements; defends conditionalities in foreign aid
provision; and dismisses environmental concerns about current eco-
nomic institutional frameworks.
HF1379 2006-044369 978-0-7656-1803-0
International trade and economic growth.
Van den Berg, Hendrik and Joshua J. Lewer.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 305 p. $32.95 (pa)
Van den Berg (economics, U. of Nebraska-Lincoln) and Lewer (banking,
West Texas A&M U.) believe that economists can make a better case for
free trade if they go beyond static models trade such as the Heckscher-
Ohlin model to dynamic models that link international trade and eco-
nomic growth over time. They offer this text as a beginning effort ana-
lyzing trade in terms of the Solow growth model and the process of
creative destruction and presenting arguments on how trade influences
technological progress and the growth of physical and human capital
stock.
–128–
HF1385 2006-049111 978-0-8213-6496-3
Reforming agricultural trade for developing countries; v.1:
Key issues for a pro-development outcome of the Doha
Round.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alex F. McCalla and John Nash. (Agriculture
and rural development)
The World Bank, ©2007 308 p. $45.00 (pa)
McCalla (emeritus, agricultural and resource economics, U. of California
at Davis) and Nash (adviser or trade, agriculture, and rural development
at the World Bank) present revised versions of ten papers presented at
the June 2002 workshop, “The Developing Countries, Agricultural Trade,
and the WTO,” sponsored by the International Agricultural Trade
Research Consortium, the World Bank, and Agriculture and Agri-Food
Canada, in the first of a two-volume work. The papers in this volume
explore major agricultural trade issues raised during the World Trade
Organization’s Doha Round of negotiations, including the impact of agri-
cultural support policies on developing countries, developing country
experience with the Uruguay Round Agreement, coalition and alliance
strategies among developing countries in the Doha negotiations, domestic
management of price risk in the context of trade reform in the devel-
oping world, implications of food import regulations and market access
for developing countries, India’s experience with managing import com-
petition following trade liberalization, and Latin American experiences
with agricultural trade liberalization. The second volume explores
methods of modeling trade reform.
HF1385 2006-049111 978-0-8213-6716-2
Reforming agricultural trade for developing countries; v.2:
Quantifying the impact of multilateral trade reform.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alex F. McCalla and John Nash. (Agriculture
and rural development)
The World Bank, ©2007 261 p. $45.00 (pa)
McCalla (emeritus, agricultural and resource economics, U. of California
at Davis) and Nash (adviser or trade, agriculture, and rural development
at the World Bank) present revised versions of eight papers presented at
the June 2002 workshop, “The Developing Countries, Agricultural Trade,
and the WTO,” sponsored by the International Agricultural Trade
Research Consortium, the World Bank, and Agriculture and Agri-Food
Canada, in the second of a two-volume work. This volume discusses
methods of quantifying and modeling agricultural trade reform. Topics
include synthesizing empirical studies of WTO agricultural trade reform;
projecting the effects of liberalization on trade, prices, and economic ben-
efits; possible impacts of special WTO provisions for developing coun-
tries, and medium term impacts of trade liberalization on Organization
for Economic Co-operation and Development countries and on the food
security of nonmember countries. The first volume explores overarching
agricultural trade issues raised during the World Trade Organization’s
Doha Round of negotiations.
HF1413 978-0-7165-2839-5
The blame game; rethinking Ireland’s sustainable
development and environment performance.
Flynn, Brendan. (Justice in controversy series)
Irish Academic Press, ©2007 278 p. $75.00
Is the phrase “ecological modernization” an oxymoron? Not according to
Flynn (political science and sociology, National U. of Ireland, Galway),
who not only describes how new technologies and methods can produce
sustainability in theory but also how they can be applied in practice. He
argues for moving beyond blame in the uninspired performance of
Ireland’s environmental protection sector during the rise of the “Celtic
Tiger,” which produced development and profits but did not seem to
support them well with efforts to develop environmentally responsible
infrastructures. He examines the history of Irish environmental policy,
the weak points in its institutions, instruments and implementation. He
proposes a reform agenda that will make up for lost time as well as move
toward true sustainability without sacrificing the advances made so far
in bringing Ireland toward the top of the European Union in devel-
opment and growth. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–129–
HF1413 2006-009992 978-1-57075-669-6
The true cost of low prices; the violence of globalization.
Gallagher, Vincent A.
Orbis Books, ©2006 166 p. $15.00 (pa)
Gallagher (a lecturer on globalization at the Romero Center, a Catholic
“Retreat and Social Justice Center” in East Camden, New Jersey) offers a
primer on the institutional violence wrought by neoliberal globalization
around the world. He explains the operations of the political, economic,
legal, and military institutions that together make up the neoliberal
global order, later describing their effects on the world’s poor and the
most vulnerable including children forced to work in sweatshop condi-
tions and worse and women trafficked as sexual slaves. Finally, he
presents solutions rooted in Catholic liberation theology.
HF1418 2006-021198 978-92-808-1132-2
Trade and investment rule-making; the role of regional
and bilateral agreements.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Woolcock.
United Nations University Pr., ©2006 265 p. $36.00 (pa)
This volume examines interactions between rule-making in bilateral or
regional trade agreements and the wider multilateral level of the World
Trade Organization in a series of horizontal case studies that focus on
different policy areas. By way of introduction, editor Woolcock (interna-
tional relations, London School of Economics, UK) lays out the broad
assumptions of the text—rule-making and market access are inextricably
linked, rule-making is the product of a multilevel process, and the inter-
action of these levels are and will be of central importance to the future
of international trade and investment regimes—and describes the ana-
lytical approach of the studies, which is to break down rule-making into
component elements of coverage, principles, transparency, substantive
measures, cooperation, regulatory “safeguard,” and implementation. The
policy areas examined by the studies include agricultural trade, sanitary
and phytosanitary measures, preferential rules of origin, public pro-
curement, trade in telecommunications services, intellectual property,
and international investment rules.
HF1480 2006-012571 978-0-7546-4177-3
Bilateral ecopolitics; continuity and change in Canadian-
American environmental relations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Philippe Le Prestre and Peter Stoett. (Global
environmental governance)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 286 p. $99.95
Sixteen academics from Canada and the U.S. contribute 13 chapters
examining Canadian-American environmental relations. A key theme of
the text is the need to study the new dimensions and interdependent
nature of the evolving relationship between the two countries and to rec-
ognize that, for Canadians and Americans alike, ecopolitics is increas-
ingly less national and must be considered continental in scope. The text
offers readers updated analyses of several of the institutional and issue-
based ecopolitical dilemmas affecting policymakers and citizens of both
countries, which have been further complicated by trade liberalization
and the potential contradictions between trade and the environmental
international agenda. For students and academics in global governance,
U.S.-Canadian foreign policy and environmental policy.
HF1584 2005-029828 1-905050-06-2
Doing business with Saudi Arabia, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony Shoult.
GMB Publishing, ©2006 623 p. $143.00
Part of the Global Market Briefing series, this book provides guidance to
foreign investors and other interested parties on the commercial and
business opportunities to be realized in Saudi Arabia. Editor Shoult (ASA
consulting, “a UK-based independent marketing- focused consultancy spe-
cializing in the Middle East region”) adheres to the standard layout of
the series, presenting 53 chapters in sections dealing with country back-
ground; overview of the economy and investment; the legal framework
and business regulation; finance, accountancy, and taxation; marketing
and promotion; the business environment (employment issues, working
conditions, business culture, and business practicalities); key sectors of
trade and investment; and nine profiles of leading Saudi companies. Five
appendices are presented covering further sources of information,
business sources, leading companies and organizations, details of leading
companies, and contributor contact details.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF1604 2006-014209 0-13-228128-7
The coming China wars; where they will be fought and
how they will be won.
Navarro, Peter.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2007 263 p. $24.99
Navarro (Paul Merage School of Business, U. of California at Irvine)
argues that the rise of China is the greatest threat to world peace and
prosperity today. In making this argument, he identifies eight “wars”
China is engaged in: destroying global intellectual property regimes,
operating as a major banking hub for drug money laundering,
despoiling the environment with toxic industrial emissions, working with
dictators around the world in order to satisfy their need for oil, acting as
a relentless imperial creditor nation, endangering the welfare and pros-
perity of lower Mekong River countries through the reconstruction of
massive dams, failing to manage its own internal political stability, and
threatening to unleash HIV/AIDS and other disease epidemics upon its
own population and the rest of the world. His goal in this work is to
identify the underlying economic roots of all of these “wars” in order to
point the way towards solutions.
HF1611 2006-029062 978-0-8213-6835-0
Africa’s silk road; China and India’s new economic
frontier.
Broadman, Harry G.
The World Bank, ©2007 391 p. $20.00 (pa)
The growing economies of China and India are at the center of an
explosion of African-Asian trade and investment, according to this study,
which analyzes firm-level data from a large World Bank quantitative
study and from business cases studies in Ghana, Senegal, South Africa,
and Tanzania in order to analyze the pattern and performance of trade
and investment flows and the impacts on Africa of these growing trade
and investment relations with China and India. In exploring these issues,
the report focuses on four key factors of trade and investment: “at-the-
border” policies such as tariffs, investment policy regimes, and trade
agreements; domestic market conditions, including the business envi-
ronment, market institutions, and supply constraints; “between-the-
border” factors such as logistical and transport regimes, information
about market opportunities, technical standards, and migration; and
complementarities between investment and trade.
HF1966 2006-023570 0-88132-389-6
Trade relations between Colombia and the United States.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey J. Schott. (Policy analysis 79, August
2006)
Peterson Inst. Int’l Economics, ©2006 205 p. $21.95 (pa)
Schott (Institute for International Economics) and his contributors
examine current trade relations between US and Colombia and analyzes
the likely impact of the proposed free trade agreement between the two
countries, which may be congressionally ratified by the end of November
2006. Opening chapters examine bilateral trade and investment in terms
of areas of trade complementarities and trade frictions, examine the
“readiness” of Colombia for a free trade agreement in terms of indicators
of economic and political stability, and quantitatively analyze trade and
welfare impacts on both countries using applied general equilibrium and
gravity models. Three chapters focus on key issues of contention: agri-
culture, labor, and intellectual property rights. The concluding chapter
reviews the implications for broader hemispheric trade integration.
HF2330 2006-027591 0-88132-395-0
Sustaining reform with a US-Pakistan free trade
agreement.
Hufbauer, Gary Clyde and Shahid Javed Burki. (Policy analyses in inter-
national economics, v.80, October 2006)
Peterson Inst. Int’l Economics, ©2006 295 p. $18.00 (pa)
Huffbauer (a former professor of international finance diplomacy at
Georgetown U. and former US Treasury official) and Burki (a former
finance minister of Pakistan) advocate for the establishment of a bilateral
US-Pakistan free trade agreement, arguing that it could promote eco-
nomic reform and thereby strengthen political ties between the US and
the military dictatorship of Pervez Musharraf. Following a brief dis-
cussion of the historical context and current conditions influencing the
negotiation of an agreement, they discuss the possible form of the
agreement in the areas of agricultural market access, textiles and
clothing, other manufactures, environmental and labor issues, gov-
ernment procurement, and investment and services. They also present
estimates of such an agreement’s effects using gravity and computable
general equilibrium models.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF3581 2-503-51580-0
Buyers & sellers; retail circuits and practices in medieval
and early modern Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bruno Blondé et al. (Studies in European
urban history, 9)
Brepols Publishers, ©2006 351 p. $86.00 (pa)
Organized by Centre for Urban History at the Belgium’s U. of Antwerp,
a November 2003 conference brought together urban historians, social
historians, and art historians in order to examine the comparative history
of retail consumerism in Europe in the medieval and early modern eras.
According to the editors (of the U. of Antwerp and the UK’s U. of
Northampton), the major contributions of the conference consisted of its
comparative attention to long-term trends and changes and the will-
ingness of participants to challenge orthodoxies of earlier retail histori-
ography. Here, 17 papers from the conference discuss issues of exchange,
shopping behavior, social interactions, gender, and physical space.
Geographic focus is largely centered on England, Italy, and the
Netherlands. Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co.
HF3752 978-0-9713938-7-5
Trade, interdependence, and security.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ashley J. Tellis and Michael Wills. (Strategic
Asia 2006-07; v.6)
Natl. Bureau of Asian Research, ©2006 433 p. $24.95 (pa)
The editors (of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace and the
National Bureau of Asian Research) present the sixth in a series of
annual reports analyzing the present and considering the near future of
the Asian strategic environment from the perspective of US government
interests. Chapters discuss the broad trends of economic trade in the
region and their implications for regional stability; US economic debt and
its Asian super-creditors; Chinese economic trade as a constraint on mil-
itary interventionism; Japan’s economic and security challenges; South
Korea’s policy of deepening interdependence with North Korea; Russia’s
economic and security role in Asia; trade, energy, and security in Central
Asia; South Asian economic integration; strategic dimensions of eco-
nomic interdependence in Southeast Asia; the relationship between eco-
nomic growth and political reform in China; and political and economic
risks of pandemic disease. An appendix presents some statistical indi-
cators relevant to the issues mentioned above.
HF3788 2006-310979 81-215-1160-7
India’s overland trade with Central Asia and Persia
during the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries.
Chawla, Joginder K.
Munshiram Manoharlal Pub., ©2006 177 p. $31.50
Chawla (history of medieval India, U. of Delhi, India) describes the
overland trading activities conducted between India, Central Asia, and
Persia in the 13th and 14th centuries. After presenting some brief his-
torical and geographic background, he describes the networks of towns
important to the trading routes, identifies the important items of import
and export, examines the types of merchants and guilds involved in
trade, discusses modes of travel and transportation of goods, and pro-
vides a portrait of mediums of exchange and methods of payment.
Distributed in the US by South Asia Books.
HF3800 2006-023948 978-0-7391-1655-5
Trade and development in a globalized world; the unfair
trade problem in U.S.-Thai trade relations.
Rothgeb, John M. and Benjamas Chinapandhu.
Lexington Books, ©2007 125 p. $55.00
Rothgeb (political science, Miami U., Oxford, Ohio) and Chinapandhu
(political science, Ramkhamhaeng U., Bangkok, Thailand) present a case
study of U.S.-Thai trade relations to examine how government officials
and private industry representatives from a developing country handle
problems associated with the antidumping and antisubsidy rules and
procedures they confront in their largest export market and at the World
Trade Organization. The study offers insights into the effects of unfair
trade regulations on international development and on power in the
current international system. For students, scholars, and policymakers in
international relations and economics.
–130–
HF5381 2006-026414 0-7494-4819-9
Career, aptitude & selection tests; match your IQ,
personality & abilities to your ideal career, 2d ed.
Barrett, Jim.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 186 p. $17.95 (pa)
This resource for those leaving school and entering the job market con-
tains a variety of self-assessment tests and questionnaires designed to
reveal aptitudes, motivations, and personality traits. Psychologist and
consultant Barrett offers guidelines for taking and interpreting each test.
In the final section, he takes the reader through a profile matching
process aimed at identifying good matches between individual charac-
teristics revealed by the tests and hundreds of occupations.
HF5381 2006-018264 0-7494-4564-5
From new recruit to high flyer; no-nonsense advice on
how to fast track your career.
Karseras, Hugh.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 218 p. $17.95 (pa)
An associate director at Barclays Capital describes the attitude, skills, and
politics necessary to achieve success as a young executive fresh out of
business school. Based on surveys with executives, the guide suggests tips
for performing quantitative analysis, communicating in the business
environment, managing projects, finding mentors, and building a
political network. No index or bibliography is provided.
HF5382 2006-011525 978-1-59357-315-7
40 best fields for your career.
Farr, Michael and Laurence Shatkin. (JIST’s best jobs series)
JIST Publishing, ©2006 440 p. $16.95 (pa)
For educators, counselors, and those making career decisions, this guide
lists careers in fields based on the best combination of earnings, growth
rate, and expected expansion. Drawn from the US Department of Labor’s
Career Guide to Industries, 2006-2007 edition, and other government
sources, the data also lists fields for workers age 16-24 or over 55, part-
time or self-employed workers, women, and men. Forty-five fields are
then described, with information on earnings, projected growth, type of
work, conditions, skills and abilities required, types of employers, related
occupations, education and training, advancement, and other factors.
Jobs range from those in manufacturing and trades to information and
professional services and government organizations. Appendices list
fields by skills, abilities, and work-related values. Farr is the author of
several books on career and job search topics, and Shatkin, also an
author of career books, has worked in the career information field.
HF5382 95004929 0-02-866047-1
Career information center, 9th ed; 13v.
Title main entry.
Gale Group, ©2007 2421 p. $415.00 (pa)
Handy for the college or public library’s reference shelf, this 13-volume
set presents the tasks involved, skills required, and potential employment
possibilities for jobs in the U.S. today. The volumes are organized the-
matically, allowing the reader to browse among related jobs in a given
field. Volume topics include agribusiness, environment, communications,
computers, construction, engineering, health, hospitality, manufacturing,
and transportation. Each volume begins with an essay providing an
overview of the fields it contains and a lengthy section of practical advice
on how to gain the education and access to get a job in one, with tips on
how to write a cover letter, fill out an application, and other basic skills.
The sections on individual professions contain a description of the job,
education required, employment outlook, working conditions, earnings
and benefits, and a list of organizations to contact for more information.
Volume 13 contains essays on employment trends and a comprehensive
index.
We're always delighted to hear from our readers.
Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.
–131–
HF5382 2005-035411 978-0-8160-6130-3
Ferguson career resource guide for women and
minorities; 2v.
Title main entry.
Ferguson Publishing, ©2006 760 p. $125.00
For grades nine and up, this two-volume set serves as a resource for
career information for women and minorities. It lists organizations, col-
leges, foundations, and publications that promote career and educational
advancement. Each volume contains brief essays and related resources
on topics such as childcare, mentors and role models, women’s colleges,
equal education and employment, sexual harassment, nontraditional
careers, entrepreneurship, the arts, affirmative action, and workplace
diversity. This is followed by a directory containing contact information
and descriptions of financial aid programs, professional and other organ-
izations, postsecondary institutions, and additional resources, such as
youth programs, internships, minority studies and women’s studies pro-
grams, and online resources. The two volumes are divided between
resources for women, in the first, and minorities, in the second. Indexes
are arranged by institution and financial aid, state, academic topic, and
minority topic.
HF5382 2006-012461 978-1-59357-324-9
The ultimate job search; intelligent strategies to get the
right job fast.
Beatty, Richard H.
JIST Publishing, ©2006 307 p. $16.95 (pa)
Beatty, a corporate consultant, helps readers formulate a job search
strategy, from writing a resume to conducting print, mail, and Internet
job search methods, and gives advice on evaluating and accepting or
declining job offers, negotiating a salary, and succeeding in a new
position. The book includes self-assessment instruments on areas such as
preferred tasks, motivation, skills, and ideal work environment, plus
checklists, sample resumes, and chapter summaries.
HF5384 2006-022461 0-275-98801-5
The mid-career success guide; planning for the second
half of your working life.
Power, Sally J.
Praeger, ©2006 200 p. $39.95
Aimed at white collar workers in the middle years of their career paths,
this text offers practical advice for achieving success in today’s rapidly
changing employment environment. Power (management, U. of St.
Thomas) describes an innovative approach to career management that
focuses on the continual development of an individual’s portfolio of
skills. This model is further illustrated with a wealth of real-life examples
and interactive exercises.
HF5385 2006-27768 978-0-7619-3528-5
Mentoring; a practitioner’s guide to touching lives.
Guptan, Sunil Unny.
Response Books, ©2006 214 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this accessible guide, consultant Guptan explains how to be a suc-
cessful mentor to others in any type of organization. Fictionalized cases
are used as examples throughout. Some of the topics addressed include
key mentoring skills, ethical considerations, and gender issues. A former
journalist, Guptan is the founder of Touching Lives, an organization
working in the areas of life strategies, humanizing organizations, and
emotional health. Response Books is an imprint of Sage India.
HF5386 2005-052090 1-84376-995-6
Handbook of organizational politics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eran Vigoda-Gadot and Amos Drory.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 370 p. $195.00
Nineteen chapters are presented by Vigoda-Gadot (organizational
behavior and public administration, U. of Haifa, Israel) and Drory (orga-
nizational behavior, Ben-Gurion U. of the Negev, Israel) with the intention
of providing a broad perspective on recent work studying organizational
politic, “the fascinating phenomenon of power, influence and politics in
modern worksites. The papers are presented in sections that the editors
see as embodying the core areas of research in the field: the individual’s
viewpoint; values issues including ethics, justice, and trust; emotions and
stress; systems and performance analysis; and professional perspectives
on organizational politics.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF5386 2006-008115 978-0-470-04548-0
Meet & grow rich; how to easily create and operate your
own “mastermind” group for health, wealth, and more.
Vitale, Joe and Bill Hibbler.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 221 p. $24.95
Vitale and Hibbler, marketing consultants, show how to create a group
of like-minded individuals to support and inspire one another to achieve
wealth and financial freedom. They look at the history and dynamics of
“mastermind groups,” and give advice on starting and running such
groups in person and long-distance. In the second half of the book, they
assemble short chapters by 16 additional contributors with tips on facil-
itating meetings and creating mastermind groups for musicians, Internet
marketers, software developers, and Christians.
HF5386 2006-013081 0-13-228751-X
Success built to last; creating a life that matters.
Porras, Jerry et al.
Wharton School Publishing, ©2006 278 p. $22.99
Porras (organizational behavior, emeritus, Stanford Graduate School of
Business), author of the best-selling Built to Last: Successful Habits of
Visionary Companies, joins Stewart Emery, one of the fathers of the
human potential movement (and the first CEO of est), and Mark
Thompson, an executive coach, to challenge conventional wisdom about
success. Drawing on conversations with billionaires, Nobel laureates, and
celebrities, as well as spiritual and political leaders, they show how to
discover a passion make it the center of one’s career and life.
HF5387 2006-011640 978-1-4129-0538-1
Ethics in the workplace; tools and tactics for
organizational transformation.
Johnson, Craig E.
Sage Publications, ©2007 335 p. $79.95
Bringing together material from the fields of philosophy, management,
moral psychology, communications, and social psychology, Johnson
(George Fox U.) addresses the issue of workplace ethics at successive
levels of organizational behavior, thus moving from individual motiva-
tions and decision-making and personal moral development, through
interpersonal communication, questions of power and influence, and
ethical dilemmas of teams and leadership roles, to the ethics of organi-
zational systems. Written to be broadly accessible, each chapter includes
2 cases and self-assessment tools related to important skills or concepts.
HF5387 2006-920828 978-0-7618-3428-1
Multicultural business ethics and global managerial moral
reasoning.
Parhizgar, Kamal Dean and Robert Parhizgar.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 701 p. $85.00 (pa)
Father and son team Kamal and Robert Parhizgar offer scholars and stu-
dents of global business a reference text on ethics and morality in multi-
national business. Coverage includes an overview of business ethics;
morality, ethicality, and legality in business transactions; micro-level
approaches to moral theories; macro-level social approaches to ethical
theories; issues between home and host countries; multicultural ethics
and business knowledge management; moral virtues, ethical values, and
the corporate stakeholders’ convictions; managerial trust, rights, and
duties; ethical issues concerning econo-political ideologies; Global Social
Businesses Darwinism; theories of justice, law, and social contracts
between business and society; workplace issues; capital flight movements
and money laundering; and professional integrity, whistle blowing, and
organizational loyalty. Kamal Dean Parhizgar teaches management at
Texas A&M International U.; his son, Robert Parhizgar, is a medical
student at Texas Tech U.
HF5387 2006-009526 0-7546-4750-1
Whistleblowing and organizational social responsibility; a
global assessment.
Vandekerckhove, Wim. (Corporate social responsibility series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 344 p. $99.95
Vandekerckhove (Center for Ethics and Value Inquiry, U. of Ghent)
examines the implications of how and why whistleblower policies were
created in various contexts and countries between 1970, when the term
“whistleblower” was popularized by Ralph Nader’s activism, and 2005,
by which time dozens of countries had established or were developing
whistleblower legislation. Using an explicitly described research and
assessment methodology, the author investigates and compares what
goes on when such policies are created, and whether the process itself
sabotages ethical goals. He looks at implications for the whistleblower,
the accused organization, and the recipient of the complaint and
concludes with recommended strategies for reform. Chapter 3 was
previously published in the Journal of Business Ethics. This book is part
of a series on corporate social responsibility.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF5413 2006-280279 1-84407-209-6
Sustainable consumer services; business solutions for
household markets.
Title main entry. Ed. by Minna Halme et al.
Earthscan Publications Ltd., ©2005 192 p. $69.95
In this collection of essays contributors describe how to reduce material
consumption while still boosting the bottom line, a process that starts to
make sense as soon as you understand the cost of replacing the earth.
Writing as a team, they describe ecologically and socially sound services
(such as home services) that are also economically appropriate, samples
of innovative home services and their sustainability effects, conditions for
the demand for sustainable household services, providers of home
services, positive and negative factors affecting home services, business
models, service development, and in a very upbeat chapter, the art of
rediscovering immaterial pleasures. The services described here include
such ideas as delivering organic food, leasing “green” appliances, mobile
laundry service, Internet schemes and commercial car pools. Distributed
by Stylus.
HF5415 2006-021766 978-0-275-99282-8
The affluent consumer; marketing and selling the luxury
lifestyle.
Michman, Ronald D. and Edward M. Mazze.
Praeger, ©2006 194 p. $44.95
While a single profile no longer fits all affluent consumers, the market
for luxury goods is a global one in which shoppers seek relevance, value,
and fun. Drawing on their own research, Michman (emeritus, marketing,
Shippensburg U., Pennsylvania) and Mazze (business administration, U.
of Rhode Island) examine this booming market, who constitutes it, and
how businesses can meet lifestyle-based desires. They examine the
strategies of companies from Tiffany to Wal-Mart for attracting wealthier
seniors and others in the segmented market who cross-shop at both.
HF5415 978-1-933588-06-3
Best customers; demographics of consumer demand, 4th
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by the editors of New Strategist Publications.
New Strategist Pub., Inc., ©2006 750 p. $89.95
Using information from the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ 2004 Consumer
Survey, this volume examines spending patterns by the demographic
characteristics of households. It is arranged by spending category (alco-
holic beverage, apparel, entertainment, furnishings, groceries, health
care, shelter, transportation, and travel are some) and lists average
spending, indexed spending, and market share by age, income,
household, type, race and Hispanic origin, region of residence, and edu-
cational attainment, in a table format with accompanying descriptions.
Households that spend the most and those that control the largest share
of spending are identified. Excluded from the book are “other” categories
and products and services with patterns that are unreliable because of
small sample sizes.
HF5415 1-85604-548-X
Developing strategic marketing plans that really work; a
toolkit for public libraries.
Kendrick, Terry.
Facet Publishing, ©2006 225 p. $89.95 (pa)
UK-based Kendrick has extensive experience in public libraries and
strategic marketing planning. Here he advises individuals and com-
mittees at public libraries in the planning, implementation and mainte-
nance of a program for advertising services. Advice covers interpreting
audience and market, creating clear objectives, making sound choices,
and brainstorming attention-grabbing communications and PR strategies.
The author’s objective is to integrate the marketing of formerly discon-
nected departments to create a more complete, consistent coherent rela-
tionship to the public.
HF5415 2006-026009 0-275-99223-3
Direct marketing in action; cutting-edge strategies for
finding and keeping the best customers.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew R. Thomas et al.
Praeger, ©2007 218 p. $49.95
Direct marketing is a customer-driven approach that employs focused,
targeted communication. Written by a team of specialists from the
business and academic worlds, this text dispels a number of common
myths about direct marketing and describes twelve steps for developing
a successful strategy. Ethical and professional issues are also addressed.
Thomas teaches marketing at the U. of Akron.
–132–
HF5415 2006-012211 0-8144-7374-1 HF5415 2006-052745 978-0-273-70693-9
Get clients now!; a 28-day marketing program for Marketing communications; a European perspective, 3d
professionals, consultants, and coaches, 2d ed. ed.
Hayden, C. J. Pelsmacker, Patrick de et al.
AMACOM, ©2007 239 p. $19.95 (pa) Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2007 610 p. $80.73 (pa)
Master Certified Coach Hayden describes a customizable 28-day program Suitable for both undergraduate and postgraduate students of marketing
designed to help professional services businesses to locate, land, and keep communications, this textbook provides an overview of its fundamental
new clients. Following the model of a cookbook, the program allows concepts and techniques within a European context. It is assumed that
business owners to select from a variety of “ingredients” for success. The the reader has already completed an introductory course in marketing.
second edition features a stronger emphasis on relationship marketing Some of the topics addressed include branding, budgets, advertising
and discusses some of the latest Internet marketing strategies. research, sales promotions, direct marketing, trade fairs, and Internet
marketing. The volume is not distributed in the U.S. at this time.
HF5415 2006-928088 978-0-566-08744-8
Handbook of customer satisfaction and loyalty HF5415 2005037134 0-7890-2746-1
measurement, 3d ed. Marketing research; text and cases, 2d ed. (CD-ROM
Hill, Nigel and Jim Alexander. included)
Gower Publishing, ©2006 273 p. $144.95 Wrenn, Bruce et al.
Most companies measure and manage the manufacturing process far Best Business Books, ©2007 464 p. $49.95 (pa)
more thoroughly than they do customer satisfaction and loyalty, say the This textbook takes students through each stage of designing and con-
authors, who make a living consulting on the subject in the UK. In this ducting marketing research and interpreting the resulting data. Topics
third edition text, they guide managers in their step-by-step process of include (for example) sample size, the interviewing relationship,
evaluating customer satisfaction and acting on the results. Sixteen hypothesis testing, and report formats. The second edition features a new
chapters introduce readers to the value-profit chain and principles of cus- section on using Internet surveys. The CD-ROM is an SPSS 11.0 data disk
tomer loyalty, as well as how to conduct research through focus groups, containing a variety of practice cases.
telephone and personal interviews, and survey questionnaires. Detailed
sampling and questionnaire design techniques are included. Various HF5415 2006-019186 1-932159-57-6
methodologies for analysis of and reporting on results are provided, fol- Value innovation portfolio management; achieving double-
lowed by strategies for maximizing the benefits of the research through digit growth through customer value.
PR and other departments and continued monitoring of improvements. Mello, Sheila et al.
The appendixes comprise sample questionnaires and customer inter- J. Ross Publishing, ©2006 273 p. $39.95
views. This book is distributed by Ashgate.
Four members of Product Development Consulting in Boston have co-
HF5415 2005-35813 978-1-4129-2120-6 written a guide to portfolio management that offers a paradigm shift for
managers to learn to focus constructively on customer value at all levels
Handbook of marketing. (reprint, 2002) of a product’s development. The chapters delve into approaches to inno-
Title main entry. Ed. by Barton Weitz and Robin Wensley. vation; the importance of coordinated vision, mission, strategy and value;
Sage Publications, ©2006 582 p. $52.95 (pa) identifying the market; gathering customer value data; communication
This work presents a retrospective and prospective overview of research within the company; and sustaining a dynamic view after the product is
on marketing management issues, for advanced undergraduates, launched. Concrete examples from a variety of industries are included.
graduate students, academics, and practitioners in marketing. Organized
in sections on marketing strategy, activities, and management and special HF5415 978-1-4129-3087-1
topics, chapters look at areas such as the role of marketing and the firm, A very short, fairly interesting and reasonably cheap
competitive response and market evolution, branding and brand equity, book about studying marketing.
marketing communications, and global marketing. Weitz is professor of
Blythe, Jim.
marketing at the University of Florida. Wensley is professor of strategic
Sage Publications, ©2006 146 p. $80.00
management and marketing at the University of Warwick. This is a
paperbound reprint of a 2002 book. Using a lighthearted, humorous approach, Blythe (marketing, U. of
Glamorgan, UK) shares with students some of his thoughts on mar-
HF5415 2006-023957 0-7494-4377-4 keting. He begins by discussing marketing’s academic foundations in the
An introduction to market & social research; planning & fields of economics and behavioral science. He then provides an overview
of the ideas of some “marketing gurus” who shaped professional
using research tools & techniques. practice. He concludes by exploring briefly some current debates in the
Adams, Karen and Ian Brace. field.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 154 p. $25.00 (pa)
Brace (Bristol Business School, UK), a market researcher, and Adams, a HF5429 2006-001913 0-7494-4689-7
professional development manager, describe basic principles and tech- Retailization; brand survival in the age of retailer power.
niques of market and social research. They detail the research process, Thomassen, Lars et al.
from the identification of the research topic to the results and recom- Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 221 p. $35.00
mendations, including designing a project, finding data, and using qual-
itative research methods, questionnaires, and analysis. Tasks and Written by three leading brand consultants, this practical guide provides
questions are included in each section. The book follows the syllabus for brand managers with a seven-step plan for revitalization that takes into
the MRS/City & Guilds Certificate in Market and Social Research (UK) account the rise of retailer power. Drawing upon case studies of such
and is a study guide for its examination. prominent international brands as Procter & Gamble, Apple, and LEGO,
the authors explain how to connect shoppers to brands by thinking like
HF5415 2006-024190 978-0-87389-702-0 a retailer and “branding from the shelf.” They also reveal how the most
successful brands sell themselves to increasingly demanding retailers.
Managing the customer experience; a measurement-based
approach. HF5438 2006-025825 978-0-87389-696-2
Wilburn, Morris. Applying the science of Six Sigma to the art of sales and
ASQ Quality Press, ©2007 112 p. $45.00 (pa)
marketing.
Written at a fairly high conceptual level, this text describes a meas- Pestorius, Michael J.
urement-based approach to the management of customer loyalty. ASQ Quality Press, ©2007 132 p. $45.00 (pa)
Wilburn begins by explaining the interrelationship between brand image,
customer emotion evoked by contact with service employees, and the Used successfully by manufacturers worldwide, the principles of Six
shopping environment. He then identifies the specific information nec- Sigma may also be applied to the realms of sales and marketing. This
essary for managing the customer experience and describes how it may text offers step by step instructions for using Six Sigma tools to improve
best be obtained and analyzed. Wilburn (Market Probe) is a researcher the effectiveness of sales forces and target the right customers. Sample
specializing in customer loyalty. topics include new product sales, the field-visit process, and sales ter-
ritory planning. Pestorius has held Six Sigma leadership positions at
Johnson & Johnson and General Electric.

–133– Reference & Research Book News February 2007

HF5438 2006-012554 0-7546-4609-2
The hard sell; an ethnographic study of the direct selling
industry.
Bone, John.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 206 p. $99.95
Bone (sociology, U. of Aberdeen, UK) reports findings from an ethno-
graphic study on the UK direct selling industry and, specifically, on the
sociologically significant aspects of the selling practices, interaction
order, internal culture and organizational characteristics of two home
improvement companies, Mega Home Improvements (MHI) and Big Time
Products (BTP), which are shown to be representative of the UK home
improvement industry as a whole. The research finds that direct selling
is an industry with an insular internal culture, supporting a range of
practices and an organizational form that are often at odds with the
image these companies present to the public. The author suggests that
the industry reflects a more widespread process of irrational and anti-
structural demodernization, affecting economic, labor and social rela-
tionships, and posing a threat to the rationality of “modern” business.
HF5438 2006-014057 978-0-470-04547-3
How to deal with difficult customers; 10 simple strategies
for selling to the stubborn, obnoxious, and belligerent.
Anderson, Dave.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 159 p. $22.95
Entrepreneur and sales workshop leader Dave Anderson explains how to
deal with S.O.B.s—customers who are Stubborn, Obnoxious, or
Belligerent—and gain both their trust and their business. He begins by
describing how sales people can unwittingly turn otherwise normal
prospects into SOBs. He then outlines ten simple strategies they can use
to boost sales with even the toughest customers. Sample topics include
removing the fight from the sales process, building referrals, creating
urgency, and closing the sale.
HF5478 2006-024269 978-0-910627-64-1
The eBay success chronicles; secrets and techniques eBay
powersellers use every day to make millions.
Adams, Angela C.
Atlantic Publishing, ©2007 407 p. $21.95 (pa)
After reviewing the history of eBay and power seller levels, Adams inter-
views 70 power sellers about their experiences selling on the popular
auction site. The sellers explain why they decided to do business on eBay,
and express their opinions on listing composition, cross-promotion,
product sources, timing, and unresponsive buyers.
HF5478 2004-116490 0-7897-3646-2
Making a living from your eBay business, 2d ed.
Miller, Michael.
Que Publishing, ©2007 436 p. $24.99 (pa)
Miller, an experienced eBay seller and author, offers a guide to making
a living from an eBay-based business, concentrating on the business
aspects; he does not describe how to run an auction. He discusses how
to figure out a business model and plan, finances, tax and legal issues,
and recordkeeping. Types are then detailed, as is everyday management
of inventory, listings, payments, packing and shipping, and customers.
Miller also outlines how to improve sales and expand using other venues
and ideas.
HF5547 2006-025917 978-0-275-99220-0
Building community in buildings; the design and culture
of dynamic workplaces.
Kemp, Jana M. and Ken Baker.
Praeger, ©2007 202 p. $49.95
For Kemp (founder and owner of Meeting & Management Essentials) and
Baker (owner of K Energy Consulting), the value of workplace com-
munity is to be found in the way people work well together, commu-
nicate effectively in crisis, feel creative and productive, and feel secure
enough to make connections with other people. Their description of how
to achieve these goals brings together questions of architecture and
human working behavior and addresses a wide range of issues,
including energy and light usage, building travel patterns, organizational
design and community interaction, design elements that encourage spon-
taneous and informal interactions, and the interaction of building design
with work productivity variables (health, safety and security, comfort
and control, community, rewards, and creativity and morale).
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF5548 2003-116567 1-58705-182-6
Build the best data center facility for your business.
Alger, Douglas.
Cisco Press, ©2005 374 p. $55.00
This guide to data center design and management also details the ele-
ments of physical infrastructure and operations, creating a server envi-
ronment for a specific company, and the experiences of the author and
others. Coverage encompasses principles of design, choosing a site, quan-
tifying space, layout, installation, electrical systems, structured cabling,
environmental control and protection systems, and upgrading an existing
center. Management topics include labeling and signage, stocking and
standardizing, safeguarding the servers, mapping, monitoring, metrics,
and maintenance. It does not discuss network architecture,
internet/extranet/intranet functions, applications, or other topics not
related to the physical elements of a data center facility. The book is
aimed at IT and data center managers, facilities managers, and architec-
tural, engineering, and facilities consultants and IT and network engi-
neers. Alger works with the data infrastructure team at Cisco Systems.
HF5548 2006-049016 0-470-08485-5
Data mining for business intelligence; concepts,
techniques, and applications in Microsoft Office Excel
with XLMiner.
Shmueli, Galit et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 279 p. $100.00
Business success depends on the art of extracting useful information
from large amounts of data. In a text developed from their business data
mining courses, Galit (U. of Maryland) and colleagues from MIT and the
private sector introduce data mining concepts, methods, and applications
using real-world data for supporting the business intelligence function
without being overly technical. Using the Excel software widely used in
the business world, chapters include examples and exercises. The authors
chose not to cover SQL and OLAP, descriptive rather than predictive ana-
lytic database methods. A Web link and complimentary trial access to
XLMiner, an Excel add-on, are available.
HF5548 2006-030036 978-0-7619-3532-2
Emotional intelligence at work; a professional guide, 3d
ed.
Singh, Dalip.
Sage Publications, ©2006 235 p. $29.95 (pa)
According to “EQ” proponents, emotional intelligence is an important
part of one’s capacity for professional success. This guide for business
people introduces the concept of EQ and explains how emotional skills
can be learned. A self test for measuring EQ is found at the back of the
volume. A trained psychologist, Singh is a senior bureaucrat in the
Indian Administrative Service. Response Books is an imprint of Sage
India.
HF5548 2006-000267 1-59140-799-0
Encyclopedia of e-commerce, e-government, and mobile
commerce; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mehdi Khosrow-Pour.
Idea Group Publishing, ©2006 1310 p. $545.00
From “adaptive virtual reality shopping malls” to “wireless LAN access
technology,” some 200 alphabetical entries presented by Khosrow-Pour
(Information Resources Management Association) provide information on
management and social issues, technologies, and applications of e-com-
merce, e-government, and mobile commerce in this two-volume encyclo-
pedia. The entries can be characterized as belonging to one of three
categories: concepts, trends, and challenges; applications in business and
organizational settings; and case study experiences of dot-com business.
Further examples of topics covered include branding on the Internet, bio-
metric identities and e-government services, customer goals online, cyber-
identity theft, dynamic pricing for e-commerce, electronic word-of-mouth,
emergent semantic web, Internet access to scholarly publications, infor-
mation integration for relationship management, and ontology-based
query formation and information retrieval. Included with the entries are
definitions of some 1400 technical and managerial key terms and bibli-
ographic guides to further research.
–134–
HF5548 2006-009521 0-7546-4416-2
Impact of e-commerce on consumers and small firms.
Title main entry. Ed. by Salvatore Zappalá and Colin Gray.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 264 p. $114.95
A few economists and business scholars, but mostly psychologists and
educators describe factors influencing the process of adoption and use of
electronic commerce by mostly small firms and by consumers in Europe.
They consider not just transactions conducted online, but also trade and
transactions that use information and communications technologies.
Their topics include social influences and the diffusion of innovations in
education, Internet marketing and the Portuguese marketplace, and con-
sumer risk perception in online shopping.
HF5548 2005-275470 0-471-69099-6
Industrial and organizational psychology; research and
practice, 4th ed.
Spector, Paul E.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 430 p. $101.95
The fourth edition of this text incorporates new findings and insights in
the field, many new references, and as Spector (psychology, U. of South
Florida) puts it: “more balance between issues of employee performance
and well-being.” New/expanded coverage treats such topics as team job
analysis, drug testing, justice theories, employee harassment, organiza-
tional politics as a stressor, group diversity, cross-cultural issues in lead-
ership, and employee acceptance of change. Chapters include a summary
of research from a major I/O journal, an international study, and dis-
cussion questions. A guide to graduate school admission in the field is
appended, and an Internet support site is available.
HF5548 2006-041769 978-0-471-78327-5
Multiple streams of internet income; how ordinary people
make extraordinary money online, 2d ed.
Allen, Robert G.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 260 p. $24.95
Though some of the sources cited are a bit outdated (Wall Street Journal
articles from 1999, for example), the gist of Allen’s book centers on a
sound concept: first find the market, then produce the product. Chapters
detail Allen’s own early schemes in Internet marketing then move to
other ventures, including selling on eBay. Written for the general reader,
the names and terms common to the electronic world are defined or
described throughout the text.
HF5548 2006-036448 978-1-934015-01-8
SAP R/3 FI; transactions.
Narayanan, V.
Infinity Science Press, ©2007 518 p. $49.95
This text provides a guide to the full range of transactions involved in
using European software company SAP’s financials (FI) software.
Narayanan (a practicing SAP R/3 FICO consultant) organizes the trans-
actions first by accounting area—general ledger, accounts payable,
accounts receivable, asset accounting, and miscellaneous—and then by
transaction type—document entry, document, account, master records,
periodic processing, information system, and environment. Following an
overview, each transaction is described step-by-step, and information on
verifying the transaction is provided.
HF5548 2006-100822 0-7897-3517-2
Special edition using Microsoft Office 2007.
Bott, Ed and Woody Leonhard.
Que Publishing, ©2007 1020 p. $39.99 (pa)
Focusing on the needs of business professionals and business users
already familiar with Windows, the Internet, and the basics of previous
versions of Microsoft Office, computer journalist Bott and computer
Internet writer Leonhard (of AskWoody.com) provide advice on using the
applications of the 2007 Office suite, first covering common tasks and
features and then devoting a section to each of the major applications.
The emphasis of the text is those features of Office that are not easily
understood simply by trial and error or by reference to the online help
resources. The authors also pride themselves on not glossing over Office’s
weaknesses and offering workarounds for where Office doesn’t work as
it is supposed to or might be hoped to.
–135–
HF5548 2006-009418 978-1-4051-4434-6
Work in the 21st century; an introduction to industrial
and organizational psychology, 2d ed.
Landy, Frank J. and Jeffrey M. Conte.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 738 p. $109.95
For use in college courses, this textbook describes the fundamentals of
industrial and organizational psychology. Landy (organizational psy-
chology, Penn State U.) and Conte (psychology, San Diego State U.) have
reorganized chapters in this edition, and references have been added.
Some topics are new, such as unions as stakeholders, the motivation of
entrepreneurs, organizational identification, overtime pay and fair com-
pensation, and internet attitude measurement. Other topics have been
expanded, although the length of the text is shorter, and critical thinking
exercises have been moved to the website. Indexes are divided between
subjects and names.
HF5549 2006-018670 978-0-910627-76-4
199 pre-written employee performance appraisals; the
complete guide to successful employee evaluations and
documentation. (CD-ROM included)
Lyster, Stephanie and Anne Arthur.
Atlantic Publishing, ©2007 316 p. $24.95 (pa)
This resource for managers and supervisors provides over 199 pre-
written phrases that may be inserted into a blank employee evaluation
form. The phrases are organized into 25 different categories of evaluation
and are found on the CD-ROM. In the book, human resources profes-
sional Lyster provides an overview of the performance appraisal process
and discusses various tools to use and skills to evaluate.
HF5549 0-7879-8471-X
The 2007 Pfeiffer annual; human resource management.
(CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert C. Preziosi.
Pfeiffer, ©2006 285 p. $75.00
Preziosi (business, Nova Southeastern U.) presents the third annual
volume for human resource students and professionals offering perspec-
tives on current topics and practices in HR. The first section comprises
nine chapters by HR practitioners describing their strategies for success
in conceiving competitive employee retention strategies, attracting more
IT professionals, developing high-potential managers, and hiring the right
personnel in health services, among other topics. The remaining 13
chapters are more editorial, offering opinions on critical topics such as
HR after the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, the crisis of health care costs and how
HR professionals can address it, liability issues, promoting employee
accountability, and new rules for overtime pay exemptions. The CD-ROM
contains materials from the book that may be used for presentation or
to distribute excerpts.
HF5549 2006-026760 978-0-7879-8198-3
90 world-class activities by 90 world-class trainers.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elaine Biech.
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 388 p. $40.00 (pa)
This resource for training professionals presents a selection of 90 activ-
ities designed by the world’s leading trainers. The main part of the
volume is organized into twelve chapters, each containing activities
dealing with a specific training topic (for example, customer service, self-
management, and teamwork). Other activities of a more general nature
(i.e., icebreakers and closing activities) are grouped together at the end.
Editor Biech has been in the training and consulting field for more than
25 years. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
HF5549 2004-027183 0-566-08778-2
Adverse impact and test validation; a practitioners’ guide
to valid and defensible employment testing, 2d ed. (CD-
ROM included)
Biddle, Dan.
Gower Publishing, ©2006 192 p. $99.95
Aimed at human resource professionals and testing and recruitment
specialists, this guide explains how to protect organizations from
litigation and from damage to employee relations and corporate
reputation. Biddle’s analyses allow corporations to identify selection
procedures that have adverse impacts. His validation steps are tools for
determining whether to keep, change or terminate existing selection
procedure. This second edition contains new material on using multiple
regression to evaluate pay practices and offers step-by-instructions for
using SPSS or Excel for evaluating pay practices for possible inequities.
New content on how to define “internet applicants” and set up basic
qualifications for online recruiting will help employers ensure
compliance with EEO regulations. The accompanying CD includes tools
for implementing functions discussed in the text. Distributed by Ashgate.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF5549 2005-034909 0-566-08680-8
Age matters; employing, motivating, and managing older
employees.
Smedley, Keren and Helen Whitten.
Gower Publishing, ©2006 351 p. $144.95
Written for managers, this sensible and thoughtful volume details the
issues and attitudes that lead to age discrimination and provide practical
information on how to prevent it in the workplace. The authors detail
how to foster positive attitudes towards older workers and, in turn, how
to ensure older workers have a positive attitude towards their work. Each
chapter begins with a hypothetical and thought-provoking scenario
where age-related issues are causing stress and unhappiness. Health,
fitness, lifelong learning, and intergenerational working are some of the
chapter topics. The final five chapters are devoted to a training and
implementation program. (The volume was inspired in part by new leg-
islation outlawing age discrimination in the EU.) Oversized: 8.5x12″.
Distributed by Ashgate.
HF5549 2006-008961 0-7494-4474-6
The essential guide to recruitment; how to conduct great
interviews and select the best employees.
Dale, Margaret.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 233 p. $35.00 (pa)
Dale, a staff recruiter for 20 years, offers advice to managers who haven’t
been extensively trained on strategies for seeking, hiring, and keeping the
best employees for their team. Six chapters cover how to determine what
to look for in an employee, how and why to test the field before deciding,
preparing to interview, conducting an interview, and choosing and
keeping the best person. Specific tasks addressed include helping appli-
cants get to know you, creating recruitment packets, avoiding false ref-
erences, and making an offer. Sample questions for interviews, as well as
a list of questions not to ask, are included. Each chapter contains an
exercise for understanding, and the book concludes with a “good
practice” checklist.
HF5549 2006-007135 1-59139-821-5
The essentials of power, influence, and persuasion.
Title main entry. (Business literacy for HR professionals)
Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2006 286 p. $39.95 (pa)
Aimed at human resource professionals, this text explains how to use the
tools of power, influence, and persuasion in order to obtain the resources
and cooperation needed to implement HR initiatives and programs. It
also contains profiles of HR practitioners who successfully used these
tools in their own organizations. The content is based on material found
in various publications from Harvard Business School Publishing and the
Society for Human Resource Management.
HF5549 2006-002695 978-1-84542-148-9
Happy performing managers; the impact of affective
wellbeing and intrinsic job satisfaction in the workplace.
Hosie, Peter J. et al. (New horizons in management)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 449 p. $135.00
Many authors have long assumed the idea that happy workers are more
productive, lack of empirical evidence notwithstanding. In this study,
Hosie (a post-doctoral research fellow at the Curtin Business School,
Curtin U. of Technology, Australia) and Cooper (organizational psy-
chology and health, Lancaster U. Management School, UK) test a different
but similar thesis—that happy managers perform better. They specifically
focus on the impact of affective wellbeing and intrinsic job satisfaction
on managers’ contextual performance (endorsing, supporting, and
defending organizational objectives; helping and cooperating with others;
persisting with enthusiasm and extra effort to complete task activities
successfully, and following organizational rules and procedures) and task
performance (monitoring and controlling resources, technical profi-
ciency, influencing others, and delegating to others). After describing the
theoretical and methodological assumptions behind the study, they
describe their findings, which point towards a positive correlation
between manager happiness and performance.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF5549 2006-006678 1-59139-842-8
Harvard business essentials; performance management;
measure and improve the effectiveness of your employees.
Title main entry. (Harvard business essentials)
Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2006 152 p. $19.95 (pa)
This work outlines essential ideas on employee performance and gives
practical advice on employee goal setting, motivation, coaching, dele-
gating coaching responsibilities, performance appraisal, employee devel-
opment, and problem employees. A glossary is included, along with a
coach’s self-evaluation checklist, a performance appraisal form, and a
primer on handling dismissals. Author Richard Luecke has written pre-
vious books on business.
HF5549 2006-023712 978-0-7879-7621-7
Job aids and performance support; moving from
knowledge in the classroom to knowledge everywhere.
Rossett, Allison & Lisa Schafer.
Pfeiffer, ©2007 216 p. $55.00
Rossett (educational technology, San Diego State U.) and Schafer, who
develops enterprise systems and consults in performance analysis and
improvement, discuss performance support and two types they refer to
as planners and sidekicks. Their objectives in writing the book include
encouraging people to use, develop, and implement performance
support; increase the shift from training to performance; and enhance
performance and results. Written for people who help others improve the
way they work, such as trainers or human resource managers, the book
defines job aids and performance support, and details new ways of
thinking, when to use it, and examples of the planner and sidekick types.
Effective elements of support are covered, as well as strategies for imple-
mentation. Pfeiffer is an imprint of Wiley.
HF5549 2006-016470 0-7494-4477-0
Managing and measuring employee performance.
Houldsworth, Elizabeth and Dilum Jirasinghe.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 245 p. $39.95 (pa)
Extrapolating from experience and research by their respective
employers, Henley Management College and the Hay Group,
Houldsworth and Jirasinghe, seek to transcend the traditional divides in
human resources practice between the carrot and the stick and between
hard measurement and soft development techniques. The authors discuss
the secrets of performance management at the world’s most admired
companies and use international case studies to illustrate new and future
trends.
HF5549 2006-046719 978-0-393-97643-4
The mismatched worker.
Kalleberg, Arne L. (Contemporary societies series)
W.W. Norton, ©2007 321 p. $13.00 (pa)
Sociologist Kalleberg (U. of North Carolina) considers the problem of
“mismatched” workers—those who find themselves in jobs that do not
mesh well with their needs, preferences, and abilities. In each of seven
main chapters, he looks at a particular type of mismatch and presents
data on its prevalence in the U.S. labor force. He also explains the con-
sequences of these mismatches for workers, organizations, and society.
The final chapter contains some suggestions for governmental policies
and business strategies aimed at reducing mismatches.
HF5549 2006-008661 978-0-7879-8199-0
Thiagi’s 100 favorite games.
Thiagarajan, Sivasailam.
Jossey-Bass, ©2006 383 p. $40.00 (pa)
Over the course of his career, consultant Thiagarajan has designed hun-
dreds of training games and simulations for corporate clients and non-
profit organizations. Here, he shares 100 of his favorites. The volume is
organized into 11 sections dealing with such corporate training topics as
teamwork, leadership, communication, and diversity. In addition to step-
by-step instructions, each entry also describes the purpose of the game
or activity and lists the number of participants, time required, and sup-
plies needed. Each closes with some suggestions for debriefing.
–136–
HF5549 2006-022940 0-275-99086-9
Understanding workplace violence; a guide for managers
and employees.
Paludi, Michele A. et al.
Praeger, ©2006 127 p. $39.95
Human resources management consultants Paludi and Carmen A.
Paludi, and Rudy V. Nydegger (psychology, Union College and man-
agement, Union Graduate College) translate concepts and theories from
academic research into practical strategies that business leaders can use
to respond to the threat of workplace violence. They describe such
measures as developing and enforcing effective policy statements, inves-
tigatory procedures, and training programs.
HF5549 2005-035226 0-566-08613-1
Vetting and monitoring employees; a guide for HR
practitioners.
Howard, Gillian.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 198 p. $99.95
The laws relating to the rights of employers to monitor their employees
in such areas as Internet use, email correspondence, and telephone calls
are complex and wide-ranging. In this guide for human resources prac-
titioners, attorney Howard provides an overview of relevant UK law and
supplies practical examples of policies and procedures for monitoring
employees at work. Particular attention is paid to various interpretations
of the 1998 Data Protection Act by the Courts and Employment
Tribunals.
HF5611 978-0-8213-6768-1
International financial reporting standards; a practical
guide, 4th ed.
Greuning, Hennie van.
The World Bank, ©2006 299 p. $39.95 (pa)
This easy-to-use handbook helps executives, managers, and financial ana-
lysts without a strong background in accounting to understand the appli-
cation of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) to business
situations. Each of 38 chapters briefly summarizes and explains a new
or revised IFRS, describing the problems it addresses, its scope, under-
lying concepts, the appropriate accounting treatment, and associated
requirements for presentation and disclosure. Examples are included at
the end of most chapters. Van Greuning is a senior advisor in the World
Bank’s Treasury.
HF5625 2006-404273 1-55266-190-3
Truth or profit?; the ethics and business of public
accounting.
Neu, Dean and Duncan Green.
Fernwood Publishing, ©2006 171 p. $17.95 (pa)
Throughout the 20th century, Canada has experienced similar corporate
financial scandals as those found in the United States and elsewhere,
scandals that all too often implicate public accounting firms as complicit
in the shady practices of their clients. The authors (professors of
accounting at the Haskayne School of Business, U. of Calgary, Canada) of
this work describe the development of these Canadian scandals over the
past 100 years, along with the professional and governmental efforts to
set up rules and procedures that would mitigate the perceived problems.
They argue that these efforts have been largely unsuccessful and suggest
that perhaps the scandals should be seen as “natural accidents.”
HF5635 2005-024423 978-0-470-01779-1
Accounting, 2d ed.
Jones, Michael.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 690 p. $70.00 (pa)
Jones (Cardiff Business School) introduces double-entry bookkeeping, the
preparation of financial statements, the annual report, budgets, standard
costing, decision making, strategic management accounting, capital
investment, and sources of finance. The second edition of the textbook
reflects the new UK accounting standards setting regime, and the
adoption of international financial reporting standards.
–137–
HF5635 2006-923151 0-324-30295-9
Financial reporting, financial statement analysis, and
valuation; a strategic perspective, 6th ed.
Stickney, Clyde P. et al.
South-Western College Pub., ©2007 1128 p. $165.95
Divided into three parts on the main components of financial statement
analysis, this textbook introduces the concepts and tools of profitability
and risk analysis, the generally accepted accounting principles, and a
process for preparing forecasts of future profitability and valuation of
firms. The sixth edition adds a chapter on dividends valuation models
and sections on EBITDA, economic value added, and FASB Statement No.
123.
HF5635 2005-283965 0-471-75272-X
Fundamentals of intermediate accounting, 2006 FASB
update. (CD-ROM included)
Kieso, Donald E. et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 886+ p. $132.95
Keiso (accounting, Northern Illinois U.) et al. provide an update booklet
to discussions of key accounting standards issued since the publication
of their Fundamentals of Intermediate Accounting, followed by the
chapters of that textbook. Standards are discussed by topic: asset
exchanges, consolidation of variable interest entities, other-than-tem-
porary impairments, stock-based compensation, pension disclosures,
accounting changes, and income statement reporting of changes,
inventory costs, and preferred stock. The text is intended for the second
course in financial accounting and reporting taken over a single
semester. A supplemental CD-ROM contains toolkits—reports, web links,
spreadsheet templates, writing materials, group work materials, tutorials,
and other items.
HF5657 2005-031940 978-0-470-01609-1
Accounting for managers; interpreting accounting
information for decision-making, 2d ed.
Collier, Paul M.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 514 p. $65.00 (pa)
Drawing on his own industry and teaching experience, Collier (Monash
U., Australia) describes the use of accounting information by non-
financial managers in this textbook aimed at postgraduate and under-
graduate students who are taking courses that do not lead to professional
accreditation. It has a practitioner-manager orientation rather than being
accounting-centric and focuses on the interpretation of information. It is
also accessible to European and Asian students. In this edition, case
studies have been added, examples have been revised and updated, and
two chapters on financial reporting and a comparison of UK and US
accounting treatment are new. Coverage of financial statements,
reflecting the introduction of International Financial Reporting Standards
and the increased emphasis on corporate governance, has been
expanded.
HF5668 2005-046646 978-0-471-79003-7
Policies and procedures to prevent fraud and
embezzlement; guidance, internal controls, and
investigation.
McMillan, Edward J.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 308 p. $45.00 (pa)
McMillan teaches courses on fraud prevention to groups of accountants
and other business professionals in the US. He explains how auditing cer-
tified public accountants, internal auditors, fraud investigators, and man-
agement can evaluate the system of internal controls, expose weaknesses
that could lead to fraud, and take corrective action to reduce the possi-
bility of victimization. Among his perspectives are who embezzles and
when, clever examples, and identity theft. He includes many sample
forms for a variety of situations.
HF5679 2006-277690 0-538-44150-X
Creating the band; an accounting simulation for
Peachtree, QuickBooks, and Microsoft Excel.
Kane, Beth.
South-Western College Pub., ©2006 87 p. $26.95 (pa)
This workbook is designed to give students realistic experience in
keeping accounting records for a small business. Featuring pages perfo-
rated for easy removal, the volume contains background information on
a fictitious company—a band of musicians who have formed a business
partnership—and provides instructions for keeping their accounting
records over the course of one fiscal year. The simulation may be com-
pleted using any of three software programs: Peachtree, QuickBooks, or
Microsoft Excel. Data files are found on the accompanying CD-ROM.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HF5681 2005-031927 978-0-471-78588-0
Accounts payable and Sarbanes-Oxley; strengthening your
internal controls.
Schaeffer, Mary S.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 185 p. $34.95
Schaeffer describes the antecedents of SOX, including its requirements for
auditor independence and whistle-blower protection, and details the
means by which accounts payable departments can use it to foster pos-
itive change. She describes compliance alternatives such as outsourcing
and the framework devised by the Committee of Sponsoring
Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO), invoice processing,
checks, purchasing cards and electronic payments, travel and enter-
taining expenses, escheat, IRS-related reporting, and sales and use tax,
closing with overall guidelines to conform including fraud prevention
controls, documentation, an guidelines. Appendices include the text of
SOX, a description of the segregation of duties, and the answers to the
20 questions needed to determine if a worker is an independent con-
tractor or an employee.
HF5681 2006-030499 978-0-7879-7833-4
The cash flow solution; the nonprofit board member’s
guide to financial success.
Linzer, Richard and Anna Linzer.
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 131 p. $24.95 (pa)
As many financial managers of nonprofit agencies and institutions will
tell you, the bottom line, which reflects donations, reserves, and capital
projects, contains a nasty little secret: much of it is unavailable for daily
operations, and many nonprofit organizations are significantly strapped
for cash. Consultants Linzer and Linzer go beyond the desperation bake
sale to give managers skills in managing cash flow and using credit to
ensure the doors of that successful capital project stay open and staffers
can meet client needs on a long-term basis. They believe their ideas apply
to both small and large agencies and institutions, making a case for man-
aging cash flow through efficient monitoring and analysis, creating and
maintaining a good relationship with your banker, dealing with both
deficits and capital accumulation, and working with earned revenue and
discounts.
HF5681 2005-032777 978-0-471-77184-5
Fair value for financial reporting; meeting the new FASB
requirements.
King, Alfred M.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 334 p. $65.00
Over the past 30 years, the Financial Accounting Standards Board in the
United States and the International Accounting Standards Board have
been moving away from historical cost accounting and heading towards
fair value accounting, which involves having companies prepare their
balance sheets on the basis of what assets are worth today, as opposed
to what they cost when they were acquired. Writing for corporate
financial managers and auditors, King (vice chairman, Marshall &
Stevens, a national firm of appraisers) seeks to provide his audience with
a general understanding of how appraisers determine fair value and
where there expertise is required. The focus is on the fair value require-
ments of business combinations, mergers and acquisitions, the area of
the most stringent requirements.
HF5681 2006-006409 978-0-470-86572-9
Financial information analysis, 2d ed.
O’Regan, Philip.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 595 p. $65.00 (pa)
O’Regan (financial information analysis and financial accounting, U. of
Limerick) offers this textbook for undergraduates and MBA students
taking courses in financial information analysis. He focuses on the
nature and role of accounting information in modern society, and the
Annual Report. His aim is to provide readers with the skills to under-
stand its content and that of other documents and therefore puts the
Annual Report in a variety of contexts: regulatory and legislative, con-
ceptual, theoretical, and governance. This is followed by an explanation
of its content, analysis, and issues in international practice. Practices in
the UK are emphasized, but the US and Europe are included.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –138–
HF5681 2006908394 0-324-63824-8
Payroll accounting, 2007 ed. (CD-ROMs included)
Bieg, Bernard J.
South-Western College Pub., ©2006 — p. $111.95 (pa)
This textbook gives accounting students practical experience in calcu-
lating payroll, completing payroll taxes, and preparing records and
reports. Updated to reflect recent tax law changes, the 2007 edition fea-
tures the addition of a second series of practice and review problems.
One of the accompanying CD-ROMs contains a tutorial on ADP
PC/Payroll for Windows. The other contains Klooster & Allen Integrated
Accounting for Payroll software.
HF5686 978-0-86612-283-2
Basic hotel and restaurant accounting, 6th ed.
Cote, Raymond.
Educ’l Inst/Am.Hotel & Lodging, ©2006 483 p. $76.95 (pa)
This textbook describes the contents of the major financial statements,
computerized general ledger accounting software, and the revenue and
expense categories specific to lodging properties and restaurants. The
sixth edition adds chapters on merchant accounts, budgeting and fore-
casting, the annual report to shareholders, and starting a business.
HF5686 2005-029726 978-0-471-77659-8
Case studies in performance management; a guide from
the experts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tony Adkins.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 238 p. $45.00
Adkins, a product manager in business performance management, pro-
vides case studies that describe activity-based costing/performance man-
agement and how it can be used to understand and maximize an
organization’s cost structure. The case studies consider 15 companies in
a variety of industries and countries and how they applied this method.
Contributors work at universities and companies in the US in man-
agement or other capacities.
HF5686 2006-283547 978-0-86612-284-9
Hospitality industry financial accounting, 3d ed.
Schmidgall, Raymond S.
Educ’l Inst/Am.Hotel & Lodging, ©2006 568 p. $76.95 (pa)
Schmidgall (Michigan State University) and Damitio (Central Michigan
University) explain the principles of accounting and apply them to fic-
tional hotels and restaurants. Early chapters introduce branches of
accounting and forms of business organization, and explain accounting
for business transactions, the accounting cycle, and income statements.
Later chapters cover cash, receivables, bonds, investments, and financial
statements
HF5686 978-0-86612-289-4
Hospitality industry managerial accounting, 6th ed.
Schmidgall, Raymond S.
Educ’l Inst/Am.Hotel & Lodging, ©2006 696 p. $84.95 (pa)
This textbook for students and practitioners presents managerial
accounting concepts and explains how they apply to specific operations
within the hospitality industry. Early chapters cover the three basic
financial statements: the balance sheet, the income statement, and the
statement of cash flows. Other topics include (for example) ratio analysis,
cost approaches to pricing, forecasting methods, operations budgeting,
and lease accounting. Tax considerations are addressed in the final
chapter.
HF5686 92-1-112697-5
International accounting and reporting issues, 2005
review.
Title main entry. Ed. by United Nations Conference on Trade and
Development, Geneva.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 131 p. $70.00 (pa)
In recent years, globalization has increased pressure to harmonize
financial reporting practices around the world. This proceedings volume
focuses on a number of practical issues surrounding the implementation
of the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). The papers
were originally presented at the 2005 meeting of the United Nations
Conference on Trade and Development’s (UNCTAD) Intergovernmental
Working Group of Experts on International Standards of Accounting and
Reporting (ISAR), which was held in Geneva. The volume is not indexed.
HF5718 2005-055165 0-8204-7574-2
Asian business discourse(s).
Title main entry. Ed. by Francesca Bargiela-Chiappini and Maurizio
Gotti. (Linguistic insights; v.29)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2005 350 p. $70.95 (pa)
Sixteen international academics and independent scholars contribute 13
chapters reflecting a growing interest in studies of business discourses
and cultures emerging from various Asian communities, and demon-
strating the range of methodological approaches, ontological perspectives
and topics being explored by Asian and Western scholars in studies of
Asian and Asian-Western business interactions. The papers are grouped
into two sections, one addressing linguistic and textual issues, the other
focusing on cultural and pragmatic issues. A sampling of topics: the role
of elevating/denigrating forms of address in pre-modern Chinese
business discourse, the use of metaphors in network marketing maga-
zines in Hong Kong, Malaysian electronic business discourse, the import
of “face’ in Japanese business interactions, and power and politeness in
Korean business correspondence.
HF5718 2005-057510 0-8204-7699-4
Chinese and Western business cultures; a comparison and
contrast.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael B. Hinner. (A forum for general and
intercultural business communication; v.2)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2005 168 p. $37.95 (pa)
Hinner (business English and communication, intercultural communi-
cation, TU Bergakademie Freiberg and Dresden International U.) presents
a collection of seven articles exploring differences and similarities in
Chinese and Western business practices. Written by Chinese and German
graduate students attending Freiburg U., the papers explore possible ben-
efits of stereotypes during preparation for intercultural business situa-
tions, intercultural communication and market entry models, culture’s
role in management processes, the influence of Chinese culture and
business practices in international communication, the evolution of con-
temporary Chinese culture, interviews of managers from a joint German-
Chinese venture, and a comparison and contrast of Chinese and Japanese
corporate culture. No subject index.
HF5718 2006-046728 978-0-07-351188-7
Communicating at work; principles and practices for
business and the professions, 9th ed.
Adler, Ronald B. and Jeanne Marquardt Elmhorst.
McGraw-Hill, ©2008 578 p. $82.91 (pa)
In this ninth edition text, the authors (communication instructors at
Santa Barbara City College and Central New Mexico Community College,
respectively) update and expand on discussion of workplace communi-
cation for undergraduate and professional students of business and
management. Chapters have been reorganized, and cover: how to use
multimedia; cultural and ethical considerations; strategies for listening;
verbal and nonverbal messages; interpersonal skills; principles of inter-
viewing; work in teams; meetings; and strategies for giving presentations.
Updated material includes an explanation of how misunderstandings are
grounded in the symbolic nature of language, the benefits and dangers
of using specialized business terms, and stages in group problem solving.
HF5736 2006-019490 978-0-8108-5190-0
Domesticating information; managing documents inside
the organization.
Choksy, Carol E.B.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 227 p. $40.00 (pa)
Aimed at academics in library and information science, this text con-
siders records management from the perspective of the needs of the
organization and discusses how it differs from archives and library
science. Following an overview of the history of records management,
Choksy considers the importance of context for documents and records.
Other topics include business processes in relation to records, and the
value of information within the organization. Choksy teaches at the
School of Library and Information Science at Indiana U., Bloomington.
–139–
HF5823 2006-014844 978-0-7425-3836-8
Cases in advertising and marketing management; real
situations for tomorrow’s managers.
Applegate, Edd and Art Johnsen.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 217 p. $29.95 (pa)
This text for upper level courses in advertising and marketing man-
agement contains 46 cases illustrating some of the decisions students are
likely to face in their future careers. These include issues relating to posi-
tioning, media strategy, budgeting, professional ethics, marketing
planning, SWOT analysis, e-commerce, segmentation, advertising regula-
tions, and more. Applegate (advertising, Middle Tennessee State U.) and
Johnsen (an advertising agency executive) supply questions at the end of
each case that encourage students to practice in-depth analysis.
HF5823 2006-016643 978-0-7425-4137-5
Street-smart advertising; how to win the battle of the
buzz.
Berman, Margo.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 237 p. $26.95 (pa)
Walking through the advertising process from concept to execution,
Berman (advertising, Florida International University) looks at the ele-
ments and principles of design, with an emphasis on the creative
process. Readers are encouraged to rethink traditional media usage,
develop self-promotion materials, explore new advertising vehicles, and
think in a more creative way. Tips from conceptual thinkers at some of
the most imaginative agencies in the world are included, along with
b&w examples, exercises, projects, and a glossary. While written for
advertising students and professors, the book may also interest profes-
sionals who enjoy reading about campaigns that created a global buzz.
HF5823 2006-005852 978-0-7656-1739-2
When ads work; new proof that advertising triggers sales,
2d ed.
Jones, John Philip.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 209 p. $34.95 (pa)
Jones (public communications, Syracuse U.) considers how advertising
influences sales of repeat-purchase packaged goods. Using data from
1991 gleaned from single-source research by the Nielsen Company, he
analyzes established brands’ average sales in the second, third, and
fourth quarters and compares them with the first. New brands and rein-
troductions or improvements are not considered. He discusses single-
source research in Britain, Germany, and other countries; successful
advertising campaigns; and short-term advertising strength concepts,
applying them to an analysis of 78 brands that work or do not work.
This edition incorporates research in the rewritten first section since the
first edition came out. One of the appendices has been removed.
HF5827 978-0-7734-5659-4
How the media shape young women’s perceptions of self-
efficacy, social power and class; marketing sexuality.
Baldwin, Cecelia.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 154 p. $99.95
They writhe, they wail, they pout, they giggle, they bare as much as the
censors can bear, and they are perceived by certain critics as very pow-
erful women. But how do these sexualized images of women affect young
women in their approach to sexuality and their perceptions of their own
power? Developing her ideas from fieldwork as well as theory, Baldwin
(advertising, San Jose State U.) finds that adolescents are very affected by
this imagery, which at their time of life they tend to relate to themselves.
She studies the history of sexualized imagery, feminist theory, hegemony
of the media, body image, lesbianism in advertising as a form of patri-
archal control, reproduction, the media’s role in sexual development, and
the role of education in resistance to a market-driven sexuality. She also
fully describes her quantitative an qualitative research.
FINANCE
HG173 2005-276389 0-471-73174-9
Capital ideas; the improbable origins of modern Wall
Street.
Bernstein, Peter L.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2005 340 p. $16.95 (pa)
Fears that modern financial instruments are dangerously complex and
opaque are largely unfounded, argues Bernstein (founding editor, Journal
of Investment Management), attributing these fears to a gap in under-
standing between insiders and outsiders that itself is the product of a rev-
olution in finance driven since the 1970s by academic specialists of risk
and reward. He presents a portrait of this revolution in finance, profiling
six of the more important investment theorists responsible for the current
picture.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HG173 2005-036426 1-57660-201-X
Guide to financial markets, 4th ed.
Levinson, Marc.
Bloomberg Press, ©2006 250 p. $29.95
Aimed at a broad audience of business people, investment professionals,
students, and general readers, this text provides an overview of the
world’s financial markets. Coverage includes (for example) currency,
bond, securities, equity, futures, and derivatives markets. Syndicated
loans and insurance products are not discussed. The volume lacks bibli-
ographical references. Levinson is a former finance and economics editor
of The Economist.
HG173 2005-049498 1-84542-381-X
Pioneers of financial economics; v.1: Contributions prior
to Irving Fisher.
Title main entry. Ed. by Geoffrey Poitras.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 274 p. $130.00
Poitras (finance, Simon Fraser U., Canada) compiles 11 essays that
explore the origins of financial economics and its pioneers, going outside
the traditional boundaries of the field. Beginning with the second half of
the seventeenth century and ending with the early twentieth, contributors
(who work in economics and other fields in Europe and North America)
discuss the contributions of Jacob Bernoulli, Isaac Le Maire, Joseph de la
Vega, Jan de Witt, Edmond Halley, Abraham de Moivre, Thomas
Simpson, John Law, Emmanuel-Etienne Duvillard, Henri Lefèvre, Jules
Regnault, Louis Bachelier, and Vincenz Bronzin. Their theories and
philosophies about trading in common stocks, valuation models for
pricing life annuities, financial markets, and investments, for example,
are described.
HG176 2006-045787 0-471-74503-0
Numerical methods in finance and economics; a
MATLAB-based introduction, 2d ed.
Brandimarte, Paolo. (Statistics in practice)
Wiley-Interscience, ©2006 669 p. $105.00
Bridging the gap between financial theory and computational practice,
Brandimarte (quantitative methods for finance and logistics, Politecnico
di Torino, Italy) provides a foundation in finance and numerical analysis,
offering background material for students from both engineering and
economics perspectives. Coverage of MATLAB is integrated throughout
the text, in order to illustrate the underlying algorithmic concepts in con-
crete terms and to give students practice solving finance problems such
as portfolio management and derivatives pricing. Appendices introduce
MATLAB programming and review probability theory and statistics. This
second edition offers in-depth treatment of Monte Carlo methods, a new
appendix on the algebraic language AMPL, a new chapter on binomial
and trinomial lattices, and new material on advanced optimization
methods.
HG177 0-9700455-6-5
The joy of fundraising; how to stop suffering and start
enjoying asking for money for your favorite cause.
Axelrod, Terry.
Benevon Publications, ©2006 112 p. $19.95
The concept of sustainability should apply to fundraising, according to
the CEO/founder of Benevon (formerly Raising More Money). That is,
nonprofits should direct their efforts to cultivating ongoing relationships
with donors (and their volunteers and boards) rather than one-time gifts.
Seattle-based Axelrod advocates a mindset emphasizing how to ask for
the abundant resources that are available rather than scrounging for sup-
posedly limited ones. She presents exercises and her website as a
resource.
HG178 2006-023643 978-1-56549-229-5
More pathways out of poverty.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sam Daley-Harris and Anna Awimbo.
Kumarian Press, ©2006 187 p. $23.95 (pa)
The Microcredit Summit Campaign, in the view of the editors (director
and research director of the Campaign respectively), leads the way
towards the end of global poverty by 2025. They present four papers that
consider issues related to achieving the goals of the Campaign. Topics
addressed include measurement tools for assessing movement across the
dollar a day poverty threshold, factors that contribute to exponential
growth in microfinance, steps for removing obstacles impeding the
supply of commercial capital to microfinance for the poor, and creating
domestic financial systems that facilitate microfinance for the poor.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HG178 2006-026415 978-1-56549-231-8
The poor always pay back; the Grameen II story.
Dowla, Asif and Dipal Barua.
Kumarian Press, ©2006 293 p. $21.95 (pa)
The original rules and methodology of the Grameen Bank—the
Bangladeshi microcredit institution founded in 1983 that won the 2006
Nobel Peace Prize together with its founder Muhammad Yunus—
underwent a period of transition in the late 1990s, incorporating such
features as (quoting Yunus from the foreword) “open-access savings,
flexible loan products, a range of deposit products attractive to savers,
self-reliance at the branch level, freedom from donor dependence for
funds, maintenance of the interest rate close to the commercial rate while
keeping each branch profitable from the second year of operation,
insurance products, a pension fund, education loans, loans geared to the
needs of beggars, total computerization of branch-level accounting and
MIS [management information systems], elimination of the staff’s
reliance on paperwork, and the uncoupling of microcredit from the myth
of group guarantee, joint liability, and legal instruments.” Here two
former students of Yunus, Dowla (economics, St. Mary’s College of
Maryland) and Barua (deputy managing director of Grameen Bank),
describe the transition to this new model of microcredit instituted at the
Grameen Bank, discussing both the reasoning behind it and the practi-
calities of its implementation.
HG178 2006-045423 978-0-8213-6615-8
Transforming microfinance institutions; providing full
financial services to the poor.
Ledgerwood, Joanna and Victoria White.
The World Bank, ©2006 517 p. $50.00 (pa)
One of the ways the microfinance industry can widen its reach beyond
its current scope, according to this book, is through the transformation
of nongovernmental microfinance providers into regulated deposit taking
institutions. Chief authors Ledgerwood (who has experience working
with USAID-funded microfinance organizations in Uganda and the
Philippines) and White (vice president of international operations,
ACCION International) offer a guide to this process, covering strategic
decisions of planning, marketing and competitive positioning, business
planning, funding structure, ownership and governance, and legal trans-
formation. They also look at the operational implications for human
resources management, financial management, management information
systems, internal control and audits, and customer service and opera-
tions. A case study of such transformation in Uganda is included.
HG179 2005-037437 978-1-57886-409-6
Financial success for young adults and recent graduates;
managing money, credit, and your future.
Arrowood, Janet C.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 318 p. $22.95 (pa)
Focusing on young adults from 16 to 25 years old, this volume explains
personal finance issues and introduces the fundamentals of topics such
as loans and credit cards, how to find money for college, savings pro-
grams, debt, insurance, and taxes. It also explains benefits, banking,
avoiding bankruptcy and other problems, job searches, and how invest-
ments work. Exercises, charts, and worksheets are included. There is no
index. Arrowood, a former financial advisor, develops training materials
for the field.
HG179 0-7897-3638-1
Quicken 2007; on demand.
Carrillo, Gina.
Que Publishing, ©2007 374 p. $29.99 (pa)
This book provides highly visual instruction on how to use the popular
personal accounting software. Each task is presented on one or two
facing pages with step-by- step textual instruction paired with computer
screen illustrations. Chapters cover set- up and installation, basics, home
page features, account management, personal financial analysis, man-
aging bills and transactions, paying bills, managing property and debt,
planning for the future, analyzing asset allocations and one’s portfolio,
working with reports, and managing tax information.
–140–
HG181 2005-036107 978-0-471-77173-9
A manager’s guide to strategic retirement plan
management.
Cassidy, Daniel.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 279 p. $49.95
As a widely-read specialist in retirement benefits planning, Cassidy
(Boston College) offers an accessible primer for retirement plan managers
in the context of current demographic, business, and pension trends and
portfolio theory. He provides guidance on hiring a consultant, a fiduciary
assessment tool, case studies, resources, and answers the question of: If
defined benefit plans are so great, why doesn’t Microsoft have one? The
appendices include sample requests for proposal for 401(k) savings plans,
a Morningstar, Inc. 401(k) investment performance review, a study to
plan income replacement needs, Vanguard Group guidelines for selecting
a default fund for a defined contribution fund, and a survey of non-
governmental organizations’ retirement plans.
HG181 2006-009919 978-0-393-06184-0
The money men; capitalism, democracy, and the Hundred
Years’ War over the American dollar.
Brands, H.W. (Enterprise series)
W.W. Norton, ©2006 239 p. $23.95
The conflict between equality and inequality, between democracy and
capitalism, has played out in much of American history in political
battles over the dollar, including whether it should be based on gold,
silver, or other standards; whether control over issuing dollars should be
in the hands of a central bank; and other related issues. Brands (history,
U. of Texas) examines this history by focusing on five individuals central
to these debates: Alexander Hamilton (1755-1757), the first Secretary of
the Treasury and champion of the idea of a national bank; Nicholas
Biddle (1786-1844), president of the Second Bank of the United States who
fought the “Bank War” with President Andrew Jackson; Jay Cooke (1821-
1905), the American financier whose bonds financed the Union during
the Civil War and, in the process, pioneered the use of price stabilization;
Jay Gould (1836-1892), who tried to corner the market in gold; and J. P.
Morgan (1837-1913), whose wealth prompted President Grover Cleveland
to turn to him in order to defend the credit of the United States.
HG186 2006-013153 0-7494-4243-3
How the city really works; the definitive guide to money
and investing in London’s square mile.
Davidson, Alexander.
Kogan Page Ltd., ©2006 238 p. $22.50 (pa)
In this accessible guide to London’s financial institutions, a financial
journalist/popular UK investment author explains how to navigate
Europe’s financial capital. Davidson provides global, historical, and reg-
ulatory context on its commercial banking and stock exchange trading
opportunities. Websites and further reading are listed. Depending on
one’s point of view, the interspersed ads (indexing is by advertiser) either
add or detract from the text. A city map would have been welcome.
HG187 2006-023145 978-0-8213-6743-8
East Asian finance; the road to robust markets.
Ghosh, Swati R.
The World Bank, ©2006 217 p. $35.00 (pa)
Aimed at a broad audience that includes policy makers, development
practitioners, and scholars, this report from the World Bank provides a
general overview of the financial markets in the East Asia region. Each
segment (i.e., banking, equity, bond markets) is analyzed in terms of
access, efficiency, and stability. Particular emphasis is placed on the
importance of strengthening risk management in financial institutions
across the financial segments. Additional papers on selected issues rel-
evant to East Asian finance are found on the accompanying CD-ROM.
HG221 2006-029476 978-0-313-33852-6
Money.
Dobeck, Mark F. and Euel Elliot. (Greenwood guides to business and
economics)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 228 p. $55.00
Dobeck (National Association of Schools of Public Affairs and
Administration) and Elliot (government, politics and political economy,
U. of Texas, Dallas) avoid the pitfalls of commenting on investments or
making predictions about financial markets and focus instead on
providing an integrated discussion of both historical development and
contemporary reality while discussing the historical, philosophical and
political-economic aspects of money, financial systems and globalization.
They examine the history and evolution of money, monetary policy and
central banks, financial institutions, currency and national sovereignty,
financial exchanges, technology, capital markets and bonds, the short-
term here and abroad, financial derivatives, risk management, regulation
and the world to come that goes beyond money.
–141–
HG3752 2006-045632 0-398-07672-3
How to do financial asset investigations; a practical guide
for private investigators, collections personnel, and asset
recovery specialists, 3d ed.
Mendell, Ronald L.
C.C. Thomas, ©2006 221 p. $54.95 (pa)
Mendell, a certified legal investigator and information systems security
professional, details research techniques for the investigation of financial
assets, with an emphasis on following the law and using public records
and internet resources. The use of data collection forms and computer
technology is explained, as well as tools for identifying, locating, and
assessing individual and business debtors’ assets and liabilities. Some
financial fraud schemes are mentioned, but the book does not detail
white-collar crime or embezzlements. New here is a discussion of identity
theft and techniques that keep in legislation in mind, with an emphasis
on using open sources and analytical methods to get the most infor-
mation. Intelligence-gathering techniques are detailed, and also explained
is how financial privacy provisions impact investigators, to encourage
compliance with the Graham-Leach-Billey Act of 1999. New electronic
and internet resources are included, and those of use to Canadian inves-
tigators are listed. Forms are supplied.
HG3755 2006-026889 1-932531-74-2
Smart debt; borrow wisely, live rich.
Rich, Jason R.
Entrepreneur Press, ©2007 191 p. $19.95 (pa)
The aptly named Mr. Rich (author of The Unofficial Guide to Starting a
Business Online) offers strategies to deal wisely with all aspects of money
management and consumer debt—including identity theft, words of
wisdom from a mortgage consultant, and several worksheets. The guide
includes a glossary and text references to other resources.
HG3853 2005-029727 978-0-471-78760-0
SAP foreign currency revaluation; FAS 52 and GAAP
requirements.
Finke, Susanne.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 197 p. $68.00
For people in the finance areas of organizations who are responsible for
foreign currency revaluation, Finke offers guidance primarily using the
SAP software, but also using general accounting principles and calcula-
tions. She covers US statutory requirements, business execution of cur-
rency revaluation in SAP, and the configuration of SAP currency
revaluation.
HG3881 2006-034735 978-0-8213-6847-3
Engaging with fragile states; an IEG review of World
Bank support to low-income countries under stress.
Carvalho, Soniya. (Independent Evaluation Group Study series)
The World Bank, ©2006 184 p. $20.00 (pa)
This report evaluates World Bank donor operations with regards to
fragile states (or Low-Income Countries Under Stress, LICUS, in Bank
parlance), “characterized by weak policies, institutions, and governance,”
and provides recommendations on how they can be improved. The
report judges that recent changes instituted by the Bank has helped it to
contribute to macroeconomic stability and deliver significant amounts of
physical infrastructure but has failed to pay adequate attention to long-
term reform agendas. Among the recommendations made by the report
are: the development of aid- allocation criteria, strengthening internal
Bank support for LICUS, and to reassess Bank performance towards
LICUS after three years.
HG4026 2005-037203 978-0-471-77083-1
CFO insights; enabling high performance through leading
practices for finance ERP.
Wulf, C. Cristian.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 290 p. $65.00
An executive with Accenture Finance & Performance Management
service line presents a new perspective on global Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP) with such software as Oracle, PeopleSoft, and SAP. He
argues that ERP program solutions end up affecting every aspect of
finance organizations, including their processes and structures. Other
contributors’ insights, case studies, and colorful diagrams add pizazz to
such topics as the CFO agenda, financial and management subprocesses,
and the foundation of a successful tax function. Wulf has an accounting
degree from the U. of Buenos Aires and MBA from the U. of Washington.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HG4026 2006-049791 978-0-273-70644-1
Corporate finance; principles & practice, 4th ed.
Watson, Denzil and Antony Head.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2007 506 p. $78.00 (pa)
The authors (both of Sheffield Hallam U., UK) of this textbook introduce
undergraduate students in business, accounting, and finance programs
to the core concepts and key topic areas of corporate finance. Chapters
cover the finance function; capital markets, market efficiency, and ratio
analysis; short-term finance and the management of working capital;
equity finance; debt finance, hybrid finance, and leasing; investment
appraisal methods and applications; portfolio theory and the capital
asset pricing model; the cost of capital and capital structure; dividend
policy; mergers and takeovers; risk management; and international
investment decisions. Pedagogical features include newspaper vignettes;
key point summaries, and self-test and review questions. Not distributed
in the US at this time.
HG4027 2006-031245 978-0-471-74166-4
Financial management for nonprofit organizations;
policies and practices.
Zietlow, John et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 590 p. $85.00
Does nonprofit accounting software now consider the Sarbanes-Oxley
Act? What kind of reports should your nonprofit prepare, and how
often? What are the primary causes of a cash crisis? This answers the
questions of organizations ranging in size from small agencies to large
institutions. Better yet, it offers a framework of financial operation that
meets standards and is suitable for boards and managers with limited
experience in nonprofit finance. The authors, who count academia and
successful consulting in their credits, stick to the practical as they
describe how nonprofit finances work and describe understanding the
basics of accounting and financial statements, financing to meet mis-
sions and strategies, building in ethics and accountability in financial
policies, building budgets and developing reports, planning for the long
term, working with the bank and managing cash, handling risk and
investment, tackling technology, capitalizing on human resources and
performing assessments.
HG4027 2006-015227 978-0-7591-0988-9
Financing nonprofits; putting theory into practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis R. Young.
AltaMira Press, ©2006 428 p. $85.00
Eleven American academics contribute 15 chapters examining which
combinations of income best support the performance of a nonprofit
organization seeking to address a given social mission in a particular set
of circumstances. Coverage includes distinct sources of income that can
support nonprofit operations—individual giving, institutional philan-
thropy, government funding, fee income and commercial ventures, mem-
bership income, investment income, and volunteer resources—and the
circumstances under which each is appropriate; sources of capital for
nonprofit organizational development and programming, including col-
laboration and barter, gifts-in-kind and other illiquid assets, and bor-
rowing and debt; and overall portfolio and performance issues such as
managing endowment and other assets, income portfolios, and meas-
uring financial health and vulnerability.
HG4521 2006-011146 978-1-4221-0101-8
The new capitalists; how citizen investors are reshaping
the corporate agenda.
Davis, Stephen M. et al.
Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2006 288 p. $29.95
Davis (president, Davis Global Advisers Inc., an adviser on international
corporate governance), Lukomnik (managing partner, Sinclair Capital
LLC), and Pitt-Watson (former chief executive, Hermes Focus Asset
Management, “Europe’s leading shareholder activist fund manager)
argue that within corporate capitalism a new civil economy is arising in
which vast numbers of ordinary pensioners, mutual fund investors, and
small shareholders are quickly becoming the true owners of major cor-
porations. In this new environment, investment funds are acting in the
interests of their grassroots savers, compelling corporate boards and exec-
utives to behave with more financial accountability and social responsi-
bility. In this book, they offer guidance to corporate officers, investment
managers, and investors on how to navigate this emerging civil economy.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HG4521 2006-009655 0-13-172129-1
Opportunity investing; how to profit when stocks
advance, stocks decline, inflation runs rampant, prices
fall, oil prices hit the roof,... and every time in between.
Appel, Gerald.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2007 350 p. $24.99
Appel is head of an investment advisory firm, has written numerous
books and articles on investment strategies, and has appeared on tele-
vision and radio. He offers a text to help investors make the most of
opportunities within and outside of the U.S., including both typical
avenues—stocks, bonds, mutual funds, and money market instruments—
and areas with which most investors remain less familiar—commodities,
overseas bonds, foreign stocks, real estate-related instruments, and invest-
ments in developing countries. The text is designed to benefit readers
with limited inclination/time to monitor their investments and for
investors who are willing to give additional time and effort into their
investment programs.
HG4529 2006-049133 1-58488-647-1
Structured credit portfolio analysis, baskets and CDOs.
Bluhm, Christian and Ludger Overbeck. (Chapman & Hall/CRC
financial mathematics series; 5)
Chapman & Hall/CRC, ©2007 357 p. $79.95
This volume covers the topic of mathematical approaches for modeling
structured products that are credit-linked to an underlying portfolio of
credit-risky instruments. The authors do not present all the modeling
approaches, but concepts they found useful in their own work. It is
written from the perspective of practitioners who apply mathematical
concepts to structured credit products. The authors begin with an
overview of credit risk modeling, then discuss the modeling of basket
products and collateralized debt obligations (CDOs). Some knowledge of
probability theory, stochastic processes, and credit risk modeling is
assumed. Bluhm works in credit portfolio management in Switzerland,
and Overbeck is a professor of mathematics at the U. of Giessen,
Germany, and works in portfolio analysis and pricing.
HG4538 92-1-112703-3
World investment report, 2006; FDI from developing and
transition economies, implications for development. (CD-
ROM included)
Title main entry. United Nations Conference on Trade and
Development.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 340 p. $80.00 (pa)
This year’s World Investment Report from the United Nations Conference
on Trade and Development focuses on the emerging role of developing
and transition countries as sources of foreign direct investment. It
describes global and regional trends related to these developments and
examines policies for source and host countries for managing direct
investment flows. The report also contains a statistical annex on recent
foreign direct investment. The CD-ROM appears to contain an electronic
version of the report.
HG4551 2006-024285 978-1-57660-238-6
Mapping the markets; a guide to stockmarket analysis.
Owen, Deborah and Robin Griffiths.
Bloomberg Press, ©2006 134 p. $27.50
Owen and Griffiths provide investors with an examination of how cycle
theory links the disciplines of fundamental analysis and technical
analysis, and how it can be used to navigate successfully through the
changing global economic landscape. Coverage includes tools for
mapping the markets; long-term cyclical drivers; factors that can precip-
itate downward phases of the cycle; and how cycle theory can be used
to anticipate which markets and sectors will benefit from the changing
economic landscape in the coming years. Owen is with Investment
Research of Cambridge; founded in 1945, it is one of the first companies
in the UK to specialize in technically-based research. Griffiths has
worked in the financial markets since 1964, and is currently with
Rathbones, a leading UK investment firm.
–142–
HG4551 2006-029484 978-0-313-33824-3
The stock market.
Hafer, Rik W. and Scott E. Hein. (Greenwood guides to business and
economics)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 140 p. $55.00
One of a seven-volume set intended to promote economic literacy
amongst a general readership; this work presents an overview of the
history and basic operations of the stock market. Hafer (economics and
finance, Southern Illinois U.) and Hein (management and finance, Texas
Tech U.) present chapters describing the development of the US stock
market, discussing the role of stocks in the modern economy, examining
different types of stock trades and instruments, introducing the topic of
regulation, and surveying some foreign stock market developments.
HG4637 2006-019367 978-0-13-038556-7
Trading catalysts; how events move markets and create
trading opportunities.
Webb, Robert I.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2007 336 p. $39.99
Webb (financial trading, University of Virginia) explains how natural dis-
asters, such as storms and epidemics, as well as human events, such as
elections and terrorism, can influence prices in financial markets. He
shows how understanding these trading catalysts can give traders an
edge in anticipating the market’s reaction to events. Webb uses real
market examples, with moment-by-moment details of changes in market
prices, to illustrate the speed, duration, direction, and intensity of the
effects of various trading catalysts on market prices.
HG5160 2006-028046 978-0-8047-5719-5
Emerging capital markets and globalization; the Latin
American perspective.
Torre, Augusto de la and Sergio L. Schumukler.
The World Bank, ©2007 209 p. $30.00 (pa)
The authors (both of the World Bank) take stock of the development of
local securities markets in Latin America through discussion of the his-
torical development of markets, empirical questions, and policy issues.
The authors seek to explain the relatively shallow development of local
capital markets and their high degree of financial integration in global
markets in reference to such potential reasons as differences in savings
rates, degrees of macroeconomic volatility, degrees of “home bias,” and
time zones, to name a view. When discussing policy issues, the pay par-
ticular attention to the internationalization of stock markets, local cur-
rency debt markets, and market access for small and medium
enterprises. Co-published by Stanford U. Press.
HG5430 978-92-9137-311-6
Business guide to trade remedies in the European
community; anti-dumping, anti-subsidy and safeguards
legislation, practices and procedures.
Title main entry.
International Trade Centre, ©2005 215 p. $50.00 (pa)
This is a revised edition of a 2004 work; it is published by the
International Trade Centre, which is the technical cooperation agency of
the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development and the World
Trade Organization. Focusing on the European Community and its
responsibilities under WTO agreements, this report addresses anti-
dumping and anti-subsidy rules. It specifically considers the use of trade
remedies, procedural aspects, substantive elements, and emergency
actions against imports safeguards. Since the book is meant to be of aid
to business managers (especially those in developing countries and tran-
sitional economies), the emphasis is on practical definitions, problems,
and recommendations. There is no index.
HG6024 2006-048420 978-1-57660-236-2
The credit default swap basis.
Choudhry, Moorad.
Bloomberg Press, ©2006 194 p. $50.00
Choudhry (economics, London Metropolitan U.; U. of Reading; Case
Business School) offers an overview of the credit default swap (CDS)
basis—the relationship between the cash and synthetic credit markets.
Coverage includes background to the CDS itself, reasons why synthetic
and cash prices differ, the latest developments and most effective
approach to calculate the basis, and how to trade the basis. Concepts are
illustrated with real-world examples of positive and negative basis arbi-
trage trades. The text offers financial professionals an understanding of
the drivers of the basis designed to help them better undertake
investment and relative value analysis.
–143–
HG6024 2006-050101 978-0-273-70978-7
Mastering derivatives markets; a step-by-step guide to the
products, applications and risks, 3d ed.
Taylor, Francesca.
Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2007 426 p. $92.50 (pa)
This resource for students and practitioners provides comprehensive cov-
erage of the derivatives markets. After a review of fundamental concepts,
consultant and trainer Taylor (Taylor Associates, UK) goes on to discuss
option pricing, interest rate derivatives, and credit derivatives. Other
topics include (for example) using equity derivatives to create attractive
investment products for personal investors, and using derivatives in
hedge funds. Accounting principles are addressed in the final chapter.
This book is currently not distributed in the U.S.
HG6042 2006-06379 0-324-25963-8
An applied course in real options valuation.
Shockley, Richard L.
South-Western College Pub., ©2007 523 p. $80.95
This textbook for MBA students, advanced undergraduates, and prac-
ticing managers uses a series of examples and case studies to demon-
strate the use of option pricing in capital budgeting processes. Shockley
(Indiana U.) begins with a rather lengthy review of valuation and then
turns his attention to real-world applications. A state price approach is
employed throughout. It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the
basics of corporate capital budgeting.
HG6042 2006-295357 978-0-470-01684-8
Exotic option pricing and advanced Lévy models.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andreas Kyprianou et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2005 320 p. $160.00
At the same time as exotic derivatives are gaining increasing importance
as financial instruments has come a growing recognition that the short-
falls of the classical Black-Scholes model of the market for an equity (in
which equity’s price is a stochastic process) requires the adoption Lévy
processes that allow the capture of distributional characteristics in the
stock returns such as semi-heavy tails and asymmetry, among other
mathematical advances. Together these developments pose a number of
new mathematical challenges, note editors Kyprianou (mathematics and
statistics, Heriot Watt U., UK), Schoutens (mathematics, Catholic U. of
Leuven, Belgium), and Wilmott (PhD, mathematics), who present 14
papers exploring these issues. Specific topics include Lévy processes in
distinguished by their coarse and fine path properties, simulation
methods with Lévy processes, a pure jump perspective on risks in
returns, model risk for exotic and moments derivatives, symmetries and
pricing of exotic options in Lévy models, static hedging of Asian options
under stochastic volatility using fast Fourier transform, impact of market
crises on real options, moment derivatives and Lévy-type market com-
pletion, pricing perpetual American options driven b spectrally one-sided
Lévy processes, and the spread option optimal stopping game.
HG8781 2006-045558 978-1-58488-586-3
Actuarial models; the mathematics of insurance.
Rotar, Vladimir I.
Chapman & Hall/CRC, ©2007 633 p. $89.95
This textbook has been written to introduce the basic mathematical
models of insurance processes, as well as to present some mathematical
setups and methods used in Actuarial Modeling. Chapters discuss com-
parison of random variables and preferences of individuals; an indi-
vidual risk model for a short period; conditional expectations; a collective
risk model for a short period; counting and compound processes, Markov
chains, and modeling claim and cash flows; Brownian motion and mar-
tingales; global characteristics of the surplus process, ruin models, and
models with paying dividends; survival distributions; life insurance
models; annuity models; premiums and reserves; and risk exchange
(reinsurance and coinsurance). The prerequisites for the text are two
semesters of calculus and one upper division course in probability for
undergraduate students.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HG8790 2006-048571 978-0-8213-6666-0
Developing annuities markets; the experience of Chile.
Rocha, Roberto and Craig Thorburn. (Directions in development.
Finance)
The World Bank, ©2007 251 p. $30.00 (pa)
Given Chile’s early experience with pension plan privatization, argues
this World Bank report, it provides an opportunity to assess successes
and failures in developing annuities markets that can serve to provide
income streams for 40 years or more. It argues that the Chilean expe-
rience shows the feasibility of developing a retirement annuities market
from a low initial base. The report finds that a liberal approach to
product regulation is recommended, with some exceptions, such as the
strict capital regulations Chile imposed on providers, which is thought to
be responsible for enabling the early buildup of a strong capital buffer.
Co-published by Stanford U. Press and the World Bank.
HG9396 2006-024193 978-0-8144-7384-9
Ensuring fairness in health care coverage; an employer’s
guide to making good decisions on tough issues.
Wynia, Matthew K. and Abraham P. Schwab.
AMACOM, ©2007 225 p. $29.95
For businesses, Wynia (U. of Chicago) and Schwab (philosophy, Brooklyn
College), who were both associated with the Institute for Ethics at the
American Medical Association, discuss research from its Ethical Force
Program about fairness in healthcare coverage for employees. Also
involved in the discussion were focus groups with employers, insurance
brokers, and human resources consultants, and health plans, employers,
unions, doctors, nurses, and patient groups who contributed ideas on the
ethics of health care coverage. This volume describes applications of the
principles published in the 2003 consensus report Ensuring Fairness in
Health Care Coverage Decisions. The authors detail “Ethical Guideposts,”
which revolve around coverage decisions being transparent, partici-
patory, consistent, sensitive to value, and compassionate. Real-world cases
are used as examples.
HJ197 2005-057765 978-0-8213-6492-5
Intergovernmental fiscal transfers; principles and
practices.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robin Boadway and Anwar Shah. (Public
sector, governance, and accountability series)
The World Bank, ©2007 572 p. $35.00 (pa)
Since sub-national governmental bodies are almost always financially
dependent on the larger national government, inter-governmental
transfers of finance are an important aspect of a country’s political
economy that can also be utilized to serve wider policy goals, according
to Boadway (economic theory, Queen’s U., Ontario, Canada) and Shah
(Public Sector Governance Program of the World Bank Institute,
Washington, DC, US). In this volume, they present 13 contributions that
explore these theoretical principles and real- world practices of intergov-
ernmental financial transfers. Topics addressed in the section on prin-
ciples include equity and efficiency aspects of interagency transfers in a
multigovernment framework, achieving economic stabilization by
sharing risk within countries, grants and soft budget constraints, the
political economy of interregional grants, and the incentive effects of
grants. The more empirical chapters include exploration of legal archi-
tectures; institutional arrangements; issues in tax sharing; macro for-
mulas for fiscal equalization; financing capital expenditures through
grants; and grants to large metropolitan, small urban, and rural local
governments.
HJ257 2006-019777 978-0-7425-5190-9
Building prosperity; why Ronald Reagan and the
founding fathers were right on the economy.
Heck, Gene W.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 257 p. $29.95
Heck (“a senior business development economist operating in Saudi
Arabia and throughout the Middle East” and former official with the US
Departments of State and Treasury) argues that one of the most signif-
icant factors in the rise and fall of nation-states has been the bureaucratic
excess of direct taxation and regulation. Selecting examples from “two
millennia of economic history,” he seeks to demonstrate that the gov-
erning convictions allegedly shared by the Founding Fathers and Ronald
Reagan, fear of taxation and regulation, are the proper convictions for
unleashing the profit motive and for gathering government revenues that
can be used to invest in education and technology.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HJ2053 2006-018358 0-275-98013-8
Budgeting in the states; institutions, processes, and
politics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edward J. Clynch and Thomas P. Lauth.
Praeger, ©2006 324 p. $194.00
A good way to take the pulse of a state’s priorities and its political, demo-
graphic, and economic trends is to look at its budget. Clynch (political
science and public administration, Mississippi State U.) and Lauth (public
and international affairs, U. of Georgia) introduce 16 chapters examining
the contentious process involved in budget and policy-making. Building
on the framework they presented in Governors, Legislatures and Budgets:
Diversity Across the American States (1991), they overcome deficits in both
aggregated data and single-state studies by presenting in-depth, single-
state studies developed within a common framework and timeframe. To
the mix of gubernatorial and legislative authority, they add the compli-
cating factors of political party controls, court decisions, voter initiatives,
and “rational” budget reforms instituted by most states.
HJ7892 2006-414511 984-05-1767-8
Who gets what, a gender analysis of public expenditure
in Bangladesh.
Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara Evers and Kaniz Siddique.
University Press Limited, ©2006 360 p. $50.00
This study by Evers (director, Women Working Worldwide, a UK-based
network of NGOs) and Siddique (North South U., Bangladesh) provides
gender analysis of past national budgets of Bangladesh (2000-2003),
focusing on agriculture and water resources, education, general admin-
istration, and health and nutrition. Rather than seek to identify “gender-
benefit from budget,” they concentrate on identification of “gender of the
first receiver of public services.” Following presentation of their findings,
they make recommendations and identify monitoring criteria for relevant
ministries to incorporate gender analysis into their budgeting process.
SOCIOLOGY
HM545 2006-049917 978-0-202-30859-3
Closed systems and open minds; the limits of naïvety in
social anthropology. (reprint, 1964)
Title main entry. Ed. by Max Gluckman.
AldineTransaction, ©2007 274 p. $29.95 (pa)
Seven essays written by members and former members of the social
anthropology and sociology department at the University of Manchester
during 1957-58 explore common features in the methodology they had
used to explore not only traditional areas such as African and Indian vil-
lages, but also factories, villages, and other fields of social relationship in
Britain. A recurring concern is the basic assumptions that social anthro-
pologists carry to their work. The anthology was first published in 1964
by Aldine Publishing, Chicago.
HM548 2006-001276 978-1-4051-5529-8
Talcott Parsons; economic sociologist of the 20th century.
Parsons, Talcott. Ed. by Laurence S. Moss and Andrew Savchenko.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2005 226 p. $64.00
Talcott Parsons (1902-1979) was an influential American sociologist
whose work, related but not reducible to functionalism, sought an over-
arching grand theory for the social sciences. One of his noteworthy the-
oretical contributions in pursuit of this goal was his proposed AGIL
paradigm, which holds that societal action systems are composed of four
interrelated and interpenetrating subsystems: the behavioral systems of
its members (A), the personality systems of those members (G), the
society as a system of social organization (I) and the cultural system of
that society (L). This volume opens with a transcript of a March 20, 1973
Brown University seminar in which Parsons answered questions
regarding his ideas and his influences, followed by three contemporary
responses to the seminar. Five contemporary papers that either are about
Parsons and his work or represent research “in the tradition of Parsons”
complement these materials.
–144–
HM571 2001-271045 1-4129-2244-5
Interpreting qualitative data; methods for analyzing talk,
text and interaction, 3d ed.
Silverman, David.
Sage Publications, ©2006 428 p. $125.00
For undergraduates, this interdisciplinary social science text approaches
the topic of qualitative research using social theory as the basis of social
research and emphasizing the relevance of credibility and data over
open-ended interviews. Exercises are included with the descriptions of
methodologies, such as those involving ethnography, interviews, and
visual images. This edition focuses on practical skills needed to do small
amounts of qualitative research. All chapters have been updated and two
new ones—on ethics and writing up a project—are added. Chapter layout
has also been changed. Both subject and author indexes are supplied.
Silverman sees this volume as a companion to his book Doing Qualitative
Research, intended for graduate level research projects.
HM571 2006-014042 978-1-4129-2597-6
Introduction to action research; social research for social
change, 2d ed.
Greenwood, Davydd J. and Morten Levin.
Sage Publications, ©2007 301 p. $44.95 (pa)
Greenwood (Cornell U.) and Levin’s (Norwegian U. of Science and
Technology) textbook combines an introduction to the intellectual, scien-
tific, and political economic foundations of action research (AR) with a
brief survey of the major variants of AR. Restructured and updated
throughout, the second edition includes two new chapters on the current
debates on AR as tradition or as its own methodology, and examining
how AR takes shape in the university environment. For advanced under-
graduate and graduate courses in action research, social research, and
qualitative research in the social sciences, education, and management.
HM585 2006-018379 1-4129-1608-9
21st century sociology; a reference handbook; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Clifton D. Bryant and Dennis L. Peck.
Sage Publications, ©2007 1296 p. $295.00
The intent of Bryant (Virginia Polytechnic U.) and Peck (U. of Alabama)
in presenting this two-volume reference work is to provide readers with
a broad survey of the main specialty areas within international sociology
as it is presently constituted. They have gathered 106 articles reviewing
different subfields, methodological approaches, schools of thought, and
areas of study. The chapters in the first volume are grouped in sections
covering the development of sociology as a discipline, international per-
spectives, scientific approaches to sociology, the fabric of social life, social
aggregations, social distinctions and diversity, social institutions, societal
problems and disaffections, locality and social life, the quantification of
social life, collective behavior and social movements, and social dynamics
and change. The second volume contains sections dealing with nontradi-
tional perspectives, theory, and methodology; the sociology of the self; the
sociology of the life course; the sociology of normative behavior; creative
behavior; macrolevel issues (sociologies of mental health, technology, vio-
lence, the environment, etc.); and applied and interdisciplinary uses of
sociology. For each chapter, authors have been asked to review the his-
torical development of their particular area, summarize the current state
of knowledge, and suggest future research directions.
HM585 2005-030933 1-4129-1362-4
Contemporary social and sociological theory; visualizing
social worlds.
Allan, Kenneth.
Sage Publications, ©2006 455 p. $59.95
Unlike classic sociological textbooks, this one emphasizes the symbolic
interaction view of people as agents of free will and choice rather than
focusing primarily on structure, i.e, patterns of behavior. Allan (sociology,
U. of North Carolina at Greensboro) introduces the “post-thinking” (e.g.,
postcolonalism) that characterizes contemporary theorists such as
Anthony Giddons and Michael Foucault who are critical of modernist
theories based on the ideas of Durkheim, Marx, and other classic
thinkers. As aids to navigating this sometimes dense conceptual world,
chapters include biographies, interesting experience-based applications,
and a “building your toolbox” feature.
–145–
HM585 2006-020316 978-0-8047-4998-5
On sociology, 2d ed.; v.1: Critique and program.
Goldthorpe, John H. (Studies in social inequality)
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 295 p. $24.95 (pa)
Goldthorpe (Nuffield College, Oxford U.) provides a collection (in two
volumes, of which this is volume 1) of his essays on the current state of
sociology, arguing that it is in a state of “disarray.” This first volume con-
tains critical and programmatic essays concerning methodological
problems in different styles of sociological work, emphasizing the need
for a common “logic of inference” as a foundation for qualitative and
quantitative work. He discusses historical sociology, case-oriented
approaches in comparative macrosociology, and sociological ethnog-
raphy, and in the programmatic essays, describes the elements that he
argues should emerge in new mainstream sociology, such as Rational
Action Theory. Chapters were originally published in the journals British
Journal of Sociology, Comparative Social Research, West European Politics,
and European Sociological Review, between 1991 and 2002. This edition
has been revised to include more references and cross-referencing
between chapters.
HM585 2006-279984 978-0-393-92700-9
Readings for sociology, 5th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Garth Massey.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 512 p. $23.50 (pa)
This collection of 51 popular and academic articles and book excerpts
includes selections on the study of sociology ranging from a Durkheim
classic to a guide to being better consumers of statistics and a cautionary
tale on ethics. General topics include how the individual and culture
work in society, the structure of power, social institutions and social
change with articles covering such diverse issues as welfare, optional eth-
nicities, race, cultural transition, ritualization, assimilation, upward
mobility, the underclass, unseen social control and the standardization of
lives, religion, shared paternity, the conflict of work and family, jihad,
grassroots activism and environmentalism. This edition includes updated
articles and more material on racial inequality and globalization.
HM586 2006-931368 978-0-7575-3162-0
Sociological inquiry, 9th ed.
Mahmoudi, Kooros M. and Bradley W. Parlin.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2007 133 p. $26.95 (pa)
As with earlier editions, the goal of this anthology is “to present readable
and provocative articles that deal with important themes within the
study of sociology,” to quote editors Mahmoudi (Northern Arizona U.)
and Parlin (Utah State U.). They present 15 readings, many of them
classics of the literature, in sections devoted to culture and socialization;
social structure and deviance; and social change, population, envi-
ronment, and globalization. The volume adopts a “problems” orientation
towards introductory sociology.
HM586 2006-025247 1-4129-1409-4
The social lens; an invitation to social and sociological
theory.
Allan, Kenneth.
Sage Publications, ©2007 605 p. $125.00
This textbook for advanced undergraduate and graduate students in
social theory discusses the work of theorists such as Karl Marx, Max
Weber, Émile Durkheim, Charlotte Perkins Gilman, W.E.B. Du Bois,
Jürgen Habermas, Anthony Giddens, Pierre Bourdieu, Michel Foucault,
Jean Baudrillard, and others. Chapters are devoted to a few theorists and
schools of thought and move from the nineteenth century to the present.
Allan (sociology, U. of North Carolina at Greensboro), who writes in a
conversational tone, lets the theories speak for themselves and avoids too
much critique of them.
HM586 2006-004952 978-0-7619-2801-0
Sociological theory in the contemporary era; text and
readings.
Appelrouth, Scott and Laura Desfor Edles.
Sage Publications, ©2007 667 p. $64.95 (pa)
For advanced undergraduate and graduate students studying sociological
theory, this text provides readings by core contemporary theorists along
with a historical and theoretical framework and their contemporary
relevance. Applerouth and Edles (both from the sociology department at
California State U., Northridge) teach courses using only original texts,
and so include those here, with their interpretations and explanations.
The book serves as a reader and a textbook, and incorporates an
overarching theoretical framework to understand, compare, and contrast
the readings. Selections included are by theorists such as Max
Horkheimer, Theodor Adorno, Erving Goffman, Judith Butler, Patricia
Hill Collins, Michel Foucault, Pierre Bourdieu, Jürgen Habermas, and
Edward Said. Biographical sketches are incorporated.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HM621 0-8264-6073-9
Michel de Certeau; analysing culture.
Highmore, Ben.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 188 p. $29.95 (pa)
Making a compelling case for the importance of de Certeau to the field
of cultural studies, Highmore (cultural studies, U. of the West of England,
Bristol) explores those aspects of de Certeau’s work that both challenge
and re-imagine cultural studies, highlighting the potential this work has
for supplying a critical epistemology and a practical ethics for the study
of culture within the arts and humanities more generally.
HM636 2006-009524 978-0-7546-4726-3
Body/embodiment; symbolic interaction and the sociology
of the body.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis Waskul and Phillip Vannini.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 297 p. $84.95
The body is not just an artifact but actually a many-chambered vessel of
great significance to the individual and society; body, self and social
interaction are intimately interrelated and constantly reconfigured. Using
empirical evidence and armed with symbolic interactionism as explored
by John Dewey, William James, Charles Pierce, Charles Copley and
George Herbert Mead, contributors explore the sociology of the body in
terms of its reflexivity, drama, phenomenology, place in the culture, and
function as a form of narrative. papers cover such topics as visibility and
invisibility in chronic illness and disability, embodied enactment and
experience, managing disabilities and the precariousness of the territories
of the self, performance, the body in interpretive sociology, human-horse
interaction, the addict’s body, the dualism of body image, food
metaphors and the black body, masculinity and pregnancy.
HM665 2006-367282 1-55111-748-7
Moral issues in global perspective, 2d ed.; v.2: Human
diversity and equality.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christine M. Koggel.
Broadview Press, ©2006 395 p. $28.95 (pa)
This is the second of a three-volume set of textbooks that explore moral
and ethical issues of a globalizing world. Editor Koggel (philosophy, Bryn
Mawr College) has made an effort to include perspectives forged in the
tradition of Western liberalism as well as perspectives from outside that
tradition. Whereas the first volume dealt with central concepts and the-
ories of morality and the last volume addresses the relationship between
the individual and society, this volume focuses on moral issues raised by
acknowledgment of diversity and difference among human beings.
Thirty essays are included in sections covering overarching theories and
critical analysis, race and ethnicity, gender, sexual orientation, disability,
and poverty and welfare. Koggel includes an introduction to each section,
as well as study questions and suggested readings.
HM665 2006-279538 0-7456-3596-2
Transpositions; on nomadic ethics.
Braidotti, Rosi.
Polity Press, ©2006 307 p. $24.95 (pa)
Braidotti (humanities, Utrecht U., the Netherlands) addresses the ethical
temperature or fiber of the technologically driven historical phase of
advanced capitalism that characterizes post-industrial societies. Times
have stopped a-changing, she worries, and the desire for social justice
and progressive transformation seems to be dwindling. Among her per-
spectives are universalism, relocating blackness and whiteness, beyond
animal rights, memory and the imagination, and whatever gets you
through the day. Distributed in the US by Blackwell Publishing.
HM671 2006-018858 978-1-55620-264-3
Counseling for social justice, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Courtland C. Lee.
American Counseling Assn., ©2007 285 p. $47.95 (pa)
Lee (Counselor Education Program, University of Maryland) addresses
social justice and its role in the counseling profession. Contributors
examine the social, cultural, and economic systems that perpetuate
inequality, and look at ideas for promoting social justice among histori-
cally marginalized or oppressed groups. They examine professional
issues that must be considered when social justice becomes integrated
with counseling practice, such as the fair use of assessment, conducting
research with a social justice emphasis, and training counselors in social
justice.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HM671 1-889680-52-4
Social justice; its theory and practice; proceedings; v.79.
American Catholic Philosophical Association (2005) Ed. by Michael
Baur.
Philosophy Documentation Ctr., ©2006 309 p. $30.00 (pa)
This proceedings volume contains the text of addresses and presentations
made at the 2005 conference of the American Catholic Philosophical
Association. The theory and practice of social justice was the central
theme. Just a few of the topics explored: strict just war theory and con-
ditional pacifism; Thomas Aquinas and nonreductive physicalism; and
the concept of work in Maria Montessori and Karl Marx. Minutes of the
2005 Executive Council Meeting and various financial statements and
reports follow the papers. The volume is not indexed.
HM686 2006-021486 978-1-59385-332-7
Handbook of socialization; theory and research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joan E. Grusec and Paul D. Hastings.
Guilford Pr., ©2007 720 p. $85.00
This reference for researchers and advanced students in developmental
psychology summarizes the various theoretical and empirical approaches
to socialization. The first chapter traces the history of socialization
research and theory. The remaining 25 contributions from leading aca-
demics and researchers discuss such topics as evidence from behavioral
genetics for environmental contributions to antisocial conduct; social-
ization in the context of family diversity; and children’s development of
cultural repertoires through participation in everyday routines and prac-
tices. Editor Grusec teaches psychology at the U. of Toronto, and Hastings
at Concordia U. in Montreal.
HM716 2006-007630 978-0-7546-4573-3
Rights, groups, and self-invention; group-differentiated
rights in liberal theory.
Mitnick, Eric J.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 221 p. $99.95
Mitnick (Thomas Jefferson School of Law, US) examines the practice of
affording legal rights to individuals on the basis of their social or cul-
tural group membership. Most cases involve minority ethnic, racial,
gender, or religious groups, he says, but in fact citizenship itself exists as
a group-differentiated status, so rights pertaining exclusively to citizens
fall within the category of group-differentiated rights. He focuses on the
form of the right rather than on the type of group in question, using per-
spectives from analytical and constitutive theory.
HM751 2006-028743 978-0-7879-8727-5
Making questions work; a guide to what and how to ask
for facilitators, consultants, managers, coaches, and
educators.
Strachan, Dorothy.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 245 p. $40.00 (pa)
This resource for facilitators, managers, and others who lead group
decision-making processes offers practical suggestions for identifying the
right questions to ask and understanding when and how to ask them.
The first few chapters provide a general introduction to effective ques-
tioning. These are followed by some 1800 sample questions, which are
organized by context (i.e., “Questions for Opening a Session” and
“Questions for Enabling Action”) into five chapters. Strachan is an expe-
rienced professional facilitator.
HM826 2004-061455 1-84064-897-X
Institutions, globalisation and empowerment.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kartik Roy and Jorn Sideras.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 344 p. $135.00
In concordance with those who argue that without appropriate
institutions and proper inter-relationship between them, resources and
policies aimed at economic development will be frustrated, Roy
(economics, U. of Queensland, Australia) and Sideras (director, Centre for
International and Political Economy Research, Greece) present 14 papers
that explore conceptual issues of the relationships between institutions,
globalization, and economic empowerment and discuss the empirical
evidence. Conceptual topics include what type of institutions are
necessary for high-quality growth; the effects of the interaction of formal
and informal institutions on social stability and economic development;
and issues of globalization, democracy, and citizen’s sovereignty. The
empirical studies discuss dollarization as a solution to corruption,
German unification and the German social market economy, the reaction
of Russian institutions to liberalizing reform, institutional deterrents to
the empowerment of women in Kenya, the World Trade Organization
and the dangers of privatization in Saudi Arabia, institutional
impediments to women’s empowerment in rural India, estate taxes and
family-run firms in China and Taiwan, and globalization and
institutional change in the Australian labor market.
–146–
HM831 2005-032615 0-8018-8423-3
Global social change; historical and comparative
perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher Chase-Dunn and Salvatore J.
Babones.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 371 p. $55.00
These 16 popular and scholarly papers cover the definition of global-
ization in terms of global social change in the long run, competing con-
ceptions of globalization and a world systems perspective. They analyze
global inequality in the long term, describe accumulation as an ecological
process and examine the relationship among global social change,
natural resource consumption and environmental degradation. They
focus on spatial and other “fixes” of historical capitalism and compare
contemporary intracore relations with world-systems theory, explore
female labor and women’s mobilization, environmentalism and the anti-
corporate globalization movement, and comment on national and global
foundations of global civil society. They close by analyzing the future of
democracy, transnational social movements and democratic socialist
parties on the periphery.
HM841 2006-049062 90-04-15143-5
Social change in the age of globalization.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jing Tiankui et al. (International institute of
sociology; v.10)
BRILL, ©2006 288 p. $99.00
Delaying for a year because of the SARS epidemic, the International
Institute of Sociology held its 36th World Congress in Beijing in July 2004.
The 18 papers presented here, from the six plenary sessions, explore such
topics as the radical changes of Chinese society and the stable progress
of Chinese sociology, globalization from a sociological angle, dimensions
and patterns of inequalities in the world, protecting the rights of
children, why and how social transformation occurs in Korea, and
forming the new human cooperative mechanism under globalization.
They are not indexed.
HM851 2006-034894 978-0-8204-8885-1
Cybermapping and the writing of myth.
Jahshan, Paul.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 189 p. $64.95
Jahshan (American studies, Notre Dame U. in Lebanon) utilizes critical
theory to venture beyond ephemeral or technical mappings of cyberspace
to formulate long-term models of the new virtual world. Steering a
middle course between technophobes and technophiles, he traces the
history of cyberspace and assesses how this mythical space manifests
itself through the writings of such wide-ranging influences as mythol-
ogist Joseph Campbell, postmodern philosopher Pierre Lévy, and science
fiction writer William Gibson. The author concludes with reflections on
whether mapping of cyberspace represents a byproduct of the new tech-
nologies (with hackers as its myth-builders), a valid means of exploring
collective myths, or an advance in human evolution. An index would
have been helpful.
HM851 2006-023714 978-0-7879-8444-1
Momentum; igniting social change in the connected age.
Fine, Allison H.
Jossey-Bass, ©2006 220 p. $27.95
Fine (founder of Innovation Network, Inc.) contends that in the new
“Connected Age,” communications and other technologies will become
increasingly important as a tool of social activism. She first offers an
introduction to what she has dubbed the “Connected Age” and explains
how self-determination and social media are the major component parts
of “connected activism.” She then presents her thoughts on how thinking
about leadership, fundraising, and measuring results needs to be
changed in order to take full advantage of the possibilities of social
activism in the “Connected Age.”
HM851 2006-275727 978-0-7432-8705-0
No place to hide.
O’Harrow, Robert.
Free Press, ©2006 352 p. $15.00 (pa)
An award-winning reporter for The Washington Post, O’Harrow reviews
some of the surveillance and identification technologies and procedures
now being used by corporations and governments against the American
people. He begins with the flood of measures adopted during the six
weeks after the September 2001 attacks. Other topics include the data rev-
olution, Total Information Awareness, and the government’s eyes and
ears.
–147–
HM851 2006-026828 978-0-7619-3512-4
The power law of information; life in a connected world.
Srinivasa, Srinath.
Sage Publications, ©2006 184 p. $29.95 (pa)
A power law distribution, as Srinivasa (International Institute for
Information Technology, Bangalore, India) puts it, “denotes a system with
a very small number of extremely powerful entities and a very large
number of entities having very limited power” and are characteristically
found in “frictionless” (low transaction cost) non- linear systems such as
information networks. Here he discusses the lessons that can be drawn
for today’s information society from the mathematical modeling of
power law distributions in nonlinear information systems. Response
Books is an imprint of Sage India.
HM871 2005-026558 0-8047-5479-9
Crowds.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey T. Schnapp and Matthew Tiews.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 439 p. $24.95 (pa)
These essays study crowds from every perspective: market crowds,
crowds in modern art and literature, modern, premodern and ancient
crowds, sports crowds and the emergence of crowd-centered discourses
in social sciences, such as psychology, anthropology and sociology. The
contributors use analyses, word histories and personal testimonies to
make their points. The volume represents the main output of one of the
Stanford Humanities Lab’s prototype “Big Humanities” projects and is
supported by an extensive website, which includes virtual galleries and
a database of early social science readings on modern crowds.
HM881 2006-930149 978-0-7546-2633-6
Civil societies and social movements; domestic,
transnational, global.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ronnie D. Lipschutz. (The library of essays in
international relations)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 542 p. $225.00
The 20 papers presented by Lipschutz (U. of California at Santa Cruz)
give a broad overview of the social science literature on social
movements, civil society, and transnationalism. While “[s]ome of the
[previously published] pieces that appear herein are seminal; others are
not” and Lipschutz has chosen them to illustrate not just the debates and
analyses of “popular political action” but also some of the politics behind
those debates and analyses. The papers are presented in five sections
addressing states, social forces, and the new transnationalism; social
movements; civil society; case studies; and theoretical critiques and
questions.
HM881 1-889680-46-X
Liberation between selves, sexualities and war.
Title main entry. Ed. by Greg Moses. (Radical philosophy today; v.3)
Philosophy Documentation Ctr., ©2006 157 p. $26.00 (pa)
These 12 essays are based on the concept that the way to democracy lies
along a liberated path of desire. Their topics include creating organiza-
tions and institutions for radical democracy, experimental pluralism and
“education-shaped” democracy, race and class in US labor movements,
using the United Packinghouse Workers of America as a case study, alien-
ation in Elfreide Jelinek’s women as lovers, media politics and human
rights, swimming against the gay and lesbian agenda, bisexual identity
and bisexual reflections on the bisexual/transsexual alliance, the left and
humanitarian intervention as solidarity, philosophic implications of the
war over Kosovo and the cultural roots of US interventionalism.
HM881 1-889680-47-8
Philosophy against empire.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tony Smith and Harry van der Linden.
(Radical philosophy today; v.4)
Philosophy Documentation Ctr., ©2006 304 p. $41.00 (pa)
Scholars and activists from several countries gathered in Washington DC
in November 2004 to attend the sixth biennial conference of the Radical
Philosophy Association. Of the some 150 presentations and discussions,
18 were selected and edited for publication. The theme was inspired by
the persistent imperial designs of the US under both major parties. The
papers cover war and empire, cross-border flows in the global economy,
biopolitics and The Global War on Terrorism, and subjectivity and
resistance. Books reviews follow, and Carol C. Gould’s response to com-
ments on her Globalizing Democracy and Human Rights. No index is
included.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HM881 2006-011326 978-0-7391-1718-7
Visions of solidarity; U.S. peace activists in Nicaragua
from war to women’s activism and globalization.
Weber, Clare.
Lexington Books, ©2006 155 p. $20.95 (pa)
Through the transformation of two peace and social justice organizations
from an anti-war struggle to an anti-globalization struggle, Weber (soci-
ology, California State U.-Dominquez Hills) examines the tensions and
processes of exchange and influence between US citizens located in the
North and citizens of Nicaragua engaged in activist challenges to the state
and US foreign policy.
HM1116 2005-029362 0-7619-3088-4
Argumentative and aggressive communication; theory,
research, and application.
Rancer, Andrew S. and Theodore A. Avtgis.
Sage Publications, ©2006 321 p. $83.95
In a textbook designed for undergraduate courses in communications,
communications scholars Rancer (U. of Akron, Ohio) and Avtgis (West
Virginia U.) review the research on verbal argumentative and aggressive
traits. They cover the structure and origin of such communication, its
functions, and how understanding the processes behind it can enhance
communication outcomes. Each chapter ends with discussion questions.
HM1121 2006-027374 978-0-7391-1618-0
Identity, morality, and threat; studies in violent conflict.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Rothbart and Karina V. Korostelina.
Lexington Books, ©2006 409 p. $90.00
In cases of protracted conflict, and even in times of peace, observe the
editors (both of the Institute for Conflict Analysis and Resolution at
George Mason U.) in their introduction, groups that feel threatened often
construct identity narratives of the threatening Other whose morality is
degraded and reified and whose collective demonization is thereby jus-
tified. The editors present 14 papers theorizing about these normative
implications of these threat narratives, organizing them into three sec-
tions examining how threat narratives converge around normative cate-
gories that contribute to shared value-systems (collective axiologies) that
shape and solidify notions of moral inferiority and superiority of
ingroups and the Other, exploring cases in which protracted conflict is
fueled by struggles of competing value systems, and analyze ways in
which collective axiologies undergo change.
HM1126 2006-040079 978-1-57675-334-7
The anatomy of peace; resolving the heart of conflict.
The Arbinger Institute.
Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2006 231 p. $22.95
An Arab and a Jew whose fathers had been killed by the ethnic cousins
of the other come together to help warring parents come together. The
story applies to families, the world, and other realms some of the prin-
ciples laid out in the Institute’s previous book on workplaces, Leadership
and Self-Deception. The Arbinger Institute is an international training and
consulting firm specializing in conflict resolution and peace making.
There is no index or bibliography.
HM1126 978-90-04-15305-9
The ethical economy of conflict prevention and
development; towards a model for international
organization.
Bredel, Ralf. (Nijhoff law specials; v.68)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 257 p. $104.00 (pa)
Bredel, an officer in the United Nations Industrial Development
Organization, describes how debate on the importance of human welfare
in the context of group conflict has come to create a political economy of
conflict and argues for the need to assimilate into our thinking distinct
social and ethical economics of conflict prevention instead. Building his
argument, he describes how liberal economics, Keynesian economics and
Marxist economics inform each other and how an integrated perspective
leading to a political and moral economy of conflict prevention can work,
the horizontal inequality approach and why certain theories of internal
conflict are outdated, the structure and culture necessary for a social
economy of conflict prevention, and how values, ethics and interests
based on human rights can produce development. Martinus Nijhoff is an
imprint of Brill.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HM1206 2006-019024 0-8058-4999-8
Mass media effects research; advances through meta-
analysis.
Title main entry. Ed. by Raymond W. Preiss et al. (LEA’s communi-
cation series)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 535 p. $49.95 (pa)
In this collection, a group of scholars and researchers are set the task of
assessing the findings of nearly 75 years’ worth of empirical media
research. The chapters are organized by theories, outcomes and mass
media campaigns and provide insights about what social science
research reveals about media effects. The topics covered include the
effects of advertising on children and adolescents; pornography; and
violent video games and aggression. The final sections features com-
mentary from leading theorists about the contributions and limitations
of meta-analytic summaries in defining and advancing media theory and
processes.
HM1206 2006-015967 978-0-7425-5385-9
Media and society; a critical perspective, 2d ed.
Berger, Arthur Asa. (The R & L series in mass communication)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 258 p. $27.95 (pa)
Illustrated with humorous line drawings by the author, this introductory
text helps students understand the role played by the mass media in
society today. Eleven chapters discuss such topics as the social impact of
new media technologies and the possible consequences of media consol-
idation. The second edition features expanded coverage of postmod-
ernism and its relation to modernism. Berger is professor emeritus of
broadcast and electronic communication arts at San Francisco State U.
HM1211 2006-056467 0-07-313527-5
Intercultural communication in contexts, 4th ed.
Martin, Judith N. and Thomas K. Nakayama.
McGraw-Hill, ©2007 490 p. $66.00 (pa)
Martin and Nakayama’s (both Arizona State U.) introductory textbook
combines three different perspectives—the social psychological, the inter-
pretive, and the critical—in examining the key issues and concerns of
intercultural communication. The fourth edition features expanded dis-
cussion of globalization and its importance to intercultural communi-
cation, new material on blogs and online intercultural relationships,
expanded discussion of religious identity, and new material on the roles
played by churches and government institutions in intercultural contact.
HM1221 2006-020245 978-1-4051-4405-6
It’s not just PR; public relations in society.
Coombs, W. Timothy and Sherry J. Holladay.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 114 p. $59.95
Public relations activities are often viewed with suspicion by members of
the general public. In this text, Coombs and Holladay (both corporate
communication, Eastern Illinois U.) provide readers with a more
nuanced view of PR practice and explain how it can be used not only to
“spin” or distort facts, but also to inform and create mutual engagement.
In addition to discussing PR for corporations, the authors examine its use
by activists working to influence public policy. They conclude with a look
at the increasing globalization of PR.
HM1261 2006-029540 0-275-99259-4
For the common good; the ethics of leadership in the 21st
century.
Title main entry. Ed. by John C. Knapp.
Praeger, ©2007 174 p. $44.95
Contributors from business, education, religion, and politics set out the
ethical requirements of leadership in the 21st century—the obligations of
leaders to promote justice, fairness, trust, and the conditions necessary
for people to promote communities that flourish. They focus on practical
matters, leaving theory to others.
–148–
HM1263 2006-007204 978-0-7425-5361-3
Elite foundations of liberal democracy.
Higley, John and Michael Burton.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 229 p. $27.95 (pa)
Arguing that the existence of a consensually united political elite is the
sine qua non of liberal democracy, Higley (government and sociology, U.
of Texas at Austin) and Burton (sociology, Loyola College) investigate how
such an elite forms and why it persists. Noting that the occurrence of con-
sensually united elites are rare in history, they argue that there are three
conditions under which they are likely to emerge: deliberate and sudden
settlements of basic disputes among warring elites, highly contingent on
elite circumstances and choices; colonial opportunities for local elites to
practice cautious and limited representative politics while also leading
politically complex movements for national independence; and conver-
gences toward shared norms of political behavior among disunited elites
competing for support from economically prosperous electorates.
HM1281 2006-029037 978-0-7864-2773-4
The lessons of nonviolence; theory and practice in a
world of conflict.
Hastings, Tom H.
McFarland & Co., ©2006 219 p. $39.95 (pa)
Hastings (peace and nonviolence studies, Portland State U.) gathers
stories of people involved in nonviolent political action against war, for
civil rights, and for nuclear disarmament, among other causes.
Examining a range of groups, including Buddhists, Catholic Workers,
Plowshares organizations, he seeks to draw out lessons regarding the
efficacy of different tactics and orientations of nonviolent political action.
HN9 2006-051692 978-90-04-14414-9
Social and political life in late antiquity.
Title main entry. Ed. by William Bowden et al. (Late antique archae-
ology; v.3.1-2005)
BRILL, ©2006 656 p. $198.00
Archaeologists, historians, and scholars of classical literature investigate
the social world of individuals in late antiquity and integrate the study
of social groupings within the trajectory of political change during the
period. Among their topics are material culture on the western frontier,
monuments and memory in the Forum Romanum, the control of public
space and the transformation of the early Medieval town of Brescia,
towards an interactive topography of Dark Age Rome, middle class
houses, the urban poor, and social and cultural time.
HN13 2006-023438 1-4144-0327-5
Government, politics, and protest; essential primary
sources.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Lee Lerner et al. (Social issues primary
sources collection)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 485 p. $110.00
Lerner et al. put together a collection—part of a 10-volume set—of 142
primary source texts and excerpts on government, politics, and protest,
including speeches, legislation, magazine and newspaper articles,
memoirs, letters, interviews, novels, essays, songs, and works of art from
the nineteenth century to the present. The volume emphasizes the global
diversity of both the cause and nature of protest. It begins with the First
Amendment to the US Constitution, and includes such texts as Martin
Luther King’s “Letter from a Birmingham Jail,” PETA’s “We’d Rather Go
Naked” campaign, excerpts about the IRA hunger strikes, and the US
Patriot Act. Each text is accompanied by facts about the author, a con-
textual introduction, a discussion of its significance, and further
resources. Also included in the volume are a chronology, about 150 b&w
photos, and brief introductions to each of the sections—on protestors and
rights; civil and human rights; war and peace; civil liberties and social
issues; politics, policy, and dissent; labor, trade, and globalization; sover-
eignty; and health, environment, and animal rights.
Books reported NYP? Call Book News for publication dates. (503) 281-9230
–149–
HN18 978-1-86134-856-2
Cash and care; policy challenges in the welfare state.
Title main entry. Ed. by Caroline Glendinning and Peter A. Kemp.
Policy Press, ©2006 322 p. $39.95 (pa)
According to Glendinning (social policy, U. of York, UK) and Kemp (social
policy, U. of Oxford, UK), the traditional distinction between welfare state
provision of “cash” (income maintenance measures) and “care” (services
delivered in kind) have begun to break down, such as in the UK, where
direct payments are now provided to disabled and elderly in order for
them to employ their own personal assistants. These shifting relation-
ships raise a host of issues from the possibility of social exclusion of
those unable to work in an atmosphere emphasizing paid employment
to the problems raised by the commodification of care both for those
being cared for and low-paid care workers. These and other issues are
addressed in 19 individually authored chapters organized into sections
discussing new theoretical perspectives on care and policy; perspectives
on traditional forms of disadvantage; families, care work, and the state;
and citizen engagement by marginalized “welfare subjects.” Distributed
in the US by ISBS.
HN18 978-1-86134-841-8
Liberty, equality, fraternity.
Spicker, Paul.
Policy Press, ©2006 194 p. $99.00
Spicker (public policy, Robert Gordon U., UK) looks at the foundational
political concepts of liberty, equality, and fraternity through the lenses of
political theory and social policy. For each of the three sections tackling
the individual concepts, he first offers a political theory chapter that
defines basic concepts, considers new approaches to concepts through
categories based on policy, and relates the concept to radical politics, fol-
lowed by a social policy chapter that considers the political and moral
dimensions of social policies, offers a normative analysis of several
policies related to the foundational concept at hand, and suggests alter-
natives. Where he is prescriptive, he leans towards social and communi-
tarian preferences over individualistic ones. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
HN18 2006-445213 1-55266-183-0
Sociology for changing the world; social movements/social
research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Caelie Frampton et al.
Fernwood Publishing, ©2006 298 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this collection, Frampton et al. bring together 11 essays inspired by the
Sociology for Changing the World conference, held at Laurentian U. in
Ontario, Canada, in November of 2002. Contributors, who are activists
and professors of sociology and women’s studies in Canada, focus on
how to put political activist ethnography to use in doing research for
social movements. Aiming to fill the need for a book that outlines, for
students, researchers, and activists, how to do social transformation, they
see the concept of social relations of normality as disturbing and con-
sider social movements as active subjects, rather than objects. Essays
describe the elements of political activist ethnography, and how the
approach begins with people’s social practices and experiences. They
then examine how the confrontations of movements with ruling regimes
are important, and how this type of activism can illuminate and change
social relations. Included in the collection is the seminal article “Political
Activist as Ethnographer” (1990) by George Smith and essays discussing
his work.
HN28 2006-016132 978-0-7425-4693-6
Double standard; social policy in Europe and the United
States.
Russell, James W.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 192 p. $22.95 (pa)
Russell’s portrait of the development of social policy in Europe and
America helps to explain not only the differences between the European
and American welfare state, but also why the differences are important.
Russell (sociology, Eastern Connecticut State U.) examines the conse-
quences of the US and Europe’s handling of common social problems
such as poverty, inequality, unemployment, health care, and crime and
demonstrates the way different policy orientations have produced dis-
parate ways of life.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HN49 978-1-55238-217-2
The Calgary project; urban form/urban life.
Sandalack, Beverly and Andrei Nicolai.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 209 p. $29.95 (pa)
Sandalack (urban design, U. of Calgary, Canada) and Nicolai, an architect
and planner, trace the urbanization of Calgary, the evolution of the city’s
form, its public realm, and influences on its development. They begin
with its early phase up to World War II, then follow with development
during post-war economic growth, and current developments in sub-
urban expansion, particularly looking at key moments in the city’s trans-
formation. Based on five years of research, the book aims to improve
understanding of the city’s urban form and process while contributing
to the historical account of Calgary. It considers the urban relationship
to landscape, settlement form, infrastructure, land development, sustain-
ability, human comfort, and cultural identity. B&w maps, diagrams, and
photos are included. Distributed by Michigan State U. Press.
HN49 2006-007311 0-7619-3478-2
Globalising rural development; competing paradigms and
emerging realities.
Title main entry. Ed. by M.C. Behera.
Sage Publications, ©2006 462 p. $77.50
Behera (Arunachai Institute of Tribal Studies, Rajiv Gandhi U., India) has
solicited seventeen papers that explore a variety of issues arising from the
new rural development paradigm of sustainability and participation. The
first set of papers explores rural development in the context of global-
ization, the state, and non-governmental organizations, addressing the
question generally and also discussing issues specific to South Africa,
Nigeria, and Thailand. The next group of papers discusses concepts and
strategies of sustainability and endogenous rural development, drawing
their empirical material from cases in Europe and Asia. Finally, papers
address policy issues of participation, gender, poverty, and food security
in Kenya, Bangladesh, India, and elsewhere.
HN57 2006-023437 978-1-4144-0328-1
Social policy; essential primary sources.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Lee Lerner et al. (Social issues primary
sources collection)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 524 p. $115.00
Collected here are about 150 primary source documents on social policy
issues, specifically dealing with civil rights, children, education, housing,
health, welfare policy, and policies involving language and disabilities.
The book focuses on the US and Europe but does include documents
related to the world and written by an international group of authors.
Documents span from the nineteenth century to the present and provide
general overviews, rather than detailed political or sociological analysis,
so that they are accessible to younger readers and students. Each entry
includes key facts, historical background, a discussion of its significance,
and a brief bio of the author. They are mostly organized chronologically,
in addition to chapters on shaping social policy and current issues
affecting healthcare, housing, welfare, social security, education, and
employment. Some of the source authors include Jane Addams, the
United Nations, George W. Bush, Abraham Lincoln, Upton Sinclair,
Franklin D. Roosevelt, the US Congress, and Maya Angelou; these authors
touch on topics as diverse as affirmative action, fair housing, abortion,
Hurricane Katrina, poverty, and racial discrimination.
HN64 2006-019207 978-1-4144-0214-7
American social reform movements reference library; 4v.
(separately bound index included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Judy Galens et al. (American social reform
movements reference library)
UXL, ©2007 1240 p. $235.00
This is a three-part reference resource on the history of American social
movements that is written in a manner accessible to high-school students
and above. A two-volume almanac provides broad historical overviews of
the anti-globalization, antiwar, civil rights, education reform, environ-
mental, gay rights, labor, poverty reform, prison reform, abolition, and
temperance, women’s rights, and women’s suffrage movements. Each of
these overviews concludes with some bibliographical materials, although
coverage is not particularly extensive. Another volume contains 25 biog-
raphies of individuals representative of these various movements,
including iconic figures such as Susan B. Anthony, Rachel Carson,
Eugene V. Debs, Frederick Douglas, Horace Mann, Samuel Gompers,
Mother Jones, Martin Luther King Jr., Malcolm X, Carry Nation, and
Gloria Steinem, along with a few figures that are perhaps less obviously
representative of particular social movements (i.e. Joseph Stiglitz, Barbara
Ehrenreich, and Jared Diamond). Writings and speeches from a large
number of these figures are used in the volume (it contains 23 primary
sources). All volumes contain a common timeline of events and a
glossary and a separate paperbound cumulative index is available.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HN65 2006-048166 978-0-202-30256-0
Dilemmas of social reform; poverty and community
action in the United States, 2d ed. (reprint, 1973)
Marris, Peter and Martin Rein.
AldineTransaction, ©2007 309 p. $29.95 (pa)
First published in 1965, this work by Marris (emeritus, social planning,
U. of California at Berkeley) and Rein (urban studies and planning,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology) analyzes the evolution of anti-
poverty community action programs initiated by the Ford Foundation
Gray Area Programs and the President’s Committee on Juvenile
Delinquency. After setting the programs in the overall social and political
contexts, the authors discuss the strategies of the programs in relation to
bureaucratic inertia, rivalries among political and administrative juris-
dictions, and other impediments to successful reform. For the newer 1973
edition, reprinted here in a paperbound edition, they added a brief
outline of anti-poverty program events between 1965 and 1970.
HN65 2006-046177 978-0-8122-3952-2
Radical pacifism in modern America; egalitarianism and
protest.
Mollin, Marian. (Politics and culture in modern America)
U. of Pennsylvania Pr., ©2006 255 p. $49.95
Mollin (Virginia Technical U., Blacksburg) tells of a movement from
World War II through the Vietnam War era that sought counter-cultural
revolt while mired in mainstream social and cultural values. The organ-
izers and grass-roots leaders preached open-mindedness in their political
pursuits, she says, but remained profoundly closed to self-criticism and
change in their political practice and personal lives.
HN80 2006926969 0-7618-3535-0
Foundations of civic engagement; rethinking social and
political philosophy.
Ellis, Ralph D. et al.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 328 p. $45.00 (pa)
The rather ambitious goal of Ellis (Clark-Atlanta U.), Fischer (Clark-
Atlanta U.), and Sauer (St. Mary’s U.) in presenting this work is to
provide students with an accessible, yet comprehensive, critical overview
of the entire field of social and political philosophy. Following an intro-
duction to some of the central concerns running throughout the field’s
history and discussion of how to judge the correctness and/or value of
modes of reasoning and theoretical frameworks, they present chapters
that follow the development of social and political philosophy from its
origins in the works of Plato and Aristotle through the contributions of
Thomas Hobbes, John Locke, Jean-Jacques Rousseau, Immanuel Kant,
Karl Marx, John Rawls, Robert Nozick, feminist thinkers, Michael Waltzer
and other communitarian theorists of justice, and postmodernism.
HN80 2006-041027 0-394-57936-4
There goes the neighborhood; racial, ethnic, and class
tensions in four Chicago neighborhoods and their
meaning for America.
Wilson, William Julius and Richard P. Taub.
Alfred A. Knopf, ©2006 228 p. $23.95
Wilson (Harvard U.) and Taub (U. of Chicago) report findings from a
study on ethnic, racial, and class dynamics in four neighborhoods in
Chicago between January 1993 and September 1995. The neighborhoods
consisted mainly of the working and lower middle classes; one was a
white neighborhood, one a white neighborhood in transition, the third
Latino, and the fourth African American. The study explored to what
extent, and why, residents in selected urban neighborhoods reacted to
looming racial, ethnic, or class changes, and how those actions affected
neighborhood stability. It offers insights of value for those working to
resolve a major national challenge—the development of intergroup
harmony in an era of rapid ethnic change.
HN90 2006-010900 978-0-940069-47-3
The creative community builder’s handbook; how to
transform communities using local assets, art, and
culture.
Borrup, Tom.
Fieldstone Alliance, ©2006 261 p. $34.95 (pa)
Consultant Borrup begins this resource for community leaders with an
overview of the key principles of culturally driven community devel-
opment. Next, each of ten community-building strategies is illustrated
with two case studies taken from a variety of cities, small towns, and
neighborhoods across the U.S. In the final section, readers are guided
through each stage of designing a community development project, from
the initial assessment through crafting a plan and securing the necessary
funding.
–150–
HN107 978-0-88920-504-8
Canadian social policy; issues and perspectives, 4th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Westhues.
Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2006 478 p. $38.95 (pa)
Earlier editions (no dates cited) have been used across Canada and the
US in social science, Canadian studies, and social work courses. Mostly
scholars of social work, but also practitioners in government and other
organizations cover policy making processes and current social policy
issues. The focus is on the present and on information and insight to
inform practice.
HN110 2006-017080 978-1-59558-106-8
Latin America after neoliberalism; turning the tide in the
21st century?
Title main entry. Ed. by Eric Hershberg and Fred Rosen.
The New Press, ©2006 372 p. $18.95 (pa)
Social scientists from both Americas examine the social problems and
injustices that afflict peoples across Latin America, and the broad array
of social and political actors who have organized to bring justice to the
region as it is beginning integrated into global economic processes. They
consider factors within each country, relations within Latin America, and
relations with outside powers—particularly the US. Published in con-
junction with the North American Congress on Latin America.
HN373 2006-920973 978-1-904859-53-6
The subversion of politics; European autonomous social
movements and the decolonization of everyday life,
rev.ed.
Katsiaficas, George.
AK Press, ©2006 299 p. $17.95 (pa)
In response to the perceived cooptation of traditional leftist organizations
such as labor unions and working class political parties by capitalist
social relations and hierarchical authority, autonomous antisystemic
movements—stressing values of feminism, anti-xenophobism, and sexual
liberation and introducing new forms of social organization including
group living, self-directed programs of work and study, and cooperative
working relationships—arose in 1970s Italy and spread to Northern
Europe, including Germany, where they became a potent social force in
the 1980s. In addition to narrating the development and activities of these
groups, this book analyzes them in terms of the “decolonization of
everyday life,” a theoretical position that differs from Antonio Negri’s
“workerism” analysis of these groups, which is extensively critiqued by
the author.
HN388 2005-043539 0-7546-3102-8
Elizabeth Cellier.
Cellier, Elizabeth. (Early modern Englishwoman; printed writings, 1641-
1700, Series 2, Part 3; v.5)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 — p. $99.95
The scandalous English celebrity known at the Popish midwife was tried
for treason, accused of concocting evidence of a Protestant plot. When she
cleared herself by proving her accuser a felon, she wrote about the affair
and was promptly tried and convicted of liable. Once free, she began
writing tracts on midwifery and proposed the establishment of a profes-
sional guild of midwives. Here are facsimiles of four texts by Cellier and
13 about her, most of them condemnations, all written during the 1680s.
No index or bibliography is supplied.
HN460 2006-009399 978-0-8047-5208-4
After the fall of the wall; life courses in the
transformation of East Germany.
Title main entry. Ed. by Martin Diewald et al.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 380 p. $65.00
Part of the larger research program, the German Life History Study,
which initiated in 1979, the 13 chapters presented by Diewald (sociology,
U. of Bielefeld, Germany), Goedicke (sociology, U. of Duisburg-Essen,
Germany) and Mayer (sociology, Yale U., US) examine the transformation
of East Germany after the fall of the Berlin Wall through the study of
thousands of quantifiable individual life histories. Topics include the
institutional transformation of the state, labor market changes, conse-
quences of firm privatization and reorganization, disparities of gender
and age, class mobility, family formation, changes in social networks,
employment opportunities and earnings, and trends of “flexibilization”
in labor markets.
–151–
HN490 96-11842 978-0-8166-4924-2
Radical thought in Italy; a potential politics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paolo Virno and Michael Hardt. (Theory out of
bounds; v.7)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 — p. $25.00 (pa)
Collectively, the 15 essays presented by Marxist theorists Virno and Hardt
act as a survey of contemporary Italian radical political theory. The
essays critique the culture of postmodernism, analyze the economic and
social conditions of contemporary capitalist production, and propose new
forms of political theorizing. The editors have added to foundational
essays of Italian radical political theory in an appendix: 1983’s “Do You
Remember Revolution?”—an overview of the political landscape penned
by Virno, Antonio Negri, and nine others imprisoned for their politics by
the Italian state—and Virno’s “Do You Remember Counterrevolution?”—
which took stock of the trajectory of political and social developments fol-
lowing the earlier essay. Also included is a glossary defining some of the
terminology peculiar to the Italian leftist tradition.
HN660 2006-030308 0-8156-3134-0
Living Palestine; family survival, resistance, and mobility
under occupation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lisa Taraki. (Gender, culture, and politics in
the Middle East)
Syracuse U. Pr., ©2006 296 p. $24.95 (pa)
Taraki (sociology, Birzeit U., occupied Palestinian West Bank) and her col-
leagues analyze the data collected by a summer 1999 survey of some two
thousand households in nineteen Palestinian communities in the West
Bank and Gaza, primarily concerned with the dynamics and modalities
of social reproduction at the household level, although obviously the pol-
itics of occupation looms large in the lives of households. Together, the
five papers address questions of urban modernity and identity for-
mation; dynamics of extended kinship and national identity; survival and
mobility strategies and choices in times of crisis; emigration, conser-
vatism, and class formation; and the role of women’s work in coping and
family survival.
HN670 2006-042134 978-0-8213-6876-3
Ending poverty in South Asia; ideas that work.
Title main entry. Ed. by Deepa Narayan and Elena Glinskaya.
The World Bank, ©2007 400 p. $35.00 (pa)
Recent rapid economic growth, derived from broad-based economic
reforms in South Asia has resulted in improvements in the lives of
hundreds of millions of poor people. In this collection of regional and
national reports, contributors describe 12 programs from India, Pakistan,
Bangladesh and Afghanistan that worked as part of this improvement,
including investing in rural producer organizations, providing
opportunities for collective action by women workers, empowering self-
help groups, scaling up rural support programs, integrating community-
driven development with governance reform, conducting microfinance
experiments, computerizing land records and creating web-based tools
for farmers, guaranteeing education and expanding access to it,
developing public/private urban infrastructure partnerships, and making
a framework for accountability. Each of the case studies includes
references.
HN700 2006-010051 978-87-7694-007-2
Other Malays; nationalism, cosmopolitanism, and
modernity around the Melaka Straits.
Kahn, Joel S. (Asian Studies Association of Australia; Southeast Asia
publication series)
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 228 p. $25.00 (pa)
Kahn (anthropology, La Trobe U., Australia) revisits the secondary
anthropological literature in order to examine the construction of Malay
identity from the 1920s to the 1950s. He examines how the national nar-
rative of Malay peoplehood took on racially excluding aspects that sup-
pressed alternative narratives, including a cosmopolitan Malay-ness that,
resurrected, may be a better answer to Malaysian racial dilemmas than
may be found in attempts to universalize anti-racist practice.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HN703 2006-049222 978-90-04-15487-2
Ropewalking and safety nets; local ways of managing
insecurities in Indonesia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Juliette Koning and Frans Husken. (Social sci-
ences in Asia; v.12)
BRILL, ©2006 224 p. $80.00 (pa)
Begun in 1997 as economic crises and changes in global business affected
more people of the study area of Java, the research program which
inspired these eight papers address the increasing breakdown of local
and familial support in poor rural and urban communities, and the
exclusionary effects of policies of support from other sources. The papers
describe how social security efforts have split Indonesia into a small
group of those who have a safety net and a large group who do not, the
practice of exclusion and inclusion in Central Java, the decline of the
system of reciprocal labor in the last quarter of the twentieth century,
precarious family support for widows, strategies of managing insecurity
for Indonesians of Chinese extraction, the success or lack thereof of
urban self-help organizations, entrepreneurs in risks and resources, and
insecurity in the livelihood of those in the East Javanese uplands.
HN780 2006-006847 978-0-8139-2569-1
States of violence; politics, youth, and memory in
contemporary Africa.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edna G. Bay and Donald L. Donham.
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 268 p. $49.50
Eight case studies presented by Bay (interdisciplinary studies, Emory U.)
and Donham (anthropology, U. of California at Davis) explore processes
of violence in Africa. The first two focus on the relationship of the state
to violence, specifically the political economy of state collapse and
predatory violence in Sierra Leone and constructions of identity and
political violence in Guinea-Bissau. Issues of youth and gender are
explored in the next set of papers, including youth attitudes towards state
authority, gang violence in South Africa, and the construction of violence
as a problem of “youthful” excess. Finally, the construction of memories
of violence are discussed in essays examining Rwandan government nar-
ratives of national memory in the wake of the 1994 genocide, the shaping
the memory of the South Africa’s Alexandra township rebellion of 1986,
and shifting memories of the Zimbabwean war of liberation.
HN850 2006-020607 978-0-7546-4024-0
Governing rural development; discourses and practices of
self-help in Australian rural policy.
Cheshire, Lynda. (Perspectives on rural policy and planning)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 173 p. $99.95
Over the past two decades, discourses of “self-help” and “empowerment”
based on assumptions about the disabling nature of welfare dependency
have been incorporated into the rural development policies of the
Australian state. Cheshire (U. of Queensland, Australia) takes a critical
look at the “self-help” discourse and its policy impacts in Australia and
other advanced liberal democracies. Employing a Foucauldian govern-
mentality frame, he analyzes “self- help” as discursive strategy of liberal
rule and considers what strategies rural citizens may use to challenge
and resist these discourse and practices of “self-help,” partly through two
case studies of resistance in rural Australia.
HQ18 2006-022269 978-0-8248-3036-6
Fertility and pleasure; ritual and sexual values in
Tokugawa Japan.
Lindsey, William R.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 234 p. $48.00
Lindsey (religious studies, U. of Kansas) analyzes the rituals through
which women in Tokugawa Japan (1630-1867) navigated their institu-
tional and societal position as they related to the values of fertility and
sexual pleasure. He divides these ritual actions into three broad types:
“entrance,” including daughters’ marriages into households and cour-
tesans’ establishing formal relationships with clients; “placement,” which
reflects a woman’s place in societal institutions and within a range of
gender-specific experiences that cut across social status and idealized
roles (pregnancy is investigates as a form of placement); and “exit,” by
which women move between institutions and roles (e.g. betrothal, cour-
tesan retirement, divorce, and escape).
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HQ21 984-05-1734-1
Romance and pleasure; understanding the sexual conduct
of young people in Dhaka in the era of HIV and AIDS.
Muna, Lazeena.
University Press Limited, ©2005 183 p. $4.30
Now working for a UN organization in Bangladesh on issues related to
preventing HIV and AIDS, Muna here revises her 2003 doctoral disser-
tation for the University of London. She studies the sexual health of
unmarried young people in an urban setting, where increased opportu-
nities for higher education and a rise in the average age of marriage
create greater space for social mixing between the sexes than in prior
generations, and therefore greater risk of negative sexual health conse-
quences. Her findings of the special risks and needs of the population
are followed by recommendations for government policy. Published in
Bangladesh; currently there is no US distributor.
HQ21 2006-031706 978-0-275-98774-9
Sexual health; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mitchell Tepper and Annette Fuglsang Owens.
(Praeger perspectives: Sex, love and psychology)
Praeger, ©2007 1762 p. $425.00
Tepper (Morehouse School of Medicine, National Center for Primary Care,
Atlanta) is a sexual educator, researcher, and advocate; Owens is a cer-
tified sexuality counselor. Both are with the Sexual Health Network, an
organization of health professionals and educators providing online
information and guidance to the public. They present a four-volume set
comprised of 61 chapters contributed by some 70 doctors, psychiatrists,
psychologists, educators, and clergy addressing the meaning of sexual
health, the effects of ignorance or neglect, and the role of love, touch, and
communication. Each volume focuses on one of four subcategories of
sexual health—psychological foundations, physical foundations, moral
and cultural foundations, and state-of-the-art treatments and research—
and contains a subject index specific to the individual volume. A list of
print and nonprint resources is also included at the end of each volume
for further information. For students and healthcare professionals, and
general readers interested in sexual health.
HQ27 2006-021767 978-0-313-33399-6
Adolescent sexuality; a historical handbook and guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carolyn Cocca. (Children and youth)
Praeger, ©2006 188 p. $59.95
Accessible to most readers while academically solid, this anthology
examines changes in attitudes towards adolescent sexuality, particularly
in the United States during the twentieth century. Five essays survey the-
ories on sex, statutory rape laws, teenage pregnancy, sex education, and
media depictions of teenagers. The second half of the book reprints
excerpts from books on sexual theory, court cases and legislation estab-
lishing obscenity laws and the age of consent, and 14 posters produced
in 1918 and 1922 to educate youth.
HQ73 2006-028400 978-1-58765-263-9
Great events from history. Gay, lesbian, bisexual, and
transgender events, 1848-2006; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lillian Faderman et al.
Salem Press, ©2007 820 p. $160.00
Featuring contributions from 113 international academics and inde-
pendent scholars, this resource text chronicles important historical events
from around the world that have identified, defined, and legally estab-
lished the rights of gays, lesbians, bisexuals, and transgender persons. It
combines essays originally commissioned by the Salem Press for
inclusion in GLBT Life with Full Text, an online subscription database dis-
tributed by EBSCO Publishing, with newly commissioned materials;
primary source documents, such as court decisions, mission statement,
laws, and significant supporting texts; and some 100 b&w photographs
and illustrations. A keyword list of contents appears in the front matter
of both volumes and alphabetically lists all essays. Volume Two contains
several additional reference tools: a general, annotated bibliography,
organized by category; an electronics resources section; a chronological
list of the entries; a category index grouping the entries under 20 broad
areas of interest; a personage index directing users to events in which a
particular individual played a role; and a subject index.
–152–
HQ75 2006-008060 978-1-56023-187-5
Behind the mask of the Mattachine; the Hal Call
chronicles and the early movement for homosexual
emancipation.
Sears, James T.
Harrington Park Press, ©2006 586 p. $34.95 (pa)
Through a biography of activist Hall, Sears (education, curriculum
studies, and queer history; Pennsylvania State U.) traces two phases of the
Mattachine Society. He covers its founding in 1950-53 and its becoming a
national organization in 1953-1961, after which it entered into a new
phase during the radicalism of the 1960s and the gay men’s movement.
HQ76 2006-012661 978-0-8166-4916-7
African intimacies; race, homosexuality, and globalization.
Hoad, Neville.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 187 p. $20.00 (pa)
Hoad (English, U. of Texas-Austin) explores the changing discourse
regarding the relationship between homosexuality and politics in Africa
over the past century. Among his perspectives are African sodomy in the
missionary position, the World Conference of Anglican Bishops, and
Thabo Mbeki’s AIDS blues.
HQ76 2006-903208 978-0-7893-1511-3
Gay life and culture; a world history.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Aldrich.
Universe, ©2006 384 p. $49.95
Aldrich (European history, U. of Sydney), who has specialized in gay
history, and his contributors survey practices and attitudes concerning
homosexuality mostly in the Western world. Among the topics are Greece
and Rome, lesbians in early modern Europe, the homosexual age 1870-
1940, cross-cultural comparison and the history of sexuality, the Middle
East and North Africa, and desire and same-sex intimacies in Asia.
Marvelously illustrated, mostly in color. Universe Publishing is an imprint
of Rizzoli.
HQ77 2006-920988 978-0-7619-7163-4
The transgender phenomenon.
Ekins, Richard and Dave King.
Sage Publications, ©2006 263 p. $125.00
Starting from narratives about their initial studies and their early work
based on that of Carol Ridell, especially on transvestism, Ekins and King
provide a series of stories, including a series of stories about telling the
stories, about aspects of transgender culture. They note the changes in
perception about transgender individuals over time, including how
society viewed cross-dressing and sex-changing, the pervasive nature of
the medical, and the efforts of those who studied transgender behavior
to receive favorable media representation. They analyze the stories that
migrate, oscillate, negate, transcend at the conceptual and practical levels,
showing how stories changed from the sensational to the medical and
into the sociological and the personal, noting the role of creating sexual
scripts, loving oneself as a woman, body modification, and the recent
returning to stories of lived experience.
HQ115 2006-006597 978-0-8047-4938-1
Prostitution and pornography; philosophical debate about
the sex industry.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jessica Spector.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 465 p. $27.95 (pa)
Academics, activists, and participants offer a wide range of views on
what prostitution and pornography are; what they do; and how argu-
ments about them involve conceptions of the self, freedom, social respon-
sibility, and action. They often also take a position on whether
prostitution and pornography should be legal.
HQ149 978-0-7748-1331-0
Sex workers in the Maritimes talk back.
Jeffrey, Leslie Ann and Gayle MacDonald.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 273 p. $85.00
Jeffrey (history and politics, U. of New Brunswick, St. John) and
MacDonald (sociology, St. Thomas U., Fredericton) incorporate interviews
into their study of 60 sex workers in three Maritime cities in New
Brunswick and Nova Scotia, Canada. They focus on the workers’ analysis
and resistance to common interpretations of their lives. Each chapter
covers a particular concern: money, violence, conflict with the law,
stigma, health, and politics and policy. Exotic dancers and others in the
skin trade are included. Distributed by the U. of Washington Press.
–153–
HQ281 92-1-133751-8
Toolkit to combat trafficking in persons; global
programme against trafficking in human beings.
United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 223 p. $40.00 (pa)
Prepared by the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime, this prac-
tical guide describes specific actions (“tools”) that can be used to prevent
and combat human trafficking. The tools are organized into ten chapters,
each relating to one major type of activity. These include (for example)
assessment of the scope of the problem, prosecution of perpetrators, and
protection of victims. Although a subject index is lacking, a detailed table
of contents serves a similar purpose. The volume is aimed at a broad
audience that includes policy makers, law enforcement personnel, and
members of intergovernmental organizations.
HQ471 2006-028076 978-0-7864-2801-4
Virtually obscene; the case for an uncensored internet.
White, Amy E.
McFarland & Co., ©2006 180 p. $35.00 (pa)
Proponents of Internet censorship cite potential harm, and opponents cite
the First Amendment, but White (philosophy, Ohio U.-Zanesville) says
neither side justifies its argument adequately. After refuting them, she
offers a third alternative. Her consequentialist argument for an unregu-
lated Internet holds that the dis-utility of the Internet that censorship
would cause is worse than the unproven harm of sexual explicit material
on it.
HQ511 83-918250-4-3
Marriage; ideal—law—practice; proceedings.
Conference on Marriage, Ideal, Law, Practice (2004: Warsaw, Poland).
Edited by Z. Sluzewska and J. Urbanik. (The journal of juristic papy-
rology; supplement 5)
Warsaw U., ©2005 261 p. $63.00
This volume brings together papers delivered during the conference com-
memorating the tenth anniversary of the death of Henryk Kupiszewski,
a Romanist and papyrologist at Warsaw University and the former
Academy of Catholic Theology. The contributors expand on
Kupiszewski’s interest in the social and legal aspects of family relations.
The articles in French and Italian have not been translated into English.
Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co.
HQ518 2006-026216 1-4144-0330-5
Family in society; essential primary sources.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Lee Lerner et al. (Social issues primary
sources collection)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 479 p. $115.00
This resource for students, researchers, and general readers presents a
wide ranging collection of primary sources that shed light on shifting
concepts, representations, and roles of the family in society. Documents
include letters, speeches, magazine articles, essays, legislation, and more.
All were written in the past two centuries. For each entry, the editors
(affiliations not cited) provide background information on the author
and the topic addressed and suggest additional text, audio, and visual
sources.
HQ536 0-8058-6072-X
Family policy matters; how policymaking affects families
and what professionals can do, 2d ed.
Bogenschneider, Karen.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2006 352 p. $34.95 (pa)
To overcome controversy and find common ground in family policy
making, Bogenschneider (human ecology, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) pro-
poses a theoretical framework derived from hundreds of studies. This
second edition includes discussion of recent policies that are changing
the political landscape for families, such as legalizing same-sex partner-
ships and reforming welfare, and an expanded section on executive
orders and state statues that require family impact analysis. The volume
also contains a new chapter on the history of family policy, new case
studies, and a new appendix explaining how to conduct a family impact
analysis.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HQ536 2006-016028 978-1-56663-709-1
Marriage and caste in America; separate and unequal
families in a post-marital age.
Hymowitz, Kay S.
Ivan R. Dee, Inc., ©2006 179 p. $22.50
Journalist Hymowitz (Manhattan Institute) points out that marriage is
more than a piece of paper or even an ironic socio-political statement,
but a preserver of culture, a weighty weapon against poverty, and a sig-
nificant source of betterment of the lives of adults and children. She
shows how one’s marital state relates directly to one’s social capital, what
marriage does in America for all concerned, how myths of single par-
enthood (complete with non-existent familial and social support net-
works) came into practice, how ethnic men became marginalized as
family members, how the fashion of teen pregnancy resulted in disaster,
and how theorists need to step up to the chaos they have helped to cause.
HQ536 2006-047328 978-0-07-352809-0
Public and private families; a reader, 5th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew J. Cherlin.
McGraw-Hill, ©2008 397 p. $58.13 (pa)
This supplementary text for a course in the sociology of the family con-
tains 29 readings that examine the family from within and without. Just
a few of the themes and issues explored: interracial marriage, multigen-
erational bonds, and the modern American stepfamily. The readings are
organized into 15 chapters, which correspond to the chapters in Cherlin’s
fifth edition textbook, titled Public and Private Families: An Introduction.
Nearly half of the readings are new to the fifth edition.
HQ536 2006-046734 978-0-07-352808-3
Public & private families; an introduction, 5th ed.
Cherlin, Andrew J.
McGraw-Hill, ©2008 572 p. $100.31
In this text for undergraduate students of sociology Cherlin (public policy
and sociology, Johns Hopkins U.) discusses the social dynamics of the
“private family”—comprising two or more people in a longstanding emo-
tionally intimate relationship—and the “public family”—consisting of the
commitment that adults make to society at large (e.g. to provide for the
children and the elderly). Coverage includes historical and contemporary
contexts; gender, class, and race-ethnicity; sexuality, partnership, and
marriage; links across the generations; and conflict, disruption, and
reconstitution. While the majority of material speaks to American trends,
families in many international societies are discussed throughout the text.
Updates include new coverage of topics including the Mexican-American
family, same-sex marriage, Hurricane Katrina’s relationship to poverty
and family, and the financing of Social Security and Medicaid.
HQ706 2006-008606 0-7546-4645-9
Family, gender and kinship in Australia; the social and
cultural logic of practice and subjectivity.
Uhlmann, Allon J. (Anthropology and cultural history in Asia and the
Indo-Pacific)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 198 p. $99.95
Uhlmann (anthropology, U. of Missouri, St. Louis) reports findings from
a study based on ethnographic fieldwork conducted between 1994 and
1996 among working class workers and their families in the Australian
town of Newcastle, New South Wales, as well as interviews with union
organizers, local politicians, community organizers, and professionals
and activists in the areas of family, youth and gender, and with family
and relationship counselors. The text covers a wide range of themes from
techniques of the body, the experience of relatedness and the structure of
family households, to the very dynamics of contemporary capitalism. In
the process, it challenges the idea that the nuclear domestic family is in
crisis in Australia, an idea that circulates in political and popular dis-
course within Australia and elsewhere.
HQ755 2006-017473 978-0-8214-1691-4
Popular eugenics; national efficiency and American mass
culture in the 1930s.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Currell and Christina Cogdell.
Ohio University Press, ©2006 406 p. $69.95
In these 14 articles contributors take a close look at how and why the
pseudo-science of eugenics was heavily promoted in the mass media
from the 1930s onward, and what that promotion has done to US policy.
Topics include media coverage of a sterilization trial, eugenic decline and
recovery in self-improvement literature, the role of the “expert,” gender
and eugenic education, the politics of eugenics in South, Faulkner’s
perceptions, the rise of the average American, biological efficiency and
the streamlining, eugenics expressed in tooth decay, classical bodies and
criminals in popular art, eugenics expressed in madcap romances and
monsters in film, and the legacy of the nazi eugenics exhibit touring the
US from 1934 to 1943.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HQ759 978-0-7734-5621-1
Single motherhood in twentieth-century Ireland; cultural,
historical, and social essays.
Title main entry. Ed. by María Cinta et al.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 273 p. $109.95
These essays on Irish single mothers are more about shame than about
mothers and children. By juxtaposing different cultural sites, times and
processes, the essays individually and collectively identify shame as a
framing emotion in the social life of 20th-century Ireland. The papers,
which were first presented at a 2004 conference on this subject at the
University of Limerick, are organized around the topics of Irish Culture
and single maternity; a socio-historical perspective of single maternity in
20th-century Ireland; the Magdalen Laundries in literature and film;
unmarried mothers in contemporary literature and film; and single
maternity and Irish women’s writing. Ramblado-Minero (Spanish,
Hispanic studies, U. of Limerick) and Pérez-Vides (English, U. of Huelva,
Spain) introduce the essays with a historical and social framework for
considering the image of unmarried mothers in Ireland.
HQ764 2005-033501 978-0-8018-8404-7
Blessed motherhood, bitter fruit; Nelly Roussel and the
politics of female pain in Third Republic France.
Accampo, Elinor Ann.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 312 p. $50.00
Accampo (history, U. of Southern California) presents a biography of
French feminist, journalist, and public speaker Nelly Roussel (1878-
1922). Roussel argued that women have the right to pursue self- ful-
fillment regardless of their social, marital, or maternal status, and that
they also have the right to avoid pain. She advocated a radical transfor-
mation of both private and public life by explicitly associating a woman’s
autonomy and capacity for full political citizenship with her control over
her own body—including the use of birth control—all of which threatened
the very foundation of the political culture and bourgeois belief systems
that dominated the Third Republic. The text examines reactions to
Roussel and to her doctrine as a means of illuminating the gender system
in France and its relationship to political culture.
HQ766 0-89714-772-3
State of world population, 2006; a passage to hope,
women and international migration.
Title main entry. United Nations Population Fund.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 107 p. $17.50 (pa)
The United Nations Populations Fund presents this book, which examines
the conditions that compel migrant women to leave their countries, and
those that greet them when they find new homes. Issues of human rights
abuses, trafficking, war and violence, poverty, and gender discrimi-
nation, are all factors that may afflict migrant women in both their
source and host countries. Also discussed are migrant health issues
including HIV and pregnancy prevention, the benefits and burdens of
migration on host countries, the effects of immigration policies on the
most vulnerable migrants, issues of cultural diversity, and more of the
particular challenges and contributions of migrant females. Extensive sta-
tistical indicators and some b&w photographs supplement the text. No
index is provided.
HQ767 978-0-7734-5645-7
Changing conceptions of the child from the Renaissance
to post-modernity; a philosophy of childhood.
Kennedy, David.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 274 p. $109.95
In the 12 essays published here, Kennedy (philosophy and education,
Montclair State U.) examines the dynamic perception of childhood in
Western society from the Renaissance to the present. The first six essays
discuss forms such as the “invisible” Victorian child and the “infant nar-
cissism” of Freud through examination of the images, cultural constructs,
discourses, mythologies, and ideologies of each era. The second half com-
prises a sort of phenomenology of the child’s voice, in which the author
reflects on two conversations with and among children regarding philo-
sophical and scientific questions, with focus on animism and the phe-
nomenon of conflict. In these chapters excerpts of the conversations are
included, portraying, at times, what the author describes as a drama of
philosophical discourse in the adult world.
–154–
HQ767 2006-002761 0-275-98981-X
Child honoring; how to turn this world around.
Title main entry. Ed. by Raffi Cavoukian and Sharna Olfman.
Praeger, ©2006 291 p. $29.95
Children’s songwriter Raffi Cavoukian spent a decade developing his
Child Honoring philosophy, a worldview that examines global threats to
child development and offers systemic solutions based on principles of
children-first, compassion, and sustainability. Along with Olfman
(clinical and developmental psychology, Point Park U.), Cavoukian invited
commentary and theoretical and practical insights about promoting child
development from scholars of science, law, education, theology, and sus-
tainability; human rights and environmental advocates; writers
(including Barbara Kingsolver and David C. Korten); and spiritual
philosophers. The results are found in the 19 essays compiled here. The
foreword was authored by the Dalai Lama.
HQ767 978-1-86134-783-1
Children these days.
Madge, Nicola.
Policy Press, ©2006 169 p. $29.95
Madge (National Children’s Bureau, London) provides a study on present-
day views of childhood and adult-child relationships from the perspec-
tives of both. For the study, she interviewed 2000 students and 500 adults
in England, and also drew conclusions from current literature and policy
and practice perspectives. Themes considered include the meaning of
childhood, growing up and becoming responsible, peer influences and
parental controls, over-protection, status and respect, and communi-
cation. She also addresses whether England is a child-friendly society and
how children’s lives can be improved. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HQ767 2006-280349 978-0-335-21650-5
Ethical research with children.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ann Farrell.
Open University Press, ©2005 188 p. $35.95 (pa)
Farrell (Queensland U. of Technology, Australia) presents a collection of
14 chapters authored by 19 international experts covering a range of con-
ceptual, methodological and procedural issues in conducting ethical
research with children. Topics addressed include the notion of risk, its
minimization and management; research design issues; research with
very young children; opening the research conversation; research into
child abuse and neglect; working with indigenous communities;
inclusion and participation of children with special educational needs
and/or disabilities; ethico-political choices and challenges of transfor-
mative research; ethical aspects of power; collaborative, transdisciplinary
research; and future directions. For students and practitioner-researchers
in childhood studies, teacher education, public health, nursing, human
services, legal studies, psychology, and social sciences.
HQ769 2006-924792 978-1-4129-3069-7
Inventing adulthoods; a biographical approach to youth
transitions.
Henderson, Sheila et al.
Sage Publications, ©2007 189 p. $39.95 (pa)
Five British social scientists look at 100 young people growing up during
the decade 1996-2006 in rural and urban Britain. In most cases, the same
researcher dealt with the same subject through the entire decade, so close
relationships were forged. After setting out their theories and methods,
they consider the journey from public agendas to joined up lives, and
biographical projects and the remaking of inequality.
HQ772 2005-051781 978-0-8264-8465-9
Managing behaviour in the early years.
Kay, Janet.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 199 p. $19.95 (pa)
Kay (early childhood studies, Sheffield Hallam U., UK) offers practi-
tioners a number of useful tips for managing the behavior of children in
preschool settings. In addition to addressing difficult or harmful
behavior, she discusses long-term strategies for supporting the devel-
opment of mature and independent behavior. Particular emphasis is
placed on the role of good relationships. The material in this volume
(which lacks a subject index) is augmented by case studies, self-
assessment exercises, and discussion questions.
–155–
HQ784 2006-012514 978-1-4051-4418-6
Children and television; a global perspective.
Lamish, Dafnah.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 257 p. $84.95
Lemish (communication, Tel Aviv U.) offers a critical analysis of the accu-
mulated literature of the past 50 years on the interrelationships between
television and children. Looking at the issue from a global perspective,
she moves beyond American- and European-based studies to consider
research conducted around the world. Some of the topics addressed
include the behavioral effects of television on children; the role of tele-
vision in the construction of gender identities; and the relationship
between television and formal learning. She concludes with a discussion
of some efforts aimed at improving children’s television and fostering
global cooperation.
HQ784 2006-016723 978-1-4129-0530-5
Encyclopedia of children, adolescents, and the media; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey Jensen Arnett.
Sage Publications, ©2007 986 p. $325.00
A collaborative effort of 500-plus international academics and
researchers, this two-volume publication contains state-of-the-art research
and ready-to-use facts on the media’s interaction with children and ado-
lescents. Its 463 entries address concerns and potential negative effects,
and benefits, of traditional and electronic media. Entries on specific
media characters or performers are not included as the emphasis is on
experiences with media rather than on the specific media products
children and adolescents use. In addition to a complete A-to-Z index, each
volume includes an alphabetical list of entries and a “reader’s guide”
classifying the articles under 17 general topic categories: advertising,
advocacy groups, books and print media, computers and electronic
media, cross- cultural perspectives, developmental stages, gender and
sexuality, media education, media effects, media use, movies, music,
public policy, research methods, television, theories, and violence and
aggression. Oversize: 8.5x11.25″.
HQ784 2006-030165 978-0-7391-1396-7
If kids could vote; children, democracy, and the media.
Sugarman, Sally.
Lexington Books, ©2007 132 p. $24.95 (pa)
Sugarman investigates how children perceive politics and the media and
form their political consciousness. Her analysis is based on interviews
and surveys of sixth graders in a Vermont town during three Presidential
elections and two non-Presidential years. In addition to presenting the
children’s experiences in their own words, she considers how various
aspects of the media and the school setting affect their thinking.
Sugarman taught Childhood Studies at Bennington College for 35 years.
HQ784 2006-016746 978-0-19-530983-6
Violent video game effects on children and adolescents;
theory, research, and public policy.
Anderson, Craig Alan et al.
Oxford U. Press, ©2007 190 p. $29.95
Anderson, Gentile, and Buckley (all psychology, Iowa State U.) offer a text
for researchers, public policy makers, parents, and educators concerned
about the negative effects of video games on children and adolescents.
Coverage includes an overview of basic issues concerning violent video
games; past research on the subject; the authors’ updated version of the
General Aggression Model and its use to understand developmental
processes to predict effects of media violence on the development of
aggressive behavior and aggressive personality; presentation of three new
studies filling important knowledge gaps in video game research liter-
ature; and a summarization and of the authors’ new findings and their
implications for several key issues.
HQ784 2006-020202 978-1-56549-225-7
A world turned upside down; social ecological approaches
to children in war zones.
Title main entry. Ed. by Neil Boothby et al.
Kumarian Press, ©2006 260 p. $26.95 (pa)
Boothby (clinical population and family health, Columbia U.) et al.
compile a collection of 10 chapters by an international group of scholars
and psychologists, some who have worked with UNICEF, Save the
Children, and similar organizations and in war zones in Asia, Africa,
Latin America, and Europe. They discuss the experiences of children in
war zones, and how these experiences differ on an individual basis. They
emphasize the importance of psychosocial programs and use the
Psychosocial Working Group Conceptual Framework to understand well-
being and interventions. The chapters look at culture bias, the
importance of the family in well-being, child-family separation, gender
and soldiering, the contributions of youth to peace building, reintegration
into civilian life, religion and ideology, and protection efforts.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HQ796 2006-923157 1-887554-54-8
Cognitive behavioral interventions for at-risk youth.
Glick, Barry et al.
Civic Research Institute, ©2006 — p. $133.95
Practitioner Glick and his contributors describe and evaluate cognitive
behavioral interventions in use over the last 50 years or so as they relate
to juvenile justice and other systems that serve youth. Using examples
and real-world studies they cover the history of such interventions, basic
models and techniques of cognitive restructuring interventions, cognitive
skills interventions, multimodal interventions, implementation and man-
agement issues, taking the Boys & Girls Club of America approach to
developing model cognitive intervention programs, implementing a cog-
nitive self change program, specific roles in program implementation,
practical techniques to enhance prosocial information processing, review
of research into effectiveness, applications of theory in corrections, and
several national and international case studies of implementation. They
include a list of working programs and a comprehensive bibliography.
HQ796 2006-048639 978-0-415-96667-2
International encyclopedia of adolescence; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey Jensen Arnett.
Routledge, ©2007 1259 p. $295.00
This two-volume encyclopedia presents 88 articles summarizing research
on the experiences of adolescents (defined as ages 10 to 25) in countries
from Argentina to Zimbabwe. The articles, averaging 6,000 to 11,000
words each, discuss the perception of adolescence in each society, the
transmission of religious and other beliefs, gender-specific roles, the
development of personal and cultural identity, peer relationships and
youth culture, love and sexuality, health risk behavior, education, work,
media use and reception, involvement in politics and the military, and
various issues unique to the country in question that don’t fit under any
of the other sections. Most of the authors are psychologists, but the con-
tributors also include sociologists, educators, economists, and demogra-
phers. Of the 88 country articles, 28 cover Africa and the Middle East, 18
look at Asia, 27 discuss Europe, and 15 explore the Americas.
HQ796 2005-037155 978-0-7425-4668-4
Kids these days; facts and fictions about today’s youth.
Sternheimer, Karen.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 167 p. $19.95 (pa)
Aimed at a broad audience of scholars and general readers, this text crit-
ically examines some of the hottest news stories about today’s youth in
order to determine whether or not things are as bad as they sound. By
comparing the headlines with statistical evidence, Sternheimer (sociology,
U. of Southern California) dispels a number of myths while identifying
areas where kids really do need help. Some of the issues explored include
kidnapping by strangers, childhood obesity, and school violence.
HQ796 2006-020322 0-8156-3127-8
Straightedge youth; complexity and contradictions of a
subculture.
Wood, Robert T.
Syracuse U. Pr., ©2006 180 p. $19.95
The straightedge movement began as a faction of the Washington DC
punk culture in the late 1970s, and is characterized by an often militant
opposition to drug and alcohol use, smoking, promiscuous sex, and the
consumption and abuse of animals. Wood (sociology, U. of Lethbridge,
Alberta) examines the subculture through interviews with current and
founding straightedgers and discussion of the principles on which it is
based and the hardcore music scene that closely accompanies it. Among
other themes, the author explores differing perspectives from within the
scene about the “rules” for collective and individual straightedge identity,
and how that identity should be expressed (symbolically, vocally, mili-
tantly, etc).
HQ796 2006930074 978-1-891792-31-1
Understanding youth; adolescent development for
educators.
Nakkula, Michael J. and Eric Toshalis.
Harvard Education Press, ©2006 286 p. $29.95 (pa)
Researchers Nakkula and Toshalis (both: Harvard Graduate School of
Education) provide educators and others who work with young adults
with an overview of adolescent development. Drawing upon the work of
psychological researchers and theorists, they explain how factors such as
social class, relationships, gender norms, and the media shape adoles-
cents’ sense of themselves. A constructionist perspective is employed
throughout, and threaded case studies are used to illustrate the concepts
discussed.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HQ799 2006-015176 978-0-7425-3966-2
Fountain of youth; strategies and tactics for mobilizing
America’s young voters.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel M. Shea and John C. Green.
(Campaigning American style)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 256 p. $24.95 (pa)
Shea (political science, Allegheny College) and Green (political science, U.
of Akron) present nine studies that explore and assess strategies and pro-
grams intended to mobilize American youth to engage in the electoral
political process. The studies are presented in three sections that
examine, in turn, efforts by political parties, campaigns of civic edu-
cation, and work by nonpartisan organizations.
HQ801 2006-042219 978-0-06-088111-5
DSI: date scene investigation; the diagnostic manual of
dating disorders.
Kerner, Ian.
ReganBooks, ©2006 246 p. $24.95
Kerner, the hip sex expert appearing on the Discovery Health Channel
series Love on the Rocks, presents cases of cads disguised as boyfriends
from the Federal Bureau of Intimacy’s most-wanted files. From the case
of the office fling flop to the case of the relationship torn by porn, Kerner
indicts the cads for interpersonal infractions, mating misdemeanors, and
flirtatious felonies.
HQ1034 2006-031058 978-0-275-98773-2
Defending same-sex marriage; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark Strasser.
Praeger, ©2007 829 p. $300.00
As the title to this three-volume set makes clear, contributors share the
belief of chief editor Strasser (law, Capital U. Law School) that indi-
viduals, the state, and society as a whole would benefit were marriage
laws to made more inclusive of lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender, and
intersexual (LGBTI) people. Each volume addresses these benefits and
related issues from different perspectives. The first volume examines
legal and political topics, including the Supreme Judicial Court of
Massachusetts ruling in Goodridge v. Department of Public Health;
Vermont’s Baker v. State; domestic partner status rules in California, New
Jersey, and the District of Columbia; corporate benefits that could be pro-
vided to same-sex couples that do or do not require cooperation from gov-
ernment regulators and insurers; lessons learned from the recent issuing
of same-sex marriage licenses by the mayor of San Francisco; the 2004
state referendum ballots seeking to preclude same-sex marriage; the con-
stitutional vulnerabilities of the Defense of Marriage Act; and the negative
financial effects on children of barring same-sex marriage. The second
volume contains chapters seeking to show how same-sex marriage can be
seen as compatible with Judaism, Islam, Buddhism, Hinduism,
Catholicism, and several strands of Protestantism. Finally the third
volume contains chapters that address same-sex marriage from the per-
spectives of advocacy and activism, education and the media discourses,
and different American cultural traditions.
HQ1058 2005-031466 978-0-87422-283-8
Forbidden red; widowhood in urban Nepal.
Galvin, Kathey-Lee.
Washington State U. Press, ©2005 166 p. $18.95 (pa)
In this edited version of her dissertation in anthropology, published as
part of an award she won while at Washington State U., Galvin examines
the experiences of widows in Nepal, with a focus on kinship and how it
constructs and deconstructs widowhood. Specifically, she discusses how
these widows are rejected from their kin group and how they deal with
their new status, as well as their rituals, religion, caste, and residence
choices. She uses both her own model of kinship and practice theory in
the analysis, which is based on 56 interviews and life histories of widows
in Kathmandu and other parts of the country. There is no index.
HQ1059 2005-029668 0-87417-672-7
Swooning beauty; a memoir of pleasure.
Frueh, Joanna.
U. of Nevada Press, ©2006 289 p. $24.95 (pa)
Performance artist and art historian (U. of Nevada, Reno), Frueh chron-
icles her spiritual recovery after the death of her parents and her divorce.
Through an examination of her intuitions, desires, fantasies, dreams and
emotions, Frueh is able to reassess her life and her potential. She credits
her capacity for pleasure and her sense of a heroic female identity for
her recovery and self- realization.
–156–
HQ1061 2006906457 0-534-59814-5
Aging, the individual, and society, 8th ed.
Hillier, Susan and Georgia M. Barrow.
Intl. Thomson Publishing, ©2007 465 p. $96.95 (pa)
For sociology students, Hillier (Sonoma State U.) and Barrow provide a
textbook on the different aspects of aging in US society, taking an inter-
disciplinary approach. This edition addresses the effects of longer
lifespans; integrates issues relevant to subgroups such as ethnic/cultural
and gender differences; incorporates policy, public will, and policy imple-
mentation; and discusses the role of baby boomers. It has been reor-
ganized, with an expanded appendix on internet addresses. Both subject
and name indexes are included.
HQ1061 2005-017316 978-0-7425-1954-1
Social theory and aging.
Powell, Jason L. (New social formations)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 157 p. $19.95 (pa)
Powell (sociology, University of Liverpool, UK) explores theoretical issues
related to the understanding of aging in contemporary Western society,
in order to analyze how “old age” is socially constituted by powerful
assumptions that are usually taken for granted. He introduces scientific
models and theories of gerontology, and demonstrates how assumptions
of aging have provided a power and knowledge base for biomedical dis-
ciplines, political-economic discourses, and professional practices. He
offers “postmodern” constructions of aging through the development of
new epistemologies: postmodernism and the aging body, discourse and
power/knowledge, and aging in the risk society.
HQ1063 2006-026013 0-275-98415-X
Aging nation; the economics and politics of growing older
in America.
Schulz, James H. and Robert H. Binstock.
Praeger, ©2006 283 p. $49.95
Writing for the general public, Schulz (economics, Brandeis U.) and
Binstock (aging, health, and society, Case Western Reserve U.) describe
changes occurring in the US due to the aging of baby boomers and how
their retirement decisions will be affected. They also discuss situations
they will need to consider and address areas usually covered in separate
books: Social Security history, policy issues, reform proposals, health care
issues, work and retirement policy, private pensions, and the politics of
aging. In particular, they aim to aid readers in figuring out the truth
behind pessimistic warnings of future problems in health care and
policy for the elderly and describe how these focus on the wrong issues.
Instead, they focus on system-wide health-care cost issues, retirement and
personal pensions, problems with raising the retirement age, and the
myth that the country will be ruled by the aged.
HQ1063 2005-034070 978-1-57230-729-2
The emotional survival guide for caregivers; looking after
yourself and your family while helping an aging parent.
Jacobs, Barry J.
Guilford Pr., ©2006 261 p. $14.95 (pa)
After relating his early experience of his father’s terminal illness, a
Pennsylvania psychologist (affiliated with Temple U. and the U. of
Pennsylvania) offers advice for the increasing number of baby boomers
dealing with such issues as getting support as a caregiver for a parent,
ambivalent feelings, and the stages of grieving. The guide includes
information in question-and-answer format and resources (organizations
and websites, but not further reading).
HQ1064 978-1-59237-136-5
Older Americans information directory; 2007, 6th ed.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2006 1158 p. $165.00 (pa)
This reference book for senior citizens compiles information on health
conditions, disability aids, facilities, and other topics related to aging. The
listings (about 12,000 in this edition) include organizations, books, direc-
tories, magazines, newspapers, newsletters, video and audio, websites,
and research centers, by topic and then alphabetically. This edition also
combines information on national and federal organizations into one
chapter, as well as state agencies in another. It places health resources in
each of the chapters and precedes each with descriptive paragraphs. New
chapters cover continuing education, disability aids, libraries, legal aid,
living centers, and travel. Six new articles are included—on online health
information, safe medicine use, crime, choosing a Medicare drug plan,
and hiring a home care provider. Indexes are divided by entry, geog-
raphy, and subject.
–157–
HQ1073 2006-041217 0-06-081741-0
Final exits; the illustrated encyclopedia of how we die.
Largo, Michael.
HarperCollins, ©2006 465 p. $15.95 (pa)
Between 1926 and 1930, over 3,200 people were electrocuted by toasters
and these appliances still account for some deaths. Other unexpected
killers include dentures, homemade ice-cream, microwaves, and sleep-
eating. This A-Z compendium of the amazingly diverse causes of death
and how famous and other people met their demise is well-documented,
though some entries read like excerpts from Ripley’s Believe it or Not!.
None of the many illustrations are really grisly. This morbidly fascinating
volume would be an appropriate complement to Mary Roach’s survey of
the fate of corpses in Stiff (2003).
HQ1075 2006-006327 978-0-472-09943-6
Gender in transition; discourse and practice in German-
speaking Europe, 1750-1830.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ulrike Gleixner and Marion W. Gray. (Social
history, popular culture, and politics in Germany)
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 391 p. $75.00
Growing out of discussions between the editors (when they were asso-
ciated with the U. of Potsdam) and a subsequent Gender in Transition
working group, this volume treats rapidly changing gender roles in
Enlightenment era Europe. International contributors present 14 case
studies on particular aspects of these shifts in German-speaking society.
Government reforms focused on immoral outcomes of poverty which
threatened the social order. Related themes include the emergence of
widow’s insurance, non-romantic relationships between the sexes at
salons, women writers’ search for their own journals and inclusive lan-
guage, and philosopher Kant’s continued unenlightened thinking. Period
illustrations feature images of the virtues of faith and charity, couples
dancing, women’s fashions, and women drivers.
HQ1075 2006-011357 978-0-7425-3742-2
Gender, sexuality, and power in modern Latin America
since independence.
Title main entry. Ed. by William E. French and Katherine Elaine Bliss.
(Jaguar books on Latin America series)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 309 p. $29.95 (pa)
Featuring the original primary research of leading scholars in Latin
American studies, this collection of essays integrates gender and sexuality
into current historical interpretations concerning Latin America. The con-
tributors focus on diverse topics, such as dueling in Uruguay, youth
culture in Mexico, and revolution in Nicaragua, but all conclude that
gender and sexuality have been essential to the operation of power in
Latin America over the past 200 years.
HQ1090 2005-299720 978-0-7190-6027-4
Leisure, citizenship and working-class men in Britain,
1850-1945.
Beaven, Brad. (Studies in popular culture)
Manchester U. Press, ©2005 258 p. $84.95
From the bawdy audience of a Victorian Penny Gaff to the excitable
crowd of a 20th-century football match, working-class male leisure has
been a contentious issue for contemporary observers. Arguing that there
was a remarkable continuity in male working-class culture between 1850
and 1945, Beaven (social history, U. of Portsmouth) contends that, despite
changing socio-economic contexts, male working-class culture continued
to draw from a tradition of active participation and cultural contestation
that was both class and gender exclusive. Beaven’s use of accounts from
those who participated in and observed contemporary popular leisure
makes this a lively and readable study. Distributed in the US by Palgrave
Macmillan.
HQ1121 2006-044716 0-7190-7565-3
History matters; patriarchy and the challenge of
feminism.
Bennett, Judith M. (Gender in history)
Manchester U. Press, ©2006 214 p. $49.95
Bennett (history, U. of Southern California) describes an eroding rela-
tionship between feminism and history over the past three decades, and
seeks to recover some of the clarity of the seamless union of the two she
felt during the 1970s, but informed by her subsequent experience in both
realms. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HQ1127 2006-026026 978-0-275-98249-2
Daughters of Gaia; women in the ancient Mediterranean
world.
Vivante, Bella. (Praeger series on the ancient world)
Praeger, ©2007 230 p. $49.95
American scholar of classics Vivante explores the divine figures and the
actual women who embodied the various transmutations of the concepts
of femaleness in Egypt, Mesopotamia, Greece, and Rome across four mil-
lennia. She considers such aspects as women’s rituals, health and med-
icine, the economic bases of women’s lives, women who ruled, war, and
women’s philosophical writings and poetry.
HQ1147 2006-048638 0-415-96944-1
Women and gender in medieval Europe; an encyclopedia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Margaret Schaus. (Routledge encyclopedias of
the Middle Ages; v.14)
Routledge, ©2006 944 p. $175.00
Female patronage of the arts and the church, female mysticism and devo-
tional practices, women’s medicine and understandings of the female
body, and women’s roles in politics and diplomacy are among the activ-
ities discussed in the 563 signed articles, each with cross-references to
other articles and a bibliography of primary and secondary sources. The
very few illustrations are monochrome.
HQ1154 2006-279527 0-7456-3381-1
Dead end feminism.
Badinter, Elisabeth. Trans. by Julia Borossa.
Polity Press, ©2006 126 p. $19.95 (pa)
According to French philosopher Badinter, the gains of French feminism
in promoting equality of the sexes became infected in the 1990s by
American feminists that portrayed all women as victims and mistakenly
equated small oppressions with big ones, thus leading feminism to lose
credibility. She insists that this brand of feminism, which draws essen-
tialist differences between men and women, is incapable of fighting for
a lack of differentiation in male/female roles, the only road to true
equality. Distributed in the US by Blackwell Publishing.
HQ1154 2006-046549 978-0-582-50608-4
Feminism.
Hannam, June. (Big idea series)
Longman, ©2007 188 p. $15.95 (pa)
The series briefly introduces students to ideas that had significantly
impact on society during the 20th century. Hanam (modern history, U.
of the West of England) traces the history of European and American
feminist and women’s rights movements from the 1760s through the 20th
century and into the shallows of the 21st.
HQ1155 978-1-55238-184-7
Home/bodies; geographies of self, place, and space.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wendy Schissel.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 206 p. $34.95 (pa)
Schissel (humanities and distance learning, Mt. Hood Community
College), editing this work on behalf of the Women’s Studies Research
Unit at the U. of Saskatchewan in Canada, present 11 essays by feminist
scholars that explore metaphorical geographies of home, gender, and
identity. Topics include the negotiation of female Muslim identities in
Canada; adolescent girls, consumer society, and information technologies;
the impact of palliative care on familial space; women’s activism in
support of industrial forestry on Canada’s West Coast; the impact of
identity on intercultural friendships among women; women’s profes-
sional mentorship in psychology and the academy; and voices of dancers
with mobility impairments. Distributed in the US by Michigan State U.
Press.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HQ1170 2004-269368 978-90-04-12820-0
Encyclopedia of women & Islamic cultures; v.4:
Economics, education, mobility and space.
Title main entry. Ed. by Suad Joseph et al.
BRILL, ©2007 587 p. $249.00
This is the fourth of a planned six-volume work “envisioned as a broad
based, interdisciplinary, cross-cultural, transhistorical encyclopedia,
focusing specifically on women and Islamic cultures, but also including
non-Muslim women in cultures where Islam has had a significant
presence. Whereas previous volumes have been dedicated to method-
ologies, paradigms, and sources; family, law, and politics; and family,
body, sexuality, and health and the remaining volumes will treat prac-
tices, interpretations, and representations and provide a general index
and supplementary material, this volume is concerned with economics,
education, mobility, and space and other issues related to the material
conditions facing Muslim women generally and non-Muslim women in
Muslim majority societies. General editor Joseph (U. of California at
Davis) and his associates present 263 entries covering 87 topics (including
15 overviews) within the broad headings of cities, development, eco-
nomics, education, environment, information technologies, migration,
poverty, slavery, space, and tourism. Each specific topic (e.g. “Migration:
Refugee Women’s Narratives,” “Education: Women’s Religious,” or
“Space: Domestic”) is further broken down into country-specific or
region-specific articles that follow the topical overview article. Name and
subject indexes are provided for the single volume.
HQ1180 2006-018378 978-0-7619-2891-1
Feminist research practice; a primer.
Hesse-Biber, Sharlene Nagy and Patricia Lina Leavy.
Sage Publications, ©2007 371 p. $79.95
Edited by Hesse-Biber (Boston College) and Leavy (Stonehill College), this
work seeks to provide grounding in the principle epistemological, theo-
retical, and methodological approaches in feminist sociological research.
Reviewing theoretical and epistemological issues, they include chapters
on feminist empiricism, feminist standpoint theory, and feminist post-
modernism and poststructuralism. This discussion is followed by a
review of feminist research methods, including in-depth interviewing,
oral history and focus group interviews, ethnography, content analysis,
survey research, and mixed-methods research. The concluding chapter
addresses the analysis and interpretation of research findings.
HQ1180 2006-011641 978-1-4129-0545-9
Handbook of feminist research; theory and praxis.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sharlene Nagy Hesse-Biber.
Sage Publications, ©2007 758 p. $125.00
Intending to legitimize and establish the importance of feminist- pio-
neered epistemologies, theories, methodologies, and methods in social
science research, Hesse-Biber (Boston College) presents an interdisci-
plinary handbook containing 43 chapters that highlight the scope of
current feminist social science research and address ongoing debates and
practical applications and issues. The contributions are presented in sec-
tions dealing with feminist perspectives on knowledge building; feminist
research praxis; feminist perspectives on the research process; and com-
mentaries on future directions in feminist theory, research, and ped-
agogy. The content has been chosen to reflect a diversity of scholarship
with respect to race, class, sexual preference, and geographic region.
HQ1206 2006-043794 0-375-42417-2
The female thing; dirt, sex, envy, vulnerability.
Kipnis, Laura.
Pantheon Books, ©2006 173 p. $23.95
Kipnis (media studies, Northwestern U.) ponders the female psyche in the
aftermath of second-wave feminism and part-way to gender equality.
Feminism has come up against the inner woman, she argues: masculine
privilege would have ended long ago without female compliance. She has
not indexed her work.
–158–
HQ1206 0-88920-497-7
Killing women; the visual culture of gender and violence.
Title main entry. Ed. by Annette Burfoot and Susan Lord. (Cultural
studies series)
Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2006 328 p. $38.95 (pa)
Choosing their title to reference both women who are killed and women
who kill, Burfoot (feminist science studies and visual culture, Queen’s U.,
Canada) and Lord (film studies, Queen’s U.) present a wide-ranging col-
lection of theoretical essays on the representation of gender and violence
in historical and contemporary visual culture. They have organized the
essays into three sections that explore the construction and reception of
histories and memories of gendered violence; strategies, discourse, and
technologies of the representation of violence; and collectivity in the form
of national culture as it relates to representations and mediations of
women and violence.
HQ1220 2006-019972 978-0-8166-4790-3
Pure beauty; judging race in Japanese American beauty
pageants.
King-O’Riain, Rebecca Chiyoko.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 276 p. $20.00 (pa)
With a low rate of immigration and a high rate of interracial marriage,
Japanese Americans today compose the Asian ethnic group with the
largest proportion of mixed-race members. Within Japanese American
communities, collective anxiety about overassimilation has led to an indi-
vidual and collective search for cultural reassurance that a Japanese
American community will continue to exist. Japanese American King-
O’Riain (sociology, National U. of Ireland, Maynooth) presents findings
from an ethnographic study of one cultural institution—Japanese
American community beauty pageants in San Francisco, Los Angeles,
Seattle, and Honolulu—to discover how these pageants seek to maintain
racial and ethnic purity within shifting notions of cultural identity.
HQ1236 978-1-59237-117-4
From suffrage to the Senate; America’s political women;
an encyclopedia of leaders, causes & issues; 2v. (reprint,
1999)
O’Dea, Suzanne.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2006 488 p. $195.00
The second edition of the two-volume encyclopedia examining women’s
involvement in American politics in (primarily) the 20th century comes
just as a record number of women have been elected to national political
office, including incoming Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi, whose
biographical entry is included here alongside many other women office
holders, as well as a number of significant political activists such as
anarchist Emma Goldman, feminist theorist Andrea Dworkin, former
Black Panthers chair Elaine Brown, conservative activist Phyllis Schlafly,
and neoconservative hawk Midge Decter. While dominated by biogra-
phies, the 800 entries also include discussions of important legislation,
organizations, and issues pertinent to women’s involvement in American
politics. Examples include the American Civil Liberties Union, Roe v.
Wade, the Christian Coalition of America, displace homemakers, the
Equal Employment Opportunity Act of 1972, Operation Rescue, the peace
movement, and Title IX.
HQ1236 2005-026146 978-0-415-36834-6
The politics of women’s interests; new comparative
perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Louise Chappell and Lisa Hill. (Routledge
research in comparative politics; v.12)
Routledge, ©2006 244 p. $120.00
Billing the collection as an attempt to bridge the gap between “sameness”
and “difference” approaches to women’s interests, Chappell (economics
and political science, U. of Sydney, Australia) and Hill (politics, U. of
Adelaide, Australia) present ten papers that look at how women activists
around the world have asserted their interests through political institu-
tions, always assuming that while women to share some political
interests, important differences also exist between women as a group.
Topics include identification of women’s political interests in Britain,
political orientations and the gender voting gap in industrialized settings,
proportional representation of women in Western legislatures, women’s
policy agencies and neoliberalism in New Zealand and Canada’s British
Columbia, gender inequality and feminist activism in institutions, gender
interests and constitutional matters in the European Union, international
citizenship and women’s interests, and developments regarding women’s
interests and women’s rights at the UN criminal tribunals and the
International Criminal Court.
–159–
HQ1236 2005-029630 0-415-39316-7
Representing women in parliament; a comparative study.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marian Sawer et al. (Routledge research in
comparative politics; 14)
Routledge, ©2006 278 p. $120.00
Sawer (chair, Research Committee on Gender, Politics and Policy of the
International Political Science Association), Tremblay (political science, U.
of Ottawa, Canada), and Trimble (political science, U. of Alberta, Canada)
present 14 papers that comparatively explore issues of female represen-
tation in the “Westminster” parliamentary systems of the United
Kingdom, Canada, Australia, and New Zealand. The first set of papers
analyze institutional and structural factors influencing actual numbers of
women seated in the parliaments of the individual countries. The
attention than shifts from the mere presence of women (descriptive rep-
resentation) to issues of substantive representation, with papers exploring
how much influence the presence of women has had on the tenor of
debate, general increase of respect for women throughout society, the
extent to which women have separate interests from men and are able to
assert them through parliament, and similar topics. The remaining
papers test institutional theory’s propositions about timing and path
dependence through case studies of institution-building in which women
have been in at the ground floor.
HQ1236 978-0-8020-9125-3
Rural women’s leadership in Atlantic Canada; first-hand
perspectives on local public life and participation in
electoal politics.
Carbert, Louise.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 190 p. $45.00
Noting that the dearth of women in rural Canadian government seems
more connected to the dearth of women candidates than sexism on the
part of the voters, Carbert (political science, Dalhousie U.) set out to inves-
tigate the barriers and impediments facing women who are capable of
serving in the political arena by interviewing 126 women who play lead-
ership roles in the rural communities of Atlantic Canada. In her analysis,
she discusses the leadership qualities of her interviewees; their views of
leadership; relationships between public participation, occupations, and
family life; and the women’s distaste for the style of patronage politics
found in their communities.
HQ1236 978-0-7734-5579-5
The tension between women’s rights and religions; the
case of Malaysia.
Bong, Sharon A.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 297 p. $119.95
Bong (women’s studies and creative writing, Monash U.) takes a new
approach to the study of how women’s lives take shape within religion,
that being that equality actually does sometimes equal sameness. She
challenges the universality and secularity of current global rights dis-
course, elucidates and bridges the disparity between global rhetoric and
implementation of women’s and human rights, and employs an Asian,
particularly Malaysian feminist epistemology that she feels has the
potential to reconcile the current impasse between cultural and universal
relativism of rights. Using a crisp, narrative style she explains the con-
flicts between global vision and local practices and the need to go beyond
universal versus relativist rights discourse and practice, explains how out-
siders and insiders perceive and apply rights activism based on faith,
shows how an Asian-Malaysian feminist viewpoint works to bring the
elements of the debate to their proper places, with local visions building
global practice.
ART BOOK NEWS ANNUAL features selections from SciTech Book News
and Reference & Research Book News. Contact us for information:
jane@booknews.com or (503) 281-9230.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HQ1236 2004-065143 0-415-35738-1
Women, activism, and social change.
Title main entry. Ed. by Maja Mikula. (Routledge research in gender
and society; 11)
Routledge, ©2005 277 p. $115.00
Mikula (Italian studies, Institute of International Studies, U. of
Technology Sydney, Australia) presents 12 studies that juxtapose issues of
social change and women’s agency in a variety of cultural and historical
settings. The first eight contributions include discussions of ideological
obstacles for resistance to patriarchy in post- independence Singapore, the
unfair historiographical dismissal of the Chinese women’s suffrage
movement as “little more than a futile escapade by bourgeois women,”
the material and moral support given by the Japanese Patriotic Ladies’
Association (1901-1942) to Japanese nationalism, the conflict between
Australian radical feminist activism against wartime rape and the nation-
alist celebrations of Anzac Day, the development of Yugoslav and
Croatian neo-feminism from World War II to the 1990s and its problems
with ethnic nationalism, grassroots women’s organizations in post-Soviet
Russia, and Tibetan nuns jailed for nationalist protests in the 1990s. The
last four chapters focus on the politics of representation, covering topics
such as the development of the nationalist rhetoric of Polish motherhood
from early Polish Romanticism to the present day, German author
Christa Wolf’s reinvention of the mythic figure of Media as the perpetual
outsider, and Chicana literary re-imaginings of a 17th century nun as
politicized responses to marginalization.
HQ1237 2005-021864 978-0-7425-4545-8
Leaving women behind; modern families, outdated laws.
Strassel, Kimberley A. et al.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 215 p. $21.95
This volume discusses the ways in which women are discriminated
against in social and economic policies. Tax law, labor law, and other
policy institutions have not adapted to the entry of women in the labor
market, the authors argue, and working women are penalized as a result
because these laws favor a single-income household. They examine and
make suggestions for changes to work schedules, tax and benefit systems,
labor laws, welfare, childcare, school systems, retirement, benefits, and
Social Security. Strassel is a writer for the Wall Street Journal. Colgan is
an education consultant and formerly affiliated with the Women in the
Economy Project of the National Center for Policy Analysis. Goodman is
founder and president of the National Center for Policy Analysis, which,
with the Manhattan Institute, sponsored the publication of this volume.
HQ1240 2006-372796 0-85598-550-X
Gender and the millennium development goals.
Title main entry. Ed. by Caroline Sweetman. (Oxfam focus on gender)
Oxfam GB, ©2005 117 p. $16.50 (pa)
Nine articles from international scholars consider the Millennium
Development Goals from the perspective of gender. The emphasis
throughout is on women’s rights and empowerment as key factors in
combating poverty, hunger, and disease while stimulating development.
The material in this volume (which lacks a subject index) was originally
published as a single issue of the journal Gender and Development.
Distributed in the U.S. by Stylus.
HQ1240 2006-297096 0-85598-551-8
Mainstreaming gender in development; a critical review.
Title main entry. Ed. by Fenella Porter and Caroline Sweetman. (Oxfam
focus on gender)
Oxfam GB, ©2005 111 p. $16.50 (pa)
Gender mainstreaming has been defined as “a strategy which aims to
bring about gender equality and advance women’s rights by infusing
gender analysis, gender-sensitive research, women’s perspectives and
gender equality goals into mainstream policies, projects and institutions.”
In this text, eight papers look critically at how gender mainstreaming has
been carried out in organizations involved in development, assess its
impact, and consider future directions. Covering governmental and non-
governmental organizations, the essays variously focus on gender main-
streaming efforts at the local, national, and international levels.
Distributed in the US by Stylus.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HQ1240 2006-445826 0-7315-3745-9
NGO’s and post-conflict recovery; the Leitana Nehan
Women’s Development Agency, Bougainville.
Title main entry. Ed. by Helen Hakena et al.
Asia Pacific Press, ©2006 182 p. $30.00 (pa)
This work analyzes the work of the Leitana Nehan Women’s
Development Agency (LNWDA) in undertaking grassroots peace-making
and peace-building work in the Papua New Guinea’s province of
Bougainville following the secessionist conflict of the late 1990s. Opening
chapters describe the history and work of the LNWDA, providing biog-
raphical information on its founders, discussion of how LNWDA’s
humanitarian relief work developed and was received by the community,
and an accounting of LNWDA’s activities in the post-conflict era. Later
chapters examine LNWDA’s work through a number of theoretical lenses,
including post-structural analysis of gender, development, and peace dis-
courses; institutional analysis of relations between LNWDA, the
International Women’s Development Agency, and the Australian Agency
for International Development; and discussion of the place of LNWDA in
local, international, and global networks. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HQ1418 2006-026206 978-0-313-33547-1
Women’s roles in nineteenth-century America.
Wayne, Tiffany K. (Women’s roles through history)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 210 p. $59.95
In a series highlighting women’s roles in major areas of the world,
Wayne (U.S. and women’s history, Cabrillo College, Aptos, California;
formerly, Institute for Research on Women and Gender, Stanford U.)
traces the 19th century in the US as one of great progress for women.
Still, as the timeline shows, it wasn’t until 1920 that the Constitution was
amended to grant women the right to vote. The many images include an
illustration from an antislavery book; photographs of Little Women
author Louisa May Alcott, early feminist theorist Margaret Fuller, and
Indian reformer Sarah Winnemucca; and a Mary Cassatt painting for the
Woman’s Building at the 1983 World’s Columbian Exposition. Chapters
include suggested reading.
HQ1419 2006-004333 978-1-57233-542-4
The saturated world; aesthetic meaning, intimate objects,
women’s lives, 1890-1940.
Gordon, Beverly.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 273 p. $38.00
Gordon (chair, environment, textiles and design department, U. of
Wisconsin-Madison) adds a new and useful dimension to the study of
19th and 20th-century domesticity by demonstrating the ways that
women elaborated on their everyday tasks and responsibilities by trans-
forming them into playful, emotionally satisfying amusements. Through
this study, Gordon seeks to redress the assumption that women’s
domestic activities had less value than work done outside the home.
HQ1464 2006-005717 978-0-8165-2528-7
Women and change at the U.S.-Mexico border; mobility,
labor, and activism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Doreen J. Mattingly and Ellen R. Hansen.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 231 p. $45.00
Social scientists from both sides of the border describe how women in
the region are responding to changes in the three spheres by making
their own. Among their topics are the gendered consequences of
migration for Mexican indigenous women, the roots of autonomy
through work participation in northern Mexico, and non-government
organizations and political participation in Baja California.
HQ1600 978-0-7165-3341-2
Made holy; Irish women religious at home and abroad.
McKenna, Yvonne.
Irish Academic Press, ©2006 268 p. $75.00
Drawing on the oral testimony of 30 Irish women religious, McKenna
(sociology and women’s studies, U. of Limerick) explores how nuns and
sisters have inhabited, negotiated, and contested a sense of self as Irish,
as women, as Catholics, and as religious over the course of their lives
and in the context of the societies in which they have lived. The sections
cover Ireland from the 1910s to the 1960s, religious life before and after
Vatican II, and returning to Ireland from England or foreign missions.
Some of the material has been published previously. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
–160–
HQ1600 2006-017130 978-0-7546-4424-8
Risky pleasures?; club cultures and feminine identities.
Hutton, Fiona.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 121 p. $99.95
Hutton (criminology, Victoria U. of Wellington, New Zealand) looks at the
girls and young women who take part in the Manchester club scene,
offering a gendered perspective of the clubbing phenomenon and an
analysis from the women’s perspective. She considers the gendered expe-
rience of club spaces; women as drug dealers, disk jockeys, and club pro-
moters; drug use; safety and sexuality; and negotiating risk and pleasure.
HQ1600 978-0-7165-2801-2
Women of the Dáil; gender, republicanism and the Anglo-
Irish treaty.
Knirck, Jason.
Irish Academic Press, ©2006 205 p. $65.00
Women were equal in citizenship in Ireland starting in 1916, based
perhaps on the knowledge that women were active members of the inde-
pendence movement, suffering privation, physical danger and impris-
onment. Constance Markievicz, the first woman elected to Parliament as
an MP for Ireland, refused on principle to govern from the colonial
power’s soil and formed the Irish Parliament, the Dáil, with her male
Sinn Fein comrades. More women followed, two the widows of activists,
one the sister of a man who died in a prison hunger strike. They used a
remarkable system of political language and imagery to powerfully affect
nationalism, revolutionary theology and the idea of revolution itself.
Knirck (history, Central Washington U.) closely follows the rhetoric,
pragmatism, and compromises to violence of these and the women who
followed, who built Irish political life their own way. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
HQ1645 2006-005164 978-0-8047-5301-2
Sheltering women; negotiating gender and violence in
northern Italy.
Plesset, Sonja.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 250 p. $45.00
Drawing on her fieldwork in Parma during the late 1990s, Plesset
(anthropology, Harvard U.) sets out the political, cultural, historical, and
legal contexts of two indigenous explanations for intimate-partner vio-
lence. One explanation is that it reflects historical gender inequalities
embedded in traditional Italian society; the other is that it reflects con-
fusion and ambivalence about new or modern forms of gender relations.
HQ1726 2006-001664 978-0-7890-2984-3
A history of women’s seclusion in the Middle East; the
veil in the looking glass.
Chamberlin, Ann. (Innovations in feminist studies)
Haworth Pr., ©2006 298 p. $24.95 (pa)
Historical novelist, playwright, and scholar of the Near East, Chamberlain
explores the origins of the seclusion of women in the Middle East,
arguing that it was initiated by the women themselves as a protection for
women’s values. It preserves social ambidexterity, she says, rather than
the social equality so highly praised and so little practiced in the West.
HQ1726 2003-021866 978-0-7425-2924-3
Promises of empowerment; women in Asia and Latin
America. (reprint, 2004)
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter H. Smith et al.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 292 p. $32.95 (pa)
This is a paperbound reprint of a 2004 book. Scholars and practitioners
tend to assume that terms like democracy and development have the
same meaning across cultures, and the social scientists and other
scholars here test that assumption by comparing women’s experiences in
two regions with quite different cultural traditions and development tra-
jectories. Contributors from the US, Asia, and Latin America explore pol-
itics and the public arena, women at work and at home, and
constructions and representations. The 11 essays emerged from a mul-
tiyear project based at the University of California-San Diego.
HQ1726 2006-008911 978-0-691-12863-4
Women in the Middle East; past and present.
Keddie, Nikki R.
Princeton U. Press, ©2007 389 p. $24.95 (pa)
Keddie (emerita, Middle Eastern and Iranian history, U. of California, Los
Angeles) has gathered previously published articles, some reprinted in
their original format, others rewritten for this volume, on the history of
women in the Middle East and the scholarship and methodology applied
to the study of Middle Eastern women. The book concludes with a
fascinating autobiographical interview and essay on her life and career
as one of the first women in the U.S. to teach Middle East studies.
–161–
HQ1728 2006-014172 978-1-56656-663-6
The wind in my hair.
Salem, Salwa. Trans. by Yvonne Freccero.
Interlink Publishing Group, ©2007 229 p. $15.00 (pa)
Salwa Salem was just eight years old in 1948 when she, her family, and
many other Palestinians were driven from their homes and villages by
Zionist forces. She spent her life in nomadic exile, finally settling in Italy,
where she raised a family, studied philosophy, and became politically
active. She dictated this memoir to Laura Maritano shortly before she
died in 1992.
HQ1735 2006-049202 978-90-04-15295-3
Performing Islam; gender and ritual in Islam.
Torab, Azam. (Women and gender, the Middle East and the Islamic
world; v.4)
BRILL, ©2007 300 p. $88.00 (pa)
Though she does include one chapter on men’s rituals, Torab (social
anthropology, U. of London) focuses on women’s ceremonial life and its
diversity in order to develop an understanding of how gender is con-
structed and understood in modern Iran. She conducted her fieldwork in
1992-93, about 15 years after the Iranian revolution. The study is neither
a conventional anthropological community-focused study nor a socio-
logical or historical account, she says, but bears elements of both.
HQ1754 2006-389089 1-55111-689-8
Back door Java; state formation and the domestic in
working class Java.
Newberry, Jan. (Broadview ethnographies & case studies)
Broadview Press, ©2006 200 p. $22.95 (pa)
Through official support by the Indonesian government of the social
development activities of the Pembinaan Kesejahteraan Keluaraga (PKK-
a national housewives’ association), the ongoing process of state for-
mation has become inextricably linked to the activities of domestic
households. Through ethnographic analysis of one urban neighborhood
in Central Java, Newberry (anthropology, U. of Lethbridge, Canada)
explores these connections at the household, community, and national
levels.
HS2330 2006-030954 978-0-7864-2787-1
The Ku Klux Klan; history, organization, language,
influence and activities of America’s most notorious secret
society.
Newton, Michael.
McFarland & Co., ©2007 504 p. $95.00
This reference work presents information on the American white
supremacist organizations known collectively as the Ku Klux Klan. The
volumes 11 chapters summarize the history of the Klan, introduce its dis-
tinctive argot, describe the organization’s tenets, offer brief biographical
portraits of notable figures in the Klan (as well as important allies and
opponents), list constituent organizations, describe incidents of Klan
lynchings and other crimes and activities, discuss the policing of the
Klan, and look at journalistic coverage. A pair of appendixes presents a
timeline and select documents from Klan history.
HS3175 2006-007351 978-0-7890-3164-8
Club management issues in Australia and North America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Clayton W. Barrows and Nerilee Hing.
Haworth Pr., ©2006 233 p. $29.95 (pa)
Academics from North America and Australia explore current issues
related to the management of private clubs. Topics addressed include (for
example) declining memberships, waiting lists, wage determination, and
changing patron expectations. Barrows is Professor of Hospitality and
Tourism Management at the U. of Guelph, and Hing heads the Center for
Gambling Education and Research at Southern Cross U. in Australia. The
volume has been simultaneously co- published as International Journal of
Hospitality & Tourism Administration; v.7, nos. 2/3, 2006.
HT108 2005-048223 0-7407-5143-3
Urban dictionary; fularious street slang defined.
Peckham, Aaron.
Andrews McMeel, ©2005 343 p. $12.95 (pa)
Peckham, a software engineer, provides a fun dictionary of slang and
pop culture terms drawn from user-submitted definitions on the website
of the same name, which he created. As the site boasts one million
definitions, the ones chosen for the book were based on their wit, humor,
and accuracy. Better known words such as blog, bling bling, grunge, and
cool are listed, as well as others such as retrosexual, scooby doos, and
cadbury. Some definitions are humorous, like the one for computer
science: “The study of making porn more readily available, to make it
easier and faster to download, and to make what you’re looking for
easier to find.”
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HT110 2006-280283 0-7456-2826-5
Space, the city and social theory; social relations and
urban forms.
Tonkiss, Fran.
Polity Press, ©2005 170 p. $29.95 (pa)
Seeing the city as “a site of social encounter and social division, as a field
of politics and power, as a symbolic and material landscape, as an
embodied space, as a realm of everyday experience,” Tonkiss (sociology,
London School of Economics and Political Science, UK) places concerns
from urban studies within wider debates within social theory and
analysis. Primarily discussing liberal capitalist cities in North America
and Western Europe, she presents chapters looking at social relations of
community and solitude; spatial manifestations of difference and
division; social movements and public space; capital, culture, and gen-
trification; gender, sexuality, and the city; subjectivity and urban narra-
tives; and spatial tactics and social power. Distributed in the US by
Blackwell Publishing.
HT111 2005-040999 978-0-8021-4273-3
Cities.
Reader, John.
Grove Atlantic, ©2005 358 p. $16.00 (pa)
What distinguishes this book from others on cities, according to Reader
(anthropology, U. College London, UK), is that it attempts to identify the
common ecological and functional contexts that define urbanity from its
earliest manifestations to the present time. Looking at cities through this
ecological lens, he discusses how they grow, how they are sustained, and
the nature of their relationship with immediate and distant sur-
roundings. The treatment is broadly chronological in nature, but fre-
quently veers off into discussion of individual cities in order to illustrate
thematic points.
HT114 978-90-04-15043-0
City, countryside, and the spatial organization of value in
classical antiquity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ralph M. Rosen and Ineke Sluiter.
(MNEMOSYNE; bibliotheca classica batava)
BRILL, ©2006 384 p. $174.00
The third Penn-Leiden Colloquium on Ancient Values was held in Leiden
in 2004, and drew classicists from Europe and the US to discuss the
polarity of urban and rural values in classical antiquity. Their topics
include sacred land and the margins of the community, Herodotus on
survival, agriokia and pleasure in Aristotle, and city and countryside in
Vergil’s Eclogues.
HT123 2006-025882 0-7619-2884-7
Encyclopedia of American urban history; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by David R. Goldfield. (A Sage reference publi-
cation)
Sage Publications, ©2007 945 p. $300.00
Employing a broad definition of urban, Goldfield (U. of North Carolina
at Charlotte) presents some 500 essays that together offer an expansive,
if selective, portrait of the interdisciplinary field of urban history in the
20th century United States. Entries include biographies of notable figures
such as novelist F. Scott Fitzgerald, organized crime boss Al Capone, New
York City mayor Fiorello La Guardia, newspaper magnate William
Randolph Hearst, and architect Frank Lloyd Wright; profiles of select
cities; descriptions of major topics in urban history (e.g. “poverty and
welfare in cities” and “social geography of cities and suburbs”); expla-
nations of doctrines, actions, movements, and religions; discussion of
urban education and schools; reviews of the urban policies of US presi-
dential administrations; urban theories; and entries related to race,
gender, housing, transportation, education, and finances and commerce.
HT131 2005-017418 0-7546-5247-5
Civil society, associations, and urban places; class, nation
and culture in nineteenth-century Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Graeme Morton et al. (Historical urban studies
series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 220 p. $99.95
To test the hypothesis that more associations in a society means a more
deeply entrenched democracy, these essays by international urban
historians examine the construction of civil society from associational
activity in urban places. Their findings indicate that 19th-century urban
associations were ideological in purpose but discriminatory in practice,
exhibiting both a strong pluralism and a weak opposition to interests of
the state. Through a wide array of urban associations in a broad range
of settings, including Austria, Bratislava, France, Italy, the Netherlands,
Austro-Hungary, England and the US, this volume demonstrates that an
interlocking civil society does not automatically lead to a rise in
democratic activity.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HT131 978-90-420-2104-4
Urban mindscapes of Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Godela Wiess-Sussex. (European studies; an
interdisciplinary series in European culture, history and politics; 23)
Editions Rodopi, ©2006 299 p. $78.00
Based on presentations at the conference of the same name held in
Leicester in April 2004, these 17 papers describe the concepts, cultural
representations and policy applications of how European states think of
and imagine cities. Topics include the gestalt of the urban imaginary,
research that resists the erasure of places, presenting the modern
cityscape as a reflection of the self, urban mindscapes as reflected in
shop windows, resisting the impulse to “colonize” cities new to you, the
meaning of Belfast Gothic, the urban dystopias of Wells and Lang, cities
in 1980s European cinema, television coverage of the “royal city” in
media events, cartoons of European city culture, and imagery of classical
Athens. Applications of concepts include the fantasy and reality of old
and new Berlin, the evolution of the museum, the planning of a new
identity for Malmo, and an interview of Paul Brooks on marketing place.
HT151 2006-029515 978-0-88214-577-8
City and soul.
Hillman, James. Ed. by Robert J. Leaver. (Uniform edition of the
writings of James Hillman; v.2)
Spring Publications, Inc., ©2006 413 p. $28.00
One of ten volumes collecting the writings of imaginative psychologist
James Hillman, one of the founding members of the Dallas Institute of
Humanities and Culture, this volume collects his musings on the place of
the city in human life and culture. The essays were penned between
1973-2005 and, as with much of Hillman’s work, reflect on such themes
as the “importance of mythical and archetypal foundations, anima mundi
and animating the soul of the world, the politics of beauty and ugliness,
city as nature, community and the common,” to quote the editor.
HT151 2006-018674 978-0-631-21120-4
Understanding urban policy; a critical introduction.
Cochrane, Allan.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 178 p. $79.95
Cochrane (public policy, Open U., UK) examines the emergence of urban
social policy in the United Kingdom (with frequent cross reference to the
United States). He is concerned with why particular problems are iden-
tified as requiring social policy intervention at particular times and why
urban problems come to be defined or understood in particular ways,
often in ways that differ markedly from the perceptions of those who are
the apparent targets or supposed beneficiaries of policy. He takes a the-
matic approach to the subject, devoting individual chapters to issues of
race and poverty, managerialism in the public sector, the concept of
“community” in urban policy, urban disorder and social disorganization,
the rise of urban entrepreneurialism, investment in cultural activities,
and neoliberalism and the globalization of urban policy.
HT153 2006-024795 1-59385-320-3
Contesting neoliberalism; urban frontiers.
Title main entry. Ed. by Helga Leitner et al.
Guilford Pr., ©2007 340 p. $30.00 (pa)
Theorizing neoliberalism without recognizing how it is shaped by a
range of contestations to its hegemonic drive, contestations that are more
than just “resistance” in the way they help reshape neoliberalism itself,
risks essentializing neoliberalism and failure to understand its
development, or so argues the introduction to the 15 papers presented
here by Leitner (geography, U. of Minnesota), Peck (geography, U. of
Wisconsin at Madison), and Sheppard (geography, U. of Minnesota). Most
of the papers are case studies of urban contestations of neoliberalism by
grassroots groups, city governments, nongovernmental organizations,
and other actors and their impact on urban political geographies, while
the few others address the broader theoretical issues of neoliberalism
and its contestations.
–162–
HT153 2006-013778 978-1-58948-082-7
GIS for the urban environment. (CD-ROM included)
Maantay, Juliana and John Zielger.
ESRI Press, ©2006 596 p. $79.95
Maantay (GISc, Lehman College, City University of New York) and
Ziegler, a GIS consultant, introduce urban planning applications and
problem solving using geographic information system (GIS) technology,
in this text for undergraduate and graduate students and professionals in
urban geography, urban studies, urban planning, public health, urban
environmental assessment, and hazard and emergency management.
Writing with a minimum of technical jargon, the authors give students
a taste of real-world activities that are often required in urban GIS
projects but rarely included in prepared lab work, such as data acqui-
sition, integration of data into a GIS, and manipulation of real data.
Project design and analysis methods are demonstrated with real case
studies of urban GIS projects. Lab exercises (and a companion CD-ROM
of data sets) allow readers to become familiar with ArcGIS Desktop tech-
nology. Color maps, illustrations, and screenshots are included. No prior
background in GIS is assumed.
HT166 2006-010177 978-1-58948-143-5
Mapping global cities; GIS methods in urban analysis.
(CD-ROM included)
Pamuk, Ayse.
ESRI Press, ©2006 182 p. $49.95 (pa)
With the rise of “global cities” and “megacities,” urban planners are re-
thinking traditional approaches to urban planning. After tips on using
Global Information Systems (GIS), which has emerged as a major tool for
the spatial analysis of the challenges spawned by demographic trends,
Pamuk (urban studies, San Francisco State U.) applies GIS to questions of
settlement patterns. Many detailed color maps show such patterns as
ethnic enclaves in urban areas, population change, land use, house price-
to-income ratio, and the number of children in poverty in an area. The
included CD-ROM contains data needed for several exercises, which
require ArcView, ArcEditor, or Archinfo 9 and the ArcGIS Spatial Analyst
extension.
HT167 978-1-59237-135-8
America’s top-rated smaller cities; a statistical profile,
2006/07, 6th ed.; 2v.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2006 2485 p. $195.00 (pa)
★★★★ Cited in Guide to Reference Books, this annually updated reference,
now in its 13th edition, occupies four hefty volumes, each devoted to a
region (in sequence): southern, western, central, and eastern. Twenty-five
cities from each region, selected as “best” for business and living, are
thoroughly profiled. Entries begin with an essay on historical and con-
temporary background and a presentation of rankings given to the cities
by magazines, studies, and other sources. Following are statistical tables
covering such topics as city finances, demographics, economy, residential
and commercial real estate, transportation, taxes, event sites, cost of
living, health care, residential utilities, presidential election results, major
employers, public safety, media, climate, hazardous waste, and air and
water quality. The statistics were gathered from such sources as the US
government, The Tax Foundation, and the Society of Industrial and
Office Realtors. Also included are regional maps showing city boundaries
and five appendixes presenting historical and current metropolitan area
definitions; comparative statistics; and contact information for chambers
of commerce, economic development organizations, and state depart-
ments of labor and employment.
HT167 2006-007749 978-1-57233-543-1
The backcountry towns of colonial Virginia.
Hendricks, Christopher E.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 186 p. $36.00
Hendricks (history, Armstrong Atlantic State U.) explores the devel-
opment of 25 backcountry towns in colonial Virginia, significant in
helping to expand and accelerate the settlement of the region and in pro-
moting westward expansion of the frontier. The text examines the cir-
cumstances of each town’s establishment, intended purpose, design, and
actual development. It provides not only a regional town survey, and
analysis and interpretation of a significant urban movement, but also
identifies commonalities in town development such as methods of estab-
lishment, economic activities on local and regional levels, the roles of
public institutions, and what factors may have led to the success or
failure of each town.
–163–
HT167 2006-015237 978-0-7591-0755-7
The politics of historic districts; a primer for grassroots
preservation.
Schmickle, William Edgar.
AltaMira Press, ©2006 269 p. $60.00
A political scientist who bolted from academia to practice in historic
preservation, Schmickle offers a field manual for others seeking to
protect parts of cities from development. His emphasis of course is on
the political process: dealing with supporters and opponents, planners,
the media, and government at the various layers necessary. Among his
discussions are planning and strategy, leadership and organization, the
campaign kickoff, countering standard objections, public hearings, com-
promise, and winning the vote.
HT168 2006-001813 0-8018-8328-8
Worthy of the nation; Washington, DC; from L’Enfant to
the National Capital planning commission, 2d ed.
Gutheim, Frederick and Antoinette J. Lee.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 430 p. $65.00
In this update to the 1977 edition, Washington DC historians Lee and
Gutheim detail the history of the capital city’s planning and devel-
opment, from its inception following L’Enfant’s survey of 1791, through
the “city beautiful movement” of the early 20th century and the New
Deal era residential rush to the suburbs, and up to modern growth and
controversial urban renewal campaigns. Black and white photographs,
maps, and plans support discussion of major projects, disputes, archi-
tectural feats, and movements of populations, all weighted by the city’s
responsibility to embody the ideals of an entire nation. First Lady Laura
Bush authored the foreword. Oversize: 9x11.5″.
HT169 2006-009618 1-55963-891-5
Metrogreen; connecting open space in North American
cities.
Erickson, Donna L.
Island Press, ©2006 333 p. $35.00 (pa)
Open spaces for environmental integrity, human health, and community
cohesion are now recognized as an important ecological and social
concept, and are increasingly being planned for by metropolitan
agencies. A consultant who wrote this book while at the U. of Michigan
(in landscape architecture) draws lessons about urban conservation from
her case studies of ten North American cities’ open-space experience;
cities include Denver, Portland (Oregon), British Columbia, and Toronto.
Erickson presents current thinking, practices and political and social
issues relating to ecology, transportation, recreation, community, and
infrastructure. B&w photos and greenbelt maps complement the
analysis.
HT206 2006-044476 0-398-07669-3
Children in the urban environment; linking social policy
and clinical practice, 2d ed.
Phillips, Norma Kolko and Shulamith Lala Ashenberg Straussner
C.C. Thomas, ©2006 287 p. $67.95
Welfare reform, growth in immigration and its backlash, and the
tragedies of September 11 and Hurricane Katrina have all altered the
demands of social policy on urban children since this text’s first edition
was published in 1996. Phillips (social work, City U. Of New York) and
Straussner (clinical approaches to addictions, New York U. School of
Social Work) present this update discussing the major factors impacting
urban children today, with advice for integrating clinical social work and
the development of social policy in response to these factors. In 12
chapters, contributors present and interpret studies on the impact of
poverty, immigration, health and mental health issues, and youth gangs
on the urban child. Further topics include children in out-of-home place-
ments, substance-abusing families, children of incarcerated parents, the
problems of street youth, and urban teen parents. The text concludes
with recommendations for mobilizing communities in the improvement
of urban child welfare. This text is intended for students and profes-
sionals in social work, family counseling, human services, psychology,
and criminal justice.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HT215 2006-010648 978-0-7425-2948-9
Landscapes of the ethnic economy.
Title main entry. Ed. by David H. Kaplan and Wei Li.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 224 p. $27.95 (pa)
Nineteen international academics contribute 13 chapters examining the
ways that inner cities and suburbs are being transformed into areas of
new ethnic economic activity as immigration increases throughout the
world. The text contains a series of case studies exploring the role that
location plays in helping, hindering, or shaping ethnic economies; the
relationship between ethnic business networks and other geographically
identifiable phenomena, such as residential segregation, underserved
markets, or institutional distributions; and the impact of ethnic business
activity in shaping the urban landscape. For scholars and students in
ethnic studies, urban studies, economic development, geography, and
sociology.
HT321 2005-034084 1-4129-3680-2
Cities in a world economy, 3d ed.
Sassen, Saskia. (Sociology for a new century series)
Sage Publications, ©2006 269 p. $36.95 (pa)
The central concept around which Sassen (U. of Chicago) structures this
book is the idea of the “global city.” Offering Tokyo, New York, Sao
Paulo, and Hong Kong as examples, his argument concerns the way cities
have become transnational “spaces” in which processes of globalization
have caused cities to come to have more in common with one another
than with regional centers in their own nation-states. For the new edition,
he has updated the work in accordance with recent data and added dis-
cussion of international migration to and from global cities, while
retaining the topics of global city economic functions, inequalities within
cities, and the implications of the global city for understanding center-
periphery geographies.
HT321 2006-021668 978-1-4051-3118-6
Urban economics and real estate; theory and policy.
McDonald, John F. and Daniel P. McMillen.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 619 p. $99.95
The authors (professors of economics at the U. of Illinois at Chicago)
present an urban economics textbook aimed at undergraduate and
master’s degree students. Their emphasis is on economic analysis (pri-
marily microeconomic theory), empirical studies that are based in eco-
nomic theory, and the policy lessons that can be drawn from the study
of urban economics. After the presentation of introductory material, the
present sections discussing location patterns in urban areas, urban
housing and real estate, the public sector and transportation, urban
social problems, and urban growth. The text assumes a strong back-
ground in the principles of microeconomics and the ability to handle
algebra.
HT325 2006-051514 978-0-7425-4062-0
Urban communication; production, text, context.
Title main entry. Ed. by Timothy A. Gibson and Mark Lowes. (Critical
media studies; institutions, politics, and culture)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 241 p. $27.95 (pa)
The 10 essays in this volume edited by Gibson and Lowes (communi-
cation scholars with George Mason U. and U. of Ottowa respectively) crit-
ically explore the relationship between cities’ global images with their
internal politics and interests. Scholars in communication, cultural
studies, and urban sociology discuss how different cities around the
world vie for a share in the developing global economy through mar-
keting campaigns, urban revitalization, megasport events, internet pol-
itics, and other measures. Each essay assesses the effect of these symbolic
activities on the local communities not represented by urban elites and
city leaders. Specific topics include the evolution of popular definitions
of the poor classes in the Urban Subaltern of the Global South; the
original vision of New York’s World Trade Towers as symbols of post-
war, post-industrial America; and the political-economic limits of D.C.’s
urban branding campaign.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HT391 2006-926067 978-0-7546-4548-1
Rethinking European spatial policy as a hologram;
actions, institutions, discourses.
Title main entry. Ed. by Luigi Doria et al. (Urban and regional
planning and development series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 320 p. $114.95
The contested constitution of the European Union introduced the
objective of “territorial cohesion,” thrusting the debate on spatial devel-
opment to the fore after it had lain becalmed for a decade or more. The
problem is that the Union still lacks a specific competence of spatial gov-
ernance. In response, researchers and practitioners in urban planning,
political science, and economics, from across western Europe explore
some dimensions of the Union’s action in the spatial field, and inves-
tigate the emergence of space as a category of Union policy They resist
proposing a comprehensive and organic analysis.
HT392 2006-012232 0-7546-4471-5
Environmental valuation; interregional and intraregional
perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by John I. Carruthers and Bill Mundy. (Urban
planning and environment)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 305 p. $99.95
A two-year research project investigated how people react to differences
in environmental conditions among and within regions. In 13 studies,
economists, regional planners and developers, and other social scientists
report where people choose to live and how much they are willing to pay
for living there as a measure of how much they like the environmental
conditions.
HT395 2006-017126 978-0-7546-4714-0
Regional development and spatial planning in an
enlarged European Union.
Title main entry. Ed. by by Neil Adams et al. (Urban and regional
planning and development series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 283 p. $99.95
Regional planners from across Europe describe and illustrate how spatial
planning can contribute to regional development schemes. Their topics
include the Europeanization of spatial planning, dealing with the
enduring prosperity gap in Wales, the response to regional disparities in
Lithuania, and whether sustainable development is a myth.
HT690 2006-021627 978-0-8166-4928-0
India’s new middle class; democratic politics in an era of
economic reform.
Fernandes, Leela.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 289 p. $22.50 (pa)
The rise of the new Indian middle class represents the political con-
struction of a social group that operates as a proponent of economic lib-
eralization, argues Fernandes (political science, Rutgers U.). She says that
the middle class is new not because of upwardly mobile segments of the
population, but because of the production of a distinctive social and
political identity.
HT1031 2006-026185 978-0-313-33142-8
Encyclopedia of antislavery and abolition; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Hinks and John McKivigan. (Greenwood
milestones in African American history)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 796 p. $199.95
This two-volume encyclopedia contains approximately 300 entries on
topics in antislavery, abolition, and emancipation, with an objective of
detailing the topics in an accessible manner and showing the broad
range of forms these forces followed in history. It has three thematic con-
cerns: illustrating the various forms of antislavery and its emergence as
an organized movement, showing the causes of abolition and its passage,
and describing the process of emancipation and its consequences. Slavery
is discussed in many societies and time periods, including the twentieth
century, with a focus on the Atlantic world. Following a historical intro-
duction, the entries detail specific countries, important figures and
leaders, economic issues, ideology and philosophy, literature, music, the
law, organizations and societies, politics, rebellions, religion, slave trade,
social and cultural issues, war, and women. Emancipation and abolition
are treated separately. Hinks and McKivigan (Indiana U.- Purdue U.
Indianapolis) aim the encyclopedia at scholars, students from high school
and higher, librarians, teachers, policy advocates, and general readers.
An index is included in the second volume only.
–164–
HT1322 2005-056910 0-7546-2571-0
The Atlantic slave trade; v.1: Origins-1600.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeremy Black.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 401 p. $195.00
This first volume in a set of four covers the Atlantic slave trade from its
earliest origins through the end of the 16th century. Editor Black (U. of
Exeter) provides a general overview of Western slavery during that period
in the introduction. Seventeen papers by scholars follow. All have been
previously published in various journals. Sample topics include the
failure of Spanish medieval colonization of the Canary and Caribbean
islands; the Indian population of North America in 1492; and African cul-
tural continuities in the early black communities of the Americas. An
extensive name index is found at the back of the volume. A subject index
is lacking.
HT1322 2005-056910 0-7546-2576-1
The Atlantic slave trade; v.2: Seventeenth century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeremy Black.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 548 p. $225.00
In this second of four volumes, 21 articles from leading scholars discuss
the Atlantic slave trade during the 17th century from a variety of disci-
plinary perspectives. Editor Black (U. of Exeter, UK) provides an overview
of the subject in the introduction. A sampling of topics includes the eco-
nomics of slaving in pre-colonial Africa; white mortality in Jamaica; and
the collective behavior of black and mulatto brotherhoods in colonial
Brazil. All of the articles were previously published in various journals
between 1966 and 2001. The volume concludes with a name index; there
is no subject index.
HT1322 2005-056910 0-7546-2579-6
The Atlantic slave trade; v.3: Eighteenth century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeremy Black.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 535 p. $225.00
This is the third part of a four-volume set containing historical essays on
the Atlantic slave trade from its origins to the end of slavery as in insti-
tution. In this volume, editor Black (U. of Exeter, UK) presents 22 previ-
ously published essays that examine the slave trade during the 18th
century. Topics include the estimation of volume and distribution of slave
exports from West and West-Central Africa; the effect of the slave trade
on the British port of Whitehaven, the commercial and financial organi-
zation of the British slave trade, evidence on English/African terms of
trade, characteristics of British slaving vessels, Jamaican wealth prior to
the American Revolution, the condition of the slave in the settlement and
economic development of the British Windward Islands, quantitative
study of the French sugar business, profitability of slave and long-dis-
tance trading in France, the history of the Danish slave trade, the cacao
economy of the 18th century province of Caracas and the Spanish cacao
market, and social protest and labor bargaining as examples of slaves’
responses to plantation life in Barbados.
HT1322 2005-056910 0-7546-2582-6
The Atlantic slave trade; v.4: Nineteenth century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeremy Black.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 474 p. $225.00
This is the final volume of a four-volume set containing historical essays
on the Atlantic slave trade from its origins to the end of slavery as in
institution. In this volume, editor Black (U. of Exeter, UK) presenst 25 pre-
viously published papers focusing on the 19th century, which witnessed
the demise of the Atlantic slave trade. Topics include revolution and
emancipation in Saint Domingue; French abolitionism; the relationship
between capitalism and slavery; British evangelicals, economic warfare,
and the abolition of the slave trade, shipping patterns and mortality in
the African slave trade to Rio de Janeiro; fluctuations in sex and age
ratios in the slave trade from 1663 to 1864; slave resistance and white
reaction in the British Windward Islands; British parliamentary politics
and the abolition of slavery, French anti-slavery and the revolutions of
1848, Brazilian abolition and the contraband slave trade to Brazil; the
control of land and labor in the British West Indies following abolition;
and the compatibility of the slave and palm oil trades in the Bight of
Biafra (also called the Bight of Bonny).
–165–
HT1521 2006-028317 978-1-4129-4110-5
Ethnicity and race; making identities in a changing
world, 2d ed.
Cornell, Stephen and Douglas Hartman.
Sage Publications, ©2007 311 p. $41.95 (pa)
Cornell (sociology, U. of Arizona) and Hartmann (sociology, U. of
Minnesota, Minneapolis) present an updated edition of their textbook for
advanced undergraduate courses on race and ethnicity in the depart-
ments of sociology, ethnic studies, global studies, and anthropology.
Revised throughout with new illustrative or empirical materials and
updated references, the text includes new discussion of assimilation, the
invisibility of racial dominance, and paradigms and analytical frames for
understanding group relations, and a new case study on race, culture,
and belonging in contemporary France.
HT1521 2006-018450 978-0-7546-4839-0
Race and inequality; world perspectives on affirmative
action.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elaine Kennedy-Dubourdieu.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 200 p. $99.95
Contributors from a wide range of countries and disciplines analyze
affirmative active as it has evolved in different parts of the former British
Empire around the world. They focus on the policy’s application to
benefit racial and ethnic groups that have suffered from overt and covert
racism and disadvantage. South Africa, India, Australia, Northern
Ireland, North America, and Britain herself are the case studies.
HV11 2006-926736 978-1-4129-3420-6
Qualitative research practice. (reprint, 2004)
Title main entry. Ed. by Clive Seale et al.
Sage Publications, ©2007 534 p. $59.95 (pa)
This reprint from 2004 serves as a guide to the major forms of qualitative
methods in use today and describes what researchers actually do in
projects. For students, as well as researchers in any discipline, Seale (soci-
ology, Brunel U.) et al. compile 32 chapters on a variety of techniques,
from interviews and oral history to feminist approaches and visual
methods. Contributors, who are in social sciences and related fields from
Europe, North America, and Australia, write about their own experi-
ences; discuss analysis, field relations, context, and quality and credi-
bility; and describe audiences, applications, and the international context.
The book is meant to represent the European tradition in qualitative
research practice, which the editors note has been neglected in hand-
books. Because the book concentrates on research practice, method-
ological discussion is therefore within the context of projects.
HV40 2006-047587 0-8261-3815-2
An empowering approach to managing social service
organizations.
Hardina, Donna et al.
Springer Publishing Co., ©2007 443 p. $60.00
Aimed at social service practitioners as well as graduate students
entering the field, this text describes an empowerment-based approach to
organizational management. An alternative to top-down, bureaucratic
approaches, it incorporates principles consistent with good social work
practice, such as allowing workers to make key decisions about their jobs
and giving priority to the needs of clients and customers. The limitations
of participatory decision- making structures and suggestions for further
research are discussed in the final chapter. The authors are affiliated
with California State U., Fresno.
HV40 978-3-86649-008-6
Perspectives on European social work; from the birth of
the nation state to the impact of globalisation.
Lorenz, Walter.
Barbara Budrich Publishers, ©2006 199 p. $19.90 (pa)
Lorenz (Free U. Bozen, Italy) investigates some of the most significant
developments in European social work and places them in historical per-
spective. He examines the diverse array of titles, training traditions, and
tasks within the social professions in European countries, framing them
as both products of specific national welfare arrangements and as a sign
of a healthy professional autonomy. The material incorporates revised
versions of papers published in various journals in recent years.
Distributed in the U.S. by ISBS.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV40 2006-012017 0-7546-4768-4
Social work and social exclusion; the idea of practice.
Sheppard, Michael.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 281 p. $99.95
Sheppard (social work, U. of Plymouth, UK) argues that social work is
founded on notions of social exclusion and inclusion, and that ideas and
practice are closely related. Social work practice is permeated with ideas,
and social work ideas can only be rooted in practice. From this basis the
text explores some key aspects of social work including social work
values and knowledge, empowerment, need, authority, choice, evidence-
based practice, reflection and reflective learning, judgment and decision
making, social work and “art” and social work as “science,” demon-
strating how they reflect an underlying concern with social exclusion. For
practitioners and scholars in social work and allied disciplines.
HV41 2006-000671 978-0-87101-369-9
Effectively managing nonprofit organizations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard L. Edwards, John A. Yankey.
Natl. Assn./ Social Workers, ©2006 494 p. $47.99 (pa)
Edwards (social work, Rutgers) and Yanky (family and child welfare,
Case Western Reserve U.) present a revision and expansion of two earlier
books, Skills for Effective Human Services Management (1991) and Skills for
Effective Management of Nonprofit Organizations (1998). Featuring contri-
butions from 31 American academics, consultants, and nonprofit profes-
sionals, the text offers nonprofit managers a guide to the skills and
competencies needed to successfully lead today’s nonprofit organizations
. The text is organized around the “competing values framework,” a
metatheoretical model of organizational and managerial effectiveness.
Coverage includes an overview of the framework followed by sections on
its four skill areas—boundary-spanning, human relations, coordinating,
and directing—and discussion of the skills needed to manage in turbulent
times. For mid- and upper-level managers, and students of nonprofit or
public management.
HV41 2006-029100 978-0-7879-8455-7
Fundraising for social change, 5th rev.ed.
Klein, Kim. (Chardon press series)
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 527 p. $38.00 (pa)
For small organizations wanting to raise money from a broad base of
donors, Klein provides a text on fundraising that focuses on social change
as an objective. Topics covered include strategies for upgrading donors,
management, budgeting and planning, and special circumstances such
as raising money in rural communities and fundraising for a coalition.
This edition incorporates information on new technology, expanded
chapters on capital and endowment campaigns, and discussions of how
to ask for money, recruit help, and build relationships with donors.
Other new topics include ethics, cultural differences, and creating oppor-
tunities for fundraising more systematically. Klein is a fundraiser who
helped develop the field for grassroots organizations; she speaks and con-
sults internationally. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
HV41 2006-030496 978-0-7879-8055-9
Grant proposal makeover; transform your request from
no to yes.
Clarke, Cheryl and Susan P. Fox.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 214 p. $29.95 (pa)
This accessible guide for grant seekers explains how to transform weak
grant proposals into strong contenders for funding. Each chapter begins
with an example illustrating one of a number of problems commonly
found in grant proposals. Fundraising consultants Clarke and Fox then
point out flaws in the sample narrative and demonstrate how they may
be corrected. Some of the mistakes addressed include florid writing, lack
of a good match with funders’ guidelines, and ineffective use of statistics.
HV41 92-9137-286-2
ISO 9001:2000; a workbook for service organizations.
Title main entry.
International Trade Centre, ©2005 116 p. $50.00 (pa)
Developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO),
the standards in the ISO 9000 family offer organizations in developing
countries clear guidelines for improving their quality management
systems. This workbook for service organizations wishing to increase
their share in the global market provides a methodology for imple-
menting the 2000 version of the ISO 9001 standard. Practical tools sup-
plied include checklists, questions, and planning guides.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV41 2006-004846 978-0-471-76810-4
Major donors; finding big gifts in your database and
online.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ted Hart et al.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 232 p. $39.95
Written by a quartet of fundraising professionals, this book gives advice
on how to be more selectively targeting in making fundraising requests,
basing their model of fundraising on a five-step process that consists of
identification, gaining insight, reviewing and segmenting, nurturing hot
prospects, and solicitation and stewardship. The authors are especially
keen on explaining the application of recent information and communi-
cation technologies to streamline the prospecting and fundraising
process.
HV51 2006-013182 978-0-7546-4857-4
The institutional logic of welfare attitudes; how welfare
regimes influence public support.
Larsen, Christian Albrekt.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 169 p. $89.95
Larsen (economics, Centre for Comparative Welfare Studies, Aalborg U.,
Denmark) examines how the institutional structures of different welfare
regimes influence public support for welfare policy. Challenging the
present welfare state theory, he describes welfare regime theory and com-
bines it with the theory of deservingness criteria, while also considering
the ethnic fractionalization thesis. Regime dimensions of job opportu-
nities, degree of selectivism, causes of poverty, and degree of generosity
are considered. He then compares Nordic countries using data from a
Nordic module to the International Social Survey Program from 1999 and
a large Danish and Finnish dataset, in addition to analyzing elements
relating to public perceptions of immigrants, the poor and unemployed,
generosity of the welfare state, and job opportunities.
HV95 2006-022406 978-1-58826-488-6
Creating gender; the sexual politics of welfare policy.
Johnson, Cathy Marie et al.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 262 p. $55.00
Using the example of the adoption and implementation of the Personal
Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act, known as
welfare reform, Johnson (political science, democratic studies, Williams
College), Duerst-Lahti (political studies, Beloit College) and Norton
(political science, international relations, U. of San Diego) take up the
question of how gender is created when policy is made. They consider
the ways in which ideas about gender merge or do not merge with
liberal-conservative governing ideology. Through their example, the
authors demonstrate that the governing ideology is not gender-neutral
and that ideas about proper gender arrangements establish a gender
ideology.
HV95 2006-008572 978-0-8165-2512-6
Doing without; women and work after welfare reform.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jane Henrici.
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 233 p. $45.00
Social scientists reveal how low-income women and their children live
with decreasing public assistance under the neo-liberal approach to gov-
ernment currently dominant in the US. Drawing on material collected
through a long-term, multi-site and multi-method research project after
the implementation of welfare reform, they challenge popular and gov-
ernmental assumptions about poverty that legitimate current US welfare
policy and practice.
HV97 2004-010608 978-0-7391-1863-4
Generations of giving; leadership and continuity in family
foundations. (reprint, 2004)
Gersick, Kelin E.
Lexington Books, ©2006 283 p. $29.95 (pa)
Based on a study commissioned by the National Center for Family
Philanthropy, this text considers the unique challenges faced by family
philanthropic foundations. The emphasis throughout is on issues of con-
tinuity and leadership. In particular, four themes are explored: mission
and dream; family dynamics; organizational structure; and successor
development. The volume concludes with some practical recommenda-
tions for current and future foundation leaders.
–166–
HV109 978-0-88920-452-2
The social origins of the welfare state; Qúebec families,
compulsory education, and family allowances, 1940-1955.
Marshall, Dominque. Trans. by Nicola Doone Danby. (Studies in
childhood and family in Canada series)
Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2006 277 p. $32.95 (pa)
In 1943, the Premier of the Canadian province of Québec announced that
schooling become both compulsory and free up to age of fourteen or
until grade seven, inclusively. The following year the Canadian Prime
Minister announced the institution of monthly family allowances
intended to provide all children with a “minimum of welfare.” Seeing the
universality of these laws as harbingers of the Canadian welfare state
that was to come, Marshall (history, Carleton U., Canada) examines the
social context within which these laws were drafted, discusses the
mechanics of their implementation, and gauges the degree to which their
original objectives were achieved. She concludes with a discussion of how
over the course of the next two decades the two laws altered the rela-
tionships between the State, families, and special interest groups, laying
the groundwork for Québec’s Quiet Revolution of the 1960s.
HV551 2006-031237 978-0-471-73487-1
Emergency management; concepts and strategies for
effective programs.
Canton, Lucien G.
Wiley-Interscience, ©2007 349 p. $79.95
A consultant who once directed emergency services for the City of San
Francisco, Canton had to rethink the book he had started to write, and
indeed rethink the traditional perspectives on managing emergencies, in
the wake of Hurricane Katrina. Rather than rehearsing the usual details
about risk, hazards, and impacts, he focuses on developing emergency
management programs and positioning them within local government in
a way that contributes to community goals by helping manage com-
munity risks.
HV553 2006-044509 0-398-07663-4
Disaster resilience; an integrated approach.
Paton, Douglas and David Johnston.
C.C. Thomas, ©2006 321 p. $68.95
Paton (psychology, U. of Tasmania) and Johnston (Institute of Geological
and Nuclear Sciences, New Zealand) address two gaps in emergency
planning: the absence of a comprehensive review and the inability to
understand the multi-level nature of emergency planning. The authors
develop a comprehensive working model of disaster resilience and sus-
tainability by integrating these different levels of emergency planning
and creating a holistic approach. The text provides an overarching
framework as well as procedures for progressively developing the multi-
level model.
HV639 0-415-36745-X
A human security doctrine for Europe; project, principles,
practicalities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marlies Glasius and Mary Kaldor. (Routledge
advances in international relations and global politics; v.40)
Routledge, ©2006 366 p. $115.00
At the request of the European High Representative for Common Foreign
and Security Policy, Javier Solana, a Study Group on European Security
Policies was convened to study practical needs for the implementation of
the European Security Strategy and analyze, from a “bottom-up” per-
spective, actual security problems around the world that affect the
security of individual Europeans. Glasius (research fellow, Centre for the
Study of Global Governance, London School of Economics and Political
Science, UK) and Kaldor (director, Centre for the Study of Global
Governance) present 15 papers resulting from the work of the Study
Group in pursuit of those goals. These include the group’s original
“vision paper;” regional papers on conflict regions in Africa, the Balkans,
the South Caucasus, and the Middle East; papers discussing operational
principles related to legal frameworks, gender concerns, and cultural
aspects of the new accession states; and “nitty-gritty” papers on civilian
and military capabilities needed to realize recommendations in the other
contributions.
–167–
HV640 2005-036380 0-415-77080-7
Internal displacement; conceptualization and its
consequences.
Weiss, Thomas G. and David A. Korn. (Global institutions series)
Routledge, ©2006 190 p. $125.00
As the twentieth century progressed it became apparent that refugees
from or to regions within the same state were becoming a significant
result of civil war or other internal conflicts. These internally displaced
persons (IDPs) have constituted as many as 25 million people in about
40 countries, presently numbering about two and a half times the
number of interstate refugees. Weiss (political science, The City U. of New
York) and Korn, a retired US foreign service officer, show how the
internal v. external refugee situation has changed along with changes in
conduct of war, and how the UN and other agencies have responded by
developing resources. They list key UN publications and decisions con-
cerning IDPs, and offer a selection of information from institutions,
agency staff and consultants.
HV640 0-7190-6882-7
Remembering refugees; then and now.
Kushner, Tony.
Manchester U. Press, ©2006 264 p. $80.00
As part of a larger project studying Jewish/non-Jewish relations centered
at the University of Southhampton, where he seems to be based himself,
Kushner explores the memory work associated with The Refugee. Only
secondarily a history of refugee movements and settlements, the study is
more concerned with identity formation by refugees, arguing that the
process is not isolated from the surrounding world. Distributed in the US
by Palgrave Macmillan.
HV689 978-90-04-15423-0
Mental disability and the European convention on human
rights.
Bartlett, Peter et al. (International studies in human rights; v.90)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 377 p. $169.00
Barlett (mental health law, U. of Nottingham School of Law), Lewis (exec-
utive director, Mental Disability Advocacy Center, Budapest) and Thorold
(formerly, National Association of Mental Health, London) provide an
overview of the current status of European law related to mental dis-
ability—a recent subject of concern for the European Convention on
Human Rights—and speculate on future developments. The initial
chapters address aspects of Convention rights, such as issues of detention
in institutions, conditions within institutions, and guardianship.
Subsequent chapters discuss the practicalities of litigation. The appen-
dices contain international legal materials pertaining to mental disability
rights under the Convention and recommendations and principles from
the Council of Europe.
HV741 2006-019026 0-8058-5937-3
Invisible children in the society and its schools, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sue Books. (Sociocultural, political, and his-
torical studies in education)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 298 p. $31.00 (pa)
Children and teenagers with social disabilities are among the most
marginalized members of society. Containing 14 contributions from
leading scholars, this volume examines the lives of these “invisible
children” at school and in the larger community. Books (education, State
U. of New York at New Paltz) begins with some reflections on the current
socio-political environment affecting children’s lives. Other contributors
consider the barriers faced by homeless students and the emotional
needs of immigrant children. The third edition also features five new
chapters on such topics as the “school-to-prison pipeline” and the efforts
of working class pregnant and parenting teens to create positive self-
identities.
HV800 2006-414512 984-05-1759-7
Our lives and hopes; beyond statistics and reports.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mridu Shailaj Thanki and Jyoti Dhingra.
University Press Limited, ©2006 158 p. $4.87
Mridu, a social anthropologist who has worked extensively with Asian
women and children in Britain, and Jyoti, who has worked with and
evaluated development programs in Bangladesh and India, juxtapose the
words and children and their families in the slums of Dhaka,
Bangladesh, with background information about the family and situ-
ation. Among the questions they delve into are how soon the children
notice that they are different from people who are not poor, what their
aspirations are, and how the dire poverty of such a major part of the
population impacts society at large. There is no index. The book is pub-
lished in Bangladesh and so far lacks a US distributor.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV875 2006-019255 978-0-275-98799-2
The basics of adoption; a guide for building families in
the U.S. and Canada.
Dickerson, James L. and Mardi Allen.
Praeger, ©2006 288 p. $44.95
This guide for parents considering adoption walks them through the
process. Dickerson, a writer and former social worker in charge of foster
care and adoptions, and Allen, a psychologist, wanted to provide a book
that was based on their career experience. Focusing on the US and
Canada, they address parenting challenges, how to choose an agency,
information needed, and home visits, in addition to international adop-
tions and guides to the policies of 15 countries. Also covered is advice on
raising an adopted child, and single parent and gay and lesbian adop-
tions. An extensive list of agencies (by state) in the US and Canada is
included, with contact information.
HV875 2005-055514 0-8160-6329-X
The encyclopedia of adoption, 3d ed.
Adamec, Christine A. and Laurie C. Miller.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 394 p. $75.00
In this update of the 2000 and 1992 editions, Adamec (a medical writer)
and Miller (pediatrician/director, International Adoption Clinic, Tufts-
New England Medical Center, Boston) provide wide- ranging coverage of
adoption issues. Following a brief introduction to the history of adoption
and, new to this edition, such current issues as Internet information and
scams. A to Z entries explain topics including adoption agencies, legis-
lation, statistics, birth parents’ rights, adjustment and health problems in
adopted children, and transracial adoption. Substantial appendices
include further information on North American adoption resources, US
and state laws, and a checklist for adoptive parents.
HV875 2006-025203 1-4129-2750-1
Handbook of adoption; implications for researchers,
practitioners, and families.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rafael A. Javier et al.
Sage Publications, ©2007 563 p. $125.00
The editors (of St. John’s U. and Montclair State U.) present a multidisci-
plinary handbook reviewing the current state of adoption studies from
theoretical academic research to professional practitioner considerations.
Thirty-three chapters are presented in nine sections, beginning with
examination of foundational issues such as the historical sociology of
adoption, adoption data and statistical trends, and legal history and
ongoing legal issues. The next section examines theories of adoption
identity and development, followed by analysis of the impacts of tran-
sracial and international adoption. “Special issues” are then discussed
including single-part adoptions and clinical implications, special-needs
adoptees and their families, the importance of kinship relationships for
children in foster care, and academic considerations. The following three
sections explore training and education for adoption therapy competence,
research findings in adoption work, and assessment and treatment
issues in adoption. Poetic reflections from adoptees and a concluding dis-
cussion of the future of adoption and adoption research round out the
volume.
HV875 2006-025919 0-313-33335-1
The Praeger handbook of adoption; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathy Shepherd Stolley and Vern L. Bullough.
Greenwood Press, ©2006 862 p. $275.00
In two volumes, this comprehensive encyclopedia presents information
on all aspects of adoption relating to topics such as culture, child welfare,
advocacy, selected famous adoptees and adopters, birthparents, charac-
teristics, and cross-cultural issues. Awareness, financial issues, same-sex
adoption, foster care, and history are other categories, and perspectives
on international adoption from African countries, Britain, Canada, China,
India, Japan, and Mexico, and US adoptions from other countries are
considered. Other entries involve legal issues and key legislation, medical
issues, psychology, religious perspectives, science, special needs cate-
gories, and stress. Stolley (sociology, Virginia Wesleyan College) and the
late Bullough (State U. of New York) include some excerpts from primary
source documents, such as legislation and articles. An index is only
included in the second volume, which has appendices containing addi-
tional primary documents relating to legislation, institutions, and inter-
national conventions. Contributors of the articles, who work in sociology,
psychology, and other fields, hail from around the world.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV903 2006-019993 978-1-55766-719-9
Brothers & sisters; a special part of exceptional families,
3d ed.
Gallagher, Peggy A. et al.
Paul H. Brookes Pub. Co., ©2006 367 p. $24.95 (pa)
Writing for professionals and families, Gallagher et al. (educational psy-
chology and special education, Georgia State U. and Mount St. Mary’s U.)
describe the relationship between siblings and those who have disabil-
ities and the role and impact siblings have. They discuss their impor-
tance in the family system, special aspects of having a brother or sister
with a disability, how to explain the disability and give support, and
social interactions. They then detail the roles of siblings as teachers, in
school, and as adults. This edition includes material on extended family
members, genetic counseling, multicultural issues, and financial
planning. The model of theory to research to practice is also the format
for this edition. An annotated list of literature and media is provided, as
well as a list of organizations and resources.
HV1344 2006-014088 978-1-59691-116-1
There is no me without you; one woman’s odyssey to
rescue Africa’s children.
Greene, Melissa Fay.
Bloomsbury Publishing, ©2006 472 p. $25.95
Atlanta-based journalist Greene is the author of three books and has
written for a number of major publications, including the New Yorker,
the Washington Post, the New York Times Magazine, the Atlantic Monthly,
Newsweek, and Life. She offers an insightful look into the AIDS crisis in
Africa through the story of Haregowoin Teferra, an Ethiopian woman
who, since losing her husband and 23-year-old daughter to AIDS, has
cared for hundreds of AIDS orphans in Addis Ababa.
HV1421 2006-006473 978-1-57886-477-5
Rethinking adolescence; using story to understand life’s
uncharted years.
D’Ambrosio, Jay.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 145 p. $27.95 (pa)
D’Ambrosio works as a teacher, mentor, and conflict mediator at a
Pennsylvania middle school. In this accessible book for parents, teachers,
and counselors of adolescents, he explains how well-known myths can be
used to help a young teen understand and reflect on his or her hardships
and to encourage alternative, often healing perspectives. The author pri-
marily uses Homer’s Odyssey to demonstrate how to draw parallels
between story and an adolescent’s life. For example, the Lotus Eaters
analogize the numbing of pain, the Cyclops is the penultimate bully, and
the Siren’s song represents unhealthy temptations such as drugs, alcohol,
and sexual misbehavior. He uses vignettes to illustrate these correlations
and others, including issues related to death, fitting in, and parental rela-
tionships. The book is not indexed.
HV1421 2005-025358 1-4129-2819-2
Strengths-based counseling with at-risk youth.
Ungar, Michael.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 129 p. $56.95
This book explains how educators can work with at-risk youth by under-
standing their ways of coping. Ungar (social work, Dalhousie U., Halifax,
Canada) uses the labels of pandas, chameleons, and leopards to demon-
strate coping strategies and show why students act out, followed by ways
to work with them to nurture resilience. These include looking critically
at their behavior, creating opportunities for what they need, and methods
of communication. The final chapters apply the methods to bullies and
provide an assessment tool.
HV1451 2006-027908 978-0-8261-5565-8
Aging and disability; crossing network lines.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michelle Putnam.
Springer Publishing Co., ©2007 276 p. $47.00
Twelve contributions from academics and practitioners examine issues
involved in working across aging, developmental disability, and physical
disability service networks. In the first section, Putnam (social work,
Washington U., St. Louis) and colleagues provide an overview of current
concerns and discuss findings from a qualitative case study on multi-
network professional collaboration in Missouri. Subsequent chapters look
at the needs of aging and disability consumer populations and discuss
ways of moving cross-network partnerships forward through research,
evaluation, and policy interventions.
–168–
HV1461 2006-042385 0-8261-0227-1
Service delivery to rural older adults; research, policy,
and practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by R. Turner Goins and John A. Krout.
Springer Publishing Co., ©2006 269 p. $46.00
Inspired by the Plan of Action on Rural Aging, an effort to create and
study six demonstration projects from 2001 to 2003, and largely compiled
from materials in the project’s final report, these 13 papers describe the
challenges of accessing and providing services to older rural residents,
including several model programs. The papers describe service needs
and barriers, the impact of demographics and resettlement on rural
services, rural elders who are members of ethnic and racial minorities
(including African Americans, Native Americans and Alaska Natives and
Latinos/Hispanics), health and nutrition in rural areas, diversification
and integration in rural hospitals, Medicare, the role of technology, and
public policies and rural aging. Model programs address caregiving,
housing and transportation. Especially helpful is the section dispelling
myths about the rural elderly and their needs for services.
HV1480 978-1-86134-610-0
Placing health; neighbourhood renewal, health
improvement and complexity.
Blackman, Tim.
Policy Press, ©2006 246 p. $39.95 (pa)
Blackman (sociology and social policy, Durham U., UK) applies com-
plexity theory to thinking about the relationship between neighborhoods
and health inequalities. Drawing his empirical evidence from British
places and policy programs, he describes neighborhoods and their wider
environments as dynamic and adaptive systems, where emergent health
problems signal maladaption. His theoretical treatment is used to assess
the approaches, targets, and achievements UK’s National Strategy for
Neighbourhood Renewal and other recent British policy developments.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
HV1553 2005-033733 978-0-8160-6127-3
Ferguson career resource guide for people with
disabilities, 3d ed.; 2v.
Title main entry.
Ferguson Publishing, ©2006 1004 p. $125.00
Designed for a broad audience including educators, those in the care
industry, families, and perhaps also those considered disabled, this com-
pilation of resources includes essays on communicating with people who
have disabilities, teaching students with learning disabilities and using
low-cost ways to make libraries more accessible. Directories include
resources for caregivers and lists of such assistive technologies as com-
puters, daily living aids and mobility and transportation devices as well
as funding resources for nonprofits and research, providers of educa-
tional and vocational assistance, and libraries and research centers.
Entries for organizations and associations include those involved with the
Americans with Disabilities Act, medical care, independent living, legal
assistance, rehabilitation, advocacy, support groups, hotlines, technology
access, veterans’ associations, arts programs, camps, conferences, media,
and sports. The indexes are sorted by disability, geography and organi-
zation.
HV1568 2005-938587 1-58603-587-8
Promoting independence for older persons with
disabilities; proceedings.
International Conference on Aging, Disability and Independence (3d:
2006: St. Petersburg, FL) Ed. by William C. Mann and Abdelsalam
Helal. (Assistive technology research; v.18)
IOS Press, ©2006 235 p. $105.00
Taken from the February 2006 conference, these 25 papers show how
professionals can manage seniors who wish to maintain their inde-
pendence and actively engage in family and community life, focusing
largely on assistive technologies and prevention of injury. Papers on
“smart homes” and robotics present studies on monitoring of persons
with disabilities and dementia, privacy management, steward devices,
and the development of service models in the UK and Ireland. Topics on
“telehealth” include monitoring of behaviors, rural care coordination,
ethical considerations of monitoring, online resources for families caring
for a person with Alzheimer’s Disease, low cost evaluation centers and
using videophones as a way to reduce isolation, while papers on housing
consider lighting, cabinets, and rails, and such assistive devices as an
ultrasonic urine sensor, and various methods of providing prescription
information.
–169–
HV1624 2006-014539 978-1-56368-295-7
Blind rage; letters to Helen Keller.
Kleege, Georgina.
Gallaudet University Pr., ©2006 209 p. $19.95 (pa)
As a young blind girl, Georgina Kleege felt enormous pressure to emulate
the remarkable achievements of Helen Keller. Later, as an English pro-
fessor at the U. of California, Berkeley, she questioned the perfect image
of this “secular saint” and undertook to uncover the story of the real
Helen Keller. Using a series of letters to Keller as a literary device, she
criticizes the Keller mythology that promotes an unrealistic model for
blind people. Ultimately, she also expresses her genuine admiration for
this complex woman who managed to make a life for herself despite the
restrictions of her myth.
HV2402 2006-032360 978-1-56368-297-1
New approaches to interpreter education.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cynthia B. Roy. (Interpreter education series;
v.3)
Gallaudet University Pr., ©2006 169 p. $45.00
Roy’s (interpretation, Gallaudet U., Washington, D.C.) text expands the
tools available to interpreter educators with seven new chapters on new
curricula and creative teaching methods. The collection brings together
contributions by nine international academics and professionals from
both the sign and spoken language interpreting communities and from
a variety of professional and instructional settings that reflect differing
requirements—graduate, undergraduate, and certificate programs in the
U.S. and Australia; community and healthcare interpreting; blended pro-
grams that combine classroom instruction with distance learning; intro-
ductory training in languages of limited diffusion; and the development
and use of instructional materials (video) and techniques (discourse-
based instruction).
HV2474 2006-010157 1-56368-288-5
Frequency of occurrence and ease of articulation of sign
language handshapes; the Taiwanese example.
Ann, Jean.
Gallaudet University Pr., ©2006 209 p. $75.00
In this revised and updated version of her dissertation (published in
1993), Ann (curriculum and instruction, SUNY Oswego) analyzes
Taiwanese Sign Language handshapes to see if they improve ease of
articulation. She looks at the relationship between frequency of hand-
shape and ease, detailing 56 discovered shapes in TSL. Beginning with
the approaches of linguists, she examines the physiology of the hand,
divides shapes into categories, and describes patterns. In contrast to some
of her previous publications on the subject, she discusses her questions
in the context of functionalist theory, includes conversational data, cal-
culates frequency in a straightforward way, and only examines TSL in
detail.
HV2474 2006-021001 0-275-98974-7
Significant gestures; a history of American Sign Language.
Tabak, John.
Praeger, ©2006 225 p. $44.00
For some time it seemed to be the beginning of a culture, a start on a
language, but it was not until those who lived the culture and used the
language gained recognition as self-reliant that both the Deaf culture and
American Sign Language (ASL) were acknowledged as valid. Tabak, who
has a personal and professional interest in ASL, describes the remarkable
French cleric who taught an early form of sign language, then traces the
forces of opposition, many of which insisted on oral speech rather than
signing, and describes the growth of ASL into a recognized language. He
also shows the side roads, including forays into race, and how modern
concepts of modality started to work for ASL. He details the path of the
deaf and blind within ASL and explains technologies that are (and are
not) gaining ground in the Deaf and ASL communities.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV2545 2006-014962 1-56368-293-1 HV5731 2006-043744 0-7432-8958-7
Women and deafness; double visions. A life in smoke; a memoir.
Title main entry. Ed. by Brenda Jo Brueggemann and Susan Burch. Hansen, Julia.
Gallaudet University Pr., ©2006 298 p. $38.00 Free Press, ©2006 279 p. $24.00
Brueggemann (English, Ohio State U.), Burch (history, Gallaudet U.) and Hansen recounts her seven days of quitting smoking cold-turkey.
their contributors are the first to engage scholars and students in Deaf Interspersed with thoughts and feelings at the time, are memories of her
studies and women’s studies together and to open new avenues of previous life as a smoker.
inquiry into this new multidisciplinary field. They cover the experience
of women in and out of the community in such topics as female HV5740 2006-296314 0-07-147279-7
dynamics within schools for the Deaf, multiple identities within the com- Stop smoking.
munity of the deaf-blind, Deaf women in organizations and whether Aldrich, Matthew. (Teach yourself)
deafness or being female is to blame for inequality in education and McGraw-Hill, ©2006 187 p. $12.95 (pa)
work. They explore how women shaped Deaf culture and deafness itself
Written in short sections intended to be read while on cigarette breaks,
in the example of Marcelina Ruiz Ricote y Fernandez, the dominance of
this book seeks to help readers teach themselves to stop smoking by
hearing women teachers, and mothering dictated by oralism, with the
undermining the type of reasoning smokers engage in to explain to them-
concluding papers covering the ways in which Deaf women are perceived
selves why they smoke and why they feel quitting will be too difficult.
in film (The Piano and Children of a Lesser God), religion, gendered
signing and even beauty pageants.
HV5760 2006-049644 978-0-7879-8745-9
HV4493 2006-027102 978-0-7391-1585-5 Tobacco control policy.
Road dogs and loners; family relationships among Title main entry. Ed. by Kenneth E. Warner.
homeless men. Jossey-Bass, ©2006 590 p. $65.00 (pa)
Pippert, Timothy D. The underlying argument is that though education and propaganda have
Lexington Books, ©2007 153 p. $55.00 been important to reducing the percentage of people who smoke in the
US, regulations and incentives have played the critical role, especially in
Using ethnographic interviews, an affiliation scale, and observational
recent decades. Reprinted articles discuss taxation and price, smoking
data from two soup kitchens, Pippert (sociology, Augsburg) investigates
bans on businesses, advertising bans, laws against minors, insurance
the various relationships constructed among homeless men. He compares
policies, state laws, and the role of the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation
homeless men who typically partnered with others to men who
(which prepared the anthology).
described themselves as “loners.” The result is a sobering portrait of all
types of poverty on the streets and a valuable contribution to studies of HV5825 978-0-7734-5696-9
homelessness, family and gender.
The hidden language of narcoterrorism; a Spanish-English
HV4577 2006-009703 0-7546-1813-7 dictionary with a Quecha glossary; v.1.
Crossing the line; vagrancy, homelessness and social Costa, Heinrich.
displacement in Russia. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 483 p. $139.95
Stephenson, Svetlana. This is Volume I of a two-volume English-Spanish dictionary of drug
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 189 p. $99.95 slang and various chemical, legal, psychological, and military terms
related to the drug trade and efforts to combat it. There are also many
Stephenson (comparative sociology, London Metropolitan U.) examines
terms related to terrorism and espionage. This volume contains Spanish
the rise in homelessness in the late Soviet period and during the post-
terms with English and Spanish translations, and Volume II contains
socialist transition, in which many of those at the edge of society fell off
English terms with translations in both languages, plus a glossary of
and landed in a world in which they are almost entirely ignored. Using
Quechua terms. The dictionary can be used in law enforcement and
theoretical perspectives on how space and social status work together in
research.
excluding certain people, she works from in-depth biographical inter-
views to determine the causes for displacement and the currents of social HV5825 978-0-7734-5698-3
control that contribute to homelessness. The result is an interesting look
at how social forces more or less purposefully cause homelessness,
The hidden language of narcoterrorism; a Spanish-English
whether or not a transitional economy or society serve as excuses for it. dictionary with a Quecha glossary; v.2.
Costa, Heinrich.
HV4708 2006-047543 978-90-04-14725-6 Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 924 p. $129.95
In search of consistency; ethics and animals. This is Volume II of a two-volume English-Spanish dictionary of drug
Kemmerer, Lisa. (Human-animal studies; v.3) slang and various chemical, legal, psychological, and military terms
BRILL, ©2006 542 p. $99.00 (pa) related to the drug trade and efforts to combat it. There are also many
terms related to terrorism and espionage. This volume contains English
Kemmerer (philosophy, Montana State U., Billings) acknowledges non-
and foreign terms used in the US, Europe, and Asia as well as those
human animals past and present for helping her realize truths she might
common in Latin America, with definitions in English and Spanish. This
not have otherwise realized, thus indicating the importance she places
volume also contains a 2,000-word glossary of Quechua terms commonly
on the application of ethics to nonhumans. She presents critical analysis
used in the manufacture and commerce of cocaine, heroin, and mari-
of four contemporary thinkers’ proposals for extending core Western
juana, with English and Spanish definitions. Volume I of the set contains
moral theories to other life-forms. The philosophical approaches dis-
Spanish terms with translations in English and Spanish. The dictionary
cussed are: Tom Regan’s animal rights view, Peter Singer’s utilitarian
can be used in law enforcement and research.
theory, Paul Taylor’s bio-protectionism, and Andrew Linzey’s protec-
tionist theology. Lastly, she applies the Minimize Harm Maxim to such
HV5825 2006-025913 978-0-275-99322-1
ongoing animal welfare issues as being kept in captivity and human
dietary choice. The book is based on the author’s doctoral dissertation The methamphetamine crisis; strategies to save addicts,
from the U. of Glasgow. Her master’s is in theology. families, and communities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Herbert C. Covey.
HV4999 2006-029462 978-0-7890-3506-6 Praeger, ©2007 276 p. $69.95
Adolescent substance abuse; new frontiers in assessment. Fifteen chapters are presented by Covey (Colorado Department of Human
Title main entry. Ed. by Ken C. Winters. Services) in order to provide guidance and advice to professionals
Haworth Pr., ©2006 114 p. $20.00 (pa) working families and children affected by methamphetamine manufac-
Seven contributions from academics and practitioners discuss recent turing and abuse. Covey first describes the basic science and statistics of
advances in screening and assessment tools for measuring the extent and methamphetamine and its prevalence in the United States. Other con-
nature of alcohol and drug use problems in adolescents. For example, tributors explore methamphetamine lab identification and the dangers of
one paper addresses the measurement of community readiness for drug methamphetamine production, short- and long-term medical effects of
abuse prevention, while another examines the concordance of urinalysis, methamphetamine on children and adults, the environmental cleanup of
parent-report, and self-report. Editor Winters teaches psychiatry at the U. methamphetamine labs, community-based treatment for methamphet-
of Minnesota. The volume has been simultaneously co-published as amine addiction, psychosocial approaches to methamphetamine
Journal of Child & Adolescent Substance Abuse, v. 16, no.1, 2006. dependence, child welfare and methamphetamine, case management,
and drug courts. Also included is testimony from an addict and the
mother of an addict.

Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –170–

HV5825 2006-024491 978-0-275-99026-8
Rethinking our war on drugs; candid talk about
controversial issues.
Fisher, Gary L.
Praeger, ©2006 208 p. $44.95
In this accessible text Fisher critically examines the National Drug
Control Strategy (NDCS) of the past ten years and observes that it has
failed to reduce either the supply of drugs or the demand for them in
the U.S. He then considers in turn a number of controversial issues such
as the legalization of marijuana and the disease concept of addiction. He
concludes by proposing a new model for an NDCS that is based on harm
management. Fisher is director of the Center for the Application of
Substance Abuse Technologies at the U. of Nevada, Reno.
HV5831 2006-010102 978-1-887896-97-9
The reaper’s line; life and death on the Mexican border.
Morgan, Lee.
Rio Nuevo Publishers, ©2006 525 p. $25.00
Morgan, a retired US Customs Service Special Agent, spent much of his
career on the US-Mexican border engaged in drug interdiction efforts. In
this memoir, aimed at a general readership, he recounts his 31 years
along the border, describing gun fights, raids, government corruption,
and other observations, airing his unabashed criticisms of current US
border policies along the way.
HV5840 2006-299026 978-0-335-21616-1
Drugs; policy and politics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rhidian Hughes et al. (Introducing social
policy)
Open University Press, ©2006 143 p. $39.95 (pa)
Part of a series directed at undergraduate students of social policy, the
volume discusses drug policy from a European perspective and in the
context of such topical substantive themes as social exclusion, gender, eth-
nicity, the law, criminal justice, and health. Among specific topics are
young people, the regulation of harm, epidemiology and the evolution of
a common European drug policy, and contemporary social theory.
HV6018 2006-017357 1-4129-3632-2
Criminological theory; context and consequences, 4th ed.
Lilly, J. Robert et al.
Sage Publications, ©2007 400 p. $49.95 (pa)
This updated text aimed at advanced undergraduate and graduate
student audiences introduces criminological theory and links theory with
real- world policy and policy alternatives, as well as with the social and
cultural milieu within which the theory took shape, albeit to a lesser
extent. Lilly (Northern Kentucky U.), Cullen (U. of Cincinnati), and Ball
(Pennsylvania State U. at Fayette) have organized the material according
to the different schools of criminological theory, presenting chapters on
the Chicago School, anomie and strain theories, control theory, labeling
theory, conflict theory, critical theory, feminist theory, conservative crim-
inology, routine activity and rational choice theories, biological and
biosocial theories, and life-course theories.
HV6025 0-7401-1719-X
City crime rankings; crime in metropolitan America, 13th
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathleen O’Leary Morgan and Scott Morgan.
Morgan Quitno Press, ©2006 408 p. $49.95 (pa)
This reference compares crime in about 380 US cities with a population
of 75,000 or more in addition to all metropolitan areas, aiming to make
data understandable. Statistics on violent crime, murder, rape, robbery,
assault, property crime, burglary, and theft are presented in tables in
alphabetical and rank order, with statistics on police patrols and percent
changes from 2001 to 2005. It includes a report of the safest city and
metro area, a 2005 crime overview, and metropolitan and city popula-
tions. Rankings are based on 2005 FBI statistics from their annual pub-
lication Crime in the United States.
HV6025 2006-022332 978-1-4129-3840-2
Criminology; an interdisciplinary approach.
Walsh, Anthony and Lee Ellis.
Sage Publications, ©2007 495 p. $64.95 (pa)
Taking an interdisciplinary approach to the subject, this introductory
criminology textbook integrates ideas and research from sociology, psy-
chology, and biology with coverage of traditional criminological theory
and concepts. The first nine chapters discuss specific theories and
approaches, while the remaining ones look at certain types of crimes (i.e.,
serial murder, terrorism, property crime). The experience of victimization
is covered in the final chapter.
–171–
HV6046 2006-386564 1-55266-187-3
Criminalizing women; gender and (in)justice in neo-
liberal times.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gillian Balfour and Elizabeth Comack.
Fernwood Publishing, ©2006 382 p. $31.95 (pa)
Women are becoming the fastest-growing segment in the prison popu-
lation, indicating that the ways in which western societies have perceived
offending women has changed, or that women are becoming more likely
to choose to become offenders. The truth is more complex than either
approach, according to the contributors of these 14 essays, who frame the
feminist engagement with criminology. They describe the representations
censuring of the “errant female,” the classed and gendered nature of the
in-call sex industry, gang participation as a response to colonialization,
representations of women in the drug trade, criminal and psychiatric
control of women, secure care and young women in prostitution, the
criminalization of poverty, feminist therapeutic programming, gender-
responsive strategies, regulation of women in transition in the system,
collaborations that enforce the human rights of women, and making
changes in neo-liberal times.
HV6080 2005-031627 0-7619-2909-6
Crime and nature.
Felson, Marcus.
Sage Publications, ©2006 391 p. $67.95
Writing for students already versed in standard theories of crime, Felson
(criminal justice, Rutgers U.) here proposes an alternative theoretical
framework that posits crime as a living system characterized by organi-
zation, adaptation, metabolism, movement, growth, reproduction, and
irritability. He uses this framework to reorder current knowledge on
crime in order to draw new connections and stimulate critical thinking
about crime’s prevention.
HV6181 2006-005842 0-7546-2650-4
Migration, culture conflict, crime, and terrorism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joshua D. Freilich and Rob T. Guerette.
(Advances in criminology)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 235 p. $124.95
Fourteen papers were selected for this volume by Freilich (John Jay
College of Criminal Justice) and Guerette (Florida International U.) from
the third international conference dealing with the topics mentioned in
the volume’s title (and their interrelationships), held in October 2003 in
Istanbul, Turkey. Contributors generally approach their individual topics
through the disciplinary lens of criminology. Specific issues discussed
include terrorism as politically inspired criminality; comparative leg-
islative and policy developments regarding immigration, security, and
civil liberties in the US, Australia, and Canada following the September
11th attacks; attitudes towards violence and delinquent behavior among
young Christians and Muslims in Germany; the prison situation of for-
eigners in Japan; media use and its impacts on crime perception, sen-
tencing attitudes, and crimp policy in Germany; transnational organized
crime and trafficking of human beings; an international law perspective
on refugees and human rights; the role for situational crime prevention
in addressing migrant deaths; domestic violence among immigrant
women; and police approaches to domestic violence in India.
HV6248 2005-043541 0-7546-3104-4
Mary Carleton.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mihoko Susuki. (Early modern Englishwoman;
printed writings, 1641-1700, Series 2, Part 3; v.6)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 — p. $165.00
Carlton (1642-73) left no writings, but there are several versions of her
narration of life as a German princess during her 1663 trial for bigamy.
She was acquitted, but twice more condemned to death for petty theft,
and actually executed the second time. In addition to that narrative,
Susuki presents her husband’s pamphlet attacking her as the impostor
she was, and other texts about her during the period, all in facsimile of
the original publication.
HV6248 2006-011908 1-4000-8066-5
Thunderstruck.
Larson, Erik.
Crown Publishers, ©2006 463 p. $25.95
Dr. Hawley Harvey Crippen murdered his wife and tried to escape
London on a ship to America in the early twentieth century. He was
caught in part due to the new invention of the wireless by Guglielmo
Marconi, which was used on the ship. Larson draws from letters,
memoirs, Scotland Yard reports, and other documents in telling the story
and filling in its historical context of the Edwardian era. Larson is the
author of Isaac’s Storm and The Devil in the White City.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV6250 2006-021002 0-275-98967-4
“Intimate” violence against women; when spouses,
partners, or lovers attack.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paula K. Lundberg-Love & Shelly L. Marmion.
(Women’s psychology)
Praeger, ©2006 235 p. $44.95
Aimed at a general audience, this volume dispels a number of myths
about intimate violence against women and arms readers with
knowledge they need to help themselves or others who have been vic-
timized. Eleven contributions from academics and clinicians address the
prevalence of these types of crimes and describe their impact on
women’s emotional and physical health. Legal issues and therapeutic
interventions are also discussed. The editors teach psychology at the U. of
Texas.
HV6250 2006-021760 1-59332-155-4
The measurement of crime; victim reporting and police
recording.
Catalano, Shannan M. (Criminal justice)
LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2006 216 p. $65.00
Victim reporting and police recording of serious violent crime corre-
spond more closely now than in the past. Apparently, police are now
doing better in counting crimes reported by victims. Catalano
(Victimization Statistics Unit, Bureau of Justice Statistics, Washington, DC)
analyzes these reporting gaps and convergences in statistics from the
National Crime Victimization Survey (NCVS) and the Uniform Crime
Reports, 1973-2002. About half of the book is comprised of graphic rep-
resentations of these trends. In examining empirical and methodological
issues in measuring such crimes, she concludes that changes in percep-
tions of rape and domestic violence as aggravated assault plus a re-
designed NCVS have contributed to this convergence.
HV6322 2004-016986 978-0-7391-1279-3
Get ‘em all! kill ‘em!; genocide, terrorism, righteous
communities. (reprint, 2005)
Wilshire, Bruce W.
Lexington Books, ©2006 199 p. $18.95 (pa)
Wilshire (philosophy, Rutgers U.) mixes Freudian theorizing and philo-
sophical exegesis in his attempt to understand the causes of genocide and
terrorism. He builds on the idea that the group that commits genocide is
in some way terrorized as well, perceiving a threat to their “world-expe-
rienced,” and traces this idea through discussion of the Nazis, Serb
crimes against Muslims in Bosnia, Pol Pot’s Cambodian massacres, Hutu
attacks on Tutsis in Rwanda, and white settler massacres of Native
Americans in California. This is a paperbound edition of a work first
published in 2005.
HV6431 2006-025924 978-0-275-99336-8
Fighting suicide bombing; a worldwide campaign for life.
Charny, I.W.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 283 p. $49.95
Suicide bombing, argues Charny (psychology, Hebrew U. of Jerusalem,
Israel), is a product of an Islamic fundamentalist “Culture of Death” that
is at war with a Judeo-Christian “Culture of Life.” Proceeding from this
basic premise, he explores the psychology of suicide bombing and tends
to what he thinks are its implications. Thus suicide bombers become a
pathological aspect of Islam that needs to be confronted with a “spiritual
battle over values” (which includes limiting the speech of those Muslims
thought to be promoting the “Culture of Death”), as well as police-mil-
itary force. While aware of political scientist Robert Pape’s argument that
suicide bombings are primarily a product of people perceiving their
homelands to be under attack or occupation, Charny chooses not to
engage Pape’s argument in any significant manner.
HV6431 2006-021637 978-1-58826-453-4
How states fight terrorism; policy dynamics in the West.
Title main entry. Ed. by Doron Zimmermann and Andreas Wenger.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 261 p. $55.00
Scholars of security and defense present nine papers from a March 2004
conference in Zurich describing the counter-terrorism policies and initia-
tives undertaken in the wake of the September 2001 attack by govern-
ments in Europe and North America. A final paper looks at efficiency
and legitimacy.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV6431 2006-042724 978-0-7546-2583-4
Insurgent terrorism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gerald Cromer. (International library of crimi-
nology, criminal justice and penology; 2d series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 524 p. $250.00
Writing in the late 1970s while working for the Rand Corporation,
Nathan Leites complained that far too many studies concerned with
“urban guerillas” and “terrorists” focus on what they do and their envi-
ronments but neglect to consider “what they thought they were doing,
precisely what good it would do.” Following the Leites essay, 18 previ-
ously published papers that are collected here take up precisely that
issue, seeking to understand how the terrorists understand themselves
and their activities. Editor Cromer (Bar-Ilan U., Israel) has organized the
papers into sections that explore justifications of violence and the rhetoric
of terrorism, the relationship between cultural narratives and terrorist
motivations, and religious motivations. Also included are a trio of com-
parative papers discussing the role of ideology and theories of justifi-
cation of political violence.
HV6431 2006-026014 0-275-98963-1
The “new” terrorism; myths and reality.
Mockaitis, Thomas R.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 158 p. $39.95
The “Global War on Terrorism,” declares Mockaitis (history, DePaul U.),
“has become one of the most socially enervating and politically debili-
tating phenomena in recent history.” He argues that this has come about
as a result of the myths, misconceptions, and oversimplifications that
run through the popular perception of terrorism and preclude a sober
cost-benefit analysis of terrorism’s real risks. Offering this book as a cor-
rective, he describes the patterns and trends of global terrorism, analyzes
the evolution and ideology of Al Qaeda, and proposes a counterinsur-
gency model for combating terrorism to replace the current war model.
HV6431 2006-021060 0-275-99230-6
Outsmarting the terrorists.
Clarke, Ronald and Graeme R. Newman. (Global crime and justice,
1931-7239)
Praeger, ©2006 303 p. $49.00
Criminal justice professors Clarke and Newman present a systematic
approach that security agencies can use to fight terrorism. The focus is
on identifying opportunities for attacks and then blocking or removing
them before terrorists can strike. The authors, who are affiliated with the
Center for Problem Oriented Policing, also offer suggestions for devel-
oping a more rational and effective homeland security policy in the U.S.
HV6431 2006-048470 978-1-4058-4085-9
Terrorism; understanding the global threat, rev. ed.
Whittaker, David J.
Longman, ©2007 236 p. $15.95 (pa)
Adopting a definition of and intellectual approach to terrorism similar to
that favored by Western governments and many Western academics, this
is a primer on current issues of global terrorism. The book describes the
events of major terrorist attacks in New York and Washington, Madrid,
and London; presents a snapshot on terrorist events around the world;
discusses motives for terrorism; considers the nexus between terrorism
and religion; examines current and possible future methods of terrorism;
and addresses counter-terrorism efforts.
HV6432 2006-017185 978-1-58816-635-7
Debunking 9/11 myths; why conspiracy theories can’t
stand up to the facts.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Dunbar and Brad Reagan.
Hearst Books/Sterling, ©2006 170 p. $14.95 (pa)
Two editors of Popular Mechanics, building upon an article published in
the March 2005 issue of their magazine, take on the myriad claims of
the 9-11 conspiracy theorists, seeking to show that the claims do not rest
upon a sound factual basis. Claims are discussed on an individual basis,
with each claim followed by the editors’ countervailing facts. The focus
is on the sort of scientific and technical matters one would expect Popular
Mechanics to specialize in, such as whether the World Trade Center
towers were truly capable of “pancaking” due to the structural damage
from the planes and the jet fuel fire or whether it should have been
simple for the Air Force to intercept the hijacked passenger airplanes. An
afterword by James B. Meigs, editor-in-chief of the magazine, examines
the “conspiracy industry” itself, attacking the style of argument they typ-
ically engage in.
–172–
HV6432 2005-038031 978-1-55753-418-7
Guiding future homeland security policy; directions for
scientific inquiry.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sandra F. Amass et al. (Advances in homeland
security; v.2)
Purdue University Press, ©2006 152 p. $34.95
The first volume in the series having reviewed the scientific literature on
homeland security, this second explores emerging topics that do not yet
have a strong basis in that literature. Contributors mostly from Purdue
University look at such topics as a qualitative architecture for investi-
gating the quantitative aspects of the impact of public policies related to
homeland security, and security screening.
HV6432 2006-020265 1-59102-453-6
Jihad incorporated; a guide to militant Islam in the US.
Emerson, Steven.
Prometheus Books, ©2006 535 p. $28.00
According to Emerson (founder and executive director, Investigative
Project on Terrorism), radical Islamist groups have established a world-
wide “conglomerate” that has operationally autonomous “subsidiaries”
operating in the United States through networks of terrorist cells, char-
ities, front companies, advocacy groups, think tanks, web sites, mosques,
and theological organizations. In this work, he and his colleagues at the
Investigative Project seek to alert Americans to the scope and danger of
this network. He discusses the activities of Al Qaeda, Hamas, Hizballah,
Palestinian Islamic Jihad, and jihadists in Pakistan. He also seeks to
expose an alleged support network operating with the types of front
organizations mentioned above. As with earlier works by Emerson,
critics are likely to respond that the book is marred by portraying every
single one of these groups as dangerous to the United States when many
are better understood as opponents of Israel that, however violent, have
arisen in response to Israeli policies in the Occupied Territories and
Lebanon, and by conflating organizations whose links are tenuous at
best, such as Hizballah al-Hijaz, accused of carrying out the Khobar
Towers bombing of 1996, and the Lebanese Hizballah, founded to resist
the Israeli occupation of southern Lebanon in the 1980s.
HV6432 2005-283866 978-0-8050-7852-7
Nuclear terrorism; the ultimate preventable catastrophe.
Allison, Graham.
Owl Books, ©2005 275 p. $15.00 (pa)
Allison (director, Belfer Center for Science and International Affairs,
Harvard U.) makes an alarming case that without prompt action, the
probability of a terrorist strike using a nuclear weapon is quite high. In
order to prevent such a catastrophe, he argues, the United States must
adopt a strategy that is founded on a doctrine that seeks no loose nuclear
weapons, no new nascent nuclear weapons, and no new nuclear
weapons states.
HV6432 2005-038030 978-1-55753-416-3
The science of homeland security.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sandra F. Amass et al. (Advances in homeland
security; v.1)
Purdue University Press, ©2006 227 p. $34.95
Intended as a resource for the scientific community and government offi-
cials, this volume reviews and critiques the scientific literature in several
areas relating to homeland security. Eight chapters address such topics
as physical security aspects in water infrastructure; detection of signif-
icant bacterial pathogens; and modeling, measuring, and understanding
security risks. Editor Amass is affiliated with the Purdue U. Homeland
Security Institute, as are a number of the contributors.
HV6432 2006-045682 978-0-8122-3983-6
Trapped in the war on terror.
Lustick, Ian S.
U. of Pennsylvania Pr., ©2006 186 p. $24.95
The panic and fear that pervaded America at the opening of the Cold
War, fanned in part by McCarthyism, did not stop the country from sus-
taining a productive national life and overcoming the USSR. Lustick
(political science, U. of Pennsylvania) notes that this victory came from
careful analysis of the threat of communism in the US and abroad,
rather than preemptive war, and the lessons learned should be applied
in the case of al-Qaeda. He maintains that the fear of terrorism is caused
primarily by ignorance, and that terrorist organizations have used that
ignorance greatly to their advantage. He describes common perceptions
of the terrorist threat against the real evidence, faults in intelligence and
the invasion of Iraq, the role of the media in perpetuating ignorance, and
the steps necessary to free America from the war on terror.
–173–
HV6432 2005-021789 1-85109-803-8
U.S. homeland security; a reference handbook.
Ball, Howard. (Contemporary world issues)
ABC-CLIO, ©2005 235 p. $55.00
Ball uses his considerable experience as an academic and a writer on
judicial politics, civil rights, civil liberties, international law, war crimes
and justice to create an accessible but thorough account of the creation
of the Department of Homeland Security (DHS), its intentions and its
actions. He begins with a brief history, including the constitutional foun-
dations, its formation in the shadows of 9/11, its inception in the 2001
USA Patriot Act and executive order, the politics behind its becoming a
cabinet-level agency, early problems in organization, management and
funding, political responses and private sector security problems. Ball
provides biographical profiles of leadership of the DHS and others
involved, relevant documents, including reports, testimony and speeches,
a directory of governmental and non-governmental organizations and
print and non-print resources. The result should be on hand whenever
one reads a newspaper or watches the evening news.
HV6432 2006-010593 978-0-446-57932-2
Wake-up call; the political education of a 9/11 widow.
Breitweiser, Kristen.
Warner Books, Inc., ©2006 287 p. $24.99
Breitweiser, one of the nation’s leading 9/11 activists, was a Republican
and a suburban mother and housewife until her husband was killed in
the September 11th terrorist attacks. The attack galvanized Breitweiser
politically, and, along with three other 9/11 widows, she fought for the
creation of the 9/11 Commission in the face of strong opposition from
President Bush and many other top government officials. In this account,
she describes her recovery from the nightmare of the attacks, and dis-
cusses cover-ups revealed during her campaign for the 9/11 Commission.
B&w personal photos are included. There is no subject index.
HV6432 2006-048972 0-87113-945-6
War by other means; an insider’s account of the war on
terror.
Yoo, John.
Grove Atlantic, ©2006 292 p. $24.00
Serving in the George W. Bush administration’s Office of Legal Council
of the Department of Justice, John Yoo (now a professor at the U. of
California at Berkeley School of Law) played a significant and, to many,
infamous role in crafting the legal arguments deployed by the adminis-
tration in defense of its “detainment,” “extraordinary rendition,” war-
rantless wiretapping and “coercive interrogation” (torture) policies.
Together with his academic legal book, The Powers of War and Peace: The
Constitution and Foreign Affairs After 9/11, this memoir of those years is
clearly intended as an apologia defending himself against his critics,
many of whom have gone so far as to call for the prosecution of Yoo as
a war criminal. Yoo doesn’t restrict himself to discussion of his own par-
ticular involvements in policy, instead seeking to defend the entire edifice
of “unitary executive” powers asserted by the Bush administration as the
only reasonable response to “a terrorist enemy intent on carrying out the
catastrophic destruction of our nation.”
HV6433 2006-414614 984-05-1768-6
Faces of terrorism in Bangladesh.
Shawkat Ali, A.M.M.
University Press Limited, ©2006 127 p. $50.00
Shawkat Ali, a former official in both the Pakistani and Bangladeshi gov-
ernments and now a professor at East West U. in Bangladesh, presents
27 of his columns on the question of terrorism in Bangladesh that he has
previously published in the major national English dailies in Dhaka
between 2004 and 2006. Seeing terrorism in Bangladesh as a result of
“Islamic bigotry,” he advocates for pursuit of terrorists using police
powers, but also addresses such topics as depoliticizing religion,
revamping the religion-based education system, and addressing issues of
social and economic development.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV6433 2006-007865 978-1-59403-144-1
Londonistan.
Phillips, Melanie.
Encounter Books, ©2006 213 p. $25.95
The London subway bombings were only the outward manifestation of
a much more widespread problem in contemporary Britain of Muslim
minorities refusing to “accept the terms on which minorities must relate
to the majority culture in a liberal democracy,” warns Phillips (a
columnist for the UK’s Daily Mail). She argues that this environment is
rife for the growth of Islamic radicalism and what’s worse, in her eyes,
is that fear of being branded racist has blinded British authorities (par-
ticularly the liberals) to the magnitude of the threat while British aban-
donment of Judeo-Christian values has left a moral vacuum into which
Islamism is rushing. Additionally, she charges, the antiwar movement
and the inroads it has made into mainstream opinion helps fuel Muslim
anger in Britain with “daily invective against Jews, Israelis, and evil
Americans.”
HV6433 2006-347576 81-7304-671-9
Responding to terrorism in South Asia.
Title main entry. Ed. by S.D. Muni.
Manohar, ©2006 542 p. $67.95
The 14 chapters presented by Muni (South Asian studies, Jawaharlal
Nehru U., India) explore the evolution of state responses to terrorism (as
seen from the state perspective) in South Asia. Individual national case
studies are presented for India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, Nepal,
and Bhutan. Comparative regional perspectives are explored in chapters
that address such issues as the role of civil societies, consequences of the
anti-terror strategies pursued, the role of third parties, general regional
anti-terror strategies, and the political economy of terrorism. Also
included is a data paper presenting information on the identity and
range of terrorist organizations, national anti-terror legislation, and rel-
evant international treaties and UN Security Council resolutions.
Distributed in the US by South Asia Books.
HV6433 2006-554315 81-7304-659-X
Understanding terrorism in South Asia: beyond statist
discourses.
Title main entry. Ed. by Imtiaz Ahmed.
Manohar, ©2006 418 p. $68.95
Recognizing that there are many competing definitions of terrorism,
from those that are defined by the state to those that are defined by sub-
altern groups, the eight papers presented by Ahmed (international rela-
tions, U. of Dhaka, Bangladesh) collectively paint a picture of the current
status of state, subaltern, and other terrorisms in South Asia. Topics
include the merging of state terrorism and counter-terrorism in Sri
Lanka, Bangladesh, Pakistan, and India; the complicity of the state in
non-state terrorism because of its role in developing weapons technology;
the relationship between subalternity in Nepal, Sri Lanka, and north-east
India; and the influence of globalization on subaltern militancy.
Distributed in the US by South Asia Books.
HV6457 978-0-7734-5628-0
How the American media packaged lynching (1850-1940);
constructing the meaning of social events.
Wasserman, Ira.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 390 p. $129.95
Over 3,400 people lost their lives to lynching from 1882 to 1930 in the US;
nearly three-quarters of that number were in the Southern states, which
leaves nearly 900 from the Northeast, Midwest and West. Wasserman
(sociology emeritus, Eastern Michigan U.) takes a hard look at this most
violent collective and public behavior, analyzing how the media and the
various interest groups which influenced the media framed vigilante
activity and lynching. He finds startling evidence that vigilantes and
pressure groups often romanticized lynching, and the media often pre-
sented lynching as justified, especially when the victims were alleged to
have perpetrated interracial sexual crimes. Along with careful work on
the theories and events behind lynching, Wasserman provides fascinating
and sometimes disturbing illustrations and materials from the legitimate
press.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV6517 2006-012980 0-8156-0824-1
The “double indemnity” murder; Ruth Snyder, Judd Gray,
and New York’s crime of the century.
MacKellar, Landis.
Syracuse U. Pr., ©2006 411 p. $24.95 (pa)
Investigation documents and photographs related to the 1927 murder of
Albert Snyder by his wife Ruth and her lover Judd Gray have been
mostly destroyed because of their antiquity. Mackeller offers his telling of
the ordeal, as gleaned from trial transcripts, periodicals, interviews, city
records, letters, a detective log, and earlier books on the topic. The
murder inspired the book-turned-noir film titled Double Indemnity, and
was later interpreted in the film Body Heat. This book reads like a novel
and employs artistic license in fleshing out the moments that were not
logged, as in the first chapter describing the crime, where dialogue of
unclear source is abundant. The second chapter details the trial, wherein
the two accused invent indictments of the other. This chapter also por-
trays the popular and media frenzy that accompanied the trial. The two
were eventually sentenced to be executed at Sing Sing prison, and the
final chapter describes their last days and the public’s response. The
appendix offers brief biographies of personalities in the book and dis-
cusses questions of motive that may remain unanswered.
HV6534 0-7190-7376-6
Poison, detection and the Victorian imagination.
Burney, Ian. (Encounters)
Manchester U. Press, ©2006 193 p. $74.95
Burney examines the causes and effects of the Victorian fascination with
the threat of criminal poisoning. Using an interdisciplinary cultural his-
torical approach, he interweaves accounts of several famous poisoning
trials with a discussion of the origins and development of the field of tox-
icology. He also considers the legal concept of expert testimony. Burney
teaches at the U. of Manchester’s Centre for the History of Science,
Technology, and Medicine. Distributed in the U.S. by Palgrave Macmillan.
HV6535 978-0-88920-522-2
Rage and resistance; a theological reflection on the
Montreal massacre.
O’Donovan, Theresa. (Studies in women and religion)
Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2007 145 p. $25.95 (pa)
On December 6, 1989, Marc Lépine entered the campus of the École
Polytechnique de Montreal and proceeded to shoot dead fourteen women
before killing himself. He left a note blaming feminists for the troubles
in his life. This volume represents the doctoral thesis of O’Donovan (reli-
gious studies and philosophy, Brescia U. College, Canada), in which she
examines the presentation of, responses to, and debates over the Montreal
Massacre, as well as their theological implications and connections to
wider questions over violence against women.
HV6542 2006-044035 0-8493-9366-3
Child homicide; parents who kill, 2d ed.
Schwartz, Lita Linzer and Natalie K. Isser.
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2007 297 p. $89.95
Schwartz and Isser (both emerita, Pennsylvania State U.) take on a hor-
rific subject with objectivity and sensitivity, placing neonaticide in its
proper place separate from infanticide and filicide. They examine the
history of child homicide as a means of disposing of unwanted or
imperfect children, the motives and legal ramifications of neonaticide,
new evidence about postpartum depression and Munchausen Syndrome
by Proxy, paternal involvement, the ramifications of other forms of child
murder, political and other arguments about abortion and euthanasia,
the role of therapeutic jurisprudence, and preventive measures such as
sex education, pregnancy prevention, adoption and foster placement.
HV6548 2006-016837 978-0-7890-3019-1
Cultural diversity and suicide; ethnic, religious, gender,
and sexual orientation perspectives.
Leach, Mark M.
Haworth Pr., ©2006 258 p. $34.95 (pa)
Leach (psychology, U. of Southern Mississippi, Hattiesburg) discusses the
relationship between culture and suicide. Following an introduction on
risk factors and assessment, chapters are arranged by ethnicity
(European Americans, African Americans, Asian Americans, Hispanic
Americans, and Native Americans), and cover gender, age, religion, and
sexuality within each, prevention and intervention, and special topics
such as views of death and dying and tribal affiliation and acculturation.
Case studies are included. The book is meant for use by clinicians and
researchers when clients are not actively suicidal, and in the application
of cultural dimensions to treatment. An understanding of traditional
suicide assessment is assumed.
–174–
HV6592 2006-045237 0-398-07677-4
Sex crimes; perpetrators, predators, prostitutes, and
victims, 2d ed.
Flowers, Ronald B.
C.C. Thomas, ©2006 298 p. $63.95
This volume consists of a criminological and sociological examination of
sex criminality in the US, its nature, characteristics, dimensions, and
ramifications. It covers the broad range of sex crimes as both a distinct
classification of crime and as individual offences and discusses sex-
related homicides, rape, incest, sexual predatory crimes, prostitution, the-
ories on sexual criminality, and the criminal justice system. It has been
updated and has a new chapter on sex trafficking in the US and related
international aspects. Statutory rape is also discussed in this edition. The
book is meant for academics and professionals in a variety of fields, in
addition to survivors and general readers.
HV6592 2006-922587 1-887554-53-X
The sexual predator; law and public policy clinical
practice; v.3.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anita Schlank.
Civic Research Institute, ©2006 — p. $133.95
Because sexual offenders tend to be viewed as the most objectionable type
of criminal offender and are assumed by many to be untreatable and
more likely to recidivate, draconian laws restricting their movement and
behavior have been passed—some for example banning them from hur-
ricane shelters. Here contributors from mental health and law, believing
that such statutes will not soon disappear, provide information to help
identify as accurately as possible the subgroup that presents the highest
risk to society, and to help treatment providers identify the most effective
methods for treating them.
HV6594 2006-044280 0-8261-3756-3
Partner stalking; how women respond, cope, and survive.
Title main entry. Ed. by TK Logan et al.
Springer Publishing Co., ©2006 342 p. $45.00
The authors interviewed 62 women who have been stalked by violent
partners, many of them for years, to describe their daily lives and the
critical cultural and community factors that could alleviate or prevent the
incidence of stalking. The authors describe perpetrators, coping tactics,
stalking tactics, earlier victimization, incidents of physical abuse, health
problems associated with stress, resources, barriers to getting help, and
the behavior of a justice system which has been known to dismiss,
ignore, or more fully victimize women being stalked.
HV6626 2005-926809 1-887554-45-9
Abuse and neglect of vulnerable adult populations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joanne Marlatt Otto.
Civic Research Institute, ©2005 — p. $133.95
When Otto, a 25-year veteran of adult protective services now in Colorado,
was asked to produce a book on elder abuse, she pondered, then started
what she calls a report letter, Victimization of the Elderly and Disabled. A
decade later, she has selected over 100 articles (organized into 17
chapters) from its issues that she finds most informative about preva-
lence and types; specific populations; mental and physical disabilities;
professional development, policies, and best practices; and legal
responses.
HV6626 2006-011288 978-0-7591-0800-4
Family abuse and violence; a social problems perspective.
Miller, JoAnn and Dean D. Knudsen. (Violence prevention and policy
series)
AltaMira Press, ©2007 425 p. $90.00
For undergraduate and graduate students, Miller and Knudsen (sociology
and women’s studies, Purdue U.) provide a text that addresses the
problem of family abuse and violence in the US, analyzing child, partner,
and elder abuse. They first present a conceptual framework that inte-
grates research in subfields with research studying them as dimensions
of a single problem, calling it the Family Abuse and Violence Episode
perspective, which integrates social theories and represents a new
method for examining intragenerational and intergenerational abuse.
Their method concentrates on the social context and considers historical
studies and types of abuse. Other chapters address medical, legal, and
social problems, child sexual abuse and exploitation, definitions and per-
ceptions of victims and perpetrators, dating and intimate partner vio-
lence, and neglect.
–175–
HV6626 2006-018587 0-8261-0245-X
Family interventions in domestic violence; a handbook of
gender-inclusive theory and treatment.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Hamel and Tonia L. Nicholls.
Springer Publishing Co., ©2007 642 p. $79.00
For many years, intimate partner violence has been typically framed as
a gender issue, with men as the perpetrators and women as the victims.
This volume departs from traditional paradigms by taking a gender-
inclusive, pragmatic approach to assessment and intervention. The 28
contributions from clinician Hamel, researcher Nicholls (Simon Fraser
U.) and other scholars and practitioners are divided into two sections:
research/theory and assessment/treatment. Some of the issues addressed
include court-mandated therapy, partner violence typologies, and
treatment of domestic violence in same-sex couples.
HV6626 2006-045339 978-0-393-70514-0
Stop domestic violence; innovative skills, techniques,
options, and plans for better relationships; group leader’s
manual. (CD-ROM included)
Wexler, David B. (Norton professional book)
W.W. Norton, ©2006 211 p. $32.00 (pa)
Wexler, of the Relationship Training Institute, provides a revision
(informed by new research and models) of Domestic Violence 2000, STOP
Domestic Violence that gives guidelines for treating male offenders. Aimed
at therapists, social workers, and counselors, the text gives an open-ended
26 or 52-week psychoeducational treatment model and numerous forms,
handouts, and questionnaires. The program has men examine the dom-
inance and control aspects of domestic violence and trains them in new
skills for self-management, communication, problem solving, and
empathy. A CD-ROM containing relaxation exercises is included. Their
treatment model originated as part of a research project evaluating mil-
itary treatment programs cosponsored by the Department of Defense and
the National Institute of Mental Health.
HV6626 2005-937641 0-446-57970-X
A teenager’s journey; overcoming a childhood of abuse.
Pelzer, Richard B.
Warner Books, Inc., ©2006 215 p. $23.95
In A Brother’s Journey, Richard Pelzer revealed the grim details of a
childhood spent enduring abuse at the hands of his schizophrenic
mother. In this memoir, he recounts the harrowing story of his teen
years, which were marked by suicide attempts and drug addiction. He
also goes on to describe his difficult, but ultimately inspiring journey to
freedom and forgiveness.
HV6679 2005-031926 978-0-471-75724-5
Investigating identity theft; a guide for businesses, law
enforcement, and victims.
Collins, Judith M.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 252 p. $39.95
Using real case examples, Collins, a criminologist employed by the State
Department in Washington, DC, discusses the extent of this escalating
crime and the process of conducting an online investigation of identity
theft. Topics she covers include identity theft networks (said to operate
in a manner similar to al Queda), computer security, and how to trace
Internet addresses. The text includes exercises, a victim’s intake form and
other required documentation, and an extensive list of Web resources.
HV6769 2006-016595 978-1-4051-4539-8
Permission to steal; revealing the roots of corporate
scandal: An address to my fellow citizens.
Newton, Lisa H. (Blackwell public philosophy)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 105 p. $34.95
To restate the argument of Newton (philosophy, Fairfield U.) at its most
simplistic: the causes of the corporate scandals of the 1990s and early
2000s lie in the embrace of classical liberalism in its most extreme form
as our vision of the good life. In order to rebuild a healthy and integrated
society, she argues, it is necessary to recognize the importance of public
life, build transparency, rearticulate and recommit to a sense of stew-
ardship, and regain a republic dedicated to the common good.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV6773 2006-026800 0-275-98575-X
The dark side of the Internet; protecting yourself and
your family from online criminals.
Bocij, Paul.
Praeger, ©2006 253 p. $44.95
The author introduces the types of threats posed to users of the Internet
by the range of “criminals and deviants” populating the Web. The focus
is more on the motivations and behaviors of people and less on techno-
logical matters and now prior technical knowledge is required. The
author has included greater coverage of neglected areas by sacrificing
coverage of topics that have been discussed extensively elsewhere. He
presents the material in four sections that deal with cyberterrorism and
information warfare; malware (malicious software) and their creators;
phishing, e-mail fraud, auction fraud and other forms of identity theft;
and issues related to online relationships such as cyberstalking, suicide
clubs, and hate speech.
HV6773 2006-016019 978-0-471-78245-2
Phishing and countermeasures; understanding the
increasing problem of electronic identity theft.
Title main entry. Ed. by Markus Jakobsson and Steven Myers.
Wiley-Interscience, ©2007 700 p. $79.95
Mostly American researchers introduce the practice of retrieving confi-
dential or sensitive credentials about legitimate computer users by mim-
icking electronic communications from a trustworthy or public
organization, and measures that can be taken to avoid and prevent it.
They speak mainly to computer scientists, engineers in wireless commu-
nication, banking specialists, policy makers, and graduate or under-
graduate students in those fields.
HV6789 2006-010110 0-8058-6091-6
Understanding violence, 3d ed.
Englander, Elizabeth Kandel.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 247 p. $32.95 (pa)
Drawing on contemporary research and theory in various fields,
Englander (psychology, Bridgewater State College) summarizes the factors
implicated in a broad range of violent acts from child abuse to gang
warfare, from school shootings to spousal homicide. In this third edition,
Englander continues to emphasize family and street violence, although
she notes the recent decline in those crimes and the increased fears
Americans have about violent political crimes.
HV7428 2006-045645 0-398-07676-6
Social work in juvenile and criminal justice settings, 3d
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Albert R. Roberts et al.
C.C. Thomas, ©2007 438 p. $69.95 (pa)
According to the foreword to the first edition (which was apparently pub-
lished in the 1970s, although it is not stated in the book), this text was
the first to cover professional social work in the field of corrections. The
second edition was published in 1997, and this third edition brings the
work into the 21st century with about half of the 31 chapters newly
written. Academics and practitioners discuss various aspects of such
topics as evolving trends in correctional policies, forensic social work in
victim service programs, conflicting philosophies of juvenile justice, and
administration in probation and parole.
HV7436 2006-044415 978-1-59558-087-0
Gun show nation; gun culture and American democracy.
Burbick, Joan.
The New Press, ©2006 232 p. $24.95
Burbick (English and American studies, Washington State U.) traveled
around to gun shows around the United States, listening to the stories
people at these events told to themselves and others about guns, con-
cluding that gun rhetoric is highly gendered and racialized and that
American gun culture is a danger to democracy. In addition to this act
of reportage and analysis, she goes back in time to investigate the origins
of American gun culture in pre-Civil War legislative movement, gun mag-
azines, and popular culture, finding intimate connections between guns
and white power.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV7921 2006-007626 0-7546-4719-6
Democratic policing in transitional and developing
countries.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nathan Pino and Michael D. Wiatrowski.
(Interdisciplinary research series in ethnic, gender, and class relations)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 252 p. $99.95
The authors describe a model of democratic policing that they argue sup-
ports democratic, economic, and human development and analyze how
it may be implemented in transitional and developing countries. The
model links different levels of analysis and factors associated with crime
and policing; human, social, and economic development; and democra-
tization. Within this context, they also offer case studies examining the
state of policing in Iraq, South Africa, Northern Ireland, and Kazakhstan,
as well as description of a training program developed to promote dem-
ocratic forms of policing around the world.
HV7921 978-0-8039-8904-7
The new policing.
McLaughlin, Eugene.
Sage Publications, ©2007 246 p. $125.00
In this study, McLaughlin (City University, London, UK and University of
Helsinki, Finland) critically examines policing as it is practiced in Great
Britain today. Early chapters provide an overview of the origins and
development of key theoretical perspectives in police studies. Subsequent
chapters focus in turn on the policing of crime and disorder; police
culture; and police governance. McLaughlin concludes by considering the
long term consequences of the July 2005 suicide bomb attacks on
London’s transport system for policing in the 21st century.
HV7936 2006-040474 0-398-07661-8
Fit, unfit or misfit?; How to perform fitness for duty
evaluations in law enforcement professionals.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathleen P. Decker.
C.C. Thomas, ©2006 259 p. $61.95
Written for police chiefs and sheriffs, this guide explains the contents of
a fitness for duty evaluation, identifies common causes of police
misconduct, and describes the various structured psychological tests. The
11 chapters also discuss the potential impact of medications, the stress
experienced after duty death, data on police suicide, gender and ethnic
differences among officers, stereotypes of mental health personnel, and
legal considerations. Dr. Decker is a professor of psychiatry at the
University of Washington who has conducted 175 fitness for duty
evaluations.
HV7936 2006-932069 0-495-09341-6
Management and supervision in law enforcement, 5th ed.
Bennett, Wayne W. and Kären M. Hess.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2007 582 p. $123.95
Blending theory and practice, this text overviews management and
supervision in law enforcement at the local, county, state, and federal
levels. The text is written in informal language, with an emphasis on par-
ticipative leadership, community policing, and continuous change.
Chapters are in sections on basic management and personnel skills, man-
aging others, managing problems, and meeting responsibilities.
Appendices offer 15 pages of sample forms. This fifth edition contains
updated reference from 2003 or later, and incorporates the impact of the
9/11 attack. Bennett was Chief of Police of the Boulder City, Nevada,
Police Department; Hess is a member of the Academy of Criminal Justice
Sciences.
HV7979 2006-025926 978-0-275-99305-4
The secret life of the lawman’s wife.
Alderman, B.J.
Praeger, ©2007 219 p. $49.95
One night in 1853, you are jailed for shooting at your neighbor. You are
taken to jail by the sheriff your particulars are written down in a ledger
by the sheriff’s wife, who also locks you in and brings you a home-made
meal. Unbeknownst to you she also takes a statement from your intended
victim and comforts his children, prepares the report on your arrest,
cleans the empty cells, tidies her own home in the corner of the jail
building, feeds her husband and children, and settles down to repair the
jail linen. You are not being paid for your time in the jail, and neither is
she. Alderman accounts for the lives of these hitherto largely unknown
women, whose work sustained the law enforcement system of the US for
generations and whose work was eliminated as the enterprise stopped
being a cottage industry.
–176–
HV8073 2005-055954 0-8493-2209-X
Cold case homicides; practical investigative techniques.
Walton, Richard H. (Practical aspects of criminal and forensic investi-
gation; 43)
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2006 631 p. $99.95
Walton brings his 31 years of experience in California law enforcement
to this guide to investigating and resolving previously examined but unre-
solved murders. Walton merges theory with practice through the use of
case histories, photographs, illustrations and checklists that convey
essential fundamental concepts while providing a strong practical basis
for the investigative process. Combining techniques in forensics, psy-
chology and criminal investigation, the guide defines the characteristics
of a cold case homicide and presents current technologies, such as
ViCAP, HITS and TracKERS, used in the identification of cases related to
the reopened case or its perpetrator.
HV8073 2005-022236 978-0-471-64879-6
The science of Sherlock Holmes; from Baskerville Hall to
the Valley of Fear, the real forensics behind the great
detective’s greatest cases.
Wagner, E.J.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 244 p. $24.95
Wagner, a crime historian, uses the fictitious cases of Sherlock Holmes
mysteries as a way to explain forensics during the Victorian age. She
describes the history of the field at this time, topics such as anatomy, tox-
icology, blood chemistry, fingerprinting, evidence handling, ballistics,
handwriting, and other types of evidence, and cases involving poisoning,
dogs and insects, and disguises. Real cases and a few illustrations are
incorporated.
HV8079 2005-053190 978-0-8493-3395-8
Money laundering; a guide for criminal investigators, 2d
ed.
Madinger, John.
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2006 530 p. $89.95
Using his lengthy experience in law enforcement, Madinger, an agent
with the criminal investigation division of the IRS, describes money laun-
dering practices and investigative and legislative processes in the US. The
guide is aimed at criminal investigators and has a basic foundation in
the law and theory, so it does not discuss complex schemes in detail,
although some are included. Coverage spans the historical context and
federal statutes, in addition to sources and how to analyze books and
records and obtain financial information, among other topics. Forms,
templates, and related federal statutes are included in the appendices.
The new edition addresses techniques used by terrorists, provisions
under the US Patriot Act, and changes in federal forfeiture law and other
legislation, and it contains two new chapters on the investigation of ter-
rorist activities.
HV8079 2006-018616 978-0-8493-9808-7
Practical drug enforcement, 3d ed.
Lyman, Michael D. (CRC series in practical aspects of criminal and
forensic investigations)
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2007 333 p. $99.95
Lyman (criminal justice, Columbia College of Missouri) provides plenty
of detail in this combination instructional text and reference, describing
sound drug enforcement practices in initiating investigations, securing
sources of information (including other governmental agencies), con-
ducting undercover and surveillance operations, identifying drug evi-
dence, managing informants, dealing with clandestine laboratories, and
running special enforcement operations such as curtailing air smuggling
and inside growing. Lyman includes new chapters on drug enforcement
for the patrol officer and legal issues of drug enforcement and material
on drug courier profiling high-tech surveillance, drug diversion by
doctors and drug companies, and serving high-risk warrants.
HV8079 2006-018580 978-0-8493-7850-8
Terrorism and organized hate crime; intelligence
gathering, analysis, and investigations, 2d ed.
Ronczkowski, Michael R.
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2007 363 p. $89.95
Having been with the Miami-Dade Police Department in Florida for over
20 years, Ronczkowski now oversees its Homeland Security Bureau. Here
he offers law enforcement agencies in the US and other countries an
approach to analyzing homeland security needs, arguing that the law
enforcement community plays a vital role in the war on terrorism. No
date is noted for the first edition.
–177–
HV8138 978-1-56025-855-1
Breaking rank; a top cop’s exposé of the dark side of
American policing.
Stamper, Norm.
Nation Books, ©2005 400 p. $15.95 (pa)
Seattle’s former police chief combines memoir and polemic in reflecting
on his three decades as a police officer. He is quite critical of many
aspects of contemporary American policing, including homophobia,
increasing militarization of police forces, lack of emphasis on community
policing, and other problems. Towards the end of the volume, he gives
his personal account of the 1999 “Battle in Seattle” during the meeting of
the World Trade Organization. Although critical of the management of
the situation by himself and other top city officials, his account is
unlikely to mollify peaceful activists or innocent passers-by shot by
rubber bullets, tear-gassed, or otherwise abused by rioting police officers,
as Stamper elides over the sequence of events concerning the use of force
and blames the debacle on his own and others naiveté, lack of resources,
and the stereotypical thuggish anarchist bent on violence that is ubiq-
uitous to police riots around the world.
HV8247 2006-554904 81-7304-678-6
Minorities and police in India.
Title main entry. Ed. by Asghar Ali Engineer and Amarjit S. Narang.
Manohar, ©2006 227 p. $36.95
These essays analyze the attitude and orientation of police toward
minorities in India’s plural, democratic, secular society and police
behavior while dealing with minorities in groups, particularly in com-
munal riot situations. The contributors, who have diverse socio- cultural
perspectives, take into account the expected role of law enforcement
agencies in plural democratic societies and the success or failure of
Indian police to carry out that role. Distributed by South Asia Books.
HV8599 2006-002206 978-0-89608-753-8
American methods; torture and the logic of domination.
Williams, Kristian.
South End Press, ©2006 279 p. $18.00 (pa)
Apologists for the Bush administration blamed the pictures of torture at
Abu Ghraib as the product a “few bad apples,” while critics countered
that it was the result of policies initiated by bad apples occupying top
positions in the Pentagon and the White House. However, for Williams
(an activist with Rose City Copwatch in Portland, OR), the problems man-
ifested in those photographs are far more deeply rooted in larger systems
of imperialism, racism, and male domination which have given rise to
torture by the US military, intelligence agencies, police and prison author-
ities, and by allied regimes acting on behalf of American policy. Limiting
himself to discussion of the past quarter-century, he considers the ethical,
legal, and political aspects of torture as a characteristic of state power.
HV8599 2005-051124 978-0-8050-8041-4
A question of torture; CIA interrogation from the Cold
War to the War on Terror.
McCoy, Alfred W.
Henry Holt & Co., ©2006 290 p. $25.00
Bypassing the morality, McCoy (history, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) inves-
tigates the policy of torture largely from a pragmatic perspective. Against
the background of the question whether at times there might be cir-
cumstances so desperate that torture is effective and even justified, he
plumbs the hidden history of torture inside the US intelligence com-
munity over the past half century. The War on Terror first appears
halfway through.
HV8699 2006-020997 978-0-275-99221-7
Dead wrong; violence, vengeance, and the victims of
capital punishment.
Stack, Richard A.
Praeger, ©2006 287 p. $49.95
Convinced that supporters of the death penalty would change their
minds if they understood the problems with the system, Stack (commu-
nication, American U.) analyzed the cases of individuals exonerated from
death row and identified the most common features of their cases,
including mistaken eyewitness identification, systemic corruption and
racism, and incompetent lawyers. Each of these is discussed in terms of
its general aspects and in reference to an exemplary case. Stack also
presents an account of Illinois Governor George Ryan’s transformation
into an opponent of the death penalty and concludes with discussion of
how to correct the injustices of the death penalty.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV8699 2006-011308 978-0-8214-1693-8
The fairer death; executing women in Ohio.
Streib, Victor L. (Ohio University Press series on law, society, and pol-
itics in the Midwest)
Ohio University Press, ©2006 198 p. $24.95 (pa)
Streib (law, Ohio Northern U.) features case studies of 15 women who
were sentenced to death in Ohio from 1844-2005. He places their stories
in the contexts of the capital punishment system’s sex bias nationally and
the history of the death penalty for murder in this fairly representative
state. He does not discuss whether this cultural bias is changing. The
book concludes with case summaries of the 49 female offenders under
death sentences in the U.S. as of the end of 2005.
HV9104 2006-029960 978-0-313-33682-9
Encyclopedia of juvenile violence.
Title main entry. Ed. by Laura L. Finley.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 336 p. $85.00
From “Abused/Battered Children” to “Zero Tolerance Laws,” the 270
alphabetical entries presented by Finley (sociology, Florida Atlantic U.) in
this reference provide information on the frequency and types of juvenile
violence in the United States, as well as historical information, assessment
of relevant theories, examination of media issues, discussion of measures
of juvenile violence, and examination of social and criminal responses to
juvenile violence. Other representative examples of entry topics include
the Boston Youth Strike Force, the Central Park Jogger case, curfews,
delinquency and drift theory, theories on gang involvement, frequency of
perpetration of violence by gender, genetic theories, types of gun-related
violence, history of juvenile violence (by decade), marijuana, restorative
justice, situational crime prevention, teen courts, and urban juvenile vio-
lence. Each entry provides a guide to further reading.
HV9275 2006-040659 1-56991-240-8
Reentry today; programs, problems, and solutions.
Title main entry.
Amer. Correctional Assoc., ©2006 229 p. $25.00 (pa)
The American Correctional Association (ACA) presents 27 readings dis-
cussing core issues in offender reentry after institutionalization in the US,
for students and professionals working either in corrections or in com-
munity services. Many of the chapters were previously published in ACA
publications. They address topics including the Second Chance Act,
recidivism, reentry research at the Urban Institute, evidence-based prac-
tices, how to assess for success, how crime victims can be involved in
reentry, and issues in releasing inmates with mental illness and co-
occurring disorders into the community. Additional readings comprise
surveys and statistics on state reentry programs, what they provide, and
what they lack; resources for professionals; and examples of unique
policies with varied results, such as a Clarksburg, Maryland facility’s
“Sweet Release” Bakery Job Training Program. No index is provided.
HV9304 2006-022513 1-59332-152-X
Prisoner reentry and the life course; the role of race and
drugs.
O’Connell, Daniel J. (Criminal justice; recent scholarship)
LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2006 168 p. $58.00
O’Connell (drug and alcohol studies, U. of Delaware) tests Sampson and
Laub’s age-graded theory of informal social control by applying it to a
sample of criminal offenders re-entering society from prison. Among the
questions he addresses are whether the theory can explain desistence in
contemporary, highly active, drug-involved offenders; whether it works
across Black and White populations and across differing levels of
criminal propensity; and whether it can be extended to include drug
treatment as a potential turning point in the life course.
HV9471 2006-025284 0-8204-8831-3
Prisons, penology and penal reform; an introduction to
institutional specialization.
Blakely, Curtis R.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 149 p. $29.95 (pa)
Blakely (political science and criminal justice, U. of South Alabama)
poses the question of whether prisons should be secretive human ware-
houses of de-individualized prisoners or whether they should be com-
mitted to producing socially responsible and productive citizens. While
he prefers the latter, he sees current trends as moving towards the
former. At the root of the problem, he argues, is the failure to recognize
that there are two types of prisoners: those that are indeed best dealt
with through containment and those who can respond to meaningful
reform programs. He promotes a program of prison privatization and
specialization in order to properly classify and respond to these two types
of programs, covering relevant concepts of security, rehabilitation, retri-
bution, deterrence, and incapacitation along the way.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
HV9471 2005-936319 1-887554-52-1
Women and girls in the criminal justice system; policy
issues and practice strategies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Russ Immarigeon.
Civic Research Institute, ©2006 — p. $133.95
At present over 100,000 women in the US are confined to state and
federal prisons, making up about seven percent of incarcerated
Americans. The rapid increase in both the raw number of prisoners and
their proportion in the system has caused experts to begin to consider
women offenders separately from men. This collection of 52 articles
reflects this shift in perception about the needs of female offenders, and
includes material on policy, juvenile justice, mothers and children,
gender-specific classification and risk assessments, health care and
treatment for drugs and mental illness, and programs and practices tai-
lored for women and girls. Along with a number of case studies of pro-
grams papers address prisoner reentry, sexual abuse, relational
aggression, the lifetime welfare ban for drug offenders, prison nurseries,
alternative programs for mothers and children, parole supervision, and
restorative justice.
HV9871 978-1-85775-720-0
Humane prisons.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Jones.
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2006 213 p. $55.00 (pa)
Drawing on experiences in Europe and North America, researchers in
mental health, social sciences, and social work; government personnel;
writers; and former prisoners offer ideas, examples, and models for
making prisons more humane. Their topics include how to create
madness in prison, clinical supervision for staff in a therapeutic com-
munity prison, and whether humane prisons are worth the trouble.
Distributed in the US by BookMasters.
HV9950 2006-015999 978-0-7425-4687-5
Class, race, gender, and crime; the social realities of
justice in America.
Barak, Gregg et al.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 327 p. $29.95 (pa)
Barak and Leighton, both professors of criminology and criminal justice
at Eastern Michigan U., and Flavin, who teaches sociology at Fordham U.,
attempt to demonstrate that crime, criminals, and the criminal justice
apparatus are socially constructed phenomena and are the product of
moral agents, social movements, political interests, media dissemination
and policymakers. In this second edition, the authors extend their dis-
cussions of victimization, criminal justice practice and policy. Each
chapter begins with an example drawn from history, news stories or
popular culture and ends with review and discussion questions.
HV9950 978-90-04-15276-2
Responding to international crime.
Gilbert, Geoff. (International studies in human rights, v.88.)
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2006 489 p. $189.00
Gilbert (international law, U. of Essex, UK) looks at how the international
community has sought to respond to crimes that have an international
or transnational aspect. He begins by identifying and analyzing the
primary sources of extradition law. Next, he discusses human rights con-
ventions used by fugitive offenders when challenging extraditions and
addresses the controversy surrounding the political offense exemption.
Chapters in the final section consider the lawfulness and effectiveness of
certain alternatives to extradition. This is a revised and updated version
of a volume published in 1998 under the title Transnational Fugitive
Offenders in International Law.
POLITICAL SCIENCE
HX17 2006-020471 978-0-8108-5458-1
Historical dictionary of Marxism.
Walker, David and Daniel Gray. (Historical dictionaries of religions,
philosophies, and movement; no.74)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 402 p. $95.00
Walker (politics, U. of Newcastle, UK) and Gray (National Library of
Scotland, UK) present a dictionary of Marxism that offers concise
explanations of major theoretical and political figures, organizations,
schools of thought, and events related to the historical development of
Marxism (conceived broadly) in cross-referenced alphabetical entries. In
addition to the entries and the introductory historical essay, the
dictionary also contains a guide to acronyms and abbreviations, a
chronology, and a bibliography.
–178–
HX17 2006-012818 978-0-8108-5560-1
Historical dictionary of socialism, 2d ed.
Lamb, Peter and James C. Docherty. (Historical Dictionaries of
Religions, Philosophies, and Movements Series; no.73)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 456 p. $99.00
Together, the approximately 440 entries found in this historical dictionary
are intended to serve as a general guide to the subject, tracing the evo-
lution and diversification of socialism from the early 19th century to the
early 21st. Primarily concerned with politics (thus leaving any deeper
examination of industrial relations to the complementary Historical
Dictionary of Organized Labor), it provides information on writers,
activists, ideas, political parties, institutions, and movements important
to the history of socialism. Also included are an introductory overview, a
chronology, a glossary of terms, and a bibliography.
HX73 2006-011445 1-58367-145-5
Build it now; socialism for the twenty-first century.
Lebowitz, Michael A.
Monthly Review Press, ©2006 127 p. $14.95 (pa)
Lebowitz (emeritus economics, Simon Fraser U., Canada) collects seven
of his essays from various sources, most pertaining the Venezuela, where
he sees a real alternative to capitalism being created. His perspectives
include the needs of capital versus the needs of human being, reclaiming
the socialist vision, and the Bolivarian choice of a socialist path.
HX84 2006-041035 0-375-41032-5
Decca; the letters of Jessica Mitford.
Mitford, Jessica. Ed. by Peter Y. Sussman.
Alfred A. Knopf, ©2006 744 p. $35.00
These letters reflect the humor and wide-ranging curiosity that propelled
Mitford through her adventurous life. The correspondence covers the full
arc of her experiences and includes letters to Katharine Graham, George
Jackson, Miss Manners, Maya Angelou, Harry Truman, and Hillary
Clinton, as well as to Mitford’s extensive family. Sussman, formerly an
editor at the San Francisco Chronicle, provides a brief biography of
Mitford and includes detailed footnotes for the letters.
HX542 2006-008019 978-0-472-06951-4
Socialism after Hayek.
Burczak, Theodore A. (Advances in heterodox economics)
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 171 p. $19.95 (pa)
While the works of Austrian economist Friedrich Hayek have long been
used in efforts by the Right to discredit socialism, Burczak (economics,
Denison U.) turns the tables and identifies an “applied epistemological
postmodernism” in the works of Hayek that he believes can aid in the
construction of a “libertarian Marxist” socialism that incorporates
Hayek’s valuable recognition of factual and ethical knowledge problems
in attempting to manage economies. In addition to this surprising
mélange of the Austrian School theories of market processes and the
Marxian understandings of the relationship between class and surplus
labor, Burczak mixes in an Aristotelian capability theory of justice, as
described by Martha Nussbaum and Amartya Sen in The Quality of Life,
that provides “an intersubjectivist method to make interpersonal com-
parisons of well-being.”
HX833 2006-000679 978-1-57591-105-2
Anarchism and the crisis of representation; hermeneutics,
aesthetics, politics.
Cohn, Jesse S.
Susquehanna Univ. Press, ©2006 325 p. $60.00
Cohn (English, Purdue U.) appears to agree with Marxist theorist Frederic
Jameson that an all-encompassing “crisis of representation” has befallen
Western thought, calling into question “the relationships between our
concepts and the truths they are meant to denote, our images and the
realities they are supposed to depict, our institutions and the interests
they are meant to serve.” Finding in the social anarchist tradition the ear-
liest modern critique of political representation, he believes that a close
reading of the tradition shows a path out of the contemporary represen-
tation impasse, not only in the field of politics but also in the realms of
hermeneutics and aesthetics.
The two Book News periodicals alert you to more than 19,000 new, high-level
books each year. Our mission is to get reliable news to you quickly.
–179–
ISK151 978-0-07-481293-1
The culture of hunting in Canada.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jean L. Manore and Dale G. Miner.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2007 276 p. $85.00
Canada’s hunting culture has a long and important history, is closely
linked to its early and current economy, and yet has received little
scholarly attention. In these 17 essays contributors analyze the connection
between hunting and identity and the history of hunting and conser-
vation, with personal narratives as well as historical and sociological
works on familial hunting, the links between hunting and travel writing
in the building of empire, Canadian hunting identity, the spiritual con-
nection between hunters and animals, declining wildlife and hunting
rights, and the role of the Canadian Wildlife Service. Contemporary
issues they address include gun control, personal expression, and animal
rights activism.
JA71 978-0-7391-1503-9
Hegemony and power; consensus and coercion in
contemporary politics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark Haugaard and Howard H. Lentner.
Lexington Books, ©2006 254 p. $25.95 (pa)
Responding to the fact that the word “hegemony” means different things
in different fields, nine essays, most of which were presented at a
meeting of the International Political Science Association’s Research
Committee on Political Power in June 2004, analyze how hegemony and
power inform each other. Topics on theory include the concept of
hegemony in Gramsci and power and hegemony in social theory; those
on international relations and political life include the dilemmas of
making hegemony operational, the relationship of hegemony and power
in international politics, and power dynamics under hegemony; and post-
modern and feminist approaches to hegemony and power include such
topics as how white western feminists protect “Other” women, analyzing
giving practices through a critical naturalist approach, working through
radical politics, and the relationship between hegemony and the power
to act. The editors provide an introduction and conclusion and references.
JA71 2006-040754 0-7546-2545-1
Jean Bodin.
Title main entry. Ed. by Julian H. Franklin. (International library of
essays in the history of social and political thought)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 453 p. $225.00
Best known for his theory of sovereignty, Jean Bodin (1529-1596) sought
to encompass all the disciplines of his age in a single encyclopedia of
knowledge. Franklin (Columbia U.) has made an effort to represent
Bodin’s many contributions to varied disciplines by organizing the
material into sections on sovereignty, public law, political economy,
religion, natural philosophy and method, and theories of history.
Franklin’s introduction places Bodin in the context of the politics and
scholarship of his time. Individual articles cover such topics as Bodin and
Locke on consent to taxation, Bodin’s conversion to Judaism, and
humanist methods in natural philosophy. In keeping with the series’
policy, the essays retain their original pagination.
JA71 978-0-8204-8882-0
Natural law and political realism in the history of
political thought; v.2: From the seventeenth to the twenty-
first century.
Dyson, R.W. (Major concepts in politics and political theory; v.26)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 277 p. $75.95
Having in the first volume traced the journey from the Sophists to
Machiavelli, Dyson (government and international affairs, U. of Durham,
England) concludes his history of natural law and political realism as
traditions in the history of political thought. Among the thinkers he
examines are Locke, Rousseau, John Rawls, and Marx. A final chapter
considers the foundations of the tradition.
JA74 3-86649-027-5
Political psychology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Linda Shepherd. (The world of political
science—the development of the discipline)
Barbara Budrich Publishers, ©2006 168 p. $23.95 (pa)
Shepherd (public policy and political science, California Polytechnic State
U.) describes the development of the field of political psychology. He dis-
cusses the evolution of concepts and theories in the field, introduces
current concepts and methodologies, critically assesses the current state
of research, and proposes avenues for continued research. Distributed in
the US by ISBS.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JA75 2005-035467 978-0-7591-0737-3
Global visions, local landscapes; a political ecology of
conservation, conflict, and control in Northern
Madagascar.
Gezon, Lisa L. (Globalization and the environment)
AltaMira Press, ©2006 224 p. $72.00
During the late 1980s, explains Gezon (anthropology, U. of West Georgia),
an influx of millions of international dollars allowed the Malagasy gov-
ernment to help protect endangered species by revitalizing the
enforcement of rules in protected areas, often by keeping people out. She
explores how people living outside protected areas reacted to this inten-
sification in monitoring and enforcement, and indeed how effective the
interventions were at keeping people out. Her story is not just about law
enforcement, but encompasses economics, royal authority, rights to
forests and caves, and other aspects.
JA75 2006-029669 978-0-87586-509-6
Infinity’s rainbow; the politics of energy, climate, and
globalization.
Byron, Michael P.
Algora Publishing, ©2007 236 p. $23.95 (pa)
Byron (PhD, political science, U. of California at Irvine) applies systems
theory to the environmental and resource crisis humankind is bringing
upon itself. He traces these crises and the impediments to solutions to the
sociopolitical institutions that have developed into today’s world of global
corporatism, an “unholy union” of church, corporation, and state.
JA75 2006-935154 978-0-7618-3610-0
Prospects for green liberal democracy.
Jagers, Sverker C.
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 253 p. $35.00 (pa)
Jagers (political science, Göteborg U.) investigates whether policies aimed
at realizing sustainable development can be considered compatible with
upholding the normative values constituting liberal democracy. The
underlying problem, he says, is that liberal democracy has so elevated
the value of individual liberty and so identified that liberty with the use
of resources, that restricting the use of resources could lead to a complete
transformation of government and society.
JA81 978-0-7734-5587-0
Foundational problems in philosophy; politics, ethics,
aesthetics, and religion.
Lord, Arthur Ritchie. Ed. by William Sweet and Errol E. Harris.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 366 p. $129.95
In this contribution to the literature of Idealist philosophy, Sweet (phi-
losophy, St. Xavier U., Nova Scotia) and Harris (emeritus, philosophy,
Northwestern U.) compile, and provide commentaries and annotations
on, previously unpublished lectures and essays by Lord (1880-1941).
Through his sole book (The Principles of Politics, 1921), the Scottish
philosopher who taught at Rhodes College, U. of South Africa, was a
major influence on British idealist political thought. A bio-bibliographic
sketch introduces his brand of pluralism that steers a path between indi-
vidual and group rights, such influences on him as Hegel and E. Caird,
and students he influenced. These writings cover an eclectic range of
interests including modern democracy, aesthetic judgment, historiog-
raphy, and education and the community.
JA81 978-0-7734-5589-4
The history of philosophy from Descartes to Hegel.
Lord, Arthur Ritchie. Ed. by William Sweet and Errol E. Harris.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 371 p. $119.95
Together with Foundational Problems in Philosophy and The Principles of
Politics, this volume is one of three recent volumes edited by Sweet (phi-
losophy, St. Francis Xavier U., Canada) and Harris (emeritus, philosophy,
Northwester U., US) reproducing the works of British/South African
philosopher Arthur Ritchie Lord (1880- 1941). This work reproduces
Lord’s lectures for the second and third courses in logic at South Africa’s
Rhodes University College. The second course, dating from the early
1920s, follows a syllabus common to that era’s South African universities
in its treatment of philosophical developments from René Descartes to
Immanuel Kant, while the third, dating from the late 1930s, contains
Lord’s discussion of G.F.W. Hegel. The focus of the lectures is less on
logic, in the present-day formal sense, than on the development of epis-
temology or theories of the nature of knowledge.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JA81 2006-052949 0-7734-5591-4
A reprint edition of the The principles of politics by
Arthur Ritchie Lord together with a critical assessment.
Lord, Arthur Ritchie. Ed. by William Sweet and Errol E. Harris.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 308 p. $119.95
Together with Foundational Problems in Philosophy and The History of
Philosophy from Descartes to Hegel, this volume is one of three recent
volumes edited by Sweet (philosophy, St. Francis Xavier U., Canada) and
Harris (emeritus, philosophy, Northwester U., US) reproducing the works
of British/South African philosopher Arthur Ritchie Lord (1880-1941).
This volume reproduces Lord’s The Principles of Politics, which was orig-
inally designed to introduce students at South Africa’s Rhodes University
College to the idealist thought of T.H. Green’s Lectures on the Principles of
Political Obligation and Bosanquet’s The Philosophical Theory of the State,
the standard introductory materials on sovereignty, law, and rights used
as texts at Rhodes’s second course on Politics in the 1920s and 1930s.
JA83 978-0-415-36647-2
The political theory of John Gray.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Horton and Glen Newey.
Routledge, ©2007 241 p. $115.00
Over the course of his career, British political philosopher John Gray has
traveled from Millian liberalism, through the neo-liberalism of the
Washington Consensus and “third way” Labour of the early Blair years,
to an embrace of James Lovelock’s Gaia hypothesis and a trenchant cri-
tique of humanism. The editors (professors of political theory at Keele U.,
UK) present 12 papers that, perhaps more sympathetically than his most
vociferous detractors would like, examine different aspects of Gray’s
work over the years, including his theory of modus vivendi, which seeks
“common institutions in which many forms of life can exist;” his under-
standing of pluralism; his criticisms of concepts of progress; charges of
nihilism; and ecological views. A 25-page essay in which Gray replies to
criticisms is included. This work has been previously published as a
special issue of the Critical Review of International Social and Political
Philosophy.
JA84 2005-014154 978-0-295-98531-2
Ecological nationalisms; nature, livelihoods, and identities
in South Asia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gunnel Cederlöf and K. Sivaramakrishnan.
(Culture, place, and nature)
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 399 p. $50.00
Anthropologists and historians specializing in South Asia explore how
struggles over nature and its conservation are related to issues of citi-
zenship, subjecthood, and nationalism in India, Nepal, Bangladesh, and
Pakistan over the past two centuries. They cover regional natures, nation,
and empire; competing nationalisms; and commodified nature and
national visions.
JA84 2006-015762 0-7391-1417-4
Modern America and the legacy of the founding.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ronald J. Pestritto and Thomas G. West.
Lexington Books, ©2007 339 p. $29.95 (pa)
Stressing the importance of ideas as determinants of political change, the
ten papers presented by Pestritto (Hillsdale College) and West (U. of
Dallas) represent a consensus view that the deep changes in American
politics experienced in the past 100 years is the product of a new theory
of justice that emerged in the Progressive Era. The theory, at its most sim-
plified, rejected the Founders’ appeal to “Nature” as the foundation for
thinking about justice and replaced it with an appeal to “History.” From
this shift came John Dewey’s criticisms of the Founders, the Supreme
Court’s rejection of older notions of separation of powers and federalism,
Roosevelt’s New Deal and Johnson’s Great Society, the sexual liberation
and breakdown of the family of the 1960s, the idea of the living consti-
tution, and even the foreign policy of the George W. Bush administration.
As readers might have guessed at this point, the authors are generally
critical of these developments.
JA84 2006-411898 1-55111-711-8
Political thought in Canada; an intellectual history.
Fierlbeck, Katherine.
Broadview Press, ©2006 178 p. $26.95 (pa)
Writing for the neophyte, Fierlbeck (political science, Dalhousie U.,
Canada) provides a sketch of the major politico-philosophical debates that
have occurred through Canadian history. He takes a broadly thematic
approach, including chapters on how Canadians have sought to define
the nation in the context of the British colonial legacy and relations with
their powerful southern neighbor, the United States; issues of social
justice and the influence of radical political thought from the Left and
other groups; and cultural accommodation with French Canadians and
other minorities.
–180–
JA85 2006-011873 978-0-7425-3565-7
Center stage; media and the performance of American
politics.
Woodward, Gary C. (Communication, media, and politics)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 201 p. $24.95 (pa)
Because most of American politics is mediated via television, newspapers,
the Internet, and other media, suggests Woodward (communication
studies, The College of New Jersey) it is proper to explore politics through
a performative lens, in other words as a kind of theater. In chapters that
individually explore the forces that shape the news business; types of dis-
course in the media; the presidency; congress and the courtroom; foreign
news and war reporting; and the nexus between art, entertainment, and
politics, a number of common themes emerge. These include the growing
dependence of politicians on public relations professionals and celebrity
journalists for representation of work, the staging of politics (exemplified
by George W. Bush’s “Mission Accomplished” landing on a US aircraft
carrier), the way the media is able to set the agenda for American pol-
itics, and the harnessing of the dramatic impulse as a means of creating
an alternative to the moribund state of American media politics.
JC11 2006-015219 1-4129-0579-6
Encyclopedia of governance; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark Bevir.
Sage Publications, ©2007 1097 p. $325.00
Bevir (U. of California at Berkeley) distinguishes the term governance
from government by suggesting it is less oriented towards the state and
denotes a process by which hierarchic, rule-bound institutions are
replaced with interactive processes in markets and networks. In this two-
volume encyclopedia, he aims to provide a general audience with an
accessible understanding of governance and some 550 other key related
topics in a jargon-free manner. The reader’s guide gives a sense of the
encyclopedia’s coverage, with such terms as human capital mobility,
liberal market economy, public investment, and regulation theory falling
under the subject of capitalism; empowerment, community organizing,
ethnic groups, civil society, and guest workers under citizenship; social
constructivism, policy style, and ethnonationalism under cultures; and
Bretton Woods, export processing zones, neoliberalism, and offshoring
under development. The other broad subjects covered are decision-
making, economic governance, environmental governance, evaluation of
governance, good governance, government, information governance, insti-
tutionalism, international organizations, interpretive theory, local gover-
nance, market, organization theory, political process, policy analysis,
public administration, public-sector management, rational choice theory,
regionalism, security, society, sociology of governance, theories of gover-
nance, and trade (individual entries often fall into more than one of these
categories. Entries are cross- referenced and provide brief guides to
further reading.
JC61 2005-014322 1-84553-010-1
Local power in old Babylonian Mesopotamia.
Seri, Andrea. (Studies in Egyptology and the ancient Near East)
Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2005 240 p. $125.00
Seri (Assyriology, Harvard U.) discusses the role of local authorities in the
functioning of society in Old Babylonian Mesopotamia (ca. 2000-1595
B.C.E.). Four local institutions of authority are examined: the chief of the
city, the elders, the “city”, and the assembly. The study is based on an
exhaustive compilation and analysis of cuneiform documents encom-
passing economic, legal, and epistolary sources, and royal inscriptions.
Some references found in literary works were also considered. The text
is a revised version of the author’s 2003 doctoral thesis. Distributed in
the US by David Brown Book Co.
JC221 2005001175 0-7391-1810-2
Democracy as the political empowerment of the people;
the betrayal of an ideal.
Behrouzi, Majid.
Lexington Books, ©2005 227 p. $26.95 (pa)
The original concept of democracy, the ideal of the political empow-
erment of the people, laments Behrouzi (PhD, philosophy, York U.,
Canada), has so progressively degenerated over the centuries that today’s
liberal-democratic conception of democracy can accurately be charac-
terized as the idea of the political disempowerment of the people. He
traces this degeneration from Athenian democracy and its fall, through
the decoupling of democratic sovereignty and equality by Rousseau and
others, the betrayed promises of Bolshevik democracy, and today’s
liberal-democratic representative democracies. He then looks at some of
the criticisms of representative democracy leveled by advocates of par-
ticipatory and deliberative democracy, promising his own solution in a
second volume titled Democracy as the Political Empowerment of the
Citizen: Direct-Deliberative e- Democracy.
–181–
JC229 2006-20803 978-0-7391-1665-4
Tocqueville’s road map; methodology, liberalism,
revolution, and despotism.
Boesche, Roger.
Lexington Books, ©2006 215 p. $70.00
Although the title suggests a retracing of Tocqueville’s trip through
America, the road followed in these essays is the evolution of
Tocqueville’s political thought. The essays also follow Boesche’s thoughts
about Tocqueville from the 1980s to the present. In these articles Boesche
(history of ideas, Occidental College) considers the methodology that
allowed Tocqueville to make such accurate predictions about the US;
Tocqueville’s concerns about the conflicts of democracy and commerce;
and the impossibility of classifying Tocqueville’s philosophy. Boesche also
compares Tocqueville’s predictions to those of Nietzsche, Arendt and
others.
JC251 2006-006601 978-0-8047-5132-2
The claim to community; essays on Stanley Cavell and
political philosophy.
H.C. pour la vie. Ed. by Andrew Norris. (Meridian, crossing aesthetics)
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 389 p. $24.95 (pa)
Although American philosopher Stanley Cavell is more commonly seen
as a contributor to aesthetic, ethical, and epistemological questions, editor
Norris (political science, U. of Pennsylvania) notes that his connection of
reason to the claim of community, in addition to other philosophical posi-
tions, also makes him a significant political philosopher. Bringing
together philosophers from the Anglo-American and Continental tradi-
tions, he presents 12 papers that explore the political aspects of Cavell’s
writings, variously relating his work to the thought of such figures as
Wittgenstein, Montaigne, Kant, Foucault, and Nietzsche.
JC319 2006-011874 978-0-7425-4129-0
Islam, oil, and geopolitics; Central Asia after September
11.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth Van Wie Davis and Rouben Azizian.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 308 p. $29.95 (pa)
Historians and political scientists who specialize in the region look at
what has become the ripest plum for big powers since the breakup of
the Soviet Union, and especially since the US got a justification for flexing
its muscle there. They cover internal conflict and peace, the energy
security of big powers, geopolitics, and Central Asia and the Asia Pacific.
JC319 2004-051039 0-415-34802-1
Partitions; reshaping states and minds.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stefano Bianchini et al. (Routledge studies in
geopolitics)
Frank Cass, ©2005 176 p. $115.00
An outcome of the research project Partitions Compared and Lessons
Learnt: Issues in the Politics of Dialogue and Peace conducted by the
International Program for Advances Studies at the Maison de l/Homme
and the Institute for Scholars at Reid Hall at Columbia University, this
series of six essays studies core geopolitical issues: the genealogy of the
political technology in which the modern state and the patriarchal self
are linked; the problems of transition; the durability of the technique and
form of partition, its ability to reproduce itself and its ability to sponsor
co-existent time; modern forms of political violence and civil war; the
relationship of space, territory and power; and the interrelation between
partition and dialog. Essays cover partitions as forms of transition and
their forms and destinies, the undefined acts of partition and dialog, and
the excess of geopolitics better known as the partition of “British India.”
JC328 978-0-7734-5626-6
The thought world of Hindu nationalism; analyzing a
political ideology.
Karner, Christian.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 389 p. $129.95
Karner (sociology and social policy, U. of Nottingham) investigates and
analyzes in its own terms a highly successful South Asian version of
ethno-religious mobilization known as Hindutva, or modern Hindu
nationalism. He constructs a novel theoretical framework capable of illu-
minating its logic and workings during the several years before the May
2004 Indian election when it held a position of hegemony and central
decision-making power in the shape of the Bharatiya Janata Party in the
world’s largest democracy.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JC359 2005-058622 978-0-582-50583-4
Imperialism and postcolonialism.
Bush, Barbara. (History: concepts, theories and practice)
Longman, ©2006 280 p. $24.00 (pa)
The conceptualization of empire and imperialism in the historical disci-
plines has always been problematic and contested, but perhaps no more
so than in the era of neoliberalism and postcolonialism. In this work,
part of a series dedicated to examining the evolution of key concepts in
historical debates, Bush (imperial history, Sheffield Hallam U., UK)
examines recent intellectual, theoretical, and conceptual developments in
imperial history, adopting for herself a sense of imperialism that
embraces a wide range of perspectives on the nature of Western
hegemony and also distinguishing her treatment by viewing the putative
shift from the colonial to postcolonial as a seamless whole and privi-
leging recent work in cultural history. She examines the evolution of the
historiography in thematic chapters discussing imperialism and
modernity, culture and imperialism, representations of empire, and the
nature of the “post-imperial” era. The application of these theoretical con-
cerns is illustrated in case studies chapters on Ireland, China and Japan,
Africa, and imperialism and national identity in Britain.
JC359 2006-010333 0-415-34675-4
Imperialism and resistance.
Rees, John.
Routledge, ©2006 265 p. $120.00
In this treatise on imperialism and its discontents, Rees (a founding
member of the Stop the War Coalition in Britain and a editor of the quar-
terly International Socialism), characterizes his argument as an expla-
nation of the clashes between the “three great powers” of the modern
world: the state, the world economy, and the international workforce it
has created. He explores the rise of US imperialism and assesses its
current military strengths and economic weaknesses. Turning to the
Middle east, he explains the role of oil in the maintenance of imperialism
and traces anti-imperialist resistance from Arab nationalism to the resur-
gence of Islam. Subsequent chapters tackle the question of globalization
and inequality and compare and contrast the political and class features
of democratic revolutions from the 17th century to recent years. Finally,
the socialist case and strategy for resisting imperialism and neo-liber-
alism is sketched out.
JC375 2006-049425 978-0-7734-5719-5
Documents illustrating the theory of the king’s two bodies
in the age of Shakespeare; The Reports of Edmund
Plowden and D i s c o u r s e o f t h e B o d i e s N a t u r a l a n d P o l i t i q u e
by Edward Forest.
Title main entry. Ed. by Albert Rolls.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 209 p. $109.95
Rolls (Touro College) offers a reassessment of the theory of the king’s two
bodies based on analysis of two texts, the 1816 printing of the 18th-
century translation of Plowden’s Reports and the 1606 printing of Forset’s
A Comparative Discourse of the Bodies Natural and Politique. Rolls’
analysis offers points of entry into the two texts, delineates the primary
elements of the theory they draw upon, and calls attention to the ways
these elements are combined to produce different versions of that
theory—all with the aim of demonstrating that there are a variety of ways
to use the notion that a monarch has two bodies. The book includes the
author’s 23-page essay followed by Plowden’s Reports and Forset’s text.
No subject index.
JC421 2005-058861 0-87113-931-6
Democracy; a history.
Dunn, John.
Grove Atlantic, ©2005 246 p. $24.00
Dunn (political theory, Cambridge U., UK) offers a history of democracy,
both as political ideal and as a set of concrete political institutions, from
its emergence in Ancient Greece to contemporary times. His narrative
pursues the answers to four major questions: the reasons why the
meaning of the word democracy has shifted so dramatically from the
time of the French Revolution to the present, why current democratic
forms vary from earlier forms, the reasons for the contemporary domi-
nance of current forms of democracy, and why current forms have so
uniformly latched on to the word “democracy” to label themselves. What
emerges from the discussion is the idea that democracy has yet to fulfill
many of its promises, yet in the future may perhaps still fulfill the
utopian wish for a worldwide demos.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JC423 2006-003550 0-8018-8470-5
Constitutional democracy; creating and maintaining a just
political order.
Murphy, Walter F. (The Johns Hopkins series in constitutional thought)
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2007 547 p. $55.00
Even though most Western industrial nations have adopted constitutional
democracy as their form of government, one should recognize that there
are inherent tensions between democracy (rule by the people) and con-
stitutionalism (which places limits on rule by the people). Murphy
(emeritus, jurisprudence, Princeton U.) presents a comparative analysis
of how countries have sought to resolve these tensions in drafting their
constitutions in the form of a Socratic dialogue featuring the members of
a constitutional caucus in a fictional country that has just tossed of its
ruling junta. The caucus includes such figures as a professor of Islamic
studies, a Jesuit “worker priest,” a Lutheran advocate of human rights, a
professor of comparative constitutional law, the junta’s former Ministers
of Finance and Justice, an immigrant union activist, and the CEO of the
country’s largest bank. Following this dialogue, he changes to a more
standard analytical mode for discussing the problems of maintaining a
stable constitutional order in chapters that address the “creation” of citi-
zenship, civil-military relations, the building up of a professional bureau-
cracy, dealing with deposed despots, and institutional mechanisms of
constitutional interpretation and change.
JC423 2006-027743 978-0-7425-5801-4
Countries at the crossroads; a survey of democratic
governance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sanja Tatic and Christopher Walker.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 760 p. $39.95 (pa)
Produced by the governmentally funded research institute, Freedom
House, this report provides analysis and comparative statistics of 30
countries that are characterized as “middle-performing countries that
qualify neither as failed states nor as clear beacons of democracy,”
including Armenia, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Cambodia, East Timor, Georgia,
Guatemala, Guyana, Indonesia, Jordan, Kazakhstan, Kenya, Kyrgyzstan,
Malawi, Malaysia, Morocco, Nepal, Nicaragua, Nigeria, Pakistan, Sierra
Leone, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Tanzania, Uganda, Ukraine, Venezuela,
Vietnam, Yemen, and Zimbabwe. The countries are evaluated and
numerically rated in terms of accountability and public voice, civil lib-
erties, the rule of law, and anticorruption and transparency. The report
also provides recommendations on how governments can improve their
performance in these areas. Included in an appendix is a report dis-
cussing whether governments included in the last edition of Countries at
the Crossroads (2004) have acted on that report’s recommendations.
JC423 2006-012230 0-7546-2627-X
Deliberative democracy and its discontents.
Title main entry. Ed. by Samantha Besson and José Luis Martí.
(Applied legal philosophy)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 261 p. $114.95
Besson (public international law and European law, U. of Fribourg,
Switzerland) and Marti (law, Pompeu Fabra U., Spain) present papers
from the eponymous academic workshop held under the auspices of the
World Congress of Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy, held in
Granada, Spain in May of 2005. Together, the 11 papers round up the
major arguments for and against deliberative democracy, addressing
legal and political perspectives, national and post-national concerns, and
the different American and European takes on deliberative democracy.
The basic structure of the text hinges on the three question of why, how,
and where to deliberate democratically, with each question being tackled
in turn.
JC423 2006-001568 978-0-472-06949-1
The logic of democracy; reconciling equality, deliberation,
and minority protection.
McGann, Anthony. (Michigan studies in political analysis)
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 243 p. $26.95 (pa)
In A Preface to Democratic Theory, Robert A. Dahl defined democracy as
a system of government that satisfies the values of popular sovereignty
and political equality. McGann (political science, U. of California at
Irvine) here works out the logical consequences of this definition into a
unified theory of democracy by bringing together the literatures on nor-
mative political philosophy, social choice, and the empirical study of
political institutions. He comes to the conclusion that proportional par-
liamentary representation and majority rule at the decision stage is the
best means of protecting the weakest minority and gives the most
incentive for reasonable deliberation and that consensus democracy only
occurs because of majority rule, not in spite of it.
–182–
JC481 2005-055899 978-0-7546-2574-2
Fascism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael S. Neiberg. (The international library
of essays on political history)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 618 p. $275.00
Although most associate fascism with Italy, Germany, Spain and Portugal
in the twentieth century, its loose definition and tendency to rise in
indigenous movements makes a perfect idea of fascism difficult to pin
down. This collection of 26 articles in their original presentations covers
a range of movements and instances, from those found in the aforesaid
nations to the UK, the US, Peru, Brazil, Chili and Japan. After contribu-
tions on theories, origins and definitions, papers focus on fascism and
power (including local politics and the Francoist state, Italian anti-
Semitism, and the waning of fascism in Spain), fascism in opposition
(including British and French fascism), and fascism in a global and com-
parative setting (including America in the 1930s, Italian-American
identity during Mussolini, and pre-war Japan.)
JC481 2005-280784 978-0-826-48281-5
Fascism.
Griffiths, Richard.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 165 p. $13.95 (pa)
Griffiths (emeritus, King’s College London) constructs a typology of
fascism by surveying the ideologies of the various European fascist
groups of the 1930s. His treatment is more inclusive than works that
limit themselves to discussion of Franco, Mussolini, and Hitler and
includes such strands of the radical right such as Action Française in
France. This approach allows Griffiths to show how fascism developed
ideologically, with ideals of anti-capitalism, revolutionary change, and
destruction of the old elites jettisoned as fascists came to power within
their individual countries and ideals of nationalism even being tossed
aside as the rise of the Nazis gave rise to ideals of international fascism.
JC481 2006-021588 1-57607-940-6
World fascism; a historical encyclopedia; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cyprian P. Blamires.
ABC-CLIO, ©2006 750+ p. $185.00
Freelance editor and scholar Blamires presents a two-volume reference
encyclopedia on global fascism that has adopted the “new consensus”
definition of fascism for its selection criteria: “A revolutionary form of
ultra-nationalism bent on mobilizing all `healthy’ social and political
energies to resist the perceived thread of decadence and on achieving the
goal of a reborn national or ethnic community. This project involves the
regeneration both of the political culture and of the social and ethical
culture that underpin it, and in some cases involves the eugenic concept
of rebirth based on racial doctrine.” From “Abstraction,” an interwar
fascist derogatory term for such values as human rights and interna-
tionalism, to “Zyklon B,” the gas used by the Nazis to execute their
victims en masse, some 500 entries present information on important
organizations, personalities, concepts, and events relevant to fascist and
anti-fascist movements. Not surprisingly, the focus is European, with
much discussion of Italian and German fascism in particular, but
fascism in Argentina, Libya, the United States, Iraq, and elsewhere is dis-
cussed as well.
JC571 2006-002736 978-1-4051-5241-9
The challenge of human rights; their origin, development,
and significance.
Mahoney, John.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 215 p. $29.95 (pa)
Mahoney (emeritus moral and social theology, U. of London) looks at
human rights as a cultural and historical phenomenon of the past half
century. He begins with the historical background to the modern
movement, then discusses the various stages of that movement from the
United Nations Charter to the impact of globalization.
JC571 82-642048 978-0-7425-5803-8
Freedom in the world 2006; the annual survey of political
rights and civil liberties.
Title main entry. Ed. by Aili Piano et al. (Freedom House book)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 908 p. $32.95 (pa)
The Freedom House unveils its annual assessments and ratings, mostly
in the form of reports a few pages long on individual countries and on
disputed territories. Tables and lists also rate countries as free, partly
free, or not free. There is no index, but everything is listed alphabetically.
–183–
JC571 2006-020044 1-4144-0326-7
Human and civil rights; essential primary sources.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Lee et al. (Social issues primary sources col-
lection)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 519 p. $110.00
The material in this collection provides insight into emerging concepts of
rights and a global perspective of successes and failures in civil rights
movements. Each of the primary sources includes a summary of key
facts, an introduction describing the historical background and con-
tributing factors for the primary source, the significance of the piece, and
further resources on the topic, including books, periodicals, websites, and
audio and visual material. The documents are preceded by a chronology
that begins with the passing of the Habeas Corpus Act in 1679 and ends
with the London bombings in 2005. The articles themselves begin with
the French National Assembly’s 1789 Declaration of the Rights of Man
and conclude with a 2003 article about attacks on Afghan girls’ schools.
JC571 2006-014455 978-0-8014-7324-1
Unexpected power; conflict and change among
transnational activists.
Hertel, Shareen.
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 159 p. $17.95 (pa)
Studying two of the most prominent transnational economic and labor
rights campaigns of the 1990s, one to end child labor in Bangladesh and
the other to fight gender discrimination in Mexican workplaces, Hertel
(political science, U. of Connecticut) investigates the reasons why those in
Mexico and Bangladesh who were ostensibly being helped by transna-
tional activists came to challenge the definitions of rights and the policy
priorities of the campaigns. She proposes two mechanisms by which
these challenges happen—”blocking,” in which home country activists
seek to stall or halt progress in order to pressure outside activists to
change the frame of the campaign, and more indirect “backdoor moves,”
in which the normative reference points may be agreed upon but
attempts are made to change secondary reference points or policy priority
points. In addition to identifying and explaining these mechanisms, she
demonstrates their role in the evolution of human rights campaigns.
JC573 2006-016174 1-59102-463-3
The angry Right; why conservatives keep getting it wrong.
Joshi, S.T.
Prometheus Books, ©2006 311 p. $25.00
The author profiles 12 significant conservative political and media
figures, seeking an answer for what he perceives as their angry attitude.
The figures he discusses are Russell Kirk, William F. Buckley Jr., Irving
Kristol and son William, Phillis Schlafly, William J. Bennett, Gertrude
Himmelfarb, brothers David and Rush Limbaugh, Ann Coulter, Michael
Savage, and Sean Hannity. In distilled form, his argument suggests that
conservatives are angry at having being forced to move to the left over
the decades since the Franklin Roosevelt administration and in dim
recognition that their ideas are doomed to extinction.
JC573 2006-040647 0-06-018877-4
The conservative soul; how we lost it; how to get it back.
Sullivan, Andrew.
HarperCollins, ©2006 294 p. $25.95
Sullivan (senior editor, The New Republic), a self-described former teenage
Thatcherite and supporter of Ronald Reagan, has become increasingly
frustrated with the direction of the Republican Party in recent years,
arguing that it has veered into fundamentalist supremacy. He charts the
development of this fundamentalist movement within the Republican
Party through a look at how a set of religious doctrines have been ele-
vated as means to understand a chaotic world and the related con-
struction of a theological “natural law” approach to cultural politics. He
analyzes how these twin projects operate in the foreign and domestic
policies of the George W. Bush administration and then offers his
counter-vision of a conservatism ruled by philosophical modesty; prac-
tical restraint; a “radically random” notion of history; and an experi-
ential, ritual, and sacramental approach to Christianity.
JC574 2005-008208 0-415-37327-1
Neoliberal hegemony; a global critique.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dieter Plehwe et al. (RIPE series in global
political economy; 18)
Routledge, ©2006 294 p. $125.00
Such is the virulence of neoliberalism that it continues to spread though
few politicians, business leaders or academics identify with it; and even
forces critical of it carry out its policies. Social scientists from Europe
and North America look at the people and organizations driving
neoliberalism, specific projects in the regional and intellectual contexts,
its effects on international institutions and on popular culture and
education, and the various forms of opposition to it.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JC574 2006-014437 978-1-59486-396-7
Wait! don’t move to Canada!; a stay-and-fight strategy to
win back America.
Scher, Bill.
Rodale, ©2006 176 p. $10.00 (pa)
Progressive writer Scher pleads with his compatriots not to cut and run
from the endless wars, torture and wire-tapping, race-baiting, corporate
tyranny, and embarrassing stupidity that seems to be the business of the
US government now. He notes some successes in turning back the tide
that are not reported or not remembered, and recommends arguments
and actions to take back the initiative. There is no index.
JC578 2006-280321 1-4051-3010-5
Global institutions and responsibilities; achieving global
justice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christian Barry and Thomas W. Pogge.
(Metaphilosophy series in philosophy)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2005 349 p. $34.95 (pa)
Barry, editor of Ethics & International Affairs, and Pogge (moral and
political philosophy, Columbia U.) compile 17 essays by political philoso-
phers, legal theorists, and economists from around the world. The essays
serve to connect theory and practice by integrating thinking about prin-
ciples of global justice into debates about existing institutions. They
discuss the goals, values, and ideals that global institutional arrange-
ments should achieve, institutions that realize these aims, and how they
are supported and promoted. Specific topics include global poverty and
inequality, international fairness, the World Trade Organization and egal-
itarian justice, empire versus international law, human rights and global
health, international monetary arrangements, business ethics, and the
contribution principle.
JC585 2005-010998 0-7546-5214-9
Libertarianism defended.
Machan, Tibor R.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 348 p. $99.95
Machan (Chapman U.) defends the political and economic theory of a
fully free society from its detractors. His perspectives include finding the
rational man, a positive libertarian view of government, Robert Nozick
and the libertarian alternative, whether libertarianism implies the
welfare state, and the dependence of equality on liberty.
JC585 2006-022060 978-0-393-06000-3
Modern liberty and the limits of government.
Fried, Charles. (Issues of our time)
W.W. Norton, ©2007 217 p. $24.95
Characterizing his book as a successor to Friedrich Hayek’s The Road to
Serfdom without the “apocalyptic thunder” and cognizant of “the good
things that the post-New Deal world has done for almost everyone,” Fried
(Harvard Law School) muses on the meaning of individual liberty in the
welfare administrative state. Writing for a general audience, he sets out
and defends his libertarian view of the world, addressing both social and
economic issues.
JC596 2006-031213 0-313-33477-3
Encyclopedia of privacy; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by William G. Staples.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 676 p. $199.95
This two-volume encyclopedia compiled by Staples (sociology, U. of
Kansas) explores cultural, social, and legal issues of privacy in the con-
temporary United States. The 226 alphabetical entries range from brief
technical explanations of various technologies to extended meditations on,
for example, the philosophical foundations of privacy. Coverage includes
key concepts, events, legal cases and laws, organizations, technological
developments, major figures, and ethical debates. In making his selec-
tions, Staples sought to ensure that different perspectives were included,
especially those concerned with gender. Examples of entry subjects
include anti-wiretap statutes, bar code readers and scanners, the Cable
Communications Policy Act of 1984, the Clinton-Lewinsky scandal, fin-
gerprints and fingerprinting, freedom of association, McCarthyism, the
National Security Agency, privacy torts, traffic control cameras, trans-
action-generate data, voice identification, and voyeurism. A chronology of
select events precedes the entries and the second volume concludes with
a subject index and a resource guide to books, websites, organization,
and films.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JC599 2006-026636 978-0-8047-5317-3
Between justice and politics; the Ligue des droits de
l’homme, 1898-1945.
Irvine, William D.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 269 p. $60.00
The League of the Rights of Man was founded to address concern about
the unjust and illegal Dreyfus affair, and within 40 years was the largest
and most influential civil liberties organization in the world. Its archives
were seized by invading Germans in 1940 and in turn by the Soviets in
1945. The existence of the archives was revealed only in 1991, and they
were returned to France in 2001 and opened to scholars in 2002.
Therefore, Irvine (history, York U., Toronto) decided it was time to write
the first history of the organization since 1927.
JC599 2006-024493 978-0-275-98911-8
The four freedoms under siege; the clear and present
danger from our national security state.
Raskin, Marcus and Robert Spero.
Praeger, ©2007 344 p. $49.95
While George W. Bush proclaims regularly that his “War on Terror” is
being fought for the advance of freedom, Raskin (policy studies, George
Washington U.) and Spero (formerly of the US Agency for International
Development during the Kennedy administration) argue that his
expansion of the national security state (a term first used by Raskin to
describe Cold War America in 1967) is in fact undermining the four
freedoms delineated by Franklin Roosevelt in his 1941 State of the Union
address: freedom of speech, freedom to worship, freedom from want,
and freedom from fear. They touch upon a wide range of issues in
making their argument, including the PATRIOT Act, misconceptions
about terrorism, voting rights violations, the religious right, economic
inequality, and the mobilization of fear in the name of the “War on
Terror.”
JC599 2006-014113 978-0-8166-4706-4
The racial order of things; cultural imaginaries of the
post-soul era.
Mukherjee, Roopali.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 284 p. $20.00 (pa)
Mukherjee (media studies, Queens College, City U. of New York) analyzes
recent reversals in attitude and policy about affirmative action, as com-
pared to the advances made in the 1960s and 1970s in the civil rights
movement. Working from a variety of vantage points, including policy
narrative, conceptual analysis, film studies, politics, and the myth of the
meritocracy, Mukherjee exposes the reasons why so many are now
opposed to what held out so much hope for the marginalized, and how
identities within class, race and gender formed and reformed. Topics
include the enemies, allies and alibis of race, gender and the constitution
of subjects; Hollywood cinema as a racial regime in the affirmative
action film of the 1990s; the role of the South as eyewitness to the racial
past; and the structure of response to race in terms of both the heroism
and racism so closely associated with it. The bibliography gives a good
accounting of the most recent thought on what affirmative action once
was and what it now is.
JF51 2006-045347 978-0-393-92943-0
Cases in comparative politics, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick O’Neil et al.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 504 p. $62.50 (pa)
Taking their conceptual structure from the textbook, Essentials of
Comparative Politics, the authors (all professors of politics and gov-
ernment at U. of Puget Sound) present 12 country case studies to be used
in courses on comparative politics. The uniformly structured studies
discuss the United Kingdom, the United States, France, Japan, Russia,
China, India, Iran, Mexico, Brazil, South Africa, and Nigeria. Each study
includes discussion of major geographic and demographic features,
themes in the state’s historical development, political regimes, political
conflict and competition, political economy, foreign relations, and current
issues.
–184–
JF51 0-495-00761-7
Comparative politics using MicroCase ExplorIt, 4th ed.
Le Roy, Michael K.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2007 295 p. $41.95 (pa)
Le Roy (Whitworth College) presents a student workbook intended to
complement core undergraduate introduction to comparative politics
texts. The workbook’s chapters are structured around use of MicroCase
ExplorIt, a statistical data analysis software that allows students to
connect the key ideas of comparative politics to their own explorations of
data gathered from such sources as the World Values Survey, the Pew
Global Attitude Survey, the World Bank, and the United Nations. Fourteen
chapters are presented in five sections dedicated to introductory matters,
politics and government in liberal democracies, communist and post-
communist states, newly industrializing countries, and the Islamic world.
The software and the data are available over the Web to text adopters.
JF51 2005-037159 0-415-38505-9
Democratic politics and party competition; essays in
honour of Ian Budge.
Title main entry. Ed. by Judith Bara and Albert Weale.
(Routledge/ECPR studies in European political science; 47)
Routledge, ©2006 315 p. $120.00
The Comparative Manifestos Project has collected empirical information
on 780 political parties in 54 countries over the course of the past 50
years and has been used by political scientist Ian Budge to construct a
synthetic theory of modern political democracy that includes such ele-
ments as ideologically informed parties, electoral competition, an account
of the structure of ideological space over which competition takes place,
and the motivation of parties in pursuing their programs both in relation
to the electorate and in relation to government. In this work, Bara
(poitics, U. of London, UK) and Weale (government, U. of Essex, UK)
present 14 papers that revisit the data of the Comparative Manifestos
Project in an effort to determine the empirical validity of Budge’s account
of democracy, identify any methodological problems associated with his
account (particularly as related to his claim of left-right ideological dom-
inance), and consider theoretical and normative implications of this
understanding of political democracy.
JF51 2006-047324 978-0-393-92950-8
Essential readings in comparative politics, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick H. O’Neil and Ronald Rogowski.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 571 p. $33.33 (pa)
O’Neil (U. of Puget Sound) and Rogowski (U. of California at Los Angeles)
present an anthology that is intended to complement O’Neil’s Essentials
of Comparative Politics through the presentation 51 original readings they
view as key works or containing original ideas in the field of compar-
ative politics. Writers represented include Max Weber, Eric Hobspawm,
Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Fareed Zakaria, Alexis de Tocqueville, Karl
Marx, Paul Collier, Samuel P. Huntington, Francis Fukuyama, James K.
Galbraith, and Joseph Nye. The readings are presented in chapters that
parallel those of the aforementioned textbook, dealing with definitions
and methodologies of comparative politics, the state, nations and society,
political economy, authoritarianism and totalitarianism, democracy,
advanced democracies, communism and post-communism, less-
developed and newly industrializing countries, globalization, and
political violence. A Cases in Comparative Politics, in which O’Neil also
had a hand, is also available from Norton.
JF801 2005-013152 0-415-36897-9
Citizenship and ethnic conflict; challenging the nation-
state.
Title main entry. Ed. by Haldun Gulalp. (Routledge research in compar-
ative politics)
Routledge, ©2006 156 p. $105.00
The case studies presented by Gülalp (political sociology, Yilbiz Technical
U., Turkey) explore how six different countries define national citi-
zenship and the effect this has upon inter-ethnic conflict within their
countries. Four of the six—Turkey, Iraq, Greece, and Lebanon—descend
from the Ottoman Empire and the influence of the Empire’s religion-
based millet system is considered, along with the colonial experiences of
Iraq and Lebanon. The other two countries examined, Israel and
Germany, are discussed in terms of the ethnic exclusivity that has
defined their definitions of citizenship. The impact of membership or
possible accession vis-à-vis the European Union is discussed in the cases
of Germany and Turkey, respectively.
–185–
JF1051 2006-042935 978-0-202-30885-2
Representation. (reprint, 1968)
Title main entry. Ed. by J. Roland Pennock and John W. Chapman.
AldineTransaction, ©2007 317 p. $32.95 (pa)
The anthology, first published in 1968, assembles papers from 1965
meetings of the American Society for Political and Legal Philosophy and
some additional essays to explore representation from a number of
angles. Scholars of political science, law, and philosophy consider the
concept, its history, the underlying theory, US constitutional decision,
weighted voting, extra-elective representation, and representation under
non-competitive party systems as exemplified in Poland. No index is
provided.
JF1351 2006-040716 978-0-8493-3726-0
Handbook of globalization, governance, and public
administration.
Farazand, Ali and Jack Pinkowski. (Public administration and public
policy; 129)
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2007 1208 p. $139.95
The 52 separately authored chapters presented by Farazmand (Florida
Atlantic U.) and Pinkowski (Nova Southeastern U.) are intended to serve
as a cross-disciplinary encyclopedic handbook on diverse issues and
aspects of globalization, governance, and public administration. The
material is organized into nine sections discussing concepts, meanings,
and theoretical perspectives; consequences and implications of global-
ization for public administration; consequences and implications of glob-
alization for governance; globalization and administrative reform and
reorganization; administrative reform and reorganization in the Asia-
Pacific region; administrative reform and reorganization in Africa and
India; development and global public administration; globalization and
issues in public management; and globalization and the future of gover-
nance and public administration.
JF1351 2006-008566 978-1-574-44560-2
Handbook of public administration, 3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jack Rabin et al. (Public administration and
public policy; no.124)
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2007 1243 p. $139.95
This comprehensive, yet concise reference provides a thorough review of
the literature pertaining to public administration. The volume opens with
two papers exploring the history of public administration in the U.S. The
remaining 28 contributions address such topics as organization theory,
financial management, decision making, public policy, judicial adminis-
tration, and public administration pedagogy. New to the third edition are
chapters on information technology and conduct of inquiry. Editor Rabin
teaches public administration and public policy at The Pennsylvania State
University.
JF1351 978-92-1-123158-8
Innovations in governance and public administration;
replicating what works.
Title main entry.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 201 p. $49.00 (pa)
Academics and practitioners in public administration and political
science review characteristics and best practices of innovation in gover-
nance, and examine factors related to the transferability and dissemi-
nation of innovations. Case examples are given from programs in Brazil,
Canada, Mexico, and the Philippines.
JF1351 2006-906712 0-495-00680-7
Organization theory; a public and nonprofit perspective,
3d ed.
Gortner, Harold F. et al.
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2006 436 p. $106.95 (pa)
Gortner (George Mason University) offers selections from basic literature
in the field of organization theory and interprets them in light of
problems in public sector administration. In addition to material tradi-
tionally included in organization theory texts, there is also material
drawing on political science and economics. Selections are grouped in
broad categories such as communication, accountability, motivation, and
decision making. Discussion questions are included. For this third
edition, cases and most of the readings have been removed from the
book and are now available on a web site. The book is for upper division
undergraduates and graduate students in programs of public and non-
profit administration.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JF1351 2006-023238 978-0-87289-302-3
Practical program evaluations; getting from ideas to
outcomes.
Emison, Gerald Andrews.
CQ Press, ©2007 121 p. $24.95 (pa)
Program evaluation is a type of institutionalized reflection aimed at iden-
tifying ways to improve the performance of public organizations. This
supplementary text for students in program evaluation courses identifies
some practices used by experienced evaluators that increase the like-
lihood of their suggestions being implemented. Emison (public adminis-
tration, Mississippi State U.) was formerly director of the U.S. EPA’s
Program Evaluation Division.
JF1411 2006-012648 0-7656-1705-6
Postmodern public administration, rev. ed.
Miller, Hugh T. and Charles J. Fox.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 157 p. $29.95 (pa)
Fox (public services and political science, Texas Tech U.) died in May
2004, and so was not able to help Miller (public administration, Florida
Atlantic U.) with the second edition. Defining postmodernism as the
refusal to describe human progress as a rational process leading to
heaven to some other teleological end, they consider its application to
public administration. The representative democratic accountability
feedback loop, alternatives to orthodoxy, hyper-reality, and the social con-
struction of government are among the topics.
JF1525 2006-008933 978-1-57444-548-0
Handbook of decision making.
Title main entry. Ed. by Göktug Morcöl. (Public administration and
public policy; no.123)
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2007 638 p. $139.95
This wide-ranging reference for practitioners describes the theories and
methods of neoclassical economic/utilitarian decision making, as well as
their more recent behavioral/organizational critiques and alternatives.
Sample topics include disjointed incrementalism, punctuated equilibrium
models, cost benefit analysis, queuing theory, and Confucian decision
making. Several chapters look at decision making within specific con-
texts, such as metropolitan areas, narcotics enterprises, and public man-
agement networks. Editor Morcöl teaches public policy and
administration at The Pennsylvania State U.
JF1525 2006-023267 978-1-933116-93-8
Intelligence analysis; a target-centric approach, 2d ed.
Clark, Robert M.
CQ Press, ©2007 321 p. $44.95 (pa)
In this resource for practicing intelligence analysts, Clark describes an
innovative “target-centric” intelligence process. This approach allows
intelligence collectors, analysts, and consumers to work collaboratively in
order to develop actionable intelligence. The second edition features three
new chapters on technology and systems analysis; denial and deception;
and collection strategies. Clark works as an independent consultant
assessing threats to U.S. space systems.
JF1525 2006-028572 978-0-275-99251-4
Intelligence and human rights in the era of global
terrorism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steve Tsang.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 224 p. $49.95
The 13 chapters presented by Tsang (politics, Oxford U., UK) address a
range of issues of how intelligence agencies in western democracies
should address the issue of terrorism. After opening chapters examine
historical and overarching issues, contributors discuss the evolution of
congressional oversight of American intelligence, the extent to which Al
Qaeda differs from earlier terrorist organizations, the need to uphold
human rights and the law in order to avoid such reputation- under-
mining situations as the US detention regimes as the Guantanamo camp
and Abu Ghraib, the benefits of adding independent research products
to the intelligence analysis process, allocation of financial resources by
intelligence organizations, and intelligence sharing between Britain and
Europe, among other topics.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JF1525 978-0-7165-2840-1
Intelligence, statecraft and international power.
Irish conference on Historians (27th: 2005: Dublin, Ireland) Ed. by
Eunan O’Halpin et al. (Historical studies; 25)
Irish Academic Press, ©2006 246 p. $85.00
The 15 papers presented by the editors (professors of history at Trinity
College, Ireland) collectively offer a geographically and chronologically
wide-ranging discussion of the history of espionage and military intelli-
gence around the world, although (probably due to the fact that the con-
ference at which the papers were first presented was sponsored by
Ireland’s National Committee for History) significantly greater attention
is paid to intelligence in Irish history than in the history of any other
single country. Examples of specific topics include the role of intelligence
in shaping issues of international power relevant to China’s Qing Empire;
English military intelligence in Ireland during the Wars of the Three
Kingdoms; diplomacy and the transformation of intelligence gathering in
Renaissance Italy; Irish intelligence and British war planning in 1910-14;
the Irish Republican Army, intelligence, and Bloody Sunday of 1920; intel-
ligence and Roman Emperor Trajan’s Parthian campaign; Josef Stalin
and foreign intelligence during the Second World War; British covert
action against Egypt in the aftermath of the 1956 Suez Crisis; and the
failure of intelligence in the run-up to the 2003 invasion of Iraq.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
JF1525 2006-015053 0-13-187515-9
Marketing in the public sector; a roadmap for improved
performance.
Kotler, Philip and Nancy Lee.
Wharton School Publishing, ©2007 332 p. $34.99
In this resource for government agency personnel, marketing professors
Kotler (Northwestern U.) and Lee (U. of Washington) explain how the
application of traditional marketing concepts can improve agency per-
formance in key areas. Using real world examples from public agencies,
the authors illustrate how the development of a “marketing mindset” can
contribute to meeting agency goals. Sample topics include communi-
cating effectively with the public, creating a strong brand identity, and
evaluating program performance.
JF1525 2006-920942 1-58603-597-5
Public administration in the information society; essays
on risk and trust.
Title main entry. Ed. by Miriam Lips et al. (Innovation and the public
sector; v.11)
IOS Press, ©2005 151 p. $114.00
Lips (Tilburg U., The Netherlands), Taylor (Glasgow Caledonian U.,
Scotland), and Bannister (Trinity College, Ireland) present the book
edition of the journal Information Polity, Volume 10, Nos. 1,2 (2005),
exploring a range of risk and trust issues emerging from contemporary
developments in the management of information, information flows and
resources in public administration. Eleven essays written by 21 interna-
tional academics provide an overview of the impact of information and
communication technology on public trust followed by discussion of risk
to privacy in new forms of information management; information, inno-
vation and risk; and risks to Internet governance.
JF1525 2006-023024 978-0-8213-6723-0
The role of parliament in curbing corruption.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rick Stapenhurst et al. (WBI development
studies)
The World Bank, ©2006 263 p. $30.00 (pa)
This report on research on the role the institution of parliament plays in
constraining corruption includes information on experiences, tools and
strategies for developing nations. Contributors address such topics as cor-
ruption as a key challenge to development, the political nature of cor-
ruption, political will, legislation, financial scrutiny, supreme audit
institutions, the media, commissions, coalitions among parliaments and
civil society, political parties, party political funding, legislative ethics
and codes of conduct, and building networks. Several of the topics
include case studies.
–186–
JF1525 2006-932214 978-0-7546-2460-8
Surveillance, crime and social control.
Title main entry. Ed. by Clive Norris and Dean Wilson. (International
library of criminology, criminal justice and penology; 2d series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 583 p. $275.00
Surveillance has been part of the response to crime since at least as far
back a Jeremy Bentham’s proposed Panopticon, a prison intended to
infuse prisoners with “sentiment of an invisible omniscience.” In this
work, the editors (U. of Sheffield, UK and Monash U., Australia) have
selected 26 papers that explore connections between surveillance prac-
tices and state crime control in different historical, social, and political
environments. The papers, originally appearing in the scholarly literature
between 1985 and 2004, are presented in sections discussing social the-
ories of surveillance; closed circuit television surveillance; undercover
police surveillance; bodies, databases, and technologies; and surveillance
futures.
JF2011 2005-028118 0-8160-5953-5
World encyclopedia of political systems and parties, 4th
ed.; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Neil Schlager and Jayne Weisblatt.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2006 1584 p. $270.00
Written by political scientists and other scholars, this three-volume ency-
clopedia covers some 180 countries and dependent territories, describing
their political systems and parties. Each article is presented in a standard
format that provides a basic description of the institutions of government
and the relevant historical background. The relative powers of the exec-
utive, legislative, judicial powers of government are then discussed.
Issues of suffrage, registration, balloting processes, geographic electoral
organization, and apportionment of office are then considered. Major
parties, including those in one-party states, are then described in term of
its history, organization, policy, membership and support, financing,
leadership, and prospects for retaining or gaining power. Minor parties
typically receive extremely brief description. The length of the articles
was determined by whether the country was deemed important, rather
than by the complexity of the political system. There is little in the way
of ancillary material, with the exception of an index.
JF2051 2006-014032 0-415-36832-4
Party policy in modern democracies.
Benoit, Kenneth and Michael Laver. (Routledge research in comparative
politics; 19)
Routledge, ©2006 287 p. $135.00
Since voters presumably make their voting choices based on the policy
positions of the parties they have to choose from, it follows that sys-
tematic analysis of party competition is made significantly more difficult
without reliable information on the policy positions of political parties.
In this work, Benoit (political science, Trinity College, Dublin, Ireland)
and Laver (politics, New York U., US) address this problem by presenting
the results of a systematic survey of country specialists that were tasked
with identifying the policy positions of parties in 47 countries around the
world. The policy dimensions chosen for examination include a “core set”
relating to policy on the economy, issues such as abortion and gay rights,
environmental matters, and the decentralization of decision making,
along with select country or region specific dimensions such a immi-
gration, deregulation, European Union issues, health care, media
freedom, and foreign ownership of land. After considering possible
applications of their work and presenting and defending their method-
ology, they summarize some of the main empirical patterns found
through the survey.
JK102 2006-008472 978-0-19-530924-9
The congress of the United States; a student companion,
3d ed.
Ritchie, Donald A.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 269 p. $60.00
Designed and written by Ritchie (associate historian, US Senate Historical
Office) for students age 12 and up, this encyclopedia offers some 200
articles introducing a wide range of topics related to the US Congress and
its history. Thematically speaking, the entries provide information on
notable members of Congress, congressional powers, elections and suc-
cession, congressional agencies and staff, congressional leadership, pro-
cedures, traditions, the Capitol Building, relations with the executive,
notable events and legislation, and sources of information about the
Congress. Each entry is cross- referenced and contains a guide to further
reading.
–187–
JK271 2006-036067 978-1-933116-74-7
American public policy; promise and performance, 7th
ed.
Peters, B. Guy.
CQ Press, ©2007 555 p. $65.95 (pa)
Peters (American government, U. of Pittsburgh) takes a comprehensive
view of public policy and policy-making in the United States. Opening
chapters define public policy and its instruments, place it in social and
political context, and describe the fundamental structures of policy-
making in American government. The making of public policy is dis-
cussed in chapters covering agenda setting, legitimization of policy
choices, organizations and implementation, budgeting, and policy evalu-
ation. Substantive policy issues are examined in chapters on economic
policy, tax policy, health care policy, income maintenance (social security
and welfare), education policy, energy and the environment, protective
policies (defense and law enforcement), and the “culture wars.” Finally,
cost-benefit and ethical analysis of public policy is considered in the last
two chapters.
JK421 2005-034063 1-59139-955-6
The first 90 days in government; critical success strategies
for new public managers at all levels.
Daly, Peter H. and Michael Watkins.
Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2006 256 p. $24.95
Daly (“a former federal executive agency head and Presidential
Commission member”) and Watkins (INSEAD, the international graduate
business school) draw on the research and conclusions found in an
earlier book by Watkins, The First 90 Days: Critical Success Strategies for
New Leaders at All Levels, in order to give advice to those about to tran-
sition into new leadership roles in government. Their advice is under-
pinned by consideration of nine key transition challenges: clarify
expectations, match strategy to situation, accelerate your learning, secure
early wins, build the team, create alliances, achieve strategic-structural
alignment, avoid predictable surprises, and manage yourself.
JK421 2006-034123 978-0-87289-333-7
System under stress; homeland security and American
politics, 2d ed.
Kettl, Donald F. (Public affairs and policy administration series)
CQ Press, ©2007 166 p. $28.95 (pa)
For the purposes of the study of American government, suggests Kettl
(political science, U. of Pennsylvania), the 9-11 terrorist attacks and the
Hurricane Katrina disaster were “stress tests” analogous to those run by
a cardiologist to diagnose the health of a patient’s heart. He offers his
own diagnosis of the US government’s homeland security health as
revealed by these events, discussing intelligence failures prior to the 9-11
attacks and the government’s response, broader coordination problems
in the federal bureaucracy, state and local government responses to
Hurricane Katrina, the policy problem of trying to maximize protection
against threats that can’t be eliminated, and the alleged conflict between
security and civil rights and liberties.
JK468 2005-034372 0-525-94929-1
Class 11; inside the CIA’s post 9/11 spy class.
Waters, T.J.
Dutton Books, ©2006 301 p. $24.95
Following the September 11th, 2001 Al Qaeda attacks on the World Trade
Center and the Pentagon, the author, then the president of a private con-
sulting firm specializing in intelligence collection and training, joined the
Central Intelligence Agency’s Clandestine Service Training Program along
with about a hundred others. In this book, he describes those experiences
for a popular audience, focusing on the personalities he encountered,
rather than tradecraft. As he describes it, each chapter “is a month’s mix
of training, class bonding, personal reflection, and world events viewed
through one officer’s perspective.”
JK468 2006-045601 0-8493-7096-5
Elements of effective governance; measurement,
accountability and participation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathe Callahan. (Public administration and
public policy; 126)
CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2007 360 p. $89.95
For both students of government and citizen activists, Callahan (public
administration, Rutgers U.-Newark) and six colleagues from New Jersey,
Massachusetts, and New York explain the basic themes, concepts, and
competencies of measuring the performance of governments and holding
them to account for that performance, and of citizen participation in gov-
ernance. They include case studies from the region.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JK468 2006-012890 1-57488-949-4
Fair play; the moral dilemmas of spying.
Olson, James M.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 291 p. $28.95
As a general rule, says Olson (intelligence and national security, Texas
A&M U.), the politicos tell the spies just to get the goods and be quiet
about how they got them. He believes this attitude is unhelpful, and is
not how the US should be conducting itself. He argues that deciding what
is acceptable moral behavior in any operational situation is too heavy a
burden to be placed on individual officers or even their supervisors or
other senior officials, and that clear guidelines should be debated and
established by a body answerable to the public.
JK468 2006-012651 978-1-57488-990-1
Flawed patriot; the rise and fall of CIA legend Bill
Harvey.
Stockton, Bayard.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 357 p. $28.95
Transferring from the FBI to the fledgling CIA in 1947, William K.
Harvey would come to head the clandestine agency’s assassination
division and its task force targeting Cuba until clashes with the
Kennedy’s led to his being sidelined and eventually sinking into alco-
holism and obscurity. Stockton, a former CIA agent who served under
Harvey and later became Newsweek’s bureau chief in Bonn, Germany,
biographically reconstructs Harvey’s CIA career, seeking to restore his
reputation as an operative who contributed greatly to CIA successes in
Cold War Germany and during the Cuban Missile Crisis, even if flawed
by excessive drink and overconfidence. Distributed in the US by Books
International.
JK468 2006-006269 978-1-56663-574-5
Safe for democracy; the secret wars of the CIA.
Prados, John.
Ivan R. Dee, Inc., ©2006 696 p. $35.00
Independent scholar Prados provides a detailed account of the Central
Intelligence Agency’s activities around the world from its formation in
1947 to the present day. Drawing upon recently declassified secret docu-
ments as well as the memoirs of former officials, he describes the CIA’s
various covert and political operations and places them within the
context of America’s foreign policy goals and the global quest for
democracy. Particular attention is paid to the efforts of presidents and
Congress to control the CIA. Prados is a senior fellow of the National
Security Archive.
JK468 978-1-933633-09-1
Torture taxi; on the trail of the CIA’s rendition flights.
Paglen, Trevor and A.C.Thompson.
Melville House Publishing, ©2006 205 p. $23.00
“Tail spotters” have long tracked the comings and goings of individual
airplanes as a sort of hobby, but the authors (one a winner of jour-
nalism’s George Polk Award) of this book found that in combination
with other techniques of investigative journalism it served as an
invaluable tool for exposing the broad contours of the US government’s
“extraordinary rendition” program, in which individuals are picked up
by the US government and whisked all over the world to secret US
detention facilities, facilities run by cooperative governments, and else-
where, often to find themselves tortured in the name of the “War on
Terror.” They describe the results of their investigations, exposing the
travels of the CIA “torture taxi” planes, the network of detention facilities,
and the experiences of some of the detainees in the Kafkaesque nether-
world of the “extraordinary detention” program.
JK516 2006-297252 978-1-56751-320-2
Lying for empire; how to commit war crimes with a
straight face.
Model, David.
Common Courage Press, ©2005 335 p. $18.95 (pa)
While it has become almost a commonplace among wide swathes of the
American public that George W. Bush lied about weapons of mass
destruction in order to gin up his war in Iraq, Model (political science
and economics, Seneca College, Canada) points out in this work that this
is hardly aberrant behavior for an American president serving the cause
of empire. He focuses on eight recent presidents, describing their use of
deceit in order to wage war and commit atrocities, both overt and covert.
Chapters discuss Harry Truman’s use of the atom bomb, Eisenhower’s
toppling of democracy in Guatemala, Johnson’s war on Vietnam, Nixon’s
secret bombing of Cambodia, Ronald Reagan’s secret wars in Central
America, George H. W. Bush’s lies about diplomacy in order to justify his
earlier war with Iraq, Clinton’s portrayal of the bombing of Serbia as a
humanitarian mission, and, of course, George W. Bush’s invasion of Iraq.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JK526 2006-007192 978-0-7425-5350-7
Dancing without partners; how candidates, parties, and
interest groups interact in the presidential campaign.
Title main entry. Ed. by David B. Magleby et al. (Campaigning
American style series)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 191 p. $28.95 (pa)
Because of the importance of the Bipartisan Campaign Reform Act for
the conduct of the 2004 US presidential election, political scientists
describe and analyze five battleground states, focusing on the relation-
ships among the candidates, the political parties, and the interest groups
under the Act’s regulation.
JK526 2006-003009 978-1-58901-108-3
The values campaign?; the Christian right and the 2004
elections.
Title main entry. Ed. by John C. Green et al. (Religion and politics
series)
Georgetown U. Press, ©2006 273 p. $26.95 (pa)
How much influence did the Christian Right exert on the nine most key
states in the 2004 US general elections? Was their behavior created specif-
ically for that election or was it part of an ongoing and national agenda?
In this collection of essays contributors from a variety of disciplines
analyze how so-called “moral values” played a part in voters’ choices in
2004 and how those values will continue to influence future elections.
Topics on the Christian Right movement in 2004 include the new issue
of same-sex marriage and the continuity of values campaigns, and
articles cover events in the key states of Ohio, Michigan, Iowa, Minnesota,
Florida, Colorado, Oklahoma, California and South Carolina.
JK692 2006-047550 0-8493-0534-9
American public service; radical reform and the merit
system.
Title main entry. Ed. by James S. Bowman and Jonathan P. West.
(Public administration and public policy; 127)
CRC Press, ©2006 263 p. $89.95
American political scientists examine the rise of at-will employment in
public service in the US, and its effect of making civil servants at
national, state, and locals levels subject to the will and ill will of political
operatives. Their topics include framing civil service innovations, demo-
nizing patronage in the Boston Globe’s coverage of the 9/11 terrorist
attacks, ending civil service protections in Florida and Texas, racial
equality, and whether federal labor-management relations under George
W. Bush constitutes enlightened management or political retribution.
JK1021 2005-028124 0-8160-5058-9
Encyclopedia of the United States Congress.
Dewhirst, Robert E. and John David Rausch. (Facts on file library of
American history)
Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 578 p. $75.00
Dewhirst (Northwest Missouri State U.) presents approximately 450 cross-
referenced entries providing information about the United States
Congress. Topics include the constitutional powers of the Congress,
important legislation passed, prominent historical and contemporary
members, congressional processes and rules, constituent offices and
committees of the Congress, major events and scandals, court cases
impacting the Congress, and political terminology related to the
Congress. Entries often provide “further reading” bibliographies and a
general selected bibliography is included at the end of the volume.
JK1118 2006-035661 978-1-933116-76-1
Interest group politics, 7th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Allan J. Cigler and Burdett A. Loomis.
CQ Press, ©2007 484 p. $49.95 (pa)
Although noting that the impact of the 2006 Democratic congressional
victories has yet to be seen, Cigler (political science, U. of Kansas) and
Loomis (political science, U. of Kansas) present the new edition of this
collection of 19 papers as an analysis of American interest group politics
that takes into account the recent political landscape. Opening chapters
are presented under the heading “group organization” and address
issues such as the enduring power of the National Rifle Administration,
casinos and the politics of tribal recognition, and the motivations of big-
money donors to environmental groups. The next section discusses issues
related to interest group interventions in the electoral process, including
religious and partisan mobilization in the 2004 elections and the role of
tax-exempt 527 groups not subject to the same contribution limits as
political action committees. The remaining chapters address groups in
the policy process, looking at ethnic group influence in foreign policy
making, the shifting fortunes of the Japanese and China lobby groups,
interest group participation in the Supreme Court nomination process,
interest groups and the making of nanotechnology policy, the influence
of the K-Street lobby groups during the Republican era, and other topics.
–188–
JK1118 2006-015165 978-0-7890-3166-2
Lobbying for social change, 3d ed.
Richan, Willard C. (Haworth series in social administration)
Haworth Pr., ©2006 302 p. $32.95 (pa)
Imagining an audience of people interested in pursuing social change in
the governmental arena but inexperienced in understanding the
processes of lobbying state and federal government officials, Richan
(emeritus, social work and social policy, Temple U.) presents an updated
edition of his introductory guide to lobbying. Opening chapters discuss
how set an agenda, targeting policy makers, evidence gathering, and case
preparation. He then discusses one-on-one lobbying, testifying in
hearings, interacting with the mass media, and the uses of direct action.
He concludes with a case study of grassroots welfare reform lobbying
campaign involving the Delaware County Coalition to Save Our Safety
Net.
JK1118 2006-023058 978-0-7619-3480-6
Sikhs, swamis, students, and spies; the India lobby in the
United States, 1900-1946.
Gould, Harold A.
Sage Publications, ©2006 460 p. $49.95
Gould (South Asian studies, U of Virginia-Charlottesville) draws primarily
on earlier studies, weaving them into a coherent social-historical picture
of a little recognized element of the South Asian legacy. However he does
make his own contribution with a review of a leaked diplomatic memo
in 1943 complaining that British arrogance in India was retarding the
war effort in Asia, and his startling revelation of the leaker’s identity
after all this time.
JK1726 2006-004580 978-0-8047-5461-3
The cult of true victimhood; from the war on welfare to
the war on terror.
Cole, Alyson M.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 240 p. $19.95 (pa)
Victim has become a keyword in US politics and culture since the end of
the 1980s, says Cole (political science, City U. of New York- Queens
College), and has been used in disputes over the welfare state, civil and
criminal justice reform and the culture wars. She argues that recasting
familiar conflicts in terms of victims is politically significant, and that
understanding the meanings of victimhood and victimization is nec-
essary to explaining how the welfare state was dismantled, why culture
wars keep being declared, and the Bush administration’s response to the
September 11th events.
JK1726 2006-278278 0-7453-2468-1
Death’s dream kingdom; the American psyche since 9-11.
Davis, Walter A.
Pluto Press, ©2006 279 p. $27.95 (pa)
The US is not fascist yet, says Davis (emeritus English, Ohio State U.) but
could become so if people fail to understand the economic and political
pillaging by the Bush regime. He argues that a deep psychological exam-
ination of the American character is needed, but is impossible because
American culture long since divorced itself from the psyche. He hopes to
reverse that process by developing a method for recovering and radical-
izing a psychoanalytic way to examine political and cultural events.
Distributed in the US by University of Michigan Press.
JK1726 2006-028561 0-275-99358-2
Eight ways to run the country; a new and revealing look
at left and right.
Mitchell, Brian Patrick.
Praeger, ©2007 161 p. $39.95
Dissatisfied with prior schemes for categorizing political ideologies,
Mitchell (Washington bureau chief, Investor’s Business Daily) proposes his
own typology. He begins by boiling down political differences down to
support or opposition to archê (the concept of rank) and kratos (the use
of force by the state and others) and then deriving from this distinction
the four political traditions of the Anglo-American experience: republican
constitutionalism, libertarian individualism, progressive democracy, and
plutocratic nationalism. Further identifying intermediate steps between
them, he argues that the contemporary American political scene can be
characterized as consisting of eight political perspectives: individualist,
paleolibertarian, paleoconservative, theoconservative, neoconservative,
communitarian, progressive, radical, and individualist. He offers a
chapter on each of these perspectives, detailing how they are the result
of differing attitudes towards archê and kratos and the positions this
leads them towards.
–189–
JK1873 2006-024261 978-0-8447-4247-2
Absentee and early voting; trends, prospects, and pitfalls.
Fortier, John C.
AEI Press, ©2006 105 p. $20.00 (pa)
In explaining why people are rather suddenly choosing to cast their
ballots anywhere but the voting booth and anytime but on election day,
Fortier (American Enterprise Institute) carefully avoids mentioning the
physical suppression and intimidation of voters in the 2000, 2002, and
2004 elections and the introduction of easily hackable voting machines.
Early and absentee voting may be convenient, he says, but there is no
evidence that it increases turnout; he deliberately does not consider the
cost savings to states. On the other hand, he describes at length such
potential problems as fraud, undue party influence, the loss of a civic
ritual, and the wasting of the last few days of all that very expensive cam-
paign advertising. He recommends making such practices as hard as pos-
sible. There is no index.
JK1994 2005-301151 978-0-7867-1843-6
Deliver the vote; a history of election fraud, an American
political tradition, 1742-2004.
Campbell, Tracy.
Carroll and Graf, ©2005 452 p. $16.95 (pa)
While numerous irregularities and allegations of fraud outraged
Democratic voters in the presidential elections of 2000 and 2004,
Campbell (history, U. of Kentucky in Lexington) documents in this book
that “[b]uying votes, stuffing or destroying ballots, moving polling loca-
tions, transposing results, importing illegal voters from other towns or
states, suppressing, disfranchising, and sometimes killing voters com-
prises a long, sordid tradition in American political culture.” He traces
the development of a culture of electoral corruption deeply engrained in
American politics, suggesting that it’s persistence is attributable to an
internalized sense that cheating is a justifiable response to equally
corrupt competitors.
JK2281 2006-016831 978-0-7890-3210-2
Campaigns and political marketing.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wayne P. Steger et al.
Haworth Pr., ©2006 210 p. $29.95 (pa)
Steger (political science, DePaul U.), Kelly (political science, Niagara U.),
and Wrighton (political science, U. of New Hampshire) present eight
papers in which political scientists analyze the work of electoral cam-
paign and marketing research professionals and assess the power and
limitation of their efforts. Individual topics include the role of profes-
sional political consultants in forming campaign strategy, legislative can-
didate time allocation, press responses to candidate attack messages, how
political professionals define electoral crisis, and an assessment of a
model of the “sympathy vote” in political campaigns. This work has also
been published as Journal of Political Marketing, v.5, nos.1/2, 2006.
JK2281 2006-012618 0-8204-8604-3
Communication in political campaigns.
Benoit, William L. (Frontiers in political communication; v.11)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 292 p. $34.95 (pa)
Benoit (communication, Wayne State U.) begins this analysis of political
campaign communications by defending the importance of the topic and
by presenting the functional theory that underpins his research, which
is based on the assumption that voting is a comparative act and thus can-
didates must distinguish themselves from opponents through political
campaign messages that establish candidate preferability through the
functions of acclaiming, attacking, and defending in terms of both policy
and character. This theory is then used to analyze US presidential cam-
paign discourse in chapters specifically focused on the role of medium,
information sources, and contextual factors in shaping campaign mes-
sages. Other chapters compare non-presidential and non-US campaign
discourses, discuss news coverage of political campaigns, and explore the
relationship between campaign discourse and election outcomes.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JK2281 2006-933220 978-0-7391-1546-6
Images, issues and attacks; television advertising by
incumbents and challengers in presidential elections.
Dover, E.D. (Lexington studies in political communication)
Lexington Books, ©2006 179 p. $25.95
Dover (political science, public policy and administration, Western
Oregon U.) analyzes the US presidential elections form 1980 to 2000 to
find how presidential hopefuls use televised advertising as a strategic tool
and weapon to create their own images and make the other candidate
appear not to be POTUS material. He first sorts his analysis by strength
of incumbent, noting they were weak in 1980 and 1992, strong in 1984
and 1996, and surrogate incumbents in 1988 and 2000. He then tales a
sharp look at the 2004 election from the nomination campaigns to the
strategies of each candidate, showing that the incumbent in this case
created an image of competence for himself while attacking the chal-
lenger on various issues at carefully-timed points in the campaign. The
result is a fascinating affirmation of what you may have already under-
stood subconsciously.
JK2281 2006-014124 978-0-7425-4143-6
Mediating the vote; the changing media landscape in U.S.
presidential campaigns.
Pfau, Michael. (Communication, media, and politics)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 178 p. $27.95 (pa)
Analyzing data drawn from national public opinion surveys conducted
during the 2004 US presidential campaign, the authors (a professor and
two doctoral students of communication at the U. of Oklahoma) explore
how changing patterns of media consumption have affected how people
receive information about politics and how that, in turn, has influenced
American political campaigns. Among the topics explored are the extent
to which politically engaged or disengaged people turn to specialized
forms of communication, which media exerted the most influence over
people’s political perceptions, the influence of different communication
forms over normative outcomes, and the compatibility of different media
forms with democratic values.
JK2316 2006-044490 978-0-8050-8101-5
The courage of our convictions; a manifesto for
Democrats.
Hart, Gary.
Henry Holt & Co., ©2006 206 p. $22.00
Hart, a Colorado senator from 1975 to 1987, specialized in environmental
and conservation issues, technology, military reform and foreign policy.
He challenges his fellow party members to remember Franklin Roosevelt,
Harry Truman, John Kennedy and Lyndon Johnson and their accom-
plishments, and to absorb and apply their principles of a single national
community, internationalism, civic duty and service to the nation, and
equality for all citizens. He describes the party as being in crisis through
its own timidity and calls for a return to leadership by the party in
matters of security while retaining basic civil rights. He also describes the
Democrats’ advantages in such issues as the environment, and proposes
a manifesto for the twenty-first century.
JK2316 2005-022572 978-0-7425-4037-8
Get this party started; how progressives can fight back
and win.
Title main entry. Ed. by Matthew R. Kerbel.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 210 p. $14.95 (pa)
Kerbel (political science, Villanova U.) and his contributors are convinced
progressivism still has a chance in the US, provided it is well-organized,
clear about its goals, and committed. In these 12 essays with an intro-
duction by Kerbel and a foreword by Howard Dean, some of the new
movers and shakers describe the decline of progressivism and the new
reasons to restart it, the causes of the general elections of 2004, the
gender gap, the values dilemma, the art of seeking the common good,
ways and means of crafting both policy and message without conflict or
overlap, the infamous Section 527 loophole in the McCain-Feingold Act,
communicating a progressive philosophy, teaching progressives to speak
American, firing the consultants, and using technology for campaigns
and political change.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JK2408 2006-009397 978-0-8047-5300-5
Public opinion in state politics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey E. Cohen.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 279 p. $60.00
The explosion of public opinion polling over the past 20 years by com-
mercial firms, newspapers, and academic and nonprofit institutions has
opened up the possibility of measuring public opinion in the American
states. Twenty American academics contribute 13 chapters investigating
state-level public opinion from a number of angles. The essays are
organized around three major themes: the conceptualization and meas-
urement of public opinion in the states, explanations of variation in state
public opinion, and the impact of public opinion on state politics and
policy.
JK3430 978-1-59237-145-7
The New York state directory, 2006-2007.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2005 1026 p. $145.00 (pa)
Published annually since 1983, this directory provides contact infor-
mation for public officials and private sector organizations and indi-
viduals who influence public policy in the state of New York. It opens
with an overview of the executive, legislative, and judicial branches of the
state government, followed by 25 chapters devoted to specific policy
areas, including education, health, real property, and taxation, among
others. A biographies section profiles 247 state officials. The 2006-2007
edition features new maps and additional listings for political action
committees, lobbyists, and local newspapers.
JK3474 2006-043336 978-1-59558-032-0
Three men in a room; the inside story of power,
corruption, and betrayal in an American statehouse.
Lachman, Seymour P.
The New Press, ©2006 194 p. $23.95
Having served as a Democratic New York State Senator for almost decade,
Seymour Lachman walked away from seeking reelection in 2004, having
to come to the conclusion that the real power in New York legislative pol-
itics lies almost solely in the hands of three men: the Governor, the
Speaker, and the Majority Leader. Here, together with journalist Polner,
he recounts his own experience with this corrupt system and documents
a number of the scandals that have resulted from it, finally concluding
with a plan for reform of NY state politics.
JK3816 2006-020981 978-0-7391-1415-8
Maryland politics and political communication, 1950-2005.
Sheckels, Theodore F. (Lexington studies in political communication)
Lexington Books, ©2006 183 p. $22.95 (pa)
Sheckels (English and Communication, Randolph-Macon College) con-
siders specific political events in Maryland history during the period
1950-2005. Not all of the elections or officials are discussed. Instead, he
focuses on those of interest from a communication perspective: Senators
Millard Tydings and Joseph Tydings, Alabama Governor George Wallace,
the story of Spiro Agnew, and Baltimore Mayor and Governor William
Donald Schaefer. The senate race between Barbara Mikulski and Linda
Chavez is described, followed by the gubernatorial races between Parris
Glendening and Ellen Sauerbrey, and Kathleen Kennedy Townsend and
Robert L. Ehrlich, and the Ehrlich administration. He considers commu-
nication strategies, campaign strategies, and attack ads. The book is
aimed at both academic and general readers.
JL86 978-0-7748-1317-4
Critical policy studies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Orsini and Miriam Smith.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2007 386 p. $85.00
Public policy and its formation in Canada is a unique field of analysis,
particularly given Canada’s particular position and experience with
diversity, globalization, terrorism and the environment. Canadian
scholars have also been evolving in their critical approaches to policy
studies, often taking entirely new positions on methodology and theory.
The 16 papers here cover political economy, citizens and diversity, dis-
course and knowledge and “risky subjects” such as moving from the
welfare state to the social investment state, border policy and 9/11
spillover, life in a post-socialist state, and changes in the Canadian health
care system. Topics include the role of political economy, globalization,
citizen engagement, policies on homosexuality, gender mainstreaming,
race and ethnicity, shifts in political studies, setting agendas and defining
issues, reproductive technologies, indigenous knowledge as part of policy,
and aboriginal rights and conservation. Distributed by the U. of
Washington Press.
–190–
JL966 978-90-04-15365-3
Imperialism, neoliberalism and social struggles in Latin
America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard A. Dello Buono and José Bell Lara.
(Studies in critical social sciences; v.7)
BRILL, ©2007 381 p. $134.00
Declaring that the social consequences of neoliberalism is Latin America
have provided the fundamental basis for its own negation, the editors (a
pair of sociologists from the US and Cuba) present 14 papers analyzing
the current state of neoliberalism in the region and dimensions of
resistance. Opening papers review the crisis of neoliberalism as it relates
to debt burdens, issues of democratic governability, social security crisis
in Panama, and social protest in Argentina. The alternatives put forward
by leftist state-power based movements including Cuban socialism,
Brazil’s Workers Party, Venezuela’s Chavista’s, and the Uruguayan Frente
Amplio. Remaining papers change focus to concentrate on the grassroots
social movements and their relationships to the state, political parties,
and the US as the imperial sponsor of neoliberalism.
JL967 2006-021636 978-1-58826-490-9
Citizenship in Latin America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph S. Tulchin and Meg Ruthenburg.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 329 p. $55.00
Political and other social scientists and activists from throughout the
Americas analyze citizenship in Latin American democracies within the
context of—and in order to help clarify—democratic theory and devel-
opment policies. They propose different conceptions of citizenship,
identify challenge to it, and reflect on their experiences advocating a
more active citizenry in the region.
JN30 3-8329-1230-4
The pressure of Europeanisation; from post-communist
state administrations to normal players in the EU system.
Lippert, Barbara and Gaby Umbach. (Eurpäische Schriften; 82)
Nomos, ©2006 203 p. $38.00 (pa)
This report describes the results of research on the impact of EU
accession and membership on public administration in five Central and
Eastern European countries that joined the EU in 2004: the Czech
Republic, Estonia, Hungary, Poland, and Slovenia. The report identifies
phases in Europeanization of the five countries, and examines the estab-
lishment of national administrative structures for the management of EU
affairs. Lippert is Deputy Director of the Institute for European Politics
in Berlin. Umbach is affiliated with the political science department at
the University of Cologne. The book is distributed in the US by ISBS.
JN30 2005-055569 1-84376-813-5
Public policy and the new European agendas.
Title main entry. Ed. by Fergus Carr and Andrew Massey. (New
horizons in public policy)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 450 p. $160.00
The seventeen papers presented by the editors (professors of government
at the U. of Portsmouth, UK) are similar in focus to the earlier Public
Policy in the New Europe: Eurogovernance in Theory and Practice (1999), in
that they consider both theoretical approaches to European integration
and empirical analysis of key policy areas, but this volume is more
focused on the key themes of the enlargement of the European Union
and the place of Europe in international politics. The more theoretically
oriented papers address such topics EU enlargement and international
socialization, the political and constitutional implications of enlargement,
military and economic relations between Europe and the United States,
and relations with Russia. The remaining papers address policy issues in
the realms of immigration and asylum policy and the dangers of ter-
rorism, human rights and civil rights, agriculture, environmental policy,
health policy, and pension policy.
–191–
JN30 2006-005424 0-415-39046-X
State territoriality and European integration.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Burgess and Hans Vollaard. (Europe
and the nation state; 10)
Routledge, ©2006 284 p. $120.00
The Westphalian connection of political sovereignty to the question of ter-
ritoriality has been an underpinning basis of thinking about the inter-
national legal order for some three and a half centuries, but with the
current political and economic integration of Europe, this inalienable
connection of sovereignty and territoriality has become theoretically prob-
lematic. For Burgess (federal studies, U. of Kent, UK) and Vollaard
(political science, Leiden U., the Netherlands), this calls for a rethinking
of conventional claims concerning the dominance of territorial logic in
politics from the Treaty of Westphalia forward to the current integration
processes of the European Union. They present 13 papers pursuing this
goal, exploring such topics as the historical metamorphosis of European
territoriality, territoriality and federalism in the governance of the
European Union, multi-level governance and communities in Belgium,
the continuing relevance of the principle of territoriality in the field of
European taxation, EU social polity beyond the welfare regime, and the
territorial monopoly of force and moves towards a “neomedieval”
Europe.
JN32 2006-012537 0-7546-4843-5
Reform in Europe; breaking the barriers in government.
Title main entry. Ed. by Liesbet Heyse et al.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 205 p. $99.95
Heyse (sociology, University of Twente, The Netherlands) collects work on
reforms in several policy sectors in European countries. Contributors,
mainly from The Netherlands, look at cases such as smoking bans in
Ireland, public housing in The Netherlands, safety policy reform in
Germany, and the reform of Dutch disability insurance, demonstrating
that barriers to reform, such as decision-making procedures, do not nec-
essarily prevent reform. The book will be of interest to students and pro-
fessionals in public administration and policy.
JN33 978-90-04-15573-2
European union administration; legitimacy and efficiency.
Nedergaard, Peter. (Nijhoff law specials; v.69)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 201 p. $115.00 (pa)
Nedergaard (business and politics, Copenhagen Business School) takes on
the complicated task of analyzing the European Union (EU) as a combi-
nation of several elements of traditional national and international
administration, each is fraught with its own particular dangers, ana-
lyzing the EU’s efficiency and legitimacy. He examines the organizational
theories behind the EU’s administration and places that administration
within its legal, political and historical contexts, then steps through how
the institutions of the EU work at the practical level, right down to how
the EU recruits “Eurocrats” and pays them. He analyzes the Commission
and the Council of Ministers, focusing on the organizational processes of
the latter, and ends with a succinct analysis of what is working, what is
not, and how the background of the individual Eurocrat influences the
efficiency of the EU. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
JN96 2006-022348 963-7326-79-0
Divide and pacify; strategic social policies and political
protests in post-communist democracies.
Vanhuysse, Pieter.
Central European U. Press, ©2006 170 p. $41.95
Vanhuysse (political economy, U. of Haifa) develops social policy-based
explanations of post-communist protests, drawing on research traditions
in the politics and sociology of contention and the comparative political
economy of welfare states. His topics include political quiescence despite
conditions for conflict, the great abnormal pensioner booms, and the
political economy of post-communist welfare. Distributed in the US by
Books International.
JN96 2005-055196 978-0-415-34807-2
The quality of democracy in post-communist Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Derek S. Hutcheson and Elena A. Korosteleva.
Routledge, ©2006 171 p. $105.00
Political scientists from western Europe examine why eastern European
countries have failed to fulfill the expectations the West had for them a
decade and a half ago. Their topics include good and bad democracy, the
misuse of referendums, dimensions of disengagement in Russia, and
competitive authoritarianism in Ukraine.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JN508 2005-472637 978-0-7190-5794-6
Parliament today.
Rush, Michael. (Politics today)
Manchester U. Press, ©2005 338 p. $55.00
Rush (politics, U. of Exeter) points out that politics is about how societies
seek to resolve conflicts, including those with other societies. He uses a
wide range of resources, including a number created by Parliament
about itself, to explain how the institution that is the heart of British pol-
itics works, taking the House of Commons and the House of Lords as a
single entity. He places parliament within its social and historical con-
texts as he explains its founding and development, its functions, its role
in democracy, its people and their professionalization, the way it
organizes its business as legislator and overseer, its relationship with the
people it represents and the government of which it is so integral a part,
and the ramifications of changes and reforms. The explanatory boxes,
charts and graphs are very helpful and the bibliographic essay is par-
ticularly well done. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
JN571 978-90-04-15336-3
National human rights institutions in the Asia-Pacific
region.
Burdekin, Brian. (The Raoul Wallenberg Institute human rights library;
v.27)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 555 p. $134.00
Burdekin (Melbourne U. Law School, Australia) analyzes the legislative
mandates and operational aspects of current national human rights insti-
tutions established in the Asia-Pacific region, assessing them against the
United Nations Principles relating the status of National Institutions (the
1991 Paris Principles) at a minimum. Following an introduction, his
chapters address mandates powers and functions; independence, acces-
sibility, resources, and other essential characteristics; relations with gov-
ernment institutions; cooperation with international treaty bodies, the UN
Commission on Human Rights, and other charter-based mechanisms;
regional cooperation; and challenges of protecting economic, social, and
cultural rights and operating in situations of armed conflict. Some 400
pages contain relevant legislation from Australia, Fiji, India, Indonesia,
South Korea, Malaysia, Mongolia, Nepal, New Zealand, the Philippines,
Sri Lanka, and Thailand, as well as other documentary materials.
JN1129 2006-046993 0-7734-5581-7
The Conservative Party leadership of John Major, 1992-
1997.
Heppell, Timothy.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 330 p. $119.95
Heppell (British politics, U. of Huddersfield, Britain) explains why the
predictions of perpetual rule by the Conservative Party after its unprece-
dented fourth consecutive General Election victory in April 1992 proved
wrong. Between then and its worst electoral defeat since 1832 five years
later, he says, it was increasingly seen as administratively incompetent
and ideologically divided and its parliamentarians as sleazy, disrep-
utable, and untrustworthy.
JN1571 978-0-7165-2848-7
Frank Sherwin; independent and unrepentant.
Title main entry. Ed. by Frank Sherwin.
Irish Academic Press, ©2007 236 p. $75.00
Sherwin (1905-81) recounts his life and career in Irish politics from the
Easter Rising, which he witnessed, through the early 1970s. He joined the
Fianna Fáil party in 1926, but was so disgusted with the machinery of
parties that he became an independent for the rest of his public life. His
son, also an Irish politician, includes some additional reminisces by his
father and an introduction and afterword. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
JN2341 2005-055585 978-0-582-36900-9
The origins of French absolutism, 1598-1661.
James, Alan. (Seminar studies in history)
Longman, ©2006 148 p. $17.00 (pa)
Richelieu and later Mazarin in essence took France from a region
exhausted by war to a state triumphant, but according to James (war
studies, King’s College, London) neither had a master plan to modernize
France or to create a centralized and bureaucratic form of government
based on traditional values of religion war and privilege. After giving
background on the early Bourbon monarchy he organizes his evidence
and assertions into themes, analyzing religion in terms of the parallel
Catholic Reformation and the challenges of the Huguenots and Jansenists,
War and the Peace of the Pyrenees, the growing power of centralized
government and the role of the Fronde in creating royal absolutism more
or less as a defense mechanism, and the resulting social order. He
assesses approaches to the origins of French absolutism, especially the
Fouquet-Colbert rivalry and provides a collection of original documents
in translation.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JN2358 2005-034478 978-0-252-03056-7
Sunspots and the Sun King; sovereignty and mediation in
seventeenth-century France.
McClure, Ellen M. (The humanities laboratory)
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 316 p. $45.00
The reign of the Sun King, French monarch Louis XIV, (1643-1715) was a
time in which political theorists sought to reformulate the theoretical
basis for monarchical authority. McClure (French, U. of Illinois) places
these efforts within the wider intellectual debates over the relation of God
to the Universe, describing them as a contest between a worldview that
stressed the independence of the interrelatedness of God and the universe
and one, bolstered by Galileo’s contemporary discovery of sunspots, that
stressed the independence of the parts composing the universe.
Analogously, the theory of the divine right of the monarchy was formu-
lated in response to a perceived overemphasis on the independence of the
sovereign in earlier formulations. She elaborates this argument through
readings of 17th century texts, including Louis XIV’s memoirs to the
crown prince, and analysis of the role of ambassadors as mediators of
the king’s authority.
JN5801 978-90-04-15527-5
Public opinion and changing identities in the early
modern Netherlands; essays in honour of Alastair Duke.
Title main entry. Ed. by Judiht Pollmann and Andrew Spicer.
BRILL, ©2007 305 p. $129.00
Alastaire Duke, whose work focused on the Netherlands, was one of a
generation of historians whose work on public opinion in Early Modern
Europe helped challenge Jürgen Habermas’s theory that the public
sphere only arrived in the 17th century with the emergence of the coffee
houses, salons, and the like. In this volume, Pollmann (Early Modern
Dutch history, U. of Leiden, the Netherlands) and Spicer (Early Modern
European history, Oxford Brooks U., UK) present 14 contributions from
former students of Duke that mine the same sort of material in Early
Modern Dutch history. Examples of topics discussed include the role of
public rumor in driving the Dutch Revolt of the mid-1560s, the use of a
range of media to shape ideas about Dutch patriotism, and the playing
out of debates over war and peace in the dramatic productions of the
early-17th century.
JN6531 2005-004827 978-0-415-36804-9
Post-Soviet civil society; democratization in Russia and the
Baltic states.
Uhlin, Anders.
Routledge, ©2006 205 p. $115.00
Many thought they would never see the USSR collapse; the monolith
would stand forever if only under the weight of its own inertia. However,
Uhlin (political science, Lund U.) demonstrates that democratization
revealed significant cleavages within the monolith, not the least of which
were caused by long-standing ethnic and social differences. Uhlin studies
developments in Russia, Latvia, Estonia and Lithuania using a unique
analytical framework derived from theories of democratization, civil
society, social movements and transnational relations to compare seg-
ments of society along with regions. He analyzes including independence
movements before and after communism, actors (including non-govern-
mental organizations) and activities in post-soviet civil society, unclear
boundaries such as those found in issues of political influence and eco-
nomic society, and efforts to make local civil society transnational. He
closes with a multi-level analysis of qualitative and quantitative indi-
cators of democratization.
JN6633 2006-436567 3-89821-558-X
Cleft countries; regional political divisions and cultures in
post-Soviet Ukraine and Moldova.
Katchanovski, Ivan. (Soviet and post-Soviet politics and society; 33)
Ibidem-Verlag, ©2006 286 p. $29.90 (pa)
Katchanovski (political science, U. of Toronto) traces the reasons why
Ukraine, although stressed by secessionist agitation, managed to remain
a single state while Moldova did not. He provides a theoretical and com-
parative framework based on the historical legacies of the regions
through the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, regional political divi-
sions after the communist era and subsequent regional separatist move-
ments, attitudes toward economic changes, the evolution of regional
political cultures in Ukraine and Moldova and the traditional influence
of cultural, ethnic, economic, political and religious leadership on
whether the states would remain relatively intact. In short, he finds that
westernmost regions tended to support independence while those of the
east were pro-Russian and pro-communist; the latter case led to the sep-
aration of the Independent Trandniestian Republic from Moldova.
–192–
JN6635 2006-016004 978-0-7656-1812-2
Understanding Ukrainian politics; power, politics, and
institutional design.
D’Anieri, Paul J.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 299 p. $29.95 (pa)
Addressing the question of why the ballyhooed “Orange Revolution” of
late 2004 failed to fulfill the promise of democratic reform predicted by
many Western commentators, D’Anieri (political science, U. of Kansas)
finds the answer in the political institutions of the former soviet republic.
He discusses the fragmented nature and ineffectiveness of the Ukrainian
Parliament, tracing the causes of the parliamentary weakness to institu-
tional design and the ability of the executive to pursue its goals by going
outside established constitutional rules. The fundamental root of the
problem, he concludes, is an imbalance in raw political power that is the
political and institutional legacy of the Soviet Union.
JN6693 2006-279317 978-0-7190-6149-3
Military and society in post-Soviet Russia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen L. Webber and Jennifer G. Mathers.
Manchester U. Press, ©2006 277 p. $60.00
Webber (Russian and East European studies, U. of Birmingham, UK) and
Mathers (international politics, U. of Wales-Aberystwyth, UK) present ten
papers that explore civil-military relations in post-Soviet Russia, going
beyond a focus on elite-level politico-military reaction and attempting a
holistic approach that brings together all aspects of the interaction
between civilian society and the military sphere, from high politics to the
portrayal of the military and warfare in rock music (for example).
Opening papers discuss the army as an institutional model, media-mil-
itary relations, and representations of war in film. More explicit political
and economic interfaces are discussed in chapters that look at civil reac-
tions to the wars in Chechnya, connections between military reform and
regional politics, and the economics of society-military relations.
Questions of citizenship and identity are explored in the final set of
papers, including the role of women soldiers, soldiers’ mothers and the
Chechen wars, and the integration of the Cossacks within the Russian
army. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
JN6699 2006-023459 978-0-8018-8562-4
Rebounding identities; the politics of identity in Russia
and Ukraine.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dominique Arel and Blair A. Ruble.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 365 p. $55.00
The ten chapters presented in this volume by Arel (political science, U. of
Ottawa, Canada) and Ruble (director, Kennan Institute, Woodrow Wilson
Center) approach the politics of cultural (ethnic, linguistic, religious, etc)
identity in post-Soviet Russian and Ukraine from different theoretical and
disciplinary perspectives. Papers review theories of nationalist mobiliza-
tions in the 1990s, discuss the role of language cleavages in the Ukrainian
elections, analyze the role of elites in attempting to reframe the role of
Islam in Russian culture, describe anti-Chinese immigration sentiments
in Siberia, explore shifts in map-making as reflective of legitimacy ques-
tions of Great Power politics versus the nationality principle, examine
shifting constructions of the category of “refugee” in Ukraine and Russia,
and discuss religious revival in the Ukraine as consequences of shifting
political and economic realities. Co-Published with the Woodrow Wilson
Center Press.
JQ292 2006-033222 978-0-7619-3516-2
India’s 2004 elections; grass-roots and national
perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ramashray Roy and Paul Wallace.
Sage Publications, ©2007 341 p. $72.00
Roy (visiting fellow, G.B. Pant Social Science Institute, India) and Wallace
(emeritus, political science, U. of Missouri, US) present 12 chapters ana-
lyzing the recent 2004 elections in the world’s largest democracy, India.
National-level analysis is presented as pertains to the Lok Sabha (lower
house of Parliament) results, Indian women in politics, and the role of
Hindu nationalism in the elections. Comparative issues are discussed in
chapters considering federalism and coalition governments in the states
of Kerala, Punjab, and Uttar Pradesh and the relationships between
issues of religion, caste, and regional dynamics. Analytical state-level
studies are presented for Gujarat, Andhra Pradesh, Bihar, Assam,
Meghalaya, Orissa, and West Bengal.
–193–
JQ628 2006-028381 978-0-7391-1177-2
Power, participation, and policy; the “emancipatory”
evolution of the “elite-controlled” policy process.
Masaki, Katsuhiko.
Lexington Books, ©2007 145 p. $65.00
Masaki (studies on global citizenship, Seisen U. in Japan) questions the
arguments underlying recent calls to expand citizen involvement in devel-
opment policy-making through institutionalizing countermeasures to
current decision-making processes, suggesting that stakeholders already
manage to influence decision-making through a complex form of “cul-
tural politics.” He defends this theory through an analysis of the micro-
level power struggles that resulted in the failure of Nepal’s
decentralization and participation agenda in flood control policy during
the 1990s, highlighting how “the multi-faceted and fluid nature of the
subject positions of national, district, and village-level actors opened
avenues for the general public to participate in shaping the evolution of
the overarching policy process.”
JQ659 2006-000052 0-7619-3466-9
Recolonisation; foreign funded NGOs in Sri Lankan.
Goonatilake, Susantha.
Sage Publications, ©2006 321 p. $32.95 (pa)
In what she believes is the first study of the impact of foreign-funded
non-government organizations on an entire country, rather than a par-
ticular sector within it, Goonatilake (World Academy of Arts and
Sciences) presents the case of Sri Lanka as a warning to other post-
colonial countries. She shows how the country already had a long tra-
dition of civil society and local organizations in the 1980s when such
organizations swarmed the island to provide exactly those elements. Now
civil society is gone, suppressed by an authoritarian state that took power
in the shadow of the do-gooders.
JQ1499 2005-034608 0-415-34909-5
Advancing East Asian regionalism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Melissa G. Curley and Nicholas Thomas.
(Politics in Asia series)
Routledge, ©2007 297 p. $120.00
Political scientists—most from eastern Asia and the Pacific, but some the
US and Britain—present results from their research in response to the
2002 China-ASEAN Roundtable in regionalism and community building.
They consider some of the progress toward regional cooperation in
various realms and the factors that have constrained such progress.
Among their topics are a multi-lateral security approach to building a
Northeast Asian community, and problems and prospects for regional
environmental cooperation.
JQ1506 2005-028469 0-415-37932-6
Chinese civil-military relations; the transformation of the
People’s Liberation Army.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nan Li. (Asian security studies)
Routledge, ©2006 212 p. $115.00
US and Chinese scholars of political science look at relations between
civilian and military leaders and institutions in China since the rise of
Deng Xiaoping’s policy of specialization reduced the role of the army in
party and societal politics, slowed the circulation of elites between the
two spheres, and concentrated the army on military modernization.
Their topics include factors and phases of army involvement in domestic
politics, myths about political commissars, and dual-use technologies.
JQ1506 2006-000015 978-0-7656-1660-9
Civil-military relations in today’s China; swimming in a
new sea.
Title main entry. Ed. by David M. Finkelstein and Kristen Gunness.
M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2007 326 p. $29.95 (pa)
Changes have come to the Chinese People’s Liberation Army (PLA),
compelled largely by the recent growth in the Chinese economy and the
resulting social changes. Along with reforms that reflected the role of the
PLA in the developing socio-economic climate, the PLA needed to become
a more professional force in a corporate and institutional sense and a
more capable force in an operational sense to meet the challenges of
modern warfare and security concerns. This collection of 14 papers,
presented at a May 2004 conference in sponsored by the CAN
Corporation in Alexandria, Virginia, contributors describe significant
domestic issues, the relationship of a new generation of civilian and
military elite at national and local levels, and the continuing impact of
the economy on the PLA’s ability to attract worthy recruits and move
toward high technology.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JQ1510 2006-007916 978-0-87220-818-6
The government of the Qin and Han Empires; 221 BCE-
220 CE.
Loewe, Michael.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2006 224 p. $34.95
Writing for a non-specialist audience, Loewe (emeritus, Chinese studies,
U. of Cambridge, UK) introduces the institutional structures of the Qin
and Han dynasties of China (221 BCE-220 CE). In addition to describing
the institutional means by which the Qin and the Han ruled, Loewe also
seeks to shed light on how these institutions affected the lives of the
ruled.
JQ1758 2006-016244 0-295-98646-8
Party building in the modern Middle East.
Angrist, Michele Penner. (Publications on the Near East)
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 247 p. $50.00
How did Turkey manage, with periodic military coup exceptions, to
establish stable competitive electoral institutions, while most of the other
states emerging out of the collapse of the Ottoman Empire did not? In
answering this question, Angrist (political science, Union College in
Schenectady, New York) points to the political party system characteristics
at the establishment of the foundational political regimes at the time of
independence for the countries of the Middle East. She identifies three
party system characteristics that help explain variations in foundational
regimes: the number of parties, the presence or absence of political polar-
ization, and the presence or absence of “mobilizational asymmetry” (e.g.
the existence of significant gaps in contending parties’ respective abilities
to get out the vote.” These factors are examined as a means of explaining
the political regime outcomes in Tunisia, South Yemen, Algeria, Iran,
Iraq, Jordan, Syria, Egypt, and Turkey.
JQ1850 2006-021635 978-1-58826-461-9
Democracy and authoritarianism in the Arab world.
Pratt, Nicola.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 236 p. $55.00
Rejecting the essentializing conceptualizations of the exceptionalism of
Arab-Muslim political culture found in the writings of such figures as
Samuel Huntington and Bernard Lewis, Pratt (comparative politics and
international relations, U. of East Anglia, UK) theorizes the history of
Arab authoritarianism in terms of political regimes and the complex of
social relations rooted in class, gender, religious, and ethnic differences.
Focusing on the one-party states of Algeria, Egypt, Iraq (prior to the US
invasion), Syria, and Tunisia, Pratt connects the development of authori-
tarianism to state- building responses to the economic problems rooted
in the colonial period that suppressed competition to executive power and
secured popular consent through the provision of socio-economic ben-
efits. The persistence of authoritarianism in the absence of the economic
factors that underpinned its emergence is connected to a Gramscian con-
ception of ideological hegemony.
JQ1850 2006-022320 0-8156-3099-9
Democracy and civil society in Arab political thought;
transcultural possibilities.
Browers, Michaelle L.
Syracuse U. Pr., ©2006 279 p. $29.95
Browers (political science, Wake Forest U.) analyzes the conceptual evo-
lution of “democracy” and the more recent “civil society” in Arabic lan-
guage discourse, attempting to combine various approaches of conceptual
history: including the German genre of Begriffsgeschichte, which charts
shifting usage of sociopolitical language; Anglo-American critical con-
ceptual history, which interprets concepts within the framework of intel-
lectual, political, and linguistic discourses; Michael Freeden’s emphasis
on ideologies; and others. A significant portion of his focus is on the act
of translation and its implications for conceptual change. Overall, his
argument counters claims of Arab democratic “exceptionalism” and
finds a rich and contested discourse on “democracy” and “civil society”
in Arab intellectual traditions, even if they haven’t been transferred into
democratic practice by Arab governments.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JQ1852 2005-035072 0-415-39896-7
Popular movements and democratization in the Islamic
world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kisaichi Masatoshi. (New horizons in Islamic
studies)
Routledge, ©2006 196 p. $120.00
The nine papers presented by Kisaichi (Islamic studies, Sophia U.,
Turkey) are based on talks delivered at an international symposium
organized by the Islamic Area Studies Project and the Japanese gov-
ernment and titled “The Dynamism of Muslim Societies: Toward New
Horizons in Islamic Area Studies.” Broadly speaking, the papers address
issues of Islam and democracy, which Kisaichi believes are irreconcilable
at a generalized level, although noting within people’s movements and
activism a “feeling of resentment on the part of the common man with
regard to power and a unique style of realizing political participation.”
It is these movements that the papers explore, especially those linked to
or led by Sufi organizations. The papers range geographically in focus
from Morocco to Indonesia and chronologically across the 20th century.
JQ1879 2006-020644 978-0-7546-4764-5
Against global capitalism; African social movements
confront neoliberal globalization.
Prempeh, E. Osei Kwadwo.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 189 p. $99.95
As Prempeh (Carleton U., Canada) observes in his introduction, critical
scholarship has gone quite a way towards shining light on the forms of
hegemonic power that have come to be known as neoliberal global-
ization, but relatively less work has been done investigating and ana-
lyzing the counter-hegemonic forces that have arisen in neoliberal
globalization’s wake. With this work, he seeks to spur a new research
agenda focused on counter-hegemonic contestation and resistance in
Africa by emergent social movements and civil society groups by out-
lining the dialectical relationship between globalization and social move-
ments as they relate to issues of development, the New Partnership for
Africa’s Development (NEPAD), debt, trade, HIV/AIDS, and the privati-
zation of water.
JQ3036 2006-050920 978-90-04-15243-4
Shaping tradition; civil society, community and
development in colonial northern Ghana, 1899-1957.
Grischow, Jeff D. (African social studies series; v.14)
BRILL, ©2006 264 p. $90.00 (pa)
For generations colonizers used the doctrines of civil society against those
they ruled or formerly ruled, creating a complex set of ideas about what
constituted African community. Here Grischow (African studies, Wilfrid
Laurier U.) uses the example of colonial northern Guana to explore
exactly how such concepts were used by colonizers to the ends of eco-
nomic development in the form of exploitation of labor and extraction of
resources while publicly considering the idea of “native states.” He
describes the process of developing the estates and preserving a very real
feudal peasantry, the evolution of the concept of community through
land use, native administration and direct taxation, loss of productive
power through demographic changes and manipulation, changes
brought by medical and other technologies, and eventually the role of
mechanized agriculture in the development of community from 1948 to
1957. The result is a rich, interdisciplinary and revealing study.
JQ3945 2006-025907 978-0-89206-486-1
Arab reform and foreign aid; lessons from Morocco?
Malka, Haim and Jon B. Alterman. (Significant issues series; v.28, no.4)
Ctr. for Strategic...Studies, ©2006 97 p. $16.95 (pa)
Two fellows with the Centre’s Middle East Program report on a project
to assess economic and political reform in Morocco and what lessons can
be learned from the experience there in attempts to reform the Middle
East in general. US and European scholars gathered background and con-
ducted interviews beginning in 2004, then visited Morocco for a week in
2006.
–194–
JS78 978-3-86649-034-5
The comparative study of local government and politics;
overview and synthesis.
Title main entry. Ed. by Harald Baldersheim and Hellmut Wollmann.
Barbara Budrich Publishers, ©2006 135 p. $23.95 (pa)
Part of a series intended to provide up-to-date overviews of specific
political science sub-fields, this volume is concerned with, as the title
indicates, the comparative study of local government and politics. Editors
Baldersheim (political science, U. of Oslo, Norway) and Wollmann
(emeritus, Institute of Social Science, Humboldt U., Germany) present five
essays that, in turn, review the general developments of the sub-field over
the past 40 years; explore the normative, theoretical, and empirical
dimensions of the relationship between the local and the global; examine
methodological issues; describe the institutional infrastructure of
research; and provide a general assessment of the state of the field and
suggestions for future research. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
JS100 2006-025016 978-0-7546-4836-9
E-governance in European and South African cities; the
cases of Barcelona, Cape Town, Eindhoven, Johannesburg,
Manchester, Tampere, The Hague, and Venice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Leo van den Berg et al. (EURICUR series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 250 p. $99.95
The authors (of the European Institute for Comparative Urban Research,
Erasmus U., the Netherlands) present a report that is based on an inter-
national comparative study into “e-governance” strategies in Barcelona,
Spain; Cape Town and Johannesburg, South Africa; Eindhoven and The
Hague, the Netherlands; Manchester, the UK; Tampere, Finland; and
Venice, Italy. Prior to analyzing the case material, the report constructs a
conceptual framework for analysis that draws distinctions between three
manifestations of the information revolution: local electronic content,
local access to new technologies, and local electronic infrastructure. It is
their main contention that it is the interactions between these three that
drive the dynamics of local information society and they discuss some
the policy implications that flow from acceptance of this contention.
JS391 2006-010591 0-8265-1541-X
The next form of democracy; how expert rule is giving
way to shared governance—and why politics will never be
the same.
Leighninger, Matthew.
Vanderbilt University Pr., ©2006 296 p. $27.95 (pa)
Leighninger (executive director, Deliberative Democracy Consortium)
argues that a generational shift heralding the next stage in the devel-
opment of the American political system in which citizens demand much
more day-to-day involvement in the crafting of government policy. He
looks at how theses demands first arose through community organizing
in response to issues of race relations and urban sprawl and gentrifi-
cation and describes the institutional structures that have been created at
in order to accommodate citizen pressure concerning issues of drugs,
education, and public finances.
JV22 2006-010042 0-02-865843-4
Encyclopedia of Western colonialism since 1450; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Benjamin.
Thomson Gale, ©2007 1315 p. $395.00
The overseas empires of Western Europe, including the US first as colony
then as colonizer, is deemed here to have ended in the middle to late 20th
century. Over 400 articles provide information about such aspects as eco-
nomic concepts and ideas, explorations and migrations, industries,
organizations and institutions, people and peoples, religions, scientific
and cultural practices, and wars and conflicts. Each is signed and
includes a bibliography and references to other articles. There is no cross-
referencing within the articles. Maps, monochrome photographs, and
other illustrations are frequent but clearly secondary to the text.
JV51 2006-013903 978-0-8166-4735-4
Decolonization and the decolonized.
Memmi, Albert. Trans. by Robert Bononno.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 148 p. $17.95 (pa)
Published in 1957, The Colonizer and the Colonized found French Tunisian
novelist Memmi (emeritus, sociology, U. of Paris, France) criticizing the
distorting relationships of French colonialism in a work that frequently
found on bookshelves next to Frantz Fanon’s The Wretched of the Earth
and Aimé Césaire’s Discourse on Colonialism. In this new book, he casts
his eye back on the disappointing fruits of decolonization, primarily
concerned with the Arab world and with Arab immigrants in France.
This time, he is much more in tune with the sensibilities of the former
colonizers, criticizing corrupt decolonized elites for poverty and other
problems and urging immigrants to integrate with their host societies.
–195–
JV6201 2006-6898 978-0-8160-6234-8
Immigration.
Powell, John. (Library in a book)
Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 298 p. $45.00
Powell (history, Oklahoma Baptist U.) offers a first-stop research source
on a particularly important issue in contemporary America—immi-
gration—for individuals just beginning to investigate the topic. Coverage
includes a general overview of the topic and of immigration laws, a
chronology of key events in the history of immigration and immigration
policy development in the U.S., brief profiles of key figures in American
immigration, a glossary of terms, a guide on how to research immi-
gration issues, an annotated bibliography of print and nonprint refer-
ences grouped by subtopic, and a detailed listing of international and
national organizations and agencies. Included in the appendices are
recent national legislation documents and proposals, and statistical
graphs and charts. Academic but accessible to the general reader.
JV6271 978-0-9742819-3-3
Immigration and America’s future; a new chapter, report
of the independent task force on immigration and
America’s future.
Meissner, Doris et al.
Migration Policy Institute, ©2006 153 p. $14.95 (pa)
Co-chaired by former Secretary of Energy under George W. Bush, Spencer
Abraham, and former congressional Democrat and co-chair of the 9/11
Commission, Lee Hamilton, the Independent Task Force on Immigration
and America’s Future was organized by the Migration Policy Institute
(MPI) in order to review American immigration policy. The result is a set
of policy proposals for a system that, according to the President of the
MPI, “meets US economic interests now and in the future, promotes long-
standing social goals and priorities, respects core US values, and dra-
matically improves the government’s ability to advance the rule of law, a
standard no longer being met by the status quo.”
JV6450 2005-028935 978-0-252-07305-2
American dreaming, global realities; rethinking U.S.
immigration history.
Title main entry. Ed. by Donna R. Gabaccia and Vicki L. Ruiz. (Statue
of Liberty-Ellis Island Centennial series)
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 563 p. $35.00 (pa)
This collection of research focuses on issues in immigration history. The
22 essays form an anthology that Gabaccia (immigration history, U. of
Minnesota) and Ruiz (history and Chicano/Latino studies, U. of
California at Irvine) aim at undergraduates. Essays, presented chrono-
logically and based around themes of transnationalism, community
building, making home, and citizenship, delve into what it means to be
an immigrant; aspects of race, gender, sexuality, class, and nationality;
and specific studies of immigrants in China, Italy, Lebanon, Canada, and
those in the US who are from Mexico, Cuba, Poland, and other countries.
Contributors are scholars of history, sociology, ethnic studies, women’s
studies, German, and American civilization at universities in the US.
JV6450 2006-021401 978-0-275-99294-1
Guarding the gates; immigration and national security.
LeMay, Michael C.
Praeger Security International, ©2006 323 p. $49.95
LeMay (national security studies, California State U., San Bernardino)
offers the first history of American immigration policy written in the
post-9/11 environment to focus specifically on the role of national
security considerations in determining that policy. Following an overview
of U.S. immigration policy, the various “waves” in the composition of
immigration to the U.S., and five distinct cycles or phases in immigration
policy, each of the five subsequent chapters explores in greater detail the
five cycles: the “Open-Door Era,” the “Door-Ajar Era,” the “Pet-Door Era”,
the “Dutch-Door Era,” and the “Storm-Door Era.” The text concludes with
a critique of recent laws and proposals, and likely developments in the
future.
JV6456 2006-018288 978-1-931859-35-6
No one is illegal; fighting racism and state violence on
the U.S.-Mexico border.
Akers Chacón, Justin and Mike Davis.
Haymarket Books, ©2006 333 p. $14.00 (pa)
California-based historians Akers Chacón and Davis set out the historical
and contemporary dimensions of the immigrant rights struggle, focusing
primarily on the US-Mexico border and the experience of working people
who cross the border, or who were crossed by it. They first trace the
political, racial, and class origins and evolution of the anti-immigrant
movement, then place the formation of immigration policy in the context
of the struggle between capital and labor. Award-winning Mexican
photographer Julián Cardona provides illustrations.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JV6465 2006-026241 978-1-4144-0329-8
Immigration and multiculturalism; essential primary
sources.
Title main entry. Ed. by K. Lee Lerner et al. (Social issues primary
sources collection)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 483 p. $115.00
This volume contains selected readings that offer insights into issues sur-
rounding immigration and multiculturalism in the US, Europe, and
around the world. The primary sources excerpted here include news-
paper articles, letters, speeches, legislation, interviews, memoirs, novels,
and songs written during the past two centuries. Each entry features an
editorial introduction, information on the author, and a list of resources
for further study. The organization of the volume is roughly chrono-
logical, by era.
JV6484 2006-045342 978-0-393-06145-1
Ellis Island; ghosts of freedom.
Wilkes, Stephen.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 140 p. $75.00
The buildings on Ellis Island that were used for medical examinations
and processing of immigrants were allowed to go to ruins after they were
closed in 1954. This oversized volume (10.5x13.25″) is filled with Wilkes’
superb photographs of the ruined buildings and their rooms, presented
in full-page color plates, some accompanied by a quote on a transparent
overlay page. The result is a moving tribute to the site, the buildings of
which have since been restored. Not indexed.
JV7284 2006-010215 978-0-7391-1235-9
Breaking the iron wall; decommodification and
immigrant women’s labor in Canada.
Zaman, Habiba.
Lexington Books, ©2006 187 p. $60.00
Along with globalization has come migration, which seemed to hold out
hope for workers and thereby nations to rise from poverty, at least tem-
porarily, in new environments. However, Zaman (women’s studies,
Simon Fraser U.) finds today’s transnational migration is largely market-
driven and workers, particularly women, have become cheap com-
modities. In this empirical and historical study of women’s experiences
she takes the case of Canada in an age of neoliberalism, examining inter-
sections of gender, class and race, analyzing the distance created for the
privileged and the return to feudalism of the worker, the crisis of access
to social benefits and services for immigrant women, the possibilities for
creating new skills that would inhibit their becoming commodities, and
the role of networks and associations in supporting immigrant women
as agents of change.
JV9120 2006-005890 978-1-84542-245-5
Public policy and immigrant settlement.
Title main entry. Ed. by Deborah A. Cobb-Clark and Siew Ean Khoo.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 238 p. $110.00
In the 1990s, the Australian Government’s Department of Immigration
and Multicultural Affairs commissioned two longitudinal surveys of
immigrant experiences over the first years of their settlement. Conducted
six years apart, the data from these studies provide a comparative oppor-
tunity to analyze the effects of changing immigration selection policy and
criteria, rules governing immigrant access to welfare benefits, and eco-
nomic and labor market conditions on immigrant experience. The editors
(both of the Research School of Social Sciences, Australian National U.)
present seven papers that analyze these effects, specifically focusing on
selection policy and labor market outcomes, the length of time it takes
immigrants to find employment, female immigrants’ participation in the
labor market, the role of immigration policy as it relates to language
skills and immigrant adjustment, immigrant health in the period after
arrival, and housing outcomes in the early years of settlement. A con-
cluding chapter assesses the overall impact of the changes in immigrant
selection policy.
Watch for four stars: ★★★★ The stars you see at the beginning of some
annotations can help with collection development. They indicate that a
previous edition has been cited in Books for College Libraries, 3rd ed., in
Guide to Reference Books, or in other standard references.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JX74 90-04-14548-6
Collected courses of the Hague Academy of International
Law; v.309 (2004) / Recueil des cours.
Title main entry.
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2006 451 p. $174.00
Published in French and English, this volume consists of two lectures
given at the Hague Academy of International Law by J.P. Karaquillo and
M. Maresceau. The first, in French, considers the development of inter-
national law regarding sport, its rules, and litigations. The second (in
English) discusses bilateral agreements concluded by the European com-
munity. This lecture does not provide a theory of the European com-
munity’s treaty-making but rather offers a basic insight into practice
regarding bilateral agreements and concentrates on their place in EC law
and analyzes agreements that have been set up between the EC with
other countries. There is no index. Martinus- Nijhoff is an imprint of
Brill.
JX1977 90-04-15511-2
Max Planck yearbook of United Nations law; v.10, 2006.
Title main entry. Ed. by Armin von Bogdandy and Rüdiger Wolfrum.
(series: title)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2006 738 p. $169.00
Edited by the directors of the Max Planck Institute of Comparative Public
Law and International Law, this publication recognizes the increased
worldwide impact of the UN and its specialized agencies and attempts to
create a forum in which to assess the potential of organizations to affect
the future course of international relations. Appropriately, the first article
is an overview of the future charter of the UN. The subsequent papers
address such topics as international law and military operations in space;
internet regulation and the role of international law; the right to a fair
trial in Islamic law; and human rights in the Afghan constitution. The
volume also includes reviews of recent books on relevant subjects. Nijhoff
is an imprint of Brill.
JX1977 92-1-100966-9
Yearbook of the United Nations 2004; v.58.
Title main entry.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 1610 p. $175.00
★★★★ The many events and issues of concern to the United Nations in
2004 are gathered into this lengthy, detailed report. The first five sections
contain chapters on political and security questions, human rights, and
economic, social, legal, institutional, administrative, and budgetary ques-
tions, with the information grouped by major geographic area. Any res-
olutions, decisions, and similar activities undertaken by the UN or one
of its related organizations are reported within the article for that
country and topic. Reports are also included from 18 related organiza-
tions, among them the World Bank, the World Health Organization, and
the World Trade Organization. Appendices contain a roster of the UN, its
charter and the statute of the International Court of Justice, the UN’s
structure, and the agendas of its principal organs in 2004. An earlier
edition is cited in Guide to Reference Books.
JX1995 90-04-15387-X
The international year book and statesmen’s who’s who
2007, 54th ed.
Title main entry.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2006 1818 p. $520.00
For those interested in international affairs and business, this directory
provides information on international and national organizations and
states of the world, and includes about 5700 brief biographies of key
figures—politicians, diplomats, and business people. Organizations (e.g.
the United Nations, the European Union, and intergovernmental organi-
zations) are chosen if they make a significant contribution to political or
commercial decision-making; they are organized into four categories:
political, commercial, scientific, and charitable and environmental objec-
tives. The structure and functions of these organizations is outlined. The
majority of the tome is taken up by entries on 380 countries, provinces,
state dependencies and territories, with data on their capital, government
and legal system, area and population, employment, banking and
finance, manufacturing and services, communications and transport,
health, education, religion, environment, and space program. These are
arranged alphabetically, with states or provinces listed after federal coun-
tries such as the UK, US, Canada, Australia, India, and Germany. Contact
information for agencies is included, and tables of economic and demo-
graphic data from the World Bank are supplied. Contact information is
given with the biographies. Martinus-Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
–196–
JZ43 2006-009987 978-0-7425-4024-8
Decolonizing international relations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Branwen Gruffydd Jones.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 275 p. $34.95 (pa)
The field of international relations is tainted by long-fostered habits of
distorted Eurocentric thought that ignores the imperial context of its
origins, charges Jones (African political economy, U. of Leeds, UK). In this
collection, she presents nine essays that analyze these Eurocentric and
imperial origins, along with their colonial and racial components, and
describe how they give rise to distortions that serve to obscure a world-
system of staggering inequality in wealth and power, with particular
topics including the invasion of Iraq and international law, the imperial
aspects of the concept of “good governance,” and amnesia about race in
the education of international relations. They also discuss moves towards
a decolonized field of international relations, specifically focusing on
African political historiography and the proper elements of a postcolonial
human rights discourse.
JZ1242 2004-023699 978-0-415-33940-7
Postcolonial politics, the internet, and everyday life.
Franklin, M.I. (Routledge advances in international relations and global
politics; v.35)
Routledge, ©2004 293 p. $115.00
Franklin (social and political theory, U. for Humanist Studies, Utrecht)
examines early and successful Internet forums and analyzes daily life
spent on the web. Given the influence of globalization and all its
attendant overtones of colonialism and post-colonialism, and dimensions
of gender, politics, ethnicity, and culture she does not find that life simple
or even consistent. Franklin works through the situation in the South
Pacific Islands, focusing on the marketing of neoliberalism, the appli-
cation of de Certeau’s practice theory in everyday life online, the revision
of sex and gender roles, political dissent online, identity, online power
relations, Internet research praxis, and the relations of knowledge and
power. She finds the person-to-person interactions on the net seem more
hospitable and equitable than the rigors of globalization, and there is
hope the web can make the process of development more human, if not
more fair.
JZ1253 2006-018732 978-0-7425-1689-2
Foreign policy analysis; classic and contemporary theory.
Hudson, Valerie M.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 223 p. $24.95 (pa)
Foreign policy analysis, as presented here by Hudson (political science,
Brigham Young U.), is grounded in the idea that theorizing the relations
between states cannot be reduced to treating states as unitary rational
actors. It instead recognizes a number of levels of analysis, including the
political psychology of world leaders; small group dynamics, organiza-
tional process, and bureaucratic process; culture and national identity;
domestic politics and opposition; and the international system. Hudson
explains theoretical approaches of foreign policy analysis for each of
these levels and explores the “promise and frustration” of attempting
their theoretical integration.
JZ1308 2006-279841 0-7456-3399-4
The cosmopolitan vision.
Beck, Ulrich. Trans. by Ciaran Cronin.
Polity Press, ©2006 201 p. $24.95 (pa)
Beck (sociology, Ludwig-Maximilian U. of Munich, Germany) charts the
“conceptual topography of the cosmopolitan outlook,” arguing for the
adoption of a cosmopolitan realism that is not reducible to multicultur-
alism or globalization. This cosmopolitan realism must recognize
actually existing cosmopolitanism and is further constituted by principles
aware of a civilizational community of fate, respectful of cosmopolitan
differences, open to cosmopolitan empathy and perspective-taking, and
knowledgeable about the need to mix cosmopolitanism with provin-
cialism. Distributed in the US by Blackwell Publishing.
JZ1316 2006-017191 0-415-38504-0
Nationalism and global solidarities; alternative projections
to neoliberal globalisation.
Title main entry. Ed. by James Goodman and Paul James.
(Routledge/Warwick studies in globalisation; 15)
Routledge, ©2007 214 p. $120.00
Political and other social scientists from Australia, the US, and Canada
explore the extent to which nationalism can be a foundation for solidar-
ities that can provide an alternative to neoliberal globalization. They con-
struct a framework for understanding the effect of globality on
nationalism, set out the logic of nationalism in globalizing contexts, and
address issues of solidarity and integration.
–197–
JZ1317 2005-010876 978-0-7391-1765-1
Crafting peace; strategies to deal with warlords in
collapsing states. (reprint 2005)
Lezhnev, Sasha.
Lexington Books, ©2005 119 p. $18.95 (pa)
Lezhnev (a policy advisor at Global Witness) argues that power-sharing
mediation is a wholly inappropriate tool for dealing with warlordism,
and he aims to encourage different policy approaches towards warlords
for the international community. Analyzing case studies of Sierra Leone
and Tajikistan, he concludes that dealing with warlord situations
requires a two-pronged strategic approach that includes unseating war-
lords through coercive measures and crafting policies that rebuild law
and order over the long-term, including economic development pro-
grams, integration schemes, and democratization policies. He explores
international, regional, and domestic policy tools for pursuing these
objectives.
JZ1318 90-04-15381-0
British and Canadian perspectives on international law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher P.M. Waters.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2006 407 p. $169.00
Twenty-four academics, researchers, and legal practitioners from the UK
and Canada contribute 19 chapters comparing British and Canadian per-
spectives on public international law. Coverage includes an introductory
overview of the subject, international criminal law, international human-
itarian law, extraterritorial jurisdiction, international human rights
petition systems, women’s international human rights norms, gender
guidelines in refugee determination cases, the impact of public emer-
gency discourse on human rights norms, human security, sustainable
development in international trade law, implementation of the Kyoto pro-
tocol, government regulation and corporate social responsibility, taxation
and tax sovereignty, transnational crime, and how municipal courts
receive international law. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
JZ1318 2006-050968 978-0-7425-4961-6
The ethical dimensions of global development.
Title main entry. Ed. by Verna V. Gehring. (Institute for philosophy and
public policy studies)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 96 p. $19.95 (pa)
As globalization continues, what happens across borders becomes more
important than what happens within borders, creating significant shifts
in power and control, especially at the grass-roots level. In seven essays
contributors reckon with past wrongs, analyze the treatment of the most
vulnerable citizens, and study the effects of ethics on globalization in
such topics as retribution and reconciliation as ethical possibilities, the
role of ethics in assigning complicity in mass violence, ethics in female
genital mutilation and child labor, the creation of development ethics, the
ethics of those opposing globalization, and the interesting ethical ques-
tions posed by globalization’s major inconsistencies.
JZ1318 978-90-04-15581-7
Globalization and political ethics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard B. Day and Joseph Masciulli.
(International studies in sociology and social anthropology; v.103)
BRILL, ©2007 458 p. $107.00 (pa)
As Day (political science, U. of Toronto, Canada) and Masciulli (political
science, St. Thomas U., Canada) observe in their introduction, debates
over globalization involve more than just facts and objectively meas-
urable probabilities; they also involve subjective judgments concerning
issues of obligation and propriety. In other words, debates over global-
ization must address the normative ethics of what individuals and col-
lectivities ought and ought not to do. They present 15 papers that explore
the ethics of a range of issues, from market reform in Russia to the insti-
tutional capacity of the United Nations to uphold human rights and
security, framing such concerns in terms of the tensions between state-
centered Hegelian ethics and the universal-cosmopolitan claims of
Kantian morality.
JZ1318 2006-280164 0-7456-3389-7
How much globalization can we bear?
Safranski, Rüdiger. Trans. by Patrick Camiller.
Polity Press, ©2005 72 p. $17.95 (pa)
This is a philosophical treatise that is concerned with how theoretical
constructions of globalization situate humans in relation to each other
and with how individuals will find their place in the globalized world.
The author insists on the need for individuals to keep globalization at
distance and for the continuing importance of boundaries and the other,
although not in a conservative sense. Distributed in the US by Blackwell
Publishing.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JZ1318 2006-018675 92-808-1129-0
Multilateralism under challenge?; power, international
order, and structural change.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edward Newman et al.
United Nations University Pr., ©2006 563 p. $49.00 (pa)
The macho lone-gun approach of the US Bush administration is not
singled out as the only problem facing multilateralism in international
relations, but most certainly receives most attention here. Scholars of
international relations, security, and law consider how the values and
institutions of multilateralism are evolving as the context in which they
operate change.
JZ1318 2006-278122 978-0-7453-2287-2
Vulnerability and violence; the impact of globalisation.
Kirby, Peadar.
Pluto Press, ©2006 246 p. $27.95 (pa)
Having written considerably about globalization, particularly in Ireland
and Latin America, Kirby (international relations and globalization,
Dublin City U.) here turns to the question of how the lives of individuals,
families, communities, and countries are being shaped by the phe-
nomenon. Violence he includes as both a cause and an expression of vul-
nerability. He follows a strict regimen: description, diagnosis,
interrogation, and remedies.
JZ1324 978-0-7748-1321-1
International ecopolitical theory; critical approaches.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eric Laferriére and Peter J. Stoett.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 168 p. $85.00
These seven papers had their origins in the efforts of editors Laferriére
(liberal arts, John Abbott College, Canada) and Stoett (political science,
Concordia U., Canada) to further the research design evoked by their
earlier International Relations Theory and Ecological Thought: Towards a
Synthesis, which not surprisingly is concerned with the ways in which
international relations and ecology can inform each other and how such
a dialogue cant contribute to the building of sustainable communities on
the broad-scale and local levels. They have brought together contributors
from such fields as geography, political theory, philosophy, foreign policy
analysis, and systems theory in order to address this concern with inter-
national ecopolitical theory. Among the themes that emerge from the
papers are need to go beyond Malthusian analysis in linking social vio-
lence and natural resource use, the inadequacy of economistic
approaches to what the non-linear dynamics between nature and
humanity, and the contributions of critical theory to the building of inter-
national ecopolitical theory. Distributed in the US by the U. of
Washington Press.
JZ1405 2006-040998 978-1-4058-1201-6
Modern diplomacy, 3d ed.
Barston, R.P.
Longman, ©2006 387 p. $50.00 (pa)
What role does the International Monetary Fund have in diplomacy?
Does a smaller power really have a chance when it proposes restriction
of a larger power’s military enterprises? Barston (international relations,
U. of Reading) makes good use of his experience in diplomacy to give stu-
dents a background in diplomacy from the front lines to the back rooms.
He describes how diplomacy has changed from the days when it was a
family business to the nominally more democratic present, foreign policy
organization, negotiation, developing diplomatic practice, international
financial relations, trade and foreign policy, disaster and emergency
diplomacy (focusing on recent major events), security (including the
influence of international terrorism), violence and change, diplomacy
and mediation, the diplomacy of normalization, and international
treaties. He supplies extensive case studies on environmental diplomacy
and international agreements and in this edition includes new chapters
on diplomatic methods and practice.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JZ1480 2006-019775 978-0-7425-4911-1
Atlantic bridges; America’s new European allies.
Bugajski, Janusz and Ilona Teleki.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 285 p. $27.95 (pa)
A host of new issues of diplomacy are coming from some of the newest
members of the European Union (EU), the republics of central and
eastern Europe (CEE). Each has a unique post-Soviet experience, has a
distinct history and culture, and is in the process of creating and main-
taining foreign and domestic policies. Bugajski and Teleki (Both New
European Democracies Project, Center for Strategic and International
Studies) believe CEE states are US allies, anxious to be stable and capable
of contributing to security, but EU members first. They note differences
in approach and philosophy between EU states and the US, look closely
at how anti-Americanism enters into the mix, and describe differences in
policy that have emerged amongst CEE nations. They also address the
options the US must consider if it is to maintain relationships with CEE
nations.
JZ1480 2006-043673 0-375-42445-8
Ethical realism; a vision for America’s role in the world.
Lieven, Anatol and John Hulsman.
Pantheon Books, ©2006 199 p. $22.00
Lieven (a senior research fellow at the New America Foundation) and
Hulshman (a former senior research fellow at The Heritage Foundation
and a member of the Council on Foreign Relations) propose to steer
American foreign policy away from the contradictory directions of hard-
line realism and utopian morality and towards an “ethical realism” that
incorporates moral thinking into classical realist concerns of national
interests. They link this concept, influenced by Reinhold Niebuhr, Hans
Morgenthau, and George Kennan, with the concept of the “Great
Capitalist Peace,” which accommodates other great powers in an effort to
make stakeholders of much of the world. After expanding upon their
twin concepts they describe how they should be applied to the Iraq War
(e.g. establish a US-sponsored regional concert to prevent civil war) and
confrontations with Iran and Korea, among other foreign policy flash-
points.
JZ1480 2006-007251 0-7546-4774-9
Hegemony or empire?; the redefinition of US power under
George W. Bush.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles-Philippe David and David Grondin.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 237 p. $89.95
“How are we to understand US hegemony or empire, and indeed which
is it?” Although no single answer is provided by the ten papers presented
by David (political science, U. of Québec, Canada) and Grondin (interna-
tional relations and American studies, U. of Ottawa, Canada), that is the
overarching question addressed in this collection of interdisciplinary
papers. The first half of the text addresses general theoretical and con-
ceptual issues, including the misuse of the terms “hegemony” and
“empire” found in the literature, the geopolitical- strategic context of
American power, the Bush administration and the rhetoric of empire,
Bush administration actions that undermine international law, and con-
gressional influence over foreign policy in the “War on Terror.” The
remaining papers discuss regional implications and perceptions of US
hegemony/empire, looking at the Middle East, Mexico and Canada (the
“North American periphery”), Africa, Asia, and Europe.
JZ1480 2005-037705 978-0-7391-0989-2
Oil and terrorism in the new Gulf; framing U.S. energy
and security policies for the Gulf of Guinea.
Forest, James J.F. and Matthew V. Sousa.
Lexington Books, ©2006 329 p. $29.95 (pa)
Forest (terrorism studies, US Military Academy) and Sousa, a foreign area
officer in the US Army specializing in sub-Saharan Africa, argue that the
lessons their country has learned from its experience in the Middle East
should be applied to US energy security interests in western and central
sub-Saharan Africa. Long-term national security for US, they argue, will
prove elusive unless the pursuit for oil is accompanied by efforts to
increase state legitimacy and good governance.
–198–
JZ1570 2006-011924 978-1-58826-476-3
Europe and the Middle East; in the shadow of September
11.
Youngs, Richard. (Studies on the European polity)
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2006 255 p. $55.00
Youngs (Fundación para las Relaciones Internacionales y el Diálogo
Exterior, Madrid and politics and international studies, U. of Warwick)
examines the strategies of the European Union and European national
governments in their proclaimed efforts to encourage political reform in
the Middle East after the American attack. He analyzes the balance
between their commitment to political reform and their traditional
counter-terrorist and containment-oriented cooperation. He also questions
the degree to which understandings of strategic interests really changed
after 2001.
JZ1570 2005-024434 0-415-35983-X
International relations in Europe; traditions, perspectives
and destinations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Knud Erik Jørgensen and Tonny Brems
Knudsen. (Routledge advances in international relations and global pol-
itics; 44)
Routledge, ©2006 273 p. $120.00
Bemoaning the lack of attention to the development of international rela-
tions theory and theoretical debates in Europe, Jøgesen (European pol-
itics, U. of Aarhus, Denmark) and Knudsen (international relations, U. of
Aarhus) present a collection that begins to fill the gap. The first seven
papers provide accounts of particular national or regional traditions, cov-
ering France and other Francophone countries, Italy, Germany, Spain, the
Nordic countries, the United Kingdom, and the Czech Republic. The other
two papers discuss the way individual political cultures influence theo-
rizing in international relations and explore the mechanisms and
processes for the transfer of international political theory across borders.
JZ1570 2006-013337 978-0-7546-4832-1
Security versus freedom?; a challenge for Europe’s future.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thierry Balzacq and Sergio Carrera.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 313 p. $99.95
Bringing together both policy oriented and academic papers, Balzacq (U.
of Namur, Belgium) and Carrerra (Centre for European Policy Studies,
Belgium) present a collection that addresses issues raised by the
European Council’s Hague Programme on “Strengthening Freedom,
Security, and Justice in the European Union.” Under the thematic
heading of “Freedom,” the first five papers discuss asylum legislation in
Europe, the compatibility of EU immigration acquis with international
and European human rights law, and the types of immigrant inclusion
programs across the European Union. The focus shifts to security for he
next seven papers, which discuss data surveillance and border control,
integration of border management, the European Neighbourhood Policy,
and the status of the Common Foreign and Security Polity after the
Constitutional Treaty. The final three papers discuss transparency,
justice, and territoriality; trust-building measures in the European
criminal justice; and policy recommendations for the development of
Justice and Home Affairs.
JZ1980 2006-020883 978-1-58826-194-6
Asia Pacific in world politics.
McDougall, Derek.
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 371 p. $59.95
McDougall (politics, U. of Melbourne, Australia) presents a textbook ana-
lyzing the international politics of the Asia Pacific region. He opens with
chapters on the roles and interactions of the United States, China, and
Japan, followed by discussion of the Taiwan and Korea conflicts. He then
turns to the international politics of Southeast Asia, concentrating his
focus on Indonesia and concludes with discussion of Russia, Australia,
regional international organizations (ASEAN and APEC), and the UN.
JZ3675 2006-011533 978-0-7391-1286-1
Redrawing the map to promote peace; territorial dispute
management via territorial changes.
Tir, Jaroslav. (Innovations in the study of world politics)
Lexington Books, ©2006 169 p. $23.95 (pa)
Analyzing the empirical record of all 20th century territorial change
cases, Tir (political science, U. of Georgia) attempts to answer twin
questions regarding the extent to which territorial changes may resolve
territorial disputes between countries and promote peaceful contexts
between territorial gainers and losers and which factors influence the
likelihood of future militarized conflict or peace between involved
parties. The two most significant factors he concentrates on are the
correspondence between the territorial change and the underlying
dispute and the process (conquest, peace conference, secession, etc.) by
which territorial change was effected.
–199–
JZ4034 2006-272813 0-8020-3881-6
Complex sovereignty; reconstituting political authority in
the twenty-first century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edgar Grande and Louis W. Pauly.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2005 348 p. $60.00
Crossing the disciplines of political science, international relations, soci-
ology, and political economy, this collaborative study organized by
Grande (political science, U. of Munich, Germany) and Pauly (political
science, U. of Toronto, Canada) seeks to elaborate the shifting nature of
political sovereignty, hitherto invested in the nation-state. The 13 contri-
butions investigate the institutionalization and overall institutional archi-
tecture of new transnational forms of governance, the willingness and
ability of states to cooperate with these new forms of governance, the role
of private actors and their possible contribution to transnational gover-
nance, and the democratic legitimacy of new forms of governance.
JZ4841 2006-019522 978-1-56549-227-1
Humanitarian alert; NGO information and its impact on
US foreign policy.
Stoddard, Abby.
Kumarian Press, ©2006 245 p. $24.95 (pa)
Do the large international humanitarian non-governmental organizations
(NGOs) act as independent bodies seeking to influence government and
corporate policies in conformity with their stated values or, as a growing
number of leftist critics contend, are they beholden to their state
financial sponsors and carrying out their activities in concordance with
the foreign policy goals of these sponsors? The answer of Stoddard
(Center on International Cooperation, New York U.) is somewhere in
between, arguing that the large humanitarian NGOs do have a significant
influence on government policy, but as field-level information sources
and technical advisors, not as advocacy groups. She pursues this
argument through case studies of US foreign policy towards Somalia,
Bosnia, and Kosovo, concluding that information from NGOs helps shape
policy-makers perceptions and initial reactions, but that they tend to get
shunted aside as the government becomes more political engaged with
the issue.
JZ4841 2006-013772 978-1-84407-368-9
NGO accountability; politics, principles, and innovations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lisa Jordan and Peter van Tuijl.
Earthscan Publications Ltd., ©2006 257 p. $120.00
This volume examines the issues and politics of non-governmental organ-
izations and their accountability, in all sectors and around the world. The
13 chapters were developed out of a workshop on the topic held in
January 2003 in Bandung, Indonesia; some of the papers are used as a
basis for the chapters here, while others are new. Focusing on the
political framework of NGO accountability, the book takes a rights-based
approach to questions of global governance, legislations and regulation,
and innovations in the field. The international group of scholars and
researchers also discuss the benefits of governance, specifically in China
and Indonesia; other countries examined include Uganda, the
Philippines, and the UK. Jordan works in governance and civil society at
the Ford Foundation, and Van Tuijl has lengthy experience working on
NGO capacity-building, governance, and accountability issues.
Distributed by Stylus.
JZ4841 2006-023642 978-1-56549-230-1
NGOs in international politics.
Ahmed, Shamima and David Potter.
Kumarian Press, ©2006 285 p. $24.95 (pa)
Noting that most of the work on the role of non-governmental organiza-
tions (NGOs) in international politics is only to be found in the specialist
literature, Ahmed (political science and criminal justice, Northern
Kentucky U., US) and Potter (political science, Nanzan U., Japan) intend
this work to serve as an introductory textbook on the topic for under-
graduate audiences. They place NGOs in the context of the major inter-
national relations theories and describe their historical development.
They further review the range of activities engaged in by NGOS in the
current global environment and describe their interactions with inter-
governmental organizations, particularly the United Nations and the
World Bank.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JZ5538 2005-018136 0-415-38360-9
Nordic approaches to peace operations; a new model in
the making?
Jakobsen, Peter Viggo. (Cass series on peacekeeping; 22)
Routledge, ©2006 259 p. $115.00
Are Denmark, Finland, Norway and Sweden especially blessed in their
peace operation abilities? It may seem so, or at least they have developed
a model that takes transnational considerations into account, provides for
mutual support and collective effort, affords flexibility, and helps other
regions conduct their own successful peacemaking efforts. Jakobsen
(international studies, Danish Institute for International Studies), uses his
academic skills and his practical experience in describing how the Nordic
nations developed new systems and approaches at the close of the Cold
War, focusing on the old Nordic model of 1957-87, the growing awareness
of the need for a new model, and the approaches to peace operations by
each of the nations. He asserts that a new Nordic model will likely come
into play in the international responses to terrorism.
JZ5566 978-3-8329-1737-1
Global governance and the role of non-state actors.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gunnar Folke Schuppert. (Schriften zur
Governance-Forschung; band 5)
Nomos, ©2006 273 p. $61.00 (pa)
Eleven contributions from international scholars consider the role of non-
state actors (such as non-governmental organizations and transnational
corporations) in global governance. Sample topics include the trans-
parency principle and the regulation of corporations; non-state actors in
the governance of global financial markets; and the changing role of the
state. The volume, which is not indexed, contains papers originally pre-
sented at a November 2004 conference held at the London School of
Economics and Political Science. Distributed in the U.S. by ISBS.
JZ5588 2006-017539 0-415-33397-0
Culture and security; symbolic power and the politics of
international security.
Williams, Michael C. (The new international relations)
Routledge, ©2007 172 p. $120.00
While Williams (international politics, U. of Wales, UK) feels that the
social constructivists are right to emphasize the importance of culture—
norms, values, and identities— in recent studies on international security
in the 1990s and to criticize treatments of culture as purely instrumen-
talist tool of more materialist interests, he feels it is wrong to neglect
strategic agency in accounts of the role of culture in security. Influenced
by Pierre Bourdieu’s “structuralist constructivism,” he seeks to demon-
strate that articulations of culture and security, such as claims of the
essential connections between peace and democracy and policies aimed
at extending self-declared “democratic security communities” such as the
North Atlantic Treaty Organization, have been essential forms of cultural
and symbolic power in the construction of security relations in the
aftermath of the Cold War.
JZ5588 2006-002741 978-0-7546-4644-0
Old Europe, new security; evolution for a complex world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Janet Adamski et al. (Ethics and global pol-
itics)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 175 p. $99.95
When some western European nations expressed reluctance to engage in
the war in Iraq, they were accused of relying on the resources of the US
to solve shared security problems and were labeled “Old Europe.” In this
collection of 11 papers and a summary conclusion, contributors critically
evaluate the choices western European nations have made relative to the
realities of security after the Cold War, and how they have consciously
applied economics, diplomacy, and the power of inclusion above military
intervention. Conceptual topics include shared power, historical
precedent, symbolic security and human values, searching for a strategic
role, structures and institutions, the transformation of NATO, and
defense policy, while papers on how western Europe has applied these
concepts cover accession in the Balkans, soft power in the Middle East,
relations with the Russian Federation, and approaches to Latin America.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
JZ5588 2004-447833 92-1-142253-1
The United Nations disarmament yearbook.
Title main entry. Ed. by Department for Disarmament Affairs.
(Disarmament, study series; 30)
United Nations Publications, ©2006 506 p. $30.00 (pa)
Continuing its three decades of work of documenting weapon-related
events, this edition serves as an authoritative chronicle of international
efforts to control or eliminate the world’s most deadly weapons in 2005,
focusing on the UN General Assembly and its associated committees and
organizations that address disarmament. Highlights include the General
Assembly’s adoption of the International convention on the Suppression
of Acts of Nuclear Terrorism and an instrument to identify and trace
illicit small arms, work on acting to keep terrorists from acquiring
weapons of mass destruction, and moves toward establishing nuclear-
weapon-free zones. Other report topics include treaty conferences and
other nuclear disarmament and non-proliferation issues, biological and
chemical weapons, conventional weapons, regional disarmament, inter-
national aspects, and relevant studies, information and education.
Appendices contains relevant disarmament resolutions and decisions.
JZ5625 2005-020200 978-0-415-38667-8
Controlling the weapons of war; politics, persuasion, and
the prohibition of inhumanity.
Rappert, Brian. (Contemporary security studies)
Routledge, ©2006 223 p. $120.00
Examining humanitarian weapons prohibitions in customary and
statutory law, multilateral treaties, United Nations resolutions, and
national legislations, Rappert (sociology, U. of Exeter, UK) is primarily
concerned with how classifications are formulated that determine what
prohibitions are prudent and workable. In discussing this process, he
concentrates on how descriptions, evidence, and arguments are mar-
shaled in order to contest the appropriateness or inappropriateness of
various types of weaponry. Both conventional and nonconventional
weapons are considered.
JZ5675 2006-020917 978-92-808-1131-5
Arms control after Iraq; normative and operational
challenges.
Title main entry. Ed. by Waheguru Pal Singh Sidhu and Ramesh
Thakur.
United Nations University Pr., ©2006 438 p. $45.00 (pa)
US accusations of a “grave and gathering” threat from non-existent Iraqi
nuclear weapons programs helped pave the way for Iraq’s invasion and
occupation, but unsurprisingly there remains a great diversity of opinion
among the world’s governments and other actors over the efficacy and
desirability of current international mechanisms that are purported to be
aimed at a nuclear-weapons-free world, suggesting that the “after Iraq”
reference of the title is intended to refer more to the current temporal
moment than any significant paradigm shift. The 20 chapters presented
by editors Sidhu (Geneva Centre for Security Policy, Switzerland) and
Thakur (senior vice-rector, United Nations U., Japan and Assistant
Secretary-General of the United Nations) in this work reflect some of this
diversity in looking at doctrinal issues regarding the use of force, shifts
in (American) nuclear policy from deterrence to compellence, and the
effective abandonment by the five original nuclear powers of their Non-
Proliferation Treaty disarmament obligations; the place and role of the
United Nations in nuclear weapons non-proliferation efforts; regional
dynamics of proliferation concerns in Northeast Asia and the Middle
East; policy dynamics of nuclear weapons holding states, both NPT sig-
natories such as the US, and non-NPT signatories such as India and
Israel; and possible nuclear weapons threats from non-state actors.
JZ6005 2005-013139 0-415-36300-4
Russia and NATO since 1991; from cold war through cold
peace to partnership?
Smith, Martin A. (Routledge advances in international relations and
global politics; 42)
Routledge, ©2006 163 p. $105.00
The North Atlantic Treaty Organization was founded, primarily, as a
Euro-American military organization concerned with confronting the
Soviet Union, thereby posing difficult questions regarding its relationship
with Russia following the fall of the Soviet Union. In this work, Smith
(defense and international affairs, Royal Military Academy, UK) analyzes
the evolving relationship between NATO and Russia from 1991-2005,
assessing the extent to which a strategic partnership has been estab-
lished. In exploring the relationship, he pays particular attention to the
Kosovo crisis, the September 11th attacks, the invasion of Iraq, and the
creation of the NATO-Russia Council.
–200–
JZ6374 978-90-04-15678-4
International peacekeeping; the yearbook of international
peace operations; v.11. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Harvey Langholtz et al.
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2007 471 p. $395.00
The core of this yearbook consists of nine long articles reviewing legal,
ethical, political, and practical issues related to United Nations and other
international peacekeeping activities around the world. Topics covered by
these papers include a review of the activities of the UN Special
Committee on Peacekeeping Operations form 1965 to 2005, civil-military
cooperation in UN peace operations, fender and peacekeeping, law-
making by international administrations, the legal framework of peace
operations by regional organizations, the evolution of the relationship
between South Korea and the United Nations, and the UN’s legal obliga-
tions in terms of rule of law in peacebuilding operations. Also included
in the volume are notes and recommendations from meetings of the
International Association of Peacekeeping Training Centres, International
Society for Military Law and the Law of War, and the International
Institute of Humanitarian Law. Book reviews of Dieter Fleck’s Customary
International Humanitarian Law and Hans-Joachim Heintze’s The UN,
Human Rights and Post Conflict Situations are then followed by a listing
of books received, a bibliography, and a chronicle of events. The accom-
panying CD-ROM reproduces UN Security Council resolutions, UN
reports, and other relevant documentary materials. Martinus-Nijhoff is
an imprint of Brill.
JZ6374 0-415-39370-1
Military forces in 21st century peace operations; no job
for a soldier?
Arbuckle, James V.
Routledge, ©2006 194 p. $120.00
Arbuckle (Lester B. Pearson Canadian International Peacekeeping
Training Centre), a seasoned infantryman of several decades’ standing,
explains why managing modern conflicts requires carefully planned and
executed joint civil and military effort. He believes the primary reason
why joint efforts have been afterthoughts at best in the past is cultural,
and involves complex attitudes and beliefs that may or may not be true,
creating tension and a sense of competition among parties who should
be cooperating on a mission. He starts with a conceptual framework for
peace operations that includes civilian and military involvement, then
describes military culture and popular perceptions about it, including the
degree of its cohesion. He describes the military in its role as a partner
agency, including in force structures and both staff and line functions,
and describes the training and education that will be necessary to create
a holistic peacekeeping approach.
JZ6374 2006-026027 0-275-99214-4
UN peacekeeping; myth and reality.
Sitkowski, Andrzej.
Praeger Security International, ©2006 189 p. $49.95
Sitkowski draws on his three decades of service as a staff member and
adviser to peacekeeping missions, and the accounts of participants and
historians of such missions, to analyze what goes wrong too often and
right too rarely. He concludes that the United Nations’ attempt to conduct
peacekeeping but not peace enforcement limits the effectiveness of mis-
sions and allows aggressors and warlords to carry on war, atrocities, and
ethnic cleansing with impunity.
JZ6374 2005-049764 0-415-37203-8
UN peace operations and Asian security.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mely Caballero-Anthony and Amitav Acharya.
Routledge, ©2005 146 p. $110.00
Inspired by the workshop of the same title held in Tokyo in February
2003 by the Institute of Defense and Strategic Studies of Nanyang
Technical U. (Singapore) and the United Nations U. (Japan), these nine
papers including an introduction examine the current state of UN peace
operations and analyze issues of critical relevance to the security of the
region. Contributors focus on current trends in UN peacekeeping from
regional and Asian perspectives, the involvement of non-governmental
organizations in conflict resolution, Japan’s policy and China’s changing
attitude toward UN peacekeeping, the work of the UN and others in
Cambodia, and the role of the UN in East Timor’s moving from self-deter-
mination to state-building. The conclusion details Asian norms and prac-
tices in UN-based peace operations. The volume includes a digest of UN
peacekeeping operations for May through July 2004 and a brief review
of documentation relating to possible peacekeeping in southern Sudan.
–201–
LAW
K23 90-04-15257-1
Spanish yearbook of international law, v.10, 2004.
Title main entry. Ed. by Asociacion Espanola de Profesores de Derecho
Internacional y Relaciones Internacionales.
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2006 500 p. $228.00
Compiled annually by the Spanish Association of Teachers of
International Law and International Relations, this yearbook publishes
English translations of key articles and notes dealing with international
law doctrine, with particular reference to the Spanish practice. Volume X
(2004) contains four articles covering the Prestige Oil Spill, the War on
Iraq, EU immigration policy, and article IX of the Convention on the
Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide. Subsequent sec-
tions review Spanish diplomatic and parliamentary practice; treaties;
municipal legislation; and judicial decisions. The volume concludes with
a survey of literature on private and public international law published
in Spain and/or by Spanish authors in 2004.
K213 2006-009707 0-7546-4874-5
Comparative legal linguistics.
Mattila, Heikki E. S. Trans. by Christopher Goddard.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 347 p. $134.95
While studying comparative law, Mattila (U. of Lapland, Finland) realized
that a big part of the field entails analyzing differences between legal
concepts in different legal systems, which are expressed through the
terms of the legal languages that those systems employ. Here, in a blend
of linguistic, legal, and cultural perspectives, she examines the functions
and characteristics of legal language, the specific features of legal con-
cepts and terms, the heritage of legal Latin, the major modern legal lan-
guages, and problems of legal translation. Goddard is an English lawyer
and French-English translator.
K230 2006-004575 978-0-8047-5525-2
How law knows.
Title main entry. Ed. by Austin Sarat et al. (Amherst series in law,
jurisprudence, and social thought)
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 208 p. $50.00
Six lectures presented at Amherst College in Massachusetts during the
2004-05 academic year sample some of the ways that the knowledge-
acquisition practices of various aspects of law impact legal outcomes and
the world beyond law. Legal scholars from as far away as Toronto and
Berkeley consider such topics as fact and the proof of fact in Anglo-
American law 1500-1850, legal realism as psychological and cultural
rather than political realism, and fact-finding in constitutional cases.
K236 2005-034558 0-7546-4724-2
Bijuralism; an economic approach.
Title main entry. Ed. by Albert Breton and Michael Trebilcock.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 228 p. $124.95
When contracting parties to a transaction are located in jurisdictions that
have different legal systems, the results can be, to put it mildly, chaotic
for trade, investment and migratory labor. In the current movement
toward globalization, a full range of chaos can easily become a daily
occurrence in countries operating under more than one legal system to
conduct business, such as Canada, India, the UK, the US and the
European Union. In this collection of 12 papers and commentaries
focusing on this situation, known as bijuralism (or multijuralism when
more than two legal systems are involved), contributors describe the eco-
nomics of legal systems that are forced to interact under a broader legal
order. Papers address bijural systems as factors of production, the chal-
lenges of incomplete law and how different legal systems respond, co-evo-
lution as an influence in the development of legal systems, and the
demand for bijurally trained Canadian lawyers.
K284 81-22332 0-275-98509-1
Origins of legislative sovereignty and the legislative state;
v.6: American tradition and innovation with
contemporary import and foreground. Book 2:
Superstructures (since mid-19th century).
Fell, A. London.
Praeger, ©2006 332 p. $149.95
The first book of Volume Six looked at the foundations from the late 18th
to the early 19th centuries, and this second looks at the superstructures
built upon those foundations from Abraham Lincoln to Ronald Reagan.
The three parts focus on the Civil War and Reconstruction, Progressivism
and the New Deal, and toward contemporary America. He finds that
later leaders and paradigm-builders were not as aware of European
antecedents as the Founders were. Fell is a semi-retired American
academic, presumably in political science but possibly history, law, or
some other discipline. He does not provide an index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
K367 0-8243-4102-3
Annual review of law and social science; v.2, 2006.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Hagan et al. (Series: title)
Annual Reviews, ©2006 418 p. $175.00
Hagan (Northwestern U.) et al. compile 18 critical articles that review
developments in the fields of law and social science and their rela-
tionship to each other. Authors discuss the following topics: history, law
and social movements, the social and legal construction of suspects, Max
Weber and the economic sociology of law, governmentality, labor law,
economy and crime, Islamic law and society after 9/11, fieldwork, net-
working, international human rights, emergency powers, postcom-
munism, and transnational legality and local agency. Contributors work
in the fields of law, political science, sociology, criminology, and other
disciplines in the US, Canada, France, and Australia.
K370 2006-003910 978-0-7546-2505-6
Law, culture and society; legal ideas in the mirror of
social theory.
Cotterrell, Roger. (Law, justice, and power)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 198 p. $114.95
Cotterrell (legal theory, University of London) explores the links between
legal studies and social theory, and relates the study of law in society to
sociolegal research and to legal philosophy. He argues for a rethinking of
the concept of law to take account of the new forms of legal and cultural
pluralism and the growing significance of transnational law. He develops
an original approach to legal studies, which he calls a law-and-com-
munity approach, and uses it to look at issues related to legal doctrine
and its social consequences and contexts.
K487 2006-008608 0-7546-4720-X
Images in law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Wagner and William Pencak.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 318 p. $124.95
As part of the Third International Roundtable for the Semiotics of Law,
Wagner (Université du Littoral Côte d’Opale, France) and Pencak (history,
Penn State U.) compile 14 essays in this collection by scholars of law and
language from around the world. These scholars examine how images of
what people believe the law to be convey meaning, as well as legal lan-
guage and how images arise from conflicts between different systems
and interpretations. Essays examine the US Patriot Act, changes in
Chinese legal language, symbols of dress in the English legal system,
popular attitudes generated by TV shows, the influence of computers,
and the use of other images. The process of juries is analyzed, as are
police encounters, Irish law, and hate crimes in France.
K588 978-1-84113-641-7
An index to common law festschriften ; from the beginning
of the genre up to 2005.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Taggart.
Hart Publishing, ©2006 300 p. $50.00
are the focus of this index. Taggart (law, U. of Auckland, New Zealand)
fills a bibliographic gap in providing this index, derived from a Web-
based project at his campus, focusing on the compilations of essays hon-
oring a person or an event known as festschriften. About 300 festschriften
on subjects pertaining to common law from “access to justice” to
“women’s rights” are indexed by author, subject, editor, title, honor, and
date and ISBN. He also includes “hidden” festschriften, and some 1,000
entries of English language contributions to foreign language festschriften
pertaining to law, including areas outside of common law. Distributed in
the US by ISBS.
K600 978-0-521-68185-8
An introduction to the comparative study of private law;
readings, cases, materials.
Gordley, James and Arthur Taylor von Mehren.
Cambridge U. Pr., ©2006 581 p. $100.00
To respond to the expressed need for law schools to broaden their stu-
dents’ frame of reference, this introductory textbook provides texts and
materials on the historical development of modern legal doctrine, demon-
strating the close relationship between legal history and comparative law.
Gordley (U. of California Berkeley School of Law) and von Mehren (for-
merly, Harvard Law School) expand on their previous volumes on civil
law by giving an overview of private law, rather than a deep view of
selected topics. Although the volume contains some introductory
readings, its core is the statutes, codes and judicial decisions of the US
and England.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
K1066 978-0-8213-6488-8
Doing business 2007; how to reform.
Title main entry. (Comparing regulation in 175 economies)
The World Bank, ©2006 185 p. $35.00 (pa)
This is the fourth in a series of annual reports investigating regulations
that enhance and constrain business activity. It presents quantitative indi-
cators on business regulations and the protection of property rights, com-
pared across 175 economies and over time. The indicators are then used
to analyze economic outcomes and identify what reforms have worked,
where, and why. Regulations affecting 10 areas of everyday business are
measured, including starting a business, employing workers, getting
credit, protecting investors, and paying taxes. There is no subject index.
K1401 2005-031605 1-84542-038-1
The intellectual property debate; perspectives from law,
economics, and political economy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Meir Perez Pugatch. (New horizons in intel-
lectual property series)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 374 p. $135.00
Scholars and practitioners from the three professions look at current
debates around intellectual property rights from the perspectives of trade
investment and enforcement policies; business and public-private
partnerships; pharmaceuticals and biotechnology; competition, access,
and antitrust in the age of The Information Society; and geographical
indications.
K1401 2005-052088 1-84542-269-4
Intellectual property rights; innovation, governance, and
the institutional environment.
Title main entry. Ed. by Birgitte Andersen.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 359 p. $135.00
Ten papers from a June 2003 conference in Elsinore, Denmark look at
the belief systems underpinning intellectual property rights and the
impact of the increased enforcement of them worldwide. Economists,
with a smattering of business and law scholars, consider the general
commons, rationales for the rights, the performance of the patenting
system, and coordinating institutions of intellectual property rights
governance.
K1528 2005-033014 978-0-471-74067-4
Licensing best practices; strategic, territorial, and
technology issues.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Goldscheider and Alan H. Gordon.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 288 p. $90.00
Attorneys Goldscheider and Gordon present a follow-up to the Licensing
Executives Society International’s The LESI Guide to Licensing Best
Practices (John Wiley & Sons, 2002) that is intended to provide intellectual
property professionals with coverage of issues not addressed in the pre-
vious volume. Opening chapters offer legal commentary on technology
licensing regimes in China, India, Korea, Japan, Mexico, Scandinavia,
Thailand, Malaysia, Singapore, and Indonesia. Focus then shifts to scien-
tific issues in five chapters discussing global innovation and licensing
opportunities on the Internet, energy and environmental technology,
biotechnology, nanotechnology, and high-technology licensing royalty
compliance. The remaining six chapters discuss business, legal, and pro-
fessional issues, including licensing challenges encountered by a multi-
national law firm, managing intellectual property allocation in joint
ventures, experience in Norway with strategic alliances as a work form
when commercializing technology, application of game theory to intel-
lectual property royalty negotiations, and administration and auditing of
license agreements to promote control and harmony.
K1705 978-90-04-15586-2
International labour law reports; v.25.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alan Gladstone.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 467 p. $344.00
Reporters from mostly European countries present headnotes in English
and the judgment text in English or the original language for cases
relating to general principles of labor law and key concepts, basic rights
pertaining to labor, manpower, the individual employment relationship,
collective labor relations, and judicial and general administration. There
is no index, but cases are listed by jurisdiction and subject matter. Nijhoff
is an imprint of Brill.
–202–
K1770 978-90-04-15462-9
Systemic discrimination in employment and the
promotion of ethnic equality.
Craig, Ronald. (International studies in human rights; v.91)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 327 p. $169.00
Craig (Norwegian Centre for Human Rights at the U. of Oslo) argues that
traditional complaint-based anti- discrimination laws are inherently inad-
equate to respond to systemic discrimination in employment. He
examines the mechanisms and characteristics of systemic discrimination
and the shortcomings of complaint-based laws, noting that these charac-
teristics can also inform employers and government authorities about
effective preventive measures. In searching for a rational governmental
policy response to systemic discrimination, Craig evaluates selected legal
regimes that impose proactive obligations on employers to promote
equality in the workplace and explains why some of these regimes
function better than others. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
K3157 2005-028923 978-0-8160-6078-8
Encyclopedia of world constitutions; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gerhard Robbers.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 1092 p. $255.00
This three-volume encyclopedia, put together by Robbers (law, Institute
for European Constitutional Law, U. of Trier, Germany), is essentially a
comparative introduction to the political constitutions of the world’s
countries, from Afghanistan to Zimbabwe. Each of the approximately 200
articles is structured similarly. Following “at-a- glance” information and
discussion of the country’s constitutional history, information is provided
on the form and the impact of the current constitution; the primary prin-
ciples underlying the document; political bodies established by the con-
stitution; established electoral processes; and constitutional clauses
regarding political parties, citizenship, fundamental rights, the economic
system, religious communities, military defense and states of emergency,
and amendments. Most entries average three to four pages, but some,
such as that on the United States, provide more detailed treatment.
K3220 2006-022052 978-0-8047-5392-0
The new police science; the police power in domestic and
international governance.
Title main entry. Ed. by Markus D. Dubber and Mariana Valverde.
(Critical perspectives on crime and law)
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 308 p. $55.00
Taken from work at a June 2004 workshop held at the Baldy Center for
Law and Social Policy at State U, of New York-Buffalo Law School, this
collection of ten interdisciplinary essays deals with the power to police in
the interest of maximizing public welfare. With the variety of ways in
which the word “police” can be defined in mind, and the number of con-
texts in which it can be applied, contributors describe how the power and
science of policing have changed in light of recent US action, how the
new science of policing has been influenced by theory, theories of the
state in spiritual and earthly policing in early modern Europe, police
powers from a postcolonial perspective, police power and criminal law,
traffic policing as a civilizing process, military intervention as a form of
policing, international police and locating the idea of policing within
genealogies, discourses, locales and principles.
K3238 2006-925026 0-7546-4783-8
Courts and social transformation in new democracies; an
institutional voice for the poor?
Title main entry. Ed. by Roberto Gargarella et al.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 311 p. $124.95
Gargarella (Torcuato di Tella University, Argentina) collects case studies
from Latin America, Africa, India, and Eastern Europe to examine the
role of courts as a channel for social transformation to benefit excluded
sectors of society in contemporary democracies. Contributors in law,
political theory, and political science assess the role of judicial processes
in altering (or perpetuating) social and economic inequalities and power
relations in society, with a focus on social rights litigation in post-
authoritarian regimes and in countries with fragile state control. Courts
and social transformation in India, social rights as middle-class
entitlements in Hungary, and legal mobilization in Bolivia are some
subjects discussed.
–203–
K3240 978-90-04-15437-7
Human rights and policing, 2d rev.ed.
Crawshaw, Ralph et al. (Raoul Wallenberg Institute professional guides
to human rights; v.5)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 511 p. $196.00 (pa)
Crawshaw (Human Rights Centre, U. of Essex, UK), Williamson (Institute
of Criminal Justice Society, U. of Portsmouth, UK), and Cullen (a retired
British police superintendent) explore international human rights and
humanitarian law standards relevant to policing and discuss how they
can ensured. After introducing fundamental issues of democracy, human
rights, and policing, they analyze international standards governing
police responses to armed conflict, disorder, and tension and related
standards governing the use of force and firearms by police. They then
turn to the treatment of people detained in police custody, addressing the
issue of torture and the rights of detainees under international human
rights law, as well as specific standards concerning suspect interrogation.
They lay out their own thoughts on best policing practices in the forgoing
areas and conclude with a discussion of management in police organi-
zations, particularly with the management of change and anti- cor-
ruption reform. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
K3240 2006-025958 978-0-87586-494-5
Plato’s dreams realized; surveillance and citizen rights
from KGB to FBI.
Avakov, Aleksandr V.
Algora Publishing, ©2006 246 p. $23.95 (pa)
After having served time in a Soviet camp for dissidents, the author came
to the United States in 1981, only to find out some years later that the
Federal Bureau of Investigation had placed him under surveillance
shortly after his arrival. After briefly discussing these experiences, he sets
out on a broad investigation of the US national security state and its con-
flict with fundamental rights, mixing philosophical questions of privacy
and autonomy with historical and documentary investigation of US gov-
ernment surveillance.
K3263 2005-275722 0-7456-3111-8
The value of privacy.
Rössler, Beate. Trans. by R.D.V. Glasgow.
Polity Press, ©2005 272 p. $28.95 (pa)
Rössler (philosophy, U. of Amsterdam, the Netherlands) constructs a
political philosophical theory of the value of individual privacy, under-
stood as freedom from illicit interference in one’s actions, illicit surveil-
lance, and illicit intrusions into rooms or dwellings. His theory rests on
the connections between autonomy and privacy. It argues that autonomy
“can only be lived out in all its aspects and articulated in all its senses
with the help of the conditions of privacy and by means of rights and
claims to privacy.” In drawing these connections, he suggests that civil
liberties, without the protection of privacy, are insufficient for the full
enjoyment of autonomy, in itself the “telos of freedom.” Distributed in the
US by Blackwell Publishing.
K3263 2006-028565 978-0-275-98891-3
The war on privacy.
Klosek, Jacqueline.
Praeger, ©2007 232 p. $49.95
Klosek (an attorney specializing in issues of data privacy and security)
contends, “the ongoing global war on terror has led to an ongoing global
war on privacy.” He details the post-9/11 developments in the world’s
legal privacy regimes on a regional basis, offering separate chapters on
the United States, the Middle East and Africa, the European Union,
Canada and Mexico, Latin and South America, and the South Pacific and
Asia. He concludes arguing that the erosion of privacy rights worldwide
is undermining democratic aspirations.
K3275 2005-053065 978-0-7546-2474-5
Immigration.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Sterett. (International library of essays
in law and society)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 610 p. $300.00
Sterett (U. of Denver) presents a collection of 20 key essays on immi-
gration law, previously published between 1996 and 2005 in leading
journals of the law and society field. Twenty contributions are organized
into four sections: illegality, mercy and the language of deservingness;
transnationality; family and identity; and refugees and asylum-seekers.
The collection is preceded by an introductory essay by the editor illus-
trating the most important questions, approaches, and methods and pro-
viding a distinctive analysis of the scholarship presented in the text.
Indexed by name only.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
K3275 978-90-04-15614-2
The right to leave and return and Chinese migration law.
Liu, Guofu.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 428 p. $189.00
The right to leave and return (RLR) a state is considered fundamental,
but each state has its own set of policies and laws, some based on
economy and some on ideology. In the case of the People’s Republic of
China (PRC), the communist ideology appears to have affected the devel-
opment of RLR the most, and according to Liu (law, U. of Technology,
Sydney) this influence has caused significant restrictions and impedi-
ments to development. He notes that the PRC is undertaking reforms and
has succeeded to some extent in liberalizing its citizens’ rights to live and
work overseas, but still needs to make policies and laws consistent and
more accommodating in a globalization and developing economy. Liu
closely analyzes the current laws current in place and relates how they
evolved, investigates key cases, compares the PRC’s practice to the com-
monly accepted international standard, and makes significant recom-
mendations for improvement.
K3280 2006012939 978-0-8047-5575-7
Law and the sacred.
Title main entry. Ed. by Austin Sarat et al. (The Amherst series in law,
jurisprudence, and social thought)
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 192 p. $45.00
Six papers from a lecture series at Amherst College during the 2001- 02
academic year present perspectives from American scholars mostly of
law, but also political science and Middle Eastern studies. Their topics
include the profanity of law, pragmatic rule and personal sanctification
in Islamic legal theory, and the ethos of sovereignty.
K3585 2006-046387 1-84542-702-5
Implementing the precautionary principle; perspectives
and prospects.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth Fisher et al.
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 336 p. $135.00
In the last two decades the precautionary principle has become an estab-
lished feature of environmental, public health, and other risk regulation
regimes in jurisdictions around the world. This volume contains 14
essays by international academics and practitioners exploring some of
the complexities involved in the application of this key principle of public
decision making and considering its role in risk management and risk
assessment. Sample topics include precaution in WTO decision making,
climate change, and food safety. Six of the papers were first presented at
a 2003 environmental law conference held at the Australian National
University. Editor Fisher is affiliated with Corpus Christi College, U. of
Oxford, UK.
K3585 92-807-2564-5
Selected texts of legal instruments in international
environmental law.
Title main entry.
UN Environment Programme, ©2005 734 p. $60.00 (pa)
This publication provides legal information and material for judges, par-
liamentarians, government officials, lawyers, civil society organizations,
and teachers by serving as a reference of basic documents on interna-
tional environmental law. As part of the priorities of the Environmental
Law Branch Division of Policy Development and Law, the publication
contains up-to-date information, including key policy documents, texts of
major legal instruments, and basic texts in international law. The selected
texts range in date from 1945 (Charter of the United Nations) to 2003.
They consist of documents on the United Nations Environment
Programme’s Legislative Authority in Environmental Law, declarations
and global and regional agreements, excerpts of global and regional legal
instruments, and documents of the International Law Association and
the International Law Commission. Year of adoption and date of entry
into force are listed. There is no index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
K3823 978-90-04-15561-9
The World Bank legal review; law, equity, and
development; v.2.
Title main entry. (Series: title)
BRILL, ©2006 589 p. $485.00
Intended for policy makers, attorneys, and other professionals in inter-
national development, this volume features research on how the appli-
cation of the law and improvement of justice systems promote poverty
reduction, economic development, and the rule of the law. The volume
originated from the World Bank’s World Development Report 2006: Equity
and Development and a subsequent conference held in November 2005.
The report argued that development can be sustainable when equity is
present; it also discussed inequality issues. Most of the nineteen papers
here were drawn from a related forum on Law, Equity, and Development
held in December of 2005, which had an objective of defining the concept
of equity. Topics address rethinking the processes and practices of law
and development and exploring the institutional and policy context of
these processes in places such as Africa and Latin America. Contributors
discuss the relationship between development and human rights,
morality, and ethics, as well as environmental justice, and the rela-
tionship between intellectual property rights and the development of
inclusive economic markets. The final section contains papers on the
World Bank’s policies on physical cultural resources and indigenous
peoples. Papers were written by an international group of academics and
practitioners in law, criminal justice, economics, human rights, social
development, cultural studies, and anthropology, or those associated with
the World Bank. Some of the papers were previously published in other
volumes or journals.
K3850 2005-057450 1-84542-607-X
Innovation markets and competition analysis; EU
competition law and US antitrust law.
Glader, Marcus. (New horizons in competition law and economics
series)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 340 p. $110.00
Glader (an associate at Cleary Gottlieb Steen & Hamilton LLP, Belgium)
compares the standards for the protection of competition in the inno-
vation process in American antitrust law and European competition law.
He describes the development and current state of the relevant legal
frameworks and evaluates the extent to which they fulfill their under-
lying economic goals. Mergers case law is discussed in order to explore
how authorities have dealt with the potential negative effects from
lessened innovation competition, also addressing, albeit not as fully, cases
dealing with joint ventures, intellectual property, and abuse of domi-
nance. He concludes with suggestions for legal policy modifications and
the presentation of what he believes should form the central elements of
a policy for innovation competition.
K3871 2005-057742 978-0-8213-6468-0
Land law reform; achieving development policy objectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by John W. Bruce et al. (Law, justice, and devel-
opment)
The World Bank, ©2006 259 p. $35.00 (pa)
Drawing largely on the experiences of the World Bank and the Rural
Development Institute in developing and transitional countries, this col-
lection of seven articles analyzes the importance of land law reform in
creating opportunity and equity in borrower nations. With the
knowledge in mind that even in consumer nations land use is essential
in determining economies, contributors address the process of reforming
land law to achieve development goals, the reform of land law in the
context of World Bank lending, overcoming gender biases in established
and transitional property rights systems, framing land market law with
the needs of the poor in mind, using land titling and registration to
reduce poverty, property rights and environmentally sound management
of rangeland and forests, and the future of land law reform in relation
to development. The editors include a bibliography.
–204–
K4293 2006-280514 90-6704-216-1
Starting points for ICT regulation; deconstructing pevalent
policy one-liners.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bert-Jaap Koops et al. (Information technology
& law series; 9)
T.M.C. Asser Press, ©2006 293 p. $90.00
Information and communication technology (ICT) has become an
important and complex issue for policy makers, legislators, regulators
and politicians, perhaps in part because present rules and laws are a
patchwork of single purposes and reactions to a certain, often irrepro-
ducible event. In this international collaborative effort by the Tilburg
Institute for Law, Technology and Society (TILT), contributors start the
process of developing coherent and agile legal frameworks to encompass
present and future ICT situations. The contributions include an inventory
of general ICT regulatory starting points, a review of what applies to off-
line that also applies to on-line, summaries of the debates about whether
ICT regulation should be technology-neutral and whether self-regulation
should be the starting point, and a report on whether ICT regulation
should be international. The volume includes very useful lists of liter-
ature and an essential abbreviation list.
K4610 2005-022291 1-84407-298-3
Environment and trade; a guide to WTO jurisprudence.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nathalie Bernasconi-0sterwalder et al.
Earthscan Publications Ltd., ©2006 370 p. $145.00
Noting the need for strengthening the synergies between multilateral
environmental agreements and the rules of the World Trade
Organization, this book reviews the emergence of environmental
jurisprudence in the WTO and highlights key cases relevant the rela-
tionship between trade and environment issues. Lead author Bernasconi-
Osterwalder (Center for International Environmental Law, Switzerland)
and her collaborators present chapters exploring the jurisprudence of
“like products,” general exceptions clauses, the requirement that trade-
restrictive measures must be “necessary” to protect the environment,
processes and production methods, extraterritoriality, the role of science
and the precautionary principle, and amicus briefs as a form of partici-
pation in WTO dispute settlement.
K5261 2006-006433 0-7546-4757-9
The international law of responsibility for economic
crimes; holding state officials individually liable for acts
of fraudulent enrichment, 2d ed.
Kofele-Kale, Ndiva.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 411 p. $154.95
When the first edition was published in 1995, says Kofele-Kale (law,
Southern Methodist U., US), there was only one multi-lateral convention
against corruption by public officials or private individuals. Now there
are at least seven, several still in draft, so he figures some progress is
being made, but Grand Corruption, which he prefers to call indigenous
spoliation, continues to thrive. He first makes the case that indigenous
spoliation is an international economic crime. Then he explores aspects
of responsibility and accountability such as the cult of sovereignty as a
barrier, a proposed framework, and the legal basis of jurisdiction.
K7128 978-90-04-14838-3
Multiple nationality and international law.
Boll, Alfred M. (Developments in international law; v.57)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 626 p. $201.00
Based on analyses of state practice, treaties, court decisions and scholarly
writing, this study addresses the modern day phenomenon of multiple
nationality. Boll (foreign service officer, US Department of State) does not
argue that states should adopt a particular stance toward multiple nation-
ality, but rather that the existence of multiple nationality cannot be
avoided and that the fact that multiple nationality has become the norm
has important consequences for international law and relationships
between states. He does, however, survey arguments for and against mul-
tiple nationality and considers states’ motivations in adopting particular
attitudes toward the topic. The volume includes a detailed examination
of the nature of nationality under international law and the concepts of
nationality and citizenship under municipal law.
–205–
KBP50 2006-050908 978-90-04-15453-7
Law, custom, and statute in the Muslim world; studies in
honor of Aharon Layish.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ron Shaham. (Studies in Islamic law and
society; v.28)
BRILL, ©2007 263 p. $142.00
The ten papers contained in this volume are presented by Shaham
(Hebrew U. of Jerusalem, Israel) in honor of the Israeli scholar of Islamic
law, Aharon Layish. Geographically and temporally wide-ranging, the
papers focus on shari`a, custom, and statute in Islamic societies, as well
as their interactions. Specific topics examined include disinheritance of
women in the law and custom of the Maghrib (1475-1500); women as
expert witnesses in pre-modern Islamic courts; the roles of the qadi,
mufti, and ruler in the development of Islamic law; patronage, inter-
vention, and violence in the legal process in 18th century Salonica;
archaic forms of contract in Max Weber’s theories and in Arab and
Somali customary law; and legal reform, interpretive communities, and
questions of legitimacy in a 1995 legal circular issues by the president of
the Israeli Shar`a Court of Appeal. Also included is an academic autobi-
ography by Layish and a listing of his publications.
KBP454 978-0-7734-5567-2
The function of orality in Islamic law and practices;
verbalizing meaning.
Souaiaia, Ahmed E.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 388 p. $129.95
Modern scholars rely almost exclusively on the written record in recon-
structing early Islamic legal thought, says Souaiaia (Islamic studies, U. of
Iowa), and if they consider orality at all, it is as a passing stage in pre-
literate, primitive culture. In contrast, he presents orality as a requite of
the Islamic legal discourse without which the religion system could have
lost its power and influence. He warns that readers who are not already
familiar with Islamic law, and jurisprudence and the sources and the-
ories he references, will have difficulty making sense of his argument.
KD371 2006-022402 978-0-306-81438-9
The strange case of Hellish Nell; the true story of Helen
Duncan and the witch trial of World War II.
Shandler, Nina.
Da Capo Press, ©2006 259 p. $25.00
Drawing on recently declassified documents, personal papers, and inter-
views, Shandler (a psychologist living in Massachusetts) relates the
stranger-than-fiction case of a Scottish psychic who the British tried and
convicted in 1944 under an ancient witchcraft law. Duncan’s crime: her
alleged ability to “channel” classified intelligence about British ship
movements at séances! The book includes photos of the principals
involved in the case.
KD621 2006-044798 1-4000-4451-0
The tyrannicide brief; the story of the man who sent
Charles I to the scaffold.
Robertson, Geoffrey.
Pantheon Books, ©2005 429 p. $30.00
John Cooke (1608-1660) served as lead prosecutor for the trial of English
monarch Charles I during the English Civil War, only to be executed
himself a decade later on the orders of Charles II. According to Robertson
(an Australian human rights lawyer) he was to suffer even further indig-
nities at the hands of historians who would label him a “regicide” car-
rying out Oliver Cromwell’s dirty work and ignore his genuine
commitment to progressive causes, including a national health service
and legal aid for the poor. In this examination of Cooke’s involvement in
the trial of Charles I, Robertson defends the idea that he was a “tyran-
nicide in the noble Roman sense, rather than a king-killer.”
KD1289 2006-925662 978-1-58428-194-8
Legal handbook for photographers; the rights and
liabilities of making images, 2d ed.
Krages, Bert.
Amherst Media, ©2007 125 p. $34.95 (pa)
Krages, a Portland, Oregon-based attorney who specializes in intellectual
property matters, is an advocate for the rights of photographers to doc-
ument what they see in public places. In this update of the 2001 edition,
he addresses post-9/11 suspicions about photos taken in public places,
and publication and copyright issues generated by increased use of the
Internet and digital photography. B&w photos illustrate legal and ethical
points. A glossary of legal terms is included.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KDK1750 978-0-7165-3407-5
The presumption of innocence in Irish criminal law;
whittling the golden thread.
Hamilton, Claire. (Justice in controversy series)
Irish Academic Press, ©2007 252 p. $65.00
Recent legislation in Ireland after the murder of Veronica Guerin
includes an amendment of bail laws and the introduction of preventative
detention. Those newly arrested on drugs charges in Ireland can no
longer exercise the right of silence. Irish authorities can seize what they
perceive to be the proceeds of crime. These and other developments,
according to barrister Hamilton (criminology, Dublin Institute of
Technology), indicate that Ireland is facing a fundamental shift in the
“golden thread” of presumed innocence that only recently ran relatively
unfettered through Irish jurisprudence. Hamilton examines in particular
the Criminal Justice (Public Order) Act of 1994 and its impact on pre-
sumed innocence as well as the case law around it, and reviews the state
of presumed innocence around the world in the wake of terrorism.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
KDZ432 2006-018447 978-0-7546-3337-2
The limits of regionalism; NAFTA’s labour accord.
Finbow, Robert G. (The international political economy of new region-
alisms series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 300 p. $99.95
Finbow (Dalhousie U., Canada) reveals how the North American Free
Trade Agreement has negatively affected working people and the unem-
ployed in all three countries involved. He seeks a means of promoting
free trade in ways that rebound broadly to the welfare of citizens rather
than solely to corporate profit and elite enrichment. He finds few pos-
sible solutions, and fewer all the time.
KE394 978-0-8020-9424-7
A history of Canadian legal though; collected essays.
Risk, R.C.B.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 434 p. $65.00
These 12 studies on the history of Canadian legal thought were written
by law scholar Risk (emeritus, U. of Toronto, Canada) over a period of
20 years. Risks investigations into Canadian case law and extrajudicial
writing spanned form the late 19th century to the post-World War II era.
Among the themes addressed by Risk are the methods and limits of legal
reasoning, the Anglican origins of Canadian legal formalism, links
between political rhetoric and legal doctrine in constitutional texts, the
role of legislatures in the facilitation and protection of private autonomy,
and the purpose of legal education.
KE3109 0-8058-5389-8
Exploring positive relationships at work; building a
theoretical and research foundation.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jane E. Dutton and Belle Rose Ragins. (LEA’s
organization and management series)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 421 p. $45.00 (pa)
Dutton (business administration and psychology, U. of Michigan) and
Ragins (management, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) assemble a volume of 20
essays by a group of multidisciplinary scholars from the US and Canada
who discuss the new field of positive relationships at work. The volume
aims to establish it as a domain of inquiry; facilitate application of its
perspective to new areas of organizational behavior, theory, and strategy;
and address areas for future research. Organized into three parts, the
essays consider individuals and dyadic factors, groups and communities,
and organizations, with commentary chapters (which connect themes) at
the end of each part. Essays explore such topics as identity, body, trust,
mentoring, diversity, networks and teams, community, organizational
culture, effectiveness, and change. They also elucidate how relationships
fuel self-discovery and self-actualization, how conflict and learning can
drive them, and how familial relationships are key. Essays were based
on a conference held in Ann Arbor, Michigan, in the fall of 2004, that
was meant as a foundation for the book. It is intended for academics and
practitioners, as well as graduate students. Indexes are divided by subject
and author.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KE4395 978-0-7748-1168-2
Misrecognized materialists; social movements in Canadian
constitutional politics.
James, Matt.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 170 p. $85.00
Canadian constitutional politics has represented an arena wherein mar-
ginalized social groups that include women, working-class people, and
ethnocultural minorities seeking broader recognition within the
Canadian polity can inject concerns and accumulate “symbolic capital”
(“Pierre Bourdieu’s term for a potent social product produced in fields of
unequal power”) in a manner typically denied them in the more
mundane political sphere, according to James (political science, U. of
Victoria), who examines case studies between 1938 and 1992 in support
of this thesis. Further, the groups engaging in this politics of esteem and
belonging are in fact pursuing very concrete goals related to problems of
security and safety, and thus are not expressing postmaterialist values, as
New Politics theory would have it, but are in fact “misrecognized mate-
rialists.” Distributed in the US by the U. of Washington Press.
KF221 2006-005618 978-0-89672-579-9
Getting away with murder on the Texas frontier;
notorious killings & celebrated trials.
Neal, Bill.
Texas Tech U. Press, ©2006 308 p. $27.95
While working as a criminal lawyer in West Texas for four decades, Neal
made a fascinating discovery: from the 1880s until World War I, an aston-
ishing number of confessed or otherwise proven murderers walked away
from courts West of Fort Worth as free men with “not guilty” verdicts.
Here, Neal examines the factors, from the institution of Texas law to the
influence of Hispanic practices and society at large, that contributed to
this phenomenon. His information was gleaned from a number of
primary documents (court decisions, transcripts, and newspaper articles)
as well as books and interviews with contemporary West Texan law prac-
titioners. About 30 b&w photographs accompany the tales of bank
robbers, matricidal brothers, and other murderers who got away scot-
free.
KF224 2006-040240 978-1-55885-476-5
“Colored men” and “hombres aquí”; Hernandez v. Texas
and the emergence of Mexican American lawyering.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael A. Olivas.
Arte Público Press, ©2006 373 p. $49.95
Olivas (law, U. of Houston) presents a text commemorating the 50th
anniversary of the major U.S. Supreme Court case involving Mexican
Americans and jury selection, published just before Brown v. Board of
Education in the 1954 Supreme Court reporter. The text contains the ten
papers presented at the Hernandez at 50 conference held at the U. of
Houston Law Center in 2004, source materials, trial briefs, and a
chronology of the case. A sampling of topics: Mexican elites and the
rights of Indians and Blacks in 19th-century New Mexico; race and col-
orblindness after Hernandez and Brown; legacies of justice and injustice;
and Mexican Americans and the politics of racial classification in the
federal judicial bureaucracy 25 years after Hernandez v. Texas. No subject
index.
KF224 2006-025354 1-59345-955-6
Corporate crime under attack; the fight to criminalize
business violence, 2d ed.
Cullen, Frances T. et al.
Anderson Publishing Co., ©2006 398 p. $47.95 (pa)
Cullen (U. of Cincinnati), Cavender (Arizona State U.), Maakestad
(Western Illinois U.), and Benson (U. of Cincinnati) examine corporate vio-
lence and the long and mounting effort to bring such harm within the
reach of the criminal law. The text is a revised edition of Cullen,
Maakestad, and Cavender’s 1987 publication, Corporate Crime Under
Attack: The Ford Pinto Case and Beyond. The first section, on the
expanding criminalization of corporations, has been reordered and
revised to create a faster-paced, up-to-date account, arranged in historical
sequence. The middle section focusing on the Pinto case is largely
unchanged, but contains a new epilogue. The final section—the aftermath
of Ford’s prosecution—contains new material assessing the extent to
which the criminal law has been used more recently to fight business
violence and considering future directions of such efforts.
–206–
KF225 2006-008062 0-299-21960-7
Cry rape; the true story of one woman’s harrowing quest
for justice.
Lueders, Bill.
Terrace Books, ©2006 275 p. $29.95
Journalist Lueders follows the story of how a victim of rape was bullied
into recanting and charged with making a false report, then run through
the courts for years before the rapist was caught and convicted. The
result is a graphic depiction of a system which is said to protect and find
justice for victims but is in fact far too dependent on the level of intelli-
gence, competence and compassion of individuals. Terrace Books is a
division of the U. of Wisconsin Press.
KF285 2006-925984 0-7897-3595-4
LSAT exam prep.
Dulan, Steven W.
Pearson Technology Group, ©2007 495 p. $34.99 (pa)
After taking the opening diagnostic test, potential law students can
review the different forms of argument, the anatomy of a logical rea-
soning question, analytical reasoning scenarios, and approaches to
reading comprehension. The second half of the preparation aid contains
three practice exams along with answer keys and explanations.
KF297 2006-011320 1-59031-675-4
Nonlegal careers for lawyers, 5th ed.
Munneke, Gary A. et al. (ABA career series)
American Bar Association, ©2006 183 p. $34.95 (pa)
This guide for law students and beginning lawyers describes nonlegal
careers, when to choose one, and the skills needed, as well as how to find
a job in sectors such as business and industry, government, public and
community service, professional services, publishing and media, edu-
cation, information and technology, and entrepreneurial ventures.
Munneke (law, Pace U.) et al. use examples of real people in common
nonlegal careers and include a list of job titles. The annotated resource
section has been updated for this fifth edition.
KF299 2006-033068 978-1-59031-745-7
Visible invisibility; women of color in law firms.
American Bar Association. Commission on Women in the Profession.
American Bar Association, ©2006 73 p. $49.95 (pa)
This report by the American Bar Association’s Commission on Women
in the Profession examines the experiences of women of color who have
worked in law firms employing 25 attorneys or more. It finds that career
experiences of women of color differ dramatically from those of their col-
leagues, with women of color experiencing more harassment, often
feeling that others doubted their legal abilities or career commitment,
being more excluded from formal and informal networking opportu-
nities, being placed in assignments with less potential for advancement,
having less access to client development opportunities, and being more
likely to feel that they have received unfair performance evaluations. In
addition to documenting these and other career hurdles for women of
color in American law firms, the report makes recommendations on how
firm managers can address theses issues so as to have American law
firms reflect the diversity of society.
KF303 2005-034209 1-59460-165-8
Pass the bar!
Riebe, Denise and Michael Hunter Schwartz.
Carolina Academic Press, ©2006 322 p. $30.00 (pa)
Riebe (law, Duke U. and U. of North Carolina) and Schwartz (Charleston
School of Law) draw on a combined 40 years of experience in the legal
profession as practicing lawyers and educators in creating a practical text
for individuals facing the bar exam. Coverage includes bar exam pre-
liminaries; licensing requirements, selection of a bar exam state, and bar
review courses; planning to pass the bar exam; expert study strategies;
taking the bar; getting licensed in more than one state; and repeating a
bar exam. The text contains several appendices, including additional bar
preparation resources; answers to sample MBE, MPRE, and essay ques-
tions; and an MPT point sheet for a sample question.
–207–
KF306 2006-283599 978-0-314-15034-9
Ethical dilemmas in the practice of law; case studies and
problems.
Dzienkowski, John S. and Amon Burton.
Thomson West, ©2006 372 p. $30.00 (pa)
An assortment of case studies and problems illustrate some of the ethical
issues that arise in the practice of law. Some of the situations depicted
involve (for example) attorney-client relationships, confidentiality, and
candor to the court. Each case is followed by questions for reflection and
discussion. The authors developed the text while teaching a course in
Professional Responsibility at the U. of Texas School of Law
KF306 2005-932031 1-59460-148-8
Real ethics for real lawyers.
Coquillette, Daniel R. (Law casebook series)
Carolina Academic Press, ©2005 855 p. $90.00
Coquillette (Boston College Law School) links legal ethics to the funda-
mental moral values held by individuals in Western society in this text is
designed to teach professional responsibility by solving practical
problems. Emphasis is on preparing problems for oral argument and on
solving difficult dilemmas by asking questions and debating options.
Coverage encompasses conflicts of interest, confidentiality, difficult
clients, and topics of particular concern to new lawyers, such as bar
admissions, starting a practice, and malpractice liability. The book
includes selected professional rules, and offers an appendix containing
the Massachusetts Rules of Professional Conduct. It can be used as a free-
standing professional responsibility text, or paired with the author’s
Lawyers and Fundamental Moral Responsibility (1995).
KF363 2006-280976 0-06-111920-2
The president’s counselor; the rise to power of Alberto
Gonzales.
Minutaglio, Bill.
HarperCollins, ©2006 356 p. $24.95
Having conducted interviews with White House officials and staffers,
school classmates, former Texas state officials, former teachers, corporate
clients, critics, and others who have interacted with the sitting Attorney
General, journalist Minutaglio has constructed a political biography of
one of the central figures of the George W. Bush administration, a man
who has played a central role in fashioning the new (il)legal regime of
detention and interrogation of the so-called “War on Terror” and has
pushed novel and, critics say, extreme theories of executive power. The
narrative ends at the point Gonzalez left his position as the president’s
counselor and assumed the helm of the US Justice Department.
KF373 2006-015747 978-1-58234-389-1
Supermob; how Sidney Korshak and his criminal
associates became America’s hidden power brokers.
Russo, Gus.
Bloomsbury Publishing, ©2006 623 p. $34.95
Existing at the nexus of organized crime, legitimate business, and politics
was a cadre of powerful men with family backgrounds in the Russian
Pale of Settlement, whose activities played a powerful, largely invisible
role in real estate, organized labor, the media, and many other areas of
the American economic landscape for a large chunk of American 20th
century history. Investigative reporter Russo describe the development of
this “Supermob,” as they were dubbed by the late Senate investigator
Walter Sheridan, from the 1930s through the late 1980s, focusing on the
figure of Sid Korshak, “the sphinxlike operator who quietly kept the
wheels of the enterprise greased.”
KF379 0-495-00421-9
On the philosophy of law.
Reidy, David A. (Wadsworth philosophical topics)
Wadsworth Publishing Co., ©2007 210 p. $15.95 (pa)
Reidy (University of Tennessee) offers an accessible introduction to some
of the main issues and debates of the philosophy of law. To begin, he
reviews three different ways in which philosophers have thought about
the nature and validity of law in general: legal positivism, natural law
theory, and various versions of legal realism. This sets the stage for dis-
cussion of issues raised by the practice of judicial review in a constitu-
tional democracy. There is also material on the problem of legal
punishment, and an inquiry into the nature of international law. The
book is for undergraduate students, and assumes a basic familiarity with
the American political and legal system or modern liberal democratic
systems similar to it. There is no subject index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KF384 2006-022893 978-0-87586-527-0
Adversarial justice; America’s court system on trial.
Kubicek, Theodore L.
Algora Publishing, ©2006 210 p. $23.95 (pa)
A practicing lawyer for 39 years, Kubicek here attacks the American
adversarial system of criminal justice as a system that allows too many
of the guilty to escape unpunished and urges the adoption of an inquisi-
torial system in which all parties are enjoined to seek the truth, thus
eliminating what he sees as the contradiction between attorney’s duties
to serve as a zealous advocate and their duties as officers of the court.
Other recommendation include eliminating attorney-client privilege, elim-
inating exclusionary rules concerning illegally obtained evidence, and
putting voir dire and jury selection entirely in the hands of judges.
KF386 2006-283597 978-0-314-15898-7
Introduction to the law and legal system of the United
States, 4th ed.
Burnham, William.
Thomson West, ©2006 339+ p. $82.00 (pa)
Written for legal practitioners from foreign countries, U.S. undergraduate
students, and interested general readers, this textbook summarizes the
law and the operation of the legal system in the U.S. The narrative is aug-
mented by citations to cases and statutes as well as books and articles
suited to the non-specialist. Burnham (Wayne State U. Law School)
attempts to provide balanced, non-biased coverage of any controversies
surrounding U.S. institutions or laws. The fourth edition has been
updated to be current through the 2005- 2006 U.S. Supreme Court term.
KF390 2006-025920 0-275-99125-3
Courting the media; public relations for the accused and
the accuser.
Mackenzie, Margaret A.
Praeger, ©2006 189 p. $39.95
Mackenzie, founder of a public relations firm that specializes in court-
related work and high-profile criminal trials, explains the importance of
media relations for both the accused and accuser in trails. In each
chapter, she describes a media relations challenge, including cases
involving celebrities (O.J. Simpson, Russell Crowe, Robert Blake), custody
disputes, serious and white-collar crimes, and Andrea Yates. She includes
a chapter on media training for lawyers. The book was written for sub-
jects and lawyers of high-profile cases and those interested in them.
KF390 978-0-314-16777-4
Elder law in a nutshell, 4th ed.
Frolik, Lawrence A. and Richard L. Kaplan. (West nutshell series)
Thomson West, ©2006 437 p. $28.00 (pa)
Written by two law professors, this compact reference introduces readers
to a variety of legal concerns faced by older Americans. The accessible
text is aimed at a broad audience that includes not only lawyers and law
students, but anyone who works regularly with older persons (e.g. social
workers, retirement planners). Sixteen chapters cover such topics as
health care decision-making, long-term care insurance, guardianship,
veteran’s benefits, and age discrimination in employment.
KF390 2006-046425 1-4133-0517-2
Music law; how to run your band’s business, 5th ed. (CD-
ROM included)
Stim, Richard.
Nolo, ©2006 441 p. $39.99 (pa)
Stim, a musician and intellectual property attorney, explains the business
side of running a band from a legal perspective. He discusses band part-
nerships and agreements, management, attorneys, equipment, per-
formance and touring, copyright and song ownership, publishing, band
names and trademarks, album artwork issues, recording and manufac-
turing issues, music distribution, independent record agreements, and
taxes. This edition covers downloads and other internet issues. Forms are
included on an accompanying CD-ROM.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KF417 90-04-15219-9
America’s choice-of-law revolution; past, present and
future.
Symeon Symeonides. (The Hague Academy of International Law mono-
graphs; v.4)
BRILL, ©2006 478 p. $182.00
Choice-of-law is a procedural stage in the litigation of a case involving the
resolution of conflicts of laws in different jurisdictions. In the American
case, argues Symeonides (Willamette College of Law), there has been both
an academic and a judicial revolution in this area of the law, albeit con-
fined primarily to the choice of law in torts and contracts. He chronicles
the development of this “revolution” from its origins in the 1960s to the
present, concentrating on the past two decades. The choice-of-law revo-
lution is explored as it relates to loss-distribution tort conflicts, conduct-
regulation tort conflicts, and products liability.
KF535 2006-010815 1-59031-658-4
The military divorce handbook; a practical guide to
representing military personnel and their families. (CD-
ROM included)
Sullivan, Mark E.
American Bar Association, ©2006 639 p. $149.95 (pa)
For family law practitioners, this volume examines the process of repre-
senting military personnel in a divorce and addresses unique issues that
may arise. Sullivan begins with tips on starting the case and discusses
the Servicemembers Civil Relief Act, custody and visitation, family
support, domestic violence, domicile, tax issues, and pension and
property division. Sample forms, letters, and other documents are pro-
vided. Sullivan is a family law specialist, teaches military family law, and
formerly served with the Army Reserve.
KF590 2005-058990 1-4133-0414-1
Every landlord’s legal guide, 8th ed. (CD-ROM included)
Stewart, Marcia et al.
Nolo, ©2006 590 p. $44.99 (pa)
This work provides an accessible guide to the legal rights and require-
ments of those owning or managing residential rental properties
(excluding public and “Section 8” housing, mobile home parks and
marinas, and live/work units such as lofts) that is meant to be general-
izable to all 50 states. The treatment is organized chronologically from
the acceptance of rental applications to security deposit requirements
upon tenant vacancy, covering, along the way, such topics as lease and
rental agreements, rent and rent control, discrimination, property man-
agers, cotenants and sublets, repair and maintenance duties, liability for
dangerous conditions and criminal acts and activities, landlord’s right of
entry and tenants’ privacy, terminations and evictions, dispute resolution,
and lawyers and legal research. Although the text’s discussion is general,
state landlord- tenant law charts are provided in an appendix, as are 34
model forms. The enclosed CD-ROM also contains example forms in PDF
files.
KF750 2005-058544 1-4133-0406-0
Plan your estate, 8th ed.
Clifford, Denis.
Nolo, ©2006 455 p. $44.99 (pa)
Taking the inexorability of death and taxes head on, this text teaches
people with small and large estates about wills and living trusts; naming
a guardian for children; how to reduce estate taxes; and planning
strategies for businesses. This eighth edition has been updated to include
the latest federal laws and those of all states except Louisiana. It includes
a new section on ethical wills.
KF750 2006-048304 1-4133-0527-X
Quicken WillMaker Plus 2007; estate planning essentials,
3d ed. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry.
Nolo, ©2006 539 p. $49.99 (pa)
WillMaker software from Quicken allows people in all 50 states (except
Louisiana) to create customized wills and a wide range of related legal
documents on their home computers. This easy-to-follow guide provides
clear instructions for using WillMaker in estate planning. Twenty-five
chapters discuss such topics as living trusts, durable powers of attorney,
and health care directives. These are followed by a complete WillMaker
user’s manual. The 2007 version of WillMaker Plus for Windows is con-
tained on the accompanying CD-ROM.
–208–
KF753 2006-282933 978-1-59941-022-7 KF1366 2006-282936 978-1-59941-208-5
Trusts and estates. An introduction to agency, partnerships, and LLCs, 5th
Leslie, Melanie B. and Stewart E. Sterk. (Concepts and insights series) ed.
Thomson West, ©2006 269 p. $33.00 (pa) Eisenberg, Melvin Aron.
Written by two law professors from Yeshiva U., this concise text provides Thomson West, ©2006 756 p. $99.50
an overview of the law as it relates to trusts and estates. The first section Designed for courses in organizational law, this casebook focuses on non-
is devoted to intestate succession and the law of wills and deals largely corporate business organizations. Cases illustrating the underlying con-
with probate transfers. Non-probate transfers are then discussed in the cepts and workings of agency, partnerships, and LLCs have been selected
chapter on trusts. A table of cases and a detailed subject index complete and edited so as to ensure their accessibility to students who lack an
the volume. accounting and financial background. Extensive cross-references are
made to Corporations and other Business Organizations: Statutes, Rules,
KF778 2005-055491 1-4133-0408-7 Materials, and Forms, by the same author. Eisenberg teaches law at the
The executor’s guide; settling a loved one’s estate or trust, U. of California at Berkeley.
2d ed.
Randolph, Mary. KF1388 2005-930583 1-887554-50-5
Nolo, ©2006 480 p. $34.99 (pa) Complete guide to nonprofit organizations; law, taxation,
Randolph, an attorney and editor for Nolo, provides a guide for executors operational planning.
and trustees, describing legal procedures and terminology, what to Title main entry. Ed. by Penina Kessler Lieber and Donald R. Levy.
expect, decisions that will need to be made, and questions to ask. Details Civic Research Institute, ©2005 — p. $203.95
such as organ donation and burial are covered, as are those during the Noting that advisors to nonprofits cannot rely on good intentions or past
first month after the death of a loved one, such as finding important doc- good deeds, Lieber and Levy seek to provide lawyers, accountants, con-
uments and claiming benefits. She discusses what to do if there is no sultants and board members who serve nonprofit organizations with the
will, managing assets and paying bills, caring for children, taxes, and resources to navigate this increasingly complicated legal landscape. Each
transferring property. Other sections cover handling trusts, and getting chapter addresses a distinct and relevant topic, such as the form and
help. This edition has been updated to include information on the laws structure of nonprofits; tax issues for private foundations; accountability
of all 50 states, recent information on estate taxes, and worksheets. rules for nonprofit insiders; employee benefits for nonprofit employers;
topics in nonprofit healthcare; and cross-border philanthropy. The con-
KF801 2006-025886 978-0-8047-5398-2 tributors are all experts in the field who bring experience and knowledge
Calculating promises; the emergence of modern American from public and private practices. The reference includes a copy of the
contract doctrine. Internal Revenue Service’s new chart explaining the life cycle of a public
Kreitner, Roy. charity, as well as sample forms and agreements.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 242 p. $55.00
KF1438 2006-282935 978-1-59941-155-2
Revising his doctoral dissertation at Harvard Law School, Kreitner (law,
Tel Aviv U.) offers a genealogy of the emergence of the modern con- Securities regulation, 6th ed.
ception of contract. He argues that the current conception is not an out- Soderquist, Larry D. and Theresa A. Gabaldon. (University casebook
growth of gradual, piecemeal refinements of a centuries-old idea of series)
contract, but was shaped by a revolution in private law undertaken by Thomson West, ©2006 860 p. $106.50
classical legal scholars toward the end of the 19th century. The wider Soderquist (law, Vanderbilt U.) and Gabaldon (law, George Washington
framework, he says, is a cultural negotiation over the nature of indi- U.) provide, for students, a handbook on securities regulation. Each
vidual subjects and their role in a society undergoing transformation. chapter places material in context and includes situations involving a
hypothetical client. Emphasizing the idea that securities law is tied to
KF888 2006-930561 0-324-36499-7 business transactions, the authors give some business background. They
West’s business law, 10th ed., alternate edition. (online also consider how this law is practiced from prospective and retro-
legal research guide included) spective viewpoints and show situations from each. After the intro-
Title main entry. Ed. by Gaylord A. Jentz et al. duction on approaching securities law, chapters treat the Securities Act,
Exchange Act, litigation, responsibilities of securities lawyers, state regu-
Thomson West, ©2007 1291 p. $125.95
lation, and international aspects.
This alternative version of West’s Business Law uses summaries of legal
cases (rather than excerpts) to introduce business students to the funda- KF1446 2005-031928 978-0-471-78553-8
mentals of business law. Special boxed sections found throughout the
Sarbanes-Oxley guide for finance and information
volume focus on ethical considerations. The tenth edition contains a new
appendix on the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. A separately-bound guide to
technology professionals.
online legal research is included with purchase. Anand, Sanjay.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 273 p. $45.00
KF1030 2005-037376 1-59031-471-9 Signed into law after the Enron scandal, the Act established new stan-
The ABCs of the UCC; article 4A: Funds transfers, 2d ed. dards for internal reporting and auditing, requiring quarterly reports
Baxter, Thomas C. et al. from CEOs, CFOs, and CIOs, and setting harsher penalties for accounting
American Bar Association, ©2006 114 p. $29.95 (pa) transgressions. In this updated edition, Anand (an IT consultant who has
written for Dataquest, TechRepublic, and Information Week) guides infor-
Designed to be accessible to both students and practitioners, this concise mation technology and finance professionals in bringing their organiza-
guide introduces Article 4A of the Uniform Commercial Code, which tions to SOX compliance. The first nine chapters dissect the impact of
governs the rights and obligations of all parties involved in a funds SOX on the finance professional, their supervisors, and related depart-
transfer. A glossary of terms and a bibliography are found at the back ments. Advice then follows on implementing changes such as an internal
of the volume. An index is lacking. Two of the authors are officials of control system, an effective whistleblower program, and transparent dis-
the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, and one is retired from the closure policies. The remaining six chapters contain methods for IT
Occidental Petroleum Corporation. departments in understanding and redesigning technologies affected by
the Act, and explains the Sarbans-Oxley Compliancy Key Enterprise
KF1257 2006-048309 1-4133-0519-9
Technology (SOCKET). The appendices provide brief frameworks for
How to win your personal injury claim, 6th ed. implementing the steps described in the book.
Matthews, J. L.
Nolo, ©2006 289 p. $29.99 (pa)
A California lawyer clarifies the law determining fault for automobile,
bicycle, and dangerous premises accidents, and walks through the
process of filing a claim without a lawyer. The practical guide explains
insurance coverage, the compensation formula, the demand letter, set-
tlement negotiation, and the formal settlement document. The sixth
edition updates state law.

–209– Reference & Research Book News February 2007

KF1524 2005-058985 1-4133-0451-6
How to file for Chapter 7 bankruptcy, 13th ed.
Elias, Stephen et al.
Nolo, ©2006 507 p. $29.99 (pa)
In this 13th edition, Elias (National Association of Consumer Bankruptcy
Attorneys), Prenauer (U. of Michigan Law School), and Leonard (Cornell
Law School) offer advice to individuals, married couples, and small
business owners on filing for Chapter 7 Bankruptcy, particularly in the
aftermath of a 2005 law which established stricter eligibility require-
ments. The first chapter helps the reader assess eligibility and whether
Chapter 7 is the best option. The remaining materials guide the reader
in plain terms through how to acquire protection through an “automatic
stay,” determine what assets can be legally kept, handle the case in court
largely without a lawyer’s assistance, recover credit after bankruptcy,
among other topics. A list of further resources is provided, and the
appendices contain state exemptions tables, worksheets, and tear-out
forms that a Chapter 7 filer will need.
KF1609 2006-012012 0-7546-4709-9
Consumer protection in the age of the ‘information
economy’.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jane K. Winn. (Markets and the law)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 456 p. $134.95
In March 2005, a conference was held at the U. of Washington School of
Law in which legal scholars and practitioners were asked to address the
question of whether consumer protection is an anachronism in the infor-
mation economy. Fourteen papers from the conference have here been
organized by Winn (U. of Washington) into sections discussing the scope
of issues raised by the application of traditional consumer protection con-
cepts to the new technological and economic landscape; the appropriate
balance between consumer and producer interests under intellectual
property law in terms of traditional consumer protection policy objec-
tives, current contract law doctrine and competing interests among com-
mercial parties and consumers; and the dignitary values embedded in
the concept of information privacy and legal responses to the challenges
posed to those values by unregulated technological innovation.
KF1659 2006-046427 1-4133-0513-X
Legal guide for starting & running a small business, 9th
ed.
Steingold, Fred S.
Nolo, ©2006 454 p. $34.99 (pa)
Using plain language, attorney Steingold explains the main legal issues
involved in starting and running a small business. He begins by dis-
cussing the advantages and drawbacks of various types of legal entities.
Other topics include (for example) obtaining licenses and permits; buying
business insurance; hiring and managing employees; entering into con-
tracts; and paying business taxes. The ninth edition has been updated to
reflect current regulations and features the addition of a photocopiable
checklist for starting a small business.
KF2265 2006-022983 1-59031-760-2
Truck accident litigation, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Laura Ruhl Genson and Anita Kerezman.
American Bar Association, ©2006 504 p. $99.95 (pa)
Forty-seven attorneys, engineers, trucking industry experts, forensic pro-
fessionals, and social psychologists contribute 34 chapters to an overview
of the trucking industry and applicable standards for motor
carriers/drivers with an emphasis on legal liability, considerations, and
ramifications. The text provides attorneys with a strong knowledge base
of the trucking industry and a tutorial “how to” for handling a com-
mercial motor vehicle case from initial intake through trial. While much
of the text assumes intermediate to advanced legal experience and focuses
on situations unique to the trucking industry, the text also covers
essential information for the novice trucking litigator. The text has been
revised and updated throughout to reflect changes in the industry and in
government regulations since publication of the first edition ten-plus
years ago.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KF2750 2006923751 978-0-7618-3498-4
Communication law; the Supreme Court and the First
Amendment, rev. ed.
Hemmer, Joseph J.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 316 p. $39.95 (pa)
This introduction to communications law is designed for students in jour-
nalism, communication and political science. Hummer (communication,
Carroll College) addresses First Amendment issues that affect the general
public, academic institutions, business enterprises, journalistic profes-
sional, government agencies and the broadcast industry. He focuses on
recent and precedent-setting cases, describing the act under challenge,
analyzing the central issue and explaining the reasons behind the
opinion. This revised edition includes new cases through the Supreme
Court’s decisions of August 2005.
KF2979 2006-031062 0-275-98882-1
Intellectual property and information wealth; issues and
practices in the digital age; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter K. Yu. (Praeger perspectives)
Praeger, ©2007 1917 p. $400.00
Yu (founding director, Intellectual Property and Communications Law
Program, Michigan State U. College of Law) viewed his purpose in
putting together this four-volume set as the development of a compre-
hensive mini-library on intellectual property that covers both the basic
and cutting edge issues. He has organized the material in accordance
with the three main branches of intellectual property law (copyrights,
patents, and trademarks) and added a final volume covering the increas-
ingly important international developments. Each volume contains
approximately 20 articles each, with the first covering protections to
novels, films, sound recordings, computer programs, and other creative
products, as well as issues such as authorship, duration of copyright, fair
use, and the implications of the Internet and peer- to-peer file sharing
technologies; the second examining protections to inventors of devices,
mechanical processes, chemical compounds, and other inventions and
issues such as the scope and limits of patent protection, research exemp-
tions and infringement, intellectual property in the software and biotech
industries, and trade secrets; the third discussing protections for brand
names and unique product designs, along with issues of consumer pro-
tection, trademark and the first amendment, brand licensing, publicity
and cultural images, and Internet domain names; and the final volume
exploring enforcement of intellectual property rights across borders and
their implications for international trade and investment, economic devel-
opment, national sovereignty, human rights, and public health.
KF2980 978-0-7734-5661-7
Universities, faculty, and the battle over intellectual
property; who owns what’s inside the professor’s head?
Bobbitt, Randy.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 118 p. $99.95
When college professors develop courses for the Internet, they are often
required by their universities to sign intellectual property agreements
that cede their rights to their institutions in exchange for a one-time
“development fee.” In this study, Bobbitt (communications arts, U. of
West Florida) examines the range of such policies, with one goal being
the identification of how many of them are based on existing “patents
and inventions” policies and how many have been created from scratch.
He also examines the historical development of these policies within the
context of the constitutional background of intellectual property law and
provides advice on how to craft policy for those institutions that yet to
address the issue.
KF3022 2005-058980 1-4133-0454-0
The public domain; how to find & use copyright-free
writings, music, art & more, 3d ed.
Fishman, Stephen.
Nolo Press, ©2006 — p. $34.99 (pa)
This volume explains how to find creative works that are not protected
by copyright and that can be copied and used without permission or
fees. Public domain works involving writing, music, art, architecture,
maps, choreography, photography, film, television, databases and
collections, titles, and software are covered. The book also provides an
overview of copyright law, how to determine a work’s public domain
status, foreign publications, the length of copyright protection, where and
how notices appear, and legal problems. Doing research in the Copyright
Office and what to do if a work is not in the public domain is also
discussed. In this edition, Fishman details resources such as Google
Books, MorgueFile, Image*After, Hollywood Film Archive, and Creative
Commons. An expanded section on copyright case law is presented and
the most recent court decisions are described. One of the appendices lists
popular songs in the public domain. Fishman is a legal writer with
experience in government and private practice.
–210–
KF3114 2005-021668 978-1-57248-514-3
The complete patent kit. (CD-ROM included)
Rogers, James L.
Sourcebooks, Inc., ©2005 404 p. $39.95 (pa)
Rogers, a registered patent attorney, breaks down the legal components
and the steps of patent procurement for inventors who intend to undergo
the process largely on their own. Four sections address what to do before
application (including a search for prior art); how to write a successful
application; what to expect when interacting with the U.S. Patent Office;
and how to maintain, correct, and protect a patent after it issues. The
author discusses strategies for evaluating the likelihood of obtaining a
patent, overcoming rejections based on novelty and obviousness, and
commercializing a product through licensing and other means. The
appendices and a CD-ROM contain forms for various types of patents.
KF3114 2003-064968 978-1-4133-0516-6
Patent it yourself, 12th ed.
Pressman, David.
Nolo, ©2006 575 p. $49.99 (pa)
Pressman, a patent attorney and former examiner, offers a guide to the
process for inventors. He discusses salability and patent capability, and
explains how to document an invention and obtain a patent, require-
ments for protection abroad, alternative and supplementary forms of pro-
tection, such as trade secrets, copyrights, trademarks, and unfair
competition law, and how to commercially evaluate, market, and license
an invention. This edition contains the newest US Patent and Trademark
Office rules and forms, and information on how to file electronically and
how to write an application that is not limiting. It also has material on
new laws involving internet and business method patents, preparing
claim charts for infringement, websites, online searching facilities, fee
information, revised listings of foreign filing countries, and other topics.
Many forms and worksheets are included.
KF3120 84-644547 1-57018-619-7
Patent trademark and copyright laws; June 2006 ed.,
current through June 1, 2006.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey M. Samuels.
BNA Books, ©2006 917 p. $130.00 (pa)
Updating the volume to reflect statutory changes enacted through June 1,
2006, Samuels (director, Center for Intellectual Property Law and
Technology, U. of Akron School of Law) collects and reprints the United
States Code relevant to intellectual property law, including Title 35
(Patents), Title 17 (Copyrights), and Chapters 22 and 63 of Title 15
(Trademarks and Technology Innovation), along with other miscella-
neous sections of the United States Code and international treaty and
agreements. The volume includes an index showing the title and section
number for each topic and its page number, as well as editor’s notes clar-
ifying definitions and effective dates.
KF3145 2006-043903 978-1-57018-385-0
Intellectual property technology transfer.
Title main entry. Ed. by Aline C. Flower.
BNA Books, ©2006 597 p. $375.00
The idea is to get new technologies out of the labs and onto the market,
but given the competitive nature of that marketplace and the current
world political situation that idea is in reality very complex. Ignorance of
that reality and the law that is its outcome is no excuse, and the con-
tributors of these eight chapters ensure readers have a solid background
in intellectual property (IP) technology transfer, covering government reg-
ulations of rights to IP such as the Bayh-Dole Act, IP infringement and
its relationship to sovereign immunity and the Eleventh Amendment, the
new enigma of technology export controls and national security, uni-
versity technology transfer rights, especially as it relates to infringement
and products liability and risk allocation, the ownership of IP in fed-
erally funded research settings, and technology transfer considerations
for research conducted at foreign universities. The final chapter closely
details issues of entrepreneurship and conflicts of interest.
KF3145 2005-058533 1-4133-0450-8
Profit from your idea; how to make smart licensing deals,
5th ed. (CD-ROM included)
Stim, Richard.
Nolo, ©2006 — p. $34.99 (pa)
Writing for inventors, Stim, an intellectual property attorney, describes
how to license an invention, protect it, reduce risks, and save money. The
book is aimed at the layperson, but not meant for those who want to
manufacture and market their inventions themselves. Topics covered are
ownership rights, soliciting licenses, the agreement, and dealing with
licensees, with chapters on financing and joint ownership, royalty
provisions, negotiation, warranties, termination, and other related
subjects. Forms are included on the accompanying CD-ROM.
–211–
KF3512 1-57018-522-0
ERISA regulations, 2005 ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sharon F. Fountain and Michael G. Kushner.
BNA Books, ©2005 — p. $195.00 (pa)
This volume contains the full text of proposed and final ERISA regula-
tions through June 30, 2005, from the US Labor Department, IRS, Pension
Benefit Guaranty Corporation, Equal Employment Opportunity
Commission and the Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries that
affect employee benefit plans. The book is organized by whether the reg-
ulation is final/temporary or proposed and by the issuing agency. Notes
from the editors are provided when more than one set of regulations
may be applicable; they also note the history of each subsection. Some of
the topics covered by the regulations include valuation of benefits,
expected retirement age, mortality assumptions, automatic rollover safe
harbor, mental health parity, health coverage portability, and IRAs. The
book is intended for labor and tax attorneys, accountants, financial con-
sultants, actuaries, and benefits specialists. Fountain is managing editor
for the Bureau of National Affairs, and Kushner is an attorney.
KF3775 2006-009304 1-59726-036-3
Understanding environmental administration and law, 3d
ed.
Buck, Susan J.
Island Press, ©2006 284 p. $29.95 (pa)
Buck illuminates the policy processes by which U.S. environmental law
is created. Aimed at a college audience, this concise text also describes
the political environment in which policy is applied and the statutory
and case laws that make up the regulatory system. New case studies have
been added for the third edition. Buck teaches political science and envi-
ronmental studies at the U. of North Carolina at Greensboro.
KF4119 2005-278080 978-0-7575-1677-1
Foundational legal issues for pre-service teachers.
Williams, Henry S.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2005 119 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this concise reference, Williams (Central Washington U.) summarizes
laws and legal decisions that pertain to education, providing teachers in
the U.S. with basic knowledge of their rights, risks, and limitations as
defined by the law. Seven chapters discuss topics such as: the
Constitution and free speech among students and teachers, discipline and
corporal punishment, zero tolerance, drug testing, teacher-board rela-
tions, academic freedom, search and seizure, child abuse and neglect and
the school’s role in related cases, and tort liability. The author includes
true and hypothetical cases, challenging the reader to evaluate the legality
of the actions involved.
KF4119 2005-031689 1-4129-2593-2
The principal’s quick-reference guide to school law
reducing liability, litigation, and other potential legal
tangles, 2d ed.
Dunklee, Dennis R. and Robert J. Shoop.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 405 p. $79.95
This update of the 2002 edition incorporates issues under the No Child
Left Behind Act, current trends in special education, and recent
landmark U.S. Supreme Court and other cases. Dunklee (education lead-
ership, George Mason U.) and Shoop (education law, Kansas State U.)
offer practical guidance on mundane and crisis management decisions
on such issues as the principal’s responsibilities and tort liability, pre-
ventative law, teachers’ and students’ constitutional rights, discipline, and
sexual harassment. For each legal focus point, they present management
examples, suggested guidelines, and relevant legal cases. Resources
include further cases of interest to educators. School principals were
among the reference’s reviewers.
KF4159 2006-021459 0-275-98893-7
Knowing where to draw the line; ethical and legal
standards for best classroom practice.
Manos, Mary Ann.
Praeger, ©2006 150 p. $39.95
“One out of every five teachers will be either the plaintiff, the defendant,
or a grievant in an action that is job related!” From that startling starting
point, Manos (teacher education, Bradley U., Peoria) and several Illinois
colleagues begin their discussion of what the required law course in
teacher education should cover, the importance of being familiar with
state ethics codes, and drawing the line ethically/legally with students,
parents, administrators, and the community. Chapters include cases in
point and critical thinking questions. The appendix presents the codes of
ethics of the National Education Association, American Association of
School Administrators, and related groups.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KF4209 2005-031748 1-4129-2622-X
Special education and the law; a guide for practioners, 2d
ed.
Osborne, Allan G. and Charles J. Russo.
Sage Publications, ©2006 248 p. $74.95
In this resource for school officials, Osborne (a school principal) and
Russo (editor of the Yearbook of Education Law) discuss the law as it
relates to the delivery of special education and related services to students
with disabilities. They examine how federal and state courts have inter-
preted the IDEA statute and its regulations and describe the substantive
and procedural requirements they have placed on school officials. A
number of special education and education law websites are listed at the
back of the volume, along with a glossary.
KF4288 2006-283873 978-0-314-15878-9
Art law in a nutshell, 4th ed.
DuBoff, Leonard D. and Christy O. King. (West nutshell series)
Thomson West, ©2006 330 p. $27.00 (pa)
In this compact reference, attorneys DuBoff and King provide a summary
of federal and state law as it pertains to art. Although many complex
issues are addressed, the text is written to be accessible to a broad
audience that includes artists, dealers, collectors, and students as well as
legal practitioners. Sixteen chapters cover such topics as auctions,
insurance, taxes, copyright, trademark, and freedom of expression.
KF4290 2006-025317 0-275-99205-5
Law and business of the entertainment industries, 5th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by by Donald E. Biederman et al.
Praeger, ©2007 1022 p. $92.95
Aimed at law students preparing to specialize in this area, this text
examines both the legal and business aspects of the entertainment indus-
tries. The authors begin by looking at the roles of the various represen-
tatives of entertainers and discussing the complex issues involved in
recognizing and acquiring rights. Other topics include (for example) lit-
erary publishing, sound recordings, film, television, and the Internet.
Editor Don Biederman (who died in 2002) taught entertainment and
media law at Southwestern U. School of Law in Los Angeles.
KF4541 2006-279721 978-0-7575-2631-2
Constitutional government; the American experience, 6th
ed. (CD-ROM included)
Curry, James A. et al.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2006 549 p. $69.95 (pa)
This textbook traces the development of the constitutional government of
the U.S. from its earliest political and philosophical roots to present day
challenges and issues. The authors take an interdisciplinary approach to
the subject, combining historical analysis with examinations of politics
and the law. The sixth edition features an increased emphasis on indi-
vidualist and communitarian perspectives. The text of the U.S.
Constitution and a glossary of terms are found in the appendix.
KF4541 2006-025249 0-275-98972-0
In the wake of slavery; Civil War, Civil Rights, and the
reconstruction of Southern law.
Ranney, Joseph A.
Praeger, ©2006 199 p. $49.95
Practicing attorney Ranney (legal history adjunct, Marquette U.) shows
how the South was in fact not at all unified, and that building a new
social order from the ruins of a slave economy was a state-by-state enter-
prise. He also finds that far from operating under a legal system imposed
by the victorious North, Southern courts operated largely independently.
Along with the economic issues, which each state handled largely on its
own, many courts made surprising rulings toward reunification and civil
rights in defiance of Southern legislators. The result is a fascinating
account of how the relationship of law and society can be simultaneously
interdependent, delicate and complex.
For information about BookNews Online, visit www.paratext.com, or link to it
from our newly revamped website: www.booknews.com. You’ll have access
to the entire Book News database (over 200,000 reviews), with a powerful
search engine. Trial subscriptions are available.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KF4545 2005-024354 978-0-8203-2842-3
Origins of the Dred Scott case; Jacksonian jurisprudence
and the Supreme Court, 1837-1857.
Allen, Austin. (Studies in the legal history of the South)
Univ. of Georgia Press, ©2006 274 p. $22.95 (pa)
Some say the Dred Scott case hinged solely upon slavery. In response
Allen (history, U. of Houston) replies that the Chief Justice and his col-
leagues at the time of the hearing of the case stood in the middle of a
complex web of assumptions, agendas and personal and political com-
mitments and reacted out of immediate expediency than with regard to
the rights of human beings. Allen examines the contexts of the US
Supreme Court in the years leading to the 1857 decision at an intellectual
as well as political level, a world that was deeply mired in the futile
effort to be all things to all factions, ranging from slave-holders to states’
rights advocates, federalists, economic developers expecting a new cor-
porate order, and the remains of the Jacksonian democratic enthusiasts.
The result is a richer understanding of the reasoning behind subjugation.
KF4549 2006-280184 978-0-7575-1562-0
The American constitutional experience; selected readings
and Supreme Court opinions, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by James A. Curry et al.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2005 187 p. $29.95 (pa)
This book is intended as a supplemental reader and casebook for the
undergraduate text Constitutional Government: The American Experience,
but it may be a useful accompaniment to other texts on the subject. The
editors compile, edit, and reflect on primary sources that explain the lan-
guage, evolution and application of constitutional law. Most are Supreme
Court decisions; but writings by Frederick Douglass, James Madison,
Alexander Hamilton, John Stuart Mill, James Otis, Thomas Jefferson, and
Alexis de Tocqueville are also excerpted. The introductory chapter dis-
cusses the role of the Supreme Court in constitutional development.
Subsequent chapters address topics that include judicial power and
judicial review, separation of powers, racial equality under the consti-
tution, equal protection and Seneca Falls, due process, and applications
of the First Amendment.
KF4549 2005-937551 1-59460-197-6
Constitutional law in context, 2d ed.; v.2.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Kent Curtis et al. (Carolina Academic
Press law casebook series)
Carolina Academic Press, ©2006 1921 p. $90.00
Curtis (Wake Forest U. School of Law) presents historical and legal back-
ground material and excerpts from cases in chapters on freedom of
speech and the press, freedom of religion, equal protection under the law,
and governmental actors, private actors, and the scope of the 13th and
14th Amendments. At about 330 pages, the chapter on freedom of speech
and the press is the longest. Case discussion questions and a detailed 30-
page timeline of American constitutional history are included.
KF4550 2006-019283 978-0-8447-4239-7
Democracy and the Constitution; essays by Walter Berns.
Berns, Robert.
AEI Press, ©2006 244 p. $20.00 (pa)
Walter Berns (professor emeritus at Georgetown and resident scholar at
the American Enterprise Institute) gathers 22 of his most important
essays on constitutional and political questions. He explains the impor-
tance of strict constructionism and explores issues such as natural law,
civil rights, states’ rights, multiculturalism, patriotism, the First
Amendment, and the roles of academic and religious institutions.
KF4747 2006-045284 978-0-415-94342-0
Encyclopedia of American civil liberties; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Finkelman.
Routledge, ©2006 2576 p. $595.00
This three-volume encyclopedia is presented with the aim of examining
historical issues of civil liberties in the United States and their relevance
to major current events such as George W. Bush’s “War on Terror.” Chief
editor Finkelman (law and public policy, Albany Law School) presents
1423 alphabetical entries that introduce an audience intended to
encompass lawyers, scholars, students, and general readers to a wide
range of topics, including: the Constitution, the Bill of Rights, and the
history of civil liberties; cases, trials, and important court decisions;
associations, societies, organizations, and government bodies; literature,
entertainments, media, and art; slavery, crime, and war; religion,
censorship, and privacy; and peoples, places, and events. Coverage
includes traditional civil liberties—freedom of speech, press, religion,
assembly, and petition—as well as newer concerns such as privacy, the
rights of the accused, and national security. Articles range in length from
250 words for a brief biography to 6000 words for in-depth analysis of
concepts and issues.
–212–
KF4748 2006-012037 0-313-32758-0
Encyclopedia of American civil rights and liberties; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Otis H. Stephens, Jr. et al.
Greenwood Press, ©2006 1342 p. $349.95
From Abington School District v. Schempp (one of the Supreme Court’s
school prayer decisions) to zoning, this three-volume encyclopedia 627
alphabetical entries on issues of civil rights, defined as those that arise
from the democratic commitment to equality, and civil liberties, defined
as related to the disputes pitting claims of individual freedom against
assertions of governmental power, in American history. Editors Stephens
(political science and constitutional law, U. of Tennessee), Scheb (political
science and legal studies, U. of Tennessee), and Stooksbury (political
science, Carson-Newman College) include coverage of important court
decisions and legislation; important individuals, such as Rosa Parks and
John Peter Zenger; governmental and non-governmental groups and
organizations; controversial issues; and key legal and philosophical con-
cepts and doctrines. Specific examples include rights of crime victims,
discrimination, the Equal Pay Act, the Ku Klux Klan, use of force by law
enforcement, courts-martial, Operation Rescue, Jesse Jackson, the
American Civil Liberties Union, Thomas Paine, the doctrine of original
intent, the Freedom of Information Act, and public nudity, to cite a few.
In addition to the entries, over 100 pages of primary documents are pre-
sented in the third volume, along with a table of cases, a bibliography,
and an index.
KF4757 2006-015018 978-0-292-71310-9
Latinos and American law; landmark Supreme Court
cases.
Soltero, Carlos R.
U. of Texas Press, ©2006 239 p. $19.95 (pa)
Soltero provides an important resource to students, lawyers, and the
public by assembling descriptions and discussion of 14 critical cases of
concern to Latinos. The cases are presented chronologically, beginning
with Botiller v. Domingues in 1889, which concerned application of
Mexican Land Grants following the Mexican-American War, and con-
cluding with the 2001 case of Alexander v. Sandoval, which concerned
discrimination on the basis of language. For each case, Soltero provides
the historical background and legal precedent, then discusses the case
itself, the judicial opinions, and the impact of the court’s decision.
KF4758 2005-930311 1-59460-026-0
Sexuality and discrimination; a rights and liberties
perspective.
Carrasco, Gilbert Paul. (Law casebook series)
Carolina Academic Press, ©2005 929 p. $100.00
Carrasco (law, Willamette U., Salem, Oregon) offers a text designed pri-
marily for use in law classes dealing with sexuality and discrimination,
with a primary focus on the rights of gays, lesbians, bisexuals, and trans-
gendered people. The material is organized into three main components:
discrimination based on sexual orientation, the legal facets of the AIDS
crisis, and legal problems associated with pregnancy. Each section
includes an introductory overview of the subject followed by represen-
tative cases. In all aspects, international perspective is brought to the
issues, although the main focus is on the law of the U.S.
KF4770 90-04-14868-X
Article 13; the right to freedom of expression.
Thorgeirsdóttir, Herdís. (A commentary on the United National
Convention on the rights of the child)
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2006 53 p. $78.00 (pa)
Herdís (constitutional law and human rights, Bifrost School of Business,
Iceland) explores the meaning and significance of the freedom as
expressed in the article not only in relation to the Convention itself, but
also in the context of the jurisprudence and objectives of overall human
rights. Among other facets, she describes how applying freedom of
expression to children changes the understanding of it in general. There
is no index.
–213–
KF4783 2002-009010 978-0-7391-1764-4
Faith on trial; communities of faith, the First
Amendment, and the theory of deep diversity. (reprint
2002)
Guinn, David E.
Lexington Books, ©2006 223 p. $24.95 (pa)
This is a paperbound reprint of a 2002 book. Guinn (International
Human Rights Law Institute, DePaul U. College of Law) argues that
current U.S. Supreme Court jurisprudence and legal reasoning relating to
concepts of religious freedom is both contradictory and discriminatory
towards a number of groups, especially if they do not belong traditional
forms of Protestant theology or liberal Judaism. He argues that this
problem can only be adequately addressed from the standpoint of the
theory of deep diversity. Deep diversity, like traditional liberalism, seeks
to hold up the rights of the individual, but differs in its rejection of atom-
istic understandings of the individual in favor of a concept of a human
identity that draws on communities of meaning. Guinn explores the
implications that this theory would have on legal reasoning on a number
of aspects of religious legal freedom.
KF4840 2006-048287 978-1-4133-0520-3
How to get a green card, 7th ed.
Bray, Ilona.
Nolo, ©2006 282 p. $29.99 (pa)
This guide explains the basic requirements for obtaining legal permission
to stay in the United States, and walks through the process for requesting
a green card based on family relations, political asylum, the visa lottery,
and ten years residency. The seventh edition features new authors who
update legal and procedural changes.
KF4893 2004-112641 978-0-7618-3043-6
Voting rights and minority representation; redistricting,
1992-2002.
Title main entry. Ed. by David A. Bositis.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 134 p. $24.00 (pa)
Bositis (senior political analyst, Joint Center for Political and Economic
Studies) presents seven papers that examine the connections between
redistricting and minority representation in recent American electoral
politics. After analysis of the contentious legal issues is presented, devel-
opments related to political parties, redistricting, and minority represen-
tation in the South from 1992 to 2002 are reviewed. A conceptual model
for drawing effective minority districts is then presented, followed by an
analysis of the redistricting process of 2000 as a political loss for Latinos.
A participant observer discusses reapportionment/redistricting politics in
Georgia and, finally, racial redistricting and southern Republican con-
gressional gains in the 1990s is analyzed.
KF5075 2006-021919 978-1-59558-140-2
The genius of impeachment; the founders’ cure for
royalism.
Nichols, John.
The New Press, ©2006 230 p. $15.95 (pa)
Nichols (Washington correspondent for The Nation and an editor at the
Capital Times) has penned another in a growing list of books calling for
the impeachment of President George W. Bush. His approach aims at
allaying fears about the perceived extremity of such a measure by
making the case that it is an institution with a venerable history in
American democracy that was included in the Constitution for just such
“high crimes and misdemeanors” as have been committed by Bush and
his administrative minions. He also stresses that it shouldn’t be a par-
tisan affair in an appeal to “rule-of-law Republicans” who in the past
have been opposed to an imperial presidency. The bill of particulars
Nichols concentrates on is somewhat more limited than previous works
and revolves principally around the invasion of Iraq, although war-
rantless spying and other issues are mentioned.
KF5599 2006-036483 978-0-87586-524-9
The eminent domain revolt; changing perceptions in a
new constitutional epoch.
Ryskamp, John.
Algora Publishing, ©2007 269 p. $24.95 (pa)
A journalist and critic with a law degree, Ryskamp begins with the story
of the women in New London, Connecticut who refused to give up her
house to a pharmaceutical giant, as directed by her city government. He
asks why she fought all the way to the US Supreme Court when no one
thought she had a chance, why her loss sparked legislation in every state
and in Congress to prevent such actions, why that movement came as a
surprise to the political system, and the continuing fight for the New Bill
of Rights.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KF6377 2006-046637 1-4133-0530-X
Every landlord’s tax deduction guide, 3d ed.
Fishman, Stephen.
Nolo, ©2005 446 p. $34.99 (pa)
Tax attorney Fishman, noting that rental real estate provides more tax
benefits than almost any other investment, gives advice to owners of res-
idential rental properties on how to take full advantage of their deduction
opportunities. Chapters cover landlard tax classifications, deduction of
operating expenses, repairs, depreciation, interest, start-up expenses,
home office deductions, car and local transportation expenses, travel
expenses, hiring help, casualty and theft losses, additional deductions,
vacation homes, deduction of rental losses, record keeping and
accounting, Schedule E, and claiming deductions for prior years. A final
chapter includes information on further resources and on consulting tax
professionals.
KF6388 2006-030747 978-0-471-78353-4
Charitable giving law made easy.
Hopkins, Bruce R.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2007 356 p. $34.95
Aimed at accountants, consultants, nonprofit executives, and other inter-
ested professionals, this text provides an accessible overview of the law
as it relates to charitable giving. Using plain language, Hopkins addresses
such topics as contributions of money and property; timing of charitable
deductions; estate and gift tax considerations; special property rules; and
planned giving. The administration of charitable giving programs is
covered in the final chapter. The author or co-author of 19 books,
Hopkins is an authority on tax- exempt organizations.
KF6491 1-4133-0531-8
Home business tax deductions; keep what you earn, 3d
ed.
Fishman, Stephen.
Nolo, ©2006 481 p. $34.99 (pa)
Updated for 2007 tax filings, an attorney offers the growing ranks of
home business owners general legal information in plain English with
examples for staying out of trouble with the IRS. E.g., tables on ranges of
expenses for income categories accompany the tip to beware of taking
abnormally large deductions. The guide includes further resources, the
tax law, and information on the types of tax professionals to consult.
KF8202 2005-028933 978-0-252-03035-2
Benjamin Franklin, Pennsylvania, and the first nations;
the treaties of 1736-62.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Kalter.
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 453 p. $45.00
In her new edition of Benjamin Franklin’s publication of the Indian
treaties, Kalter (U.S. and Native American literature, Illinois State U.,
Normal) provides annotation and introductory materials that bring to
light Franklin’s understanding of the native peoples and their point of
view. Her lengthy historical introduction is useful both for providing
background and context to the treaties, but also for adding a more
nuanced view to the complexities of the political situation by giving cre-
dence to the native point of view, their history not only with the colonists
but with other native groups, and the shifts they had experienced in
power since the colonists had arrived. In turn, details about the Native
American peoples who appear in the treaties are highlighted in Kalter’s
annotation, making this a thoughtful historical work. A glossary and
detailed index are provided.
KF8700 2006-281131 978-0-7575-2609-1
Balancing justice; power, politics, and privilege.
Bridgmon, Phillip B. and John W. Clark.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2005 181 p. $32.50 (pa)
Writing for students of criminal justice, Bridgmon and Clark (both of the
U. of North Alabama) examine how politics interacts with criminal
justice institutions and policies. Focusing on politics, ideology, and
wealth, they offer chapters discussing justice and the policy process, dis-
cretion and justice, law enforcement and politic, judicial politics, rights
of the accused, the politics of punishment, capital punishment, and the
politics of tort reform.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KF8736 2006-018461 1-85109-751-1
The judicial branch of state government; people, process,
and politics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sean O. Hogan. (About state government)
ABC-CLIO, ©2006 433 p. $95.00
The state level of the judiciary is not just a way station in the progress
of cases from the local to the federal level; it handles nearly 97 percent
of all legal cases settled in the US. This accessible reference gives a
thorough overview of how state courts impact law, how they function
and exercise power, how they are structured and how they operate, who
works in the courts and how their responsibilities are organized, and
how they deal with politics, including how judges are elected and
reforms are affected. Entries for each state include a brief history,
descriptions of the supreme court of the state and courts of appeal, the
superior courts, county and municipal courts, associated agencies, related
matters such as judicial selection and removal, and a list of further
reading. The editor includes a glossary and annotated bibliography.
KF8742 2006-279755 978-0-393-32757-1
A court divided; the Rehnquist court and the future of
constitutional law.
Tushnet, Mark.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 398 p. $15.95 (pa)
Tushnet (constitutional law, Georgetown U. Law Center) analyzes the
legal personalities and decisions of the US Supreme Court under Chief
Justice Rehnquist. His overarching argument has to do why the
Rehnquist court, to the dismay of the religious right, could generally be
counted on to advance economic conservatism but simultaneously failed
to roll back the cultural leftism unleashed by the Warren Court. His
explanation distinguishes between new (Reagan/Goldwater) Republicans
such as Scalia and Thomas and old Republicans such O’Connor and
Souter, who tended not to join their Republican colleagues on such issues
as abortion, affirmative action, and gay rights. In addition to examining
these issues and explaining this dynamic, he profiles four of the justices
in relation to signature issues: Clarence Thomas and constitutional “orig-
inalism,” Ruth Bader Ginsberg and gender discrimination; Antonin Scalia
and the absolute First Amendment; and Anthony Kennedy and gay
rights.
KF8742 2005-029109 0-8139-2527-4
Institutional games and the U.S. Supreme Court.
Title main entry. Ed. by James R. Rogers et al. (Constitutionalism and
democracy)
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 335 p. $60.00
The editors (all professors of political science at Texas A&M U.) present
nine papers that apply game theory to understandings of how Supreme
Court justices act within their institutional context, both in horizontal
relation to Congress and the states and hierarchical relation to the US
Court of Appeals and other judicial bodies. Among the topics addressed
in relation Congress and the states are strategic versus attitudinal expla-
nations for constitutional and statutory decisions, the role of interest
groups as links between courts and legislatures, transparency as prin-
ciple driver of compliance with court rulings, and state self-regulation of
trade as a reflection of a weak court that strategically deploys the
Commerce Clause to achieve its ends. The book then considers vertical
interactions in papers that discuss lower court failure to follow precedent
as a strategic opportunity for the Supreme Court to retool decisions it no
longer agrees with, the idea that the court system as a whole has mul-
tiple “principles” that influence Supreme Court decisions on the envi-
ronment, and other topics.
KF8742 2006-028064 0-275-98971-2
The Rehnquist Court; understanding its impact and
legacy.
Hudson, David L.
Praeger, ©2007 181 p. $49.95
Hudson (a research attorney with the First Amendment Center at
Vanderbilt U.) presents an overview and assessment of the Supreme
Court during the tenure of the recently deceased Chief Justice, William
J. Rehnquist. Career and other biographical information for Rehnquist
open the volume, followed by a chapter profiling justices serving during
Rehnquist’s tenure at the head of Court. Subsequent chapters explore the
views of Rehnquist and court rulings as they related to federalism;
freedom of religion; freedom of expression; habeas corpus and capital
punishment; other areas of criminal law; and abortion, gay rights, and
affirmative action. The final chapter assesses Rehnquist as an efficient
and fair administrator of the Court who articulated a consistent
conservative judicial philosophy and remained committed to judicial
independence.
–214–
KF8742 2005-025555 978-0-88295-241-3
The Supreme Court under Marshall and Taney, 2d ed.
Newmyer, R. Kent. (The American history series)
Harlan Davidson, Inc., ©2006 191 p. $15.95 (pa)
Newmyer (law and history, U. of Connecticut School of Law) synthesizes
the scholarship on the Supreme Court during the tenures of Chief Justices
John Marshall (1801-1835) and Roger Brooke Taney (1836-1864). Over the
course of the text he deals with a number of significant questions
important to study of the Court during this era, including Marbury v.
Madison and the question of judicial power, state porwer and agrarian
capitalism, the Court and the rise of the American business corporation,
the continuing influence of Justice Marshall on the Taney Court, and the
fugitive slave question and the Dred Scott decision.
KF8745 2006-929553 978-1-933859-11-8
Gleanings from an unplanned life; an annotated oral
history.
Buckley, James L.
Intercollegiate Studies Inst., ©2006 308 p. $25.00
This memoir by James F. Buckley (b. 1923) tells of his varied political
experiences as U.S. Senator, undersecretary of state in the Reagan admin-
istration, and as a judge on the US Court of Appeals. The account is told
through a series of five interviews with Wendy White, and they trace his
childhood and family history, life as a businessman and lawyer, and
political career and retirement. Supplemented by written descriptions,
the interviews are excerpts from the oral history transcripts of the
Historical Society of the District of Columbia Circuit, Oral History Project.
KF8748 2006-028379 978-0-7391-1635-7
Earl Warren and the Warren Court; the legacy in
American and foreign law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Harry N. Scheiber.
Lexington Books, ©2007 368 p. $30.00 (pa)
Lest we forget, the Supreme Court under Earl Warren was a force in both
American and foreign law. This collection of 13 essays examines the
impact of the court on doctrines in terms of equality and liberty and
process in terms of judicial style and strategy. Topics examine equal rep-
resentation through redistricting, race and constitutional development,
including equal protection, the influence of Warren’s decades in law
enforcement, the First Amendment, constitutional federalism at the end
of World War II, the court and Congress, and the craft of avoiding con-
stitutional questions. Foreign issues include judicially-initiated social
transformation in Latin America, the function of jurisprudence in
Canada, comparative law in East Asia, the strong nation-state in
Scandinavia, and the question of whether Warren himself was politically
rather than legally influential in Europe.
KF9066 2005-922049 1-59031-524-3
Model jury instructions in civil antitrust cases, 2005 ed.
Title main entry.
American Bar Association, ©2005 — p. $139.00 (pa)
This handbook for practicing lawyers and judges contains model jury
instructions for all of the more significant causes of action, defenses, and
other issues that have particular application to civil antitrust litigation
and involve issues likely to be considered for jury resolution. Although
based upon the ABA Antitrust Section’s Sample Jury Instructions (last
updated in 1999), these instructions have been reviewed and rewritten
where necessary in order to reflect the law as established by the Supreme
Court and the Courts of Appeal. The volume does not include standard
instructions that the court would use in any civil jury case.
KF9325 2006-017142 978-0-8014-4378-7
Failure to protect; America’s sexual predator laws and the
rise of the preventive state.
Janus, Eric S.
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 184 p. $35.00
In his case against current sexual predator laws such as Megan’s law,
Janus (William Mitchell College of Law, St. Paul, Minnesota) argues that
they are counter-productive, because they focus on the stereotypical
lurking stranger who is a repeat offender rather than the more typical
perpetrator who is known to the victim but not the criminal justice
system. Like the conservative agenda in regard to suspected terrorists,
application of these laws in a preventive way violates the American
concept of justice. He urges examination of the root causes of sexual vio-
lence and the likelihood of various approaches preventing such crimes.
–215–
KF9440 978-90-04-15459-9
The regulation of gambling; European and national
perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alan Littler and Cyrille Fijnaut.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 265 p. $121.00
These nine essays come from a November 2005 colloquium funded by
the Dutch State Lottery held at Tilburg U. with contributors concentrating
on EU gambling regulations, the economics of regulation, and the
problem of illegal gambling. Essay topics include an overview of gam-
bling in the EU, the political and legal controversies of gambling in the
EU, the proportionality principle and its application by the European
Court of Justice, private operators’ views of regulation, state licensed lot-
teries and “toto companies,” Dutch gambling law and policy as an
untenable parochial approach, regulation in Great Britain and the impact
of EU law, French and Belgian views and a summary of member state
perspectives. An appendix includes material on six significant cases.
Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KF9619 2006-019798 1-933220-92-9
Current legal issues in criminal justice; readings.
Title main entry. Ed. by Craig Hemmens.
Roxbury Publishing Co., ©2007 264 p. $29.95 (pa)
The 19 essays in this graduate textbook explain the history and current
status of major legal issues involving the police, courts, corrections, and
juvenile justice. Topics include drug tests and the rationale for war-
rantless searches, DNA evidence, mental health and the death penalty,
juvenile waiver laws, obscenity on the internet, and the USA Patriot Act.
No index is provided.
KF9630 2006-002162 978-1-85109-503-2
Unreasonable searches and seizures; rights and liberties
under the law.
Stephens, Otis H. and Richard A. Glenn. (America’s freedoms)
ABC-CLIO, ©2006 445 p. $55.00
Stephens (political science and constitutional law, U. of Tennessee) and
Glenn (government and political affairs, Millersville U.) analyze the roots
of both the amendment and the act and examine recent legislation, inter-
pretation and jurisdiction. They cover the elements of the Fourth
Amendment in a dynamic society including issues of warrants and
detention, the origins of the amendment in the colonial Writs of
Assistance Case and later in the building of the new nation, twentieth-
century issues involving warrants, electronic surveillance and the exclu-
sionary rule, and the impact of the war on terrorism. They include key
cases, concepts, persons, laws and terms and a collection of documents
including a sampling of present-day warrants from Pennsylvania and the
federal government.
KF9674 2006-007048 978-0-19-518995-7
Proving the unprovable; the role of law, science, and
speculation in adjudicating culpability and
dangerousness.
Slobogin, Christopher. (American Psychology-Law Society series)
Oxford U. Press, ©2007 193 p. $55.00
Courts often uncritically heed the opinions of mental health professionals
in commitment and sentencing proceedings on why a defendant com-
mitted a harmful act and the chance of recidivism, according to Slobogin
(law, psychiatry, U. of Florida). He examines the expert witness role in
the context of the recent history of the science and the law (e.g., the 1993
Supreme Court decision in Daubert v. Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals that
established reliability criteria for clinical testimony). He draws on Daniel
Fishman’s pragmatic psychology for his analytical framework for the
admissibility of such testimony. In cross-examining the predictability of
dangerousness, the author recommends a database of cases to bolster
opinions, e.g., the validity of claims of posttraumatic stress syndrome as
an extenuating factor.
KFC170 2006-046799 978-1-4133-0621-7
Deeds for California real estate, 7th ed.
Randolph, Mary.
Nolo, ©2007 158 p. $27.99 (pa)
Whenever property is transferred in California, a new deed is required.
Aimed at non-lawyers, this accessible guide explains how to choose the
right kind of deed, draw it up, and file it with the county recorder. All
of the necessary forms are provided in a photocopiable format and are
accompanied by step-by-step instructions. The seventh edition has been
updated to include information for registered domestic partners.
Randolph is vice president of editorial at Nolo.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KFI1765 2006-012940 978-0-8047-5332-6
Forgiveness, mercy, and clemency.
Title main entry. Ed. by Austin Sarat and Nasser Hussain.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 238 p. $24.95 (pa)
However crucial justice and its legal implementation are to making life
bearable, companion virtues such as forgiveness, mercy, and clemency
are just as necessary, say these American scholars of law, ethics, and lit-
erature. They examine various registers on which to chart the relations
among such values, and to understand their place in society.
KJ945 2005-034775 0-7546-5687-X
Burgesses and Burgess law in the Latin kingdoms of
Jerusalem and Cyprus (1099-1325).
Nader, Marwan.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 225 p. $99.95
Burgesses were European crusaders, pilgrims and colonists who settled
in the cities and villages of the Holy Land starting in the 12th century.
Although they worked in a variety of fields as merchants, tradesman,
artisans, money-changers, translators, farmers and fisherman alongside
non-European Christians or Moslems they were set apart and eventually
assumed positions of power. This study defines the status of burgesses
in this period, illustrates the subtle social forces at work, disputes a
number of past explanations for their assumption of power, and con-
cludes their status came from a complex combination of religion, juris-
diction and property.
KJA1067 2006-049221 978-90-04-15499-5
The C o r p u s I u r i s C i v i l i s i n t h e M i d d l e A g e s ; m a n u s c r i p t s
and transmission from the sixth century to the juristic
revival.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles M. Radding and Antonio Ciaralli.
(Brill’s studies in intellectual history; v.147)
BRILL, ©2007 277 p. $129.00
Issued between 529 and 534 by the Byzantine emperor Justinian I, the
Corpus Iuris Civilis (Body of Civil Law or Codex Justinianus) was an
extremely influential work in European jurisprudence from the 11th
through the 19th centuries. Unfortunately, according to Radding (history,
Michigan State U.) and Ciaralli (Latin paleography and diplomatics, U. of
Perugia, Italy), historical treatment of the texts and their reception have
generally failed to take into account paleographic studies of the trans-
mission of the manuscripts of the Corpus that undermine the evidence
upon which those histories are premised. They take stock of these pale-
ographic issues and consider their implications for historians writing
about the Corpus. Their focus is on the three works of the Justinian cod-
ification—the Institutes, the Code, the Digest—with less attention given to
the Novels.
KJC436 978-90-04-15533-6
Russia, Europe, and the rule of law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ferdinand Feldbrugge. (Law in Eastern
European; no.56)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 223 p. $149.00
In 12 papers selected from a July 2005 conference in Berlin, scholars of
law, history, and the social sciences examine the concept and practice of
the rule of law in contemporary Russia, and how it intersects with those
in European, especially in places where governments modeled on
Western Europe are by replaced by ones modeled on Russia. The topics
include interpretation and accommodation in the Russian Constitutional
Court, lay judges in Rostov province, and the role of the European Union
in rebuilding Serbia as a rechtsstaat. Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KJC436 978-90-04-15187-1
Terrorism and the foreigner; a decade of tension around
the rule of law in Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elspeth Guild and Anneliese Baldaccini.
(Immigration and asylum law and policy in Europe; v.11)
BRILL, ©2007 431 p. $175.00
Seven chapters, presented by Baldaccini (committee specialist, House of
Lords European Union Committee, UK) and Guild (European migration
law, U. of Nijmegen, the Netherlands), explore the changing legal regimes
of freedom and security as they concern immigrants and asylum seekers
in the EU from the time of the first Iraqi invasion of Kuwait to the end
of July 2005. At the European level, contributors discuss how terrorism
and other security concerns have impacted immigration and asylum
policies and explore the role and limits of the European Court of Human
Rights in supervising nation state measures affecting aliens’ rights. These
chapters are followed by national studies of the changing legal regimes
of the UK, Germany, France, the Netherlands, and Italy. The volume also
contains annexes reproducing the texts of relevant documents, including
UN Security Council Resolution 1373 (passed in response to the
September 11th attacks) and other materials.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KJC5132 978-90-04-15432-2
Human rights in turmoil; facing threats, consolidating
achievements.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stéphanie Lagoutte et al. (International studies
in human rights; v.92)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 299 p. $108.00
The Berlin Wall has come down; Charles Taylor is out of work; interna-
tional conferences and conventions protecting human rights have bur-
geoned over the past couple of decades. On the other hand, to take
perhaps the most egregious example, The World’s Only Remaining
Superpower is wantonly torturing people around the world and incar-
cerating an unconscionable portion of its population. So, are human
rights losing or gaining ground? Scholars with the Danish Institute for
Human Rights offer insights, if not a definitive answer, in discussions on
such aspects as UN reform, globalization, terrorism, the battlefield,
religion, freedom from want, and solitary confinement. A former judge
of the European Court of Human Rights also weighs in. Martinus Nijhoff
is an imprint of Brill.
KJC5132 978-90-04-15383-7
Promoting justice, human rights and conflict resolution
through international law: Liber amicorum, Lucius
Caflisch.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marcelo G. Kohen. (Graduate Institute of
International Studies, Geneva)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 1226 p. $439.00
Kohen (international law, Graduate Institute of International Studies,
Geneva, Switzerland) present this work in honor of Swiss international
law specialist and former European Court of Human Rights judge, Lucius
Caflisch, on the occasion of his retirement. Over the course of his career,
Caflisch has worked on such areas the relationship between state immu-
nities and human rights, peaceful settlement of disputes, the law of the
sea, international watercourses, the protection of the environment and
boundaries, and inventorying state legal practices. The 67 articles pre-
sented reflect these concerns and more. Topics include the jus cogens pro-
hibition of torture and the importance of sovereign state immunity, the
election of judges to the European Court of Human Rights, European per-
spectives on the right to education, transitional justice and the
International Criminal Court, the law of war, reparations in favor of indi-
vidual victims of gross violations of human rights and international
humanitarian law, the principle of subisidiarity in the European
Convention on Human Rights, common implementation of environ-
mental standards for Antarctica, and unilateral declarations as a means
of settling human rights disputes. Approximately half of the papers are
written in English and half in French. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of
Brill.
KJC5132 978-90-04-14980-9
State support of religious education; Canada versus the
United Nations.
Bayefsky, Anne F. and Arieh Waldman. (Studies in religion, secular
beliefs and human rights; v.3)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 1116 p. $585.00
In 1867 Canada recognized the legal right for minority Roman Catholics
in Ontario to receive public funding for separate schools; at the same
time minority Protestants in Quebec received the same right. In time the
right was revoked in Quebec while state funding of Roman Catholic
schools continued in Ontario. Bayefsky (political science, York U.) and
advocate Waldman, who was the successful plaintiff in Waldman v.
Canada to the UN Human Rights Committee, document the case against
public funding for Roman Catholic schools in Ontario. They introduce
the case and give complete texts of related Canadian laws, international
treaties and commentary, government data including census information,
official reports, private reports from school associations, Canadian
judicial decisions, materials presented to the UN committee and its deci-
sions, and legislative developments in Ontario. The cover lists the title as
State Support for Religious Education; Canada versus the United Nations.
Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
–216–
KJC5132 978-90-04-15554-1
Yearbook of the European convention on human rights;
v.48, 2005.
Title main entry. Council of Europe. (series: title)
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2007 857 p. $574.00
Published in both English and French, this yearbook contains infor-
mation on the European Convention on Human Rights for 2005, its
control mechanism, selected judgments of the European Court of Human
Rights, and resolutions of the Committee of Ministers. The third section
covers other human rights work conducted by the Council of Europe,
including the Committee of Ministers, recommendations and resolutions
of the Parliamentary Assembly, and policies and activities of the
Directorate General of Human Rights. The final section, which presents
reports in either English or French, consists of information on national
legislation and extracts from national judicial decisions concerning rights
protected by the Convention. The yearbook was prepared by the
Directorate General of Human Rights of the Council of Europe. There is
no index. Martinus-Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KJC6456 2006-046383 1-84542-701-7
The evolution of European competition law; whose
regulation, which competition?
ASCOLA Workshop on Comparative Competition Law (1st: 2004:
Florence, Italy) Ed. by Hanns Ullrich. (ASCOLA competition law series)
Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2006 370 p. $135.00
Eleven contributions from international scholars address the evolution of
the interpretation, implementation, and application of European compe-
tition law. The essays are arranged into four thematic sections: US-EU
Conflicts and Convergence; Controlling Restrictions of Competition; and
Approaching Competition by Regulation. Editor Ullrich teaches law at the
European University Institute in Firenze, Italy. The papers in this volume
were originally presented at the first workshop of the Academic Society
for Competition Law (ASCOLA), which was held there in November 2004.
KJE5124 978-90-04-15239-7
Basic documents on international migration law, 3d ed.
Plender, Richard.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 850 p. $253.00
This edition of the collection of basic documents on international
migration law includes changes and additions to the international con-
ventions, protocols, declarations, and recommendations governing
migration, and the European Union’s legislation. New documents include
the EU’s Minimum Standards Directive, the European Convention on
Nationality, Conclusions of the Executive Committee of the UNHCR, and
Protocol No. 12 to the European Convention on Human Rights. Others
that have entered into legal effect are the International Convention on the
Protection of the Rights of All Migrant Workers and Members of their
Families. Multilateral instruments, texts governing nationality and state-
lessness, general instruments on refugees and Council of Europe
Instruments are presented and followed by new measures dealing with
aspects of EU law or policy—expanded into four parts here. These cover
provisions governing freedom of movement, the Schengen Acquis, the
EU’s asylum policy, and Admission and Residence in the EU of Third
Country Nationals. Subsequent sections contains documents from the
International Labour Office, American treaties, and African Treaties—the
last two being new. The book is aimed at scholars and practitioners of
migration law, and serves as a companion to Richard Plender’s
International Migration Law. Some documents from the previous edition
have been omitted, and the chapter on the Conference on Security and
Cooperation has been removed.
KJE6536 2006-012259 0-7546-4589-4
European fair trading law; the unfair commercial
practices directive.
Howells, Geraint et al. (Markets and the law)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 295 p. $114.95
Adopted by the European Community in May of 2005, the Unfair
Commercial Practices Directive introduces a general prohibition on a
range of unfair business-to-consumer practices. In this work, Howells
(Lancaster U., UK), Micklitz (U. of Bamberg, Germany), and Wilhelmsson
(U. of Helsinki, Finland) seek to explain the directive while considering
its implications for trading and consumer protection in Europe and its
relationship to national trade practices law. Following an introduction to
the development of the directive, they offer chapters discussing
minimum/maximum harmonization and the internal market clause,
scope of the directive, the general clause on unfair practices, misleading
practices, aggressive commercial practices, codes of conduct, and legal
redress.
–217–
KKM3 978-90-04-15705-7
The Netherlands in court.
Title main entry. Ed. by Niels Blokker et al.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2006 265 p. $128.00
Written to mark the retirement of Johan Lammers from his position as
Legal Adviser of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the Kingdom of the
Netherlands and head of its International Law Division, 12 papers by col-
leagues and former colleagues explore issues arising from the
Netherlands’ involvement in court cases dealing with international law.
They include interstate disputes before international courts and arbitral
tribunals, international court cases in which individuals appear as
applicant or defendant, and national cases in which international law is
invoked. Topics include the International Criminal Tribunal for the
Former Yugoslavia, the filing of amicus curiae briefs in US Courts, legal
effects of international court decisions in the proceedings of national
courts, and the Netherlands before the International Tribunal for the Law
of the Sea. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KKT526 2006-049273 978-90-04-15358-5
Till God inherits the earth; Islamic pious endowments in
al-Andalus (9 - 15th centuries).
García Sanjuán, Alejandro. (Medieval and early modern Iberian World;
v.31)
BRILL, ©2007 545 p. $223.00
García Sanjuán (medieval history, Huelva U., Spain) draws mainly but
not exclusively on Islamic jurisprudence records in Arabic and Spanish
to investigate pious endowments as an institution of Andalusian society.
Among his perspectives are its origins and early development, the organ-
ization of mosques and the role of pious endowments, and legal theory
versus practical needs. His 1998 dissertation at the University of Seville
was published in 2002 as Hasta que Dios herede la tierra; no publisher is
cited. The English translation has been substantially revised and updated,
though the general format and the conclusions remain the same.
KNC362 2005-015921 0-7546-2125-1
Insolvency law in East Asia.
Title main entry. Ed by Roman Tomasic.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 563 p. $185.00
This volume speaks to the urgency of insolvency law reform in East Asia
over the last 10 years. Although two general chapters address topics such
as legal culture and cross-border insolvency, most of the articles scru-
tinize the 14 principal jurisdictions in the region. Each of those articles
discuss key themes that run through different insolvency regimes, such
as the legal system and culture; personal insolvency laws; corporate insol-
vency rules; court-based schemes of arrangement; winding-up proce-
dures; liquidators; enforcement; and offences. The authors not only
analyze the legal rules and principles, but also the contexts in which they
have evolved. Its comprehensiveness makes this reference useful to both
practitioners and academics who advise on transactions and business
structures, as well as on actual or potential insolvent situations.
KUQ41 978-0-7165-3396-2
Bishop in the dock; the sedition trial of James Liston in
New Zealand. (reprint, 1997)
Sweetman, Rory.
Irish Academic Press, ©2007 332 p. $75.00
Sweetman (Irish history, U. of Otago, New Zealand) tells how Catholic
Bishop Liston, in Auckland, New Zealand on Saint Patrick’s Day 1922
delivered a speech praising revolutionaries who were then striving to free
Ireland from English rule, and how the authorities took him to trial for
sedition against the British crown. The 1997 edition was published by
Auckland U. Press. This reprint is distributed in the US by ISBS.
KZ236 978-90-04-15331-8
Treaties submitted to the United States Senate; legislative
history, 1989-2004.
Wiktor, Christian L.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2006 475 p. $202.00
Wiktor traces the legislative history of the 329 treaties submitted by the
President to the U.S. Senate for its advice and consent to ratification
during the 1989-2004 period. The main part of the volume is arranged
chronologically. Each entry provides general information about a par-
ticular treaty and the steps taken by the Senate during the approval
process. This is followed by sections on implementing legislation, exec-
utive action, and entry into force. Annotations offer additional infor-
mation on related treaties, amendments, and present status. Wiktor is
also the editor of the nine-volume series Unperfected Treaties of the United
States of America 1776-1976. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KZ1176 978-1-903047-50-7
Nazi war trials.
Walker, Andrew.
Pocket Essentials, ©2006 159 p. $14.95 (pa)
Their crimes were unprecedented, despicable, deadly and obscene, con-
ducted in hatred but also conducted in times of war. Their victors had to
punish them, but exactly how under the laws that existed at the time was
an open question. The prosecutors’ tricks were to be candid about the
law and thorough about the evidence, and although they did not obtain
convictions for all of the 21 Nazi defendants, they were able to establish
precedent and bring the truth to an already-weary world. In this very
accessible explanation of the case for general readers and those new to
the subject, Walker covers the American, British, French and Soviet pros-
ecutors’ cases, the individual defense cases, the closing speeches, delib-
erations, verdicts, sentences and how they were carried out. He also gives
a list of websites and further reading. Distributed in the US by Trafalgar
Square Publishing.
KZ1190 2006-026010 0-275-99297-7
Global justice; the politics of war crimes trials.
Moghalu, Kingsley Chiedu.
Praeger, ©2006 220 p. $49.95
Rather than take an advocacy position towards war crimes trials,
Moghalu (a recent member of the Redesign Panel on the United Nations
Internal Justice System) seeks to provide a non-scholarly audience with
an understanding of the international political context of war crimes
trials, portraying it as the playing out of the conflict of between global-
ization and sovereignty. He traces the development of international war
crimes trials from their foundations in the Nurember and Tokyo trials
after World War II, going on to discuss tribunals for the former
Yugoslavia, Rwanda, Sierra Leone, along with the establishment of the
International Criminal Court. He concludes with recommendations on
how to address power imbalances that currently influence the system of
international justice.
KZ1242 978-90-04-15660-9
The Italian yearbook of international law; v.15, 2005.
Title main entry. Ed. by Benedetto Conforti et al. (The Italian yearbook
of international law; v.15)
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2006 485 p. $243.00
This edition includes articles on interpretation of doctrine, explaining
implementation of the judgments of the European Court on Human
Rights reforms of the UN Charter, the 2005 world summit on environ-
mental governance, minorities and their autonomy in South Tyrol, and
issues of attribution to states of private acts as it relates the concept of de
facto organs and complicity. It also includes material about the rulings
of the House of Lords on torture, Italian anti-terrorism legislation, the
International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea and the activities of the
International Law Commission and the World Trade Organization. It
explains Italian practice relating to international law and Italian
involvement in diplomatic and parliamentary practice, treaty practice
and national legislation. The collection closes with a bibliography of
Italian publications in international law and reviews of recent books. The
editors provide an analytical index. Martinus-Nijhoff is an imprint of
Brill.
KZ1276 2006-026904 978-3-11-019120-2
The Grotian theology of international law; Hugo Grotius
and the moral foundations of international relations.
Stumpf, Christoph A. (Religion and society; v.44)
Mouton de Gruyter, ©2006 262 p. $113.40
Dutch jurist and theologian Grotius (1583-1645) is widely known for his
work in both fields, but Stumpf (not further identified) explores the
intersection between these two as manifest in his highly influential 1625
work on the law of nations. He argues that his system of international
relations is in fact a theology of international law, and that it can
supplement modern public international law and provide bridges to the
religious traditions of jurisprudence.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
KZ3410 978-90-04-15481-0
Time, history and international law.
Title main entry. Ed. by Matthew Craven et al. (Develoments in interna-
tional law; v.58)
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2007 251 p. $134.00
How does the understanding of time and history resonate in the work of
practitioners of international law? In this collection of ten articles con-
tributors show through case narratives and theoretical studies how
memory figured in the interpretation of evidence, the creation of policy,
and the outcome of significant contentions in practice. They cover per-
ceptions of the historiography of international law and its interpretation,
English approaches to international law in the nineteenth century,
Oppenheim’s influence, the quest for new sources of international law,
the Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties and the fragmentation of
international law, the use of treaties as points of reference, piracy and
the origins of enmity, and the role of distance in the British policies on
the 1957 Oman and Muscat incident. The introduction is particularly
helpful in explaining this often-overlooked aspect of history. Martinus
Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KZ4216 90-04-15430-2
Baltic yearbook of international law; v.6, 2006.
Title main entry. (Series: title)
Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2006 501 p. $398.00
This volume of the Baltic Yearbook contains the proceedings of the May
2004 inaugural conference of the European Society of International Law.
Fourteen papers (four of which are presented in French) examine such
issues as American imperialism as a “shadow looming over international
law,” the role of the Soviet legal legacy in the definition of genocide, col-
lectivism and customary international law, the normative underpinnings
of the use of force in the European Union’s common security policy,
European Union anti-terrorism policy from the perspective of the
European Convention on Human Rights, and the international legal
aspects of Soviet policy towards the Lithuanian independence movement
in 1991. Also included are documentary materials on international law
produced in Estonia, Latvia, and Lithuania produced in the year 2005; a
pair of reviews of books on humanitarian intervention by S. Chesterman
and N.J. Wheeler; and information on the Lithuanian legal journal Teisé
(Law). Martinus-Nijhoff is an imprint of Brill.
KZ5624 2006-014014 1-84519-028-9
Arms control in the Middle East; cooperative security
dialogue and regional constraints.
Landau, Emily B.
Sussex Academic Press, ©2006 253 p. $69.50
With the US and Russia serving as gavel-holders, 14 Middle Eastern coun-
tries took part in the Arms Control and Regional Security working group
from 1992 to 1995, which was the first region-wide attempt to develop a
concept of regional security for the Middle East. Studying these talks,
Landau (director, Arms Control and Regional Security Project, Jaffee
Center for Strategic Studies, Tel Aviv U., Israel) analyzes how security con-
cerns and interests “were shaped in the context of cooperative regional
dialogue carried out in a seminar-like framework” and seeks to identify
the constraints to progress and explain the dynamics that led to the sus-
pension of the talks. He pays particular attention to the role of Egypt’s
opposition to the direction of the talks, explaining it partly in terms of
the social dynamics of the working group itself and Egypt’s perception
that its role as a regional leader was being sidelined. Distributed in the
US by ISBS.
KZ5830 2006-012156 92-808-1123-1
The Chemical Weapons Convention; implementation,
challenges and opportunities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ramesh Thakur and Ere Haru.
United Nations University Pr., ©2006 190 p. $30.00 (pa)
The Convention, which was signed in 1993 and came into effect in 1997,
has not faced the same controversy as the ban on nuclear weapons
because it applies to across the board, rather than allowing a small
group of countries to retain weapons that are banned for all others.
Professionals with the Organisation for the Prohibition of Chemical
weapons and academic researchers review the challenges of
implementing it.
–218–
KZ6311 2006-015988 978-0-7391-1185-7
Symbolic gestures and the generation of global social
control; the International Criminal Court.
Rothe, Dawn and Christopher W. Mullins. (Critical perspectives on
crime and inequality)
Lexington Books, ©2006 229 p. $25.95 (pa)
That the International Criminal Court (ICC) exists at all is significant
enough in the mechanics of maintaining international social order, let
alone the fact that it has so much to do it is permanent. However, Rothe
and Mullins (both criminology, U. of Northern Iowa) find significant
problems with a world court that is intended to work as a deterrent
against genocide, terrorism and war crimes. They find the ICC to be
limited in its scope and power, and confined in its conception of what
constitutes the crimes it judges. They explain how the ICC fits within
criminology and an integrated theory of state crimes, describe the devel-
opment of the ICC through the Rome Statue, define contradictions of
international law with which the court must deal, clarify the position of
the ICC in the war on Iraq and make suggestions to enhance the potential
of the ICC.
KZ6316 2006-007572 978-0-8047-5352-4
Guilty pleas in international criminal law; constructing a
restorative justice approach.
Combs, Nancy Amoury.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 370 p. $29.95 (pa)
Combs (William and Mary School of Law) examines how a widespread
and systematic effort to obtain guilty please can enhance international
criminal accountability by increasing the number of prosecutions that
feasibly can be undertaken. She compares the almost universal practice
in states such as the US and Britain called plea bargaining, in which
defendants are offered some form of sentencing concessions in exchange
for a guilty plea.
KZ6795 2006-036100 978-1-933264-21-9
Terrorism law; materials, cases, comments, 4th ed.
Addicott, Jeffrey F.
Lawyers & Judges Pub. Co., ©2007 557 p. $95.00
In assembling this introductory law school textbook on the emerging
body of “terrorism law,” Addicott (director, Center for Terrorism Law, St.
Mary’s U. School of Law) purposes to “survey the dominant character-
istics of the War on Terror and to highlight some of the evolving legal
and policy implications that confront the United States with special
emphasis on the importance of developing capable law-based responses
on the one hand and promoting democracy as a long term solution to
terrorism avoidance on the other.” After defining terrorism and exam-
ining some of the broad international and domestic legal issues involved
in the “War on Terror,” he presents chapters discussing domestic civil lib-
erties, the necessity and rationale for the law of war (drawing lessons
from the My Lai massacre), interrogation and torture, battlefield con-
tractors, cyberterrorism, human rights and terrorism avoidance, tensions
between Pax Americana and the rule of law, terrorism-related civil liti-
gation, and responses to bioterrorism and legal ramifications. His dis-
cussion incorporates judicial decisions and other legal materials into the
body of the text and a series of appendixes present other materials,
including relevant United Nations Security Council Resolutions, the
International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, the US Military
Commissions Act of 2006, and a September 2006 Department of Defense
directive on detainee treatment policy.
KZA5205 978-90-04-15589-3
The International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea
yearbook 2005; v.9.
Title main entry.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2006 252 p. $128.00 (pa)
The International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea is the central judicial
forum established by the United Nations Convention on the Law of the
Sea of 1982. This yearbook describes the activities of the Tribunal for the
year 2005. Only one case was subject to decision during 2005, the Case
concerning the Conservation and Sustainable Exploitation of Swordfish
Stocks in the South-Eastern Pacific Ocean (Chile/European Community), and
its proceedings are discussed here. Also discussed are the legal and
administrative matters dealt with by the Tribunal in their 2005 sessions.
Other topics dealt with include the organization and functioning of the
Tribunal, jurisdiction and competence, procedure, finances, privileges
and immunities, and biographies of the judges. A series of annexes
contain a variety of relevant documentary materials.
–219–
KZA5205 978-90-04-15240-3
The rules of the International tribunal for the law of the
sea; a commentary.
Title main entry. Ed. by P. Chandrasekhara Rao and Ph. Gautier.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2006 521 p. $196.00
The International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea was founded in 1996.
Rao (a judge and former president of the International Tribunal for the
Law of the Sea) and Gautier (registrar of the Tribunal; Catholic U. of
Louvain) introduce this judicial body that aims to be efficient and trans-
parent while seeking a balance between familiar judicial practices and
innovation in settling disputes. The volume includes contributed com-
mentaries; appended details of the Tribunal’s organization, jurisdiction,
procedures, rules, and articles (in English and French); and lists of cases
and references to its articles and rules. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of
Brill.
EDUCATION
LA217 2006-021398 978-1-57886-535-2
Mis-education in schools; beyond the slogans and double
talk.
Good, Howard.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 96 p. $19.95 (pa)
Good (journalism, SUNY New Paltz) considers the state of American
schools and his “frustration as a parent, teacher, and former school
board member at the vast amount of uninspired schooling,” while
describing his own experience in these capacities. He disagrees with the
overregulation and pushing for standards that has occurred recently and
feels that there is more to education than testing. There is no index.
LA226 978-1-932236-88-0
All-American colleges; top schools for conservatives, old-
fashioned liberals, and people of faith.
Title main entry.
ISI Books, ©2006 336 p. $22.00 (pa)
The 50 schools profiled here emphasize what the authors believe are the
core values of America’s founding and the intellectual traditions of the
West. Emphasis is on mandatory core courses required at each school
and whether they add up to a broad background in the traditional liberal
arts or whether they are left up to chance and consumer choice. The
guide suggests its own eight-course core curriculum—one specific class in
each of eight critical areas of knowledge: classical literature, ancient phi-
losophy, the Bible, Christian thought before 1500, modern political
theory, Shakespeare, US history before 1865, and 19th-century European
intellectual history. The most left-leaning campus covered is Whitman
College, and the most conservative is the Citadel.
LA1128 0-8058-5505-X
User design.
Carr-Chellman, Alison A.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 142 p. $22.50 (pa)
Aimed at students and practitioners of instructional design (ID), this text
makes a case for engaging users in the creation of their own systems of
learning and offers practical guidance for accomplishing this. Carr-
Chellman (Pennsylvania State U.) introduces the concepts of user-design
and outlines methods for implementing this approach in corporations
and schools. She also explains the basics of systems thinking and sug-
gests ways of handling conflicts that arise during the design process.
LA1312 2006-931369 978-0-7391-1344-8
The state bearing gifts; deception and disaffection in
Japanese higher education.
McVeigh, Brian J.
Lexington Books, ©2006 297 p. $63.00
Using Japanese higher education as a case study, McVeigh (East Asian
studies, U. of Arizona) explores exchange dramatics and their linkages to
the state. Coverage includes theoretical background on general, abstract
processes found in all human societies—exchange, front-building, and
deception—and specific, concrete instances of sociopolitical arrangements
visible in state societies; the concept in Japan of education as a “gift”
from officialdom; licit and illicit facets of Japan’s higher education; a
case study illustration of exchange dramatics; linkages between exami-
nations and “excessive dramatizations of self-worth,” how students are
guided through the “official exchange circuitry,” and the “real and
rhetorical” in education reform; and ways that self-deception may be
seen as a form of alienation in modern society.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB7 2006-046745 978-1-59558-110-5
The New Press education reader; leading educators speak
out.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ellen Gordon Reeves.
The New Press, ©2006 352 p. $24.95 (pa)
Twenty essays by writers and educators explore contemporary topics in
education through progressive and underrepresented points of view.
Many of the contributors are associated with community projects pro-
viding multicultural advocacy, perspectives on child policy, and literacy
services. Writers Studs Terkel, Herbert Kohl, and Dave Eggers also con-
tribute. The essays, some previously published, discuss what makes a
great educator (high school students weigh in on this topic), explore solu-
tions to racism and homophobia, offer perspectives on multicultural
issues, and emphasize the benefits of community and family
involvement. Specific topics include: challenges for Black and Native
American teachers, the current state of desegregation, commercial tar-
geting of poor schools, and reflections on teaching social justice. The
anthology is not indexed. Reeves is the education editor for The New
Press and writes about education for Time magazine.
LB880 2006-023767 0-8204-7890-3
Why Foucault?; new directions in educational research.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael A. Peters and Tina (A.C) Besley.
(Counterpoints: Studies in the postmodern theory of education; v.292)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 243 p. $32.95 (pa)
Contributors of these 13 articles analyze recent work in English and that
by scholars from Germany and Belgium. Topics include research as prob-
lematization, pedagogic punishment, master-student relationships in
antiquity, confessional practices, the relationship between critical
ontology and the developmental model of childhood, the power analytical
perspective on social work as government, the process of fostering and
developing the entrepreneur of the self, social work and social move-
ments as collective actors in movable and mobile orders, truth-telling at
the world university, the ethics of self-creation in the future of education,
games of truth and the ethics of subjectivity in research, discourse and
government in critically framing education policy and Foucault’s rather
Hobbesian take on invoking democracy.
LB1025 2006-052024 978-0-7734-5630-3
Ten basic questions about education; how the concept of
education shapes the practice of education.
Heslep, Robert D.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 272 p. $109.95
Heslep (education, U. of Georgia) argues that while parents, principals,
legislators, and others who make decisions about education are “very
much in need of a conceptual foundation,” they generally lack the time
or interest in theorizing or access to readily understandable sources of
ideas on the nature of education. In this text, Heslep offers a generic
concept of education embodied in mainstream-English discourse by
exploring a series of questions about what education and an educable
being are, the content of educative learning, and educative teaching. The
text concludes with the application of Heslep’s concept of education to
familiar issues and problems, such as evolution and freedom of
expression, that educational leaders are likely to face in American public
schools.
LB1025 2005-036543 1-4129-1616-X
What successful teachers do in diverse classrooms; 71
research-based classroom strategies for new and veteran
teachers.
Glasgow, Neal A. et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 168 p. $65.95
The strategies are designed to aid teachers in making the multicultural
connection, including students with special educational needs, cultivating
gender sensitivity, including students who are sexual minorities, sup-
porting students who are economically advantaged, meeting the needs of
English language learners, working with parents and establishing and
sustaining your professional identity. They include being wary of low
expectations, considering using Universal Design for Learning principles,
opening dialog with students, becoming aware of the traits of gifted stu-
dents, using cooperative test reviews and study guides effectively and
fairly, and developing culturally-appropriate positive feedback.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB1027 2005-285192 0-7575-2647-0
Becoming interdisciplinary; an introduction to
interdisciplinary studies, 2d ed.
Augsburg, Tanya.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2006 197 p. $41.45 (pa)
Inspired by the call to encourage self-authorship in undergraduates,
Augsburg (interdisciplinary studies, Arizona State U.) provides seminal
texts, examples from current events, advice on assembling intellectual
autobiographies and portfolios, discussion questions, worksheets, check-
lists and exercises in this introductory text. She covers the initial defini-
tions and historical contexts of interdisciplinary studies, essential terms
and characteristics, advantages and disadvantages of a degree in inter-
disciplinary studies, understanding and doing research on disciplines,
portfolios, and supplemental readings based on clusters such as inte-
gration and transfer skills, trends in the interdisciplinary workplace, and
types of intelligence for the interdisciplinary workplace. The readings
include Dirk Olin’s “Prospect Theory,” Richard Florida’s “The Creative
Class” and Jennifer James’s “Mastering New Forms of Intelligence.”
LB1027 1-4129-2400-6
Brief counselling in schools; working with young people
from 11 to 18, 2d ed.
Lines, Dennis.
Sage Publications, ©2006 217 p. $110.00
In this book for counseling practitioners and trainees working in schools,
UK-based school counselor Lines discusses techniques for the school envi-
ronment. In this second edition he updates data and attempts a more
universal, less Eurocentric perspective. Still, discussions of legal and
ethical boundaries are based on UK rules. Separate sections each address
a problem that is frequently faced by students aged 12-18. Lines draws
from research in a number of methods of therapy, and largely from his
own experience, to discuss how the school counselor’s brief sessions can
help the student. Case studies illustrate problems in the following cate-
gories: low self-esteem, depression, and suicidal thoughts; bullying; anger
and violence; parental separation and stepparent conflict; loss and
bereavement; sexual inclination and conduct; smoking, drugs, and
alcohol misuse; and life meaning and spiritual emptiness.
LB1027 2006-021288 1-58683-217-4
Project-based inquiry units for young children; first steps
to research for grades pre-K-2.
MacDonell, Colleen.
Linworth Publishing, Inc., ©2007 124 p. $44.95 (pa)
MacDonell shows teachers and librarians how stories and informational
texts can be used to promote research and inquiry in children in grades
Pre-K - 2. In the first two chapters, she describes the project approach to
learning and details the practice of dialogic reading. The remaining four
chapters contain hands-on, developmentally appropriate lessons that
teach children how to construct meaning from informational texts. Each
provides one detailed project description plus three short project
overviews. MacDonell is Head Librarian at a large, American-run inter-
national school.
LB1027 2006-020729 978-1-57886-522-2
The progressive education movement; is it still a factor in
today’s schools?
Hayes, William.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 165 p. $26.95 (pa)
Principles of progressive education, which promotes project-based
learning and development through students’ own interests, have taken a
back seat to new initiatives like No Child Left Behind and the “back to
basics movement,” believes Hayes (education, Roberts Wesleyan College,
Rochester). In 16 chapters, he describes the evolution of progressive edu-
cation from its inception at the beginning of the 20th century. The
legacies of pioneers like John Dewey, Jean Piaget, and later Maria
Montessori are marked by eras both of progress and of backlash. Later
chapters assess the state of today’s teacher education programs and of
the movement in general, and make suggestions for enlivening the future
of progressive education. No index is provided.
–220–
LB1027 2005-031710 1-4129-0634-2
The teacher’s guide to leading student-centered
discussions; talking about texts in the classroom.
Hale, Michael S. and Elizabeth A. City.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 120 p. $61.95
This resource for teachers offers guidance for effectively leading student-
centered, text-based discussions in the classroom. The authors (both
National Paideia faculty members) begin by reviewing each of the
essential elements of a seminar (text, questions, participants, facilitator)
before addressing such topics as creating a culture of inquiry and rec-
ognizing ownership issues. They conclude with an assortment of prac-
tical tips and strategies for improving discussions.
LB1028 2006-037478 0-8204-8188-2
Bakhtin primer.
Shields, Carolyn M. (Peter Lang primers)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 189 p. $18.95 (pa)
Although he was primarily known as a literary critic and philosopher of
language, Shields (educational organization and leadership, U. of Illinois)
feels that many of the ideas of Mikhail Bakhtin hold special relevance for
educators. The primary concepts she deploys from Bakhtin’s work are:
chronotope, which “emphasizes the agency of individuals within the real-
ities of space and time;” heteroglossia, the “multi-vocal and multi-per-
spectival approach to life that, according to Bakhtin, is inherent in
day-to-day interaction;” dialogism, which replaces monologic approaches
to life with “living in openness to difference;” and carnival, which sub-
verts the hierarchy of everyday institutional life.
LB1028 2006-277009 0-87425-717-4
Blended eLearning; integrating knowledge, performance,
support, and online learning. 2d ed., enterprise-class ed.
Bielawski, Larry and David Metcalf.
HRD Press, Inc., ©2005 326 p. $39.95 (pa)
The authors (both of RWD Technologies) argue for a multidisciplinary
approach to online learning and human capital management that takes
advantage of information technologies and best practices in alternative
approaches to instructional design in business enterprises. In this book
they provide guidance on the currently available technological tools and
strategies that can be harnessed in pursuit of enterprise-wide “blended”
e-learning.
LB1028 2006-025691 1-58683-212-3
Handheld computers in schools and media centers.
Bell, Ann.
Linworth Publishing, Inc., ©2007 133 p. $39.95 (pa)
Also known as PDAs, hand-held computers have a wealth of features that
can be used to support learning in the classroom. This guide for
librarians and teachers takes them through the process of selecting
hardware and software and explains how hand-held computers can be
used to help students learn the curriculum and meet national standards.
A former high school media specialist, Bell developed and now teaches
online professional development courses for teachers for the U. of
Wisconsin-Stout.
LB1028 2005-022461 1-59140-494-0
Handbook of research on literacy in technology at the K-
12 level.
Title main entry. Ed. by Leo Tan Wee Hin and R. Subramaniam.
Idea Group Publishing, ©2006 666 p. $195.00
Stressing the need to introduce a greater emphasis on technological lit-
eracy into primary school classrooms, the editors (both of Nanyang
Technological U., Singapore) present 35 chapters that together provide an
overview of the major issues involved in such a project. Opening chapters
grapple with conceptual issues, including the definition of technological
literacy, connecting technological literacy to other educational goals,
ethical and legal issues, Internet chatrooms as alternatives to physical
meeting places, connections between discourses of technology and lit-
eracy, and questions of technological literacy measurement. The next
group of chapters focuses on technological tools, including digital video,
“WebQuests,” and tablet PCs. The final group of papers discusses issues
related to teacher education and school-based matters, specifically edu-
cators as instructional designers, constructing online learning commu-
nities, knowledge management and communities of practice, factors
affecting the integration of technology into education, and pedagogical
choices for teaching English as a second language with technology.
–221–
LB1028 978-0-7734-5525-2
A learning technology in continuing professional
development; the Galileo network.
Jacobsen, Michele.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 280 p. $109.95
Jacobsen (education, U. of Calgary) offers a case study of the Galileo
Educational Network Association, an independent educational
organization which has pioneered a mentoring approach in Alberta,
Canada, to continuous professional development for classroom teachers
in the area of integrating information and communications technology
(ICT) in the curriculum. The author analyzes and evaluates the impact
of the Galileo Network’s approach to professional development and
leadership on teacher and student learning in nine schools in five school
divisions during the 2000 to 2001 school year. She concludes that the
Galileo Network has worked extremely well in training educators to
effectively incorporate ICT as a component in their students’ educational
experiences.
LB1028 2005-037827 1-4129-3730-2
Powerful lesson planning; every teacher’s guide to
effective instruction, 2d ed.
Skowron, Janice.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 153 p. $65.95
Skowron (who has been a school teacher, an administrator, and an edu-
cation consultant) conceived this guide for novice and veteran teachers
from a perceived lack of models for creating lesson plans that incor-
porate more complex methods than simply basic instructional design.
Each chapter in this second edition addresses one of four instructional
designs: basic, integrated, differentiated, and problem-based. While
guiding teachers through a process involving self-reflection and data col-
lection and interpretation, the author explains the desired results,
strategies for assessment, and nuts and bolts of lesson creation for the
design in question. A number of reproducible self-surveys, worksheets,
and assessment rubrics are provided.
LB1028 2005-033277 0-7619-2935-5
Qualitative research in education; a user’s guide.
Lichtman, Marilyn.
Sage Publications, ©2006 249 p. $77.95
Designed as a classroom text, this introduction to the field gives
advanced undergraduate and early postgraduate students sufficient
theory and methodology to design research, gather and organize infor-
mation and analyze results through readings, examples, explanatory text
and individual and group activities. Lichtman (educational research and
evaluation emerita, Virginia Technical U.) begins with an overview of the
traditions and influences of modern educational qualitative research,
including the development of the inductive approach and describes eth-
nologies, phenomenological inquiry, case studies, feminist research
methods and the generic approach. She then describes developing
research questions, conducting literature reviews, interviewing,
observing, and putting it all together by making meaning from data,
communicating ideas, judging and evaluating, and considering self-
reflexivity and subjectivity. She also gives tips on keeping current with
an evolving field and offers a checklist for individual and focus group
interviews and a glossary.
LB1028 2006-026144 978-1-57886-551-2
Research and educational leadership; navigating the new
National Research Council guidelines.
Title main entry. Ed. by Fenwick W. English and Gail Furman. (UCEA
leadership series)
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 176 p. $55.00 (pa)
The authors of the seven essays presented here by English (educational
leadership, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill) and Furman (educational
leadership, Washington State U.) react to the recommendations and argu-
ments of the National Research Council’s Scientific Research in Education
(2002), especially those areas relevant to research in educational lead-
ership and school administration. Authors criticize the report for its
blindness to the needs of culturally sensitive research, examine political
contexts undermining the reports requirements, argue the futility of gen-
eralizing leadership across multiple school contexts following the impor-
tation of “moral goods” such as social justice into the conceptualization
of leadership, and advocate for the benefits of the reports’ recommended
standards for research integrity.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB1028 2006-026940 1-58683-223-9
Technology projects for library media specialists and
teachers.
Conover, Patricia Ross.
Linworth Publishing, Inc., ©2007 125 p. $39.95 (pa)
This resource for library media specialists contains 50 easy-to-use projects
designed to help K-8 students improve their technology skills as they
learn content. The projects are created using Microsoft Word, PowerPoint,
and Excel software. Each lesson contains clear, concise instructions as
well as correlations to ALA Power Standards and National Educational
Technology Standards (NETS). Conover is a middle school library media
specialist in Shawnee Mission, Kansas.
LB1028 2006-004607 1-4129-2797-8
Using PowerPoint in the classroom, 2d ed.
Howell, Dusti et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 116 p. $45.95
The authors provide step-by-step directions from launching the software
to creating a new slide to putting together a whole slide show for
classroom or conference use. They start with the very basics from using
the mouse to undoing mistakes, show how to build a show from the first
slide onward and how to add graphs and graphics from other comput-
erized sources, explain using special effects such as animation and give
tips on making presentation delivery easier with speaker notes and
printed versions. They include material on how to simplify and focus
texts and use type effectively, how to use templates and storyboards, and
how to choose the best graphs for your purpose, and include classroom
applications such as a looping slide show, recorded narration, or even
including a school logo.
LB1033 2005-019984 1-4129-1462-0
The principal’s guide to managing communication.
Schneider, Joe E. and Laura L. Hollenczer. (Leadership for learning)
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 174 p. $69.95
Schneider and Hollenczer present a text to assist principals in under-
standing how to manage communications among and between their
various stakeholders if they are going to be effective at leading their
schools. Coverage includes an overview of the theory underlying com-
munication management, case studies demonstrating practical appli-
cation of the theories, communicating under pressure, thinking
strategically, using technology, and implementing effective practices.
Currently an educational consultant in Arlington, Virginia, Schneider has
30 years of experience in the field of education; Hollenczer is a public
relations professional in Maryland, where her clients include local and
state teacher associations.
LB1042 2006-030670 1-59158-399-3
Crash course in storytelling.
Haven, Kendall and MaryGay Ducey. (Crash course)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2007 120 p. $30.00 (pa)
Written by two master storytellers, this guide for librarians describes a
variety of proven techniques that anyone can use to engage young lis-
teners and make stories come alive. Topics include (for example) how to
choose a story, what to do when memory fails, and how to encourage
audience participation. Copyright issues are addressed in the appendix.
The volume concludes with a list of recommended sources for stories.
LB1042 2006-026486 978-1-59158-305-9
The storytelling classroom; applications across the
curriculum.
Norfolk, Sherry et al.
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 212 p. $35.00 (pa)
Arranging presentation by grade level from kindergarten up through
grade eight, the four chapters in this teaching resource collect lesson
plans and activities based around stories for teaching language arts,
science, math, and social studies. The 48 contributions identify national
standards met and provide a materials list, detailed instructions,
assessment ideas, and references.
LB1044 2005-033579 1-4129-2766-8
Blogs, wikis, podcasts, and other powerful web tools for
classrooms.
Richardson, Will.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 149 p. $61.95
A longtime evangelist for internet technologies in schools, Richardson
(supervisor of instructional technology and communications, Hunterdon
Central Regional High School, New Jersey) challenges teachers to think
differently about technology in their classrooms and gives them the
knowledge to implement the “cool tools” of the web. He includes advice
about using weblogs, wikis, RSS, and podcasts in schools and discusses
the implications of these changes for educators.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB1047 2004-115431 1-4129-0829-9
How to develop children as researchers; a step-by-step
guide to teaching the research process.
Kellett, Mary.
Sage Publications, ©2005 184 p. $67.95
In this practical resource for teachers, Kellett presents a series of 12
lessons designed to help students aged 10 to 14 acquire basic research
skills. Each chapter contains a summary of learning outcomes, timed
teaching content, and a core activity that engages pupils with the main
learning objectives. The core materials are provided in a photocopiable
format at the back of the volume. Kellett is Director of the Children’s
Research Centre, based at the Open U., UK.
LB1048 2005-037814 1-4129-3668-3
176 ways to involve parents; practical strategies for
partnering with families, 2d ed.
Boult, Betty.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 125 p. $51.95
Boult, an adjunct professor and educational consultant, details ways that
schools and teachers can involve parents in their children’s education.
Reasons why this collaboration is helpful are described, along with how
to help parents become advocates. Other chapters discuss methods of pro-
moting and supporting communication and change, involving parents
and the business community, and moving beyond the traditional role as
fundraisers into broader volunteering. This edition has been reorganized
and contains expanded and updated references and strategies.
Suggestions for working with families in diverse communities are
included.
LB1050 2005-017003 978-1-59385-253-5
Fluency instruction; research-based best practices.
Title main entry. Ed. by Timothy Rasinski et al.
Guilford Pr., ©2006 302 p. $30.00 (pa)
In recent years, reading fluency has gained recognition as a critical com-
ponent of effective reading instruction. Thirty-four K-12 and university
educators from the U.S., Australia, New Zealand, and Scotland contribute
16 chapters offering preservice and practicing teachers a thorough exam-
ination of what reading fluency is and how it should be taught. Coverage
includes an historical overview of fluency, ways in which it has come to
be understood, and the educational areas in which it has been situated;
effective instructional programs and classroom practices; and the appli-
cations of fluency research and practice to special populations not typi-
cally associated with fluency instruction.
LB1050 2005-035105 1-59385-296-7
Lenses on reading; an introduction to theories and
models.
Tracey, Diane H. and Lesley Mandel Morrow.
Guilford Pr., ©2006 238 p. $30.00 (pa)
Tracey (education, Kean U.) and Morrow’s (education, Rutgers U.) intro-
ductory text summarizes the key theories and models related to reading
processes and instruction, and offers implications and ideas for both
practice and research. Designed for use as a text in graduate courses on
the foundations of reading, the psychology of reading, and reading
research seminars, and as a reference and resource tool for academics
and practitioners.
LB1050 2004-304886 0-8058-4743-X
The linguistics, neurology, and politics of phonics; silent
“E” speaks out.
Strauss, Steven L.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2005 203 p. $75.00
Politics has taken precedence over science and over common sense,
declares Strauss, a neurologist with a background in linguistics. In par-
ticular, he explores the forces behind the current government sponsored
resurrection of phonics and the arguments used to justify its legal sanc-
tification. He argues that the right-wing government’s distorted view of
science was carefully concocted in order to justify an already-made com-
mitment to the resurrection of phonics, even after decades of meaning-
centered research had demonstrated its profound limitation. Teachers
and administrators are now being forced to use methods they know do
not work under threat of sanction and loss of funding.
–222–
LB1050 2006-027161 978-1-890871-74-1
Literacy & learning in the content areas, 2d ed.
Kane, Sharon.
Holcomb Hathaway, Pub., ©2007 414 p. $51.00 (pa)
This resource for pre-service and in-service secondary school teachers
describes a range of practical tools for integrating literacy in content area
classrooms. Numerous examples and teaching/learning scenarios are pro-
vided for a wide range of subjects. Kane (curriculum and instruction,
State U. of New York at Oswego) also explains how literacy strategies can
help students achieve national standards and benchmarks for content
knowledge.
LB1050 2006-052036 978-1-4164-0089-9
Preventing and remediating reading difficulties; bring
science to scale. (reprint, 2003)
Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara R. Foorman.
PRO-ED, ©2006 470 p. $69.00 (pa)
These 16 papers, taken from a June 2002 symposium sponsored by The
Dyslexia Foundation, include research in neuroscience, psychology, edu-
cational psychology and special education and reflect the challenges of
the No Child Left Behind Act of 2001. Contributors describe their work
in early learning and the development of reading-related skills, including
the plasticity of neurophysiological process involved in reading and the
assessment of phonological abilities, identifying sources of risk for
reading difficulties, implementing early reading interventions, including
a two-year study of children at risk, locating the instructional conditions
necessary to remedy reading difficulties in older children, and improving
oral and written language understanding including behavior and brain
evidence in the effective treatment of children in grades four through six.
The final paper comments on getting reader interventions into wide-
spread practice. This is a reprint of a 2003 book originally published by
York Press under ISBN 0-912752-75-0.
LB1050 2005-035082 1-59385-299-1
Reading research at work; foundations of effective
practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Katherine A. Dougherty Stahl and Michael C.
McKenna.
Guilford Pr., ©2006 450 p. $50.00 (pa)
These papers about research of the components of successful literacy
learning build on and extend the work of Steven Stahl, who pioneered
work on phonemic awareness, phonics, vocabulary, fluency, compre-
hension and assessment. The volume includes ten chapters by Stahl and
16 new chapters by experts in the field of literacy learning. They high-
light Stahl’s theoretical, methodological and instructional innovations
and discuss their implications for helping children become better
readers. Katherine Stahl, Steven’s widow, teaches language and literacy at
the University of Illinois, Urbana- Champaign; McKenna teaches reading
at the University of Virginia.
LB1050 0-8058-4006-0
Teaching reading to every child, 4th ed.
Lapp, Diane et al.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 449 p. $55.00 (pa)
Aimed at pre-service and in-service teachers, this text offers the most
current theories and methods for teaching reading to elementary school
students. It includes examples, hands-on activities, lesson plans, assess-
ments, and lists of children’s books. This fourth edition contains new
chapters on technology and on vocabulary instruction; a new section on
readers and writers’ workshops; and expanded discussions of literature
instruction, phases of reading development, and teaching non-native
speakers.
LB1050 2006-027887 1-59385-364-5
Teaching word recognition; effective strategies for
students with learning difficulties.
O’Connor, Rollanda E. (What works for special-needs learners)
Guilford Pr., ©2007 164 p. $25.00 (pa)
O’Connor (education, U. of California, Riverside) describes a variety of
teaching techniques and activities that have been proven to be effective
in helping students with learning difficulties build skills in the area of
word recognition. The material is arranged to correspond to the order in
which reading skills related to word recognition unfold for typical
readers. Resources for teaching older students are found in the appendix,
along with some checklists for the informal assessment of skills.
–223–
LB1051 2006-272999 0-7575-1528-2
Educational psychology, 3d ed.
Gentile, J. Ronald and James P. Lalley.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2005 651 p. $88.95 (pa)
Focusing on the “ordinary” classroom, Gentile (educational psychology
emeritus, State U. of New York-buffalo) and Lalley (education, D’Youville
College) use an eclectic approach and include behaviorism, cognitive
development psychology, psychoanalytic psychology, and humanism to
describe how humans think and learn. They cover levels of experience in
emotion, behavior and cognition in the social context, stability and
change in human development, stages and processes of development and
intelligence, motions and emotions, emotional learning and respondent
conditioning, regulating behavior and operant conditioning, modeling
and social processes, discipline, problem solving, transfer, cognition and
memory, nurturing, knowledge and intellect, expanding teaching reper-
toire and developing sound assessment and grading techniques. They
write with both the student and the seasoned practitioner in mind, pro-
viding new research and examples.
LB1051 2006-031061 978-0-313-33123-7
The Praeger handbook of education and psychology; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joe L. Kincheloe and Raymond A. Horn.
Praeger, ©2006 1015 p. $400.00
As editors Kincheloe (education, McGill U., Canada) and Horn (educa-
tional leadership, Saint Joseph’s U., US) make clear in their introduction,
this four-volume survey of the field of educational psychology in oriented
away from the dominant mechanistic disciplinary orientation and is
rooted more in traditions of cultural and interpretive psychology that
focus on the process of meaning making over the production of gener-
alized empirical data. The 110 chapters review the various strands of this
cultural and interpretive tradition, culminating in discussion of
Kinchelhoe’s “postformalist” approach to educational psychology, which
draws on insights from the Frankfurt School, feminist theory, the devel-
opment theory of Jean Piaget, the ethical concerns of liberation theology,
and a variety of other critical theories. The opening volume explores the
contributions of individual thinkers on education, ranging from the
expected (Jürgen Habermas, Maria Montessori, Erik Erikson, and John
Dewey) to perhaps more surprising figures (Emma Goldman and bell
hooks, for example). Chapters in subsequent volumes address overar-
ching issues in education and psychology in sections on constructivism;
creativity; criticality; culture and cultural studies; developmentalism; edu-
cational purpose; enactivism; knowledge work; learning; memory; mind;
psychoanalysis; race, class, and gender; situated cognition; teaching; and
assessment. The final chapters focus on “new visions” of Kinchelhoe’s
postformalism and address curriculum design, epistemology, intelligence,
multilogicality, ontology, paradigmatic change, pedagogy, power,
research, and spirituality.
LB1059 2006-020640 978-0-566-08734-9
The transfer of learning; participants’ perspectives of
adult education and training.
Leberman, Sarah et al.
Gower Publishing, ©2006 131 p. $89.95
How can adult learners take what they learn into the classroom and suc-
cessfully apply it to the workplace? What can teachers of adults learn
from teachers of children? Working in a variety of adult education set-
tings, including in a fascinating situation in the Cook Islands, the authors
show how the transfer of learning is essentially the core of all learning,
that such a transfer is cross-disciplinary and applicable to many domains
of life, that it is best conducted in a strategic manner and when it meets
the specific needs of the context and cannot be regarded as a set of
standard procedural guideline, and that transfer is an important com-
ponent to independence in learning. They cover concepts and theories,
approaches, the role of learning in transfer, facilitation and modeling and
offer two case studies. Distributed by Ashgate.
LB1060 2006-007585 978-1-57886-495-9
How students really learn; instructional strategies that
work.
Wilson, Linda Henshall.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 194 p. $24.95 (pa)
Drawing on recent brain research, Wilson (curriculum and instruction,
elementary education, Northeastern State U., Oklahoma) emphasizes
long-term rather than rote learning. She urges teachers to assess their
own learning style through the VARK (visual-auditory-reading-kines-
thetic) inventory, before applying suggested activities to improve student
learning overall and in specific subject areas. E.g., the KWL chart maps
assesses what we know, want we want to know, and what we learned.
Rating scales are included but not an index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB1065 2006-023607 978-1-57886-549-9
Results-driven teaching; teach so well that every student
learns.
Babbage, Keen.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 229 p. $29.95 (pa)
Babbage has 22 years of experience in education as a middle school and
high school administrator, college instructor, and graduate school
instructor, and has written six other books about education. He offers a
fast-paced exploration of results-driven teaching—what it is, what it is not,
and how it differs from other perspectives on teaching—illustrated with
numerous classroom examples. For practicing and preservice teachers,
the text is also accessible to the general reader. No subject index.
LB1065 2006-019742 978-1-4166-0411-2
Teachers as classroom coaches; how to motivate students
across the content areas.
Stix, Andi and Frank Hrbek.
Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev, ©2006 190 p. $25.95 (pa)
Applying what works in sports and corporate coaching, Stix and Hrbek
describe the use of coaching strategies in the classroom, first addressing
the environment, then particular techniques. These utilize discussion,
deductive reasoning, drama and art integration, and project-based
learning. The authors detail how to help students improve their per-
formance, build confidence in taking risks, and create a trusting envi-
ronment. Collaboration, hands-on learning, assessment, listening and
questioning skills, problem solving, and individual coaching is discussed,
as is the administrator’s role. Stix is an educational consultant, coach,
and speaker. Hrbek has been a middle school teacher for almost 40 years.
LB1067 2005-034840 978-0-87659-007-2
Learning games; exploring the senses through play.
Silberg, Jackie.
Gryphon House, Inc., ©2006 248 p. $14.95 (pa)
Silberg (Emporia State University) compiles individual and group games,
songs, and activities designed to raise children’s awareness of the senses.
Each activity is paired with a suggested children’s book. The activities are
in sections on the five senses and on multi- sensory activities. An index
of children’s books mentioned is included.
LB1072 87-7307-736-4
Emotions in learning.
Title main entry. Ed. by Francisco Pons et al.
Aalborg University Press, ©2005 182 p. $33.95 (pa)
Written by a team of European and North American scholars of devel-
opmental psychology and education, this volume reviews recent research
on the role of the emotions in learning. The authors look at the subject
from both psychological and pedagogical perspectives. They also propose
a number of interventions for helping both students and teachers to
improve their emotional experience and comprehension. Editor Pons is
affiliated with the U. of Aalborg in Denmark. The volume (which lacks
an index) is distributed in the U.S. by The David Brown Book Company.
LB1115 0-8058-5263-8
The psychoeducational assessment of preschool children,
4th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce A. Bracken and Richard Nagle.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 488 p. $89.95
For academics and practitioners, this text, consisting of 18 chapters by US
contributors in a variety of disciplines, addresses the psychoeducational
assessment of preschool children. Bracken (The College of William and
Mary) and Nagle (Appalachian State U.) bring together these chapters on
the history and issues of preschool assessment, early childhood screening
and readiness, multicultural factors, and ecological assessment in clinical
observation, preschool, home and family, school and classroom, and play
situations. Cognitive abilities and specific abilities relating to communi-
cation, language, speech, gross motor development, and neuropsychology
are examined. The new edition has material on environmental and home
and family assessment; discusses new tests such as the Stanford-Binet V
and the Kaufman Assessment Battery for Children, Second Edition; and
updates all chapters. Both subject and author indexes are provided.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB1139 2006-015220 978-1-57886-503-1
Early childhood education; history, theory, and practice.
Morgan, Harry.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 165 p. $24.95 (pa)
Morgan (child development, U. of West Georgia, Carrollton) offers an
overview of the early-childhood education in the U.S., particularly that of
infants and toddlers, for professors, undergraduate and graduate stu-
dents, and parents. Coverage includes an historical review of early-
childhood education over the past 200 years; key theoreticians who have
influenced early-childhood education and child development; assessment
in early development; public policy issues and the current conflict
between educational planners favoring early- childhood studies and state
school systems dismantling programs to reduce costs; literacy devel-
opment; the role of play in child development; and the future of early-
childhood education.
LB1139 2006-023089 978-0-87355-261-5
Exemplary science in grades preK-4; standards-based
success stories.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert E. Yager and Sandra K. Enger.
NSTA Press, ©2006 191 p. $19.95 (pa)
The 15 essays in this collection describe programs developed by edu-
cators in prekindergarten through grade 4 which fulfill the More
Emphasis guidelines of the National Science Education Stardards (NSES)
released in 1996. Each essay begins with a description of the school,
including its students and faculty, and then describes how the program
was developed (including notes on its planning and assessment), how it
fits in with the More Emphasis requirements, and the program itself,
include its goals and implementation. Examples include the 4-H Wildlife
Stewards Program in Portland, Oregon; several projects (including obser-
vation of mice and squirrel behavior) from Greene Community School in
Butler County, Iowa; and the commitment to “leaving no child inside” at
Homer Pittard Campus School in Rutherford County, Tennessee.
LB1139 2006-014094 978-1-929610-88-4
From parents to partners; building a family-centered early
childhood program.
Keyser, Janis.
Redleaf Press, ©2006 155 p. $29.95 (pa)
Building a family-centered practice in early childhood education is more
than bullying some hapless soul into bringing snacks or filling in at sto-
rytelling time. Keyser uses both her academic and practical skills in
advising administrators and teachers on how to involve parents in every
aspect of their children’s first experiences with learning, and gives ideas
that can work in a variety of familial and cultural settings. She focuses
on effective daily communications with families, challenges which may
affect the child at home or at school, ways of resolving conflicts, creating
efficient documentation and effective conferences, creating successful
parent meetings and events as well as parent-friendly classrooms, devel-
oping curriculum for family-centered classrooms and helping parents
become teaching partners who feel welcome. Keyser gives sample con-
versations and plenty of ideas on activities and ways to communicate
through newsletters, bulletin boards, and family-to-family support net-
works.
LB1139 2006-021054 978-0-275-98228-7
Teaching young children social studies.
Mindes, Gayle. (Teaching young children)
Praeger, ©2006 196 p. $49.95
The Teaching Young Children series draws from child development prin-
ciples to advise teachers in the creation of curricula that take advantage
of each learner’s own experience to teach big concepts. In this volume,
Mindes (education, DePaul U., Chicago) discusses theory and practices for
teaching social studies (history, philosophy, sociology, anthropology, psy-
chology, geography, political science) to young children in an increasingly
globalizing society. She discusses the opportunity offered by these disci-
plines for exploring personal ethics and teaching the notion of world cit-
izenship. She addresses the mandates of No Child Left Behind and
similar programs, the role of culture in social learning, using and
teaching multimedia, the Anti-Bias Curriculum, and the importance of
multicultural perspectives. Activities and review questions to aid reader
understanding are included.
–224–
LB1181 2005-037027 978-1-59385-050-0
Word sorts and more; sound, pattern, and meaning
explorations K-3.
Ganske, Kathy. (Solving problems in the teaching of literacy)
Guilford Pr., ©2006 404 p. $32.00 (pa)
Ganske (reading, Rowan U.), a former classroom teacher, provides a col-
lection of about 200 reproducible word, picture, and letter sorts for use
in K-3 classrooms or phonics, spelling, reading, and writing programs.
These categorization activities serve as a way to improve children’s
understanding of how words work. Activities span the emergent, letter
name, and within word pattern spelling stages, with a few that look
ahead to syllable juncture. They include explanations, directions, and tips
for using the sorts, as well as ideas from other teachers, literacy assess-
ments, and techniques for working with Spanish-speaking English-lan-
guage learners. A bibliography of children’s literature is included as well
as books that correlate to each activity.
LB1528 2006-000526 0-87207-562-1
Literature links; thematic units linking read-alouds and
computer activities.
Title main entry. Ed. by Linda D. Labbo et al.
International Reading Assn., ©2006 317 p. $35.95 (pa)
Five scholars from the U. of Georgia Department of Language and
Literacy Education, Athens, present this guide for primary school
teachers on linking classroom computer time with read- aloud and lit-
eracy education. The book’s 19 units each contain around four activities
that explore themes in language and visual arts, social and multicultural
concepts, current events, and science. Each unit includes a literacy skills
matrix and integrates the read-aloud study of one or more children’s
books with a multimedia task. Examples include Internet research; word
processing; digital photography; and the use of programs that allow
children to learn about music, build automobiles, paint, and see favorite
books come to life, among other tasks.
LB1532 2006-030910 1-59158-351-9
The natural world through children’s literature; an
integrated approach.
Butzow, Carol M. and John W. Butzow. (Through children’s literature)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2007 188 p. $29.00 (pa)
The 27 lesson plans in this teaching resource center on a picture book
title for teaching young students about animals, plants, the earth, stars,
and environmental interactions. Each lesson plan consists of a vocab-
ulary list, a crossword puzzle, illustrations, and activities for language
arts, writing, social studies, science, mathematics, the arts, and infor-
mation literacy.
LB1555 2005-028709 1-4129-0453-6
How to survive and thrive in the first three weeks of
school.
McEwan, Elaine K.
Sage Publications, ©2006 235 p. $75.95
Using the curious but apt “numerym” 3+3=33, consultant McEwan shows
how effectively and consistently applying the three Rs (routines, rubrics
and rules) in the first three weeks of class can create success in the other
33 weeks. Writing for frizzled veterans as well as dewy novices, she
explains creating spaces for teaching and learning, designing walls that
work, teaching routines that develop self-discipline, developing rubrics
that raise expectations and achievement, giving rules and rewards that
build character and motivation, and developing a 3+3=33 plan for your
own practice. She includes a number of practical techniques in a separate
section, including ways to check for understanding, unique and often
participatory signals that get silence from students, time-savers for
teachers and rewards that range from the intangible to the edible.
LB1573 2005-019384 1-4129-2550-9
102 reading response lessons; improving comprehension
skills for test day—and beyond.
Wolfgang, Kristin Noelle.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 292 p. $79.95
To help teachers of grades 3 through 12 enable their students to analyze
comprehension questions and respond to them in clear, supported para-
graphs, this guide presents a series of 30-minute lessons, each consisting
of five steps. Wolfgang, a fifth-grade teacher, constructs these lessons
around 102 questions that cover narrative techniques, tone, style and
characterization. She includes suggested texts, sample response sheets,
and detailed instructions for working through every aspect of the pro-
posed lesson plans.
–225–
LB1573 2006-002315 1-4129-2647-5
Quotes to inspire great reading teachers; a reflective tool
for advancing students’ literacy.
Block, Cathy Collins and Susan E. Israel.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 191 p. $69.95
This volume presents a selection of quotes intended to inspire and
encourage teachers to reflect on their practices related to literacy devel-
opment. The quotes are organized into 11 sections exploring such themes
as setting valuable goals, identifying strengths, and using assessment to
excel. Each quote is followed by some prompts for reflection, as well as
lesson ideas and related literature selections. Block is professor of edu-
cation at Texas Christian U., and Israel is affiliated with the U. of Dayton.
LB1573 2005-028087 1-59385-290-8
Reading assessment and instruction for all learners.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jeanne Shay Schumm. (Solving problems in
the teaching of literacy)
Guilford Pr., ©2006 576 p. $50.00 (pa)
Schumm (teaching and learning, U. of Miami) compiles 14 chapters by
education scholars in Florida in a guide (which originated in a doctoral
seminar in reading) to differentiated instruction for diverse learners,
with English-language learners and those with disabilities as the focus.
Taking an interdisciplinary approach, the book is aimed at elementary
general education and special education preservice teachers, practicing
teachers, and those beginning a master’s program. It discusses challenges
faced by teachers and multiple ideas about how reading should be
taught; resources for meeting those challenges; the reasons students have
difficulty learning to read and write; and how to teach students with cul-
tural and linguistic differences. The second section focuses on elementary
reading curriculum, assessment, and instructional practices, with
chapters connecting to the National Reading Panel report. The final
chapters describe how to use computer applications and combine
resources.
LB1575 2005-029173 1-4129-2519-3
Teaching writing to visual, auditory, and kinesthetic
learners.
Walling, Donovan R.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 120 p. $61.95
American educator Walling, now director of publications at Phi Delta
Kappa International, explains how teachers can differentiate writing
instructions according to the preferred learned style of students and thus
increase their success. Students who process stimuli using language or
logic/mathematics often learn reading and writing easily, he says, but
those who respond most strongly to images, sound, or movement have
more trouble unless teachers find a teaching style that can dance with
these learning styles.
LB1576 2006-001769 1-4129-2571-1
50 literacy strategies for culturally responsive teaching, K-
8.
Schmidt, Patricia Ruggiano and Wen Ma.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 140 p. $61.95
This practical guide for pre-service and in-service elementary school
teachers presents 50 teaching and learning strategies designed to
introduce students to the diversity in their own classroom communities.
Drawing upon their experience as both classroom teachers and
researchers, the authors have created and/or adapted these easy- to-use
instructional tools and linked each to IRA and NCTE standards. The
emphasis throughout is on the development of a risk-free learning com-
munity in the classroom where students feel free to share and collab-
orate.
LB1576 2006-014041 1-4129-1811-1
Developing voice through the language arts.
Henn-Reinke, Kathryn and Geralyn A. Chesner.
Sage Publications, ©2007 465 p. $79.95
This textbook for pre-service and in-service teachers explains how to use
the language arts to help students in grades K-8 to develop their literate
voices. Henn-Reinke (education, U. of Wisconsin) and Chesner (education,
Alverno College) encourage teachers to employ a reflective approach and
think of themselves as literate models for their students. Each chapter fea-
tures suggestions for applying what was learned in the classroom. Video
clips demonstrating key teaching and learning techniques are found on
the accompanying CD-ROM.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB1576 2006-001770 1-4129-3741-8
How to teach balanced reading & writing, 2d ed.
Burns, Bonnie.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 267 p. $79.95
Balanced reading and writing is a pedagogical approach that incorpo-
rates both skill-based and meaning-based instruction. Written for pre-
service and practicing teachers, this guide explains how to implement
balanced reading and writing in the classroom. Early chapters focus on
the needs of primary readers and older students who are still developing
basic skills, while the remainder of the volume applies to all grades.
Assessment is covered in the final chapter. The second edition features
new material on fluency and language acquisition.
LB1576 2005-036436 978-0-470-01939-9
The learning and teaching of reading and writing.
Flynn, Naomi & Rhona Stainthorp.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 229 p. $50.00 (pa)
Flynn (primary education, U. of Winchester) and Stainthorp (education
and language and literary research, U. of London) offers guidance to
trainee and newly qualified teachers for teaching reading and writing.
More experienced teachers and literary coordinators and consultants may
also be interested in the detailed report on literacy practice in three suc-
cessful schools. A particular emphasis is how research can inform
practice and generate a more focused and grounded logic to planning
and delivering literacy teaching.
LB1576 2005-026853 1-4129-2632-7
Literacy coaching; a handbook for school leaders.
Moxley, Dale E. and Rosemarye T. Taylor.
Sage Publications, ©2006 102 p. $51.95
Moxley, principle of a Florida elementary school, and Taylor (educational
leadership, U. of Central Florida, Orlando) developed and implemented
the K-12 literacy coach concept, which has yet to catch fire on a national
scale, and worked with literacy coaches for several years. They report on
what helps and hinders success for literacy coaches, and recount their
work with them in a variety of states in elementary, middle, and high
schools and in district offices.
LB1576 2005-036542 1-4129-2787-0
Teaching literacy; engaging the imagination of new
readers and writers.
Egan, Kieran.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 163 p. $61.95
Egan (education, Simon Fraser U., British Columbia) proposes and
explains an approach to teaching literacy that includes new ways of
using feelings and images; metaphors and jokes; rhyme and rhythm;
heroes and the exotic; hopes, fears, and passions; and other dimensions
of imagination. It draws on the work of Russian psychologist Lev
Bygotsky (1896-1934), extending his cognitive tools for use in daily literacy
instruction.
LB1576 2005-031506 1-59385-280-0
Teaching literacy through the arts.
McDonald, Nan L. and Douglas Fisher. (Tools for teaching literacy)
Guilford Pr., ©2006 192 p. $19.95 (pa)
Teachers will find in this volume a wealth of ideas for integrating lit-
eracy instruction and the four arts—music, visual arts, drama, and
dance—in grades K-8. McDonald and Fisher (both San Diego State U.)
developed many of the concepts and activities described here while
working in close collaboration with classroom teachers. Many worksheets
and checklists are provided in reproducible format.
LB1576 2006-022460 0-8204-6310-8
Whole language teaching, whole-hearted practice; looking
back, looking forward.
Title main entry. Ed. by Monica Taylor. (Counterpoints; studies in the
postmodern theory of education: v.236)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 219 p. $31.95 (pa)
Taylor (curriculum and teaching, Montclair State U.) and her contributors
believe whole language teaching is alive and well, and its practitioners
are significant political and social activists committed to critical thinking
and social justice. Their narratives describe the past 35 years or so of
whole language teaching and its continuing relevance despite the present
mandate to teach to the test, with such topics as the close relationship
between whole language teaching and activism, the path from miscue
analysis to liberatory pedagogy, social justice inquiry, early politics and
passion that has proven long-lived, and teachers’ experiences from Detroit
to Taiwan. This serves both as a valuable historical treatment and an
introduction to the essence of whole language teaching as a technique
and a lifelong endeavor.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB1576 2006-022698 978-0-7879-8657-5
Writing for a change; boosting literacy and learning
through social action.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kristina Berdan et al.
Jossey-Bass, ©2006 165 p. $22.95 (pa)
This resource for educators in grades 1-12 introduces the Social Action
process—an innovative approach that engages students in social justice
projects of their own choosing. In the first section, participants in a four-
year collaboration between the U.S.-based National Writing Project and
the Centre for Social Action in England share their experiences using
Social Action in a wide variety of school settings. In the second section,
CSA workers outline the theory and principles of Social Action. The
volume concludes with instructions for a number of classroom-tested
activities.
LB1623 2006-024141 0-8204-7459-2
Teachers in the middle; reclaiming the wasteland of the
adolescent years of schooling.
Smyth, John and Peter McInerney. (Adolescent cultures, school and
society; v.38)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 247 p. $32.95 (pa)
In light of the increasing boredom reported by students and overem-
phasis on meeting standards and raising test scores, Smyth and
McInerney (U. of Ballarat and Charles Darwin U., Australia) offer a study
of the ways teachers and schools can build pedagogically engaged com-
munities, focusing on the experiences of adolescents and problems of
alienation, attrition, and disaffection. In addition to interviews with staff
and students, the book uses material from Australian Research Council
projects, but can be applicable to most Western countries. They detail
practices in six public schools that prioritize adolescent education, con-
sidering also how teachers and schools reinvent themselves to be more
inclusive and learner- centered. First addressing issues of poverty, edu-
cational inequality, and the sociology of high schools, they then discuss
how project schools promoted a sense of belonging and student partici-
pation, and their pedagogical practices and institutional arrangements.
Both author and subject indexes are provided.
LB1707 2006-014665 978-1-57886-519-2
Excellence in teaching and learning; bridging the gaps in
theory, practice, and policy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Adnan Salhi.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 160 p. $29.95 (pa)
Working across the curriculum, these contributors collaborate to address
significant issues that have haunted classrooms for decades. Aimed at
policy makers, administrators, teacher educators and teachers, the 12
articles here cover teaching and learning strategies, research and models
for improving teacher quality, and the role of diversity in teach and
learning excellence. Article topics include bridging the gaps, ODES
(observe, describe, elaborate and share) as a teaching and learning
strategy, online incidental learning and instant information sharing in
teacher education, strategies for developing collaborative skills in teacher
education programs, the affects of action research on educators’ profes-
sional growth, teacher leaders, making technology comfortable, pre-
service teacher’s development in reading instruction, the Mathematics
Teaching Profile, teaching social justice under current conditions, inte-
grating multicultural themes, and learning the facts and the fictions in
diverse classrooms.
LB1707 2005-055931 0-8077-4669-X
Multicultural strategies for education and social change;
carriers of the torch in the United States and South
Africa.
Ball, Arnetha F. (Multicultural education series)
Teachers College Press, ©2006 174 p. $27.95 (pa)
In addition to teaching education at Stanford U., Ball has also served as
an academic specialist for the U.S. Information Services Program in
South Africa. She reports findings from an action research project on
teacher change and teacher education she conducted in South Africa and
the U.S. The study centers around a successful teacher education course
the author designed and taught to some 100 teachers in the two coun-
tries between 1994 and 1999; followup interviews and classroom obser-
vations took place between 1995 and 2005. The research demonstrates
how sociocultural theory can be used as the basis for designing courses
that make a difference in facilitating the development of teachers who
have a commitment to teaching racially, ethnically, and linguistically
diverse students in today’s global society.
–226–
LB1731 2006-020637 978-0-7546-4577-1
Mentoring in education; an international perspective.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cedric Cullingford. (Monitoring change in edu-
cation)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 218 p. $99.95
Twelve international academics contribute 12 chapters exploring the
concept of mentoring and its application. The text contains empirical
studies of mentoring from Europe, the U.S. and the Middle East, covering
a range of topics including the historical and cultural aspects of men-
toring, the motivation behind it, its effects on both mentor and mentee,
its effects on the system, and the different approaches to the idea and
implementation of mentoring. The case studies reveal differences
between the theoretical advantages put forth by policy makers and the
day-to-day challenges faced in actual mentoring situations.
LB1731 2005-032724 1-4129-3670-5
Mentoring novice teachers; fostering a dialogue process,
2d ed.
Pitton, Debra Eckerman.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 167 p. $69.95
Pitton (education, Gustavus Adolphus College, St. Peter, Minnesota) begins
this update of the 2000 edition with a tribute to teachers whom she
credits with having helped her survive her first year of teaching high
school. After introducing the role of mentor as a needed one and as a
metaphor for visions of teaching, she describes the mentoring process.
This edition, revised through feedback from those who have applied the
text, includes checklists, mentee and mentor evaluation forms, and men-
toring resources including projects, role-playing scenarios, a facilitator’s
guide to setting up a workshop, and web sites.
LB1732 2006-021057 978-0-275-99192-0
Acting lessons for teachers; using performance skills in
the classroom, 2d ed.
Tauber, Robert T. and Cathy Sargent Mester.
Praeger, ©2007 225 p. $54.95
Tauber (humanities and social sciences, Penn State-Erie, The Behrend
College, Gannon U., and the U. of Florida, Gainesville) and Mester (com-
munication, Penn State-Erie, The Behrend College) discuss different
teaching strategies for those in elementary through university levels. They
focus on the idea that there is an acting- teaching parallel that can
improve effectiveness and consider what can be learned from the world
of acting. Specifically, they describe animation in voice and body,
classroom space utilization, humor, role-playing, props, and suspense
and surprise, while detailing stage and film examples of these techniques
and classroom correlations. Other chapters address educational founda-
tions, the importance of teacher enthusiasm, and classroom man-
agement. Acting exercises are provided in one chapter. This edition
contains new chapters on instructional technology and classroom
entrances and exits. All chapters have been revised to include recent
research and descriptions of the experiences of K-12 teachers.
LB1738 2006-011744 0-8058-5844-X
Learner-centered leadership; research, policy, and practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Arnold B. Danzig et al. (Topics in educational
leadership)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 305 p. $39.95 (pa)
Danzig et al. (from Arizona State U., U. of South Florida, and Northern
Arizona U.) compile 14 essays that describe an approach to school
improvement in the US called Learner-Centered Leadership, which rests
on the ideas of democracy and that responsibility for learning and devel-
opment is with students and the staff of a school. Themes revolve round
the importance of learning, that it occurs in multiple contexts and levels,
critical thinking, and collaboration. Contributors, who are teachers or
work in the disciplines of educational leadership, anthropology, and edu-
cation, also explore historical and intellectual foundations for the idea;
connections to administrator development, content knowledge, and cur-
ricular reform; research and practice on school leadership and profes-
sional development; and social justice and urban reform issues. The book
is meant for use in masters-level courses and certification seminars, and
inservice workshops on school leadership. Indexes are divided by author
and subject.
–227–
LB1775 2006-930214 978-1-57886-547-5
International research on the impact of accountability
systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Louise F. Deretchin and Cheryl J. Craig.
(Teacher education yearbook; XV)
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 251 p. $22.95 (pa)
Featuring contributions from some 35 international academics, teachers,
and educational consultants, this text examines what is occurring around
the globe concerning accountability in education. Coverage includes the
philosophy, history, and design of the accountability movement; the
impact and consequences of accountability systems in relation to learner
and teacher success; personal perceptions and perspectives of accounta-
bility on the part of teachers and teacher educators; and the underpin-
nings of powerful accountability systems. For educators, policymakers,
and community members concerned with this timely issue. No subject
index.
LB1778 2006-024664 978-0-8141-1923-5
A guide to professional development for graduate
students in English.
Moore, Cindy and Hildy Miller.
NCTE, ©2006 154 p. $30.95 (pa)
English professors Moore (Eastern Kentucky U.) and Miller (Portland
State U., Oregon) advise graduate students in English to determine their
professional goals early enough that they can use their time in graduate
school to start laying a foundation for finding work as a teacher, a
scholar, or other professional in their field. They also offer hints on sur-
vival strategies for graduate school itself and beyond. There is no index.
LB1778 2006-023422 978-0-8047-5534-4
In pursuit of knowledge; scholars, status, and academic
culture.
Rhode, Deborah L.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 236 p. $24.95
Rhode (law and ethics, Stanford U.) assembles views from a number of
disciplines on the nature of the academic life, which includes schol-
arship, teaching, administration, and public intellectual pursuits. She
focuses on the some 260 research universities in the US, which set the
standards to which higher education generally aspires, and supply much
of the knowledge base and faculty for institutions of all types.
LB1779 2006-929148 978-0-7546-2536-0
Academic ethics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robin Barrow and Patrick Keeney. (The inter-
national library of essays in public and professional ethics)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 632 p. $250.00
Rather than attempt to cover as wide a range of topics pertinent to aca-
demic ethics as possible, the editors (a professor and doctoral graduate
of Canada’s Simon Fraser U.) have sought to focus this collection of 48
previously published papers on what they see as the field’s central and
defining elements. The opening essays address the classical liberal ideal
of the university and contemporary concerns related to that ideal.
Discussion of the relationship between universities and business is then
presented followed by exploration of the roles of professors and admin-
istrators. Papers discussing faculty- student relations touch on such topics
as political correctness, harassment, and the role of the erotic in teaching
relationships. Remaining papers address collegiality, plagiarism, the need
for formal institutional codes, and the overall structure of a credible aca-
demic ethic.
LB2165 2006-028893 978-0-8204-8833-2
The Holmes partnership trilogy; tomorrow’s teachers,
tomorrow’s schools, tomorrow’s schools of education.
Title main entry.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 293 p. $79.95
This combines three seminal works by the Holmes Group and later the
Holmes Partnership on the role of the teacher in schools, the role of the
school in the community, and the role and obligation of schools and col-
leges of education in the preparation of teachers. In the 1986 Tomorrow’s
Teachers, the series asserts that greater care must be taken not only to
make teaching relevant but to link K-12 schools with schools of education;
in the 1990 Tomorrow’s Schools the series continues by describing how
schools of professional development can design research and organize
knowledge about teaching and learning and strengthen relations between
schools and the political and socioeconomic communities they serve; in
1995’s Tomorrow’s Schools of Education the text develops a new core cur-
riculum for teacher education and proposes restructuring of schools, col-
leges and departments of education in research universities.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB2328 2006-028943 978-1-933371-15-3
Fixing the fragmented university; decentralization with
direction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph C. Burke.
Anker Publishing Co., Inc, ©2007 427 p. $40.00
Created by the Kellogg Foundation and the National Association of State
Universities and Land-Grant Colleges, the Kellogg Commission on the
Future of State and Land-Grant Universities issued five reports from
April 1997 to January 2000. Among their conclusions were the charges
that the American university “has become an institutionally fragmented
aggregation of departments” in which scholars are increasingly directed
away from immediate colleagues and students and towards international
societies and associations of disciplinary peers and that universities had
increasingly lost their commitment to producing public goods. Burke
(higher education policy and management, State U. of New York) and his
colleagues offer analysis of how universities can go about addressing
these problems. Opening chapters focus on the roles of trustees, presi-
dents, and faculty senates. The next five chapters examine processes of
strategic planning, budgets, student learning quality assurance, regional
accreditation, and alignment of departmental and institutional goals.
Finally, a pair of chapters discusses the reorientation of the mission of
the university and the five concluding chapters explore issues of campus-
level implementation of change.
LB2331 2006-929005 978-0-7618-3500-4
African Americans and whites; changing relationships on
college campuses.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert M. Moore.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 236 p. $33.00 (pa)
Moore (sociology and African American studies, Frostburg State U.)
presents 15 essays exploring relations between whites and blacks on
today’s higher education campuses. Topics include black and white per-
spectives on teaching about racial inequality, black and gay identity
selection, the impact of membership in a black fraternity or sorority,
social distance and race, self-segregation and friendship formation, inter-
racial dating and marriage, and the weaknesses of current approaches to
diversity policy.
LB2331 2006-022688 978-0-7879-8640-7
Assessing organizational performance in higher
education.
Miller, Barbara A.
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 258 p. $40.00 (pa)
Aimed at faculty, staff, and administrators at colleges and universities,
this text presents an approach to organizational performance evaluation
that is rooted in systems theory. Consultant Barbara Miller’s conceptual
framework goes beyond the assessment of student outcomes to evaluate
performance in seven broad organizational areas. A number of photo-
copiable worksheets are provided to aid in the assessment process. In the
final chapter, Miller explains how to build and deploy campus-wide
assessment programs. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
LB2331 2006-001702 1-933146-20-6
Excellent teaching in the excellent university; the search
for voice among faculty and students.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jerome Rabow.
Academica Press, LLC, ©2006 295 p. $79.95
Rabow (sociology, UCLA) presents a collection of essays by 14 American
academics exploring the problems and dilemmas of excellent teaching in
the excellent research university setting, emphasizing student partici-
pation as a form of scholarship that can only occur in a classroom.
Coverage includes the contradictions in the professorial role and the
college classroom in the research university; teaching excellence in a mul-
ticultural university; and neglected aspects of the teaching enterprise. The
latter include character formation as an aspect of college and university
training, the use of new technology to empower disadvantaged students,
balancing effective teaching and effective research, objectivity versus
activism in teaching social justice, and balancing ideals with the institu-
tional constraint. For professors, graduate and undergraduate students,
educators, state legislators, and others concerned with higher education
in the U.S.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB2331 978-0-8020-9000-3
Historical identities; the professoriate in Canada.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Stortz and E. Lisa Panayotidis.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 437 p. $70.00
The book’s few well-chosen illustrations include the stereotypical por-
trayal of an absent-minded, egghead professor in an early novel for
young adults. Another image, linking the personal and professional in a
letter between female professors in a same-sex relationship in the 1920s,
underscores views of how academia affected female’s roles. Stortz (com-
munication and culture, U. of Calgary) and Panayotidis (education, U. of
Calgary) introduce 14 essays examining literary and visual images of his-
torical constructions of professors in Canada. Other approaches include
the under-examined lives of North American professors as a group once
they got to the classroom/lab, and case studies of professors’ involvement
in Canadian politics, faculty development, and teacher training.
LB2331 2006-016499 978-0-7879-8066-5
The skillful teacher; on technique, trust, and
responsiveness in the classroom, 2d ed.
Brookfield, Stephen.
Jossey-Bass, ©2006 297 p. $36.00
For college educators, Brookfield (higher and adult education, U. of St.
Thomas, Minneapolis and Columbia U.) offers advice for teaching in
higher education and illustrates with examples of his own and others’
experiences. He discusses students’ experiences of teaching and learning,
assumptions of skillful teaching, how to understand classrooms, the
importance of credibility and authenticity, and specific practices such as
lecturing, discussion, teaching in diverse classrooms, evaluations, and
responding to student resistance. Also addressed are political aspects and
teaching philosophies. The book comes out of issues and questions that
arose in faculty development workshops he has lead. The new edition is
completely revised and takes into account online education and diversity.
LB2331 978-1-933371-08-5
To improve the academy; resources for faculty,
instructional, and organizational development; v.25.
Title main entry. Ed. by Douglas Reimondo Robertson and Linda B.
Nilson.
Anker Publishing Co., Inc, ©2006 389 p. $37.95 (pa)
This volume of the distinguished series focuses on educational devel-
opment and the sociological imagination, paradigms, educational devel-
opment and the scholarship of teaching and learning, instructional and
curricular development, and faculty careers. Topics include a personal
journey through the movements for change in educational development
since the 1960s, the art of living engagement, surviving to tenure, a
critical theory perspective on faculty development, fractal thinking in
higher education, student learning initiatives, action research, lessons on
research from engineering, structuring complex cooperative learning
activities, intercultural teaching and learning, responses to workshops on
the ethics of teaching, faculty actions following a collective tragedy, mod-
eling and giving guidelines, the scholarship of civic engagement, post-
tenure review, memoirs from seasoned faculty, peer mentoring, and
careers in academic librarianship.
LB2331 2006-009630 0-8018-8461-6
Whatever happened to the faculty?; drift and decision in
higher education.
Burgan, Mary.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 238 p. $38.00
The rate for dropping out or failing to complete online courses is roughly
twice that for college courses taught by a human being. The “winner
takes all” research arena is so competitive the case of Rosalind Franklin
and DNA research is becoming a model rather than a cautionary tale.
Lecturers who are hired to drop in and teach a course or two have very
little to say about cultural transmission, curriculum, and basic pedagogy,
which may be the point of hiring them in the first place. Burgan (English
emerita, Indiana U.-Bloomington) shows how competition has reduced
faculty involvement in planning, curriculum, instructional technology,
governance and academic freedom, with the result being a corre-
sponding loss of quality in both research and teaching. She describes a
variety of exemplary cases of the successful return of the faculty to the
work of the university.
–228–
LB2333 2006-025793 978-1-933371-11-5
Developing a comprehensive faculty evaluation system; a
guide to designing, building, and operating large-scale
faculty evaluation systems, 3d ed.
Arreola, Raoul A.
Anker Publishing Co., Inc, ©2007 246 p. $55.00 (pa)
This handbook provides practical models for developing and using a
comprehensive faculty evaluation system. The third edition retains the
eight-step process from previous volumes but includes more detailed
information about the process of building and operating an evaluation
system and offers a new model for conceptualizing the full complexity of
faculty performance. This edition also contains a new introductory
section, new research, updated forms and procedures, and a new case
study of a web-enabled, computer-supported system based on the eight-
step process.
LB2341 2006-025666 978-1-933371-17-7
Academic leadership; a practical guide to chairing the
department, 2d ed.
Leaming, Deryl R.
Anker Publishing Co., Inc, ©2007 491 p. $40.00
Leaming (mass communication, Middle Tennessee State U.) presents the
second edition of his guide to assist department chairpersons in carrying
out their duties and responsibilities, especially those new to the position.
The material has been revised and expanded throughout while retaining
its focus on practical application, and offers best practices and ideas for
developing a departmental vision, working with constituents, retaining
students, managing conflict, mentoring faculty, and post-tenure review.
Numerous checklists, tables, and sample forms are included throughout
the text and in its 17 appendices.
LB2341 2006-021004 978-0-275-99193-7
Can state universities be managed?; a primer for
presidents and management teams.
Acker, Duane. (ACE/Praeger series on higher education)
Praeger, ©2006 216 p. $39.95
Acker (animal science, Iowa State U.), former president of Kansas State
U., discusses management practices at state universities for new or
potential presidents or other administrators. Drawing from his own expe-
rience in different administrative roles, as well as that of others, he
explains the role of the state university and presidency, as well as the
selection process. The brief chapters detail issues having to do with staff,
budget, administrative structure, delegation, problems, working with pro-
grams, and issues relating to global curriculum, student enrollment, mul-
tidiscipline institutes, medical schools, athletics, academic freedom, and
unions. Funding is also addressed, in addition to faculty and student
relations, and how to maintain one’s personal life. He notes that the infor-
mation is applicable to other types of universities in and outside the US.
LB2341 2006-008099 0-8018-8447-0
Defending the community college equity agenda.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Bailey and Vanessa Smith Morest.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 305 p. $45.00
The overall concept of higher education equity, according to the editors
(both of the Community College Research Center, Teachers College,
Columbia U.), encompasses equity in college preparation, access to
college, and success in reaching college goals. While community colleges
in the United States offer greater access to minority and financially
impaired students, their role in meeting the other two pillars of educa-
tional equity is more controversial. The ten chapters they present explore
various issues related to how community colleges can improve their roles
in promoting equity in education, discussing such topics as performance
accountability, online access, the limits of vocational training, guidance
counseling dilemmas, and the growth of dual credit at community col-
leges and high schools.
LB2341 2006-032961 978-1-933371-18-4
Leadership in place; how academic professionals can find
their leadership voice.
Wergin, Jon F.
Anker Publishing Co., Inc, ©2007 254 p. $38.00
This book considers academic leadership from the new perspective that
anyone can choose to lead. Wergin (educational studies, Antioch U.) com-
piles 11 essays by US university administrators and professors from
varied fields who write about their experiences, discuss leadership in
terms of changes to faculty culture, and tell stories about curricular
reform, part-time faculty roles, important qualities, and challenges for
leaders. Both subject and name indexes are included.
–229–
LB2341 2006-022717 0-8204-8650-7
Trust and the public good; examining the cultural
conditions of academic work.
Tierney, William G. (Counterpoints; studies in the postmodern theory of
education; v.308)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 207 p. $29.95 (pa)
Tierney (education, U. of Southern California) examines the role of trust
in academic life and how to build trust in colleges and universities so
that those who work in postsecondary organizations and those external
to the institution are able to support change. The author explores trust in
the context of four facets of academic life—the social networks that link
individuals and allow trust to develop, the dissolution of academic com-
munity and the erosion of trust, how organizational communication
plays a vital role in enabling trust to occur, and the limits of trust for
resolving all problems that ail an institution. The text concludes with a
discussion of trust as defined by how the public views postsecondary
organizations. For faculty members, administrators, and preservice
teachers.
LB2341 2006-019215 1-55728-830-5
Where you stand is where you sit; an academic
administrator’s handbook.
Smith, Robert V.
U. of Arkansas Pr., ©2006 217 p. $19.95 (pa)
Smith (U. of Arkansas) shares what he has learned over the course of 30-
plus years of service as an academic administrator at several public
research universities. Much of the material here is based on articles orig-
inally published in the quarterly online journal All Things Academic. The
24 chapters address such topics as communicating with supervisors, pro-
moting the concept of the integrated scholar, and dealing with conflicts-
of-interest.
LB2343 2005-026698 978-0-7890-2525-8
College students in distress; a resource guide for faculty,
staff, and campus community.
Sharkin, Bruce S. (Haworth series in clinical psychotherapy)
Haworth Pr., ©2006 140 p. $19.95 (pa)
Sharkin (Department of Counseling and Psychological Services, Kutztown
University) provides college personnel with information on how to
identify and refer emotionally troubled students for professional coun-
seling. He overviews current issues in college counseling, then outlines
general warning signs and specific problems, such as anxiety,
depression, self-inflicted harm, and eating disorders. He offers guidelines
on approaching students for intervention and on working with specific
populations. A final chapter looks at campus policies and procedures
related to student mental health.
LB2351 978-1-4129-0718-7
Postgraduate study in the UK; the international student’s
guide.
Foskett, Nicholas and Rosalind Foskett.
Sage Publications, ©2006 192 p. $122.00
Most of what is written about coming to Britain for graduate school is
basically marketing from institutions or organizations, say the Fosketts,
who are not further identified. They offer a more realistic view of what
foreign graduate students actually encounter when they arrive and
during the length of their study. Much of the information applies to both
masters and doctorate degrees, and they indicate when it applies only to
one or the other. They cover choosing and applying for a program,
everyday life, studying, and what to do with the degree in hand.
LB2353 2006-035931 0-7897-3615-2
SAT/PSAT exam prep.
Dulan, Steven W.
Pearson Technology Group, ©2007 559 p. $29.99 (pa)
Dulan (Michigan State U.) has taught SAT and PSAT preparation for
twenty years. In this book, he offers study and test-taking strategies for
students preparing for either exam. Early chapters provide an overview
of the tests, discuss scoring and registration, and detail each component
(math, verbal skills, critical reading, writing), including chapter tests to
assess readiness. Major concepts in quantitative problem-solving and
verbal skills are then covered in a review. The book also includes one
pre-study diagnostic test (with scoring guide) and four post-study practice
tests, each accompanied by full answer explanations. A removable card
with quick review techniques is also provided. The indexes contain an
SAT vocabulary list, a glossary of math terms, and a list of additional
resources.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB2367 2006-031875 0-7897-3594-6
GRE exam prep.
Dulan, Steven W.
Pearson Technology Group, ©2006 353 p. $34.99 (pa)
This study guide helps students prepare to take the Graduate Record
Examinations (GRE) General Test. The GRE Subject Tests are not covered.
A diagnostic test with answers and explanations contains sample ques-
tions representing each section of the GRE and is followed by a wealth
of test-taking strategies and techniques. Four practice exams are found at
the back of the volume, along with a vocabulary list and a glossary of
math terms.
LB2375 2006-010931 978-1-85359-910-1
Living and studying abroad; research and practice.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Byram and Anwei Feng. (Languages
for intercultural communication and education; 12)
Multilingual Matters Ltd., ©2006 276 p. $54.95 (pa)
Thirteen international academics and counselors contribute 11 chapters
reporting on current research on diverse groups and types of students
experiencing residence abroad for shorter or longer periods, in countries
near and far from their own. The chapters are grouped into sections
reflecting some of the parameters of sojourns: time and space—geo-
graphical and cultural distance, length of stay; and the impact of the
experience—on the individuals personally and professionally, and on the
institution to or from which they travel. Each chapter explains the case
study, the research findings and their possible implications, and a critical
reflection on the research method used. The text provides a method-
ological reference for anyone interested in the cultural impacts of study
and work abroad. No subject index. Distributed in the U.S. by UTP
Distribution.
LB2393 2006-013334 0-7546-4597-5
The academic presentation; situated talk in action.
Rendle-Short, Johanna. (Directions in ethnomethodology and conver-
sation analysis)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 173 p. $99.95
Rendle-Short (linguistics and applied linguistics, Australian National U.)
examines the academic seminar presentation from the perspective of the
listing audience, analyzing the details of what it is that speakers actually
do when talking to an audience. Among her topics are how speakers
show the structure of the talk, what they are actually doing as they talk,
how they show continued engagement with the audience while man-
aging equipment such as projectors, and how they encourage the
audience to orient to such tools.
LB2395 2005-034513 1-4129-2695-5
Teaching for deep understanding; what every educator
should know.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kenneth Leithwood et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 203 p. $69.95
The result of collaboration between the Elementary Education Teachers’
Federation of Ontario and the U. of Toronto, these 20 interlinking essays
describe how educators and parents can counter the deficits produced by
increasing dependence on rote memorization, teaching to the test, and
succumbing to the quick-fix and the superficial. They describe deep
understanding as the overriding goal for schooling within the framework
of constructivism, review the literature, describe deep understanding as
it is interpreted over a variety of disciplines (including mathematics, lit-
erature, science, technology, social science, theater and the arts) and cur-
riculum (including identity texts, critical thinking and character,
technology and assessment), analyze what teachers really feel about
teaching for deep understanding rather than rote memorization, and give
a number of methods, including developing partnerships and responding
positively to conditions that support deep understanding.
LB2805 2006-018452 978-1-4166-0404-4
Connecting leadership with learning; a framework for
reflection, planning, and action.
Copland, Michael A. and Michael S. Knapp.
Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev, ©2006 280 p. $27.95 (pa)
This resource for school leaders presents the Leading for Learning
Framework—a set of ideas designed to help them to assess strengths and
weaknesses, plan for improvement, and take actions that promote
learning. The application of the framework is illustrated with examples
from a wide range of schools and districts. The authors teach educational
leadership and policy studies at the U. of Washington.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB2805 2006-014098 978-1-4129-1686-8
Organizational learning; improving learning, teaching,
and leading in school systems.
Collinson, Vivienne and Tanya Fedoruk Cook.
Sage Publications, ©2007 239 p. $74.95
Collinson (Michigan State U.) worked in K-12 for 20 years before
beginning to teach principals and teachers at the graduate level in
Canada and the U.S.; Cook has years of experience as a consultant and
offering leadership and management development programs for schools,
community service, and service-learning organizations. They present a
text for school leaders which clarifies the complex concept of organiza-
tional learning, its importance to schools and school systems, how
schools and school systems can foster organizational learning, and how
school systems can move forward. The concepts are illustrated through
numerous practical examples, and the text includes activities for getting
started and a reflective journal which encourages readers to apply
content and ideas to their own settings.
LB2805 2006-928135 978-1-4129-3469-5
Re-imagining educational leadership.
Caldwell, Brian J.
Sage Publications, ©2006 214 p. $130.00
The author was commissioned by the Specialist Schools and Academies
Trust in England to write pamphlets on his experiences studying the
decentralization of decision making and other trends in education lead-
ership in the UK, Chile, Australia, and elsewhere; pamphlets which form
the heart of this book. His discussion is centered upon the concept of a
“New Enterprise Logic of Schools,” which places the student as the most
important unit of the organization and “is concerned with an under-
taking that is difficult, complicated, and at times risky, often calling for
daring activity which is at all times purposeful.”
LB2806 2006-008873 0-8179-4762-0
Charter schools against the odds.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul T. Hill. (Hoover Institution Press publi-
cation; no.549)
Hoover Institution Press, ©2006 219 p. $15.00 (pa)
On average, charter schools generally operate on 23 percent less funding
than other schools. That statistic is just the tip of the iceberg, according
to the contributors of these seven articles; charter schools are also forced
to pay rent out of operating funds, are limited to nonprofit organizations,
and are kept low in number despite calls by parents and educators for
needs-based, nonbureaucratic, alternative education. Contributors
describe charter schools supply, funding, and authorization, as well as
the innovations charter schools have made to thrive in a hostile envi-
ronment, and lessons learned in a 15-year experiment in school choice in
Milwaukee.
LB2806 2005-032722 1-4129-0501-X
Collaborative teacher leadership; how teachers can foster
equitable schools.
Krovetz, Martin L. and Gilberto Arriaza.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 193 p. $65.95
In interviews and discussions with over 100 practicing teachers, Krovetz
and Arriaza (both educational leadership, San Jose State U.) found that
rather than being concerned about technology or curriculum they
wanted to learn how to be leaders. Working from the notions that
everyone can be a leader, that reform comes from the district level, that
strong public schools create a strong democracy, and school leadership
is all about maximizing the learning of every student, the authors make
good use of the experiences and narratives of teachers learning to be
leaders as they describe reframing school cultures, learning to use dis-
tributed leadership, influencing student learning, making best use of
inquiry, building equity in diverse classrooms, advocating for students
and teachers, and building courageous followers and leaders. Each
section has a list of resources, including tools and organizations.
LB2806 2006-278570 1-57766-393-4
Curriculum planning; integrating multiculturalism,
constructivism, and education reform, 3d ed. (CD-ROM
included)
Henson, Kenneth T.
Waveland Press, Inc., ©2006 450 p. $54.95
Henson’s (The Citadel) textbook provides graduate education students an
understanding of the nature of the curriculum development process and
the nature of education reform. Updated and expanded throughout, the
third edition includes discussion of current topics such as the increasing
impact of education technology, the value of teacher and student empow-
erment, the power of collaboration, the validation and expansion of
teachers’ roles as researchers, and the impact of the No Child Left Behind
legislation. The CD-ROM contains the instructor’s manual and test bank.
–230–
LB2806 2005-035811 1-4129-1713-1
Implementing NCLB; creating a knowledge framework to
support school improvements.
Kimmelman, Paul L.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 175 p. $65.95
Former school superintendent Kimmelman (Learning Point Associates)
offers a spirited defense of the No Child Left Behind Act. He also explains
how school leaders can build organizational capacity for successful
implementation of NCLB and identifies a variety of helpful publications
and products. Instead of using a “cookbook” approach, the text describes
a knowledge model for school improvement. Illustrative examples of
ways of building organizational capacity are taken from business and
sports as well as education.
LB2806 2003-099479 1-4129-0109-X
Management skills in schools.
Jones, Jeff.
Sage Publications, ©2005 221 p. $71.95
This resource for current and aspiring team leaders within schools
teaches key personal management skills that can help leaders to be more
effective. Eleven chapters focus on such areas as planning meetings,
implementing decisions, and conducting performance reviews. Action
research is covered in the final chapter. Each chapter concludes with a
self-review exercise. Jones is affiliated with the Centre for British
Teachers in Reading, UK.
LB2806 2006-029670 978-0-87389-697-9
Transformation to performance excellence; Baldrige
education leaders speak out. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Sandra Cokeley et al.
ASQ Quality Press, ©2007 152 p. $36.00 (pa)
This volume presents a question-and-answer session with the leaders of
seven educational organizations that have successfully used the Baldrige
Education Criteria for Performance Excellence. Some of the issues
addressed include getting buy-in from school boards, dealing with
resistance, aligning all systems and departments, and understanding the
financial impact of Baldrige. Contained on the CD- ROM are the complete
Baldrige applications and full profiles for each of the organizations.
LB2817 2006-021860 978-1-57886-531-4
Strategic communication during whole system change;
advice and guidance for school district leaders and PR
specialists.
Duffy, Francis M. and Patti L. Chance. (Leading systemic school
improvement; no.9)
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 248 p. $34.95 (pa)
Duffy (change leadership in education, Gallaudet U.) and Chance (edu-
cational leadership, U. of Nevada, Las Vegas) explain methods for whole-
system change in school districts, focusing on theoretical and practical
advice for district-based leaders and school public relations specialists on
how to lead and support their district’s transformation by engaging in
strategic communication. They don’t describe tools and techniques but
rather discuss what strategic communication is and how it can be incor-
porated, why it is needed, and protocols for change. They then detail spe-
cific applications. The final section consists of five essays written by
public relations experts and change leaders who have experienced or are
in the process of whole-system change. There is no index.
LB2822 2005-032909 0-8204-7648-X
Authentic assessment primer.
Janesick, Valerie J.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 125 p. $18.95 (pa)
This supplementary text introduces education students to the funda-
mentals of authentic assessment. Offered as an alternative to high-stakes
testing, this approach looks for higher order thinking skills and demon-
stration of knowledge through the use of such instruments as portfolios,
writing samples, and role plays. The volume is not indexed. Janesick
teaches educational leadership and policy studies at the U. of South
Florida.
–231–
LB2822 2006-001786 1-4129-2641-6
Breakthrough.
Fullan, Michael et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 109 p. $55.95
The breakthrough proposed by Fullan (policy studies, Ontario Institute of
Education, U. of Toronto), Hill (secretary general, Hong Kong
Examinations and Assessment Authority) and Crévola (international lit-
eracy consultant) is a universal model of education that focuses on
improving classroom instruction with processes for turning it into a
“more precise, validated, data-driven expert activity” that can respond to
the learning needs of individual students. The authors explain why and
how such a transformation should occur.
LB2822 2006930072 1-891792-27-X
The case for district-based reform; leading, building, and
sustaining school improvement.
Supovitz, Jonathan A.
Harvard University Press, ©2006 286 p. $29.95 (pa)
Supovitz (U. of Pennsylvania and Consortium for Policy Research in
Education) describes the role of the school district in educational reform
by tracing the efforts of the Duval County School District in Florida to
improve teaching and learning and show how the school district in
general can be redefined. Chapters are organized by ideas: developing a
specific vision, building the commitment and capacity of employees, con-
structing mechanisms to provide data to inform practices and monitor
implementation, and developing methods for ongoing refinements.
Supovitz’s research, spanning 1999 to 2005, is based on interviews with
teachers, school leaders, and district officials; annual survey data of prin-
cipals; observations; annual analyses of performance results; and district
policy documents and newspaper reports.
LB2822 2006-027655 0-87766-733-0
Examining comprehensive school reform.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel K. Aladjem and Kathryn M. Borman.
Urban Institute Press, ©2006 366 p. $29.50 (pa)
This volume considers the effectiveness of comprehensive school reform
and its impact and outcomes. Aladjem (American Institutes for Research)
and Borman (anthropology, U. of South Florida) bring together 11
chapters by education scholars and researchers (mostly from the US) who
trace the history of reform, types of policy decisions made by state
agencies, and how reform works with the No Child Left Behind Act.
Other subjects treated are district and school implementation, types of
models and how schools choose them, educational partnerships, and
instructional practices. Chapters also describe research to evaluate
student achievement conducted under the National Longitudinal
Evaluation of Comprehensive School Reform, in addition to an initiative
by the Gates Foundation and other studies.
LB2822 2006-023494 0-87389-703-X
The quality rubric; a systematic approach for
implementing quality principles and tools in classrooms
and schools.
Benjamin, Steve.
ASQ Quality Press, ©2007 96 p. $45.00 (pa)
Teachers and administrators with little or no knowledge of quality prin-
ciples are the intended readership of this guide. Benjamin (Indiana U.,
Bloomington) proposes that his design for implementing quality in edu-
cation is more likely to produce measurable results than other similar
programs, because it is more concise and implicitly demands more
accountability from faculty. Part one introduces the quality rubric and its
core values: personal accountability for learning, alignment, continuous
improvement, data-driven decision making, teamwork, results focus, high
expectations, focus on the vital few (literacy and standards mastery),
leadership, and systems thinking. Parts two and three lay out strategies
for positioning learning within an integrated systems framework that
provides a logical “flow” to the work, at both the classroom and
schoolwide levels. The appendix contains the quality rubric in brief in
terms of an achievement hierarchy (levels 1-4), as well as a sample award
certificate for quality achievement.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB2830 2005-031712 1-4129-2531-2
The principal’s guide to school budgeting.
Sorenson, Richard D. and Lloyd Milton Goldsmith.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 215 p. $71.95
For public and private school administrators, this book covers the rela-
tionship between academic and fiscal accountability systems and pro-
vides an overview of school budgeting practices in terms of collaborative
decision-making. As former school administrators, Sorenson (educational
leadership and foundations, U. of Texas at El Paso) and Goldsmith (edu-
cation, Abilene Christian U.) explain—using school situations and
national standards—how to plan and develop a budget; allocate, expend
and monitor funds; manage and evaluate reports; and prepare school
action plans. Also described: the relationship between budget and vision,
including a model for integrating the two, and the effect of the No Child
Left Behind Act.
LB2831 2005-037816 1-4129-1598-8
194 high-impact letters for busy principals; a guide to
handling difficult correspondence, 2d ed. (CD-ROM
included)
Grady, Marilyn L.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 212 p. $79.95
Grady (educational administration, U. of Nebraska-Lincoln) offers school
administrators nearly 200 letters they can use as templates when crafting
communications with teachers, staff, and parents. The letters are generic
and are intended to be modified to address specific situations. They are
organized into 13 categories (e.g., congratulations, recommendations,
sympathy, welcome, discipline, and special events). The letters are also
found on the accompanying Windows- and Macintosh-compatible CD-
ROM.
LB2831 2005-031691 0-7619-3151-1
The assistant principal; leadership choices and challenges,
2d ed.
Marshall, Catherine and Richard M. Hooley.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 195 p. $65.95
Marshall (University of North Carolina) and Hooley (school superin-
tendent) describe the role of assistant principals in the public school,
analyze the process by which assistant principals build their job skills,
and suggest possible improvements in training, selection, and
recruitment. Originally published in 1992, the second edition addresses
administrator shortage, new licensure and training practices, and
accountability pressures.
LB2831 2005-031776 1-4129-2681-5
Beginning the principalship; a practical guide for new
school leaders, 3d ed.
Daresh, John C.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 184 p. $69.95
Daresh (educational leadership, U. of Texas, El Paso) offers a wealth of
practical advice to school principals who are new to the job. Particular
emphasis is placed on the ways in which beginning principals can face
the expectations of state and federal accountability standards. The third
edition also contains new chapters addressing such topics as working
with support staff and understanding parents as partners. Each chapter
concludes with some prompts for building a personalized professional
development plan.
LB2831 2005-032751 1-4129-2504-5
Best practices of award-winning secondary school
principals.
Harris, Sandra.
Sage Publications, ©2006 224 p. $65.95
This volume presents dozens of cases showcasing the work of some of
the nation’s most effective secondary school principals and describing
the practices they use. Contributions from 34 award- winning adminis-
trators are organized into six main sections, focusing on such areas as
leadership, communication, and curriculum. These are followed by some
“words of wisdom” and a list of suggested books. Harris is director of
the Center for Doctoral Studies in Educational Leadership at Lamar U.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB2831 2006-014480 978-1-57886-494-2
Ethics and the school administrator; balancing today’s
complex issues.
Mahoney, Daniel.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 155 p. $24.95 (pa)
Mahoney (educational leadership and administration, Gonzaga U.) pro-
vides a guide for school administrators on dealing with ethical issues that
is also aimed at professors and students in educational leadership pro-
grams. In interviews, five administrators revealed their experiences with
deceptive behavior and ethically compromising situations, and Mahoney
draws conclusions from their answers. He discusses organizations,
behavior, theories of ethics and decision making, organizational politics,
and interpersonal dynamics.
LB2838 2006-929104 978-0-9787158-0-9
Awards and recognition for exceptional teachers; K-12 and
community college programs in the U.S.A., Canada and
other countries.
Andrews, Hans A.
Matilda Press, ©2006 386 p. $24.95 (pa)
Andrews calls on all K-12 schools and community colleges to develop and
implement teacher recognition programs. After explaining the link
between such recognition and improved student learning, he provides a
number of specific examples of effective award programs at the school,
state, and national levels. Some programs in Canada and elsewhere
around the world are also profiled. Andrews is the author of six books
on evaluation and recognition for outstanding teachers and students.
LB2838 2005-018393 1-4129-1482-5
Effective teacher evaluation; a guide for principals.
Peterson, Kenneth D. and Catherine A. Peterson.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 114 p. $55.95
Kenneth (education, Portland State U.) and Catherine Peterson (jour-
nalism, U. of Oregon) recognize that no specific preconception of good
teaching is precise or universally agreed upon. They respond to this
notion by offering new perspectives to principals on effective teacher eval-
uation, how it is defined for each teacher, and how it can be achieved.
They discuss a strategy of objective data collection from multiple sources
that involves the teacher in the process, and address how to analyze and
act on the results. Chapters cover the documentation of student learning,
classroom program quality, student and parent satisfaction, and teacher
professional activity, as well as the roles of the principal and the school
district in both promoting and implementing effective evaluation. The
final chapter and appendix material suggest methods for dealing with
unsatisfactory teachers.
LB2842 2005-029174 1-4129-1320-9
Teacher pay and teacher quality; attracting, developing,
and retaining the best teachers.
Stronge, James H. et al.
Sage Publications, ©2006 185 p. $71.95
Whether high-quality teachers will remain to help weather the storm of
budgets, mandates and turnover depends to some extent on intangibles.
However, unattractive or insufficient salary, benefits and working condi-
tions can push many to retire early, transfer to other districts or schools,
or just leave the professional altogether. Stronge (educational policy,
planning and leadership, College of William and Mary) and his co-
authors link teacher pay with teacher quality and provide a sequential
and practical approach for developing a teacher compensation system.
They show how teacher quality impacts student achievement, show how
teacher pay relates to the organizational purpose of schools and districts,
develop teacher assessment tools and examine the impact of working con-
ditions and student demographics, show how selected districts admin-
ister pay and present a model for compensation, and describe how to
plan and implement a restructured compensation system.
LB2844 2005-025997 1-4129-1691-7
Everything I need to know about teaching; ...they forgot
to tell me!
Jarvis, Stacey and Bob Algozzine.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 86 p. $45.95
Jarvis (a North Carolina social studies teacher) and Algozzine (education,
U. of North Carolina at Charlotte) turned Jarvis’s journal of her first year
into a series of brief lessons describing survival strategies that, the
authors believe, education programs rarely impart to beginning teachers.
Topics include dos and don’ts of student, parent, and peer interaction;
the management of time, resources, and money; considerations for
special education; and an introduction to creative teaching tools like
debate, Socratic seminars, and experiential exercises. The appendix
contains templates of resumes, scheduling forms, student questionnaires,
rubrics, and graphic organizing tools.
–232–
LB2844 2006-016508 978-1-57886-504-8
The faculty parking lot is not for planning; becoming an
effective first year teacher.
Conro, James L.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 111 p. $19.95 (pa)
Drawing on 37 years of experience in education, Conro offers a succinct
guide to best practices based on real-life classroom examples. Coverage
includes classroom management, essential components of effective lesson
plans, teaching to the objective, teaching for retention, teaching for
transfer, evaluation, and effective teaching research. For new teachers,
teacher mentors, department chairs, directors of instruction, and
building administrators. No subject index.
LB2844 2006-016828 978-1-890871-72-7
Focus on fluency; a meaning-based approach.
Cecil, Nancy Lee.
Holcomb Hathaway, Pub., ©2007 155 p. $21.95 (pa)
Aimed at pre-service and in-service teachers, this text describes a
meaning-based approach for promoting fluency. For each chapter, Cecil
(California State U., Sacramento) provides step-by-step instructions for
fluency-building classroom activities like sing-alongs, readers’ theatre,
and speedwriting. Activities can be modified for grade/skill level, and
many are appropriate for use with English language learners. Selected
children’s literature resources are listed in the appendix.
LB2844 2005-014783 1-57886-313-9
Innocence denied; a guide to preventing sexual
misconduct by teachers and coaches.
Fibkins, William L.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 152 p. $45.00
While not denying that there is a problem, Fibkins (an educator who
specializes in developing schoolwide support systems) argues that inap-
propriate sexual contact between school personnel and students is not of
epidemic proportions. He faults a legalistic approach for focusing on a
few predators while neglecting preventive guidelines and intervention
skills for all who may be vulnerable to engaging in such relationships
due to personal problems, like the lead character in Mr. Holland’s Opus
(film). Following actual case examples, he presents teacher awareness
inventories and information on establishing clear boundaries. The book
lacks an index.
LB2844 2006-021928 978-1-57274-865-1
Literacy coaching; developing effective teachers through
instructional dialogue. (CD-ROM included)
Duncan, Marilyn. (Learning network solutions)
Richard C. Owen Publishers, ©2006 100 p. $24.95 (pa)
Instructional dialogue is a type of professional support in which a coach
provides a teacher with feedback that is based on observation and inter-
action in that teacher’s classroom. In this practical guide, staff developer
Duncan (The Learning Network) explains how coaches can use this
method to help teachers become more effective and increase student
achievement. A companion DVD allows readers to watch and listen to
actual instructional dialogue between Duncan and one of the teachers
she has coached.
LB2844 2006-024660 978-0-8141-0290-9
Tensions and triumphs in the early years of teaching;
real-world findings and advice for supporting new
teachers.
Long, Susi et al.
NCTE, ©2006 255 p. $34.95 (pa)
Seeking to make a positive difference for academics and new teachers,
the eight authors speak from experience as they define and explain what
really happens from the preservice year up to the sixth year of teaching.
They describe how they formed their group, how they felt when they
first started, when they discovered they had the “being perfect disease,”
what they need from administrators and colleagues, how they matter in
school politics, and how they have adapted and grown since the first
years.
All books cited here are new, and all are in print and available.
We prepare entries from bound books only, never galleys.
–233–
LB2846 978-0-7401-1707-7
Education state rankings 2006-2007; pre K-12 education in
the 50 United States, 5th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathleen O’Leary Morgan and Scott Morgan.
Morgan Quitno Press, ©2006 441 p. $59.95 (pa)
A compilation of facts about US education, this reference contains 441
tables of statistics about student achievement, districts and facilities,
special education, safety and discipline, school finance, staff, student
demographics, teacher salaries, test scores, graduation rates, and other
topics relating to preK-12 education in all of the US states. Thirty new
tables are added to this edition. Information was drawn from federal and
state government documents, such as those from the US Census and
Department of Education, and interest groups. Data in each table is
shown in both alphabetical and rank order.
LB3013 2005-037815 1-4129-3917-8
Bully prevention; tips and strategies for school leaders
and classroom teachers, 2d ed.
Barton, Elizabeth A.
Sage Publications, ©2006 124 p. $57.95
Developmental psychologist Barton (peace and conflict studies, Wayne
State U.) suggests that school leaders and classroom teachers should
intervene in bullying not just because bullied students do less well aca-
demically and sometimes gun people down, but more fundamentally
because they have an obligation to build inclusive classroom environ-
ments for all students. She discusses the behavior of bullies, victims, and
witnesses; how to implement a school-wide anti-bullying program;
strategies for managing and preventing bullying in the classroom; evalu-
ating initiatives; and legislation.
LB3013 2005-035310 1-4129-1721-2
Common-sense classroom management for elementary
school teachers, 2d ed.
Lindberg, Jill A. and April M. Swick.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 135 p. $61.95
Lindberg and Swick (exceptional education and education respectively, U.
of Wisconsin-Milwaukee) have updated this quick reference for ele-
mentary school teachers to account for timely issues such as the
increasing importance placed on standardized testing, as well as the use
of computers, cell phones, and pagers. The 14 chapters offer about 100
brief strategies for achieving classroom goals and managing problems.
Specific topics include: taking care of teacher and classroom business,
communicating with parents, working with diverse populations, dealing
with personal hygiene issues, carrying out rewards and consequences,
and maintaining respect and authority through the concept of “with-it-
ness,” among others.
LB3013 2005-018856 978-1-57886-302-0
Effective classroom management; six keys to success.
Bradley, Dianne F. et al.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 134 p. $24.95 (pa)
Drawing from the process communication model (PCM), this teaching
resource identifies six types of student personalities, examines traditional
behavior management methods, and suggests proactive strategies for
reducing problem behaviors. Bradley (University of Maryland) and
Pauley (California State University) share success stories of motivating
students with different personalities, and address the challenge of
dealing with acute negative emotions bought into the classroom.
LB3013 2006-025718 978-1-4166-0462-4
Managing your classroom with heart; a guide for
nurturing adolescent learners.
Ridnouer, Katy.
Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev, ©2006 179 p. $25.95 (pa)
If you have teenagers in your life you know they need someone who
cares about them. Chances are good a teacher is that someone, and
Ridnouer draws from her experience in public and private schools and
high school equivalency programs to counter distraction, disconnection
and defiance. She reminds us that caring is an avenue to teaching, and
part of caring is providing a stable, safe and stimulating environment in
which teenagers interact with learning and teachers balance caring and
discipline. She gives guidelines for interacting with students, getting past
personality conflicts and building trust, handling common challenges
such as noise and lack of cooperation, giving kids a sense of order and
respect, making grades make sense, getting through a day, creating and
meeting expectations and taking accountability, and learning to tap into
students’ interests. She provides reflection questions suitable for indi-
viduals or groups.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB3013 2006-045511 978-1-57886-497-3
The nitty-gritty classroom and behavior management
resource; strategies, reproducibles, and tips for teachers.
Tetteris, Belinda Christine.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 225 p. $29.95 (pa)
Veteran elementary teacher Tetteris (Baltimore County Public Schools)
shares a wealth of practical tips and strategies for classroom and
behavior management. These classroom-tested ideas are organized into
nine chapters, dealing with such areas as bulletin board displays, record
keeping, and lesson planning for substitute teachers. Methods for
teaching reading groups are also covered. Ready-to-use reproducible
forms are found throughout the volume.
LB3013 2006-001771 1-4129-3767-1
Planning classroom management; a five-step process to
creating a positive learning environment, 2d ed.
Bosch, Karen.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 159 p. $65.95
Bosch (education, Virginia Wesleyan College) guides teachers through
each stage of the development and implementation of a personal
classroom management plan (CMP). Questions and activities found
throughout the text help readers to understand classroom management
as a process. The volume concludes with five sample CMPs written by
teachers of primary, intermediate, middle, and secondary grades. The
second edition features an increased emphasis on the research under-
lying the text’s main concepts.
LB3013 2004-090285 0-7619-4472-9
Preventing bullying in schools; a guide for teachers and
other professionals.
Lee, Chris.
Paul Chapman Publ. Ltd., ©2005 102 p. $24.95
This resource for teachers and other school personnel offers practical
advice on preventing and countering bullying in schools. Former
classroom teacher Lee (now a lecturer at the U. of Plymouth, UK)
describes research-based strategies that go beyond dealing with indi-
vidual incidents to address bullying at the school level. Some Web
resources for staff, children, and parents are listed at the back of the
volume. Distributed in the U.S. by Sage Publications.
LB3013 2005-032723 1-4129-3724-8
Teaching class clowns (and what they can teach us).
Purkey, William Watson.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 128 p. $49.95
Purkey, a former class clown and retired professor of counselor edu-
cation at the U. of North Carolina, uses stories about himself and others
(some famous) to describe how to teach and appreciate the contributions
of class clowns. He outlines their tendencies—investing in themselves and
situations, asserting, relating to others, and coping—and effective ways to
teach them based on these predispositions. Purkey conducted a research
study of class clowns at the U. of Florida (published in The American
Educational Research Journal in 1979) and draws from this material for
the book.
LB3013 2006-024498 0-275-99329-9
Violence in America’s schools; understanding, prevention,
and responses.
Thomas, R. Murray.
Praeger, ©2006 258 p. $44.95
Thomas (emeritus, educational psychology, U. of California, Santa
Barbara) presents both the bad news and the good news about the fre-
quency of school violence in US schools. While there were about 738,700
violent crimes committed in a school setting reported in 2003, this trend
has actually been declining over the past 15 years. After using case
examples to define types of school violence and discussing the specific
types of deadly weapons brought to schools, he focuses on approaches to
treating violence. There is more emphasis on students than outsiders as
perpetrators.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LB3032 2005-032759 1-4129-3676-4
The elementary school principal’s calendar; a month-by-
month planner for the school year.
Ricken, Robert et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 230 p. $79.95
Organized to correspond to the academic year, this resource for current
and aspiring elementary school principals provides a month- by-month
“tickler file” designed to support their planning processes. Each of 12
chapters begins with a list of key tasks. The tasks are accompanied by
brief explanations and space for personal notes. Sample communications,
planning prompts, personnel-related activities, and checklists follow. A
number of reproducible sample documents—such as teacher job descrip-
tions and summer letters to parents—are found at the back of the volume.
LB3051 2006-020642 978-1-4166-0422-8
Classroom assessement & grading that work.
Marzano, Robert J.
Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev, ©2006 188 p. $27.95 (pa)
Marzano (education, Cardinal Stritch U.) shows that adding up points or
using other well-known methods often produces assessments that have
nothing to do with how much the K-12 student has learned. He offers a
framework for classroom assessment based on an application of national
and state standards designed to measure learning over time and create a
comprehensive, topic-based assessment system. He details the differences
in mastering information, mental procedures and psychomotor proce-
dures and the appropriate assessment of each, and also shows how to
make the all-important final grade better reflect reality. His goal is to
create assessments that encourage learning and transform the culture of
schools and districts to expect and get higher levels of effectiveness and
efficiency from teachers and students.
LB3060 2005-032720 1-4129-1577-5
Common formative assessments; how to connect
standards-based instruction and assessment.
Ainsworth, Larry and Donald Viegut.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 164 p. $67.95
Ainsworth (a performance assessment advisor with an M.S. in educa-
tional administration) and Viegut (educational leadership, Western
Michigan U.) define common formative assessments as
“pretests...designed by participating teachers of elementary grade-level
teams and secondary course/department teams who all teach the same
content standards to their students.” In ten chapters, the authors instruct
educators in the implementation of such assessments which, when com-
pared to summative assessments, are better designed to identify strug-
gling students and improve their chances early. Coverage includes how
to align formative assessment with standards, how to score them, and
how to implement and sustain them at the school- and district-wide
levels, among other topics. Sample assessments are included.
LB3060 2006-005527 978-1-57886-471-3
A complete guide to rubrics; assessment made easy for
teachers, K-college.
Quinlan, Audrey M.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 217 p. $29.95 (pa)
Quinlan (methods in language arts and elementary math, Seton Hill U.)
provides a guide to assessment rubrics and examples for practical use for
both beginners and experienced users. Introductory chapters define the
concept and help readers to decide whether to use checklists, per-
formance lists, or rubrics. Subsequent chapters address every grade level,
from primary grades to adult education, as well as using rubrics with
computer presentations and online activities, teacher and student-created
types, and their use in the real world. Examples are ideas obtained from
teachers around the country. Included is a list of websites.
–234–
LB3060 2005-283971 0-471-70706-6
Essentials of WIAT-II and KTEA-II assessment.
Lichtenberger, Elizabeth O. and Donna R. Smith. (Essentials of psycho-
logical assessment series)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2005 355 p. $34.95 (pa)
Inspired by Douglas K. Smith’s 2001 Essentials of Individual Achievement
Assessment, Lichtenberger (a practicing clinical psychologist) and Smith
(a clinical measurement consultant with Harcourt Assessment, Inc.—The
Psychological Corporation) concentrate on the academic assessment of
the recent second editions of two of the standardized tests discussed in
that earlier volume: the Weschler Individual Achievement Test and the
Kaufman Test of Educational Achievement, justifying their focus by
noting that both are widely used instruments in school psychology and
related fields. They cover test administration, scoring, interpretation, and
clinical applications. Their discussion goes beyond the tests’ manuals by
providing illustrative case reports showing how the two tests can be inte-
grated with a battery of other tests on academic functioning, discussing
the integration of the tests with respective conformed tests of cognitive
ability, and looking at the assessment of special populations with
learning disabilities.
LB3060 2005-057975 1-57110-424-0
Fair isn’t always equal; assessment & grading in the
differentiated classroom.
Wormeli, Rick.
Stenhouse Publishers, ©2006 218 p. $23.00 (pa)
Differentiated instruction is a highly effective approach that employs a
variety of instructional strategies to address diverse student learning
needs. In this text, Wormeli explores some of the difficult issues encoun-
tered by secondary school teachers when assessing and grading students
in differentiated classrooms. Just a few of the practicalities addressed:
handling extra credit work, recording work not done, and creating useful
and fair test questions. Wormeli is a National Board Certified Teacher
and a nationally-known speaker on middle-level education.
LB3060 2006-17002 978-1-4129-1682-0
Standard setting; a guide to establishing and evaluating
performance standards on tests.
Cizek, Gregory J. and Michael B. Bunch.
Sage Publications, ©2007 352 p. $79.95
Beginning with foundational and conceptual information and concluding
with step-by-step procedures, this reference explains all aspects of setting
standards for tests in education, licensure and certification. Procedures
are included for all current methods, such as Angoff, item mapping, and
analytical judgment. Examples are provided in widely available formats
so that readers can easily adapt the material provided.
LB3454 2005-025071 978-1-4164-0071-4
Speech, language, and hearing programs in schools; a
guide for students and practitioners, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Eileen Gravani and Jacqueline Meyer.
PRO-ED, ©2006 647 p. $57.00 (pa)
Aimed at students of speech-language pathology, this volume provides a
broad overview of the profession as it is practiced in the schools. Gravani
(State U. of New York at Cortland) begins with a brief look at relevant
educational history and legal landmarks. Other contributors address
such core topics as assessment, individualized educational programs,
and models of service delivery. Coverage extends to discussions of lin-
guistically diverse students, third- party payments, and the roles of
related professionals.
LB3605 2006-029663 978-0-7879-8213-3
Exploring leadership; for college students who want to
make a difference, 2d ed.
Komives, Susan R. et al.
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 488 p. $30.00 (pa)
Komives (college student personnel graduate program, U. of Maryland,
College Park) et al. describe how college students can use their experience
to understand leadership. They use a combination of psychological and
educational approaches to emphasize self-awareness as well as under-
standing leadership in the context of others. Themes in the book involve
leadership for a changing world; relationships as a foundation; groups,
organizations, and communities; understanding change and how to
make a difference; and personal renewal. This edition has been
expanded and has new chapters on change and strategies and developing
a leadership identity. It includes the relational model and uses a more
global context and multidisciplinary examples. Names and subjects are
indexed. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
–235–
LC47 2006-011238 978-1-57886-473-7
Operating an independent school; a guide for school
leaders.
Case, Agnes Gilman.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 269 p. $37.95 (pa)
The expanding number of private schools and public charter schools
offer alternatives to families of all income levels. But according to a
former Delaware secretary of education, operating an independent school
is more like leading a school district than operating a single school. Case,
with an educational consulting company supporting school choice,
presents information on how to run such a school and conduct a per-
formance audit. Chapters provide checklists on issues ranging from
school discipline to grant funding. The guide includes references but
lacks an index.
LC67 2006-025790 978-1-933371-13-9
Advancing campus efficiencies; a companion for campus
leaders in the digital era.
Johnstone, Sally M.
Anker Publishing Co., Inc, ©2007 216 p. $37.95
Educator and administrator Johnstone (Winona State U.) has long worked
with WCET, a cooperative advancing the effective use of technology in
higher education. Here she and other members share what they have
learned to help other administrators and faculty members make deci-
sions about technology in their own institution. The concerns they
address include cost efficiencies, student and faculty services, accounta-
bility and assuring quality, and consortial relationships.
LC72 2006-007252 978-0-7391-1081-2
Academic freedom in Hong Kong.
Currie, Jan, et al.
Lexington Books, ©2006 192 p. $70.00
Written by a team of professors of education, law, and public policy, this
text explores the issue of academic freedom in Hong Kong since its return
to China. Drawing upon interviews with academics and administrators,
the authors describe how certain critical incidents in 2000 and 2001 led
to a reaffirmation of academic freedom. They also provide a legal
analysis of Article 23 and its potential impact on a range of freedoms in
Hong Kong. Currie is professor emeritus at Murdoch U.
LC89 2006-010911 978-1-57886-486-7
The impact of politics in local education; navigating white
water.
Owen, Jane C.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 1553 p. $24.95 (pa)
This text helps school administrators to understand and better manage
the local community politics that impact schools. Owen (Midwestern State
U.) explains how to read the political climate of a community and then
proactively manage political issues in order to maintain a stable educa-
tional environment. A fictionalized school district case study is used
throughout to illustrate the micropolitical theories discussed. The volume
is not indexed.
LC146 2006-012709 0-8204-8189-0
From the classroom to the corner; female dropouts’
reflections on their school years.
Robinson, Cynthia Cole. (Counterpoints; studies in the postmodern
theory of education; v.302)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 205 p. $31.95 (pa)
Robinson (education, National-Louis U.) discusses the in-school and out-
of-school experiences of three young women who dropped out as adoles-
cents and became prostitutes. She writes particularly with attention to
feminist theory; curriculum studies; and race, class, and gender studies.
She sets the scene for the case studies with an examination of the con-
ditions that compelled these and similarly marginalized young women
to fail or reject the education system. The following section comprises the
stories of the three women, prefaced by the first hand account of a street
cop. The stories consist partly of the women’s own words and partly of
explanation and analysis by the author. The concluding chapters offer
curricular designs to address the educational needs of dropouts and
potential dropouts, and explore the effects of the non-school histories of
the women on their experiences and relationships to school.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LC149 2006-017398 0-8058-5057-0
Advocacy research in literacy education; seeking higher
ground.
Cherland, Meredith Rogers and Helen Harper.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 350 p. $29.95 (pa)
Writing for those in literacy education, Cherland (English studies, U. of
Regina, Canada) and Harper (English studies, U. of Nevada) offer a
volume on advocacy research, which addresses issues of social justice,
equity, and democracy with the objective of social transformation.
Aiming to categorize and describe advocacy research and explore ideas
about literacy and justice, the volume surveys research in critical literacy,
the work of Paulo Freire, radical counternarratives influenced by fem-
inist and queer theory, literacy as social practice, and linguistic studies.
Each chapter covers the research area, history, example studies, and con-
tributions to advocacy work. The second section focuses on literacy and
social justice and psychoanalytic and feminist poststructural scholarship
about the body. The authors view this research as particularly important
with the increase in testing and scripted lessons and programs that
undermine gains made in the subject. Indexes by both subject and
author are provided.
LC196 2006-023641 0-8204-8123-8
Brave new classrooms; democratic education & the
Internet.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joe Lockard and Mark Pegrum. (Digital forma-
tions; v.37)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 360 p. $32.95 (pa)
Seeing the promised democratic potential of electronic education as
increasingly chimerical, Lockard (English, Arizona State U., US) and
Pegrum (English, U. of Western Australia) have gathered 16 chapters that
critique e-learning paradigms and practices from democratic perspectives
that go beyond mere calls for access. Opening chapters examine
emerging discourses of resistance to current e-learning among educators,
followed by explorations of the points at which these discourses emerge,
primarily associated with the injection of neoliberal paradigms and
market models into various sites and institutions of e-learning.
Concluding chapters proffer alternative paradigms and practices that the-
oretically can minimize the dangers outlined in previous chapters.
LC196 20069025770 978-0-8020-9078-2
Curriculum as cultural practice; postcolonial
imaginations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Yatta Kanu.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 326 p. $65.00
Thirteen papers, presented by Kanu (education, U. of Manitoba, Canada),
explore how education curricula around the world should be re-imagined
in the wake of postcolonialism’s exposure of the global dominance of
Western cultural knowledge and traditions complicit in the subjugation
of large groups of people. Topics include the integration of postcolonial
literary studies into school reading practices, culturally-specific mathe-
matics for American Indians in Canada, how dominant-culture teachers
come to understand the social construction of their own subjectivities
through exploring issues of indigenousness, the retrieval of indige-
nousness approaches to education in Sierra Leone, the educational
agenda of neoliberal globalization, the role of the nation and nationality
in Canadian teaching about citizenship and identity, and other related
topics.
LC196 2006-014827 978-0-7425-3888-7
Reinventing critical pedagogy.
Title main entry. Ed. by César Augusto Rossatto et al.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 258 p. $24.95 (pa)
The title of this collection also served as the theme of the October 2004
Second International Conference on Education, Labor, and Emancipation,
from which the 15 papers presented here by Rossatto (teacher education,
U. of Texas at El Paso), Allen (educational though and sociocultural
studies, U. of New Mexico), and Pruyn (social studies education, New
Mexico State U.) was taken. The collection is offered in the belief that
critical pedagogy needs to be more welcoming of a wider representa-
tional and ideological array of the oppressed in way that can make it
more of a counterhegemonic force. The papers are presented in three
parts that, in turn, interrogate questions of race and ethnicity in critical
pedagogy, critique established theoretical premises and concepts
prevalent in the field, and present empirical studies applying new
approaches to critical pedagogy.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LC196 2006-018973 0-8204-6307-8
Useful theory; making critical education practical.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rebecca A. Goldstein. (Counterpoints; studies
in the postmodern theory of education; v.235)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 243 p. $32.95 (pa)
For undergraduate and graduate students in education, Goldstein (cur-
riculum and teaching, Montclair State U.) compiles 12 essays on the topic
of critical education theory and how to connect theory to practice.
Teachers and professors of education from universities in the US discuss
critical pedagogy, social consciousness, and the importance of listening to
youth voices, as well as examples of applying theory in middle and high
schools and colleges. The third section covers the integration of theory
with technology, and the last addresses using theory to be more inclusive
in the classroom, such as with students with disabilities.
LC197 0-7734-5810-7
The responsibility of parents for the education of their
children; a Foucauldian analysis of the School Education
Act, 1999.
McGowan, Wayne S.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 257 p. $109.95
In this study, McGowan (U. of Western Australia) applies a Foucauldian
perspective to parenting in relation to education. He uses Foucauldian
notions such as discourse, discursive formations, power, archaeology,
genealogy, and governmentality to investigate how Western Australia’s
1999 School Education Act relates to constructions of two types of
parents—the responsible and the unfit. The focus is on how the Act
“shapes and uses freedom to constitute the responsible parent for the
purpose of governing the education of the child” (from the introduction).
LC212 2006-022455 0-8204-8692-2
Geographies of difference; the social production of the
east side, west side and central city school.
Buendia, Edward & Nancy Ares. (Intersections in communications and
culture; global approaches and transdisciplinary perspectives; v.17)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 132 p. $29.95 (pa)
Buendia (education, culture, and society; U. of Utah) and Ares (teaching
and curriculum, U. of Rochester, New York) remind readers that terms
ostensible identifying parts of a city are often in fact codes underpinned
by local knowledge referring to race and class. They argue that city edu-
cators are implicated in the production and maintenance of these codes
and knowledge about city space and group identity, and that principals
and teachers frame their work and mission according to what part of
town the are working in.
LC212 2006-922117 978-1-4129-0792-7
The Sage handbook of gender and education.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christine Skelton et al.
Sage Publications, ©2006 536 p. $130.00
Skelton et al. (education, Roehampton U. and educational studies,
Swarthmore College) provide an overview of gender and education in 35
essays written by an international group of scholars in those disciplines.
Coverage encompasses theory and methods, including feminist pedagogy
and methodology and gender issues at different educational levels and in
curriculum subjects, with a chapter on single-sex schooling. Other sub-
jects addressed are identity construction in educational settings, taking
into account race and class issues, the gendering of institutions and prac-
tices, and issues faced by teachers. The volume is intended for students
and academics at the undergraduate and postgraduate levels.
LC220 2006-046294 978-1-57886-366-2
Building character through community service; strategies
to implement the missing element in education.
Rizzo, Margaret and Joyce Brown.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 193 p. $32.95 (pa)
The authors of this book are a middle school librarian and a family and
consumer science teacher. For the past ten years, the two have coordi-
nated a community service day at their school. This guide lays out that
same process using task lists, worksheets, sample letters, and activities,
for educators hoping to implement day-long or ongoing service learning
projects. Coverage includes researching and contacting agencies, choosing
student and faculty leaders, soliciting chaperones, arranging trans-
portation, and publicizing the project. One chapter contains ten lessons
for student preparedness, which include a discussion of the behavioral
expectations of volunteers, and activities involving interviewing a vol-
unteer and designing a logo. The following chapters contain materials for
executing projects both in the community and in the school, activities for
follow-up education, and advice for planning for the next year.
–236–
LC220 2005-032753 1-4129-3672-1 LC586 2006-007079 0-8018-8495-0
Service learning; a guide to planning, implementing, and Train up a child; Old Order Amish & Mennonite schools.
assessing student projects, 2d ed. Johnson-Weiner, Karen M. (Young Center books in Anabaptist and
Berman, Sally. Pietist studies)
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 202 p. $74.95 Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2007 289 p. $49.95
Service learning is in-context learning that connects specific educational Johnson-Weiner (linguistic anthropology, State U. of New York-Potsdam)
goals with meaningful community service. In this guide for educators, presents an ethnological study of Old Order schools in the context of Old
Berman explains the rationale behind service learning programs and Order culture. She drew on personal connections established over several
presents nine sample projects that can be used as-is or modified. Each years of participant observation of Amish communities in upstate New
includes a grid for planning and managing the project, suggestions for York and Mennonite communities in Pennsylvania and on interviews
student journaling lead-ins, and a list of portfolio pieces. A former high with teachers, students, parents, school board members, and other
school science teacher, Berman creates and leads workshops for edu- members of the communities.
cators.
LC1032 2005-029176 1-4129-1778-6
LC221 2006-020718 978-1-57886-539-0 From standards to rubrics in six steps; tools for assessing
Diverse partnerships for student success; strategies and student learning, K-8. (CD-ROM included)
tools to help school leaders. Burke, Kay.
Decker, Larry E. et al. Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 222 p. $74.95
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 308 p. $34.95 (pa) Burke discusses how to assess standards by integrating them with real
Decker (community education, Florida Atlantic U.) and co-authors tasks to motivate learning. She articulates how to develop a process that
describe strategies and tools to help school leaders create successful part- moves from standards to rubrics by determining what students need to
nerships with members of the larger community. Some of the aspects of understand, organizing criteria into checklists, creating performance
educational partnerships discussed include home-school partnerships, tasks to establish a relevant context, guiding students through checklists,
school public relations, and volunteer programs. Most chapters conclude and designing rubrics. Many forms are provided and resources for
with a list of Internet resources. The final chapter focuses on the impor- rhyming words; social studies, language arts, reading, and math units;
tance of “making friends before you need them.” and the scientific method are included. A CD-ROM accompanies the text.
Burke is an author and consultant who has taught at the high school and
LC221 2006-015093 1-4129-3659-4 university levels and lectured widely on professional development for
The engaged sociologist; connecting the classroom to the teachers.
community.
LC1072 978-0-8160-6019-1
Korgen, Kathleen and Jonathan M. White.
Pine Forge Press, ©2007 196 p. $26.95 (pa) Ferguson career resource guide to internships and
summer jobs; 2v.
This introductory sociology textbook by Korgen (William Paterson U.) and
White (Bridgewater State College) promotes the idea of “public sociology,” Turkington, Carol.
wherein students come to understand the connections between sociology, Ferguson Publishing, ©2006 876 p. $125.00
democracy, and civic engagement. This concept is used to explore the Turkington is a medical writer with a degree in journalism, and has
standard concerns of sociology, including theory and methods, culture, authored or co-authored nearly 20 encyclopedias for Facts on File. In this
socialization, social institutions, deviancy, social movements, class strati- two-volume reference, she profiles approximately 550 internships and
fication, sex and gender, and race and ethnicity. summer jobs, primarily for college students or recent graduates seeking
career and travel experience. Brief essays (about one page each) intro-
LC243 2006-023721 978-0-7879-8818-0 duction offer advice on choosing and locating a position, creating a
Reconnecting education and foundations; turning good resume and cover letter, acing an interview, finding a mentor for the
intentions into educational capital. selection process, finding references, working abroad, and handling the
particulars of a government internship. These are supplemented with
Title main entry. Ed. by Ray Bacchetti and Thomas Ehrlich.
exercises when appropriate. The following section comprises the
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 503 p. $55.00
directory. Entries are grouped by 16 alphabetically listed areas of study:
This volume investigates the sometimes strained partnerships between activism, animals, art, business, education, entertainment, government,
philanthropic foundations and educational institutions in the U.S. today. health, historical areas, international, media, nature, science, sports, and
It contains 15 contributions from leaders in both types of organizations technical. The internships and jobs are listed alphabetically by title,
who participated in a recent conference sponsored by the Carnegie within these themes. Each position is profiled in at least a page providing
Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching. The editors introduce each contact information, pay information, application deadlines, and educa-
essay, relating its particulars to the overarching theme of the devel- tional and experiential requirements, along with an overview of the
opment of “educational capital.” Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley. organization and the tasks of an intern/employee. Some internship titles,
such as one with Amnesty International, actually describe a number of
LC311 2006-907503 978-0-7618-3612-4 possible positions (e.g. communications, crisis preparedness, or gov-
Character education; transforming values into virtue. ernment relations). The directory seems to omit work with faith-based or
Salls, Holly Shepard. politically radical organizations; however, listings in areas including gov-
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 153 p. $27.00 (pa) ernment and business are ideologically diverse (both the Democratic and
Salls created the character education program at The Willows Academy Republican national committees are represented). Each volume contains
in Chicago, and puts her experience in the context of work by John indexing by application deadline, education level, salary, country, state,
Dewey, Alasdair MacIntyre, and other American and European education and organization. Appendixes in volume two list internet resources and
theorists. further reading and contacts for governor’s offices in all 50 states.

LC506 978-0-7165-3403-7 LC1085 2006-018424 978-0-7425-5026-1

Founded on fear; Letterfrack industrial school, war and
exile.
Tyrrell, Peter. Ed. by Diarmuid Whelan.
Irish Academic Press, ©2006 182 p. $29.50 (pa)
An Irishman living in London, Tyrrell (1916-67) burned himself to death
in April 1967. Nearly 40 years later, many pages of manuscript written in
1959 in installments, along with much correspondence from him, were
discovered describing the brutality of his life in a Christian school and
as a prisoner of war. Whelan (U. College, Cork) has assembled them into
a narrative. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
Defining values for research and technology; the
university’s changing role.
Title main entry. Ed. by William T. Greenough et al.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 239 p. $29.95 (pa)
Eighteen of the world’s leading policy makers, scientists, and scholars
contribute 13 essays about the values that should help guide the research
mission of major research-intensive universities. Coverage includes the
purpose of the research university; forging partnerships with industry
and governments; funding, economic incentives, and the research
agenda; and the dark side of university- corporate partnerships. For stu-
dents, scholars, and general readers concerned about the changing direc-
tions of contemporary research universities and the future of academia.

–237– Reference & Research Book News February 2007

LC1091 2006-014471 978-1-85359-918-7
Education for intercultural citizenship; concepts and
comparisons.
Title main entry. Ed. by Geof Alred et al. (Languages for intercultural
communication and education; 13)
Multilingual Matters Ltd., ©2006 254 p. $46.95 (pa)
Fourteen international academics and researchers contribute 11 chapters
applying theory and concepts of interculturality/of being intercultural to
citizenship education. The collection explores identity and its complexity,
and the difficulties this poses for education for national citizenship;
examines concepts of citizenship education and the difficulties of trans-
lating both literally and metaphorically from one context and language
to another; offers a definition of intercultural citizenship that is sensitive
to complexities of identity, of concepts and of translation; and, through
international case studies, analyzes the degree to which intercultural cit-
izenship is present or emergent in contemporary education systems. No
subject index. For those working in intercultural citizenship and edu-
cation for citizenship.
LC1099 2005-031707 1-4129-2618-1
Building culturally responsive classrooms; a guide for K-6
teachers.
Delgado-Gaitan, Concha.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 166 p. $67.95
Delgado-Gaitan explains how K-6 teachers can create a classroom envi-
ronment that is responsive to the needs of children from a wide variety
of cultural and linguistic backgrounds. The first section (“Context”)
focuses on the physical organization of the classroom as well as disci-
pline procedures, parent-teacher communication, and other structures
that surround and support learning. The second section (“Content”) con-
tains chapters on such topics as literacy and math. Delgado-Gaitan has
worked as an elementary school teacher, principal, and professor of
anthropology and education at the Santa Barbara and Davis campuses of
the U. of California.
LC1200 2005-027438 1-4129-1468-X
Making inclusion work; effective practices for all teachers.
Beattie, John et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 269 p. $75.95
Beattie (U. of North Carolina-Charlotte) et al. offer a handbook on prac-
tices for including students with disabilities in general education class-
rooms. The book is meant to accompany methods texts in general
education and addresses the need to increase understanding of special
education concepts and skills to inclusive classroom situations, apply
these concepts and skills, and increase cooperation among professionals,
administrators, and parents. The authors begin by describing the current
special education system and the social, political, and legal bases for
general and special education. They then discuss individualized edu-
cation programs, classroom organization, appropriate lessons, behavior
management and motivation, teaching reading, cognitive strategies,
effective accommodations and modifications, and assessment and
grading. The final chapters cover parental assistance, collaboration with
other professionals, and the impact of the No Child Left Behind Act.
LC1394 2006-277810 978-0-335-21608-6
Raising boys’ achievement in secondary schools.
Younger, Mike and Molly Warrington.
Open University Press, ©2005 209 p. $35.95 (pa)
Younger and Warrington (education and geography respectively, U. of
Cambridge), along with Mclellan (Raising Boys’ Achieveent Project),
evaluate different approaches and advocate practical strategies for raising
boys’ achievement in secondary schools. Case studies, evidence-based
research, and boys’ and girls’ perspectives drive discussion of best prac-
tices on individual, classroom, organizational, and socio-cultural levels,
as well as a critical exploration of the concepts of underachievement and
the gender gap. The final chapter suggests policy modifications that
promote inclusive practices. Data and policies are UK-based. This text is
intended for undergraduate and graduate education students, as well as
school administrators and policy makers.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LC2669 2006-032638 0-313-32833-1
The Praeger handbook of Latino education in the U.S.; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lourdes Diaz Soto.
Praeger, ©2007 605 p. $175.00
Soto (education, Pennsylvania State U., University Park) presents infor-
mation on the state of education for Latinos in the US in a text meant for
educators, students, scholars, policy makers, and general readers. Aiming
to provide an overview and a comprehensive understanding of issues,
contributors (mostly US scholars in education and other fields) address
issues in thematic entries arranged alphabetically. These entries discuss
topics such as academic achievement, Americanization, bilingual edu-
cation, border crossing, higher education, reform and policy, subjects
relating to teaching and learning English, and equity. Others include
gender issues, immigration, cultural leaders, testing, teacher education,
standards, and poverty. Demographic tables are presented in the
appendix. Sources for the handbook include the US Census, the Pew
Hispanic Center, the Rand Corporation, the National Center for
Educational Statistics, and the work of contemporary scholars. An index
is provided in the second volume only.
LC2683 2006-004579 978-0-8047-5523-8
Mexican roots, American schools; helping Mexican
immigrant children succeed.
Crosnoe, Robert.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 168 p. $19.95 (pa)
Crosnoe (sociology, U. of Texas, Austin) presents findings from the first-
ever national study of the school readiness of Mexican immigrant
children. As the number of Mexican immigrants to the U.S. continues to
increase, the author argues, it is critical that we determine ways to
improve the educational prospects of the Mexican immigrant children if
they are to eventually become prosperous, productive, fulfilled citizens.
The study examines various aspects of their lives—including health, the
home environment, and childcare arrangements—to identify what helps
and what hurts these children in the first years of elementary school,
and concludes with some recommended social policy changes For edu-
cators, policymakers, and parents.
LC2778 978-0-7734-5685-3
Twenty issues in teaching African American pupils; a
collective experience of what works.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tony J. Manson.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 315 p. $119.95
Manson (education, Florida A&M U.) and his contributors offer their
research and their experience here, and the result is a collection of
articles that work at both a theoretical and practical level to sensitize
teachers and other school personnel to the need for their full partici-
pation in the education process. Topics include producing effective
teachers, online instruction, traditional and constructivist teaching, the
impact of the No Child Left Behind Act on African-American students,
African-centered education as an answer to the achievement gap, early
literacy, investigating misconceptions in probability and statistics,
repeated reading and fluency, the new gender gap affecting male stu-
dents, a comparison of public and charter schools, high stakes testing,
parental involvement with children at risk, character education, student
grade level retention, block scheduling, national teacher board certifi-
cation and case studies of the Call Me Mister educational achievement
program and Florida’s implementation of The No Child Left Behind Act.
LC2779 2006-044255 1-57110-393-7
Teaching reading to black adolescent males; closing the
achievement gap.
Tatum, Alfred W.
Stenhouse Publishers, ©2005 165 p. $17.50 (pa)
Tatum (literacy education, Northern Illinois U.) uses his own experiences
as a black child, middle school teacher, reading specialist in an urban
elementary school, and staff developer to describe how to rethink literacy
instruction and improve learning, therefore creating better societal
options for black males. He discusses changes in adolescence that affect
literacy development, the effect of turmoil in urban centers and how
accounts can be used to reach students, and the reading achievement
gap. He explains concepts of literacy instruction, curriculum orientation,
and culturally responsive pedagogy, and specific methods for instruction,
text discussion, and assessment. He concludes with a discussion of pro-
fessional development. No index is provided.
–238–
LC3726 2006-004927 0-8058-2514-2
English-only instruction and immigrant students in
secondary schools; a critical examination.
Gunderson, Lee.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 306 p. $39.95 (pa)
Gunderson (U. of British Columbia) presents findings from a number of
studies which are part of a large, longitudinal study of the success of
some 25,000 immigrants students in a Vancouver, BC school district in
which the policy is English-only instruction. The text provides multiple
views of the students’ lives and their success in schools. It examines stu-
dents’ perceptions of teaching and learning; differences between stu-
dents’ and teachers’ views; issues related to students’ views of their
identities as they work, study, and socialize; and different reading
models to facilitate the learning of English as a second language. For
teachers, teacher educators, school and district administrators, policy-
makers, and researchers interested in literacy, cultural diversity, and stu-
dents who speak little or no English.
LC3731 0-8058-5506-8
Literacy and bilingualism; a handbook for all teachers, 2d
ed.
Brisk, María and Margaret M. Harrington.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 272 p. $27.00 (pa)
Brisk (Boston College) and Harrington (Providence Public Schools)
present an updated handbook applying proven techniques, based on
working with bilingual learners, to teaching literacy in the 21st century.
Complete and straightforward instructions are accompanied by accounts
of teachers experimenting with a variety of approaches to enliven
instruction in reading and writing native as well as second languages.
The second edition includes five new approaches and their classroom
implementation; additional information in each chapter introduction
addressing its theme; new material on language, culture, and literacy
development for students completely new to English; and annotated bib-
liographies with sample books to support theory within language and
content area classes. For K-12 teachers in any type of classroom where
bilingualism plays a role.
LC3745 2006-008679 0-8058-5838-5
Global migration and education; school, children, and
families.
Adams, Leah D.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2006 349 p. $39.95 (pa)
Twenty-nine international academics and educational policy specialists
contribute 21 chapters examining the issues faced by immigrant children,
their parents, and educators in school settings. Individual chapters
identify some of the specific problems related to newly immigrated
children and families; the support services needed; the challenges faced
by educators, schools, and school authorities as they try to address the
needs of increasing numbers of children and families in transition; some
of the ways that schools can assume their related responsibilities; and
examples of successes in easing the transition for new arrivals. For
researchers, students, school professionals, and educational policymakers
and analysts around the world in the fields of multicultural education,
child psychology, comparative and international education, educational
foundations, educational policy, and cross-cultural studies.
LC3981 2005-026851 1-4129-1507-4
Common-sense classroom management for special
education teachers, grades K-5.
Lindberg, Jill A. et al.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 124 p. $69.95
Lindberg, Walker-Wied (both: exceptional education, U. of Wisconsin-
Milwaukee), and Beckwith (special education, U. of Wisconsin-Oshkosh)
intend this quick reference for K-5 special education teachers. The 12
chapters comprise about 70 strategies, in outline format, for achieving
goals and managing common problems. The authors advise teachers in
organizing materials and students; managing behavior; instructional
planning in special and general education environments; record keeping;
dealing with legal issues; working with families, support staff, teacher
assistants, and administration; and becoming involved in the school
community.
–239–
LC3981 2006-014173 978-0-7879-8154-9
How to reach and teach all children in the inclusive
classroom, 2d ed.
Rief, Sandra F. and Julie A. Heimburge.
Jossey-Bass, ©2006 456 p. $32.95 (pa)
This text covers strategies, lessons, and reproducible activities to use in
teaching students in grades three to eight who have different learning
styles, abilities, skills, and behaviors. Lessons are gauged toward active,
high-interest learning and for use with all the students in a general edu-
cation classroom. They discuss how to recognize student differences;
manage behavior; engage students; promote self-esteem and resilience;
increase parental involvement; improve time management, organization,
and homework success; and use specific curriculum for reading and
writing, language, content areas, and music and art. This edition is
updated to include new research findings and educational practices. Rief
(continuing education, California State U., East Bay and Seattle Pacific U.)
is an internationally known author, speaker, and teacher trainer, and
Heimburge has taught at the elementary level for over 30 years.
LC3981 2006-922307 978-1-4129-0728-6
The Sage handbook of special education.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lani Florian.
Sage Publications, ©2007 580 p. $125.00
Florian (inclusive and special education, U. of Cambridge, UK) gathers
together recent scholarship in 40 chapters by scholars in education from
around the world, with a focus on English-speaking countries. The
handbook aims to reach an international audience and is intended as a
sourcebook on special education, looking specifically at responses to stu-
dents’ difficulties in learning or working with those who have disabil-
ities. Special education is treated as a form of provision and an area of
research rather than as categories of learning difficulties. Sections cover
theory and how needs are understood, the challenge of inclusion, the pro-
duction of knowledge, teaching strategies and approaches, and future
directions for research.
LC3986 2004-116992 1-4129-0302-5
Managing special educational needs; a practical guide for
primary and secondary schools.
Gibson, Suanne and Sonia Blandford.
Paul Chapman Publ. Ltd., ©2005 158 p. $65.95
Gibson (education, U. of Plymouth) and Blandford (education, Christ
Church U. College) focus on delivering programs for students with special
educational needs (SENs) in mainstream settings so all students are
served with equitable and effective education that responds to their needs
as learners. By taking this direction they reject the idea that “inclusion”
means merely to limit or restrict learning or practice. They cover working
with the history of SENs and the emergence of the social model, listening
to the voices of all stakeholders in devolution and inclusion, believing the
school and home are a community, taking new approaches in learning
and teaching from the community to the classroom, constructing man-
agement systems and structures, making use of external agencies in the
school community, developing effective and inclusive schools through
policies for practice, and implementing professional development to
create inclusive and effective schools. Distributed by Sage Publications.
LC3993 2006-023744 978-1-59158-376-9
Mind builders; multidisciplinary challenges for
cooperative team-building and competition.
Fleisher, Paul and Donald M. Ziegler.
Teachers Ideas Press, ©2006 87 p. $30.00 (pa)
Fleisher and Ziegler, retired educators with experience teaching gifted ele-
mentary students, provide 12 simple engineering problems to be solved
by student teams in grades 4-8, along with exercises to introduce students
to the team concept and different team roles. Ten warm-up team projects
can be completed with little advance preparation, unlike the 12 engi-
neering challenges, which must be completed by teams over an extended
period of time. Each challenge includes detailed instructions, a b&w
photo, hints for teachers and coaches, scoring rubrics, a list of references
to help students get started, and a checklist for administrating a compe-
tition. The challenges are indeed challenging, requiring students to create
original, working musical instruments, or a catapult, for example. There
is no subject index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LC4031 0-9787610-0-6
Shadow children; understanding education’s #1 problem.
Jones-Dallmann, Anthony.
RLD Publications, ©2006 188 p. $24.95 (pa)
In this accessible text for educators and concerned citizens, Jones-
Dallman describes the constellation of difficulties facing “at-risk”
children in grades K-12. He then outlines some educational interventions
aimed at giving these children a fighting chance to succeed in life. He
also makes the case for developing separate standards for evaluating edu-
cational programs for at-risk children. Dallmann-Jones (Marian College)
is Director of the National At-Risk Education Network (NAREN).
LC4165 2005-029813 1-4129-0906-6
Fostering child & adolescent mental health in the
classroom.
Title main entry. Ed. by Raymond J. Waller.
Sage Publications, ©2006 339 p. $69.95
This resource for pre-service and practicing educators and other school
personnel describes some of the most common mental health issues expe-
rienced by children and adolescents. Case vignettes are provided to illus-
trate how students with specific problems may present in class and to
identify appropriate support strategies. Some of the issues discussed
include mood disorders, AD/HD, bulimia, bullying, child abuse/neglect,
and suicide. The role of the educator in early identification and referral
is also addressed.
LC4181 2006-001773 1-4129-3907-0
A practical approach to special education for every
teacher; 13v.
Algozzine, Bob and Jim Ysseldyke.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2006 1248 p. $195.00
The 13 slim volumes included in this collection are meant to help
teachers educating students with disabilities or those who are talented
and gifted. In each volume, Algozzine (educational leadership, U. of
North Carolina at Charlotte) and Ysseldyke (educational psychology, U. of
Minnesota) emphasize a specific area of special education. Each can be
used individually or with some of the others. Six of the books provide
background and content knowledge; these focus on the fundamentals of
special education, legal foundations, effective assessment, instruction,
working with families and community agencies, and public policy and
school reform. The other seven concentrate on teaching specific groups
of students—those with sensory, medical, physical, multiple, and learning
disabilities; communication disorders; emotional disturbance; mental
retardation; and gifts and talents. The books came about in response to
a desire for practical texts providing information about students and
teaching methods, as well as the demand for separate books on specific
subjects. Each volume includes an index to the entire set.
LC4601 2005-432666 978-0-8264-7836-8
Profound and multiple learning difficulties.
Cartwright, Corinna and Sarah Wind-Cowie. (The SEN series)
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2005 115 p. $15.95 (pa)
Practitioners Wind-Cowie and Cartwright call upon their experience in
this practical guide for professionals in either special or mainstream
classrooms. They start with information on the daily management of
pupils with profound and multiple learning disorders (PMLD), including
positioning and mobility, the incidence of seizures, continence and diet,
and then give ideas on the social and physical learning environment.
Coverage includes techniques for more effective teaching and learning,
including routine, planning and assessment; curriculum enhancements
in reading, writing, social interaction and mathematics; methods for
addressing violent and self-injuring behaviors, stereotyped behaviors and
those associated with feeding, and autistic spectrum disorder as it relates
to PMLD; and ideas about support for families, including respite care,
emotional and leisure support, transition to life outside school, and
useful contacts.
LC4704 2006-029984 978-1-59385-370-9
Learning disabilities; from identification to intervention.
Fletcher, Jack M. et al.
Guilford Pr., ©2007 324 p. $38.00
Written for educators, psychologists, and related professionals, this
volume provides an overview of the current state of scientific knowledge
regarding learning disabilities. For each chapter, the authors—leading
experts in neuropsychology, cognitive neuroscience, and special edu-
cation—employ a unified framework to apply the assembled research
findings in a particular area to educational practice and policy. They con-
clude with some suggestions for further research. Fletcher teaches psy-
chology at the U. of Houston.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
LC4705 1-59237-122-1
The complete learning disabilities directory; 2007, 13th ed.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2006 764 p. $145.00 (pa)
This directory lists print, electronic, product, and organizational
resources available for dealing with the many different types of learning
disabilities, including those that occur with spoken and written language,
arithmetic, reasoning, and organizational skills. This year’s edition
includes 18 pages of educational material from the National Center for
Learning Disabilities (NCLD) and the No Child Left Behind Act, offering
definitions, checklists of characteristics, and advice on advocacy. There
are a total of 6,795 listings in this edition (520 more than the previous
edition). Listings are divided into 21 major chapters and 100 sub-
chapters, on resources such as summer programs, classroom resources,
testing centers, national associations, and federal agencies. According to
the publisher, the directory has received recognition from the NCLD as
an outstanding reference for the field.
LC4705 2005-031508 1-59385-282-7
Strategy instruction for students with learning disabilities.
Reid, Robert and Torri Ortiz Lienemann. (What works for special needs
learners)
Guilford Pr., ©2006 237 p. $25.00 (pa)
Reid (special education and communication disorders, U. of Nebraska-
Lincoln) and Lienemann, a former classroom resource teacher and doc-
toral candidate at the U. of Nebraska-Lincoln, provide a guide to strategy
instruction for students with learning disabilities. They describe tools for
organization and implementation, give guidelines for strategy modeling
and scaffolding, and provide sample lesson plans and materials. Using
the Self-Regulated Strategy Development model, they concentrate on the
academic and motivational aspects of learning problems, detailing the
model and types of self-regulation strategies. This is followed by specific
strategies in written language, reading comprehension, math, and study
skills and mnemonics. Some reproducible worksheets and forms are
included.
LC4717 2006-011506 978-1-84310-382-0
The autism spectrum and further education; a guide to
good practice.
Breakey, Christine.
Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2006 208 p. $24.95 (pa)
A social worker who has worked with autistic people for over 20 years,
Breakey recently developed the Autism Specialist Support Service at The
Sheffield College in England. Here she provides others following her path
with the guidance she found lacking during her effort. She also chal-
lenges current attitudes towards autistic people, arguing that solutions to
their impairments must be sought within society rather than in the
afflicted people.
LC4718 978-1-4129-0228-1
Educating pupils with autistic spectrum disorders.
Hanbury, Martin.
Paul Chapman Publ. Ltd., ©2006 128 p. $27.95 (pa)
Written for educators in both mainstream and special provision schools,
this text offers practical guidance on appropriate teaching and learning
strategies for pupils with autistic spectrum disorders (ASDs). Hanbury
begins with an overview of ASDs and discusses their impact on learning.
Other topics include (for example) addressing behavioral issues, working
with other professionals, and assessing the learning needs of children
with ASDs. Hanbury is head teacher of a school for children with autism
in the UK.
LC5131 2006-022715 0-8204-8603-5
Teaching city kids; understanding and appreciating them.
Kincheloe, Joe L. and Kecia Hayes. (Counterpoints; studies in the post-
modern theory of education; v.306)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 311 p. $45.95 (pa)
Twenty contributions from academics, researchers, and classroom
teachers explore some of the complexities surrounding urban students—
especially those marginalized by race, class, gender, religion, and lan-
guage. A sampling of topics includes an historical overview of Latinas in
single-sex schools; a case study of African American and Latino males in
an urban college prep program; and pedagogical practices within the
prison industrial complex. Kincheloe is a researcher at McGill U. in
Canada, and Hayes holds a PhD in urban education.
–240–
LC5225 2006-019145 978-0-7879-7588-3
Learning in adulthood; a comprehensive guide, 3d ed.
Merriam, Sharan B. et al. (Jossey-bass higher and adult education
series)
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 533 p. $52.00
This resource for adult education students and practitioners covers the
latest research and practice in the field, along with important founda-
tional material. Early chapters consider the sociocultural context of adult
learning in North America, while the second section explores various
adult learning theories and models. Next, some newer approaches such
as narrative learning are described. The final section brings together
material from disciplines such as psychology and philosophy that has a
bearing on adult learning. Editor Merriam teaches adult education at the
U. of Georgia. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
LD3911 2006-022464 0-8204-7625-0
The rainbow never fades; Niagara University 1856-2006.
Stranges, John B.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 256 p. $42.95 (pa)
Stranges traces the history of Niagara University, a Catholic liberal arts
institution located in upstate New York. His narrative encompasses key
events ranging from the school’s founding as a seminary in 1856 to revi-
sions made to its core curriculum in the last few years. B&w archival
photographs illustrate the volume. Stranges own academic career has
included stints as an undergraduate, professor, and academic vice pres-
ident at Niagara U.
LD7501 2005-025205 0-292-70934-X
Whose school is it?; women, children, memory, and
practice in the city.
Halperin, Rhoda H. (Louann Atkins Temple women & culture series;
v.12)
U. of Texas Press, ©2006 217 p. $21.95 (pa)
Halperin (anthropology, U. of Cincinnati) presents the story of the cre-
ation and first years of a charter school in the East End neighborhood
of Cincinnati. A strong advocate for the students and family of the neigh-
borhood, Halperin describes the cultural mores and lives of the families
that live there, the process of negotiating with the city to form the school,
the process of hiring the school’s staff, and the subsequent conflicts and
successes during the school’s first years of operation.
LE3 0-88755-692-2
St. John’s College; the origin of higher education in
Western Canada.
Bumsted, J.M.
Univ. of Manitoba Pr., ©2006 210 p. $24.95 (pa)
Originally founded as a school for the children of employees of the
Hudson’s Bay Company, St. John’s College in Winnipeg is the oldest
Anglophone educational institution in Western Canada. In this text,
popular history author Bumsted recounts important events in the
college’s history and profiles its key leaders. B&w archival photographs
illustrate the volume. Distributed in the U.S. by Michigan State U. Press.
LF953 978-1-84682-009-0
St Patrick’s College, drumcondra 1875-2000; a history.
Title main entry. Ed. by James Kelly.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 280 p. $50.00
Coláiste Phágraig is responsible for the education of a good number of
Irish teachers, growing from 63 male students living seminary-fashion in
1883 to serving over 2,000 male and female students by the end of the
twentieth century. Here eight of the many closely associated with Coláiste
Phágraig tell its story from its initial building’s beginnings as Belvedere
House from 1540 to 1883, the growth of its city of Drumcondra from
1875 to 1940, its predecessors in training national school teachers and the
early years of the college from 1875 to 1921, its role in educating edu-
cators between the world wars, its era of expansion post-1945 and the
great changes that came as it admitted women and day students and
joined forces with Dublin City U. A delightful essay largely in Irish details
fifty years of student and faculty life. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
–241–
MUSIC
ML50 978-90-420-2113-6
John Gay’s The Beggar’s Opera 1728-2004; adaptations and
re-writings.
Title main entry. Ed. by Uwe Böker et al. (Internationale forschungen
zur allgemeinen und vergleichenden literaturewissenschaft; 105)
Editions Rodopi, ©2005 347 p. $91.00
Gay’s Beggar’s Opera has served as a springboard for dramatists since its
first production in the 18th century. In this volume international scholars
analyze versions of the play by such playwrights as Havel, Soyinka, Fo,
Ayckbourn, Fassbinder and others. The introduction by Böker (English
literature, Technische Universität Dresden), Detmers and Giovanopoulos
(Dresden) discusses other dramatists who have paid homage to Gay. The
text includes a calendar of important adaptations and re-writings from
1920 to 2004.
ML74 2006-927907 978-0-470-04894-8
iPod & iTunes for dummies, 4th ed.
Bove, Tony and Cheryl Rhodes. (For dummies.)
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 418 p. $21.99 (pa)
Featuring information for both Macintosh and Windows computer users,
this easy-to-follow guide explains how to get the most out of iPod players
and the iTunes music service. Introductory chapters cover setup of
hardware and software and describe how to import, play, and share
content. Advanced techniques discussed include changing encoders,
using the iPod as a hard drive, and adjusting the equalizer. A removable
“cheat sheet” lists iTunes keyboard shortcuts.
ML74 978-0-596-52978-9
iPod; the missing manual, 5th ed.
Biersdorfer, J.D.
O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2007 239 p. $19.99 (pa)
In this guide, Biersdorfer, technology Q&A columnist for the New York
Times and author of other books in the Missing Manual series, describes
the features of the iPod, including the different models, and how to
download music and use its menus and controls. She devotes chapters to
iTunes, playlists, working with videos and photos, and other features,
such as the calendar, address book, and using the iPod as a portable
hard drive. Utilizing it with a car or stereo system is explained, in
addition to troubleshooting and advanced features. Color illustrations are
included on each page. New to this edition is coverage of iTunes, video,
and the iPod Shuffle.
ML102 2006-015323 978-0-19-530907-2
The Grove book of operas, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stanley Sadie. Revised by Laura Macy.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 740 p. $39.95
Compiled from The New Grove Dictionary of Opera, this book contains
synopses of 264 popular and commonly performed operas, arranged
alphabetically and meant to be accessible to opera beginners and experts.
Each entry describes the opera’s genre, premiere, librettist, cast, compo-
sition, and musical features. This edition, revised by Macy (editor-in-chief
of Grove Music), adds several new operas. It includes an essay by David
Levin (Germanic studies, U. of Chicago) on contemporary trends in opera
production. Also provided are some color plates, and indexes by com-
poser, character name, and aria title. The late Sadie edited the Grove
Music reference series, including the New Grove Dictionary of Music and
Musicians.
ML102 2006-019324 978-0-8108-5530-4
Historical dictionary of sacred music.
Swain, Joseph P. (Historical Dictionaries of Literature and the Arts;
no.13)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 299 p. $75.00
Accessible to students, general readers, and musicians and composers,
this dictionary includes terms associated with the sacred music of
Christianity and Judaism, with some related to Buddhism, Hinduism,
Islam, and other religions. Entries are on traditions, documents, religious
figures such as Martin Luther, writers, publishers, places, genres like the
mass, terms such as alleluia, and compositions such as The Creation.
Famous composers with little sacred output are only briefly discussed,
and performers and scholars are omitted. Some knowledge of musical
vocabulary and religious practices is assumed. Appendices contain texts
and translations of the Roman Catholic rites, the Shema, and the Kaddish.
Swain, a music critic, is a former music history and theory teacher at
Phillips Academy and Colgate U.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
ML105 2006-000542 978-0-8108-5739-1
Musical AKAs; assumed names and sobriquets of
composers, songwriters, librettists, lyricists, hymnists, and
writers on music.
Drone, Jeanette Marie.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 645 p. $100.00
This catalog lists about 15,500 assumed names of 9,800 composers, lyri-
cists, librettists, and writers on music. Drawing from many music and
other reference texts, websites, and online copyright sources, Drone lists
these sources, followed by the bulk of the book: an alphabetical listing
of original names of individuals and their aliases, source consulted,
dates, occupation, and notes. This is followed by a list organized by
pseudonym. Legal name changes, pen names, nicknames, and initials are
included, but individuals who were only performers are not. Drone is a
freelance educator and author of music reference books.
ML128 2006-009651 0-415-98004-6
Directory of choral-orchestral music.
Rosewall, Michael.
Routledge, ©2007 616 p. $125.00
Rosewall (music, St. Norbert College) provides this index of music written
for chorus and orchestra as a reference for scholars and performers. He
aims to also include music that is underrepresented, less well known, or
written by non-western and female composers. Works are given alpha-
betically by composer, and appendices list them by category—double and
multiple chorus, female and male voices, children, and string accompa-
niment—as well as by composers listed chronologically by birth date,
female composers, and publisher and composer contact information.
Records contain title, opus number, date, length, instrumentation, lan-
guage and publisher. A title index is also provided.
ML134 2005-013599 0-415-94301-9
William Byrd, a guide to research, 2d ed.
Turbet, Richard. (Routledge music bibliographies)
Routledge, ©2006 329 p. $90.95
This edition of the previously published guide to research on composer
William Byrd contains writings published from 1987 to 2004 and a
discography of recordings from 1995 to 2003 organized by genre, picking
up where the previous edition left off. Some material from the previous
edition remains, but the books are considered to be complementary. This
volume includes a catalog of his works (also in the previous edition) and
an index to titles, an annotated bibliography by topic and genre, checklist
of monographs and articles about Byrd in chronological order from 1826
(part from the previous edition), and a description of the contents of the
Annual Byrd newsletter.
ML160 2006-297606 978-0-7575-2067-9
Music through time; an appreciation of music in Europe
and America.
Gordon, Christopher P. et al.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2006 229 p. $90.00 (pa)
This music appreciation text covers the fundamentals, Western art and
twentieth century American music, including popular styles—blues, jazz,
country, and rock. Chapters are brief and are divided among historical
events and figures during a period, genres, and prominent composers.
Musical examples are not incorporated. Listening exercise forms are
included in the appendix, and there is no bibliography.
ML180 2005-026458 0-7546-5340-4
The instrumental consort repertory of the late fifteenth
century.
Banks, Jon.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 186 p. $89.95
Banks (London Metropolitan U., UK) examines the repertoire of late fif-
teenth-century instrumental consorts. He addresses the problem of iden-
tification when notated music is instrumental rather than vocal, and
describes performance practices and how this music works for instru-
ments associated with polyphonic ensembles of the period. He discusses
lute music and its style, and the lute consort repertoire and its per-
formance characteristics. This is followed by a chapter on textless instru-
mental music and mixed sources.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
ML200 2006-279481 978-0-393-32726-7
America’s musical life; a history.
Crawford, Richard.
W.W. Norton, ©2005 976 p. $23.95 (pa)
Crawford (music, U. of Michigan) presents a history of American music
from Native American music through the twentieth century, with equal
weight given to the nineteenth and twentieth centuries and classical,
popular, and folk music, as well as oral and written traditions. His
starting point is performance rather than composition—although com-
posers are integrated, along with conductors, teachers, entrepreneurs,
and writers. Jazz, blues, rock music, Broadway, and band music are also
included. The book was first published in 2001.
ML290 2006-042741 0-7546-5900-3
Music in renaissance Florence; studies and documents.
D’Accone, Frank A. (Variorum collected studies series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 344 p. $109.95
D’Accone brings together nine of his essays that have previously appeared
in journals, congress reports, and books over a period of forty years:
1961-2001. They focus on the topic of Florentine music and musicians of
the Renaissance and are documentary studies and research on liturgical
usages, political and social conditions, the financial status of musicians
and musical pedagogy, and recruitment and hiring practices. Figures
discussed include Heinrich Isaac, Lorenzo the Magnificent, Alessandro
Coppini, and Bartolomeo degli Organi. One essays is in Italian.
ML338 2005-027806 978-0-7546-5424-7
Gurudev’s drumming legacy; music theory and
nationalism in the Mrdang aur Tabla Vadanpaddhati of
Gurdev Patwardhan.
Kippen, James. (SOAS musicology series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 346 p. $99.95
Kippen (music, U. of Toronto, Canada) provides a translation of the
Mrdang aur Tabla Vadanpaddhati, a manual of drum playing in North
Indian music from 1903, and also considers its ideas (and the later
edition’s) and its differences from traditional Hindustani rhythmic
theory. In addition to the history and context of the text, he also discusses
changes in the 1938 edition made by Gurudev’s nephew, Vinayakrao
Patwardhan, and includes translations of those changes. Further dis-
cussed are the notation system and repertoire in the manual. An index
of compositions is included.
ML342 2006-000622 0-7546-3892-8
Preserving Korean music; intangible cultural properties as
icons of identity; perspectives on Korean music; v.1. (CD-
ROM included)
Howard, Keith. (SOAS musicology series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 228 p. $99.95
Howard (music, School of Oriental and African Studies, U. of London,
UK) presents an analysis of the Korean preservation system, focusing on
music-based traditions called Intangible Cultural Properties. He provides
an overview of the system and an account of recent moves by UNESCO
to encourage other member states to establish similar systems, which he
also examines. He then critiques Korea’s system and studies specific folk
art genres and criteria used to determine authenticity. He discusses oral
folksongs and the county of Chindo, a cultural tourism zone where
shaman rituals are prominent, followed by a chapter on crafts, musical
instruments, and the distillation of liquor. The CD contains musical
examples. The volume serves as a companion to the author’s Creating
Korean Music.
ML342 2006-000622 978-0-7546-5729-3
Creating Korean music; tradition, innovation and the
discourse of identity; prespectives on Korean music; v.2.
(CD-ROM included)
Howard, Keith. (SOAS musicology series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 228 p. $99.95
This volume by Howard (music, School of Oriental and African Studies,
U. of London, UK) focuses on musical creativity and identity in the pro-
duction of South Korean music, specifically what Koreans consider to be
characteristic of their music. He discusses the kugak (traditional music)
and the yangak (Western music), and examines the aesthetics of
SamulNori, a percussion quartet formed in 1978, and the genre it
spawned called samullori. Folksongs and p’ansori vocal music is
described, followed by chapters on the music of traditional composers
and composers who have lived abroad, finishing with a discussion of the
melding of the two styles. The CD contains musical examples. Some of
the material in the book has been previously published in different ver-
sions in journals. The volume serves as a companion to Howard’s
Preserving Korean Music.
–242–
ML394 2006-022760 0-415-97929-3
Global minstrels; voices of world music.
Wald, Elijah.
Routledge, ©2007 306 p. $95.00
Wald offers a volume on world music, based on interviews he conducted
with musicians while he was world music critic for the Boston Globe. He
presents these interviews in the format he preferred, since space was an
issue with the newspaper, so they have all been expanded, and some
have been rewritten. Chapters are mostly organized by geographical area,
and interviews are with musicians from Africa, the Caribbean, Latin
America, Asia, and the US, with a separate chapter on flamenco.
Musicians include Ravi Shankar, the Gipsy Kings, Ladysmith Black
Mambazo, El Gran Combo, Gilberto Gil, Kayhan Kalhor, and the Iron
River Singers. A list of recommended listening is included, but there is
no bibliography.
ML410 2006-031934 1-57647-108-X
Alessandro and Domenico Scarlatti; two lives in one.
Pagano, Roberto. Trans. by Frederick Hammond. (Lives in music series;
no.6)
Pendragon Press, ©2006 381 p. $56.00
Pagano provides a study of the relationship between composer
Alessandro Scarlatti and his son Domenico (also a composer), in the
context of seventeenth-century Sicilian culture. He addresses many of the
research questions that have persisted in scholarship since Ralph
Kirkpatrick’s monograph, such as Domenico’s role at the Portuguese
court, reasons he assembled his complete works, and misunderstood doc-
uments—one example being an analysis of the document of Domenico’s
legal emancipation from his father. The book was translated from the
Italian by Frederick Hammond, who is a performer and scholar. It has
been revised and expanded from the 1985 edition. Pagano served as
artistic director of the Sicilian National Orchestra and the Teatro
Massimo in Palermo.
ML410 2005-037516 978-0-8108-5721-6
Brahms and his world; a biographical dictionary.
Clive, Peter.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 605 p. $100.00
This biographical dictionary covers approximately 430 people associated
with composer Johannes Brahms, including relatives and friends, physi-
cians, conductors, artists, poets, rulers, and fellow composers and musi-
cians, such as the Schumanns, Schubert, Rubinstein, Nietzsche, Ibsen,
Liszt, Bizet, and the publishers Breitkopf and Härtel. Presented alpha-
betically, the entries contain dates and places of birth and death, biog-
raphical information, and a discussion of how each person was linked
to the composer. A chronology of Brahms’ life and indexes of names and
works are provided. Clive taught French literature at universities for 22
years and is the author of Schubert and His World and Beethoven and His
World.
ML410 1-57467-148-0
Chopin; a listener’s guide to the master of the piano.
(audio CD included)
Lederer, Victor. (Unlocking the masters)
Amadeus Press, LLC, ©2006 146 p. $22.95 (pa)
The music of the composer Frédéric Chopin is the subject of this volume
aimed at general readers. Lederer, a music critic and writer, discusses
Chopin’s life in the first chapter and his musical style in subsequent
chapters arranged by genre, including etudes and preludes, music for
piano and orchestra, waltzes, sonatas, and polonaises. He details the
character of various pieces, when they were composed, and delves into
themes and forms. A CD of 15 of Chopin’s compositions is provided, and
tracks are referred to in the text for simultaneous listening.
ML410 0-521-86200-0
Edward Elgar, modernist.
Harper-Scott, J.P.E. (Music in the 20th century)
Cambridge U. Pr., ©2006 255 p. $90.00
This examination of the music of Edward Elgar is based on the per-
spective that he was a modernist composer. Harper-Scott (music, U. of
London) focuses on his music and not his life, using twentieth- century
philosophy and music-analytical theory to make connections between dif-
ferent works and their meaning. Theories he uses are Schenkerian
analysis (while reworking its concepts), and those of Martin Heidegger
and James Hepokoski. In particular, he analyzes the First Symphony and
Falstaff, their form and tonality.
–243–
ML410 2006-000875 978-0-934223-86-7
Francis Johnson (1792-1844); chronicle of a black
musician in early nineteenth-century Philadelphia.
Jones, Charles K.
Lehigh University Press, ©2006 330 p. $57.50
A biography of black musician Francis Johnson (1792-1844), this volume
describes his life and career as both a composer and performer in
Philadelphia. His music was more influenced by the dominant culture,
as he was not a slave, Jones argues. Jones surveys Johnson’s compositions
and performances, the musical culture of the period, and tours with his
band to other cities in the US and Europe. Excerpts from letters and other
documents are included, as well as facsimiles and some new illustra-
tions. In addition to the general index, an index of music is supplied. The
book is aimed at both general readers and music specialists. The late
Jones was a composer, chronologist, and co-author of A Choice Collection
of the Works of Francis Johnson. Distributed by Associated University
Presses.
ML410 2006-009389 978-0-8108-5720-9
Gustav Mahler and the New York Philharmonic Orchestra
tour America.
Wagner, Mary H.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 239 p. $50.00 (pa)
Mahler (1860-1911) is best known as a composer, but Wagner (music, U.
of Michigan-Flint) describes how he helped reshape and transform the
New York Philharmonic into a leading orchestra. The orchestra was reor-
ganized in 1909, and wanted a new leader; Mahler accepted the challenge
and spent his final two years meeting it. She documents his American
tours with the orchestra, preparations for them, the outcome of each
concert, and the perception of audiences beyond New York City.
ML410 2006-012390 978-0-15-100648-9
Johann Sebastian Bach; his life and work.
Geck, Martin. Trans. by John Hargraves.
Harcourt, ©2006 40 p. $40.00
Geck (musicology, Dortmund U., Germany) provides a study of Johann
Sebastian Bach’s life and music. He traces the career path the composer
followed, from his early education to role as Kapellmeister of the St.
Thomas Church in Leipzig and director of the collegium musicum. He
then reserves half of the volume for an examination of Bach’s music by
genre, analyzing individual pieces and groups of vocal and instrumental
works, and ends with brief discussions of specific topics such as Bach as
a Christian, rhetoric and symbolism, proportion and numerical relations
in his music, and theological research. The book has been translated
from the German version by Hargraves (German language and literature,
Yale U. and Connecticut College).
ML410 2006-000325 978-0-252-03098-7
“Maximum clarity” and other writings on music.
Johnston, Ben. (Music in American life)
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 275 p. $40.00
This collection consists of the writings of American composer Ben
Johnston (b. 1926)—41 in total, including some previously unpublished
texts from the Music Library at Northwestern U. Compiled by Bob
Gilmore (musicology, Dartington College of Arts, UK), the writings cover
a period of about 40 years and include papers, treatises, program notes,
lectures, interview excerpts, and letters, and address such topics as
theory, microtonality, aesthetics and culture, the music of composers
such as John Cage, Harry Partch, and Lamonte Young, and his own com-
positions. The book also contains a discography of available recordings.
ML410 2006-050261 0-89990-136-0
On Brahms and his circle; essays and documentary
studies.
Geiringer, Karl. (Detroit monographs in musicology/Studies in music;
no.49)
Harmonie Park Press, ©2006 418 p. $70.00
George Bozarth (musicology, U. of Washington) brings together 19 shorter
essays, articles, and program notes written by musicologist Karl
Geiringer between 1933 and his death, meant to serve as a companion
volume to Geiringer’s biography of the composer. Essays discuss Brahms
as a music historian, symphonist, and collector; as a reader of history,
literature, and philosophy; his relationships with Robert Schumann and
Joachim; and his final days. Letters between the composer and others
such as his family, Antonín Dvorak, Richard Wagner, George Grove, and
Eusebius Mandyczewski are included. Editions of performance
arrangements of “Es ist genug” and the Ophelia Lieder round out the
book. Articles originally written in German have been translated, letters
to and from Brahms are presented in both languages, information has
been added, and footnotes expanded. Indexes are divided between names
and compositions.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
ML410 978-0-87910-333-0
Outsider; John Rockwell on the arts, 1967-2006.
Rockwell, John.
Limelight Editions, ©2006 544 p. $34.95
He may consider himself a mere observer of the human as expressed in
dance, classical music, rock, opera, theater, books, art and every combi-
nation thereof, but Rockwell actually joins in, at least though intimate
conversations with the talent and a very refined ear and eye for what
really matters. This is how we get such a succinct account of why a Welsh
male chorus is both Welsh and male, a deeply moving commentary on
the lives and deaths of Herbert von Karajan and Morton Feldman, and
stunning pieces on Lessing’s The Sweetest Dream and the saving graces
of the arts in the world of 9/11.
ML410 2006-046938 0-7734-5648-1
The revision process in Rachmaninoff’s Piano concerto no.
1 in F-sharp minor, opus 1.
Grossman, Morley.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 127 p. $109.95
Grossman (piano, U. of Texas) considers the compositional process of
Sergei Rachmaninoff by examining his Piano Concerto No. 1 in F-sharp
minor in detail. After discussing his life, style, background, and deriv-
ative works, Grossman looks at each movement of the concerto, com-
paring the 1890-91 original student composition, the 1917 revision, and
the final draft of 1919. He particularly analyzes whether the composer
favored economy of construction and a thinner texture in the process.
ML420 2006-025381 0-313-33827-2
Elvis Presley; a biography.
Tracy, Kathleen. (Greenwood biographies)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 140 p. $29.95
Journalist Tracy takes a remarkably even-handed approach in this nar-
rative of what happened to the kid from Tupelo, Mississippi who seemed
to drop in from another planet in 1956. She details the deals with Colonel
Tom Parker, which Presley entered into largely out of fear over what
Parker would do with salacious recordings, the familial relationships, the
concerts, the tours, the awards, the movies, the hits, the flops, the
gluttony and the wretched stumbling to the pharmacy and back.
Although intended for the general readership, Tracy is honest about what
killed Presley and why, showing how his fears of exposure of youthful
indiscretions and basic insecurity as a performer and a person combined
with the liberality of the time.
ML420 2006-008016 978-0-472-11564-8
Haunted heart; a biography of Susannah McCorkle.
Dahl, Linda.
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 324 p. $29.95
Dahl, the author of Stormy Weather: The Music and Lives of a Century of
Jazzwomen, offers a biography of jazz singer Susannah McCorkle, who
suffered from bipolar disorder and committed suicide in 2001. Dahl
traces her life and career, including the discovery of Billie Holiday that
led to McCorkle beginning a career as a singer, her education and
writing, performances and recordings, and struggle with mental illness.

ML410 978-0-521-86542-5 ML420 2005-017656 0-8118-5036-6

Schoenberg’s transformation of musical language.
Haimo, Ethan. (Music in the twentieth century)
Cambridge U. Pr., ©2006 430 p. $90.00
Haimo (music theory and composition, U. of Notre Dame) disputes the
commonly accepted idea that composer Arnold Schoenberg’s music can
be divided into periods and demonstrates that his atonal music did not
completely break from his earlier techniques. Examining Schoenberg’s
music for stages of transformation and the evolution of his ideas, Haimo
considers specific pieces during the period 1899-1909, and when relevant,
aspects of biography and reception history. Pieces are not comprehen-
sively analyzed, nor are all the pieces from that period discussed. He ana-
lyzes those such as Verklärte Nacht; Gurrelieder; Pelleas und Melisande; the
Chamber Symphony, Op. 9; Das Buch der hängenden Gärten; string
quartets; pieces for piano; and songs.
ML420 2006-025382 0-313-33629-6
Billie Holiday; a biography.
Greene, Meg. (Greenwood biographies)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 122 p. $29.95
Referring to Billie Holiday (1915-1959) as the iconic female jazz singer, an
independent scholar/biographer examines her contributions to the genre
as well as the legendary aspects of her short, troubled life. In a series for
high school and public library readers, the book includes photos of
“Lady Day,” an index, and references including a selected discography
and the official and unofficial Billie Holiday Web sites.
ML420 2006-002170 978-0-415-97933-7
The day John met Paul; an hour-by-hour account of how
the Beatles began. (reprint, 1994)
O’Donnell, Jim.
Routledge, ©2006 169 p. $29.95 (pa)
Journalist O’Donnell provides an hour-by-hour account of July 6, 1957—
the day when John Lennon and Paul McCartney first met. Drawing upon
eight years of research, he describes the parallel worlds of two Liverpool
teenagers who would go on to create the legendary rock and roll band.
This reprint of a volume first published by Penguin in 1996 features the
addition of a number of historical photographs, augmented by more
recent images of McCartney and Lennon’s hometown taken by the
author.
Marley legend; an illustrated life of Bob Marley.
Henke, James.
Chronicle Books, ©2006 64 p. $35.00
For fans and collectors, Henke, a music journalist who is now chief
curator of The Rock and Roll Hall of Fame, provides an illustrated biog-
raphy of singer Bob Marley in a boxed package that includes fold- out
photos and inserted reproductions of album covers, ticket stubs, concert
posters, handwritten lyrics, set lists, and other memorabilia. Also
included is a CD featuring music clips and interviews with Marley. The
book was compiled in cooperation with his family and integrates inter-
views with other musicians and people who knew him. There is no
index.
ML420 2006-031707 0-275-98938-0
The words and music of Bruce Springsteen.
Kirkpatrick, Rob. (The Praeger singer-songwriter collection)
Praeger, ©2007 198 p. $44.95
This is a musical biography of rock singer Bruce Springsteen that travels
chronologically through the artist’s many albums examining
Springsteen’s creative processes of songwriting, performing, and
recording. The author discusses cultural and social contexts for
Springsteen’s music, lyrical themes and motifs, musical analysis, and
musical and lyrical influences.
ML421 2006-028299 978-0-8126-9606-6
The Beatles and philosophy; nothing you can think that
can’t be thunk.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Baur and Steven Baur. (Popular
culture and philosophy; 25)
Open Court Publishing, ©2006 301 p. $17.95 (pa)
In this tribute to the Beatles, 20 Beatle-fan philosophers look at the
Beatles’ output backwards and forwards and dissect even the most puz-
zling of the Beatles’ lyrics. The articles analyze such topics as the Beatles
and Nietzsche, the Beatles and the critique of consumer culture, the
Beatles and social philosophy and, perhaps most importantly, the hidden
clues in the lyrics and album covers.
ML421 2006-011454 978-0-8126-9599-1
U2 and philosophy; how to decipher an atomic band.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark A. Wrathall. (Popular culture and phi-
losophy; v.21)
Open Court Publishing, ©2006 228 p. $17.95 (pa)
Fifteen essays by scholars place the rock band U2 within a philosophical
context. Some chapters look at the existential struggles portrayed in U2’s
music, while others consider the philosophical basis of the band’s ethics
and politics. U2’s albums and Grammy Awards are listed at the back of
the volume, along with some Internet resources. Editor Wrathall teaches
philosophy at Brigham Young U.

Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –244–

ML429 2006-011372 978-0-15-101308-1
Winifred Wagner; a life at the heart of Hitler’s Bayreuth.
Hamann, Brigitte.
Harcourt, ©2005 582 p. $35.00
Winifred Marjorie Williams, after having come to Germany as a nine-
year-old English orphan, wound up marrying the son of composer
Richard Wagner and by 1930 had become the widowed head of the
Bayreuth Festival celebrating Wagner’s music, an event long patronized
by Adolf Hitler. Winifred Wagner initially used her friendship with Hitler
to intercede on behalf of people persecuted by Hitler, including the math-
ematician Alfred Israel Pringsheim and his wife (the in-laws of novelist
Thomas Mann). Although her influence with Hitler waned towards the
end of the war, she was never to disavow her relationship with the Nazi
dictator. This biography provides a window into the life of Winifred
Wagner and the cultural and political milieu of Bayreuth.
ML455 2006-022761 978-0-415-97683-1
Orchestration; an anthology of writings.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Mathews.
Routledge, ©2006 230 p. $35.00 (pa)
Mathews (music theory, Peabody Institute) provides a history of orches-
tration through writings by composers from the nineteenth century to the
present. Composers such as Czerny, Berlioz, Wagner, Mahler, Stravinsky,
Strauss, Rimsky-Korsakov, Schoenberg, Webern, Ives, Carter, Reich, and
Boulez discuss Beethoven’s orchestration, French and German tech-
niques, “new music,” klangfarbenmelodie and texture, and late-twentieth
century innovations. Their writing reveal views on their own and other’s
music. Excerpts from twentieth century textbooks are not included, but
writings by lesser-known composers such as Gevaert, Jadassohn, and
Hauer are. Some of the excerpts have never been translated into English
until now.
ML462 2006-009410 1-57467-146-4
A living legacy; historic stringed instruments at the
Juilliard School.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lisa B. Robinson.
Amadeus Press, LLC, ©2006 89 p. $75.00
Issued in commemoration of the hundredth anniversary of The Julliard
School, this is the world’s first glimpse of its fabled stringed instrument
collection, and it is worth the wait. Accompanying color photographs of
the instruments, including bows, is text on the provenance and historical
significance of each. Robinson (special projects, The Julliard School)
explains these are actually working instruments, loaned to students.
Makers include Stradivari, Amati, Bergonzi, Gagliano, Guidagnini, and
this includes color facsimiles of relevant documentation. The forward, by
Itzak Perlman, is delightful and a reminder that this system works; he
was loaned one of the violins as a student.
ML652 2006-019077 978-0-86534-514-0
The piano owner’s home companion; a reference guide.
Snyder, Steven R.
Sunstone Press, ©2006 95 p. $20.95 (pa)
For lay readers and piano owners, Snyder, a piano tuner-technician who
has worked for many well-known musicians, provides instructions on
piano care, based on questions from his own clients. He discusses types,
how to clean the inside and outside, why a piano needs tuning, voicing
and regulation, do-it-yourself repairs, and protection from the elements
and moths. Diagrams and a glossary are included. There is no index or
bibliography. The volume is a revised edition of The Piano Owner’s
Manual, first published in 1981.
ML933 2006-026803 978-1-57647-105-0
Brass scholarship in review; proceedings.
International Conference on Brass Scholarship in Review (1999: Paris,
France) Ed. by Stewart Carter. (Bucina: the Historic Brass Society series;
no.6)
Pendragon Press, ©2006 306 p. $62.00
This publication contains the papers from the proceedings of the Historic
Brass Society Conference, held in 1999 in Paris. Fourteen papers and two
reports on discussion sessions are included and address research, ped-
agogy, performance, and conservation. Contributors are performers,
teachers, scholars, museum curators, an engineer, and a dentist (who dis-
cusses embouchure). Papers describe performers, repertoire, and instru-
ments; trombone ensembles of the Moravian Brethren in America;
Schubert’s ideas about the cornett; Adolphe Sax and the Paris Opéra; edi-
tions and publishers; performance techniques; acoustics; and brass
playing before globalization.
–245–
ML1711 1-57467-147-2
Start-up at the new Met; the Metropolitan Opera
broadcasts, 1966-1976.
Jackson, Paul.
Amadeus Press, LLC, ©2006 640 p. $49.95
Following his previous two volumes, which recounted the Metropolitan
Opera broadcasts from 1931-1966, Jackson (music, Drake U.) describes
about 140 performances from 1966 to 1976, a time when the opera house
moved to Lincoln Center. He begins with a discussion of Barber’s Antony
and Cleopatra in 1966, and follows with descriptions (in chronological
order) of the Met’s productions of Norma, Die Meistersinger, Die
Zauberflöte, Wozzeck, Otello, Il Trovatore, Peter Grimes, Pagliacci, and
many others. Some b&w photos of performances and performers are
included. Supplementing the general index is an index to operas
critiqued.
ML2075 2005-027803 0-7546-3658-5
European film music.
Title main entry. Ed. by Miguel Mera and David Burnand. (Ashgate
popular and folk music series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 206 p. $99.95
Mera and Burnand (music technology and Centre for the Study of
Composition for Screen, Royal College, of Music, UK) bring together 12
essays on European film music, which has not been studied widely in
favor of Hollywood films. Older and newer forms (from the 1920s to the
present) are included, in addition to diverse styles in overviews and case
studies. Music and film scholars from the UK, US, and Germany examine
film music in Germany around World War II, Italian neo-realism, in con-
temporary Spain and Ireland, the Ealing Comedies, representations of
classical music performance and European identity, and French heritage
films. Also discussed are the music of Popol Vuh, films by Werner
Herzog and Theo Angelopoulos, and close readings of Three Colours: Red,
Beau Travail, and This Filthy Earth. The book is intended for scholars of
film studies, popular music studies, musicology, media studies, and cul-
tural theory.
ML3534 2005-026457 0-7546-5188-6
White boys, white noise; masculinities and 1980s indie
guitar rock.
Bannister, Matthew. (Ashgate popular and folk music series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 200 p. $99.95
Bannister (media arts, Waikato Institute of Technology, New Zealand)
considers indie guitar rock of the 1980s and its rejection of traditional
rock and roll masculinity. He uses his own experiences as a musician in
New Zealand and also addresses the indie culture in US and UK and
bands such as the Smiths, The Jesus and Mary Chain, My Bloody
Valentine, The Go-Betweens, REM, The Replacements, Dinosaur Jr.,
Hüsker Dü, Nirvana, The Chills, The Clean, the Verlaines, Chris Knox,
Bailter Space, and The Bats. He discusses research on masculinities and
how masculine hegemony is constructed, and the characteristics of the
indie guitar rock genre. In addition, he addresses how the concept of
homosociality works, the role of women and feminism, media tech-
nologies, and the connection between melancholy and white masculin-
ities. He examines musical texts, but does not delve into deep
musicological analysis.
ML3575 2005-032594 0-7546-0489-6
Music and the poetics of production in the Bolivian
Andes. (audio CD included)
Stobart, Henry. (SOAS musicology series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 336 p. $99.95
Stobart (ethnomusicology, Royal Holloway, U. of London, UK) provides an
ethnography of the people of Kalankira, a Quechua-speaking community
of northern Potosí in the Bolivian Andes. He explores how music and
socio-economic production are connected in the culture. Specifically, he
considers how the production of sound relates to other forms of material
production, and describes guitar construction and performance tech-
niques, song performance, the cycle of their musical year, and rituals
and musical instruments used. Fieldwork was undertaken beginning in
1991, with a focus in the study on 1991-1992. An audio CD supplements
the text.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
ML3790 2006-003517 978-0-8265-1532-2
A shot in the dark; making records in Nashville 1945-
1955. (CD included)
Hawkins, Martin.
Vanderbilt University Pr., ©2006 318 p. $65.00
Hawkins traces the development of Nashville as the dominant city in the
country music industry from the period of 1945 to 1955. He tells the story
of record companies, studios, DJs, and other music promoters, and some
musicians. He interviewed many pioneers based in Nashville and relates
the story through the viewpoint of local companies such as Bullet
Records, Dot Records, Hickory Records, and small labels. A CD con-
taining 20 songs as examples of musical styles is provided. Record label
listings (including all the records issued on independent labels during
the period), and indexes of song titles, names, and places, are included.
B&w photos are incorporated throughout. Hawkins is co-author of Good
Rockin’ Tonight: Sun Records and the Birth of Rock `n’ Roll.
ML3830 2006-025281 0-8204-8125-4
Portable music & its functions.
Williams, Andrew. (Music/meanings; v.6)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 127 p. $29.95 (pa)
Williams (music, U. of Adelaide, Australia) examines the use of portable
music through iPods and CD players and how they are used in different
ways. Defining portable music in terms of both content and medium, he
describes its functions: for a listener’s chosen material, learning, con-
structing an environment, environmental control, boundary demarcation,
interpersonal mediation, company, aural mnemonic, mood and time
management, and stimulation. Research was compiled from interviews
with 26 listeners in 2001. The book is intended for students and scholars
of sociology, cultural studies, and musicology.
ML3845 2006-008595 0-299-21930-5
Sound figures of modernity; German music and
philosophy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jost Hermand and Gerhard Richter.
U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 267 p. $39.95
Hermand (German, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) and Richter (German, U. of
California, Davis) assemble 11 essays that examine the relationship
between German music and philosophy and how each affects the other,
with specific consideration of the philosophers Schelling, Schopenhauer,
Nietzsche, Bloch, Mann, Adorno, and Lukács, and the composers
Beethoven, Wagner, Schoenberg, and Eisler. Contributors are scholars of
German, literature, philosophy, and musicology at universities in the US
and Germany. All but one of the essays were presented in earlier versions
at the international conference “Elective Affinities: German Music and
Philosophy,” the 36th Wisconsin Workshop, which was organized by the
editors at the U. of Wisconsin- Madison in October 2003.
ML3849 2005-024716 0-7546-5193-2
Music writing literature; from Sand via Debussy to
Derrida.
Dayan, Peter.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 141 p. $89.95
Dayan (French, U. of Edinburgh, UK) posits a different way of under-
standing music and literature that acknowledges the problems with
objective readings of texts and addresses the essence of both. He argues
that music does not imitate or represent, and discusses how music and
literature are inseparable by considering texts by George Sand,
Baudelaire, Mallarmé, Proust, Barthes, and Derrida, and the music of
Chopin, Wagner, Berlioz, Debussy, and Schumann. Music can be used to
define literature, and literature to define music, he says.
ML3917 2006-002161 0-7546-5291-2
Popular music censorship in Africa.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Drewett and Martin Cloonan. (Ashgate
popular and folk music series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 228 p. $99.95
In this volume, Drewett (sociology, Rhodes U., South Africa) and Cloonan
(popular music, U. of Glasgow, UK) assemble 14 essays that examine the
censorship of musicians in colonial and post-colonial Africa and their
strategies of resistance. Censorship issues and characteristics are first
considered, with chapters addressing racist hate speech, media control,
and political repression and hip-hop. Other chapters focus on case studies
of censorship and musicians in Malawi, Nigeria, apartheid South Africa,
Rwanda, Tanzania, Kenya, Ghana, Zaïre, and Algeria. Contributors are
scholars of sociology, anthropology, history, music, and other fields, as
well as musicians and writers. They are based in Africa, the US, and the
UK.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
ML3920 2006-007511 0-415-97906-4
Sounding off; theorizing disability in music.
Title main entry. Ed. by Neil Lerner and Joseph N. Straus.
Routledge, ©2006 295 p. $95.00
Lerner (music, Davidson College) and Straus (music, City U. of New York)
assemble 16 essays by music scholars from the US and UK who address
the burgeoning field of disability studies and its connection to music,
regarding disability as a cultural and social phenomenon rather than a
medical one. They focus on mental, cognitive, and developmental dis-
abilities in terms of composers, performers, and representations in
music, with specific topics including HIV/AIDS, one-handed pianism,
stuttering, autism, illness, and vocal pathology. Others explore perform-
ances by Glenn Gould, the film Dancer in the Dark, Cavalli’s Il Giasone,
“Blind Tom” Wiggins, mental illness and Berlioz’s Symphonie fantastique,
and concepts of the normal body in the music of Schoenberg and
Webern.
MT1 2006-279544 1-4051-3658-8
Music education for the new millennium; theory and
practice futures for music teaching and learning.
Title main entry. Ed. by David K. Lines.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2005 150 p. $34.95 (pa)
Lines (music, U. of Auckland, New Zealand) assembles 10 essays that
consider changes in music education that would be in line with changes
in contemporary culture. Essays propose a more pragmatic stance to
music education, new ways of teaching, acknowledgement of cultural
identity, and the use of improvisation. They also discuss musical context,
the expression of emotion, innate musical talent, performativity and aes-
thetics, and technology. Contributors work in the fields of music, edu-
cation, and music education in the UK, Australia, the US, New Zealand,
Canada, and the Netherlands.
MT1 2005-037240 978-1-57886-465-2
Teaching music in the urban classroom; a guide to
leadership, teacher education, and reform; v.2.
Title main entry. Ed. by Carol Frierson-Campbell.
Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2006 232 p. $39.95 (pa)
Teachers and administrators bring their own research and experiences to
this collection of 17 essays on a range of issues that concern the urban
music teacher. Leadership, teacher education, partnership, and reform
are the major themes, with individual essays on alternative certification,
private lessons for at-risk children, and personal perspectives on admin-
istering an urban school district in Norfolk, Virginia. Frierson-Campbell
teaches music at William Paterson U., in Wayne, New Jersey.
MT6 2006-003936 0-7546-3505-8
Synopsis of vocal musick.
A.B. Philo-Mus. Ed. by Rebecca Herissone. (Music theory in Britain,
1500-1700)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 223 p. $99.95
Herissone provides an edition of the seventeenth-century British treatise
Synopsis of Vocal Musick by an anonymous author, along with a dis-
cussion of its context, sources, and relationship to other treatises during
the period it was published. She also examines its structure, readership,
and identity of its author, and its importance in showing new ways of
notating and understanding and organizing meter and pitch. The treatise
has not previously been published in a modern edition.
MT67 2006-015554 978-1-58297-466-8
The craft and business of songwriting, 3d ed.
Braheny, John.
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2006 400 p. $22.99 (pa)
This accessible guide is aimed at songwriters interested in building a suc-
cessful (and lucrative) professional career. The first half of the volume
deals with the craft of songwriting, covering such areas as subject matter,
song construction, and collaboration. The remaining chapters deal with
business aspects like copyright, publishing, and marketing. The third
edition features new information on digital royalties, podcasting, and
cellphone ringtones. Braheny is a music industry consultant and coach
for songwriters and performers.
–246–
MT67 978-1-58297-431-6
Songwriter’s market, 2007.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ian Bessler.
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2007 422 p. $26.99 (pa)
This reference provides contact information for music companies and
organizations that are looking for songs and artists and describes what
types of music they are interested in. More than 700 listings are
organized into general categories such as music publishers, record pro-
ducers, and contests, and then arranged alphabetically. The volume also
features a number of informative articles addressing such topics as sub-
mitting demo recordings, understanding copyright, and getting started in
music licensing.
ART, ARCHITECTURE
N71 2006-024755 978-159017-213-1
Born under Saturn; the character and conduct of artists.
Wittkower, Margot and Rudolf Wittkower. (New York Review Books
classics)
New York Review Books, ©2007 344 p. $18.95 (pa)
First published in 1963, Margot and Rudolf Wittkower’s Born Under
Saturn examined the evolution of the concept of the “alienated artist”
from antiquity to the beginning of the romantic era. Drawing upon biog-
raphies, letters, and other primary documents, the authors investigated
what people in the Western world thought about the artists in their
midst. The focus is primarily on attitudes towards European master
painters, sculptors, and architects. This reprint features a new intro-
duction by Joseph Connors (Director, Harvard Center for Italian
Renaissance Studies, Florence).
N71 2005-9110541 978-1-4129-0044-7
Images; a reader.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sunil Manghani et al.
Sage Publications, ©2006 331 p. $110.00
This collection of readings has been put together by Manghani (critical
and cultural theory, York St. John U., UK), Piper (image studies and
visual culture, U. of Nottingham, UK), and Simons (communications,
Indiana U., US), in part, as a response to W.J.T. Mitchell’s complaint that
“there is, at present, no real `field’ in the humanities . no `iconology’ that
studies the problem of perceptual, conceptual, verbal and graphic images
in a unified way.” In pursuit of such an interdisciplinary field of image
studies, they gather 81 essays and excerpts of longer works in order to
indicate the types of concerns, methods of inquiry, subjects of study, and
disciplinary connections that would constitute the field. Historical and
philosophical precedents are presented in selections from the Bible, Plato,
Aristotle, Descartes, Hobbes, Locke, Kant, Marx, Nietzsche, Freud, and
others. Theories of images are examined in sections dealing with ide-
ology critique, art history, semiotics, phenomenology, and psycho-
analysis. Finally, image culture is explored in sections on images and
words, image as thought, image fabrication, visual culture, vision and
visuality, and image studies. Among the notable authors represented in
these last two sections are Régis Debray, Susan Sontag, Marshall
Mcluhan, Sergei Eisenstein, Paul Klee, Marcel Proust, Ludwig
Wittgenstein, Walter Benjamin, Michel Foucault, Martin Heidegger,
Roland Barthes, Jacques Lacan, Jean Baudrillard, Charles Sanders Peirce,
and Theodor Adorno.
N72 2006-022051 978-0-8047-5477-4
Creative reckonings; the politics of art and culture in
contemporary Egypt.
Winegar, Jessica. (Stanford studies in Middle Eastern and Islamic soci-
eties and cultures)
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 377 p. $24.95 (pa)
Winegar (anthropology, Fordham U.) explores how the artistic and his-
torical past, and internal and external economic, political, and social
factors are influencing the production of art in Egypt at the beginning of
the 21st century. Profiles of artists alternate with thematic chapters.
N72 2005-033924 978-0-8166-3587-0
The matrixial borderspace.
Ettinger, Bracha L. (Theory out of bounds; v.28)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 244 p. $25.00 (pa)
Painter Ettinger (psychoanalysis and aesthetics, U. of Leeds) presents a
matrixial realm as a shareable, psychic dimension that underlies the
individual unconscious and experience. It is a counter to the
phallocentrism of mainstream Lacanian theory and the masculine-
feminine opposition.
–247–
N72 2006-005222 0-7546-5506-7
Pictures and popery; art and religion in England, 1660-
1760.
Haynes, Clare.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 185 p. $99.95
During the 18th century, says Haynes (world art and museology, U. of
East Anglia) the English, who prided themselves on their defense of the
Reformation, highly prized art that was Roman Catholic in matter and
provenance, and the anti-image Church of England was full of images.
She investigates the related paradoxes by looking at the nature of English
Protestantism, and explaining the religious concerns and debates over
how art was viewed and made.
N72 2005-044750 1-4000-4129-5
Visual shock; a history of art controversies in American
culture.
Kammen, Michael.
Alfred A. Knopf, ©2006 450 p. $35.00
Pulitzer Prize winner Kammen explains why art matters in this study of
the nature, diversity and persistence of major disputes generated by art
and artists since the 1830s. In reviewing the controversies over art in US
history, he discusses the kind of art appropriate for a democratic society,
how a distinctively American art can be achieved, and the reasons for
the politicalization of art since the late 1960s. Kammen also considers the
quest for provocative shows in some galleries and museums and the com-
mercialization stemming from dependence on corporate sponsorship at
others.
N4395 2005-055529 978-0-393-73211-5
Exhibition design.
Dernie, David.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 192 p. $65.00
Dernie (Manchester School of Architecture, UK), an architect and
designer, discusses contemporary exhibition design, themes, and proce-
dures. He outlines the subject’s history, describes different techniques
used in display, and demonstrates by including many color photos from
recent international exhibitions ranging from consumer pavilions to
small-scale displays from as far back as 1985. Lighting, and combining
communication, color, and graphics are detailed in the final chapter.
Approaches covered include narrative and performance spaces and sim-
ulated experiences. The techniques detailed are not intended to be guides,
but as an example of possible tools.
N5300 978-0-7148-4703-0
The story of art; pocket edition. (reprint, 1995)
Gombrich, E.H.
Phaidon Press Ltd., ©2006 1046 p. $19.95 (pa)
Phaidon has succeeded admirably in producing an appealing reprint of
this classic introduction to the world of art. Published in a small format
with a sturdy but flexible cover and containing full-page color plates of
good quality, the text is published on onion skin with ribbons for page
markers. Gombrich (d.2001) achieved a classic in this text through his
attention to context and larger issues, deft description of the aesthetics of
artistic styles, breadth of focus that included the arts of Asia as well as
the West, and a gift for conveying in a timeless manner the meaning of
art. The 1995 edition reprinted here was the 16th edition of a text origi-
nally published in 1950.
N5310 2006-040888 978-1-4000-4348-4
The cave painters; probing the mysteries of the first
artists.
Curtis, Gregory.
Alfred A. Knopf, ©2006 278 p. $25.00
In this comprehensive study of the cave paintings of France and Spain,
Curtis touches on every aspect of the paintings, from their beauty and
theories about their origins to the men and women who rediscovered
them. He considers the meaning of the paintings by reviewing the major
theories—that the art was part of fertility or hunting rituals, was used for
religious purposes or was clan mythology—and explaining the ways in
which ethnography, archeology and religion have influenced the thinking
about the paintings over time.
ART BOOK NEWS ANNUAL features selections from SciTech Book News
and Reference & Research Book News. Contact us for information:
jane@booknews.com or (503) 281-9230.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
N5970 2005-033250 978-1-4051-0286-5
A companion to medieval art; Romanesque and Gothic in
Northern Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Conrad Rudolph. (Blackwell companions to art
history)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 676 p. $174.95
This impressive volume gathers 30 essays by prominent medieval art his-
torians that survey the state and historiography of the field, describing
its theoretical basis and controversies in the process. Among the topics
are vision, Gregory the Great and image theory, the concept of spolia, art
and exegesis, the monstrous in medieval art, and art and pilgrimage. Five
essays are devoted to architecture, with Eric Fernie (emeritus, the
Courtauld Institute of Art, U. of London, UK) writing about Romanesque,
Columbia University’s Stephen Murray writing about Gothic, and Peter
Fergusson (Wellesley College) on Cistercian. Two essays consider
medievalism in architecture (by Tina Waldeier Bizzarro, Rosemont
College, Penn.) and current museum practices in presenting medieval art
(by Michelle Brown, of the British Library). All the essays are illustrated
with b&w plates, annotated, and concluded with a list of bibliography.
Both scholars and students of art history will find this a handy and
thought- provoking resource.
N6260 978-90-04-15492-6
Muqarnas; an annual on the visual culture of the Islamic
world; v.23.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gülru Necipoglu.
BRILL, ©2006 344 p. $129.00
Sponsored by the Aga Khan Program for Islamic Architecture at Harvard
and MIT, this well-respected annual presents current research in the
history of Islamic art and architecture. The 13 essays contained in the
23rd volume present topics that include the Islamic history of the
Lighthouse of Alexandria, the mausoleum of Imam al-Shafi’i in Cairo,
Gujarat architecture, the Imambara complex of Lucknow of the Twelver
Shi’i, calligraphy exercises in Iran, and a survey on post-revolutionary art
in Iran. Manuscript painting is discussed in four articles. Each article is
illustrated with color plates. The volume is not indexed.
N6512 2006-010859 1-58685-766-5
Creating the artful home; the aesthetic movement in
America.
Zukowski, Karen.
Gibbs Smith, ©2006 176 p. $39.95
Zukowski, a historian of late 19th-century American visual arts, covers
the history of the Aesthetic movement, which popularized the notion that
everyone should be able to enjoy beautiful, well-made homes and fur-
nishings. In her discussion of the way American homes of the past have
shaped homes today, Zukowski analyzes gender roles and the devel-
opment of architecture as a moral imperative. The many illustrations
include rare color views of the interiors and exteriors of homes built in
the 1880s.
N6535 2006-011560 1-4236-0114-9
Artists of the canyons and caminos; Santa Fe, early
twentieth century.
Robertson, Edna and Sarah Nestor.
Gibbs Smith, ©2006 188 p. $19.95 (pa)
Robertson was Curator of Collections at the Fine Arts Museum in Santa
Fe, New Mexico, when she wrote this book with the assistance of her
writer-editor daughter, Nestor. Originally published in 1976 by P. Smith,
the text highlights the now legendary group of painters living and
working in early-20th century Santa Fe. The text is based on information
gathered by Robertson from the artists themselves, their families and
friends, and the Santa Fe Fine Arts Museum’s artists’ files, old exhibit
catalogues, and photo archives. Illustrated throughout with b&w and
color photographs and reproductions.
N6537 2006-013202 0-8109-3030-7
The color of love; an artist’s book of poetry and passion;
moving through the world; selections and paintings.
Bancou, Marielle.
Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 — p. $85.00
Published in an oversize, slightly vertical format (9x13″), this volume
presents full-page color plates of excellent quality of the silkscreened
images of textile and book artist Bancou’s favorite love poems, which she
wrote in gold on backgrounds in all shades of red and violet. In a sturdy
red slip-case. Not indexed.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
N6537 2006-026597 1-58839-201-5
Louis Comfort Tiffany and Laurelton Hall; an artist’s
country estate.
Frelinghuysen, Alice Cooney.
Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2006 262 p. $65.00
This publication accompanies the 2006-07 exhibition of art from Louis
Comfort Tiffany’s country estate, Laurelton Hall, at the New York
Metropolitan Museum of Art. The exhibition’s developer Frelinghuysen,
along with other contributors, trace the genesis of Laurelton Hall,
explaining the eastern influence on Tiffany’s early interiors; and attrac-
tively displaying the elaborate lamps, vases, murals, leaded-glass
windows, paintings, ceramics, and enamelwork that made up his per-
sonal museum. The book also features Tiffany’s extensive collections of
Asian and Native American art, provides insight into life at Laurelton
Hall, and describes the work of the Louis Comfort Tiffany Foundation.
Distribution is by Yale U. Press. Oversize: 9.25x12″.
N6537 2006-018718 978-0-300-12120-9
Maya Lin; systematic landscapes.
Lin, Maya Ying.
Yale University Press, ©2006 112 p. $40.00
Those interested to see the full range of Lin’s ouevre—so evocative of
maps and topography (she designed the Vietnam Memorial in
Washington, DC)—will welcome this catalogue, which contains full-page
photos of her site-specific as well as gallery-sized works and two lengthy
essays (by Richard Andrews, director of the Henry Art Gallery, Seattle,
and John Beardsley, Harvard U. Graduate School of Design). The volume,
which is oversized (10.75x10.75″), was published in association with the
Henry Art Gallery, where the exhibition originated in 2006 (it travels to
locations in St Louis, San Diego, and Denver in 2007-2008).
N6537 2006-045894 978-0-7407-6080-8
Wyland; 25 years at sea.
Wyland. Ed. by John Yow.
Andrews McMeel, ©2006 178 p. $39.95
Yow, a freelance writer, brings together a volume on the life and work of
marine-life artist Wyland (who provides a foreword), consisting of many
stunning one and two-page color spreads of his paintings, along with
descriptions of his recent environmental projects, specifically the Wyland
Ocean Challenge. His international mural series Whaling Wall, and new
directions in his work as a sculptor, muralist, and photographer are
detailed. The book measures 10.5x12.5″.
N6538 2006-021369 978-0-7425-4641-7
Jewish art in America; an introduction.
Baigell, Matthew.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 251 p. $29.95 (pa)
Surveying subjects and themes explored by Jewish artists and America,
Baigell (emeritus art history, Rutgers U.) suggests a few ways to think
about how artists dealt with Jewish themes over the past 250 years (but
mostly since the 1920s), how they responded to events of their time, and
how their subject matter has changed and developed over the decades.
N6538 2005-028434 1-930618-56-5
Painting the underworld sky; cultural expression and
subversion in art.
Romero, Mateo. (School of American Research Native America series)
School of American Research Pr, ©2006 94 p. $29.95 (pa)
This work reproduces 50 paintings by Pueblo artist Mateo Romero. In
addition to the color plates representing a range of different styles and
topics, the paintings are accompanied by Romero’s own explanations of
his efforts, most of which express the current and historical concerns of
his people, as well as of his own biography and family.
N6573 978-90-04-15392-9
Woman and art in early modern Latin America.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kellen Kee McIntyre and Richard E. Phillips.
(The Atlantic world: Europe, Africa and the Americas, 1500-1830, v.10)
BRILL, ©1007 449 p. $129.00
McIntyre (art history, U. of the Incarnate Word, San Antonio) and Phillips
(art history, U. of Texas-Pan American, Edinburg) offer a collection of 17
essays on the visual representation of women in early modern Latin
America. Noticing the omission of art and architecture of this period in
feminist art historical publications, they sought to compile a volume that
combines feminist approaches with interdisciplinary methodologies as a
means to expand understanding of the topic. Essays are grouped
according to forms of representation in places such as Mexico, Peru, and
Spain. Some b&w illustrations are included.
–248–
N6757 2006-050058 978-1-4128-0607-7
Art in crisis; the lost center. (reprint, 1957; new intro.)
Sedlmayr, Hans. Trans. by Brian Battershaw.
Transaction Publishers, ©2007 266 p. $29.95 (pa)
First published in Germany in 1948 as Verlust der Mitte, Sedlmayr’s
(1896-1984) text argued that the aesthetic disjunctures of modern art rep-
resented more than matters of style, that in fact they were indicative of
deeper processes of cultural and religious disintegration. This reprint of
the 1957 English translation (Hollis and Carter Limited, London) includes
a new introduction by Kimball (The New Criterion) which provides back-
ground on Sedlmayr’s work in Austria as an art and architectural his-
torian, the significance of the text and analysis of Sedlmayr’s key points.
For art critics and theological thinkers. No subject index.
N6784 978-1-85182-987-3
Art and devotion in late medieval Ireland.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rachel Moss et al.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 234 p. $55.00
The authors examine the material culture of Ireland in the context of con-
tinental popular piety by situating texts, topics and artifacts within their
theological, artistic and historical milieux. As a result of the multi-disci-
plinary approach of the contributors, wall paintings, reliquaries, stained
glass, figure sculpture and vestments appear along religious poetry,
hagiography and devotional literature. The text includes illustrations and
color plates. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
N6797 0-85331-938-3
Doves and dreams; the art of Frances Macdonald and
James Herbert McNair.
Title main entry. Ed. by Pamela Robertson.
Lund Humphries, ©2006 191 p. $80.00
Robertson (Mackintosh studies, U. of Glasgow, UK) is joined by other art
scholars from Canada and the UK in this examination of the lives and
careers of Frances Macdonald (1873-1921) and J. Herbert McNair (1868-
1955), the less often studied members of the “Glasgow Four.” The volume
has been published in association with the exhibition of the same name,
showing in 2006 and 2007 at the Hunterian Art Gallery at the U. of
Glasgow and Walker Art Gallery at the National Museums Liverpool.
Essays, which survey the contributions of Macdonald and McNair,
present a comparative analysis of the urban context, and discuss their
collaborative partnership and 3-D designs, are followed by a catalog of
the works, most held at the U. of Glasgow. Color and b&w photos show
furniture and interiors, graphics, metalwork, pastels, textiles, and water-
colors. Distributed in the US by Ashgate.
N6999 2005-020644 978-0-8204-7850-0
Kandinsky’s quest; a study in the artist’s personal
symbolism, 1866-1907.
Aronov, Igor. (Hermeneutics of art; v.13)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 270 p. $74.95
Aronov (art history, Hebrew U. of Jerusalem and history and theory of
art, Bezalel Academy of Arts, Jerusalem) focuses on Russian painter
Vasily Kandinsky’s (1866-1944) enigmatic figurative art, the framework
for his later abstraction, as his personal symbolic language. He draws on
published and unpublished material to explore the artist’s spiritual
world. The 68 reproductions are in black and white. There is no index.
N7480 2006-042302 0-931102-67-7
Compression vs. expression; containing and explaining the
world’s art.
Clark Conference (2000: Sterling and Francine Clark Art Institute) Ed.
by John Onians. (Clark studies in the visual arts)
Sterling & Francine Clark Art, ©2006 252 p. $24.95 (pa)
If one expands the study of art beyond the works valued by Europeans
to consideration of all human artifacts of visual interest it becomes clear,
notes Onians (director, World Art Research Programme, U. of East
Anglia, UK), that a fundamental rethinking of the field must take place.
He presents 16 papers from a conference held in 2000 in order to
advance this agenda and consider the problems inherent in such an
endeavor, including the issues, reflected in the title and subtitle, of how
to embrace the vaster field of knowledge than typical of art history
(compression) without losing depth of presentation and intellectual
reflection (expression), how it is to be constituted and defined (con-
tained), and how it is to be studied (explained). The collection offers
museological studies, comparative analysis of how art history is pursued
in different geographical settings, discussion of different approaches to
art-history, exploration of an attempt to root world art history in neuro-
science, and reflections on the difficulties of distilling world art history
into a single text or theory, among other topics.
–249–
N8193 978-90-04-15549-7
Text, image and song in transdisciplinary dialogue;
proceedings. (CD-ROM included)
Seminar of the Int’l Association for Tibetan Studies (10th: 2003: Oxford,
UK) Ed. by Deborah Klimburg-Salter et al. (Brill’s Tibetan studies
library; v.10/7)
BRILL, ©2007 247 p. $120.00
Many of these papers come from field work by the Interdisciplinary
Research Unit of the Austrian Science Fund. Papers include an analysis
of art history relative to transdisciplinary research in the Nako Sacred
Compound, an introduction to the Western Himalayan Archive in Vienna,
an analysis of cultural preservation and research in central Tibet in the
Ke ru lha khang, and examinations of fragments of pramana texts, a
manuscript of the Gondhla Kanjur, historical inscriptions at Wanla and a
narrative composition found in the Main Temple at Tabo. Others cover
art of the court reflecting eastern Iranian elements, methods of pre-
serving oral traditions, and songs in Tibetan recorded in Spiti and Upper
Kinnaur. Three papers describe the structure, methods and advantages of
transdisciplinary research and are based on the interactive dialogue of
scholars attending the seminar. The illustrations are especially well-
chosen and the color plates are on the accompanying CD-ROM.
N8217 2006-013685 978-0-7892-0900-9
The lure of gold; an artistic and cultural history.
Bachmann, Hans-Gert. Trans. by Steven Lindberg.
Abbeville Press, ©2006 279 p. $75.00
Filled with color images in the superb quality for which this publisher
is known, this suitably sumptuous, oversized (10.5x12″) volume presents
many examples of the use of gold in art and architecture throughout the
world. Bachmann, a specialist in geosciences and archaeology in
Germany, has provided a chronological account describing uses of gold
from ancient times to the neoclassical era; art historian Jörg Völlnagel
contributes the final chapter on gold in modern and contemporary art.
N8600 978-1-58297-429-3
Artist’s & graphic designer’s market, 2007.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Cox and Michael Schweer.
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2007 650 p. $26.99 (pa)
This reference for artists hoping to establish a career in fine art, illus-
tration, cartooning or graphic design lists contact information for over
1,900 art markets, including greeting card companies, magazine and
book publishers, galleries, art fairs, and ad agencies. The listings include
pay scales and tips from art directors. This annual edition contains
advice from art professionals, such as Louise Bourgeois, Christoph
Niemann, Bob McLeod and Steven Diamant, as well as from successful
freelancers.
N8600 978-1-58297-428-6
Photographer’s market, 2007.
Title main entry. Ed. by Donna Poehner and Erika O’Connell.
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2007 633 p. $26.99 (pa)
This is the 30th annual edition of this directory for professional photog-
raphers seeking contact info for commercial, trade, and news publica-
tions; galleries; stock photo agencies; art fairs (new to this edition); and
photo contests. The majority of the 1,800 listings are for the US and
Canadian markets; some represent the international market as well.
Other materials include articles and interviews advising novices on
building and selling their body of work, as well as listings of grants,
organizations, websites, and publications that help career photographers.
Listings are indexed separately by geography, subject, and name.
N8660 2006-023514 1-58839-195-7
Cézanne to Picasso; Ambroise Vollard, patron of the
avant-garde.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rebecca A. Rabinow.
Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2006 450 p. $65.00
Renoir, Picasso, Degas, Gauguin, Cézanne, and other well known painters
are among those whose works Vollard sold as an art dealer in Paris in
the late 19th and early 20th centuries. His relationships with these artists,
his work as an editor of artists’ books, his clients, his estate, and the exhi-
bitions he mounted are discussed in 22 fascinating, heavily illustrated
essays in a catalogue remarkable for its depth of research. The volume,
which is published in an oversized format (9.25x12.25″), accompanies an
exhibition held at the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York, the Art
Institute of Chicago, and the Musée d’Orsay in Paris in 2006-2007. The
202 works of the exhibition are the subject of full entries (in small type)
and fingernail b&w images at the book’s conclusion (with reference to
the color image of many of the images in the essays). Distributed by Yale
U. Press.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
NA705 2006-297278 1-57233-440-1
Building environments.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kenneth A. Breisch and Alison K. Hoagland.
(Perspectives in vernacular architecture; 10)
University of Tennessee Press, ©2005 299 p. $32.00 (pa)
A Japanese-style lunch room of an American hotel features diner-style
seats. Elaborate wayside shrines dotting Lithuania provide a window into
faith. Windows in slave quarters reflect the severest of political
economies. How did the occupants feel about these sites and buildings?
What are the symbolic implications? In this collection of 17 essays chosen
from conventions of the Vernacular Architecture Forum, contributors
describe the houses of New England, including the stories of small urban
houses of the North Shore from 1630-1830, built-in gender and class, the
double house, and housing for workers. They show how buildings relate
to their social contexts, describing a church in early Jamaica, barns in
Maryland, residences on the Crow Indian Reservation, and early 1900s
hotels, explain the history of methods of understanding buildings, and
move beyond buildings to commercial fishing architecture, Northern
Umiak shelter, and the snap of cereal places and the pop of crop art.
NA712 2006-281576 0-7649-3659-X
An American architecture. (reprint, 1998)
Wright, Frank Lloyd. Ed. by Edgar Kaufman.
Pomegranate Communications, ©2006 269 p. $39.95
This work was first published in 1955 and was revised in 1998; this is a
reprint of the revised edition. It features the writings and lectures of
architect Frank Lloyd Wright, along with about 300 plans, drawings, and
b&w and color photos from the Frank Lloyd Wright Archives at Taliesin
West in Scottsdale, Arizona. Describing his architectural vision, Wright
discusses the elements of architecture, his ideas about organicism,
working with different materials and landscapes, form and style, and
specific projects as examples. Case histories of the Larkin Building in
Buffalo, the Unity Temple in Illinois, the Imperial Hotel in Japan, and the
Johnson Administration Building in Wisconsin, are provided, among
several others. No index is included.
NA720 2005-037586 0-8139-2539-8
Southern built; American architecture, regional practice.
Bishir, Catherine W.
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 332 p. $35.00 (pa)
Bisher (architectural historian, Preservation North Carolina) offers three
decades of significant research into the local economies and class struc-
tures and their expression in a mythology of wood and stone while
focusing on the builders, bringing to light the work of slave artisans. Her
case studies include Alexander Parris’s Wickham House, the New Bern
Jail, the Hayes Plantation House, and beach cottages of Old Nags Head,
and she considers the influence of women and politics in the con-
struction of memorials to the confederacy in nineteenth-century Raleigh
and the ways the south rebuilt its past from 1885 to 1915 in monumental
buildings. Her final, very entertaining chapter focuses on new money’s
attraction to the fictions of the old south.
NA735 2006-003575 0-8018-8467-5
AIA guide to the architecture of Washington, D.C., 4th ed.
Moeller, G. Martin.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 379 p. $35.00
This rewritten and updated edition of the guide to Washington D.C. archi-
tecture also includes added entries on the National Museum of the
American Indian and other places. Provided are walking tours of Capitol
Hill, the Mall, Judiciary Square/Gallery Place, Pennsylvania Avenue,
downtown, the White House/Lafayette Square, Georgetown, Dupont
Circle, Arlington National Cemetery, and other areas, with each citing
several places, their location, names of architects and designers, dates of
completion, and a brief description. Maps and b&w photos are provided.
Information was drawn from documents of the Historic American
Buildings Survey, institutional archives, local governmental agencies, and
articles and books. Moeller is a curator at the National Building Museum
and former executive director of the Washington Chapter of the America
Institute of Architects.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
NA737 2006-043177 0-7649-3746-4
Hometown architect; the complete buildings of Frank
Lloyd Wright in Oak Park and River Forest, Illinois.
Cannon, Patrick F. Photography by James Caulfield. (Pomegranate
catalog; no.A118)
Pomegranate Communications, ©2006 144 p. $35.00
Paying homage to the hometown boy who made good, Cannon, a jour-
nalist, editor and publicist and tour leader of the Frank Lloyd Write
Preservation Trust, presents, in chronological order, 27 Wright homes
built in Oak Park and River Forest, Illinois. The last chapter surveys eight
“lost, altered and possibly Wright” structures. The text includes over 90
photographs of the buildings’ exteriors and interiors and an introduction
to each chapter that details the story of each commission, along with
commentary on Wright’s relationships with his clients, the importance of
each building in Wright’s body of work and the characteristics that make
each house unique.
NA961 1-86077-388-5
Gerrards Cross; a history.
Hunt, Julian and David Thorpe.
Phillimore, ©2006 164 p. $36.00
Local historians based in Buckinghamshire, Hunt and Thorpe recount the
history of the area that came to be known as Gerrards Cross. Emerging
from their work to celebrate the centenary of the coming of the railway,
they focus on the 19th century and the first four decades of the 20th,
when Gerrards Cross became a parish and then a special type of sub-
urban village. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
NA961 978-1-904965-09-1
Ham Hill; portrait of a building stone.
Durman, Richard.
Spire Books, ©2006 241 p. $39.95 (pa)
Durman explores the use of stone quarried at Ham Hill in southern
Somerset for building, from Roman times to the present. Before
beginning the history, however, he looks at the area, how the hill came
about, the stone’s qualities for building, and the quarries. A final chapter
considers repair, conservation, and the future. Distributed in the US by
the David Brown Book Company.
NA1068 2004-018644 978-0-521-79004-8
Before the Bauhaus; architecture, politics and the German
state, 1890-1920.
Maciuika, John V.
Cambridge U. Pr., ©2005 386 p. $85.00
In this interdisciplinary contribution to studies of the German Second
Empire (shown in a map), Maciuika (U. of Virginia School of
Architecture) examines the roots of such post-World War I German archi-
tectural and design reform as Walter Gropius’ Bauhaus and more
broadly, the role played by architects as Germany sought and fought
modernization. Period photos and illustrations include buildings featured
at early 20th century German applied arts exhibits, and other new resi-
dential and commercial buildings. Appendices include—in the original
German and in English translation—principles espoused in 1914 by
Hermann Multesius on the future directions of the Werkbund, a design
association dedicated to harmonizing German culture and work, and
opposing views.
NA1211 87-7288-972-1
Arkitekture fortaellinger; om Aarhus Universitets
bygninger.
Title main entry. Ed. by Olaf Lind. Photographs Poul Ib Henriksen.
Aarhus University Press, ©2006 239 p. $33.00
Written mostly in Dutch, with some English translations, this volume
describes the architecture of the U. of Aarhus in Denmark on its 75th
anniversary, particularly its parks and surrounding buildings and its
construction history. Also detailed: the architectural competition held
during the 1930s, material types, phases of building, and long- term
development. Many color photos are included. The book measures
11.25x11.25″. Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co.
–250–
NA1546 2006-015042 978-0-8248-2151-7
Allegorical architecture; living myth and architectonics in
southern China.
Ruan, Xing. (Spatial habitus; making and meaning in Asia’s archi-
tecture)
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 219 p. $45.00
Ruan (architecture, U. of New South Wales-Sydney) argues that, at least
for the minority peoples in southern China that he studied, making and
inhabiting a space cannot be separated. Meaningful engagement from the
designers as well as from the inhabitants with their built world requires
conscious efforts from both sides, he says.
NA1581 2005-026817 0-8109-5538-5
Egyptian palaces and villas; pashas, khedives, and kings.
Johnston, Shirley.
Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 207 p. $50.00
This volume presents a dramatization of Egypt and its places, people,
and events, singling out 41 palaces as the focus. With a grounding in
scholarly works and Egyptian stories and tales, each palace and its owner
is described through a narrative, and accompanied by color photos of
interiors, exteriors, and related artwork. Serif Sonbol, who lives in Cairo,
provides the photos. Johnston is a writer and photographic director of
books. The book measures 10.5x12.5″.
NA1995 2005-034526 0-471-70954-9
Becoming an architect; a guide to careers in design.
Waldrep, Lee W.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 304 p. $35.00 (pa)
Waldrep (architecture, U. of Maryland) brings the perceptions and nar-
ratives of dozens of students and practitioners as he defines the role of
an architect and who is most likely to succeed, education from childhood
through high school and pursuit of an accredited degree, experience at
various levels, including as a volunteer, researcher, intern and full-time
professional, licensure, career design, and the future of the profession. He
gives a number of valuable resources for architects, including profes-
sional organizations and websites, and lists accredited architecture pro-
grams in the US and Canada. Although nominally designed to help high
school students plan their educational and work experiences toward a
career in architecture, this guide can double as a resource for those in
later life seeking a second career or as a reference for professionals in
related fields such as urban planning and construction.
NA1996 2006-001920 978-0-471-79294-9
The architect’s handbook of professional practice; update
2006. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph A. Dempkin.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 182 p. $85.00
This volume serves as a companion to the 13th Edition of The Architect’s
Handbook of Professional Practice and consists of 14 articles by architects
and others in the US who discuss reports on advancing practice and pro-
fessional development; practice topics (relating to clients, business,
delivery, services, and methods and techniques); and American Institute
of Architects contract document updates, covering new and revised doc-
uments and those under development. A CD-ROM, containing samples of
existing, revised, and new AIA contract documents, is included. There is
no bibliography.
NA2105 2006-044317 1-56377-100-4
From the studio to the streets; service-learning in
planning and architecture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary C. Hardin. (AAHE’s series on service-
learning in the disciplines)
Stylus Publishing, ©2006 234 p. $29.50
A dozen essays by American academics describe how they have used
service learning pedagogy in their urban planning and architecture
courses. Several more contributions look at broader issues, such as insti-
tutional support for community-based architecture and the integration of
planning theory and practice. Together, they identify some successful
service learning practices while pointing out some commonly encoun-
tered obstacles. The editors teach architecture at the U. of Arizona. The
volume is not indexed.
–251–
NA2500 2005-033488 978-0-8133-9045-1
Understanding architecture; its elements, history, and
meaning, 2d ed.
Roth, Leland M.
Westview Press, ©2007 652 p. $55.00 (pa)
Roth (architectural history, U. of Oregon, Eugene) offers the second
edition of his text for use in basic introduction to Western architecture
courses and as a visual guide for the general reader, examining archi-
tecture from cultural, artistic and technological perspectives. The text
assumes the reader has no prior knowledge of the subject. The material
is presented in two main components: the elements of architecture, and
the history and meaning of architecture. The fully revised and updated
text includes new material on Postmodernism and its relationship to the
Modernist era, restructured coverage of Mesopotamian and Prehistoric
architecture based on thematic lines of development and chronology, and
an expanded chapter on Medieval architecture. Illustrated throughout
with b&w photographs and diagrams and 14 color plates.
NA2540 2006-048356 3-7643-7597-3
5 codes; architecture, paranoia and risk in times of terror.
Title main entry. Ed. by Igmade.
Birkhäuser Boston, ©2006 299 p. $40.00 (pa)
The 18 contributions to this collection together represent architectural
theory’s critical reaction to Homeland Security’s creation of its five-color
terror warning system. The papers, in the words of the editors, inves-
tigate “the entanglements of producing space, paranoia, and risk.” The
collection is itself color-coded, with each color representing a different
theme: green for wilderness, blue for suburbia, yellow for gated com-
munities or camps, orange for back-up and gadget architecture, and red
for war rooms.
NA2540 2006-044797 0-375-42443-1
The architecture of happiness.
De Botton, Alain.
Pantheon Books, ©2006 280 p. $25.00
De Botton, author of How Proust Can Change Your Life, continues to be
concerned about our happiness, in this case demonstrating lucidly and
convincingly that the spaces we inhabit are essential to our well-being.
Tracing the way human needs and desires have been served by styles of
architecture from Classical to Gothic to Modern, he argues that the sty-
listic choices of a society can represent both its cherished ideals and qual-
ities it lacks.
NA2543 2006-010501 978-0-393-73220-7
Poetry, property, and place 01; Stefan Behnisch/Gerald
Hines.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nina Rappaport. (The Edward P. Bass
Distinguished Visiting Architecture Fellowship; v.1)
W.W. Norton, ©2006 192 p. $35.00 (pa)
The Edward P. Bass Distinguished Visiting Architecture Fellowship pro-
vides opportunities for advanced students at the Yale School of
Architecture to work collaboratively with leading architects and devel-
opers. This first volume in a planned series features interviews with
developer Gerald D. Hines and architect Stephan Behnisch, as well as
student participants in the inaugural studio. It also contains descriptions
of a number of student-designed projects aimed at transforming a neg-
lected site in central Milan into a vital urban place.
NA2545 2006-017369 978-1-4051-4626-5
The access manual; auditing and managing inclusive built
environments, 2d ed.
Sawyer, Ann and Keith Bright.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 263 p. $79.95 (pa)
Building access consultants Sawyer and Bright provide guidance on
designing buildings and building elements that enable access by disabled
individuals mandated by British Disability Discrimination Act of 1995
and related standards and regulations. Over the course of the work, they
give advice on access management, handover and commissioning of new
and improved buildings, feedback procedures, post-occupancy evalu-
ation, and access audits. While legal standards and regulations are dis-
cussed in the British context, there is enough coverage of general issues
of accessibility to interest other audiences.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
NA4140 2006-003905 0-7546-3813-8
Cultures of glass architecture.
Elkadi, Hisham. (Design and the built environment series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 103 p. $69.95
British architect has long been fascinated with glass, especially as a
building material. Here he explores, the history, aesthetics, environmental
and cultural perspectives, and the future of glass architecture. He also
includes a technical review of seeing through glass.
NA4471 2006-022751 978-0-393-73070-8
Celebrating the courthouse; a guide for architects, their
clients, and the public.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steven Flanders.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 240 p. $60.00
Thirteen American architects, judges, administrators, and attorneys con-
tribute 10 chapters examining the issues involved in designing an
effective and satisfying courthouse building. The text is intended for
those who are new to courthouse projects, including government agency
personnel responsible for funding decisions, citizens’ groups and bar
associations, and architects. Coverage includes an historic overview of the
courthouse as a building type and its image within the community;
solving the distinctive problems of a courthouse project; the courthouse,
its publics and its users; and the future of the courthouse. The text
includes a forward by Justice Stephen G. Breyer and epilogue on Daniel
Patrick Moynihan and federal architecture. Illustrated throughout with
b&w photographs and diagrams, and 48 color photographs.
NA4800 978-1-904965-08-4
600 new churches; the Church Building Commission 1818-
1856.
Port, M.H.
Spire Books, ©2006 386 p. $100.00
The Church Building Commission was established in 1818 with a
mandate to solve intractable social, political and religious problems by
bringing the Anglican Church to the church-identified godless towns and
cities of Britain. Port, an architectural historian, describes the creation of
the Commission, the buildings it erected and the architects who designed
them. The historic and modern photographs, plans and drawings reveal
a great diversity of architecture, demonstrating that the Commissioners’
churches were an essential factor in making possible the Victorian
explosion of church-building. In this volume, Port updates his 1961 study
of the Commission by adding new material and illustrations, many of
which have not been published previously. Distributed by The David
Brown Book Co.
NA5494 2006-445953 978-1-904350-81-1
Cardiff; architecture and archaeology in the medieval
diocese of Llandaff.
Title main entry. Ed. by John R. Kenyon and Diane M. Williams. (The
British Archaeological Association conference transactions; 29)
Maney Publishing, ©2006 214 p. $45.00 (pa)
The proceedings of the July 2004 annual conference of the British
Archaeological Association comprise 11 papers on the capital city of
Wales, where the conference was held. Historians and art historians as
well as archaeologists consider such features as the evidence of the early
Christian monuments, the Early Gothic fabric of Llandaff Cathedral and
its place in the West Country school of masons, and three rood-screens
in southeast Wales. There is no index.
NA5811 2006-047549 978-90-04-15297-7
Queen as king; politics and architectural propaganda in
twelfth-century Spain.
Martin, Therese. (The medieval and early modern Iberian world; v.30)
BRILL, ©2006 285 p. $169.00
San Isidoro de Léon is a royally-sponsored monastic church, one of the
best known monuments surviving from Romanesque Spain. Yet Martin
(medieval art history, U. of Arizona) notes that scholars have never given
the full site its due because they found it difficult to date the buildings
and name its patron. This study traces the construction history of San
Isidoro and determines the identities of its patrons, including the
remarkable Urraca, Queen of Léo-Castialla, who ruled in her own right.
Martin traces the history of the site and its growth to a major site of pil-
grimage, the elements of monarchic power introduced into the building
as symbols of Urraca’s self-identity, and the complex ways in which
Urraca and other political women made themselves known in stone. This
contains over 100 well-chosen monochrome and color photographs sup-
porting Martin’s claims.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
NA5977 2006-043942 978-90-04-15186-4
Art and architecture of the synagogue in late antique
Palestine; in the shadow of the church.
Milson, David. (Ancient Judaism and early Christianity; v.65)
BRILL, ©2007 579 p. $239.00
Revising his 2002 doctoral dissertation at Oxford University, biblical
archaeologist Milson assesses several aspects of the impact of Christian
art and architecture on synagogues in Byzantine Palestine from the
middle fourth to the early seventh centuries when the eastern provinces
came under Arab rule. He compares orientation, the chancel screen,
facade motif, ecclesiastical furnishings, and niche and apse. Other
chapters consider evolution and ancient synagogues, and excavation and
dating.
NA6008 978-90-04-15644-9
Ajanta; history and development; v.5: Cave by cave.
Spink, Walter M. (Handbook of oriental studies=Handbuch der
Orientalistik: Section two: India=Indien; v.18)
BRILL, ©2007 396 p. $134.00
The complex of sacred caves in India enjoyed two distinct periods of
patronage, a Hinayana Buddhist phase about 100 BC to 100 CE, and a
revival in the middle fifth century under the powerful emperor Harisena
of the Vakataka Dynasty. Having written extensively about Indian art in
general and specifically that found in the Ajanta caves, Spink (emeritus
history of art, U. of Michigan-Ann Arbor) here offers a guide to visitors,
detailing the art to be seen in each of the more than 36 caves. He includes
maps, floor plans, and elevations, but no reproductions of the art itself,
which readers are presumably looking at with their own eyes. There is
no index.
NA6234 2006-272745 978-0-470-01867-5
Petronas twin towers; the architecture of high
construction.
Pelli, Cesar and Michael J. Crosbie.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2005 128 p. $40.00 (pa)
Pelli (architecture, Yale U.) designed the twin towers that form part of the
larger complex Kuala Lumpur City Centre in Malaysia, and comprise the
tallest buildings on the planet. He and practicing architect Crosbie
describe his design principles and goals, the negotiations, and the con-
struction. Large color photographs adorn nearly every page. No index or
bibliography is provided.
NA7126 2006-016248 978-0-393-73205-4
Key houses of the twentieth century; plans, sections, and
elevations. (CD-ROM included)
Davies, Colin.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 240 p. $45.00 (pa)
This volume profiles the architectural features of some 100 houses that
made an important contribution to 20th century residential design.
Included are key works by such architects as Le Corbusier, Frank Lloyd
Wright, Alvar Aalto, Rem Koolhaas, and Ma Qingyun. Each profile is
illustrated with color photographs along with accurate scale plans of
every floor. Digital files of all of the drawings are contained on the
accompanying PC- and Mac-compatible CD-ROM. Davies teaches at
London Metropolitan U. The book is oversize: 10x11.5″.
NA7207 2006-010842 0-8109-3085-4
The Queen Anne house; America’s Victorian vernacular.
Foster, Janet W. Photographs by Radek Kurzaj.
Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 240 p. $50.00
Through photographs of 21 different examples, Foster (associate director,
Historic Preservation Program, Columbia U.) examines the evolution of
the American version of the Queen Anne home. The examples include
notable homes such as the Watts Sherman House in Newport, Rhode
Island and one of Frank Lloyd Wrights’ earliest houses, the Robert Parker
House in Oak Park, as well as more modest Queen Anne-style houses
that can be matched with their published pattern-book design sources.
NA7208 2006-004614 1-4236-0002-9
Atomic ranch; design ideas for stylish ranch homes.
Gringeri-Brown, Michelle. Photographs by Jim Brown.
Gibbs Smith, ©2006 192 p. $39.95
Gringeri-Brown proves that even the humble ranch house can blossom
under a makeover in this beautifully illustrated accolade to the “cookie
cutter” homes of the 1950s. In 25 examples of tract, split- level and
rambler houses, she shows why these homes worked so well for their
first residents and how they can be updated. The volume includes before
and after shots, design-tip sidebars, and a resource index. Gringeri-Brown
and her husband, Jim Brown, are the founders and publishers of Atomic
Ranch magazine, a quarterly devoted to mid-century homes.
–252–
NA7346 2006-004914 0-295-98632-8
The problem of the house; French domestic life and the
rise of modern architecture.
Anderson, Alex T.
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 220 p. $60.00
Anderson (architecture, U. of Washington) explores the work of a like-
minded group of designers in France, most of whom began their creative
lives as decorative artists, interior designers, and painters but moved into
the field of architecture in the 1920s. The author argues that this
movement placed particular emphasis on the problems of domestic set-
tings, and the house became central to the development of modernist
architecture in Europe. Coverage includes an introductory overview of the
movement; an examination of interior ensembles exhibited in the Paris
Salons d’Automne of 1910 to 1913; the effects of WWI on house recon-
struction and furniture production; and the work of Pierre Chareau, Le
Corbusier, Eileen Gray, Francis Jourdain, and Robert Mallet-Stevens in the
1920s, and the nature of their program for modern architecture.
Illustrated throughout with b&w photographs and diagrams.
NA7533 2006-015633 978-0-06-113933-8
Mini house now.
Losantos, Àgata. Trans. by Jay Noden.
Collins Design, ©2006 191 p. $29.95
An editor of books on architecture showcases 22 tiny houses that make
innovative use of space. These include a German micro-compact module
that draws on aeronautical and automotive as well as Japanese teahouse
design, a 275-square foot glass-walled cabin for sunset viewing in
Canada, a two-person home in Austria for those on a small budget, and
a relatively large 880-square foot weekend place in Texas. The volume (a
square 9.4″) includes color photos, floor plans, and a directory of the
architectural firms whose designs are featured.
NA7571 2006-002429 0-295-98627-1
The Seattle bungalow; people and houses, 1900-1940.
Ore, Janet.
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 202 p. $24.95 (pa)
The Seattle bungalow is the focus of this history, written from the per-
spective of the lower middle class families who were its primary con-
sumer from 1900-1940. Ore (history, Colorado State U.) uses both social
history and vernacular architectural history methodologies and concen-
trates on 800 houses in four neighborhoods: Ballard, Fremont, Green
Lake, and Wallingford. Utilizing both primary source materials from tax
records and the census, as well as interviews with former owners, her
narrative history describes the architecture, philosophy, construction,
sales, and experiences of those living in the bungalow style home. B&w
photos are included.
NA7575 9788496263512
Great spaces; cabins.
Mostaedi, Arian.
Links International, ©2006 191 p. $39.95
Published in an oversized format (9.75x10.5″), this volume showcases
innovative designs of 19 small vacation homes, many of them located in
northern Europe. Each house is presented through excellent and copious
color photos of interiors and exteriors, as well as a descriptive intro-
duction, plans, sections, and renderings. The book is not indexed. Note
that the title inside the book, Small houses in nature, (intended for a
European audience) differs from the dustjacket, Great spaces; cabins,
which is aimed at the American reader.
NA7845 2006-012172 1-4236-0012-6
Big Sur Inn; the Deetjen legacy.
Alan, Anita.
Gibbs Smith, ©2006 160 p. $29.95
The Big Sur Inn on the spectacular California coast is now listed on the
National Register of Historic Places for its faithful preservation of local
architecture. A former longtime resident who was a writer/photographer
for a local newspaper, pays homage to this landmark. In this photoessay,
Alan traces the inn’s history and visitors under the stewardship of a
resourceful Norwegian family. (Helmuth Deetjen died in 1972). She
includes poems that have been inspired by the inn and its environs, e.g.,
those of Robinson Jeffers.
–253–
NA8001 2005-034192 1-57233-496-7
Masonic temples; freemasonry, ritual architecture, and
masculine archetypes.
Moore, William D.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 216 p. $34.95
Moore (history, U. of North Carolina, Wilmington) presents a study of
Masonic temples constructed by American Freemasons from 1870 to
1930, focusing on New York State, although his ideas are applicable to
other areas. Drawing from his experience as director of the Livingston
Masonic Library in New York City, he investigates ceremonies and the
places where they occurred, their history, and connections to American
concepts of masculinity. This last idea he closely ties to specific arche-
types and spaces like the lodge room, armory and drill room of the
Knights Templar, the Scottish Rite Cathedral, and the Shriners’ mosque.
He also addresses the architectural, financial, and symbolic significance
of the structures. The book is aimed at readers interested in vernacular
architecture, material culture, American studies, architectural and social
history, Freemasonry, and voluntary associations. B&w photos and illus-
trations are incorporated throughout.
NB87 2006-001040 978-1-931707-84-8
Classical sculpture; catalogue of the Cypriot, Greek, and
Roman stone sculpture in the University of Pennsylvania
Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology. (CD-ROM
included)
Romano, Irene Bald.
U. Penn/Mus. of Archaeo & Anth, ©2006 331 p. $59.95
Romano (American School of Classical Studies at Athens, U. of
Pennsylvania, and Bryn Mawr College) provides the first complete cata-
logue of the Classical sculpture collection at the U. of Pennsylvania
Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology. It contains all the Cypriot,
Greek, and Roman stone sculptures in the Museum, including relevant
pieces in the Eastern and Egyptian Sections. Organized by provenience,
each piece has a description, measurements, report of condition, list of
published sources, commentary, and b&w photographic documentation.
It is meant for scholars, students, and general readers. The accompanying
CD-ROM has 54 color images of pieces.
NB464 2006-004749 0-7546-3030-7
Sculpture and the garden.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick Eyres and Fiona Russell.
(Subject/object; new studies in sculpture)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 196 p. $99.95
This collection of 10 essays by history and art scholars from the UK
addresses the relationship between sculpture and gardens there since the
early eighteenth century. They discuss different types of gardens and
how sculpture has “embellished” them. Concentrating on four key land-
scapes—the Georgian Landscape, Victorian urban park, outdoor spaces of
twentieth-century modernism, and late-twentieth century sculpture
parks—the essays trace a continuous example of British culture and
aspects relating to royalty, gender, public areas, meaning, modernism,
and neoclassicism. The volume begins with color photographs of several
gardens by Geoffrey James. It originated in a conference held at the U.
College Bretton Hall in the Yorkshire Sculpture Park in 1998. Eyres is the
editor of the New Arcadia Journal, UK. Russell is a freelance writer and
editor.
NB615 978-2-503-52459-7
Benedetto da Maiano; a Florentine sculptor at the
threshold of the high Renaissance; 2v.
Carl, Doris.
Brepols Publishers, ©2006 1147 p. $204.00
The sculpture of this 15th-century Italian is surveyed in a detailed
analysis of the style and patronage of reliefs, terracottas, and marble. The
influences of compatriots, especially Verrocchio, are discussed in terms
of specific works. Notable is Carl’s attention throughout of the patronage
of the altarpieces, sculptural groups, and individual works she describes.
Initial chapters analyze artistic development. Subsequent chapters
describe portraits and works grouped by their patrons, including the
Santa Fina Chapel, the Florentine Signoria, and individual patrons in
Siena and Rome. An appendix contains the texts of some of the original
sources of this research (in Italian or Latin, they are not translated). A
full bibliography is included. Vol.1 contains the text, vol.2 contains full-
page color and b&w plates of excellent quality in oversize format
(9x11.75″). Distributed in North America by the David Brown Book
Company.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
NB1912 2006-024200 978-0-8248-2994-0
Donors of Longmen; faith, politics, and patronage in
medieval Chinese Buddhist sculpture.
McNair, Amy.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 230 p. $52.00
The Longmen Grottoes near Luoyang, China are the site of nearly 100,000
individual Buddhist statues produced approximately between 494 and
794 BCE. In this work, McNair (Chinese art, U. of Kansas) is concerned
not just with who the sponsors of these statues were (they included
emperors, empresses, aristocrats, court eunuchs, imperial artisans,
monks, nuns, military officials, local government functionaries, and
members of commercial guilds), but also their motivations for paying for
the statues, often revealed through the commissioned inscriptions
engraved near the statues.
NB1932 2006-020906 978-0-300-11781-3
Set in stone; the face in medieval sculpture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles T. Little.
Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2006 222 p. $50.00
In this beautifully illustrated catalog of over 80 sculpted heads from
French, German, and US museums, private collections and anonymous
lenders, curator Little and his contributors describe each of the pieces
and work through several interrelated themes. They cover such issues as
the role of the face in medieval art, iconoclasm and its legacy of violence,
the scientific detective story known as the Limestone Project, Faith in
images in an illiterate age, marginalia, identity as portrayed in the carved
faces, gothic Italy as a reflection of antiquity, and the unique history of
reliquary busts. It is especially interesting to find out why the faces
survive while the bodies to which they were attached did not. Distributed
by Yale University Press.
NC997 978-0-321-35024-4
Hot-wiring your creative process; strategies for print and
new media desingers.
Cloninger, Curt.
New Riders Publishing, ©2007 260 p. $40.00 (pa)
Cloninger (multimedia arts and sciences, U. of North Carolina at
Asheville) gives designers of print and media a nudge of inspiration and
ideas on how to work efficiently while tapping creative strategies. With
the wisdom of one who has overcome staring clueless into space, he gives
the basics of the creative process, reasons to believe in your creative
powers and get past reliance on the epiphany moment, ways to bypass
inertia, sources for art and design history with varying degrees of deri-
vation, edits without cringing, software and systems, and making use of
the five realms of design while balancing form and reconciling para-
digms. He includes interviews with industry leaders and plenty of illus-
trations to shake you up.
NC997 2-08-030523-9
Typography and graphic design; from antiquity to the
present.
Jubert, Roxane.
Flammarion, ©2006 431 p. $95.00
Jubert (art history, Ecole Nationale Supérieure des Arts Décoratifs,
France) combines the histories of typography and graphic design, from
proto-inscriptions in ancient Europe, through the advent of the printing
press, and up to the reinvention of the arts during the digital revolution.
Three-fourths of the coverage in this volume, translated from French, is
devoted to the 19th and 20th centuries. Supported by 850 images, dis-
cussion includes the relationship of advancements in typography and
graphics to contemporary artistic movements, and examines their role—
at turns both empowering and sinister (particularly their use for propa-
ganda and class repression)—in major political and social events. Later
chapters cover post-WWII advertising booms in several industrialized
countries, trace the evolution of computer fonts, and discuss the unprece-
dented accessibility of today’s tools for typography and graphic design.
Serge Lemoine, president of the Musée d’Orsay, authored the foreword to
the French edition, which is translated here. Oversize: 9.5x11.25″.
Distributed by Rizzoli.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
NC999 2006-295646 1-55297-913-X
Shigeo Fukuda; masterworks.
Fukuda, Shigeo.
Firefly Books Ltd., ©2005 167 p. $49.95
Tokyo native Fukuda is an internationally recognized graphic artist who,
over a 50- year period, has created some 1300 large posters for Japanese
corporations, exhibitions, and the entertainment and merchandising
industries, most designed with the Japanese lifestyle and culture in mind.
He presents a selection of 140 full-page, full- color posters which he feels
best represent his work while also remaining accessible to a global
audience despite differences in lifestyles, cultures and customs. The work
is introduced with an essay by American designer and cofounder of the
Push Pin Studios, Seymour Chwast. For professionals in the visual arts,
and enthusiasts of Japanese graphic art and optical illusions.
NC1000 2006-282381 0-321-33658-5
Graphic design portfolio-builder; Adobe Photoshop and
Adobe Illustrator projects.
Title main entry. Ed. by the instructors of sessions.edu.
Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2006 353 p. $44.99 (pa)
Developed by the faculty of Sessions, an online school of design licensed
by the New York Education Department and accredited by the Distance
Education and Training Council, this guide offers projects, case studies,
and tips for developing graphic design skills. Following a refresher
course on digital imaging applications of Adobe Photoshop and Adobe
Illustrator, step-by-step, well- illustrated lessons are presented on elements
of design and designing for advertising, magazines, 3-D packaging, and
other types of projects.
NC1305 2006-013711 978-1-4144-0440-0
UXL graphic novelists; 3v.
Pendergast, Tom and Sara Pendergast.
Thomson Gale, ©2007 634 p. $181.00
This three-volume work profiles 75 authors, artists, and (mostly)
author/artists of graphic novels, including some of the most influential
and celebrated English-language creators such as Neil Gaiman, Will
Eisner, Frank Miller, Alan Moore, and Art Spiegelman, as well as a sig-
nificant number of Japanese manga artists and writers whom one sus-
pects are just as important in their respective milieu. The profiles are
largely biographical in nature, although some limited discussion of the
creators’ most important works is usually included. Introductory essays
offer short histories of the graphic novel and manga. Also, a guide to
graphic novel publishers and a glossary are included. Some examples of
the artists’ illustrations are reproduced, but not as many as might be
expected given the topic. Twenty-four of the authors agreed to be inter-
viewed for the project.
NC1429 2006-049175 978-1-4129-2701-7
The lighter side of classroom management.
Bacall, Aaron.
Corwin Press Inc., ©2007 84 p. $45.95
A former teacher and curriculum writer, Aaron Bacall is now a full- time
cartoonist. This volume reproduces more than 80 of his single- panel car-
toons that focus on “the lighter side of classroom management.” Bacall
also briefly summarizes his views on the importance of attitude in
effective teaching in the introduction.
NC1479 2006-011375 978-0-15-101282-4
The joke’s over; bruised memories; Gonzo, Hunter S.
Thompson, and me.
Steadman, Ralph.
Harcourt, ©2006 396 p. $26.00
To describe the 30-year relationship of Thompson and Steadman as
bizarre would be a disservice to the language, and yet the two found
compelling ways to describe some the more significant occasions of the
end of the twentieth century, if not the end of the world, including
Watergate. Steadman tracks through the decades, filling in and correcting
details, and keeps the proceedings charmingly graphic and profane. The
letters between the two men about business and credits are enlightening,
and Steadman’s last letter to Thompson, written after the latter’s suicide
in 2005, is a classic.
–254–
ND237 2006-013390 1-59714-041-4
Dark metropolis; Irving Norman’s social surrealism.
Norman, Irving. Ed. by Ray Day and Scott A. Shields.
Crocker Art Museum, ©2006 223 p. $35.00 (pa)
The uncompromising nature of the paintings of California artist Irving
Norman (1906-1989), with their dense and hostile cityscapes, dehu-
manized workers and students, and political perspective shaped by his
experiences as a soldier in the Spanish Civil War, have perhaps denied
him the wider recognition he deserves beyond his passionate supporters
and collectors, but maybe the recent exhibit by the Crocker Art Museum,
which has resulted in this catalogue, may go some way towards
redressing that wrong. Following essays discussing Norman’s life and
politics and the themes and techniques of his paintings (which often
remind one of the scale and concerns of Diego Rivera mixed with the
surrealist vision of Salvador Dali), a wide selection of his paintings are
reproduced in thematic sections labeled “The Capitalist Enigma,” “The
Social Illusion,” “The Cycle of War,” “The Urban Transformation,” and
“The Human Predicament.” Details are frequently reproduced in addition
to whole works. Appendices list a catalogue of Norman’s works, exhibi-
tions and collections, and reproductions. Distributed by Heyday Books.
ND237 2006-016371 978-1-55595-269-3
East Coast/West Coast, and beyond; Colin Campbell
Cooper, American impressionist.
Gerdts, William H. and Deborah Epstein Solon.
Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 143 p. $50.00
The span of Cooper’s output, which ranges from optimistic paintings of
New York’s financial district at the turn of the 20th century to paintings
of a more natural world in California in the 1920s, allows the curators
of this exhibition to focus equally on East Coast and West Coast subject
matter. Gerdts (art history, CUNY, emeritus) provides a comprehensive
essay on Cooper’s contribution to art on the East Coast, while Solon (inde-
pendent curator) writes about Cooper’s work in California. The “and
beyond” portion of his work includes some large-scale paintings from his
travels in Europe, such as the impressive Greco-Roman Theater at Night,
Taormina, Sicily. The catalog has 79 color reproductions of Cooper’s
paintings, including some which have never been published.
ND237 2006-006792 978-1-59629-090-7
Fitz H. Lane; an artist’s voyage through nineteenth-
century America.
Craig, James A.
History Press, ©2006 222 p. $32.99 (pa)
Born in 1804 and raised in the maritime community of Gloucester,
Massachusetts, Luminist painter Fitz H. Lane’s sea images have become
celebrated examples of the form and his work has been exhibited at the
White House and numerous museums and have been no less prized by
the general public. Not surprisingly, then, many works have been pub-
lished analyzing Lane’s work, but much less is known about the man
himself. This work by Craig (a curator at the Cape Ann Historical
Association in Gloucester) represents an effort to reconstruct a more
detailed understanding of Lane’s life and historical and cultural contexts
and the relationship of these to the paintings so prized by so many.
ND237 2006-015741 0-300-11771-X
Jennifer Bartlett; early plate work.
Richardson, Brenda.
Yale University Press, ©2006 122 p. $24.95
Published to accompany an exhibition at the Addison Gallery of
American Art, this work documents the emergence and development of
painter Jennifer Bartlett’s signature style—colored dots on gridded steel
plates and canvas. Over 35 works produced between 1968 and 1976, the
year of her production of Rhapsody painting (The Museum of Modern
Art, New York), are reproduced in color. The volume also includes an
analytical essay focused on this earlier period, examining Bartlett’s style
of working, her connection to other artists, and the development of her
aesthetic, among other issues.
ND237 2006-014667 0-86534-498-1
Passionate landscape; the painting journeys of Buffalo
Kaplinski.
Graves, Harmon S.
Sunstone Press, ©2006 183 p. $65.00
A Denver lawyer active in art-related legal issues presents a well-
illustrated biography of his longtime artist friend known as Ronald
Kaplinski (1943- ) until he left Chicago for New Mexico in the 1960s.
There, he became “Buffalo” and part of the Taos Society of Artists,
representing a new breed of Western plein-air painters. The volume
features many of Kaplinski’s paintings from Sky of the Kachinas (1967)
to The Observation Point—Phantom Canyon, Colorado (2004), and photos of
the artist. The director of the Charles M. Russell Center for the Study of
Art of the American West, U. of Oklahoma, supplies the foreword.
–255–
ND237 2006-283821 978-0-7148-3992-9
Winslow Homer; an American vision.
Griffin, Randall C.
Phaidon Press Ltd., ©2006 239 p. $69.95
This critical survey of Homer’s life and work features all of his major
paintings, along with a selection of his lesser-known etchings and
woodcuts. Asserting that Homer’s works have helped shape America’s
view of itself, Griffin (art history, Southern Methodist U.) argues that
Homer exemplifies the aspiration to create specifically American subjects
and a specifically American character. In support of his argument,
Griffin discusses the criticisms and themes of Homer’s work, such as
post-war American values, the relationship between man and nature, and
the American pastoral.
ND249 1-55238-183-8
Reta Summers Cowley.
Fenton, Terry. (Art in Profile series)
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 107 p. $29.95 (pa)
As part of a series focusing on contemporary Canadian artists and archi-
tects co-published with the Mendel Art Gallery, Saskatoon, of which
Fenton is a former director, this volume profiles Reta Cowley (1910-2004).
From his personal acquaintance with this Saskatoon-area watercolorist,
the author showcases the work of a major contributor to Canadian land-
scape painting. Her critical thoughts on her own work is included as well
as a record of her painting trips, as evidence that she was hardly a
Sunday painter as sometimes criticized. Distributed by Michigan State U.
Press.
ND547 2006-043621 0-06-054558-5
The private lives of the Impressionists.
Roe, Sue.
HarperCollins, ©2006 356 p. $29.95
Biographer Roe describes the private lives of the nine Impressionist
painters—Manet, Monet, Pissarro, Cézane, Renoir, Degas, Sisley, Berthe
Morisot, and Mary Cassatt—and illuminates the intersections between
their personal experiences and the themes and development of their art.
Her chronological account covers the years between the first meeting of
the Impressionists in 1860 and the introduction of their work in New
York in 1886. The volume features b&w artistic reproductions and
archival photographs as well as a section of color plates.
ND553 2006-000843 978-0-87413-934-1
Antoine Watteau; perspectives on the artist and the
culture of his time.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary D. Sheriff. (University of Delaware Press
studies in seventeenth- and eighteenth- century art and culture)
Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 201 p. $62.50
Sheriff (art history, U. of North Carolina) presents ten essays from
scholars of French history, literature, and art discussing the art and
context of 18th-century painter Antoine Watteau, known for his fetes
galantes and scenes from the theater. Topics explored include the history
of writing about the artist across the centuries; how the practice of
drawing shaped Watteau’s artistic production; how his works respond to
his contemporary social and political climate; his relationship to various
theatrical institutions; and his influence on contemporaries and modern
painters, among other subjects. About 30 of Watteau’s drawings and
paintings are reproduced in b&w. This book is distributed by Associated
University Presses.
ND565 2005-053446 978-0-942614-34-3
German and Netherlandish Paintings, 1450-1600; the
collections of the Nelson-Atkins Museum of Art.
Dunbar, Burton L. (The collections of the Nelson-Atkins Museum of Art;
2)
Nelson-Atkins Museum of Art, ©2005 347 p. $75.00
The remarkable collection of top-notch German and Netherlandish
paintings held by the Nelson-Atkins Museum in Kansas City receives sub-
stantial treatment in the lengthy essays on each of the selected paintings
presented in this volume. Dunbar’s (art history, U. of Missouri, Kansas
City) in-depth analysis of the work includes a scientific report of the den-
drochronology of the panel and infrared reflectography of the painting,
and the place of the painting within the artist’s oeuvre. The lengthy intro-
duction surveys the history of collecting in the Midwest of Northern
Renaissance painting. The volume, which is oversize (9.25x12.25″), is
illustrated with color and b&w images of excellent quality. Distributed by
the U. of Washington Press.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
ND623 2006-008312 978-0-87413-936-5
Caravaggio; realism, rebellion, reception.
Title main entry. Ed. by Genevieve Warwick. (University of Delaware
Press studies in 17th- and 18th- century art and culture)
Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 145 p. $52.50
These essays consider Caravaggio’s revolutionary “realism” from a range
of perspectives. As a whole, the volume adds to the understanding of
Caravaggio’s relationship to the “new” science of observation cham-
pioned by Galileo and reexamines the theoretical nature of Caravaggio’s
seemingly direct realism. Some of the essays extend the research on
Caravaggio’s intellectual and social milieu and the effects of high and
low cultures. Distributed by Associated University Presses.
ND653 2006-001759 978-0-8014-4461-6
Tables of knowledge; Descartes in Vermeer’s studio.
Stone, Harriet.
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 168 p. $39.95
Stone (Romance languages and literature, comparative literature,
Washington U., St. Louis) demonstrates that Dutch genre paintings and
still lifes enact in visual form a process of recording information similar
to that of Descartes. Investigating such diverse topics as the explosion of
data about the natural world resulting from 17th-century advances in
optics and the proliferation of material goods in prosperous Dutch
homes, she contends that art offered the Dutch a way of bearing witness
to ordinary experiences that was satisfying and also surprisingly
Cartesian. Her assertions are well argued and supported with 16 color
reproductions of Dutch masterworks.
ND673 978-1-904449-20-1
Rubens.
Lawson, Susan. (Chaucer art)
Chaucer Press, ©2006 192 p. $55.00
Lawson approaches Ruben’s masterful secular and religious paintings by
exploring his mix of sex, violence and spectacle in relation to the taste of
Counter-Reformation Catholic Antwerp. She grapples with both his
infamous rendering of flesh and the body and the diversity of his work.
By putting into context Ruben’s absolutist politics and Catholic rhetoric,
Lawson shows how his painterly style and understanding of color,
rhythm, scale and space have transcended his own times and circum-
stances. Distributed by International Publishers Marketing.
ND699 2006-922385 0-87846-702-5
Concerning the spiritual in art.
Kandinsky, Wassily. Trans. by Michael T. H. Sadler.
MFA Publications, ©2006 138 p. $24.95
First published in 1912, Kandinsky’s treatise on art lays the theoretical
foundation for German Expressionism and for non-objective art in
general. This new edition includes not only letters between Kandinsky
and his translator, Michael Sadler, but also Kandinsky’s unpublished
prose poems from the time of the book’s composition. With these addi-
tions, as well as the introduction by Adrian Glew, archivist at the Tate,
this text is an important record of the modernist period.
ND1318 2006-021563 978-0-7546-5404-9
Re-membering masculinity in early modern Florence;
widowed bodies, mourning, and portraiture.
Levy, Allison. (Women and gender in the early modern world)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 194 p. $99.95
In her innovative and fruitful approach to Renaissance portraiture, Levy
(art history, Wheaton College) argues that these paintings were generated
within a discourse of male anxiety and pre-mortuary mourning. She con-
tends that portraiture could defer memory loss, or, at least, pictorially
console the subject against his own potentially unmourned death. To
support her arguments, Levy examines an extensive selection of 15th- and
16th-century male and female portraits, primarily associated with the
Medici family, circle and court, in the context of historical writings and
contemporary discourses, including literary and cultural theory, psycho-
analysis, feminism and gender studies, as well as critical theories of race
and disability.
ND1460 92-1-101098-5
Water, mirror of the world.
Silva, Sergio da.
United Nations Publications, ©2006 190 p. $29.00 (pa)
In 2002, United Nations U. in Tokyo hosted an exhibition of photographs
by Sergio da Silva, titled “Water, Mirror of the World.” Rather than
emphasizing the harm done by humans to this vital natural resource,
the inviting and colorful images focused on the life-giving qualities of
water. Proceeds from the sale of this exhibition catalog will be donated
to projects assisting in the protection of fresh water.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
ND2590 2006-015287 0-8109-5747-7
Graffiti women; street art from five continents.
Ganz, Nicholas.
Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 223 p. $29.95
This volume surveys the work of female graffiti and street artists, with
approximately 1,000 color illustrations making up the bulk of the book.
Often ignored, these women have had to fight against the idea that
graffiti is a male realm. Ganz briefly discusses the trend in all parts of
the world, and shows the work of many artists around the globe, with
some background on them accompanying photos of tags, characters, and
other art. No index is present. Ganz is a street and fine artist based in
Germany. He is the author of Graffiti World.
NE507 2006-923961 1-890751-13-8
Paths to the press; printmaking and American women
artists, 1910-1930.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth G. Seaton.
M. Kistler Beach Museum of Art, ©2006 261 p. $40.00 (pa)
Featuring the art of female printmakers from America, this volume
accompanies an exhibition at Kansas State U.’s Beach Museum of Art, for
which the editor is assistant curator. A series of essays in the first section
offer a history and analysis of the art as it was employed by American
women between 1910 and 1930, touching on topics including the artists’
relationships with men, women’s depiction of women, and printmaking
as a teaching tool. The remaining two thirds of the book comprise alpha-
betically arranged profiles of approximately 80 artists; each artist’s two-
page biography is accompanied by one or two examples of her work.
Additionally, a list of the names of 400 women printmakers and their
dates of birth and death is also provided. This book is published by the
Marianna Kistler Beach Museum of Art, Kansas State U. Distribution is
by U. of Washington Press.
NE1321 90-74822-88-6
Chikanobu; modernity and nostalgia in Japanese prints.
Coats, Bruce A.
BRILL, ©2006 208 p. $89.00
Coats (art history and humanities, Scripps College) presents the first
monograph in English on the Meiji print artist Yoshu Chikanobu (1838-
1912), well known for his depictions of women and scenes of Japanese
history and legends. Coats places Chikanobu’s life and works in the his-
toric and artistic context of Meiji Japan, when rapid modernization and
westernization created an interest for old Japan among the Japanese and
when arts underwent significant changes. Hockley (art history,
Dartmouth), Kurita (Asian languages and literatures, Pomona) and
Mostow (Asian studies, U. of British Columbia) contribute essays on
Chikanobu’s work as it relates to Meiji literature, the heroic ethos in the
late Meiji period, and other topics relevant to the period. The text con-
tains over 270 full color illustrations; two of Chikanobu’s series of prints
are illustrated in their entirety.
NE2049 2001-037140 978-0-8204-5046-9
Making time; Picasso’s Suite 347 .
Holloway, Memory. (American University studies. Series XX: Fine arts;
v.35)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 268 p. $73.95
Between March and October of 1968, a year in which he uncharacteristi-
cally did very little drawing and almost no painting, Picasso produced
347 etchings in varying sizes and techniques. Halloway (20th-century art
history, U. of Massachusetts-Dartmouth) says that his concentration on
these etchings to the exclusion of other media makes them a particularly
condensed site for the construction of meaning. She explores how and
under what conditions he constructed that meaning.
NK28 2006-009866 978-0-19-518948-3
The Grove encyclopedia of decorative arts; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gordon Campbell.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 1201 p. $250.00
Campbell (Renaissance studies, U. of Leicester) presents a two-volume ref-
erence work for general readers, collectors, curators, and scholars fea-
turing some 3,000 articles covering all aspects of decorative arts from
cultures around the world. The text combines some 2,000 articles culled
from the 34-volume Grove Dictionary of Art (1996, ed. Jane Turner) with
1,000-plus new entries to cover designers, manufacturers, craftsmen and
their works; materials and techniques; and periods in the history of the
decorative arts. The entries include extensive cross-referencing in an easy-
to-use format and fully updated bibliographies. Illustrated with 600-plus
photographs of furniture, ceramics, jewelry, interior decoration, and
modern design, including 32 color plates.
–256–
NK535 2006-016228 978-1-55595-268-6
The George Washington collection; fine and decorative
arts at Mount Vernon.
Cadou, Carol Borchert.
Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 303 p. $60.00
Printed in an oversize format (9.5x12.25″) and containing full-page color
plates of 100 works and paintings, in addition to other photos of the
museum and comparative works, this catalogue does justice to the his-
toric collection in Mount Vernon. Clothing, furniture, glassware,
ceramics, and metalwork are among the works included, each with a full
catalogue entry. The seven chapters each begin with an essay, which
describe the context and history of the material. Topics include George
Washington as a planter, as a general, in retirement, and his and
Martha’s personal style. Cadou is curator at the Mount Vernon Estate &
Gardens.
NK835 2005-026152 0-271-02690-1
Transforming images; New Mexican santos in-between
worlds.
Title main entry. Ed. by Claire Farago and Donna Pierce.
Penn State U. Press, ©2006 355 p. $75.00
Dealing with Catholic instruments of religious devotion produced in New
Mexico from about 1760 to the radical transformation of local artistic tra-
dition in the 20th century, scholars of art history, music, literature,
genetics, and other disparate fields argue that local artistic practice is
indebted to many cultural traditions, and question why the tradition in
New Mexico has been understood exclusively in terms of its Spanish
roots. They also contend that the art traditions there have significance in
art history and theory generally.
NK1125 978-0-89689-332-0
Antique Trader antiques and collectibles price guide 2007,
23d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kyle Husfloen.
Krause Publications, ©2006 1007 p. $19.99 (pa)
This longstanding reference, begun humbly in the 1970s, now features
11,000 items, illustrated with 5,000 color photos. Issued annually, with
all new entries, this guide offers brief descriptions and price information
on items in the major categories of collecting—ceramics, glass, furniture—
as well as several dozen specialty categories—e.g. firearms, kitchenware,
paperweights, signs, and soda fountain and ice cream collectibles, among
others. New to this edition: eyewear, Foxy Grandpa collectibles, lipstick
tubes, snowmen, Syrocowood, and Harris Strong ceramic designs. Editor
Husfloen is a well-seasoned antiques expert and a long-time editor with
Antique Trader publications.
NK1447 2005-936755 0-8478-2804-2
Owen Jones; design, ornament, architecture, and theory in
an age in transition.
Flores, Carol A. Hrvol.
Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2006 275 p. $75.00
In addition to being exceptionally lovely, this volume contains a useful
and substantial text on Jones’s career, theory, and contribution to the
fields of architecture and architectural and decorative ornament. Flores
(architecture and planning, Ball State U.), a specialist on Jones, describes
Jones’s buildings, designs, and publications as part of a coherent and full
account of his career. The text is heavily illustrated with color and b&w
plates, including many full-page plates, all of superb quality. The volume
is oversized: 10.25x12.25″.
NK1464 2006-283825 978-0-7148-4547-0
Max Huber.
Von Moos, Stanislaus et al.
Phaidon Press Ltd., ©2006 232 p. $75.00
To assist their research, Max Huber’s widow granted this book’s authors
unrestricted access to the largest archive of the Swiss graphic designer’s
work. The result is an attractive career biography supported by 12 the-
matic portfolios that containing many never before published artworks
and photographs. Three sections cover Huber’s formative years in
Switzerland; his experience and legacy in the city of Milan and matu-
ration into a sought-after commercial designer; and finally his activity in
interior and exhibition design, in particular his collaboration with the
Castiglioni brothers. Portfolio themes include architecture and design,
politics, sport, music, publishing, textile industry, and stationery.
Oversize: 10x11.75″.
–257–
NK2113 2006-045220 978-0-7649-3764-4
The house beautiful.
Gannett, William C.
Pomegranate Communications, ©2006 — p. $25.00
As elegant as a Frank Lloyd Wright house but more ornate, this tribute
to the Arts and Crafts aesthetic features page designs by Wright and text
by Unitarian minister William Gannett, who muses on the requirements
for a “house beautiful.” Originally published in 1898 in a limited edition
of 90 copies, the book has been reproduced exactly, with the addition of
an introduction by Kruty, an expert on Wright and the Prairie School
from the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.
NK2115 2006-048257 978-1-58816-500-8
House beautiful color workshop; decorating stylish rooms.
Childs-Carlile, Sarah.
Hearst Books/Sterling, ©2006 160 p. $24.95
Featuring high quality color photography throughout, this guide for
homeowners explains how to use color to personalize their space and
create an inviting atmosphere. Introductory chapters cover the basics of
how colors work both singly and in combination. The main part of the
volume is organized into sections offering specific tips for each of six
main color palettes. The final section contains some more general color
solutions that can make rooms appear smaller or larger, divide or unify
spaces, and help with other architectural considerations.
NK2115 2006-045049 978-1-4027-4212-5
Living with books.
Powers, Alan.
Sterling Publishing Co., ©2006 144 p. $19.95 (pa)
If you are merely reading your books, you are missing half the fun of
having them, according to this guide to incorporating books into your
interior design. Powers goes from room to room to demonstrate the many
ways that books can create character in the home. This beautifully illus-
trated text shows vast, two-story libraries as well as tiny collections
tucked into stairways and unused fireplaces. Powers includes advice on
caring for books and instructions for building shelves.
NK2117 2006-048251 978-1-58816-589-3
House beautiful storage workshop.
Evelegh, Tessa.
Hearst Books/Sterling, ©2006 158 p. $24.95
Illustrated throughout with color photographs, this practical guide helps
readers to maximize the storage potential of any home. The first part of
the volume covers general issues, such as principles of organization and
types of storage (built-in vs. free-standing, for example). The remaining
chapters describe traditional and contemporary storage solutions for each
area of the home: living room, kitchen, dining room, bedroom,
bathroom, hallways, and work/play spaces.
NK2406 2006-281476 1-57432-489-6
Early American furniture; a guide to who, when, and
where.
Obbard, John W.
Collector Books, ©2006 464 p. $19.95 (pa)
Several US colonies can lay claim to producing Chippendale furniture,
and the same can be said for a variety of other styles also sure to confuse
novice collectors. Obbard works from the originals and from a variety of
primary sources, including period catalogs, to place pieces of all sizes
and shapes squarely within their proper geography. He begins with the
all-important evidence offered by varieties of wood and their treatment,
then moves through the colonies of New England, the Middle Atlantic
and the South to find major themes and trends. He then describes
various pieces ranging from a range of chairs to sofas, chests, desks,
serving and dining tables, cupboards, wardrobes, tea and card tables,
stands for candles and work tables, daybeds, bedsteads, and furniture
peculiar to certain regions. The illustrations are well-rendered and
detailed and the references are comprehensive and accessible.
NK2715 2005-033218 0-8109-5484-2
Chairs; a history.
Dampierre, Florence de.
Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 430 p. $65.00
A beautifully and generously illustrated homage to chairs, this history
shows chairs in all their guises, humble, grand, practical and wacky, and
in many stages of development. Dampierre, an antiques dealer and
furniture historian, begins with the emergence of chairs in pre-dynastic
Egypt and progresses to the forms, uses and social meanings of various
types of seating in Classical Greece and the Roman Empire through the
present day. Along the way, she makes fascinating observations about
historical personalities, furniture- making technology, social life and
fashions of dress and deportment.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
NK3600 978-1-55407-179-1
The complete guide to calligraphy; master scripts of the
West and East, step-by-step with 45 projects.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ralph Cleminson.
Firefly Books Ltd., ©2006 224 p. $35.00 (pa)
This spiral-bound volume meant for calligraphers demonstrates Latin,
non-Latin (Ancient Greek, Russian Cyrillic, Hebrew, and Arabic), and pic-
tographic (Japanese and Chinese) scripts, together with the history and
culture behind them. Cleminson (Slavonic studies, U. of Portsmouth, UK,
and Central European U., Budapest) and other calligraphers and artists
also describe how to use authentic writing materials and apply them to
craft projects, such as greeting cards, invitations, plaques, poems, and
lampshades, with many color photos and illustrations as a guide. They
outline the different types of materials and beginning skills and tech-
niques, with step-by-step illustrations of how to draw letters and numbers
in each script.
NK3637 2006-042062 978-0-8348-0571-2
77 dances; Japanese calligraphy by poets, monks, and
scholars, 1568-1868.
Addiss, Stephen.
Weatherhill, Inc., ©2006 259 p. $65.00
Addiss (art, U. of Richmond, Virginia), who is also a calligrapher, has
written essays to accompany each of the 77 works of calligraphy of this
catalogue displayed in a traveling exhibition originating at the U. of
Richmond Museums. Also a calligrapher, Addiss’s essays are adept and
illuminating in their analysis of the unique characteristics of each artist’s
achievement in this learned and poetic art. The works are grouped into
the categories of Waka, Karayo, literati, Confucian, Haiku, and Zen, with
each work presented as a full-page color plate, in an oversized format
(8.75x12″). A glossary and introduction to East Asian calligraphy are
included.
NK4648 2006-049191 978-90-04-14445-3
Dionysos in archaic Greece; an understanding through
images.
Isler-Kerenyi, Cornelia. Trans. by Wilfred G. E. Watson. (Religions in the
Graeco-Roman world; v.160)
BRILL, ©2007 291+ p. $169.00
Dionysos is by far the most common subject of Greek vase painting
during the sixth and fifth centuries BC, but his image remains contro-
versial and obscure. Classical archaeologist Isler-Kerenyi suggests that
European scholars are uncomfortable accepting classical culture as a
system based on values different from their own, and privilege literary
evidence and dismiss any graphic evidence that conflicts with it. She
finds that the pictures tell a different story of the important deity. No
publication data is provided for the original Dionysos nella Grecia arcaica.
NK6784 2005-057896 978-4-7700-2494-7
The art of Japanese sword polishing.
Takaiwa, Setsuo et al.
Kodansha International, ©2006 191 p. $45.00
The Japanese sword has long been valued for practical and aesthetic
reasons, and the art of sword polishing has evolved over centuries to a
highly-specialized skill. Of this text’s four authors, Takaiwa is one of
Japan’s top sword polishers, Yoshihara is ranked among the top sword-
smiths in Japan, and Leon and Hiroko Kapp have studied Japanese
swords for decades and written two books on the topic. The four authors
combine their knowledge and experiences to create the first book in
English to explain how the Japanese sword is polished today, and to illus-
trate the methods, materials, and tools used for this process. Illustrated
throughout with b&w photographs and diagrams, the text will appeal to
collectors and interested general readers.
NK7150 2006-013727 978-0-300-11736-3
The art of the goldsmith in late fifteenth-century
Germany; the Kimbell Virgin and her bishop.
Smith, Jeffrey Chipps. (Kimbell masterpiece series)
Kimbell Art Museum, ©2006 86 p. $16.95 (pa)
Smith (European art, U. of Texas, Austin) presents a monograph on the
silver Virgin and Child statuette, housed in Fort Worth’s Kimbell Art
Museum. Made in south Germany during the late 15th century for a pow-
erful bishop of Echstätt, the sculpture is one of the rare surviving mas-
terpieces of the art of the goldsmith. The text examines the creation of
the statuette, its significance in the context of other works of art in
Eichstätt, and the story of Bishop Reichenau and his intense devotion to
the Virgin Mary. Illustrated with 78 b&w and color photographs, dia-
grams and reproductions. Distributed in the U.S. by Yale U. Press.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
NK7373 2006-016695 978-1-55595-270-9
Women’s tales; four leading Israeli jewelers.
Taragin, Davira Spiro et al.
Hudson Hills Press, ©2006 128 p. $50.00
Documenting an international collaboration between the Israel Museum
in Jerusalem and the Racine Art Museum in Wisconsin, this beautifully
illustrated exhibition catalog focuses on the careers of four prominent
Israeli women jewelers: Bianca Eshel-Gershuni, Vered Kaminski, Esther
Knobel and Deganit Stern Schocken. The volume includes a discussion of
the context in which the artists developed, biographies of each women,
and essays evaluating their work.
NK8595 2006-003680 978-4-7700-3017-7
Plastic culture; how Japanese toys conquered the world.
Phoenix, Woodrow.
Kodansha International, ©2006 109 p. $29.95
Extolling the creative potential of plastics, a London-based comics
artist/critic traces the history of Japanese toys from the postwar period’s
Godzillas to today’s “urban vinyl” blending graphic design and art.
Phoenix draws on interviews with leading Japanese toymakers, and fea-
tures full-color photos of collectible toys ranging from the cute to bondage
fantasy figures. A glossary of terms includes production methods and
“shokuan” (action toys that come free with other products).
NX175 2006-046917 0-7734-5779-8
How to respond to strangeness in art; four studies in the
unfamiliar.
Greene, David B.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 157 p. $109.95
Greene (art, North Carolina State U.) grapples with issues regarding
works of art that depict an engagement between two elements or cultures
that are significantly different. His case studies are Mahler’s music and
neo-Daoist poetry; Ming landscape paintings; the Iranian rug in
European interior design; and textiles, architecture, and narratives from
Guatemala.
NX180 2005-037730 0-7546-4002-7
Visual culture and decolonisation in Britain.
Title main entry. Ed. by Simon Faulkner and Anadi Ramamurthy.
(British art and visual culture since 1750, new readings)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 277 p. $99.95
For editors Faulkner (history of art and design, Manchester Metropolitan
U., UK) and Ramamurthy (media and cultural history, U. of Central
Lancashire, UK), and presumably their contributors, decolonization
means much more than formal constitutional decolonization, instead
referring to “the interrelationships and conflicts between those complex
historical forces that have been involved with the ongoing deconstruction
of empire, and those that have defended colonialism and reconstructed
imperialism in new contexts,” as well as ongoing cultural processes
through which lingering aspects of colonialism and imperialism in the
cultural sphere are critiqued or defended. It is the visual aspects of this
latter meaning (as they relate to the decolonization of the British Empire)
to which the nine historical essays presented attend, although obviously
not in isolation from the former. Individual chapters discuss the re-artic-
ulation of otherness in feature film images of Africa, photographic rep-
resentations of Caribbean migrants in England, corporate advertisements
concerning large industrializing project in the decolonizing world as a
form of “controlling gaze,” and the appropriation of colonial imagery in
pro-Zionist films, among other topics.
NX587 2006-002245 978-0-292-71295-9
Amazigh arts in Morocco; women shaping Berber
identity.
Becker, Cynthia J.
U. of Texas Press, ©2006 225 p. $45.00
The wife of a Moroccan, Becker (art history, Boston U.) has spent several
years living among the Ait Khabbash women of southeastern Morocco
where she gained unique access to their artistic rituals. Her study focuses
on the women’s role in the process of identity construction by examining
the centrality of the textiles, jewelry, and other art forms they create to
the social relations and ethnic identity of Moroccan Berbers. The text
explores the complexity of women’s roles in the Islamic societies of Africa
and demonstrates the part played by women’s agency in negotiating
complex social and religious issues. The author argues that women’s
control over the visual symbols of Berber ethnic identity grants them
power and prestige while simultaneously restricting their societal roles.
–258–
NX650 2006-009663 978-0-415-34522-4
Self/image; technology, representation, and the
contemporary subject.
Jones, Amelia.
Routledge, ©2006 258 p. $35.95 (pa)
Jones (history of art, U. of Manchester, UK) explores the Euro-American
cultural use of modern imaging technologies (film, video, etc.) in order
to “render and/or confirm the self,” arguing that since the early 19th
century artists have pushed imaging technologies to interrogate the limits
of subjectivity, thus exposing the “inexorable failure of the self as a
coherent knowable entity.” She makes this argument by reviewing
examples of artistic productions using visual representation technologies,
from Los Angeles activist art collaborative products to Australian body
artist Stelarc’ implementation of robotics to render the body obsolete.
LANGUAGE, LITERATURE
P26 2005-055296 0-8204-7162-3
Contexts—historical, social, linguistic; studies in
celebration of Toril Swan.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kevin McCafferty et al.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2005 370 p. $70.95 (pa)
Swan’s work sweeps across geography and themes, and this collection of
19 papers reflects her abilities in originating ideas and encouraging stu-
dents in such diverse fields as onomastics, adverbials, language and
gender, diachronic and synchronic syntax, comparative linguistics,
metaphor and discourse. After a fascinating essay on the depths behind
the meanings of her first name, contributors examine functionality, lan-
guage processing and interpretation, female leadership in academia, posi-
tioning oneself as a scholar, female linguistic activism, gender stereotypes
in later modern English, SXVX clauses in Old and Middle English, the
existential “there,” the Northern Subject Rule in nineteenth-century
Ireland, Scandinavian pseudo-possessors, Middle Norwegian declarative
clauses, teenagers’ slang in London and Madrid, Norwegian child lan-
guage and the history of English, metaphors of structure in higher edu-
cation Kristeva as scientist or charlatan and the achievement of empathy
in therapeutic interaction.
P37 2005-051529 0-582-50575-5
An introduction to psycholinguistics, 2d ed.
Steinberg, Danny D. and Natalia V. Sciarini. (Learning about language)
Pearson Education Limited, ©2006 306 p. $41.33 (pa)
Steinberg (Surugadai U.) and Sciarini (Yale U. Research Services and
Collections Dept.) offer an introductory overview of the psychology of lan-
guage as it relates to learning, mind and brain as well as various aspects
of society and culture. Reflecting advances in the field of psycholin-
guistics since publication of the first edition in 1993, the second edition
features a radically new theory of grammar—Natural Grammar—unique
in its ability to account for the psycholinguistic processes of speech com-
prehension and speech production. For students, lecturers, and
researchers in psychology, linguistics, philosophy, second-language
teaching, speech pathology, and related fields.
P40 2005-057220 90-272-2710-1
Explorations in the sociology of language and religion.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tope Omoniyi and Joshua A. Fishman.
(Discourse approaches to politics, society, and culture; v.20)
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 347 p. $144.00
Social scientists from many countries provide an overview of the nature
of the interface between language and religion as revealed by the socio-
logical study of them. Among their topics are language and world order
in Baha’i perspective, societal multi-lingualism and multi-faithism,
maligned and misunderstood marginal movements and British law, and
the role of liturgical literacy in British Muslim communities.
Prices are U.S. "list." They may vary outside the U.S. Bookstores, jobbers,
or the presses will fill orders. Do not order books from Book News Inc.
–259–
P40 2006-014470 978-1-85359-921-7
Language planning and policy in Pacific; Fiji, the
Philippines and Vanuatu.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard B. Baldauf and Robert B. Kaplan.
(Language planning and policy; v.1)
Multilingual Matters Ltd., ©2006 239 p. $74.95
Some estimate that over 4,000 languages co-exist in this widely scattered
geography, a number which includes several non-indigenous languages
inherited from colonialism and migration. Adding to this complexity and
diversity are the facts that despite once being a Spanish colony The
Philippines is largely unmarked by the language, Vanuatu names English
and French as the official languages of the country and the principal lan-
guages of education but calls Bislama its national language, and Fijians
are having difficulty engaging with English despite its importance in
technology and commerce. The four essays here describe the little-known
language situations in each locale and the work already done in language
planning, including scholarly reviews, with the intention of developing a
richer theory to guide language policy and planning in other polities
facing such diversity. Distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.
P51 2006-022376 978-1-84541-053-7
Learning the arts of linguistic survival; languaging,
tourism, life.
Phipps, Alison. (Tourism and cultural change; 10)
Channel View Publications, ©2007 205 p. $44.95 (pa)
Phipps (arts, humanities and education, U. of Glasgow) examines how
tourism relates to language acquisition. She analyzes the relationship
between preparing for the immersion experience and actually encoun-
tering it, details the contributions of simple conversations and games,
and describes the process of moving from language to culture. She argues
that tourism, especially that which encourages learning a language, pre-
serves valuable languages and cultures and counters the increasing dom-
inance of English. Distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.
P53 2006-022868 978-3-11-018603-1
Catching language; the standing challenge of grammar
writing.
Title main entry. Ed. by Felix K. Ameka et al. (Trends in linguistics,
studies and monographs; 167)
Mouton de Gruyter, ©2006 662 p. $132.30
Twenty-two international academics contribute 19 chapters exploring the
complexity of the task of writing a descriptive grammar and the diversity
of skills required of the grammar writer. The text is intended to help
scholars and students appreciate the challenges of grammar writers, and
to help those intending to write a descriptive grammar to clarify their
goals and methods. A sampling of topics: reflections on native speaker
and nonnative speaker descriptions of a language, cross-linguistic gram-
matography as database creation, the organization of reference
grammars, the role of linguistic theory in writing grammars, describing
word order, heterosemy and the grammar- lexicon tradeoff, field
semantics and grammar-writing, converbs in an African perspective, dis-
posal constructions in Sinitic languages, and the interplay of synchronic
and diachronic discovery in Siouan grammar-writing.
P53 2006-020017 1-932559-11-6
The politics of second language writing; in search of the
promised land.
Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Kei Matsuda et al. (Second language
writing)
Parlor Press, ©2006 320 p. $30.00 (pa)
Nineteen academics from the U.S. and Canada contribute 16 chapters
examining second language writing classroom practices in the larger con-
texts of institutional politics and policies. The text is organized roughly
by the level of instruction: K-12, language support programs in higher
education, English for academic and professional purposes, assessment,
and the politics of the profession. Topics addressed include policies on
assessment, placement, credit, class size, course content, instructional
practices, teacher preparation, and teacher support, and political aspects
of the relationships and interaction between second language writing
professionals and their colleagues at the program, department, school,
college, and university levels and beyond. For individuals directly
involved in the teaching, research, and administration of second lan-
guage writing, and members of programs where second language
writing courses and programs are located.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
P85 2006-008876 0-299-22040-0
Lotman and cultural studies; encounters and extensions.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andreas Schönle.
U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 383 p. $50.00
A co-founder of the Tartu-Moscow school of semiotics, Yuri Lotman (1922-
1993) was one of the most prominent and influential Russian scholars of
the 20th century. This volume contains 12 contributions from American
and British academics exploring Lotman’s work and extending his the-
ories to a variety of fields. Earlier versions of some of the papers were
first presented at a 1999 conference held at the U. of Michigan. Editor
Schönle teaches Russian studies at Queen Mary, U. of London.
P85 2003-109008 0-7619-4952-6
Roland Barthes; 3v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mike Gane & Nicholas Gane. (Sage masters of
modern social thought)
Sage Publications, ©2004 380 p. $864.00
The work of French intellectual Roland Barthes (1915-1980) has been
called “a veritable fever-chart of all the significant intellectual and critical
tendencies since World War II” and consists of forays into literary crit-
icism, social theory, philosophy, and semiotics, among other intellectual
endeavors. This three-volume set collects 65 previously published
scholarly essays on Barthes dating from the early 1980s through the turn
of the century. The essays have been grouped into eight thematic sections,
the first two of which constitute the first volume and provide discussion
of Barthes’ relationship to other thinkers and exploration of issues of
method, rhetoric, and writing. The next five sections are organized
according to specific works, including the early writings, Mythologies,
Empire of Signs and other writings on Japan, S/Z (a critical reading of
Balzac’s Sarrasine), and Pleasure of the Text together with A Lover’s
Discourse. The final section, taking up most of the third volume, is ded-
icated to some of the overarching themes of Barthes’ work, including the
death of the author; art cinema and theater; photography; and gender,
sexuality, and identity.
P90 2006-028670 0-8058-3959-3
Explaining communication; contemporary theories and
exemplars.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bryan B. Whaley and Wendy Samter. (Lea’s
communication series)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 467 p. $55.00 (pa)
In this volume, scholars offer their views on communication theories for
undergraduate students in communication studies, interpersonal com-
munication, and advanced theory courses. Whaley (U. of San Francisco)
and Samter (Bryant U.) assemble 21 chapters that review research
findings and also provide a developmental framework. Theories—such as
constructivism, problematic integration theory, politeness theory, and
communication accommodation theory—were chosen because they are
active, longstanding, or have not been detailed elsewhere. Scholars
discuss the nature of theory and fundamental concepts in interpersonal
communication; individual differences in message production; human
communication from dyadic and cultural levels; and the roots of com-
munication theory. Both subject and author indexes are provided.
P91 0-8058-6094-0
Assessing media education; a resource handbook for
educators and administrators, component 3: Developing
an assessment plan.
Title main entry. Ed. by William G. Christ. (LEA’s communication
series)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 50 p. $19.50 (pa)
This book is the third component of the Assessing Media Education series,
which provides guidelines for media educators and administrators in
higher education who, responding to greater demands for accountability,
are developing or improving student-learning assessment strategies.
Component three, edited by Christ (communication, Trinity U.),
comprises three chapters: one discussing the need for assessment and
defining key terms; the second advising in the creation of an assessment
plan, including the identification of institutional and program goals and
the creation of assessment criteria; and the third walking the reader
through the steps to conceiving a meaningful mission statement, both for
media education programs and for broader institutions. No index is
provided.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
P95 2005-010413 0-415-33779-8
Mass media and political communication in new
democracies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Katrin Voltmer. (Routledge/ECPR studies in
European political science; 42)
Routledge, ©2006 262 p. $115.00
In these papers drawn from a workshop sponsored by the European
Consortium for Political Research in 2002, contributors describe their
studies in how issues of mass communication relate to the consolidation
of new democracies. They consider the changes in how journalism is per-
ceived, the influence of political actors on the media, especially in elec-
tions, the way ordinary people interpret political messages, and the new
role of the Internet as they cover examples from around the world,
including the media and transition in Spain from 1975 to 1978, press
freedom and television campaigning in post-communist Russia, media
after apartheid in South Africa, credibility in fragmented journalism and
electoral campaigning in Latin America, the media in the 2002 Ukrainian
elections, and professional media and the Internet in Taiwan. Topics on
audience responses include the issue of trust in Russian media and com-
parative surveys of Uruguay, Chile, Hungary and Bulgaria.
P95 2006-051486 978-0-393-92819-8
Media politics; a citizen’s guide. (DVD included)
Iyengar, Shanto and Jennifer McGrady.
W.W. Norton, ©2007 361 p. $41.50 (pa)
Iyengar and McGrady (Stanford U.) provide a text that discusses the rise
of media-based politics in the US, how the media affects American pol-
itics, and how politicians use it to their advantage. Campaigning, public
relations tactics, and the effects of media on the general public are also
detailed. A DVD containing historical and recent video examples, such as
political advertisements, debates, and news coverage from the 1960s to
the present, is included.
P95 2006-016416 978-0-7546-5685-2
Textual conversations in the Renaissance; ethics, authors,
technologies.
Title main entry. Ed. by Zachary Lesser and Benedict Robinson.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 228 p. $99.95
Scholars mostly of English literature present case studies to help illu-
minate the concept and practice of conversation during the Renaissance
that was carried out in a medium that has survived to the present. Their
topics include Marlowe’s republican authorship, Chaucer’s Pardoner’s
and Franklin’s Tales and Spenser’s Faerie Queene books I and III, and the
puzzling letters of Sister Elizabeth Sander (or Saunders).
P96 2006-022220 978-1-4051-4411-7
Bridging the gaps in global communication.
Newsom, Doug.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 153 p. $84.95
A public relations practitioner and teacher (Texas Christian U.), Newsom
alerts readers to differences in communication styles around the world
that they are increasingly likely to encounter, and perhaps misunder-
stand, as communication technology becomes faster and broader. She
considers global sources of information and their systems of communi-
cations, and some theoretical underpinnings for inter-personal and public
information, and the cultural context in which it is both given and
received.
P96 2006-296570 0-7453-2484-3
Language wars; the role of media and culture in global
terror and political violence.
Lewis, Jeff.
Pluto Press, ©2005 280 p. $27.95 (pa)
Lewis (RMIT U. Melbourne, Australia) argues that global terror and
political violence are essentially formed in relation to broadcast commu-
nications, especially television. He looks at conflict and culture in relation
to Islam, 9/11, the invasion and occupation of Iraq, and the Bali
bombings.
–260–
P96 2006-003198 0-8058-5548-3
Media diversity and localism; meaning and metrics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Philip M. Napoli. (LEA’s communication series)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 400 p. $125.00
In June 2003, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) chose to
relax a wide range of media ownership regulations, allowing for an
unprecedented degree of media consolidation. Containing 16 contribu-
tions from scholars representing a variety of disciplines, this volume
addresses some of the challenges and issues related to media diversity
and localism in this new policy era. A sampling of topics includes the
wage effects of radio consolidation; the absence and stereotyping of
people of color by the major broadcast television networks; and the
organization and accessibility of online content. Editor Napoli is director
of Fordham University’s Donald McGannon Communication Research
Center.
P96 2006-933349 978-0-7618-3630-8
Poetic acts and new media.
O’Conner, Tom.
Univ. Press of America, ©2007 174 p. $28.95 (pa)
Through his study of the boundaries between competing genres and
media, O’Connor has created a new artistic genre, which he calls “media
poetry.” This mode of expression seeks to transform mass culture by self-
consciously acknowledging the ways textual, audio and/or visual signs
are constructed according to their simulation and not their represen-
tation. To define media poetry, he discusses the works of several poets,
contemporary films and the television shows Twin Peaks and Buffy the
Vampire Slayer.
P99 978-0-8248-3137-0
Pragmatics & language learning; v.11, 2006.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathleen Bardovi-Harlig et al.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 407 p. $30.00 (pa)
Seventeen international academics contribute 13 chapters derived from
the most recent Pragmatics and Language Learning conference held at
Indiana U., Bloomington, in 2004. The papers discuss pragmatics and
language learning in a range of languages, based on language data col-
lected by a variety of means, and interpreted from both acquisitional and
instructional perspectives. A sampling of topics: the role of formulas in
the acquisition of L2 pragmatics, delay as an interactional resource in
native speaker-nonnative speaker academic interaction, interactional com-
petence and the use of modal expressions in decision-making activities,
making requests in e-mail, L2 learner attitudes toward the teaching of
pragmatics in a university-level Spanish course, and teaching the negoti-
ation of multi-turn speech acts. No subject index.
P107 978-1-85359-923-1
Disinventing and reconstituting languages.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sinfree Makoni and Alastair Pennycook.
(Bilingual education and bilingualism)
Multilingual Matters Ltd., ©2007 249 p. $42.95 (pa)
Thirteen international academics and independent scholars contribute
ten chapters questioning assumptions about the nature of languages and
how they are conceptualized. Key points addressed include the socio-
political contexts within which ways of thinking about language
emerged; how these ways of thinking about sign languages, indigenous
literacies, or African American Vernacular may militate against the devel-
opment of radically different and possibly more nuanced understandings
of language; and ways in which revising how we think about language
affects the nature of the language teaching materials we develop and our
language-teaching goals. For linguistics theorists, scholars, students, and
practitioners.
P107 2006-030707 1-4051-6031-4
Philosophy of language.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ernest Sosa and Enrique Villanueva.
(Philosophical issues; 16)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 357 p. $39.95 (pa)
Featuring contributions by distinguished active philosophers, this volume
surveys current thinking on the philosophy of language. It opens with a
discussion of “Things and their Aspects” by Nicholas Asher (U. of Texas
at Austin). Other topics include (for example) Soames on descriptive ref-
erence-fixing; understanding as immersion; and interpreting concate-
nation and concatenates. Editor Sosa is affiliated with Rutgers and Brown
Universities. The volume is not indexed.
–261–
P115 2006-045893 90-272-5390-0
Codeswitching on the web; English and Jamaican Creole
in e-mail communication.
Hinrichs, Lars. (Pragmatics & beyond; v.147)
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 301 p. $138.00
Using personal emails of students at the University of the West Indies
Mona in Jamaica as a corpus, Hinrichs (U. of Freiburg) studies how the
discourse functions of Jamaica Creole in computer communications
differ from those in the spoken Creole of the Jamaican diaspora, what
the implications of those differences are for studies on English as a world
language and Jamaican sociolinguistics, and how discourse analysis of
computer communications can benefit from a third-wave inspired, style-
centered approach.
P115 2006-014469 978-1-85359-916-3
Linguistic landscape; new approach to multilingualism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Durk Gorter.
Multilingual Matters Ltd., ©2006 89 p. $69.95
Gorter (head of the social sciences research group at the Fryske
Akademy, a Netherlands-based scientific center for research focusing on
the Frisian language) presents a special edition of the International
Journal of Multilingualism that contains four papers on the linguistic
landscape of cities in Israel, Thailand, Japan, the Netherlands (Friesland),
and Spain (the Basque Country). The papers analyze the “language of
public road signs, advertising billboards, street names, place names,
commercial shop signs, and public signs on government buildings” in
each of the cases. With some of the studies discussing homogenous lin-
guistic landscapes and others looking at more mixed ones, the papers
discuss issues of the relation between the linguistic landscape and
societal power relations, issues of language borrowing, the notions of
power and solidarity as they relate to official and nonofficial multi-
lingual signs, and comparative uses of minority languages versus state
languages. Distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.
P118 2006-047727 90-272-5301-3
The acquisition of syntax in Romance languages.
Title main entry. Ed. by Vincent Torrens and Linda Escobar. (Language
acquisition & language disorders; v.41)
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 421 p. $150.00
Torrens and Escobar (Psycholinguistic Institute, Madrid) present a
selection of papers from a workshop on first and second language acqui-
sition held in Madrid in September 2004, addressing a wide range of
acquisition phenomena from different Romance languages. All share a
common theoretical approach based on the Principles and Parameters
theory, and depart from the view that language acquisition can be
explained in terms of learning language specific rules, constraints, or
structures. The 18 contributions are organized into sections on clitics,
determiners and pronouns; verbs, auxiliaries and inflection; movement
and resumptive pronouns; syntax/discourse interface; and L2 acquisition.
A sampling of topics: definite and bare noun contrasts in child Catalan,
early operators and late topic-drop/pro-drop, the acquisition of A- and A’-
bound pronouns in Brazilian Portuguese, subject pronouns in bilinguals,
and the development of the syntax-discourse interface in Greek learners
of Spanish.
P118 2006-042702 90-272-1966-4
Synthesizing research on language learning and teaching.
Title main entry. Ed. by John M. Norris and Lourdes Ortega. (Language
learning and language teaching; v.13)
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 349 p. $42.95 (pa)
Nineteen academics from the U.S. and Canada contribute ten chapters to
the first collection of substantial work on research synthesis within
applied linguistics, with a focus on language learning and language
teaching topics. The text illustrates the many ins and outs of research syn-
thesis and offers guidance and models for its complex application, its
diverse epistemological choices, and its demanding methodologies.
Following an overview of the value and practice of synthesis, the text con-
tains five meta-analyses on universal grammar, task-based interaction,
corrective feedback, instructed pragmatics development, and reading
strategy training; a qualitative meta-synthesis on effective teaching for
English language learners; an historiographical synthesis of proficiency
assessment practices; and two commentaries by Nick Ellis and Craig
Chaudron. For graduate students, methodologists, senior academics and
theoreticians, teachers, curriculum developers, and policy makers.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
P118 0-8058-5738-9
Theories in second language acquisition; an introduction.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bill VanPatten and Jessica Williams. (Second
language acquistion research theoretical and methodological issues)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 261 p. $32.50 (pa)
Thirteen international academics contribute 12 chapters focusing on a
number of contemporary mainstream theories in second language acqui-
sition (SLA) research that have gained attention among scholars.
Designed for the beginning student of SLA theory and research, each of
the chapters follows the same model: the theory and its constructs, what
counts as evidence for the theory, common misunderstandings about the
theory, an exemplary study, and how the theory addresses the observable
phenomena of SLA.
P118 2006-013946 0-8058-3456-7
Ultimate attainment in second language acquisition; a
case study.
Lardiere, Donna.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 273 p. $59.95
Lardiere (linguistics, Georgetown U.) presents one of the longest- running
longitudinal case studies in second language acquisition. The subject,
Patty, a longtime acquaintance of the author, is a Chinese- American nat-
uralized immigrant who has achieved native-like proficiency in some
areas of her English idiolect but not in others. The study examines
various formal aspects of Patty’s spoken and written English, and
explores the nature of the relationship between knowledge of abstract
grammatical features and production of the morphological and syntactic
forms typically assumed to constitute evidence of those features. For
researchers and scholars in theoretical and applied linguistics, graduate
students in TESOL, and teachers who work with advanced learners of
foreign languages.
P119 2006-003199 0-8058-5694-3
Language policy, culture and identity in Asian contexts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Amy B.M. Tsui and James W. Tollefson.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 283 p. $34.50 (pa)
Now that English speakers in Asia outnumber those in countries where
English is the mother tongue, scholars from the Pacific Rim and Pakistan
explore how language policies in Asian countries have been affected by
the unprecedented spread of English and the challenge that this spread
has posed to non-English-speaking countries. Specifically, they look at the
roles of language policies in the social construction of national cultural
identities and the relationship between language, culture, and identity.
P119 2006-022532 978-0-7391-0955-7
The study of language and the politics of community in
global context.
Title main entry. Ed. by David L. Hoyt and Karen Oslund.
Lexington Books, ©2006 256 p. $65.00
While there are works that trace the evolution of the study of language,
note the editors, few make explicit connections between the technical and
intellectual history of the discipline and broader historical processes of
nationalism and colonialism. This collection of essays makes those con-
nections, in diverse settings ranging from the centers of academic Europe
to African missionary stations in Namibia. The seven contributions
explore such topics as the 19th-century French debate over the bound-
aries of romance dialectics and its connections to an ideology of assimi-
lation to the norms of urban civilization, the contestation over the
standardization of Swahili and Gikuyu in pre-World War I French West
Africa and attempts to linguistically segregate educated and politicized
Africans from English language spheres of colonial and metropolitan
power, and Chinese efforts to modernize their script in the late-19th and
early-20th centuries as part of a nationalist response to growing Japanese
political and military power.
Assume that all books contain appropriate scholarly paraphernalia. We note if
the book should contain, but lacks, a subject index and/or a bibliography.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
P119 2006-040054 978-0-8021-1825-7
Unspeak; how words become weapons, how weapons
become a message, and how that message becomes
reality.
Poole, Steven.
Grove Atlantic, ©2006 282 p. $23.00
British journalist Poole has coined the word “unspeak” to refer to a type
of political language that, unlike Orwell’s “newspeak,” which aims at
stripping language of meaning, or the more prosaic “doublespeak,”
which Poole equates with simple lying, instead seeks to invest language
with pre-packaged or unspoken meaning that precludes the possibility of
opposing points of view, in other words, it “unspeaks” debate. For
example, if the physical and psychological violence meted out against the
American-held prisoners of Abu Ghraib becomes “detainee abuse,” it
allows US political and military figures to escape moral and legal respon-
sibility for torture. He takes the reader on a tour of political unspeak that
travels across the political map, although his political sympathies, it
seems relatively clear, lie with the left. Among the other examples of
unspeak he attacks are “war on terror,” “public diplomacy,” coalition of
the willing,” “Friends of the Earth,” and “intelligent design theory,” and
the discourse of “moderates” vs. “extremists.”
P158 2006-042739 90-272-3355-1
Minimalist essays.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cedric Boeckx. (Linguistics today; v.91)
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 399 p. $156.00
To what extent is the human language faculty an optimal solution to
minimal design specifications? With this central question of the mini-
malism project in mind, contributors of these articles work through the
main features of minimalism, its primary theories and historical sources,
and its association with the syntactic component of grammar. Topics
include an introduction to the program, a novel view of feature
movement, true optionality, focus and clause structure, symmetry in
syntax, Japanese topic construction in the syntax-semantics interface evi-
dence for phases, label-free syntax, binding domains, Japanese passives,
the long passive, null arguments and case-driven agree in Turkish, tough-
movement and Spanish existentials and other accusative constructions.
The latter papers include empirical gains that come from adopting min-
imalist guidelines.
P165 2006-023786 978-3-11-019084-7
Cognitive linguistics; basic readings.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dirk Geeraerts. (Cognitive linguistics research;
v.34)
Mouton de Gruyter, ©2006 485 p. $132.30
A dozen articles and book chapters are reprinted mostly from the 1990s
as a set of landmarks for students and scholars just stumbling onto the
discipline. Each one introduces of the conceptual cornerstones of the the-
oretical framework of cognitive linguistics. Among these are grammatical
construal, schematic network, mental spaces, and usage-based linguistics.
The introduction offers guidance on getting around. There is no index.
P165 2006-023784 978-3-11-018950-6
Cognitive linguistics; current applications and future
perspectives.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gitte Kristiansen et al. (Applications of cog-
nitive linguistics; 1)
Mouton de Gruyter, ©2006 499 p. $132.30
Researchers in linguistics and cognitive science, of course—but also in lit-
erature, media, computer science, and other fields—offer case studies and
critical overviews to bring the larger scientific community up to date on
the state of research in cognitive linguistics. They also identify pressing
questions that promise to shape the direction of the field and keep its
practitioners in honest work.
P165 2006-040863 978-0-582-78496-3
An introduction to cognitive linguistics, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Friedrich Ungerer and Hans-Jörg Schmid.
Pearson Education Limited, ©2006 384 p. $59.20 (pa)
Ungerer (English linguistics, U. of Rostock, Germany) and Schmid’s
(modern English linguistics, U. of Munich) textbook offers an accessible
up-to-date overview of cognitive linguistics. The second edition has been
revised and expanded to reflect developments in the field since publi-
cation of the 1996 edition, including an innovative description of the role
played by metaphors and metonymies based on the notion of “mapping
scope,” a new section on construction grammar, a new chapter focusing
on blending theory as an online processing strategy, expanded coverage
of iconicity and cognitive linguistics in foreign language learning, and a
survey of recent attempts to put linguistic theorizing on a safer psycho-
logical and neurological footing.
–262–
P281 2006-042929 90-272-3358-6
Individuals in time; tense, aspect and the individual/stage
distinction.
Arche, María J. (Linguistics today; v.94)
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 281 p. $138.00
Arche works through the distinctions between stage-level (SL) and indi-
vidual-level (IL) predicates, using an empirical focus and on the corre-
lation between the SL and IL distinction as in the two copular verbs ser
and estar in Spanish. After presenting her study’s goals and method-
ology, she describes individual-level predicates in terms of the IL/SL
semantic distinction and the IL/SL dichotomy as a syntactic distinction,
and event classes, aspect alternations, outer aspects and tense in IL pred-
icates. Amongst her conclusions is that the IL/SL dichotomy is not a per-
manent or episodic distinction, and the IL/SL distinction is not
completely a matter of inner aspect. She also finds that outer data does
not affect the IL/SL distinction.
P291 978-0-826-48946-3
An introduction to syntax; fundamentals of syntactic
analysis.
Moravcsik, Edith.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 273 p. $34.95 (pa)
Moravcsik’s (linguistics, U. of Wisconsin-Milwaukee) introductory
textbook covers an overview of what syntax is about and where it fits
within the context of linguistic research and human inquiry in general;
word selection and ordering; the relationship between syntax, meaning
and phonetic form; syntactic variation and change, both historical and
developmental; and discussion of ways of explaining syntactic patterns.
Designed for undergraduate and graduate students who have completed
an introductory linguistics course, the text is suitable for students
studying syntax for the first time or at an advanced level.
P291 978-0-826-48944-9
An introduction to syntactic theory.
Moravcsik, Edith.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 263 p. $34.95 (pa)
Moravcsik (linguistics, U. of Wisconsin-Milwaukee) explores various syn-
tactic theories from the point of view of how they accommodate conflicts.
Drawing on theoretical literature of the past few decades, the author
presents selected analyses from different syntactic frameworks, and
argues two main points—that conceptual tools used by syntacticians are
designed to resolve conflicts in the data, and the range of syntactic theory
types reflects the limited range of logically available ways of conflict res-
olution and the diversity of the types can be systematically characterized
in terms of the conflict-resolving constructs they employ. For under-
graduate and graduate linguistics students who have completed an intro-
ductory linguistics course and are familiar with syntactic analysis.
P299 2006-040574 90-272-3356-X
Agreement systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cedric Boeckx. (Linguistics today; v.92)
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 346 p. $150.00
Working from foundations set by no less than Chomsky and Pollock, the
contributors of these 11 articles examine the central arguments per-
taining to the nature of agreement between the noun phrase and the verb
in generative grammar, seeking formal and substantial universals about
the relationship between case and agreement. Topics include person
splits and direct-inverse alternations, the finite and the relation between
agreement and the nominative case, case and agreement with the gen-
itive of quantification in Russian, agreement and selection in an efficient
minimalist syntax, agreement configurations, agreement in syntax and
signs, standard Arabic agreement symmetry recast in minimalist syntax,
complete and partial agreement, case-agreement mismatches and local
agreement.
P299 2006-045728 90-272-2297-5
Metadiscourse in L1 and L2 English.
Ädel, Annelie. (Studies in corpus linguistics; v.24)
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 243 p. $132.00
Ädel (U. of Michigan, Ann Arbor) presents findings from a large-scale
study comparing the use of metadiscourse in written argumentative texts
by advanced university-level learners of English whose first language is
Swedish with comparable texts written by native speakers of British and
American English. The author presents a new model of metadiscourse
based on Jakobson’s functions of language and other conceptual tools,
and finds that the L2 speakers’ overuse of metadiscourse is a strong
indicator of lack of communicative competence. The study contributes to
the theory of metadiscourse, to computer-assisted methods for the study
of metadiscourse, and to current knowledge of the use of metadiscourse
in English argumentative writing. For linguists and educators concerned
with writing in English.
–263–
P301 2006-047709 90-272-5391-9
Academic voices; across languages and disciplines.
Fløttum, Kjersti et al. (Pragmatics & beyond; v.148)
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 309 p. $138.00
The authors (of Norway’s U. of Bergen and the Norwegian School of
Economics and Business Administration) present a research product of
the KIAP project (full English title: Cultural Identity in Academic Prose:
national versus discipline-specific), which sought to identify if cultural
identities can be identified in academic discourse and the extent to which
they may be language-specific or discipline-specific in nature. The
research focused on comparative analysis of English, French, and
Norwegian research articles in the fields of economics, linguistics, and
medicine. It asked questions regarding how article authors manifest
themselves in the text, how voices of other researchers are reflected, and
how authors present and promote their own research, or the “search for
person manifestation as realized through voices and roles. To answer
these questions, the use of first person pronouns, indefinite pronouns,
metatext (such as “see above”), negation, adversatives, and biblio-
graphical references are subjected to statistical analysis.
P301 2006-047054 978-0-7734-5592-4
The history of metaphors of nature; v.1: Science and
literature from Homer to Al Gore.
Norwick, Stephen A.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 457 p. $99.95
Norwick (geology, Sonoma State U.) was puzzled by the metaphor of
nature as a book in the environmental literature he was teaching, and
soon discovered many more words and phrases that represented the
whole of nature. He began setting out parallel histories of the trope of
the whole-of-nature in nature writing, but as he went back in time, he
ran out of nature writing in the 18th century. Undaunted, he turned to
general literature and found examples as far back as the Hebrew Bible,
Homeric texts, and Gilgamesh. He presents the metaphors not chronolog-
ically, but topically. The first of two volumes considers the muses as god-
desses of natural history and poetic inspiration, the music of the spheres
versus the clockwork universe, the humanoid macrocosm, and other
topics. The two volumes are paged, referenced, and indexed together.
P301 2006-047054 978-0-7734-5593-1
The history of metaphors of nature; v.2: Science and
literature from Homer to Al Gore.
Norwick, Stephen A.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 466 p. $99.95
Despite the title, Norwick (geology, Sonoma State U., California) does not
trace how literary tropes representing nature have evolved over the cen-
turies, but presents examples of how they have been used in various con-
texts. Among the areas he discusses in the second volume are nature as
the creation and the problem of evolution for nature writers, the shape
of the planet Earth and the size of the universe, the Book of Nature, and
the river of life and the hydrological cycle. The two volumes are paged,
referenced, and indexed together.
P302 0-8058-5106-2
New directions in the analysis of multimodal discourse.
Title main entry. Ed. by Terry D. Royce and Wendy L. Bowcher.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2006 403 p. $110.00
Drawing predominantly on the theoretical approaches of systemic func-
tional linguistics, scholars from the Americas, Europe, Asia, and
Australia offer a range of perspectives on multi-modal discourse analysis,
emphasizing ways in which the different modes interact inter-semioti-
cally. After some discussion of theory, they look at such areas as writing
and graphology, genre, ideology, computational concordancing, and
cross-cultural and cross-linguistic issues.
P306 2006-011070 978-1-85359-913-2
Managing translation services.
Samuelsson-Brown, Geoffrey. (Topics in translation; no.32)
Multilingual Matters Ltd., ©2006 162 p. $39.95 (pa)
As a complement to his 1993 work, A Practical Guide for Translators,
Samuelsson-Brown’s newest text provides freelance translators with a
guide to changing from working as a single freelance translator to setting
up and managing a company offering a range of added value services.
Coverage includes organizational development, business plans, quality
management, quality procedures, managing human resources, customer
relations, and planning retirement. The text includes a number of ready-
made examples and forms, and a list of sources of additional infor-
mation. The author is a translator, writer and business adviser with some
30 years of experience in translation and documentation. Distributed in
the U.S. by UTP Distribution.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
P306 978-90-420-2059-7
Theories on the move; translation’s role in the travels of
literary theories.
Susam-Sarajeva, Sebnem. (Approaches to translation studies)
Editions Rodopi, ©2006 241 p. $65.00 (pa)
Susam-Sarajeva (University of Edinburgh) explores the role played by
translation in the migration of literary and cultural theories across lin-
guistic and cultural borders. The analysis is based on a multiple-case
study of the importation of Roland Barthes’s works into Turkish and of
Hélène Cixous’s works into English. Particular attention is paid to how
power differentials between the source of a theory and that of the
receiving system affect the translation process.
P325 2006-926147 978-0-7618-3523-3
The world and language; the ontology for natural
language.
Mitjashin, Alexander.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 147 p. $25.00 (pa)
Mitjashin (philosophy, St. Petersburg U.) makes a case for regarding lan-
guage not as a set of sentences but primarily as a set of terms, a dis-
tinction that proves essential to his describing how these terms are
connected to each other grammatically to create central notions that serve
to explain philosophical and logical concepts. He also necessarily holds
that the steps from language to ontology are dramatic and the concept of
realism corresponding to the concept of language is inferred through the
process of reductio ad absurdum. As he works through his arguments he
comes to the belief that in our way of language we can only describe a
world that contains only entities, which cannot be reduced to one entity,
and cannot be reduced so one replaces the other. In a series of small but
rich essays he sweeps through such considerations as Wittgenstein’s lan-
guage and Heraclites’s philosophy, metaphysical solutions, skepticism
and Platonism as it applies to the philosophy of language.
P326 2006-027965 978-3-11-019019-9
Advances in the theory of the lexicon.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dieter Wunderlich. (Interface explorations; 13)
Mouton de Gruyter, ©2006 502 p. $132.30
Linguists taking part in a long-term project hosted by the Heinrich-Heine-
Universität Düsseldorf present some recent work on the theory of the
lexicon—the whole body of words available for use in a particular lan-
guage. Their topics include concepts of the lexicon in theoretical lin-
guistics, ontology and diachrony of poly-synthesis, and inheritance-based
models of the lexicon.
P946 2006-051655 978-90-04-15281-6
The Carian language.
Adiego, Ignacio J. (Handbook of Oriental studies. Section 1: The Near
and Middle East; v.86)
BRILL, ©2007 526 p. $236.00
Adiego (Indo-European linguistics, U. of Barcelona) presents an up- to-
date handbook on Carian, one of the Indo-European languages spoken in
ancient Anatolia. The author has written two prior books on the subject
during the past 15 years; his latest text is intended to show the new look
of Carian following the recent decipherment of the Carian writing
system. Coverage includes the direct and indirect sources with an edition
of the Carian inscriptions following a new classification system, the
history of the decipherment, the Carian alphabet, and the phonological,
morphological, lexical, and syntactic features of the language. The text
also contains an annotated Carian glossary, two indexes—one by ancient
proper names and the other an index of languages—and a special
appendix of Carian coin legends by Koray Konuk.
PA817 2006-021313 978-1-56563-576-0
Mastering New Testament Greek; essential tools for
students. (CD-ROM included)
Robinson, Thomas A.
Hendrickson Publishers, ©2007 230 p. $19.95 (pa)
Robinson (religious studies, U. of Lethbridge) offers a vocabulary of the
Greek roots most frequently encountered in the New Testament. For most
he identifies an English word derived, directly or through Latin, from the
root as a memory aid to the root’s meaning. He also parses the actual
work in the Bible into its prefix, root, and suffix. The arrangement by
root facilitates recognizing and learning related words. The disk contains
information and aids for learning Greek in general.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PA1087 2005-054110 0-8204-9805-X
Verb derivation in modern Greek; alternation classes,
conceptual structures, semantic fields.
Charitonidis, Chariton. (European university studies. Series XXI,
Linguistics; v.284)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2005 208 p. $43.95 (pa)
Charitonidis (linguistics, U. of Cologne) examines the verb derivation of
Modern Greek within an alternations framework and suggests a new
model of analysis for verb derivation in general. The study focuses on the
Greek -ízo verb derivatives. The analysis draws on the work of Beth
Levin, defining significant meaning components for the English verb on
the basis of diathesis alternations, and the proposed model incorporates
a version of Ray Jackendoff’s conceptual semantics. For students and
researchers in lexical semantics, verb morphology, Modern Greek, lexi-
cology, and universals research.
PA2065 2-503-51425-1
Insignis sophiae arcator; essays in honour of Michael W.
Herren on his 65th birthday.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gernot R. Wieland et al. (Publications of The
Journal of Medieval Latin; v.6)
Brepols Publishers, ©2006 304 p. $69.00 (pa)
Latinists of various stripes and related scholars present 14 papers, mostly
on specific Latin texts or authors of the Middle Ages. Their topics include
ethnogenesis and ethnic identity in Roman and early Medieval sources,
reading and writing Augustine in Medieval St. Gall, Irish evidence for
shared sources of classical mythology in Anglo-Saxon England and
Medieval Ireland, and the poem Archalis Clamare Triumuir. Distributed
in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
PA3015 978-90-04-15515-2
Writing exile; the discourse of displacement in Greco-
Roman antiquity and beyond.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jan Felix Gaertner. (Mnemosyne; supplementa;
v.83)
BRILL, ©2007 294 p. $134.00
Classics scholars from Europe and North America place the three famous
literary exiles—Cicero, Ovid, and Seneca—within the larger context of
writing about exile, not only during the period from Cynicism to Late
Antiquity, but also going back to concepts and motifs from the oral
antecedents of the Iliad and Odyssey, and forward to the age of Petrarch.
Quotations are in the original Latin or Greek with English translation.
Earlier versions of six of the 11 essays were presented at an autumn 2001
seminar at the University of Oxford.
PA3042 2006-025966 978-0-7391-1714-9
Intercepted letters; epistolarity and narrative in Greek and
Roman literature.
Jenkins, Thomas E. (Roman studies; interdisciplinary approaches)
Lexington Books, ©2006 162 p. $60.00
Jenkins (Trinity U.) explores epistles in their function as literary symbol
in classical literature, not just in collections of letters themselves, but also
as portrayed in dramatic, military, rhetorical, and forensic narrative.
Among his topics are Cicero’s wayward letters, kinetic letters in drama,
Ovidian letters, and letters in the Historia Augusta. Quotations are in
Latin or Greek with English translation.
PA3521 2006-051690 978-90-04-14540-5
The politics of orality.
Title main entry. Ed. by Craig R. Cooper. (Orality and literacy in
ancient Greece; v.6. Mnemosyne, bibliotheca classica Batava.
Supplementum; 280)
BRILL, ©2007 377 p. $174.00
Cooper (classics, U. of Winnipeg, Canada) presents 18 papers from the
sixth conference on Orality and Literacy in Ancient Greece, held in July
of 2004 at his home institution. The papers explore with the political and
cultural tensions of shifting oral and textual traditions among the Greeks,
as well as issues of oral and textual literacy among other peoples that
may shed light on similar issues among the Ancient Greeks. Specific
topics include variant tellings of the African Mwindo Epic as forms of
social and political deliberation; values bias in the scholarship of orality;
the role of written lists of military personnel in the development of
Athenian literacy; the purpose of state textual production of the works of
Aeschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides; the use of textual and oral evidence
in Aeschine’s oratory Against Timarchus; oral procedures of Roman
peacemaking; the reception and politics of Thucydides’ History among
his contemporaries; the origins of text-dependent moral education of the
Athenian elite; Greek transliterations of Near Eastern languages in the
Hellenistic East; and the contested of oral vs. written sources of Athenian
law.
–264–
PA3872 978-90-04-15594-7
Commentary on the Historia Apollonii Regis Tyri .
Kortekaas, G.A.A. (Mnesmosyne; supplementa; v.284)
BRILL, ©2007 935 p. $228.00
A specialist in Late and Medieval Latin, Kortekaas presents a com-
mentary on the text as a sequel to his 2004 The Story of Apollonius, King
of Tyre: A Study of Its Greek Origin and an Edition of the Two Oldest Latin
Recensions. He compares the two recensions and argues that the novel
originated in Greek Asia Minor, possibly Taurus. The arrangement
follows the chapter division of the Latin text.
PA4450 978-90-04-15298-4
Theophrastus of Eresus; sources for his life, writings,
thoughts and influence. Commentary v.2: Logic.
Huby, Pamela. (Philosophia Antiqua. A series of studies on ancient phi-
losophy; v.103)
BRILL, ©2007 208 p. $120.00
Huby (retired philosophy, Liverpool U.) continues her commentary on the
sources for information about Greek philosopher Theophrastus (370-285
BC) published in two volumes in 1992. Here she looks at references to his
logic in documents up to 1450. Reflecting the arrangement of the mother
study, she considers such aspects as doctrines, titles of books, categorical
syllogism, modal logic, hypothetical syllogism, demonstration, and defi-
nition. Dimitri Gutas (Arabic languages and literature, Yale U.) covers the
Arabic material.
PA6026 2006-048721 978-90-04-15327-1
Latinitas perennis; v.1: The continuity of Latin literature.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wim Verbaal and et al. (Brill’s studies in intel-
lectual history; v.144)
BRILL, ©2007 220 p. $129.00
The study of Latin literature has generally focused on one of three
periods: Roman Antiquity, the high Middle Ages, or the Golden Age of
Humanism. The three-volume series beginning here starts a new per-
spective on Latin literature as an ever-evolving but single continuum
throughout its two millennia of use in Western Europe. The 10 papers are
from an April 2005 conference in Brussels. Only names are indexed. The
other two volumes, Appropriation by Latin Literature and The Property of
Latin Literature are projected to appear in 2008 and 2010.
PA6385 2006-044016 978-90-04-13177-4
The rhetoric of Cicero in its medieval and early
renaissance commentary tradition.
Title main entry. Ed. by Virginia Cox and John O. Ward. (Brill’s com-
panions to the Christian tradition; v.2)
BRILL, ©2006 545 p. $163.00
Scholars of literature explore how classical rhetorical theory was accom-
modated to the needs of a post-classical Christian culture, and the context
in which this development took place. The obvious vehicle for such
transmission, of course, is the work of Cicero, paraphrases of and com-
mentaries on it, and later texts attributed to him. Among the topics are
the textual history and manuscript transmission of his rhetorical works,
conduct literature and speaking well, and Latin composition textbooks.
Most of the quotations are in English translation.
PA6452 2006-043351 978-0-87220-724-0
The History of Rome, books 1-5.
Livy. Trans. by Valerie M. Warrior.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2006 452 p. $39.95
Titus Livius (64 or 59 BCE-17 CE) lived in the backwoods of Cisalpine
Gaul, now northern Italy, and does not seem to have been engaged in the
literary or political circles of Rome. Even so, he managed to write
perhaps the most influential history of Rome, originally comprising over
a hundred books. British classicist Warrior here translates, introduces,
and annotates the first five books, which begin with the city’s mythical
foundation and end at the close of the fourth century BCE.
PA6501 978-90-04-15192-5
Martial, Book IV; a commentary.
Soldevila, Rosario Moreno. (Mnemosyne, bibliotheca classica Batava;
supplementa)
BRILL, ©2006 618 p. $188.00
Revising her 2003 doctoral dissertation for her home institution, Soldevila
(Latin, U. Pablo de Olavide, Seville), offers a line-by-line commentary on
the sixth volume of epigrams by the first-century Latin poet, probably
published around the end of 88 or beginning of 89. It differs from pre-
vious volumes, she says, by the increased number of Imperial poems and
fewer erotic epigrams; aside from Domitian and the question of
patronage, it explores the main of death and literature.
–265–
PA6519 978-0-905205-44-1
Ovid Heroides 1 6 a n d 1 7 ; i n t r o d u c t i o n , t e x t a n d
commentary.
Michalopoulos, Andreas N. (ARCA; classical and medieval texts, papers
and monographs; no.47)
Francis Cairns Ltd., ©2006 409 p. $160.00
The first 15 were individual letters, in verse, from well-known women of
mythology to their absent husbands or lovers. Some years later, Ovid
published three double Heroides, each with letters between a pair of
lovers; 16 is from Paris to Helen and and 17 vice versa. After an intro-
duction placing the two letters within Ovid’s work and contemporary lit-
erature and discussing literary features of them, Michalopoulos (Latin,
Democritus U. of Thrace, Komotini) presents a Latin edition of them with
extensive commentary. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book
Company.
PA6537 0-7156-3559-X
Ovid and Augustus; a political reading of Ovid’s erotic
poems.
Davis, P.J.
Duckworth, ©2006 183 p. $70.00
Davis (history and classics, U. of Tasmania) examines the relationship
between the surviving poems—particularly the erotic works—attributed to
Publius Ovidius Naso (43 BC-18 AD), and the political ideology that his
contemporary Augustus developed and promoted as a means of justi-
fying his unprecedented position of virtually unchallenged power as
Rome’s first emperor. He argues that Ovid’s works challenge the
Augustan regime at the level of ideology, and resist the Augustan con-
ception of what it was to be Roman. Excerpts are in Latin with English
translation. Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing.
PA8045 2005-438316 3-11-018450-8
Engaging moments; the origins of medieval bridal-quest
narrative.
Bornholdt, Claudia. (Ergänzungsbände zum Reallexikon der german-
ischen Altertumskunde; v.46)
Walter de Gruyter, ©2005 236 p. $94.95
Revising her Ph.D. dissertation at Indiana University-Bloomington at an
undisclosed day, Bornholdt examines the Western European bridal-quest
tradition. She focuses on the earliest occurrences of the narrative in
medieval Germany and Scandinavia, but compares versions from else-
where in Europe to illustrate that the German versions represent only one
branch of a much larger tree. There is no index.
PA8260 2005-937639 978-1-933202-09-9
Innovation and tradition in the writings of the Venerable
Bede.
Title main entry. Ed. by Scott DeGregorio. (Medieval European studies;
7)
West Virginia University Press, ©2006 287 p. $45.00 (pa)
To explore the writings of the Anglo-Saxon saint Bede (673-735), scholars
of literature, history, and religion draw on recent perspectives that
include attention to his exegesis in addition to the history he is best
known for today, the inter-textual dimension of his writing, and his self-
conception as a writer and scholar.
PA8260 2005-017585 978-0-631-16655-9
The times of Bede; studies in early English Christian
society and its historian.
Wormald, Patrick.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 290 p. $74.95
Oxford historian Wormald (d. 2004) assembled these nine articles and
lectures from the period 1976-2003 but died before he could write an
introduction to the collection. They reflect the recent trend in scholarship
about the seventh-century Anglo-Saxon historian to assess him not by
modern standards of history, but in terms of how he differed from his
contemporaries, and how his particular interests might have influenced
how he presented the facts as he knew them. The first four look at the
society he described; four more consider the impact of his critique; and
an appendix profiles his contemporary saint and scholar Hilda.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PB1306 978-1-85182-940-8
A guide to Irish fiction; 1650-1900.
Loeber, Rolf and Magda Loeber.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 1489 p. $120.00
Aiming for comprehensiveness, the Loebers, both researchers at the
University of Pittsburgh Medical School, provide thousands of summaries
of Irish fiction published in Ireland, England, North America, Australia
and Europe. Their research has uncovered the works previously
unknown and forgotten authors, which are included here along with any
fictional text dealing with Irish matters, regardless of size, sub-genre or
provenance. The summaries are listed in alphabetical order and cover
thematic as well as bibliographic features, information about the
authors, and a printing history. The text includes a glossary, reproduc-
tions of book covers and title pages, and indices of persons, book titles,
publishers, historic periods, themes and settings, and places relating to
the authors. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
PB1306 978-0-7165-3366-5
The Irish scene in Somerville and Ross.
Stevens, Julie Anne.
Irish Academic Press, ©2007 287 p. $75.00
Ireland’s foremost female writers of the 19th century, Edith Somerville
and Martin Ross, advocated the “high art of comedy” during a period of
transition and turbulence in the Irish countryside. This critical biography
of their collaboration from 1890 to Ross’ death in 1915 studies the self-
conscious artistry of the creators of what some consider the finest Irish
novel of the 19th century, The Real Charlotte. Stevens (English, Trinity
College, Dublin, and St. Patrick’s College, Drumcondra) traces the
influence of both popular culture and high art in the treatment of the
volatile Irish landscape. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
PC4131 978-0-7618-3531-8
Issues in Spanish morphophonology; implications for
language acquisition.
Castro, Obdulia.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 150 p. $25.95 (pa)
Based on data from L1 and L2 environments in Spanish language acqui-
sition, Castro’s (Spanish, Regis U., Denver) study examines syllable
structure, stress assignment, alternating diphthongs, phonological pro-
cessing, and other linguistic phenomena occurring mostly in the interface
between phonology and morphology in Spanish. The text employs both
an empirical and theoretical approach to the study of Spanish language
acquisition in both native and nonnative systems, subsequently identi-
fying similarities and differences in learnability between both systems.
Language change and language learning are also discussed throughout
as they pertain to difficulties intrinsic to the learner, the learning envi-
ronment, and the use of language in everyday life.
PC4131 978-0-8058-5227-1
Research on politeness in the Spanish-speaking world.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mará Elena Placencia and Carmen García.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 442 p. $99.95
Thirteen international academics contribute 15 chapters offering an
overview of research on politeness as it relates to a number of varieties
of Spanish—Argentinean, Colombian, Cuban, Ecuadorian, Peninsular,
Peruvian, U.S., and Venezuelan—and a variety of speech activities and
contexts, including little-explored ones. The material is organized into sec-
tions covering overviews of theoretical contributions by Hispanists and
empirical studies in relation to the nine varieties of Spanish; new
empirical studies from within institutional contexts and noninstitutional
contexts; Fant’s theoretical proposals for the examination of rapport and
identity management; salient trends in the study of politeness; and direc-
tions for future research. For practitioners and upper-level undergrad-
uates and graduates in Spanish pragmatics and Spanish linguistics.
PE1068 2005-057911 0-8204-9811-4
Measuring interlanguage pragmatic knowledge of EFL
learners.
Liu, Jianda. (Language testing and evaluation; v.5)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 252 p. $50.95 (pa)
Liu’s study (linguistics, Guangdong U. of Foreign Studies, China)
describes the development and validation of three test methods to
measure the interlanguage pragmatic knowledge of 413 Chinese learners
of English as a foreign language. The study extends the test methods
developed in the 1990s by Hudson, Detmer, and Brown with more rigor
and a more pragmatically-informed test development process. It also
adds to the literature employing Messick’s theory to explore the reliability
and validity of test methods used in pragmatics tests, especially the appli-
cation of verbal protocol in the development of pragmatics tests and val-
idation of test methods. No subject index.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PE1072 2006-021078 978-0-8141-1544-2
English studies; an introduction to the discipline(s).
Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce McComiskey. (Refiguring English
studies)
NCTE, ©2006 339 p. $38.95 (pa)
Despite its longevity and ubiquity on college campuses, English studies
still needs defending, according to the contributors to this volume. Each
chapter is an argument for the value of every discipline within English
studies, including creative writing, linguistics, rhetoric, composition, lit-
erary criticism and critical theory. McComiskey (English, U. of Alabama
at Birmingham) asserts that each discipline is a separate but equal
partner in the larger project of analysis, critique and production of dis-
course in social context.
PE1072 2005-055170 0-8204-7346-4
Selected writings = Ausgewahlte Schriften; English
linguistic and cultural history-English dialectology =
Englische sprach-und-kulturgeschichter-Englische
dialektologie.
Viereck, Wolfgang. (University of Bamberg studies in English lin-
guistics; v.49 = Bamberger Beitrage zur Englischen Sprachwissenschaft;
bd.49)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2005 382 p. $62.95 (pa)
Viereck taught English philology at the U. of Graz, Austria, from 1973 to
1978 before assuming the Chair of English Linguistics and Medieval
Studies at the U. of Bamberg. His recent retirement from the U. of
Bamberg is being marked by the publication of two volumes of selected
writings spanning a period of 40 years. This first volume contains 22
papers centered around English linguistics and cultural history as well
as English dialectology. One essay appears in German, one in French,
and the remainder in English, with topics ranging from the dissemi-
nation of early (insular) manuscripts on the European continent and
Celtic-English linguistic contact to selected features of English dialectal
variation. For dialectologists and English language historians. No subject
index.
PE1074 2006-009364 0-8058-4693-X
Chicano-Anglo conversations; truth, honesty, and
politeness.
Youmans, Madeleine. (ESL and applied linguistics professional series)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 190 p. $49.95
Youmans (U. of Alabama, Huntsville) investigates differences in commu-
nication practices between Mexican-American underclass residents of an
East Los Angeles housing project and White middle-class literacy tutors
who worked with them. The study explores how values—particularly
truth, honesty, and politeness—are both reflected and created through dis-
course conventions. It suggests that certain language-use patterns benefit
the powerful, but do not equally benefit the less powerful, thus leading
to the development of divergent belief systems and language-use patterns.
The aim of the text is to increase understanding of how subtle features
of language use in combination with other social factors creates and per-
petuates misunderstanding, miscommunication, marginality, and conflict
between citizens of the same nation, speaking the same language. For
researchers, educators, and students in linguistics and communications.
PE1075 2006-045891 90-272-3237-7
A history of the English language.
Gelderen, Elly van.
John Benjamins Publishing Co., ©2006 334 p. $39.95
Aimed at undergraduate and graduate students, this introductory text
outlines the history of English from pre-Old English times to the present,
focusing on internal changes in the language. Van Gelderen (Arizona
State U.) provides many example sentences, texts and cartoons to explain
the traditional morphological descriptions of the various stages of the
language. She includes a timeline of external events, tables, figures and
exercises. A companion website accompanies the book.
–266–
PE1122 2006-276838 978-0-7575-2050-1
The place where we dwell; reading and writing about
New York City.
But, Juanita and Mark Noonan.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2005 346 p. $45.95 (pa)
In this textbook designed for use in introductory composition courses, the
editors (City U. of New York) have collected examples of writings
(including poems, fictions, and nonfiction essays) about life in New York
City from such figures as John Steinbeck, Ralph Ellison, E.B. White, Junot
Diaz, Emma Lazarus, June Jordan, Andrew Carnegie, Jacob Riis,
Jonathon Kozol, Colin Powell, Walt Whitman, Herman Melville, Ezra
Pound, Langston Hughes, Pedro Pietri, and Jack Kerouac. The 60 selec-
tions are grouped in thematic sections focused the experience of life in
New York, the immigrant experience, violence and social tensions, edu-
cation, current issues (graffiti and the bid to host the Olympics), and lit-
erature. Each selection is followed by discussion questions and student
writing exercises.
PE1128 2005-057719 0-8204-7655-2
Assessing second language writing; the rater’s perspective.
Lumley, Tom. (Language testing and evaluation; v.3)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2005 368 p. $62.95 (pa)
Lumley (Australian Council for Educational Research) investigates the
process by which raters of texts written by adult ESL learners make their
scoring decisions. The context of the study was the Special Test of English
Proficiency (step), used by the Australian government to assist in immi-
gration decisions. Four trained, experienced and reliable step raters took
part in the study, providing scores for two sets of 24 texts. The first set
was scored as in an operational rating session. Raters then provided
think-aloud protocols describing the rating process as they rated the
second set. The study reveals the challenges in the rating process, and the
tension between the use of a rule-bound, socially governed procedure that
relies on a rating scale and the raters’ complex, initial, intuitive
impression of the text. No subject index.
PE1128 2006-046992 0-7734-5538-8
Bilingualism and American national identity; the pros
and cons of immersion education.
Kinberg, Margot and Peter Serdyukov.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 129 p. $99.95
Kinberg and Serdyukov (both: teacher education, National U., California)
offer a concise examination of adult English-as-a-second- language
learners from several perspectives, and place this unique group within
the larger language-learning context. Coverage includes an overview of
bilingualism in the U.S. within the context of bilingualism in the inter-
national community; theoretical models of bilingualism; the history of
bilingual education in the U.S., including the ramifications of the dif-
ferent approaches to bilingual education for non-English speaking cit-
izens and native speakers of English; and bilingualism and second
language instruction in the workplace.
PE1128 978-0-7734-5627-3
How globalization affects the teaching of English;
studying culture through texts.
Title main entry. Ed. by Andrea Gerbig and Anja Müller-Wood.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 285 p. $119.95
In recent years, university English departments have faced increasing
pressure to prove their socio-economic value. In response to these chal-
lenges, this volume calls for reconciliation among the field’s sub-disci-
plines and argues that English has much of relevance to offer in a
globalized world. The 12 essays address such topics as cultural studies
in English, the use of corpora in teaching linguistics, and literature as
part of teacher education. Gerbig teaches English linguistics at the U. of
Duisburg-Essen and Müller-Wood is an English literature professor at
Johannes Gutenberg U. Mainz, Germany.
–267–
PE1128 2006-025922 0-275-98604-7
Teaching young children a second language.
Gordon, Tatiana. (Teaching young children)
Praeger, ©2007 216 p. $49.95
Gordon (teacher preparation TESOL program, Hofstra U., Hempstead,
New York) examines current research on young immigrants’ lives and
language learning experiences in the U.S. Coverage includes an overview
of recent sociological and ethnographic studies of children’s immigration
and research on various aspects of children’s second language devel-
opment, followed by summaries of some of the most important method-
ological concerns pertaining to teaching young language learners. The
text includes samples of good practice and practical recommendations,
including descriptions of innovative second language lessons developed
and implemented by ESL teachers working with language learners
enrolled in the primary grades. For preservice and practicing teachers,
parents, and administrators.
PE1130 2005-054504 978-4-7700-1808-3
Kodansha’s communicative English-Japanese dictionary.
Sharpe, Peter. Ed. by Michael Staley and Keiko Yoshida.
Kodansha International, ©2006 1178 p. $45.00
A native of England, Sharpe (foreign languages, Takushoku U., Tokyo)
has lived in Japan for some 15 years. He presents a dictionary containing
some 22,000 entries and 19,000 example sentences and phrases to assist
users in daily and even sophisticated conversation. These include not
only frequently used words but also a number of technical terms, new
words, and vocabulary related to Japanese culture, as well as interjec-
tions, idioms, and phrasal verbs. Also included is an in-depth appendix
which serves as a mini-grammar on the Japanese language. The text is
designed for learners at all levels who have the ability to read hiragana
and katakana; no knowledge of kanji is required.
PE1137 2005-057962 0-8204-7173-9
English pronunciation models; a changing scene.
Title main entry. Ed. by Katarzyna Dziubalska-Koaczyk and Joanna
Przedlacka. (Linguistic insights; v.21)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2005 476 p. $82.95 (pa)
As the needs of English users change in a fast-paced globalizing world,
questions arise as to whether pronunciation models have kept up—or
even should—with those changes. Twenty-seven international academics
contribute 22 chapters examining various issues concerning the teaching
and learning of English pronunciation in the 21st century. Coverage
includes the fluidity and change of native models and the relevance of
the existing descriptions of native accents for teaching purposes; the con-
troversy surrounding the Lingua Franca Core as an alternative model to
Received Pronunciation and General American; discussion of a realistic
syllabus for a foreign learner, based on recent attitudinal and linguistic
data; intonational variation in English and its role in communication;
and how dictionaries and teaching materials reflect changing market
demands. No subject index.
PE1404 2006-006627 1-932559-17-5
Composing a community; a history of writing across the
curriculum.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan H. McLeod and Margot Iris Soven.
(Lauer series in Rhetoric and composition)
Parlor Press, ©2006 209 p. $29.00 (pa)
The “Writing Across the Curriculum” (WAC) movement started in the
early 1970s and gathered steam as it became apparent that making every
subject a writing subject worked in the classroom. Here pioneer change
agents of the movement share their experiences with those who want to
start or restart a local effort. They cover WAC in undergraduate edu-
cation, a university/schools partnership for a project at George Mason U.,
the growth of research communities, the start of WAC in the California
state university system and in the Ivy League, the growth of WAC as a
community in Montana, WAC at the national level, lessons for today in
early WAC community experiences in gender and discipline, WAC in the
Michigan Tech curriculum, and a narrative of 15 years’ duration of the
events at the writing retreat at Wildacres. Each contribution includes a
bibliography.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PE1404 2006-924911 978-0-7618-3522-6
Writing to teach; writing to learn in secondary schools.
Leist, Susan M. and Pamila Marchewka-Cornwell.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 133 p. $23.95 (pa)
Leist (English, State U. of New York at Buffalo) and Marchewka-
Cornwell, a high school English teacher, discuss techniques for writing
assignments and how high school teachers can effectively use them as a
teaching tool in any discipline. They explain types of heuristic writing—
both generative and structural—and how to apply them, in addition to
student research and how to evaluate writing. Appendices contain
sample syllabi and assignments, forms and checklists, and other
resources. The authors draw from course plans in Writing/Learning:
Using Writing in the Classroom, a faculty handbook published at Broome
Community College. This volume was also published in an earlier version
in 1997 as A Guidebook for Using Writing to Teach Across the Curriculum.
This version has new examples for high school teachers, materials, and
bibliography.
PE1408 2006-021700 978-0-8141-5674-2
What is “college-level” writing?
Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick Sullivan and Howard Tinberg.
NCTE, ©2006 418 p. $42.95 (pa)
In this resource published by the National Council of Teachers of English,
Sullivan (Manchester Community College, Connecticut) and Tinberg
(Bristol Community College) collect diverse perspectives of scholars, high
school teachers, college administrators and students on what defines
college-level writing. Sullivan’s introductory essay poses central questions:
e.g.: What differentiates college from high school-level writing? Should
standards be local? How can students be taught to write at this level?
Contributors’ remarks include the caveat that writing to one’s audience
does not mean kow-towing to the instructor’s ideology. An auxiliary
website enables participation in this dialog.
PE1413 2005-022224 0-415-38419-2
Academic writing; a handbook for international students,
2d ed.
Bailey, Stephen.
Routledge, ©2006 260 p. $26.95 (pa)
Facing lecturers who spout idiom and jargon at breakneck pace is dif-
ficult enough for students for whom English is a non-native language;
writing academic essays, exams, theses and dissertations can become
exercises in both agony and futility. Bailey (English, U. of Nottingham
and U. of Derby) provides hundreds of exercise questions in this very
practical reference and workbook for international students (and even
native speakers) that doubles as a classroom text and a self-study guide.
He starts by describing the academic writing process, including taking
notes, finding key points and writing summaries, then works through
the elements of writing, including argument, cause and effect, examples,
generalizations, and references, accuracy in writing, including the ele-
ments that trip up even well-educated native writers and in a concluding
section provides writing models for letters, CVs, surveys, and essays.
PE1464 2006-043657 978-0-06-113220-9
Mind the gaffe!; a troubleshooter’s guide to English style
and usage.
Trask, R.L.
Harper, ©2006 289 p. $13.95 (pa)
Going far beyond the spelling checker, Trask (late linguistics, U. of
Sussex) continues in spirit as he saves us from ravaging, or ravishing,
standard written English. Here we find that asking for a “reaction” is
actually asking someone to burst into laughter or fall into a faint, that
convincing is different than persuading, and that a horde can hoard but
a hoard cannot horde. Trask sternly judges those who use “circa” rather
than “around” and deflates those who puff themselves up with inad-
vertent double meetings, ten-dollar words when five cents will do, and
harebrained (not “hairbrained”) errors. The result is not only a fine desk
reference but also fun to read.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PE1479 978-0-538-73000-6
English and communication for colleges, 4th ed.
Means, Thomas L.
South-Western College Pub., ©2007 595 p. $87.95 (pa)
Means (Louisiana Tech U.) provides a textbook focusing on improving
communications skills, so that students will be prepared to enter the
workforce. The book blends grammar, mechanics, and writing with
activities involving business communications, including email, letters,
reports, memos, telephone conversations, teamwork, and customer rela-
tions. Persuasive and technical writing and creating visual aids, docu-
ments, and presentations are also covered. The final chapter discusses
successful job searching. This edition has an emphasis on ethics,
diversity, technology, and employability; critical thinking questions;
section assessments; and a linked website. No bibliography is supplied.
PE1571 2006-025385 978-1-56037-402-2
Verbivore’s feast; second course; more word & phrase
origins.
Chrysti, the Wordsmith.
Farcountry Press, ©2006 352 p. $15.95 (pa)
Chrysti the Wordsmith is a radio series that Chrysti M. Smith puts out
from Montana. In each two-minute program, she recounts lore she has
delved from dictionaries. Here she collects 338 of those programs for a
second volume, each fitting comfortably on a page.
PE1574 2006-018710 1-58297-443-8
Unfortunate English; the gloomy truth behind the words
you use.
Brohaugh, William.
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2006 184 p. $18.99
Readers may think twice about using such seemingly innocuous words
as “pretty,” “gymnasium,” and “goodbye” after perusing this volume. In
it, Brohaugh reveals the original meanings of a number of commonly
used words—meanings that might offend the more delicate sensibilities
of modern hearers, were they made aware of them. Brohaugh is the
editor or author of several books on writing.
PE1578 978-0-7734-5544-3
Surnames, nicknames, placenames, and eipthets in
America; essays in the theory of names.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edward Callary.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 281 p. $109.95
To mark the 2002 end of his decade as editor of Names: A Journal of
Onomastics, the official publication of the American Name Society,
Callary selected 17 articles published in the journal over the past 20
years. The goal of his selection was to present a picture of the concerns
and state of onomastics in the US during the closing decades of the 20th
century. There is no index.
PE1591 2005-010984 1-930901-87-9
The dictionary of vital expressions; how to use
expressions to persuade.
Kurjian, Douglas C.
Academica Press, LLC, ©2005 1415 p. $54.95
Rhetoric is the classical art of persuasion, and metaphors the most per-
suasive rhetorical device. The book is designed to show how to persuade
by using appropriate mixes of impressive sounding metaphors (also
known variously as expressions, clauses, phrases, idioms, figures, figures
of speech, tropes). The author prefers the more common term “expres-
sions.” An “Expression Awareness Program” presents a survey of expres-
sions and
demonstrates how to persuade by means of their rhetorical application.
Entries defining the expressions are listed by keywords (thus “accept
responsibility for” falls under responsibility”), and are in model sen-
tences. A search for a suitable expression can be done in a variety of
systems: a definition index, an index by individual words, and a pair of
appendixes that organizes expressions by personality and situational
effects (such as humor) and according to an “Intuitive Leap” thesaurus.
–268–
PE1630 2006-049596 978-0-19-861452-4
Movers and shakers; a chronology of words that shaped
our age.
Ayto, John.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 250 p. $25.00
British dictionarian Ayto revises his 1999 20th-Century Words and adds a
final chapter on neologisms in the early 21st century. Decade by decade,
he cites words introduced into English, notes the year of their first
recorded appearance; discusses their context, possible origin, and impact;
and in most cases provides an example or two of their use.
PE1667 2006-049925 978-0-19-861062-5
Gallimaufry; a hodgepodge of our vanishing vocabulary.
Quinion, Michael.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 272 p. $25.00
Word enthusiast Quinion offers another book on peculiarities in the sort
of English spoken in Britain. He surveys some words that are vanishing
or have recently vanished from common use in both spoken and written
English. His categories are food and drink; health and medicine; enter-
tainment and leisure; transport and fashion; and names, employment,
and communications. He concludes with a chapter on words that never
made prime time.
PE2102 1-84596-052-1
Scots; the mither tongue.
Kay, Billy.
Mainstream Publishing, ©2006 224 p. $19.95 (pa)
A writer for radio and television as well as print, Kay is devoted to cre-
ating an awareness of Scottish culture. Here he reissues his 1986
(Mainstream Publishing Company, Edinburgh) history of the Scots, the
much derided language he grew up speaking. A new prologue discusses
what the Scottish Parliament has and has not done to nurture Scots lan-
guage and culture since it reconvened (from 1707) in 1999; the bibliog-
raphy has been updated; and a list of web sites added. Distributed in the
US by Trafalgar Square.
PE2751 2005-034554 978-1-4051-1185-0
The handbook of world Englishes.
Title main entry. Ed. by Braj B. Kachru et al. (Blackwell handbooks in
linguistics)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 811 p. $174.95
Forty-two international academics and independent scholars contribute
42 specially commissioned articles exploring the theoretical, ideological,
applied, and pedagogical issues related to the major varieties of English
spoken around the world. Coverage includes the sociolinguistic contexts
of world Englishes, their diffusion and location in world contexts; the
functional ranges and domains in which such varieties are actually used
across cultures; the creative processes determining the distinctiveness of
each major variety; the relationship of linguistic creativity to accultur-
ation in distinct sociocultural contexts; the distinction between genetic and
functional nativeness, and its theoretical and practical implications; cross-
over between canons and canonicities, and devices used for representing
such distinctiveness; and attitude-marking love-hate relationships with
the medium and their reflections in language policies and language
planning in Anglophone societies. For researchers and students of world
Englishes.
PE2846 2006-015738 978-1-58297-423-1
Talk the talk; the slang of 65 American subcultures.
Reid, Luc.
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2006 422 p. $14.99 (pa)
Fiction writer Luc Reid takes readers on a linguistic tour of 65 American
subcultures, providing definitions and usage information on some 3,500
slang terms. The cross-referenced entries are organized into sections
explicating the lingo of such groups as carnival workers, goths, nudists,
online gamers, puppeteers, scuba divers, stamp collectors, and UFO
believers. The appendix is devoted to hip hop terminology. Technical
jargon is not covered. The volume concludes with some suggestions for
further reading and a complete word index.
–269–
PE3721 978-1-905172-07-8
Dublinese; know what I mean?
Share, Bernard.
The Collins Press, ©2006 200 p. $20.95
Having written a book in 2003 about slang and colloquial English in
Ireland, Share here explores the various colloquial tongues in Dublin,
showing how the city’s unique accent, vocabulary, and idiom have been
influenced by native culture and centuries of settlement, conquest, and
change. Rather than a dictionary, he presents essays on selected features
and neighborhoods. Distributed in the US by Dufour Editions.
PF3131 2005-055211 0-8204-7593-9
Production and perception of thematic contrast in
German.
Braun, Bettina. (Contemporary studies in descriptive linguistics; v.9)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2005 277 p. $54.95 (pa)
Braun (Max Planck Institute for Psycholinguistics, Nimmegen, The
Netherlands) presents an empirical investigation of thematic contrast in
German. The study includes an acoustic comparison between sentences
produced in contrastive and non-contrastive contexts, quantification of
intonational realization in terms of the height and position of tonal
targets, and rating experiments to test the perceptual reality of different
productions and the relevance of different acoustic cues. The data are
prosodically annotated by a group of linguists to explore the validity and
explanatory power of different accent categories for contrastive and non-
contrastive themes in German. No subject index.
PF3271 2006-022391 0-8204-8663-9
German ver-verbs; internal word structure and lexical
processing.
Schirmeier, Matthias K. (Berkeley insights in linguistics and semiotics;
v.63)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 168 p. $64.95
Schirmeier, English language officer for the German Army, examines one
of the central questions in psycholinguistics: how are complex works
processes in the human mind? Here he examines how human visually
recognize German ver-verbs, which are superficially uniform (obviously,
they all begin with ver-) but are structurally heterogeneous internally.
Schirmeier finds their internal structure is of the highest importance in
processing, showing the mind uses different strategies to process complex
words. He describes the literature that brought him to this study, the four
experiments he conducted, including morphological root and root+(en)
priming and awareness, and other experiments in whole-word priming
and lexical decisions with capitalization.
PG2129 2006-929473 978-0-7575-3416-4
Political Russian; an intermediate course in Russian
language for international relations, national security and
socio-economics, 5th ed.
Simes, Natasha and Richard M. Robin.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2006 532 p. $89.95 (pa)
Simes (Russian, John Hopkins U.) and Robin (Slavic languages and liter-
atures and international affairs, George Washington U.) present a revised
textbook for generalists and practitioners involved in international rela-
tions, foreign trade or people-to-people exchanges with Russia. The
emphasis is on the development of functional proficiency in three skill
types—reading, speaking, and listening—rather than “covering the
grammar,” with an added dose of political vocabulary and use of
authentic texts including radio broadcasts, newspaper articles and real-
istic speaking situations. Recorded materials for use with the text are
available at an accompanying website. The text assumes students possess
a first-year knowledge of Russian. No subject index. Revisions from the
2002 fourth edition to the fifth edition are not stated.
PG3015 978-1-904350-56-9
The fantastic in France and Russia in the nineteenth
century; in pursuit of hesitation.
Whitehead, Claire. (Studies in comparative literature; 10)
Legenda, ©2006 170 p. $69.00
Whitehead (Russian, U. of St. Andrews, Scotland) investigates the literary
genre of the fantastic as it was practiced in the two countries during the
rise of the novel and the grand narrative. Investigating both production
and reception, she analyzes the devices and techniques it uses to produce
hesitation in the mind of the reader, and explores how those mechanics
frustrate the reader’s search for unambiguous knowledge and definitive
interpretation. Dostoevskii, Gautier, Gogol de Maupassant, and Pushkin
are among the authors. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book
Company.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PG3311 2006-003928 0-7546-5628-4
The dramatic works of Catherine the Great; theatre and
politics in eighteenth-century Russia.
O’Malley, Lurana Donnels. (Performance in the long eighteenth century)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 227 p. $99.95
O’Malley (theatre, U. of Hawai’i Mañoa) examines the plays and opera
libretti of Catherine the Great, using a chronological and genre study
approach. She considers the early and late comedies, historical plays, and
comic operas, and Catherine’s political viewpoints in them, in addition
to her dramatic skill, characters, and humor. The way she educated her
public through the works is discussed, as well as the Shakespearean
influence apparent in them.
PG3337 2006-023423 978-0-8047-5370-8
A fallen idol is still a god; Lermontov and the quandaries
of cultural transition.
Allen, Elizabeth Cheresh.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 286 p. $55.00
Allen (Russian and comparative literature, Bryn Mawr College) elucidates
the historical distinctiveness and significance of the 19th-century poet,
playwright and novelist Mikhail Lermontov by demonstrating that
Lermontov’s works illustrate the condition of living in an epoch of tran-
sition. Through close and comparative readings, she explores the meta-
physical, psychological, ethical and aesthetic ambiguities and
ambivalences that mark Lermontov’s works and reflect the transition out
of Romanticism and the nature of post- Romanticism.
PG3467 2006-008592 0-299-21830-9
The Russian prospero; the creative universe of Viacheslav
Ivanov.
Bird, Robert.
U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 310 p. $26.95
He could relate tragedy seamlessly to Dionysus, his synthesis of
Christianity, Platonism and Nietzsche deeply informed Russian and
Western modernism, and although he became an expatriate in 1924, his
thought continues to influence Russian poetry, literary theory, philosophy
and theology. Ivanov’s originality and his previously obscure sources are
amongst the primary themes in this intellectual biography, and Bird
(Russian literature, U. of Chicago) shows how Ivanov’s thought evolved
and became so closely connected to international modernism. Bird
locates Ivanov’s attention to ecstatic creative psychology within a broader
historical context and through close readings identifies Ivanov’s need to
liberate his alternative himself to regain self-sovereignty and ethical
agency. Ivanov’s legacy and the continuing debate over his ideas and
motivations deserve this unique and rigorous approach, which should
intrigue all students of modernity regardless of their discipline of choice.
PG3488 2006-929181 978-1-933859-00-2
The Solzhenitsyn reader; new and essential writings,
1947-2005.
Title main entry. Ed. by Edward E. Ericson and Daniel J. Mahoney.
ISI Books, ©2006 634 p. $30.00
This volume offers a broad and representative selection of the work of
Russian writer Aleksandr Solzhenitsyn. Presented in their entirety are a
number of poems, short stories, essays, and speeches, along with excerpts
from Solzhenitsyn’s novels, memoirs, and books of political analysis and
historical scholarship. More than one quarter of the material has never
before appeared in English. Editors Ericson (emeritus, Calvin College)
and Mahoney (politics, Assumption College) provide an overview of
Solzhenitsyn’s life and work in the introduction.
PH5024 2006-001007 1-877802-62-X
Anthology of apologists and detractors of the Basque
language.
Title main entry. Ed. by Juan Madariaga Orbea. Trans. by Frederick H.
Fornoff et al. (Basque classics series; no.2)
U. of Nevada Press, ©2006 703 p. $29.95 (pa)
Orbea (geography and history, Universidad del Pais Vasco) presents a col-
lection of English translations of key texts and authors in the cultural
development of Europe’s Basque Country. The selections range from the
16th-19th centuries, from anonymous works authored by the “com-
munity” to Modern Age works written in the defense of the Basque lan-
guage—Euskara—and Basque political institutions.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PJ409 1-920694-63-3
Beyond good and evil?; essays on the literature and
culture of the Asia-Pacific region.
Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis Haskell et al.
U. of Western Australia Pr., ©2005 231 p. $26.95 (pa)
When Nietszche urged that we move “beyond good and evil” in his
eponymous text, he was pointing to what he saw as the relativism of the
terms, a relativisms that seems to have been rejected by President Bush
when he proclaimed the existence of an “Axis of Evil.” It is this question
of the relativism or fundamentalism of good and evil that is the primary
theme of the 17 essays exploring Asian-Pacific literature and culture pre-
sented in this collection by the editors (all of the U. of Western Australia).
Specific topics include moral attitudes towards sexuality in Hong Kong
English language literature, Australian representations of the Japanese in
World War II literature, the morality of Salman Rushdie’s Fury, and
moralities of national and ethnic identity. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
PJ3085 978-0-7734-5526-9
A synactic and literary analysis of ancient northwest
semitic inscriptions.
Schade, Aaron.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 329 p. $119.95
Northwest Semitic syntax has been explored at great length on word,
phrasal, and clausal levels. In this study, Schade (religious education,
Brigham Young U. Hawaii) utilizes a text-level approach to analyze
writings from the tenth-to-fifth centuries BCE, from Phoenicia, Moabite,
and Hebrew languages, and demonstrates how clauses and sentences
work together to form larger syntactic units. The study defines the syntax
of the inscriptions based on grammatical and syntactic markers, and
then offers examples of literary devices that help confirm the syntactic
interpretations, as the syntax is the vehicle that conveys the literary
devices.
PJ4013 2006-927550 978-0-9786429-0-7
Sumerian lexicon; a dictionary guide to the ancient
Sumerian language.
Title main entry. Ed. by John Alan Halloran.
Logogram Publishing, ©2006 318 p. $79.00 (pa)
Sumerian is a dead language found on clay tablets from the world’s
oldest civilization. Independent scholar Halloran has educated the public
about Sumerian from his Sumerian Language Page on the internet for ten
years. With this text, he provides academics and interested general
readers with a Sumerian-English dictionary containing some 6,400
entries of the ancient Sumerian vocabulary. The text replaces the third
version of Halloran’s online Sumerian Lexicon, adding 2,600 new entries,
correcting or expanding many of the previous entries, and merging
together and sorting the logogram words and the compound words into
purely alphabetical order. Distributed in the U.S. by the David Brown
Book Company.
PJ5050 2006-051767 978-90-04-14718-8
The Secular poetry of El’azar ben Ya’aqov ha-Bavli;
Baghdad, thirteenth century; on the basis of manuscript
Firkovicz Heb. IIA, 210.I St. Petersburg.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wout Jac. van Bekkum. (Études sur le
judaïsme médiéval; v.34)
BRILL, ©2007 — p. $121.00
Bekkum (Semitic languages and cultures, Rikhsuniversiteit Groningen)
presents a Hebrew edition of the collection of poems to contribute to
research into Hebrew poetics and poetry from the 12th and 13th cen-
turies in various cities across the Middle East. He also appends El’azar’s
poems that in the Adler manuscript ENA No. 881 but not in the Firkovicz
manuscript, with the vocalization and commentary that is missing from
Hayyim Brody’s 1935 edition of that collection. His introduction
overviews El’azar’s professional life and times.
PJ5059 978-0-85303-660-9
Identity and modern Israeli literature.
Domb, Risa.
Vallentine Mitchell, ©2006 107 p. $27.50 (pa)
As fiction reflects the rise of nationalism and collective identity, the
revived Hebrew language links modern Israeli Jewish identity, ideology,
and memory, according to Domb (modern Hebrew literature, U. of
Cambridge). She examines key novels by six Israeli authors: Aharon
Applefield, Yoram Kaniuk, Sami Michael, Gabriela Avigur-Rotem, Nathan
Shaham, and A.B. Yehosua. Central themes include the legacy of the
Holocaust, trying to reconcile Jews of different backgrounds, and early
Zionist idealism and current political realities. Distributed in the US by
ISBS.
–270–
PJ5191 2006-024109 978-0-8047-5183-4
Sing, stranger; a century of American Yiddish poetry; a
historical anthology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Benjamin Harshav.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 726 p. $75.00
This anthology of Yiddish poetry contains a range of examples of the
genre from the proletarian poetry of the late 19th-century, to the indi-
vidualistic poetry of post-World War I “Introspectivists” to the poetry of
the Holocaust. The work reflects the experiences of the individual in the
big metropolis, including the architecture and alienation of the big city,
trade unions, and the underworld. Barbara and Benjamin Harshav, who
both teach at Yale, include a glossary and a pronunciation key.
PJ6095 978-90-04-14474-3
Encyclopedia of Arabic language and linguistics; v.2: Eg-
Lan.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kees Versteegh et al.
BRILL, ©2007 716 p. $267.00
With four volumes anticipated to complete the work, this second volume
completes half of an ambitious reference. Written by 112 contributors at
research institutions worldwide, the entries describe topics on general
themes, specific words, linguistic issues, Arabic use or influence in indi-
vidual countries, and national languages and dialects. A sampling of
entry topics on general themes includes ethnicity and language, epig-
raphy, Europe, French loanwords, gender, government, intonation, and
language attitudes. The country entries contain a general overview of the
use or influence of Arabic there, the dialects, linguistic description, and
a lexicon. All entries conclude with a list of bibliography. Because of the
many entries on non-technical topics, the reference will be useful not only
to linguists, but also scholars and students in other disciplines. Versteegh
is at the U. of Nijmegen in the Netherlands. An index is not provided
with this volume.
PJ6773 2006-044018 978-90-04-14986-1
Mixed styles in spoken Arabic in Egypt; somewhere
between order and chaos.
Mejdell, Gunvor. (Studies in Semitic languages and linguistics; 48)
BRILL, ©2006 481 p. $230.00
Mejdell (Arabic language and culture, U. of Oslo) presents findings from
a study of spoken academic discourse in Egypt, specifically variations in
the linguistic choices made by several highly educated Egyptians in a
specific setting—the panel presentation at a public seminar. Coverage
includes an overview of the Egyptian language and the development of
the status and functions of its language varieties, and the issue of
intermediate forms or “mixed” styles. Subsequent chapters focus on the
features chosen for investigation—complementizers, demonstratives,
negation, relatives, and pronoun suffixation—all of which have binary
variants in the two basic codes available to the speaker, the standard
variety and the vernacular. The text concludes with a comparison and
discussion of the author’s findings on patterns of use of the various
features.
PJ7519 2006-015345 978-0-8166-4883-2
Liberating Shahrazad; feminism, postcolonialism, and
Islam.
Gauch, Suzanne.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2007 174 p. $20.00 (pa)
Gauch (English and women’s studies, Temple U.) reveals how Arabic and
Muslim women are foregrounding the legendary teller of the Thousand
and One Nights as a speaking agent whose stories have never ended and
whose resolve has only increased in the face of both rising fundamen-
talism and proliferating Western media images of Arab and Muslim
women as silent, oppressed, exploited, and uneducated victims.
PJ8190 2006-049577 978-90-04-15259-5
Pens, swords, and the springs of art; the oral poetry
dueling of Palestinian weddings in Galilee.
Yaqub, Nadia G. (Brill studies in Middle Eastern literature; v.32)
BRILL, ©2007 378 p. $162.00
Yaqub’s fascinating study of oral poetry addresses poetry dueling as a
performative and compositional device and considers the social efficacy
of poetry dueling, its aesthetic nature, and its value as a compositional
device within a larger system of poetic production. In addition to a study
of poetry dueling in standard Arabic, Yaqub (Arabic language and liter-
ature, U. of North Carolina, Chapel Hill) describes the historical and per-
formance contexts of the Palestinian duels and of poets and their
training. She provides a close analysis of a single performance, as well
as a reinterpretation of the nature of verbal dueling generally. The text
includes a transcription and translation of an entire performance.
–271–
PK1730 2006-021039 0-275-99167-9
The crescent and the pen; the strange journey of Taslima
Nasreen.
Deen, Hanifa.
Praeger, ©2006 274 p. $49.95
The conventional story in the West holds that Bangladeshi writer Nasreen
spoke out against Islamist fanatics, male oppression, and the curtailment
of freedom of expression; was charged by the government with injuring
religious sentiment; and was forced to go into hiding and flee her native
country in 1994. Deen (Centre for Muslim Minorities, Monash U.,
Australia) was puzzled by, for example, the lack of Bangladeshi women
defending her, and thought there might be more to the story. Between
1995 and 2000, she conducted over a hundred interviews and traveled not
only to Bangladesh several times, but also other places associated with
Nasreen, and found a stranger story than she had imagined.
PL41 2006-402787 3-447-05310-0
Exploring the eastern frontiers of Turkic.
Title main entry. Ed. by Marcel Erdal and Irina Nevskaya. (Turcologica;
v.60)
Harrassowitz, ©2006 263 p. $86.00 (pa)
Contributors identified only by name discuss grammatical, lexical, ono-
mastic, and historical issues of non-Muslim Turkic languages and
dialects spoken in South Siberia and in neighboring parts of Mongolia
and China. All of them are socially dominated by non-Turkic languages,
and many are acutely endangered and not sufficiently recorded. Of the
16 essays, five are in German and one in Russian. There is no index.
PL402 2005-056867 978-0-8248-3000-7
A handbood of ‘Phags-pa Chinese.
Coblin, W. South. (ABC Chinese dictionary series)
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 307 p. $38.00
Coblin (Chinese, U. of Iowa) presents a practical introduction to the study
of ‘Phags-pa Chinese, the earliest form of the Chinese language to be
written in a systematically devised alphabetic script; the text also serves
as a guide for reading and interpreting the script. Coverage includes an
overview of the invention of the script and its historical background, a
brief history of ‘Phags-pa studies, the alphabet and its interpretation,
salient features of the underlying sound system of the script and its com-
parison to various later forms of Chinese, followed by a glossary of
‘Phags-pa Chinese forms and their corresponding Chinese characters,
pinyin and stroke order indexes, and an index of ‘Phags-pa forms.
PL523 2006-017116 978-1-4051-1066-2
An introduction to Japanese linguistics, 2d ed.
Tsujimura, Natsuko. (Blackwell Textbooks in Linguistics)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 501 p. $99.95
Tsujimura (Japanese linguistics, Indiana U.) offers a descriptive source
and theoretical foundation of Japanese linguistics, covering phonetics,
phonology, morphology, syntax, semantics, language variation including
dialectal variation and gender differences, and language acquisition. The
second edition includes a new chapter on language acquisition, expanded
coverage of morphology to include new sections on nominalization and
compounding, and expanded coverage of semantics to include a new dis-
cussion of pragmatics and discourse analysis. Each chapter includes exer-
cises exploring descriptive and theoretical issues, and updated reading
lists. For students and scholars in linguistics and in Japanese language.
PL726 978-90-04-15709-5
Haikai poet Yosa Buson and the Basho revival.
Crowley, Cheryl A. (Brill’s Japanese studies library; v.27)
BRILL, ©2007 308 p. $99.00
Crowley (Japanese literature, Emory U.) examines the work of poet and
painter Buson (1716-83) as a window into the artistic practices in Japan
during a period of economic, technological, and social change. She looks
at his role in the revival of Matsuo Basho (1644-94), his endeavors with
linked verse and haikai painting, and his reception in the modern world.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PL726 2006-020766 978-0-8248-3020-5
A poetics of courtly male friendship in Heian Japan.
Schalow, Paul Gordon.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2007 219 p. $49.00
Western scholars have tended to read Heian literature through the prism
of female experience, stressing the imbalance of power in courtship and
looking for evidence that women hoped to move beyond the constraints
of marriage politics. In this study, Schalow (Japanese literature, Rutgers
U.) carries these concerns into a new realm of inquiry: the suffering of
noblemen and the literary record of their hopes for transcendence
through friendship. He traces this theme in five important literary works
ranging from the 10th-century Tale of Ise to the early 11th-century Tale of
Genji.
PL726 2005-031246 0-415-36186-9
Representing the other in modern Japanese literature; a
critical approach.
Title main entry. Ed. by Rachael Hutchinson and Mark Williams.
(Sheffield Centre for Japanese Studies/Routledge series)
Routledge, ©2007 345 p. $39.95 (pa)
Taking the theoretical approaches of Foucault and Lacan and the under-
pinning of their critical approach, 16 papers explore how writers of
Japanese literature have approached the Other and how that has led to
reconceptualizations of the Japanese Self and also look at Japanese
writers that have constructed their Selves as Other. Hutchinson (Japanese
studies, Colgate U., US) and Williams (Japanese studies, U. of Leeds, UK)
have organized the collection in reference to three different Others:
“Others outside Japan; Others inside Japan; and the complicated Other
of the liminal colonial and postcolonial world.”
PL747 2006-049274 978-90-04-15546-6
Japanese fiction of the Allied occupation; vision,
embodiment, identity.
Orbaugh, Sharalyn. (Brill’s Japanese studies library; vol.26)
BRILL, ©2007 515 p. $194.00
Some 15 years in the making, Orbaugh’s (Asian studies and women’s
studies, U. of British Columbia) study explores how Japanese writers of
fiction working during the Allied Occupation (1945-1952) contributed to
the postwar discourses of racial, national, and linguistic identity, as
influenced by the historical circumstances of war, defeat, privation, and
occupation by a foreign power. The texts examined include prewar and
wartime materials—films, fiction, posters, kamishibai plays,
advertisements—and Occupation- period fictional works, several of which
do not yet exist in English. The author suggests that the presence of
Occupation forces acted as a mirror in which previously obstructed
elements of Japanese racial and cultural identity became visible, and
were then incorporated into the efforts of writers—and their readers—to
use narrative in reorienting themselves to the drastically changed social
and political environment.
PL856 2006-010346 978-0-7391-0785-0
Murakami Haruki; the simulacrum in contemporary
Japanese culture.
Seats, Michael. (Studies of modern Japan)
Lexington Books, ©2006 365 p. $70.00
Seats (language studies, City University of Hong Kong) offers a new
approach to dealing with Murakami’s radical narrative project by
demonstrating how his first and later trilogies employ the structure of
the simulacrum, a second-order representation, to develop a complex cri-
tique of contemporary Japanese culture. Coverage includes an overview
of the critical-fictional contours of the “Murakami Phenomenon”;
Japanese modernity as seen within the contexts of the national-cultural
imaginary, globalized artistic discourses and the idea of the Japanese
novel; various perspectives on the theory of the simulacrum; and
analyses of several of Murakami’s works including Hear the Wind Sing,
Pinball, 1973, A Wild Sheep Chase, and The Wind-Up Bird Chronicle. For
scholars and students of Japanese studies and critical theory, and
modern Japanese literature.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PL2261 2006-009784 978-0-8047-5417-0
Revolution of the heart; a genealogy of love in China,
1900-1950.
Lee, Haiyan.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 364 p. $60.00
In focusing on Confucian, Enlightenment, and revolutionary discourses
of romantic sentiment in the Chinese literature in the first half of the
20th century, Lee (East Asian languages and civilizations, U. of Colorado)
highlights how modernity’s individualism is tied to representations of
love and their dialectical connections to the emergence of modern nation-
alism. As the discussion proceeds, he examines how the romantic and
psychoanalytic definitions of love displaced cosmic-ethical definitions
and how the universal subjectivity bound up with discourses of free love
were part of the project of overthrowing the Confucian family order. He
also seeks to show the linkage between the notion of national sympathy
and the discourse of national character.
PL2263 2006-050951 978-90-04-15483-4
Reading China; fiction, history and the dynamics of
discourse; essays in honor of professor Glen Dudbridge.
Title main entry. Ed. by Daria Berg. (China studies: v.10)
BRILL, ©2007 322 p. $134.00
Scholar Glen Dudbridge’s approach to Chinese studies has dealt with two
main issue: the use of literature as historical source material and a focus
on vernacular culture. This volume is a festschrift for Dudbridge in
which editor Berg (Chinese studies, U. of Nottingham, UK) presents con-
tributions from eight of Dudbridge’s former students applying similar
methodological approaches to Chinese texts dating from the fifth to the
20th centuries. Specific topics include eremitism (solitary monasticism)
and the pastoral in the 17th century poetry of Ruan Dacheng; the textual
and visual modes of production of a particular publishing house, the
relationship between language reforms and social change in the
Republican era (1911-1949), and women’s publishing ventures as a means
of rewriting literary history.
PL2443 2006-008799 978-0-8047-5485-9
Corruption and realism in late socialist China; the return
of the political novel.
Kinkley, Jeffrey C.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 288 p. $55.00
Kinkley (history, S. John’s U.) has chosen five representative contem-
porary Chinese novels concerned with corruption to subject to analysis:
Lu Tianming’s Heaven Above, Chen Fang’s Heaven’s Wrath, Zhang Ping’s
Choice, Wang Yuewen’s National Portrait, and Liu Ping’s Dossier on
Smuggling. He approaches each novel uniformly, discussing the types of
corruption that concern the author and its relation to realism, finding in
the end that despite its limitations, Chinese realism has much unrealized
potential to challenge centralized power, bureaucracy, and greed.
PL2652 2006-015676 0-7876-8146-6
Chinese fiction writers, 1900-1949.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Moran. (Dictionary of literary biog-
raphy ; v. 328)
Thomson Gale, ©2007 445 p. $225.00
Moran (Middlebury College) assembles 34 biographies of Chinese fiction
writers prominent in the first half of the twentieth century. The contrib-
utors, who are scholars based around the world, also critically examine
the writers’ works, provide a bibliography with translations of titles, and
include photos and b&w illustrations, many of them book covers. Some
of the writers are Ba Jin, Ding Ling, Lao She, Liu E, Lu Ling, Shen
Congwen, Eileen Chang, and Zhang Tianyi. A cumulative index is
included.
PL3705 2006-051842 978-90-04-15516-9
Contemporary Tibetan literary studies; proceedings.
International Association for Tibetan Studies Seminar (10th: 2003:
Oxford, England). (Brill’s Tibetan studies library; v.10/6)
BRILL, ©2007 158 p. $85.00
Mostly Western scholars of Tibetan literature present nine papers on such
topics as the emergence of historical fiction in contemporary Tibet, three
contemporary Mongolian-Tibetan writers, the poem Young Dondrup the
Courier, the creation of Tibetan literary voices in China, and magical
realism. No index is provided.
–272–
PL4072 2006-007230 978-0-87220-850-6
Butterfly mother; Miao (Hmong) creation epics from
Guizhou, China.
Title main entry. Trans. by Mark Bender.
Hackett Publishing Co., ©2006 214 p. $37.95
The 19 epic songs describe the origins of the sky and early, heavenly
bodies, landforms and water, plants and animals, farming practices,
ritual activities, and various local peoples. The collection is based on a
version compiled by Jin Dan and Ma Xueliang during the 1970s and early
1980s. The Miao in Southeast Guizhou are part of the largest of China’s
56 official ethnic groups. There is no index.
PL6231 2006-014324 978-0-8248-3061-8
A grammar of South Efate; an oceanic language of
Vanuatu. (includes CD-ROM)
Thieberger, Nick. (Oceanic linguistics special publication; no.33)
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 384 p. $39.00
Thieberger presents the first grammatical description of the language of
Central Vanuatu, spoken in Erakor village on the outskirts of Port Vila.
It has been classified as the southernmost member of the North-Central
Vanuatu subgroup of languages, and he shows that it shares with other
southern Vanuatu languages a lack of serial verb constructions of the
kind known for its northern neighbors, and the use of an echo-subject
marker. The accompanying DVD contains playable version of most
example sentences and texts, and includes a dictionary and finder-list.
PL8014 2006-027796 978-0-8214-1711-9
Rewriting modernity; studies in Black South African
literary history.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Attwell.
Ohio University Press, ©2005 236 p. $49.95
Asking whether the postcolonial transculturation theory pioneered by
Cuban anthropologist Fernando Ortiz, which rejects the passivity of
“recipient” cultures implied in theories of acculturation, applies to the
production of black literature in South Africa, Attwell (modern literature,
U. of York, UK) answers with a qualified affirmative. He pursues his
argument by combining historical narration, textual description and
analysis, comparative literary studies, and theory. Seeking a middle
ground of “rescripting in and through transcultural discourses of
modernity” that exists between the idea of a colonialism that dictates
terms and “blithe” concepts of appropriation and transformation, he dis-
cusses the intellectual productions of such authors as John Knox Bokwe,
John Langalibalele Dube, Solomon T. Plaatje, Thomas Mofolo, B.W.
Vilakazi, H.I.E. Dhlomo, Es’kia Mphahlele, and the writers of the Black
Consciousness movement of the 1970s.
PM205 978-0-7734-5639-6
The social and linguistic heritage of native peoples in the
Americas; the struggle to maintain cultural particularity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Laura N.K. Van Broekhoven.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 298 p. $119.95
Van Broekhoven (archaeology, Leiden U., Belgium) presents a collection
of ten essays, written by fellow Leiden academics and Mexican colleagues
also affiliated with Leiden U., which examine the postcolonial conditions
of indigenous peoples and how their political mobilization influences col-
lective identities. Coverage includes an overview of postcolonial studies in
North America; postcolonial studies in the Mesoamerican culture area,
particularly the Ñuu Savi and Zapotec studies; and postcolonial studies
in the Andean region. The text focuses on the efforts of indigenous
peoples to create new lives, to build their own organizations, and to rep-
resent themselves in a process of building an indigenous civil society that
can help face the challenges of the future. No subject index.
CRITICISM, THEATER, FILM, JOURNALISM, ETC.
PN44 2005-058540 978-0-393-92837-2
Essential literary terms; a brief Norton guide with
exercises.
Hamilton, Sharon.
W.W. Norton, ©2007 292 p. $22.00 (pa)
This text defines over 220 literary terms and offers examples and exer-
cises to increase comprehension. The exercises, which build in length, ask
students to identify a literary device in a passage and to analyze the way
the device affects the meaning and overall effect of the work. The guide
also includes a brief appendix on MLA documentation and a sample
student paper on a literary topic.
–273–
PN56 2006-021116 0-8156-3109-X
The Holy Land in transit; colonialism and the quest for
Canaan.
Salaita, Steven. (Middle East studies beyond dominant paradigms)
Syracuse U. Pr., ©2006 234 p. $16.95 (pa)
Salaita (English, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University)
presents a comparative literary analysis of Native American
(Anishinaabe) writers Gerald Vizenor and Winona Lduke and Palestinian
writes Emile Habiby and Liyana Badr. He explores the effects of the
colonial settler rhetoric of the United States and Israel on the counter-dis-
courses produced by indigenous peoples, paying particular attention to
the trickster discourses found in the fiction of Vizenor and Habiby.
PN56 2006-031212 0-313-33780-2
Icons of horror and the supernatural; an encyclopedia of
our worst nightmares; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by S.T. Joshi. (Greenwood icons)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 796 p. $175.00
This encyclopedia features topics relating to icons in supernatural and
nonsupernatural fiction, their origins in folklore and legend, character-
istics, and analysis of their prominence in specific works of literature
and film, and in popular culture and society. Joshi, an author of books
on the supernatural and other topics, brings together two volumes that
contain 11-13 articles each; these are longer than conventional encyclo-
pedia entries (about 30 pages) and presented alphabetically. Topics—dis-
cussed by scholars, writers, and other authorities on the subject—include
icons such as the alien, angel and demon, devil, curse, ghost, haunted
house, immortal, monster, mummy, psychic, sorcerer, vampire, werewolf,
and zombie. Quotations and excerpts, and lists of major films and
novels, are included in each article. The volumes are aimed at students,
general readers, and scholars and avoid any technical jargon from lit-
erary criticism. An index is provided in the second volume only.
PN56 2006-046980 0-7734-5524-8
Key signifier as literary device; its definition and function
in literature and media.
Kim, Heerak Christian.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 164 p. $99.95
Kim (Asia Evangelical College and Seminary) defines and explains his
concept of the “key signifier,” which he asserts allows readers to fully
understand the intention of a literary work. He defines the key signifier
as a term or phrase that triggers a collective memory or a community
value that is overarching and all-encompassing, a phrase which functions
aggressively in the literary context to spur the audience to action. He
shows how key signifiers work in the Bible, the apocrypha and the
pseudepigrapha, African-American literature, a number of inter-cultural
sources, and the media.
PN57 978-90-420-2110-5
Hidden mutualities; Faustian themes from gnostic origins
to the postcolonial.
Mitchell, Michael. (Cross cultural; readings in the post/colonial litera-
tures in English; 87)
Editions Rodopi, ©2006 330 p. $94.00
Persecuted by the Church and state, Gnostic seekers were forced to
pursue the goal of divine knowledge in secret, says Mitchell (Caribbean
studies, U. of Warwick), making their endeavor occult and so linked in
tradition with Hermetic traditions. He argues that this theme of for-
bidden learning came into manifestation as the Faust story during the
ecclesiastical crisis in Renaissance Europe, then traces the theme through
science, politics, and the arts to the present. Parts of the work have been
published elsewhere. There is no index.
PN81 978-0-8020-9209-0
The educated imagination and other writings on critical
theory, 1933-1963.
Title main entry. Ed. by Germaine Warkentin. (Collected works of
Northrop Frye; v.21)
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 553 p. $125.00
Warkentin (emeritus, English, U. of Toronto) provides a pithy intro-
duction to the texts that follow, giving the context for them within Frye’s
ouevre and noting where pertinent their role in the thinking that led to
Frye’s masterpiece, The anatomy of criticism (which isn’t included in this
volume). The volume contains many short reviews and essays on poetry,
myth, art, cultural history, literature, symbolism, and other topics. Frye’s
longer essay, The educated imagination terminates the volume. Each
selection is preceded by a brief introduction by the editor.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN98 2006-015598 978-0-87352-947-1 PN162 2006-006625 1-932559-75-2
Diversifying the discourse; the Florence Howe Award for Revision; history, theory, and practice.
Outstanding Feminist Scholarship, 1990-2004. Title main entry. Ed. by Alice Horning and Anne Becker.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mihoko Suzuki and Roseanna Dufault. Parlor Press, ©2006 257 p. $30.00 (pa)
Modern Language Association, ©2006 342 p. $22.00 (pa) Revision has a power and purpose of its own; it is a public act, it is a
The award began in 1974, administered by the Women’s Caucus for the craft of wide dimensions, and it has a finite nature that nevertheless goes
Modern Languages, and an anthology of winning essays up to 1989 was beyond the narrow boundaries of editing. In these ten essays plus an
published in 1990. Here are those from the next 15 years. The title was introduction, contributors explore the act of revision and its results along
chosen to remark on the multiplicity of discourses that mark them. The with its role in pedagogy. Papers define revision according to scholars
essayists are scholars of mostly English literature, but also Spanish and and by practice, and as an assertion of identity, review writing model
French. Only names are indexed. research based on cognitive processes, show how revision affects basic
writers and students for whom English is a second language, examine
PN161 2006-022617 978-1-58297-367-8 revision-focused textbooks, analyze the role of word processing and doc-
Bulletproof book proposals. ument design software, assess revision as an element of professional and
Brodowsky, Pamela K. and Eric Neuhaus. creative writing, describe best classroom practices and present modeling
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2006 296 p. $14.99 (pa) exercises. The collection closes with practical guidelines for writers and
teachers, a glossary, and an annotated bibliography.
This guide gives a quick and relatively painless ten-step system for
writing a proposal with tips on everything from defining your market to PN213 2006-2757 978-3-11-018948-3
choosing a catchy title and selling yourself as the author. It then provides
12 successful sample proposals with critiques from agents and editors.
The implied author; concept and controversy.
The result is suitable for self-study or the classroom. The only thing Kindt, Tom and Hans-Harald Müller. (Narratologia; 9)
missing is the proposal that sold this title. Walter de Gruyter, ©2006 224 p. $105.30
Kindt (U. of Göttengen) and Müller (U. of Hamburg) examine the concept
PN161 2006-004919 978-1-879384-66-8 of the implied author, the fundamental criticism it has drawn since
The dog walked down the street; an outspoken guide for Wayne C. Booth brought it up in 1961, and why it is still being used in
writers who want to publish. the study of language in most languages today. Building on that foun-
dation, they then propose a more precise way of understanding the
Glynn, Sal.
concept that does not diverge completely from they ways it has been used
QED Press, ©2006 81 p. $13.95 (pa)
previously. On a deeper level, they hope to demonstrate why the historical
Sal Glynn abandoned his job as an editor working within the confines development of terms and concepts should be given proper attention in
of publishing houses to become, in his words, a book midwife, assisting the historiography of scholarly activity. They do not provide an index.
writers directly and intimately with birthing their works. In this slim
volume, Glynn provides concise, friendly, and practical tips on writing PN441 2006-024317 978-3-11-018932-2
and publishing, with many funny references throughout. He concludes Literary history; towards a global perspective; 4v.
with an annotated bibliography of useful books on reading, writing, and
Title main entry.
publishing. Not indexed.
Walter de Gruyter, ©2006 1055 p. $298.00
PN161 2006-278613 978-0-9749344-4-0 The boxed four-volume set does not aspire to be a history of world liter-
The street-smart writer; self defense against sharks and ature, but rather to discuss three fundamental questions that have
scams in the writing world. inhibited the conception and realization such histories, at least in
English, since the end of World War II. They address the notion of liter-
Glatzer, Jenna and Daniel Steven.
ature (volume one), the problem of genres (volume two), and encounters
Nomad Press, ©2006 296 p. $16.95 (pa)
between literary cultures (volumes three and four). In the process, they
Veteran writer Glatzer and publishing attorney Steven explain what do present some interesting perspectives on particular cases, and high-
aspiring writers need to know in order to avoid unscrupulous agents, light how a number of cultures around the world relate their verbal pro-
bogus publishers, scam contests and others who prey on the hopeful. A duction to their cultural life and their self- defining narrative practices.
sampling of topics includes “vanity” presses, trouble spots in book con- With a few exceptions, the contributors are Swedish scholars of literature.
tracts, and the basics of copyright. A number of sample forms, including Each volume is paged and indexed separately.
an interview release and a contributor’s agreement, are found at the back
of the volume. PN441 2006-017967 978-0-8047-5374-6
The literary in theory.
PN161 31-20772 978-1-58297-427-9
Culler, Jonathan. (Cultural memory in the present)
Writer’s market, 2007. Stanford U. Press, ©2007 276 p. $21.95 (pa)
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Lee Brewer and Joanna Masterson.
Literary critic Culler (English and comparative literature, Cornell U.)
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2006 1177 p. $29.99 (pa)
argues that not only is literary theory alive and well, despite its many
Featuring over 600 new listings, this annually updated resource for obituaries, but that such theory need not eclipse literature itself, as many
writers provides contact information and detailed submission guidelines critics have claimed. He brings theory to literature, and brings out the lit-
for more than 4,000 markets where they can sell their work and get pub- erary in theory. The two are not quarreling, he says, and do not need to
lished. Entries are arranged by type of publication (e.g. book publishers, be separated.
consumer magazines) and then by subject. The information is based on
editorial questionnaires and interviews. The volume also contains 16 PN669 978-2-503-51698-1
articles by professional writers offering advice on practical considera- Grant risee?; the medieval comic presence/La présence
tions like querying agents, finding regular freelance work, and setting comique médiévale; essays in memory of Brian J. Levy.
rates.
Title main entry. Ed. by Adrian P. Tudor and Alan Hindley. (Medieval
texts and cultures of Northern Europe 11)
PN162 2005-030710 978-0-87352-971-6
Brepols Publishers, ©2006 359 p. $125.00
Electronic textual editing. (CD-ROM included)
Levy’s love of life was legendary, and one of the ways he expressed it best
Title main entry. Ed. by Lou Burnard et al.
was in his scholarship. His interests included modern French language
Modern Language Association, ©2006 419 p. $28.00 (pa)
and literature, film, Old French language and literature, medieval art
Although the contributors come from diverse disciplines and institutions and iconography, codicology and paleography. His colleagues commem-
around the world, this collection reflects an emerging consensus about orate his life here with scholarship of their own along with an essay on
the fundamental issues of electronic textual editing. The 24 essays the medieval comic presence and an analytical bibliography of Levy’s
address markup coding and procedures, electronic archive adminis- published works. Topics include the early appearances of the statue of
tration, use of standards, rights and permissions, and the changing envi- the urinating boy, the joys of marriage, the medieval Jew, the beastly
ronment of the internet. The guidelines of the Modern Language epic, professions, taking humor seriously in the Moralités, saintly inter-
Association for scholarly editions are included in full. The accompanying cession, political humor, humor and identity, food and humor in wall
CD contains the complete text of the Text Encoding Initiative guidelines hangings, carnivals and games, the foxy peculiarities of the Roman de
(P4 edition) in HTML and PDF formats. Renart, status and sexuality, and a woman’s response to La Bestiarire
d/amour. Distributed by the David Brown Book Company.

Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –274–

PN771 2006-929297 0-7876-7539-3
Concise major 21st-century writers; a selection of sketches
from contemporary authors; 5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tracey L. Matthews.
Thomson Gale, ©2006 4000 p. $469.00
Based on Thomson Gale’s Contemporary Authors series, Major 21st-
Century Writers presented biographical and bibliographical information
on influential and emerging writers of literary significance. Only
available online, it has here been distilled to 700 entries over the course
of five volumes, including authors who have made literature their
primary occupation and have written in English. The selection criteria
also included whether the authors had won major awards, had works
that were bestsellers, or had works that were included in high school and
college curricula. Each entry provides information on the authors per-
sonal history, including birth and death dates, family life, education,
career, memberships, and awards. Bibliographical information is then
presented, followed by information on the critical reception of the
author’s works. Also included is bibliographical information on books,
articles, and reviews about the author and his or her works, information
about adaptations of the author’s works, and lists of works scheduled to
be published by the author. Indexes included in the final volume list the
entries by nationality/ethnicity and subject/genre (covering some fifty
genre and subject areas of fiction and non-fiction.
PN849 2006-017972 978-0-8047-3198-0
All the difference in the world; postcoloniality and the
ends of comparison.
Melas, Natalie. (Cultural memory in the present)
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 278 p. $21.95 (pa)
After assuring readers that she is not about to compare anything to any-
thing else, or to propose a new model for comparative analysis, Melas
(comparative literature, Cornell U.) examines various instances of post-
colonial comparison by analyzing figures of incommensurability in a set
of literary and theoretical texts. She views post- coloniality as a condition
linked to the cultural logic subtending the history of European conquests
begun 500 years ago that brought the world as an empirical totality into
human apprehension.
PN865 2006-022842 978-3-11-018955-1
Studying transcultural literary history.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gunilla Lindberg-Wada. (Spectrum
Literaturwissenschaft = Spectrum literature; no.10)
Walter de Gruyter, ©2006 316 p. $132.30
Drawn from contributions presented at an international symposium held
November 2004 in Stockholm under the name “Literature and Literary
History in Global Contexts,” these 34 papers examine some of the major
problems of transcultural literary history, including problems of com-
parisons and literary exchanges. Topics include models such as India,
cultural sensitivity, the limits of what can be termed “global,” African
histories of textuality, rhetorical uses of poetry in nineteenth-century east-
central Europe, the formation of Japanese literature, evolution and world
systems, the “Englishness” of English literary histories, fugitive moder-
nities such as Black writing in South Africa, examples of works traveling
west, and reevaluation of how we think of the Other, the concrete and
the universal.
PN1009 2006-020838 978-0-8108-5415-4
Beyond Babar; the European tradition in children’s
literature.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sandra L. Beckett and Maria Nikolajeva.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 322 p. $46.00 (pa)
Beckett (modern languages, literature, and culture, Brock U., Canada) and
Nikolajeva (comparative literature, Stockholm U.) present this collection
of 12 essays with the intention of expanding the canon of commonly-
studied European children’s literature to include 11 notable non-English
language novels. Of interest primarily to literary scholars and professors
of children’s literature, and secondarily to librarians and teachers, the
essays offer a variety of theoretical perspectives on children’s novels from
Poland, Norway, France, Italy, Sweden, Germany, Belgium, and
Denmark. The texts discussed include the Pippi Longstocking series, The
Little Prince, The Neverending Story, and the novel-cum-introduction to phi-
losophy’s history Sophie’s World. In the concluding essay, Nikolajeva dis-
cusses approaches, challenges, and lessons of translation into English.
–275–
PN1009 2006-011358 978-1-59187-065-4
Favorite children’s authors and illustrators, 2d ed.; 8v.
Title main entry. Ed. by E. Russell Primm.
Tradition Books, ©2006 1344 p. $138.00
For middle-grade readers, the eight volumes in this collection feature
about 300 biographical essays on children’s authors and illustrators,
mostly from the twentieth century. Presented alphabetically, essays are
brief, and include a photo, reproductions of book covers, quotes, and
facts. A sampling of those included: Louisa May Alcott, Laura Ingalls
Wilder, Lemony Snicket, J.K. Rowling, A.A. Milne, Beverly Cleary, Dr.
Seuss, Judy Blume, Roald Dahl, and Madeleine L’Engle. Selected bibli-
ographies of works are incorporated; they have been revised and updated
for this edition. It has also been expanded by two volumes, with each
volume in the set having a cumulative index.
PN1009 2006-007081 0-8018-8517-5
Feeling like a kid; childhood and children’s literature.
Griswold, Jerome.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 148 p. $19.95
Griswold (English and comparative literature, San Diego State U.)
explores recurring themes or qualities in children’s literature, examining
their appeal and comparing children’s imaginative world with that of
adults. In an attractively designed petite volume, enduring stories that
feature snugness, scariness (i.e. Where the Wild Things Are, smallness
(Gulliver’s Travels), lightness (Peter Pan) and the aliveness of the inan-
imate world (Pinochio), are discussed with an eye to what they reflect of
the child’s mind and to their potential to help adults once again feel like
kids. Some color images support the text.
PN1009 2006-010924 978-1-85359-905-7
The translation of children’s literature; a reader.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gillian Lathey. (Topics in translation; no.31)
Multilingual Matters Ltd., ©2006 259 p. $44.95 (pa)
Lathey, acting director of the National Center for Research in Children’s
Literature, gathers journal articles and book chapters, published during
the last 30 years. From an investigation of linguistic features specific to
children’s translation, to a model of narrative communication with the
child reader in translated texts, the essays offer new insights into the
challenges of translating for the young. Material explores themes related
to theoretical approaches and their application, translating the visual, the
travels of children’s books and cross-cultural influences, and the trans-
lator’s voice. The book is distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.
PN1010 978-1-58297-433-0
Poet’s market, 2007.
Title main entry. Ed. by Nancy Breen and Erika O’Connell.
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2007 571 p. $26.99 (pa)
This reference lists more than 1,800 magazines, journals, presses, con-
tests, and other markets where poets can get their work published. Each
listing contains up-to-date contact information as well as detailed sub-
mission guidelines. In addition to subject and general indexes, the 2007
edition contains several special indexes: chapbook publishers, book pub-
lishers, openness to submissions, and geographical. Sixteen how-to
articles and “Insider Reports” discuss such topics as manuscript prepa-
ration, poetry on the Internet, and “problem” editors.
PN1181 2006-023175 978-3-11-018100-5
Poets laureate in the Holy Roman Empire; a bio-
bibliographical handbook; 4v.
Flood, John L.
Walter de Gruyter, ©2006 2529 p. $604.80
As a beginning reference, the author provides information about more
than 1,300 poets who received the laurel from the hands of or in the
name of Holy Roman Emperors between 1355 and 1804. Though not
much information is available about some, he says, at least a citation on
each sets a foundation upon which further research can be built, and
that can be of use immediately to scholars of the politics or the literature
of the period. The poets are listed in alphabetical order, and the entries
identify the date and place of laureation and who, or on whose behalf,
it was performed. A few paragraphs discuss what is known of his life
and career, and bibliographies cite original works, modern editions, illus-
trations, reference works, and secondary literature. An appendix lists
poets laureate in England from 1451 to 1999. Other back matter includes
a chronological list of laureations, places, conferring people and author-
ities, dates of emperors and other potentates, and other information. The
four volumes are paged and indexed together.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN1590 2006-029093 978-0-7879-7844-0
Arts marketing insights; the dynamics of building and
retaining performing arts audiences.
Bernstein, Joanne Scheff.
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 294 p. $27.95
For managers, board members, fundraisers, marketers, professors, and
students of arts management, this volume details new ways and com-
monly accepted practices for audience retention and development.
Bernstein (business institutions, Northwestern U. and executive director,
Lake Forest Symphony) details techniques and why they work, such as
strategic marketing plans, building a brand identity, market research,
internet and email marketing, and good customer service. She describes
important demographic characteristics, customer mind- sets, how to
build a subscriber base, and alternatives to subscriptions. Both small and
large institutions are addressed, and examples from around the world
are used. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
PN1590 2006-006237 978-0-472-06950-7
Staging philosophy; intersections of theater, performance,
and philosophy.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Krasner and David Z. Saltz.
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 334 p. $28.95 (pa)
Scholars of drama, philosophy, and literature apply insights from current
philosophical theories to performance theory. Writing for non-specialists
in the philosophy of performance, they consider such topics as critical
realism and performance strategies, the ontology of presence recon-
sidered, and the Black arts movement and logo-centrism.
PN1979 2006-023745 978-1-59158-404-9
Kamishibai story theater; the art of picture telling.
de Las Casas, Dianne.
Teachers Ideas Press, ©2006 85 p. $27.00 (pa)
A storyteller and teacher of storytelling, de Las Casas introduces three
methods of using the Japanese art form that combines storytelling,
drama, and visual arts in classrooms. Then she presents her version of
25 stories from Asia that can be used with the methods.
PN1991 2006-013679 978-0-7546-5517-6
Radio modernism; literature, ethics, and the BBC, 1922-
1938.
Avery, Todd.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 158 p. $89.95
Weaving together the institutional history of the BBC and developments
in ethical philosophy as mediated and forged by writers such as T.S.
Eliot, H.G. Wells, E.M. Forster, and Virginia Woolf, Avery (English, U. of
Massachusetts Lowell) shows how prominent authors’ involvement with
radio helped to shape the ethical contours of literary modernism. In the
process, Avery demonstrates the central role that radio played in the
early dissemination of modernist art and literature, and also challenges
t he conventional assertion that modernists were generally elitist and
anti-democratic.
PN1992 0-7190-7458-4
Beyond representation; television drama and the politics
and aesthetics of identity.
Harris, Geraldine.
Manchester U. Press, ©2006 210 p. $74.95
Harris (theatre studies, Lancaster U.) examines how academic theories
generally belonging to the postmodern milieu have and have not
impacted actual practice in television drama. Her topics include modes
of reading in Marxist-socialist and post-Marxist-socialist television drama
criticism, myths of the global and global myths in Star Trek, and
romantic attractions and queer dilemmas in Queer as Folk. Distributed in
the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
We're always delighted to hear from our readers.
Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN1992 1-55238-222-2
Canadian television today.
Beaty, Bart and Rebecca Sullivan. (Op-Position: Issues and Ideas series,
no.1)
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 168 p. $24.95 (pa)
Beaty and Sullivan (communication and culture, U. of Calgary) consider
issues of media, technology, cultural policy, identity, and nationhood as
they explore where Canadian television is today and the implications of
its current status as Canadians move into the future. Following an
overview of the main issues, the authors examine the technology of tele-
vision, the people who watch it and the programs they watch, and the
regulatory framework that exists in Canada to mediate between the two.
Beaty and Sullivan conclude that as Canada as a nation changes through
immigration, urbanization, and globalization, so too will Canadian tele-
vision need to evolve to serve the cultural needs of its increasingly mul-
ticultural population.
PN1992 2006-042315 978-0-8058-4997-4
The children’s television community.
Title main entry. Ed. by J. Alison Bryant
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 304 p. $32.50 (pa)
Bryant, who works for Nickelodeon/MTV Networks, brings together 14
essays that consider the process of creating children’s television in the US
and the people and organizations involved. Topics covered include the
evolution of children’s television and why it has changed, the economic
side, production and distribution elements, programming on PBS and
cable, product sales, new technology, regulation, the effects of advocacy
groups, and TV and the problem of obesity. Contributors are academics,
industry professionals, researchers, and advocacy group professionals.
The book is intended for educators, professionals, and practitioners in
media, developmental psychology, and education, as well as advanced
level courses. It contains both author and subject indexes.
PN1992 2006-018108 978-0-275-98807-4
Crime television.
Snauffer, Douglas. (The Praeger television collection)
Praeger, ©2006 260 p. $49.95
Snauffer writes on television and film for a number of publications and
has written and produced for TV. In this book he offers a chronological
examination of the history and evolution of television’s prolific crime
genre. In chapters organized by decade, he traces the genesis of 1950s
shows like Dragnet from radio detective dramas, then discusses the many
successful series that followed including “Charlie’s Angels,” “The Mod
Squad,” and “Columbo,” “Law & Order,” “CSI,” and “24,” among many
others. Interviews with “The Rockford Files” creator and other insiders
augment the author’s own first-hand research of the processes, politics,
and final products of 50 years worth of crime television. Twenty-six b&w
stills from various series are included. There are no bibliographic refer-
ences.
PN1992 2006-011890 1-4144-0221-X
Television in American society; 3v.
Hillstrom, Laurie Collier.
UXL, ©2007 679 p. $181.00
Aimed at young adult readers, this comprehensive reference on television
in American society is divided into three volumes. The first surveys the
development of television technology, the growth of the broadcast and
cable TV industries, and the evolution of programming. It also discusses
the industry’s impact on American society and culture. Volume 2 con-
tains 15 full or excerpted primary documents relating to the development
and impact of television. Biographies of 26 key individuals, including
inventors, network executives, and entertainers are found in the third
volume. All feature b&w photo illustrations. A cumulative index is bound
separately.
PN1992 2006-012471 978-0-472-11578-5
Warm up the snake; a Hollywood memoir.
Rich, John.
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 238 p. $29.95
Author John Rich worked as a television producer and director on The
Dick Van Dyke Show, All in the Family, The Jeffersons, Good Times, Barney
Miller, Gilligan’s Island, and other successful American television series.
In this memoir, he recounts numerous anecdotes from those years and
reflects on the behind-the-scenes politics of the American television
industry.
–276–
PN1993 2005-037855 0-7619-3460-X
Bollywood; sociology goes to the movies.
Dudrah, Rajinder Kumar.
Sage Publications, ©2006 210 p. $110.00
The audience for the Hindu cinema of Mumbai (formerly Bombay) has
gone global, while people of dark skin or the Muslim faith are increas-
ingly suspect since 9/11. In this context, Dudrah (screen studies, U. of
Manchester, UK) presents an analysis wedding media and cultural
studies. Following an overview of the Bollywood phenomenon and influ-
ences on him such as Norman Denzin’s sociology of cinema, he examines
multiple dimensions of these films from their representation of identity
issues in India and the Indian diaspora to their songs. The six genres of
Bollywood films (devotional, historical, social, the Muslim social sub-
genre, masala or all-action, and romantic) are described in an appendix.
The movie stills could be of better quality.
PN1993 2006-019500 1-932907-16-5
Independent film distribution; how to make a successful
end run around the big guys.
Hall, Phil.
Michael Wiese Productions, ©2006 272 p. $26.95 (pa)
Assuming a reader with completed film in hand, Hall (contributing
editor to the online magazine Film Threat) provides advice on finding an
audience through independent distribution. He introduces the various
industry figures involved in film distribution, the role of film festivals,
the direct-to-video market, and other issues. He includes a number of
interviews with independent film figures discussing their own experi-
ences with independent film distribution.
PN1993 2006-013419 978-0-02-865791-2
Schirmer encyclopedia of film; 4v.
Grant, Barry Keith.
Thomson Gale, ©2007 2136 p. $425.00
This four-volume reference on film treats its subject as art, entertainment,
and industry contains 200 alphabetical entries discussing film genres;
studies; national cinemas; technological, commercial, and cultural issues;
and critical theories of film. Entries are longer than in many other
similar references, ranging from approximately 1,500 to 9,000 words
each, and are intended to reflect both the most influential and the most
recent scholarship from the different areas of film studies. Each entry
includes a brief “further reading” bibliography. A representative sample
of topics covered includes auteur theory and authorship, B movies,
Chinese cinema, choreography, fantasy films, French film, feminism,
Native Americans and cinema, reception theory, road movies, sexuality,
structuralism and poststructuralism, United Artists, violence, Walt Disney
Company, and Yiddish cinema. The encyclopedia includes a large, but
not overwhelming, number of film stills and other illustrative materials.
Chief editor Grant (film studies and popular culture, Brock U., Canada)
also includes 230 sidebars profiling important film figures related to
accompanying articles (for example, Shirley Temple is profiled as part of
the entry on child stars).
PN1993 978-1-55783-707-3
Screen world; v.57.
Willis, John.
Applause Books, ©2006 466 p. $24.95 (pa)
The basic production credits for all major film released in the United
States for the year 2005 are accompanied by numerous stills and, often,
brief synopses. Also included in the volume are photos of up and coming
new actors, place and birth data for a few hundred select actors, brief
obituaries of recently deceased film figures, and photos of academy
award winners and nominees. With the exception of just over ten pages
of color stills, all of the illustrations are in black and white.
PN1994 2006-023868 978-0-8108-5856-5
Film musing; a selected anthology from Fanfare
magazine.
Brown, Royal S.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2007 414 p. $45.00 (pa)
Brown (European languages and literatures, Queens College), a former
music editor of Fanfare magazine, provides a selective collection of many
of his columns mostly published as “Film Musings” in the magazine.
They consist of reviews of recordings of film music and a few interviews
with composers, arranged chronologically from 1983-2001. The films are
in boldface for easy browsing and catalog numbers and other infor-
mation has been omitted. Some articles have been revised and are noted
when revisions appear. Indexes are by name and film.
–277–
PN1994 1-84682-018-9
National cinemas and world cinema.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kevin Rockett and John Hill. (Studies in Irish
film; 3)
Four Courts Press, ©2006 149 p. $55.00
Film scholars, most from Ireland, present a selection of 11 papers from
the 2005 meeting of an annual conference, held in Dublin. They situate
national—mostly but not only Irish—cinema in the context of world
cinema. Among their topics are the cinematograph in provincial Ireland
1896-1906, American dreams and Irish myths in The Secret of Roan Inish,
the films of Andrei Tarkovsky, and designing asynchronous sound for
film. Distributed in the US by ISBS.
PN1994 2006-279523 978-1-4051-5411-6
Thinking through cinema; films as philosophy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Murray Smith and Thomas E. Wartenberg.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 222 p. $39.95 (pa)
Including works by both film scholars and philosophers, Smith (film
studies, U. of Kent, UK) and Wartenberg (philosophy, Mount Holyoke U.,
US) present seventeen papers take up the question of whether philosophy
can take the form of, or be articulated through, film. In sections covering
American, European, and avant-garde cinemas, the contributors display
a wide range of approaches, topical concerns, and conclusions. Specific
topics include transparency and twist in narrative fiction film, Eternal
Sunshine of the Spotless Mind and the morality of memory, Sartre’s phi-
losophy of nothingness and the modern melodrama, cinema and sub-
jectivity in Krzysztof Kieslowski, and directing desire and female
auteurship in the cinema of Catherine Breillat.
PN1995 2006-028264 978-1-933330-12-9
Asia shock; horror and dark cinema from Japan, Korea,
Hong Kong, and Thailand.
Galloway, Patrick.
Stone Bridge Press, ©2006 211 p. $19.95 (pa)
The author defines “dark cinema” as “a meta-genre that embraces the
macabre and disturbing, shocking and profane, dire and devastating
extremes of the contemporary film experience,” thus encompassing
horror, exploitation film, black comedy, psychological thrillers, and even
some types of police procedurals and art house fare. In this work he
takes the reader on a tour of 41 of his favorite examples of dark cinema
from Japan, Korea, China, and Thailand, describing them in synopsis
and offering his own typically enthusiastic judgments.
PN1995 2002-006481 978-0-8018-8537-2
Blue-collar Hollywood; liberalism, democracy, and
working people in American film. (reprint, 2003)
Bodnar, John.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 284 p. $25.00 (pa)
This is a paperbound repirnt of a 2003 book. This chronologically
arranged cinematic study analyzes the portrayal of working class people
in Hollywood films made between the 1930s and 1980s. Bodnar (history,
Indiana U.) connects the problems faced by these fictional characters
with the economic, social, and political issues of 20th-century America.
Some of the films examined include The Grapes of Wrath, Taxi Driver,
and Boyz N the Hood.
PN1995 2006-047192 978-0-7734-5774-4
Categorizing twentieth-century film using Northrop Frye’s
Anatomy of criticism; relating literature and film.
Hamilton, Mark A.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 349 p. $119.95
It took a nineteenth-century critic Hamilton (English and modern lan-
guages, Liberty U.) explains Frye’s cyclical phases of comedy and irony,
comedy and romance, romance and tragedy, romance and comedy,
tragedy and romance, tragedy and irony, irony/satire and comedy and
irony, satire and tragedy, using an elliptical schema invented by no less
than Roger Ebert. As he works through dozens of films in all the phases
and categories, Hamilton shows how each fits within the schema and
relates to other examples located there, explaining the phase’s character-
istics against the framework set up by Frye’s Anatomy of Criticism. The
films, which range from military classics and Hollywood histories to
classic and modern Westerns, film noir, romantic comedies, and even
Revenge of the Nerds, serve to illustrate how Frye’s unique approach to the
written also applies so well to the filmed. The result, despite the compli-
cated nature of Frye’s work, is both agile and accessible.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN1995 2006-012837 978-0-8248-2909-4
Celluloid comrades; representations of male
homosexuality in contemporary Chinese cinemas.
Lim, Song Hwee.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 247 p. $54.00
Lim (world cinemas, U. of Exeter) analyzes the proliferating films from
China, Taiwan, and Hong Kong since the 1990s that feature male homo-
sexual themes and characters, as a contribution to the nexus of Chinese
studies, gender and sexuality studies, and film and cinema studies. He
explores such themes are the burden of representation, the uses of fem-
ininity, and traveling sexualities.
PN1995 0-8264-1665-9
The documentary film makers handbook.
Jolliffe, Genevieve and Andrew Zinnes.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 560 p. $35.00 (pa)
Jolliffe and Zinnes, building on their previous book on guerrilla film
making, turn to over 100 experts on all aspects of making documentaries,
including finding subjects, getting funded, exercising appropriate ethics,
dealing with censorship, distributing and, of course, the all-important
budgeting and fundraising. Their experts give practical advice on getting
training, setting up the legal aspects of your work, making the most of
film organizations, writing, working with broadcasters and production
companies, getting a global perspective, conducting production and post-
production, and marketing. They also offer case studies of two dozen sig-
nificant films, including several for which the filmmakers actually did
get to thank their moms and the academy. The result is both hopeful and
realistic.
PN1995 2005-034326 978-0-292-71342-0
“Evil” Arabs in American popular film; orientalist fear.
Semmerling, Tim Jon.
U. of Texas Press, ©2006 303 p. $22.95 (pa)
Semmerling (he holds a PhD in Near Eastern Languages and Cultures
from Indiana U.) has selected a diverse group of American movies to
make his case for the presence of a stock orientalist “evil Arab” type in
American consciousness. He provides a minute reading of seven movies,
including The Exorcist (the victim was possessed by an Arab demon),
Black Sunday, Three Kings, and CNN’s documentary on 9/11.
PN1995 2006-013896 978-0-8166-4251-9
F is for phony; fake documentary and truth’s undoing.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alexandra Juhasz and Jesse Lerner. (Visible
evidence; v.17)
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 255 p. $20.00 (pa)
Fifteen contributions from academics and filmmakers explore issues
raised by fake documentaries—films that utilize the documentary format
to tell fictional stories. Particular attention is paid to serious films pro-
duced within the independent or avant-garde sectors that self-consciously
and directly engage with history, identity, and truth. The editors teach
media studies at Pitzer College. The material in this volume began as a
film and lecture series held at that institution in 2001.
PN1995 2006-014097 978-0-415-32433-5
Feminist film theorists; Laura Mulvey, Kaja Silverman,
Teresa de Lauretis, Barbara Creed.
Chaudhuri, Shohini. (Routledge critical thinkers)
Routledge, ©2006 148 p. $23.95 (pa)
This pithy volume is part of a series of studies that supplement and
enhance university courses with authoritative explanations of influential
thinkers in the humanities. Chaudhuri (contemporary writing and film,
U. of Essex, UK) describes the unifying theories that inform the four fem-
inist filmmakers, with many examples from their work. Students will
come away not only with a familiarity of what makes Mulvey and the
rest tick, but also with knowledge of the essential trends in feminism.
PN1995 2004-027072 0-8230-7774-8
A fine romance.
Denkert, Darcie.
Watson-Guptill Pubns., ©2005 360 p. $45.00
For general readers and movie lovers, this volume describes the history
of movie adaptations of musicals, specifically the stories behind the
making of films such as Sunset Boulevard, My Fair Lady, West Side Story,
Gypsy, The Sound of Music, Cabaret, Chicago, Hello Dolly!, The Producers,
and Hairspray. Incorporated are b&w and color photos of stage and
movie versions (often in large two-page spreads), and quotes from stars,
directors, and producers. Denkert is an entertainment attorney who has
lived in New York and Los Angeles. Measurements for the book are
10.5x13″.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN1995 2006-014907 978-1-4051-3232-9
Genre, gender, race, and world cinema.
Title main entry. Ed. by Julie F. Codell.
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 474 p. $89.95
The 25 essays, first published during the past couple decades, are
intended to ease students who have had at least one introductory film
course into sophisticated film analysis using contemporary issues as a
transport medium. Among the topics are Fight Club as a symptom of the
network society, cowgirl tales, Pocahontas and The Indian in the
Cupboard, and cultural identity and diaspora in contemporary Hong
Kong cinema. Students are considered mature enough not to need illus-
trations or an index.
PN1995 2006-017117 978-1-4051-3901-4
The horror film; an introduction.
Worland, Rick. (New approaches to film genre)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 324 p. $79.95
This accessible text introduces students and movie-goers to the horror
film genre. Worland (cinema-television, Southern Methodist U.) provides
a broad overview of cinematic horror from the 1920s to the present day
and discusses the genre’s place in American culture. He then takes a
closer look at some significant films, including Frankenstein (1931),
Invasion of the Body Snatchers (1956), The Texas Chainsaw Massacre
(1974), and Bram Stoker’s Dracula (1992). Brief profiles of several
prominent horror directors are found in the appendix.
PN1995 2005-012064 978-0-415-37536-8
Imagining America at war; morality, politics and film.
Weber, Cynthia.
Routledge, ©2006 186 p. $115.00
Being a US citizen, after 9/11, Weber (international relations, Lancaster
U., Britain) began paying close attention to American films that had been
made before the attacks but released or re-released between then and
when the Bush Doctrine of Preemption had been laid as the cornerstone
of US foreign policy the following summer. She found a selection of them
linked to an ongoing debate in the US about what it means morally to
be an American. She shares her insights.
PN1995 2006-015624 978-0-8108-5870-1
La dolce morte; vernacular cinema and the Italian giallo
film.
Koven, Mikel J.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 195 p. $40.00 (pa)
“Giallo,” Italian for “yellow,” is applied to a vernacular film genre (e.g.,
Sergio Martino’s Torso, 1973) based on mystery novels with bright yellow
covers that an Italian publisher has been producing since the 1920s. In
the context of psychodynamics and Italian audiences, Koven (film and
television studies, U. of Wales, Aberystwyth) explores themes including
the outsider, sexually-driven murder, the amateur detective’s role, and a
view of these films from Pasolini’s theory of a “cinema of poetry.” He
concludes that gialli, like other horror cinema, reflect modernity’s
ambivalence toward both traditional folk beliefs and science.
PN1995 2006-017976 978-0-8047-5431-6
The material image; art and the real in film.
Peucker, Brigitte.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 251 p. $24.95 (pa)
Examining films by Scorsese, Greenaway, Wenders, Kubrick, Fassbinder,
and other directors, Peucker (film studies, Yale U.) explores connections
between film and the “real,” increasingly focusing on the “real” body of
the film spectator as the book progresses. She draws on theories from
across the scholarly literature of the visual arts in order to explore inter-
media issues of art and the body—images and the real—such as the way
reality is suggested by visual metaphors, its relation to illusion, the
boundary between art and the real, and the spectator’s relationship to
the visual.
–278–
PN1995 2006-018676 978-1-55849-575-3
Movie censorship and American culture, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Francis G. Couvares.
U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2006 334 p. $24.95 (pa)
Eleven essays presented by Couvares (history and American studies,
Amherst College) draw connections between the evolution of censorship
and self-censorship in American film and larger social processes of the
20th century, including the consolidation of culture industries and the
spread of consumer markets; the evolution of government regulation of
these markets; interethnic conflict at the local, national, and international
levels; and the transformation of gender relations and the roles of women
in American society. Specific topics include Mae West and the frontiers
of sexuality and race relations, the impact of women progressive
reformers on popular cinema, theater licensing and the origins of movie
censorship in New York, representations of global ethnicity, the politics
of the Hollywood Ten (writers and directors jailed for contempt of
Congress for refusing to testify before the House Committee on Un-
American Activities), and the Supreme Court and the decline of cen-
sorship in the 1950s and 60s.
PN1995 2006-025764 0-275-99281-0
Onscreen and undercover; the ultimate book of movie
espionage.
Britton, Wesley.
Praeger, ©2006 208 p. $44.95
How well did The Manchurian Candidate describe the fears of the early
1960s? Who remembers that Buster Keaton’s classic The General was
actually a spy yarn? Enthusiast Britton starts his hunt from the silent
film and treads to the films that are likely to come our way soon, looking
at the former as a form of Victorian melodrama with a rather scattered
system of villains and fears and the latter as what the viewing public
assumes about terrorists. Along the way he examines early civil war
flicks and oaters, the aristocratic and elegant espionage of the 1930s,
various narratives of nazis from the 1930s to 2005, the Bond, et. al.
worship of the 1960s and 1970s, and the antiheroes from then to now. A
fascinating chapter details how those who made movies somehow found
spies of World War II and the Cold War hilarious.
PN1995 2002-153431 978-0-8108-5882-4
Screening politics; the politician in American movies.
(reprint 2003)
Keyishian, Harry. (Studies in film genres; no.2)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 199 p. $24.95 (pa)
Keyishian (English, Fairleigh Dickinson U.) describes and analyzes more
than 50 films dealing with politicians and the political process in the U.S.
He provides an overview of the development of the genre in the intro-
duction, while the main part of the volume consists of alphabetically
arranged entries discussing individual films. This is the first paperback
edition of a work previously published in 2003.
PN1995 0-87910-331-0
Sports cinema 100 movies; the best of Hollywood’s
athletic heroes, losers, myths, and misfits.
Williams, Randy.
Limelight Books, ©2006 429 p. $24.95 (pa)
Organized by ranking from lowest to highest, this movie guide selects the
100 best movies featuring a sporting element significant to the progress
of the story. Each entry lists the cast and creators, summarizes the plot,
and provides background information on the production. The Hustler,
Bull Durham, and This Sporting Life receive top honors. Black-&-white
stills are provided. There is no index.
PN1995 2006-012714 0-8204-7852-0
Visual economies of/in motion; sport and film.
Title main entry. Ed. by C. Richard King and David J. Leonard.
(Cultural critique; v.6)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 274 p. $34.95 (pa)
This volume takes a multidisciplinary approach to examining sports in
American cinema of the past quarter century. Eleven scholarly essays
consider sport films ranging from Hollywood blockbusters such as
Seabiscuit to independent documentaries. A number of critical theories—
feminist, poststructural, psychoanalytic, postcolonial, and critical race—
are employed in the analysis of key themes of race, gender, class,
(trans)nationalism, and collective memory. The editors are affiliated with
Washington State University’s Department of Comparative Ethnic Studies.
–279–
PN1995 2006-002413 978-0-8018-8436-8
Women filmmakers in early Hollywood.
Mahar, Karen Ward. (Studies in industry and society)
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 291 p. $45.00
Alice Guy Blaché and Lois Weber were filmmakers in the silent film era,
but such opportunities for women disappeared by the 1920s—with the
notable exception of Dorothy Arzner. Based on her research for an oral
history project sponsored by the Women in Film Foundation, Mahar
(history, Siena College, New York) showcases early woman directors and
analyzes trends in the Hollywood film industry. Blending feminist with
historical scholarship, she attributes this shift from a more egalitarian
theatrical model to the rise of big business. She concludes that: “A
century after the integration of women as filmmakers, the promise held
out by the early American cinema is still unfulfilled.” Illustrations
include vintage movie stills.
PN1995 978-0-8020-9076-6
Working on screen; representations of the working class
in Canadian cinema.
Title main entry. Ed. by Malek Khouri and Darrell Varga.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 293 p. $75.00
Contributors of these 13 articles analyze the Canadian cinema to find
how those who work for wages wind up looking on film. Topics on
workers, history and historiography include the search for the Canadian
labor film, the image of the people in the CBC’s Canada: A People’s
History, and the relationship of communists, class and culture in Canada;
those on gender and sexuality include an analysis of the film Valerie and
its take of sex and nationalism, masculinity and nation in the hockey
film, gay workers as Other, and the change from The Glace Bay Miner’s
Museum into Margaret’s Museum. They also examine the Women’s Labor
History Project, the construction of nation by the Canadian Pacific
Railway in Dirty Laundry, stereotypes in Quebec features, class and
nationalism in realist cinema, class relations in Rude and counter-narra-
tives of globalization such as Maelstrom.
PN1996 2006-043919 978-0-312-35987-4
The devil’s guide to Hollywood; the screenwriter as God.
Eszterhas, Joe.
St. Martin’s Press, ©2006 397 p. $24.95
Once called the “Che Guevara of screenwriters,” Eszterhas, who penned
such box office hits as Basic Instinct and Flashdance, shares such
hardwon lessons as: “Make ‘em feel smart and you’ll get your way!” and
“How to tell if your agent cares about you.” With lots of name-dropping
and b.s.-detecting, he offers insider translations of Hollywood studio exec-
speak (e.g. “life affirming” really means “Will it make a million
dollars?”) and other pithy insights on the industry.
PN1997 0-88920-487-X
Image and territory; essays on Atom Egoyan.
Title main entry. Ed. by Monique Tschofen and Jennifer Burwell.
Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2007 417 p. $29.95 (pa)
Tschofen and Burwell (English, Ryerson U.) present 18 essays aimed at
scholars and fans of filmmaker Atom Egoyan’s work. They examine
themes in his films, such as The Sweet Hereafter and Exotica, his theater
and opera stagings, and his art installations and their political, philo-
sophical, and aesthetic context, in addition to their intellectual and emo-
tional aspects. Specifically, they look at his use of technology, themes
relating to the Armenian diaspora, and the social elements of his work
in terms of psychoanalytic discourse, feminism, and film theory. The
final section consists of two interviews—one with filmmaker Gariné
Torossian, who is influenced by Egoyan, and the other with Egoyan
himself. Essay authors are scholars of film, English, women’s studies,
and other disciplines and work in North America and Europe. A fil-
mography is included.
PN1997 2006-021196 978-0-8166-4125-3
What have they built you to do?; The Manchurian
candidate and Cold War America.
Jacobson, Matthew Frye and Gaspar González.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 234 p. $19.95 (pa)
Jacobson (American studies, Yale U.) and Miami scholar and journalist
González show how various elements of the 1962 movie about brain-
washed US soldiers expressed fears in the political culture of the Cold
War. Among their perspectives are the rise of the security state,
McCarthy, the Red Queen and the American family, Cold War courtship,
and echoes from Kennedy to Reagan.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN1998 0-8058-5616-1
Critical thinking about sex, love, and romance in the
mass media; media literacy applications.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mary-Lou Galician and Debra L. Merskin.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 408 p. $34.95 (pa)
Published in 2004, Mary-Lou Galician’s (Arizona State U.) Sex, Love, and
Romance in the Mass Media: Analysis and Criticism of Unrealistic
Portrayals and Their Influence has been widely used in mass media
courses around the country. This volume presents 24 original essays by
academics that explore further the myths/stereotypes about romantic
relationships that were identified in that textbook. Each chapter con-
cludes with study questions, exercises, and an extensive bibliography.
PN1998 2006-018357 978-0-275-98690-2
Designing movies; portrait of a Hollywood artist.
Sylbert, Richard and Sylvia Townsend.
Praeger, ©2006 229 p. $49.95
Sylbert was the late (d. 2002) Academy Award-winning production
designer for such films as Whose Afraid of Virginia Woolfe?, The Graduate,
Rosemary’s Baby, and Chinatown). At his wife’s request, Hollywood
writer/editor Townsend edited his unfinished memoir in the third
person. Included are his thoughts on production design and art direction,
and her assessment of his contributions—which went beyond design, and
quirks. The book includes photos and drawings of his film sets, and
some character- revealing anecdotes by his wife, Sharmagne Leland-St.
John- Sylbert.
PN1998 2006-027098 978-0-8264-1902-6
The director’s cut; picturing Hollywood in the 21st
century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Stephan Littger.
Continuum Publishing Group, ©2006 330 p. $18.95 (pa)
Oxford-graduated psychologist and beginning filmmaker Littger inter-
views 21 Hollywood directors of various genres, origins (both biogra-
phical and artistic), and styles, reflecting what the author believes is the
diversity in today’s Hollywood as a whole. Part one comprises ten inter-
views with directors whose beginnings and ambitions were centered
around Hollywood. Part two contains talks with the so-called “generation
of director-directors”—those who entered Hollywood filmmaking only
after attending film school or establishing a self-made career. Littger lets
his subjects do most of the talking, revealing the biographical back-
ground, decision-making and creative processes, and insights that
explain why they occupy the place they do in the business today. The
book includes b&w head shots of the men and women, eight born
outside the US, who are responsible for dozens of films that include: Das
Boot, Good Morning, Vietnam, Tootsie, I Shot Andy Warhol, Superman
(1978), and more recently Monsoon Wedding, Fight Club, Babel, and
Eternal Sunshine of the Spotless Mind.
PN1998 2006-011665 978-0-8166-4654-8
Dudley Murphy, Hollywood wild card.
Delson, Susan.
U. of Minnesota Press, ©2006 251 p. $27.95
Active in Hollywood from the 1920s through the 1940s, Dudley Murphy
was one of the industry’s first independent filmmakers. In this biog-
raphy, independent scholar Delson pays particular attention to Murphy’s
visually oriented and musically inspired cinematic style, which was
looser and more evocative than that of more mainstream directors. The
volume is illustrated with b&w movie stills and photographs from the
Murphy family collection.
PN1998 2006-029526 978-0-275-98578-3
Women directors and their films.
Hurd, Mary G.
Praeger, ©2007 178 p. $44.95
Hurd (film studies, East Tennessee State U.) profiles 29 women film
directors, offering biographical information and critical discussion of
their works for each. She begins with the pioneering figures of Dorothy
Arzner and Ida Lupino. Mainstream figures such as Nora Ephron, Amy
Heckerling, and Martha Coolidge are discussed next, followed by inde-
pendent, experimental, and documentary film directors, including Lizzie
Borden, Allison Anders, Penelope Spheeris, and Barbara Kopple. Non-
American directors (including Leni Riefenstahl), emerging directors, and
actresses turned directors are examined in the final chapters.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN1998 2006-009472 978-0-292-71343-7
Woman with a movie camera.
Goldovskaia, Marina. Trans. by Antonina W. Bouis. (Constructs)
U. of Texas Press, ©2006 263 p. $24.95 (pa)
Goldovskaia, a prize-winning documentary filmmaker who taught for
decades at Moscow State U. and now teaches at UCLA, has written a biog-
raphical account of her life and work in Russia, where she began making
films in the 1930s. In an animated style, often incorporating dialogue to
tell her stories, Goldovskaia describes her determined, lifelong pursuit to
make films depicting both contemporary life and historic events, and the
endless, pointless trials of dealing with Soviet bureaucracy as she
struggled to have her films allowed, both to be made and to be shown.
An alphabetical list of writers, actors, and others is included as an
appendix, with short biographies of each.
PN2020 2006-011322 978-1-55783-698-4
The alchemy of theatre, the divine science; essays on
theatre and the art of collaboration.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Viagas.
Playbill Books, ©2006 284 p. $29.95
Featuring 26 essays by some of theatre’s leading lights, this volume
explores the collaboration and cooperation that lie at the heart of creating
good drama. Included are the personal recollections of playwright Wendy
Wasserstein, casting director Jay Binder, leading lady Chita Rivera, set
designer Robin Wagner, and public relations professional Adrian Bryan-
Brown, among others. Most of the essays were developed over the course
of interviews conducted by New York theatre journalist Viagas.
PN2037 2006-276120 978-0-7575-2143-0
Theater appreciation; an introductory guide,.
Jones, Marshall.
Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., ©2005 127 p. $44.00 (pa)
Jones (Rutgers U.), who has been a theater manager and producer, offers
a introductory theater appreciation text for non-majors, emphasizing
Broadway and New York theater. He discusses the fundamentals of
theater and storytelling, audiences and the environment, and the roles of
the playwright, actors, director, designers, and producers. Various genres
are described, as well as critics and arts education. Worksheets are
included in each chapter. There is no index or bibliography.
PN2053 2006-033673 978-0-8204-8860-8
The craft of rehearsal; further reflections on interpretation
and practice.
Efros, Anatoly. Trans. by James Thomas.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 234 p. $70.95
Thomas (theatre, Wayne State U.) provides a translation of this book by
Russian director Anatoly Efros (1925-1987). It consists of stream of con-
sciousness reflections from 1975 to 1979 about directing, aesthetics, con-
sidering plays and rehearsing them, his developments of classic works,
inspirations, and the application of his ideas in productions such as
Shakespeare’s Othello, Chekov’s The Cherry Orchard, and Turgenev’s A
Month in the Country. Thomas omits passages that do not relate to theatre
or about figures who are only known in Russia.
PN2053 2006-283901 978-1-55936-273-3
Stage directors handbook; opportunities for directors and
choreographers, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sarah Hart.
Theatre Communications Group, ©2006 215 p. $19.95 (pa)
This guide for stage directors contains lists of director training programs;
career development opportunities; regional theater opportunities; grants,
fellowships, and awards; service organizations and unions; agents and
attorneys; and opportunities to work abroad. Descriptions and contact
information are included. Listings are accompanied by short articles on
topics such as resume tips, writing grant proposals, advice from agents,
whether to go to school, and mentoring; these are written by industry
professionals. This edition has been updated and revised; it was prepared
by the Stage Directors and Choreographers Foundation. The bibliography
includes web resources and is annotated.
–280–
PN2055 2006-016400 1-58115-453-4
The actor’s other career book; using your chops to survive
and thrive.
Mulcahy, Lisa.
Allworth Press, ©2006 207 p. $19.95 (pa)
Mulcahy draws from interviews with about 50 actors to guide readers on
how to use their acting skills in different careers, such as communication
consulting, teaching, voice-over work, spokesmodel work, product
demonstration, dialogue coaching, publicity, deejaying, casting, nursing,
and related performance fields. She connects particular skills—like
drawing from history, physicality, helping others, communication and
presentation, and selling oneself—with each chapter and the experiences
of these actors, who have experience working in alternative fields.
Mulcahy is a theater teacher, director, performer, and writer. Appendices
list organizations and other resources. No index is provided.
PN2071 2006-026629 978-1-58115-462-7
An actor rehearses; what to do when—and why.
Hlavsa, David.
Allworth Press, ©2006 187 p. $18.95 (pa)
Veteran actor, playwright, and director Hlavsa (theatre arts, Saint
Martin’s U.) guides both budding and experienced actors through each
step of the rehearsal process. The focus throughout is on acting as a
practice that can lead to higher understanding and encourage personal
development. Just a few of the topics addressed: exploring the emotional
life of the character, getting the most out of technical rehearsals, and con-
necting with the audience.
PN2071 2006-015187 978-0-415-41436-4
The mask handbook; a practical guide.
Wilsher, Toby.
Routledge, ©2007 188 p. $90.00
Wilsher, a mask director in the UK and co-founder of the Trestle Theatre
Company, describes the process of using masks, including their origin,
making them, and writing and directing works, along with practical
exercises in each chapter. His aim is to “demystify and reclaim the mask
in theatre,” noting that many of the books available on the subject are
too academic. Instead, the book’s approach is a practical one that shows
teachers, actors, writers, and directors how to use masks onstage and
create characters. In addition, the half mask and other types are dis-
cussed. B&w photos are included.
PN2075 1-55238-213-3
The French play; exploring theatre “re-creatively” with
foreign students.
Essif, Les.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 251 p. $29.95 (pa)
Essif (French studies, U. of Tennessee, Knoxville) intends this book pri-
marily for foreign language instructors (undergraduate and above), and
secondarily for teachers of English, English as a second language, and
drama. He guides teachers, step-by-step, in the selection, interpretation,
preparation, and production of a play in a language foreign to the
student-actors, especially for students with little theater experience. As
models, he uses his own direction of Ubi Roi and other French plays
based on well-known stories (e.g. Macbeth, Candide, and Cyrano), but his
strategies are meant to apply to plays in any language. Exercises, critical
approaches, and theory are all included in this discussion of the act of
“re-creating” a theater text on the stage. Advice includes strategies for
using the process to educate, collaboratively assigning roles, taking the
play on tour, and evaluating student actors. The appendices contain
sample rewrites, press releases, evaluation forms, and other model mate-
rials. This book is distributed by Michigan State U. Press.
PN2270 2006047103 0773456422
The secret messages in African American theater; hidden
meanings embedded in public discourse
Williams-Witherspoon, Kimmika.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 315 p. $119.95
Williams-Witherspoon (theater history, Temple U.) examines African
American arts institutions and how they contribute to the construction of
public discourse, sometimes through “hidden” scripts in rituals,
rhetorical strategies, and theatrical conventions. She argues that these
hidden scripts are necessary due to power dynamics that exist in theater,
and deconstructs them using Freedom Theatre’s production of Sparkle in
Philadelphia. She also gives a historical overview of African American
Theater and Freedom Theatre and examines popular rituals used and
incorporated in the production, including church scenes, dialogue, class
and representations of ghetto life, and gender. The volume is aimed at
those in anthropology, cultural studies, sociology, theater history, and
African American studies.
–281–
PN2286 2006-018071 978-1-55783-680-9
Black comedians on Black comedy; how African-
Americans taught us how to laugh.
Littleton, Darryl.
Applause Books, ©2006 343 p. $27.95
Littleton, a stand-up comedian and comedy writer, describes the history
of black comedians, interspersing excerpts from interviews he did with
many of them—Eddie Murphy, Robert Townsend, Marla Gibbs, Chris
Rock, and Arsenio Hall, to name a few. He begins with comedy during
the period of slavery up to the present, and discusses vaudeville and
blackface, the “chitlin’ circuit” of nightclubs, films, and television.
Incorporated within the text are answers to questions from other come-
dians, about topics such as the KKK, joke stealing, negative aspects of
stand-up, Apollo experiences, the Def Comedy Jam, audiences, and their
views on other comedians like Richard Pryor and Bill Cosby. B&w photos
are included.
PN2286 2006-282176 978-1-55936-263-4
Women in American theatre, rev. and expanded 3d ed.
(reprint, 1981)
Title main entry. Ed. by Helen Krich Chinoy and Linda Walsh Jenkins.
Theatre Communications Group, ©2006 555 p. $19.95 (pa)
Chinoy and Jenkins (both: theatre; Smith College and Northwestern U.,
respectively) present the revised and expanded third edition to this
anthology honoring female contributions to American theatre as play-
wrights, actresses, directors, theorists, critics, teachers, and designers.
Approximately 150 essays, profiles, and interviews illuminate such topics
as: female rites in American theatre, women and the folk play, feminist
theatre and theatrical theories, performing gender disruptions, and doc-
umenting America, among many others. The final section, titled “Voices
at the Millennium,” discusses “intimate” one-woman performances,
explores perspectives on diversity, and sets forth strategies for addressing
and subverting the canon of major theatre. This collection will be of
interest to drama and women’s studies students at the undergraduate
level and above.
PN2287 94-24165 0-8061-3768-1
The papers of Will Rogers; v.5: The final years, August
1928 - August 1935.
Rogers, Will.
U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2006 683 p. $49.95
The final volume of the documentary history of American entertainer
and political commentator Will Rogers covers a period in which Rogers
enjoyed immense popularity and influence; an influence that was cut
short when he died in a plane crash with renowned aviator Wiley Post
in the summer of 1935. Gragert (archivist and historian for the Will
Rogers Memorial Museum) and Johansson (history, Rogers State U.) have
included transcripts of radio broadcasts, contracts and business docu-
ments, family correspondence, correspondence with notable personal-
ities, an eyewitness account of his funeral, estate materials, and other
documents. They have organized the materials into five chronological
periods, each of which is introduced with a brief essay.
PN2287 2006-020244 978-1-55783-672-4
Shirley Temple; a pictorial history of the world’s greatest
child star.
Dubas, Rita.
Applause Books, ©2006 255 p. $29.95
Lavishly illustrated throughout with color and b&w photographs, this
volume celebrates the stardom of 1930s child actress Shirley Temple. In
addition to tracing Temple’s film career, Dubas describes some of the
many licensed and unlicensed products bearing her image that were
marketed in countries around the world. These include (for example)
dolls, clothing, comic books, and housewares. The volume concludes
with a filmography. Dubas’s articles on Shirley Temple memorabilia
have appeared in several publications. Oversize: 10.25x10.25″.
PN2596 2005-031647 0-7546-0786-0
Studio Shakespeare; the Royal Shakespeare Company at
the Other Place.
Smith-Howard, Alycia.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 180 p. $89.95
The famed Company’s intimate second auditorium and studio venue, The
Other Place, opened in 1974 and was closed and demolished in 1989.
Shakespeare scholar, performance historian, and theater director Smith-
Howard (New York U.) says the 13 Shakespeare productions at the site
were some of the Company’s most adventurous, experimental, and con-
troversial work. Rather than describing each production in turn, she dis-
cusses various innovations and approaches throughout the period.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN2598 2005-032503 0-7546-5650-0
The cult of Kean.
Kahan, Jeffrey.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 195 p. $99.95
Yes, he was handsome. Yes, he was a spectacular serial adulterer. Yes, he
was so popular and powerful that he could demand the best parts in the
best works of the best writers. It is in that last observation that we start
to understand how nineteenth-century actor Edmund Kean affected no
less than Byron, Coleridge and Keats. Kahan (U. of La Verne) explores
how Kean’s acting style was so affecting his biographers forgot the man
sought to control English theater, how his persona was so influential
even after death that both Dumas used it to explode aristocratic preten-
sions and Twain used it to explore the loving link between American
audiences and titillation, how Kean’s son attempted to make him less of
a fornicator and more of a philosopher, and how Sartre made Kean exis-
tentially transparent. The final chapter explores the temptations of per-
petual illusion.
PN2766 2006-004817 0-8386-4107-5
Norway’s Christiania Theatre, 1827-1867; from Danish
showhouse to national stage.
Schmiesing, Ann.
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2006 277 p. $53.50
The theater in Christiana, now Oslo, produced mostly Danish plays and
even the rare Norwegian play only in Danish, and so highlighted not only
the continuing dominance of Danish culture in the decades after 1814
when Norway came out from under the political domination of Norway,
but also the lack of a Norwegian national theater. Schmiesing
(Scandinavian and German literature and culture, U. of Colorado-
Boulder) traces the movement to change all that and its triumph in 1889.
Distributed in the US by Associated University Presses.
PN2788 0-8020-8969-0
The triumphant Juan Rana; a gay actor of the Spanish
golden age.
Thompson, Peter E.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 183 p. $45.00
Thompson (Spanish and Italian, Queen’s U.) celebrates one of the most
famous buffoons of the 17th century, Juan Rana, an actor for whom over
50 plays were written. Thompson focuses on Rana’s sexuality, an
important factor for Rana, who was arrested in 1636 for the “nefarious
sin” of homosexuality and who played roles that addressed gender,
sexual and biological difference. In addition to bringing attention to the
theater of the Spanish baroque period, Thompson uncovers an
acceptance of homosexuality that challenges many preconceived ideas
about this period.
PN2969 2006-035131 978-0-8204-8899-8
Performing Africa; remixing tradition, theatre, and
culture.
Riccio, Thomas.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 238 p. $70.95
Riccio (performance studies, U. of Texas-Dallas) has collected nine essays
published 1992-2002 on contemporary African performance. His topics
include process and performance in a changing South Africa, performing
the spirits in Zambia, Tanzania theater from Marx to the marketplace,
and community health awareness puppets in Kenya.
PN3035 2006-041034 978-1-4000-4288-3
Stardust lost; the triumph, tragedy, and Mishugas of the
Yiddish theater in America.
Kanfer, Stefan.
Alfred A. Knopf, ©2006 324 p. $26.95
Veteran New York City writer Kanfer explores the Yiddish theater scene
that thrived on the Lower East Side during the first half of the 20th
century. The theaters, he said, had a great impact on newly arrived
immigrants as they learned their role in the New World, and also altered
the history of Broadway and Hollywood before it ended.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN3355 2006-020558 978-1-58297-446-0
The Glimmer Train guide to writing fiction; building
blocks.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Burmeister-Brown and Linda B.
Swanson-Davies.
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2006 444 p. $19.99
Rather than providing step-by-step instructions, this guide to writing is
based on interviews conducted over a 16-year period and preserved by
the editors of the literary quarterly Glimmer Train Stories and its
newsletter Writers Ask. The interviewees are successful contemporary
authors, such as Julia Alvarez, Sandra Cisneros, Andre Dubus and Tobias
Wolff, who candidly discuss every aspect of their craft.
PN3365 2006-014687 978-1-58297-388-3
Your first novel; a published author and a top agent
share the keys to achieving your dream.
Rittenberg, Ann and Laura Whitcomb.
Writer’s Digest Books, ©2006 297 p. $16.99 (pa)
While many people dream of writing and publishing a novel some day,
most lack the skills and insider knowledge to see that project through to
completion. In this accessible guide, novelist Whitcomb and literary agent
Rittenberg explain the nuts and bolts of developing and writing a great
story. They also offer practical information on what it really takes to get
published, with chapters devoted to such topics as query letters, literary
agents, and publicity.
PN3491 2006-25356 978-0-7391-1184-0
Between terror and freedom; politics, philosophy, and
fiction speak of modernity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Simona Goi and Frederick M. Dolan.
Lexington Books, ©2006 376 p. $80.00
Exploring a range of literary, poetic, and filmic texts, occasionally in com-
parison to political texts, the 13 papers presented by Go (political science,
Calvin College) and Dolan (rhetoric, U. of California at Berkeley) seek to
understand the broad political implications of the philosophical stances
of late modernity. The papers, which along the way engage Wallace
Stegner, Heidegger, Cervantes, Nietzsche, Camus, Hans-Georg Gadamer,
the Bible, Montesquieu, and Günter Grass, among others, are organized
into four thematic groups addressing the search for a ground for phi-
losophy after the demise of foundationalism, the reconception of the prin-
ciples that ordain the polis in this postfoundational age, the connection
between the political and the categories of ordinary life and nature, and
the task of crafting and interacting with texts.
PN4129 2006-015528 1-931719-00-4
Public speaking in a multicultural society; the essentials.
Samovar, Larry A. and Edwin R. McDaniel.
Roxbury Publishing Co., ©2007 200 p. $38.95 (pa)
This text focuses on ways to be an effective public speaker in an increas-
ingly multicultural society. Samovar (San Diego State U.) and McDaniel
(international communication, Aichi Shukutoku U., Japan) offer an
approach that is practical, brief, and a blend of multicultural and
domestic diversity and traditional public speaking examples. Beginning
with the communication process, they explain such topics as speech
purpose and audience analysis, material organization and visual aids,
delivery, structure, persuasion, and language usage, with sections and
examples that address multicultural issues.
PN4145 2006-001709 978-1-4051-4692-0
The performance of reading; an essay in the philosophy
of literature.
Kivy, Peter. (New directions in aesthetics; v.3)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 155 p. $59.95
Taking an unexpected position on the performative nature of reading,
Kivy (philosophy, Rutgers U.) finds distinct analogies between silent
reading and performance, arguing that readers’ experience in reading is
similar to the reaction of ancient Athenians listening to recitations of
Homer. Kivy makes a case for a deeper understanding and appreciation
of literary works by suggesting that readers are performers of the works
they read and their performances are recitations to the inner ear.
–282–
PN4731 2006-018037 978-0-415-37141-4
News production; theory and practice.
Machin, David and Sarah Niblock.
Routledge, ©2006 202 p. $31.95 (pa)
Machin (media and communication, Leicester U., UK) and Niblock (jour-
nalism, Brunel U., UK) argue that it is necessary for journalism scholars
to connect theory and practice in their field by analyzing the actual
processes of news production rather than simply relying on the products
of news to build their theories of modern journalism. They thus use
empirical case material on the everyday practices of news journalists
(gathered through interviews) as a means of reexamining long-standing
sociological theories of journalism. Among the major topics addressed
are the news values of consumers, news beats and collecting news, con-
flict reporting and propaganda, humanitarian reporting, visual jour-
nalism, and the socialization of news journalists.
PN4731 2005-938005 978-0-7619-4926-8
Practical journalism; how to write news.
Sissons, Helen.
Sage Publications, ©2006 318 p. $120.00
This textbook seeks to impart the practical skills of the news journalist
to its audience. The author covers the basics of grammar and style, how
to structure the news story, writing for different media, effective inter-
viewing, identifying stories, local government and court reporting, and
ethics. Illustrative case studies are interspersed throughout. While most
of the material is broadly applicable, discussion of legal matters is
limited to a British context.
PN4736 978-0-7425-5435-1
Freedom of the press, 2006; a global survey of media
independence.
Title main entry. Ed. by Karin Deutsch Karlekar.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 271 p. $22.95 (pa)
Produced by the government-funded research institute, Freedom House,
this study surveys 194 countries and territories and rates their levels of
freedom of news and information flows based on 23 methodological cri-
teria that address the legal, political, and economic environments for
media. For each country, brief analytical text is provided and three sep-
arate numerical ratings are presented for each sphere of press freedom.
Overall, Finland ranks as most free, while North Korea ranks as last.
Oddly, the United States is not included in the study. This fact, seen in
light of the 2006 Reporters Without Borders Worldwide Press Freedom
Index, published shortly after this Freedom House study, which ranks
the US as 53rd (tied with Croatia, Tonga, and Botswana) and also places
Finland and N. Korea in first and last, might incline the reader to spec-
ulate that there were political motivations favoring omission rather than
admission.
PN4738 2006-028548 978-0-275-99335-1
No questions asked; news coverage since 9/11.
Finnegan, Lisa. (Democracy and the news)
Praeger, ©2007 189 p. $49.95
While many commentators have drawn connections between the mis-
erably uncritical treatment of the Bush administration by the media fol-
lowing the September 11th attacks and the ability of the administration
to initiate the invasion and occupation of Iraq based on nonexistent
“weapons of mass destruction” and equally nonexistent ties between
Saddam Hussein and Al Qaeda, fewer have sought to map out the entire
American media landscape in the era of the “War on Terror,” as inde-
pendent journalist Finnegan does here. The picture that emerges is, if
anything, worse, with even the self-bestowed accolades for the media’s
coverage of Hurricane Katrina withering under scrutiny. Beyond criti-
cizing the structural and cultural factors that preclude media skepticism
towards the powerful, she also documents the many ways that the
American media has come to serve essentially as a propaganda organ for
government, whether through the dissemination of unattributed gov-
ernment produced “video news releases” or through the acceptance of
the Pentagon’s “embedded” reporter program. As Finnegan describes,
this lamentable situation has permitted wars of aggression, curtailment
of civil liberties, and a host of other societal ills.
–283–
PN4748 2006-278119 0-7453-2482-7
Guardians of power; the myth of the liberal media.
Edwards, David and David Cromwell.
Pluto Press, ©2006 241 p. $24.95 (pa)
MediaLens, the critical media analysis website, was established in 2001
in order to highlight “serious examples of bias, omission, or deception in
British mainstream media,” particularly those outlets often thought to be
“objective” or “liberal,” such the BBC, the The Guardian, and The
Independent. In this book, the editors of MediaLens present some of the
results of that work, highlighting such problems in reporting on the sanc-
tions on Iraq and its nonexistent Weapons of Mass Destruction; the scale
of death wrought by Bush and Blair’s Iraq invasion and occupation;
Western interventions in Afghanistan, Kosovo, East Timor, and Haiti; and
global climate change. Following their documentation of bias, omission,
and deception, they offer their own explanation for why the corporate
media is so bad and lay out their suggestions on how to fix the problem.
Distributed in the US by the U. of Michigan Press.
PN4781 2006-924529 978-1-4129-1914-2
News writing.
McKane, Anna.
Sage Publications, ©2006 196 p. $110.00
To introduce students to the basics of news writing, McKane (journalism
and publishing, City University) presents a step-by-step guide to con-
structing a story. Using examples of both good and bad writing, she
covers writing a good introduction, ordering information, and the fun-
damentals of style, language and grammar. She includes checklists to
help inexperienced writers measure their work.
PN4781 2006-041887 978-0-07-298109-4
News writing & reporting for today’s media, 7th ed.
Itule, Bruce D. and Douglas A. Anderson.
McGraw-Hill, ©2007 484 p. $76.88 (pa)
Featuring illustrative firsthand accounts from reporters and editors, this
introductory textbook teaches students the basics of news writing and
reporting. Sample topics include organizing a news story, covering a beat,
and conducting an in-depth investigation. Legal and ethical issues are
addressed in the final section. The seventh edition also contains a new
chapter on multimedia journalism.
PN4784 2006-931598 978-0-566-08727-1
How to manage a successful press conference.
Leinemann, Ralf and Elena Baikaltseva.
Gower Publishing, ©2006 251 p. $54.95 (pa)
Two international PR and marketing professionals offer advice to PR
companies working at national or international levels on how to hold a
press conference that makes the most of increasingly tighter budgets
while responding to increasingly complex demands. Each step, from
fundraising and venue selection to speechwriting to conducting the event
and collecting feedback is discussed with an eye to tailoring the event for
its specific audience. Additional coverage includes criteria for deciding
whether a press conference is the right strategy for marketing a given
company, as well as strategies for appealing to the needs and cultural dis-
tinctions of hosting journalists (particularly in international settings). The
appendices contain budget worksheets and task checklists; short mate-
rials on online press conferences, cultural considerations, and industry
analyst briefings; and a vignette illustrating a journalist’s thoughts. This
book is distributed by Ashgate.
PN4784 2006-280375 0-596-10227-5
We the media; grassroots journalism by the people, for
the people.
Gillmor, Dan.
O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2006 301 p. $16.99 (pa)
With the rise of the blogs (web-logs) and other forms of communication
technologies, the traditional distinctions between journalists, news-
makers, and news consumers are breaking down and an emergent grass-
roots media is forming to challenge the entrenched corporate news
producers. Believing it possible to marry the best of both worlds, Gillmor
(founder of the Center for Citizen Media, “a project to enable and expand
the reach of grassroots media”) provides a tour of this grassroots media
landscape and its possibilities, while also introducing some of the legal,
social, political, and economic issues associated with the new media.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN4785 2006-924264 978-0-7618-3492-2
Seed of cynicism; the undermining of journalistic
education.
Amster, Sara-Ellen.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 269 p. $37.00 (pa)
Amster (communication, National U.) spent three years studying three
Southern California high school journalism programs, combining
ethnography, participant-observation research, and journalistic tech-
niques to examine the ways in which journalism advisors approach such
issues as censorship, ethics, and professional standards. She also dis-
cusses such issues as turnover rates for advisers and professional expe-
rience and considers how all of these factors influence students’ attitudes
towards and competency in journalism.
PN4874 2006-042389 978-0-684-80713-3
All governments lie; the life and times of rebel journalist
I.F. Stone.
MacPherson, Myra.
Scribner, ©2006 564 p. $35.00
In reading critiques of the media landscape that allowed George W. Bush
to lead the country into the disastrous invasion of Iraq, it was not
uncommon to come across laments that there were no longer any jour-
nalistic figures comparable to the late I. F. “Izzy” Stone (1907-1989),
whose observation that “All governments lie, but disaster lies in wait for
countries whose officials smoke the same hashish they give out” is
perhaps more aptly descriptive of our present times than at the time
Stone said it. Long-time journalist MacPherson presents a biography of
Stone that follows his individual career and places his writings in the
context of overall political developments and in relation to American jour-
nalism as a whole.
PN4888 2006-028553 978-0-275-99330-6
Editorial and opinion; the dwindling marketplace of ideas
in today’s news.
Hallock, Steven M. (Democracy and the news)
Praeger, ©2007 195 p. $49.95
Hallock (journalism, Southern Illinois U.) analyzes the content of his-
torical and modern US newspaper editorials in order to investigate how
newspaper market competition influences the opinions that appear on
the editorial pages. His analysis focuses on the differences and similar-
ities of editorial production in direct competition markets (Boston and
Chicago), joint operating agreement markets (Seattle and Denver), and
metroplex markets (Dallas/Fort Worth and Pittsburgh/Greensburg), with
separate chapters exploring the general contours of each and an addi-
tional chapter analyzing editorial treatment of the 2004 presidential cam-
paign for all three markets.
PN4888 2006-014454 978-0-8014-4235-3
Front-page girls; women journalists in American culture
and fiction, 1880-1930.
Lutes, Jean Marie.
Cornell U. Press, ©2006 226 p. $45.00
“Front-page girls” is the term that the growing number of women
reporters were called in a 1936 history (Ladies of the Press by Ishbel
Ross). In what is presented as the first study of actual and fictional news-
paperwomen at the turn of the 20th century, one-time reporter Lutes
(English, Villanova U.) examines their roles as stunt reporters (e.g., Nelly
Bly), “sob sisters,” and agents and objects of emergent mass culture. She
also treats the paradox that the same qualities that marginalized news-
paperwomen in literature has made them popular characters in films
and television, from Bette Davis in Front Page Woman (1935) to Sara
Jessica Parker in Sex and the City (1999-2003). Period illustrations enhance
the text.
PN4888 2006-004518 1-57233-493-2
Rethinking Zion; how the print media placed
fundamentalism in the South.
Mathews, Mary Beth Swetnam.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 177 p. $36.00
The wider American culture has long associated a disparaging view of
Christian fundamentalism, together with attendant connotations of white
racism and anti-intellectualism, with the southern states. Mathews
(religion, U. of Mary Washington) explores how this image came to dom-
inate views of the South in American print media during the late-19th
and early-20th century, approaching her topic thematically through
chapters tracing changes in perceptions of the South as, in turn, violent,
uneducated, the driving force behind prohibition, and dominated by fun-
damentalism (in a narrower sense than just religiously conservative.)
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PN4888 2006-016118 1-59114-007-2
Warheads; cable news and the fog of war.
Allard, C. Kenneth.
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 156 p. $26.95
The “warheads” is a term Allard (former Dean of the National War
College) seems to have adapted from the more venerable “talking heads”
in order to designate those current and former military figures who
become so ubiquitous on cable news channels every time the US decides
to attack someone. Himself a “warhead,” he describes his experiences on
cable news as Clinton bombed Kosovo and as Bush later invaded
Afghanistan and Iraq. In his account, he offers some criticisms of the
media and the military’s relationship to the media, but rarely of a sys-
temic nature.
PN4897 2006-000861 978-0-9759196-0-6
The copper chorus; mining, politics, and the Montana
press, 1889-1959.
Swibold, Dennis L.
Montana Historical Society Pr., ©2006 408 p. $24.95 (pa)
In an age when seven large corporations own more than 90 percent of
the American media market it may perhaps serve as a useful lesson to
examine a historical example of corporate media ownership and its dis-
torting effects on politics, the ownership of Montana newspapers by the
Anaconda Copper Mining Company for the first half of the 20th century.
Swibold (journalism, U. of Montana) chronologically traces the rise and
fall of the “Copper Chorus,” documenting its interventions in electoral
politics, support for war, and attacks on Wobblies and other union
activists, among other positions taken in defense of Anaconda interests.
PN4914 1-55238-190-0
Lily Lewis; sketches of a Canadian journalist; a biocritical
study.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peggy Martin.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2005 p. $24.95 (pa)
In 1888, Canadian journalist Lily Lewis and fellow writer Sara Jeannette
Duncan embarked on a journey around the world, sending articles about
their travels back to their respective newspapers, The Week and the
Montreal Daily Star. Lewis was immortalized as a character in Duncan’s
fictionalized account of their journey, but as a writer she has been
almost entirely forgotten. Combining elements of a critical study, a biog-
raphy, and an edited collection, Martin (English, University of
Saskatchewan) looks at Lewis’ work in the context of Canadian travel
writing and the journalism of the period, and discusses her use of the
sketch as her preferred literary form. B&w photos, and some examples
of Lewis’ work, are included. The book is distributed in the US by
Michigan State University Press.
PN4930 2006-015112 0-275-98397-8
Centuries of silence; the story of Latin American
journalism.
Ferreira, Leonardo.
Praeger, ©2006 332 p. $97.95
Ferreira (U. of Miami) begins by asking whether there was a nascent or
proto-journalism in pre-Columbian America. Then he looks at such stages
of Latin American journalism as the idealism surrounding liberation
from Spain; war, censorship, and propaganda during the 19th century;
revolution and the Cold War; and tension between globalization and a
fair and humane world.
PN5184 2005-028589 978-0-8387-5579-2
Murder in Parisian streets; manufacturing crime and
justice in the popular press, 1830-1900.
Cragin, Thomas.
Bucknell University Pr., ©2006 273 p. $75.00
In the extremely influential Discipline and Punish, Michel Foucault iden-
tified the 18th century as a period in which elite attitudes towards crime
and punishment shifted from emphasizing physical discipline to a new
focus on psychological control, arguing that the Europe’s news sheets fol-
lowed this change in their discourse. Reviewing representations of crime
and punishment in the 19th century French news sheets, Cragin (history,
Muhlenberg College) argues that Foucault got it wrong, that there was in
fact substantial discursive resistance to the new elite attitudes and that
this resistance was representative of popular understandings of crime
and punishment. In making this argument, he first demonstrates the
importance of the news sheets (canards) as a news genre, explores their
social composition, and examines the issue of political censorship, before
reviewing representations of crime and criminal justice in the canards as
a window into the larger public’s vision of crime and justice. Distributed
in the US by Associated University Presses.
–284–
PN5407 2006-012667 978-0-8248-2997-1
Turning pages; reading and writing women’s magazines
in interwar Japan.
Frederick, Sarah.
U. of Hawai’i Pr., ©2006 251 p. $54.00
Frederick (Japanese literature, Boston U.) examines glossy mass- market
monthly women’s magazines in Japan during the 1920’s and 1930s,
emphasizing the wide range of interests they inspired and addressed. She
covers the production and consumption, enlightening the modern
woman in Ladies’ Review, modern life in The Housewife’s Friend, and
negotiating literature and politics in Women’s Arts.
PN6080 978-0-19-280650-5
The Oxford dictionary of phrase, saying, and quotation,
3d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Ratcliffe.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 689 p. $39.95
“We have ways of making you talk” has nothing to do with gangsters but
instead appears only in the 1935 movie Lives of a Bengal Lancer, thereby
rendering the sentiment a bit odd. “Length begets loathing” is a brevity-
urging sentence from, of all times, the eighteenth century (remember
Pamela?) Indispensable for lecturers, writers and all of us dedicated to
finding the right words along with the right attribution, this edition of
over 12,000 entries includes new contributions from politics, high tech-
nology and popular culture. Entries are sorted by subject for quick ref-
erence, the keyword index is invaluable and also serves as a
cross-reference, and the entries themselves include explanations of
origins and original usage. Along with using this as a professional and
scholarly reference, casual readers can also pick up a few pointers from
such luminaries as Gandhi on cooked food, Wittgenstein on flies, and
James I on smoking.
PN6081 2005-043697 0-312-34004-4
The quote verifier; who said what, where, and when.
Keyes, Ralph.
St. Martin’s Press, ©2006 389 p. $15.95 (pa)
“Memory may be a terrible librarian, but it’s a great editor.” So says the
author of The Courage to Write in tracing the sources and usage history
of many familiar but often misattributed or misquoted classic and con-
temporary sayings. E.g., what Churchill actually said was “blood, toil,
tears, and sweat” rather than “blood, sweat, and tears.” Keyes’ verdict is
that this is the prime minister’s take on an old phrase. Quotes are
organized alphabetically by key word, including genres such as famous
last words and movie quotes. Indexing is by key word, name, and
sidebar (featuring people who commonly have words put in their
mouth). This well- researched, entertaining reference deserves a cloth
edition.
PN6519 2006-044034 978-90-04-15168-0
Persian wisdom in Arabic garb; ‘Ali b. ‘Ubayda al-
Rayhani (d. 219/834) and his Jawahir al-kilam wa-fara’id
al-hikam; 2v.
Rayhani, ‘Ali ibn ‘Ubaydah. Ed. and trans. by Mohsen Zakeri. (Islamic
philosophy, theology and science, text and studies)
BRILL, ©2007 1509 p. $399.00
Al-Rayhani was renowned during his own early Abbasid time as a pro-
lific author of great erudition, translator from Middle Persian into
Arabic, compiler of proverbial wisdom, and eloquent speaker. Zakeria (U.
of Frankfurt) presents a bio-bibliographical account of al-Rayhani and
his more than 60, mostly lost, books. In the second volume he edits and
translates for the first time The Jewels of Speech and the Pearls of Wisdom,
one of the oldest collections of his ancient proverbs, proverbial phrases,
and popular sayings; and three shorter texts. The second volume, the
edition and translation, is not indexed.
PN6727 2006-046674 978-0-393-06106-2
Will Eisner’s New York; life in the big city.
Eisner, Will. (The Will Eisner library)
W.W. Norton, ©2006 423 p. $29.95
Will Eisner (1917-2005) is widely considered one of the most influential
comics writers ever for his work on the series The Spirit and for his work
in establishing the graphic novel as viable literary and commercial art
form. This volume collects four of Eisner’s major works New York: The
Big City (1981), The Building (1987), City People Notebook (1989), and
Invisible People, which together reveal Eisner as a “remarkable observer”
of life in the Big Apple, to quote The Sandman comics writer, Neil
Gaiman, who penned the introduction.
–285–
ROMANCE LITERATURES
PQ1 77-648803 1-57591-104-3
French XX bibliography; a bibliography for the study of
French literature and culture since 1885, v.12, no.2, issue
no.57.
Title main entry. Ed. by William J. Thompson.
Susquehanna Univ. Press, ©2006 398 p. $110.00 (pa)
This issue contains nearly 10,000 updated entries, all of which include
the source of information or library in which the book or article has
been consulted and includes articles and books from 2005. Subjects
include anthologies and collections, bibliographies, bibliophilism and
publication studies, francophone literature, French literary history, lit-
erary themes and topics, literary theory and aesthetics, memoirs and
autobiography, novels and short stories, poetry, surrealism, theater,
cinema, and philosophy, psychology and religion. The editor includes
author arranged alphabetically by name of author, theater actor or
theater director and under the cinema heading entries for individual
directors, cinema authors, cinema theorists, and actors. This edition also
contains updated cross-references to previous issues. Distributed by
Associated University Presses.
PQ149 2005-035344 978-0-8265-1531-5
The hysteric’s revenge; French women writers at the fin
de siécle.
Mesch, Rachel.
Vanderbilt University Pr., ©2006 268 p. $34.95 (pa)
These women were scandals. Their frankness and their ability to artfully
disclose that women could feel pleasure and describe it very well made
men very jumpy, partly out of reverence for the dubious assumptions of
nineteenth-century science, partly out of sheer jealousy. Mesch (French,
Columbia U.) examines the strong link and even stronger confusion
between what was presumed to be women’s minds and bodies as
expressed in their writing when France made the difficult transition
from the nineteenth century to the twentieth. She challenges fin de siècle
notions and modern notions about those notions in her analysis of Zola’s
Nana, de Pougy’s Idylle saphique, Vivien’s Une femme m’apparut and
Collette’s La Vagabonde, the virility of the intellectual woman, the right
to decadence expressed in the lore of the body, and the right to pleasure
expressed in the sentimental novel.
PQ155 2006-016917 978-1-55753-430-9
Culinary comedy in medieval French literature.
Gordon, Sarah. (Purdue studies in Romance literatures; v.37)
Purdue University Press, ©2007 220 p. $43.95 (pa)
Like modern audiences, people in the Middle Ages found fictional
accounts of gluttony (and related vices) and food fights humorous.
Gordon (medieval literature, Utah State U.), a former restaurant critic in
Paris, explores how food serves as a comic device offering insights into
cultural norms, preoccupations, and literary conventions. Following an
overview of classic and modern theories of humor, and food from the
more studied socio-historical perspective, she examines culinary comedy
in medieval French genres including romances, epics, fables, and
fabliaux (short “black humor” verse narratives).
PQ231 2006-014212 0-7876-8145-8
Sixteenth-century French writers.
Title main entry. Ed. by Megan Conway. (Dictionary of literary biog-
raphy; v.327)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 533 p. $225.00
The latest volume in the Dictionary of Literary Biography series provides
a biographical-bibliographical guide and overview to 47 major French
writers of the 16th century. Each entry includes a detailed list of the
author’s works, later editions, and editions in English; a brief biogra-
phical account of the author’s life and major contributions; and list of
resources including bibliographies, biographies, and other reference pub-
lications. The entries are illustrated with b&w reproductions of drawings
and paintings of the authors, their families, places where they lived, fac-
simile reproductions of title pages, and specimens of manuscripts and
letters, when feasible. Conway is with Louisiana State U., Shreveport.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PQ307 2006-004626 978-0-8047-5356-2
From split to screened selves; French and Francophone
autobiography in the third person.
Gabara, Rachel.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 213 p. $55.00
Gabara (romance languages, U. of Georgia) takes a hard look at the work
of contributors to the autobiographic genre to analyze their elements of
self-representation, whether as French or French-speaking Africans. She
starts with Roland Barthes by Roland Barthes and Sarraute’s Childhood,
exploring the possibilities of the self as expressed in the first, second and
third persons, then moves to photography and film, including Collard’s
filming of Savage Nights, and then moves through the complexities of
Djebar’s Love, an Algerian Cavalcade and the autobiographical “third
cinema” of Achkar’s Allah Tantou and Peck’s Lumumba: Death of the
Prophet, exposing in all cases the twenty-first century self, a prospect not
entirely ironic.
PQ629 2006-021234 0-8204-7133-X
New approaches to twentieth-century travel literature in
French; genre, history, theory.
Forsdick, Charles et al. (Travel writing across the disciplines; v.10)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 235 p. $70.95
Taking French literature as a case study, Forsdick, Feroza Basu (both
French, U. of Liverpool), and Siobhán Shilton (French, U. Bristol) consider
the impact of travel texts on national and international cultures and iden-
tities in the context of post-colonial thought. Their topics include travel
and empire, returning the traveler’s gaze, performative insiders, and self-
propulsion and speed.
PQ631 978-0-7734-5618-1
A time of transition in the French novel; “Les Années
tournantes” 1928-1934.
Shorley, Christopher.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 277 p. $109.95
A number of scholars of interwar French culture have identified a sig-
nificant turning point in the years between 1928 and 1934. In this study,
Shorley examines French novels of that period in order to understand
how they reflect outward crises as they reveal their own internal
changes. Coverage includes works by Malraux and Queneau (among
others), as well as translations into French of American detective fiction.
Shorley teaches French at Queen’s U. in Belfast.
PQ1139 978-0-7734-5610-5
Allegories of decadence in fin-de-siécle Spain; the female
consumer in the novels of Emilia Pardo Bazán and Benito
Pérez Galdós.
Anderson, Lara.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 135 p. $99.95
Anderson (Spanish, U. of Melbourne) looks at the descriptions of female
apparel by Bazán (1851-1921) and Galdós (1843-1920), two of the best
known and most prolific writers in Spain during the 19th century, from
the perspective of the wider contemporary concern with the impact of
consumerism on the social milieu, in particular its contributions to
Spain’s national decadence, which was already being fueled by the loss
both of her last colonies and of the basic principles of democracy at
home. Quotations are in Spanish.
PQ1483 978-0-8020-9020-1
Controlling readers; Guillaume de Machaut and his late
medieval audience.
McGrady, Deborah.
U. of Toronto Pr., ©310 310 p. $75.00
McGrady (French and Italian, Tulane U.) explores the construction of the
lay reader and the lay reading experience in late medieval vernacular art
and literature through a case study of Guillaume (1300-77). In his 1363-
65 collection Voir dit, she says, he combined poems and songs that
invited oral delivery, with prose and elaborate pictorial programs that
privileged a physical encounter with the book. Her concern is not so
much with any actual lay readers of the book, but with how they were
imagined by him, his bookmakers, and subsequent readers.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PQ2443 2006-051782 0-7734-5611-2
Color symbolism in the works of Stendhal; le bleu et le
vert.
Hansen, Cheryl M.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 214 p. $109.95
Hansen (French, Weber State U., Utah) argues that French writer Stendhal
(1783-1842) developed a personal color code more elaborate than the
simple red and black of his best known novel that became a key element
in his fiction. She begins by looking at his treatment of color in journals
and correspondence, then analyzes his increasing use of a his palette in
fiction.
PQ2603 2006-019384 0-8204-8649-3
Beckett and French theory; the narration of transgression.
Migernier, Eric. (Francophone cultures and literatures; v.50)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 144 p. $61.95
Bringing together two of the 20th-century’s most opaque collections of
writing, Migernier (French, Marshall U., West Virginia) probes the rela-
tionship between Beckett’s fiction and the work of several contemporary
French thinkers, such as Maurice Blanchot and Gilles Deleuze. Migernier
demonstrates the ways concepts such as the “thought of the outside” and
the “simulacrum” also generate Beckett’s transgressive narrative. He con-
cludes with a discussion of the possibility of statements by Beckett’s l’in-
nommable.
PQ2623 978-0-7734-5602-0
Experimentation and the autobiographical search for
identity in the projects of Michel Leiris and Hubert Fichte.
Wilks, Thomas.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 342 p. $119.95
The bodies of texts by Leiris (1901-90) and Fichte (1935-86) are substantial
in scale and scope, says Wilks (English, U, of Wüzburg), but in both cases
form unified projects. Concentrating on the style and autobiographical
substances of their prose, he discusses how the projects developed, and
the features they share as experiments in the exploration of identity at
intersections between autobiography and ethnography.
PQ2627 2006-017052 978-0-8047-5481-1
Irène Némirovsky; her life and works.
Weiss, Jonathan.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 200 p. $24.95
Born in Russia to wealthy Jewish parents, Irène Némirovsky immigrated
to Paris in 1919 and went on to write 17 popular novels and dozens of
short stories. Abandoned by her powerful friends after the Nazis invaded
France, she was deported to Auschwitz and died shortly after in 1942.
This biography describes her life and literary output. It is based upon
information contained in Némirovsky’s personal documents as well as a
close textual analysis of her work. Weiss teaches French language and lit-
erature at Colby College.
PQ2631 978-1-904350-52-1
The extreme in-between; Jean Paulhan’s place in the
twentieth century.
Milne, Anna-Louise.
Legenda, ©2006 163 p. $69.00
He set Ponge and Sartre before the world in the renowned Nouvelle Revue
Francais. He wrote criticism so dense it is itself a prose poem. He
explained de Sade to us as well as Picasso, and he understood art as art
and art as politics. Milne (French, U. of London Institute, Paris) under-
stands Paulham more completely as a creator and resident genius of the
space between art as art and art as politics, and explores his range of
commentary, charting a course between the drive for revolution and the
remainders of the ethos of art. She explains the forms of literary and
political extremism of the 1930s, Paulham’s take on proverbial speech in
Madagascar, the subtleties of the truth and the lie, and the efforts
Paulham made to protect art from the transitory passion of the day.
Distributed by the David Brown Book Company.
–286–
PQ2631 2006-015294 978-0-252-03070-3
Proust’s deadline.
Cano, Christine M.
U. of Illinois Press, ©2006 140 p. $35.00
Years after its initial publication, the discovery of unpublished drafts of
Marcel Proust’s Á la recherche du temps perdu provoked a lively debate
among scholars about the definitive form of this important literary work.
In this study, Cano offers a concise history of the publishing and
reception of Proust’s sprawling multi- volume text. She also explores such
key issues as Proust’s intellectual debt to transcendental idealism and the
impact of his deathbed revisions to Recherche’s penultimate volume. Cano
teaches French and comparative literature at Case Western Reserve U.
PQ2635 2005-023175 0-8386-4084-2
The target; Alain Robbe-Grillet, Jasper Johns.
Title main entry. Trans. by Ben Stoltzfus.
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2006 115 p. $52.50
French novelist and cinematographer Alain Robbe-Grillet wrote the intro-
duction to the catalog for the 1978 exhibition of works by American Pop
artist Jasper Johns at the Centre Georges Pompidou in Paris. The intro-
duction was fiction, and bore no resemblance to typical interpretive com-
ments and critical analyses. This volume presents 58 illustrations (eight
in color) from the show, along with an English translation of Robbe-
Grillet’s unconventional text. This is followed by an essay by Stoltzfus dis-
cussing Johns’s art and Robbe-Grillet’s metafiction in a postmodern
context. Stoltzfus holds a PhD in French from the U. of Wisconsin and is
a recognized interarts scholar.
PQ4086 978-1-904350-73-6
Orality and literacy in modern Italian culture.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Caesar and Marina Spunta.
Legenda, ©2006 169 p. $69.00
All but one of the 12 essays were selected from those presentations at a
May 2002 conference in London that dealt specifically with the second
half of the 20th century. Scholars of literature explore oral traditions and
practices in Italy, their relationship with literature and written culture,
and the methodological and theoretical problems raised by that rela-
tionship. Four of the essays are in Italian; none are spoken. Distributed
in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
PQ4335 2005-030635 978-1-4051-3051-6
Dante; a brief history.
Hawkins, Peter S. (Blackwell brief histories of religion)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 194 p. $54.95
Hot, deep, wide and nearly hopelessly stocked with ingredients, Dante’s
Divine Comedy is too often sorted into smaller, more digestible bits and
served cold. To do so is to lose the passion, the subtleties of the theology,
the wicked humor and the voice of Dante himself. Hawkins (religion,
Boston U.) keeps the bits together into a coherent whole as he evaluates
Dante’s life and work, covering the probable and the possible with clear
delineation, noting that this is a work of exile and the result of a complex
mix of mysticism and cold hard logic. He works through the steps on
Dante’s path to God, the role of the ideal and the incarnate Beatrice, the
workings of Dante’s religion, and the later treatment of Dante and his
poem as art rather than heresy, as performance, and even in the comics.
The color plates are particularly interesting.
PQ4335 978-1-904350-71-2
From Florence to the heavenly city; the poetry of
citizenship in Dante.
Honess, Claire E.
Legenda, ©2006 203 p. $69.00
Honess (Italian, U. of Leeds, UK) analyzes the importance of the concepts
of citizenship and the city-state in the writings of Dante Alighieri and
connects them to broader theological and poetical concerns of the
Florentine poet. She discusses how Dante’s ideals of citizenship are
reflected in the realms of the afterlife portrayed in his poetry, as well as
his treatment of the outsider (the “anti-citizen”) within the moral
structure of the Commedia. The poetic functions of the city of Jerusalem
in his writings is also explored prior to a concluding discussion of the
interface between Dante’s conceptions of “the poetic” and “the civic.”
Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co.
–287–
PQ4390 2006-006938 0-86078-984-5
Dante’s enigmas; medieval scholasticism and beyond.
Kay, Richard. (Variorum collected studies series; 839)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 350 p. $114.95
Kay (U. of Kansas) attempts to solve some of the riddles that he finds in
Commedia and figures Dante left hanging on purpose to engage the
intellect of readers. Among these are the sins of Brunetto Latini, the spare
ribs of Dante’s Michael Scot, Vitrivius and Dante’s giants, mental illumi-
nation in Paradiso 33.141, and acrostic allegations in several passages.
The 20 articles, one in Italian, were published between 1970 and 2005,
but mostly in the 1990s, and are reproduced with the original page
numbers.
PQ4417 2006-543115 978-90-04-15495-7
Dante and the Franciscans.
Title main entry. Ed. by Santa Casciani. (The medieval Franciscans; v.3)
BRILL, ©2006 357 p. $149.00
How much Franciscan teachings influenced the work of Dante has
grown into a significant field of interest, with scholars seeking the mys-
terious and fascinating linkages between such as Saint Bernardino’s
image of the sun and Dante’s ideas behind the Pentacostal gift. Whether
delineating heaven or hell Dante appears to have done so under the
influence of Franciscan teaching, and these ten essays carefully examine
that relationship in such topics as Dante’s take on Olivi and the
Apocalypse, the influence of Clarissan spirituality, Saint Bernadino as a
reader of Dante, what Dante learned from the example of Saint Francis,
the origin of the reference to “five hundred and ten and five” in the
Purgatorio, the evolution of Dante in Franciscanism and the resulting
character of Paradiso, the role of the cross in Dante and Chaucer, Dante’s
depiction of Saint Francis, and traces of the Franciscan in New Life.
PQ4473 2006-007746 1-932559-85-X
Searching for Latini.
Kleine, Michael.
Parlor Press, ©2006 141 p. $20.00 (pa)
In this absorbing and very personal journey, Kleine (rhetoric and writing,
U. of Arkansas, Little Rock) seeks Brunetto Latini, a proponent of
Ciceronian rhetoric. Although Kleine finds Latini singularly relevant to
contemporary teaching of writing, Latini is generally remembered, if he
is at all, as the teacher of Dante. Kleine finds Latini’s earthly traces in
the civic writing of the exile, in Dante’s bad treatment of his master, in
translations of Latini, and in the preservation of his manuscripts and rep-
utation by unlikely heroes. Kleine’s journey is marked by his growth as
a scholar and writer as he is tutored in orality, literacy, rhetoric and
teaching by Latini from seven centuries away. The result is a gentle nar-
rative of growth and discovery.
PQ4712 2006-015592 978-0-87352-596-1
Approaches to teaching Collodi’s Pinocchio and its
adaptations.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Sherberg. (Approaches to teaching
world literature)
Modern Language Association, ©2006 179 p. $19.75 (pa)
Nineteen essays by educators discuss various strategies for teaching
Collodi’s Pinocchio and its adaptations. Some draw upon the story’s 19th-
century context, while others explore modern critical approaches. Sample
topics include society in post-Unification Italy, the theme of the hero’s
journey, and the use of the film version in the classroom. A “Materials”
section evaluates different editions and translations and suggests some
audiovisual and electronic resources. Editor Sherberg teaches Italian at
Washington University.
PQ6046 2006-051808 0-7734-5536-1
Dreams in the Western literary tradition with special
reference to medieval Spain; a method for interpreting
oneiric texts.
Cerghedean, Gabriela.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 259 p. $109.95
American specialist in Medieval Spanish literature, Cerghedean (U. of
Wisconsin-Madison) contributes to the very little previous critical
attention to dreams in Medieval Spanish literature, considering the tra-
ditions, theories, and taxonomies. She also sets the context by reviewing
dream traditions from Antiquity through the Late Middle Ages, and pro-
vides examples of the use of dreams in Spanish literature. The quotations
are in Spanish.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PQ6064 2006-023520 978-0-8265-1545-2
Reason and its others; Italy, Spain, and the New World.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Castillo and Massimo Lollini. (Hispanic
issues; v.32)
Vanderbilt University Pr., ©2006 358 p. $34.95 (pa)
Scholars of literature and other humanities explore the heritage of the
Enlightenment in the two early modern European countries and in Latin
America. Among their topics are the telescope in the Baroque imagi-
nation, a dialogue on good government in Spanish Naples, and
modernity and coloniality in the Jesuits’ reducciones in Paraguay.
PQ6065 2006-007799 978-0-8387-5642-3
Critical reflections; essays on Golden Age Spanish
literature in honor of James A. Parr.
Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara Simerka and Amy R. Williamsen.
Bucknell University Pr., ©2006 214 p. $44.50
To honor James Parr, the contributors to this essay collection take up his
challenge to explore emerging approaches to textual study, not by
adopting them unquestioningly, but by adapting aspects that enhance the
study of Spanish literature. The essays use approaches as varied as genre
and cultural studies, cognitive psychology, and performance theories to
analyze texts of the Spanish golden age of literature. Distributed by
Associated University Presses.
PQ6137 2005-037909 978-0-8387-5633-1
Scripted geographies; travel writings by nineteenth-
century Spanish authors.
Nunley, Gayle R.
Bucknell University Pr., ©2007 272 p. $52.50
Focusing on texts produced during a crucial period in the development
of Spain’s modern consciousness at the close of its imperial age, Nunley
(Romance languages, Spanish, U. of Vermont) demonstrates the ways
writers’ strategies of travel representation reflected and participated in
the process of cultural transformation. Nunley highlights the works of
Mesonero Romanos, Galdós, Alarcón and Galiano. Distributed by
Associated University Presses.
PQ7082 2006-042548 978-0-8387-5645-4
Figural conquistadors; rewriting the New World’s
discovery and conquest in Mexican and River Plate novels
of the 1980s and 1990s.
Hernández, Mark A. (The Bucknell studies in Latin American literature
and theory)
Bucknell University Pr., ©2006 194 p. $45.00
Hernández (Spanish, Tufts U.) offers readings of novels published in
Mexico and the Rio de la Plata basin (Argentina, Paraguay, and Uruguay)
in the 1980s and 1990s that have revisited the conquistador past of their
countries, particularly through the use of fictional autobiographies and
testimonials. Finding both legitimating and subversive elements in the
novels, Hernández is primarily interested in the way the novels rewrite
historiographical discourse about the conquest and the relationship of
that discourse to contemporary Latin American politics. The novels dis-
cussed include Armanda Ayala Anguiano’s Cómo conquisté a los aztecas,
Abel Posse’s El largo atardecer del caminante, Napoleón Baccino Ponce de
León’s Maluco: La novella de los descubridores, Antonio Elio Brailovsky’s
Esta maldita lujuria, Eugenio Aguirre’s Gonzalo Guerrero, Augusto Roa
Basto’s Vigilia del Almirante, Herminio Martínez’s las puertas del mundo:
Una autobiografía del Almirante, most of which have previously received
only limited critical attention. Distributed in the US by Associated
University Presses.
PQ7797 2006-008746 978-0-8387-5665-2
Littoral of the letter; Saer’s art of narration.
Riera, Gabriel. (The Bucknell studies in Latin American literature and
theory)
Bucknell University Pr., ©2006 173 p. $39.50
Riera (comparative literature, Princeton U.) examines how the fiction and
essay texts of Argentine writer Juan José Saer (1937-2005) question their
own generic protocols and exhibit their anomalous condition of writing
without attributes. Focusing on a reduces corpus, he hopes to elucidate a
series of issues that touch the core of the interpretation of certain fun-
damental tendencies in contemporary literature. Distributed in the US by
Associated University Presses.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PQ7797 2006-012706 978-0-8204-8639-0
Peripheral (post) modernity; the syncretist aesthetics of
Borges, Piglia, Kalokyris, Kyriakidis.
Kefala, Eleni.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 303 p. $77.95
Kefala (Spanish and Latin American literature, U. of St. Andrews) finds
the relatively untouched ground of Argentina and Greece, working
through the aesthetic principals and traditions that occur in locations
considered peripheral. She explains her notion of syncretist aesthetics in
terms of cultural reactions to modernity in the historical avant-garde and
those considered modernists and postmodernists, then locates these con-
cepts within the ideologies and cultural trajectories in Argentina and
Greece, moving specifically to Borges and the ironic and fantastic tradi-
tions of Argentina. In Piglia she finds traces of the syncretist machine
and its irreverent peripheries, and in Kalokyris she locates the craft of
syncretic craters. She closes her evidence with the false testimonies of
Kyriakidis and compares his work to the labyrinths of Borges, and con-
cludes with a fascinating comparison of the ideological debates of stu-
dents of the literature of Latin America and Neohellenism.
PQ9401 2006-046920 0-7734-5576-0
The metaphorical “tenth island” in Azorean literature; the
theme of emigration in the Azorean imagination.
Ramos Villar, Carmen M.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 304 p. $119.95
Ramos Villar (Hispanic studies, U. of Sheffield) examines the theme of
emigration in Portuguese literature, taking the Azores Islands as a case
study and concentrating mostly on literature produced there since the
beginning of the 20th century. Within a post-colonial framework, she
argues that a metaphorical 10th island is synonymous with the position
of Azorean literature itself as it negotiates a position between being part
of a Portuguese literary tradition and American literature.
ENGLISH-LANGUAGE LITERATURES
PR19 2006-049353 978-0-19-861453-1
The Oxford companion to English literature, 6th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Margaret Drabble.
Oxford U. Press, ©2006 1172 p. $60.00
Containing encyclopedic coverage of all aspects of English literature from
Homer to hypertext, The Oxford Companion to English Literature has been
a standard source for students, scholars and general readers since the
1930s. The sixth edition, edited by the novelist Margaret Drabble, con-
tains over 8,000 entries on writers, their works, and their cultural con-
texts, as well as discussions of critics, literary theory, allusions, and
characters from novels and plays. The appendices containing the
chronology and lists of literary award winners have been updated, as
have many of the entries.
PR255 2005-034698 978-0-631-23171-4
Reading Middle English literature; an introduction.
Turville-Petre, Thorlac. (Blackwell introductions to literature; 16)
Blackwell Publishing, ©211 211 p. $74.95
The stories are awash in sex, power, swords, ambition, swooning,
plagues, wealth, intrigue, and the very real threat of the flames of hell.
Add characters named “Criseyde” and “Wastour,” and now you know
why Middle English should be considered accessible and fascinating
rather than impenetrable and scary. Turville-Petre (medieval English lit-
erature, U. of Nottingham) gives readers a good understanding of the cul-
tural and historical contexts for all that action, using a carefully selected
set of readings from standard texts. He explains the social impact of
having three English languages, the choice of which determined the text’s
social register, describes the nature of the physical texts and manuscripts,
including the role of the scribe, and defines how literature described and
defined the bondsman and the freeman. He also shows how monastic
history defined the romance, how religion was located personally and
what Criseyde and Wastour really meant by “love” and “marriage.”
PR411 2005-032599 978-1-4051-1357-1
A concise companion to English Renaissance literature.
Title main entry. Ed. by Donna B. Hamilton. (Blackwell concise com-
panions to literature and culture)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 275 p. $89.95
US and British scholars examine English literature between the later
decades in the reign of Elizabeth I and the end of the reign of James I,
1575-1625 from the perspective of categories and contexts thought to have
informed it. Among these are economics, religion, manuscripts,
patronage, treason, private life, exploration, and royal marriage.
Substantial bibliographies point to deeper study in each of the specialties.
–288–
PR448 978-87-635-0493-5
Angles on the English-speaking world; v.6: Literary
translation; world literature or ‘worlding’ literature?
Title main entry. Ed. by Ida Klitgard.
Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2006 152 p. $25.00 (pa)
Eleven international academics and scholars contribute nine essays and
two book reviews to an annual publication of the Department of English
at the U. of Copenhagen. The collection explores the interrelatedness
between the concepts and phenomena of world literature and translation.
The essays consider the problematic mechanics of cultural encounters
when “reading the world,” in literary translation, that is in the texts
themselves as well as in the ways in which they have become institu-
tionalized as “world literature.” No subject index. Distributed in the U.S.
by ISBS.
PR448 2005-027815 0-7546-5475-3
Humans and other animals in eighteenth-century British
culture; representation, hybridity, ethics.
Title main entry. Ed. by Frank Palmeri.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 217 p. $99.95
Focusing on the “long eighteenth century” in England (1660-1832), and
the issues of representation, hybridity and ethics, contributors address
gross metempsychosis and the Eastern soul, mixed ethnicity in
Constantinople and fashionable pets in Britain, studies of skin color in
the Royal Society and Gulliver’s Travels, Gulliver and the lives of animals,
Swift and Lock on the ethics of excessive individualism, the autocritique
of fables, the art of facing other animals in nomenclature, Rowlandson’s
“Studies in Comparative Anatomy” and its relationship to science, art and
satire, Frankenstein as an appeal to mercy for persecuted animals,
Shelley’s take on the chain of animal life, and the play of species in
Pynchon’s Mason & Dixon. This includes an admirable collection of
period illustrations.
PR468 2006-004633 978-0-8047-5297-8
Borderlines; the shiftings of gender in British
romanticism.
Wolfson, Susan J.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 430 p. $65.00
Reviewing the Romanticist polarization of masculinist and feminist
orders and practices, Wolfson (English, Princeton U.) shifts the language
of gender essence into mobile and less determinate syntax. She highlights
such figures as the stylized feminine poetess, the aberrant masculine
woman, the male poet deemed feminine, and the hapless or strategic
cross-dressers of both sexes.
PR468 2005-033639 0-7546-5570-9
Romanticism and religion from William Cowper to
Wallace Stevens.
Title main entry. Ed. by Gavin Hopps and Jane Stabler. (The nineteenth
century series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 262 p. $99.95
British scholars of literature explore how the theological turn in post-
modern thought has impacted Romantic Studies. Their topics include
Milton and the Romantic visionary, Wordsworth’s faithful skepticism, the
diction of Don Juan, Percy Bysshe Shelley after postmodern theology, and
sacred art and profane poets.
PR478 2006-018184 978-0-8387-5617-1
Modernism and mourning.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia Rae.
Bucknell University Pr., ©2007 310 p. $62.50
Drawing from recent critical and theoretical work on mourning, these
essays explore the extent to which modernist writing repudiates Freud’s
famous injunction to mourners to “work through” their grief, endorsing
instead a resistant mourning related to Freudian melancholia. The
resulting picture challenges previous concepts about modernism, partic-
ularly about the political messages generated by its radical formal exper-
iments. Rae (English, Queen’s U., Ontario) provides a useful framework
for the discussions in her introduction.
–289–
PR478 2006-017177 978-0-7546-5308-0
Modernism on Fleet Street.
Collier, Patrick.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 257 p. $99.95
Concern about cultural decline and its connections to journalism were a
significant feature of English modernism, notes Collier (English, Ball
State U.), although modernist reactions to journalism were multiple and
conflicting, if always ambivalent. He presents case studies tracing how
modernist writers engaged the issue of journalism, presenting separate
narratives for T.S. Eliot, Virginia Woolf, James Joyce, Rose Macaulay, and
Rebecca West.
PR499 2003-014309 1-933146-07-9
The ABC of lit crit.
Ellis, Frank H.
Academica Press, LLC, ©2003 234 p. $74.95
To create this primer for close reading, Ellis (English, Smith College) side-
steps decades’ worth of critical discourse about authorial intent, reader
response, the inability of language to represent the world, ideologies
promulgated and resisted, and debates about the relevance of race, class
and gender. He states as his purpose teaching students “how to have
something to say about literature” and notes that that task requires a
vocabulary of about 100 technical terms and “a rule of thumb for pro-
ceeding.” The rule of thumb consists of finding the answers to five ques-
tions: what is the subgenre, genre and supergenre of the work; what is
the structure; what are the sound effects; what is the tone; and what is
the theme. He uses as examples essays he has published from 1951 to
1989 about such works as Gray’s Elegy, Robinson Crusoe and Absalom
and Achitophel. The essays exemplify precisely Ellis’ formalist approach
but do not set that approach in context or engage any dissonant opinions.
PR553 2005-034701 978-1-4051-1316-8
A companion to eighteenth-century poetry.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christine Gerrard. (Blackwell companions to
literature and culture; v.42)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 605 p. $149.95
Gone are the days when dead white guys comprised the study of eigh-
teenth century English poetry. They have not been supplanted but, for
example, now we know Jane Barker, Mary Chudleigh, Anne Finch, Mary
Collier, Lady Mary Wortley Montague and Ann Yearsley scribbled
alongside Dryden, Gay, Johnson, Pope and Swift. In these 41 essays con-
tributors give contexts and perspectives on politics, empire, science,
religion, poetic enthusiasm, visual arts, popular culture, the literary
marketplace, women poets, and sentiment. They comment on the works
of the aforementioned along with Duck, Leapor, Goldsmith, Cowper and
others, analyze forms and genres such as rhyming couplets and blank
verse, the epic and the mock-heroic, the verse satire, the ode, the georgic
and the verse epistle, and describe themes such as femininity, Whig and
Tory poetics, the classics, the past, imagination, the sublime, the city, and
the sense of place.
PR555 2006-010233 978-0-87413-945-7
A careful longing; the poetics and problems of nostalgia.
Santesso, Aaron.
Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 221 p. $60.00
Santesso (English, U. of Nevada) examines the emergence of the nostalgia
poem in the 18th century, asserting that the poems are best understood
by imagining the premises of nostalgia itself. To this end, he offers a new
and broadly applicable theory of “tropic change,” in which new genres
are built around tropes extracted from decaying genres. He uses the
works of Dryden, Pope, Gray, Goldsmith, Cowper and Crabbe to demon-
strate his theory. Distributed by Associated University Presses.
PR651 2005-030633 978-0-631-22629-1
English renaissance drama.
Womack, Peter. (Blackwell guides to literature)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 325 p. $84.95
A useful fulcrum to the study of Shakespeare and other playwrights of
the English Renaissance, this guide covers the London theatrical culture
that began in the 1570s and ended in 1642. Womack (English, U. of East
Anglia) traces the opposing influences of patronage and the market and
surveys the various languages out of which plays were written. He also
provides biographies of the best-known playwrights of the period and
analyzes over 20 scripts. Through themes such as cuckolding, going mad,
and rising from the dead, Womack links ideological concerns with dra-
matic practice.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PR719 0-7734-5619-8
The origins of the modern study of Gothic drama,
together with a re-edition of Gothic Drama from Walpole
to Shelley (1947) by Bertrand Evans.
Title main entry. Ed. by Frederick S. Frank.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 315 p. $119.95
Frank (English, Allegheny College) provides a new edition of R. Bertrand
Evan’s Gothic Drama from Walpole to Shelley from 1947, which was never
reprinted or issued in a second edition until now. He notes that the
volume is a key introduction to Gothic theater and a guide to its canon
and also traces the history of the genre and summarizes the study. In
addition, he adds notes, a bibliography, and updates bibliographic cita-
tions of primary sources.
PR756 978-90-04-15403-2
Bringing the world to early modern Europe; travel
accounts and their audiences.
Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Mancall.
BRILL, ©2006 168 p. $98.00
In this collection of six essays, contributors examine how the act of travel
compared to the travelers’ descriptions of it, and analyze how travel nar-
ratives of the early modern period relate to the formation of humanistic
culture. They cover questions of value in the Early English Travel
Collection, Thévenot’s contributions to the culture of curiosity, the efforts
by Peter Kolb in the eighteenth century to create an authoritative text on
the Khoikhoi at the Cape of Good Hope, the work of Benzenet’s travel
narratives in the Quaker anti-slavery movement before the American
Revolution, and the idea that travel writing was not fully realized from
the sixteenth to the eighteenth centuries because the leading lights of the
Enlightenment were not yet involved.
PR788 2005-033640 0-7546-5540-7
Possessed Victorians; extra spheres in nineteenth-century
mystical writings.
Willburn, Sarah A. (The nineteenth century series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 169 p. $89.95
Willburn (English, Trinity College, Connecticut) explores what people in
the 19th century thought happened to identity when people were pos-
sessed, and how spiritual possession re-figured models for civilization
and community. Her cases include George Eliot’s realism in Daniel
Deronda, spiritualist views of seeing the invisible, spiritual Darwinism,
trance heroines, and the threat of mediumship to marriage in trance
novels.
PR830 2006-026202 978-0-313-33428-3
Great women mystery writers, 2d ed.
Lindsay, Elizabeth Blakesley.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 335 p. $65.00
Lindsay (library instruction, Washington State U. Libraries) offers biog-
raphies of 90 female English language mystery writers in this update to
the 1994 edition. Writers who were deceased before 1994, or who have
died since then but whose entries in the first edition remain complete,
have been omitted. Entries on living writers have been updated, and
many new names added. The authors were selected based on award
receipts, commercial success, and critical acclaim. Each entry offers a
short bibliography, a discussion of major works and themes, and a
summary of critical response, followed by a complete bibliography.
Multiple indexes allow readers to find works by author, series character
name, sleuth type, and setting. The appendices list female nominees and
recipients of various mystery awards.
PR830 2006-295742 978-0-7190-6968-0
Reading the graphic surface; the presence of the book in
prose fiction.
White, Glyn.
Manchester U. Press, ©2005 216 p. $47.50
White (humanities, U. of Central Lancashire) examines the graphic
surfaces of Beckett’s Watt and Murphy, Johnson’s Albert Angelo, Travelling
People and The Unfortunates, Brooke-Rose’s Thru, Gray’s Lanark: A Life in
Four Books, Brophy’s In Transit and, of course Sterne’s classic Life and
Opinions of Tristam Shandy to locate the reasons why the authors chose
to present their material in such a fashion and why critics have
dismissed such efforts either by ignoring them or assigning them to
postmodern decadence. White describes the presence of the book in
terms of why the manuscript is not the real work and how the book
serves as codex form, the theories behind the graphic surface, with
commentary on the idealized text, the linguistic model, writing and the
textual voice, and critical reactions within the context of mimesis. The
next chapters are close “readings” of the texts in question, including
figures. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PR858 2005-029456 978-0-8387-5604-1
Engendering legitimacy; law, property, and early
eighteenth-century fiction.
Glover, Susan Paterson. (The Bucknell studies in eighteenth-century liter-
ature and culture)
Bucknell University Pr., ©2006 231 p. $49.50
This study examines the fiction of four early 18th-century writers—
Jonathan Swift, Mary Davys, Daniel Defoe and Eliza Haywood—to find
intersections of law, land, property and gender. Glover (English,
Laurentian U., Ontario) employs these examples in support of her con-
tention that questions of political and legal legitimacy raised by the
Glorious Revolution of 1688 were transposed to the domestic and literary
spheres of the early 1700s. She finds the foundations of the English novel
in the period’s preoccupation with the role of property in law and
culture. Distributed by Associated University Press.
PR858 2006-003549 0-8018-8430-6
Sentimental figures of empire in eighteenth-century
Britain and France.
Festa, Lynn.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 300 p. $55.00
Festa (English, Harvard U.) makes the case that what people read about
their relations with their colonies shaped their identities, particularly
when what they read cast the colonizers as saviors. Using a variety of
sentimental fiction ranging from novels, poetry, travel accounts, com-
merce manuals and philosophical writings, Festa traces the development
of the image of the aboriginal as Other but one worthy of pity and
attempts at redemption, with the affect being readers’ formation of them-
selves as individuals and differentiated by superiority. In scene after
scene, the Other is overawed by the benevolence of those bringing the
benefits of modern life, with sentimental emotions such as sympathy
soaking every word. She traces through number of complex ideas,
including sentimental re-writing of history, emotions in an age of
mechanical reproduction, the tales told by things people make, tropes of
redundant personification, and the sympathetic misfire.
PR878 2006-008917 978-0-691-12712-5
Imperial masochism; British fiction, fantasy, and social
class.
Kucich, John.
Princeton U. Press, ©2007 258 p. $35.00
Masochism, here interpreted in a broader cultural sense to mean the
desire for and glorification of suffering (in this case, for the imperial
cause), is revealed to be a predominant theme in the works of many
major Victorian writers, including Robert Louis Stevenson, Rudyard
Kipling, and Joseph Conrad. By tracing the common thread of
masochistic and sadomasochistic fantasy occurring in works on colonial
themes by these and other writers, Kucich (English, Rutgers U.) offers a
vision of the cultural and social mores behind celebrated actions and
stories that elevate suffering as the necessary process by which a hero
creates a new, better world. Kucich supplements his psychoanalytic
analysis throughout by providing details of the historical events and
figures behind the stories, as well as noting other examples of such
stories, often in the popular media.
PR1111 2004-061155 1-4000-7675-7
Tuscany in mind; an anthology.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alice Leccese Powers. (Vintage departures)
Vintage Books, ©2005 371 p. $14.00 (pa)
Powers (writing, Corcoran College of Art and Design), a freelance writer
and editor of other books in the series, offers a guide to Tuscany through
literary works—fiction, poetry, essays, letters, and memoirs by English
and American writers, from Edith Wharton to Mark Twain. The excerpts
include Pictures from Italy by Charles Dickens, Where Angels Feat to Tread
by E.M. Forster, Confidence by Henry James, and others by writers such
as Erica Jong, D.H. Lawrence, Mary McCarthy, Mary Shelley, and Percy
Bysshe Shelley. Each excerpt is preceded by a brief biography. There is
no index.
–290–
PR1260 0-8386-4119-9
Medieval and Renaissance drama in England; v.19.
Title main entry. Ed. by S.P. Cerasano.
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2006 348 p. $72.50
Reflecting the ongoing interest in attribution studies, the first two essays
focus on the authorship of plays attributed to John Webster. Seven addi-
tional articles consider such topics as the Bell Savage Inn and Playhouse
in London, merchants of Venice in A Knack to Know an Honest Man, and
the extremes of sumptuary law in Robert Greene’s Briar Bacon and Friar
Bungay. A review essay on Shakespeare and crypto-Catholicism is fol-
lowed by reviews of 13 recent publications. Distributed in the US by
Associated University Presses.
PR1261 978-0-7734-5578-8
Four levels of meaning in the York cycle of mystery
plays; a study in medieval allegory.
Taylor, Jeffrey H.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 115 p. $89.95
The 48 pageants that comprise the York mystery plays, presented on the
Feast of Corpus Christi, dated from the fourteenth century and encom-
passed the whole of sacred history from the creation to the last
judgment. Some scholars claim the plays were written by learned clerics
for absorption by an ignorant audience but Taylor (English, Metropolitan
State College) counters by asserting the question of who wrote the plays
for whom is largely irrelevant. He asserts the plays had four levels of
meaning (literal, typological, tropological and anagogical), a nominalist
epistemology that would have been understood by the entire audience.
Taylor uses his deep understanding of Boethius, Emmerson, Auerbach,
and Muller to good purpose here, explaining the audience and the cul-
tural context of the York mystery plays and their cycle, the role of
typology and Boethian time in the structure, fifteenth-century mystical
nominalism, and ritual compensations at the anagogical level.
PR1261 978-0-7734-5624-2
Medieval mystery plays as popular culture; performing
the lives of saints.
Murphy, Diane.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 216 p. $109.95
The Miracle Plays did not start out to be obscure texts puzzled over by
graduate students, says Murphy (humanities, Unity College, Maine), but
as popular dramas about the lives of saints. She explains that during the
13th century, such plays began to be written in the local vernacular
rather than in Latin, and so became comprehensible to common folk.
Then they starting changing to become more attractive to general audi-
ences. She looks at cultic traditions, social change, aesthetic conventions,
and reception from the 13th to the 17th centuries.
PR2043 2004-053375 1-889818-42-9
Le Morte d’Arthur, or, The whole book of King Arthur
and of his noble knights of the Round Table.
Malory, Sir Thomas. Retold by Joseph Glaser.
Pegasus Press, ©2005 357 p. $19.95 (pa)
There is no doubt that Malory served both English literature and the
Arthurian canon an enormous service with his 1469 weaving of tales into
a coherent cycle. But he can get a little windy for modern taste at times.
Glaser (English, Western Kentucky U.) provides readers with the stories
in modern English. The index doubles as a glossary of characters.
PR2064 2006-018041 978-1-58044-111-7
Four Middle English romances; Sir Isumbras, Octavian,
Sir Eglamour of Artois, Sir Tryamour, 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Harriet Hudson. (Middle English texts)
Medieval Institute Pub., ©2006 205 p. $13.00 (pa)
The four romances, all composed in the northeast Midlands between
1325 and 1375, were among the most popular of the genre, and many
manuscripts continued to circulate through the 16th century, the four
often bound together. In addition to glossing terms and phrases in the
margin, Hudson provides a glossary, introductions, and notes sometimes
on the manuscript but more often explaining or expanding some aspect
of the narrative. As so often in such editions, she does not indicate in the
text when she has something to say in the notes, so readers must flip
back and forth frequently to make sure they do not miss something. No
date is noted for the first edition, which has been revised and re-for-
matted for the second.
–291–
PR2358 978-0-7734-5679-2
Character development in Edmund Spenser’s The Faerie
Queene .
Chishty-Mujahid, Nadya Q.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 242 p. $109.95
In her study of Spencer’s ability to fuse topical and historical allegory to
create characters who were both timely and timeless, Chishty-Mujahid
(English, U. of North Alabama) focuses on Spencer’s techniques of char-
acter development and of character functions. She argues that the
strange, heroic and creepy characters who populate the Faerie Queen
work to provide a vital framework for structuring the topical allegory
and express the implications of the reader’s moral development. Chishty-
Mujahid demonstrates the ways that Spencer allegorizes important con-
temporary political events and subjects, such as Elizabethan perceptions
of the Virgin Queen, the Catholicism and execution of Mary Stuart, the
festering political discontent in Ireland, and the significance of Prince
Arthur to Tudor propaganda.
PR2364 2006-042863 0-8386-4066-4
Edmund Spencer; new and renewed directions.
Title main entry. Ed. by J.B. Lethbridge.
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2006 385 p. $55.00
These eleven papers on Edmund Spenser’s poetry, life and thought, and
on recent approaches to his work illustrate the developing trend away
from theoretical criticism toward historical criticism. The criticism in this
collection advocates a renewed attention to the seriousness of Spenser’s
religious and moral commitments; increased attention to the technique of
his rhymes as an important clue to meaning; recuperation of the
medieval aspects of structure and organization; and the presence in The
Faerie Queene of themes to be uncovered by anthropological and cultural
research. Lethbridge (English, Tubingen U.) introduces the essays with an
overview of the present state of Spenser criticism. Distributed by
Associated University Presses.
PR2823 2005-016034 978-0-8204-7933-0
WE T h r e e ; t h e m y t h o l o g y o f S h a k e s p e a r e ’ s w e i r d s i s t e r s .
Shamas, Laura.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 140 p. $59.95
Examining the three witches from Macbeth through the lens of
mythology, Shamas finds an amalgamation of classical, folkloric and
sociopolitical elements. Her study traces the sources and the theatrical
evolution of the Weird Sisters through to current versions of female trios.
Shamas concludes that Shakespeare’s witches have informed our modern
definition of womanhood and the archetypal feminine.
PR2848 2006-006940 978-0-86698-349-5
The perfect ceremony of love’s rite; Shakespeare’s Sonnets
and A l o v e r ’ s c o m p l a i n t .
Montgomery, Robert L. (Medieval and renaissance texts and studies;
v.305)
ACMRS, ©2006 136 p. $30.00 (pa)
Now retired from the classroom, California-based scholar of English and
comparative literature Montgomery treats the two works as a single col-
lection made up of several groups of poems: the young man sonnets, the
dark lady sonnets, and the narrative complaint. A particular interest is
the character of the speaker. He also looks at the rhetoric of sincerity. The
publisher is the Arizona Center for Medieval and Renaissance Studies.
PR2880 2006-010852 978-0-313-33116-9
Shakespeares after Shakespeare; an encyclopedia of the
Bard in mass media and popular culture; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Burt.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 862 p. $299.99
Literature scholars cite and describe nearly 4,000 adaptations and near-
adaptations of works by Shakespeare in such genres as cartoons and
comic books, film, popular music, literature and genre fiction, radio, US
and British television, and even theater. The citations are arranged by the
play adapted or alluded to—rather than, for example, name or producer
of the adaptation. A few black-and-white illustrations are included.
Appendices cite adaptations in Japanese comics and Italian television,
and web resources for Shakespeare companies and festivals. The two
volumes are paged and indexed together.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PR2971 2005-030288 978-0-87413-911-2 PR3034 2005-051430 978-0-826-47846-7
German Shakespeare studies at the turn of the twenty- Music in Shakespeare; a dictionary.
first century. Wilson, Christopher R. and Michael Calore. (Athlone Shakespeare dic-
Title main entry. Ed. by Christa Jansohn. (International studies in tionary series)
Shakespeare and his contemporaries) Continuum Publishing Group, ©2005 508 p. $300.00
Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 318 p. $56.50 This dictionary, meant as a comprehensive survey of musical vocabulary,
A sample of 15 essays by German scholars, mostly of English literature features an alphabetical listing of terms that have musical meaning or
but also of German literature and of musicology, illustrate the status of relevance in the plays and poetry of Shakespeare, with attention to the
Shakespeare studies in Germany at the beginning of the 21st century. earlier printed editions. It includes technical terms, allusion to instru-
Essays published elsewhere have often been passed over in favor of those ments, genres, and performance techniques, as well as those not typically
that might not otherwise reach an international readership. Their topics considered, such as bird songs, noise, motion, thunder, or those unique
include Lear’s animal kingdom, Oberon and Titania in the city park, to the Elizabethan age. It is not confined to terms in Western art music
Shylock on the German stage in the post-Shoah era, and the German or songs or music intended to be performed in the plays. Entries, which
Shakespeare Society. Distributed in the US by Associated University are concise, contain explanations of the meaning, its signification in
Presses. Shakespeare’s works, specific instances in the works, and bibliographical
references.
PR2971 2006-015936 978-0-8262-1688-5
Marketing the bard; Shakespeare in performance and PR3065 2006-020998 978-0-275-99081-7
print, 1660-1740. The mind according to Shakespeare; psychoanalysis in the
Dugas, Don-John. Bard’s writing.
U. of Missouri Press, ©2006 271 p. $42.50 Krims, Marvin Bennett.
Dugas (English, Kent State U., Ohio) explores how theater managers, Praeger, ©2006 218 p. $49.95
adapters, and publishers packaged Shakespeare for commercial con- Krims (psychiatry, Harvard U.) puts Shakespeare’s characters on the
sumption, and how this activity affected his popularity. In particular, he couch and makes some observation’s about the Bard’s mental state when
shows how practices of the playhouse and printing house transformed he made them do what they do. Most of the chapters are revised from
him from a relatively modest presence on the London stage at the previous publication.
reopening of the theaters in 1660, after the Puritans were chased from
power, into the most performed English playwright following the PR3091 2006-048143 978-0-7734-5680-8
Licensing Act of 1737. Japanese studies in Shakespeare; interpreting English
drama through the Noh and theatrum mundi .
PR2992 2006-022451 0-8204-7646-3 Momose, Izumi.
Childhood in Shakespeare’s plays. Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 173 p. $99.95
Partee, Morriss Henry. Momose (Chuo U.) examines the relationship between Shakespearean
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 139 p. $58.95 drama and Noh theater, their dramaturgical and ideological aspects,
Partee (English, U. of Utah) explores Shakespeare’s portrayal both of “structural as well as spiritual.” He begins with describing the basic ele-
children themselves, and of the attitudes of adults towards them. He ments of Noh drama and key playwrights, followed by parallels between
finds the children to be fully developed, if minor, characters in several Noh and Shakespearean drama. He then discusses Richard III, King Lear,
cases. Generally parents tend to gush over helpless infants, he says, but A Midsummer Night’s Dream, and Shakespearean characterization, sub-
often react with rage when older children challenge their authority. All sequently tying them to the Noh and Theatrum Mundi. He also considers
this he places in the context of nuclear families beginning to replace Shakespeare’s Sonnets.
extended families in Elizabethan England.
PR3091 2006-010960 978-1-55783-666-3
PR2995 0-8386-4120-2 Will power; how to act Shakespeare in 21 days.
Shakespeare studies; v.34. Basil, John.
Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Zimmerman. Applause Books, ©2006 363 p. $17.95 (pa)
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2006 281 p. $60.00 This guide for actors outlines a three-week process for performing
The forum in this issue asks whether there is character after theory, and Shakespeare’s plays. Basil, producing artistic director and co- founder of
offers such perspectives as whether characters have souls, the persistence the American Globe Theatre, has led workshops throughout the country,
of character, and Shylock’s virtual injuries. There is nothing yet about and describes 21 activities in four phases leading up to a performance.
whether character have rights as citizens and can make campaign con- The activities involve script examination, memorization, pacing, physi-
tributions. Three articles follow, on Jack Cade, the skin of a dead lamb, calization, focus, and delivery. He also goes over the use of the Stanilvaski
and the hatred for writing; accidental Shakespeare; and eunuch and approach as applied to Shakespeare.
blackamoor as imperial culture-gram. Recent publications are also
reviewed. Distributed in the US by Associated University Presses. PR3588 978-0-8020-9105-5
Milton and the climates of reading; essays by
PR3001 2005-055008 0-06-085615-7 Balachandra Rajon.
Shakespeare’s philosophy; discovering the meaning Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth Sauer.
behind the plays. U. of Toronto Pr., ©2006 192 p. $45.00
McGinn, Colin. Rjan (emeritus English, U. of Western Ontario) began publishing essays
HarperCollins, ©2006 230 p. $24.95 on Milton in 1945, but his latest book wholly on the English poet
Oxford-educated McGinn (philosophy, U. of Miami) teases out the philo- appeared in 1970. Documenting that he has been quiet since then, Sauer
sophical ideas he has found in Shakespeare’s texts, trying not to poach (English, Brock U.) selects nine recent essays, four not previously pub-
on scholars of Shakespeare scholars in literature or theater. Among the lished, in which he explores how Milton engages and critiques post-struc-
themes are skepticism and the possibility of human knowledge, the turalist and post-colonial notions.
nature of the self and personal identity, the understanding of causation,
the existence and nature of evil, and the formative power of language.

Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –292–

PR3588 2006-024411 978-0-8207-0384-8
Milton in the age of Fish; essays on authorship, text, and
terrorism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Lieb and Albert C. Labriola. (Medieval
& Renaissance literary studies)
Duquesne University Press, ©2006 320 p. $60.00
Whether one believes he is an announcing angel or the disquieting prince
of darkness, one must admit Stanley Fish has shaken the previously
rather sleepy world of Milton studies wide awake. This collection of ten
essays dedicated to Fish works from historical and literary ends to better
establish Milton within in a complex age at critical and cultural levels.
Topics include Fish’s progress, Milton’s ideas of authorship, his use of
the negative form in his Latin texts, the Son as angel in Paradise Lost,
parental deity in the manner of Henry More, feminist liberation theology
in the times of Mary Astell and Lucy Hutchinson, compounding contexts
for Samson Agonistes, the culture of religious terror in Samson Agonistes,
critical responses to terror and annihilation in Milton, and an offering on
Milton’s take on liberalism and terrorism by Fish himself. The editors
offer a bibliography of works by and about Fish.
PR3592 2006-030966 978-0-8207-0386-2
The age of Milton and the scientific revolution.
Duran, Angelica. (Medieval & Renaissance literary studies)
Duquesne University Press, ©2007 349 p. $58.00
Duran (English, Purdue U.) shows how Milton responded to his contexts,
particularly those of the scientific revolution set in motion by such as
Harvey and Newton and that in education headed by Hartlib and
Oldenburg. Duran observes that Milton’s literature became an equal
partner with the new theories of the cosmos, matters of mathematics,
and scientific tracts that imbued seventeenth century England. She traces
the evidence in Milton’s pre- and postlapsarian angelic teachers, the sub-
jects of change in early works such as L’Allegro, the sexual mathematics
of Paradise Lost and Milton’s use of Samson to promote his own par-
ticular interpretations of natural religion in an age full of particular inter-
pretations of science.
PR3729 2006-007973 978-0-8386-4101-9
I n c l e a n d Y a r i c o and T h e I n c a s ; t w o p l a y s .
Thelwall, John. Ed. by Frank Felsenstein and Michael Scrivener.
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2006 167 p. $39.50
Felsenstein (humanities, Ball State U., Indiana) and Scrivener (English,
Wayne State U., Detroit) present an edited volume of two unpublished
plays by John Thelwall (1764-1834), an English radical who was a friend
of Coleridge and who was tried and acquitted of high treason in 1794.
Recovered from library archives at Yale and the British Library, the man-
uscript plays shed light on issues of the time such as race, gender, sexu-
ality, and popular culture. The text includes a concise general
introduction providing background information on Thelwall. Each of the
two manuscripts is also preceded by a short essay providing historical
background to the play and brief analysis of the main characters and
themes. No subject index. Distributed in the U.S. by Associated University
Presses.
PR4038 978-0-7734-5657-0
The Loiterer; a periodical work in two volumes published
in Oxford in the years 1789 and 1790 by the Austen
family.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert L. Mack.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 476 p. $139.95
In a popular weekly periodical called The Loiterer, James Austen (Jane’s
elder brother) described his daily life as a student at Oxford. The series
also featured contributions from his younger brother Henry and other
friends and academic colleagues. The 60 installments were gathered
together and published by the Austen Family in 1790. This volume repro-
duces the essays as they appeared in that two-volume work. A number
of detailed explanatory notes are found at the back. Editor Mack (U. of
Exeter) also provides an extensive critical introduction.
PR4147 2006012915 978-0-8387-5646-1
Blake and the city.
Michael, Jennifer Davis.
Bucknell University Pr., ©2006 235 p. $50.00
Blake is generally thought to present an urban variation on the overall
Romantic view of nature, but Michael (English, U. of the South,
Tennessee) argues that his depictions of the city dissolve the binaries that
generally defines Romanticism: between self and other, art and nature,
male and female, and country and city. She traces the development of his
urban vision, each chapter exploring a particular function or metaphor
of the city.
–293–
PR4148 2006-003097 978-1-57591-109-0
The torn book; unreading William Blake’s marginalia.
Snart, Jason Allen.
Susquehanna Univ. Press, ©2006 213 p. $46.50
Did Blake know his penciled notes on the pages of the books he owned
or borrowed would fade, providing question upon question for scholars
to come? Did the marginalia he imposed upon his pages constitute
graphic, text, or both? Snart (English, College of DuPage) is highly skilled
at understanding what Blake meant, or did not mean, by the marginalia
on his own works and that of others, including its material as well as
symbolic importance. He finds that not only is one’s own reading a char-
acter in texts, but that Blake’s work in particular induces readers to
believe that meaning is the product of interaction with the visual, verbal
and physical elements of the page. Snart’s examples of Blake’s marginalia
are engaging, and his ability to interpret them is fascinating.
PR4149 2005-036295 978-0-8387-5629-4
Robert Bloomfield; lyric, class, and the romantic canon.
Title main entry. Ed. by Simon White et al.
Bucknell University Pr., ©2006 315 p. $58.50
Reflecting a renewed interest in the Romantic poet Robert Bloomfield,
this volume brings together three types of essays: those considering major
volumes of poetry by Bloomfield; those focusing on particular themes
that dominate his corpus of work; and essays examining the significance
of Bloomfield in a broader context. The introduction by Simon White (U.
of York) offers an account of the vicissitudes of Bloomfield’s popularity
in the context of canon formation and disintegration. The volume
includes a bibliography of Bloomfield editions. Distributed by Associated
University Presses.
PR4451 2006-009981 978-0-7391-14650
A spiritual Bloomsbury; Hinduism and homosexuality in
the lives and writings of Edward Carpenter, E.M. Forster,
and Christopher Isherwood.
Copley, A.R.H.
Lexington Books, ©2006 397 p. $30.95 (pa)
In this study, Copley (retired, U. of Kent) investigates how three English
writers explored Hindu spirituality in an effort to come to terms with
their homosexuality. Through an examination of the lives and writings
of Edward Carpenter, E.M. Forster, and Christopher Isherwood, Copley
attempts to reveal the connections between their sexuality and their
pursuit of mysticism. Particular attention is paid to the role of the guru-
disciple relationship in these writers’ spiritual development. The volume
concludes with some extracts from a diary Copley kept during a research
visit to India in 1999.
PR4563 2006-025138 978-0-8204-5004-9
Dickens and landscape discourse.
Berard, Jane H. (Studies in nineteenth-century British literature; v.16)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 188 p. $66.95
In this study, Berard (English, U. of Rhode Island) offers a New
Historicist interpretation of Charles Dickens’s Martin Chuzzlewit. She
begins by exploring the literary and non-literary landscape contexts
outside of Chuzzlewit, discussing such topics as the 19th-century poetic
landscape and the geopolitical landscape of Wiltshire (where the novel is
set). She then gives a revised reading and analysis of the work, focusing
on the landscape and those extensions of the landscape which have dis-
turbed or dissatisfied Dickens’s previous readers.
PR4611 2006-018928 978-0-393-06242-7
The annotated Hunting of the Snark ; the full text of Lewis
Carroll’s great nonsense epic The Hunting of the Snark ,
definitive edition.
Title main entry. Ed. by Martin Gardner.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 152 p. $27.95
Lewis Carroll’s poem The Hunting of the Snark, published in 1876, is pro-
vided here with annotations by Gardner. The original illustrations are
included, and the annotations—which explain historical context, use of
words, and other’s interpretations of the text—are situated in footnotes in
red print beneath the text. Gardner also discusses the theories about the
meaning of the nonsense poem and supplies commentary, sequels, and
interpretations by F.C.S. Schiller, James Albert Lindon, and Henry
Holiday. A listing of editions and anthologies that include the poem is
appended. This edition contains a new preface, and a new introduction
by Adam Gopnik. Gardner is the author of many books, including
several annotated literary works such as The Annotated Alice.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PR4692 2005-027814 0-7546-5172-X
George Eliot and nineteenth-century psychology; exploring
the unmapped country.
Davis, Michael. (Nineteenth century series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 216 p. $99.95
In his study of Eliot as a psychological novelist, Davis (Open University,
London) examines Eliot’s writings in the context of 19th- century
scientific writings about the mind. Davis argues that Eliot manipulated
scientific language in often subversive ways to propose a vision of mind
as both fundamentally connected to the external world and radically
isolated from and independent of that world. In showing the alignments
between Eliot’s work and the formulations of such key thinkers as
Charles Darwin, T.H. Huxley and G.H. Lewes, Davis demonstrates the
ways Eliot responds creatively and critically to contemporary theories of
mind as she explores themes pertaining to thought, reason and
consciousness.
PR4754 2006-031758 978-0-313-33396-5
Student companion to Thomas Hardy.
Morgan, Rosemarie. (Student companions to classic writers)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 226 p. $65.00
Combining synopses of the texts (Far from the Madding Crowd, The
Return of the Native, Tess of the d’Urbervilles, Jude the Obscure and a
selection of poems) and accessible critical reviews, this addresses the
needs of the nonspecialist and general reader while giving students up
to the early undergraduate level sufficient background and resources to
study further. Each contains an introduction, a review of the plot and
structure, descriptions of settings as well as major and minor characters,
themes, symbols, allusions, figurative language, setting, a review of crit-
icism along with alternative readings, commentary on the development
of Hardy’s Wessex, biographical material, and a bibliography.
PR5267 2006-009478 978-0-8139-2558-5
John Ruskin and the ethics of consumption.
Craig, David Melville. (Studies in religion and culture)
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 422 p. $60.00
Unlike many of his contemporary Victorian intellectuals, Ruskin (1819-
1900) continues to be studied and appropriated by historians and theo-
rists of art and architecture, literary critics, and political theorists, but
Craig (religious studies, Indiana U.-Purdue U., Indianapolis) thinks that
the reasons he was so highly esteemed during his own time have slipped
out of view and need to be not so much recovered as reappraised. He
focuses on conceptual sources and ethical concerns that carried Ruskin
through many changes, and seeks moral resources and critical lessons
that should be preserved as the chaff is winnowed away.
PR5468 2006-000084 0-7546-3046-3
Robert Southey and the contexts of English romanticism.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lynda Pratt. (Nineteenth century series)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 267 p. $99.95
One of the so-called “Lake Poets”, Robert Southey (1774-1843) has often
been neglected in comparison with his friends William Wordsworth and
Samuel Taylor Coleridge. This volume addresses that imbalance with14
specially commissioned essays by British and American academics that
explore Southey and his intersections with English Romantic culture.
Sample topics include the literary relationship between Southey and
Thomas De Quincey and Southey’s role in shaping 19th-century ide-
ologies of the Orient. Editor Pratt is Reader in Romanticism at the U. of
Nottingham, UK.
PR5528 978-90-420-2075-7
And never know the joy; sex and the erotic in English
poetry.
Title main entry. Ed. by C.C. Barfoot.
Editions Rodopi, ©2006 490 p. $143.00
Scholars of English literature, a surprising proportion from outside the
anglophone world, explore erotic themes in English poetry, generally but
not exclusively pivoting around several texts of the 16th and 17th cen-
turies, Blake, and Christina Rossetti. Little is said about popular poetry
such as street ballads or drinking songs. The 25 essays are from a 2003
conference in Leiden, the Netherlands.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PR5902 978-0-7734-5570-2
Staging Yeats in the twenty-first century; a reception
history.
Lapisardi, Frederick S.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 387 p. $129.95
Drawn from Yeats’ own statements about his plays and their per-
formance, this study aims to demonstrate the production of the plays in
a way that Yeats imagined, as well as ways to create innovative revivals,
based on recent productions at James W. Flannery’s International W. B.
Yeats Theatre Festival in Dublin. Lapisardi considers Yeats’ dramatic the-
ories, specific productions of his plays, and plans for new productions.
These include Land of Heart’s Desire, The Shadowy Waters, Deirdre, The
Dreaming of the Bones, Wheels and Butterflies, Purgatory, and “The
Cuchulain Cycle.” In addition to other sources, Lapisardi draws from The
Collected Works of W.B. Yeats and Manuscript Studies. Lapisardi has
taught in the English departments of Niagara U., CUNY, SUNY at
Fredonia, and California U. of Pennsylvania, and was literary advisor to
the Yeats Festival at the Abbey Theatre.
PR6005 978-1-57409-244-8
Joseph Conrad, master mariner; the novelist’s life at sea.
Villiers, Peter.
Sheridan House, ©2006 125 p. $19.95 (pa)
Late in his life, deep water mariner, photographer, and author Alan
Villiers (1903-1982) decided to write the story about the Polish mariner’s
20 years at sea before he changed his name and became an English nov-
elist. He died with the manuscript incomplete, but his son Peter has fin-
ished it at the request of many Conrad fans. Artist Mark Myers, who
sailed with Alan, provides paintings of the ships Conrad was on.
PR6019 2006-017021 978-1-56478-428-5
Joyce’s voices.
Kenner, Hugh.
Dalkey Archive Press, ©2007 120 p. $13.50 (pa)
Written in answer to a letter that asked Kenner to elaborate on his
assertion that “Joyce began Ulysses in naturalism and ended it in
parody,” this book explores the way Joyce is able to play two roles in the
novel—that of Bloom and the narrator—by using a technique that Kenner
calls the “Uncle Charles Principle.” Kenner demonstrates the way this
principle subverts the traditional novelistic technique of being told only
the things an observer would experience and allows Joyce to achieve a
remarkable level of complexity and narrative depth. This is a reprint of
the original edition published in 1978 by the U. of California Press.
PR6019 2006-051805 0-7734-5522-1
Voice, boundary, and identity in the works of James
Joyce.
Manista, Francis C.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 222 p. $109.95
Manista (science and ethics, Michigan State U.) explores some of the finer
points in the work of Irish writer Joyce (1882-1941). He discusses the first
earwitness to the thunder of his Arafatas in Dubliners, distinguishing
between the sense (prain) from the sound (bray) of Stephen Dedalus’
poor traits of the artless, imeffable tries at speech unasyllabled in
Finnegans Wake, and so on.
PR6021 0-907871-49-6
Scum of the earth. (reprint, 1941)
Koestler, Arthur.
Eland Publishing, ©2006 253 p. $29.95 (pa)
At the beginning of WWII, Jewish-Hungarian novelist Arthur Koestler
(author of Darkness at Noon was detained by French authorities and held
for several months in a camp for resident aliens. In the months imme-
diately following his escape to England, he wrote this account of his per-
sonal survival and his observations of the collapse of the French
determination to resist the Nazis during the summer of 1940. This reprint
of the 1955 edition is distributed in the U.S. by Dufour Editions, Inc.
–294–
PR6023 2006-003806 978-0-310-26509-2
C.S. Lewis remembered; collected reflections of students,
friends, and colleagues.
Title main entry. Ed. by Harry Lee Poe and Rebecca Whitten Poe.
Zondervan Pub. House, ©2006 270 p. $18.99
Seventeen students, friends and colleagues of C.S. Lewis offer their per-
sonal memories of Lewis as a teacher, scholar, writer and Christian apol-
ogist. The volume includes pieces by Lewis’ godson, Lawrence Harwood,
a transcript of an interview with Owen Barfield, who played an
important role in Lewis’ shift from atheism to Christianity, and a previ-
ously unpublished sketch of Lewis by Mary Shelley Neylan. The appendix
includes an article from a science fiction fan magazine that transcribes
a conversation between Lewis, Kingsley Amis and Brian Aldiss.
PR6052 2006-047046 0-7734-5543-4
The quest for God in the novels of John Banville, 1973-
2005; a postmodern spirituality.
McNamee, Brendan.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 286 p. $109.95
Banville’s protagonists are both motivated and aggravated by a tor-
mented longing for a sense of completion that seems to emanate from
the phenomenal world but which that world steadfastly refuses to satisfy,
says McNamee (English, U. of Ulster-Coleraine). He characterizes the
novels as realist in that they deal with recognizable suffering human
beings and are written with an intense care for mimetic detail, but also
postmodern in that they clearly recognize and accept the postmodern
position on the inability of language to apprehend reality fully.

PR6023 2006-033192 978-0-7864-2876-2 PR6056 2006-024448 978-0-8126-9607-3

Milton, Spenser and The chronicles of Narnia ; literary
sources for the C.S. Lewis novels.
Hardy, Elizabeth Baird.
McFarland & Co., ©2007 188 p. $35.00 (pa)
Hardy (English, Maryland Community College) discusses how Lewis
found inspiration in Paradise Lost and The Faerie Queen, fantastic fiction
and even courtly love poetry. She carefully analyzes the role of powerful
and malicious mortals, both women and men, the role of monsters, pro-
tagonists who must sometimes be wrong, intelligent women and girls,
and very large places that fit inside very small spaces. She closes by com-
menting on why we know so much about Lewis’s beliefs when we are
on the other side of the wardrobe’s doors.
PR6039 2006-003227 978-0-87462-018-4
The Lord of the rings, 1954-2004; scholarship in honor of
Richard E. Blackwelder.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wayne G. Hammond and Christina Scull.
Marquette University Press, ©2006 387 p. $32.00
Hammond (rare books librarian at Williams College, US) and Scull
(former librarian of Sir John Soane’s Museum, UK) present the 20 papers
presented at the eponymous Marquette University Tolkien conference,
held in October of 2004 in honor of the late entomologist and zoologist
turned J.R.R. Tolkien scholar, Richard Blackwelder, whose collecting
activities provided the foundation of Marquette University’s Tolkein col-
lection. About half of the papers focus on Tolkien’s major work, The Lord
of the Rings trilogy, while the others discuss other topics, including the
rhetorical evolution of Tolkein’s essay on Beowulf, Tolkien as a linguist,
the role of Tolkien in education, and special collections in the service of
Tolkien studies.
PR6045 2006-011265 978-0-87413-950-1
Rebecca West today; contemporary critical approaches.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bernard Schweizer.
Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 334 p. $61.50
In its organization, this first essay collection about the novelist, journalist
and cultural critic Rebecca West demonstrates that West’s work is sus-
ceptible to a variety of approaches and methods. The contributions are
assembled into sections on historicism, gender studies, textual analyses
and philosophical approaches and cover such topics as West in South
Africa, music and the feminine art of detail in Harriet Hume, and
teaching West. The volume also includes a previously unpublished
portion of West’s novel This Real Night. Distributed by Associated
University Presses.
PR6045 2006-047050 0-7734-5532-9
Sir Hugh Walpole and the United States; a novelist’s view
of 1919-1936 America.
Steele, Elizabeth.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 215 p. $109.95
The author of 42 books of fiction and two famous screenplays, British
novelist Sir Hugh Walpole completed a number of successful lecture tours
in the U.S. Drawing on an examination of Walpole’s diaries and letters,
Steele describes his tours during the period 1919-1936 and relates his
impressions of America. Excerpts from contemporary newspaper
accounts augment the narrative. Two short stories and three articles by
Walpole are reproduced in the appendix. Steele is Professor Emerita of
English at the U of Toledo.
James Bond and philosophy; questions are forever.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jacob M. Held and James B. South. (Popular
culture and philosophy; v.23)
Open Court Publishing, ©2006 244 p. $17.95 (pa)
Scholars of philosophy explore the stories and movies of the super-cool
English spy from such perspectives as existentialism and death, the char-
acter himself, politics and law, knowledge and technology, and multicul-
turalism and women. Some would call the style informal and witty, other
perhaps cloyingly cute.
PR6056 2005-013194 0-471-66195-3
The science of James Bond; from bullets to bowler hats to
boat jumps, the real technology behind 007’s fabulous
films.
Gresh, Lois H. and Robert Weinberg.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 212 p. $14.95 (pa)
One of the enduring features of the James Bond franchise of spy movies
is the array of gadgets employed by Agent 007 and his antagonists, from
laser watches to invisible cars. In this volume, the authors of The Science
of Superheroes and The Science of Supervillains (also from Wiley) return to
examine the scientific basis (or lack thereof) for Bond’s gadgetry.
PR6059 978-0-7734-5691-4
Globalization and dislocation in the novels of Kazuo
Ishiguro.
Sim, Wai-chew.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 306 p. $129.95
Sim (English, Nanyang Technological U.) explores the work of a writer
who cannot be contained by critics’ categories, who lives in at least two
worlds simultaneously as both a native of Japan and an expatriate. Sim
works beyond stereotypes and gets to Ishiguro’s commentary on Japan’s
sociality, and calls into the forefront the fact that Ishiguro is keenly aware
of his critics and may be in fact writing to confound and inform them.
Sim analyzes the novels A Pale View of Hills and An Artist of the Floating
World, and the way they inform each other, gets past the eurocentric
stereotypes of The Remains of the Day, and explains The Unconsoled, When
We Were Orphans and Never Let Me Go within their own, intricate con-
texts of constant change and disruption, international interference, and
the state of the Other.
PR8491 2006-001443 0-8018-8433-0
Haunted English; the Celtic fringe, the British Empire,
and de-anglicization.
O’Connor, Laura.
Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 240 p. $49.95
O’Connor (English and comparative literature, U. of California- Irvine)
explores how Celtic modernist writers W. B. Yeats, Hugh MacDiarmid,
and Marianne Craig Moore portray and advocate the persistence of Irish
and Scottish Gaelic within a society dominated by English.
PR8567 978-0-7734-5650-1
The role of medieval Scottish poetry in creating Scottish
identity; “textual nationalism.”
Hall, Stefan Thomas.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 239 p. $109.95
Taking into account recent theories of national identity and identity for-
mation, Hall (humanistic studies and English literature, U. of Wisconsin-
Green Bay) explores how the notions of Scottishness expressed by such
writers as Robert Burns and Walter Scott, can be traced to medieval
Scottish literature and historical writings that later Scots read and inter-
nalized. The study began as his 2002 doctoral dissertation in English at
St. Louis University.

–295– Reference & Research Book News February 2007

PR8733 978-0-7734-5558-0
How Irish women writers portray masculinity; exposing
the presumptions of patriarchy (interviews and novels by
Clare Boylan, Maeve Kelly, Mary O’Donnell, and Anne
Haverty).
Houston, Nainsí.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 201 p. $109.95
Houston (English, Creighton U.) explores how the four contemporary nov-
elists portray men and women in a changing Ireland, drawing on inter-
views with them and relevant excerpts from their novels. She sets the
scene by looking at women writing in Ireland, and ordinary men and
women there. Transcripts of the full interviews—in one case the email
text—are appended.
PR9087 2006-030152 0-8204-8889-5
Modern Anglophone drama by women.
Title main entry. Ed. by Alan P. Barr.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 494 p. $85.95
While compiling Modern Women Playwrights of Europe, which featured
dramas of literary quality by women beyond the US and England, Barr
(U. of Rochester) discovered another underrepresented class of female
playwrights: those from Anglophone countries, or former British colonies
(excluding the US) for whom English is a primary literary language. The
11 plays selected for this volume come from Ghana, Canada, Singapore,
New Zealand, Australia, Nigeria, South Africa, Northern Ireland, and
Ireland. An introduction to each play briefly discusses the playwright’s
biography and context. All the works were written after 1970 and are
considered “post-colonial,” with the exception of Lady Gregory’s 1907 The
Rising of the Moon. That play is the shortest at nine pages; most are
between 40 and 50 pages long.
PR9185 2006-271841 0-88864-441-8
Gothic Canada; reading the spectre of a national
literature.
Edwards, Justin D.
The U. of Alberta Press, ©2005 194 p. $34.95 (pa)
What happens when a town, a region, or a country learns the truth about
itself? Edwards (English, U. of Copenhagen) calls upon his years of
reflection as a Canadian expatriate upon the spectral nature of Canadian
identity as he explores the haunted places of its literature. He finds the
ghosts of forgotten history dancing with the more specific specters of the
excesses of colonialism and the wilderness, locating such gothic results
as the works of such as John Richardson, Sinclair Ross and F.P. Grove,
and Margaret Atwood, along with a range of filmmakers. He finds dark
journeys, the abyss, haunted spaces and selves, dark cities, suppressed
transgressions, wakeful dead, monsters, and a decidedly gothic idea of
what constitutes the body politic. The result is like exploring a forgotten
graveyard that has recently risen through a cornfield otherwise shining
under a broad sky. Distributed by the Michigan State U. Press.
PR9205 2006-016417 978-0-7546-5134-5
Caribbean women writers and globalization; fictions of
independence.
Scott, Helen.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 193 p. $89.95
In this volume, Scott (postcolonial literature, U. of Vermont) considers
contemporary literature by Caribbean women in the context of global-
ization. The fiction, which addresses the notion of independence, is from
and about Haiti, Antigua, Guyana, and Grenada, and mostly from the
1980s and 1990s. Writers Scott discusses are Edwidge Danticat, Oonya
Kempadoo, Jamaica Kincaid, Pauline Melville, Merle Collins, Janice
Shinebourne, and others. She specifically looks at how globalization
processes affect nations and are represented in works of fiction, as well
as themes of imperialism, colonialism, and resistance. The book is
intended for scholars of women’s studies, and postcolonial, cultural, and
globalization studies.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PR9275 2006-002596 978-0-87413-928-0
Jamaica Kincaid and Caribbean double crossings.
Title main entry. Ed. by Linda Lang-Peralta.
Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2006 171 p. $42.50
Eight contributions from Lang-Peralta (literature, The Metropolitan State
College, Denver) and other scholars examine recent fiction and nonfiction
work by Antiguan-American novelist Jamaica Kincaid. The essays draw
upon the theories of Homi Bhabha, Jacques Lacan, Jacques Derrida, and
Édouard Glissant, with a special focus on the construction of identity in
the Caribbean literary tradition. The papers were originally presented at
the 2002 American Comparative Literature Association Conference, held
in San Juan, Puerto Rico. Distributed in the U.S. by Associated University
Presses.
PR9369 2006-011612 978-0-8214-1686-0
J.M. Coetzee and the idea of the public intellectual.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jane Poyner.
Ohio University Press, ©2006 246 p. $44.95
Coetzee’s awards are legion, and they include a Nobel Prize for
Literature. That alone makes him a public figure. Coetzee’s critical work
puts him within the realm of writing as a public activity and within the
debate of the ethics of writing, and that makes him a public intellectual.
Where Coetzee differs from most other public intellectuals is in his part
in his native South Africa’s apartheid and post-apartheid debate, and his
public performances as his ecofeminist alter-ego, Elizabeth Costello. The
11 essays here include such topics as Coetzee’s leaving the pubic sphere
to Costello, Coetzee’s experiences with censorship and attitude toward
allegory, his faith in fiction, the limits of sympathetic imagination,
Coetzee’s gendering of contrition and his modernist concepts about the
South African Truth and Reconciliation Commission, the combined
Costello and Coetzee on the lives of animals and men, and Coetzee as a
textual transvestite.
PR9484 2006-345471 81-7033-905-7
Mediating Indian writing in English, German responses.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bernd-Peter Lange and Mala Pandurang.
Rawat Publications, ©2005 330 p. $36.00
German academics, most with personal knowledge of India and a con-
nection with post-colonial studies, respond to creative literary production
in English by writers born in India who have partaken in varied facets
of an Indian experience. Their topics include images of Indianness in
current constructions of Germanness, Salman Rushdie’s fictions between
post-national belonging and global un-belonging, and the representation
of education in Indian novels in English. No index is provided.
Distributed in the US by South Asia Books.
PR9492 2006-922530 978-0-7618-3465-6
(In)fusion approach; theory, contestation, limits;
(in)fusionising a few Indian English novels.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ranjan Ghosh.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 339 p. $45.00 (pa)
Defying recent declarations that theory is dead, Ghosh (English, Wroclaw
U., Poland) introduces a new approach to critical reading: (in)fusion,
which he defines as a theory that “promotes a cross conceptual and
cross-paradigm plexus.” The essays in this volume, which are written by
well known literary critics, examine the implications of (in)fusion theory
and implement it in analyses of the works of Indian English novelists,
such as Salman Rushdie, Amitav Ghosh, Anita Desai and Vikram Seth.
PR9492 2006-345469 81-7033-970-7
The Indian novel in English; its critical discourse, 1934-
2004.
Riemenschneider, Dieter.
Rawat Publications, ©2005 386 p. $40.00
Riemenschneider (new literatures in English, Frankfurt U., retired)
approaches the Indian novel in English from the perspective of readings
by Indian and international critics from the 1930s through the present.
He examines the reception of the novel genre in general and then reports
on the reception of the works of Mulk Raj Anand, R.K. Narayan and Raja
Rao. The volume includes a list of the authors’ novels and a compre-
hensive critical bibliography for each.
–296–
PR9570 2005-035602 0-7876-8141-5
South Asian writers in English.
Title main entry. Ed. by Fakrul Alam. (Dictionary of literary biography;
v.323)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 490 p. $235.00
Alam (U. of Dhaka, Bangladesh) has assembled a terrific reference of bio-
graphic material for English-language writers of Bangladesh, India,
Pakistan, and Sri Lanka. Each of the 48 essays profile an author, pro-
viding a list of their writings, an account of their life and career, and the
reception of their works. Each essay is organized chronologically, and
includes summaries of the writer’s major works as well as frequent
quotes by the writer from interviews and other sources. Some lives of
influential writers born in the 19th century, including Ananda
Coomaraswamy and Rabindranath Tagore, are included, but the
majority of the essays are devoted to 20th- and 21st- century writers. The
essays are accessible to undergraduate students and will be of interest to
the general reader.
PR9612 978-1-920694-69-2
Mind the country; Tim Winton’s fiction.
Ben-Messahel, Salhia.
U. of Western Australia Pr., ©2006 277 p. $35.95 (pa)
Author of a series of novels, books of short stories, and works of crit-
icism, Tim Winton is perhaps the best-loved Australian literary writer of
the late 20th century. In this study, Ben-Messahel examines some of the
major themes in Winton’s fiction. She then goes on to explore the impor-
tance of the Australian landscape in his writing. Ben-Messahel holds a
PhD from the U. of Toulouse II in France. Distributed in the U.S. by ISBS.
AMERICAN LITERATURE
PS149 2006-013675 978-0-7546-5338-7
Women and authorship in revolutionary America.
Vietto, Angela. (Women and gender in the early modern world)
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2005 147 p. $89.95
Although her study revisits a well-trodden field, Vietto (English, Eastern
Illinois U.) succeeds in her goal of challenging commonplaces and in not
insisting that current ideologies are lurking in events of the past.
Through an examination of the strategic choices writers made as they
constructed their authorial identities at a moment when ideals of Author
and Women were in flux, Vietto argues that the relationship between
gender and authorship was dynamic and presents a richer view of civic
and commercial authorship than many previous examinations of
authorship in the Revolutionary period.
PS153 2006-030669 978-1-59158-322-6
100 most popular African American authors; biographical
sketches and bibliographies.
Drew, Bernard A. (Popular authors series)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2007 361 p. $55.00
Of interest to high school readers and older, this volume consists of pro-
files of 100 popular, contemporary African American authors, mostly
those who have become prominent in the past 25 years, but with some
seminal figures such as Alex Haley, Langston Hughes, and Zora Neale
Hurston. The profiles, which are presented alphabetically, provide brief
biographies and discussions of their works, along with complete lists of
their publications. Authors were chosen with an emphasis on popular
fiction, durability, and US orientation in mind. A sampling of those pro-
filed: Octavia Butler, Walter Moseley, Omar Tyree, Zane, Maya Angelou,
Toni Morrison, Bebe Moore Campbell, Edwidge Danticat, Terry McMillan,
and Alice Walker. The book is indexed by author/title and genre. Profiles
are based on sources such as existing reference works, periodicals, and
author web sites. Drew is a freelance writer and editor.
PS153 2006-011469 978-0-8139-2560-8
Ethnic American literature; comparing Chicano, Jewish,
and African American writing.
Franco, Dean J.
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 219 p. $19.50 (pa)
Proposing an analytic method that accounts both for what is common in
ethnic literary cultures and what is at stake in understanding their dif-
ferences, Franco (English, Wake Forest U.) extends current discussions of
identity politics, race theory, trauma studies and multiculturalism into a
new model of ethnic studies based in an ethic of respect. His discussion
involves a range of writing, from novels by Philip Roth, Cynthia Ozick,
Toni Morrison and Alejandro Morales to literature and criticism by Tony
Kushner, Cherrie Moraga and others.
–297–
PS153 2005-013679 0-313-32972-9
The Greenwood encyclopedia of African American
literature; 4v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Hans Ostrom and J. David Macey.
Greenwood Press, ©2005 2010 p. $499.95
Gwendolyn Bennett was a poet and writer of short stories, and although
she never published a book of either she kept the spirit of the Harlem
Renaissance alive. Anne Spencer worked on her poetry 16 years before
she was discovered and published, but it took almost no time before
actor and writer Paul Robeson was discovered to be a socialist and
reviled. In hundreds of objective and accessible entries, high school stu-
dents, undergraduates and general readers can get the basics on the
issues, events and people of African American literature. Contributors
describe how writers, filmmakers and commentators reacted to social
and political events, a unique approach that helps to define contexts.
Writers, journalists, and editors are joined by others generally ignored in
the literary world, including publishers, writers’ collectives, niche
journals, advocacy groups and marketeers. Entries include impressive
lists of resources.
PS153 2006-033609 978-1-4022-0436-4
Harlem speaks; a living history of the Harlem
Renaissance. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Cary D. Wintz.
Sourcebooks, Inc., ©2007 502 p. $29.95
Wintz (history, Texas Southern U.) compiles 21 biographical essays that
discuss the lives and contributions of key individuals in literature, music,
visual and performing arts, social activism, and politics during the
Harlem Renaissance. US scholars in these fields provide essays on
Langston Hughes, Zora Neale Hurston, Bessie Smith, Louis Armstrong,
Josephine Baker, W.E.B. Du Bois, Paul Robeson, Marcus Garvey, Alain
Locke, and others. Wintz gives historical and social context in the intro-
ductory chapters. Many b&w photos are incorporated. A noteworthy
addition to the book is the audio CD, which contains 32 musical and
spoken recordings (poetry, lyrics, interview excerpts, speeches, and songs)
mostly from The Schomburg Center for Research in Black Culture and
the Smithsonian Institute’s Folkways collection.
PS153 2006-028759 978-0-8141-5497-7
Multicultural hybridity; transforming American literary
scholarship and pedagogy.
Grobman, Laurie. (Refiguring English studies)
NCTE, ©2007 205 p. $37.95 (pa)
Grobman (Pennsylvania State U., Berks) explores the paradox in acknowl-
edging difference when it comes to multicultural literature while simul-
taneously treating all texts equally and as equal parts of the body of work
and the discipline of American literature. The author examines this con-
tradiction by theorizing hybridity; drawing on diverse theoretical posi-
tions, she argues that texts by writers of color are multiply inflected
hybrids that blur, but do not erase, cultural difference, thus allowing for
multiple intersections of meaning. Texts discussed include The Bluest Eye,
House Made of Dawn, The Color Purple, Bone, Silent Dancing: A Partial
Remembrance of a Puerto Rican Childhood, and . . . y no se lo tragó la
tierra/And the Earth Did Not Devour Him. For college and university
teacher-scholars of multicultural and American literature.
PS153 2006-017912 978-0-8386-4117-0
Queen Calafia’s paradise; California and the Italian
American novel.
Scambray, Kenneth.
Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2007 211 p. $46.50
Scambray (English, U. of La Verne) begins his study with an outline of
the history of the Italian American narrative, before focusing on the
Italian American experience in the trans-Mississippi West. He argues that
California offers Italian American protagonists a unique cultural land-
scape in which to define what it means to be American. In the novels of
P.M. Pasinetti, Lawrence Madalena and John Fante, Scambray finds the
reconciliation of Italian heritage with an evolving, modern social order to
be problematic at best. Distributed by Associated University Presses.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PS153 2006-008598 0-299-22000-1
Ulysses in Black; Ralph Ellison, classicism, and African
American literature.
Rankine, Patrice D. (Wisconsin studies in classics)
U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 254 p. $44.00
Rankine (classics, Purdue U.) takes an entirely new, and extremely
valuable, approach to the problem of Eurocentrism in his assertion that
the classical tradition can be part of a self-conscious, prideful approach
to African American culture, esthetics and identity. He analyzes classical
themes in such African American writers as Ralph Ellison, Toni
Morrison and Countee Cullen. Rankine finds that the merging of a black
esthetic with the classics has often been a radical addressing of concerns,
including violence against blacks, racism and oppression.
PS153 2005-031487 0-313-33196-0
Writing African American women; an encyclopedia of
literature by and about women of color; 2v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth Ann Beaulieu.
Greenwood Press, ©2006 991 p. $199.95
This two-volume set consists of entries related to literature by and about
African American women, with a focus on feminist and womanist
approaches by writers of fiction, nonfiction, drama, and poetry. Meant
to contribute to the ongoing transformation of the American literary
canon, the encyclopedia includes 400 entries appropriate for scholars,
high school and college students, and general readers. A sampling of
writers: Phyllis Wheatley, Zora Neale Hurston, Suzan Lori Parks, Toni
Morrison, Alice Walker, Mae Cowdery, and Kate Drumgoold. Children’s
authors, political pamphleteers, and journalists are included, as well as
some male writers who address themes from feminist or womanist per-
spectives, like Ralph Ellison and Frederick Douglass. Biographical entries
encompass analyses and a selective works list, and works and thematic
articles are included, covering topics such as race, stereotypes, moth-
erhood, sexuality, slavery, violence, masculinity, black feminist criticism,
and the South.
PS169 2006-027890 978-0-8204-8697-0
Aftermyths; hysteria, colloquialism, and caricature in the
age of doubt.
Eisenhauer, Robert. (Studies on themes and motifs in literature; v.87)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 255 p. $71.95
Aftermyths differ from urban myths or legends in being posterior or sub-
ordinate to true myth, explains Eisenhauer, an American scholar of
German and comparative literature, and they cannot be debunked
because they draw their legitimacy not from fact but from psychological
need, and operate in the realms of mass hysteria and tribal consensus.
He discusses the cadence of decadence, detecting the capital of the 20th
century, extra-species identification and mimetic aftermyth, other-history
in Grass and Hamill, and the ontological-hysteric theater.
PS221 2005-034697 978-1-4051-0126-4
American literature and culture, 1900-1960.
McDonald, Gail. (Blackwell introductions to literature)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2007 243 p. $54.95
In this unusual but fruitful introduction to American literature and
culture, McDonald (English, U. of Southampton) addresses four common
conceptions about the US: that it is big, rich, new and free. Each section
reflects one of these concepts and begins with a series of quotations from
literary and other sources of the period. Within each section, history,
popular culture, literature and other art forms are juxtaposed to foster
discussion and further study. The text includes a list of primary works,
a bibliography of secondary works on American literature and culture,
and a timeline of important events.
PS228 2006-029546 978-0-313-33283-8
Masterpieces of Beat literature.
Dittman, Michael J. (Greenwood introduces literary masterpieces)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 121 p. $49.95
A timeline brackets the Beat Generation as beginning with a 1944
meeting between Jack Kerouac, Allen Ginsberg, William S. Burroughs,
and Herbert Huncke, and ending with Ginsberg’s death in 1997. Dittman
(humanities and social sciences, Butler County Community College),
author of Jack Kerouac: A Biography (2004), reflects on what defines lit-
erary movements and the Beats’ legacy. He then presents biographies,
synopses of, and discussion questions on the works of key figures: John
Clellon Holmes (Go); Kerouac (On the Road, The Dharma Bumns;
Ginsberg (Howl and Other Poems); Burroughs (Naked Lunch); Neal
Cassidy (The First Third); and “new journalist” Tom Wolfe (The Electric
Kool-Aid Acid Test).
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PS228 2005-031822 0-8101-2235-9
Subject to delusions; narcissism, modernism, gender.
Rupprecht, Caroline. (Avant-garde & modernism studies)
Northwestern U. Press, ©2006 203 p. $24.95 (pa)
Rupprecht (comparative literature, City U, of New York) examines three
modernist women writers (Henriette Hardenberg, Djuna Barnes and
Unica Zürn) to locate the transgression, or forbidden knowledge of sub-
jectivity that came to be known as “narcissism” by the end of the nine-
teenth century. Considering Lacan, Melanie Klein and other in describing
paradigms of narcissism, she works through an historical overview and
assessment of Freud’s “On Narcissism,” moving to the “body” of
Hardenberg and the image of the other between birth and death in
Barnes’s Nightwood and the violence of merging in Zürn’s writing. In a
very interesting epilog Rupprecht reconsiders subjectivity within the
framework of the pleasures of fantasy that creates narcissism and that
narcissism creates.
PS261 2006-022447 0-8204-8691-4
Gay men in modern southern literature; ritual, initiation,
and the construction of masculinity.
Poteet, William Mark.
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 225 p. $31.95 (pa)
Everybody in the South has a gay uncle, insists independent scholar and
writer Poteet, and that affects the attitude. He examines how traditional
American Southern cultural traits inform the concepts of masculinity, ini-
tiation, and homosexuality in works by Tennessee Williams, Charles
Nelson, and Reymolds Price, the first two acknowledged gay writers and
the third a little coy. There is no index.
PS261 2005-025947 1-57233-463-0
Touching the web of southern novelists.
Madden, David.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 258 p. $37.00
Himself a novelist, poet, and playwright, Madden (creative writing,
Louisiana State U.) collects 16 essays he has published over the past three
decades on his personal involvement with the lives and writings of the
novelists he talks and teaches about.
PS366 978-0-7425-3777-4
The ethics of the story; using narrative techniques
responsibility in journalism.
Craig, David.
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2006 217 p. $27.95 (pa)
Drawing on interviews with 60 writers, copy editors, assigning editors,
and top managers at the Los Angeles Times, the Portland Oregonian, and
the Dallas Morning News, Craig (journalism, U. of Oklahoma) examines
the ethical decision making journalists engage in on a day-to-day basis.
He begins with a general discussion of journalistic ethics, focusing on the
principles of truth and compassion, followed by thematic chapters that
explore the use of anecdotes; description and attribution; quotes and par-
aphrasing; word choice, labeling, and bias; interpretation and analysis;
and authorial voice.
PS374 2005-011416 978-0-7876-8134-0
American prose writers of World War I; a documentary
volume.
Title main entry. Ed. by Steven Trout. (Dictionary of literary biography;
v.316)
Thomson Gale, ©2005 497 p. $225.00
Critic Stark Young balances the spare work of Ernest Hemingway in A
Farewell to Arms with the energy of the adaptation by Laurence Stallings,
to the benefit of the latter. Leslie Fiedler call’s out William Faulkner’s rep-
resentation of the Christ as man but not God, and John Dos Passos asks
why he is not ashamed of himself for Three Soldiers. Offering a wealth
of letters, reviews, art and photographs this collection illuminates works
on the Great War by Hervey Allen, Thomas Boyd, Dos Passos, Faulkner,
Hemingway, William March, Elliot White Springs and Stalling. Entries
include the wartime experiences of each author when applicable, docu-
ments on relevant works, notes on later lives and careers in the cases of
the lesser-known, a listing of prose, theater and cinema on the Great War
written from 1919 to 1939, and a checklist of further reading.
–298–
PS374 2006-025700 978-0-7864-2672-0 PS374 2006-027918 0-313-32841-2
Dinosaurs in fantastic fiction; a thematic survey. Romance today; an A-to-Z guide to contemporary
Debus, Allen A. American romance writers.
McFarland & Co., ©2006 220 p. $55.00 Title main entry. Ed. by John Charles and Shelley Mosley.
This survey discusses instances of dinosaurs in literature and historical Greenwood Press, ©2007 406 p. $85.00
trends in those stories. Each chapter covers a theme, such as the “lost Organized alphabetically by last name, his reference provides biogra-
world,” war, Godzilla, time travel, space, and science. Books examined phical and bibliographical information on more than 100 contemporary
(only ones written in English) include Jules Verne’s Journey to the Center American authors of romance fiction. Chosen for both the quality of
of the Earth, Arthur Conan Doyle’s The Lost World, books by Ray their work and their prominence in the field, those profiled include such
Bradbury, H.G. Wells, and Michael Crichton, and some novelizations of writers as Cherry Adair, Lory Foster, Tess Gerritsen, Amanda McCabe,
movie scripts. The book includes “pseudo-dinosaurs” and is selective Brenda Novak, and Sheri WhiteFeather. Most entries are accompanied by
regarding comics and books for younger readers. The appendix contains a b&w author photo. The editors are librarians who have written exten-
summaries of many other stories that were not described in the main sively on the romance genre.
text. Debus is a dinosaur sculptor and contributing editor of Fossil News:
Journal of Avocational Paleontology. PS374 2006-045663 978-0-472-03181-8
The syntax of class; writing inequality in nineteenth-
PS374 2006-046999 978-0-7734-5554-2 century America. (reprint, 2003)
Hero and anti-hero in the American football novel; Lang, Amy Schrager. (Class; culture)
changing conceptions of masculinity from the nineteenth U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 152 p. $19.95 (pa)
century to the twenty-first century. Lang (English, Syracuse U.) explores the literary expression of the crisis
Deardorff, Donald Lee. of social classification that occupied public discourse in the mid-19th
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 141 p. $99.95 century. The text focuses on a group of novels written by middle-class city
Deardorff (American literature and criticism, Cedarville U.) traces the dwellers, mainly American women and men living in the urban
evolution of US masculine identity through football narratives from the Northeast. The novels tell stories of people who are not yet, or are never
1870s to the present. He looks at masculinity as a search for meaning, to be, themselves members of the middle class, and as such present a
the failure of the football hero as masculine center, understanding ironic definitive encounter between members of different classes.
resistance in Don DeLillo’s End Zone, and other topics.
PS374 2006-008094 0-8018-8435-7
PS374 2006-044700 0-8061-3679-0 Unless the threat of death is behind them; hard-boiled
Muting white noise; Native American and European fiction and film noir.
American novel traditions. Irwin, John T.
Cox, James H. (American Indian literature and critical studies series; Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2006 290 p. $45.00
v.51) Irwin (humanities, Johns Hopkins U.) still plans to finish that trilogy he
U. of Oklahoma Pr., ©2006 338 p. $29.95 promised, but has temporarily gotten side-tracked; after the first
Cox (Native American and American literature, U. of Texas-Austin) volume—on Poe, Borges, and detective stories—he thought he really ought
reveals how contemporary Native novelists are literally revising the to deal with the offshoot of the tradition of hard-boiled detective fiction.
European American textual record of conflicts between the two groups, He looks at five writers of the 1930s and 1940s who established the
and the stories European Americans tell about Indians. He also explores themes and narrative structures of the genre, and at certain key films of
red readings of the European American novel tradition. the 1940s that translated it to the screen and established the narratives
and cinematic techniques of film noir.
PS374 2006-044606 0-87745-994-0
Plain & ugly Janes; the rise of the ugly woman in PS437 2006-022456 978-0-8204-8811-0
contemporary American fiction. (reprint, 2000) The frontier roots of American realism.
Wright, Charlotte M. Martin, Gretchen. (Studies on themes and motifs in literature; v.89)
Univ. of Iowa Press, ©2006 136 p. $19.95 (pa) Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 136 p. $58.95
Examples of the ugly woman in American literature are cited by Wright Martin (American and Southern literature, U. of Virginia-Wise College)
(no affiliation is noted), noting the shifts in perception that occur in dif- explores the unique and innovative contribution of Southwest humorists
ferent works. Stories by Alice Walker, Sarah Bird, Stephen Crane, and to American literary realism and the cultural work it performs. The
Louisa May Alcott, among others, are considered in what amounts genre spans three decades before the Civil War, from Augustus Baldwin
mainly to a survey of this character type. First published in 2000 by Longstreet’s 1835 Georgia Scenes to George Washington Harris’ 1867 Sut
Garland Publishing. Lovingood’s Yarns.

PS374 2006-012101 978-0-8203-2858-4 PS501 2005-037307 978-0-8165-2537-9

Romancing the vote; feminist activism in American
fiction, 1870-1920.
Petty, Leslie.
Univ. of Georgia Press, ©2006 231 p. $39.95
Not all women in pre-voting days in the US were fragile flowers of fem-
ininity, and not all fictional characters of the period were of the frothy
and fainting variety. Perry (English, Rhodes College) notes that many of
the strong and capable women portrayed from 1870 to 1920 met with a
shabby end, but she also points out that some modern literary critics
have not considered works of advocacy and reform suitable for serious
study. She corrects that error of omission by starting with the search for
equity within marriage that rose in feminist activist literature of the
1870s, then expands with the times and the reach of the public life in
Harper’s Iola Leroy and Garland’s A Spoil of Office and proceeds to the
many titles of early twentieth-century suffragist fiction, ending with com-
mentary on what The Bostonians taught and can still teach feminist
activists.
Blonde Indian; an Alaska native memoir.
Hayes, Ernestine. (Sun tracks; v.57)
U. of Arizona Press, ©2006 172 p. $16.95 (pa)
Born in Juneau, Alaska, Ernestine Hayes (English, U. of Alaska
Southeast) is a member of the Wolf House of the Kaagwaantaan clan of
the Lingít. In this memoir, she uses vivid dialogue to tell the story of her
girlhood, her travels as a young woman, and her return home as an
adult. She also reveals her inner struggle as an individual who is neither
fully Native American nor Euro-American.
PS508 2006-008599 978-0-299-22064-8
Wisconsin Indian literature; anthology of native voices.
Title main entry. Ed. by Kathleen Tigerman.
U. of Wisconsin Press, ©2006 400 p. $26.95 (pa)
Tigerman (English, U. of Wisconsin-Platteville) presents some 300 old and
new narratives from seven native peoples in the Great Lakes state.
Among the genres represented are historical narratives, oratory from
treaty signings and other historical events, autobiography, creations
stories, poetry, short stories, and excerpts from novels. Some were written
in English and some translated.

–299– Reference & Research Book News February 2007

PS589 2006-044574 1-58729-507-5
Innovative women poets; an anthology of contemporary
poetry and interviews.
Title main entry. Ed. by Elisabeth A. Frost and Cynthia Hogue.
Univ. of Iowa Press, ©2006 424 p. $29.95 (pa)
Frost (English, Fordham U.) and Hogue (English and modern and con-
temporary poetry, Arizona State U.) have gathered interviews—some of
them quite lengthy—and poetry by 13 American women poets chosen for
work that’s unusual in style or is concerned with new themes. Ethnic
diversity is a central theme. Among the poets featured are Harryette
Mullen, Jayne Cortez, and Mei-mei Berssenbrugge.
PS648 2006-014201 1-932100-95-4
This is my funniest; leading science fiction writers
present their funniest stories ever.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mike Resnick.
BenBella Books, ©2006 427 p. $14.95 (pa)
Editor Resnick (a Hugo and Nebula Award winning science fiction
author) has asked 29 of his fellow science fiction writers to select what
they believe is their funniest story for this anthology. Authors included
represent a range of science fiction generations, from older writers such
as Joe Haldeman and Robert Silverberg to newer writers such as Connie
Willis and Esther Friesner. Other well-known writers included in the
anthology are Harry Harrison, Spider Robinson, Gardner Dozois, David
Brin, and Harry Turtledove, to name just a few. Distributed in the US by
IPG.
PS1216 2006-017825 978-0-8108-5288-4
In the garden; essays in honor of Frances Hodgson
Burnett.
Title main entry. Ed. by Angelica Shirley Carpenter.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 261 p. $46.00 (pa)
Carpenter (California State U., Fresno) presents a selection of essays
exploring both traditional and new ideas about the life and work of
Frances Hodgson Burnett (1849-1924), author of well-known children’s
works—The Secret Garden, A Little Princess, and Little Lord Fauntleroy—and
of a number of best-selling adult novels exploring serious themes such as
working women, abusive marriages, and single-motherhood. The text
combines a selection of essays from an April 2003 conference on Burnett
held at California State U., essays offering practical advice for collectors,
and the first interview ever published with Burnett’s great-grand-
daughter, Penny Deupree, the heiress to the family archive.
PS1294 2006-025137 978-0-8204-2496-5
The art of dying; suicide in the works of Kate Chopin and
Sylvia Plath.
Gentry, Deborah S. (American university studies; series XXIV. American
literature; v.56)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 102 p. $50.95
Gentry (English, Middle Tennessee State U.) examines the representation
of suicide in the works of two women writers. Through critical feminist
readings of Kate Chopin’s The Awakening and Sylvia Plath’s The Bell Jar
and Ariel, Gentry illuminates how their women protagonists grapple with
unyielding societal stereotypes, ultimately choosing suicide as an exis-
tential act of defiance and rebellion. Particular attention has been paid
to the theories of Higonnet and Gilbert and Gubar.
PS1342 2005-032946 0-88125-916-0
Mark Twain’s Jews.
Vogel, Dan.
KTAV Pub. House, ©2006 146 p. $22.95
This study examines the controversy over whether Mark Twain was an
anti-Semite by examining all mentions of Jews in his notebook entries,
autobiographical recollections, newspaper articles, letters, and sketches
and essays, culminating in his essay “Concerning the Jews,” which was
published in 1899 (and is presented here in facsimile reproduction).
Vogel spent 25 years affiliated with the English department of Yeshiva
University and then another 25 years at Michlalah-Jerusalem College in
Israel; now retired, he edits Jewish Bible Quarterly and writes.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PS1438 2006-015694 0-313-33413-7
Student companion to James Fenimore Cooper.
White, Craig. (Student companions to classic writers)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 209 p. $65.00
Literature professor White (U. of Houston-Clear Lake) introduces students
and general readers to the major works of American novelist James
Fenimore Cooper (1789-1851). Each book in the series of The Leather-
Stocking Tales gets its own chapter here, as does Cooper’s breakthrough
novel, The Spy. White also describes Cooper’s life and literary accom-
plishments and discusses the special challenges and rewards his peculiar
style creates for readers. The volume concludes with an extensive bibli-
ography of primary and secondary sources.
PS1541 2005-028123 978-0-8160-5448-0
Critical companion to Emily Dickinson; a literary
reference to her life and work.
Leiter, Sharon.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 448 p. $65.00
This collection of criticism, biography and commentary works best at the
high school or early college level, giving readers just starting to read and
analyze her work a solid foundation in the basic themes of her poems,
the story of her life, the lives of family and friends as well as editors and
corespondents, assessments of her peculiar style, and a bibliography of
primary and secondary sources.
PS1881 2005-034648 978-0-8160-5583-8
Critical companion to Nathaniel Hawthorne; a literary
reference to his life and work.
Wright, Sarah Bird.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 392 p. $65.00
Some credit Hawthorne with being the first widely-read American psy-
chological novelist, while others accuse him of being amongst the first to
take the slippery slope into sentimentalism. This covers both schools and
others in between with a biography, synopses of major and minor works,
criticism, and profiles of Hawthorne’s family and acquaintances.
Although it is aimed at the high school or early college level for readers
with little exposure to either that famous letter or those famous gables, it
also contains more advanced interpretations of lesser-known works such
as short stories, including Poe’s famous review of Twice-Told Tales and a
range of material on influences, including Hawthorne’s friendships with
Herman Melville and President Franklin Pierce. The result is a well-bal-
anced presentation of the forces surrounding Hawthorne’s life and his
responses in correspondence and in print.
PS2127 2006-017710 978-0-8108-5707-0
Adapting Henry James to the screen; gender, fiction, and
film.
Raw, Laurence.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 297 p. $50.00 (pa)
In this intriguing study of both Henry James and Hollywood film con-
ventions, Raw (American culture and literature, Baskent U., Turkey) sug-
gests that most film adaptations of James’ novels have sought to shift
attention away from the classical narrative to the audience’s interaction
with the narrative. He demonstrates that, although several adaptations
have critically engaged the subject of gender relations, they often rein-
force accepted norms, rather than following James in examining the
social construction of gender.
PS2386 2005-036733 0-8160-6461-X
Critical companion to Herman Melville; a literary
reference to his life and work.
Rollyson, Carl et al.
Facts On File, Inc., ©2007 394 p. $65.00
In this “reorganized, revised, and expanded” of Herman Melville A to Z,
Rollyson (English, Baruch College, US), Paddock (PhD, English, U. of
Toronto, Canada), and Gentry (liberal arts, Savannah State U., US) have
included brand new critical commentary sections for each of the
American writer’s novels and for many of his poems and have expanded
the biographical and bibliographical material. The bulk of the text con-
sists of descriptive entries of his novels, short stories, and poems that
provide synopses, explore themes, discuss publication histories, explore
individual characters, and suggest further readings. Following this a-to-z
listing of Melville’s works, 80 pages are devoted to entries on related
people, places, publications, and topics. A series of appendices provide a
chronology of Melville’s life and times and a bibliography of his works,
list selected books and articles about Melville, present excerpts of con-
temporary reviews of his work, reprint some correspondence between
Melville and Nathaniel Hawthorne, and present his family genealogical
tree.
–300–
PS2387 2006-003196 978-1-4051-2231-3
A companion to Herman Melville.
Title main entry. Ed. by Wyn Kelley. (Blackwell companions to liter-
ature and culture; v.41)
Blackwell Publishing, ©2006 582 p. $149.95
This wide-ranging volume introduces today’s readers to the fiction of
Herman Melville and provides a wealth of background information on
the 19th-century world in which he lived. Written by leading scholars
from around the world, the 35 original essays discuss such topics as
Melville’s whaling years; the political and social concerns of his time; and
his responses to various literary predecessors. Melville’s critical repu-
tation and place in contemporary popular culture are also discussed.
Editor Kelley (literature, Massachusetts Institute of Technology) is
Associate Editor of the Melville Society Journal Leviathan.
PS3048 2006-028847 978-1-55849-576-0
More day to dawn; Thoreau’s Walden for the twenty-first
century.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sandra Harbert Petrulionis and Laura Dassow
Walls.
U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2007 252 p. $28.95 (pa)
Simple Walden, surely one of the most-assigned books in the US, would
seem to have worn out its welcome in this wired, complicated, material
world but these essays show the conversations Henry David Thoreau had
with himself in his little cabin on the pond still matter. Topics include
the place in the canon for Walden, its modes of representation, the lure
of idealism, the lore of contemplation and violence, Thoreau’s unsettling
instincts, materialism found in Walden and Wild Fruits, the influence of
Homer and the community, the view from women readers, the Georgic
mode, the tension between agriculture and the environment, and the
hurt that comes from leaving a pond we have never really touched but
touches us.
PS3503 2005-024022 0-7546-3566-X
Art and memory in the work of Elizabeth Bishop.
Ellis, Jonathan.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 208 p. $89.95
In this study, Ellis (Sheffield U., UK) examines the published and unpub-
lished writings of American poet Elizabeth Bishop (1911-1979). While
making connections between Bishop’s work and life, he illuminates the
ways in which she refracted key events into her writing. His analysis is
structured according to the artistic forms and themes of Bishop’s writing,
rather than on the chronology and facts of her life. The text is based
upon Ellis’s doctoral dissertation.
PS3507 2006-017970 978-0-8047-5131-5
Robert Duncan and Denise Levertov; the poetry of politics,
the politics of poetry.
Title main entry. Ed. by Albert Gelpi and Robert J. Bertholf.
Stanford U. Press, ©2006 209 p. $19.95 (pa)
The two 20th-century American poets are linked in anthologies, literary
histories, and with the experimental poets of the Black Mountain school.
They became close friends but lived on different coasts, so much of their
relationship is recorded in their letters. The publication of those letters
inspired the November 2003 symposium in San Francisco from which
these 13 essays are drawn. Not all deal with their relationship or even
with the political or poetic elements they shared.
PS3511 2005-011126 1-57233-449-5
Reading Faulkner; introductions to the first thirteen
novels.
Marius, Richard.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 200 p. $35.00
For the 1996-97 academic year at Harvard University, Marius (d. 1999)
taught a course on the early work of American writer William Faulkner
(1897-1962) for students who had already read the novels and wanted to
know more about the author, his writing career, and the richness and
complexity of the works. Nancy Grisham Anderson (English, Auburn U.)
has assembled those lectures, either in manuscript with revisions and
additions, or in later typescripts.
–301–
PS3513 90-420-2082-2
Disclosing intertextualities; the stories, plays, and novels
of Susan Glaspell.
Title main entry. Ed. by Martha C. Carpentier and Barbara Ozieblo.
(DQR studies in literature; 37)
Editions Rodopi, ©2006 307 p. $83.00
Bringing together essays by feminist, Americanist and theater scholars,
this volume is the first to address Susan Glaspell’s entire oeuvre. The
focus of previous studies has been dominated by the feminist imperative
to recover a canon of silenced women writers, but the contributors to this
collection transcend that agenda to analyze Glaspell’s work as a dialogic
intersection of genres, texts and cultural phenomena. The volume as a
whole presents a complex aesthetic appreciation of Glaspell’s work.
PS3513 2006-022350 978-0-87286-479-5
Howl on trial; the battle for free expression.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bill Morgan and Nancy J. Peters.
City Lights Books, ©2006 224 p. $14.95 (pa)
Letters, press reports, excerpts from the trial transcript and decision, and
other texts document the 1957 obscenity trial of San Francisco beat poet
Allen Ginsburg’s (1926-97). The whole affair is set in the context of cen-
sorship in the US and the battle against it. The text of the poem itself is
included. There is no index.
PS3515 2005-017185 978-1-56164-342-4
Hemingway’s cats; an illustrated biography.
Brennen, Carlene Fredericka.
Pineapple Press, ©2005 185 p. $21.95
It’s unusual to profile a major literary figure by discussing his pets, but
this engaging work offers more than such an approach might suggest.
Many of the numerous b&w photos do feature Hemingway with one or
another cat (or dog, or an owl), but others depict family scenes and home
interiors and exteriors that invite a close, personal view. The text empha-
sizes the pet theme but is generally biographical, incorporating much
about early years, wives, and changing domestic situations. The author
is a newspaper editor and publisher in southwest Florida and has a 30-
year history of research on Hemingway’s life in Key West, Bimini, and
Cuba.
PS3515 2005-005553 978-0-7876-8133-3
Langston Hughes; a documentary volume.
Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher C. De Santis. (Dictionary of lit-
erary biography; v.315)
Thomson Gale, ©2005 458 p. $225.00
Meant to accompany the works of great American writers of all genres,
each volume of this series contains a wide variety of materials arranged
chronologically, many of them primary documents, including reviews of
the author’s works, reviews written by the author of other works, little
known writings, facsimiles, drafts, letters, and interviews. Among the
materials found in the volume on Langston Hughes are letters, both from
Hughes and to him; articles he wrote for newspapers; poems; reviews;
and interviews. A separate section is included containing materials from
the 1960’s that speak to Hughes’ legacy. Many b&w photos and images
of letters, drafts of his writing, and dust jackets are included, as are a
cumulative index and list of further reading. De Santis is at Illinois State
University.
PS3523 978-0-7734-5560-3
A guide to the characters in the novels, short stories, and
plays of Sinclair Lewis (A-G).
Title main entry. Ed. by Samuel J. Rogal.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 494 p. $99.95
From Mary Abbott, major general in the Peace Army in the story
“Captains of Peace” to Einar Gyseldson, a farmer in the novel “Main
Street,” this volume lists every fictional character from A to G invented
by American author Sinclair Lewis in his writings (even those of the
most generic nature), together with brief descriptions. This first of three
volumes also includes an essay by compiler Rogal (emeritus, humanities
and fine arts, Illinois Valley Community College reflecting on the impor-
tance of names in Lewis’s fiction. The other volumes cover H-R and S-Z,
with the concluding volume also containing a list of real persons
appearing as characters in Lewis’s fiction; summaries and a checklist of
Lewis’s stories, novels, and plays; and works cited and consulted.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PS3523 978-0-7734-5561-0
A guide to the characters in the novels, short stories, and
plays of Sinclair Lewis (H-R).
Title main entry. Ed. by Samuel J. Rogal.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 493 p. $99.95
From Haberdasher, the proprietor of an store in the Bronx in the story
“The City Shadow,” to Noel Ryland, a member of the Boosters’ Club in
the novel Babbitt, this volume lists every fictional character from H to R
invented by American author Sinclair Lewis in his writings (even those
of the most generic nature), together with brief descriptions. Two other
volumes cover A-G and S-Z. The A-G volume also contains an essay by
compiler Rogal (emeritus, humanities and fine arts, Illinois Valley
Community College) reflecting on the importance of character names in
Lewis’s fiction and the S-Z volume contains a list of real persons
appearing as characters in Lewis’s fiction; summaries and a checklist of
Lewis’s stories, novels, and plays; and works cited and consulted.
PS3523 978-0-7734-5562-7
A guide to the characters in the novels, short stories, and
plays of Sinclair Lewis (S-Z).
Title main entry. Ed. by Samuel J. Rogal.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 494 p. $99.95
From Bill Saber, a character in “Is This a Dagger—So What?” who wears
a toupee that resembles moss, to the idiosyncratically spelled
Zylophonists in the story “Loki the Red,” this volume lists every fictional
character from S to Z invented by American author Sinclair Lewis in his
writings (even those of the most generic nature), together with brief
descriptions. This final of three volumes also contains a list of real
persons appearing as characters in Lewis’s fiction; summaries and a
checklist of Lewis’s stories, novels, and plays; and works cited and con-
sulted. Preceding volumes cover A-G and H-R, with the first volume con-
taining an essay by compiler Rogal (emeritus, humanities and fine arts,
Illinois Valley Community College) reflecting on the importance of char-
acter names in Lewis’s fiction.
PS3535 2006-023945 978-0-7391-1577-0
Essays on Ayn Rand’s The fountainhead .
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Mayhew.
Lexington Books, ©2007 349 p. $29.95 (pa)
Even detractors of Ayn Rand’s philosophy of trenchant individualism rec-
ognize the importance of her novel Fountainhead as a cultural phe-
nomenon. Mayhew (philosophy, Seton Hall U.) pays homage to that
phenomenon in this collection of essays about the creation, publication
and reception of the novel. Several of the contributors make use of pre-
viously unpublished material from the Ayn Rand Archives.
PS3537 2005-000500 978-0-7876-8127-2
John Steinbeck; a documentary volume.
Title main entry. Ed. by Luchen Li. (Dictionary of literary biography;
v.309)
Thomson Gale, ©2005 447 p. $225.00
Meant to accompany the works of great American writers of all genres,
each volume of this series contains a wide variety of materials arranged
chronologically, many of them primary documents, including reviews of
the author’s works, letters, and interviews. The materials on Steinbeck
are grouped chronologically according to his prodigious output, with the
reviews, letters, and reproductions of drafts and dust jackets, among
other things, grouped together for each published work. Letters from
Steinbeck to his friends and fellow writers, their responses, and reviews
dominate the collection. A list of further reading and a cumulative index
are provided. Li is at Kettering U.
PS3537 2006-009754 0-313-29669-3
A John Steinbeck encyclopedia.
Title main entry. Ed. by Brian Railsback & Michael J. Meyer.
Greenwood Press, ©2006 482 p. $125.00
Having had such a reference would have saved Railsback (contemporary
American literature) countless hours of labor if such had been available
when he began his studies of this multi-genre and 1962 Nobel Prize-
winning author. He and Meyer (English, DePaul and Northeastern Illinois
U., Chicago) head a team of Steinbeck scholars in compiling relevant
topics from “Abner, the Aerial Engineer” (in Bombs Away) to “The Wrath
of John Steinbeck” (a pamphlet written by a friend in 1939). In addition
to alphabetical and topical lists of entries, the volume includes a
Steinbeck chronology (1902-1968) and introductory essay by Steinbeck
biographer Jackson J. Benson. An annotated list of Steinbeck archives is
appended. The only photo is the cover shot.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PS3537 2005-030450 978-0-471-72511-4
Upton Sinclair and the other American century.
Mattson, Kevin.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 294 p. $25.95
Mattson (contemporary history, Ohio U.) offers a biography of American
novelist and socialist Sinclair (1878-1968), finding his to embody the con-
tradictions of his country. Among the stages of his life and career are a
very devout and earnest little boy, socialist celebrity, and candidate for
governor of California. Two world wars also make their appearance.
PS3545 978-0-15-603063-2
Eudora Welty; a biography.
Marrs, Suzanne.
Harcourt, ©2006 652 p. $16.00 (pa)
Welty was not the aged and cloistered spinster scrawling out her crys-
talline fiction in the dark recesses of her Southern Gothic existence. In
fact, in a period of eight years in the 1980s she was too often on the road
and maintaining her vast network of friends and fellow writers to write
much more than autobiographical pieces. Marrs, (English, Millsaps
College), a distinguished Welty scholar and personal friend of the author,
gently clears up these and other misperceptions about one of the pillars
of twentieth-century American fiction. Marrs was given access to letters
to and from Welty’s two great loves of her life, and correspondence with
no less than Katherine Anne Porter, E.M. Forster and Elizabeth Bowen,
showing that Welty was fascinated by people and their thoughts, the vari-
eties of life around her, and the literary world. The result is upbeat, pos-
itive, and affectionate.
PS3545 2006-043490 978-0-06-075708-3
Letters of E.B. White, rev. ed.
White, E. B. Ed. by Dorothy Lobrano Guth and Martha White.
HarperCollins, ©2006 713 p. $35.00
E.B. White’s letters are every bit as casually elegant and amusing as his
essays, poems and stories. This revised and updated edition contains
newly released letters from 1976 to 1985, additional photographs, and a
new foreword by John Updike, who provides an excellent overview of
White’s writing life. The text contains many photographs of White, his
family and friends and explanatory notes on the letters, where necessary.
PS3545 2005-020361 978-0-7876-8138-8
Robert Penn Warren; a documentary volume.
Title main entry. Ed. by James A. Grimshaw. (Dictionary of literary
biography; v.320)
Thomson Gale, ©2006 451 p. $225.00
Meant to accompany the works of great American writers of all genres,
the volumes of this series each contain a wide variety of materials
arranged chronologically, many of them primary documents, including
reviews of the author’s works, reviews written by the author of other
works, little known writings, facsimiles, drafts, letters, and interviews.
Among the materials found in the volume on Warren are documents
related to his years with the poetry group the Fugitives, the origin of the
Southern Review and his work there, reviews of his books of poetry and
novels, and many letters and interviews. Some b&w illustrations,
including several of drafts, facsimiles and dust jackets, and a list of
further reading are included. Grimshaw is at Texas A&M University-
Commerce.
PS3545 2005-031041 1-57233-474-6
Robert Penn Warren, critic.
Beck, Charlotte H.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 192 p. $38.00
Surprisingly, given Warren’s prolific output as a critic, this study is the
first to consider Warren as a literary critic in his own right. Beck
(English, U. of South Carolina, Beaufort) traces the evolution of Warren’s
criticism and finds differences between Warren and Cleanth Brooks and
New Criticism that are ignored in the usual conflation of Warren with
New Criticism.
–302–
PS3545 978-0-7734-5641-9
Teaching American literature at an East European
university; explicating the rhetoric of liberty.
Raymond, Richard C.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 203 p. $119.95
From January through July of 2003, Raymond (English, Mississippi State
U.) served as Fulbright professor of English and American Studies at the
U. of Shkoder in Albania. In this text, he reflects on his experiences there
and explains the pedagogical strategies he used to help students develop
themselves as writers and researchers. He also describes the professional
development plan he created together with the University’s English
faculty and recounts their efforts to implement it despite their over-
loaded teaching schedules. He concludes by exploring the work of
Roberta Maierhofer and Walter Hoeflechner (both: Karl-Franzens U. of
Graz).
PS3552 2006-023644 1-59158-262-8
Bob Barner and YOU.
Barner, Bob. (The author and YOU series; no.6)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 124 p. $35.00 (pa)
Barner’s children’s books include such titles as Dem Bones, Stars, Stars,
Stars and Bugs! Bugs! Bugs!, and here he provides the backstage view of
how he created them. He describes how he grew up and became an artist
and author, how he works daily, how he keeps his idea files and
sketches, whether the pictures or words come first, how he gets his work
on paper, and how others can use his methods in their own creative
processes. He then gives activities for each book and also gives a little
inside information about the movie of Dem Bones. The result is a
classroom visit on paper.
PS3552 2005-024264 978-0-8204-6385-8
John Barth and postmodernism; spatiality, travel,
montage.
Clavier, Berndt. (Studies on themes and motifs in literature; v.83)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 368 p. $81.95
Barth is often-cited but relatively little-explored, with most scholars and
critics focusing on his concepts of “exhaustion” and “replenishment” and
revealing limited understanding of the full range of his work. Clavier
(migration and ethnic relations, Malomö U.) opens Barth’s discourse on
his aesthetic as it relates to the ideological critiques of the avant-gardes,
offering montage as a possible model for understanding Barth’s fiction.
The result is the interesting notion that postmodernism may be a
mimesis of reality, particularly as it relates to the collective nature of self.
Clavier builds his case primarily with commentary on Barth’s theme of
travel, noting Barth’s idiosyncratic take on spatiality and the idea of
travel as escape out of postmodernism, the postmodern aesthetic as it
relates to travel, the myth of the postmodern breakthrough, self-discovery
in voyage, and spaces that become as itinerant as those who seek them.
PS3552 2006-003853 978-1-55753-421-7
Murder, HE wrote; a successful writer’s life. (reprint,
2002)
Bain, Donald.
NotaBell Books, ©2006 239 p. $19.95 (pa)
He has interviewed half a dozen little people, asking them in all seri-
ousness if they owned Uncle Sam costumes. He has parlayed talking of
roses over a few drinks into handling PR for three of the nation’s largest
airports. He has consorted with shady ladies and murdering men (solely
for research purposes) and somehow has managed to produce mystery
novels, nonfiction classics, television scripts, and even a book on caviar.
Bain has been there and written that, and this part-autobiography part-
survival guide for successful professional writers is both upbeat and
practical, quite a feat when one considers his contacts include a drug test
subject for a leading US intelligence agency, various barflies, and
Veronica Lake. Nevertheless, Bain shows by example how to be kind in
cultivating the ones you want, be even kinder in letting down the ones
you do not want, and keeping kind but completely honest field notes.
PS3552 2006-007962 1-59766-012-4
Sleepwalk; California dreamin’ and a last dance with the
‘60s.
Buckley, Christopher.
Eastern Washington U. Press, ©2006 160 p. $16.95 (pa)
Award-winning poet Buckley (U. of California at Riverside) reflects on his
youth growing up in California in the 1950s and 1960s. His memoir
touches on questions of politics, rock and roll, poetry, and how the
culture of one’s youth affects one in adulthood.
–303–
PS3553 2006-033681 978-1-59158-405-6
Mary Casanova and you.
Casanova, Mary. (The author and you series)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2007 141 p. $35.00 (pa)
This series indulges young readers’ wishes to know more about the lives,
ideas, and characters of their favorite authors. Mary Casanova, the
award-winning author of often environmentally-themed picture books
(including Utterly Otterly Day) and middle-grade adventure novels (e.g.,
Wolf Shadows), shares details and photos of growing up in Minnesota
and becoming a writer. She also presents the stories behind her stories
and her responses to letters from young readers, answering questions
ranging from whether she has pets to how to get published.
PS3561 2006-009920 978-0-393-05892-5
Eavesdropping; a life by ear.
Kuusisto, Stephen.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 186 p. $23.95
In accepting Kuusisto’s invitation to experience his world, the reader
enters a realm of poetry, music, travel, and the art of eavesdropping.
Kuusisto explains how he has perfected this art throughout his life and
invites the reader to do the same. His language demonstrates how well
he has put the art of eavesdropping to use in developing a nuanced and
crystalline prose. Kuusisto is a poet and essayist who teaches courses in
disability studies at Ohio State U.
PS3562 2006-024369 978-0-88146-036-0
The new Brothers Grimm and their Left behind fairy
tales.
Morgan, David T.
Mercer University Press, ©2006 222 p. $20.00 (pa)
The new Grimm brothers, says Morgan, are Tim LaHaye and Jerry B.
Jenkins, who wrote the Left Behind series of books espousing pre-mil-
lennial dispensationalism. Having retired from three decades of teaching,
he could not sit idle while millions were being bamboozled by their fairy
tales masquerading as theology and biblical scholarship. For each of the
books, he summarizes the story, then sets out in clear language the the-
ological, moral, and political points it makes. He does not provide an
index.
PS3562 2006-017937 0-313-33225-8
Ursula K. Le Guin; a critical companion.
Bernardo, Susan M. and Graham J. Murphy. (Critical companions to
popular contemporary writers)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 198 p. $65.00
As part of a series on popular and critically-acclaimed authors selected
by high school teachers and librarians, this volume features the works of
Portland, Oregon-based writer Ursula Le Guin. The brief biography of
her upbringing by noted anthropologists helps explain why Le Guin con-
siders her writing to transcend science fiction/fantasy. Bernardo (English,
Wagner College, Staten Island, New York) and Murphy (science fiction,
Trent U., Peterborough, Ontario; Seneca College of Applied Arts and
Technology, Toronto) offer readings of a dozen of her works from The
Left Hand of Darkness (1969) to Tales from Eathsea (2001), a list of her
many awards, and a recent e-mail interview. They do not cover her more
recent novels and poetry.
PS3563 2005-031042 1-57233-460-6
David Madden; a writer for all genres.
Title main entry. Ed. by Randy Hendricks and James A. Perkins.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 177 p. $34.95
These eight essays cover all of Madden’s work and together make the
case that the attention paid to Madden’s novels has overshadowed his
innovative work as a critic, poet, short-story writer and dramatist. The
essays, which analyze Madden’s themes and craft, are supplemented by
a long interview with Madden and an extensive bibliography. The editors
are academic and fiction writers; Hendricks teaches English at the State
University of West Georgia and Perkins teaches at Westminster College.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PS3566 2006-011956 978-0-8203-2807-2
A Gravity’s rainbow companion; sources and contexts for
Pynchon’s novel, 2d ed.
Weisenburger, Steven C.
Univ. of Georgia Press, ©2006 412 p. $22.95 (pa)
Devoted fans as well as newbies to Pynchon’s 1973 masterpiece will enjoy
and appreciate this erudite guide, now much expanded from the 1988
first edition. Weisenburger (English, Southern Methodist U., Dallas,
Texas)—who graciously acknowledges corrections sent to him over the
years from readers, including academics in a wide range of disciplines—
provides annotation for terms, phrases, and references through the novel
in the order in which they occur (references to page and line number is
provided for three different editions). Also useful, and thought-provoking,
are his initial introduction to the novel’s plot and mind-blowing style,
and subsequent introductions on the novel’s four parts and the episodes
each contain.
PS3573 2005-019801 1-57233-469-X
Critical essays on John Edgar Wideman.
Title main entry. Ed. by Bonnie TuSmith and Keith E. Byerman.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 275 p. $32.00
Literature scholars examine the fiction and non-fiction of contemporary
Black American writer Wideman. Among their topics are figures of life
in Fatheralong, his reflection on the nation questions, tropes of vision and
the articulation of race relations in The Cattle Killing, and dissolving and
shapeshifting.
PS3573 2006-018891 978-0-7603-2256-7
Forty acres and a fool; how to live in the country and
still keep your sanity.
Welsch, Roger.
Voyageur Press, ©2006 316 p. $21.95
In 1975 Welsch bought a farm in Nebraska and resigned as a professor
at a university so that he could live in a rural area. He describes his expe-
riences and gives advice on how to make the decision to move to a rural
location, difficulties that come up, choosing a location, what to do with
the land, necessary equipment, making a living, rural culture, and
nature. Welsch is a humor writer who has appeared on CBS’s Sunday
Morning.
GERMANIC LITERATURES
PT289 2005-034675 978-0-295-98611-1
Missing the breast; gender, fantasy, and the body in the
German Enlightenment.
Richter, Simon. (Literary conjugations)
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 353 p. $45.00
Over the past two decades the cult of the female breast in Western
society—particularly in England and France—has received much scholarly
attention. In this study Richter (Germanic languages and literature, U. of
Pennsylvania) examines various German texts of the Enlightenment era
and shows how the breast-related fantasies underlying them differ from
and are more complex than their English and French counterparts.
Particular attention is paid to the tension between the plenitude of the
breast and the implications of its absence.
PT341 978-1-904350-55-2
Dilettantism and its values; from Weimar classicism to
the fin de siéle.
Hibbitt, Richard. (Studies in comparative literature; 9)
Legenda, ©2006 192 p. $69.00
Hibbitt (modern French Literature, U. of York) examines the role of the
dilettante and dilettantism in German and French critical writing from
the eighteenth through the nineteenth centuries, finding that dilettantism
had more to do with apprenticeship, skepticism, parody, aestheticism
and fruitful error than amateurism or superficiality. Along with a variety
of other texts he examines Goethe’s and Schiller’s “dilettantism project,”
the work of Paul Bourget, and changing concepts about the role of the
dilettante from Baudelaire, Laforge, Nietzsche, and Mann. Distributed by
the David Brown Book Company.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
PT391 2006-022858 978-0-8204-6331-5
Gender, feminism, and fiction in Germany, 1840-1914.
Weedon, Chris. (Gender, sexuality, and culture; v.5)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2006 189 p. $68.95
Weeden (critical and cultural theory, Cardiff U., UK) examines how pro-
gressive women’s fiction, conduct books, and feminist texts in 19th- and
early-20th-century Germany negotiated and challenged scientific, philo-
sophical, and religious definitions of woman. Coverage includes the com-
peting views of “woman’s nature” of the time, women’s access to the
political sphere and their efforts to redefine what constituted politics,
issues of education and work, family life, motherhood, sexuality, working
class women, and the ways in which texts about marginality and socially
excluded women served as sites of resistance for challenging hegemonic
forms of femininity that were deeply intertwined with class specific dis-
courses of Germanness, gender and national identity. For general readers
and those in gender studies, German cultural history, German literature,
women’s writing, and comparative literature.
PT2681 2006-017393 978-3-11-018274-3
W.G. Sebald; history, memory, trauma.
Title main entry. Ed. by Scott Denham and Mark McCulloh.
(Interdisciplinary German cultural studies; v.1)
Walter de Gruyter, ©2006 382 p. $88.00
The March 2003 symposium at Davidson College was planned before
Sebald’s death in December 2001. The 21 papers consider the work of the
German author from the perspectives of contexts and influences, nar-
rative and style, and history and trauma. Their topics include intertextu-
ality and narratives of redemption in Vertigo and The Emigrants, his
Kafka, moments of symbolic investiture in Austerlitz, and institutions
and buildings in his prose. No index is provided.
PT7078 2006-445729 1-870041-59-3
On the margins; Nordic women modernists of the 1930s.
Rees, Ellen. (Series A; no.24)
Norvik Press, ©2005 204 p. $38.95 (pa)
In this study Rees examines the work of six Nordic women prose writers
of the 1930s: Stina Aronson, Karen Blixen, Karo Espeseth, Hagar Olsson,
Cora Sandel, and Edith Oberg. The focus is on how these writers
responded to experimental trends in Continental and Anglo- American
modernism and how they positioned themselves in relation to male
writers. Supplemental materials found in the appendix include a trans-
lation of censored passages from Sandel’s Bare Alberte. Rees teaches
Scandinavian studies at the U. of Oregon. Distributed in the U.S. by
Dufour Editions.
SCIENCE, COMPUTERS, MATH, HEALTH
Q180 1-55193-056-0
Experience research social change; methods beyond the
mainstream, 2d ed.
Kirby, Sandra L. et al.
Broadview Press, ©2006 280 p. $24.95 (pa)
This textbook by Kirby (sociology, U. of Winnipeg, Canada), Greaves
(executive director, British Columbia Centre of Excellence for Women’s
Health, Canada), and Reid (a postdoctoral fellow at Simon Fraser U.,
Canada) provides an overview of qualitative collaborative research in the
social sciences, covering basic concepts concerning the production of
knowledge, ontology, epistemology, methodology, and methods. Their
emphasis throughout is on the construction of knowledge as a political
process, a perspective that causes them to discuss points of view not gen-
erally found in the mainstream, the involvement of actors not typically
found in the research process, and critical views of methodology and
research design.
Q181 2006-026861 978-1-4166-0529-4
Priorities in practice; the essentials of science, grades K-6;
effective curriculum, instruction, and assessment.
Allen, Rick.
Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev, ©2006 134 p. $23.95 (pa)
The author gives advice to elementary school teachers on the bringing
science into their classrooms. His six chapters combine insights from
practicing teachers in the United States (as well as some from outside the
US) as well as research on science education in order to cover trends in
elementary science teaching, curriculum planning, best practices in the
elementary science classroom, the engagement and motivation of stu-
dents, ongoing assessment, and professional development.
–304–
QA76.57 978-0-415-30712-3
The new media handbook.
Dewdney, Andrew and Peter Ride. (Media practice)
Routledge, ©2006 329 p. $30.95 (pa)
This book is part of a series for students of the arts, media, cultural
studies, and social sciences. Dewdney (media education, London South
Bank U.) and Ride (U. of Westminster) loosely define “new media” as the
evolving relationships between technology, cultural contexts, and cultural
concepts. Each of the 31 chapters contains an examination of a theo-
retical, practical, or historical/contextual topic of new media; 19 of these
are case studies/interviews of practitioners who work in advertising,
sound, game design, and in fine arts arenas, among other areas. Topics
include: the language of new media, curating new media projects, new
media histories, interactive design, human-computer interface, innovation
and media institutions, and a framework for considering new media in
contemporary culture. Black and white illustrations supplement the text.
QA76.59 2006-040520 0-8058-5736-2
Ubiquitous computing in education; invisible technology,
visible impact.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mark van’t Hooft and Karen Swan.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 369 p. $49.95 (pa)
Through examples from theory, research and practice, these papers
explore the educational potential of ubiquitous computing, which the
editors define as computing “available through a variety of digital tools
wherever and whenever it is needed.” The contributors discuss the
importance of ubiquitous computing for students and teachers and
extrapolate from current practices effective applications for the future. In
their epilogue, van’t Hooft and Swan, who both teach at Kent State U.,
conclude that ubiquitous computing is inevitable and requires further
research to ensure its optimum use.
QA76.9 0-321-47080-X
Adobe Acrobat 8 in the office.
Baker, Donna L.
Adobe Press, ©2007 364 p. $40.00 (pa)
Consultant Baker helps business people get the most out of the broad
capabilities of Adobe Acrobat 8 software. Each of 13 chapters takes the
reader through the steps of a project that illustrates the use of Acrobat
in solving common workflow or document management problems.
Source material for all of the projects is available online. Topics include
(for example) collaborating in a shared review, assembling a library, and
packaging and preparing legal documents.
QA135 2006-023716 978-0-7879-8880-7
Math essentials, elementary school level; lessons and
activities for test preparation.
Thompson, Frances McBroom.
Jossey-Bass, ©2007 381 p. $32.95 (pa)
This resource for elementary school teachers contains lessons and activ-
ities designed to prepare students for mathematics testing in grades 3-5.
It covers 40 key objectives correlated to the National Council of Teachers
of Mathematics (NCTM) standards. Each objective includes three devel-
opmental activities—one manipulative, one pictorial, and one inde-
pendent practice—and is accompanied by a list of typical errors made by
students. Thompson (a K-12 mathematics specialist) has also provided
five practice tests. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.
QC358 2006-023057 978-0-8194-6307-4
Optics made clear; the nature of light and how we use it.
Wolfe, William L. (Press monograph)
SPIE, ©2007 263 p. $56.00 (pa)
Writing for a general audience, although a familiarity with basic scien-
tific writing on the level of Scientific American is probably recommended,
Wolfe (formerly professor of optical science at the U. of Arizona) takes
the reader on a wide-ranging tour of optics, its instruments, and its appli-
cations in field as diverse as art, communication, transportation, den-
tistry, and forensics.
Book News places most science, medicine, technology, engineering, &
agriculture books in SciTech Book News. Call for a sample issue.
–305–
QE28 2006-933459 0-495-01204-1
Historical geology; evolution of earth and life through
time, 5th ed.
Wicander, Reed and James S. Wonroe
Brooks/Cole Publishing, ©2007 440 p. $127.95 (pa)
Wicander and Monroe (both: geology, Central Michigan U.; Monroe is
emeritus) introduce the principles of historical geology to undergraduates
who have had an introductory geology course. For those who haven’t,
early chapters review plate tectonics and minerals and rocks. In 19 highly
illustrated chapters, the main themes of plate tectonics, geologic time, and
evolutionary theory unify more specific discussions of fossils and the
dynamic characteristics of life and geology throughout Earth’s different
ages, among other topics. This fifth edition adds to the standard multiple
choice and short answer review questions by including field questions,
in which a student is asked to describe a geologic feature or apply
learned principles as related to a photograph of an important site. Three
appendixes contain English-Metric conversions, and guides to the classi-
fication of organisms and the identification of minerals.
QH105 2005-929112 978-0-7385-2987-5
San Francisco; a natural history.
Gaar, Greg and Ryder W. Miller. (Images of America)
Arcadia Publishing, ©2006 127 p. $19.99 (pa)
San Francisco’s natural attractions—featured in the book’s many b&w
photos—have caused many hearts to be left there. But Gaer (a San
Francisco native, local historian, and natural-areas advocate) and Miller
(an environmental reporter) chronicle how some of this scenic glory was
due to hardwon efforts, as shown in images over time. The book includes
information on the politics of urban preservation and volunteer oppor-
tunities for preserving natural habitat in the Bay area.
QH311 1-933392-29-0
Animate earth; science, intuition and Gaia.
Stephan, Harding.
Chelsea Green Publ. Co., ©2006 256 p. $25.00 (pa)
As part of the effort to communicate Gaian ideas and institutions,
Harding (holistic science and resident ecologist, Schumacher College,
Devon, England) argues that explanation and understanding, two severed
branches of the human psyche representing the rational and the intu-
itive, need to be reconnected. The main body of text explaining the
concept of the planet earth as a single organism is punctuated with pas-
sages suggesting experiential and intuitive approaches that some might
call guided visualizations. The book was first published in the UK by
Green Books but is published for US distribution by Chelsea Green.
QH438 2006-283626 0-567-03079-2
Future perfect?; God, medicine and human identity.
Title main entry. Ed. by Celia Deane-Drummond and Peter Manley
Scott.
T&T Clark, ©2006 219 p. $130.00
Here contributors address the issues of what is a human, what is a med-
icalized human, and what constitutes a fabulous human in such topics
as humans as perfect or trans-human, human nature and the human
condition, the nature of human welfare, whether humans are recasting
themselves outside of God’s image, the moral geography of the embryo,
neuroscience and its modifications, the soul as it relates to genetics and
neuroscience, virtue, stem cell research, the ethics of extending life,
genetic perfection as a fulfillment of creation in Christ, God in the trans-
human future, and the work of Christology, anthropology and post-
human medicine in saving us from ourselves. T&T Clark is an imprint
of Continuum.
R727 2006-017738 1-884956-54-8
How to talk to your doctor; getting the answers and care
you need.
Agnew, Patricia A. (The best half of life series)
Quill Driver Books, ©2007 119 p. $12.95 (pa)
To have a successful relationship with a doctor first requires finding one
with whom you can communicate. An Arizona journalist offers advice
on getting quality care in today’s defensive, complex medical envi-
ronment, from being your own best advocate to serving as one for
someone else. Her patient tool kit includes questions to ask, ways to
conquer health fears, checklists, a doctor rating chart, sample living will,
and Web and print resources.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
RA644 2006-048275 1-4133-0521-0
Long term care; how to plan and pay for it, 6th ed.
Matthews, J. L.
Nolo, ©2006 372 p. $19.99 (pa)
Matthews, an attorney, provides a guide to understanding and preparing
for long-term care for both those who need it and those setting up or
paying for that care. The book covers financial planning, whether to buy
long-term care insurance, how to protect assets, care alternatives, and
medical decisions. It also explains the role of geriatric care managers, the
special needs of those with Alzheimer’s or related conditions, protecting
against elder fraud, how government programs such as Medicare and
Medicaid assist financially, and types such as home care and residences.
This edition contains a new chapter on hospice care and updated data
on benefits laws and taxes, and resources and websites.
RC455 978-0-88937-344-0
Posttraumatic embitterment disorder.
Linden, Michael et al.
Hogrefe & Huber Publishers, ©2007 172 p. $24.95 (pa)
For researchers, clinicians, forensic psychologists, and psychiatrists, this
volume serves as the first comprehensive description of posttraumatic
embitterment disorder (which was first recognized after German reuni-
fication), how it arises, its diagnosis, and its treatment. Linden et al. sep-
arate the disorder from PTSD and discuss stress and stress reactions and
the theoretical background, diagnostic categories, psychological and etio-
logical methods, and wisdom research. Empirical data on PTED is then
summarized, including patient profiles. This is followed by an outline of
treatment methods. There is no index.
RC469 978-1-85775-778-1
Consciousness reconnected; missing links between self,
neuroscience, psychology and the arts.
Steinberg, Derek.
Radcliffe Publishing, ©2006 214 p. $29.95 (pa)
This ninth book continues Steinberg’s trajectory from clinical and scien-
tific work in psychiatry towards the arts. Consciousness, he says, is an
elusive quarry and hides from the naked eye, so he leads readers on an
attempt to creep up on it from a number of directions. Closing the net
around it, he says, reveals connections between the perspectives being
used. Published by Radcliffe Publishing, UK; U.S. distribution is by
BookMasters.
RC489 978-0-7619-5976-2
An introduction to dramatherapy.
Langley, Dorothy. (Creative therapies in practice)
Sage Publications, ©2006 173 p. $99.95
In the UK, dramatherapists are professional therapists who are trained
to use the dramatic process to help people during times of stress, emo-
tional upheaval or disability. Langley offers an introductory overview
describing what dramatherapy is, what dramatherapists do, where they
work, how individuals become dramatherapists, and who can benefit
from the method. Throughout the text, vignettes describing examples of
therapeutic situations are described, most from the author’s own expe-
rience or experiences of her colleagues. The author’s specific credentials
are not stated.
RC489 978-1-4129-1956-2
Spirituality in counselling and psychotherapy.
Lines, Dennis.
Sage Publications, ©2006 213 p. $110.00
Practitioner Lines calls upon his personal experiences in developing a
unique spirituality as well as his experience with counseling youth to
develop a well-balanced approach to using the faith systems underlying
both counseling and psychotherapy. He starts at the individual and social
levels, showing how spirituality and the concepts of application and
practice have changed, and explaining the debates about the ethics and
efficacy of spirituality. He describes the spiritually-centered counselor,
analyzes the process of spiritual healing and the journey of spiritual
practice, introduces religious and spiritual techniques and closes with
(aptly) an assessment of closure. The result is a source of techniques that
those who are as honest as Lines is about his own spirituality can use in
what is still a spiritually-informed society.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
RC489 2004-004804 978-0-7657-0511-2
Using the transference in psychotherapy. (reprint, 2004)
Goldstein, William N. and Samuel T. Goldberg.
Jason Aronson, ©2006 153 p. $29.95 (pa)
This is a paperbound reprint of a 2004 book. Writing primarily for stu-
dents and mental health professionals early in their careers, Goldstein
and Goldberg (both: Baltimore-Washington Institute for Psychoanalysis)
provide a historical and contemporary overview of the concept of trans-
ference, particularly as it relates to psychology. They emphasize old
versus new models of transference, and its role in psychotherapy.
RJ140 2006-022877 0-7808-0943-2
Adolescent health sourcebook; basic consumer health
information about the physical, mental, and emotional
growth and development of adolescents..., 2d ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Joyce Brennfleck Shannon. (Health reference
series)
Omnigraphics, Inc., ©2007 683 p. $87.00
For parents and teens, this volume collects information on the health and
concerns of adolescents in brief chapters organized by the following
topics: adolescent health and development, nutrition and weight man-
agement, appearance, reproductive and sexual health, injury, physical
disorders, abuse and violence, mental health, and substance abuse. It
covers issues such as sleep needs, educational disabilities, skin issues,
teen pregnancy, contraception, stress management, bullying, hazing,
online abuse, dating violence, and many others. All of the material in the
book was drawn from publications by government agencies and non-
profit organizations, and periodicals.
RJ506 2006-020198 1-59102-478-1
The strangest song; one father’s quest to help his
daughter find her voice.
Sforza, Teri.
Prometheus Books, ©2006 296 p. $24.00
Williams syndrome is a rare genetic disorder that produces mental retar-
dation and stunted physical growth. Many who have it are also gifted
with an extraordinary musical ability. This narrative tells the story of
mentally disabled opera singer Gloria Lenhoff and describes her father’s
fight to get the scientific community to investigate the link between
Williams and musical ability. Journalist Sforza (Orange County Register
also offers readers a glimpse into the Berkshire Hills Music Academy in
Massachusetts—the nation’s first residential academy for mentally dis-
abled musicians.
RT21 2006-005012 978-1-4144-0374-8
The Gale encyclopedia of nursing and allied health, 2d
ed; 5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jacqueline L. Longe.
Thomson Gale, ©2006 3093 p. $985.00
This five-volume encyclopedia, presented here in a second edition (the
first was published in 2002), was prepared for a wide audience of stu-
dents preparing to play a role in health care—in hospitals, labs, clinics,
and offices. Medical terminology is used but is well explained, and the
entries are written to be accessible yet more thorough than material gen-
erally available for lay people. The 930 entries vary in length from a page
to several pages and follow standardized formats appropriate to the topic,
beginning with a definition and ending with resources and key terms.
Topics addressed include causes, diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis (for
diseases); purpose, precautions, complications, and aftercare (for tests
and procedures); operation, maintenance training (equipment and tools);
function, role in human health, common diseases (human biology and
body systems); work settings, education, future outlook (nursing and
allied health professions); and viewpoints and professional implications
(current health issues). Arrangement is alphabetical, and indexing is in
the final volume. An unobtrusive number of small color photos support
the text.
–306–
AGRICULTURE, LANDSCAPE DESIGN, ANIMAL
CULTURE
S473 978-90-868601-5-9
The combat for gender equality in education; rural
livelihood pathways in the context of HIV/AIDS.
Kakuru, Doris Muhwezi.
Wageningen Academic Publishers, ©2006 221 p. $30.00 (pa)
Kakuru (sociology, Makerere U.) analyzes the impact of gender inequality
and the complex interactions between schools and rural livelihoods
within the context of the HIV/AIDS crisis, carrying out her research
within the framework of the African Women Leaders in Agriculture and
the Environment project funded by The Netherlands Ministry of Foreign
Affairs. Through direct access to Ugandans affected by the interrelated
conditions of gender inequality in education, want, and HIV/AIDS, she
analyzes teacher competence, classroom interactions, pupils’ academic
competencies, children’s rights and gender equality, closing with signif-
icant work on how they all work together and against the possibility of
a life free of HIV/AIDS for girls and women. Distributed in the US by
Enfield.
S494 2006-031508 978-0-8213-6741-4
Enhancing agricultural innovation; how to go beyond the
strengthening of research systems.
Title main entry. (Agriculture and rural development)
The World Bank, ©2007 157 p. $25.00 (pa)
This volume originated in an international workshop called
“Development of Research Systems to Support the Changing Agricultural
Sector” held in June 2004 in Washington, D.C. by the World Bank’s
Agriculture and Rural Development Department. It focuses on unex-
plored operational aspects of the innovation systems concept and its
potential for agriculture. It examines real-world innovations systems and
their usefulness for guiding investments in agricultural technology devel-
opment and economic growth and incorporates prior work and eight
new case studies, which comparatively analyze the roles of public and
private sector actors, their attitudes and practices, patterns of interaction,
and enabling environment policies and infrastructure. The analysis
framework and methodology are also described.
SB435 2005-037518 0-8139-2533-9
City trees; a historical geography from the Renaissance
through the nineteenth century.
Lawrence, Henry W.
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 336 p. $75.00
The tree-lined streets that Americans take for granted are heirs to the late-
19th century model of the green city as a symbol of civilization in a
rapidly changing urban environment. Lawrence (geosciences, Edinboro
U. of Pennsylvania) traces this concept back to its Renaissance roots.
Though landscape design initially lagged behind building design, the
period’s cosmopolitan nature, class consciousness, and nationalistic com-
petitiveness led to the innovation of less formal gardens extending into
surrounding areas with greater use of trees and more public access. He
treats these influences on urban green spaces in the US and today’s glob-
alized world. The volume includes period illustrations, city plans and
maps.
SB472 2005-028990 0-471-76137-0
Landscape design documentation; a guide to plan
checking and quality control. (CD-ROM included)
Mcdonald, Brian Thomas.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 241 p. $75.00
Beginning with the definition of the profession by the American Society
of Landscape Architects, an experienced practitioner examines a land-
scape architect’s roles and responsibilities. The text includes landscape
plans; organizational diagrams; and most notably, 46 checklists (plus a
master checklist) in the start-to-finish areas of data collection, consultant
coordination, design documents, construction documents, specification,
cost estimation, site observation, and project closeout. The CD-ROM
includes the checklists in customizable form. McDonald is a licensed
landscape architect in Texas. The subtitle on the cover and CD-ROM
reads: “Strategies for Plan Checking and Quality Control.”
–307–
SB473 2006-275759 978-1-55407-129-6
Encyclopedia of garden design & structure; ideas and
inspiration for your garden.
Fell, Derek.
Firefly Books Ltd., ©2005 224 p. $29.95
This well-illustrated reference offers gardeners some 150 design cate-
gories and suggestions for planting and design variations, from ‘alleys
and avenues’ to ‘woodland gardens’. Introductory material includes inspi-
ration from classic gardens plus practical issues to consider: e.g., formal
vs. informal design, softscape vs. hardscape components, and seasonal
considerations. Entries run from one to four pages including color
photos. Less expected entries include those on labels and signs, orchid
gardens, and roof gardens. Fell is a UK-born, Pennsylvania-based
writer/photographer said to have won more awards from the Garden
Writers Association of America than anyone else.
SB937 2005-936471 978-1-891127-46-5
Insect management for food storage and processing, 2d
ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Jerry W. Heaps.
Am. Assn. of Cereal Chemists, ©2006 231 p. $169.00
Heaps (General Mills, Inc.) presents the new edition of a work that gives
food plant and warehouse professionals technical and practical infor-
mation on insect pest management. Opening chapters introduce the
concept of integrated pest management, choosing between in-house pest
control programs or outside pest control firms, how to inspect facilities,
insect resistant food packaging, and the implications of insect behavior.
The next seven chapters offer strategies for manipulating facility envi-
ronments to mitigate or eliminate insect pest problems (these include a
new chapter discussing retail pest management). Chemical control and
strategies are discussed in the next three chapters, followed by discussion
of human safety and environmental health. Distributed in the US by the
American Phytopathological Society.
SD421 2005-021298 0-471-69656-0
Wall of flame; the heroic battle to save Southern
California.
Krauss, Erich.
John Wiley & Sons, ©2006 252 p. $24.95
Journalist Krauss tells of the devastating onslaught of wild fires in
Southern California in the autumn of 2003. He offers a chronological
account of the whole picture, rather than taking each of the 13 majors
fires in turn, to portray the building pressure.
SF309 978-1-84217-119-6
Equids in time and space; papers in honour of Véra
Eisenmann; proceedings.
Conference of the International Council on Archaeozoology (9th: 2002:
Durham, UK) Ed. by Marjan Mashkour.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 240 p. $90.00
In one of several volumes to emerge from the conference, archaeologists,
zoologists, and other scholars present 18 studies of horses, asses, zebras,
and other equids both before and after they were domesticated by
humans. Among the topics are craniodental variability in modern and
fossil Plains zebra from East and southern Africa, palaeo-ethology as an
archaeological tool, late fourth and third millennium sites in northern
Syria, body conformations in unimproved horses in the eastern
Carpathians, and horse burials in royal and common Macedonian tombs.
No index is provided. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book
Company.
SF422 978-1-84217-124-0
Dogs and people in social, working, economic or symbolic
interaction; proceedings.
Title main entry. Ed. by Lynn M. Snyder and Elizabeth A. Moore.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 146 p. $70.00
This text is one of 14 volumes which form the published proceedings of
the Ninth meeting of the International Council of Archaeozoology, held
in Durham, UK, in August 2002. Fifteen contributions cover a wide range
of topics, considering dogs as animals of sacrifice and animal compo-
nents of ancient and modern religious ritual and practice; as human
companions subject to loving care, visual/symbolic representation, and
deliberate or accidental breed manipulation; as working dogs; and as co-
inhabitators of human dwelling places and co- consumers of human food
resources. The papers demonstrate that the relationships between
humans and dogs are complex, often combining the practical, the ideo-
logical, and the symbolic. No subject index. Illustrated with b&w photo-
graphs, drawings, diagrams, tables and graphs. Oversize: 8.5x12″.
Distributed in the U.S. by The David Brown Book Co.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
SF430 978-0-7893-1399-7
Living with pugs.
Von der Leyen, Katharina.
Universe, ©2005 191 p. $39.95
Those who love pugs will love this book, which is full of photos and
stories as well as lots of information on how to choose a puppy, the per-
sonality of the breed, training, showing, the history of the breed,
breeding, and caring for an older pug. First published in German in 2005
(as Der Mops). Oversize: 10x10.25″. Universe Publishing is an imprint of
Rizzoli.
SF431 978-1-55407-197-5
Old dog, new tricks; understanding and retraining older
and rescued dogs.
Taylor, David.
Firefly Books Ltd., ©2006 176 p. $19.95 (pa)
Veterinary surgeon Taylor takes on the challenges of older dogs, rescued
dogs, and mature dogs with new owners, starting by explaining how the
relationship between dogs and humans developed and the questions to
ask before taking on a mature dog. He covers using basic commands,
caring for the needs of older dogs and using special techniques for dogs
that are aggressive, destructive, fearful, phobic, excitable or unruly, and
gives detailed tips on toilet and feeding problems. Taylor even gives tips
on training dogs with significant disabilities (deaf dogs often learn up to
about 50 signs) and the photos are delightful.
TECHNOLOGY, CONSTRUCTION, ENGINEERING
T58 2006-005844 0-7546-4631-9
Managing information services; a transformational
approach, 2d ed.
Bryson, Jo.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 346 p. $124.95
Aimed primarily at students in information services, librarianship, and
records management, this text focuses on managing information in
dynamic environments and holds out the promise that a solution can be
found for every situation. This second edition has been revised to reflect
the need for libraries and information services to become more centered
on customers. A new section on corporate governance discusses man-
aging different forms of capital. Additionally, the coverage of investment,
security, risk management and business continuity has been expanded.
Bryson is the executive director of the Office of e-Government,
Department of the Premier and Cabinet, Government of Western
Australia.
T59 2005-020989 0-945289-27-8
Reviews of human factors and ergonomics; v.2.
Title main entry. Ed. by Robert C. Williges.
Human Factors & Ergonomics Soc, ©2006 289 p. $80.00 (pa)
This second volume in the series presents eight reviews of topics in
human factors and ergonomics for researchers and practitioners,
addressing cognitive, organizational, and information-processing aspects.
Williges (industrial and systems engineering, Virginia Polytechnic
Institute and State U.) compiles eight chapters on situation awareness,
crew resources management training, representation aiding, usability
assessment methods, divergent visual needs in user-centered computing,
user safety, multidimensional aspects of slips and falls, hearing in noise,
and design effective warnings. Discipline and problem-oriented
approaches are included and both research and applications—trans-
portation, military, and occupational—are noted. Contributors work in
psychology, visual communication, and engineering fields in the US and
Brazil.
T385 0-321-43454-4
How to wow with Illustrator.
Chan, Ron and Barbara Obermeier.
Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2007 223 p. $39.99 (pa)
In putting together this instructional manual on Adobe Illustrator,
graphic designers Chan and Obermeir were primarily concerned with
improving their audience’s productivity. Assuming prior familiarity with
using the vector drawing program, they introduce shortcuts,
workarounds, and methods that can fit into readers’ existing workflows.
Chapters cover program foundations, freeform drawing and geometric
shapes, masks and blend effects, brushes and patterns, designing with
Illustrator, Illustrator and the Web, and integrating Illustrator and
Photoshop.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
TH1421 2006-002777 0-86534-527-9
Adobe conservation; a preservation handbook.
Title main entry. Ed. by Francisco Uviña Contreras.
Sunstone Press, ©2006 222 p. $34.95 (pa)
A non-profit organization based in Santa Fe, New Mexico has, for two
decades, educated and trained citizens (especially young people) in the
American Southwest and nearby Mexican communities in traditional
methods of restoring and maintaining adobe structures. This highly-illus-
trated guide offers the expertise developed over those 20 years, much of
it gained from the recent six-year project to restore the Our Lady of
Immaculate Conception mission church in Socorro, Texas. Instructions
cover how to assess a building’s needs, build adobe bricks, remove dam-
aging concrete additions, repair erosion, plaster with mud and lime,
install a subsurface drainage system, and install metal or earthen roofs.
Additional material primes the reader in history, terminology, materials,
and tools. This guide includes a glossary but no index.
TH4815 1-55701-573-2
Sweets residential cost guide 2007.
Title main entry.
McGraw Hill Construction, ©2006 316 p. $70.95 (pa)
Building on its 60-year reputation for timely and accurate information,
this edition continues the tradition of including costs for material, labor,
and equipment and the means of deducing overhead and profit for con-
tractors, architects, engineers and other building professionals.
Categories, which follow CDI MasterFormat, include general require-
ments such as modification procedures and quality control, sitework,
concrete, masonry, metals, wood, plastics, thermal and moisture pro-
tection, doors and windows, finishes, specialties such as fireplaces and
storage shelving, equipment, including home theaters and service
kitchens, furnishings, conveying systems, mechanical features, electrical
units and special construction such as for ice rinks and nuclear reactors.
The editors include adjustments to costs, a geographical conversion table,
man-hour and square foot tables, and a glossary. Distributed by
Craftsman Book Co.
TH4870 2006-012170 1-58685-891-2
Yurts; living in the round.
Kemery, Becky.
Gibbs Smith, ©2006 146 p. $24.95 (pa)
Kemery, who has lived in and set up four different yurts, describes the
environmentally friendly living space, from its architecture and history
to types, including the experiences of those who have built their own.
Many color photos show examples of construction, and tapered wall,
modern fabric, and frame panel yurts, their design and use of interior
space. Kemery also explains heating and cooling options, choosing a
company, setting up a yurt, maintenance, and insurance. A resource
guide to products and companies is included, as well as building codes,
sample plans, and diagrams.
TH4960 2006-007912 978-1-58816-513-8
Popular mechanics garage makeovers; adding space
without adding on.
Peters, Rick.
Hearst Books/Sterling, ©2006 192 p. $17.95 (pa)
In this accessible guide for homeowners, Peters offers practical sugges-
tions for transforming any garage into an attractive and efficient space.
Six real-life “makeovers” are profiled, including enclosing a carport, cre-
ating a craft room, and building a family room. Peters also provides clear
instructions for do-it-yourself projects (illustrated with color photos) and
explains which tasks should be left to the professionals. Peters is the
author of a number of titles in home remodeling and woodworking for
the non-specialist.
TK5105 978-0-7391-1672-2
Blogosphere; the new political arena.
Keren, Michael.
Lexington Books, ©2006 165 p. $26.95 (pa)
Applying the tools of life writing research to his investigation of the
political “blogosphere,” that vast collection of Internet sites known as
weblogs or blogs for short, Keren (research chair in communication,
culture, and civil society at Canada’s U. of Calgary) finds, instead of the
emancipatory project promised by the most enthusiastic proponents of
the blogosphere, a vast reservoir of melancholy, defined as solitude and
political helplessness. Blog writers, he avers in an argument guaranteed
to outrage blogosphere participants of almost all political stripes, are like
terrorists in that they represent disenchanted citizens gravitating “from
the norms of civil society to a fantasy world in which the excessive use
of words—or bombs—would make everybody listen.”
–308–
TK5105 2006-934771 0-7897-3629-2
Internet yellow pages; the fun fast, and easy way to get
productive online, 2007 edition.
Belicove, Mikal E. and Joe Kraynak.
Que Publishing, ©2007 1095 p. $19.99 (pa)
Organized alphabetically by topic, this reference contains hundreds of
entries listing addresses and providing brief descriptions of some of the
Web’s most helpful and informative sites. Each site has been given a
rating based on content, appearance, and ease of use. Just a few of the
many diverse topics: beer, crocheting, maps, martial arts, parenting, real
estate, skin care, veterinary medicine, and wedding planning. For the
2007 edition, a special icon has been used to identify sites that offer pod-
casts and webcasts.
TK5105 978-0-8058-5915-7
Webcasting worldwide; business models of an emerging
global medium. (CD-ROM included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Louisa Ha and Richard J. Ganahl.
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 432 p. $99.95
Scholars in communications, journalism, and media from around the
industrialized world explore the convergence of the internet with the tel-
evision and radio media. They focus on leading webcasters in leading
broadband markets to analyze the trends where the technology and eco-
nomics make the media easiest to start and operate. After providing a
framework for analyzing business models of emerging media, they
report on specific webcasters in North America, Europe, the Asian
Pacific, and the Arab region. The included CD-ROM contains information
about the webcasters covered, the authors, and other matters.
TP788 1-901992-44-6
John Baker’s late 17th-century glasshouse at Vauxhall.
Tyler, Kieron and Hugh Willmott. (MoLAS monograph; 28)
Mus/London Archaeology Service, ©2005 85 p. $26.00 (pa)
Baker’s glass house was not the sort to avoid throwing rock in, but the
sort where glass items are manufactured. It opened sometime between
1663 and 1681 and had closed down by 1704 and demolished soon after.
Excavations by the Museum of London in 1989 found the form of a
furnace, a fritting oven, frit itself, crucibles, working waste, finished
vessels, and other evidence for the manufacturing process of the period.
The series is devoted to publishing the backlog of excavation reports in
London. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
PHOTOGRAPHY
TR6 2006-024401 978-0-8156-0851-6
Real photo postcard guide; the people’s photography.
Bogdan, Robert and Todd Weseloh.
Syracuse U. Pr., ©2006 274 p. $39.95
Widely popular during the early 20th century, “real photo” postcards dif-
fered from their printed counterparts in that they were produced chem-
ically from a negative on photographic paper. Aimed at collectors,
historians, curators, and interested general readers, this richly illustrated
volume provides a broad overview of the genre. Seven chapters cover
such topics as photographers and careers; categories for collectors; and
photo postcard care and preservation. Bogdan (emeritus, Syracuse U.) is
a columnist for The Postcard Collector magazine, and Weseloh maintains
an extensive (5000-plus) collection of historically important postcards.
TR146 2006-046934 978-0-7922-6209-1
The ultimate field guide to photography.
Martin, Bob et al.
Natl. Geographic Society, ©2006 397 p. $24.95 (pa)
Nine professional photographers contribute personal perspectives to this
National Geographic guide to digital, film, and camera phone photog-
raphy techniques. Eleven chapters discuss basic and advanced techniques
for all types of photography, as well as strategies for selecting a digital
camera, using point and shoot and other film cameras, making better
prints, scanning and archiving (for digital files as well as prints), digital
editing, and conceiving projects. Also included are eight photographer
profiles and nine portfolios displaying works and insights, mostly from
National Geographic’s team. Abundant color photographs from the mag-
azine demonstrate techniques in action. This guide is especially useful for
beginning and intermediate photographers, though sidebars and his-
torical materials will be of interest to those of any skill level.
–309–
TR267 2006-276055 0-321-37570-X
Adobe Photoshop elements 4; 50 ways to create cool
pictures.
Huss, Dave.
Peachpit Press, Inc., ©2006 329 p. $29.99 (pa)
Photoshop Elements is the consumer version of Adobe’s powerful image
editing software. In this accessible guide, professional photographer Huss
details more than 50 Elements techniques for enhancing and retouching
digital photos. He also explains how to create a photo gallery and upload
it to the Web. Practice image files are available at a companion website.
This revised edition has been updated for Photoshop Elements version 4.
Huss is a contributing editor for Photoshop User magazine.
TR267 0-7357-1400-2
Welcome to Oz; a cinematic approach to digital still
photography with Photoshop. (DVD included)
Versace, Vincent.
New Riders Publishing, ©2007 188 p. $44.99 (pa)
Fine art photographer Versace seeks to impart his Photoshop skill-set to
other photographers, tackling the material in relation to workflow and
hoping to impart his own “cinematic approach” to digital still photog-
raphy while covering light, gesture, shape, time, color, and the formula
to mix color. The DVD contains 16-bit source files for editing practice (as
well as 8-bit files for those with less powerful computers).
TR465 2006-045061 1-931666-17-2
Photographs; archival care and management.
Ritzenthaler, Mary Lynn and Diane Vogt-O’Connor.
Society of American Archivists, ©2006 529 p. $84.95
Aimed at professional and volunteer staff at archives, libraries,
museums, and other cultural heritage organizations, this manual
explains how to best preserve and use photographs that have historical
value. All aspects of photograph management are covered, from
appraisal and accessioning through digital conversion and reference
work. The focus is on the principle of provenance and the development
of systems to organize, preserve, and access whole collections. The appen-
dices cover supplies, workstations, funding sources, general help sources,
and learning resources.
TR575 2006-010244 978-0-8174-4227-9
Lighting and the dramatic portrait.
Grecco, Michael.
Watson-Guptill Pubns., ©2006 192 p. $29.95 (pa)
In this collection of his work, photographer Michael Grecco also provides
advice for portrait photographers, using his own as examples for specific
techniques and lessons. He discusses equipment and format, lighting
techniques, style issues, creativity and conceptualization, the subject/pho-
tographer relationship, and types of subject matter and includes dia-
grams of lighting setups and equipment that he used for a specific photo.
He also explains the stories behind some of his shots, some involving
celebrities and others of everyday people.
TR645 3-8327-9159-0
Vertical New Yorkers.
Hamann, Horst.
TeNeues Publishing Co., ©2006 2006 p. $45.00
This collection contains b&w photographs of 100 strangers by photog-
rapher Horst Hamann who presents a cross-section of New Yorkers
posing with their eyes closed. People from all walks of life were captured,
such as firefighters, models, teachers, taxi drivers, actors, doctors,
lawyers, and musicians, whom Hamann sees as possessing uniquely New
Yorker qualities. The book measures 6.5x13.25″.
The two Book News periodicals alert you to more than 19,000 new, high-level
books each year. Our mission is to get reliable news to you quickly.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
TR661 2006-009079 978-0-393-05160-5
America by the yard; Cirkut camera images from the
early twentieth century.
MacKay, Robert B.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 216 p. $100.00
By augmenting his history of a particular type of camera with many
examples, both momentous and quotidian, of its usage, MacKay has pro-
duced a fascinating piece of Americana. Cirkut cameras, which took
panoramic photographs known as “yard-longs,” were used to record
scenic vistas, epic events and group photos of conventioneers, workers,
soldiers and students. The prints reproduced here, with many foldouts
that show the photographs in their entirety, include such historic
moments as the building of the Panama Canal, the crash of the dirigible
Shenandoah, the 1908 Wellesley graduating class and a very early race at
the Indianapolis speedway. MacKay, a collector of Cirkut camera
panoramas, is the director of the Society for the Preservation of Long
Island Antiquities.
TR681 0-295-98634-4
Milton Rogovin; the making of a social documentary
photographer.
Herzog, Melanie Anne.
U. of Washington Pr., ©2006 176 p. $30.00 (pa)
Photographer Milton Rogovin (b. 1909) who dedicated his work to the
goal of social justice by photographing, working people, the poor, the
“forgotten ones.” Published in conjunction with the retrospective exhi-
bition, Milton Rogovin: Photographer, at the Center for Creative
Photography, this work biographically documents the work of Rogovin
as it developed over the course of his career by reproducing 126 of his
black and white photographs. The photographs are accompanied by a
long essay by Herzog (art history, Edgewood College) on the life and
work of Rogovin.
TR820 2006-012013 0-8109-5497-4
FSA; the American vision.
Mora, Gilles and Beverly W. Brannan.
Harry N. Abrams, ©2006 357 p. $85.00
In 1935 the US Farm Security Administration (FSA) sought to assemble a
comprehensive pictorial record of America’s cultural and economic con-
ditions during the Great Depression. The project, which continued into
1943, launched a group of young photographers, including Dorothea
Lange, Walker Evans, Ben Shahn, Arthur Rothstein and Gordon Parks,
who fanned out across the country to photograph ordinary people at
work. This volume offers a new look at this collection of images, pre-
senting 470 photographs, many of which have not been published before.
Each photographer’s work is organized in a documentary series, fol-
lowed by a gallery of his or her most notable images.
TR860 2004-117992 0-7821-4403-9
Matchmoving; the invisible art of camera tracking. (CD-
ROM included)
Dobbert, Tim.
Sybex, Inc., ©2005 273 p. $49.99 (pa)
Dobbert, a matchmover who worked on Hellboy and Sin City, describes
techniques in matchmoving, the process which aligns the perspectives of
real images with computer generated additions. Coverage includes
strategies for 2D tracking, 3D calibration, perspective matching, auto-
matic tracking, set fitting, and troubleshooting, and offers tutorials for
understanding matchmoving software and different types of cameras.
The author intends this book for visual artists whose principle task is not
matchmoving, as well as for 3D animation or compositing students
whom he believes can gain a competitive advantage with knowledge of
these techniques. The accompanying CD-ROM contains practice exercises,
printable resources, and demos of boujou bullet, SynthEyes, and
MatchMover Pro software.

TR729 978-3-8327-9127-8
MANUFACTURES, ARTS & CRAFTS
Africa.
Poliza, Michael. TS753 2006-279249 978-0-943763-46-0
TeNeues Publishing Co., ©2006 408 p. $125.00 Diamonds; the Antoinette Matlins buying guide; how to
This enormous picture book (it’s 11.75x14.75″) is filled with two-page select, buy, care for & enjoy diamonds with confidence
color plates of Poliza’s photographs, many of them aerial, of the animals and knowledge, 2d ed.
and landscapes of sub-Saharan Africa, forming a virtual safari for the
Matlins, Antoinette.
reader at home. Poliza’s career, first in digital technology, then in travel
Gemstone Press, ©2006 192 p. $18.99 (pa)
and photography, is described in an introduction. The shutter speed,
aperture, and focal length of each photo is noted. Not indexed. In this update of the 2001 edition, the author of several guides on gem-
stones offers advice on what qualities, branding trends, experts, and
TR790 2006-019100 978-0-393-06028-7 scams to look for in buying diamonds online or offline, as well as how
to care for diamonds. The book includes price guides, resources, and a
To the ends of the earth; adventures of an expedition
photo gallery of classic and contemporary jewelry trends. Matlins does
photographer. not address the issue of certification of stones as not being “conflict dia-
Wiltsie, Gordon. monds” used to finance wars.
W.W. Norton, ©2006 224 p. $35.00
Gordon Wiltsie has led and/or photographed more than 100 expeditions TT197 2005-023632 1-56158-797-4
to the wildest places on earth, and his images have appeared in such Building traditional kitchen cabinets, rev. ed.
magazines as National Geographic. In this richly illustrated volume, he Tolpin, Jim.
offers a behind-the-scenes look at ten of his most memorable adventures. Taunton Press, ©2006 215 p. $24.95 (pa)
Vivid color photographs are accompanied by Wiltsie’s engaging descrip-
tions of his experiences in settings as varied as Himalayan mountains, Tolpin (a frequent contributor to Fine Woodworking and Fine
Antarctica, and the Amazon jungle. Homebuilding magazines) presents a well-illustrated instruction guide on
kitchen cabinetry design and construction. Demonstrating the building of
TR810 2006-050163 978-0-472-11549-5 traditional American designs (Colonial, Shaker, and Arts and Crafts
styles), he offers chapters on custom kitchen design, cabinet design and
Above the North; aerial photography of northern construction, materials, bills of materials and cut lists, cutting stock to
Michigan. size, face frames, door construction, case construction, finishing, door
Beaver, Marge. and drawer installation, cabinet installation, and building and installing
U. of Michigan Press, ©2006 126 p. $45.00 laminate counters.
Aerial photographer Marge Beaver offers a birds-eye view of northern
Michigan. Gorgeous color images depict the land and waters in all four TT199 2006-003717 978-1-933502-02-1
seasons of the year. The only text is in brief captions, many of which give Carving for kids.
no indication as to location, and, regrettably, no map is supplied. Trudel, Robin Edward.
Oversize: 11.75x10.25″. Linden Publishing Co., Inc., ©2006 95 p. $16.95 (pa)
This volume presents an assortment of projects designed to teach kids
ages 4 and up the basic techniques and skills of woodcarving. Following
some introductory information on tools and preparation, the volume is
organized into three main sections with hands-on lessons aimed at
children in three age ranges: 4-8, 9-12, and 13-17. Color photographs illus-
trate the individual steps of the carving projects. Trudel writes articles
for carving magazines and is a volunteer woodcarving teacher.

Reference & Research Book News February 2007 –310–

FOOD CULTURE, HOSPITALITY INDUSTRY
TX353 2006-021049 0-275-98931-3
Moveable feasts; the history, science, and lore of food.
McNamee, Gregory.
Praeger, ©2007 194 p. $39.95
McNamee asks a question that has occurred to many people while eating
artichokes: how did humans come to consume certain foods and why
were they chosen over other foods? His answers draw on history, anthro-
pology, chemistry, biology and other fields and describe the adaptation
of 30 foods, including apples, bananas, chocolate, peanuts, pineapples,
tomatos and watermelons. The descriptions include recipes from many
culinary traditions around the world.
TX357 1-903018-47-1
Authenticity in the kitchen; proceedings.
Oxford Symposium on Food and Cookery (2005) Ed. by Richard
Hosking.
Prospect Books, ©2006 453 p. $60.00 (pa)
Proceedings of a symposium on “authentic” cuisine held in 2005. Forty-
five contributions explore a range of topics. Some are of a more general
nature, while others focus on specific cuisines and time periods. A sam-
pling of topics: the ambiguity of authenticity; the rise of molecular gas-
tronomy and its problematic use of science as an authenticating
authority; food as art; authenticity and gastronomic films; 19th-century
food historians; Dutch food and 19th-century Amsterdam restaurants;
medieval Anglo-Jewry and their food, 1066- 1290; western Mediterranean
vegetable stews and the integration of culinary exotica; the strange tale
of General Tso’s chicken; naming authenticity and regional Italian
cuisine; traditional Philippine vinegars; and protecting authentic French
food heritage. Distributed in the U.S. by The David Brown Book Co.
TX357 0-89329-049-1
Six arguments for a greener diet; how a more plant-based
diet could save your health and the environment.
Title main entry.
Center/Science/Public Interest, ©2006 — p. $14.95
Published by the Center for Science in the Public Interest (CSPI), this text
for general readers outlines the benefits of a plant-based diet for human
health, the environment, and animal welfare. In addition to offering
dietary advice to consumers, the author recommends a number of spe-
cific changes to public policy. CSPI is a nonprofit organization in
Washington D.C. that conducts research and advocacy programs in
health and nutrition.
TX360 978-0-7748-1327-3
Nutrition policy in Canada, 1870-1939.
Ostry, Aleck Samuel.
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 143 p. $85.00
While Ostry (human and social development, U. of Victoria, Canada)
frames the history of Canadian nutrition policy from the late 19th
century within five eras, in this work he is only concerned with the first
two: one lasting from the mid-1870s to the end of WWI, dominated by
the establishment of a system of food safety, inspection, and surveillance
developed within the framework of criminal law and designed to protect
consumers from economic fraud; and a subsequent one, lasting to
approximately 1938, during which vitamin research, promotion of breast
feeding, politicized concerns over malnutrition and dietary standards
came to the fore, and the medical profession’s insertion of itself as a
major stakeholder in nutrition education came to the fore. Distributed in
the US by the U. of Washington Press.
TX406 2006-046571 0-8493-2842-X
Handbook of spices, seasonings, and flavorings, 2d ed.
Raghavan, Susheela.
CRC Press, ©2007 330 p. $139.95
A supplier of spices based in New York State, Raghavan offers a guide to
spices that food developers might use to create new products based on
popular ethnic cuisines from around the world. In addition to describing
the spices themselves, she identifies other ingredients found among the
world’s cuisines that are essential in providing flavors, textures, colors,
and nutritional value to foods and how these flavorings are used with
spices to create authentic or new flavors. No date is noted for the first
edition.
–311–
TX641 978-90-420-2086-3
Food, drink and identity in Europe.
Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas M. Wilson. (European studies; an
interdisciplinary series in European culture, history and politics; 22)
Editions Rodopi, ©2006 236 p. $65.00
This volume in the European Studies series, which examines European
culture, history and politics, is the first multidisciplinary look at the con-
tributions which food and alcohol make to contemporary European iden-
tities. It provides theoretically informed ethnographic and historical case
studies of transformations and continuity in social and cultural patterns
in the production and consumption of food and drink, in order to explore
how eating and drinking have helped to construct local, regional and
national identities in Europe.
TX651 2006-277167 978-0-8269-4250-0
Food preparation, 3d ed.
Haines, Robert G. and R.T. MIller.
American Technical Publishers, ©2006 618 p. $55.00
Updated with 2005 USDA dietary guidelines and the new food pyramid,
along with new materials on sanitation, computerized food service man-
agement systems, first aid and fire safety procedures, diet trends, and
temperatures for cooking, cooling, and hot and cold storage, this com-
prehensive text emphasizes cost-effective and safe techniques along with
advice on professional development. In 30 chapters Haines and Miller
cover such topics as careers in food service, sanitation, tools and
equipment, safety, nutrition, cooking methods and techniques, breakfast
preparation, batter cooking, appetizers, seasonings, salads, cheeses, fruit,
vegetables, pasta, soups, meat and fish, breads, cookies, pastries and spe-
cialty desserts. The also include hundreds of large-scale recipes (finally
we know how to make six Key Lime pies at once), a glossary, and appen-
dices on such topics as the mathematics related to food preparation. They
have included a number photographs so well-done readers may be
tempted to eat the pages.
TX719 2006-031524 978-0-313-32797-1
Food culture in France.
Abramson, Julia. (Food culture around the world)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 197 p. $49.95
Abramson (French, U. of Oklahoma, Norman) describes the role of food
as part of the culture of France, from its major foods and ingredients to
diet and health. Other topics addressed are cooking, history, typical
meals, eating out, and special occasions. She considers what the French
eat on a daily basis, and why and how foods are eaten, including
workday meals, celebration, attitudes towards health, public policy and
food quality, trends in restaurant cooking, and changing views of wine.
She draws on sources such as cookbooks and personal experiences,
studies, and the writings of historians and cultural critics. Recipes cor-
respond to typical dishes discussed.
TX725 2006-026184 978-0-313-33454-2
The world cookbook for students; 5v.
Jacob, Jeanne and Michael Ashkenazi.
Greenwood Press, ©2007 1218 p. $225.00
This attractive reference presents recipes for foods commonly eaten in
countries around the world. The recipes are presented in a knowl-
edgeable format that promises a successful cooking experience with
foods that are novel, but available to the American reader. Arranged
alphabetically by country, each chapter begins with a short description
of the country, its geography, ethnic groups, and a map, followed by lists
of foodstuffs, typical dishes, and styles of eating. This cultural survey
exposes the reader to the variety of experience in how meals are taken
and what they comprise in different countries. The recipes that conclude
each chapter include a brief note as to when the dish is commonly eaten.
Written for high school and undergraduate students, this reference will
also appeal to the general reader.
TX907 3-8327-9134-5
Cool hotels; cool prices.
Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia Massó and Martin N. Kunz.
TeNeues Publishing Co., ©2006 399 p. $24.95 (pa)
This book lists about 60 affordable hotels in the US, Argentina, Europe,
Africa, Middle East, Asia, and Australia that have unique architecture
and design and prices under 200 euros. Each hotel entry lists contact
information, designer, opening year, style, number of rooms, and
location, in addition to showing several color photos of the interior. The
introduction is in English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
TX911 2006-279620 978-0-86612-280-1
Convention management and service, 7th ed.
Astroff, Milton T. and James R. Abbey.
Educ’l Inst/Am.Hotel & Lodging, ©2006 616 p. $70.95 (pa)
For students in the hospitality field, Astroff and Abbey provide a
textbook on convention management and service. They explain different
kinds of meetings and conventions, types of organizations that hold
events, and how to contact people in charge of site selection. Other topics
include analysis of a property and finalizing an event. The second part
discusses the convention service, preparation, room setup, food and bev-
erage, audiovisual requirements, admission, exhibits and trade shows,
and billing. This edition has been updated and rewritten to make topics
more comprehensive, with new and expanded sections. Revisions were
based on journal articles, seminar notes, book reviews, and input from
industry leaders. Standardized forms have been added. The appendices
contain directories of US and Canadian organizations and publications,
as well as case studies.
TX911 2006-298120 0-86612-269-9
Hospitality and tourism marketing.
Lazer, William et al.
Educ’l Inst/Am.Hotel & Lodging, ©2006 436 p. $87.95 (pa)
Designed for both practitioners and college students, this textbook takes
a systems approach to the management of hospitality and tourism mar-
keting. A sampling of topics includes individual guest behavior, market
segmentation, pricing strategies, distribution systems, public relations,
and sales promotions. Lazer (emeritus, Michigan State U.) concludes by
suggesting some strategies for staying abreast of emerging trends and
industry developments.
TX911 2006-013809 978-0-910627-80-1
How to open a financially successful pizza & sub
restaurant. (CD-ROM included)
Henkel, Shri L. and Douglas Robert Brown.
Atlantic Publishing, ©2007 491 p. $39.95 (pa)
This resource for entrepreneurs provides the information they need to get
started in the pizza and sub shop business. Consultant Henkel covers
each step of the process, from finding a location through creating menus,
hiring employees, generating publicity, and controlling costs. A sample
pizza restaurant business plan is contained on the accompanying CD-
ROM, along with an assortment of forms, charts, and checklists.
TX911 978-0-86612-287-0
Managing hospitality human resources, 4th ed.
Woods, Robert H.
Educ’l Inst/Am.Hotel & Lodging, ©2006 491 p. $76.95 (pa)
This textbook for human resources students and practitioners addresses
the management of employees in the hospitality industry. Early chapters
cover U.S. employment laws and discuss planning and staffing. Other
topics include (for example) evaluating employee performance, negoti-
ating with labor unions, and conducting exit interviews. Ethical issues
are addressed in the final chapter. Woods teaches hotel administration at
the U. of Nevada, Las Vegas.
TX928 978-0-86612-285-6
Hospitality facilities management and design, 3d ed.
Stipanuk, David M.
Educ’l Inst/Am.Hotel & Lodging, ©2006 561 p. $71.95 (pa)
Stipanuk (School of Hotel Administration, Cornell University) introduces
the management and design of hospitality facilities and illustrates prin-
ciples with examples from the industry in this text for owners and oper-
ators of facilities, managers, and hospitality management students. After
an overview of maintenance issues, each of the primary facility systems
is covered, along with the basics of lodging and food service design. The
third edition removes the chapter on telecommunications.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
MILITARY & NAVAL SCIENCE
U22 90-04-15440-X
Military ethics; the Dutch approach; a practical guide.
Title main entry. Ed. by Th.A. van Baarda and D.E.M. Verweij.
Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2006 395 p. $132.00
Most of the chapters are adapted and translated from a practical guide
on military ethics, Pradkijkboek Militaire Ethiek, published in 2004, com-
missioned by the State Secretary for Defense of the Netherlands, and
edited by the Bureau of Ethics and the Armed Forces. They have been
more or less revised to take account of recent events. The methodical look
at ethical issues, moral development, and dilemma training in the armed
forces includes contributions from non-ethicists and experienced military
officers as well as specialists in ethics. Martinus Nijhoff is an imprint of
Brill.
U27 2005-030029 1-57488-984-2
Mud; a military history.
Wood, C.E.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 190 p. $23.95
Wood (history, Glenville State College) examines the impact of transitional
mud, “the soldier’s ancient enemy,” on military operations in Europe,
Asia, and North America (South America and Africa are excluded due
only to lack of source material). He defines mud’s characteristics and
effects and how they hinder combatants, animals, and machines; dis-
cusses how its transitory nature has influenced battlefields and com-
manders’ plans through history; looks at how military engineers have
responded to mud; discusses mud’s influence on combatants’ health,
morale, and endurance; and explores how the US military is dealing the
problem of mud today. Distributed in the US by Books International.
U27 978-90-04-15458-2
War and sacrifice; studies in the archaeology of conflict.
Title main entry. Ed. by Tony Pollard and Iain Banks. (Journal of con-
flict archaeology; v.2)
BRILL, ©2007 224 p. $132.00
It is no accident that so many sites and artifacts of prehistory have a
close relationship with conflict, either in offense, as in weapons, or in
defense, as in fortifications or secured living spaces. In these ten essays
contributors remark on the underappreciated role of conflict in pre-
history, as recent findings have tended to focus on the purely domestic,
but also acknowledge the ways in which both approaches can inform
each other. They cover such issues as climate change and socio-political
crises in Neolithic central Europe, invasion theories and warfare in
Bulgaria, evidence of seventeenth-century conflict in Derry City, Indo-
European warfare, evidence of a life of fear in Iron Age France, the devel-
opment of warfare from 3000-500 BCE in the British Isles, Hexheim’s
lessons on war and ritual, conflict archeology in Ireland, and Finnish
experiences of endemic violence. Includes related book reviews.
U29 2006-029538 0-313-33348-3
The ancient world.
Gabriel, Richard A. (Soldiers’ lives through history)
Greenwood Press, ©2007 305 p. $65.00
American military historian Gabriel covers a period from the beginning
of the Bronze Age, about 4,000 BCE through the end of the Roman and
Byzantine Empires. First he addresses such aspects of military life as the
physical conditions of soldiers, equipment, discipline and punishment,
tactics, death and wounding, and military medical care. Then he profiles
18 major armies of antiquity, including those of Sumer and Akkad,
China, Persia, Imperial Greece, Carthage, and Imperial Rome.
U41 2006-029487 0-313-33269-X
The nineteenth century.
Neiberg, Michael S. (Soldiers’ lives through history)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 205 p. $65.00
A specialist in the study of war and society, Neiberg (history, U. of
Southern Mississippi) examines how European militaries reflected the
development of nationalism during the century, concentrating on the
experience of common soldiers. He divides the period between the age of
men from the French Revolution to German Unification, and the age of
machines from the Franco-Prussian war through The Great War.
–312–
U55 2005-055226 978-1-57488-810-2
Guderian; Panzer pioneer or myth maker?
Hart, Russell A. (Military profiles)
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 145 p. $13.95 (pa)
Everyone knows that Heinz Guderian (1888-1954) was the father of the
German armored force and brilliant practitioner of Blitzkrieg maneuver
warfare, but Hart (history, Hawaii Pacific U.) points out that everyone
knows it because he told them so in his very popular memoir of World
War II. He offers a biography based on other sources as well, and finds
Guderian to have been a great military figure, but hardly the legend he
made of himself and sold to historians. Distributed in the US by Books
International.
U101 2006-042083 978-0-8348-0565-1
The illustrated book of five rings.
Miyamoto, Musashi.
Weatherhill, Inc., ©2006 156 p. $24.95
This is a translation of samurai Miyamoto Musashi’s 1643 treatise on the
“science of the martial arts.” Also included in the volume is the trans-
lation of another Japanese work on military strategy, The Book of Family
Traditions in the Art of War, written in 1632 by Yagyu Munenori, a
mentor of the Shogun. The texts are accompanied by color reproductions
of art and artifacts related to Japanese military culture of the period.
U150 2005-013919 0-415-36696-8
The fog of peace and war planning; military and strategic
planning under uncertainty.
Title main entry. Ed. by Talbot C. Imlay and Monica Duffy Toft.
Routledge, ©2006 282 p. $37.95 (pa)
If there is a long-recognized fog of war, in which uncertainty hampers
military planning and decision-making in times of conflict, than cer-
tainly the fog of peace imposes even greater uncertainty on military
planners, including the problems of identifying friend and foe, under-
standing the nature of future war, and determining its timing. Imlay
(history, U. Laval, Canada) and Toft (public policy, John F. Kennedy
School of Government, Harvard U., US) hope to shed light on these issues
through the presentation of case studies examining national strategic and
military planning for interstate war during four peacetime eras: 1815-54,
including discussion of Russia, Austria, Prussia, and the German
Confederation; 1871-1914, looking at Germany and Britain; 1919-39,
exploring British Air Force and American Navy planning; and post-1945,
examining US plans for War with the Soviet Union and the remaking of
French military power. In addition to the national case studies, each
period is considered in more general terms related to the changing tech-
nological and political landscape condition possible future wars.
U162 2006-927295 0-7618-3538-5
The comedy of war; understanding military policy and
politics for twenty-first century.
Bracey, Earnest N.
Univ. Press of America, ©2006 96 p. $19.95 (pa)
Retired Army Lieutenant Colonel Bracey (political science, Jackson State
U.) the animated films Antz and A Bug’s Life, Dr. Seuss’s children’s book
The Butter Battle Book, and his own fictionalized scenario of intelligent
insects waging war on humans to reflect on some of the politics and deci-
sions of war at the highest level. Much of the emphasis is on the uncer-
tainty of war and the way leaders make bad decisions based in
ignorance and often hubris.
U162 2006-361405 0-415-39992-0
Nuclear terrorism after 9/11.
Frost, Robin M. (Adelphi paper; no.378)
Taylor & Francis, ©2005 88 p. $26.95 (pa)
Frost (an analyst with the government of Canada) reviews the evidence
regarding the current threat of nuclear terrorism. He winds up throwing
cold water on much of the overheated discussion about the threat, while
not entirely dismissing it as an issue of concern. Among his observations:
there is no evidence of a Russian “loose nukes” black market; terrorist
groups are highly unlikely to be able to build their own nuclear weapon;
the greatest danger from so-called dirty bombs (radiation dispersal
devices) come from their conventional explosive effects; nuclear-weapons
states are extremely unlikely to hand their prized weapons over to ter-
rorist groups; terrorists are not motivated by a psychotic need for mass
murder, but are instead motivated by policy issues which can be
addressed; and, even if all the above assertions are incorrect, nuclear
weapons in the hands of terrorists can not pose an existential threat to
the United States in the sense of destroying it as a viable political and
economic entity.
–313–
U162 2006-013508 978-0-415-37103-2
Science, strategy and war; the strategic theory of John
Boyd.
Osinga, Frans P.B. (Strategy and history; v.18)
Routledge, ©2007 313 p. $120.00
It would be difficult to overstate the influence of former US Air Force
officer John Boyd (1927-1997) on many military theorists in the Western
world (although his work is hardly beyond controversy), yet until this
book by Osinga (an officer in the Royal Netherlands Air Force) there
hasn’t been an attempt to systematically interpret Boyd’s theory and
place it in the context of the scientific theories which influenced Boyd in
his own theorization of the OODA loop (Observation, Orientation,
Decision, and Action). Osinga’s explication of Boyd is based on the
premise that the conceptual process by which Boyd arrived at the OODA
loop. He thus discusses Boyd’s professional background as a fighter pilot;
the strategic and defense-political context of the US in the post-Vietnam
era; Boyd’s study of earlier military strategists, including Sun-Tzu, Julian
Corbett, T.E. Lawrence, J.F.C Fuller, and Basil Liddell Hart; and the sci-
entific theories he drew from, such as Darwinian evolution, Gödel’s
Incompleteness Theorem, and Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle. This
material is used to set provide prior context to a detailed explication of
Boyd’s slide presentations, as well as his written work.
U240 2006-004221 1-59797-015-8
Chasing ghosts; unconventional warfare in American
history.
Tierney, John J.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 289 p. $26.95
Equating unconventional warfare with irregular, guerrilla, partisan, low-
intensity, “people’s” and revolutionary wars, Tierney (internal relations,
Institute of World Politics) examines conflicts that involved Americans as
prime combatants before the current war in Iraq. He discusses the
Revolutionary War, guerilla fighting in the American Civil War, the
Philippine Insurrection, US occupations of the Dominican Republic, Haiti
and Nicaragua, and other conflicts, concluding from his many examples
that conventional military services repeatedly ignore the lessons learned
from unconventional warfare.
U850 978-0-906094-52-5
Medieval Islamic swords and swordmaking; Kindi’s
treatise on On Swords and their Kinds .
Hoyland, Robert G. and Brian Gilmour.
E.J.W. Gibb Memorial Trust, ©2006 216 p. $55.00
Known as the philosopher of the Arabs, Yaqub ibn Ishaq al-Kindi first
appears in Baghdad about 820 AD, where he served the caliph. He is
thought to have died about 860. Among his many treatises on philo-
sophical and practical matters, especially ideas from foreign lands, was
one on the different kinds of swords and how they are made. Hoyland
(Middle East studies, U. of St. Andrews) and Gilmour (archaeology and
the history of art, U. of Oxford) present the text in Arabic with facing
pages of English, comment on it, discuss descriptions of swords in con-
temporary poetry, and append two similar texts and photographs of the
manuscripts. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.
UA10 2006-017355 978-0-7425-2866-6
Elusive security; states first, people last.
Neack, Laura. (New millennium books in international studies)
Rowman & Littlefield, ©2007 263 p. $24.95 (pa)
The historical and ongoing centrality of the state in definitions of security
leads to particular behaviors and policies in defense of state sovereignty
and national security, many of which come into conflict alternative for-
mulations of international security and human security. Exploring these
issues, Neack (political science, Miami U. of Ohio) describes how states
define security for themselves, how they perceive internal and external
threats to their security, and how such formulations impact the use of
state violence and the identity of victims of such force as states address
terrorism, military and other threats from rival states, and threats to be
“pre- empted” in the sense of the Bush Doctrine. He also offers chapters
considering the issue of state sovereignty as it relates to (and has hin-
dered) efforts to construct agendas of international and human security.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
UA15 2006-931212 1-60105-023-2
Armies of Asia and Europe; embracing official reports on
the armies of Japan, China, India, Persia, Italy, Russia,
Austria, Germany, France, and England. (reprint, 1878)
Upton, Emory.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2006 376 p. $29.90 (pa)
In 1875 General Upton was relieved of his relatively comfortable duty at
West Point and sent across the US and then around the world to
determine exactly what the US was facing in the increasingly uncom-
fortable world of the late nineteenth century. In precise if slightly patron-
izing detail Upton describes the means of educating strategists, training
line officers and fighting men, procuring material, and developing pref-
erences for patterns of war. The result is a series of echoes of the future
issued from as far away as six or seven decades.
UA23 2006-023380 978-1-59797-060-0
Leading at the speed of light; new strategies for U.S.
security in the information age.
Gerstein, Daniel M. (Issues in twenty-first century warfare)
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 184 p. $24.00 (pa)
In his earlier Securing America’s Future: National Strategy in the
Information Age, Gerstein (a retired US Army officer and strategist and
recent Military Fellow on the Council on Foreign Relations) argued that
the advent of the Information Age demanded that the United States adopt
a fundamentally new approach to national security and strategy and laid
out the principles of such an approach. Here he argues that a corre-
sponding change in the type of national security leadership is also
needed, a change that will encourage incorporation of new tools for
analysis; openness to greater perspective in developing national security
strategy; and an ability to promote imagination, innovation, and ini-
tiative. Distributed in the US by Books International.
UA23 2006-030145 978-1-59797-100-3
Seeing the elephant; the U.S. role in global sercurity.
Binnendijk, Hans and Richard L. Kugler.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 319 p. $30.00 (pa)
Writing primarily for students of US war colleges, the authors (both of
the Center for Technology and National Security Policy at the National
Defense U. in Washington, DC) chart the intellectual history of national
security thinking since the end of the Cold War. They suggest that, like
the fabled Buddhists feeling different parts of an elephant, surveying
together the different concepts and schools of thought of books by the 50
American national security writers discussed can lead to a better under-
standing of the holistic picture of the United States and its role in inter-
national affairs. They have structured their analysis according to authors
that offer a neo- Kantian view of growing democratization and economic
prosperity, those that put forward a neo-Hobbesian perspective empha-
sizing stressful security affairs and frequent military solutions, those that
emphasize the impact of technological developments in world affairs,
and those that examine the evolution of American national security
strategy in the contemporary world. Distributed in the US by Books
International.
UA23 2006-016181 978-0-8330-3881-4
Striking first; preemptive and preventive attack in U.S.
national security policy.
Title main entry. Ed. by Karl P. Mueller et al.
RAND, ©2006 311 p. $30.00 (pa)
This Rand Corporation monograph explores the military implications of
George W. Bush’s announcement that the US will use preemptive attacks
in response to anticipated threats, later codified with the publication of
the 2002 National Security Strategy. Recognizing that the administration’s
definition of preemptive attack includes preventive attacks, the authors
come to a number of principal conclusions about the implications for US
defense planning of the use of preventive and preemptive attacks. These
conclusions include the propositions that military requirements for antic-
ipatory attacks will be case-specific, that anticipatory attack strategies
place high demands on strategic intelligence capabilities, that the pre-
emption of cross-border aggression requires quick and decisive strikes,
that preventive attacks on nuclear threats call for extremely effective intel-
ligence and strike capabilities, that sustained attacks on small groups of
terrorists requires increasing special operations forces, and that reliance
on anticipatory attack as a key strategy can be perilous and is not nec-
essarily the sole prerogative of the United States.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
UA25 2006-021062 0-275-98107-X
The Army after next; the first postindustrial army.
Adams, Thomas K.
Praeger Security International, ©2006 327 p. $49.95
In recent years, many military theorists became convinced that new
information technologies were generating a “revolution in military
affairs” (RMA). In response, the Department of Defense undertook to
transform the U.S. Armed Forces by adopting RMA concepts. In this
study, national security consultant Adams critically examines the U.S.
Army’s attempts to make this hypothetical revolution a reality. Particular
attention is paid to the effects of RMA concepts on American operations
in Afghanistan and Iraq.
UA26 2005-037587 978-0-8139-2575-2
Black, white, and olive drab; racial integration at Fort
Jackson, South Carolina, and the civil rights movement.
Myers, Andrew H. (The American South Series)
U. of Virginia Press, ©2006 287 p. $39.50
Fort Jackson was racially integrated by its commander in 1950 and
became one of the first to implement President Truman’s 1952 order to
integrate the military in general, but Myers (American studies and
history, U. of South Carolina-Upstate) finds the story as told during the
middle 1950s to be incomplete. He explores why integration took place at
a single post and the impact that had on the desegregation of nearby
civilian buses, schools, houses, and public facilities. Throughout he
examines how base commanders and staff navigated challenges while
working with municipal authorities, state politicians, national legislators,
and the upper echelons of the military and government.
UA26 2006-028571 0-275-99152-0
Military base closure; a reference handbook.
Sorenson, David S. (Contemporary military, strategic, and security
issues)
Praeger, ©2006 198 p. $55.00
US military base closure is governed by a highly regularized process
called base realignment and closure (BRAC). In this volume, Sorenson
(national security studies, US Air War College) details that process and
analyzes the impact of politics on how it is implemented and its effects.
He examines the varying reasons for base closures, pre-BRAC processes
of closure, and the 2005 BRAC process. He judges the 2005 BRAC to have
fallen far short of its goals, partly through the political activities of
domestic base defenders, although individual base conversions were
largely successful.
UA607 978-0-7734-5588-7
Military disengagement and democratic consolidation in
post-military regimes; the case of El Salvador.
Miller, Andrew P.
Edwin Mellen Pr., ©2006 111 p. $.00
From the 1930s onwards, El Salvador cycled through a series of military
governments, although with the 1992 settlement of the Civil War, it
seemed possible that the military could be permanently disconnected
from political affairs, a judgment that Miller (political science, Wilkes U.)
affirms as he explores the institutional dynamics of the El Salvadoran
military and its relationship with other societal forces. His case study
explores military self-perception, military views of and interactions with
civilian politicians, and the facets of the Peace Accords that have
encouraged military professionalization.
UA649 2006-925874 0-601-05019-4
The regimental history of Cromwell’s army. (reprint,
1940)
Firth, Charles.
Scholar’s Bookshelf, ©2006 768 p. $39.95 (pa)
This softcover reprint of the 1940 edition combines two volumes into a
single book. A combined effort of Firth (modern history) and Davies
(Huntington Library, California), the text provides a regiment-by-regiment
account of the horse and foot regiments of Cromwell’s army in England
and Scotland. The text includes a detailed introduction discussing the role
of Cromwell and the nature of military revolution involved in the con-
struction and management of the regiments.
–314–
UA710 978-1-59797-069-3
Fighting for the Fatherland; the German soldier from
1648 to the present day.
Stone, David.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 464 p. $29.95
After a career as a British army infantry officer, much of it in Germany,
Stone became a military historian and writer in 2002 and has already
produced several books on a wide range of military topics. Here he traces
changes in the German military from the end of the Thirty Years War
through the army of Frederick the Great, unification, the world wars,
and reunification to the present. As the title suggests, he is more inter-
ested in events in the field than high-level political or theoretical ele-
ments. Distributed in the US by Books International.
UA832 2006-018359 0-275-99186-5
Arab-Israeli military forces in an era of asymmetric wars.
Cordesman, Anthony H.
Praeger, ©2006 416 p. $89.00
Cordesman (Center for Strategic and International Studies) summarizes
the overall balance of military forces in the Middle East. Covering Egypt,
Israel, Jordan, Lebanon, Syria, and Palestine, he reports on each state’s
military force structures, material, and personnel; describes arms exports
and imports; and reviews strategic, operational, and tactical doctrines.
Where applicable, he also discusses similar information for significant
non-state militia forces, such as Hamas in Palestine and Hezbollah in
Lebanon. Unfortunately, the book seems to have gone to press just prior
to the 2006 Israeli invasion of Lebanon, which demonstrated Hezbollah
to be a much stronger and more effective force vis-à-vis the Israelis than
many had previously thought.
UA832 2006-031049 0-275-99250-0
Gulf military forces in an era of asymmetric wars; 2v.
Cordesman, Anthony H. and Khalid R. Al-Rodhan.
Praeger Security International, ©2007 598 p. $185.00
This two-volume work provides a detailed assessment of different
national military forces arrayed across the Gulf region. The authors (both
of the Center for Strategic and International Studies) first address the
regional military and security picture, addressing such issues as Islamist
terrorism, growing Iranian regional power, Iraq as a power vacuum,
broad regional military trends, and the changing nature of military
power. Individual chapters are then offered on Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman,
Qatar, Saudi Arabia, the United Arab Emirates, Iran, Iraq, and Yemen.
Each of these chapters profiles the resources, arms, and manpower of
each country’s military and other security forces (including intelligence
agencies) and reviews the country’s particular strategic concerns and
challenges.
UA832 2004-026832 978-0-415-36586-4
Weapons proliferation and war in the greater Middle
East; strategic contest.
Russell, Richard L. (Contemporary security studies)
Routledge, ©2005 213 p. $115.00
Russell (National Defense U.) employs classical realism to analyze the
dynamics of weapons proliferation and war in the Middle East and South
Asia. After reviewing the strategic rivalries of the region, he examines the
uses and limitations of chemical weapons as instruments of deterrence
and war, surveys the development and use of ballistic missiles since the
1990-1991 Gulf War (paying particular attention to Iran), and discusses
the likely impact of a nuclear-armed Iran. He also looks at the motiva-
tions for Saudi Arabia to acquire nuclear weapons, explores Chinese
strategic involvement in the region, and critically engages the argument
that balance-of-power and deterrent calculations would lead to the
nuclear stability achieved by the US and the USSR during the Cold War.
Finally, he considers the implications of the foregoing material for
American statecraft.
–315–
UA927 1-59237-151-5
The Grey House homeland security directory, 2007, 4th
ed.
Title main entry.
Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2006 929 p. $195.00 (pa)
The latest edition of this resource text contains 4,000-plus entries for
federal agencies, state agencies, private sector manufacturers and sup-
pliers of products and services, and a variety of information resources
for further research, including associations, periodicals, trade shows and
seminars, directories and databases, and websites. Each entry includes
the agency/business name, contact information, a list of key personnel,
and, in many cases, a brief description of the agency or company’s
purpose. Featuring some 570 more listings than the third edition, the
newest Directory has been updated throughout to reflect staffing and
organizational changes in the Department of Homeland Security and in
the industry as a whole over the past year. Indexed by entry, key per-
sonnel, and products and services.
UB250 2006-031165 0-275-98942-9
Strategic intelligence; 5v.
Title main entry. Ed. by Loch K. Johnson. (Intelligence and the quest
for security)
Praeger Security International, ©2007 1824 p. $450.00
Johnson (public and international affairs, U. of Georgia) brings together
contributors from academia, intelligence agencies and other government
organizations, think tanks, and the legal professions for this five-volume
overview of the current status of the field of intelligence studies. Each
volume contains ten or so articles, with the opening volume offering dis-
cussions of the methods used to study intelligence in the United
Kingdom, Canada, and the United States in addition to articles exploring
relations between intelligence officers and policy makers, the intelligence
failures associated with the 9/11 attacks and Iraqi (lack of) weapons of
mass destruction, the career of Sherman Kent (“the dean of CIA ana-
lysts”), and future prospects. The second volume focuses on the intelli-
gence cycle from collection, analysis, and dissemination of information.
The opening chapter considers the complexity of the intelligence cycle
beyond the typical model, while later contributions look more specifically
at signals intelligence, imagery intelligence, human intelligence, open-
source intelligence, and technical difficulties of intelligence sorting.
Covert action is considered in volume three’s examinations of tradecraft,
CIA covert propaganda operations, political and economic forms of
covert action, and the comparative uses of diplomacy versus covert
action. Counterintelligence and counterterrorism issues are discussed
next, including counterespionage, European efforts to replicate the coun-
terintelligence capabilities of the American Federal Bureau of
Investigation, and the rising role of women in terrorist organizations. The
final volume addresses the question of accountability and safeguards
against abuses, examining British and American experiences along with
more general considerations. Approximately a third of each volume con-
tains appendixes of government documents and other primary sources
(including legislation, congressional reports, and special commission
reports) relevant to the topics discussed in the particular volume.
UB271 2006-015639 978-1-59114-652-0
Capturing Jonathan Pollard; how one of the most
notorious spies in American history was brought to
justice.
Olive, Ronald J.
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 299 p. $27.95
While working as a United States Naval civilian intelligence analyst in the
1980s, Jonathan Pollard sold some one million pages of classified
material to Israel, doing “irreparable damage to the national defense of
the United States,” in the eyes of author Olive, who was serving as the
assistant special agent in charge of foreign counterintelligence at the
Naval Investigative Service’s Washington, D.C., field office at the time of
Pollard’s arrest. In this book he sets out to clear up what he perceives as
continuing misperceptions and uncertainties about Pollard’s spying activ-
ities, arrest, and imprisonment, including those surrounding Pollard’s
confession, other involved countries, and the role played by the 46-page
memorandum provided to the judge by Secretary of Defense Caspar
Weinberger in Pollard’s sentencing.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
UB357 2006-006904 978-0-15-100710-3
Over here; how the G.I. Bill transformed the American
dream.
Humes, Edward.
Harcourt, ©2006 319 p. $26.00
Quite by accident, according to Pulitzer Prize-winning journalist Humes,
the Servicemen’s Readjustment Act of 1944, better known as the GI Bill
of Rights, sparked a profound transformation of American society and
resulted in mass homeownership, greater access to higher education for
all Americans, and the growth of suburbia. Humes describes the origins
of the bill and illustrates its impact on American society through stories
of its effects on individual veterans lives.
UB403 2006-022874 978-0-275-98962-0
Following the flag; marriage and the modern military.
Alt, Betty L.
Praeger Security International, ©2006 138 p. $44.95
Alt, who was married to a soldier during the Vietnam War, traces the
American history of wives accompanying their husbands to war, charac-
terizes the amenities granted military families, and shares how spouses
grieve or feel left behind during a long deployment. The author confronts
the unpleasant reality of adultery and domestic violence, citing studies
and statistics when available.
UF520 2006-006562 0-415-77051-3
Small arms and security; new emerging and international
norms.
Garcia, Denise. (Contemporary security studies)
Routledge, ©2006 266 p. $120.00
Garcia (political science and international affairs, Northeastern U., US)
explores how states and other actors are engaged in establishing inter-
national norms to address the spread of small arms, a problem she says
can only be understood in the new framework of global governance.
Among the norms she examines are the destruction and disposal of
surplus weapons, regulating illicit arms brokering, regulating civilian
gun ownership, and banning the sale of weapons to non-state actors.
UG443 2006-049203 978-90-04-15489-6
Vauban under siege; engineering efficiency and martial
vigor in the War of the Spanish Succession.
Ostwald, Jamel. (History of warfare; 41)
BRILL, ©2006 390 p. $159.00
The arrival of gunpowder on European battlefields in the 13th century
tipped the advantage in sieges to the attacker. Ostwald (history, Eastern
Connecticut State U.) explains the central role that Sébastien le Prestre de
Vauban’s (1633-1707) design of fortifications played in shifting the
advantage back to defense. From a family of poor provincial nobles in
Burgundy, Vauban volunteered for the army, and his abilities as a mil-
itary engineer eventually propelled him to the highest honors. His design
principles, indeed some of the actual structures he designed, continued
to play a role in the French military through World War II.
UG634 2002-116263 0-7385-1160-9
Naval Air Station, Lakehurst.
Pace, Kevin et al. (Images of America)
Arcadia Publishing, ©2003 128 p. $19.99 (pa)
The naval air station in Lakehurst, New Jersey, grew from a gas warfare
proving ground in WWI to the focal point of lighter-than-air operations
in the US. B&w photographs and detailed captions from the archives of
the Navy Lakehurst Historical Society chronicle the people and
machinery of the base’s 85-year history and showcase its contributions to
the development of aviation and national defense. The author is affiliated
with the Navy Lakehurst Historical Society. There is no subject index.
UG635 2006-920969 0-7385-3132-4
Moffett Field.
Veronico, Nicholas A. (Images of America)
Arcadia Publishing, ©2006 127 p. $19.99 (pa)
A pictorial history of Naval Air Station Sunnyvale from birth at the start
of the 1930s through the dirigible era, WWII, and NASA’s reign. Less
lighter-than-air coverage than we’d like—see the same publisher’s
“Lakehurst” for more. The book is almost exclusively historic photos with
abundant and authoritative captions.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
UG1312 978-1-55238-211-0
“Just dummies”; cruise missile testing in Canada.
Clearwater, John Murray.
Univ. of Calgary Press, ©2006 283 p. $34.95 (pa)
Completing his trilogy on the history of nuclear weapons in Canada, mil-
itary and strategic analyst and consultant Clearwater describes the
testing of cruise missiles between 1978 and 1995, and shows how the
structure of politics and the military in Canada is set up to serve the mil-
itary requirements of the US. His basic story is the process by which the
Canadian government of Pierre Trudeau came to view the cruise missile
program as essential to maintaining good relations with the US.
Distributed in the US by Michigan State University Press.
UH720 2006-026016 0-275-99308-6
Military organizations for homeland defense and smaller-
scale contingencies; a comparative approach.
Stringer, Kevin D.
Praeger Security International, ©2006 222 p. $49.95
Although the US military is well organized for conventional force-on-
force engagements, Stringer (a graduate of the US Army Command and
General Staff College) argues that it is note organizationally prepared for
military operations other than war “in places like Grozny, Falluja, New
Orleans, and New York City.” He provides recommendations for the
development of specialized, dedicate, and heterogeneous formations for
specific missions under the umbrella of homeland security and smaller-
scale contingency operations. His recommendations are based on identi-
fication and assessment of comparative units found in other military
organizations around the world.
V23 978-1-86176-204-7
Falconer’s new universal dictionary of the Marine, 1815
edition.
Title main entry. Ed. by William Burney,
Chatham Publishing, ©2006 — p. $95.00
William Falconer was a British naval purser turned writer and poet. The
Universal Marine Dictionary was originally compiled by Falconer and
published in 1769. Falconer died while at sea, but the dictionary con-
tinued to sell well in the years after his death and was periodically
reprinted. In 1815, an almost entirely new edition was produced by
William Burney, a naval antiquarian at the British Naval Academy in
Gosport who had access to the most up-to-date information of the time.
This reprint of the 1815 text provides an accurate reflection of the actual
practice of the navy that fought the Napoleonic Wars. Illustrated with 35
b&w plates. Distributed in the U.S. by Naval Institute Press.
V55 978-90-04-15450-6
Christian IV and his navy; a political and administrative
history of the Danish navy 1596-1648.
Bellamy, Martin. (The northern world; v.25)
BRILL, ©2006 297 p. $147.00
Bellamy’s (Glasgow Museums) Ph.D. dissertation in modern history (U.
of Glasgow, 1997) examined the careers of Scottish shipwrights who
worked for the Danish navy, and analyzed their ship designs. Here he
expands and re-casts that study to focus primarily on the political and
administrative functioning of the Navy, and its role in Danish state
building. Christian and his mighty army have been so mythologized over
the centuries, he says, that few have noticed the dearth of serious history
about it.
V64 978-0-7748-1295-5
Betrayed; scandal, politics, and Canadian naval
leadership.
Mayne, Richard O. (Studies in Canadian military history)
U. of British Columbia Press, ©2006 279 p. $85.00
Mayne tells how in January 1944, Royal Canadian Navy Vice Admiral
Percy Walker Nelles was fired as chief of the naval staff, the victim of a
feud between factions among officers of the Navy. The official story was
that he had been transferred to Britain to coordinate the Canadian Navy’s
part in the upcoming invasion of Europe. Distributed in the US by
University of Washington Press.
–316–
V874 2005-015230 1-57488-663-0
Aircraft carriers; a history of carrier aviation and its
influence on world events, 2d ed.; v.1.
Polmar, Norman.
Potomac Books, Inc., ©2006 576 p. $49.95
An internationally known analyst, consultant, and author specializing in
naval, aviation, and intelligence issues, Polmar has written some 40
books. In this first volume of a two-volume set, Polmar presents an
analysis of carrier developments and warfare in the first half of the 20th
century, with particular attention given to carrier operations from WWI,
through the Japanese strikes against China in the 1930s, to WWII in the
Atlantic, Mediterranean, Arctic, and Pacific theaters. The text is a revised
edition of the 1969 publication, Aircraft Carriers: A Graphic History of
Carrier Aviation and Its Influence on World Events; specific changes to the
text are not stated. Illustrated throughout with b&w photographs, maps,
and charts. Distributed in the U.S. by Books International.
VA454 1-86176-288-7
Feeding Nelson’s navy; the true story of food at sea in the
Georgian era.
MacDonald, Janet.
Chatham Publishing, ©2006 224 p. $21.95 (pa)
In this celebration of the Georgian sailor’s diet, Macdonald explains how
the navy’s administrators fed a fleet of more than 150,000 men in ships
that were often at sea for months at a time and had no recourse to refrig-
eration. She describes surprisingly varied meals and includes recipes for
such delicacies as sea pie, lobscouse and burgoo. Distributed in the US
by Naval Institute Press.
VA454 2006-372805 978-1-84486-007-4
An illustrated history of the Royal Navy.
Winton, John.
Conway Maritime Press, ©2005 232 p. $49.95
Between his retirement from the British Navy and his death, Conway pro-
duced many novels and naval histories. Apparently this is his text,
sprinkled liberally with mostly color illustrations from the collections of
the Royal Naval Museum. Less clear is whether the text was written
specifically for this work, first published in 2000 by Salamander Books,
or has been gleaned from his other books. The time span ranges from
King John in the 13th century to the nuclear age. The volume is very over-
sized: 10.5″ deep and 14″ high.
VA456 1-86176-281-X
Ships of the Royal Navy; the complete record of all
fighting ships of the Royal Navy from the 15th century to
the present.
Colledge, J. J. and Ben Warlow.
Chatham Publishing, ©2006 396 p. $44.95
The first version of naval historian Colledge’s reference on British war-
ships was published in two volumes in 1969. In 2003, after the author’s
death, Marlow (Royal Navy officer and historian) revised the listings, and
omitted certain minor vessels. In this fourth edition, he restores those
previously omitted that are considered genuine fighting vessels, com-
piling the vital characteristics of about 15,000 ships. The alphabetically
arranged entries provide the tonnage, dimensions, and armament at the
time each vessel was built, as well as other information such as building
site, when available. For modern ships, only tonnage is given. Scope
covers ships from both British and Commonwealth navies. The intro-
duction clarifies terminology and abbreviations. This book is distributed
in the US by Naval Institute Press.
VF346 2006-30946 1-59114-658-5
Principles of naval weapon systems.
Title main entry. Ed. by Craig M. Payne. (U.S. Naval Institute blue &
gold professional library)
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 412 p. $49.95
Designed for present and future officers, Payne’s (U.S. Naval Academy)
text provides a broad overview of naval weapon systems, focusing on
how a weapon system interacts within the physical constraints of the
environment. The publication is based on material drawn from previous
texts of the same title that have explained the principles for the last 40
years, with revisions and additional new materials provided by 11
current officers from the USN and USMC. Coverage includes electromag-
netic fundamentals, radar fundamentals, radar systems, tracking
systems, electronic combat, electro-optics sensing, electro-optical targets
and systems, underwater sounds, figure of merit, undersea warfare
systems, automatic control systems, ballistics and fire control, weapon
propulsion and architecture, guidance systems, fuzing, chemical explo-
sives, weapon damage effects, and weapons of mass destruction.
–317–
VG93 2006-019836 1-59114-794-8
Carrier battles; command decisions in harm’s way.
Smith, Douglas V.
Naval Institute Press, ©2006 346 p. $32.95
In analyzing the largest naval campaign in the world, Smith (strategy
and policy division, US Naval War College’s College of Distance
Education) studies the fateful decisions made by commanders in the
World War II carrier battles in the Coral Sea, Midway, the Eastern
Solomons, Santa Cruz and the Philippine Sea. He attempts to determine
the extent to which the commanders’ inter-war education at the US Naval
Academy and Naval War College translated into their decision processes.
VK139 1-55017-383-9
From the wheelhouse; tugboaters tell their own stories.
(reprint, 2003)
Armitage, Doreen.
Harbour Publishing, ©2006 182 p. $28.95 (pa)
This book recounts the history of the tugboat industry in British
Columbia and those who worked at whitewater freighting in British
Columbia, by incorporating interviews with captains, engineers, and
deckhands. They discuss their experiences with disasters, weather,
rescues, and salvages, as well as lighter topics such as practical jokes and
camaraderie. Many b&w photos are included. No bibliography is pro-
vided. Armitage has written articles and books on Canada and lives in
Vancouver. Distributed in the US by Graphic Arts Center Publishing.
VK1139 978-0-907871-58-3
Lighthouse.
Parker, Tony.
Dufour Editions, ©2007 296 p. $28.95 (pa)
They work on the vertical at the edge of cliffs, tending a white-hot light
and watching the sea lest it devour steel ships. Some have grown old
upon the spiral staircases, others are just starting out, but they are the
part of a community literally on the margins; they know the work, they
know each other, and all they know the consequences of a distracted
moment. Parker, who was probably England’s top interviewer and
therefore also its top oral historian, lets the lighthouse keepers speak for
themselves as they describe their fascination with the sea or even just in
water in general, the people they wanted to emulate and the others they
wanted to avoid, the storms, the doldrums, the families they left on the
ground to wait for them, and, most importantly, the various strangers
they had to endure in the tight living quarters.
VK1257 2006-047370 0-7432-8008-3
When the dancing stopped; the real story of the Morro
Castle and its deadly wake.
Hicks, Brian.
Free Press, ©2006 346 p. $25.00
In the summer of 1934, off the coast of New Jersey, the Morro Castle, a
well-known luxury liner returning from a Labor Day cruise to Havana,
caught fire during a tropical storm just hours after its captain was found
dead in his cabin. The ship was incinerated, some 134 passengers died,
and the rest forced to jump into the sea to survive. Based on recently
declassified FBI files, thousands of pages of investigation notes, tes-
timony, and new interviews, Hicks provides a fast-paced account
exploring the mystery of what exactly happened on the Morro Castle
seven decades ago. Hicks writes for the Post and Courier in Charleston,
South Carolina, and is the author and co-author of three previous books
on maritime subjects.
VM15 978-1-84217-228-5
Connected by the sea; proceedings.
International Symposium on Boat and Ship Archaeology (10th: 2003:
Roskilde, Denmark) Ed. by Lucy Blue et al.
Oxbow Books, ©2006 315 p. $130.00
Also used for the title of this volume, the theme of the 10th International
Symposium of Boat and Ship Archaeology (held in Denmark in
September of 2003) was chosen to emphasize the role of the sea, sea-
faring, and watercraft as bridges rather than barriers between cultures,
according to editors Blue (Centre for Maritime Archaeology, U. of
Southampton, UK), Hocker (Natinoal Maritime Museums of Sweden), and
Englert (Viking Ship Museum, Denmark). This theme was reflected in
the fact that 12 of the 51 collected papers were originally presented in
two sessions that explored long distance seafaring and the connections
between cultures and connections between land and sea. Other sessions
were held on examples and issues of experimental archaeology; theo-
retical issues in the construction of ships; historical, iconographic, and
ethnographic sources and approaches; news archaeological studies from
the Baltic, and new archaeological studies from around the world.
Distributed in the US by The David Brown Book Co.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007

VM322 2006-004217 1-57409-223-5
How to paint your boat; painting, varnishing, antifouling,
2d ed.
Clegg, Nigel.
Sheridan House, ©2006 138 p. $19.95 (pa)
Clegg, whose technical specialty is paint and whose journalistic specialty
is yachting, sticks closely to the realities of boat ownership as he
describes how paints and coatings work with surfaces to protect your
boat. He shows the many possible surfaces of boats, including cast iron
keels and all manners of woods, the even more numerous choices of fin-
ishes, and the best possible ways of getting them together. He gives
owners/painters a fighting chance by describing, in detail, the purposes
and qualities of paint, surface preparation, paint removing methods,
coating specifications, product application, color matching, doing
onboard and preventative maintenance, using antifouling products and
methods, paying attention to temperature and relative humidity, choosing
equipment, and protecting health and safety. He includes a trou-
bleshooting guide and glossary.
PUBLISHING, LIBRARY SCIENCE, BIBLIOGRAPHY
Z43 2004-116540 0-7641-5820-1
The bible of illuminated letters; a treasury of decorative
calligraphy.
Morgan, Margaret.
Barron’s Educational Ser., ©2006 256 p. $24.99
This generously illustrated, small format (6.5x8″) guidebook presents
step-by-step instructions for recreating illuminated alphabets from six his-
torical periods, including the Celtic, Gothic and Romanesque. Diagrams
for upper- and lower-case letters are accompanied by ideas for borders
and decorations. The guide also includes full instructions for gilding.
Morgan, a professional calligrapher and associate of the Calligraphy and
Lettering Arts Society, gives advice about adapting illuminated letters to
create a personal style.
Z106 978-1-85182-985-9
The medieval manuscripts of Christ Church Cathedral,
Dublin.
Title main entry. Ed. by Raymond Gillespie and Raymond Refaussé.
Four Courts Press, ©2006 192 p. $65.00
Beginning in the 1170s, the Augustinian cathedral priory at Christ
Church in Dublin commissioned, collected, and used manuscript mate-
rials in its everyday life, thus creating a series of codices and deeds
ranging from the 12th-century Martyrology to the 16th-century Books of
Obits. Seven Irish historians, archivists, and scholars of literature place a
selection of these manuscripts in their cultural and social context.
Distributed in the US by ISBS.
Z286 2005-280957 0-7456-3477-X
Books in the digital age; the transformation of academic
and higher education publishing in Britain and the
United States.
Thompson, John B.
Polity Press, ©2005 468 p. $79.95
Meeting lamentations about the death of the book with actual facts,
Thompson (sociology, U. of Cambridge) focuses on academic and higher
education publishing and analyses the evolution of these sectors from
1980 to the present. He shows that each sector is characterized by its own
dynamic of change and that by reconstructing this logic we can under-
stand the problems, challenges and opportunities faced by publishing
firms today. He also shows that the digital revolution has had, and con-
tinues to have, a profound impact on the book publishing business,
although the real impact of this revolution is quite different from the pro-
jected scenarios.
Z305 2006-005996 0-7546-5591-1
Print and power in France and England, 1500-1800.
Title main entry. Ed. by David Adams and Adrian Armstrong.
Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2006 157 p. $89.95
Elites, Print Media, and Social Control was an April 2003 conference held
in Manchester where scholars of history, literary, and culture gathered
explore the various ways in which socially privileged groups and their
groupies, especially in France and England, exploited print media in
attempts to maintain or reinforce their position during the three cen-
turies. Some focus narrowly on a particular instance, while others take
broad views.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
Z471 2006-019876 978-0-8047-5031-8
The culture and commerce of publishing in the 21st
century.
Greco, Albert N. et al.
Stanford U. Press, ©2007 262 p. $65.00
The authors, professors of marketing, sociology, and management
systems at Fordham U., bring their collective perspectives together in
order to provide a broad organizational and economic portrait of the US
book-publish industry as it has developed since 1945. Discussing both
commercial and scholarly book publishing, they discuss organizational
choice, the economics of publishing and the impact of technology,
changing demographics of producers and consumers, the various role of
people within the industry, and contemporary challenges facing the
industry.
Z475 978-0-9778617-2-9
Alternative publishers of books in North America, 6th ed.
Anderson, Byron.
Library Professional Pub., ©2006 178 p. $18.00 (pa)
Anderson (reference, Northern Illinois U. Libraries) profiles 126 US and
19 Canadian small publishers with a political left orientation, and
another 18 that have either an address or distributor in North America.
Each has at least five titles in print and average at least one new title a
year. The entries include title and contact information, editor ISBS prefix,
average new titles per year, number in print, other materials produced,
distributors, publication interests, and a paragraph on the history and
achievements of the press. Some also include a motto. A list of presses
and their imprints is included, along with a subject index referenced to
presses with that publication interest.
Z658 2006-016435 978-0-8108-5869-5
Censorship in the Arab world; an annotated bibliography.
Nsouli, Mona A. and Lokman I. Meho.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 147 p. $45.00 (pa)
Within country chapters, librarian Nsouli (Institute for Palestine Studies,
Beirut) and Meho (library and information science, Indiana U.-
Bloomington) cite and describe works in topical sections such as aca-
demic freedom, book banning, book trade, copyright and intellectual
property, freedom of the press, the Internet, journalistic ethics, radio and
television, and theater and film. Authors and titles are indexed.
Z672 2006-023753 1-59158-475-2
Charleston Conference proceedings 2005.
Charleston Conference (25th: 2005: Charleston, S.C.) Ed. by Beth R.
Bernhardt et al.
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 207 p. $40.00 (pa)
The 32 essays and discussions of this proceedings were presented at the
25th Charleston Conference, held in Charleston, South Carolina in
November, 2005. The essays offer first-hand reports on new types of elec-
tronic library services, including those used in collection development,
journal account management, product development, and online
resources. Other topics include library consortia, ordering from Amazon,
and actively engaging with the local community to improve library image
and function.
Z675 2006-025776 978-1-58683-219-3
Your library goes virtual.
Church, Audrey P.
Linworth Publishing, Inc., ©2007 120 p. $39.95 (pa)
This practical guide for building and district-level library media spe-
cialists describes how to develop school library Web pages to create a
virtual library. Arranged according to the key concepts in Information
Power: Building Partnerships for Learning, chapters cover information
access and delivery, content, learning and teaching, program adminis-
tration, development and implementation, technological aspects, and the
context of the larger learning community. The book includes examples
from several school websites and a list of sites mentioned. School admin-
istrators and technology coordinators and directors might also find it of
interest. Church (school library media, Longwood U.) was a building
level library specialist for 20 years.
–318–
Z682 2006-014896 978-1-55570-581-7
Managing student assistants; a how-to-do-it manual for
librarians.
Sweetman, Kimberly Burke. (How to do it manuals for librarians;
no.155)
Neal-Schuman, ©2007 187 p. $59.95 (pa)
This practical guide for academic and public librarians covers the fun-
damentals of supervising student assistants. Topics addressed include
recruiting the best candidates, training and orienting new hires, and
keeping turnover at a minimum. Each of seven chapters concludes with
a set of exercises and some suggestions for further reading. A sample
student worker handbook is found at the back of the volume. Sweetman
(New York U. Division of Libraries) is a training consultant in the area
of library management.
Z682 2006-014070 978-0-8108-5851-0
New librarian, new job; practical advice for managing the
transition.
Title main entry. Ed. by Cory Tucker & Reeta Sinha.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 236 p. $45.00 (pa)
Grizzled veterans from the stacks, the reference desk, the cataloging
station, and other fronts offer advice to graduate librarians who are
about to step into their first job in academic or public libraries. They
describe the various departments, discuss career advancement, and share
survival skills.
Z682 2005-036503 1-57387-256-3
The nextgen librarian’s survival guide.
Gordon, Rachel Singer.
Information Today, Inc., ©2006 208 p. $29.50 (pa)
Gordon discusses challenges faced by next-generation librarians (desig-
nated as those in their 20s and 30s and part of Generation X and Y),
some of which are specific to that age group and others that affect all
librarians. Library administrators, managers, and students are also the
audience for the book. She describes the effects of this age status on
librarianship, as well as how to move beyond it, opening with a chapter
on its definition. Those that follow address surviving library school; job
hunts and entry level positions; management positions; image, stereo-
types, and diversity; making connections with people and colleagues; and
finding balance between work and life. The final chapter on retention
and planning is aimed at administrators. Gordon worked in computer
services at a public library in Illinois and is now an editor at the book’s
publisher.
Z682 2006-023752 978-1-59158-180-2
Rethinking information work; a career guide for
librarians and other information professionals.
Dority, G. Kim.
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 222 p. $38.00 (pa)
Dority (University of Denver) explores the different professional situations
available to LIS graduates, characterizes the duties and salary of each
position, outlines the format and content of a career portfolio, and offers
ideas for learning more job skills. The end of each chapter suggests addi-
tional books, periodicals, articles, and online resources.
Z687 2005-018383 978-0-7890-3087-0
Collection development issues in the online environment.
Title main entry. Ed. by Di Su.
Haworth Pr., ©2006 170 p. $19.95 (pa)
Eleven contributions from academic librarians in Australia, Canada, the
UK, and the US address issues relating to electronic materials and col-
lection development. Sample topics include electronic journal delivery;
variations in the depth and quality of indexing of online databases; and
PDA serials acquisition. Editor Su teaches information literacy at York
College Library at the City U. of New York. The volume has been simul-
taneously co-published as The Acquisitions Librarian, v. 19, nos. 1/2
(#37/38) 2007.
–319–
Z688 2006-014894 978-1-55570-575-6
Libros esenciales; building, marketing, and programming
a core collection of Spanish language children’s materials.
Wadham, Tim.
Neal-Schuman, ©2007 322 p. $65.00 (pa)
In this resource for library professionals, Wadham offers general guide-
lines for collection development in the area of bilingual and Spanish lan-
guage materials for children and recommends some specific titles. He
also explains how to employ the materials in programming and market
the core collection to the community. He concludes with some listings of
review sources, publishers, and vendors. Wadham is Children’s Services
Coordinator for the Maricopa County Library District in Phoenix,
Arizona..
Z692 2006-006048 978-0-7890-3404-5
Marketing and managing electronic reserves.
Title main entry. Ed. by Trevor A. Dawes.
Haworth Pr., ©2006 151 p. $24.95 (pa)
Thirteen papers presented by Dawes (circulation services director,
Princeton U. Library) give guidance on how academic libraries can inte-
grate electronic reserve services into their operations and how they can
market electronic reserve systems to library users including faculty and
students. Topics include the relationship between electronic reserves and
traditional reserves systems, electronic reserves and course management
software, workflow management for electronic reserves using a relational
database, implement process improvement into electronic reserves, and a
technical overview of automation and integration of electronic reserves at
Columbia University. This volume has also been published as the Journal
of Interlibrary Loan, Document Delivery & Electronic Reserve, vol. 16, no.
4, 2006.
Z692 2006-000943 978-0-7890-3288-1
Roaring into our 20’s; NASIG 2005; proceedings.
North American Serials Interest Group Conference (20th: 2005:
Minneapolis, Minn.) Ed. by Margaret Mering and Elna Saxton.
Haworth Pr., ©2006 369 p. $29.95 (pa)
The North American Serials Interest Group (NASIG) celebrated its 20th
anniversary (hence the “roaring 20s” in the title) at the 2005 conference.
Serials librarians Mering (U. of Nebraska-Lincoln) and Saxton (U. of
Cincinnati) introduce 35 papers plus poster sessions. Highlights include
review of the MARC 21 format for holding data standards, the Serials
Esperanto concept, and technological trends that will further challenge
serials management. Group membership and conference registrants are
listed. Co-published simultaneously as The Serials Librarian, v. 50, nos.
1/2 and 3/4, 2006.
Z692 2006-023751 978-1-59158-258-8
Serials in libraries; issues and practices.
Black, Steve.
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 193 p. $45.00 (pa)
Black (Reference, Instruction, and Serials librarian at the College of St.
Rose) intends this book for library science students as well as librarians
with little experience selecting, acquiring, receiving, and maintaining
serials. In this book he introduces the principal issues regarding serials
in libraries, first offering a broad view of the subject and relevant defi-
nitions, then addressing issues surrounding budgeting for increasing
subscription prices, working with remote access serials, using serials,
and cataloguing them; when appropriate, he advises best practice. One
chapter addresses current issues in scholarly journal publishing. The
final chapter discusses methods for teaching patrons how to use both
print and remote access serials.
Z711 2006-012719 1-59158-176-1
Read on...horror fiction.
Pulliam, June Michele and Anthony J. Fonseca. (Read on series)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 182 p. $30.00 (pa)
In this reference for librarians and patrons, Pulliam (English, Louisiana
State University) and Fonseca, a librarian at Nicholls State University, cat-
egorize some 350 current and classic horror fiction titles, not according
to standard subgenres and themes, but according to their underlying fea-
tures, such as complex plots, erotic horror, big city horror, and favorite
monsters. Entries offer bibliographic information and brief plot sum-
maries to spark reader interest.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
Z716 2006-033743 978-1-59158-382-0
The library as place; history, community, and culture.
Title main entry. Ed. by John E. Buschman and Gloria J. Leckie.
Libraries Unlimited, ©2007 260 p. $50.00 (pa)
In this collection of 14 original papers contributors analyze the cultural,
symbolic and intellectual meanings of library spaces of all sorts, ages,
compositions and aspirations. Papers cover libraries of the past,
including the military libraries of the British Empire, the private libraries
of the early nineteenth century, and the Carnegie libraries; libraries as
places of communal experience, as in a black community before civil
rights, for women seeking public lives, for sexual minorities or for those
seeking an information community; as places of learning and schol-
arship as serendipitous space for scholars and goads for undergraduates;
and as elements of culture as places of pleasure or imagination, as in the
hellish library of Buffy the Vampire Slayer.
Z716 2006-002789 978-0-7890-3352-9
Library/vendor relationships.
Title main entry. Ed. by Sam Brooks and David H. Carlson.
Haworth Pr., ©2006 232 p. $24.95 (pa)
Containing 16 contributions from practitioners, this volume examines the
collaboration between libraries and database developers and vendors.
Sample topics include the role of library advisory boards and the man-
agement of downloading of electronic resources by library users. Editor
Brooks is an executive with EBSCO Information Services, and Carlson is
Dean of Library Affairs at Southern Illinois U. Carbondale. The volume
has been simultaneously co-published as Journal of Library
Administration, v.44, nos.3/4, 2006.
Z718 2006-023646 1-59158-352-7
Crash course in children’s services.
Peck, Penny. (Crash course)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 121 p. $25.00 (pa)
Peck (San Leandro Public Library) offers those working in small public
libraries a quick overview of services for children. Seven chapters focus
on the practical aspects of (for example) homework help, readers’
advisory, storytime, and programming. The final chapter deals with
special issues such as “latchkey” children, non-English speakers, and
Internet access. Services for teens and young adults are not covered.
Z733 2006-025930 0-275-99331-0
The book thief; the true crimes of Daniel Spiegelman.
McDade, Travis.
Praeger, ©2006 181 p. $49.95
As a librarian/lawyer, McDade (U. of Illinois at Urbana- Champaign) is
uniquely qualified to relate the saga of a larcenous bibliophile who stole
some $18 million of rare books and letters from Columbia U.’s library in
the spring of 1994. Drawing on interviews with people involved in the
story, but purposely excluding Spiegelman, he chronicles not only the
events but also the court’s groundbreaking application of federal sen-
tencing guidelines to “rare and unique elements of our cultural heritage.”
(They really threw the book at him!)
Z733 2006-042208 978-1-893663-19-0
Exploring the Bancroft Library; the centennial guide to its
extraordinary history, spectacular special collections,
research pleasures, its amazing future & how it all
works.
Title main entry. Ed. by Charles B. Faulhaber and Stephen Vincent.
Signature Books, Inc., ©2006 190 p. $39.95
Celebrating the centennial of the acquisition of the Bancroft collection by
the U. of California, Faulhaber (Spanish and Bancroft Library, U. of
California, Berkeley) and Vincent, a writer and editor, compile an
overview of the collection. Curators describe the holdings, including the
Western Americana, Latin Americana, and Pictorial Collections; rare
books and literary manuscripts; History of Science and Technology
Program; University Archives; Tebtunis Papyri; Mark Twain Papers and
Project; and Regional Oral History Office. Scholars, students, and artists
discuss their work at the library, and its research and publication pro-
grams are detailed. Photos and facsimiles of some of the manuscripts are
included. Highlights of the holdings are also listed. No index is provided.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
Z997 2006-042852 978-0-87169-257-3
The library of Benjamin Franklin.
Wolf, Edwin and Kevin J. Hayes. (Memoirs of the American
Philosophical Society; v.257)
Am. Philosophical Society, ©2006 966 p. $100.00
Librarian of the Library Company of Philadelphia, Wolf (1911-91) began
his reconstruction of Franklin’s library during the 1950s, but did not live
to complete the task. Hayes (English, U. of Central Oklahoma) completed
the work and brought it to publication. The catalogue cites actual sur-
viving copies owned by Franklin, titles he owned where incomplete doc-
umentary evidence precludes a more precise identification of the work,
and works he is known to have owned of which his personal copy has
not been located. The 3,735 entries include information about the
physical volume, cost, editions printed, and other matters.
Z1003 2005-019802 1-57233-471-1
Everyday ideas; socioliterary experience among
antebellum New Englanders.
Zboray, Ronald J. and Mary Saracino Zboray.
University of Tennessee Press, ©2006 430 p. $48.00
They did not quote literature just to show off. They chose carefully from
a wide array of memorized and printed collections, and often wrote they
wished they had new ideas to share. Teachers and other professionals we
expect to have a solid literary background were joined by homemakers
by trade or avocation, factory workers, shopkeepers and artisans in their
mutual appreciation of the word and the book, and the result is erudite,
witty, profound, and not particularly pretentious. The Zborays, who work
together as book historians, offer their gleanings from about 4,000
primary texts, including diaries and letters, showing that ordinary
people, given exposure to great works and the wherewithal to appreciate
and share them with others, get the point. The Zborays delve into pro-
duction, dissemination and reception, showing how democratic the
American Renaissance really was.
Z1003 2006-010495 978-0-8108-5436-9
Something to talk about; creative booktalking for adults.
Cyr, Ann-Marie and Kellie M. Gillespie.
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 123 p. $35.00 (pa)
Noting a lack of material for adult groups, Cyr, a reference librarian, and
Gillespie, a fiction specialist, describe the idea of booktalking and focus
specifically on instructions for putting a program together for adults.
They also discuss what a booktalk is, how librarians can choose a book
and write a talk that will create interest in a title, and how to publicize
a program, following this with 88 samples in a variety of genres, from
general fiction to nonfiction. Examples also contain bibliographic infor-
mation on the book, a list of related genres, and the general character-
istics of each.
Z1037 2006-031663 1-59158-410-8
Best books for high school readers; grades 9-12.
Supplement to the first edition.
Gillespie, John T. and Catherine Barr. (Children’s and young adult liter-
ature reference)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 314 p. $40.00
Published in 2004, the first edition of Best Books for High School Readers
provided librarians with an extensive list of recommended titles for youth
in grades 9-12. This supplement brings that reference up to date, covering
titles published between early 2004 and the middle of 2006. Over 2,500
annotated entries are organized by literary type or subject/theme. Review
citations direct readers to more detailed information found in such peri-
odicals as Booklist and School Library Journal.
Z1037 2006-031033 1-59158-411-6
Best books for middle school and junior high readers;
grades 6-9; supplement to the first edition.
Gillespie, John Thomas. (Children’s and young adult literature ref-
erence)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 339 p. $40.00
This supplement covers more than 2,600 recommended fiction and non-
fiction titles for children in grades 6-9 that have been published since the
first edition came out in 2004. Most have been recommended in at least
two sources. The volume is organized thematically into 11 main cate-
gories (biography, the arts, history, and so on) which are then further
divided and subdivided by topic (for example, sports figures, music, and
ancient history). In addition to basic bibliographical information, entries
contain review citations and brief annotations. Gillespie is the author of
more than 30 books on collection development.
–320–
Z1037 2006-028647 0-8242-1073-5
Children’s catalog, 19th ed.
Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Price. (Standard catalog series)
H.W. Wilson Company, ©2006 1670 p. $195.00
★★★★ Previous editions are cited in Guide to Reference Books and in
Public Library Catalog. The latest edition of this reference text for edu-
cators and librarians provides a list of print and electronic resources for
children from preschool through grade six, and review sources and other
professional aids for children’s librarians and school media specialists.
The updated text features some 9,000 fiction and nonfiction books and
3,000-plus analytical entries for items contained in anthologies; an abun-
dance of new listings on minorities, ecology, natural sciences, and
natural history; a new periodicals section, with listings of children’s peri-
odicals and professional journals for teachers and librarians; an
expanded section of internet resources; and a selection of recommended
graphic novels. The text includes an author, title, subject, and analytical
index. Future paper supplements for 2007 through 2009 are provided at
no additional cost.
Z1037 2006-012640 1-55570-551-0
The teen reader’s advisor.
Honnold, RoseMary. (Teens @ the library series)
Neal-Schuman, ©2006 491 p. $75.00 (pa)
Aimed at public and school librarians, this reference contains more than
1900 annotated listings of recommended titles for young adults. Titles are
organized into 18 thematic chapters, which are further divided into lists
of narrower sub-genres or topics. Honnold also offers some general
guidance on developing useful Reader’s Advisory practices and reviews
a number of print and electronic RA resources. Honnold is the Young
Adult Services Coordinator at the Coshocton Public Library in Ohio.
Z1231 2006-023647 1-59158-134-6
Read the high country; a guide to western books and
films.
Mort, John. (Genreflecting advisory series)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 488 p. $60.00
This guide focuses on Western books and films, listing about 2,000 titles
categorized by subgenre and theme, such as Native Americans, mountain
men, exploration, the army, range and ranch life, sagas, Western mys-
teries, and Western romances. Mort, a reference librarian, also provides
a brief history of the genre and a discussion of six writers: Zane Grey,
Max Brand, Ernest Haycox, Louis L’Amour, Elmer Kelton, and Larry
McMurtry. Book records list publishing information and setting, sum-
marize the plot, and note appeal to women, young adults, and book
clubs, and if books have Christian themes, are out of print, or have
received awards. Movie entries list cast and crew, production infor-
mation, setting, and star rating, and include a plot summary. Indexes are
by author/title/subject, settings, and film.
Z5917 2006-012711 978-1-59158-303-5
Read ‘em their writes; a handbook for mystery book
discussions.
Niebuhr, Gary Warren.
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 249 p. $35.00 (pa)
In this book club guide for mystery and crime fiction groups, Niebuhr
explains, for those in or starting book clubs, how to select books, while
recommending which are best. In addition, he suggests ways to conduct
a discussion and find a leader and participants. Noting that what works
may not fit the typical definition of the genre, he gives a list of 100 titles,
with background on the author and book and publishing information,
setting, time period, series notes, plot summary, subject headings, appeal
points, similar works, and questions. He then gives brief descriptions of
50 additional titles. A sampling: Margaret Atwood’s Blind Assassin, Dan
Brown’s Da Vinci Code, Arthur Conan Doyle’s Hound of the Baskervilles,
Harper Lee’s To Kill a Mockingbird, and books by Agatha Christie,
Cormac McCarthy, Dashiell Hammett, Tony Hillerman, John Le Carré,
Alexander McCall Smith, Walter Mosley, and others. Five indexes are
organized by author, title, subject, location, and time period. Niebuhr, a
librarian and author of other books on mysteries, has also led mystery
book discussion groups.
–321–
Z5956 2006-034156 978-1-59158-132-1
Graphic novels; a genre guide to comic books, manga,
and more.
Pawuk, Michael. (Genreflecting advisory series)
Libraries Unlimited, ©2007 633 p. $65.00
Pawuk (teen services librarian, Cuyahoga County Public Library system,
Ohio) presents a bibliographic guide to graphic novels (and trade paper-
backs) for librarians wishing to add ot their collection. Some 2,400 titles
are listed by genre (super-heroes, action and adventure, fantasy, crime
and mysteries, horror, contemporary life, humor, and nonfiction) and
sub-genres and annotated with summary descriptions, basic publishing
information, and age ratings. The listings have been chosen according to
the following criteria: popularity, suitability, age level, genre, writing
quality, artistic quality, artistic style, format, reputation, and awards and
recognition. Also listed are publisher addresses, web sites, and other
resources.
Z6941 978-1-891783-35-7
The national directory of magazines, 2007, 19th ed.
Title main entry.
Oxbridge Communications, ©2006 1757 p. $995.00 (pa)
Published annually, this comprehensive directory (in its 19th edition) fea-
tures US and Canadian magazines, tabloids, and major journals that
accept advertising. Approximately 1,400 titles are new this year and
updates have been made to all of the 19,000 listed. They are organized
by subject; medicine, regional interest, religion, ethnic, travel, business,
college alumni, college student press, comics, clubs and associations,
books and book trade, collectibles, health and fitness, and politics are
some of the categories. Newspaper supplements are included. Entries list
ISSN, a description of contents, the year established, frequency, circu-
lation, advertising, rental rates, target audience, and contact information.
Indexes are by title change, title/ISSN, publishers by state, online titles,
and multi-title publishers. Also supplied is a cross-index to subjects.
Z7128 978-90-04-15555-8
Bibliography of Islamic philosophy; supplement.
Daiber, Hans. (Handbook of Oriental studies. The Near and Middle
East; v.89)
BRILL, ©2007 426 p. $159.00
Daiber (oriental philology, Johann Wolfgang Goethe U., Germany)
updates specific articles in the 1999 Bibliography by citing and in many
cases describing books, articles, theses, and other works on the topic that
have appeared subsequently; as well as reprints, anthologies, and trans-
lations of works cited earlier. The arrangement is alphabetical by title,
and referenced to the original entry number.
Z7164 2005-044942 0-8058-4139-3
Children and television; fifty years of research. (CD-ROM
included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Norma Pecora et al. (LEA’s communication
series)
Lawrence Erlbaum, ©2007 389 p. $27.50 (pa)
Now that evidence is available on two generations, contributors from the
medical and social sciences review over 2,000 research reports published
between 1955 and 2005 to synthesize findings on how television affects
children. Their topics include how children’s television has changed, cog-
nitive development and educational achievement, social roles and mar-
ginality, advertising and consumer development, and violence. The
extensive bibliography is duplicated on then included CD-ROM.
Z7757 2006-026532 978-0-313-28754-1
Religions of Melanesia; a bibliographic survey.
Trompf, Garry W. (Bibliographies and indexes in religious studies,
no.57)
Greenwood Press, ©2006 695 p. $150.00
Trompf (history of ideas, U. of Sydney) continues the work of prede-
cessors who have thus served other parts of the Pacific region in earlier
volumes of the series. He cites and evaluates 2,188 books and articles on
the religion of Melanesia as a whole, and of various regions within it,
including New Guinea, Papua, Vanuatu, and Fiji. Cultures, authors, titles,
and subjects are indexed separately.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
Z7835 2006-014445 978-0-8108-5408-6
The literature of Islam; a guide to the primary sources in
English translation.
Skreslet, Paula Youngman & Rebecca Skreslet. (ATLA publications
series)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 243 p. $45.00 (pa)
Reference librarian and archivist Paula (Union Theological Seminary and
Presbyterian School of Christian Education, Virginia) and Rebecca, a
scholar of Arabic studies, present a critically annotated bibliography of
central works on Islam that are available in English translation. They
write for readers who are acquainted with the basic ideas, history, and
cultural expressions of Islam but are not specialists who will have read
the texts in their original languages.
Z7963 2006-017542 978-0-8108-5372-0
The suffragists in literature for youth; the fight for the
vote.
Mosley, Shelley and John Charles. (Literature for youth, no.10)
Scarecrow Pr., ©2006 326 p. $45.00 (pa)
Reference librarians Mosley and Charles present a resource text for
teachers, librarians, students, and researchers to the available literature
for youth on the topic of woman’s suffrage. The text opens with a section
of brief biographies of 50 key figures in the American movement; each
includes an annotated list of print, nonprint and electronic resources for
the individual. The remaining sections include annotated lists of suffrage-
themed resources grouped by type (nonfiction books and monographs,
fiction, drama, media, internet sites, the suffrage movement in other
countries), field trip and classroom activity suggestions, and topics and
questions for discussion or papers. All resources listed throughout the
text include an age group label; the majority are for upper elementary
through high school/adult. Indexed by author, title, and subject.
ZA3075 2006-023645 978-1-59158-325-7
The Blue Book on information age inquiry, instruction,
and literacy.
Callison, Daniel and Leslie Preddy.
Libraries Unlimited, ©2006 643 p. $45.00 (pa)
Drawing on many years’ worth of columns from School Library Media
Activities Monthly, Callison (library media education, Indiana State
University) and Preddy, a library media specialist, present key terms in
a working theoretical model that may be used in developing and under-
standing the power of information inquiry in instruction. In addition to
the theoretical base, the authors include practical instructional applica-
tions for immediate use. The book is both a revision and an update to
Key Words, Concepts and Methods for Information Age Instruction (LMS
Associates, 2003). New columns from School Library Media Activities
Monthly are included along with new key words for instruction, and
there is a new section on inquiry. The book will be used in K-12 library
and information literacy programs and by school library educators.
ZA3075 2006-013765 978-1-55570-573-1
Information literacy instruction that works; a guide to
teaching by discipline and student population. (CD-ROM
included)
Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick Ragains. (Information literacy source-
books; no.3)
Neal-Schuman, ©2006 329 p. $89.95 (pa)
Eighteen American librarians and library instructors contribute 18
chapters offering an array of strategies and methods for effective library
instruction in higher education, from planning, to development, mar-
keting, delivery, and assessment. Coverage includes an examination of
the best ways to teach information literacy (IL) skills in colleges and uni-
versities; how to teach an increasingly diverse student body; effective
ways to teach IL in specific subject areas, each with distinctive features;
and how to educate students to research special topics, many requiring
legal and governmental research. The text includes sample assignments,
brochures, lesson plans, tutorials, evaluation forms, and bibliographies.
The accompanying CD-ROM contains a selection of resources also found
in the text.
Reference & Research Book News February 2007
ZA3270 2006-026227 1-55570-562-6
The information commons handbook. (CD-ROM included)
Beagle, Donald Robert.
Neal-Schuman, ©2006 245 p. $125.00 (pa)
Beagle (library services, Belmont Abbey College) compares the new envi-
ronment for learning communities to the open civic spaces of a city or
town, and explores how this information commons can provide a new
model for library service delivery. The model is not about technology per
se, he says, but about how an organization reshapes itself around people
using technology in pursuit of learning. The accompanying disk contains
stories of 10 successful commons in various contexts, with photographs,
floor plans, and planning documents.
ZA4201 0-8204-7857-1
Internet research annual; v.4.
Title main entry. Ed. by Mia Consalvo and Car Haythornthwaite.
(Digital formations; v.33)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 213 p. $39.95 (pa)
These proceedings of the annual conference of the Association of Internet
Researchers held in Chicago in October 2005 include a over a dozen
papers in the new and cross-disciplinary field of Internet studies and the
full text of the keynote speeches. The international contributors of these
papers cover such topics as kinship and Internet research, fear and hopes
at the UN for Internet governance, blogs in a Danish parliamentary
election campaign, socially aware solutions to motion picture piracy,
opportunities and constraints in use of the Internet by children and ado-
lescents, young men’s gender and identity work in a Swedish web com-
munity, friends and social norms online, problematic incidents in email
discussions, the intersection of technical and social logic in electronic
space, online spiritual movements, usage in transnational households,
communities of online gamers, the quality of sound, and selecting web-
sites for quantitative and qualitative analysis.
ZA4201 2006-011926 978-1-58826-421-3
Negotiating the net in Africa; the politics of internet
diffusion.
Title main entry. Ed. by Ernest J. Wilson III and Kelvin R. Wong.
(iPolitics: global challenges in the information age)
Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2007 237 p. $49.95
The editors (both of the U. of Maryland’s Center for International
Development and Conflict Management) present the results of a research
project that sought to understand the patterns of Internet expansion in
Africa and identify the policy and other interventionist that shaped out-
comes. The project developed a model of Internet diffusion that empha-
sizes the negotiations that take place among competing and cooperating
parties in society over “critical negotiation issues.” The critical negoti-
ation issues include policy reform issues of privatization, liberalization,
and regulation; access issues of access to facilities, monopoly pricing, and
access legality; national information and communication technology
policy issues of information society, universal access and services, poli-
cymaking capacity, and implementation capacity; and technical issues of
Internet exchange point and voice over Internet protocol. The is applied
to separate case studies of Ghana, Guinea-Bissau, Kenya, Rwanda, South
Africa, and Tanzania. Following the case studies is a discussion of the
role of international cooperation in Internet diffusion.
ZA4235 2006-022450 0-8204-7932-2
The Internet audience; constitution & measurement.
Bermejo, Fernando. (Digital formations; v.35)
Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2007 262 p. $32.95 (pa)
Noting that the concept of “audience” has been a central pillar of com-
munication research, Bermejo (communication, U. Rey Juan Carlos,
Madrid) uses it here as an entry point to the study of the Internet. He
examines the procedures that have been developed for measuring the
Internet audience, seeks to define the institutional environment in which
they appear, analyzes their possibilities and limitations, and considers
their main evolutionary lines. His goal in conducting such an analysis is
less to look at media industry dynamics than to show what it reveals
about the Internet as a communications medium, the Internet’s place
within the media system, and its points of comparison and contrast with
other mass media.
–322–